Merge commit 'ae91bd578b070f043b6b1b2576836c52935a5e1e' as 'tkblt'

135 files changed, 59973 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/tkblt/.gitignore b/tkblt/.gitignore
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8694d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/.gitignore
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+# Compiled Object files
+*.slo
+*.lo
+*.o
+*.obj
+
+# Precompiled Headers
+*.gch
+*.pch
+
+# Compiled Dynamic libraries
+*.so
+*.dylib
+*.dll
+
+# Fortran module files
+*.mod
+
+# Compiled Static libraries
+*.lai
+*.la
+*.a
+*.lib
+
+# Executables
+*.exe
+*.out
+*.app
+
+*~
diff --git a/tkblt/LICENSE b/tkblt/LICENSE
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ffe507e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/LICENSE
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+available under the same terms.
+
+Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+the following conditions:
+
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
diff --git a/tkblt/Makefile.in b/tkblt/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d36c879
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,466 @@
+# Makefile.in --
+#
+#	This file is a Makefile for Sample TEA Extension.  If it has the name
+#	"Makefile.in" then it is a template for a Makefile;  to generate the
+#	actual Makefile, run "./configure", which is a configuration script
+#	generated by the "autoconf" program (constructs like "@foo@" will get
+#	replaced in the actual Makefile.
+#
+# Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation.
+# Copyright (c) 2002-2005 ActiveState Corporation.
+#
+# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+
+#========================================================================
+# Add additional lines to handle any additional AC_SUBST cases that
+# have been added in a customized configure script.
+#========================================================================
+
+#SAMPLE_NEW_VAR	= @SAMPLE_NEW_VAR@
+
+#========================================================================
+# Nothing of the variables below this line should need to be changed.
+# Please check the TARGETS section below to make sure the make targets
+# are correct.
+#========================================================================
+
+#========================================================================
+# The names of the source files is defined in the configure script.
+# The object files are used for linking into the final library.
+# This will be used when a dist target is added to the Makefile.
+# It is not important to specify the directory, as long as it is the
+# $(srcdir) or in the generic, win or unix subdirectory.
+#========================================================================
+
+PKG_SOURCES	= @PKG_SOURCES@
+PKG_OBJECTS	= @PKG_OBJECTS@
+
+PKG_STUB_SOURCES = @PKG_STUB_SOURCES@
+PKG_STUB_OBJECTS = @PKG_STUB_OBJECTS@
+
+#========================================================================
+# PKG_TCL_SOURCES identifies Tcl runtime files that are associated with
+# this package that need to be installed, if any.
+#========================================================================
+
+PKG_TCL_SOURCES = @PKG_TCL_SOURCES@
+
+#========================================================================
+# This is a list of public header files to be installed, if any.
+#========================================================================
+
+PKG_HEADERS	= @PKG_HEADERS@
+
+#========================================================================
+# "PKG_LIB_FILE" refers to the library (dynamic or static as per
+# configuration options) composed of the named objects.
+#========================================================================
+
+PKG_LIB_FILE	= @PKG_LIB_FILE@
+PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE = @PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE@
+
+#lib_BINARIES	= $(PKG_LIB_FILE)
+lib_BINARIES	= $(PKG_LIB_FILE) $(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE)
+BINARIES	= $(lib_BINARIES)
+
+SHELL		= @SHELL@
+
+srcdir		= @srcdir@
+prefix		= @prefix@
+exec_prefix	= @exec_prefix@
+
+bindir		= @bindir@
+libdir		= @libdir@
+includedir	= @includedir@
+datarootdir	= @datarootdir@
+datadir		= @datadir@
+mandir		= @mandir@
+
+DESTDIR		=
+
+PKG_DIR		= $(PACKAGE_NAME)$(PACKAGE_VERSION)
+pkgdatadir	= $(datadir)/$(PKG_DIR)
+pkglibdir	= $(libdir)/$(PKG_DIR)
+pkgincludedir	= $(includedir)/$(PKG_DIR)
+
+top_builddir	= @abs_top_builddir@
+
+INSTALL_OPTIONS	=
+INSTALL		= @INSTALL@ $(INSTALL_OPTIONS)
+INSTALL_DATA_DIR = ${INSTALL} -d -m 755
+INSTALL_DATA	= @INSTALL_DATA@
+INSTALL_PROGRAM	= @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
+INSTALL_SCRIPT	= @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
+INSTALL_LIBRARY	= ${INSTALL_DATA}
+
+PACKAGE_NAME	= @PACKAGE_NAME@
+PACKAGE_VERSION	= @PACKAGE_VERSION@
+CC		= @CC@
+CFLAGS_DEFAULT	= @CFLAGS_DEFAULT@
+CFLAGS_WARNING	= @CFLAGS_WARNING@
+EXEEXT		= @EXEEXT@
+LDFLAGS_DEFAULT	= @LDFLAGS_DEFAULT@
+MAKE_LIB	= @MAKE_LIB@
+MAKE_SHARED_LIB	= @MAKE_SHARED_LIB@
+MAKE_STATIC_LIB	= @MAKE_STATIC_LIB@
+MAKE_STUB_LIB	= @MAKE_STUB_LIB@
+OBJEXT		= @OBJEXT@
+RANLIB		= @RANLIB@
+RANLIB_STUB	= @RANLIB_STUB@
+SHLIB_CFLAGS	= @SHLIB_CFLAGS@
+SHLIB_LD	= @SHLIB_LD@
+SHLIB_LD_LIBS	= @SHLIB_LD_LIBS@
+STLIB_LD	= @STLIB_LD@
+#TCL_DEFS	= @TCL_DEFS@
+TCL_BIN_DIR	= @TCL_BIN_DIR@
+TCL_SRC_DIR	= @TCL_SRC_DIR@
+#TK_BIN_DIR	= @TK_BIN_DIR@
+#TK_SRC_DIR	= @TK_SRC_DIR@
+
+# Not used, but retained for reference of what libs Tcl required
+#TCL_LIBS	= @TCL_LIBS@
+
+#========================================================================
+# TCLLIBPATH seeds the auto_path in Tcl's init.tcl so we can test our
+# package without installing.  The other environment variables allow us
+# to test against an uninstalled Tcl.  Add special env vars that you
+# require for testing here (like TCLX_LIBRARY).
+#========================================================================
+
+EXTRA_PATH	= $(top_builddir):$(TCL_BIN_DIR)
+#EXTRA_PATH	= $(top_builddir):$(TCL_BIN_DIR):$(TK_BIN_DIR)
+TCLLIBPATH	= $(top_builddir)
+TCLSH_ENV	= TCL_LIBRARY=`@CYGPATH@ $(TCL_SRC_DIR)/library`
+PKG_ENV		= @LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR@="$(EXTRA_PATH):$(@LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR@)" \
+		  PATH="$(EXTRA_PATH):$(PATH)" \
+		  TCLLIBPATH="$(TCLLIBPATH)"
+
+TCLSH_PROG	= @TCLSH_PROG@
+TCLSH		= $(TCLSH_ENV) $(PKG_ENV) $(TCLSH_PROG)
+
+#WISH_ENV	= TK_LIBRARY=`@CYGPATH@ $(TK_SRC_DIR)/library`
+#WISH_PROG	= @WISH_PROG@
+#WISH		= $(TCLSH_ENV) $(WISH_ENV) $(PKG_ENV) $(WISH_PROG)
+
+SHARED_BUILD	= @SHARED_BUILD@
+
+#INCLUDES	= @PKG_INCLUDES@ @TCL_INCLUDES@
+INCLUDES	= @PKG_INCLUDES@ @TCL_INCLUDES@ @TK_INCLUDES@ @TK_XINCLUDES@
+
+PKG_CFLAGS	= @PKG_CFLAGS@
+
+# TCL_DEFS is not strictly need here, but if you remove it, then you
+# must make sure that configure.ac checks for the necessary components
+# that your library may use.  TCL_DEFS can actually be a problem if
+# you do not compile with a similar machine setup as the Tcl core was
+# compiled with.
+#DEFS		= $(TCL_DEFS) @DEFS@ $(PKG_CFLAGS)
+DEFS		= @DEFS@ $(PKG_CFLAGS)
+
+# Move pkgIndex.tcl to 'BINARIES' var if it is generated in the Makefile
+CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = Makefile pkgIndex.tcl
+CLEANFILES	= @CLEANFILES@
+
+CPPFLAGS	= @CPPFLAGS@
+LIBS		= @PKG_LIBS@ @LIBS@
+AR		= @AR@
+CFLAGS		= @CFLAGS@
+COMPILE		= $(CC) $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) \
+			  $(CFLAGS_DEFAULT) $(CFLAGS_WARNING) $(SHLIB_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
+
+GDB		= gdb
+VALGRIND	= valgrind
+VALGRINDARGS	= --tool=memcheck --num-callers=8 --leak-resolution=high \
+		  --leak-check=yes --show-reachable=yes -v
+
+.SUFFIXES: .c .C .$(OBJEXT)
+
+#========================================================================
+# Start of user-definable TARGETS section
+#========================================================================
+
+#========================================================================
+# TEA TARGETS.  Please note that the "libraries:" target refers to platform
+# independent files, and the "binaries:" target includes executable programs and
+# platform-dependent libraries.  Modify these targets so that they install
+# the various pieces of your package.  The make and install rules
+# for the BINARIES that you specified above have already been done.
+#========================================================================
+
+all: binaries libraries doc
+
+#========================================================================
+# The binaries target builds executable programs, Windows .dll's, unix
+# shared/static libraries, and any other platform-dependent files.
+# The list of targets to build for "binaries:" is specified at the top
+# of the Makefile, in the "BINARIES" variable.
+#========================================================================
+
+binaries: $(BINARIES)
+
+libraries:
+
+#========================================================================
+# Your doc target should differentiate from doc builds (by the developer)
+# and doc installs (see install-doc), which just install the docs on the
+# end user machine when building from source.
+#========================================================================
+
+doc:
+	@echo "If you have documentation to create, place the commands to"
+	@echo "build the docs in the 'doc:' target.  For example:"
+	@echo "        xml2nroff sample.xml > sample.n"
+	@echo "        xml2html sample.xml > sample.html"
+
+install: all install-binaries install-libraries install-doc
+
+install-binaries: binaries install-lib-binaries install-bin-binaries
+
+#========================================================================
+# This rule installs platform-independent files, such as header files.
+# The list=...; for p in $$list handles the empty list case x-platform.
+#========================================================================
+
+install-libraries: libraries
+	@$(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DESTDIR)$(includedir)
+	@echo "Installing header files in $(DESTDIR)$(includedir)"
+	@list='$(PKG_HEADERS)'; for i in $$list; do \
+	    echo "Installing $(srcdir)/$$i" ; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$i $(DESTDIR)$(includedir) ; \
+	done;
+
+#========================================================================
+# Install documentation.  Unix manpages should go in the $(mandir)
+# directory.
+#========================================================================
+
+install-doc: doc
+	@$(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/mann
+	@echo "Installing documentation in $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)"
+	@list='$(srcdir)/doc/*.n'; for i in $$list; do \
+	    echo "Installing $$i"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) $$i $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/mann ; \
+	done
+
+test: binaries libraries
+	$(TCLSH) `@CYGPATH@ $(srcdir)/tests/all.tcl` $(TESTFLAGS) \
+	    -load "package ifneeded $(PACKAGE_NAME) $(PACKAGE_VERSION) \
+		[list load `@CYGPATH@ $(PKG_LIB_FILE)` $(PACKAGE_NAME)]"
+
+genstubs: $(srcdir)/tools/genStubs.tcl $(srcdir)/src/tkblt.decls
+	@echo $(TCLSH) $(srcdir)/tools/genStubs.tcl $(srcdir)/src $(srcdir)/src/tkblt.decls
+	@$(TCLSH) $(srcdir)/tools/genStubs.tcl $(srcdir)/src $(srcdir)/src/tkblt.decls
+shell: binaries libraries
+	@$(TCLSH) $(SCRIPT)
+
+gdb:
+	$(TCLSH_ENV) $(PKG_ENV) $(GDB) $(TCLSH_PROG) $(SCRIPT)
+
+gdb-test: binaries libraries 
+	$(TCLSH_ENV) $(PKG_ENV) $(GDB) \
+	    --args $(TCLSH_PROG) `@CYGPATH@ $(srcdir)/tests/all.tcl` \
+	    $(TESTFLAGS) -singleproc 1 \
+	    -load "package ifneeded $(PACKAGE_NAME) $(PACKAGE_VERSION) \
+		[list load `@CYGPATH@ $(PKG_LIB_FILE)` $(PACKAGE_NAME)]"
+
+valgrind: binaries libraries
+	$(TCLSH_ENV) $(PKG_ENV) $(VALGRIND) $(VALGRINDARGS) $(TCLSH_PROG) \
+	    `@CYGPATH@ $(srcdir)/tests/all.tcl` $(TESTFLAGS)
+
+valgrindshell: binaries libraries
+	$(TCLSH_ENV) $(PKG_ENV) $(VALGRIND) $(VALGRINDARGS) $(TCLSH_PROG) $(SCRIPT)
+
+depend:
+
+#========================================================================
+# $(PKG_LIB_FILE) should be listed as part of the BINARIES variable
+# mentioned above.  That will ensure that this target is built when you
+# run "make binaries".
+#
+# The $(PKG_OBJECTS) objects are created and linked into the final
+# library.  In most cases these object files will correspond to the
+# source files above.
+#========================================================================
+
+$(PKG_LIB_FILE): $(PKG_OBJECTS)
+	-rm -f $(PKG_LIB_FILE)
+	${MAKE_LIB}
+	$(RANLIB) $(PKG_LIB_FILE)
+
+$(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE): $(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)
+	-rm -f $(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE)
+	${MAKE_STUB_LIB}
+	$(RANLIB_STUB) $(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE)
+
+#========================================================================
+# We need to enumerate the list of .c to .o lines here.
+#
+# In the following lines, $(srcdir) refers to the toplevel directory
+# containing your extension.  If your sources are in a subdirectory,
+# you will have to modify the paths to reflect this:
+#
+# sample.$(OBJEXT): $(srcdir)/generic/sample.c
+# 	$(COMPILE) -c `@CYGPATH@ $(srcdir)/generic/sample.c` -o $@
+#
+# Setting the VPATH variable to a list of paths will cause the makefile
+# to look into these paths when resolving .c to .obj dependencies.
+# As necessary, add $(srcdir):$(srcdir)/compat:....
+#========================================================================
+
+VPATH = $(srcdir):$(srcdir)/generic:$(srcdir)/unix:$(srcdir)/win:$(srcdir)/macosx
+
+.c.@OBJEXT@:
+	$(COMPILE) -c `@CYGPATH@ $<` -o $@
+
+.C.@OBJEXT@:
+	$(COMPILE) -c `@CYGPATH@ $<` -o $@
+
+#========================================================================
+# Distribution creation
+# You may need to tweak this target to make it work correctly.
+#========================================================================
+
+#COMPRESS	= tar cvf $(PKG_DIR).tar $(PKG_DIR); compress $(PKG_DIR).tar
+COMPRESS	= tar zcvf $(PKG_DIR).tar.gz $(PKG_DIR)
+DIST_ROOT	= /tmp/dist
+DIST_DIR	= $(DIST_ROOT)/$(PKG_DIR)
+
+DIST_INSTALL_DATA	= CPPROG='cp -p' $(INSTALL) -m 644
+DIST_INSTALL_SCRIPT	= CPPROG='cp -p' $(INSTALL) -m 755
+
+dist-clean:
+	rm -rf $(DIST_DIR) $(DIST_ROOT)/$(PKG_DIR).tar.*
+
+dist: dist-clean
+	$(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DIST_DIR)
+
+	# TEA files
+	$(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/Makefile.in \
+	    $(srcdir)/aclocal.m4 $(srcdir)/configure.ac \
+	    $(DIST_DIR)/
+	$(DIST_INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(srcdir)/configure $(DIST_DIR)/
+
+	$(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DIST_DIR)/tclconfig
+	$(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/tclconfig/README.txt \
+	    $(srcdir)/tclconfig/tcl.m4 $(srcdir)/tclconfig/install-sh \
+	    $(DIST_DIR)/tclconfig/
+
+	# Extension files
+	$(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) \
+	    $(srcdir)/ChangeLog \
+	    $(srcdir)/README.sha \
+	    $(srcdir)/license.terms \
+	    $(srcdir)/README \
+	    $(srcdir)/pkgIndex.tcl.in \
+	    $(DIST_DIR)/
+
+	list='demos doc generic library mac tests unix win'; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	    if test -d $(srcdir)/$$p ; then \
+		$(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DIST_DIR)/$$p; \
+		$(DIST_INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$p/* $(DIST_DIR)/$$p/; \
+	    fi; \
+	done
+
+	(cd $(DIST_ROOT); $(COMPRESS);)
+
+#========================================================================
+# End of user-definable section
+#========================================================================
+
+#========================================================================
+# Don't modify the file to clean here.  Instead, set the "CLEANFILES"
+# variable in configure.ac
+#========================================================================
+
+clean:
+	-test -z "$(BINARIES)" || rm -f $(BINARIES)
+	-rm -f $(PKG_OBJECTS) *.$(OBJEXT) core *.core
+	-test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES)
+
+distclean: clean
+	-rm -f *.tab.c
+	-rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
+	-rm -f config.cache config.log config.status
+
+#========================================================================
+# Install binary object libraries.  On Windows this includes both .dll and
+# .lib files.  Because the .lib files are not explicitly listed anywhere,
+# we need to deduce their existence from the .dll file of the same name.
+# Library files go into the lib directory.
+# In addition, this will generate the pkgIndex.tcl
+# file in the install location (assuming it can find a usable tclsh shell)
+#
+# You should not have to modify this target.
+#========================================================================
+
+install-lib-binaries: binaries
+	@$(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)
+	@list='$(lib_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f $$p; then \
+	    echo " $(INSTALL_LIBRARY) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_LIBRARY) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
+	    ext=`echo $$p|sed -e "s/.*\.//"`; \
+	    if test "x$$ext" = "xdll"; then \
+		lib=`basename $$p|sed -e 's/.[^.]*$$//'`.lib; \
+		if test -f $$lib; then \
+		    echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$lib $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$lib"; \
+	            $(INSTALL_DATA) $$lib $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$lib; \
+		fi; \
+	    fi; \
+	  fi; \
+	done
+	@list='$(PKG_TCL_SOURCES)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f $(srcdir)/$$p; then \
+	    destp=`basename $$p`; \
+	    echo " Install $$destp $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$destp"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$destp; \
+	  fi; \
+	done
+	@if test "x$(SHARED_BUILD)" = "x1"; then \
+	    echo " Install pkgIndex.tcl $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) pkgIndex.tcl $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir); \
+	fi
+	$(INSTALL_DATA) tkbltConfig.sh $(DESTDIR)$(libdir)
+
+#========================================================================
+# Install binary executables (e.g. .exe files and dependent .dll files)
+# This is for files that must go in the bin directory (located next to
+# wish and tclsh), like dependent .dll files on Windows.
+#
+# You should not have to modify this target, except to define bin_BINARIES
+# above if necessary.
+#========================================================================
+
+install-bin-binaries: binaries
+	@$(INSTALL_DATA_DIR) $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)
+	@list='$(bin_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f $$p; then \
+	    echo " $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/$$p"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/$$p; \
+	  fi; \
+	done
+
+Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in  $(top_builddir)/config.status
+	cd $(top_builddir) \
+	  && CONFIG_FILES=$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status
+
+uninstall-binaries:
+	list='$(lib_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
+	done
+	list='$(PKG_TCL_SOURCES)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  p=`basename $$p`; \
+	  rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
+	done
+	list='$(bin_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
+	  rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/$$p; \
+	done
+
+.PHONY: all binaries clean depend distclean doc install libraries test
+.PHONY: gdb gdb-test valgrind valgrindshell
+
+# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
+# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
+.NOEXPORT:
diff --git a/tkblt/README.md b/tkblt/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5a5b74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+[![DOI](https://zenodo.org/badge/DOI/10.5281/zenodo.1041783.svg)](https://doi.org/10.5281/zenodo.1041783)
+# tkblt
+Introduction to the TkBLT library
+
+TkBLT is a library of extensions to the Tk library. It adds new
+commands and variables to the application's interpreter.
+
+TkBLT is a derived version of the BLT Toolkit by George A. Howlett,
+for Tcl/Tk 8.5/8.6, is TEA compatible, with full support for MacOSX and
+Windows, and is fully compatible with the Tk API. TkBLT is released
+under the original BSD license. TkBLT includes only the Graph and
+Barchart Tk widgets, and the Tcl Vector command.
+
+The following commands are added to the interpreter from the TkBLT library:
+
+Graph: A 2D plotting widget. Plots two variable data in a window with an optional 
+legend and annotations. It has of several components; coordinate axes, 
+crosshairs, a legend, and a collection of elements and tags.
+
+Barchart: A barchart widget. Plots two-variable data as rectangular bars in a 
+window. The x-coordinate values designate the position of the bar along 
+the x-axis, while the y-coordinate values designate the magnitude.
+The barchart widget has of several components; coordinate axes, 
+crosshairs, a legend, and a collection of elements and tags.
+
+Vector: Creates a vector of floating point values. The vector's components
+can be manipulated in three ways: through a Tcl array variable, a Tcl
+command, or the C API.
diff --git a/tkblt/aclocal.m4 b/tkblt/aclocal.m4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b05739
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/aclocal.m4
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+#
+# Include the TEA standard macro set
+#
+
+builtin(include,tclconfig/tcl.m4)
+
+#
+# Add here whatever m4 macros you want to define for your package
+#
diff --git a/tkblt/configure b/tkblt/configure
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..2d1ecc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/configure
@@ -0,0 +1,10270 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles.
+# Generated by GNU Autoconf 2.69 for tkblt 3.2.
+#
+#
+# Copyright (C) 1992-1996, 1998-2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+#
+# This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
+## -------------------- ##
+## M4sh Initialization. ##
+## -------------------- ##
+
+# Be more Bourne compatible
+DUALCASE=1; export DUALCASE # for MKS sh
+if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
+  emulate sh
+  NULLCMD=:
+  # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which
+  # is contrary to our usage.  Disable this feature.
+  alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"'
+  setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
+else
+  case `(set -o) 2>/dev/null` in #(
+  *posix*) :
+    set -o posix ;; #(
+  *) :
+     ;;
+esac
+fi
+
+
+as_nl='
+'
+export as_nl
+# Printing a long string crashes Solaris 7 /usr/bin/printf.
+as_echo='\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'
+as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
+as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
+# Prefer a ksh shell builtin over an external printf program on Solaris,
+# but without wasting forks for bash or zsh.
+if test -z "$BASH_VERSION$ZSH_VERSION" \
+    && (test "X`print -r -- $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
+  as_echo='print -r --'
+  as_echo_n='print -rn --'
+elif (test "X`printf %s $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
+  as_echo='printf %s\n'
+  as_echo_n='printf %s'
+else
+  if test "X`(/usr/ucb/echo -n -n $as_echo) 2>/dev/null`" = "X-n $as_echo"; then
+    as_echo_body='eval /usr/ucb/echo -n "$1$as_nl"'
+    as_echo_n='/usr/ucb/echo -n'
+  else
+    as_echo_body='eval expr "X$1" : "X\\(.*\\)"'
+    as_echo_n_body='eval
+      arg=$1;
+      case $arg in #(
+      *"$as_nl"*)
+	expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)$as_nl";
+	arg=`expr "X$arg" : ".*$as_nl\\(.*\\)"`;;
+      esac;
+      expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)" | tr -d "$as_nl"
+    '
+    export as_echo_n_body
+    as_echo_n='sh -c $as_echo_n_body as_echo'
+  fi
+  export as_echo_body
+  as_echo='sh -c $as_echo_body as_echo'
+fi
+
+# The user is always right.
+if test "${PATH_SEPARATOR+set}" != set; then
+  PATH_SEPARATOR=:
+  (PATH='/bin;/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 && {
+    (PATH='/bin:/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 ||
+      PATH_SEPARATOR=';'
+  }
+fi
+
+
+# IFS
+# We need space, tab and new line, in precisely that order.  Quoting is
+# there to prevent editors from complaining about space-tab.
+# (If _AS_PATH_WALK were called with IFS unset, it would disable word
+# splitting by setting IFS to empty value.)
+IFS=" ""	$as_nl"
+
+# Find who we are.  Look in the path if we contain no directory separator.
+as_myself=
+case $0 in #((
+  *[\\/]* ) as_myself=$0 ;;
+  *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    test -r "$as_dir/$0" && as_myself=$as_dir/$0 && break
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+     ;;
+esac
+# We did not find ourselves, most probably we were run as `sh COMMAND'
+# in which case we are not to be found in the path.
+if test "x$as_myself" = x; then
+  as_myself=$0
+fi
+if test ! -f "$as_myself"; then
+  $as_echo "$as_myself: error: cannot find myself; rerun with an absolute file name" >&2
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+# Unset variables that we do not need and which cause bugs (e.g. in
+# pre-3.0 UWIN ksh).  But do not cause bugs in bash 2.01; the "|| exit 1"
+# suppresses any "Segmentation fault" message there.  '((' could
+# trigger a bug in pdksh 5.2.14.
+for as_var in BASH_ENV ENV MAIL MAILPATH
+do eval test x\${$as_var+set} = xset \
+  && ( (unset $as_var) || exit 1) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset $as_var || :
+done
+PS1='$ '
+PS2='> '
+PS4='+ '
+
+# NLS nuisances.
+LC_ALL=C
+export LC_ALL
+LANGUAGE=C
+export LANGUAGE
+
+# CDPATH.
+(unset CDPATH) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset CDPATH
+
+# Use a proper internal environment variable to ensure we don't fall
+  # into an infinite loop, continuously re-executing ourselves.
+  if test x"${_as_can_reexec}" != xno && test "x$CONFIG_SHELL" != x; then
+    _as_can_reexec=no; export _as_can_reexec;
+    # We cannot yet assume a decent shell, so we have to provide a
+# neutralization value for shells without unset; and this also
+# works around shells that cannot unset nonexistent variables.
+# Preserve -v and -x to the replacement shell.
+BASH_ENV=/dev/null
+ENV=/dev/null
+(unset BASH_ENV) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset BASH_ENV ENV
+case $- in # ((((
+  *v*x* | *x*v* ) as_opts=-vx ;;
+  *v* ) as_opts=-v ;;
+  *x* ) as_opts=-x ;;
+  * ) as_opts= ;;
+esac
+exec $CONFIG_SHELL $as_opts "$as_myself" ${1+"$@"}
+# Admittedly, this is quite paranoid, since all the known shells bail
+# out after a failed `exec'.
+$as_echo "$0: could not re-execute with $CONFIG_SHELL" >&2
+as_fn_exit 255
+  fi
+  # We don't want this to propagate to other subprocesses.
+          { _as_can_reexec=; unset _as_can_reexec;}
+if test "x$CONFIG_SHELL" = x; then
+  as_bourne_compatible="if test -n \"\${ZSH_VERSION+set}\" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
+  emulate sh
+  NULLCMD=:
+  # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on \${1+\"\$@\"}, which
+  # is contrary to our usage.  Disable this feature.
+  alias -g '\${1+\"\$@\"}'='\"\$@\"'
+  setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
+else
+  case \`(set -o) 2>/dev/null\` in #(
+  *posix*) :
+    set -o posix ;; #(
+  *) :
+     ;;
+esac
+fi
+"
+  as_required="as_fn_return () { (exit \$1); }
+as_fn_success () { as_fn_return 0; }
+as_fn_failure () { as_fn_return 1; }
+as_fn_ret_success () { return 0; }
+as_fn_ret_failure () { return 1; }
+
+exitcode=0
+as_fn_success || { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_success failed.; }
+as_fn_failure && { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_failure succeeded.; }
+as_fn_ret_success || { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_ret_success failed.; }
+as_fn_ret_failure && { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_ret_failure succeeded.; }
+if ( set x; as_fn_ret_success y && test x = \"\$1\" ); then :
+
+else
+  exitcode=1; echo positional parameters were not saved.
+fi
+test x\$exitcode = x0 || exit 1
+test -x / || exit 1"
+  as_suggested="  as_lineno_1=";as_suggested=$as_suggested$LINENO;as_suggested=$as_suggested" as_lineno_1a=\$LINENO
+  as_lineno_2=";as_suggested=$as_suggested$LINENO;as_suggested=$as_suggested" as_lineno_2a=\$LINENO
+  eval 'test \"x\$as_lineno_1'\$as_run'\" != \"x\$as_lineno_2'\$as_run'\" &&
+  test \"x\`expr \$as_lineno_1'\$as_run' + 1\`\" = \"x\$as_lineno_2'\$as_run'\"' || exit 1
+test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2 || exit 1"
+  if (eval "$as_required") 2>/dev/null; then :
+  as_have_required=yes
+else
+  as_have_required=no
+fi
+  if test x$as_have_required = xyes && (eval "$as_suggested") 2>/dev/null; then :
+
+else
+  as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+as_found=false
+for as_dir in /bin$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/bin$PATH_SEPARATOR$PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+  as_found=:
+  case $as_dir in #(
+	 /*)
+	   for as_base in sh bash ksh sh5; do
+	     # Try only shells that exist, to save several forks.
+	     as_shell=$as_dir/$as_base
+	     if { test -f "$as_shell" || test -f "$as_shell.exe"; } &&
+		    { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_required" | as_run=a "$as_shell"; } 2>/dev/null; then :
+  CONFIG_SHELL=$as_shell as_have_required=yes
+		   if { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_suggested" | as_run=a "$as_shell"; } 2>/dev/null; then :
+  break 2
+fi
+fi
+	   done;;
+       esac
+  as_found=false
+done
+$as_found || { if { test -f "$SHELL" || test -f "$SHELL.exe"; } &&
+	      { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_required" | as_run=a "$SHELL"; } 2>/dev/null; then :
+  CONFIG_SHELL=$SHELL as_have_required=yes
+fi; }
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+
+      if test "x$CONFIG_SHELL" != x; then :
+  export CONFIG_SHELL
+             # We cannot yet assume a decent shell, so we have to provide a
+# neutralization value for shells without unset; and this also
+# works around shells that cannot unset nonexistent variables.
+# Preserve -v and -x to the replacement shell.
+BASH_ENV=/dev/null
+ENV=/dev/null
+(unset BASH_ENV) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset BASH_ENV ENV
+case $- in # ((((
+  *v*x* | *x*v* ) as_opts=-vx ;;
+  *v* ) as_opts=-v ;;
+  *x* ) as_opts=-x ;;
+  * ) as_opts= ;;
+esac
+exec $CONFIG_SHELL $as_opts "$as_myself" ${1+"$@"}
+# Admittedly, this is quite paranoid, since all the known shells bail
+# out after a failed `exec'.
+$as_echo "$0: could not re-execute with $CONFIG_SHELL" >&2
+exit 255
+fi
+
+    if test x$as_have_required = xno; then :
+  $as_echo "$0: This script requires a shell more modern than all"
+  $as_echo "$0: the shells that I found on your system."
+  if test x${ZSH_VERSION+set} = xset ; then
+    $as_echo "$0: In particular, zsh $ZSH_VERSION has bugs and should"
+    $as_echo "$0: be upgraded to zsh 4.3.4 or later."
+  else
+    $as_echo "$0: Please tell bug-autoconf@gnu.org about your system,
+$0: including any error possibly output before this
+$0: message. Then install a modern shell, or manually run
+$0: the script under such a shell if you do have one."
+  fi
+  exit 1
+fi
+fi
+fi
+SHELL=${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh}
+export SHELL
+# Unset more variables known to interfere with behavior of common tools.
+CLICOLOR_FORCE= GREP_OPTIONS=
+unset CLICOLOR_FORCE GREP_OPTIONS
+
+## --------------------- ##
+## M4sh Shell Functions. ##
+## --------------------- ##
+# as_fn_unset VAR
+# ---------------
+# Portably unset VAR.
+as_fn_unset ()
+{
+  { eval $1=; unset $1;}
+}
+as_unset=as_fn_unset
+
+# as_fn_set_status STATUS
+# -----------------------
+# Set $? to STATUS, without forking.
+as_fn_set_status ()
+{
+  return $1
+} # as_fn_set_status
+
+# as_fn_exit STATUS
+# -----------------
+# Exit the shell with STATUS, even in a "trap 0" or "set -e" context.
+as_fn_exit ()
+{
+  set +e
+  as_fn_set_status $1
+  exit $1
+} # as_fn_exit
+
+# as_fn_mkdir_p
+# -------------
+# Create "$as_dir" as a directory, including parents if necessary.
+as_fn_mkdir_p ()
+{
+
+  case $as_dir in #(
+  -*) as_dir=./$as_dir;;
+  esac
+  test -d "$as_dir" || eval $as_mkdir_p || {
+    as_dirs=
+    while :; do
+      case $as_dir in #(
+      *\'*) as_qdir=`$as_echo "$as_dir" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; #'(
+      *) as_qdir=$as_dir;;
+      esac
+      as_dirs="'$as_qdir' $as_dirs"
+      as_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_dir" ||
+$as_expr X"$as_dir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
+	 X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
+	 X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
+	 X"$as_dir" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
+$as_echo X"$as_dir" |
+    sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\).*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  s/.*/./; q'`
+      test -d "$as_dir" && break
+    done
+    test -z "$as_dirs" || eval "mkdir $as_dirs"
+  } || test -d "$as_dir" || as_fn_error $? "cannot create directory $as_dir"
+
+
+} # as_fn_mkdir_p
+
+# as_fn_executable_p FILE
+# -----------------------
+# Test if FILE is an executable regular file.
+as_fn_executable_p ()
+{
+  test -f "$1" && test -x "$1"
+} # as_fn_executable_p
+# as_fn_append VAR VALUE
+# ----------------------
+# Append the text in VALUE to the end of the definition contained in VAR. Take
+# advantage of any shell optimizations that allow amortized linear growth over
+# repeated appends, instead of the typical quadratic growth present in naive
+# implementations.
+if (eval "as_var=1; as_var+=2; test x\$as_var = x12") 2>/dev/null; then :
+  eval 'as_fn_append ()
+  {
+    eval $1+=\$2
+  }'
+else
+  as_fn_append ()
+  {
+    eval $1=\$$1\$2
+  }
+fi # as_fn_append
+
+# as_fn_arith ARG...
+# ------------------
+# Perform arithmetic evaluation on the ARGs, and store the result in the
+# global $as_val. Take advantage of shells that can avoid forks. The arguments
+# must be portable across $(()) and expr.
+if (eval "test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2") 2>/dev/null; then :
+  eval 'as_fn_arith ()
+  {
+    as_val=$(( $* ))
+  }'
+else
+  as_fn_arith ()
+  {
+    as_val=`expr "$@" || test $? -eq 1`
+  }
+fi # as_fn_arith
+
+
+# as_fn_error STATUS ERROR [LINENO LOG_FD]
+# ----------------------------------------
+# Output "`basename $0`: error: ERROR" to stderr. If LINENO and LOG_FD are
+# provided, also output the error to LOG_FD, referencing LINENO. Then exit the
+# script with STATUS, using 1 if that was 0.
+as_fn_error ()
+{
+  as_status=$1; test $as_status -eq 0 && as_status=1
+  if test "$4"; then
+    as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$3"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: $2" >&$4
+  fi
+  $as_echo "$as_me: error: $2" >&2
+  as_fn_exit $as_status
+} # as_fn_error
+
+if expr a : '\(a\)' >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
+   test "X`expr 00001 : '.*\(...\)'`" = X001; then
+  as_expr=expr
+else
+  as_expr=false
+fi
+
+if (basename -- /) >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`basename -- / 2>&1`" = "X/"; then
+  as_basename=basename
+else
+  as_basename=false
+fi
+
+if (as_dir=`dirname -- /` && test "X$as_dir" = X/) >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  as_dirname=dirname
+else
+  as_dirname=false
+fi
+
+as_me=`$as_basename -- "$0" ||
+$as_expr X/"$0" : '.*/\([^/][^/]*\)/*$' \| \
+	 X"$0" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
+	 X"$0" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
+$as_echo X/"$0" |
+    sed '/^.*\/\([^/][^/]*\)\/*$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\/\(\/\/\)$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\/\(\/\).*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  s/.*/./; q'`
+
+# Avoid depending upon Character Ranges.
+as_cr_letters='abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'
+as_cr_LETTERS='ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'
+as_cr_Letters=$as_cr_letters$as_cr_LETTERS
+as_cr_digits='0123456789'
+as_cr_alnum=$as_cr_Letters$as_cr_digits
+
+
+  as_lineno_1=$LINENO as_lineno_1a=$LINENO
+  as_lineno_2=$LINENO as_lineno_2a=$LINENO
+  eval 'test "x$as_lineno_1'$as_run'" != "x$as_lineno_2'$as_run'" &&
+  test "x`expr $as_lineno_1'$as_run' + 1`" = "x$as_lineno_2'$as_run'"' || {
+  # Blame Lee E. McMahon (1931-1989) for sed's syntax.  :-)
+  sed -n '
+    p
+    /[$]LINENO/=
+  ' <$as_myself |
+    sed '
+      s/[$]LINENO.*/&-/
+      t lineno
+      b
+      :lineno
+      N
+      :loop
+      s/[$]LINENO\([^'$as_cr_alnum'_].*\n\)\(.*\)/\2\1\2/
+      t loop
+      s/-\n.*//
+    ' >$as_me.lineno &&
+  chmod +x "$as_me.lineno" ||
+    { $as_echo "$as_me: error: cannot create $as_me.lineno; rerun with a POSIX shell" >&2; as_fn_exit 1; }
+
+  # If we had to re-execute with $CONFIG_SHELL, we're ensured to have
+  # already done that, so ensure we don't try to do so again and fall
+  # in an infinite loop.  This has already happened in practice.
+  _as_can_reexec=no; export _as_can_reexec
+  # Don't try to exec as it changes $[0], causing all sort of problems
+  # (the dirname of $[0] is not the place where we might find the
+  # original and so on.  Autoconf is especially sensitive to this).
+  . "./$as_me.lineno"
+  # Exit status is that of the last command.
+  exit
+}
+
+ECHO_C= ECHO_N= ECHO_T=
+case `echo -n x` in #(((((
+-n*)
+  case `echo 'xy\c'` in
+  *c*) ECHO_T='	';;	# ECHO_T is single tab character.
+  xy)  ECHO_C='\c';;
+  *)   echo `echo ksh88 bug on AIX 6.1` > /dev/null
+       ECHO_T='	';;
+  esac;;
+*)
+  ECHO_N='-n';;
+esac
+
+rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.file
+if test -d conf$$.dir; then
+  rm -f conf$$.dir/conf$$.file
+else
+  rm -f conf$$.dir
+  mkdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
+fi
+if (echo >conf$$.file) 2>/dev/null; then
+  if ln -s conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
+    as_ln_s='ln -s'
+    # ... but there are two gotchas:
+    # 1) On MSYS, both `ln -s file dir' and `ln file dir' fail.
+    # 2) DJGPP < 2.04 has no symlinks; `ln -s' creates a wrapper executable.
+    # In both cases, we have to default to `cp -pR'.
+    ln -s conf$$.file conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null && test ! -f conf$$.exe ||
+      as_ln_s='cp -pR'
+  elif ln conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
+    as_ln_s=ln
+  else
+    as_ln_s='cp -pR'
+  fi
+else
+  as_ln_s='cp -pR'
+fi
+rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.dir/conf$$.file conf$$.file
+rmdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
+
+if mkdir -p . 2>/dev/null; then
+  as_mkdir_p='mkdir -p "$as_dir"'
+else
+  test -d ./-p && rmdir ./-p
+  as_mkdir_p=false
+fi
+
+as_test_x='test -x'
+as_executable_p=as_fn_executable_p
+
+# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid CPP name.
+as_tr_cpp="eval sed 'y%*$as_cr_letters%P$as_cr_LETTERS%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
+
+# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid variable name.
+as_tr_sh="eval sed 'y%*+%pp%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
+
+
+test -n "$DJDIR" || exec 7<&0 </dev/null
+exec 6>&1
+
+# Name of the host.
+# hostname on some systems (SVR3.2, old GNU/Linux) returns a bogus exit status,
+# so uname gets run too.
+ac_hostname=`(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`
+
+#
+# Initializations.
+#
+ac_default_prefix=/usr/local
+ac_clean_files=
+ac_config_libobj_dir=.
+LIBOBJS=
+cross_compiling=no
+subdirs=
+MFLAGS=
+MAKEFLAGS=
+
+# Identity of this package.
+PACKAGE_NAME='tkblt'
+PACKAGE_TARNAME='tkblt'
+PACKAGE_VERSION='3.2'
+PACKAGE_STRING='tkblt 3.2'
+PACKAGE_BUGREPORT=''
+PACKAGE_URL=''
+
+# Factoring default headers for most tests.
+ac_includes_default="\
+#include <stdio.h>
+#ifdef HAVE_SYS_TYPES_H
+# include <sys/types.h>
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_SYS_STAT_H
+# include <sys/stat.h>
+#endif
+#ifdef STDC_HEADERS
+# include <stdlib.h>
+# include <stddef.h>
+#else
+# ifdef HAVE_STDLIB_H
+#  include <stdlib.h>
+# endif
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_STRING_H
+# if !defined STDC_HEADERS && defined HAVE_MEMORY_H
+#  include <memory.h>
+# endif
+# include <string.h>
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_STRINGS_H
+# include <strings.h>
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_INTTYPES_H
+# include <inttypes.h>
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_STDINT_H
+# include <stdint.h>
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H
+# include <unistd.h>
+#endif"
+
+ac_subst_vars='LTLIBOBJS
+LIBOBJS
+PATCHLEVEL
+MINOR_VERSION
+MAJOR_VERSION
+tkblt_STUB_LIB_PATH
+tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH
+tkblt_STUB_LIB_SPEC
+tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC
+tkblt_LIB_SPEC
+tkblt_BUILD_LIB_SPEC
+WISH_PROG
+TCLSH_PROG
+VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE
+VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL
+RANLIB_STUB
+MAKE_STUB_LIB
+MAKE_STATIC_LIB
+MAKE_SHARED_LIB
+MAKE_LIB
+TCL_DBGX
+LDFLAGS_DEFAULT
+CFLAGS_DEFAULT
+LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR
+SHLIB_CFLAGS
+SHLIB_LD_LIBS
+SHLIB_LD
+STLIB_LD
+CFLAGS_WARNING
+CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE
+CFLAGS_DEBUG
+RC
+CELIB_DIR
+AR
+STUBS_BUILD
+SHARED_BUILD
+TCL_THREADS
+XMKMF
+TK_XLIB_DIR_NATIVE
+TK_TOP_DIR_NATIVE
+TK_INCLUDES
+TCL_TOP_DIR_NATIVE
+TCL_INCLUDES
+PKG_OBJECTS
+PKG_SOURCES
+EGREP
+GREP
+RANLIB
+SET_MAKE
+CPP
+TK_XINCLUDES
+TK_LIBS
+TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC
+TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG
+TK_STUB_LIB_FILE
+TK_LIB_SPEC
+TK_LIB_FLAG
+TK_LIB_FILE
+TK_SRC_DIR
+TK_BIN_DIR
+TK_VERSION
+TCL_SHLIB_LD_LIBS
+TCL_LD_FLAGS
+TCL_EXTRA_CFLAGS
+TCL_DEFS
+TCL_LIBS
+CLEANFILES
+OBJEXT
+ac_ct_CC
+CPPFLAGS
+LDFLAGS
+CFLAGS
+CC
+TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC
+TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG
+TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE
+TCL_LIB_SPEC
+TCL_LIB_FLAG
+TCL_LIB_FILE
+TCL_SRC_DIR
+TCL_BIN_DIR
+TCL_PATCH_LEVEL
+TCL_VERSION
+INSTALL_LIBRARY
+INSTALL_SCRIPT
+INSTALL_PROGRAM
+INSTALL_DATA
+INSTALL_DATA_DIR
+INSTALL
+PKG_CFLAGS
+PKG_LIBS
+PKG_INCLUDES
+PKG_HEADERS
+PKG_TCL_SOURCES
+PKG_STUB_OBJECTS
+PKG_STUB_SOURCES
+PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE
+PKG_LIB_FILE
+EXEEXT
+CYGPATH
+target_alias
+host_alias
+build_alias
+LIBS
+ECHO_T
+ECHO_N
+ECHO_C
+DEFS
+mandir
+localedir
+libdir
+psdir
+pdfdir
+dvidir
+htmldir
+infodir
+docdir
+oldincludedir
+includedir
+localstatedir
+sharedstatedir
+sysconfdir
+datadir
+datarootdir
+libexecdir
+sbindir
+bindir
+program_transform_name
+prefix
+exec_prefix
+PACKAGE_URL
+PACKAGE_BUGREPORT
+PACKAGE_STRING
+PACKAGE_VERSION
+PACKAGE_TARNAME
+PACKAGE_NAME
+PATH_SEPARATOR
+SHELL'
+ac_subst_files=''
+ac_user_opts='
+enable_option_checking
+with_tcl
+with_tk
+with_tclinclude
+with_tkinclude
+with_x
+enable_threads
+enable_shared
+enable_stubs
+enable_64bit
+enable_64bit_vis
+enable_rpath
+enable_wince
+with_celib
+enable_symbols
+'
+      ac_precious_vars='build_alias
+host_alias
+target_alias
+CC
+CFLAGS
+LDFLAGS
+LIBS
+CPPFLAGS
+CPP
+XMKMF'
+
+
+# Initialize some variables set by options.
+ac_init_help=
+ac_init_version=false
+ac_unrecognized_opts=
+ac_unrecognized_sep=
+# The variables have the same names as the options, with
+# dashes changed to underlines.
+cache_file=/dev/null
+exec_prefix=NONE
+no_create=
+no_recursion=
+prefix=NONE
+program_prefix=NONE
+program_suffix=NONE
+program_transform_name=s,x,x,
+silent=
+site=
+srcdir=
+verbose=
+x_includes=NONE
+x_libraries=NONE
+
+# Installation directory options.
+# These are left unexpanded so users can "make install exec_prefix=/foo"
+# and all the variables that are supposed to be based on exec_prefix
+# by default will actually change.
+# Use braces instead of parens because sh, perl, etc. also accept them.
+# (The list follows the same order as the GNU Coding Standards.)
+bindir='${exec_prefix}/bin'
+sbindir='${exec_prefix}/sbin'
+libexecdir='${exec_prefix}/libexec'
+datarootdir='${prefix}/share'
+datadir='${datarootdir}'
+sysconfdir='${prefix}/etc'
+sharedstatedir='${prefix}/com'
+localstatedir='${prefix}/var'
+includedir='${prefix}/include'
+oldincludedir='/usr/include'
+docdir='${datarootdir}/doc/${PACKAGE_TARNAME}'
+infodir='${datarootdir}/info'
+htmldir='${docdir}'
+dvidir='${docdir}'
+pdfdir='${docdir}'
+psdir='${docdir}'
+libdir='${exec_prefix}/lib'
+localedir='${datarootdir}/locale'
+mandir='${datarootdir}/man'
+
+ac_prev=
+ac_dashdash=
+for ac_option
+do
+  # If the previous option needs an argument, assign it.
+  if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
+    eval $ac_prev=\$ac_option
+    ac_prev=
+    continue
+  fi
+
+  case $ac_option in
+  *=?*) ac_optarg=`expr "X$ac_option" : '[^=]*=\(.*\)'` ;;
+  *=)   ac_optarg= ;;
+  *)    ac_optarg=yes ;;
+  esac
+
+  # Accept the important Cygnus configure options, so we can diagnose typos.
+
+  case $ac_dashdash$ac_option in
+  --)
+    ac_dashdash=yes ;;
+
+  -bindir | --bindir | --bindi | --bind | --bin | --bi)
+    ac_prev=bindir ;;
+  -bindir=* | --bindir=* | --bindi=* | --bind=* | --bin=* | --bi=*)
+    bindir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -build | --build | --buil | --bui | --bu)
+    ac_prev=build_alias ;;
+  -build=* | --build=* | --buil=* | --bui=* | --bu=*)
+    build_alias=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -cache-file | --cache-file | --cache-fil | --cache-fi \
+  | --cache-f | --cache- | --cache | --cach | --cac | --ca | --c)
+    ac_prev=cache_file ;;
+  -cache-file=* | --cache-file=* | --cache-fil=* | --cache-fi=* \
+  | --cache-f=* | --cache-=* | --cache=* | --cach=* | --cac=* | --ca=* | --c=*)
+    cache_file=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  --config-cache | -C)
+    cache_file=config.cache ;;
+
+  -datadir | --datadir | --datadi | --datad)
+    ac_prev=datadir ;;
+  -datadir=* | --datadir=* | --datadi=* | --datad=*)
+    datadir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -datarootdir | --datarootdir | --datarootdi | --datarootd | --dataroot \
+  | --dataroo | --dataro | --datar)
+    ac_prev=datarootdir ;;
+  -datarootdir=* | --datarootdir=* | --datarootdi=* | --datarootd=* \
+  | --dataroot=* | --dataroo=* | --dataro=* | --datar=*)
+    datarootdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -disable-* | --disable-*)
+    ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*disable-\(.*\)'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
+      as_fn_error $? "invalid feature name: $ac_useropt"
+    ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
+    ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
+    case $ac_user_opts in
+      *"
+"enable_$ac_useropt"
+"*) ;;
+      *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--disable-$ac_useropt_orig"
+	 ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
+    esac
+    eval enable_$ac_useropt=no ;;
+
+  -docdir | --docdir | --docdi | --doc | --do)
+    ac_prev=docdir ;;
+  -docdir=* | --docdir=* | --docdi=* | --doc=* | --do=*)
+    docdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -dvidir | --dvidir | --dvidi | --dvid | --dvi | --dv)
+    ac_prev=dvidir ;;
+  -dvidir=* | --dvidir=* | --dvidi=* | --dvid=* | --dvi=* | --dv=*)
+    dvidir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -enable-* | --enable-*)
+    ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*enable-\([^=]*\)'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
+      as_fn_error $? "invalid feature name: $ac_useropt"
+    ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
+    ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
+    case $ac_user_opts in
+      *"
+"enable_$ac_useropt"
+"*) ;;
+      *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--enable-$ac_useropt_orig"
+	 ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
+    esac
+    eval enable_$ac_useropt=\$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -exec-prefix | --exec_prefix | --exec-prefix | --exec-prefi \
+  | --exec-pref | --exec-pre | --exec-pr | --exec-p | --exec- \
+  | --exec | --exe | --ex)
+    ac_prev=exec_prefix ;;
+  -exec-prefix=* | --exec_prefix=* | --exec-prefix=* | --exec-prefi=* \
+  | --exec-pref=* | --exec-pre=* | --exec-pr=* | --exec-p=* | --exec-=* \
+  | --exec=* | --exe=* | --ex=*)
+    exec_prefix=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -gas | --gas | --ga | --g)
+    # Obsolete; use --with-gas.
+    with_gas=yes ;;
+
+  -help | --help | --hel | --he | -h)
+    ac_init_help=long ;;
+  -help=r* | --help=r* | --hel=r* | --he=r* | -hr*)
+    ac_init_help=recursive ;;
+  -help=s* | --help=s* | --hel=s* | --he=s* | -hs*)
+    ac_init_help=short ;;
+
+  -host | --host | --hos | --ho)
+    ac_prev=host_alias ;;
+  -host=* | --host=* | --hos=* | --ho=*)
+    host_alias=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -htmldir | --htmldir | --htmldi | --htmld | --html | --htm | --ht)
+    ac_prev=htmldir ;;
+  -htmldir=* | --htmldir=* | --htmldi=* | --htmld=* | --html=* | --htm=* \
+  | --ht=*)
+    htmldir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -includedir | --includedir | --includedi | --included | --include \
+  | --includ | --inclu | --incl | --inc)
+    ac_prev=includedir ;;
+  -includedir=* | --includedir=* | --includedi=* | --included=* | --include=* \
+  | --includ=* | --inclu=* | --incl=* | --inc=*)
+    includedir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -infodir | --infodir | --infodi | --infod | --info | --inf)
+    ac_prev=infodir ;;
+  -infodir=* | --infodir=* | --infodi=* | --infod=* | --info=* | --inf=*)
+    infodir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -libdir | --libdir | --libdi | --libd)
+    ac_prev=libdir ;;
+  -libdir=* | --libdir=* | --libdi=* | --libd=*)
+    libdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -libexecdir | --libexecdir | --libexecdi | --libexecd | --libexec \
+  | --libexe | --libex | --libe)
+    ac_prev=libexecdir ;;
+  -libexecdir=* | --libexecdir=* | --libexecdi=* | --libexecd=* | --libexec=* \
+  | --libexe=* | --libex=* | --libe=*)
+    libexecdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -localedir | --localedir | --localedi | --localed | --locale)
+    ac_prev=localedir ;;
+  -localedir=* | --localedir=* | --localedi=* | --localed=* | --locale=*)
+    localedir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -localstatedir | --localstatedir | --localstatedi | --localstated \
+  | --localstate | --localstat | --localsta | --localst | --locals)
+    ac_prev=localstatedir ;;
+  -localstatedir=* | --localstatedir=* | --localstatedi=* | --localstated=* \
+  | --localstate=* | --localstat=* | --localsta=* | --localst=* | --locals=*)
+    localstatedir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -mandir | --mandir | --mandi | --mand | --man | --ma | --m)
+    ac_prev=mandir ;;
+  -mandir=* | --mandir=* | --mandi=* | --mand=* | --man=* | --ma=* | --m=*)
+    mandir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -nfp | --nfp | --nf)
+    # Obsolete; use --without-fp.
+    with_fp=no ;;
+
+  -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \
+  | --no-cr | --no-c | -n)
+    no_create=yes ;;
+
+  -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \
+  | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r)
+    no_recursion=yes ;;
+
+  -oldincludedir | --oldincludedir | --oldincludedi | --oldincluded \
+  | --oldinclude | --oldinclud | --oldinclu | --oldincl | --oldinc \
+  | --oldin | --oldi | --old | --ol | --o)
+    ac_prev=oldincludedir ;;
+  -oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedi=* | --oldincluded=* \
+  | --oldinclude=* | --oldinclud=* | --oldinclu=* | --oldincl=* | --oldinc=* \
+  | --oldin=* | --oldi=* | --old=* | --ol=* | --o=*)
+    oldincludedir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -prefix | --prefix | --prefi | --pref | --pre | --pr | --p)
+    ac_prev=prefix ;;
+  -prefix=* | --prefix=* | --prefi=* | --pref=* | --pre=* | --pr=* | --p=*)
+    prefix=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -program-prefix | --program-prefix | --program-prefi | --program-pref \
+  | --program-pre | --program-pr | --program-p)
+    ac_prev=program_prefix ;;
+  -program-prefix=* | --program-prefix=* | --program-prefi=* \
+  | --program-pref=* | --program-pre=* | --program-pr=* | --program-p=*)
+    program_prefix=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -program-suffix | --program-suffix | --program-suffi | --program-suff \
+  | --program-suf | --program-su | --program-s)
+    ac_prev=program_suffix ;;
+  -program-suffix=* | --program-suffix=* | --program-suffi=* \
+  | --program-suff=* | --program-suf=* | --program-su=* | --program-s=*)
+    program_suffix=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -program-transform-name | --program-transform-name \
+  | --program-transform-nam | --program-transform-na \
+  | --program-transform-n | --program-transform- \
+  | --program-transform | --program-transfor \
+  | --program-transfo | --program-transf \
+  | --program-trans | --program-tran \
+  | --progr-tra | --program-tr | --program-t)
+    ac_prev=program_transform_name ;;
+  -program-transform-name=* | --program-transform-name=* \
+  | --program-transform-nam=* | --program-transform-na=* \
+  | --program-transform-n=* | --program-transform-=* \
+  | --program-transform=* | --program-transfor=* \
+  | --program-transfo=* | --program-transf=* \
+  | --program-trans=* | --program-tran=* \
+  | --progr-tra=* | --program-tr=* | --program-t=*)
+    program_transform_name=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -pdfdir | --pdfdir | --pdfdi | --pdfd | --pdf | --pd)
+    ac_prev=pdfdir ;;
+  -pdfdir=* | --pdfdir=* | --pdfdi=* | --pdfd=* | --pdf=* | --pd=*)
+    pdfdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -psdir | --psdir | --psdi | --psd | --ps)
+    ac_prev=psdir ;;
+  -psdir=* | --psdir=* | --psdi=* | --psd=* | --ps=*)
+    psdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
+  | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil)
+    silent=yes ;;
+
+  -sbindir | --sbindir | --sbindi | --sbind | --sbin | --sbi | --sb)
+    ac_prev=sbindir ;;
+  -sbindir=* | --sbindir=* | --sbindi=* | --sbind=* | --sbin=* \
+  | --sbi=* | --sb=*)
+    sbindir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedi \
+  | --sharedstated | --sharedstate | --sharedstat | --sharedsta \
+  | --sharedst | --shareds | --shared | --share | --shar \
+  | --sha | --sh)
+    ac_prev=sharedstatedir ;;
+  -sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedi=* \
+  | --sharedstated=* | --sharedstate=* | --sharedstat=* | --sharedsta=* \
+  | --sharedst=* | --shareds=* | --shared=* | --share=* | --shar=* \
+  | --sha=* | --sh=*)
+    sharedstatedir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -site | --site | --sit)
+    ac_prev=site ;;
+  -site=* | --site=* | --sit=*)
+    site=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -srcdir | --srcdir | --srcdi | --srcd | --src | --sr)
+    ac_prev=srcdir ;;
+  -srcdir=* | --srcdir=* | --srcdi=* | --srcd=* | --src=* | --sr=*)
+    srcdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -sysconfdir | --sysconfdir | --sysconfdi | --sysconfd | --sysconf \
+  | --syscon | --sysco | --sysc | --sys | --sy)
+    ac_prev=sysconfdir ;;
+  -sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdi=* | --sysconfd=* | --sysconf=* \
+  | --syscon=* | --sysco=* | --sysc=* | --sys=* | --sy=*)
+    sysconfdir=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -target | --target | --targe | --targ | --tar | --ta | --t)
+    ac_prev=target_alias ;;
+  -target=* | --target=* | --targe=* | --targ=* | --tar=* | --ta=* | --t=*)
+    target_alias=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -v | -verbose | --verbose | --verbos | --verbo | --verb)
+    verbose=yes ;;
+
+  -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | -V)
+    ac_init_version=: ;;
+
+  -with-* | --with-*)
+    ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*with-\([^=]*\)'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
+      as_fn_error $? "invalid package name: $ac_useropt"
+    ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
+    ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
+    case $ac_user_opts in
+      *"
+"with_$ac_useropt"
+"*) ;;
+      *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--with-$ac_useropt_orig"
+	 ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
+    esac
+    eval with_$ac_useropt=\$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -without-* | --without-*)
+    ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*without-\(.*\)'`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
+      as_fn_error $? "invalid package name: $ac_useropt"
+    ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
+    ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
+    case $ac_user_opts in
+      *"
+"with_$ac_useropt"
+"*) ;;
+      *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--without-$ac_useropt_orig"
+	 ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
+    esac
+    eval with_$ac_useropt=no ;;
+
+  --x)
+    # Obsolete; use --with-x.
+    with_x=yes ;;
+
+  -x-includes | --x-includes | --x-include | --x-includ | --x-inclu \
+  | --x-incl | --x-inc | --x-in | --x-i)
+    ac_prev=x_includes ;;
+  -x-includes=* | --x-includes=* | --x-include=* | --x-includ=* | --x-inclu=* \
+  | --x-incl=* | --x-inc=* | --x-in=* | --x-i=*)
+    x_includes=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -x-libraries | --x-libraries | --x-librarie | --x-librari \
+  | --x-librar | --x-libra | --x-libr | --x-lib | --x-li | --x-l)
+    ac_prev=x_libraries ;;
+  -x-libraries=* | --x-libraries=* | --x-librarie=* | --x-librari=* \
+  | --x-librar=* | --x-libra=* | --x-libr=* | --x-lib=* | --x-li=* | --x-l=*)
+    x_libraries=$ac_optarg ;;
+
+  -*) as_fn_error $? "unrecognized option: \`$ac_option'
+Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
+    ;;
+
+  *=*)
+    ac_envvar=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x\([^=]*\)='`
+    # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+    case $ac_envvar in #(
+      '' | [0-9]* | *[!_$as_cr_alnum]* )
+      as_fn_error $? "invalid variable name: \`$ac_envvar'" ;;
+    esac
+    eval $ac_envvar=\$ac_optarg
+    export $ac_envvar ;;
+
+  *)
+    # FIXME: should be removed in autoconf 3.0.
+    $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: you should use --build, --host, --target" >&2
+    expr "x$ac_option" : ".*[^-._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
+      $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: invalid host type: $ac_option" >&2
+    : "${build_alias=$ac_option} ${host_alias=$ac_option} ${target_alias=$ac_option}"
+    ;;
+
+  esac
+done
+
+if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
+  ac_option=--`echo $ac_prev | sed 's/_/-/g'`
+  as_fn_error $? "missing argument to $ac_option"
+fi
+
+if test -n "$ac_unrecognized_opts"; then
+  case $enable_option_checking in
+    no) ;;
+    fatal) as_fn_error $? "unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" ;;
+    *)     $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&2 ;;
+  esac
+fi
+
+# Check all directory arguments for consistency.
+for ac_var in	exec_prefix prefix bindir sbindir libexecdir datarootdir \
+		datadir sysconfdir sharedstatedir localstatedir includedir \
+		oldincludedir docdir infodir htmldir dvidir pdfdir psdir \
+		libdir localedir mandir
+do
+  eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
+  # Remove trailing slashes.
+  case $ac_val in
+    */ )
+      ac_val=`expr "X$ac_val" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)' \| "X$ac_val" : 'X\(.*\)'`
+      eval $ac_var=\$ac_val;;
+  esac
+  # Be sure to have absolute directory names.
+  case $ac_val in
+    [\\/$]* | ?:[\\/]* )  continue;;
+    NONE | '' ) case $ac_var in *prefix ) continue;; esac;;
+  esac
+  as_fn_error $? "expected an absolute directory name for --$ac_var: $ac_val"
+done
+
+# There might be people who depend on the old broken behavior: `$host'
+# used to hold the argument of --host etc.
+# FIXME: To remove some day.
+build=$build_alias
+host=$host_alias
+target=$target_alias
+
+# FIXME: To remove some day.
+if test "x$host_alias" != x; then
+  if test "x$build_alias" = x; then
+    cross_compiling=maybe
+  elif test "x$build_alias" != "x$host_alias"; then
+    cross_compiling=yes
+  fi
+fi
+
+ac_tool_prefix=
+test -n "$host_alias" && ac_tool_prefix=$host_alias-
+
+test "$silent" = yes && exec 6>/dev/null
+
+
+ac_pwd=`pwd` && test -n "$ac_pwd" &&
+ac_ls_di=`ls -di .` &&
+ac_pwd_ls_di=`cd "$ac_pwd" && ls -di .` ||
+  as_fn_error $? "working directory cannot be determined"
+test "X$ac_ls_di" = "X$ac_pwd_ls_di" ||
+  as_fn_error $? "pwd does not report name of working directory"
+
+
+# Find the source files, if location was not specified.
+if test -z "$srcdir"; then
+  ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes
+  # Try the directory containing this script, then the parent directory.
+  ac_confdir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_myself" ||
+$as_expr X"$as_myself" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
+	 X"$as_myself" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
+	 X"$as_myself" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
+	 X"$as_myself" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
+$as_echo X"$as_myself" |
+    sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\).*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  s/.*/./; q'`
+  srcdir=$ac_confdir
+  if test ! -r "$srcdir/$ac_unique_file"; then
+    srcdir=..
+  fi
+else
+  ac_srcdir_defaulted=no
+fi
+if test ! -r "$srcdir/$ac_unique_file"; then
+  test "$ac_srcdir_defaulted" = yes && srcdir="$ac_confdir or .."
+  as_fn_error $? "cannot find sources ($ac_unique_file) in $srcdir"
+fi
+ac_msg="sources are in $srcdir, but \`cd $srcdir' does not work"
+ac_abs_confdir=`(
+	cd "$srcdir" && test -r "./$ac_unique_file" || as_fn_error $? "$ac_msg"
+	pwd)`
+# When building in place, set srcdir=.
+if test "$ac_abs_confdir" = "$ac_pwd"; then
+  srcdir=.
+fi
+# Remove unnecessary trailing slashes from srcdir.
+# Double slashes in file names in object file debugging info
+# mess up M-x gdb in Emacs.
+case $srcdir in
+*/) srcdir=`expr "X$srcdir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)' \| "X$srcdir" : 'X\(.*\)'`;;
+esac
+for ac_var in $ac_precious_vars; do
+  eval ac_env_${ac_var}_set=\${${ac_var}+set}
+  eval ac_env_${ac_var}_value=\$${ac_var}
+  eval ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_set=\${${ac_var}+set}
+  eval ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_value=\$${ac_var}
+done
+
+#
+# Report the --help message.
+#
+if test "$ac_init_help" = "long"; then
+  # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing.
+  # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh.
+  cat <<_ACEOF
+\`configure' configures tkblt 3.2 to adapt to many kinds of systems.
+
+Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [VAR=VALUE]...
+
+To assign environment variables (e.g., CC, CFLAGS...), specify them as
+VAR=VALUE.  See below for descriptions of some of the useful variables.
+
+Defaults for the options are specified in brackets.
+
+Configuration:
+  -h, --help              display this help and exit
+      --help=short        display options specific to this package
+      --help=recursive    display the short help of all the included packages
+  -V, --version           display version information and exit
+  -q, --quiet, --silent   do not print \`checking ...' messages
+      --cache-file=FILE   cache test results in FILE [disabled]
+  -C, --config-cache      alias for \`--cache-file=config.cache'
+  -n, --no-create         do not create output files
+      --srcdir=DIR        find the sources in DIR [configure dir or \`..']
+
+Installation directories:
+  --prefix=PREFIX         install architecture-independent files in PREFIX
+                          [$ac_default_prefix]
+  --exec-prefix=EPREFIX   install architecture-dependent files in EPREFIX
+                          [PREFIX]
+
+By default, \`make install' will install all the files in
+\`$ac_default_prefix/bin', \`$ac_default_prefix/lib' etc.  You can specify
+an installation prefix other than \`$ac_default_prefix' using \`--prefix',
+for instance \`--prefix=\$HOME'.
+
+For better control, use the options below.
+
+Fine tuning of the installation directories:
+  --bindir=DIR            user executables [EPREFIX/bin]
+  --sbindir=DIR           system admin executables [EPREFIX/sbin]
+  --libexecdir=DIR        program executables [EPREFIX/libexec]
+  --sysconfdir=DIR        read-only single-machine data [PREFIX/etc]
+  --sharedstatedir=DIR    modifiable architecture-independent data [PREFIX/com]
+  --localstatedir=DIR     modifiable single-machine data [PREFIX/var]
+  --libdir=DIR            object code libraries [EPREFIX/lib]
+  --includedir=DIR        C header files [PREFIX/include]
+  --oldincludedir=DIR     C header files for non-gcc [/usr/include]
+  --datarootdir=DIR       read-only arch.-independent data root [PREFIX/share]
+  --datadir=DIR           read-only architecture-independent data [DATAROOTDIR]
+  --infodir=DIR           info documentation [DATAROOTDIR/info]
+  --localedir=DIR         locale-dependent data [DATAROOTDIR/locale]
+  --mandir=DIR            man documentation [DATAROOTDIR/man]
+  --docdir=DIR            documentation root [DATAROOTDIR/doc/tkblt]
+  --htmldir=DIR           html documentation [DOCDIR]
+  --dvidir=DIR            dvi documentation [DOCDIR]
+  --pdfdir=DIR            pdf documentation [DOCDIR]
+  --psdir=DIR             ps documentation [DOCDIR]
+_ACEOF
+
+  cat <<\_ACEOF
+
+X features:
+  --x-includes=DIR    X include files are in DIR
+  --x-libraries=DIR   X library files are in DIR
+_ACEOF
+fi
+
+if test -n "$ac_init_help"; then
+  case $ac_init_help in
+     short | recursive ) echo "Configuration of tkblt 3.2:";;
+   esac
+  cat <<\_ACEOF
+
+Optional Features:
+  --disable-option-checking  ignore unrecognized --enable/--with options
+  --disable-FEATURE       do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no)
+  --enable-FEATURE[=ARG]  include FEATURE [ARG=yes]
+  --enable-threads        build with threads (default: on)
+  --enable-shared         build and link with shared libraries (default: on)
+  --enable-stubs          build and link with stub libraries. Always true for
+                          shared builds (default: on)
+  --enable-64bit          enable 64bit support (default: off)
+  --enable-64bit-vis      enable 64bit Sparc VIS support (default: off)
+  --disable-rpath         disable rpath support (default: on)
+  --enable-wince          enable Win/CE support (where applicable)
+  --enable-symbols        build with debugging symbols (default: off)
+
+Optional Packages:
+  --with-PACKAGE[=ARG]    use PACKAGE [ARG=yes]
+  --without-PACKAGE       do not use PACKAGE (same as --with-PACKAGE=no)
+  --with-tcl              directory containing tcl configuration
+                          (tclConfig.sh)
+  --with-tk               directory containing tk configuration (tkConfig.sh)
+  --with-tclinclude       directory containing the public Tcl header files
+  --with-tkinclude        directory containing the public Tk header files
+  --with-x                use the X Window System
+  --with-celib=DIR        use Windows/CE support library from DIR
+
+Some influential environment variables:
+  CC          C compiler command
+  CFLAGS      C compiler flags
+  LDFLAGS     linker flags, e.g. -L<lib dir> if you have libraries in a
+              nonstandard directory <lib dir>
+  LIBS        libraries to pass to the linker, e.g. -l<library>
+  CPPFLAGS    (Objective) C/C++ preprocessor flags, e.g. -I<include dir> if
+              you have headers in a nonstandard directory <include dir>
+  CPP         C preprocessor
+  XMKMF       Path to xmkmf, Makefile generator for X Window System
+
+Use these variables to override the choices made by `configure' or to help
+it to find libraries and programs with nonstandard names/locations.
+
+Report bugs to the package provider.
+_ACEOF
+ac_status=$?
+fi
+
+if test "$ac_init_help" = "recursive"; then
+  # If there are subdirs, report their specific --help.
+  for ac_dir in : $ac_subdirs_all; do test "x$ac_dir" = x: && continue
+    test -d "$ac_dir" ||
+      { cd "$srcdir" && ac_pwd=`pwd` && srcdir=. && test -d "$ac_dir"; } ||
+      continue
+    ac_builddir=.
+
+case "$ac_dir" in
+.) ac_dir_suffix= ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
+*)
+  ac_dir_suffix=/`$as_echo "$ac_dir" | sed 's|^\.[\\/]||'`
+  # A ".." for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix.
+  ac_top_builddir_sub=`$as_echo "$ac_dir_suffix" | sed 's|/[^\\/]*|/..|g;s|/||'`
+  case $ac_top_builddir_sub in
+  "") ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
+  *)  ac_top_build_prefix=$ac_top_builddir_sub/ ;;
+  esac ;;
+esac
+ac_abs_top_builddir=$ac_pwd
+ac_abs_builddir=$ac_pwd$ac_dir_suffix
+# for backward compatibility:
+ac_top_builddir=$ac_top_build_prefix
+
+case $srcdir in
+  .)  # We are building in place.
+    ac_srcdir=.
+    ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_builddir_sub
+    ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd ;;
+  [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* )  # Absolute name.
+    ac_srcdir=$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix;
+    ac_top_srcdir=$srcdir
+    ac_abs_top_srcdir=$srcdir ;;
+  *) # Relative name.
+    ac_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
+    ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir
+    ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd/$srcdir ;;
+esac
+ac_abs_srcdir=$ac_abs_top_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
+
+    cd "$ac_dir" || { ac_status=$?; continue; }
+    # Check for guested configure.
+    if test -f "$ac_srcdir/configure.gnu"; then
+      echo &&
+      $SHELL "$ac_srcdir/configure.gnu" --help=recursive
+    elif test -f "$ac_srcdir/configure"; then
+      echo &&
+      $SHELL "$ac_srcdir/configure" --help=recursive
+    else
+      $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: no configuration information is in $ac_dir" >&2
+    fi || ac_status=$?
+    cd "$ac_pwd" || { ac_status=$?; break; }
+  done
+fi
+
+test -n "$ac_init_help" && exit $ac_status
+if $ac_init_version; then
+  cat <<\_ACEOF
+tkblt configure 3.2
+generated by GNU Autoconf 2.69
+
+Copyright (C) 2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
+_ACEOF
+  exit
+fi
+
+## ------------------------ ##
+## Autoconf initialization. ##
+## ------------------------ ##
+
+# ac_fn_c_try_compile LINENO
+# --------------------------
+# Try to compile conftest.$ac_ext, and return whether this succeeded.
+ac_fn_c_try_compile ()
+{
+  as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$1"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+  rm -f conftest.$ac_objext
+  if { { ac_try="$ac_compile"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_compile") 2>conftest.err
+  ac_status=$?
+  if test -s conftest.err; then
+    grep -v '^ *+' conftest.err >conftest.er1
+    cat conftest.er1 >&5
+    mv -f conftest.er1 conftest.err
+  fi
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; } && {
+	 test -z "$ac_c_werror_flag" ||
+	 test ! -s conftest.err
+       } && test -s conftest.$ac_objext; then :
+  ac_retval=0
+else
+  $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5
+sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+
+	ac_retval=1
+fi
+  eval $as_lineno_stack; ${as_lineno_stack:+:} unset as_lineno
+  as_fn_set_status $ac_retval
+
+} # ac_fn_c_try_compile
+
+# ac_fn_c_try_cpp LINENO
+# ----------------------
+# Try to preprocess conftest.$ac_ext, and return whether this succeeded.
+ac_fn_c_try_cpp ()
+{
+  as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$1"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+  if { { ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>conftest.err
+  ac_status=$?
+  if test -s conftest.err; then
+    grep -v '^ *+' conftest.err >conftest.er1
+    cat conftest.er1 >&5
+    mv -f conftest.er1 conftest.err
+  fi
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; } > conftest.i && {
+	 test -z "$ac_c_preproc_warn_flag$ac_c_werror_flag" ||
+	 test ! -s conftest.err
+       }; then :
+  ac_retval=0
+else
+  $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5
+sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+
+    ac_retval=1
+fi
+  eval $as_lineno_stack; ${as_lineno_stack:+:} unset as_lineno
+  as_fn_set_status $ac_retval
+
+} # ac_fn_c_try_cpp
+
+# ac_fn_c_try_run LINENO
+# ----------------------
+# Try to link conftest.$ac_ext, and return whether this succeeded. Assumes
+# that executables *can* be run.
+ac_fn_c_try_run ()
+{
+  as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$1"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+  if { { ac_try="$ac_link"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_link") 2>&5
+  ac_status=$?
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; } && { ac_try='./conftest$ac_exeext'
+  { { case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_try") 2>&5
+  ac_status=$?
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }; }; then :
+  ac_retval=0
+else
+  $as_echo "$as_me: program exited with status $ac_status" >&5
+       $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5
+sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+
+       ac_retval=$ac_status
+fi
+  rm -rf conftest.dSYM conftest_ipa8_conftest.oo
+  eval $as_lineno_stack; ${as_lineno_stack:+:} unset as_lineno
+  as_fn_set_status $ac_retval
+
+} # ac_fn_c_try_run
+
+# ac_fn_c_check_header_compile LINENO HEADER VAR INCLUDES
+# -------------------------------------------------------
+# Tests whether HEADER exists and can be compiled using the include files in
+# INCLUDES, setting the cache variable VAR accordingly.
+ac_fn_c_check_header_compile ()
+{
+  as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$1"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $2" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $2... " >&6; }
+if eval \${$3+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+$4
+#include <$2>
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  eval "$3=yes"
+else
+  eval "$3=no"
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+eval ac_res=\$$3
+	       { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_res" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_res" >&6; }
+  eval $as_lineno_stack; ${as_lineno_stack:+:} unset as_lineno
+
+} # ac_fn_c_check_header_compile
+
+# ac_fn_c_try_link LINENO
+# -----------------------
+# Try to link conftest.$ac_ext, and return whether this succeeded.
+ac_fn_c_try_link ()
+{
+  as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$1"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+  rm -f conftest.$ac_objext conftest$ac_exeext
+  if { { ac_try="$ac_link"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_link") 2>conftest.err
+  ac_status=$?
+  if test -s conftest.err; then
+    grep -v '^ *+' conftest.err >conftest.er1
+    cat conftest.er1 >&5
+    mv -f conftest.er1 conftest.err
+  fi
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; } && {
+	 test -z "$ac_c_werror_flag" ||
+	 test ! -s conftest.err
+       } && test -s conftest$ac_exeext && {
+	 test "$cross_compiling" = yes ||
+	 test -x conftest$ac_exeext
+       }; then :
+  ac_retval=0
+else
+  $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5
+sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+
+	ac_retval=1
+fi
+  # Delete the IPA/IPO (Inter Procedural Analysis/Optimization) information
+  # created by the PGI compiler (conftest_ipa8_conftest.oo), as it would
+  # interfere with the next link command; also delete a directory that is
+  # left behind by Apple's compiler.  We do this before executing the actions.
+  rm -rf conftest.dSYM conftest_ipa8_conftest.oo
+  eval $as_lineno_stack; ${as_lineno_stack:+:} unset as_lineno
+  as_fn_set_status $ac_retval
+
+} # ac_fn_c_try_link
+
+# ac_fn_c_check_func LINENO FUNC VAR
+# ----------------------------------
+# Tests whether FUNC exists, setting the cache variable VAR accordingly
+ac_fn_c_check_func ()
+{
+  as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$1"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $2" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $2... " >&6; }
+if eval \${$3+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+/* Define $2 to an innocuous variant, in case <limits.h> declares $2.
+   For example, HP-UX 11i <limits.h> declares gettimeofday.  */
+#define $2 innocuous_$2
+
+/* System header to define __stub macros and hopefully few prototypes,
+    which can conflict with char $2 (); below.
+    Prefer <limits.h> to <assert.h> if __STDC__ is defined, since
+    <limits.h> exists even on freestanding compilers.  */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+# include <limits.h>
+#else
+# include <assert.h>
+#endif
+
+#undef $2
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char $2 ();
+/* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements
+    to always fail with ENOSYS.  Some functions are actually named
+    something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias.  */
+#if defined __stub_$2 || defined __stub___$2
+choke me
+#endif
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+return $2 ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  eval "$3=yes"
+else
+  eval "$3=no"
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+eval ac_res=\$$3
+	       { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_res" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_res" >&6; }
+  eval $as_lineno_stack; ${as_lineno_stack:+:} unset as_lineno
+
+} # ac_fn_c_check_func
+cat >config.log <<_ACEOF
+This file contains any messages produced by compilers while
+running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake.
+
+It was created by tkblt $as_me 3.2, which was
+generated by GNU Autoconf 2.69.  Invocation command line was
+
+  $ $0 $@
+
+_ACEOF
+exec 5>>config.log
+{
+cat <<_ASUNAME
+## --------- ##
+## Platform. ##
+## --------- ##
+
+hostname = `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`
+uname -m = `(uname -m) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
+uname -r = `(uname -r) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
+uname -s = `(uname -s) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
+uname -v = `(uname -v) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
+
+/usr/bin/uname -p = `(/usr/bin/uname -p) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
+/bin/uname -X     = `(/bin/uname -X) 2>/dev/null     || echo unknown`
+
+/bin/arch              = `(/bin/arch) 2>/dev/null              || echo unknown`
+/usr/bin/arch -k       = `(/usr/bin/arch -k) 2>/dev/null       || echo unknown`
+/usr/convex/getsysinfo = `(/usr/convex/getsysinfo) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
+/usr/bin/hostinfo      = `(/usr/bin/hostinfo) 2>/dev/null      || echo unknown`
+/bin/machine           = `(/bin/machine) 2>/dev/null           || echo unknown`
+/usr/bin/oslevel       = `(/usr/bin/oslevel) 2>/dev/null       || echo unknown`
+/bin/universe          = `(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null          || echo unknown`
+
+_ASUNAME
+
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    $as_echo "PATH: $as_dir"
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+} >&5
+
+cat >&5 <<_ACEOF
+
+
+## ----------- ##
+## Core tests. ##
+## ----------- ##
+
+_ACEOF
+
+
+# Keep a trace of the command line.
+# Strip out --no-create and --no-recursion so they do not pile up.
+# Strip out --silent because we don't want to record it for future runs.
+# Also quote any args containing shell meta-characters.
+# Make two passes to allow for proper duplicate-argument suppression.
+ac_configure_args=
+ac_configure_args0=
+ac_configure_args1=
+ac_must_keep_next=false
+for ac_pass in 1 2
+do
+  for ac_arg
+  do
+    case $ac_arg in
+    -no-create | --no-c* | -n | -no-recursion | --no-r*) continue ;;
+    -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
+    | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil)
+      continue ;;
+    *\'*)
+      ac_arg=`$as_echo "$ac_arg" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;;
+    esac
+    case $ac_pass in
+    1) as_fn_append ac_configure_args0 " '$ac_arg'" ;;
+    2)
+      as_fn_append ac_configure_args1 " '$ac_arg'"
+      if test $ac_must_keep_next = true; then
+	ac_must_keep_next=false # Got value, back to normal.
+      else
+	case $ac_arg in
+	  *=* | --config-cache | -C | -disable-* | --disable-* \
+	  | -enable-* | --enable-* | -gas | --g* | -nfp | --nf* \
+	  | -q | -quiet | --q* | -silent | --sil* | -v | -verb* \
+	  | -with-* | --with-* | -without-* | --without-* | --x)
+	    case "$ac_configure_args0 " in
+	      "$ac_configure_args1"*" '$ac_arg' "* ) continue ;;
+	    esac
+	    ;;
+	  -* ) ac_must_keep_next=true ;;
+	esac
+      fi
+      as_fn_append ac_configure_args " '$ac_arg'"
+      ;;
+    esac
+  done
+done
+{ ac_configure_args0=; unset ac_configure_args0;}
+{ ac_configure_args1=; unset ac_configure_args1;}
+
+# When interrupted or exit'd, cleanup temporary files, and complete
+# config.log.  We remove comments because anyway the quotes in there
+# would cause problems or look ugly.
+# WARNING: Use '\'' to represent an apostrophe within the trap.
+# WARNING: Do not start the trap code with a newline, due to a FreeBSD 4.0 bug.
+trap 'exit_status=$?
+  # Save into config.log some information that might help in debugging.
+  {
+    echo
+
+    $as_echo "## ---------------- ##
+## Cache variables. ##
+## ---------------- ##"
+    echo
+    # The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values,
+(
+  for ac_var in `(set) 2>&1 | sed -n '\''s/^\([a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=.*/\1/p'\''`; do
+    eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
+    case $ac_val in #(
+    *${as_nl}*)
+      case $ac_var in #(
+      *_cv_*) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&2;} ;;
+      esac
+      case $ac_var in #(
+      _ | IFS | as_nl) ;; #(
+      BASH_ARGV | BASH_SOURCE) eval $ac_var= ;; #(
+      *) { eval $ac_var=; unset $ac_var;} ;;
+      esac ;;
+    esac
+  done
+  (set) 2>&1 |
+    case $as_nl`(ac_space='\'' '\''; set) 2>&1` in #(
+    *${as_nl}ac_space=\ *)
+      sed -n \
+	"s/'\''/'\''\\\\'\'''\''/g;
+	  s/^\\([_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1='\''\\2'\''/p"
+      ;; #(
+    *)
+      sed -n "/^[_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*=/p"
+      ;;
+    esac |
+    sort
+)
+    echo
+
+    $as_echo "## ----------------- ##
+## Output variables. ##
+## ----------------- ##"
+    echo
+    for ac_var in $ac_subst_vars
+    do
+      eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
+      case $ac_val in
+      *\'\''*) ac_val=`$as_echo "$ac_val" | sed "s/'\''/'\''\\\\\\\\'\'''\''/g"`;;
+      esac
+      $as_echo "$ac_var='\''$ac_val'\''"
+    done | sort
+    echo
+
+    if test -n "$ac_subst_files"; then
+      $as_echo "## ------------------- ##
+## File substitutions. ##
+## ------------------- ##"
+      echo
+      for ac_var in $ac_subst_files
+      do
+	eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
+	case $ac_val in
+	*\'\''*) ac_val=`$as_echo "$ac_val" | sed "s/'\''/'\''\\\\\\\\'\'''\''/g"`;;
+	esac
+	$as_echo "$ac_var='\''$ac_val'\''"
+      done | sort
+      echo
+    fi
+
+    if test -s confdefs.h; then
+      $as_echo "## ----------- ##
+## confdefs.h. ##
+## ----------- ##"
+      echo
+      cat confdefs.h
+      echo
+    fi
+    test "$ac_signal" != 0 &&
+      $as_echo "$as_me: caught signal $ac_signal"
+    $as_echo "$as_me: exit $exit_status"
+  } >&5
+  rm -f core *.core core.conftest.* &&
+    rm -f -r conftest* confdefs* conf$$* $ac_clean_files &&
+    exit $exit_status
+' 0
+for ac_signal in 1 2 13 15; do
+  trap 'ac_signal='$ac_signal'; as_fn_exit 1' $ac_signal
+done
+ac_signal=0
+
+# confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed.
+rm -f -r conftest* confdefs.h
+
+$as_echo "/* confdefs.h */" > confdefs.h
+
+# Predefined preprocessor variables.
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define PACKAGE_NAME "$PACKAGE_NAME"
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define PACKAGE_TARNAME "$PACKAGE_TARNAME"
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define PACKAGE_VERSION "$PACKAGE_VERSION"
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define PACKAGE_STRING "$PACKAGE_STRING"
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define PACKAGE_BUGREPORT "$PACKAGE_BUGREPORT"
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define PACKAGE_URL "$PACKAGE_URL"
+_ACEOF
+
+
+# Let the site file select an alternate cache file if it wants to.
+# Prefer an explicitly selected file to automatically selected ones.
+ac_site_file1=NONE
+ac_site_file2=NONE
+if test -n "$CONFIG_SITE"; then
+  # We do not want a PATH search for config.site.
+  case $CONFIG_SITE in #((
+    -*)  ac_site_file1=./$CONFIG_SITE;;
+    */*) ac_site_file1=$CONFIG_SITE;;
+    *)   ac_site_file1=./$CONFIG_SITE;;
+  esac
+elif test "x$prefix" != xNONE; then
+  ac_site_file1=$prefix/share/config.site
+  ac_site_file2=$prefix/etc/config.site
+else
+  ac_site_file1=$ac_default_prefix/share/config.site
+  ac_site_file2=$ac_default_prefix/etc/config.site
+fi
+for ac_site_file in "$ac_site_file1" "$ac_site_file2"
+do
+  test "x$ac_site_file" = xNONE && continue
+  if test /dev/null != "$ac_site_file" && test -r "$ac_site_file"; then
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: loading site script $ac_site_file" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: loading site script $ac_site_file" >&6;}
+    sed 's/^/| /' "$ac_site_file" >&5
+    . "$ac_site_file" \
+      || { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error $? "failed to load site script $ac_site_file
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+  fi
+done
+
+if test -r "$cache_file"; then
+  # Some versions of bash will fail to source /dev/null (special files
+  # actually), so we avoid doing that.  DJGPP emulates it as a regular file.
+  if test /dev/null != "$cache_file" && test -f "$cache_file"; then
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: loading cache $cache_file" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: loading cache $cache_file" >&6;}
+    case $cache_file in
+      [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* ) . "$cache_file";;
+      *)                      . "./$cache_file";;
+    esac
+  fi
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating cache $cache_file" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: creating cache $cache_file" >&6;}
+  >$cache_file
+fi
+
+# Check that the precious variables saved in the cache have kept the same
+# value.
+ac_cache_corrupted=false
+for ac_var in $ac_precious_vars; do
+  eval ac_old_set=\$ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_set
+  eval ac_new_set=\$ac_env_${ac_var}_set
+  eval ac_old_val=\$ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_value
+  eval ac_new_val=\$ac_env_${ac_var}_value
+  case $ac_old_set,$ac_new_set in
+    set,)
+      { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' was set to \`$ac_old_val' in the previous run" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' was set to \`$ac_old_val' in the previous run" >&2;}
+      ac_cache_corrupted=: ;;
+    ,set)
+      { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' was not set in the previous run" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' was not set in the previous run" >&2;}
+      ac_cache_corrupted=: ;;
+    ,);;
+    *)
+      if test "x$ac_old_val" != "x$ac_new_val"; then
+	# differences in whitespace do not lead to failure.
+	ac_old_val_w=`echo x $ac_old_val`
+	ac_new_val_w=`echo x $ac_new_val`
+	if test "$ac_old_val_w" != "$ac_new_val_w"; then
+	  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' has changed since the previous run:" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' has changed since the previous run:" >&2;}
+	  ac_cache_corrupted=:
+	else
+	  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: warning: ignoring whitespace changes in \`$ac_var' since the previous run:" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: warning: ignoring whitespace changes in \`$ac_var' since the previous run:" >&2;}
+	  eval $ac_var=\$ac_old_val
+	fi
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}:   former value:  \`$ac_old_val'" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me:   former value:  \`$ac_old_val'" >&2;}
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}:   current value: \`$ac_new_val'" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me:   current value: \`$ac_new_val'" >&2;}
+      fi;;
+  esac
+  # Pass precious variables to config.status.
+  if test "$ac_new_set" = set; then
+    case $ac_new_val in
+    *\'*) ac_arg=$ac_var=`$as_echo "$ac_new_val" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;;
+    *) ac_arg=$ac_var=$ac_new_val ;;
+    esac
+    case " $ac_configure_args " in
+      *" '$ac_arg' "*) ;; # Avoid dups.  Use of quotes ensures accuracy.
+      *) as_fn_append ac_configure_args " '$ac_arg'" ;;
+    esac
+  fi
+done
+if $ac_cache_corrupted; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: changes in the environment can compromise the build" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: changes in the environment can compromise the build" >&2;}
+  as_fn_error $? "run \`make distclean' and/or \`rm $cache_file' and start over" "$LINENO" 5
+fi
+## -------------------- ##
+## Main body of script. ##
+## -------------------- ##
+
+ac_ext=c
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
+ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
+ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Call TEA_INIT as the first TEA_ macro to set up initial vars.
+# This will define a ${TEA_PLATFORM} variable == "unix" or "windows"
+# as well as PKG_LIB_FILE and PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    TEA_VERSION="3.13"
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking TEA configuration" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking TEA configuration... " >&6; }
+    if test x"${PACKAGE_NAME}" = x ; then
+	as_fn_error $? "
+The PACKAGE_NAME variable must be defined by your TEA configure.ac" "$LINENO" 5
+    fi
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ok (TEA ${TEA_VERSION})" >&5
+$as_echo "ok (TEA ${TEA_VERSION})" >&6; }
+
+    # If the user did not set CFLAGS, set it now to keep macros
+    # like AC_PROG_CC and AC_TRY_COMPILE from adding "-g -O2".
+    if test "${CFLAGS+set}" != "set" ; then
+	CFLAGS=""
+    fi
+
+    case "`uname -s`" in
+	*win32*|*WIN32*|*MINGW32_*|*MINGW64_*)
+	    # Extract the first word of "cygpath", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cygpath; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CYGPATH"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH="$CYGPATH" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH="cygpath -m"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+  test -z "$ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH" && ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH="echo"
+fi
+fi
+CYGPATH=$ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH
+if test -n "$CYGPATH"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CYGPATH" >&5
+$as_echo "$CYGPATH" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+	    EXEEXT=".exe"
+	    TEA_PLATFORM="windows"
+	    ;;
+	*CYGWIN_*)
+	    EXEEXT=".exe"
+	    # CYGPATH and TEA_PLATFORM are determined later in LOAD_TCLCONFIG
+	    ;;
+	*)
+	    CYGPATH=echo
+	    # Maybe we are cross-compiling....
+	    case ${host_alias} in
+		*mingw32*)
+		EXEEXT=".exe"
+		TEA_PLATFORM="windows"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		EXEEXT=""
+		TEA_PLATFORM="unix"
+		;;
+	    esac
+	    ;;
+    esac
+
+    # Check if exec_prefix is set. If not use fall back to prefix.
+    # Note when adjusted, so that TEA_PREFIX can correct for this.
+    # This is needed for recursive configures, since autoconf propagates
+    # $prefix, but not $exec_prefix (doh!).
+    if test x$exec_prefix = xNONE ; then
+	exec_prefix_default=yes
+	exec_prefix=$prefix
+    fi
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: configuring ${PACKAGE_NAME} ${PACKAGE_VERSION}" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: configuring ${PACKAGE_NAME} ${PACKAGE_VERSION}" >&6;}
+
+
+
+
+    # This package name must be replaced statically for AC_SUBST to work
+
+    # Substitute STUB_LIB_FILE in case package creates a stub library too.
+
+
+    # We AC_SUBST these here to ensure they are subst'ed,
+    # in case the user doesn't call TEA_ADD_...
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+    # Configure the installer.
+
+    INSTALL='$(SHELL) $(srcdir)/tclconfig/install-sh -c'
+    INSTALL_DATA_DIR='${INSTALL} -d -m 755'
+    INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644'
+    INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL} -m 755'
+    INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL} -m 755'
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking system version" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking system version... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_sys_version+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	# TEA specific:
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	    tcl_cv_sys_version=windows
+	else
+	    tcl_cv_sys_version=`uname -s`-`uname -r`
+	    if test "$?" -ne 0 ; then
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: can't find uname command" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: can't find uname command" >&2;}
+		tcl_cv_sys_version=unknown
+	    else
+		if test "`uname -s`" = "AIX" ; then
+		    tcl_cv_sys_version=AIX-`uname -v`.`uname -r`
+		fi
+	    fi
+	fi
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_sys_version" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_sys_version" >&6; }
+    system=$tcl_cv_sys_version
+
+    case $system in
+	HP-UX-*) INSTALL_LIBRARY='${INSTALL} -m 755' ;;
+	      *) INSTALL_LIBRARY='${INSTALL} -m 644' ;;
+    esac
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ac_aux_dir=
+for ac_dir in tclconfig "$srcdir"/tclconfig; do
+  if test -f "$ac_dir/install-sh"; then
+    ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
+    ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install-sh -c"
+    break
+  elif test -f "$ac_dir/install.sh"; then
+    ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
+    ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install.sh -c"
+    break
+  elif test -f "$ac_dir/shtool"; then
+    ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
+    ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/shtool install -c"
+    break
+  fi
+done
+if test -z "$ac_aux_dir"; then
+  as_fn_error $? "cannot find install-sh, install.sh, or shtool in tclconfig \"$srcdir\"/tclconfig" "$LINENO" 5
+fi
+
+# These three variables are undocumented and unsupported,
+# and are intended to be withdrawn in a future Autoconf release.
+# They can cause serious problems if a builder's source tree is in a directory
+# whose full name contains unusual characters.
+ac_config_guess="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/config.guess"  # Please don't use this var.
+ac_config_sub="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/config.sub"  # Please don't use this var.
+ac_configure="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/configure"  # Please don't use this var.
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Load the tclConfig.sh file
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+    #
+    # Ok, lets find the tcl configuration
+    # First, look for one uninstalled.
+    # the alternative search directory is invoked by --with-tcl
+    #
+
+    if test x"${no_tcl}" = x ; then
+	# we reset no_tcl in case something fails here
+	no_tcl=true
+
+# Check whether --with-tcl was given.
+if test "${with_tcl+set}" = set; then :
+  withval=$with_tcl; with_tclconfig="${withval}"
+fi
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Tcl configuration" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for Tcl configuration... " >&6; }
+	if ${ac_cv_c_tclconfig+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+
+	    # First check to see if --with-tcl was specified.
+	    if test x"${with_tclconfig}" != x ; then
+		case "${with_tclconfig}" in
+		    */tclConfig.sh )
+			if test -f "${with_tclconfig}"; then
+			    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: --with-tcl argument should refer to directory containing tclConfig.sh, not to tclConfig.sh itself" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: --with-tcl argument should refer to directory containing tclConfig.sh, not to tclConfig.sh itself" >&2;}
+			    with_tclconfig="`echo "${with_tclconfig}" | sed 's!/tclConfig\.sh$!!'`"
+			fi ;;
+		esac
+		if test -f "${with_tclconfig}/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd "${with_tclconfig}"; pwd)`"
+		else
+		    as_fn_error $? "${with_tclconfig} directory doesn't contain tclConfig.sh" "$LINENO" 5
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    # then check for a private Tcl installation
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ../tcl[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tcl[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tcl[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ../../tcl[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tcl[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tcl[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tcl[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tcl[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tcl[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # on Darwin, check in Framework installation locations
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin" -a x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ~/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Network/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /System/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Network/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/System/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/Tcl.framework/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/Tcl.framework; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # TEA specific: on Windows, check in common installation locations
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+		-a x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d C:/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d C:/Progra~1/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few common install locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tcl8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tcl8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tcl8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tcl8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few other private locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			${srcdir}/../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+fi
+
+
+	if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+	    TCL_BIN_DIR="# no Tcl configs found"
+	    as_fn_error $? "Can't find Tcl configuration definitions. Use --with-tcl to specify a directory containing tclConfig.sh" "$LINENO" 5
+	else
+	    no_tcl=
+	    TCL_BIN_DIR="${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}"
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: found ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh" >&5
+$as_echo "found ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh" >&6; }
+	fi
+    fi
+
+ac_ext=c
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
+ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
+ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
+if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}gcc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}gcc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="${ac_tool_prefix}gcc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_CC"; then
+  ac_ct_CC=$CC
+  # Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_ct_CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="gcc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_CC=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC
+if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_CC" = x; then
+    CC=""
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    CC=$ac_ct_CC
+  fi
+else
+  CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+fi
+
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+          if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+    # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}cc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}cc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="${ac_tool_prefix}cc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+  fi
+fi
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "cc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+  ac_prog_rejected=no
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    if test "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" = "/usr/ucb/cc"; then
+       ac_prog_rejected=yes
+       continue
+     fi
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="cc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+if test $ac_prog_rejected = yes; then
+  # We found a bogon in the path, so make sure we never use it.
+  set dummy $ac_cv_prog_CC
+  shift
+  if test $# != 0; then
+    # We chose a different compiler from the bogus one.
+    # However, it has the same basename, so the bogon will be chosen
+    # first if we set CC to just the basename; use the full file name.
+    shift
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="$as_dir/$ac_word${1+' '}$@"
+  fi
+fi
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+  if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  for ac_prog in cl.exe
+  do
+    # Extract the first word of "$ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy $ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="$ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+    test -n "$CC" && break
+  done
+fi
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+  ac_ct_CC=$CC
+  for ac_prog in cl.exe
+do
+  # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_ct_CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_prog"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_CC=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC
+if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+  test -n "$ac_ct_CC" && break
+done
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_CC" = x; then
+    CC=""
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    CC=$ac_ct_CC
+  fi
+fi
+
+fi
+
+
+test -z "$CC" && { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error $? "no acceptable C compiler found in \$PATH
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+
+# Provide some information about the compiler.
+$as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for C compiler version" >&5
+set X $ac_compile
+ac_compiler=$2
+for ac_option in --version -v -V -qversion; do
+  { { ac_try="$ac_compiler $ac_option >&5"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_compiler $ac_option >&5") 2>conftest.err
+  ac_status=$?
+  if test -s conftest.err; then
+    sed '10a\
+... rest of stderr output deleted ...
+         10q' conftest.err >conftest.er1
+    cat conftest.er1 >&5
+  fi
+  rm -f conftest.er1 conftest.err
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }
+done
+
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+ac_clean_files_save=$ac_clean_files
+ac_clean_files="$ac_clean_files a.out a.out.dSYM a.exe b.out"
+# Try to create an executable without -o first, disregard a.out.
+# It will help us diagnose broken compilers, and finding out an intuition
+# of exeext.
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether the C compiler works" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether the C compiler works... " >&6; }
+ac_link_default=`$as_echo "$ac_link" | sed 's/ -o *conftest[^ ]*//'`
+
+# The possible output files:
+ac_files="a.out conftest.exe conftest a.exe a_out.exe b.out conftest.*"
+
+ac_rmfiles=
+for ac_file in $ac_files
+do
+  case $ac_file in
+    *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM | *.o | *.obj ) ;;
+    * ) ac_rmfiles="$ac_rmfiles $ac_file";;
+  esac
+done
+rm -f $ac_rmfiles
+
+if { { ac_try="$ac_link_default"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_link_default") 2>&5
+  ac_status=$?
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }; then :
+  # Autoconf-2.13 could set the ac_cv_exeext variable to `no'.
+# So ignore a value of `no', otherwise this would lead to `EXEEXT = no'
+# in a Makefile.  We should not override ac_cv_exeext if it was cached,
+# so that the user can short-circuit this test for compilers unknown to
+# Autoconf.
+for ac_file in $ac_files ''
+do
+  test -f "$ac_file" || continue
+  case $ac_file in
+    *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM | *.o | *.obj )
+	;;
+    [ab].out )
+	# We found the default executable, but exeext='' is most
+	# certainly right.
+	break;;
+    *.* )
+	if test "${ac_cv_exeext+set}" = set && test "$ac_cv_exeext" != no;
+	then :; else
+	   ac_cv_exeext=`expr "$ac_file" : '[^.]*\(\..*\)'`
+	fi
+	# We set ac_cv_exeext here because the later test for it is not
+	# safe: cross compilers may not add the suffix if given an `-o'
+	# argument, so we may need to know it at that point already.
+	# Even if this section looks crufty: it has the advantage of
+	# actually working.
+	break;;
+    * )
+	break;;
+  esac
+done
+test "$ac_cv_exeext" = no && ac_cv_exeext=
+
+else
+  ac_file=''
+fi
+if test -z "$ac_file"; then :
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+$as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5
+sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+
+{ { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error 77 "C compiler cannot create executables
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5
+$as_echo "yes" >&6; }
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for C compiler default output file name" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for C compiler default output file name... " >&6; }
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_file" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_file" >&6; }
+ac_exeext=$ac_cv_exeext
+
+rm -f -r a.out a.out.dSYM a.exe conftest$ac_cv_exeext b.out
+ac_clean_files=$ac_clean_files_save
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for suffix of executables" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for suffix of executables... " >&6; }
+if { { ac_try="$ac_link"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_link") 2>&5
+  ac_status=$?
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }; then :
+  # If both `conftest.exe' and `conftest' are `present' (well, observable)
+# catch `conftest.exe'.  For instance with Cygwin, `ls conftest' will
+# work properly (i.e., refer to `conftest.exe'), while it won't with
+# `rm'.
+for ac_file in conftest.exe conftest conftest.*; do
+  test -f "$ac_file" || continue
+  case $ac_file in
+    *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM | *.o | *.obj ) ;;
+    *.* ) ac_cv_exeext=`expr "$ac_file" : '[^.]*\(\..*\)'`
+	  break;;
+    * ) break;;
+  esac
+done
+else
+  { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error $? "cannot compute suffix of executables: cannot compile and link
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+fi
+rm -f conftest conftest$ac_cv_exeext
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_exeext" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_exeext" >&6; }
+
+rm -f conftest.$ac_ext
+EXEEXT=$ac_cv_exeext
+ac_exeext=$EXEEXT
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <stdio.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+FILE *f = fopen ("conftest.out", "w");
+ return ferror (f) || fclose (f) != 0;
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+ac_clean_files="$ac_clean_files conftest.out"
+# Check that the compiler produces executables we can run.  If not, either
+# the compiler is broken, or we cross compile.
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether we are cross compiling" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether we are cross compiling... " >&6; }
+if test "$cross_compiling" != yes; then
+  { { ac_try="$ac_link"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_link") 2>&5
+  ac_status=$?
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }
+  if { ac_try='./conftest$ac_cv_exeext'
+  { { case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_try") 2>&5
+  ac_status=$?
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }; }; then
+    cross_compiling=no
+  else
+    if test "$cross_compiling" = maybe; then
+	cross_compiling=yes
+    else
+	{ { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error $? "cannot run C compiled programs.
+If you meant to cross compile, use \`--host'.
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+    fi
+  fi
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $cross_compiling" >&5
+$as_echo "$cross_compiling" >&6; }
+
+rm -f conftest.$ac_ext conftest$ac_cv_exeext conftest.out
+ac_clean_files=$ac_clean_files_save
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for suffix of object files" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for suffix of object files... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_objext+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+rm -f conftest.o conftest.obj
+if { { ac_try="$ac_compile"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_compile") 2>&5
+  ac_status=$?
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }; then :
+  for ac_file in conftest.o conftest.obj conftest.*; do
+  test -f "$ac_file" || continue;
+  case $ac_file in
+    *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM ) ;;
+    *) ac_cv_objext=`expr "$ac_file" : '.*\.\(.*\)'`
+       break;;
+  esac
+done
+else
+  $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5
+sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+
+{ { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error $? "cannot compute suffix of object files: cannot compile
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+fi
+rm -f conftest.$ac_cv_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_objext" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_objext" >&6; }
+OBJEXT=$ac_cv_objext
+ac_objext=$OBJEXT
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether we are using the GNU C compiler" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether we are using the GNU C compiler... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+#ifndef __GNUC__
+       choke me
+#endif
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_compiler_gnu=yes
+else
+  ac_compiler_gnu=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu=$ac_compiler_gnu
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu" >&6; }
+if test $ac_compiler_gnu = yes; then
+  GCC=yes
+else
+  GCC=
+fi
+ac_test_CFLAGS=${CFLAGS+set}
+ac_save_CFLAGS=$CFLAGS
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether $CC accepts -g" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether $CC accepts -g... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_cc_g+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_save_c_werror_flag=$ac_c_werror_flag
+   ac_c_werror_flag=yes
+   ac_cv_prog_cc_g=no
+   CFLAGS="-g"
+   cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes
+else
+  CFLAGS=""
+      cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+
+else
+  ac_c_werror_flag=$ac_save_c_werror_flag
+	 CFLAGS="-g"
+	 cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+   ac_c_werror_flag=$ac_save_c_werror_flag
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_cc_g" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_cc_g" >&6; }
+if test "$ac_test_CFLAGS" = set; then
+  CFLAGS=$ac_save_CFLAGS
+elif test $ac_cv_prog_cc_g = yes; then
+  if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+    CFLAGS="-g -O2"
+  else
+    CFLAGS="-g"
+  fi
+else
+  if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+    CFLAGS="-O2"
+  else
+    CFLAGS=
+  fi
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $CC option to accept ISO C89" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $CC option to accept ISO C89... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_cc_c89+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_c89=no
+ac_save_CC=$CC
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+struct stat;
+/* Most of the following tests are stolen from RCS 5.7's src/conf.sh.  */
+struct buf { int x; };
+FILE * (*rcsopen) (struct buf *, struct stat *, int);
+static char *e (p, i)
+     char **p;
+     int i;
+{
+  return p[i];
+}
+static char *f (char * (*g) (char **, int), char **p, ...)
+{
+  char *s;
+  va_list v;
+  va_start (v,p);
+  s = g (p, va_arg (v,int));
+  va_end (v);
+  return s;
+}
+
+/* OSF 4.0 Compaq cc is some sort of almost-ANSI by default.  It has
+   function prototypes and stuff, but not '\xHH' hex character constants.
+   These don't provoke an error unfortunately, instead are silently treated
+   as 'x'.  The following induces an error, until -std is added to get
+   proper ANSI mode.  Curiously '\x00'!='x' always comes out true, for an
+   array size at least.  It's necessary to write '\x00'==0 to get something
+   that's true only with -std.  */
+int osf4_cc_array ['\x00' == 0 ? 1 : -1];
+
+/* IBM C 6 for AIX is almost-ANSI by default, but it replaces macro parameters
+   inside strings and character constants.  */
+#define FOO(x) 'x'
+int xlc6_cc_array[FOO(a) == 'x' ? 1 : -1];
+
+int test (int i, double x);
+struct s1 {int (*f) (int a);};
+struct s2 {int (*f) (double a);};
+int pairnames (int, char **, FILE *(*)(struct buf *, struct stat *, int), int, int);
+int argc;
+char **argv;
+int
+main ()
+{
+return f (e, argv, 0) != argv[0]  ||  f (e, argv, 1) != argv[1];
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+for ac_arg in '' -qlanglvl=extc89 -qlanglvl=ansi -std \
+	-Ae "-Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "-Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__"
+do
+  CC="$ac_save_CC $ac_arg"
+  if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_c89=$ac_arg
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext
+  test "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" != "xno" && break
+done
+rm -f conftest.$ac_ext
+CC=$ac_save_CC
+
+fi
+# AC_CACHE_VAL
+case "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" in
+  x)
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: none needed" >&5
+$as_echo "none needed" >&6; } ;;
+  xno)
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: unsupported" >&5
+$as_echo "unsupported" >&6; } ;;
+  *)
+    CC="$CC $ac_cv_prog_cc_c89"
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" >&6; } ;;
+esac
+if test "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" != xno; then :
+
+fi
+
+ac_ext=c
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
+ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
+ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
+
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for existence of ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for existence of ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh... " >&6; }
+
+    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+        { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: loading" >&5
+$as_echo "loading" >&6; }
+	. "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh"
+    else
+        { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: could not find ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh" >&5
+$as_echo "could not find ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh" >&6; }
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TCL_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TCL_LIB_FILE=\"${TCL_LIB_FILE}\""
+    eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}\""
+
+    # If the TCL_BIN_DIR is the build directory (not the install directory),
+    # then set the common variable name to the value of the build variables.
+    # For example, the variable TCL_LIB_SPEC will be set to the value
+    # of TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC. An extension should make use of TCL_LIB_SPEC
+    # instead of TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC since it will work with both an
+    # installed and uninstalled version of Tcl.
+    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        TCL_LIB_SPEC="${TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC="${TCL_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TCL_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TCL_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH}"
+    elif test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+	# If Tcl was built as a framework, attempt to use the libraries
+	# from the framework at the given location so that linking works
+	# against Tcl.framework installed in an arbitrary location.
+	case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+	    *TCL_FRAMEWORK*)
+		if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    for i in "`cd "${TCL_BIN_DIR}"; pwd`" \
+			     "`cd "${TCL_BIN_DIR}"/../..; pwd`"; do
+			if test "`basename "$i"`" = "${TCL_LIB_FILE}.framework"; then
+			    TCL_LIB_SPEC="-F`dirname "$i" | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` -framework ${TCL_LIB_FILE}"
+			    break
+			fi
+		    done
+		fi
+		if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`echo "${TCL_BIN_DIR}"  | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+		    TCL_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+		fi
+		;;
+	esac
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TCL_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TCL_LIB_FLAG=\"${TCL_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TCL_LIB_SPEC=\"${TCL_LIB_SPEC}\""
+    eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC}\""
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking platform" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking platform... " >&6; }
+    hold_cc=$CC; CC="$TCL_CC"
+    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+	    #ifdef _WIN32
+		#error win32
+	    #endif
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+
+	    TEA_PLATFORM="unix"
+	    CYGPATH=echo
+
+else
+
+	    TEA_PLATFORM="windows"
+	    # Extract the first word of "cygpath", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cygpath; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CYGPATH"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH="$CYGPATH" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH="cygpath -m"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+  test -z "$ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH" && ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH="echo"
+fi
+fi
+CYGPATH=$ac_cv_prog_CYGPATH
+if test -n "$CYGPATH"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CYGPATH" >&5
+$as_echo "$CYGPATH" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+    CC=$hold_cc
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $TEA_PLATFORM" >&5
+$as_echo "$TEA_PLATFORM" >&6; }
+
+    # The BUILD_$pkg is to define the correct extern storage class
+    # handling when making this package
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define BUILD_${PACKAGE_NAME} /**/
+_ACEOF
+
+    # Do this here as we have fully defined TEA_PLATFORM now
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	EXEEXT=".exe"
+	CLEANFILES="$CLEANFILES *.lib *.dll *.pdb *.exp"
+    fi
+
+    # TEA specific:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Load the tkConfig.sh file if necessary (Tk extension)
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    #
+    # Ok, lets find the tk configuration
+    # First, look for one uninstalled.
+    # the alternative search directory is invoked by --with-tk
+    #
+
+    if test x"${no_tk}" = x ; then
+	# we reset no_tk in case something fails here
+	no_tk=true
+
+# Check whether --with-tk was given.
+if test "${with_tk+set}" = set; then :
+  withval=$with_tk; with_tkconfig="${withval}"
+fi
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Tk configuration" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for Tk configuration... " >&6; }
+	if ${ac_cv_c_tkconfig+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+
+	    # First check to see if --with-tkconfig was specified.
+	    if test x"${with_tkconfig}" != x ; then
+		case "${with_tkconfig}" in
+		    */tkConfig.sh )
+			if test -f "${with_tkconfig}"; then
+			    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: --with-tk argument should refer to directory containing tkConfig.sh, not to tkConfig.sh itself" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: --with-tk argument should refer to directory containing tkConfig.sh, not to tkConfig.sh itself" >&2;}
+			    with_tkconfig="`echo "${with_tkconfig}" | sed 's!/tkConfig\.sh$!!'`"
+			fi ;;
+		esac
+		if test -f "${with_tkconfig}/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd "${with_tkconfig}"; pwd)`"
+		else
+		    as_fn_error $? "${with_tkconfig} directory doesn't contain tkConfig.sh" "$LINENO" 5
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    # then check for a private Tk library
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			../tk \
+			`ls -dr ../tk[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tk[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tk[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../tk \
+			`ls -dr ../../tk[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tk[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tk[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../../tk \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tk[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tk[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tk[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # on Darwin, check in Framework installation locations
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin" -a x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ~/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Network/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /System/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Network/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/System/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/Tk.framework/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/Tk.framework; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few common install locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tk8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tk8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tk8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tk8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tk8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tk8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # TEA specific: on Windows, check in common installation locations
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+		-a x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d C:/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d C:/Progra~1/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few other private locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			${srcdir}/../tk \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tk[8-9].[0-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tk[8-9].[0-9] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tk[8-9].[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+fi
+
+
+	if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+	    TK_BIN_DIR="# no Tk configs found"
+	    as_fn_error $? "Can't find Tk configuration definitions. Use --with-tk to specify a directory containing tkConfig.sh" "$LINENO" 5
+	else
+	    no_tk=
+	    TK_BIN_DIR="${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}"
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: found ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh" >&5
+$as_echo "found ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh" >&6; }
+	fi
+    fi
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for existence of ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for existence of ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh... " >&6; }
+
+    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+        { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: loading" >&5
+$as_echo "loading" >&6; }
+	. "${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh"
+    else
+        { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: could not find ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh" >&5
+$as_echo "could not find ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh" >&6; }
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TK_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TK_LIB_FILE=\"${TK_LIB_FILE}\""
+    eval "TK_STUB_LIB_FILE=\"${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}\""
+
+    # If the TK_BIN_DIR is the build directory (not the install directory),
+    # then set the common variable name to the value of the build variables.
+    # For example, the variable TK_LIB_SPEC will be set to the value
+    # of TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC. An extension should make use of TK_LIB_SPEC
+    # instead of TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC since it will work with both an
+    # installed and uninstalled version of Tcl.
+    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        TK_LIB_SPEC="${TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="${TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH}"
+    elif test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+	# If Tk was built as a framework, attempt to use the libraries
+	# from the framework at the given location so that linking works
+	# against Tk.framework installed in an arbitrary location.
+	case ${TK_DEFS} in
+	    *TK_FRAMEWORK*)
+		if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    for i in "`cd "${TK_BIN_DIR}"; pwd`" \
+			     "`cd "${TK_BIN_DIR}"/../..; pwd`"; do
+			if test "`basename "$i"`" = "${TK_LIB_FILE}.framework"; then
+			    TK_LIB_SPEC="-F`dirname "$i" | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` -framework ${TK_LIB_FILE}"
+			    break
+			fi
+		    done
+		fi
+		if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L` echo "${TK_BIN_DIR}"  | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+		    TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+		fi
+		;;
+	esac
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TK_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TK_LIB_FLAG=\"${TK_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TK_LIB_SPEC=\"${TK_LIB_SPEC}\""
+    eval "TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG=\"${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC=\"${TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC}\""
+
+    # TEA specific: Ensure windowingsystem is defined
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "unix" ; then
+	case ${TK_DEFS} in
+	    *MAC_OSX_TK*)
+
+$as_echo "#define MAC_OSX_TK 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+		TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM="aqua"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM="x11"
+		;;
+	esac
+    elif test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM="win32"
+    fi
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+    # TEA specific:
+
+
+
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Handle the --prefix=... option by defaulting to what Tcl gave.
+# Must be called after TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG and before TEA_SETUP_COMPILER.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    if test "${prefix}" = "NONE"; then
+	prefix_default=yes
+	if test x"${TCL_PREFIX}" != x; then
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: --prefix defaulting to TCL_PREFIX ${TCL_PREFIX}" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: --prefix defaulting to TCL_PREFIX ${TCL_PREFIX}" >&6;}
+	    prefix=${TCL_PREFIX}
+	else
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: --prefix defaulting to /usr/local" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: --prefix defaulting to /usr/local" >&6;}
+	    prefix=/usr/local
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "${exec_prefix}" = "NONE" -a x"${prefix_default}" = x"yes" \
+	-o x"${exec_prefix_default}" = x"yes" ; then
+	if test x"${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}" != x; then
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: --exec-prefix defaulting to TCL_EXEC_PREFIX ${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: --exec-prefix defaulting to TCL_EXEC_PREFIX ${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}" >&6;}
+	    exec_prefix=${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}
+	else
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: --exec-prefix defaulting to ${prefix}" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: --exec-prefix defaulting to ${prefix}" >&6;}
+	    exec_prefix=$prefix
+	fi
+    fi
+
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Standard compiler checks.
+# This sets up CC by using the CC env var, or looks for gcc otherwise.
+# This also calls AC_PROG_CC and a few others to create the basic setup
+# necessary to compile executables.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    # Don't put any macros that use the compiler (e.g. AC_TRY_COMPILE)
+    # in this macro, they need to go into TEA_SETUP_COMPILER instead.
+
+    ac_ext=c
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
+ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
+ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
+if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}gcc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}gcc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="${ac_tool_prefix}gcc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_CC"; then
+  ac_ct_CC=$CC
+  # Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_ct_CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="gcc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_CC=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC
+if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_CC" = x; then
+    CC=""
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    CC=$ac_ct_CC
+  fi
+else
+  CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+fi
+
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+          if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+    # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}cc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}cc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="${ac_tool_prefix}cc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+  fi
+fi
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "cc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cc; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+  ac_prog_rejected=no
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    if test "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" = "/usr/ucb/cc"; then
+       ac_prog_rejected=yes
+       continue
+     fi
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="cc"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+if test $ac_prog_rejected = yes; then
+  # We found a bogon in the path, so make sure we never use it.
+  set dummy $ac_cv_prog_CC
+  shift
+  if test $# != 0; then
+    # We chose a different compiler from the bogus one.
+    # However, it has the same basename, so the bogon will be chosen
+    # first if we set CC to just the basename; use the full file name.
+    shift
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="$as_dir/$ac_word${1+' '}$@"
+  fi
+fi
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+  if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  for ac_prog in cl.exe
+  do
+    # Extract the first word of "$ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy $ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_CC="$ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+    test -n "$CC" && break
+  done
+fi
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+  ac_ct_CC=$CC
+  for ac_prog in cl.exe
+do
+  # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_ct_CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_prog"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_CC=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC
+if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_CC" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_CC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+  test -n "$ac_ct_CC" && break
+done
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_CC" = x; then
+    CC=""
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    CC=$ac_ct_CC
+  fi
+fi
+
+fi
+
+
+test -z "$CC" && { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error $? "no acceptable C compiler found in \$PATH
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+
+# Provide some information about the compiler.
+$as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for C compiler version" >&5
+set X $ac_compile
+ac_compiler=$2
+for ac_option in --version -v -V -qversion; do
+  { { ac_try="$ac_compiler $ac_option >&5"
+case "(($ac_try" in
+  *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;;
+  *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;;
+esac
+eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\""
+$as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5
+  (eval "$ac_compiler $ac_option >&5") 2>conftest.err
+  ac_status=$?
+  if test -s conftest.err; then
+    sed '10a\
+... rest of stderr output deleted ...
+         10q' conftest.err >conftest.er1
+    cat conftest.er1 >&5
+  fi
+  rm -f conftest.er1 conftest.err
+  $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5
+  test $ac_status = 0; }
+done
+
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether we are using the GNU C compiler" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether we are using the GNU C compiler... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+#ifndef __GNUC__
+       choke me
+#endif
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_compiler_gnu=yes
+else
+  ac_compiler_gnu=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu=$ac_compiler_gnu
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu" >&6; }
+if test $ac_compiler_gnu = yes; then
+  GCC=yes
+else
+  GCC=
+fi
+ac_test_CFLAGS=${CFLAGS+set}
+ac_save_CFLAGS=$CFLAGS
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether $CC accepts -g" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether $CC accepts -g... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_cc_g+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_save_c_werror_flag=$ac_c_werror_flag
+   ac_c_werror_flag=yes
+   ac_cv_prog_cc_g=no
+   CFLAGS="-g"
+   cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes
+else
+  CFLAGS=""
+      cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+
+else
+  ac_c_werror_flag=$ac_save_c_werror_flag
+	 CFLAGS="-g"
+	 cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+   ac_c_werror_flag=$ac_save_c_werror_flag
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_cc_g" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_cc_g" >&6; }
+if test "$ac_test_CFLAGS" = set; then
+  CFLAGS=$ac_save_CFLAGS
+elif test $ac_cv_prog_cc_g = yes; then
+  if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+    CFLAGS="-g -O2"
+  else
+    CFLAGS="-g"
+  fi
+else
+  if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+    CFLAGS="-O2"
+  else
+    CFLAGS=
+  fi
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $CC option to accept ISO C89" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $CC option to accept ISO C89... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_cc_c89+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_c89=no
+ac_save_CC=$CC
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+struct stat;
+/* Most of the following tests are stolen from RCS 5.7's src/conf.sh.  */
+struct buf { int x; };
+FILE * (*rcsopen) (struct buf *, struct stat *, int);
+static char *e (p, i)
+     char **p;
+     int i;
+{
+  return p[i];
+}
+static char *f (char * (*g) (char **, int), char **p, ...)
+{
+  char *s;
+  va_list v;
+  va_start (v,p);
+  s = g (p, va_arg (v,int));
+  va_end (v);
+  return s;
+}
+
+/* OSF 4.0 Compaq cc is some sort of almost-ANSI by default.  It has
+   function prototypes and stuff, but not '\xHH' hex character constants.
+   These don't provoke an error unfortunately, instead are silently treated
+   as 'x'.  The following induces an error, until -std is added to get
+   proper ANSI mode.  Curiously '\x00'!='x' always comes out true, for an
+   array size at least.  It's necessary to write '\x00'==0 to get something
+   that's true only with -std.  */
+int osf4_cc_array ['\x00' == 0 ? 1 : -1];
+
+/* IBM C 6 for AIX is almost-ANSI by default, but it replaces macro parameters
+   inside strings and character constants.  */
+#define FOO(x) 'x'
+int xlc6_cc_array[FOO(a) == 'x' ? 1 : -1];
+
+int test (int i, double x);
+struct s1 {int (*f) (int a);};
+struct s2 {int (*f) (double a);};
+int pairnames (int, char **, FILE *(*)(struct buf *, struct stat *, int), int, int);
+int argc;
+char **argv;
+int
+main ()
+{
+return f (e, argv, 0) != argv[0]  ||  f (e, argv, 1) != argv[1];
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+for ac_arg in '' -qlanglvl=extc89 -qlanglvl=ansi -std \
+	-Ae "-Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "-Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__"
+do
+  CC="$ac_save_CC $ac_arg"
+  if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_prog_cc_c89=$ac_arg
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext
+  test "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" != "xno" && break
+done
+rm -f conftest.$ac_ext
+CC=$ac_save_CC
+
+fi
+# AC_CACHE_VAL
+case "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" in
+  x)
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: none needed" >&5
+$as_echo "none needed" >&6; } ;;
+  xno)
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: unsupported" >&5
+$as_echo "unsupported" >&6; } ;;
+  *)
+    CC="$CC $ac_cv_prog_cc_c89"
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" >&6; } ;;
+esac
+if test "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" != xno; then :
+
+fi
+
+ac_ext=c
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
+ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
+ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
+
+    ac_ext=c
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
+ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
+ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking how to run the C preprocessor" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking how to run the C preprocessor... " >&6; }
+# On Suns, sometimes $CPP names a directory.
+if test -n "$CPP" && test -d "$CPP"; then
+  CPP=
+fi
+if test -z "$CPP"; then
+  if ${ac_cv_prog_CPP+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+      # Double quotes because CPP needs to be expanded
+    for CPP in "$CC -E" "$CC -E -traditional-cpp" "/lib/cpp"
+    do
+      ac_preproc_ok=false
+for ac_c_preproc_warn_flag in '' yes
+do
+  # Use a header file that comes with gcc, so configuring glibc
+  # with a fresh cross-compiler works.
+  # Prefer <limits.h> to <assert.h> if __STDC__ is defined, since
+  # <limits.h> exists even on freestanding compilers.
+  # On the NeXT, cc -E runs the code through the compiler's parser,
+  # not just through cpp. "Syntax error" is here to catch this case.
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#ifdef __STDC__
+# include <limits.h>
+#else
+# include <assert.h>
+#endif
+		     Syntax error
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_cpp "$LINENO"; then :
+
+else
+  # Broken: fails on valid input.
+continue
+fi
+rm -f conftest.err conftest.i conftest.$ac_ext
+
+  # OK, works on sane cases.  Now check whether nonexistent headers
+  # can be detected and how.
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <ac_nonexistent.h>
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_cpp "$LINENO"; then :
+  # Broken: success on invalid input.
+continue
+else
+  # Passes both tests.
+ac_preproc_ok=:
+break
+fi
+rm -f conftest.err conftest.i conftest.$ac_ext
+
+done
+# Because of `break', _AC_PREPROC_IFELSE's cleaning code was skipped.
+rm -f conftest.i conftest.err conftest.$ac_ext
+if $ac_preproc_ok; then :
+  break
+fi
+
+    done
+    ac_cv_prog_CPP=$CPP
+
+fi
+  CPP=$ac_cv_prog_CPP
+else
+  ac_cv_prog_CPP=$CPP
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CPP" >&5
+$as_echo "$CPP" >&6; }
+ac_preproc_ok=false
+for ac_c_preproc_warn_flag in '' yes
+do
+  # Use a header file that comes with gcc, so configuring glibc
+  # with a fresh cross-compiler works.
+  # Prefer <limits.h> to <assert.h> if __STDC__ is defined, since
+  # <limits.h> exists even on freestanding compilers.
+  # On the NeXT, cc -E runs the code through the compiler's parser,
+  # not just through cpp. "Syntax error" is here to catch this case.
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#ifdef __STDC__
+# include <limits.h>
+#else
+# include <assert.h>
+#endif
+		     Syntax error
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_cpp "$LINENO"; then :
+
+else
+  # Broken: fails on valid input.
+continue
+fi
+rm -f conftest.err conftest.i conftest.$ac_ext
+
+  # OK, works on sane cases.  Now check whether nonexistent headers
+  # can be detected and how.
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <ac_nonexistent.h>
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_cpp "$LINENO"; then :
+  # Broken: success on invalid input.
+continue
+else
+  # Passes both tests.
+ac_preproc_ok=:
+break
+fi
+rm -f conftest.err conftest.i conftest.$ac_ext
+
+done
+# Because of `break', _AC_PREPROC_IFELSE's cleaning code was skipped.
+rm -f conftest.i conftest.err conftest.$ac_ext
+if $ac_preproc_ok; then :
+
+else
+  { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
+as_fn_error $? "C preprocessor \"$CPP\" fails sanity check
+See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
+fi
+
+ac_ext=c
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
+ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
+ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
+
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Checks to see if the make program sets the $MAKE variable.
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \$(MAKE)" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \$(MAKE)... " >&6; }
+set x ${MAKE-make}
+ac_make=`$as_echo "$2" | sed 's/+/p/g; s/[^a-zA-Z0-9_]/_/g'`
+if eval \${ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat >conftest.make <<\_ACEOF
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+all:
+	@echo '@@@%%%=$(MAKE)=@@@%%%'
+_ACEOF
+# GNU make sometimes prints "make[1]: Entering ...", which would confuse us.
+case `${MAKE-make} -f conftest.make 2>/dev/null` in
+  *@@@%%%=?*=@@@%%%*)
+    eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=yes;;
+  *)
+    eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=no;;
+esac
+rm -f conftest.make
+fi
+if eval test \$ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set = yes; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5
+$as_echo "yes" >&6; }
+  SET_MAKE=
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+  SET_MAKE="MAKE=${MAKE-make}"
+fi
+
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Find ranlib
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}ranlib", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}ranlib; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_RANLIB+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$RANLIB"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="$RANLIB" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="${ac_tool_prefix}ranlib"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+RANLIB=$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB
+if test -n "$RANLIB"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $RANLIB" >&5
+$as_echo "$RANLIB" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB"; then
+  ac_ct_RANLIB=$RANLIB
+  # Extract the first word of "ranlib", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ranlib; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_RANLIB"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB="$ac_ct_RANLIB" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB="ranlib"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_RANLIB=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB
+if test -n "$ac_ct_RANLIB"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_RANLIB" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_RANLIB" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_RANLIB" = x; then
+    RANLIB=""
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    RANLIB=$ac_ct_RANLIB
+  fi
+else
+  RANLIB="$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB"
+fi
+
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Determines the correct binary file extension (.o, .obj, .exe etc.)
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+
+
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for grep that handles long lines and -e" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for grep that handles long lines and -e... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_path_GREP+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -z "$GREP"; then
+  ac_path_GREP_found=false
+  # Loop through the user's path and test for each of PROGNAME-LIST
+  as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_prog in grep ggrep; do
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+      ac_path_GREP="$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext"
+      as_fn_executable_p "$ac_path_GREP" || continue
+# Check for GNU ac_path_GREP and select it if it is found.
+  # Check for GNU $ac_path_GREP
+case `"$ac_path_GREP" --version 2>&1` in
+*GNU*)
+  ac_cv_path_GREP="$ac_path_GREP" ac_path_GREP_found=:;;
+*)
+  ac_count=0
+  $as_echo_n 0123456789 >"conftest.in"
+  while :
+  do
+    cat "conftest.in" "conftest.in" >"conftest.tmp"
+    mv "conftest.tmp" "conftest.in"
+    cp "conftest.in" "conftest.nl"
+    $as_echo 'GREP' >> "conftest.nl"
+    "$ac_path_GREP" -e 'GREP$' -e '-(cannot match)-' < "conftest.nl" >"conftest.out" 2>/dev/null || break
+    diff "conftest.out" "conftest.nl" >/dev/null 2>&1 || break
+    as_fn_arith $ac_count + 1 && ac_count=$as_val
+    if test $ac_count -gt ${ac_path_GREP_max-0}; then
+      # Best one so far, save it but keep looking for a better one
+      ac_cv_path_GREP="$ac_path_GREP"
+      ac_path_GREP_max=$ac_count
+    fi
+    # 10*(2^10) chars as input seems more than enough
+    test $ac_count -gt 10 && break
+  done
+  rm -f conftest.in conftest.tmp conftest.nl conftest.out;;
+esac
+
+      $ac_path_GREP_found && break 3
+    done
+  done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  if test -z "$ac_cv_path_GREP"; then
+    as_fn_error $? "no acceptable grep could be found in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin" "$LINENO" 5
+  fi
+else
+  ac_cv_path_GREP=$GREP
+fi
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_path_GREP" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_path_GREP" >&6; }
+ GREP="$ac_cv_path_GREP"
+
+
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for egrep" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for egrep... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_path_EGREP+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if echo a | $GREP -E '(a|b)' >/dev/null 2>&1
+   then ac_cv_path_EGREP="$GREP -E"
+   else
+     if test -z "$EGREP"; then
+  ac_path_EGREP_found=false
+  # Loop through the user's path and test for each of PROGNAME-LIST
+  as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_prog in egrep; do
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+      ac_path_EGREP="$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext"
+      as_fn_executable_p "$ac_path_EGREP" || continue
+# Check for GNU ac_path_EGREP and select it if it is found.
+  # Check for GNU $ac_path_EGREP
+case `"$ac_path_EGREP" --version 2>&1` in
+*GNU*)
+  ac_cv_path_EGREP="$ac_path_EGREP" ac_path_EGREP_found=:;;
+*)
+  ac_count=0
+  $as_echo_n 0123456789 >"conftest.in"
+  while :
+  do
+    cat "conftest.in" "conftest.in" >"conftest.tmp"
+    mv "conftest.tmp" "conftest.in"
+    cp "conftest.in" "conftest.nl"
+    $as_echo 'EGREP' >> "conftest.nl"
+    "$ac_path_EGREP" 'EGREP$' < "conftest.nl" >"conftest.out" 2>/dev/null || break
+    diff "conftest.out" "conftest.nl" >/dev/null 2>&1 || break
+    as_fn_arith $ac_count + 1 && ac_count=$as_val
+    if test $ac_count -gt ${ac_path_EGREP_max-0}; then
+      # Best one so far, save it but keep looking for a better one
+      ac_cv_path_EGREP="$ac_path_EGREP"
+      ac_path_EGREP_max=$ac_count
+    fi
+    # 10*(2^10) chars as input seems more than enough
+    test $ac_count -gt 10 && break
+  done
+  rm -f conftest.in conftest.tmp conftest.nl conftest.out;;
+esac
+
+      $ac_path_EGREP_found && break 3
+    done
+  done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  if test -z "$ac_cv_path_EGREP"; then
+    as_fn_error $? "no acceptable egrep could be found in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin" "$LINENO" 5
+  fi
+else
+  ac_cv_path_EGREP=$EGREP
+fi
+
+   fi
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_path_EGREP" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_path_EGREP" >&6; }
+ EGREP="$ac_cv_path_EGREP"
+
+
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for ANSI C header files" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for ANSI C header files... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_header_stdc+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <float.h>
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_header_stdc=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_header_stdc=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+
+if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then
+  # SunOS 4.x string.h does not declare mem*, contrary to ANSI.
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <string.h>
+
+_ACEOF
+if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 |
+  $EGREP "memchr" >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
+
+else
+  ac_cv_header_stdc=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+
+fi
+
+if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then
+  # ISC 2.0.2 stdlib.h does not declare free, contrary to ANSI.
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+_ACEOF
+if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 |
+  $EGREP "free" >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
+
+else
+  ac_cv_header_stdc=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+
+fi
+
+if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then
+  # /bin/cc in Irix-4.0.5 gets non-ANSI ctype macros unless using -ansi.
+  if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then :
+  :
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#if ((' ' & 0x0FF) == 0x020)
+# define ISLOWER(c) ('a' <= (c) && (c) <= 'z')
+# define TOUPPER(c) (ISLOWER(c) ? 'A' + ((c) - 'a') : (c))
+#else
+# define ISLOWER(c) \
+		   (('a' <= (c) && (c) <= 'i') \
+		     || ('j' <= (c) && (c) <= 'r') \
+		     || ('s' <= (c) && (c) <= 'z'))
+# define TOUPPER(c) (ISLOWER(c) ? ((c) | 0x40) : (c))
+#endif
+
+#define XOR(e, f) (((e) && !(f)) || (!(e) && (f)))
+int
+main ()
+{
+  int i;
+  for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
+    if (XOR (islower (i), ISLOWER (i))
+	|| toupper (i) != TOUPPER (i))
+      return 2;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_run "$LINENO"; then :
+
+else
+  ac_cv_header_stdc=no
+fi
+rm -f core *.core core.conftest.* gmon.out bb.out conftest$ac_exeext \
+  conftest.$ac_objext conftest.beam conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+fi
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_header_stdc" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_header_stdc" >&6; }
+if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then
+
+$as_echo "#define STDC_HEADERS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+fi
+
+# On IRIX 5.3, sys/types and inttypes.h are conflicting.
+for ac_header in sys/types.h sys/stat.h stdlib.h string.h memory.h strings.h \
+		  inttypes.h stdint.h unistd.h
+do :
+  as_ac_Header=`$as_echo "ac_cv_header_$ac_header" | $as_tr_sh`
+ac_fn_c_check_header_compile "$LINENO" "$ac_header" "$as_ac_Header" "$ac_includes_default
+"
+if eval test \"x\$"$as_ac_Header"\" = x"yes"; then :
+  cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define `$as_echo "HAVE_$ac_header" | $as_tr_cpp` 1
+_ACEOF
+
+fi
+
+done
+
+
+
+    # Any macros that use the compiler (e.g. AC_TRY_COMPILE) have to go here.
+
+
+    #------------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # If we're using GCC, see if the compiler understands -pipe. If so, use it.
+    # It makes compiling go faster.  (This is only a performance feature.)
+    #------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    if test -z "$no_pipe" -a -n "$GCC"; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if the compiler understands -pipe" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if the compiler understands -pipe... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_cc_pipe+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS; CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pipe"
+	    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_cc_pipe=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_cc_pipe=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+	    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_cc_pipe" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_cc_pipe" >&6; }
+	if test $tcl_cv_cc_pipe = yes; then
+	    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pipe"
+	fi
+    fi
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Common compiler flag setup
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+     { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether byte ordering is bigendian" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking whether byte ordering is bigendian... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_c_bigendian+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_cv_c_bigendian=unknown
+    # See if we're dealing with a universal compiler.
+    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#ifndef __APPLE_CC__
+	       not a universal capable compiler
+	     #endif
+	     typedef int dummy;
+
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+
+	# Check for potential -arch flags.  It is not universal unless
+	# there are at least two -arch flags with different values.
+	ac_arch=
+	ac_prev=
+	for ac_word in $CC $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS; do
+	 if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
+	   case $ac_word in
+	     i?86 | x86_64 | ppc | ppc64)
+	       if test -z "$ac_arch" || test "$ac_arch" = "$ac_word"; then
+		 ac_arch=$ac_word
+	       else
+		 ac_cv_c_bigendian=universal
+		 break
+	       fi
+	       ;;
+	   esac
+	   ac_prev=
+	 elif test "x$ac_word" = "x-arch"; then
+	   ac_prev=arch
+	 fi
+       done
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+    if test $ac_cv_c_bigendian = unknown; then
+      # See if sys/param.h defines the BYTE_ORDER macro.
+      cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <sys/types.h>
+	     #include <sys/param.h>
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+#if ! (defined BYTE_ORDER && defined BIG_ENDIAN \
+		     && defined LITTLE_ENDIAN && BYTE_ORDER && BIG_ENDIAN \
+		     && LITTLE_ENDIAN)
+	      bogus endian macros
+	     #endif
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  # It does; now see whether it defined to BIG_ENDIAN or not.
+	 cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <sys/types.h>
+		#include <sys/param.h>
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+#if BYTE_ORDER != BIG_ENDIAN
+		 not big endian
+		#endif
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_c_bigendian=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_c_bigendian=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+    fi
+    if test $ac_cv_c_bigendian = unknown; then
+      # See if <limits.h> defines _LITTLE_ENDIAN or _BIG_ENDIAN (e.g., Solaris).
+      cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <limits.h>
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+#if ! (defined _LITTLE_ENDIAN || defined _BIG_ENDIAN)
+	      bogus endian macros
+	     #endif
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  # It does; now see whether it defined to _BIG_ENDIAN or not.
+	 cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <limits.h>
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+#ifndef _BIG_ENDIAN
+		 not big endian
+		#endif
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_c_bigendian=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_c_bigendian=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+    fi
+    if test $ac_cv_c_bigendian = unknown; then
+      # Compile a test program.
+      if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then :
+  # Try to guess by grepping values from an object file.
+	 cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+short int ascii_mm[] =
+		  { 0x4249, 0x4765, 0x6E44, 0x6961, 0x6E53, 0x7953, 0 };
+		short int ascii_ii[] =
+		  { 0x694C, 0x5454, 0x656C, 0x6E45, 0x6944, 0x6E61, 0 };
+		int use_ascii (int i) {
+		  return ascii_mm[i] + ascii_ii[i];
+		}
+		short int ebcdic_ii[] =
+		  { 0x89D3, 0xE3E3, 0x8593, 0x95C5, 0x89C4, 0x9581, 0 };
+		short int ebcdic_mm[] =
+		  { 0xC2C9, 0xC785, 0x95C4, 0x8981, 0x95E2, 0xA8E2, 0 };
+		int use_ebcdic (int i) {
+		  return ebcdic_mm[i] + ebcdic_ii[i];
+		}
+		extern int foo;
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+return use_ascii (foo) == use_ebcdic (foo);
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  if grep BIGenDianSyS conftest.$ac_objext >/dev/null; then
+	      ac_cv_c_bigendian=yes
+	    fi
+	    if grep LiTTleEnDian conftest.$ac_objext >/dev/null ; then
+	      if test "$ac_cv_c_bigendian" = unknown; then
+		ac_cv_c_bigendian=no
+	      else
+		# finding both strings is unlikely to happen, but who knows?
+		ac_cv_c_bigendian=unknown
+	      fi
+	    fi
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+$ac_includes_default
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+	     /* Are we little or big endian?  From Harbison&Steele.  */
+	     union
+	     {
+	       long int l;
+	       char c[sizeof (long int)];
+	     } u;
+	     u.l = 1;
+	     return u.c[sizeof (long int) - 1] == 1;
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_run "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_c_bigendian=no
+else
+  ac_cv_c_bigendian=yes
+fi
+rm -f core *.core core.conftest.* gmon.out bb.out conftest$ac_exeext \
+  conftest.$ac_objext conftest.beam conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+    fi
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_c_bigendian" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_c_bigendian" >&6; }
+ case $ac_cv_c_bigendian in #(
+   yes)
+     $as_echo "#define WORDS_BIGENDIAN 1" >>confdefs.h
+;; #(
+   no)
+      ;; #(
+   universal)
+
+$as_echo "#define AC_APPLE_UNIVERSAL_BUILD 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+     ;; #(
+   *)
+     as_fn_error $? "unknown endianness
+ presetting ac_cv_c_bigendian=no (or yes) will help" "$LINENO" 5 ;;
+ esac
+
+
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# __CHANGE__
+# Specify the C source files to compile in TEA_ADD_SOURCES,
+# public headers that need to be installed in TEA_ADD_HEADERS,
+# stub library C source files to compile in TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES,
+# and runtime Tcl library files in TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES.
+# This defines PKG(_STUB)_SOURCES, PKG(_STUB)_OBJECTS, PKG_HEADERS
+# and PKG_TCL_SOURCES.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    vars="
+tkbltChain.C
+tkbltConfig.C
+tkbltGrAxis.C
+tkbltGrAxisOp.C
+tkbltGrAxisOption.C
+tkbltGrBind.C
+tkbltGrElemOp.C
+tkbltGrElemOption.C
+tkbltGrElem.C
+tkbltGrElemBar.C
+tkbltGrElemLine.C
+tkbltGrElemLineSpline.C
+tkbltGrHairs.C
+tkbltGrHairsOp.C
+tkbltGrLegd.C
+tkbltGrLegdOp.C
+tkbltGrMarkerOp.C
+tkbltGrMarkerOption.C
+tkbltGrMarker.C
+tkbltGrMarkerLine.C
+tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.C
+tkbltGrMarkerText.C
+tkbltGrMisc.C
+tkbltGrPenOp.C
+tkbltGrPenOption.C
+tkbltGrPen.C
+tkbltGrPenBar.C
+tkbltGrPenLine.C
+tkbltGrPostscript.C
+tkbltGrPostscriptOp.C
+tkbltGrPSOutput.C
+tkbltGrText.C
+tkbltGrXAxisOp.C
+tkbltGraph.C
+tkbltGraphBar.C
+tkbltGraphLine.C
+tkbltGraphOp.C
+tkbltGraphSup.C
+tkbltInt.C
+tkbltNsUtil.C
+tkbltParse.C
+tkbltOp.C
+tkbltStubInit.c
+tkbltStubLib.C
+tkbltSwitch.C
+tkbltVecCmd.C
+tkbltVecOp.C
+tkbltVecMath.C
+tkbltVector.C
+"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	case $i in
+	    \$*)
+		# allow $-var names
+		PKG_SOURCES="$PKG_SOURCES $i"
+		PKG_OBJECTS="$PKG_OBJECTS $i"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		# check for existence - allows for generic/win/unix VPATH
+		# To add more dirs here (like 'src'), you have to update VPATH
+		# in Makefile.in as well
+		if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/generic/$i" \
+		    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/win/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/unix/$i" \
+		    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/macosx/$i" \
+		    ; then
+		    as_fn_error $? "could not find source file '$i'" "$LINENO" 5
+		fi
+		PKG_SOURCES="$PKG_SOURCES $i"
+		# this assumes it is in a VPATH dir
+#		i=`basename $i`
+		# handle user calling this before or after TEA_SETUP_COMPILER
+		if test x"${OBJEXT}" != x ; then
+		    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$//'`.${OBJEXT}"
+		else
+		    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$//'`.\${OBJEXT}"
+		fi
+		PKG_OBJECTS="$PKG_OBJECTS $j"
+		;;
+	esac
+    done
+
+
+
+
+    vars="
+generic/tkbltVector.h
+generic/tkbltDecls.h
+"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	# check for existence, be strict because it is installed
+	if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" ; then
+	    as_fn_error $? "could not find header file '${srcdir}/$i'" "$LINENO" 5
+	fi
+	PKG_HEADERS="$PKG_HEADERS $i"
+    done
+
+
+
+    vars=""
+    for i in $vars; do
+	PKG_INCLUDES="$PKG_INCLUDES $i"
+    done
+
+
+
+    vars="-lstdc++"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" = "yes" ; then
+	    # Convert foo.lib to -lfoo for GCC.  No-op if not *.lib
+	    i=`echo "$i" | sed -e 's/^\([^-].*\)\.lib$/-l\1/i'`
+	fi
+	PKG_LIBS="$PKG_LIBS $i"
+    done
+
+
+if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" != "yes"; then
+
+    PKG_CFLAGS="$PKG_CFLAGS -TP -EHsc -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS -D_USE_MATH_DEFINES"
+
+
+fi
+
+    vars="tkbltStubLib.C"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	# check for existence - allows for generic/win/unix VPATH
+	if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/generic/$i" \
+	    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/win/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/unix/$i" \
+	    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/macosx/$i" \
+	    ; then
+	    as_fn_error $? "could not find stub source file '$i'" "$LINENO" 5
+	fi
+	PKG_STUB_SOURCES="$PKG_STUB_SOURCES $i"
+	# this assumes it is in a VPATH dir
+	i=`basename $i`
+	# handle user calling this before or after TEA_SETUP_COMPILER
+	if test x"${OBJEXT}" != x ; then
+	    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$//'`.${OBJEXT}"
+	else
+	    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$//'`.\${OBJEXT}"
+	fi
+	PKG_STUB_OBJECTS="$PKG_STUB_OBJECTS $j"
+    done
+
+
+
+
+    vars="library/graph.tcl"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	# check for existence, be strict because it is installed
+	if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" ; then
+	    as_fn_error $? "could not find tcl source file '${srcdir}/$i'" "$LINENO" 5
+	fi
+	PKG_TCL_SOURCES="$PKG_TCL_SOURCES $i"
+    done
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# __CHANGE__
+#
+# You can add more files to clean if your extension creates any extra
+# files by extending CLEANFILES.
+# Add pkgIndex.tcl if it is generated in the Makefile instead of ./configure
+# and change Makefile.in to move it from CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES to BINARIES var.
+#
+# A few miscellaneous platform-specific items:
+# TEA_ADD_* any platform specific compiler/build info here.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#CLEANFILES="$CLEANFILES pkgIndex.tcl"
+if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+    # Ensure no empty if clauses
+    :
+    #TEA_ADD_SOURCES([win/winFile.c])
+    #TEA_ADD_INCLUDES([-I\"$(${CYGPATH} ${srcdir}/win)\"])
+else
+    # Ensure no empty else clauses
+    :
+    #TEA_ADD_SOURCES([unix/unixFile.c])
+    #TEA_ADD_LIBS([-lsuperfly])
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# __CHANGE__
+# Choose which headers you need.  Extension authors should try very
+# hard to only rely on the Tcl public header files.  Internal headers
+# contain private data structures and are subject to change without
+# notice.
+# This MUST be called after TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG / TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Tcl public headers" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for Tcl public headers... " >&6; }
+
+
+# Check whether --with-tclinclude was given.
+if test "${with_tclinclude+set}" = set; then :
+  withval=$with_tclinclude; with_tclinclude=${withval}
+fi
+
+
+    if ${ac_cv_c_tclh+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	# Use the value from --with-tclinclude, if it was given
+
+	if test x"${with_tclinclude}" != x ; then
+	    if test -f "${with_tclinclude}/tcl.h" ; then
+		ac_cv_c_tclh=${with_tclinclude}
+	    else
+		as_fn_error $? "${with_tclinclude} directory does not contain tcl.h" "$LINENO" 5
+	    fi
+	else
+	    list=""
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+		# If Tcl was built as a framework, attempt to use
+		# the framework's Headers directory
+		case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+		    *TCL_FRAMEWORK*)
+			list="`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Headers 2>/dev/null`"
+			;;
+		esac
+	    fi
+
+	    # Look in the source dir only if Tcl is not installed,
+	    # and in that situation, look there before installed locations.
+	    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+		list="$list `ls -d ${TCL_SRC_DIR}/generic 2>/dev/null`"
+	    fi
+
+	    # Check order: pkg --prefix location, Tcl's --prefix location,
+	    # relative to directory of tclConfig.sh.
+
+	    eval "temp_includedir=${includedir}"
+	    list="$list \
+		`ls -d ${temp_includedir}        2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_PREFIX}/include     2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../include 2>/dev/null`"
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" -o "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		list="$list /usr/local/include /usr/include"
+		if test x"${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC}" != x ; then
+		    d=`echo "${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/^-I//'`
+		    list="$list `ls -d ${d} 2>/dev/null`"
+		fi
+	    fi
+	    for i in $list ; do
+		if test -f "$i/tcl.h" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tclh=$i
+		    break
+		fi
+	    done
+	fi
+
+fi
+
+
+    # Print a message based on how we determined the include path
+
+    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclh}" = x ; then
+	as_fn_error $? "tcl.h not found.  Please specify its location with --with-tclinclude" "$LINENO" 5
+    else
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${ac_cv_c_tclh}" >&5
+$as_echo "${ac_cv_c_tclh}" >&6; }
+    fi
+
+    # Convert to a native path and substitute into the output files.
+
+    INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${ac_cv_c_tclh}`
+
+    TCL_INCLUDES=-I\"${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+
+
+
+    # Allow for --with-tclinclude to take effect and define ${ac_cv_c_tclh}
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Tcl private include files" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for Tcl private include files... " >&6; }
+
+    TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${TCL_SRC_DIR}`
+    TCL_TOP_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+    # Check to see if tcl<Plat>Port.h isn't already with the public headers
+    # Don't look for tclInt.h because that resides with tcl.h in the core
+    # sources, but the <plat>Port headers are in a different directory
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tclh}/tclWinPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    elif test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "unix" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tclh}/tclUnixPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    else
+	TCL_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/generic\"
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+	    TCL_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/win\"
+	else
+	    TCL_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/unix\"
+	fi
+	# Overwrite the previous TCL_INCLUDES as this should capture both
+	# public and private headers in the same set.
+	# We want to ensure these are substituted so as not to require
+	# any *_NATIVE vars be defined in the Makefile
+	TCL_INCLUDES="-I${TCL_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE} -I${TCL_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE}"
+	if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+            # If Tcl was built as a framework, attempt to use
+            # the framework's Headers and PrivateHeaders directories
+            case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+	    	*TCL_FRAMEWORK*)
+		    if test -d "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Headers" -a \
+			    -d "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders"; then
+			TCL_INCLUDES="-I\"${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Headers\" -I\"${TCL_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders\" ${TCL_INCLUDES}"
+		    else
+			TCL_INCLUDES="${TCL_INCLUDES} ${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC} `echo "${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/Headers/PrivateHeaders/'`"
+		    fi
+	            ;;
+	    esac
+	    result="Using ${TCL_INCLUDES}"
+	else
+	    if test ! -f "${TCL_SRC_DIR}/generic/tclInt.h" ; then
+		as_fn_error $? "Cannot find private header tclInt.h in ${TCL_SRC_DIR}" "$LINENO" 5
+	    fi
+	    result="Using srcdir found in tclConfig.sh: ${TCL_SRC_DIR}"
+	fi
+    fi
+
+
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${result}" >&5
+$as_echo "${result}" >&6; }
+
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Tk public headers" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for Tk public headers... " >&6; }
+
+
+# Check whether --with-tkinclude was given.
+if test "${with_tkinclude+set}" = set; then :
+  withval=$with_tkinclude; with_tkinclude=${withval}
+fi
+
+
+    if ${ac_cv_c_tkh+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	# Use the value from --with-tkinclude, if it was given
+
+	if test x"${with_tkinclude}" != x ; then
+	    if test -f "${with_tkinclude}/tk.h" ; then
+		ac_cv_c_tkh=${with_tkinclude}
+	    else
+		as_fn_error $? "${with_tkinclude} directory does not contain tk.h" "$LINENO" 5
+	    fi
+	else
+	    list=""
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+		# If Tk was built as a framework, attempt to use
+		# the framework's Headers directory.
+		case ${TK_DEFS} in
+		    *TK_FRAMEWORK*)
+			list="`ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/Headers 2>/dev/null`"
+			;;
+		esac
+	    fi
+
+	    # Look in the source dir only if Tk is not installed,
+	    # and in that situation, look there before installed locations.
+	    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+		list="$list `ls -d ${TK_SRC_DIR}/generic 2>/dev/null`"
+	    fi
+
+	    # Check order: pkg --prefix location, Tk's --prefix location,
+	    # relative to directory of tkConfig.sh, Tcl's --prefix location,
+	    # relative to directory of tclConfig.sh.
+
+	    eval "temp_includedir=${includedir}"
+	    list="$list \
+		`ls -d ${temp_includedir}        2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TK_PREFIX}/include      2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/../include  2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_PREFIX}/include     2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../include 2>/dev/null`"
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" -o "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		list="$list /usr/local/include /usr/include"
+		if test x"${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC}" != x ; then
+		    d=`echo "${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/^-I//'`
+		    list="$list `ls -d ${d} 2>/dev/null`"
+		fi
+	    fi
+	    for i in $list ; do
+		if test -f "$i/tk.h" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tkh=$i
+		    break
+		fi
+	    done
+	fi
+
+fi
+
+
+    # Print a message based on how we determined the include path
+
+    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkh}" = x ; then
+	as_fn_error $? "tk.h not found.  Please specify its location with --with-tkinclude" "$LINENO" 5
+    else
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${ac_cv_c_tkh}" >&5
+$as_echo "${ac_cv_c_tkh}" >&6; }
+    fi
+
+    # Convert to a native path and substitute into the output files.
+
+    INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${ac_cv_c_tkh}`
+
+    TK_INCLUDES=-I\"${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+
+
+    if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" != "x11"; then
+	# On Windows and Aqua, we need the X compat headers
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for X11 header files" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for X11 header files... " >&6; }
+	if test ! -r "${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}/X11/Xlib.h"; then
+	    INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE="`${CYGPATH} ${TK_SRC_DIR}/xlib`"
+	    TK_XINCLUDES=-I\"${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+	fi
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}" >&5
+$as_echo "${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}" >&6; }
+    fi
+
+
+    # Allow for --with-tkinclude to take effect and define ${ac_cv_c_tkh}
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Tk private include files" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for Tk private include files... " >&6; }
+
+    TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${TK_SRC_DIR}`
+    TK_TOP_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+    # Check to see if tk<Plat>Port.h isn't already with the public headers
+    # Don't look for tkInt.h because that resides with tk.h in the core
+    # sources, but the <plat>Port headers are in a different directory
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tkh}/tkWinPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    elif test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "unix" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tkh}/tkUnixPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    else
+	TK_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/generic\"
+	TK_XLIB_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/xlib\"
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+	    TK_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/win\"
+	else
+	    TK_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/unix\"
+	fi
+	# Overwrite the previous TK_INCLUDES as this should capture both
+	# public and private headers in the same set.
+	# We want to ensure these are substituted so as not to require
+	# any *_NATIVE vars be defined in the Makefile
+	TK_INCLUDES="-I${TK_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE} -I${TK_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE}"
+	# Detect and add ttk subdir
+	if test -d "${TK_SRC_DIR}/generic/ttk"; then
+	   TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} -I\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/generic/ttk\""
+	fi
+	if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" != "x11"; then
+	   TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} -I\"${TK_XLIB_DIR_NATIVE}\""
+	fi
+	if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = "aqua"; then
+	   TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} -I\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/macosx\""
+	fi
+	if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+	    # If Tk was built as a framework, attempt to use
+	    # the framework's Headers and PrivateHeaders directories
+	    case ${TK_DEFS} in
+		*TK_FRAMEWORK*)
+			if test -d "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Headers" -a \
+				-d "${TK_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders"; then
+			    TK_INCLUDES="-I\"${TK_BIN_DIR}/Headers\" -I\"${TK_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders\" ${TK_INCLUDES}"
+			else
+			    TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} ${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC} `echo "${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/Headers/PrivateHeaders/'`"
+			fi
+			;;
+	    esac
+	    result="Using ${TK_INCLUDES}"
+	else
+	    if test ! -f "${TK_SRC_DIR}/generic/tkInt.h" ; then
+	       as_fn_error $? "Cannot find private header tkInt.h in ${TK_SRC_DIR}" "$LINENO" 5
+	    fi
+	    result="Using srcdir found in tkConfig.sh: ${TK_SRC_DIR}"
+	fi
+    fi
+
+
+
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${result}" >&5
+$as_echo "${result}" >&6; }
+
+
+    if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = "x11" ; then
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for X" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for X... " >&6; }
+
+
+# Check whether --with-x was given.
+if test "${with_x+set}" = set; then :
+  withval=$with_x;
+fi
+
+# $have_x is `yes', `no', `disabled', or empty when we do not yet know.
+if test "x$with_x" = xno; then
+  # The user explicitly disabled X.
+  have_x=disabled
+else
+  case $x_includes,$x_libraries in #(
+    *\'*) as_fn_error $? "cannot use X directory names containing '" "$LINENO" 5;; #(
+    *,NONE | NONE,*) if ${ac_cv_have_x+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  # One or both of the vars are not set, and there is no cached value.
+ac_x_includes=no ac_x_libraries=no
+rm -f -r conftest.dir
+if mkdir conftest.dir; then
+  cd conftest.dir
+  cat >Imakefile <<'_ACEOF'
+incroot:
+	@echo incroot='${INCROOT}'
+usrlibdir:
+	@echo usrlibdir='${USRLIBDIR}'
+libdir:
+	@echo libdir='${LIBDIR}'
+_ACEOF
+  if (export CC; ${XMKMF-xmkmf}) >/dev/null 2>/dev/null && test -f Makefile; then
+    # GNU make sometimes prints "make[1]: Entering ...", which would confuse us.
+    for ac_var in incroot usrlibdir libdir; do
+      eval "ac_im_$ac_var=\`\${MAKE-make} $ac_var 2>/dev/null | sed -n 's/^$ac_var=//p'\`"
+    done
+    # Open Windows xmkmf reportedly sets LIBDIR instead of USRLIBDIR.
+    for ac_extension in a so sl dylib la dll; do
+      if test ! -f "$ac_im_usrlibdir/libX11.$ac_extension" &&
+	 test -f "$ac_im_libdir/libX11.$ac_extension"; then
+	ac_im_usrlibdir=$ac_im_libdir; break
+      fi
+    done
+    # Screen out bogus values from the imake configuration.  They are
+    # bogus both because they are the default anyway, and because
+    # using them would break gcc on systems where it needs fixed includes.
+    case $ac_im_incroot in
+	/usr/include) ac_x_includes= ;;
+	*) test -f "$ac_im_incroot/X11/Xos.h" && ac_x_includes=$ac_im_incroot;;
+    esac
+    case $ac_im_usrlibdir in
+	/usr/lib | /usr/lib64 | /lib | /lib64) ;;
+	*) test -d "$ac_im_usrlibdir" && ac_x_libraries=$ac_im_usrlibdir ;;
+    esac
+  fi
+  cd ..
+  rm -f -r conftest.dir
+fi
+
+# Standard set of common directories for X headers.
+# Check X11 before X11Rn because it is often a symlink to the current release.
+ac_x_header_dirs='
+/usr/X11/include
+/usr/X11R7/include
+/usr/X11R6/include
+/usr/X11R5/include
+/usr/X11R4/include
+
+/usr/include/X11
+/usr/include/X11R7
+/usr/include/X11R6
+/usr/include/X11R5
+/usr/include/X11R4
+
+/usr/local/X11/include
+/usr/local/X11R7/include
+/usr/local/X11R6/include
+/usr/local/X11R5/include
+/usr/local/X11R4/include
+
+/usr/local/include/X11
+/usr/local/include/X11R7
+/usr/local/include/X11R6
+/usr/local/include/X11R5
+/usr/local/include/X11R4
+
+/usr/X386/include
+/usr/x386/include
+/usr/XFree86/include/X11
+
+/usr/include
+/usr/local/include
+/usr/unsupported/include
+/usr/athena/include
+/usr/local/x11r5/include
+/usr/lpp/Xamples/include
+
+/usr/openwin/include
+/usr/openwin/share/include'
+
+if test "$ac_x_includes" = no; then
+  # Guess where to find include files, by looking for Xlib.h.
+  # First, try using that file with no special directory specified.
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_cpp "$LINENO"; then :
+  # We can compile using X headers with no special include directory.
+ac_x_includes=
+else
+  for ac_dir in $ac_x_header_dirs; do
+  if test -r "$ac_dir/X11/Xlib.h"; then
+    ac_x_includes=$ac_dir
+    break
+  fi
+done
+fi
+rm -f conftest.err conftest.i conftest.$ac_ext
+fi # $ac_x_includes = no
+
+if test "$ac_x_libraries" = no; then
+  # Check for the libraries.
+  # See if we find them without any special options.
+  # Don't add to $LIBS permanently.
+  ac_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+  LIBS="-lX11 $LIBS"
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+XrmInitialize ()
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  LIBS=$ac_save_LIBS
+# We can link X programs with no special library path.
+ac_x_libraries=
+else
+  LIBS=$ac_save_LIBS
+for ac_dir in `$as_echo "$ac_x_includes $ac_x_header_dirs" | sed s/include/lib/g`
+do
+  # Don't even attempt the hair of trying to link an X program!
+  for ac_extension in a so sl dylib la dll; do
+    if test -r "$ac_dir/libX11.$ac_extension"; then
+      ac_x_libraries=$ac_dir
+      break 2
+    fi
+  done
+done
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi # $ac_x_libraries = no
+
+case $ac_x_includes,$ac_x_libraries in #(
+  no,* | *,no | *\'*)
+    # Didn't find X, or a directory has "'" in its name.
+    ac_cv_have_x="have_x=no";; #(
+  *)
+    # Record where we found X for the cache.
+    ac_cv_have_x="have_x=yes\
+	ac_x_includes='$ac_x_includes'\
+	ac_x_libraries='$ac_x_libraries'"
+esac
+fi
+;; #(
+    *) have_x=yes;;
+  esac
+  eval "$ac_cv_have_x"
+fi # $with_x != no
+
+if test "$have_x" != yes; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $have_x" >&5
+$as_echo "$have_x" >&6; }
+  no_x=yes
+else
+  # If each of the values was on the command line, it overrides each guess.
+  test "x$x_includes" = xNONE && x_includes=$ac_x_includes
+  test "x$x_libraries" = xNONE && x_libraries=$ac_x_libraries
+  # Update the cache value to reflect the command line values.
+  ac_cv_have_x="have_x=yes\
+	ac_x_includes='$x_includes'\
+	ac_x_libraries='$x_libraries'"
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: libraries $x_libraries, headers $x_includes" >&5
+$as_echo "libraries $x_libraries, headers $x_includes" >&6; }
+fi
+
+    not_really_there=""
+    if test "$no_x" = ""; then
+	if test "$x_includes" = ""; then
+	    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_cpp "$LINENO"; then :
+
+else
+  not_really_there="yes"
+fi
+rm -f conftest.err conftest.i conftest.$ac_ext
+	else
+	    if test ! -r $x_includes/X11/Xlib.h; then
+		not_really_there="yes"
+	    fi
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "$no_x" = "yes" -o "$not_really_there" = "yes"; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for X11 header files" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for X11 header files... " >&6; }
+	found_xincludes="no"
+	cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_cpp "$LINENO"; then :
+  found_xincludes="yes"
+else
+  found_xincludes="no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest.err conftest.i conftest.$ac_ext
+	if test "$found_xincludes" = "no"; then
+	    dirs="/usr/unsupported/include /usr/local/include /usr/X386/include /usr/X11R6/include /usr/X11R5/include /usr/include/X11R5 /usr/include/X11R4 /usr/openwin/include /usr/X11/include /usr/sww/include"
+	    for i in $dirs ; do
+		if test -r $i/X11/Xlib.h; then
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $i" >&5
+$as_echo "$i" >&6; }
+		    XINCLUDES=" -I$i"
+		    found_xincludes="yes"
+		    break
+		fi
+	    done
+	fi
+    else
+	if test "$x_includes" != ""; then
+	    XINCLUDES="-I$x_includes"
+	    found_xincludes="yes"
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "$found_xincludes" = "no"; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: couldn't find any!" >&5
+$as_echo "couldn't find any!" >&6; }
+    fi
+
+    if test "$no_x" = yes; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for X11 libraries" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for X11 libraries... " >&6; }
+	XLIBSW=nope
+	dirs="/usr/unsupported/lib /usr/local/lib /usr/X386/lib /usr/X11R6/lib /usr/X11R5/lib /usr/lib/X11R5 /usr/lib/X11R4 /usr/openwin/lib /usr/X11/lib /usr/sww/X11/lib"
+	for i in $dirs ; do
+	    if test -r $i/libX11.a -o -r $i/libX11.so -o -r $i/libX11.sl -o -r $i/libX11.dylib; then
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $i" >&5
+$as_echo "$i" >&6; }
+		XLIBSW="-L$i -lX11"
+		x_libraries="$i"
+		break
+	    fi
+	done
+    else
+	if test "$x_libraries" = ""; then
+	    XLIBSW=-lX11
+	else
+	    XLIBSW="-L$x_libraries -lX11"
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "$XLIBSW" = nope ; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for XCreateWindow in -lXwindow" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for XCreateWindow in -lXwindow... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_Xwindow_XCreateWindow+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lXwindow  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char XCreateWindow ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return XCreateWindow ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_Xwindow_XCreateWindow=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_Xwindow_XCreateWindow=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_Xwindow_XCreateWindow" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_Xwindow_XCreateWindow" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_Xwindow_XCreateWindow" = xyes; then :
+  XLIBSW=-lXwindow
+fi
+
+    fi
+    if test "$XLIBSW" = nope ; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: could not find any!  Using -lX11." >&5
+$as_echo "could not find any!  Using -lX11." >&6; }
+	XLIBSW=-lX11
+    fi
+    # TEA specific:
+    if test x"${XLIBSW}" != x ; then
+	PKG_LIBS="${PKG_LIBS} ${XLIBSW}"
+    fi
+
+    fi
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Check whether --enable-threads or --disable-threads was given.
+# This auto-enables if Tcl was compiled threaded.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    # Check whether --enable-threads was given.
+if test "${enable_threads+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_threads; tcl_ok=$enableval
+else
+  tcl_ok=yes
+fi
+
+
+    if test "${enable_threads+set}" = set; then
+	enableval="$enable_threads"
+	tcl_ok=$enableval
+    else
+	tcl_ok=yes
+    fi
+
+    if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes" -o "${TCL_THREADS}" = 1; then
+	TCL_THREADS=1
+
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" ; then
+	    # We are always OK on Windows, so check what this platform wants:
+
+	    # USE_THREAD_ALLOC tells us to try the special thread-based
+	    # allocator that significantly reduces lock contention
+
+$as_echo "#define USE_THREAD_ALLOC 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+$as_echo "#define _REENTRANT 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "SunOS" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define _POSIX_PTHREAD_SEMANTICS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	    fi
+
+$as_echo "#define _THREAD_SAFE 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lpthread" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lpthread... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_pthread_pthread_mutex_init+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lpthread  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char pthread_mutex_init ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return pthread_mutex_init ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_pthread_pthread_mutex_init=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_pthread_pthread_mutex_init=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_pthread_pthread_mutex_init" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_pthread_pthread_mutex_init" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_pthread_pthread_mutex_init" = xyes; then :
+  tcl_ok=yes
+else
+  tcl_ok=no
+fi
+
+	    if test "$tcl_ok" = "no"; then
+		# Check a little harder for __pthread_mutex_init in the same
+		# library, as some systems hide it there until pthread.h is
+		# defined.  We could alternatively do an AC_TRY_COMPILE with
+		# pthread.h, but that will work with libpthread really doesn't
+		# exist, like AIX 4.2.  [Bug: 4359]
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for __pthread_mutex_init in -lpthread" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for __pthread_mutex_init in -lpthread... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_pthread___pthread_mutex_init+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lpthread  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char __pthread_mutex_init ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return __pthread_mutex_init ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_pthread___pthread_mutex_init=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_pthread___pthread_mutex_init=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_pthread___pthread_mutex_init" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_pthread___pthread_mutex_init" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_pthread___pthread_mutex_init" = xyes; then :
+  tcl_ok=yes
+else
+  tcl_ok=no
+fi
+
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+		# The space is needed
+		THREADS_LIBS=" -lpthread"
+	    else
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lpthreads" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lpthreads... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_pthreads_pthread_mutex_init+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lpthreads  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char pthread_mutex_init ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return pthread_mutex_init ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_pthreads_pthread_mutex_init=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_pthreads_pthread_mutex_init=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_pthreads_pthread_mutex_init" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_pthreads_pthread_mutex_init" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_pthreads_pthread_mutex_init" = xyes; then :
+  tcl_ok=yes
+else
+  tcl_ok=no
+fi
+
+		if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+		    # The space is needed
+		    THREADS_LIBS=" -lpthreads"
+		else
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lc" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lc... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_c_pthread_mutex_init+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lc  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char pthread_mutex_init ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return pthread_mutex_init ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_c_pthread_mutex_init=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_c_pthread_mutex_init=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_c_pthread_mutex_init" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_c_pthread_mutex_init" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_c_pthread_mutex_init" = xyes; then :
+  tcl_ok=yes
+else
+  tcl_ok=no
+fi
+
+		    if test "$tcl_ok" = "no"; then
+			{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lc_r" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for pthread_mutex_init in -lc_r... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_c_r_pthread_mutex_init+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lc_r  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char pthread_mutex_init ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return pthread_mutex_init ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_c_r_pthread_mutex_init=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_c_r_pthread_mutex_init=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_c_r_pthread_mutex_init" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_c_r_pthread_mutex_init" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_c_r_pthread_mutex_init" = xyes; then :
+  tcl_ok=yes
+else
+  tcl_ok=no
+fi
+
+			if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+			    # The space is needed
+			    THREADS_LIBS=" -pthread"
+			else
+			    TCL_THREADS=0
+			    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: Do not know how to find pthread lib on your system - thread support disabled" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: Do not know how to find pthread lib on your system - thread support disabled" >&2;}
+			fi
+		    fi
+		fi
+	    fi
+	fi
+    else
+	TCL_THREADS=0
+    fi
+    # Do checking message here to not mess up interleaved configure output
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for building with threads" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for building with threads... " >&6; }
+    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = 1; then
+
+$as_echo "#define TCL_THREADS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes (default)" >&5
+$as_echo "yes (default)" >&6; }
+    else
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+    fi
+    # TCL_THREADS sanity checking.  See if our request for building with
+    # threads is the same as the way Tcl was built.  If not, warn the user.
+    case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+	*THREADS=1*)
+	    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "0"; then
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING:
+    Building ${PACKAGE_NAME} without threads enabled, but building against Tcl
+    that IS thread-enabled.  It is recommended to use --enable-threads." >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING:
+    Building ${PACKAGE_NAME} without threads enabled, but building against Tcl
+    that IS thread-enabled.  It is recommended to use --enable-threads." >&2;}
+	    fi
+	    ;;
+    esac
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# The statement below defines a collection of symbols related to
+# building as a shared library instead of a static library.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking how to build libraries" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking how to build libraries... " >&6; }
+    # Check whether --enable-shared was given.
+if test "${enable_shared+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_shared; shared_ok=$enableval
+else
+  shared_ok=yes
+fi
+
+
+    if test "${enable_shared+set}" = set; then
+	enableval="$enable_shared"
+	shared_ok=$enableval
+    else
+	shared_ok=yes
+    fi
+
+    # Check whether --enable-stubs was given.
+if test "${enable_stubs+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_stubs; stubs_ok=$enableval
+else
+  stubs_ok=yes
+fi
+
+
+    if test "${enable_stubs+set}" = set; then
+	enableval="$enable_stubs"
+	stubs_ok=$enableval
+    else
+	stubs_ok=yes
+    fi
+
+    # Stubs are always enabled for shared builds
+    if test "$shared_ok" = "yes" ; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: shared" >&5
+$as_echo "shared" >&6; }
+	SHARED_BUILD=1
+        STUBS_BUILD=1
+    else
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: static" >&5
+$as_echo "static" >&6; }
+	SHARED_BUILD=0
+
+$as_echo "#define STATIC_BUILD 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+        if test "$stubs_ok" = "yes" ; then
+          STUBS_BUILD=1
+        else
+          STUBS_BUILD=0
+        fi
+    fi
+    if test "${STUBS_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define USE_TCL_STUBS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+$as_echo "#define USE_TCLOO_STUBS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+      if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" != ""; then
+
+$as_echo "#define USE_TK_STUBS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+      fi
+    fi
+
+
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# This macro figures out what flags to use with the compiler/linker
+# when building shared/static debug/optimized objects.  This information
+# can be taken from the tclConfig.sh file, but this figures it all out.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}ranlib", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}ranlib; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_RANLIB+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$RANLIB"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="$RANLIB" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="${ac_tool_prefix}ranlib"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+RANLIB=$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB
+if test -n "$RANLIB"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $RANLIB" >&5
+$as_echo "$RANLIB" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB"; then
+  ac_ct_RANLIB=$RANLIB
+  # Extract the first word of "ranlib", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ranlib; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_RANLIB"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB="$ac_ct_RANLIB" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB="ranlib"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_RANLIB=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RANLIB
+if test -n "$ac_ct_RANLIB"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_RANLIB" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_RANLIB" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_RANLIB" = x; then
+    RANLIB=":"
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    RANLIB=$ac_ct_RANLIB
+  fi
+else
+  RANLIB="$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB"
+fi
+
+
+
+
+    # Step 0.a: Enable 64 bit support?
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if 64bit support is requested" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if 64bit support is requested... " >&6; }
+    # Check whether --enable-64bit was given.
+if test "${enable_64bit+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_64bit; do64bit=$enableval
+else
+  do64bit=no
+fi
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $do64bit" >&5
+$as_echo "$do64bit" >&6; }
+
+    # Step 0.b: Enable Solaris 64 bit VIS support?
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if 64bit Sparc VIS support is requested" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if 64bit Sparc VIS support is requested... " >&6; }
+    # Check whether --enable-64bit-vis was given.
+if test "${enable_64bit_vis+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_64bit_vis; do64bitVIS=$enableval
+else
+  do64bitVIS=no
+fi
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $do64bitVIS" >&5
+$as_echo "$do64bitVIS" >&6; }
+    # Force 64bit on with VIS
+    if test "$do64bitVIS" = "yes"; then :
+  do64bit=yes
+fi
+
+    # Step 0.c: Check if visibility support is available. Do this here so
+    # that platform specific alternatives can be used below if this fails.
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if compiler supports visibility \"hidden\"" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if compiler supports visibility \"hidden\"... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	hold_cflags=$CFLAGS; CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -Werror"
+	cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+	    extern __attribute__((__visibility__("hidden"))) void f(void);
+	    void f(void) {}
+int
+main ()
+{
+f();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+	CFLAGS=$hold_cflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden" >&6; }
+    if test $tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden = yes; then :
+
+
+$as_echo "#define MODULE_SCOPE extern __attribute__((__visibility__(\"hidden\")))" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+$as_echo "#define HAVE_HIDDEN 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+fi
+
+    # Step 0.d: Disable -rpath support?
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if rpath support is requested" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if rpath support is requested... " >&6; }
+    # Check whether --enable-rpath was given.
+if test "${enable_rpath+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_rpath; doRpath=$enableval
+else
+  doRpath=yes
+fi
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $doRpath" >&5
+$as_echo "$doRpath" >&6; }
+
+    # TEA specific: Cross-compiling options for Windows/CE builds?
+
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = windows; then :
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if Windows/CE build is requested" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if Windows/CE build is requested... " >&6; }
+	# Check whether --enable-wince was given.
+if test "${enable_wince+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_wince; doWince=$enableval
+else
+  doWince=no
+fi
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $doWince" >&5
+$as_echo "$doWince" >&6; }
+
+fi
+
+    # Set the variable "system" to hold the name and version number
+    # for the system.
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking system version" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking system version... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_sys_version+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	# TEA specific:
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	    tcl_cv_sys_version=windows
+	else
+	    tcl_cv_sys_version=`uname -s`-`uname -r`
+	    if test "$?" -ne 0 ; then
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: can't find uname command" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: can't find uname command" >&2;}
+		tcl_cv_sys_version=unknown
+	    else
+		if test "`uname -s`" = "AIX" ; then
+		    tcl_cv_sys_version=AIX-`uname -v`.`uname -r`
+		fi
+	    fi
+	fi
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_sys_version" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_sys_version" >&6; }
+    system=$tcl_cv_sys_version
+
+
+    # Require ranlib early so we can override it in special cases below.
+
+
+
+    # Set configuration options based on system name and version.
+    # This is similar to Tcl's unix/tcl.m4 except that we've added a
+    # "windows" case and removed some core-only vars.
+
+    do64bit_ok=no
+    # default to '{$LIBS}' and set to "" on per-platform necessary basis
+    SHLIB_LD_LIBS='${LIBS}'
+    # When ld needs options to work in 64-bit mode, put them in
+    # LDFLAGS_ARCH so they eventually end up in LDFLAGS even if [load]
+    # is disabled by the user. [Bug 1016796]
+    LDFLAGS_ARCH=""
+    UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX=""
+    # TEA specific: use PACKAGE_VERSION instead of VERSION
+    TCL_TRIM_DOTS='`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`'
+    ECHO_VERSION='`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION}`'
+    TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=ok
+    CFLAGS_DEBUG=-g
+    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+	CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=-O2
+	CFLAGS_WARNING="-Wall"
+
+else
+
+	CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=-O
+	CFLAGS_WARNING=""
+
+fi
+    if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}ar", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}ar; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_AR+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$AR"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_AR="$AR" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_AR="${ac_tool_prefix}ar"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+AR=$ac_cv_prog_AR
+if test -n "$AR"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $AR" >&5
+$as_echo "$AR" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_AR"; then
+  ac_ct_AR=$AR
+  # Extract the first word of "ar", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ar; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_AR+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_AR"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_AR="$ac_ct_AR" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_AR="ar"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_AR=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_AR
+if test -n "$ac_ct_AR"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_AR" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_AR" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_AR" = x; then
+    AR=""
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    AR=$ac_ct_AR
+  fi
+else
+  AR="$ac_cv_prog_AR"
+fi
+
+    STLIB_LD='${AR} cr'
+    LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="LD_LIBRARY_PATH"
+    if test "x$SHLIB_VERSION" = x; then :
+  SHLIB_VERSION=""
+else
+  SHLIB_VERSION=".$SHLIB_VERSION"
+fi
+    case $system in
+	# TEA specific:
+	windows)
+	    # This is a 2-stage check to make sure we have the 64-bit SDK
+	    # We have to know where the SDK is installed.
+	    # This magic is based on MS Platform SDK for Win2003 SP1 - hobbs
+	    # MACHINE is IX86 for LINK, but this is used by the manifest,
+	    # which requires x86|amd64|ia64.
+	    MACHINE="X86"
+	    if test "$do64bit" != "no" ; then
+		if test "x${MSSDK}x" = "xx" ; then
+		    MSSDK="C:/Progra~1/Microsoft Platform SDK"
+		fi
+		MSSDK=`echo "$MSSDK" | sed -e  's!\\\!/!g'`
+		PATH64=""
+		case "$do64bit" in
+		    amd64|x64|yes)
+			MACHINE="AMD64" ; # default to AMD64 64-bit build
+			PATH64="${MSSDK}/Bin/Win64/x86/AMD64"
+			;;
+		    ia64)
+			MACHINE="IA64"
+			PATH64="${MSSDK}/Bin/Win64"
+			;;
+		esac
+		if test "$GCC" != "yes" -a ! -d "${PATH64}" ; then
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: Could not find 64-bit $MACHINE SDK to enable 64bit mode" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: Could not find 64-bit $MACHINE SDK to enable 64bit mode" >&2;}
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: Ensure latest Platform SDK is installed" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: Ensure latest Platform SDK is installed" >&2;}
+		    do64bit="no"
+		else
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result:    Using 64-bit $MACHINE mode" >&5
+$as_echo "   Using 64-bit $MACHINE mode" >&6; }
+		    do64bit_ok="yes"
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$doWince" != "no" ; then
+		if test "$do64bit" != "no" ; then
+		    as_fn_error $? "Windows/CE and 64-bit builds incompatible" "$LINENO" 5
+		fi
+		if test "$GCC" = "yes" ; then
+		    as_fn_error $? "Windows/CE and GCC builds incompatible" "$LINENO" 5
+		fi
+
+    # First, look for one uninstalled.
+    # the alternative search directory is invoked by --with-celib
+
+    if test x"${no_celib}" = x ; then
+	# we reset no_celib in case something fails here
+	no_celib=true
+
+# Check whether --with-celib was given.
+if test "${with_celib+set}" = set; then :
+  withval=$with_celib; with_celibconfig=${withval}
+fi
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Windows/CE celib directory" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for Windows/CE celib directory... " >&6; }
+	if ${ac_cv_c_celibconfig+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	    # First check to see if --with-celibconfig was specified.
+	    if test x"${with_celibconfig}" != x ; then
+		if test -d "${with_celibconfig}/inc" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_celibconfig=`(cd ${with_celibconfig}; pwd)`
+		else
+		    as_fn_error $? "${with_celibconfig} directory doesn't contain inc directory" "$LINENO" 5
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    # then check for a celib library
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_celibconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			../celib-palm-3.0 \
+			../celib \
+			../../celib-palm-3.0 \
+			../../celib \
+			`ls -dr ../celib-*3.[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			${srcdir}/../celib-palm-3.0 \
+			${srcdir}/../celib \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../celib-*3.[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -d "$i/inc" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_celibconfig=`(cd $i; pwd)`
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+fi
+
+	if test x"${ac_cv_c_celibconfig}" = x ; then
+	    as_fn_error $? "Cannot find celib support library directory" "$LINENO" 5
+	else
+	    no_celib=
+	    CELIB_DIR=${ac_cv_c_celibconfig}
+	    CELIB_DIR=`echo "$CELIB_DIR" | sed -e 's!\\\!/!g'`
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: found $CELIB_DIR" >&5
+$as_echo "found $CELIB_DIR" >&6; }
+	fi
+    fi
+
+		# Set defaults for common evc4/PPC2003 setup
+		# Currently Tcl requires 300+, possibly 420+ for sockets
+		CEVERSION=420; 		# could be 211 300 301 400 420 ...
+		TARGETCPU=ARMV4;	# could be ARMV4 ARM MIPS SH3 X86 ...
+		ARCH=ARM;		# could be ARM MIPS X86EM ...
+		PLATFORM="Pocket PC 2003"; # or "Pocket PC 2002"
+		if test "$doWince" != "yes"; then
+		    # If !yes then the user specified something
+		    # Reset ARCH to allow user to skip specifying it
+		    ARCH=
+		    eval `echo $doWince | awk -F, '{ \
+	    if (length($1)) { printf "CEVERSION=\"%s\"\n", $1; \
+	    if ($1 < 400)   { printf "PLATFORM=\"Pocket PC 2002\"\n" } }; \
+	    if (length($2)) { printf "TARGETCPU=\"%s\"\n", toupper($2) }; \
+	    if (length($3)) { printf "ARCH=\"%s\"\n", toupper($3) }; \
+	    if (length($4)) { printf "PLATFORM=\"%s\"\n", $4 }; \
+		    }'`
+		    if test "x${ARCH}" = "x" ; then
+			ARCH=$TARGETCPU;
+		    fi
+		fi
+		OSVERSION=WCE$CEVERSION;
+	    	if test "x${WCEROOT}" = "x" ; then
+			WCEROOT="C:/Program Files/Microsoft eMbedded C++ 4.0"
+		    if test ! -d "${WCEROOT}" ; then
+			WCEROOT="C:/Program Files/Microsoft eMbedded Tools"
+		    fi
+		fi
+		if test "x${SDKROOT}" = "x" ; then
+		    SDKROOT="C:/Program Files/Windows CE Tools"
+		    if test ! -d "${SDKROOT}" ; then
+			SDKROOT="C:/Windows CE Tools"
+		    fi
+		fi
+		WCEROOT=`echo "$WCEROOT" | sed -e 's!\\\!/!g'`
+		SDKROOT=`echo "$SDKROOT" | sed -e 's!\\\!/!g'`
+		if test ! -d "${SDKROOT}/${OSVERSION}/${PLATFORM}/Lib/${TARGETCPU}" \
+		    -o ! -d "${WCEROOT}/EVC/${OSVERSION}/bin"; then
+		    as_fn_error $? "could not find PocketPC SDK or target compiler to enable WinCE mode $CEVERSION,$TARGETCPU,$ARCH,$PLATFORM" "$LINENO" 5
+		    doWince="no"
+		else
+		    # We could PATH_NOSPACE these, but that's not important,
+		    # as long as we quote them when used.
+		    CEINCLUDE="${SDKROOT}/${OSVERSION}/${PLATFORM}/include"
+		    if test -d "${CEINCLUDE}/${TARGETCPU}" ; then
+			CEINCLUDE="${CEINCLUDE}/${TARGETCPU}"
+		    fi
+		    CELIBPATH="${SDKROOT}/${OSVERSION}/${PLATFORM}/Lib/${TARGETCPU}"
+    		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$GCC" != "yes" ; then
+	        if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "0" ; then
+		    runtime=-MT
+	        else
+		    runtime=-MD
+	        fi
+	        case "x`echo \${VisualStudioVersion}`" in
+	            x1[4-9]*)
+		        lflags="${lflags} -nodefaultlib:libucrt.lib"
+
+    vars="ucrt.lib"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" = "yes" ; then
+	    # Convert foo.lib to -lfoo for GCC.  No-op if not *.lib
+	    i=`echo "$i" | sed -e 's/^\([^-].*\)\.lib$/-l\1/i'`
+	fi
+	PKG_LIBS="$PKG_LIBS $i"
+    done
+
+
+	            ;;
+	            *)
+	            ;;
+	        esac
+
+                if test "$do64bit" != "no" ; then
+		    # All this magic is necessary for the Win64 SDK RC1 - hobbs
+		    CC="\"${PATH64}/cl.exe\""
+		    CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} -I\"${MSSDK}/Include\" -I\"${MSSDK}/Include/crt\" -I\"${MSSDK}/Include/crt/sys\""
+		    RC="\"${MSSDK}/bin/rc.exe\""
+		    lflags="${lflags} -nologo -MACHINE:${MACHINE} -LIBPATH:\"${MSSDK}/Lib/${MACHINE}\""
+		    LINKBIN="\"${PATH64}/link.exe\""
+		    CFLAGS_DEBUG="-nologo -Zi -Od -W3 ${runtime}d"
+		    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-nologo -O2 -W2 ${runtime}"
+		    # Avoid 'unresolved external symbol __security_cookie'
+		    # errors, c.f. http://support.microsoft.com/?id=894573
+
+    vars="bufferoverflowU.lib"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" = "yes" ; then
+	    # Convert foo.lib to -lfoo for GCC.  No-op if not *.lib
+	    i=`echo "$i" | sed -e 's/^\([^-].*\)\.lib$/-l\1/i'`
+	fi
+	PKG_LIBS="$PKG_LIBS $i"
+    done
+
+
+		elif test "$doWince" != "no" ; then
+		    CEBINROOT="${WCEROOT}/EVC/${OSVERSION}/bin"
+		    if test "${TARGETCPU}" = "X86"; then
+			CC="\"${CEBINROOT}/cl.exe\""
+		    else
+			CC="\"${CEBINROOT}/cl${ARCH}.exe\""
+		    fi
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -I\"${CELIB_DIR}/inc\" -I\"${CEINCLUDE}\""
+		    RC="\"${WCEROOT}/Common/EVC/bin/rc.exe\""
+		    arch=`echo ${ARCH} | awk '{print tolower($0)}'`
+		    defs="${ARCH} _${ARCH}_ ${arch} PALM_SIZE _MT _WINDOWS"
+		    if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+			# Static CE builds require static celib as well
+		    	defs="${defs} _DLL"
+		    fi
+		    for i in $defs ; do
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define $i 1
+_ACEOF
+
+		    done
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define _WIN32_WCE $CEVERSION
+_ACEOF
+
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define UNDER_CE $CEVERSION
+_ACEOF
+
+		    CFLAGS_DEBUG="-nologo -Zi -Od"
+		    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-nologo -Ox"
+		    lversion=`echo ${CEVERSION} | sed -e 's/\(.\)\(..\)/\1\.\2/'`
+		    lflags="${lflags} -MACHINE:${ARCH} -LIBPATH:\"${CELIBPATH}\" -subsystem:windowsce,${lversion} -nologo"
+		    LINKBIN="\"${CEBINROOT}/link.exe\""
+
+		else
+		    RC="rc"
+		    lflags="${lflags} -nologo"
+		    LINKBIN="link"
+		    CFLAGS_DEBUG="-nologo -Z7 -Od -W3 -WX ${runtime}d"
+		    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-nologo -O2 -W2 ${runtime}"
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		# mingw gcc mode
+		if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then
+  # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}windres", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}windres; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_RC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$RC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_RC="$RC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_RC="${ac_tool_prefix}windres"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+RC=$ac_cv_prog_RC
+if test -n "$RC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $RC" >&5
+$as_echo "$RC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+
+fi
+if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_RC"; then
+  ac_ct_RC=$RC
+  # Extract the first word of "windres", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy windres; ac_word=$2
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RC+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test -n "$ac_ct_RC"; then
+  ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RC="$ac_ct_RC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
+  if as_fn_executable_p "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; then
+    ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RC="windres"
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
+    break 2
+  fi
+done
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+fi
+fi
+ac_ct_RC=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_RC
+if test -n "$ac_ct_RC"; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_RC" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_ct_RC" >&6; }
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+fi
+
+  if test "x$ac_ct_RC" = x; then
+    RC=""
+  else
+    case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in
+yes:)
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;}
+ac_tool_warned=yes ;;
+esac
+    RC=$ac_ct_RC
+  fi
+else
+  RC="$ac_cv_prog_RC"
+fi
+
+		CFLAGS_DEBUG="-g"
+		CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-O2 -fomit-frame-pointer"
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.a'
+		LDFLAGS_CONSOLE="-wl,--subsystem,console ${lflags}"
+		LDFLAGS_WINDOW="-wl,--subsystem,windows ${lflags}"
+
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for cross-compile version of gcc" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for cross-compile version of gcc... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_cross+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+			    #ifdef _WIN32
+				#error cross-compiler
+			    #endif
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_cross=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_cross=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_cross" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_cross" >&6; }
+		      if test "$ac_cv_cross" = "yes"; then
+			case "$do64bit" in
+			    amd64|x64|yes)
+				CC="x86_64-w64-mingw32-gcc"
+				LD="x86_64-w64-mingw32-ld"
+				AR="x86_64-w64-mingw32-ar"
+				RANLIB="x86_64-w64-mingw32-ranlib"
+				RC="x86_64-w64-mingw32-windres"
+			    ;;
+			    *)
+				CC="i686-w64-mingw32-gcc"
+				LD="i686-w64-mingw32-ld"
+				AR="i686-w64-mingw32-ar"
+				RANLIB="i686-w64-mingw32-ranlib"
+				RC="i686-w64-mingw32-windres"
+			    ;;
+			esac
+		fi
+
+	    else
+		SHLIB_LD="${LINKBIN} -dll ${lflags}"
+		# link -lib only works when -lib is the first arg
+		STLIB_LD="${LINKBIN} -lib ${lflags}"
+		UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.lib'
+		PATHTYPE=-w
+		# For information on what debugtype is most useful, see:
+		# http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/en-us/dnvc60/html/gendepdebug.asp
+		# and also
+		# http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/y0zzbyt4%28VS.80%29.aspx
+		# This essentially turns it all on.
+		LDFLAGS_DEBUG="-debug -debugtype:cv"
+		LDFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-release"
+		if test "$doWince" != "no" ; then
+		    LDFLAGS_CONSOLE="-link ${lflags}"
+		    LDFLAGS_WINDOW=${LDFLAGS_CONSOLE}
+		else
+		    LDFLAGS_CONSOLE="-link -subsystem:console ${lflags}"
+		    LDFLAGS_WINDOW="-link -subsystem:windows ${lflags}"
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".dll"
+	    SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.dll'
+
+	    TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=nodots
+    	    ;;
+	AIX-*)
+	    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1" -a "$GCC" != "yes"; then :
+
+		# AIX requires the _r compiler when gcc isn't being used
+		case "${CC}" in
+		    *_r|*_r\ *)
+			# ok ...
+			;;
+		    *)
+			# Make sure only first arg gets _r
+		    	CC=`echo "$CC" | sed -e 's/^\([^ ]*\)/\1_r/'`
+			;;
+		esac
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: Using $CC for compiling with threads" >&5
+$as_echo "Using $CC for compiling with threads" >&6; }
+
+fi
+	    LIBS="$LIBS -lc"
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+
+	    LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="LIBPATH"
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+	    if test "$do64bit" = yes; then :
+
+		if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system" >&2;}
+
+else
+
+		    do64bit_ok=yes
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -q64"
+		    LDFLAGS_ARCH="-q64"
+		    RANLIB="${RANLIB} -X64"
+		    AR="${AR} -X64"
+		    SHLIB_LD_FLAGS="-b64"
+
+fi
+
+fi
+
+	    if test "`uname -m`" = ia64; then :
+
+		# AIX-5 uses ELF style dynamic libraries on IA-64, but not PPC
+		SHLIB_LD="/usr/ccs/bin/ld -G -z text"
+		if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+
+else
+
+		    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+
+fi
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+
+else
+
+		if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared -Wl,-bexpall'
+
+else
+
+		    SHLIB_LD="/bin/ld -bhalt:4 -bM:SRE -bexpall -H512 -T512 -bnoentry"
+		    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -brtl"
+
+fi
+		SHLIB_LD="${SHLIB_LD} ${SHLIB_LD_FLAGS}"
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-L${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	BeOS*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -nostart'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+
+	    #-----------------------------------------------------------
+	    # Check for inet_ntoa in -lbind, for BeOS (which also needs
+	    # -lsocket, even if the network functions are in -lnet which
+	    # is always linked to, for compatibility.
+	    #-----------------------------------------------------------
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for inet_ntoa in -lbind" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for inet_ntoa in -lbind... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_bind_inet_ntoa+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lbind  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char inet_ntoa ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return inet_ntoa ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_bind_inet_ntoa=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_bind_inet_ntoa=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_bind_inet_ntoa" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_bind_inet_ntoa" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_bind_inet_ntoa" = xyes; then :
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lbind -lsocket"
+fi
+
+	    ;;
+	BSD/OS-4.*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-export-dynamic -fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -export-dynamic"
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	CYGWIN_*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} -Wl,--out-implib,\$@.a"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".dll"
+	    EXEEXT=".exe"
+	    do64bit_ok=yes
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	Haiku*)
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic"
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -shared'
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for inet_ntoa in -lnetwork" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for inet_ntoa in -lnetwork... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_network_inet_ntoa+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-lnetwork  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char inet_ntoa ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return inet_ntoa ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_network_inet_ntoa=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_network_inet_ntoa=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_network_inet_ntoa" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_network_inet_ntoa" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_network_inet_ntoa" = xyes; then :
+  LIBS="$LIBS -lnetwork"
+fi
+
+	    ;;
+	HP-UX-*.11.*)
+	    # Use updated header definitions where possible
+
+$as_echo "#define _XOPEN_SOURCE_EXTENDED 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	    # TEA specific: Needed by Tcl, but not most extensions
+	    #AC_DEFINE(_XOPEN_SOURCE, 1, [Do we want to use the XOPEN network library?])
+	    #LIBS="$LIBS -lxnet"               # Use the XOPEN network library
+
+	    if test "`uname -m`" = ia64; then :
+
+		SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+		# Use newer C++ library for C++ extensions
+		#if test "$GCC" != "yes" ; then
+		#   CPPFLAGS="-AA"
+		#fi
+
+else
+
+		SHLIB_SUFFIX=".sl"
+
+fi
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for shl_load in -ldld" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for shl_load in -ldld... " >&6; }
+if ${ac_cv_lib_dld_shl_load+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  ac_check_lib_save_LIBS=$LIBS
+LIBS="-ldld  $LIBS"
+cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+/* Override any GCC internal prototype to avoid an error.
+   Use char because int might match the return type of a GCC
+   builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply.  */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C"
+#endif
+char shl_load ();
+int
+main ()
+{
+return shl_load ();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  ac_cv_lib_dld_shl_load=yes
+else
+  ac_cv_lib_dld_shl_load=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+LIBS=$ac_check_lib_save_LIBS
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_lib_dld_shl_load" >&5
+$as_echo "$ac_cv_lib_dld_shl_load" >&6; }
+if test "x$ac_cv_lib_dld_shl_load" = xyes; then :
+  tcl_ok=yes
+else
+  tcl_ok=no
+fi
+
+	    if test "$tcl_ok" = yes; then :
+
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-E"
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,+s,+b,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}:.'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='+s +b ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}:.'
+		LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="SHLIB_PATH"
+
+fi
+	    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+
+else
+
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -z"
+		# Users may want PA-RISC 1.1/2.0 portable code - needs HP cc
+		#CFLAGS="$CFLAGS +DAportable"
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="+z"
+		SHLIB_LD="ld -b"
+
+fi
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+	    if test "$do64bit" = "yes"; then :
+
+		if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		    case `${CC} -dumpmachine` in
+			hppa64*)
+			    # 64-bit gcc in use.  Fix flags for GNU ld.
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+			    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+			    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+				CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+			    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+			    ;;
+			*)
+			    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system" >&2;}
+			    ;;
+		    esac
+
+else
+
+		    do64bit_ok=yes
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS +DD64"
+		    LDFLAGS_ARCH="+DD64"
+
+fi
+
+fi ;;
+	IRIX-6.*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -n32 -shared -rdata_shared"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-rpath ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+	    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -mabi=n32"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -mabi=n32"
+
+else
+
+		case $system in
+		    IRIX-6.3)
+			# Use to build 6.2 compatible binaries on 6.3.
+			CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -n32 -D_OLD_TERMIOS"
+			;;
+		    *)
+			CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -n32"
+			;;
+		esac
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -n32"
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	IRIX64-6.*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -n32 -shared -rdata_shared"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-rpath ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+
+	    if test "$do64bit" = yes; then :
+
+	        if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+	            { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported by gcc" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported by gcc" >&2;}
+
+else
+
+	            do64bit_ok=yes
+	            SHLIB_LD="ld -64 -shared -rdata_shared"
+	            CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -64"
+	            LDFLAGS_ARCH="-64"
+
+fi
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	Linux*|GNU*|NetBSD-Debian)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+
+	    # TEA specific:
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-O2 -fomit-frame-pointer"
+
+	    # TEA specific: use LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT} -shared'
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic"
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    if test "`uname -m`" = "alpha"; then :
+  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -mieee"
+fi
+	    if test $do64bit = yes; then :
+
+		{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if compiler accepts -m64 flag" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if compiler accepts -m64 flag... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_cc_m64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+		    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+		    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_cc_m64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_cc_m64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+		    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_cc_m64" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_cc_m64" >&6; }
+		if test $tcl_cv_cc_m64 = yes; then :
+
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+		    do64bit_ok=yes
+
+fi
+
+fi
+
+	    # The combo of gcc + glibc has a bug related to inlining of
+	    # functions like strtod(). The -fno-builtin flag should address
+	    # this problem but it does not work. The -fno-inline flag is kind
+	    # of overkill but it works. Disable inlining only when one of the
+	    # files in compat/*.c is being linked in.
+
+	    if test x"${USE_COMPAT}" != x; then :
+  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -fno-inline"
+fi
+	    ;;
+	Lynx*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=-02
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+	    LD_FLAGS="-Wl,--export-dynamic"
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+	    ;;
+	OpenBSD-*)
+	    arch=`arch -s`
+	    case "$arch" in
+	    alpha|sparc64)
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fpic"
+		;;
+	    esac
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.so${SHLIB_VERSION}'
+	    LDFLAGS="-Wl,-export-dynamic"
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-O2"
+	    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1"; then :
+
+		# On OpenBSD:	Compile with -pthread
+		#		Don't link with -lpthread
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-lpthread//`
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pthread"
+
+fi
+	    # OpenBSD doesn't do version numbers with dots.
+	    UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.a'
+	    TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=nodots
+	    ;;
+	NetBSD-*)
+	    # NetBSD has ELF and can use 'cc -shared' to build shared libs
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -export-dynamic"
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1"; then :
+
+		# The -pthread needs to go in the CFLAGS, not LIBS
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-pthread//`
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pthread"
+	    	LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -pthread"
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*)
+	    # This configuration from FreeBSD Ports.
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD="${CC} -shared"
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} -Wl,-soname,\$@"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    LDFLAGS=""
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+	    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1"; then :
+
+		# The -pthread needs to go in the LDFLAGS, not LIBS
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-pthread//`
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $PTHREAD_CFLAGS"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS $PTHREAD_LIBS"
+fi
+	    case $system in
+	    FreeBSD-3.*)
+		# Version numbers are dot-stripped by system policy.
+		TCL_TRIM_DOTS=`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`
+		UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.a'
+		SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}\$\{DBGX\}.so.1'
+		TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=nodots
+		;;
+	    esac
+	    ;;
+	Darwin-*)
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-Os"
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fno-common"
+	    # To avoid discrepancies between what headers configure sees during
+	    # preprocessing tests and compiling tests, move any -isysroot and
+	    # -mmacosx-version-min flags from CFLAGS to CPPFLAGS:
+	    CPPFLAGS="${CPPFLAGS} `echo " ${CFLAGS}" | \
+		awk 'BEGIN {FS=" +-";ORS=" "}; {for (i=2;i<=NF;i++) \
+		if ($i~/^(isysroot|mmacosx-version-min)/) print "-"$i}'`"
+	    CFLAGS="`echo " ${CFLAGS}" | \
+		awk 'BEGIN {FS=" +-";ORS=" "}; {for (i=2;i<=NF;i++) \
+		if (!($i~/^(isysroot|mmacosx-version-min)/)) print "-"$i}'`"
+	    if test $do64bit = yes; then :
+
+		case `arch` in
+		    ppc)
+			{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if compiler accepts -arch ppc64 flag" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if compiler accepts -arch ppc64 flag... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+			    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch ppc64 -mpowerpc64 -mcpu=G5"
+			    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+			    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64" >&6; }
+			if test $tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64 = yes; then :
+
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch ppc64 -mpowerpc64 -mcpu=G5"
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+
+fi;;
+		    i386)
+			{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if compiler accepts -arch x86_64 flag" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if compiler accepts -arch x86_64 flag... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+			    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch x86_64"
+			    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+			    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64" >&6; }
+			if test $tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64 = yes; then :
+
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch x86_64"
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+
+fi;;
+		    *)
+			{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: Don't know how enable 64-bit on architecture \`arch\`" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: Don't know how enable 64-bit on architecture \`arch\`" >&2;};;
+		esac
+
+else
+
+		# Check for combined 32-bit and 64-bit fat build
+		if echo "$CFLAGS " |grep -E -q -- '-arch (ppc64|x86_64) ' \
+		    && echo "$CFLAGS " |grep -E -q -- '-arch (ppc|i386) '; then :
+
+		    fat_32_64=yes
+fi
+
+fi
+	    # TEA specific: use LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -dynamiclib ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT}'
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if ld accepts -single_module flag" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if ld accepts -single_module flag... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_ld_single_module+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+		hold_ldflags=$LDFLAGS
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -dynamiclib -Wl,-single_module"
+		cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+int i;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_ld_single_module=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_ld_single_module=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+		LDFLAGS=$hold_ldflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_ld_single_module" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_ld_single_module" >&6; }
+	    if test $tcl_cv_ld_single_module = yes; then :
+
+		SHLIB_LD="${SHLIB_LD} -Wl,-single_module"
+
+fi
+	    # TEA specific: link shlib with current and compatibility version flags
+	    vers=`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | sed -e 's/^\([0-9]\{1,5\}\)\(\(\.[0-9]\{1,3\}\)\{0,2\}\).*$/\1\2/p' -e d`
+	    SHLIB_LD="${SHLIB_LD} -current_version ${vers:-0} -compatibility_version ${vers:-0}"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".dylib"
+	    # Don't use -prebind when building for Mac OS X 10.4 or later only:
+	    if test "`echo "${MACOSX_DEPLOYMENT_TARGET}" | awk -F '10\\.' '{print int($2)}'`" -lt 4 -a \
+		"`echo "${CPPFLAGS}" | awk -F '-mmacosx-version-min=10\\.' '{print int($2)}'`" -lt 4; then :
+
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -prebind"
+fi
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -headerpad_max_install_names"
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking if ld accepts -search_paths_first flag" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking if ld accepts -search_paths_first flag... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+		hold_ldflags=$LDFLAGS
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-search_paths_first"
+		cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+int i;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+		LDFLAGS=$hold_ldflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first" >&6; }
+	    if test $tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first = yes; then :
+
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-search_paths_first"
+
+fi
+	    if test "$tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden" != yes; then :
+
+
+$as_echo "#define MODULE_SCOPE __private_extern__" >>confdefs.h
+
+		tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden=yes
+
+fi
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="DYLD_LIBRARY_PATH"
+	    # TEA specific: for combined 32 & 64 bit fat builds of Tk
+	    # extensions, verify that 64-bit build is possible.
+	    if test "$fat_32_64" = yes && test -n "${TK_BIN_DIR}"; then :
+
+		if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = x11; then :
+
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for 64-bit X11" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for 64-bit X11... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_lib_x11_64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval 'hold_'$v'="$'$v'";'$v'="`echo "$'$v' "|sed -e "s/-arch ppc / /g" -e "s/-arch i386 / /g"`"'
+			done
+			CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS -I/usr/X11R6/include"
+			LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -L/usr/X11R6/lib -lX11"
+			cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+XrmInitialize();
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_lib_x11_64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_lib_x11_64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval $v'="$hold_'$v'"'
+			done
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_lib_x11_64" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_lib_x11_64" >&6; }
+
+fi
+		if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = aqua; then :
+
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for 64-bit Tk" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for 64-bit Tk... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_lib_tk_64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval 'hold_'$v'="$'$v'";'$v'="`echo "$'$v' "|sed -e "s/-arch ppc / /g" -e "s/-arch i386 / /g"`"'
+			done
+			CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS -DUSE_TCL_STUBS=1 -DUSE_TK_STUBS=1 ${TCL_INCLUDES} ${TK_INCLUDES}"
+			LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS ${TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC} ${TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+			cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <tk.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+Tk_InitStubs(NULL, "", 0);
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_lib_tk_64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_lib_tk_64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval $v'="$hold_'$v'"'
+			done
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_lib_tk_64" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_lib_tk_64" >&6; }
+
+fi
+		# remove 64-bit arch flags from CFLAGS et al. if configuration
+		# does not support 64-bit.
+		if test "$tcl_cv_lib_tk_64" = no -o "$tcl_cv_lib_x11_64" = no; then :
+
+		    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: Removing 64-bit architectures from compiler & linker flags" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: Removing 64-bit architectures from compiler & linker flags" >&6;}
+		    for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			eval $v'="`echo "$'$v' "|sed -e "s/-arch ppc64 / /g" -e "s/-arch x86_64 / /g"`"'
+		    done
+fi
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	OS/390-*)
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=""		# Optimizer is buggy
+
+$as_echo "#define _OE_SOCKETS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	    ;;
+	OSF1-V*)
+	    # Digital OSF/1
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    if test "$SHARED_BUILD" = 1; then :
+
+	        SHLIB_LD='ld -shared -expect_unresolved "*"'
+
+else
+
+	        SHLIB_LD='ld -non_shared -expect_unresolved "*"'
+
+fi
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    if test $doRpath = yes; then :
+
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-rpath ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+fi
+	    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -mieee"
+else
+
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DHAVE_TZSET -std1 -ieee"
+fi
+	    # see pthread_intro(3) for pthread support on osf1, k.furukawa
+	    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = 1; then :
+
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DHAVE_PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSTACKSIZE"
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DTCL_THREAD_STACK_MIN=PTHREAD_STACK_MIN*64"
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-lpthreads//`
+		if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		    LIBS="$LIBS -lpthread -lmach -lexc"
+
+else
+
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pthread"
+		    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -pthread"
+
+fi
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	QNX-6*)
+	    # QNX RTP
+	    # This may work for all QNX, but it was only reported for v6.
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -Bshareable -x"
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	SCO_SV-3.2*)
+	    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC -melf"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -melf -Wl,-Bexport"
+
+else
+
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-Kpic -belf"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -belf -Wl,-Bexport"
+
+fi
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -G"
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	SunOS-5.[0-6])
+	    # Careful to not let 5.10+ fall into this case
+
+	    # Note: If _REENTRANT isn't defined, then Solaris
+	    # won't define thread-safe library routines.
+
+
+$as_echo "#define _REENTRANT 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+$as_echo "#define _POSIX_PTHREAD_SEMANTICS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-KPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+
+else
+
+		SHLIB_LD="/usr/ccs/bin/ld -G -z text"
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	SunOS-5*)
+	    # Note: If _REENTRANT isn't defined, then Solaris
+	    # won't define thread-safe library routines.
+
+
+$as_echo "#define _REENTRANT 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+$as_echo "#define _POSIX_PTHREAD_SEMANTICS 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-KPIC"
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+	    if test "$do64bit" = yes; then :
+
+		arch=`isainfo`
+		if test "$arch" = "sparcv9 sparc"; then :
+
+		    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+			if test "`${CC} -dumpversion | awk -F. '{print $1}'`" -lt 3; then :
+
+			    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC < 3.2 on $system" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC < 3.2 on $system" >&2;}
+
+else
+
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64 -mcpu=v9"
+			    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -m64 -mcpu=v9"
+			    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+
+fi
+
+else
+
+			do64bit_ok=yes
+			if test "$do64bitVIS" = yes; then :
+
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -xarch=v9a"
+			    LDFLAGS_ARCH="-xarch=v9a"
+
+else
+
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -xarch=v9"
+			    LDFLAGS_ARCH="-xarch=v9"
+
+fi
+			# Solaris 64 uses this as well
+			#LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64"
+
+fi
+
+else
+  if test "$arch" = "amd64 i386"; then :
+
+		    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+			case $system in
+			    SunOS-5.1[1-9]*|SunOS-5.[2-9][0-9]*)
+				do64bit_ok=yes
+				CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+				LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -m64";;
+			    *)
+				{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system" >&2;};;
+			esac
+
+else
+
+			do64bit_ok=yes
+			case $system in
+			    SunOS-5.1[1-9]*|SunOS-5.[2-9][0-9]*)
+				CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+				LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -m64";;
+			    *)
+				CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -xarch=amd64"
+				LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -xarch=amd64";;
+			esac
+
+fi
+
+else
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported for $arch" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: 64bit mode not supported for $arch" >&2;}
+fi
+fi
+
+fi
+
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+		if test "$do64bit_ok" = yes; then :
+
+		    if test "$arch" = "sparcv9 sparc"; then :
+
+			# We need to specify -static-libgcc or we need to
+			# add the path to the sparv9 libgcc.
+			# JH: static-libgcc is necessary for core Tcl, but may
+			# not be necessary for extensions.
+			SHLIB_LD="$SHLIB_LD -m64 -mcpu=v9 -static-libgcc"
+			# for finding sparcv9 libgcc, get the regular libgcc
+			# path, remove so name and append 'sparcv9'
+			#v9gcclibdir="`gcc -print-file-name=libgcc_s.so` | ..."
+			#CC_SEARCH_FLAGS="${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS},-R,$v9gcclibdir"
+
+else
+  if test "$arch" = "amd64 i386"; then :
+
+			# JH: static-libgcc is necessary for core Tcl, but may
+			# not be necessary for extensions.
+			SHLIB_LD="$SHLIB_LD -m64 -static-libgcc"
+
+fi
+fi
+
+fi
+
+else
+
+		case $system in
+		    SunOS-5.[1-9][0-9]*)
+			# TEA specific: use LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS
+			SHLIB_LD='${CC} -G -z text ${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT}';;
+		    *)
+			SHLIB_LD='/usr/ccs/bin/ld -G -z text';;
+		esac
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+
+fi
+	    ;;
+	UNIX_SV* | UnixWare-5*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-KPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -G'
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    # Some UNIX_SV* systems (unixware 1.1.2 for example) have linkers
+	    # that don't grok the -Bexport option.  Test that it does.
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for ld accepts -Bexport flag" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for ld accepts -Bexport flag... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_ld_Bexport+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+		hold_ldflags=$LDFLAGS
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-Bexport"
+		cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+int i;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_link "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_ld_Bexport=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_ld_Bexport=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext \
+    conftest$ac_exeext conftest.$ac_ext
+	        LDFLAGS=$hold_ldflags
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_ld_Bexport" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_ld_Bexport" >&6; }
+	    if test $tcl_cv_ld_Bexport = yes; then :
+
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-Bexport"
+
+fi
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+    esac
+
+    if test "$do64bit" = yes -a "$do64bit_ok" = no; then :
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: 64bit support being disabled -- don't know magic for this platform" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: 64bit support being disabled -- don't know magic for this platform" >&2;}
+
+fi
+
+
+
+    # Add in the arch flags late to ensure it wasn't removed.
+    # Not necessary in TEA, but this is aligned with core
+    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS $LDFLAGS_ARCH"
+
+    # If we're running gcc, then change the C flags for compiling shared
+    # libraries to the right flags for gcc, instead of those for the
+    # standard manufacturer compiler.
+
+    if test "$GCC" = yes; then :
+
+	case $system in
+	    AIX-*) ;;
+	    BSD/OS*) ;;
+	    CYGWIN_*|MINGW32_*|MINGW64_*) ;;
+	    IRIX*) ;;
+	    NetBSD-*|DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*|OpenBSD-*) ;;
+	    Darwin-*) ;;
+	    SCO_SV-3.2*) ;;
+	    windows) ;;
+	    *) SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC" ;;
+	esac
+fi
+
+    if test "$tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden" != yes; then :
+
+
+$as_echo "#define MODULE_SCOPE extern" >>confdefs.h
+
+
+fi
+
+    if test "$SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX" = ""; then :
+
+    # TEA specific: use PACKAGE_VERSION instead of VERSION
+    SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${PACKAGE_VERSION}${SHLIB_SUFFIX}'
+fi
+    if test "$UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX" = ""; then :
+
+    # TEA specific: use PACKAGE_VERSION instead of VERSION
+    UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${PACKAGE_VERSION}.a'
+fi
+
+    if test "${GCC}" = "yes" -a ${SHLIB_SUFFIX} = ".dll"; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for SEH support in compiler" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for SEH support in compiler... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_seh+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then :
+  tcl_cv_seh=no
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#include <windows.h>
+#undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+
+	    int main(int argc, char** argv) {
+		int a, b = 0;
+		__try {
+		    a = 666 / b;
+		}
+		__except (EXCEPTION_EXECUTE_HANDLER) {
+		    return 0;
+		}
+		return 1;
+	    }
+
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_run "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_seh=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_seh=no
+fi
+rm -f core *.core core.conftest.* gmon.out bb.out conftest$ac_exeext \
+  conftest.$ac_objext conftest.beam conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_seh" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_seh" >&6; }
+	if test "$tcl_cv_seh" = "no" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define HAVE_NO_SEH 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	fi
+
+	#
+	# Check to see if the excpt.h include file provided contains the
+	# definition for EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION; if not, which is the case
+	# with Cygwin's version as of 2002-04-10, define it to be int,
+	# sufficient for getting the current code to work.
+	#
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION support in include files" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION support in include files... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_eh_disposition+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+#	    define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#	    include <windows.h>
+#	    undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+		EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION x;
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_eh_disposition=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_eh_disposition=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_eh_disposition" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_eh_disposition" >&6; }
+	if test "$tcl_cv_eh_disposition" = "no" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION int" >>confdefs.h
+
+	fi
+
+	# Check to see if winnt.h defines CHAR, SHORT, and LONG
+	# even if VOID has already been #defined. The win32api
+	# used by mingw and cygwin is known to do this.
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for winnt.h that ignores VOID define" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for winnt.h that ignores VOID define... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+#define VOID void
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#include <windows.h>
+#undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+		CHAR c;
+		SHORT s;
+		LONG l;
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void" >&6; }
+	if test "$tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void" = "yes" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define HAVE_WINNT_IGNORE_VOID 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	fi
+    fi
+
+	# See if the compiler supports casting to a union type.
+	# This is used to stop gcc from printing a compiler
+	# warning when initializing a union member.
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for cast to union support" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for cast to union support... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_cast_to_union+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+
+		  union foo { int i; double d; };
+		  union foo f = (union foo) (int) 0;
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_cast_to_union=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_cast_to_union=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_cast_to_union" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_cast_to_union" >&6; }
+	if test "$tcl_cv_cast_to_union" = "yes"; then
+
+$as_echo "#define HAVE_CAST_TO_UNION 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	fi
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+    # These must be called after we do the basic CFLAGS checks and
+    # verify any possible 64-bit or similar switches are necessary
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for required early compiler flags" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for required early compiler flags... " >&6; }
+    tcl_flags=""
+
+    if ${tcl_cv_flag__isoc99_source+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <stdlib.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+char *p = (char *)strtoll; char *q = (char *)strtoull;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_flag__isoc99_source=no
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#define _ISOC99_SOURCE 1
+#include <stdlib.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+char *p = (char *)strtoll; char *q = (char *)strtoull;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_flag__isoc99_source=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_flag__isoc99_source=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+    if test "x${tcl_cv_flag__isoc99_source}" = "xyes" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define _ISOC99_SOURCE 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	tcl_flags="$tcl_flags _ISOC99_SOURCE"
+    fi
+
+
+    if ${tcl_cv_flag__largefile64_source+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+struct stat64 buf; int i = stat64("/", &buf);
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_flag__largefile64_source=no
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#define _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE 1
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+struct stat64 buf; int i = stat64("/", &buf);
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_flag__largefile64_source=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_flag__largefile64_source=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+    if test "x${tcl_cv_flag__largefile64_source}" = "xyes" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	tcl_flags="$tcl_flags _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE"
+    fi
+
+
+    if ${tcl_cv_flag__largefile_source64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+char *p = (char *)open64;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_flag__largefile_source64=no
+else
+  cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#define _LARGEFILE_SOURCE64 1
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+char *p = (char *)open64;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_flag__largefile_source64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_flag__largefile_source64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+    if test "x${tcl_cv_flag__largefile_source64}" = "xyes" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define _LARGEFILE_SOURCE64 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	tcl_flags="$tcl_flags _LARGEFILE_SOURCE64"
+    fi
+
+    if test "x${tcl_flags}" = "x" ; then
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: none" >&5
+$as_echo "none" >&6; }
+    else
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${tcl_flags}" >&5
+$as_echo "${tcl_flags}" >&6; }
+    fi
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for 64-bit integer type" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for 64-bit integer type... " >&6; }
+    if ${tcl_cv_type_64bit+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	tcl_cv_type_64bit=none
+	# See if the compiler knows natively about __int64
+	cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+__int64 value = (__int64) 0;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_type_64bit=__int64
+else
+  tcl_type_64bit="long long"
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+	# See if we should use long anyway  Note that we substitute in the
+	# type that is our current guess for a 64-bit type inside this check
+	# program, so it should be modified only carefully...
+        cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+switch (0) {
+            case 1: case (sizeof(${tcl_type_64bit})==sizeof(long)): ;
+        }
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_type_64bit=${tcl_type_64bit}
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+    if test "${tcl_cv_type_64bit}" = none ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define TCL_WIDE_INT_IS_LONG 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: using long" >&5
+$as_echo "using long" >&6; }
+    elif test "${tcl_cv_type_64bit}" = "__int64" \
+		-a "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	# TEA specific: We actually want to use the default tcl.h checks in
+	# this case to handle both TCL_WIDE_INT_TYPE and TCL_LL_MODIFIER*
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: using Tcl header defaults" >&5
+$as_echo "using Tcl header defaults" >&6; }
+    else
+
+cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define TCL_WIDE_INT_TYPE ${tcl_cv_type_64bit}
+_ACEOF
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${tcl_cv_type_64bit}" >&5
+$as_echo "${tcl_cv_type_64bit}" >&6; }
+
+	# Now check for auxiliary declarations
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for struct dirent64" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for struct dirent64... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_struct_dirent64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+struct dirent64 p;
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_struct_dirent64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_struct_dirent64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_struct_dirent64" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_struct_dirent64" >&6; }
+	if test "x${tcl_cv_struct_dirent64}" = "xyes" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	fi
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for struct stat64" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for struct stat64... " >&6; }
+if ${tcl_cv_struct_stat64+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+struct stat64 p;
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_struct_stat64=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_struct_stat64=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $tcl_cv_struct_stat64" >&5
+$as_echo "$tcl_cv_struct_stat64" >&6; }
+	if test "x${tcl_cv_struct_stat64}" = "xyes" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define HAVE_STRUCT_STAT64 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	fi
+
+	for ac_func in open64 lseek64
+do :
+  as_ac_var=`$as_echo "ac_cv_func_$ac_func" | $as_tr_sh`
+ac_fn_c_check_func "$LINENO" "$ac_func" "$as_ac_var"
+if eval test \"x\$"$as_ac_var"\" = x"yes"; then :
+  cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
+#define `$as_echo "HAVE_$ac_func" | $as_tr_cpp` 1
+_ACEOF
+
+fi
+done
+
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for off64_t" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for off64_t... " >&6; }
+	if ${tcl_cv_type_off64_t+:} false; then :
+  $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
+else
+
+	    cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+#include <sys/types.h>
+int
+main ()
+{
+off64_t offset;
+
+  ;
+  return 0;
+}
+_ACEOF
+if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then :
+  tcl_cv_type_off64_t=yes
+else
+  tcl_cv_type_off64_t=no
+fi
+rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext
+fi
+
+			if test "x${tcl_cv_type_off64_t}" = "xyes" && \
+	        test "x${ac_cv_func_lseek64}" = "xyes" && \
+	        test "x${ac_cv_func_open64}" = "xyes" ; then
+
+$as_echo "#define HAVE_TYPE_OFF64_T 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5
+$as_echo "yes" >&6; }
+	else
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+	fi
+    fi
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Set the default compiler switches based on the --enable-symbols option.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for build with symbols" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for build with symbols... " >&6; }
+    # Check whether --enable-symbols was given.
+if test "${enable_symbols+set}" = set; then :
+  enableval=$enable_symbols; tcl_ok=$enableval
+else
+  tcl_ok=no
+fi
+
+    DBGX=""
+    if test "$tcl_ok" = "no"; then
+	CFLAGS_DEFAULT="${CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE} -DNDEBUG"
+	LDFLAGS_DEFAULT="${LDFLAGS_OPTIMIZE}"
+	{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
+$as_echo "no" >&6; }
+    else
+	CFLAGS_DEFAULT="${CFLAGS_DEBUG}"
+	LDFLAGS_DEFAULT="${LDFLAGS_DEBUG}"
+	if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes (standard debugging)" >&5
+$as_echo "yes (standard debugging)" >&6; }
+	fi
+    fi
+    # TEA specific:
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" ; then
+	LDFLAGS_DEFAULT="${LDFLAGS}"
+    fi
+
+
+
+
+    if test "$tcl_ok" = "mem" -o "$tcl_ok" = "all"; then
+
+$as_echo "#define TCL_MEM_DEBUG 1" >>confdefs.h
+
+    fi
+
+    if test "$tcl_ok" != "yes" -a "$tcl_ok" != "no"; then
+	if test "$tcl_ok" = "all"; then
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: enabled symbols mem debugging" >&5
+$as_echo "enabled symbols mem debugging" >&6; }
+	else
+	    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: enabled $tcl_ok debugging" >&5
+$as_echo "enabled $tcl_ok debugging" >&6; }
+	fi
+    fi
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# This macro generates a line to use when building a library.  It
+# depends on values set by the TEA_ENABLE_SHARED, TEA_ENABLE_SYMBOLS,
+# and TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG macros above.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" != "yes"; then
+	MAKE_STATIC_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} -out:\$@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS)"
+	MAKE_SHARED_LIB="\${SHLIB_LD} \${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} \${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT} -out:\$@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS)"
+	cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext
+/* end confdefs.h.  */
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1400
+print("manifest needed")
+#endif
+
+_ACEOF
+if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 |
+  $EGREP "manifest needed" >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
+
+	# Could do a CHECK_PROG for mt, but should always be with MSVC8+
+	VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL="if test -f \$@.manifest ; then mt.exe -nologo -manifest \$@.manifest -outputresource:\$@\;2 ; fi"
+	VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE="if test -f \$@.manifest ; then mt.exe -nologo -manifest \$@.manifest -outputresource:\$@\;1 ; fi"
+	MAKE_SHARED_LIB="${MAKE_SHARED_LIB} ; ${VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL}"
+
+    CLEANFILES="$CLEANFILES *.manifest"
+
+
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+
+	MAKE_STUB_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} -nodefaultlib -out:\$@ \$(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)"
+    else
+	MAKE_STATIC_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} \$@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS)"
+	MAKE_SHARED_LIB="\${SHLIB_LD} -o \$@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS) \${SHLIB_LD_LIBS}"
+	MAKE_STUB_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} \$@ \$(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)"
+    fi
+
+    if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	MAKE_LIB="${MAKE_SHARED_LIB} "
+    else
+	MAKE_LIB="${MAKE_STATIC_LIB} "
+    fi
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Shared libraries and static libraries have different names.
+    # Use the double eval to make sure any variables in the suffix is
+    # substituted. (@@@ Might not be necessary anymore)
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	    # We force the unresolved linking of symbols that are really in
+	    # the private libraries of Tcl and Tk.
+	    if test x"${TK_BIN_DIR}" != x ; then
+		SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} \"`${CYGPATH} ${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}`\""
+	    fi
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} \"`${CYGPATH} ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}`\""
+	    if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} -static-libgcc"
+	    fi
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	else
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	    if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		PKG_LIB_FILE=lib${PKG_LIB_FILE}
+	    fi
+	fi
+	# Some packages build their own stubs libraries
+	eval eval "PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE=${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}stub${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+	    PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE=lib${PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE}
+	fi
+	# These aren't needed on Windows (either MSVC or gcc)
+	RANLIB=:
+	RANLIB_STUB=:
+    else
+	RANLIB_STUB="${RANLIB}"
+	if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} ${TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+	    if test x"${TK_BIN_DIR}" != x ; then
+		SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} ${TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+	    fi
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=lib${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	    RANLIB=:
+	else
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=lib${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	fi
+	# Some packages build their own stubs libraries
+	eval eval "PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE=lib${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}stub${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+    fi
+
+    # These are escaped so that only CFLAGS is picked up at configure time.
+    # The other values will be substituted at make time.
+    CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} \${CFLAGS_DEFAULT} \${CFLAGS_WARNING}"
+    if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} \${SHLIB_CFLAGS}"
+    fi
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Determine the name of the tclsh and/or wish executables in the
+# Tcl and Tk build directories or the location they were installed
+# into. These paths are used to support running test cases only,
+# the Makefile should not be making use of these paths to generate
+# a pkgIndex.tcl file or anything else at extension build time.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for tclsh" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for tclsh... " >&6; }
+    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        # tclConfig.sh is in Tcl build directory
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+          if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}s${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}s${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}"
+          fi
+        else
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh"
+        fi
+    else
+        # tclConfig.sh is in install location
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+        else
+            TCLSH_PROG="tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}.${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}"
+        fi
+        list="`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../bin 2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/..     2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TCL_PREFIX}/bin     2>/dev/null`"
+        for i in $list ; do
+            if test -f "$i/${TCLSH_PROG}" ; then
+                REAL_TCL_BIN_DIR="`cd "$i"; pwd`/"
+                break
+            fi
+        done
+        TCLSH_PROG="${REAL_TCL_BIN_DIR}${TCLSH_PROG}"
+    fi
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${TCLSH_PROG}" >&5
+$as_echo "${TCLSH_PROG}" >&6; }
+
+
+
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for wish" >&5
+$as_echo_n "checking for wish... " >&6; }
+    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        # tkConfig.sh is in Tk build directory
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+          if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}s${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}$s{EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}"
+          fi
+        else
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish"
+        fi
+    else
+        # tkConfig.sh is in install location
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+            WISH_PROG="wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+        else
+            WISH_PROG="wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}.${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}"
+        fi
+        list="`ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/../bin 2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/..     2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TK_PREFIX}/bin     2>/dev/null`"
+        for i in $list ; do
+            if test -f "$i/${WISH_PROG}" ; then
+                REAL_TK_BIN_DIR="`cd "$i"; pwd`/"
+                break
+            fi
+        done
+        WISH_PROG="${REAL_TK_BIN_DIR}${WISH_PROG}"
+    fi
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: ${WISH_PROG}" >&5
+$as_echo "${WISH_PROG}" >&6; }
+
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Setup a *Config.sh.in configuration file.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # These are for tkbltConfig.sh
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    # pkglibdir must be a fully qualified path and (not ${exec_prefix}/lib)
+    eval pkglibdir="${libdir}/tkblt${PACKAGE_VERSION}"
+    if test "${TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK}" = "ok"; then
+	eval tkblt_LIB_FLAG="-ltkblt${PACKAGE_VERSION}${DBGX}"
+	eval tkblt_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkbltstub${PACKAGE_VERSION}${DBGX}"
+    else
+	eval tkblt_LIB_FLAG="-ltkblt`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`${DBGX}"
+	eval tkblt_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-ltkbltstub`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`${DBGX}"
+    fi
+    tkblt_BUILD_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH $(pwd)` ${tkblt_LIB_FLAG}"
+    tkblt_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH ${pkglibdir}` ${tkblt_LIB_FLAG}"
+    tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH $(pwd)` ${tkblt_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+    tkblt_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH ${pkglibdir}` ${tkblt_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+    tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH="`$CYGPATH $(pwd)`/${PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+    tkblt_STUB_LIB_PATH="`$CYGPATH ${pkglibdir}`/${PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+#AC_SUBST(SAMPLE_VAR)
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Specify files to substitute AC variables in. You may alternatively
+# have a special pkgIndex.tcl.in or other files which require
+# substituting the AC variables in. Include these here.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ac_config_files="$ac_config_files Makefile pkgIndex.tcl"
+
+ac_config_files="$ac_config_files tkbltConfig.sh"
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Finally, substitute all of the various values into the files
+# specified with AC_CONFIG_FILES.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+cat >confcache <<\_ACEOF
+# This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure
+# tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure
+# scripts and configure runs, see configure's option --config-cache.
+# It is not useful on other systems.  If it contains results you don't
+# want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
+#
+# config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it
+# the --recheck option to rerun configure.
+#
+# `ac_cv_env_foo' variables (set or unset) will be overridden when
+# loading this file, other *unset* `ac_cv_foo' will be assigned the
+# following values.
+
+_ACEOF
+
+# The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values,
+# but we know of no workaround that is simple, portable, and efficient.
+# So, we kill variables containing newlines.
+# Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly,
+# and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars.
+(
+  for ac_var in `(set) 2>&1 | sed -n 's/^\([a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=.*/\1/p'`; do
+    eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
+    case $ac_val in #(
+    *${as_nl}*)
+      case $ac_var in #(
+      *_cv_*) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&2;} ;;
+      esac
+      case $ac_var in #(
+      _ | IFS | as_nl) ;; #(
+      BASH_ARGV | BASH_SOURCE) eval $ac_var= ;; #(
+      *) { eval $ac_var=; unset $ac_var;} ;;
+      esac ;;
+    esac
+  done
+
+  (set) 2>&1 |
+    case $as_nl`(ac_space=' '; set) 2>&1` in #(
+    *${as_nl}ac_space=\ *)
+      # `set' does not quote correctly, so add quotes: double-quote
+      # substitution turns \\\\ into \\, and sed turns \\ into \.
+      sed -n \
+	"s/'/'\\\\''/g;
+	  s/^\\([_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1='\\2'/p"
+      ;; #(
+    *)
+      # `set' quotes correctly as required by POSIX, so do not add quotes.
+      sed -n "/^[_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*=/p"
+      ;;
+    esac |
+    sort
+) |
+  sed '
+     /^ac_cv_env_/b end
+     t clear
+     :clear
+     s/^\([^=]*\)=\(.*[{}].*\)$/test "${\1+set}" = set || &/
+     t end
+     s/^\([^=]*\)=\(.*\)$/\1=${\1=\2}/
+     :end' >>confcache
+if diff "$cache_file" confcache >/dev/null 2>&1; then :; else
+  if test -w "$cache_file"; then
+    if test "x$cache_file" != "x/dev/null"; then
+      { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: updating cache $cache_file" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: updating cache $cache_file" >&6;}
+      if test ! -f "$cache_file" || test -h "$cache_file"; then
+	cat confcache >"$cache_file"
+      else
+        case $cache_file in #(
+        */* | ?:*)
+	  mv -f confcache "$cache_file"$$ &&
+	  mv -f "$cache_file"$$ "$cache_file" ;; #(
+        *)
+	  mv -f confcache "$cache_file" ;;
+	esac
+      fi
+    fi
+  else
+    { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" >&6;}
+  fi
+fi
+rm -f confcache
+
+test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix=$ac_default_prefix
+# Let make expand exec_prefix.
+test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix='${prefix}'
+
+# Transform confdefs.h into DEFS.
+# Protect against shell expansion while executing Makefile rules.
+# Protect against Makefile macro expansion.
+#
+# If the first sed substitution is executed (which looks for macros that
+# take arguments), then branch to the quote section.  Otherwise,
+# look for a macro that doesn't take arguments.
+ac_script='
+:mline
+/\\$/{
+ N
+ s,\\\n,,
+ b mline
+}
+t clear
+:clear
+s/^[	 ]*#[	 ]*define[	 ][	 ]*\([^	 (][^	 (]*([^)]*)\)[	 ]*\(.*\)/-D\1=\2/g
+t quote
+s/^[	 ]*#[	 ]*define[	 ][	 ]*\([^	 ][^	 ]*\)[	 ]*\(.*\)/-D\1=\2/g
+t quote
+b any
+:quote
+s/[	 `~#$^&*(){}\\|;'\''"<>?]/\\&/g
+s/\[/\\&/g
+s/\]/\\&/g
+s/\$/$$/g
+H
+:any
+${
+	g
+	s/^\n//
+	s/\n/ /g
+	p
+}
+'
+DEFS=`sed -n "$ac_script" confdefs.h`
+
+
+ac_libobjs=
+ac_ltlibobjs=
+U=
+for ac_i in : $LIBOBJS; do test "x$ac_i" = x: && continue
+  # 1. Remove the extension, and $U if already installed.
+  ac_script='s/\$U\././;s/\.o$//;s/\.obj$//'
+  ac_i=`$as_echo "$ac_i" | sed "$ac_script"`
+  # 2. Prepend LIBOBJDIR.  When used with automake>=1.10 LIBOBJDIR
+  #    will be set to the directory where LIBOBJS objects are built.
+  as_fn_append ac_libobjs " \${LIBOBJDIR}$ac_i\$U.$ac_objext"
+  as_fn_append ac_ltlibobjs " \${LIBOBJDIR}$ac_i"'$U.lo'
+done
+LIBOBJS=$ac_libobjs
+
+LTLIBOBJS=$ac_ltlibobjs
+
+
+
+CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} ${CPPFLAGS}"; CPPFLAGS=""
+
+: "${CONFIG_STATUS=./config.status}"
+ac_write_fail=0
+ac_clean_files_save=$ac_clean_files
+ac_clean_files="$ac_clean_files $CONFIG_STATUS"
+{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating $CONFIG_STATUS" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: creating $CONFIG_STATUS" >&6;}
+as_write_fail=0
+cat >$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ASEOF || as_write_fail=1
+#! $SHELL
+# Generated by $as_me.
+# Run this file to recreate the current configuration.
+# Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging
+# configure, is in config.log if it exists.
+
+debug=false
+ac_cs_recheck=false
+ac_cs_silent=false
+
+SHELL=\${CONFIG_SHELL-$SHELL}
+export SHELL
+_ASEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ASEOF || as_write_fail=1
+## -------------------- ##
+## M4sh Initialization. ##
+## -------------------- ##
+
+# Be more Bourne compatible
+DUALCASE=1; export DUALCASE # for MKS sh
+if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
+  emulate sh
+  NULLCMD=:
+  # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which
+  # is contrary to our usage.  Disable this feature.
+  alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"'
+  setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
+else
+  case `(set -o) 2>/dev/null` in #(
+  *posix*) :
+    set -o posix ;; #(
+  *) :
+     ;;
+esac
+fi
+
+
+as_nl='
+'
+export as_nl
+# Printing a long string crashes Solaris 7 /usr/bin/printf.
+as_echo='\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'
+as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
+as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
+# Prefer a ksh shell builtin over an external printf program on Solaris,
+# but without wasting forks for bash or zsh.
+if test -z "$BASH_VERSION$ZSH_VERSION" \
+    && (test "X`print -r -- $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
+  as_echo='print -r --'
+  as_echo_n='print -rn --'
+elif (test "X`printf %s $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
+  as_echo='printf %s\n'
+  as_echo_n='printf %s'
+else
+  if test "X`(/usr/ucb/echo -n -n $as_echo) 2>/dev/null`" = "X-n $as_echo"; then
+    as_echo_body='eval /usr/ucb/echo -n "$1$as_nl"'
+    as_echo_n='/usr/ucb/echo -n'
+  else
+    as_echo_body='eval expr "X$1" : "X\\(.*\\)"'
+    as_echo_n_body='eval
+      arg=$1;
+      case $arg in #(
+      *"$as_nl"*)
+	expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)$as_nl";
+	arg=`expr "X$arg" : ".*$as_nl\\(.*\\)"`;;
+      esac;
+      expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)" | tr -d "$as_nl"
+    '
+    export as_echo_n_body
+    as_echo_n='sh -c $as_echo_n_body as_echo'
+  fi
+  export as_echo_body
+  as_echo='sh -c $as_echo_body as_echo'
+fi
+
+# The user is always right.
+if test "${PATH_SEPARATOR+set}" != set; then
+  PATH_SEPARATOR=:
+  (PATH='/bin;/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 && {
+    (PATH='/bin:/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 ||
+      PATH_SEPARATOR=';'
+  }
+fi
+
+
+# IFS
+# We need space, tab and new line, in precisely that order.  Quoting is
+# there to prevent editors from complaining about space-tab.
+# (If _AS_PATH_WALK were called with IFS unset, it would disable word
+# splitting by setting IFS to empty value.)
+IFS=" ""	$as_nl"
+
+# Find who we are.  Look in the path if we contain no directory separator.
+as_myself=
+case $0 in #((
+  *[\\/]* ) as_myself=$0 ;;
+  *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
+for as_dir in $PATH
+do
+  IFS=$as_save_IFS
+  test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
+    test -r "$as_dir/$0" && as_myself=$as_dir/$0 && break
+  done
+IFS=$as_save_IFS
+
+     ;;
+esac
+# We did not find ourselves, most probably we were run as `sh COMMAND'
+# in which case we are not to be found in the path.
+if test "x$as_myself" = x; then
+  as_myself=$0
+fi
+if test ! -f "$as_myself"; then
+  $as_echo "$as_myself: error: cannot find myself; rerun with an absolute file name" >&2
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+# Unset variables that we do not need and which cause bugs (e.g. in
+# pre-3.0 UWIN ksh).  But do not cause bugs in bash 2.01; the "|| exit 1"
+# suppresses any "Segmentation fault" message there.  '((' could
+# trigger a bug in pdksh 5.2.14.
+for as_var in BASH_ENV ENV MAIL MAILPATH
+do eval test x\${$as_var+set} = xset \
+  && ( (unset $as_var) || exit 1) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset $as_var || :
+done
+PS1='$ '
+PS2='> '
+PS4='+ '
+
+# NLS nuisances.
+LC_ALL=C
+export LC_ALL
+LANGUAGE=C
+export LANGUAGE
+
+# CDPATH.
+(unset CDPATH) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset CDPATH
+
+
+# as_fn_error STATUS ERROR [LINENO LOG_FD]
+# ----------------------------------------
+# Output "`basename $0`: error: ERROR" to stderr. If LINENO and LOG_FD are
+# provided, also output the error to LOG_FD, referencing LINENO. Then exit the
+# script with STATUS, using 1 if that was 0.
+as_fn_error ()
+{
+  as_status=$1; test $as_status -eq 0 && as_status=1
+  if test "$4"; then
+    as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$3"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
+    $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: $2" >&$4
+  fi
+  $as_echo "$as_me: error: $2" >&2
+  as_fn_exit $as_status
+} # as_fn_error
+
+
+# as_fn_set_status STATUS
+# -----------------------
+# Set $? to STATUS, without forking.
+as_fn_set_status ()
+{
+  return $1
+} # as_fn_set_status
+
+# as_fn_exit STATUS
+# -----------------
+# Exit the shell with STATUS, even in a "trap 0" or "set -e" context.
+as_fn_exit ()
+{
+  set +e
+  as_fn_set_status $1
+  exit $1
+} # as_fn_exit
+
+# as_fn_unset VAR
+# ---------------
+# Portably unset VAR.
+as_fn_unset ()
+{
+  { eval $1=; unset $1;}
+}
+as_unset=as_fn_unset
+# as_fn_append VAR VALUE
+# ----------------------
+# Append the text in VALUE to the end of the definition contained in VAR. Take
+# advantage of any shell optimizations that allow amortized linear growth over
+# repeated appends, instead of the typical quadratic growth present in naive
+# implementations.
+if (eval "as_var=1; as_var+=2; test x\$as_var = x12") 2>/dev/null; then :
+  eval 'as_fn_append ()
+  {
+    eval $1+=\$2
+  }'
+else
+  as_fn_append ()
+  {
+    eval $1=\$$1\$2
+  }
+fi # as_fn_append
+
+# as_fn_arith ARG...
+# ------------------
+# Perform arithmetic evaluation on the ARGs, and store the result in the
+# global $as_val. Take advantage of shells that can avoid forks. The arguments
+# must be portable across $(()) and expr.
+if (eval "test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2") 2>/dev/null; then :
+  eval 'as_fn_arith ()
+  {
+    as_val=$(( $* ))
+  }'
+else
+  as_fn_arith ()
+  {
+    as_val=`expr "$@" || test $? -eq 1`
+  }
+fi # as_fn_arith
+
+
+if expr a : '\(a\)' >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
+   test "X`expr 00001 : '.*\(...\)'`" = X001; then
+  as_expr=expr
+else
+  as_expr=false
+fi
+
+if (basename -- /) >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`basename -- / 2>&1`" = "X/"; then
+  as_basename=basename
+else
+  as_basename=false
+fi
+
+if (as_dir=`dirname -- /` && test "X$as_dir" = X/) >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  as_dirname=dirname
+else
+  as_dirname=false
+fi
+
+as_me=`$as_basename -- "$0" ||
+$as_expr X/"$0" : '.*/\([^/][^/]*\)/*$' \| \
+	 X"$0" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
+	 X"$0" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
+$as_echo X/"$0" |
+    sed '/^.*\/\([^/][^/]*\)\/*$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\/\(\/\/\)$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\/\(\/\).*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  s/.*/./; q'`
+
+# Avoid depending upon Character Ranges.
+as_cr_letters='abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'
+as_cr_LETTERS='ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'
+as_cr_Letters=$as_cr_letters$as_cr_LETTERS
+as_cr_digits='0123456789'
+as_cr_alnum=$as_cr_Letters$as_cr_digits
+
+ECHO_C= ECHO_N= ECHO_T=
+case `echo -n x` in #(((((
+-n*)
+  case `echo 'xy\c'` in
+  *c*) ECHO_T='	';;	# ECHO_T is single tab character.
+  xy)  ECHO_C='\c';;
+  *)   echo `echo ksh88 bug on AIX 6.1` > /dev/null
+       ECHO_T='	';;
+  esac;;
+*)
+  ECHO_N='-n';;
+esac
+
+rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.file
+if test -d conf$$.dir; then
+  rm -f conf$$.dir/conf$$.file
+else
+  rm -f conf$$.dir
+  mkdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
+fi
+if (echo >conf$$.file) 2>/dev/null; then
+  if ln -s conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
+    as_ln_s='ln -s'
+    # ... but there are two gotchas:
+    # 1) On MSYS, both `ln -s file dir' and `ln file dir' fail.
+    # 2) DJGPP < 2.04 has no symlinks; `ln -s' creates a wrapper executable.
+    # In both cases, we have to default to `cp -pR'.
+    ln -s conf$$.file conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null && test ! -f conf$$.exe ||
+      as_ln_s='cp -pR'
+  elif ln conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
+    as_ln_s=ln
+  else
+    as_ln_s='cp -pR'
+  fi
+else
+  as_ln_s='cp -pR'
+fi
+rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.dir/conf$$.file conf$$.file
+rmdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
+
+
+# as_fn_mkdir_p
+# -------------
+# Create "$as_dir" as a directory, including parents if necessary.
+as_fn_mkdir_p ()
+{
+
+  case $as_dir in #(
+  -*) as_dir=./$as_dir;;
+  esac
+  test -d "$as_dir" || eval $as_mkdir_p || {
+    as_dirs=
+    while :; do
+      case $as_dir in #(
+      *\'*) as_qdir=`$as_echo "$as_dir" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; #'(
+      *) as_qdir=$as_dir;;
+      esac
+      as_dirs="'$as_qdir' $as_dirs"
+      as_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_dir" ||
+$as_expr X"$as_dir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
+	 X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
+	 X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
+	 X"$as_dir" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
+$as_echo X"$as_dir" |
+    sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\).*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  s/.*/./; q'`
+      test -d "$as_dir" && break
+    done
+    test -z "$as_dirs" || eval "mkdir $as_dirs"
+  } || test -d "$as_dir" || as_fn_error $? "cannot create directory $as_dir"
+
+
+} # as_fn_mkdir_p
+if mkdir -p . 2>/dev/null; then
+  as_mkdir_p='mkdir -p "$as_dir"'
+else
+  test -d ./-p && rmdir ./-p
+  as_mkdir_p=false
+fi
+
+
+# as_fn_executable_p FILE
+# -----------------------
+# Test if FILE is an executable regular file.
+as_fn_executable_p ()
+{
+  test -f "$1" && test -x "$1"
+} # as_fn_executable_p
+as_test_x='test -x'
+as_executable_p=as_fn_executable_p
+
+# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid CPP name.
+as_tr_cpp="eval sed 'y%*$as_cr_letters%P$as_cr_LETTERS%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
+
+# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid variable name.
+as_tr_sh="eval sed 'y%*+%pp%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
+
+
+exec 6>&1
+## ----------------------------------- ##
+## Main body of $CONFIG_STATUS script. ##
+## ----------------------------------- ##
+_ASEOF
+test $as_write_fail = 0 && chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+# Save the log message, to keep $0 and so on meaningful, and to
+# report actual input values of CONFIG_FILES etc. instead of their
+# values after options handling.
+ac_log="
+This file was extended by tkblt $as_me 3.2, which was
+generated by GNU Autoconf 2.69.  Invocation command line was
+
+  CONFIG_FILES    = $CONFIG_FILES
+  CONFIG_HEADERS  = $CONFIG_HEADERS
+  CONFIG_LINKS    = $CONFIG_LINKS
+  CONFIG_COMMANDS = $CONFIG_COMMANDS
+  $ $0 $@
+
+on `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`
+"
+
+_ACEOF
+
+case $ac_config_files in *"
+"*) set x $ac_config_files; shift; ac_config_files=$*;;
+esac
+
+
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+# Files that config.status was made for.
+config_files="$ac_config_files"
+
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+ac_cs_usage="\
+\`$as_me' instantiates files and other configuration actions
+from templates according to the current configuration.  Unless the files
+and actions are specified as TAGs, all are instantiated by default.
+
+Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [TAG]...
+
+  -h, --help       print this help, then exit
+  -V, --version    print version number and configuration settings, then exit
+      --config     print configuration, then exit
+  -q, --quiet, --silent
+                   do not print progress messages
+  -d, --debug      don't remove temporary files
+      --recheck    update $as_me by reconfiguring in the same conditions
+      --file=FILE[:TEMPLATE]
+                   instantiate the configuration file FILE
+
+Configuration files:
+$config_files
+
+Report bugs to the package provider."
+
+_ACEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+ac_cs_config="`$as_echo "$ac_configure_args" | sed 's/^ //; s/[\\""\`\$]/\\\\&/g'`"
+ac_cs_version="\\
+tkblt config.status 3.2
+configured by $0, generated by GNU Autoconf 2.69,
+  with options \\"\$ac_cs_config\\"
+
+Copyright (C) 2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+This config.status script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it."
+
+ac_pwd='$ac_pwd'
+srcdir='$srcdir'
+test -n "\$AWK" || AWK=awk
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+# The default lists apply if the user does not specify any file.
+ac_need_defaults=:
+while test $# != 0
+do
+  case $1 in
+  --*=?*)
+    ac_option=`expr "X$1" : 'X\([^=]*\)='`
+    ac_optarg=`expr "X$1" : 'X[^=]*=\(.*\)'`
+    ac_shift=:
+    ;;
+  --*=)
+    ac_option=`expr "X$1" : 'X\([^=]*\)='`
+    ac_optarg=
+    ac_shift=:
+    ;;
+  *)
+    ac_option=$1
+    ac_optarg=$2
+    ac_shift=shift
+    ;;
+  esac
+
+  case $ac_option in
+  # Handling of the options.
+  -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r)
+    ac_cs_recheck=: ;;
+  --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v | -V )
+    $as_echo "$ac_cs_version"; exit ;;
+  --config | --confi | --conf | --con | --co | --c )
+    $as_echo "$ac_cs_config"; exit ;;
+  --debug | --debu | --deb | --de | --d | -d )
+    debug=: ;;
+  --file | --fil | --fi | --f )
+    $ac_shift
+    case $ac_optarg in
+    *\'*) ac_optarg=`$as_echo "$ac_optarg" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;;
+    '') as_fn_error $? "missing file argument" ;;
+    esac
+    as_fn_append CONFIG_FILES " '$ac_optarg'"
+    ac_need_defaults=false;;
+  --he | --h |  --help | --hel | -h )
+    $as_echo "$ac_cs_usage"; exit ;;
+  -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
+  | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil | --si | --s)
+    ac_cs_silent=: ;;
+
+  # This is an error.
+  -*) as_fn_error $? "unrecognized option: \`$1'
+Try \`$0 --help' for more information." ;;
+
+  *) as_fn_append ac_config_targets " $1"
+     ac_need_defaults=false ;;
+
+  esac
+  shift
+done
+
+ac_configure_extra_args=
+
+if $ac_cs_silent; then
+  exec 6>/dev/null
+  ac_configure_extra_args="$ac_configure_extra_args --silent"
+fi
+
+_ACEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+if \$ac_cs_recheck; then
+  set X $SHELL '$0' $ac_configure_args \$ac_configure_extra_args --no-create --no-recursion
+  shift
+  \$as_echo "running CONFIG_SHELL=$SHELL \$*" >&6
+  CONFIG_SHELL='$SHELL'
+  export CONFIG_SHELL
+  exec "\$@"
+fi
+
+_ACEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+exec 5>>config.log
+{
+  echo
+  sed 'h;s/./-/g;s/^.../## /;s/...$/ ##/;p;x;p;x' <<_ASBOX
+## Running $as_me. ##
+_ASBOX
+  $as_echo "$ac_log"
+} >&5
+
+_ACEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+
+# Handling of arguments.
+for ac_config_target in $ac_config_targets
+do
+  case $ac_config_target in
+    "Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES Makefile" ;;
+    "pkgIndex.tcl") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES pkgIndex.tcl" ;;
+    "tkbltConfig.sh") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES tkbltConfig.sh" ;;
+
+  *) as_fn_error $? "invalid argument: \`$ac_config_target'" "$LINENO" 5;;
+  esac
+done
+
+
+# If the user did not use the arguments to specify the items to instantiate,
+# then the envvar interface is used.  Set only those that are not.
+# We use the long form for the default assignment because of an extremely
+# bizarre bug on SunOS 4.1.3.
+if $ac_need_defaults; then
+  test "${CONFIG_FILES+set}" = set || CONFIG_FILES=$config_files
+fi
+
+# Have a temporary directory for convenience.  Make it in the build tree
+# simply because there is no reason against having it here, and in addition,
+# creating and moving files from /tmp can sometimes cause problems.
+# Hook for its removal unless debugging.
+# Note that there is a small window in which the directory will not be cleaned:
+# after its creation but before its name has been assigned to `$tmp'.
+$debug ||
+{
+  tmp= ac_tmp=
+  trap 'exit_status=$?
+  : "${ac_tmp:=$tmp}"
+  { test ! -d "$ac_tmp" || rm -fr "$ac_tmp"; } && exit $exit_status
+' 0
+  trap 'as_fn_exit 1' 1 2 13 15
+}
+# Create a (secure) tmp directory for tmp files.
+
+{
+  tmp=`(umask 077 && mktemp -d "./confXXXXXX") 2>/dev/null` &&
+  test -d "$tmp"
+}  ||
+{
+  tmp=./conf$$-$RANDOM
+  (umask 077 && mkdir "$tmp")
+} || as_fn_error $? "cannot create a temporary directory in ." "$LINENO" 5
+ac_tmp=$tmp
+
+# Set up the scripts for CONFIG_FILES section.
+# No need to generate them if there are no CONFIG_FILES.
+# This happens for instance with `./config.status config.h'.
+if test -n "$CONFIG_FILES"; then
+
+
+ac_cr=`echo X | tr X '\015'`
+# On cygwin, bash can eat \r inside `` if the user requested igncr.
+# But we know of no other shell where ac_cr would be empty at this
+# point, so we can use a bashism as a fallback.
+if test "x$ac_cr" = x; then
+  eval ac_cr=\$\'\\r\'
+fi
+ac_cs_awk_cr=`$AWK 'BEGIN { print "a\rb" }' </dev/null 2>/dev/null`
+if test "$ac_cs_awk_cr" = "a${ac_cr}b"; then
+  ac_cs_awk_cr='\\r'
+else
+  ac_cs_awk_cr=$ac_cr
+fi
+
+echo 'BEGIN {' >"$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" &&
+_ACEOF
+
+
+{
+  echo "cat >conf$$subs.awk <<_ACEOF" &&
+  echo "$ac_subst_vars" | sed 's/.*/&!$&$ac_delim/' &&
+  echo "_ACEOF"
+} >conf$$subs.sh ||
+  as_fn_error $? "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
+ac_delim_num=`echo "$ac_subst_vars" | grep -c '^'`
+ac_delim='%!_!# '
+for ac_last_try in false false false false false :; do
+  . ./conf$$subs.sh ||
+    as_fn_error $? "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
+
+  ac_delim_n=`sed -n "s/.*$ac_delim\$/X/p" conf$$subs.awk | grep -c X`
+  if test $ac_delim_n = $ac_delim_num; then
+    break
+  elif $ac_last_try; then
+    as_fn_error $? "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
+  else
+    ac_delim="$ac_delim!$ac_delim _$ac_delim!! "
+  fi
+done
+rm -f conf$$subs.sh
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+cat >>"\$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" <<\\_ACAWK &&
+_ACEOF
+sed -n '
+h
+s/^/S["/; s/!.*/"]=/
+p
+g
+s/^[^!]*!//
+:repl
+t repl
+s/'"$ac_delim"'$//
+t delim
+:nl
+h
+s/\(.\{148\}\)..*/\1/
+t more1
+s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/\\n"\\/
+p
+n
+b repl
+:more1
+s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"\\/
+p
+g
+s/.\{148\}//
+t nl
+:delim
+h
+s/\(.\{148\}\)..*/\1/
+t more2
+s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"/
+p
+b
+:more2
+s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"\\/
+p
+g
+s/.\{148\}//
+t delim
+' <conf$$subs.awk | sed '
+/^[^""]/{
+  N
+  s/\n//
+}
+' >>$CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1
+rm -f conf$$subs.awk
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+_ACAWK
+cat >>"\$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" <<_ACAWK &&
+  for (key in S) S_is_set[key] = 1
+  FS = ""
+
+}
+{
+  line = $ 0
+  nfields = split(line, field, "@")
+  substed = 0
+  len = length(field[1])
+  for (i = 2; i < nfields; i++) {
+    key = field[i]
+    keylen = length(key)
+    if (S_is_set[key]) {
+      value = S[key]
+      line = substr(line, 1, len) "" value "" substr(line, len + keylen + 3)
+      len += length(value) + length(field[++i])
+      substed = 1
+    } else
+      len += 1 + keylen
+  }
+
+  print line
+}
+
+_ACAWK
+_ACEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+if sed "s/$ac_cr//" < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+  sed "s/$ac_cr\$//; s/$ac_cr/$ac_cs_awk_cr/g"
+else
+  cat
+fi < "$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" > "$ac_tmp/subs.awk" \
+  || as_fn_error $? "could not setup config files machinery" "$LINENO" 5
+_ACEOF
+
+# VPATH may cause trouble with some makes, so we remove sole $(srcdir),
+# ${srcdir} and @srcdir@ entries from VPATH if srcdir is ".", strip leading and
+# trailing colons and then remove the whole line if VPATH becomes empty
+# (actually we leave an empty line to preserve line numbers).
+if test "x$srcdir" = x.; then
+  ac_vpsub='/^[	 ]*VPATH[	 ]*=[	 ]*/{
+h
+s///
+s/^/:/
+s/[	 ]*$/:/
+s/:\$(srcdir):/:/g
+s/:\${srcdir}:/:/g
+s/:@srcdir@:/:/g
+s/^:*//
+s/:*$//
+x
+s/\(=[	 ]*\).*/\1/
+G
+s/\n//
+s/^[^=]*=[	 ]*$//
+}'
+fi
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+fi # test -n "$CONFIG_FILES"
+
+
+eval set X "  :F $CONFIG_FILES      "
+shift
+for ac_tag
+do
+  case $ac_tag in
+  :[FHLC]) ac_mode=$ac_tag; continue;;
+  esac
+  case $ac_mode$ac_tag in
+  :[FHL]*:*);;
+  :L* | :C*:*) as_fn_error $? "invalid tag \`$ac_tag'" "$LINENO" 5;;
+  :[FH]-) ac_tag=-:-;;
+  :[FH]*) ac_tag=$ac_tag:$ac_tag.in;;
+  esac
+  ac_save_IFS=$IFS
+  IFS=:
+  set x $ac_tag
+  IFS=$ac_save_IFS
+  shift
+  ac_file=$1
+  shift
+
+  case $ac_mode in
+  :L) ac_source=$1;;
+  :[FH])
+    ac_file_inputs=
+    for ac_f
+    do
+      case $ac_f in
+      -) ac_f="$ac_tmp/stdin";;
+      *) # Look for the file first in the build tree, then in the source tree
+	 # (if the path is not absolute).  The absolute path cannot be DOS-style,
+	 # because $ac_f cannot contain `:'.
+	 test -f "$ac_f" ||
+	   case $ac_f in
+	   [\\/$]*) false;;
+	   *) test -f "$srcdir/$ac_f" && ac_f="$srcdir/$ac_f";;
+	   esac ||
+	   as_fn_error 1 "cannot find input file: \`$ac_f'" "$LINENO" 5;;
+      esac
+      case $ac_f in *\'*) ac_f=`$as_echo "$ac_f" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; esac
+      as_fn_append ac_file_inputs " '$ac_f'"
+    done
+
+    # Let's still pretend it is `configure' which instantiates (i.e., don't
+    # use $as_me), people would be surprised to read:
+    #    /* config.h.  Generated by config.status.  */
+    configure_input='Generated from '`
+	  $as_echo "$*" | sed 's|^[^:]*/||;s|:[^:]*/|, |g'
+	`' by configure.'
+    if test x"$ac_file" != x-; then
+      configure_input="$ac_file.  $configure_input"
+      { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating $ac_file" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: creating $ac_file" >&6;}
+    fi
+    # Neutralize special characters interpreted by sed in replacement strings.
+    case $configure_input in #(
+    *\&* | *\|* | *\\* )
+       ac_sed_conf_input=`$as_echo "$configure_input" |
+       sed 's/[\\\\&|]/\\\\&/g'`;; #(
+    *) ac_sed_conf_input=$configure_input;;
+    esac
+
+    case $ac_tag in
+    *:-:* | *:-) cat >"$ac_tmp/stdin" \
+      || as_fn_error $? "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5 ;;
+    esac
+    ;;
+  esac
+
+  ac_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$ac_file" ||
+$as_expr X"$ac_file" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
+	 X"$ac_file" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
+	 X"$ac_file" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
+	 X"$ac_file" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
+$as_echo X"$ac_file" |
+    sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  /^X\(\/\).*/{
+	    s//\1/
+	    q
+	  }
+	  s/.*/./; q'`
+  as_dir="$ac_dir"; as_fn_mkdir_p
+  ac_builddir=.
+
+case "$ac_dir" in
+.) ac_dir_suffix= ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
+*)
+  ac_dir_suffix=/`$as_echo "$ac_dir" | sed 's|^\.[\\/]||'`
+  # A ".." for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix.
+  ac_top_builddir_sub=`$as_echo "$ac_dir_suffix" | sed 's|/[^\\/]*|/..|g;s|/||'`
+  case $ac_top_builddir_sub in
+  "") ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
+  *)  ac_top_build_prefix=$ac_top_builddir_sub/ ;;
+  esac ;;
+esac
+ac_abs_top_builddir=$ac_pwd
+ac_abs_builddir=$ac_pwd$ac_dir_suffix
+# for backward compatibility:
+ac_top_builddir=$ac_top_build_prefix
+
+case $srcdir in
+  .)  # We are building in place.
+    ac_srcdir=.
+    ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_builddir_sub
+    ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd ;;
+  [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* )  # Absolute name.
+    ac_srcdir=$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix;
+    ac_top_srcdir=$srcdir
+    ac_abs_top_srcdir=$srcdir ;;
+  *) # Relative name.
+    ac_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
+    ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir
+    ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd/$srcdir ;;
+esac
+ac_abs_srcdir=$ac_abs_top_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
+
+
+  case $ac_mode in
+  :F)
+  #
+  # CONFIG_FILE
+  #
+
+_ACEOF
+
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+# If the template does not know about datarootdir, expand it.
+# FIXME: This hack should be removed a few years after 2.60.
+ac_datarootdir_hack=; ac_datarootdir_seen=
+ac_sed_dataroot='
+/datarootdir/ {
+  p
+  q
+}
+/@datadir@/p
+/@docdir@/p
+/@infodir@/p
+/@localedir@/p
+/@mandir@/p'
+case `eval "sed -n \"\$ac_sed_dataroot\" $ac_file_inputs"` in
+*datarootdir*) ac_datarootdir_seen=yes;;
+*@datadir@*|*@docdir@*|*@infodir@*|*@localedir@*|*@mandir@*)
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: $ac_file_inputs seems to ignore the --datarootdir setting" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: $ac_file_inputs seems to ignore the --datarootdir setting" >&2;}
+_ACEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+  ac_datarootdir_hack='
+  s&@datadir@&$datadir&g
+  s&@docdir@&$docdir&g
+  s&@infodir@&$infodir&g
+  s&@localedir@&$localedir&g
+  s&@mandir@&$mandir&g
+  s&\\\${datarootdir}&$datarootdir&g' ;;
+esac
+_ACEOF
+
+# Neutralize VPATH when `$srcdir' = `.'.
+# Shell code in configure.ac might set extrasub.
+# FIXME: do we really want to maintain this feature?
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+ac_sed_extra="$ac_vpsub
+$extrasub
+_ACEOF
+cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
+:t
+/@[a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z_0-9]*@/!b
+s|@configure_input@|$ac_sed_conf_input|;t t
+s&@top_builddir@&$ac_top_builddir_sub&;t t
+s&@top_build_prefix@&$ac_top_build_prefix&;t t
+s&@srcdir@&$ac_srcdir&;t t
+s&@abs_srcdir@&$ac_abs_srcdir&;t t
+s&@top_srcdir@&$ac_top_srcdir&;t t
+s&@abs_top_srcdir@&$ac_abs_top_srcdir&;t t
+s&@builddir@&$ac_builddir&;t t
+s&@abs_builddir@&$ac_abs_builddir&;t t
+s&@abs_top_builddir@&$ac_abs_top_builddir&;t t
+$ac_datarootdir_hack
+"
+eval sed \"\$ac_sed_extra\" "$ac_file_inputs" | $AWK -f "$ac_tmp/subs.awk" \
+  >$ac_tmp/out || as_fn_error $? "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5
+
+test -z "$ac_datarootdir_hack$ac_datarootdir_seen" &&
+  { ac_out=`sed -n '/\${datarootdir}/p' "$ac_tmp/out"`; test -n "$ac_out"; } &&
+  { ac_out=`sed -n '/^[	 ]*datarootdir[	 ]*:*=/p' \
+      "$ac_tmp/out"`; test -z "$ac_out"; } &&
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: $ac_file contains a reference to the variable \`datarootdir'
+which seems to be undefined.  Please make sure it is defined" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: $ac_file contains a reference to the variable \`datarootdir'
+which seems to be undefined.  Please make sure it is defined" >&2;}
+
+  rm -f "$ac_tmp/stdin"
+  case $ac_file in
+  -) cat "$ac_tmp/out" && rm -f "$ac_tmp/out";;
+  *) rm -f "$ac_file" && mv "$ac_tmp/out" "$ac_file";;
+  esac \
+  || as_fn_error $? "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5
+ ;;
+
+
+
+  esac
+
+done # for ac_tag
+
+
+as_fn_exit 0
+_ACEOF
+ac_clean_files=$ac_clean_files_save
+
+test $ac_write_fail = 0 ||
+  as_fn_error $? "write failure creating $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
+
+
+# configure is writing to config.log, and then calls config.status.
+# config.status does its own redirection, appending to config.log.
+# Unfortunately, on DOS this fails, as config.log is still kept open
+# by configure, so config.status won't be able to write to it; its
+# output is simply discarded.  So we exec the FD to /dev/null,
+# effectively closing config.log, so it can be properly (re)opened and
+# appended to by config.status.  When coming back to configure, we
+# need to make the FD available again.
+if test "$no_create" != yes; then
+  ac_cs_success=:
+  ac_config_status_args=
+  test "$silent" = yes &&
+    ac_config_status_args="$ac_config_status_args --quiet"
+  exec 5>/dev/null
+  $SHELL $CONFIG_STATUS $ac_config_status_args || ac_cs_success=false
+  exec 5>>config.log
+  # Use ||, not &&, to avoid exiting from the if with $? = 1, which
+  # would make configure fail if this is the last instruction.
+  $ac_cs_success || as_fn_exit 1
+fi
+if test -n "$ac_unrecognized_opts" && test "$enable_option_checking" != no; then
+  { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&5
+$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&2;}
+fi
+
diff --git a/tkblt/configure.ac b/tkblt/configure.ac
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5bbfab0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/configure.ac
@@ -0,0 +1,246 @@
+#!/bin/bash -norc
+dnl	This file is an input file used by the GNU "autoconf" program to
+dnl	generate the file "configure", which is run during Tcl installation
+dnl	to configure the system for the local environment.
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Sample configure.ac for Tcl Extensions.  The only places you should
+# need to modify this file are marked by the string __CHANGE__
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# __CHANGE__
+# Set your package name and version numbers here.
+#
+# This initializes the environment with PACKAGE_NAME and PACKAGE_VERSION
+# set as provided.  These will also be added as -D defs in your Makefile
+# so you can encode the package version directly into the source files.
+# This will also define a special symbol for Windows (BUILD_<PACKAGE_NAME>
+# so that we create the export library with the dll.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_INIT([tkblt], [3.2])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Call TEA_INIT as the first TEA_ macro to set up initial vars.
+# This will define a ${TEA_PLATFORM} variable == "unix" or "windows"
+# as well as PKG_LIB_FILE and PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_INIT()
+
+AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR(tclconfig)
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Load the tclConfig.sh file
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_PATH_TCLCONFIG
+TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Load the tkConfig.sh file if necessary (Tk extension)
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_PATH_TKCONFIG
+TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Handle the --prefix=... option by defaulting to what Tcl gave.
+# Must be called after TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG and before TEA_SETUP_COMPILER.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_PREFIX
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Standard compiler checks.
+# This sets up CC by using the CC env var, or looks for gcc otherwise.
+# This also calls AC_PROG_CC and a few others to create the basic setup
+# necessary to compile executables.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_SETUP_COMPILER
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# __CHANGE__
+# Specify the C source files to compile in TEA_ADD_SOURCES,
+# public headers that need to be installed in TEA_ADD_HEADERS,
+# stub library C source files to compile in TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES,
+# and runtime Tcl library files in TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES.
+# This defines PKG(_STUB)_SOURCES, PKG(_STUB)_OBJECTS, PKG_HEADERS
+# and PKG_TCL_SOURCES.
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_ADD_SOURCES([
+tkbltChain.C
+tkbltConfig.C
+tkbltGrAxis.C
+tkbltGrAxisOp.C
+tkbltGrAxisOption.C
+tkbltGrBind.C
+tkbltGrElemOp.C
+tkbltGrElemOption.C
+tkbltGrElem.C
+tkbltGrElemBar.C
+tkbltGrElemLine.C
+tkbltGrElemLineSpline.C
+tkbltGrHairs.C
+tkbltGrHairsOp.C
+tkbltGrLegd.C
+tkbltGrLegdOp.C
+tkbltGrMarkerOp.C
+tkbltGrMarkerOption.C
+tkbltGrMarker.C
+tkbltGrMarkerLine.C
+tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.C
+tkbltGrMarkerText.C
+tkbltGrMisc.C
+tkbltGrPenOp.C
+tkbltGrPenOption.C
+tkbltGrPen.C
+tkbltGrPenBar.C
+tkbltGrPenLine.C
+tkbltGrPostscript.C
+tkbltGrPostscriptOp.C
+tkbltGrPSOutput.C
+tkbltGrText.C
+tkbltGrXAxisOp.C
+tkbltGraph.C
+tkbltGraphBar.C
+tkbltGraphLine.C
+tkbltGraphOp.C
+tkbltGraphSup.C
+tkbltInt.C
+tkbltNsUtil.C
+tkbltParse.C
+tkbltOp.C
+tkbltStubInit.c
+tkbltStubLib.C
+tkbltSwitch.C
+tkbltVecCmd.C
+tkbltVecOp.C
+tkbltVecMath.C
+tkbltVector.C
+])
+TEA_ADD_HEADERS([
+generic/tkbltVector.h
+generic/tkbltDecls.h
+])
+TEA_ADD_INCLUDES([])
+TEA_ADD_LIBS([-lstdc++])
+if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" != "yes"; then
+TEA_ADD_CFLAGS([-TP -EHsc -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS -D_USE_MATH_DEFINES])
+fi
+TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES([tkbltStubLib.C])
+TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES([library/graph.tcl])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# __CHANGE__
+#
+# You can add more files to clean if your extension creates any extra
+# files by extending CLEANFILES.
+# Add pkgIndex.tcl if it is generated in the Makefile instead of ./configure
+# and change Makefile.in to move it from CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES to BINARIES var.
+#
+# A few miscellaneous platform-specific items:
+# TEA_ADD_* any platform specific compiler/build info here.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#CLEANFILES="$CLEANFILES pkgIndex.tcl"
+if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+    # Ensure no empty if clauses
+    :
+    #TEA_ADD_SOURCES([win/winFile.c])
+    #TEA_ADD_INCLUDES([-I\"$(${CYGPATH} ${srcdir}/win)\"])
+else
+    # Ensure no empty else clauses
+    :
+    #TEA_ADD_SOURCES([unix/unixFile.c])
+    #TEA_ADD_LIBS([-lsuperfly])
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# __CHANGE__
+# Choose which headers you need.  Extension authors should try very
+# hard to only rely on the Tcl public header files.  Internal headers
+# contain private data structures and are subject to change without
+# notice.
+# This MUST be called after TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG / TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_PUBLIC_TCL_HEADERS
+TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS
+
+TEA_PUBLIC_TK_HEADERS
+TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS
+TEA_PATH_X
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Check whether --enable-threads or --disable-threads was given.
+# This auto-enables if Tcl was compiled threaded.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_ENABLE_THREADS
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# The statement below defines a collection of symbols related to
+# building as a shared library instead of a static library.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_ENABLE_SHARED
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# This macro figures out what flags to use with the compiler/linker
+# when building shared/static debug/optimized objects.  This information
+# can be taken from the tclConfig.sh file, but this figures it all out.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Set the default compiler switches based on the --enable-symbols option.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_ENABLE_SYMBOLS
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# This macro generates a line to use when building a library.  It
+# depends on values set by the TEA_ENABLE_SHARED, TEA_ENABLE_SYMBOLS,
+# and TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG macros above.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_MAKE_LIB
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Determine the name of the tclsh and/or wish executables in the
+# Tcl and Tk build directories or the location they were installed
+# into. These paths are used to support running test cases only,
+# the Makefile should not be making use of these paths to generate
+# a pkgIndex.tcl file or anything else at extension build time.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_PROG_TCLSH
+TEA_PROG_WISH
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Setup a *Config.sh.in configuration file.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TEA_EXPORT_CONFIG([tkblt])
+#AC_SUBST(SAMPLE_VAR)
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Specify files to substitute AC variables in. You may alternatively
+# have a special pkgIndex.tcl.in or other files which require
+# substituting the AC variables in. Include these here.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_CONFIG_FILES([Makefile pkgIndex.tcl])
+AC_CONFIG_FILES([tkbltConfig.sh])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Finally, substitute all of the various values into the files
+# specified with AC_CONFIG_FILES.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_OUTPUT()
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/BLT.html b/tkblt/doc/BLT.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..55e4e38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/BLT.html
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+<HTML>
+<BODY>
+<PRE>
+<!-- Manpage converted by man2html 3.0.1 -->
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2><PRE>
+       BLT is a library of extensions to the Tk library.  It adds new commands
+       and variables to the application's interpreter.
+
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>COMMANDS</H2><PRE>
+       The following commands are  added  to  the  interpreter  from  the  BLT
+       library:
+
+       <B>graph</B>          A 2D plotting widget.  Plots two variable data in a win-
+                      dow with an optional legend and annotations.   It has of
+                      several  components; coordinate axes, crosshairs, a leg-
+                      end, and a collection of elements and tags.
+
+       <B>barchart</B>       A barchart widget.  Plots two-variable data as rectangu-
+                      lar bars in a window.  The x-coordinate values designate
+                      the position of the bar along the x-axis, while  the  y-
+                      coordinate values designate the magnitude.  The <B>barchart</B>
+                      widget  has  of  several  components;  coordinate  axes,
+                      crosshairs,  a  legend, and a collection of elements and
+                      tags.
+
+       <B>vector</B>         Creates a vector of floating point values.  The vector's
+                      components  can  be manipulated in three ways: through a
+                      Tcl array variable, a Tcl command, or the C API.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>ADDING BLT TO YOUR APPLICATIONS</H2><PRE>
+       It's easy to add BLT to an existing Tk application.   BLT  requires  no
+       patches  or  edits  to the Tcl or Tk libraries.  To add BLT, simply add
+       the following code snippet to your application's tkAppInit.c file.
+
+       if (Tkblt_Init(interp) != TCL_OK) {
+
+           return TCL_ERROR;
+
+       }
+
+       Recompile and link with the tkblt library and that's it.
+
+       Alternately, you can dynamically load tkblt,  simply  by  invoking  the
+       command
+
+       % package require tkblt
+
+       from your Tcl script.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>BUGS</H2><PRE>
+       Send bug reports, requests, suggestions, etc. to wjoye@cfa.harvard.edu
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>KEYWORDS</H2><PRE>
+       BLT
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<ADDRESS>
+Man(1) output converted with
+<a href="http://www.oac.uci.edu/indiv/ehood/man2html.html">man2html</a>
+</ADDRESS>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/BLT.n b/tkblt/doc/BLT.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f63aa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/BLT.n
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+'\"
+'\" Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+'\" This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+'\" available under the same terms.
+'\"
+'\" Copyright 1991-1997 by Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies.
+'\"
+'\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+'\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+'\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that the
+'\" copyright notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting documentation,
+'\" and that the names of Lucent Technologies any of their entities not be used
+'\" in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
+'\" without specific, written prior permission.
+'\"
+'\" Lucent Technologies disclaims all warranties with regard to this software,
+'\" including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness.  In no event
+'\" shall Lucent Technologies be liable for any special, indirect or
+'\" consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use,
+'\" data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other
+'\" tortuous action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance
+'\" of this software.  
+'\"
+.TH intro n BLT_VERSION BLT "BLT Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+BLT \- Introduction to the BLT library
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+BLT is a library of extensions to the Tk library.  It adds new
+commands and variables to the application's interpreter.
+.LP
+.SH COMMANDS
+The following commands are added to the interpreter from the BLT library:
+.TP 15
+\fBgraph\fR 
+A 2D plotting widget.  Plots two variable data in a window with an optional 
+legend and annotations.   It has of several components; coordinate axes, 
+crosshairs, a legend, and a collection of elements and tags.
+.TP 15
+\fBbarchart\fR 
+A barchart widget.  Plots two-variable data as rectangular bars in a 
+window.  The x-coordinate values designate the position of the bar along 
+the x-axis, while the y-coordinate values designate the magnitude.
+The \fBbarchart\fR widget has of several components; coordinate axes, 
+crosshairs, a legend, and a collection of elements and tags.
+.TP 15
+\fBvector\fR 
+Creates a vector of floating point values.  The vector's components
+can be manipulated in three ways: through a Tcl array variable, a Tcl
+command, or the C API.
+.SH ADDING BLT TO YOUR APPLICATIONS
+It's easy to add BLT to an existing Tk application.  BLT requires no 
+patches or edits to the Tcl or Tk libraries.  To add BLT, simply add the 
+following code snippet to your application's tkAppInit.c file.  
+.PP
+if (Tkblt_Init(interp) != TCL_OK) {
+.PP
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+.PP
+}
+.TP 15
+Recompile and link with the tkblt library and that's it.
+.PP
+Alternately, you can dynamically load tkblt, simply by invoking the
+command
+.PP
+% package require tkblt
+.PP
+from your Tcl script.
+.SH BUGS
+Send bug reports, requests, suggestions, etc. to 
+wjoye@cfa.harvard.edu
+.SH KEYWORDS
+BLT
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/barchart.html b/tkblt/doc/barchart.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f04d25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/barchart.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1640 @@
+<HTML>
+<BODY>
+<PRE>
+<!-- Manpage converted by man2html 3.0.1 -->
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2><PRE>
+       <B>barchart</B> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2><PRE>
+       The  <B>barchart</B>  command creates a bar chart for plotting two-dimensional
+       data (X-Y coordinates). A bar chart is a  graphic  means  of  comparing
+       numbers by displaying bars of lengths proportional to the y-coordinates
+       of the points they represented.  The bar chart  has  many  configurable
+       components: coordinate axes, elements, legend, grid lines, cross hairs,
+       etc.  They allow you to customize the look and feel of the graph.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>INTRODUCTION</H2><PRE>
+       The <B>barchart</B> command creates a new window for plotting  two-dimensional
+       data  (X-Y coordinates), using bars of various lengths to represent the
+       data points.  The bars are drawn in a rectangular area displayed in the
+       center  of  the new window.  This is the <I>plotting</I> <I>area</I>.  The coordinate
+       axes are drawn in  the  margins  surrounding  the  plotting  area.   By
+       default,  the  legend  is drawn in the right margin.  The title is dis-
+       played in top margin.
+
+       A <B>barchart</B> widget has several configurable components: coordinate axes,
+       data elements, legend, grid, cross hairs, pens, postscript, and annota-
+       tion markers.  Each component can be queried or modified.
+
+       axis       Up to four coordinate axes (two X-coordinate and two Y-coor-
+                 dinate axes) can be displayed, but you can create and use any
+                 number of axes. Axes control what region of data is displayed
+                 and  how  the  data is scaled. Each axis consists of the axis
+                 line, title, major and minor ticks,  and  tick  labels.  Tick
+                 labels display the value at each major tick.
+
+       crosshairs
+                 Cross  hairs  are used to position the mouse pointer relative
+                 to the X and Y  coordinate  axes.  Two  perpendicular  lines,
+                 intersecting  at  the  current  location of the mouse, extend
+                 across the plotting area to the coordinate axes.
+
+       element   An element represents a set of data to be plotted.   It  con-
+                 tains  an  x  and  y  vector  of values representing the data
+                 points.  Each data point is displayed  as  a  bar  where  the
+                 length  of the bar is proportional to the ordinate (Y-coordi-
+                 nate) of the data point.  The appearance of the bar, such  as
+                 its color, stipple, or relief is configurable.
+
+                 A  special  case exists when two or more data points have the
+                 same abscissa (X-coordinate).  By default, the bars are over-
+                 layed,  one  on  top of the other.  The bars are drawn in the
+                 order of the element display list.  But you can also  config-
+                 ure  the bars to be displayed in two other ways.  They may be
+                 displayed as a stack, where each bar (with the same abscissa)
+                 is  stacked  on  the previous.  Or they can be drawn side-by-
+                 side as thin bars.  The width of each bar is  a  function  of
+
+       pen       Pens define attributes for elements.  Data elements use  pens
+                 to  specify how they should be drawn.  A data element may use
+                 many pens at once.  Here the particular pen used for  a  data
+                 point  is  determined  from each element's weight vector (see
+                 the element's <B>-weight</B> and <B>-style</B> options).
+
+       postscript
+                 The widget can generate encapsulated PostScript output.  This
+                 component has several options to configure how the PostScript
+                 is generated.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>SYNTAX</H2><PRE>
+       <B>barchart</B> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  The <B>barchart</B> command creates a new
+       window  <I>pathName</I> and makes it into a <B>barchart</B> widget.  At the time this
+       command is invoked, there must not exist a window named  <I>pathName</I>,  but
+       <I>pathName</I>'s  parent  must exist.  Additional options may be specified on
+       the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of  the
+       graph  such  as its colors and font.  See the <B>configure</B> operation below
+       for the exact details about what <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are valid.
+
+       If successful, <B>barchart</B> returns the path name of the widget.   It  also
+       creates  a  new Tcl command by the same name.  You can use this command
+       to invoke various operations that query or modify the graph.  The  gen-
+       eral form is: <I>pathName</I> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...  Both <I>operation</I> and its argu-
+       ments determine the exact behavior  of  the  command.   The  operations
+       available  for  the graph are described in the <B>BARCHART</B> <B>OPERATIONS</B> sec-
+       tion.
+
+       The command can also be used to access components of the graph.   <I>path-</I>
+       <I>Name</I> <I>component</I> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...  The operation, now located after the
+       name of the component, is the function to be performed on  that  compo-
+       nent. Each component has its own set of operations that manipulate that
+       component.  They will be described below in their own sections.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>EXAMPLE</H2><PRE>
+       The <B>barchart</B> command creates a new bar  chart.   #  Create  a  new  bar
+       chart.   Plotting  area  is black.  barchart .b -plotbackground black A
+       new Tcl command .b is created.  This command can be used to  query  and
+       modify the bar chart.  For example, to change the title of the graph to
+       "My Plot", you use the new command  and  the  <B>configure</B>  operation.   #
+       Change  the title.  .b configure -title "My Plot" To add data elements,
+       you use the command and the <B>element</B> component.  # Create a new  element
+       named  "e1" .b element create e1 \      -xdata { 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 }
+       \       -ydata  {  26.18  50.46  72.85  93.31  111.86   128.47   143.14
+                 155.85  166.60  175.38  }  The  element's X-Y coordinates are
+       specified using lists of numbers.  Alternately, BLT  vectors  could  be
+       used to hold the X-Y coordinates.  # Create two vectors and add them to
+       the barchart.  vector xVector yVector xVector set { 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  8  9
+       10  } yVector set { 26.18 50.46 72.85 93.31 111.86 128.47 143.14 155.85
+            166.60 175.38 } n.b element create e1 -xdata xVector -ydata  yVec-
+       tor  The  advantage  of  using vectors is that when you modify one, the
+       sure we change the bar width  too.   .b  configure  -barwidth  0.2  The
+       height  of  each  bar is proportional to the ordinate (Y-coordinate) of
+       the data point.
+
+       If two or more data points have the same abscissa (X-coordinate value),
+       the  bars  representing those data points may be drawn in various ways.
+       The default is to overlay the bars, one  on  top  of  the  other.   The
+       ordering  is  determined  from  the  of  element  display list.  If the
+       stacked mode is selected (using the <B>-barmode</B> configuration option), the
+       bars  are stacked, each bar above the previous.  # Display the elements
+       as stacked.  .b configure -barmode  stacked  If  the  aligned  mode  is
+       selected,  the bars having the same x-coordinates are displayed side by
+       side.  The width of each bar is a fraction of its normal  width,  based
+       upon the number of bars with the same x-coordinate.  # Display the ele-
+       ments side-by-side.  .b configure -barmode aligned By default, the ele-
+       ment's  label in the legend will be also e1.  You can change the label,
+       or specify no legend entry, again using the element's <B>configure</B>  opera-
+       tion.   #  Don't  display  "e1" in the legend.  .b element configure e1
+       -label "" You can configure more than just  the  element's  label.   An
+       element  has many attributes such as stipple, foreground and background
+       colors, relief, etc.  .b element  configure  e1  -fg  red  -bg  pink  \
+            -stipple gray50 Four coordinate axes are automatically created: x,
+       x2, y, and y2.  And by default, elements are mapped onto the axes x and
+       y.   This  can be changed with the <B>-mapx</B> and <B>-mapy</B> options.  # Map "e1"
+       on the alternate y axis "y2".  .b element configure e1  -mapy  y2  Axes
+       can  be configured in many ways too.  For example, you change the scale
+       of the Y-axis from linear to log using the <B>axis</B> component.  # Y-axis is
+       log  scale.   .b  axis configure y -logscale yes One important way axes
+       are used is to zoom in on a particular data region.  Zooming is done by
+       simply specifying new axis limits using the <B>-min</B> and <B>-max</B> configuration
+       options.  .b axis configure x -min 1.0 -max 1.5  .b  axis  configure  y
+       -min  12.0 -max 55.15 To zoom interactively, you link the<B>axis</B> <B>configure</B>
+       operations with some user interaction (such as pressing the mouse  but-
+       ton),  using  the  <B>bind</B>  command.   To convert between screen and graph
+       coordinates, use the <B>invtransform</B> operation.  # Click the button to set
+       a new minimum bind .b &lt;ButtonPress-1&gt; {
+           %W axis configure x -min [%W axis invtransform x %x]
+           %W  axis configure x -min [%W axis invtransform x %y] } By default,
+       the limits of the axis are determined from data values.  To reset  back
+       to  the  default  limits,  set  the  <B>-min</B> and <B>-max</B> options to the empty
+       value.  # Reset the axes to autoscale again.  .b axis configure x  -min
+       {}  -max  {} .b axis configure y -min {} -max {} By default, the legend
+       is drawn in the right margin.  You can change this or any  legend  con-
+       figuration  options using the <B>legend</B> component.  # Configure the legend
+       font, color, and relief .b  legend  configure  -position  left  -relief
+       raised  \       -font  fixed  -fg blue To prevent the legend from being
+       displayed, turn on the <B>-hide</B> option.  # Don't display the  legend.   .b
+       legend  configure  -hide yes The <B>barchart</B> has simple drawing procedures
+       called markers.  They can be used to highlight or annotate data in  the
+       graph.  The types of markers available are bitmaps, polygons, lines, or
+       windows.  Markers can be used, for example, to mark  or  brush  points.
+       For  example  there may be a line marker which indicates some low-water
+       chart into file "file.ps" .b postscript  output  file.ps  -maxpect  yes
+       -decorations  no  This generates a file file.ps containing the encapsu-
+       lated PostScript of the graph.  The option <B>-maxpect</B> says to  scale  the
+       plot  to  the  size  of  the page.  Turning off the <B>-decorations</B> option
+       denotes that no borders or color backgrounds should be drawn (i.e.  the
+       background of the margins, legend, and plotting area will be white).
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>SYNTAX</H2><PRE>
+       <B>barchart</B> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  The <B>barchart</B> command creates a new
+       window <I>pathName</I> and makes it into a barchart widget.  At the time  this
+       command  is  invoked, there must not exist a window named <I>pathName</I>, but
+       <I>pathName</I>'s parent must exist.  Additional options may may be  specified
+       on  the  command line or in the option database to configure aspects of
+       the bar chart such as its colors and font.  See the <B>configure</B> operation
+       below  for  the  exact  details  as  to what <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are
+       valid.
+
+       If successful, <B>barchart</B> returns <I>pathName</I>. It also  creates  a  new  Tcl
+       command  <I>pathName</I>.   This  command may be used to invoke various opera-
+       tions to query or modify the bar chart.  It has the general form: <I>path-</I>
+       <I>Name</I> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...  Both <I>operation</I> and its arguments determine the
+       exact behavior of the command.  The operations available  for  the  bar
+       chart are described in the following section.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>BARCHART OPERATIONS</H2><PRE>
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>bar</B> <I>elemName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Creates  a  new  barchart element <I>elemName</I>.  It's an error if an
+              element <I>elemName</I> already exists.  See the  manual  for  <B>barchart</B>
+              for details about what <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are valid.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+              Returns  the  current value of the configuration option given by
+              <I>option</I>.  <I>Option</I> may be any option described below for  the  <B>con-</B>
+              <B>figure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries  or modifies the configuration options of the graph.  If
+              <I>option</I> isn't specified, a list describing  the  current  options
+              for  <I>pathName</I>  is  returned.   If  <I>option</I>  is specified, but not
+              <I>value</I>, then a list describing <I>option</I> is  returned.   If  one  or
+              more  <I>option</I>  and <I>value</I> pairs are specified, then for each pair,
+              the option <I>option</I> is set to <I>value</I>.  The  following  options  are
+              valid.
+
+              <B>-background</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the background color. This includes the margins and
+                     legend, but not the plotting area.
+
+              <B>-barmode</B> <I>mode</I>
+                     Indicates  how  related  bar  elements  will  be   drawn.
+                     Related elements have data points with the same abscissas
+                     (X-coordinates). <I>Mode</I> indicates how those segments should
+
+              <B>-barwidth</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Specifies the width of the bars.  This value can be over-
+                     rided  by  the  individual elements using their <B>-barwidth</B>
+                     configuration option.  <I>Value</I> is the  width  in  terms  of
+                     graph-coordinates.  The default width is 1.0.
+
+              <B>-borderwidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the width of the 3-D border around the outside edge
+                     of the widget.  The <B>-relief</B> option determines if the bor-
+                     der is to be drawn.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-bottommargin</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies  the  size of the margin below the X-coordinate
+                     axis.  If <I>pixels</I> is 0, the size of the margin is selected
+                     automatically.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-bufferelements</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether  an internal pixmap to buffer the dis-
+                     play of data elements should  be  used.   If  <I>boolean</I>  is
+                     true,  data  elements  are  drawn  to an internal pixmap.
+                     This option  is  especially  useful  when  the  graph  is
+                     redrawn  frequently while the remains data unchanged (for
+                     example, moving a marker across the plot).  See the <B>SPEED</B>
+                     <B>TIPS</B> section.  The default is 1.
+
+              <B>-cursor</B> <I>cursor</I>
+                     Specifies  the  widget's  cursor.   The default cursor is
+                     crosshair.
+
+              <B>-font</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     Specifies the font of the graph  title.  The  default  is
+                     *-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-18-180-*.
+
+              <B>-halo</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies  a  maximum distance to consider when searching
+                     for the closest data point  (see  the  element's  <B>closest</B>
+                     operation  below).   Data points further than <I>pixels</I> away
+                     are ignored.  The default is 0.5i.
+
+              <B>-height</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies the requested height of widget.  The default is
+                     4i.
+
+              <B>-invertxy</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether the placement X-axis and Y-axis should
+                     be inverted.  If <I>boolean</I> is true, the X and  Y  axes  are
+                     swapped.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-justify</B> <I>justify</I>
+                     Specifies  how  the title should be justified.  This mat-
+                     ters only when the title contains more than one  line  of
+                     area.  The <B>-plotrelief</B> option determines if a  border  is
+                     drawn.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-plotpadx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  amount  of padding to be added to the left and
+                     right sides of the plotting area.  <I>Pad</I> can be a  list  of
+                     one  or  two  screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements,
+                     the left side of the plotting area entry is padded by the
+                     first  distance and the right side by the second.  If <I>pad</I>
+                     is just one distance, both the left and right  sides  are
+                     padded evenly.  The default is 8.
+
+              <B>-plotpady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  amount  of  padding to be added to the top and
+                     bottom of the plotting area.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of one or
+                     two  screen  distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements, the top
+                     of the plotting area is padded by the first distance  and
+                     the  bottom  by the second.  If <I>pad</I> is just one distance,
+                     both the top and bottom are padded evenly.   The  default
+                     is 8.
+
+              <B>-plotrelief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies  the  3-D effect for the plotting area.  <I>Relief</I>
+                     specifies how the interior of the  plotting  area  should
+                     appear relative to rest of the graph; for example, raised
+                     means the plot should appear to protrude from the  graph,
+                     relative  to  the  surface  of the graph.  The default is
+                     sunken.
+
+              <B>-relief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies the 3-D effect for the barchart widget.  <I>Relief</I>
+                     specifies  how the graph should appear relative to widget
+                     it is packed into; for example, raised  means  the  graph
+                     should appear to protrude.  The default is flat.
+
+              <B>-rightmargin</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the  size  of  margin from the plotting area to the
+                     right edge of the window.   By  default,  the  legend  is
+                     drawn  in  this  margin.  If <I>pixels</I> is than 1, the margin
+                     size is selected automatically.
+
+              <B>-takefocus</B> <I>focus</I>
+                     Provides information used when moving the focus from win-
+                     dow  to  window  via  keyboard  traversal  (e.g., Tab and
+                     Shift-Tab).  If <I>focus</I> is 0, this means that  this  window
+                     should  be skipped entirely during keyboard traversal.  1
+                     means that the this  window  should  always  receive  the
+                     input  focus.   An  empty  value means that the traversal
+                     scripts make the decision whether to focus on the window.
+                     The default is "".
+
+              <B>-tile</B> <I>image</I>
+              <B>-width</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies the requested width of the widget.  The default
+                     is 5i.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?
+              See the <B>CROSSHAIRS</B> <B>COMPONENT</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>ELEMENT</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>extents</B> <I>item</I>
+              Returns  the  size of a particular item in the graph.  <I>Item</I> must
+              be  either  leftmargin,  rightmargin,  topmargin,  bottommargin,
+              plotwidth, or plotheight.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>GRID</B> <B>COMPONENT</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>invtransform</B> <I>winX</I> <I>winY</I>
+              Performs  an  inverse  coordinate transformation, mapping window
+              coordinates back to graph-coordinates, using the standard X-axis
+              and  Y-axis.  Returns a list of containing the X-Y graph-coordi-
+              nates.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>inside</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I>
+              Returns 1 is the  designated  screen-coordinate  (<I>x</I>  and  <I>y</I>)  is
+              inside the plotting area and 0 otherwise.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>LEGEND</B> <B>COMPONENT</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>line</B> <B>operation</B> <B>arg</B>...
+              The operation is the same as <B>element</B>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>MARKER</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>metafile</B> ?<I>fileName</I>?
+              <I>This</I>  <I>operation</I> <I>is</I> <I>for</I> <I>Window</I> <I>platforms</I> <I>only</I>.  Creates a Windows
+              enhanced metafile of the barchart.  If present, <I>fileName</I> is  the
+              file name of the new metafile.  Otherwise, the metafile is auto-
+              matically added to the clipboard.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>postscript</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>POSTSCRIPT</B> <B>COMPONENT</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>snap</B> <I>photoName</I>
+              Takes a snapshot of the graph and stores  the  contents  in  the
+              photo  image  <I>photoName</I>.   <I>PhotoName</I>  is  the name of a Tk photo
+              image that must already exist.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>transform</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I>
+       A graph is composed of several components: coordinate axes,  data  ele-
+       ments,  legend,  grid, cross hairs, postscript, and annotation markers.
+       Instead of one big set of configuration  options  and  operations,  the
+       graph  is  partitioned,  where each component has its own configuration
+       options and operations that specifically control that aspect or part of
+       the graph.
+
+   <B>AXIS</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B>
+       Four  coordinate  axes are automatically created: two X-coordinate axes
+       (x and x2) and two Y-coordinate axes (y, and y2).  By default, the axis
+       x  is located in the bottom margin, y in the left margin, x2 in the top
+       margin, and y2 in the right margin.
+
+       An axis consists of the axis line, title, major and  minor  ticks,  and
+       tick  labels.   Major  ticks  are  drawn at uniform intervals along the
+       axis.  Each tick is labeled with its coordinate value.  Minor ticks are
+       drawn at uniform intervals within major ticks.
+
+       The  range  of  the axis controls what region of data is plotted.  Data
+       points outside the minimum and maximum limits of the axis are not plot-
+       ted.   By  default,  the minimum and maximum limits are determined from
+       the data, but you can reset either limit.
+
+       You can create and use several axes. To create an axis, invoke the axis
+       component  and  its create operation.  # Create a new axis called "tem-
+       perature" .b axis create temperature You map data elements to  an  axis
+       using the element's -mapy and -mapx configuration options. They specify
+       the coordinate axes an element is mapped onto.  # Now map the  tempera-
+       ture  data  to  this  axis.   .b element create "temp" -xdata $x -ydata
+       $tempData \
+           -mapy temperature While you can have many axes, only four axes  can
+       be  displayed  simultaneously.   They  are drawn in each of the margins
+       surrounding the plotting area.  The axes x and y are drawn in the  bot-
+       tom  and  left  margins.  The axes x2 and y2 are drawn in top and right
+       margins.  Only x and y are shown by default. Note  that  the  axes  can
+       have different scales.
+
+       To  display  a  different  axis, you invoke one of the following compo-
+       nents: <B>xaxis</B>, <B>yaxis</B>, <B>x2axis</B>, and <B>y2axis</B>.  The <B>use</B> operation  designates
+       the  axis to be drawn in the corresponding margin: <B>xaxis</B> in the bottom,
+       <B>yaxis</B> in the left, <B>x2axis</B> in the top, and <B>y2axis</B> in the right.  #  Dis-
+       play the axis temperature in the left margin.  .b yaxis use temperature
+
+       You can configure axes in many ways. The axis scale can  be  linear  or
+       logarithmic.   The  values  along  the  axis  can  either monotonically
+       increase or decrease.  If you need custom tick labels, you can  specify
+       a  Tcl procedure to format the label any way you wish.  You can control
+       how ticks are drawn, by changing the major tick interval or the  number
+       of minor ticks.  You can define non-uniform tick intervals, such as for
+       time-series plots.
+
+
+              <B>-autorange</B> <I>range</I>
+                     Sets the range of values for the axis to <I>range</I>.  The axis
+                     limits are automatically reset to display the most recent
+                     data points in this range.  If <I>range</I> is 0.0, the range is
+                     determined  from the limits of the data.  If <B>-min</B> or <B>-max</B>
+                     are specified, they override this option.  The default is
+                     0.0.
+
+              <B>-color</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the color of the axis and tick labels.  The default
+                     is black.
+
+              <B>-command</B> <I>prefix</I>
+                     Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked when formatting the
+                     axis  tick labels. <I>Prefix</I> is a string containing the name
+                     of a Tcl proc and any extra arguments for the  procedure.
+                     This  command is invoked for each major tick on the axis.
+                     Two additional arguments are passed to the procedure: the
+                     pathname  of the widget and the current the numeric value
+                     of the tick.  The procedure returns  the  formatted  tick
+                     label.   If  "" is returned, no label will appear next to
+                     the tick.  You can get the standard tick labels again  by
+                     setting <I>prefix</I> to "".  The default is "".
+
+                     Please  note that this procedure is invoked while the bar
+                     chart is redrawn.  You may query the widget's  configura-
+                     tion options.  But do not reset options, because this can
+                     have unexpected results.
+
+              <B>-descending</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the values along the axis are monotoni-
+                     cally  increasing or decreasing.  If <I>boolean</I> is true, the
+                     axis values will be decreasing.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the axis is displayed.
+
+              <B>-justify</B> <I>justify</I>
+                     Specifies how the axis title should be  justified.   This
+                     matters  only  when the axis title contains more than one
+                     line of text. <I>Justify</I> must be  left,  right,  or  center.
+                     The default is center.
+
+              <B>-limits</B> <I>formatStr</I>
+                     Specifies a printf-like description to format the minimum
+                     and maximum limits of the axis.  The limits are displayed
+                     at  the  top/bottom  or  left/right sides of the plotting
+                     area.  <I>FormatStr</I> is a list of one or two format  descrip-
+                     tions.   If one description is supplied, both the minimum
+                     and maximum limits are formatted in  the  same  way.   If
+                     two,  the  first  designates  the  format for the minimum
+                     limit, the second for the maximum.  If  ""  is  given  as
+                     data points tightly, at the  outermost  data  points,  or
+                     loosely,  at  the outer tick intervals.  This is relevant
+                     only when the axis limit is automatically calculated.  If
+                     <I>boolean</I>  is true, the axis range is "loose".  The default
+                     is 0.
+
+              <B>-majorticks</B> <I>majorList</I>
+                     Specifies where to display major axis ticks.  You can use
+                     this  option  to  display ticks at non-uniform intervals.
+                     <I>MajorList</I> is a list of axis coordinates  designating  the
+                     location  of  major ticks.  No minor ticks are drawn.  If
+                     <I>majorList</I> is "", major ticks will be  automatically  com-
+                     puted. The default is "".
+
+              <B>-max</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Sets  the  maximum  limit  of  <I>axisName</I>.   Any data point
+                     greater than <I>value</I> is not displayed.  If <I>value</I> is "", the
+                     maximum limit is calculated using the largest data value.
+                     The default is "".
+
+              <B>-min</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Sets the minimum limit of <I>axisName</I>. Any data  point  less
+                     than <I>value</I> is not displayed.  If <I>value</I> is "", the minimum
+                     limit is calculated using the smallest data  value.   The
+                     default is "".
+
+              <B>-minorticks</B> <I>minorList</I>
+                     Specifies where to display minor axis ticks.  You can use
+                     this option to display minor ticks at non-uniform  inter-
+                     vals.  <I>MinorList</I>  is  a list of real values, ranging from
+                     0.0 to 1.0, designating the placement of  a  minor  tick.
+                     No minor ticks are drawn if the <B>-majortick</B> option is also
+                     set.  If <I>minorList</I> is "", minor ticks will  be  automati-
+                     cally computed. The default is "".
+
+              <B>-rotate</B> <I>theta</I>
+                     Specifies  the  how  many degrees to rotate the axis tick
+                     labels.  <I>Theta</I> is a real value representing the number of
+                     degrees  to  rotate  the tick labels.  The default is 0.0
+                     degrees.
+
+              <B>-shiftby</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Specifies how much to automatically shift  the  range  of
+                     the  axis.   When  the  new data exceeds the current axis
+                     maximum, the maximum is increased in increments of <I>value</I>.
+                     You  can  use this option to prevent the axis limits from
+                     being recomputed at each new time point. If <I>value</I> is 0.0,
+                     then no automatic shifting is down. The default is 0.0.
+
+              <B>-showticks</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether axis ticks should be drawn. If <I>boolean</I>
+                     is true, ticks are drawn.  If false, only the  axis  line
+
+              <B>-tickfont</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     Specifies  the  font for axis tick labels. The default is
+                     *-Courier-Bold-R-Normal-*-100-*.
+
+              <B>-ticklength</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the length of major and minor ticks (minor ticks are
+                     half  the  length of major ticks). If <I>pixels</I> is less than
+                     zero, the axis will be inverted with ticks drawn pointing
+                     towards the plot.  The default is 0.1i.
+
+              <B>-title</B> <I>text</I>
+                     Sets  the title of the axis. If <I>text</I> is "", no axis title
+                     will be displayed.
+
+              <B>-titlecolor</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the axis title. The default is black.
+
+              <B>-titlefont</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     Specifies the font for axis title. The default is  *-Hel-
+                     vetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-14-140-*.
+
+              Axis configuration options may be also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.  The resource class is Axis.  The resource names  are  the
+              names  of  the  axes  (such  as  x  or  x2).   option  add *Bar-
+              chart.Axis.Color  blue  option  add  *Barchart.x.LogScale   true
+              option add *Barchart.x2.LogScale false
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>create</B> <I>axisName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Creates  a  new  axis by the name <I>axisName</I>.  No axis by the same
+              name can already exist. <I>Option</I> and <I>value</I> are described in  above
+              in the axis <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>delete</B> ?<I>axisName</I>?...
+              Deletes  the  named axes. An axis is not really deleted until it
+              is not longer in use, so it's safe to delete axes mapped to ele-
+              ments.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>invtransform</B> <I>axisName</I> <I>value</I>
+              Performs the inverse transformation, changing the screen-coordi-
+              nate <I>value</I> to a graph-coordinate, mapping the  value  mapped  to
+              <I>axisName</I>.  Returns the graph-coordinate.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>limits</B> <I>axisName</I>
+              Returns  a  list of the minimum and maximum limits for <I>axisName</I>.
+              The order of the list is min max.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?...
+              Returns a list of axes matching zero or more  patterns.   If  no
+              <I>pattern</I> argument is give, the names of all axes are returned.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>transform</B> <I>axisName</I> <I>value</I>
+              Transforms  the  coordinate <I>value</I> to a screen-coordinate by map-
+
+       right Y-axis.
+
+       They implicitly control the axis that is currently using to that  loca-
+       tion.  By default, <B>xaxis</B> uses the x axis, <B>yaxis</B> uses y, <B>x2axis</B> uses x2,
+       and <B>y2axis</B> uses y2.  These components can be  more  convenient  to  use
+       than  always  determining  what axes are current being displayed by the
+       graph.
+
+       The following operations are available for axes.  They  mirror  exactly
+       the operations of the <B>axis</B> component.  The <I>axis</I> argument must be <B>xaxis</B>,
+       <B>x2axis</B>, <B>yaxis</B>, or <B>y2axis</B>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>invtransform</B> <I>value</I>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>limits</B>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>transform</B> <I>value</I>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>use</B> ?<I>axisName</I>?
+              Designates the axis <I>axisName</I> is to be displayed  at  this  loca-
+              tion.   <I>AxisName</I>  can not be already in use at another location.
+              This command returns the name of the axis currently  using  this
+              location.
+
+   <B>CROSSHAIRS</B> <B>COMPONENT</B>
+       Cross  hairs  consist  of  two intersecting lines (one vertical and one
+       horizontal) drawn completely across the plotting area.  They  are  used
+       to  position the mouse in relation to the coordinate axes.  Cross hairs
+       differ from line markers in that they are implemented using XOR drawing
+       primitives.  This means that they can be quickly drawn and erased with-
+       out redrawing the entire widget.
+
+       The following operations are available for cross hairs:
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+              Returns the current  value  of  the  cross  hairs  configuration
+              option  given  by  <I>option</I>.   <I>Option</I>  may be any option described
+              below for the cross hairs <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries or modifies  the  configuration  options  of  the  cross
+              hairs.   If  <I>option</I>  isn't  specified, a list describing all the
+              current options for the cross hairs is returned.  If  <I>option</I>  is
+              specified,  but  not  <I>value</I>,  then  a  list describing <I>option</I> is
+              returned.  If one or more <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are  specified,
+              then  for  each  pair,  the  cross hairs option <I>option</I> is set to
+              <I>value</I>.  The following options are available for cross hairs.
+
+              <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Set the width of the cross hair lines.  The default is 1.
+
+              <B>-position</B> <I>pos</I>
+                     Specifies  the  screen  position  where  the  cross hairs
+                     intersect.  <I>Pos</I> must be in the form "<I>@x,y</I>", where <I>x</I> and <I>y</I>
+                     are the window coordinates of the intersection.
+
+              Cross  hairs  configuration  options  may  be also be set by the
+              <B>option</B> command.  The resource name and class are crosshairs  and
+              Crosshairs       respectively.        option      add      *Bar-
+              chart.Crosshairs.LineWidth     2      option      add      *Bar-
+              chart.Crosshairs.Color     red
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>off</B>
+              Turns off the cross hairs.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>on</B>
+              Turns on the display of the cross hairs.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>toggle</B>
+              Toggles  the  current state of the cross hairs, alternately map-
+              ping and unmapping the cross hairs.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>ELEMENTS</H2><PRE>
+       A data element represents a set of data.  It contains x and  y  vectors
+       which  are  the coordinates of the data points.  Elements are displayed
+       as bars where the length of the bar is proportional to the ordinate  of
+       the data point.  Elements also control the appearance of the data, such
+       as the color, stipple, relief, etc.
+
+       When new data elements are created, they are automatically added  to  a
+       list  of  displayed elements.   The display list controls what elements
+       are drawn and in what order.
+
+       The following operations are available for elements.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>activate</B> <I>elemName</I> ?<I>index</I>?...
+              Specifies the data points of element <I>elemName</I> to be drawn  using
+              active  foreground  and background colors.  <I>ElemName</I> is the name
+              of the element and <I>index</I> is a number representing the  index  of
+              the  data  point. If no indices are present then all data points
+              become active.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>bind</B> <I>tagName</I> ?<I>sequence</I>?  ?<I>command</I>?
+              Associates <I>command</I> with <I>tagName</I> such  that  whenever  the  event
+              sequence  given by <I>sequence</I> occurs for an element with this tag,
+              <I>command</I> will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the <B>bind</B> com-
+              mand except that it operates on graph elements, rather than wid-
+              gets. See the <B>bind</B> manual entry for complete details on <I>sequence</I>
+              and the substitutions performed on <I>command</I> before invoking it.
+
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>closest</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?... ?<I>elemName</I>?...
+              Finds  the data point representing the bar closest to the window
+              coordinates <I>x</I> and <I>y</I> in the element <I>elemName</I>.   <I>ElemName</I>  is  the
+              name  of  an  element, which must be currently displayed.  If no
+              elements  are  specified,  then  all  displayed   elements   are
+              searched.   It  returns  a key-value list containing the name of
+              the closest element, the index of its  closest  point,  and  the
+              graph-coordinates  of  the  point.  If  no data point within the
+              threshold distance can be found, "" is returned.  The  following
+              <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs are available.
+
+              <B>-halo</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies a threshold distance where selected data points
+                     are ignored.  <I>Pixels</I> is a valid screen distance, such  as
+                     2  or  1.2i.   If  this  option  isn't specified, then it
+                     defaults to the value of the <B>barchart</B>'s <B>-halo</B> option.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>configure</B> <I>elemName</I> ?<I>elemName</I>... ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries or modifies  the  configuration  options  for  elements.
+              Several  elements  can  be  modified at the same time. If <I>option</I>
+              isn't specified, a list describing all the current  options  for
+              <I>elemName</I>  is  returned.   If <I>option</I> is specified, but not <I>value</I>,
+              then a list describing the option <I>option</I> is returned.  If one or
+              more  <I>option</I>  and <I>value</I> pairs are specified, then for each pair,
+              the element option  <I>option</I>  is  set  to  <I>value</I>.   The  following
+              options are valid for elements.
+
+              <B>-activepen</B> <I>penName</I>
+                     Specifies  pen to use to draw active element.  If <I>penName</I>
+                     is "", no active elements will be drawn.  The default  is
+                     activeLine.
+
+              <B>-bindtags</B> <I>tagList</I>
+                     Specifies the binding tags for the element.  <I>TagList</I> is a
+                     list of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will
+                     determine  how events for elements.  Each tag in the list
+                     matching the current event sequence  will  have  its  Tcl
+                     command  executed.  Implicitly the name of the element is
+                     always the first tag in the list.  The default  value  is
+                     all.
+
+              <B>-background</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the  the  color of the border around each bar.  The
+                     default is white.
+
+              <B>-barwidth</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Specifies the width  the  bars  drawn  for  the  element.
+                     <I>Value</I>  is  the  width  in  X-coordinates.  If this option
+                     isn't specified, the width of each bar is  the  value  of
+                     the widget's <B>-barwidth</B> option.
+
+                     a list of numeric expressions representing the X-Y  coor-
+                     dinate pairs of each data point.
+
+              <B>-foreground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the interior of the bars.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether the element is displayed.  The default
+                     is no.
+
+              <B>-label</B> <I>text</I>
+                     Sets the element's label in the legend.  If <I>text</I>  is  "",
+                     the  element  will  have  no  entry  in  the legend.  The
+                     default label is the element's name.
+
+              <B>-mapx</B> <I>xAxis</I>
+                     Selects the X-axis to  map  the  element's  X-coordinates
+                     onto.  <I>XAxis</I> must be the name of an axis.  The default is
+                     x.
+
+              <B>-mapy</B> <I>yAxis</I>
+                     Selects the Y-axis to  map  the  element's  Y-coordinates
+                     onto.   <I>YAxis</I> must be the name of an axis. The default is
+                     y.
+
+              <B>-relief</B> <I>string</I>
+                     Specifies the 3-D effect desired for bars.  <I>Relief</I>  indi-
+                     cates  how the interior of the bar should appear relative
+                     to the surface of the chart; for  example,  raised  means
+                     the bar should appear to protrude from the surface of the
+                     plotting area.  The default is raised.
+
+              <B>-stipple</B> <I>bitmap</I>
+                     Specifies a stipple pattern with which to draw the  bars.
+                     If  <I>bitmap</I>  is "", then the bar is drawn in a solid fash-
+                     ion.
+
+              <B>-xdata</B> <I>xVector</I>
+                     Specifies the x-coordinate vector of the  data.   <I>XVector</I>
+                     is  the name of a BLT vector or a list of numeric expres-
+                     sions.
+
+              <B>-ydata</B> <I>yVector</I>
+                     Specifies the y-coordinate vector of the  data.   <I>YVector</I>
+                     is  the name of a BLT vector or a list of numeric expres-
+                     sions.
+
+              Element configuration options may also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.   The  resource names  in the option database are prefixed
+              by elem.  option add *Barchart.Element.background blue
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>create</B> <I>elemName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>exists</B> <I>elemName</I>
+              Returns  1  if an element <I>elemName</I> currently exists and 0 other-
+              wise.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?...
+              Returns the elements matching one or more pattern.  If  no  <I>pat-</I>
+              <I>tern</I> is given, the names of all elements is returned.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>show</B> ?<I>nameList</I>?
+              Queries  or modifies the element display list.  The element dis-
+              play list designates the  elements  drawn  and  in  what  order.
+              <I>NameList</I> is a list of elements to be displayed in the order they
+              are named.  If there is no <I>nameList</I> argument, the  current  dis-
+              play list is returned.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>type</B> <I>elemName</I>
+              Returns  the type of <I>elemName</I>.  If the element is a bar element,
+              the commands returns the  string  "bar",  otherwise  it  returns
+              "line".
+
+   <B>GRID</B> <B>COMPONENT</B>
+       Grid  lines extend from the major and minor ticks of each axis horizon-
+       tally or vertically across the plotting area.  The following operations
+       are available for grid lines.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+              Returns  the current value of the grid line configuration option
+              given by <I>option</I>.  <I>Option</I> may be any option described  below  for
+              the grid <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries  or  modifies  the configuration options for grid lines.
+              If <I>option</I> isn't specified, a list  describing  all  the  current
+              grid  options for <I>pathName</I> is returned.  If <I>option</I> is specified,
+              but not <I>value</I>, then a list describing <I>option</I>  is  returned.   If
+              one  or more <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are specified, then for each
+              pair, the grid line option <I>option</I> is set to <I>value</I>.  The  follow-
+              ing options are valid for grid lines.
+
+              <B>-color</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the color of the grid lines.  The default is black.
+
+              <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+                     Sets the dash style of the grid lines. <I>DashList</I> is a list
+                     of  up  to  11  numbers  that  alternately  represent the
+                     lengths of the dashes and gaps on the grid  lines.   Each
+                     number must be between 1 and 255.  If <I>dashList</I> is "", the
+                     grid will be solid lines.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the grid should be drawn. If <I>boolean</I> is
+
+              <B>-minor</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether  the  grid  lines  should be drawn for
+                     minor ticks.  If <I>boolean</I> is true, the lines  will  appear
+                     at minor tick intervals.  The default is 1.
+
+              Grid  configuration  options  may also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.  The resource name and class are  grid  and  Grid  respec-
+              tively.   option add *Barchart.grid.LineWidth 2 option add *Bar-
+              chart.Grid.Color     black
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>off</B>
+              Turns off the display the grid lines.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>on</B>
+              Turns on the display the grid lines.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>toggle</B>
+              Toggles the display of the grid.
+
+   <B>LEGEND</B> <B>COMPONENT</B>
+       The legend displays a list of the data elements.  Each  entry  consists
+       of the element's symbol and label.  The legend can appear in any margin
+       (the default location is in the right margin).  It can  also  be  posi-
+       tioned anywhere within the plotting area.
+
+       The following operations are valid for the legend.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>activate</B> <I>pattern</I>...
+              Selects  legend entries to be drawn using the active legend col-
+              ors and relief.  All entries whose element names  match  <I>pattern</I>
+              are  selected.  To be selected, the element name must match only
+              one <I>pattern</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>bind</B> <I>tagName</I> ?<I>sequence</I>?  ?<I>command</I>?
+              Associates <I>command</I> with <I>tagName</I> such  that  whenever  the  event
+              sequence  given  by <I>sequence</I> occurs for a legend entry with this
+              tag, <I>command</I> will be invoked.  Implicitly the element  names  in
+              the  entry  are tags.  The syntax is similar to the <B>bind</B> command
+              except that it operates on legend entries, rather than  widgets.
+              See  the  <B>bind</B> manual entry for complete details on <I>sequence</I> and
+              the substitutions performed on <I>command</I> before invoking it.
+
+              If all arguments are specified then a new  binding  is  created,
+              replacing  any  existing  binding for the same <I>sequence</I> and <I>tag-</I>
+              <I>Name</I>.  If the first character of <I>command</I> is + then <I>command</I>  aug-
+              ments  an existing binding rather than replacing it.  If no <I>com-</I>
+              <I>mand</I> argument is provided then the command currently  associated
+              with  <I>tagName</I>  and  <I>sequence</I> (it's an error occurs if there's no
+              such binding) is returned.  If both  <I>command</I>  and  <I>sequence</I>  are
+              missing  then  a list of all the event sequences for which bind-
+              ings have been defined for <I>tagName</I>.
+
+              <B>-activebackground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the background color for active legend entries.  All
+                     legend  entries  marked  active  (see the legend <B>activate</B>
+                     operation) are drawn using this background color.
+
+              <B>-activeborderwidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the width of the 3-D border around the outside  edge
+                     of the active legend entries.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-activeforeground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the foreground color for active legend entries.  All
+                     legend entries marked as active (see the legend  <B>activate</B>
+                     operation) are drawn using this foreground color.
+
+              <B>-activerelief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies  the  3-D  effect  desired  for  active  legend
+                     entries.  <I>Relief</I> denotes how the interior  of  the  entry
+                     should appear relative to the legend; for example, raised
+                     means the entry should appear to protrude from  the  leg-
+                     end,  relative to the surface of the legend.  The default
+                     is flat.
+
+              <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+                     Tells how to position the legend relative  to  the  posi-
+                     tioning  point  for the legend.  This is dependent on the
+                     value of the <B>-position</B> option.  The default is center.
+
+                     left or right
+                                 The anchor describes how to position the leg-
+                                 end vertically.
+
+                     top or bottom
+                                 The anchor describes how to position the leg-
+                                 end horizontally.
+
+                     @x,y        The anchor specifies how to position the leg-
+                                 end  relative  to  the positioning point. For
+                                 example, if <I>anchor</I> is center then the  legend
+                                 is centered on the point; if <I>anchor</I> is n then
+                                 the legend will be drawn such  that  the  top
+                                 center  point of the rectangular region occu-
+                                 pied by the legend will be at the positioning
+                                 point.
+
+                     plotarea    The anchor specifies how to position the leg-
+                                 end relative to the plotting area. For  exam-
+                                 ple,  if  <I>anchor</I> is center then the legend is
+                                 centered in the plotting area; if  <I>anchor</I>  is
+                                 ne  then  the  legend will be drawn such that
+                                 occupies the upper right corner of the  plot-
+                                 ting area.
+
+                     of  the legend (if such border is being drawn; the <B>relief</B>
+                     option determines this).  The default is 2 pixels.
+
+              <B>-font</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     <I>FontName</I> specifies a font to use when drawing the  labels
+                     of  each  element into the legend.  The default is *-Hel-
+                     vetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-12-120-*.
+
+              <B>-foreground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the foreground color of the text drawn for the  ele-
+                     ment's label.  The default is black.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether  the  legend  should  be displayed. If
+                     <I>boolean</I> is true,  the  legend  will  not  be  draw.   The
+                     default is no.
+
+              <B>-ipadx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  amount  of internal padding to be added to the
+                     width of each legend entry.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of one  or
+                     two  screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements, the left
+                     side of the legend entry is padded by the first  distance
+                     and  the  right  side  by the second.  If <I>pad</I> is just one
+                     distance, both  the  left  and  right  sides  are  padded
+                     evenly.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-ipady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  an  amount  of  internal padding to be added to the
+                     height of each legend entry.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of one or
+                     two  screen  distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements, the top
+                     of the entry is padded by the first distance and the bot-
+                     tom by the second.  If <I>pad</I> is just one distance, both the
+                     top and bottom of  the  entry  are  padded  evenly.   The
+                     default is 2.
+
+              <B>-padx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  padding to the left and right exteriors of the
+                     legend.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of  one  or  two  screen  dis-
+                     tances.   If  <I>pad</I>  has two elements, the left side of the
+                     legend is padded by the first distance and the right side
+                     by  the  second.   If <I>pad</I> has just one distance, both the
+                     left and right sides are padded evenly.  The  default  is
+                     4.
+
+              <B>-pady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the padding above and below the legend.  <I>Pad</I> can be
+                     a list of one or two screen distances.  If  <I>pad</I>  has  two
+                     elements,  the  area  above  the  legend is padded by the
+                     first distance and the area below by the second.  If  <I>pad</I>
+                     is  just  one distance, both the top and bottom areas are
+                     padded evenly.  The default is 0.
+
+                     drawn on top of any elements that  may  overlap  it.  The
+                     default is no.
+
+              <B>-relief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies  the  3-D effect for the border around the leg-
+                     end.  <I>Relief</I> specifies how the  interior  of  the  legend
+                     should  appear  relative  to  the bar chart; for example,
+                     raised means the legend should appear  to  protrude  from
+                     the  bar chart, relative to the surface of the bar chart.
+                     The default is sunken.
+
+              Legend configuration options may also be set by the <B>option</B>  com-
+              mand.  The resource name and class are legend and Legend respec-
+              tively.  option add *Barchart.legend.Foreground blue option  add
+              *Barchart.Legend.Relief     raised
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>deactivate</B> <I>pattern</I>...
+              Selects  legend entries to be drawn using the normal legend col-
+              ors and relief.  All entries whose element names  match  <I>pattern</I>
+              are  selected.  To be selected, the element name must match only
+              one <I>pattern</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>get</B> <I>pos</I>
+              Returns the name of the element whose entry  is  at  the  screen
+              position  <I>pos</I>  in  the  legend.  <I>Pos</I> must be in the form "<I>@x,y</I>",
+              where <I>x</I> and <I>y</I> are window coordinates.  If the given  coordinates
+              do not lie over a legend entry, "" is returned.
+
+   <B>PEN</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B>
+       Pens  define  attributes  for  elements.  Pens mirror the configuration
+       options of data elements that pertain to  how  symbols  and  lines  are
+       drawn.  Data elements use pens to determine how they are drawn.  A data
+       element may use several pens at once.  In this case, the pen used for a
+       particular  data  point is determined from each element's weight vector
+       (see the element's <B>-weight</B> and <B>-style</B> options).
+
+       One pen, called activeBar, is automatically created.  It's used as  the
+       default  active  pen  for  elements.  So  you  can  change  the  active
+       attributes for all elements by simply reconfiguring this pen.   .g  pen
+       configure  "activeBar" -fg green -bg green4 You can create and use sev-
+       eral pens. To create a pen, invoke the pen  component  and  its  create
+       operation.   .g  pen  create myPen You map pens to a data element using
+       either the element's <B>-pen</B> or <B>-activepen</B>  options.   .g  element  create
+       "e1" -xdata $x -ydata $tempData \
+           -pen myPen An element can use several pens at once. This is done by
+       specifying the name of the pen in the element's  style  list  (see  the
+       <B>-styles</B>  option).   .g element configure "e1" -styles { myPen 2.0 3.0 }
+       This says that any data point with a weight between 2.0 and 3.0  is  to
+       be drawn using the pen myPen.  All other points are drawn with the ele-
+       ment's default attributes.
+
+       The following operations are available for pen components.
+              <I>value</I>.  The following options are valid for pens.
+
+              <B>-background</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the the color of the border around  each  bar.   The
+                     default is white.
+
+              <B>-borderwidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the border width of the 3-D border drawn around the
+                     outside of each bar.  The <B>-relief</B>  option  determines  if
+                     such  a  border  is drawn.  <I>Pixels</I> must be a valid screen
+                     distance like 2 or 0.25i. The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-foreground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the interior of the bars.
+
+              <B>-relief</B> <I>string</I>
+                     Specifies the 3-D effect desired for bars.  <I>Relief</I>  indi-
+                     cates  how the interior of the bar should appear relative
+                     to the surface of the chart; for  example,  raised  means
+                     the  bar  should  appear  to protrude from the bar chart,
+                     relative to  the  surface  of  the  plotting  area.   The
+                     default is raised.
+
+              <B>-stipple</B> <I>bitmap</I>
+                     Specifies  a stipple pattern with which to draw the bars.
+                     If <I>bitmap</I> is "", then the bar is drawn in a  solid  fash-
+                     ion.
+
+              <B>-type</B> <I>elemType</I>
+                     Specifies the type of element the pen is to be used with.
+                     This option should only be  employed  when  creating  the
+                     pen.   This is for those that wish to mix different types
+                     of elements (bars and lines)  on  the  same  graph.   The
+                     default type is "bar".
+
+              Pen  configuration options may be also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.  The resource class is Pen.  The resource  names  are  the
+              names  of  the  pens.   option add *Barchart.Pen.Foreground
+              blue option add *Barchart.activeBar.foreground  green
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>pen</B> <B>create</B> <I>penName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Creates a new pen by the name <I>penName</I>.  No pen by the same  name
+              can  already  exist.  <I>Option</I> and <I>value</I> are described in above in
+              the pen <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>pen</B> <B>delete</B> ?<I>penName</I>?...
+              Deletes the named pens. A pen is not really deleted until it  is
+              not  longer  in  use, so it's safe to delete pens mapped to ele-
+              ments.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>pen</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?...
+              Returns a list of pens matching zero or more  patterns.   If  no
+              <I>option</I>.   <I>Option</I> may be any option described below for the post-
+              script <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>postscript</B> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries or modifies the  configuration  options  for  PostScript
+              generation.   If  <I>option</I>  isn't specified, a list describing the
+              current postscript options for <I>pathName</I> is returned.  If  <I>option</I>
+              is  specified,  but  not <I>value</I>, then a list describing <I>option</I> is
+              returned.  If one or more <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are  specified,
+              then  for  each  pair,  the  postscript  option <I>option</I> is set to
+              <I>value</I>.  The following postscript options are available.
+
+              <B>-center</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the plot  should  be  centered  on  the
+                     PostScript  page.   If <I>boolean</I> is false, the plot will be
+                     placed in the upper left corner of the page.  The default
+                     is 1.
+
+              <B>-colormap</B> <I>varName</I>
+                     <I>VarName</I>  must be the name of a global array variable that
+                     specifies a color mapping from the X color name to  Post-
+                     Script.   Each  element  of <I>varName</I> must consist of Post-
+                     Script code to set a particular color value  (e.g.  ``1.0
+                     1.0  0.0  setrgbcolor'').  When generating color informa-
+                     tion in PostScript, the array variable <I>varName</I> is checked
+                     if  an element of the name as the color exists. If so, it
+                     uses its value as  the  PostScript  command  to  set  the
+                     color.  If this option hasn't been specified, or if there
+                     isn't an entry in <I>varName</I> for a given color, then it uses
+                     the red, green, and blue intensities from the X color.
+
+              <B>-colormode</B> <I>mode</I>
+                     Specifies  how to output color information.  <I>Mode</I> must be
+                     either color (for full color output), gray  (convert  all
+                     colors  to their gray-scale equivalents) or mono (convert
+                     foreground colors  to  black  and  background  colors  to
+                     white).  The default mode is color.
+
+              <B>-fontmap</B> <I>varName</I>
+                     <I>VarName</I>  must be the name of a global array variable that
+                     specifies a font mapping from the X font  name  to  Post-
+                     Script.   Each  element  of <I>varName</I> must consist of a Tcl
+                     list with one or two elements; the name and point size of
+                     a  PostScript  font.  When outputting PostScript commands
+                     for a particular font,  the  array  variable  <I>varName</I>  is
+                     checked  to  see  if  an  element  by  the specified font
+                     exists.  If there is  such  an  element,  then  the  font
+                     information  contained  in  that  element  is used in the
+                     PostScript output.  (If the point size  is  omitted  from
+                     the  list, the point size of the X font is used).  Other-
+                     wise the X font is examined in an attempt to  guess  what
+                     PostScript  font to use.  This works only for fonts whose
+                     widget's height.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-landscape</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     If <I>boolean</I> is true, this specifies the printed area is to
+                     be  rotated 90 degrees.  In non-rotated output the X-axis
+                     of the printed area runs along the short dimension of the
+                     page  (``portrait''  orientation);  in rotated output the
+                     X-axis runs along the long dimension of the page (``land-
+                     scape'' orientation).  Defaults to 0.
+
+              <B>-maxpect</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  to  scale  the plot so that it fills the Post-
+                     Script page.  The aspect ratio of the barchart  is  still
+                     retained.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-padx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  horizontal padding for the left and right page
+                     borders.  The borders are exterior to the plot.  <I>Pad</I>  can
+                     be a list of one or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two
+                     elements, the left border is padded by the first distance
+                     and  the right border by the second.  If <I>pad</I> has just one
+                     distance, both the left  and  right  borders  are  padded
+                     evenly.  The default is 1i.
+
+              <B>-pady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  vertical  padding  for the top and bottom page
+                     borders. The borders are exterior to the plot.   <I>Pad</I>  can
+                     be a list of one or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two
+                     elements, the top border is padded by the first  distance
+                     and the bottom border by the second.  If <I>pad</I> has just one
+                     distance, both the top  and  bottom  borders  are  padded
+                     evenly.  The default is 1i.
+
+              <B>-paperheight</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the height of the postscript page.  This can be used
+                     to select between different page sizes (letter, A4, etc).
+                     The default height is 11.0i.
+
+              <B>-paperwidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the width of the postscript page.  This can be used
+                     to select between different page sizes (letter, A4, etc).
+                     The default width is 8.5i.
+
+              <B>-width</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the  width  of  the plot.  This lets you generate a
+                     plot of a width different from that of  the  widget.   If
+                     <I>pixels</I> is 0, the width is the same as the widget's width.
+                     The default is 0.
+
+              Postscript configuration options may  be  also  be  set  by  the
+              <B>option</B>  command.  The resource name and class are postscript and
+              Postscript respectively.  option add  *Barchart.postscript.Deco-
+
+       with  a  particular  element, so that when the element is hidden or un-
+       hidden, so is the marker.  By  default,  markers  are  the  last  items
+       drawn,  so  that  data  elements  will  appear in behind them.  You can
+       change this by configuring the <B>-under</B> option.
+
+       Markers, in contrast to elements, don't affect the scaling of the coor-
+       dinate axes.  They can also have <I>elastic</I> coordinates (specified by -Inf
+       and Inf respectively) that translate into the minimum or maximum  limit
+       of  the axis.  For example, you can place a marker so it always remains
+       in the lower left corner of the plotting area, by using the coordinates
+       -Inf,-Inf.
+
+       The following operations are available for markers.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>after</B> <I>markerId</I> ?<I>afterId</I>?
+              Changes the order of the markers, drawing the first marker after
+              the second.  If no second <I>afterId</I>  argument  is  specified,  the
+              marker  is  placed at the end of the display list.  This command
+              can be used to control how markers are displayed  since  markers
+              are drawn in the order of this display list.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>before</B> <I>markerId</I> ?<I>beforeId</I>?
+              Changes  the  order  of  the  markers,  drawing the first marker
+              before the second.  If no second <I>beforeId</I> argument is specified,
+              the marker is placed at the beginning of the display list.  This
+              command can be used to control how markers are  displayed  since
+              markers are drawn in the order of this display list.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>bind</B> <I>tagName</I> ?<I>sequence</I>?  ?<I>command</I>?
+              Associates  <I>command</I>  with  <I>tagName</I>  such that whenever the event
+              sequence given by <I>sequence</I> occurs for a marker  with  this  tag,
+              <I>command</I> will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the <B>bind</B> com-
+              mand except that it operates on graph markers, rather than  wid-
+              gets. See the <B>bind</B> manual entry for complete details on <I>sequence</I>
+              and the substitutions performed on <I>command</I> before invoking it.
+
+              If all arguments are specified then a new  binding  is  created,
+              replacing  any  existing  binding for the same <I>sequence</I> and <I>tag-</I>
+              <I>Name</I>.  If the first character of <I>command</I> is + then <I>command</I>  aug-
+              ments  an existing binding rather than replacing it.  If no <I>com-</I>
+              <I>mand</I> argument is provided then the command currently  associated
+              with  <I>tagName</I>  and  <I>sequence</I> (it's an error occurs if there's no
+              such binding) is returned.  If both  <I>command</I>  and  <I>sequence</I>  are
+              missing  then  a list of all the event sequences for which bind-
+              ings have been defined for <I>tagName</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+              Returns the current value of  the  marker  configuration  option
+              given  by  <I>option</I>.   <I>Option</I> may be any option described below in
+              the <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>configure</B> <I>markerId</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+                     determine  how  events for markers are handled.  Each tag
+                     in the list matching the current event sequence will have
+                     its  Tcl  command  executed.   Implicitly the name of the
+                     marker is always the first tag in the list.  The  default
+                     value is all.
+
+              <B>-coords</B> <I>coordList</I>
+                     Specifies  the coordinates of the marker.  <I>CoordList</I> is a
+                     list of graph-coordinates.   The  number  of  coordinates
+                     required  is  dependent  on  the  type  of marker.  Text,
+                     image, and window markers need only two  coordinates  (an
+                     X-Y  coordinate).   Bitmap markers can take either two or
+                     four coordinates (if four, they represent the corners  of
+                     the bitmap). Line markers need at least four coordinates,
+                     polygons at least six.  If <I>coordList</I> is  "",  the  marker
+                     will not be displayed.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-element</B> <I>elemName</I>
+                     Links  the  marker with the element <I>elemName</I>.  The marker
+                     is drawn only if the element is also currently  displayed
+                     (see  the  element's <B>show</B> operation).  If <I>elemName</I> is "",
+                     the marker is always drawn.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the marker  is  drawn.  If  <I>boolean</I>  is
+                     true, the marker is not drawn.  The default is no.
+
+              <B>-mapx</B> <I>xAxis</I>
+                     Specifies  the  X-axis  to map the marker's X-coordinates
+                     onto.  <I>XAxis</I> must the name of an axis.  The default is x.
+
+              <B>-mapy</B> <I>yAxis</I>
+                     Specifies  the  Y-axis  to map the marker's Y-coordinates
+                     onto.  <I>YAxis</I> must the name of an axis.  The default is y.
+
+              <B>-name</B> <I>markerId</I>
+                     Changes  the  identifier  for the marker.  The identifier
+                     <I>markerId</I> can not already be used by another  marker.   If
+                     this   option  isn't  specified,  the  marker's  name  is
+                     uniquely generated.
+
+              <B>-under</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the marker is  drawn  below/above  data
+                     elements.   If  <I>boolean</I>  is  true, the marker is be drawn
+                     underneath the data elements.  Otherwise, the  marker  is
+                     drawn on top of the element.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-xoffset</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies a screen distance to offset the marker horizon-
+                     tally.  <I>Pixels</I> is a valid screen distance, such as  2  or
+                     1.2i.  The default is 0.
+
+              Creates  a marker of the selected type. <I>Type</I> may be either text,
+              line, bitmap, image, polygon, or window.  This  command  returns
+              the  marker  identifier,  used  as  the <I>markerId</I> argument in the
+              other marker-related commands.  If the  <B>-name</B>  option  is  used,
+              this  overrides  the normal marker identifier.  If the name pro-
+              vided is already used for another marker, the  new  marker  will
+              replace the old.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>delete</B> ?<I>name</I>?...
+              Removes  one  of  more markers.  The graph will automatically be
+              redrawn without the marker..
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>exists</B> <I>markerId</I>
+              Returns 1 if the marker <I>markerId</I> exists and 0 otherwise.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?
+              Returns the names of all the markers that currently  exist.   If
+              <I>pattern</I>  is  supplied,  only  those markers whose names match it
+              will be returned.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>type</B> <I>markerId</I>
+              Returns the type of the marker given by <I>markerId</I>, such  as  line
+              or  text.  If <I>markerId</I> is not a valid a marker identifier, "" is
+              returned.
+
+   <B>BITMAP</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       A bitmap marker displays a bitmap.  The size  of  the  bitmap  is  con-
+       trolled  by  the  number of coordinates specified.  If two coordinates,
+       they specify the position of the top-left corner of  the  bitmap.   The
+       bitmap  retains  its normal width and height.  If four coordinates, the
+       first and second pairs of coordinates represent the corners of the bit-
+       map.   The bitmap will be stretched or reduced as necessary to fit into
+       the bounding rectangle.
+
+       Bitmap markers are created with the marker's <B>create</B>  operation  in  the
+       form:  <I>pathName</I>  <B>marker</B>  <B>create</B>  <B>bitmap</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  There may be
+       many <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs, each sets  a  configuration  options  for  the
+       marker.   These  same  <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may be used with the marker's
+       <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       The following options are specific to bitmap markers:
+
+       <B>-background</B> <I>color</I>
+              Same as the <B>-fill</B> option.
+
+       <B>-bitmap</B> <I>bitmap</I>
+              Specifies the bitmap to be displayed.   If  <I>bitmap</I>  is  "",  the
+              marker will not be displayed.  The default is "".
+
+       <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets  the background color of the bitmap.  If <I>color</I> is the empty
+              string, no background will be transparent.   The  default  back-
+
+       <B>-rotate</B> <I>theta</I>
+              Sets  the rotation of the bitmap.  <I>Theta</I> is a real number repre-
+              senting the angle of rotation in degrees.  The marker  is  first
+              rotated  and  then placed according to its anchor position.  The
+              default rotation is 0.0.
+
+   <B>IMAGE</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       A image marker displays an image.  Image markers are created  with  the
+       marker's  <B>create</B>  operation  in  the form: <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>create</B> <B>image</B>
+       ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  There may be many <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs,  each  sets  a
+       configuration option for the marker.  These same <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may
+       be used with the marker's <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       The following options are specific to image markers:
+
+       <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+              <I>Anchor</I> tells how to position the image relative to the position-
+              ing  point  for the image. For example, if <I>anchor</I> is center then
+              the image is centered on the point;  if <I>anchor</I>  is  n  then  the
+              image  will be drawn such that the top center point of the rect-
+              angular region occupied by the image will be at the  positioning
+              point.  This option defaults to center.
+
+       <B>-image</B> <I>image</I>
+              Specifies  the  image  to  be drawn.  If <I>image</I> is "", the marker
+              will not be drawn.  The default is "".
+
+   <B>LINE</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       A line marker displays one or more connected line segments.  Line mark-
+       ers  are  created  with marker's <B>create</B> operation in the form: <I>pathName</I>
+       <B>marker</B> <B>create</B> <B>line</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  There may  be  many  <I>option</I>-<I>value</I>
+       pairs,  each  sets  a  configuration option for the marker.  These same
+       <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may be used with the marker's <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       The following options are specific to line markers:
+
+       <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+              Sets the dash style of the line. <I>DashList</I> is a list of up to  11
+              numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes and
+              gaps on the line.  Each number must be between 1  and  255.   If
+              <I>dashList</I> is "", the marker line will be solid.
+
+       <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets  the background color of the line.  This color is used with
+              striped lines (see the <B>-dashes</B> option). If <I>color</I>  is  the  empty
+              string,  no  background color is drawn (the line will be dashed,
+              not striped).  The default background color is "".
+
+       <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+              Sets the width of the lines.  The default width is 0.
+
+       in  the  form:  <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>create</B> <B>polygon</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  There
+       may be many <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs, each sets a  configuration  option  for
+       the  marker.  These same <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may be used with the <B>marker</B>
+       <B>configure</B> command to change the marker's configuration.  The  following
+       options are supported for polygon markers:
+
+       <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+              Sets the dash style of the outline of the polygon. <I>DashList</I> is a
+              list of up to 11 numbers that alternately represent the  lengths
+              of  the  dashes  and  gaps  on the outline.  Each number must be
+              between 1 and 255. If <I>dashList</I> is "",  the  outline  will  be  a
+              solid line.
+
+       <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets  the  fill  color of the polygon.  If <I>color</I> is "", then the
+              interior of the polygon is transparent.  The default is white.
+
+       <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+              Sets the width of the outline of the polygon. If <I>pixels</I> is zero,
+              no outline is drawn. The default is 0.
+
+       <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the color of the outline of the polygon.  If the polygon is
+              stippled (see the <B>-stipple</B> option),  then  this  represents  the
+              foreground color of the stipple.  The default is black.
+
+       <B>-stipple</B> <I>bitmap</I>
+              Specifies  that the polygon should be drawn with a stippled pat-
+              tern rather than a solid color. <I>Bitmap</I> specifies a bitmap to use
+              as  the  stipple  pattern.  If <I>bitmap</I> is "", then the polygon is
+              filled with a solid color (if the <B>-fill</B>  option  is  set).   The
+              default is "".
+
+   <B>TEXT</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       A  text  marker displays a string of characters on one or more lines of
+       text.  Embedded newlines cause line breaks.  They may be used to  anno-
+       tate  regions  of  the graph.  Text markers are created with the <B>create</B>
+       operation in the form: <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>create</B>  <B>text</B>  ?<I>option</I>  <I>value</I>?...
+       There  may be many <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs, each sets a configuration option
+       for the text marker.  These same <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may  be  used  with
+       the marker's <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       The following options are specific to text markers:
+
+       <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+              <I>Anchor</I>  tells how to position the text relative to the position-
+              ing point for the text. For example, if <I>anchor</I>  is  center  then
+              the  text is centered on the point; if <I>anchor</I> is n then the text
+              will be drawn such that the top center point of the  rectangular
+              region  occupied  by  the text will be at the positioning point.
+              This default is center.
+
+
+       <B>-justify</B> <I>justify</I>
+              Specifies  how  the text should be justified.  This matters only
+              when the marker contains more than one  line  of  text.  <I>Justify</I>
+              must be left, right, or center.  The default is center.
+
+       <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the color of the text. The default value is black.
+
+       <B>-padx</B> <I>pad</I>
+              Sets  the  padding  to the left and right exteriors of the text.
+              <I>Pad</I> can be a list of one or two screen distances.   If  <I>pad</I>  has
+              two  elements,  the left side of the text is padded by the first
+              distance and the right side by the second.  If <I>pad</I> has just  one
+              distance,  both the left and right sides are padded evenly.  The
+              default is 4.
+
+       <B>-pady</B> <I>pad</I>
+              Sets the padding above and below the text.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of
+              one  or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements, the area
+              above the text is padded by the  first  distance  and  the  area
+              below  by the second.  If <I>pad</I> is just one distance, both the top
+              and bottom areas are padded evenly.  The default is 4.
+
+       <B>-rotate</B> <I>theta</I>
+              Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the text.  <I>Theta</I> is  a
+              real  number  representing the angle of rotation.  The marker is
+              first rotated along its center and is then  drawn  according  to
+              its anchor position. The default is 0.0.
+
+       <B>-text</B> <I>text</I>
+              Specifies  the  text  of  the marker.  The exact way the text is
+              displayed may be affected by other options such  as  <B>-anchor</B>  or
+              <B>-rotate</B>.
+
+   <B>WINDOW</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       A  window marker displays a widget at a given position.  Window markers
+       are created with the marker's <B>create</B> operation in  the  form:  <I>pathName</I>
+       <B>marker</B>  <B>create</B> <B>window</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  There may be many <I>option</I>-<I>value</I>
+       pairs, each sets a configuration option for  the  marker.   These  same
+       <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may be used with the marker's <B>configure</B> command.
+
+       The following options are specific to window markers:
+
+       <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+              <I>Anchor</I>  tells  how  to position the widget relative to the posi-
+              tioning point for the widget. For example, if <I>anchor</I>  is  center
+              then  the  widget  is centered on the point; if <I>anchor</I> is n then
+              the widget will be displayed such that the top center  point  of
+              the  rectangular  region  occupied  by the widget will be at the
+              positioning point.  This option defaults to center.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>GRAPH COMPONENT BINDINGS</H2><PRE>
+       Specific barchart components, such  as  elements,  markers  and  legend
+       entries,  can  have  a  command trigger when event occurs in them, much
+       like canvas items in Tk's canvas widget.  Not all event  sequences  are
+       valid.  The only binding events that may be specified are those related
+       to the mouse and keyboard (such as <B>Enter</B>, <B>Leave</B>,  <B>ButtonPress</B>,  <B>Motion</B>,
+       and <B>KeyPress</B>).
+
+       Only  one element or marker can be picked during an event.  This means,
+       that if the mouse is directly over both an element and a  marker,  only
+       the  uppermost  component  is  selected.   This  isn't  true for legend
+       entries.  Both a legend entry and an element (or marker)  binding  com-
+       mands will be invoked if both items are picked.
+
+       It is possible for multiple bindings to match a particular event.  This
+       could occur, for example, if one binding is associated with the element
+       name  and another is associated with one of the element's tags (see the
+       <B>-bindtags</B> option).  When this occurs, all of the matching bindings  are
+       invoked.   A binding associated with the element name is invoked first,
+       followed by one binding for each of the element's bindtags.   If  there
+       are  multiple  matching  bindings  for a single tag, then only the most
+       specific binding is invoked.  A continue command in  a  binding  script
+       terminates  that script, and a break command terminates that script and
+       skips any remaining scripts for the event, just as for  the  bind  com-
+       mand.
+
+       The  <B>-bindtags</B>  option for these components controls addition tag names
+       which can be matched.  Implicitly elements and markers always have tags
+       matching  their  names.   Setting  the  value  of  the <B>-bindtags</B> option
+       doesn't change this.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>C LANGUAGE API</H2><PRE>
+       You can manipulate data elements from the C  language.   There  may  be
+       situations  where it is too expensive to translate the data values from
+       ASCII strings.  Or you might want to read data in a special  file  for-
+       mat.
+
+       Data  can manipulated from the C language using BLT vectors.  You spec-
+       ify the X-Y data coordinates of an element as  vectors  and  manipulate
+       the  vector  from  C.  The barchart will be redrawn automatically after
+       the vectors are updated.
+
+       From Tcl, create the vectors and configure the  element  to  use  them.
+       vector  X  Y  .g  element configure line1 -xdata X -ydata Y To set data
+       points from C, you pass the values  as  arrays  of  doubles  using  the
+       <B>Blt_ResetVector</B> call.  The vector is reset with the new data and at the
+       next idle point (when Tk re-enters its event loop), the graph  will  be
+       redrawn automatically.  #include &lt;tcl.h&gt; #include &lt;blt.h&gt;
+
+       register int i; Blt_Vector *xVec, *yVec; double x[50], y[50];
+
+       /*  Get  the  BLT  vectors  "X"  and "Y" (created above from Tcl) */ if
+       There may be cases where the bar chart needs to be drawn and updated as
+       quickly as possible.  If drawing speed becomes a big problem, here  are
+       a few tips to speed up displays.
+
+       <B>o</B> Try  to  minimize  the  number  of data points.  The more data points
+         looked at, the more work the bar chart must do.
+
+       <B>o</B> If your data is generated as floating point values, the time required
+         to  convert the data values to and from ASCII strings can be signifi-
+         cant, especially when there any many data points.  You can avoid  the
+         redundant  string-to-decimal  conversions using the C API to BLT vec-
+         tors.
+
+       <B>o</B> Don't stipple or dash the element.  Solid bars are much faster.
+
+       <B>o</B> If you update data elements frequently, try turning off the  widget's
+         <B>-bufferelements</B>  option.   When  the bar chart is first displayed, it
+         draws data elements into an internal pixmap.  The pixmap  acts  as  a
+         cache,  so that when the bar chart needs to be redrawn again, and the
+         data elements or coordinate axes haven't changed, the pixmap is  sim-
+         ply  copied  to  the  screen.  This is especially useful when you are
+         using markers to highlight points and regions on the bar chart.   But
+         if  the  bar chart is updated frequently, changing either the element
+         data or coordinate axes, the buffering becomes redundant.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2><PRE>
+       Auto-scale routines do not use requested min/max limits  as  boundaries
+       when the axis is logarithmically scaled.
+
+       The PostScript output generated for polygons with more than 1500 points
+       may exceed the limits of some printers (See PostScript Language  Refer-
+       ence  Manual,  page 568).  The work-around is to break the polygon into
+       separate pieces.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>KEYWORDS</H2><PRE>
+       bar chart, widget
+
+
+
+BLT                               BLT_VERSION                      barchart(n)
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<ADDRESS>
+Man(1) output converted with
+<a href="http://www.oac.uci.edu/indiv/ehood/man2html.html">man2html</a>
+</ADDRESS>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/barchart.n b/tkblt/doc/barchart.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a9dac8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/barchart.n
@@ -0,0 +1,2239 @@
+'\"
+'\" Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+'\" This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+'\" available under the same terms.
+'\"
+'\" Copyright 1991-1998 by Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies.
+'\"
+'\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+'\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+'\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that the
+'\" copyright notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting documentation,
+'\" and that the names of Lucent Technologies any of their entities not be used
+'\" in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
+'\" without specific, written prior permission.
+'\"
+'\" Lucent Technologies disclaims all warranties with regard to this software,
+'\" including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness.  In no event
+'\" shall Lucent Technologies be liable for any special, indirect or
+'\" consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use,
+'\" data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other
+'\" tortuous action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance
+'\" of this software.  
+'\"
+'\" Barchart widget created by Sani Nassif and George Howlett.
+'\"
+.TH barchart n BLT_VERSION BLT "BLT Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+barchart \-  Bar chart for plotting X-Y coordinate data.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBbarchart\fI \fIpathName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBbarchart\fR command creates a bar chart for plotting
+two-dimensional data (X-Y coordinates). A bar chart is a graphic means
+of comparing numbers by displaying bars of lengths proportional to the
+y-coordinates of the points they represented.  The bar chart has many
+configurable components: coordinate axes, elements, legend, grid
+lines, cross hairs, etc.  They allow you to customize the look and
+feel of the graph.
+.SH INTRODUCTION
+The \fBbarchart\fR command creates a new window for plotting
+two-dimensional data (X-Y coordinates), using bars of
+various lengths to represent the data points.  The bars are drawn in a
+rectangular area displayed in the center of the new window.  This is the
+\fIplotting area\fR.  The coordinate axes are drawn in
+the margins surrounding the plotting area.  By default, the legend is
+drawn in the right margin.  The title is displayed in top margin.
+.PP
+A \fBbarchart\fR widget has several configurable components:
+coordinate axes, data elements, legend, grid, cross hairs, pens,
+postscript, and annotation markers.  Each component can be queried or
+modified.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWaxis\fR 
+
+Up to four coordinate axes (two X\-coordinate and two Y\-coordinate
+axes) can be displayed, but you can create and use any number of
+axes. Axes control what region of data is displayed and how the data
+is scaled. Each axis consists of the axis line, title, major and minor
+ticks, and tick labels. Tick labels display the value at each major
+tick.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWcrosshairs\fR 
+Cross hairs are used to position the mouse pointer relative to the X
+and Y coordinate axes. Two perpendicular lines, intersecting at the
+current location of the mouse, extend across the plotting area to the
+coordinate axes.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWelement\fR 
+An element represents a set of data to be plotted.  It contains an x
+and y vector of values representing the data points.  Each
+data point is displayed as a bar where the length of the bar is
+proportional to the ordinate (Y-coordinate) of the data point.
+The appearance of the bar, such as its color, stipple, or relief
+is configurable.
+.sp
+A special case exists when two or more data points have the same
+abscissa (X-coordinate).  By default, the bars are overlayed, one on
+top of the other.  The bars are drawn in the order of the element
+display list.  But you can also configure the bars to be displayed in
+two other ways.  They may be displayed as a stack, where each bar
+(with the same abscissa) is stacked on the previous.  Or they can be
+drawn side-by-side as thin bars.  The width of each bar is a function
+of the number of data points with the same abscissa.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWgrid\fR
+Extends the major and minor ticks of the X\-axis and/or Y\-axis across the 
+plotting area. 
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWlegend\fR 
+The legend displays the name and symbol of each data element. 
+The legend can be drawn in any margin or in the plotting area.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWmarker\fR
+Markers are used annotate or highlight areas of the graph. For
+example, you could use a text marker to label a particular data
+point. Markers come in various forms: text strings, bitmaps, connected
+line segments, images, polygons, or embedded widgets.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWpen\fR 
+Pens define attributes for elements.  Data elements use pens to
+specify how they should be drawn.  A data element may use many pens at
+once.  Here the particular pen used for a data point is determined
+from each element's weight vector (see the element's \fB\-weight\fR
+and \fB\-style\fR options).
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWpostscript\fR
+The widget can generate encapsulated PostScript output. This component
+has several options to configure how the PostScript is generated.
+.SH SYNTAX
+.DS
+\fBbarchart \fIpathName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+The \fBbarchart\fR command creates a new window \fIpathName\fR and makes
+it into a \fBbarchart\fR widget.  At the time this command is invoked, there
+must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's
+parent must exist.  Additional options may be specified on the
+command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the
+graph such as its colors and font.  See the \fBconfigure\fR operation
+below for the exact details about what \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR
+pairs are valid.
+.PP
+If successful, \fBbarchart\fR returns the path name of the widget.  It
+also creates a new Tcl command by the same name.  You can use this
+command to invoke various operations that query or modify the graph.
+The general form is:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fIoperation\fR \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+.DE
+Both \fIoperation\fR and its arguments determine the exact behavior of
+the command.  The operations available for the graph are described in 
+the 
+.SB "BARCHART OPERATIONS"
+section.
+.PP
+The command can also be used to access components of the graph.
+.DS
+\fIpathName component operation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?...
+.DE
+The operation, now located after the name of the component, is the
+function to be performed on that component. Each component has its own
+set of operations that manipulate that component.  They will be
+described below in their own sections.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+The \fBbarchart\fR command creates a new bar chart.  
+.CS
+# Create a new bar chart.  Plotting area is black.
+barchart .b -plotbackground black
+.CE
+A new Tcl command \f(CW.b\fR is created.  This command can be used
+to query and modify the bar chart.  For
+example, to change the title of the graph to "My Plot", you use the
+new command and the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Change the title.
+\&.b configure -title "My Plot"
+.CE
+To add data elements, you use the command and the \fBelement\fR component.
+.CS
+# Create a new element named "e1"
+\&.b element create e1 \\
+	-xdata { 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 } \\
+	-ydata { 26.18 50.46 72.85 93.31 111.86 128.47 143.14 
+		155.85 166.60 175.38 }
+.CE
+The element's X-Y coordinates are specified using lists of
+numbers.  Alternately, BLT vectors could be used to hold the X-Y
+coordinates.
+.CS
+# Create two vectors and add them to the barchart.
+vector xVector yVector
+xVector set { 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 }
+yVector set { 26.18 50.46 72.85 93.31 111.86 128.47 143.14 155.85 
+	166.60 175.38 }
+\&n.b element create e1 -xdata xVector -ydata yVector
+.CE
+The advantage of using vectors is that when you modify one, the graph
+is automatically redrawn to reflect the new values.
+.CS
+# Change the y coordinate of the first point.
+set yVector(0) 25.18
+.CE
+An element named \f(CWe1\fR is now created in \f(CW.b\fR.  It 
+is automatically added to the display list of elements.  You can
+use this list to control in what order elements are displayed.
+To query or reset the element display list, you use the element's 
+\fBshow\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Get the current display list 
+set elemList [.b element show]
+# Remove the first element so it won't be displayed.
+\&.b element show [lrange $elemList 0 end]
+.CE
+The element will be displayed by as many bars as there are data points
+(in this case there are ten).  The bars will be drawn centered at the
+x-coordinate of the data point.  All the bars will have the same
+attributes (colors, stipple, etc).  The width of each bar is by
+default one unit.  You can change this with using the \fB\-barwidth\fR
+option.
+.CS
+# Change the scale of the x-coordinate data 
+xVector set { 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 }
+# Make sure we change the bar width too.
+\&.b configure -barwidth 0.2
+.CE
+The height of each bar is proportional to the ordinate (Y-coordinate)
+of the data point.
+.PP
+If two or more data points have the same abscissa (X-coordinate
+value), the bars representing those data points may be drawn in 
+various ways.
+The default is to overlay the bars, one on top of the other.
+The ordering is determined from the of element display list.  If
+the stacked mode is selected (using the \fB\-barmode\fR configuration
+option), the bars are stacked, each bar above the previous.
+.CS
+# Display the elements as stacked.
+\&.b configure -barmode stacked
+.CE
+If the aligned mode is selected, the bars having the same
+x-coordinates are displayed side by side.  The width of each bar is a
+fraction of its normal width, based upon the number of bars with the
+same x-coordinate.
+.CS
+# Display the elements side-by-side.
+\&.b configure -barmode aligned
+.CE
+By default, the element's label in the legend will be also
+\f(CWe1\fR.  You can change the label, or specify no legend entry,
+again using the element's \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Don't display "e1" in the legend.
+\&.b element configure e1 -label ""
+.CE
+You can configure more than just the element's label.  An element has
+many attributes such as stipple, foreground and background colors,
+relief, etc.
+.CS
+\&.b element configure e1 -fg red -bg pink \\
+	-stipple gray50
+.CE
+Four coordinate axes are automatically created: \f(CWx\fR, \f(CWx2\fR,
+\f(CWy\fR, and \f(CWy2\fR.  And by default, elements are mapped onto the
+axes \f(CWx\fR and \f(CWy\fR.  This can be changed with the \fB\-mapx\fR
+and \fB\-mapy\fR options.
+.CS
+# Map "e1" on the alternate y axis "y2".
+\&.b element configure e1 -mapy y2
+.CE
+Axes can be configured in many ways too.  For example, you change the
+scale of the Y\-axis from linear to log using the \fBaxis\fR component.
+.CS
+# Y-axis is log scale.
+\&.b axis configure y -logscale yes
+.CE
+One important way axes are used is to zoom in on a particular data
+region.  Zooming is done by simply specifying new axis limits using
+the \fB\-min\fR and \fB\-max\fR configuration options.
+.CS
+\&.b axis configure x \-min 1.0 \-max 1.5
+\&.b axis configure y \-min 12.0 \-max 55.15
+.CE
+To zoom interactively, you link the\fBaxis configure\fR operations with
+some user interaction (such as pressing the mouse button), using the
+\fBbind\fR command.  To convert between screen and graph coordinates,
+use the \fBinvtransform\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Click the button to set a new minimum 
+bind .b <ButtonPress-1> { 
+    %W axis configure x \-min [%W axis invtransform x %x]
+    %W axis configure x \-min [%W axis invtransform x %y]
+}
+.CE
+By default, the limits of the axis are determined from data values.
+To reset back to the default limits, set the \fB\-min\fR and
+\fB\-max\fR options to the empty value.
+.CS
+# Reset the axes to autoscale again.
+\&.b axis configure x \-min {} \-max {}
+\&.b axis configure y \-min {} \-max {}
+.CE
+By default, the legend is drawn in the right margin.  You can
+change this or any legend configuration options using the
+\fBlegend\fR component.
+.CS
+# Configure the legend font, color, and relief
+\&.b legend configure -position left -relief raised \\
+	-font fixed -fg blue
+.CE
+To prevent the legend from being displayed, turn on the \fB\-hide\fR
+option.
+.CS
+# Don't display the legend.
+\&.b legend configure \-hide yes\fR
+.CE
+The \fBbarchart\fR has simple drawing procedures called markers.  They can be
+used to highlight or annotate data in the graph. The types of markers
+available are bitmaps, polygons, lines, or windows.  Markers can be
+used, for example, to mark or brush points.  For example there may be
+a line marker which indicates some low-water value.  Markers are created
+using the \fBmarker\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Create a line represent the low water mark at 10.0
+\&.b marker create line -name "low_water" \\
+	-coords { -Inf 10.0 Inf 10.0 } \\
+	-dashes { 2 4 2 } -fg red -bg blue 
+.CE
+This creates a line marker named \f(CWlow_water\fR.  It will display a
+horizontal line stretching across the plotting area at the
+y-coordinate 10.0.  The coordinates "-Inf" and "Inf" indicate the
+relative minimum and maximum of the axis (in this case the x-axis).  By
+default, markers are drawn last, on top of the bars.  You can change this
+with the \fB\-under\fR option.
+.CS
+# Draw the marker before elements are drawn.
+\&.b marker configure low_water -under yes
+.CE
+You can add cross hairs or grid lines using the \fBcrosshairs\fR and
+\fBgrid\fR components.
+.CS
+# Display both cross hairs and grid lines.
+\&.b crosshairs configure -hide no -color red
+\&.b grid configure -hide no -dashes { 2 2 }
+.CE
+Finally, to get hardcopy of the graph, use the \fBpostscript\fR
+component.
+.CS
+# Print the bar chart into file "file.ps"
+\&.b postscript output file.ps -maxpect yes -decorations no
+.CE
+This generates a file \f(CWfile.ps\fR containing the encapsulated
+PostScript of the graph.  The option \fB\-maxpect\fR says to scale the
+plot to the size of the page.  Turning off the \fB\-decorations\fR
+option denotes that no borders or color backgrounds should be
+drawn (i.e. the background of the margins, legend, and plotting
+area will be white).
+.SH SYNTAX
+.DS
+\fBbarchart \fIpathName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+The \fBbarchart\fR command creates a new window \fIpathName\fR and makes
+it into a barchart widget.  At the time this command is invoked, there
+must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's
+parent must exist.  Additional options may may be specified on the
+command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the
+bar chart such as its colors and font.  See the \fBconfigure\fR operation
+below for the exact details as to what \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR
+pairs are valid.
+.PP
+If successful, \fBbarchart\fR returns \fIpathName\fR. It also creates a
+new Tcl command \fIpathName\fR.  This command may be used to invoke
+various operations to query or modify the bar chart.  It has the general
+form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fIoperation\fR \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+.DE
+Both \fIoperation\fR and its arguments determine the exact behavior of
+the command.  The operations available for the bar chart are described in
+the following section.
+.SH "BARCHART OPERATIONS"
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBbar \fIelemName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new barchart element \fIelemName\fR.  It's an
+error if an element \fIelemName\fR already exists.  
+See the manual for \fBbarchart\fR for details about
+what \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are valid.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described
+below for the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of the graph.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing the current
+options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.
+If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then
+for each pair, the option \fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.
+The following options are valid.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color. This includes the margins and
+legend, but not the plotting area.
+.TP
+\fB\-barmode \fImode\fR 
+Indicates how related bar elements will be drawn.  Related elements
+have data points with the same abscissas (X-coordinates). \fIMode\fR
+indicates how those segments should be drawn. \fIMode\fR can be
+\f(CWinfront\fR, \f(CWaligned\fR, \f(CWoverlap\fR, or \f(CWstacked\fR.
+The default mode is \f(CWinfront\fR.
+.RS
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWinfront\fR
+Each successive segment is drawn in front of the previous. 
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWstacked\fR
+Each successive segment is stacked vertically on top of the previous.  
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWaligned\fR
+Segments is displayed aligned from right-to-left.  
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWoverlap\fR
+Like \f(CWaligned\fR but segments slightly overlap each other.  
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB\-barwidth \fIvalue\fR 
+Specifies the width of the bars.  This value can be overrided by the
+individual elements using their \fB\-barwidth\fR configuration option.
+\fIValue\fR is the width in terms of graph-coordinates.  The
+default width is \f(CW1.0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3\-D border around the outside edge of the widget.  The
+\fB\-relief\fR option determines if the border is to be drawn.  The
+default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-bottommargin \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the size of the margin below the X\-coordinate axis.  If
+\fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, the size of the margin is selected automatically.
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-bufferelements \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether an internal pixmap to buffer the display of data
+elements should be used.  If \fIboolean\fR is true, data elements are
+drawn to an internal pixmap.  This option is especially useful when
+the graph is redrawn frequently while the remains data unchanged (for
+example, moving a marker across the plot).  See the
+.SB "SPEED TIPS"
+section.
+The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-cursor \fIcursor\fR
+Specifies the widget's cursor.  The default cursor is \f(CWcrosshair\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR 
+Specifies the font of the graph title. The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-18-180-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-halo \fIpixels\fR 
+Specifies a maximum distance to consider when searching for the
+closest data point (see the element's \fBclosest\fR operation below).
+Data points further than \fIpixels\fR away are ignored.  The default is
+\f(CW0.5i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the requested height of widget.  The default is
+\f(CW4i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-invertxy \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the placement X\-axis and Y\-axis should be inverted.  If
+\fIboolean\fR is true, the X and Y axes are swapped.  The default is
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
+Specifies how the title should be justified.  This matters only when
+the title contains more than one line of text. \fIJustify\fR must be
+\f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWright\fR, or \f(CWcenter\fR.  The default is
+\f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-leftmargin \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the size of the margin from the left edge of the window to 
+the Y\-coordinate axis.  If \fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, the size is
+calculated automatically.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotbackground \fIcolor\fR
+Specifies the background color of the plotting area.  The default is
+\f(CWwhite\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotborderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3-D border around the plotting area.  The
+\fB\-plotrelief\fR option determines if a border is drawn.  The
+default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotpadx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the amount of padding to be added to the left and right sides of
+the plotting area.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen
+distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the left side of the
+plotting area entry is padded by the first distance and the right side
+by the second.  If \fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the left and
+right sides are padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW8\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotpady \fIpad\fR
+Sets the amount of padding to be added to the top and bottom of the
+plotting area.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen
+distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the top of the plotting
+area is padded by the first distance and the bottom by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the top and bottom are padded
+evenly.  The default is \f(CW8\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotrelief \fIrelief\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect for the plotting area.  \fIRelief\fR
+specifies how the interior of the plotting area should appear relative
+to rest of the graph; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the plot should
+appear to protrude from the graph, relative to the surface of the
+graph.  The default is \f(CWsunken\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect for the barchart widget.  \fIRelief\fR
+specifies how the graph should appear relative to widget it is packed
+into; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the graph should
+appear to protrude.  The default is \f(CWflat\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rightmargin \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the size of margin from the plotting area to the right edge of
+the window.  By default, the legend is drawn in this margin.  If
+\fIpixels\fR is than 1, the margin size is selected automatically.
+.TP
+\fB\-takefocus\fR \fIfocus\fR 
+Provides information used when moving the focus from window to window
+via keyboard traversal (e.g., Tab and Shift-Tab).  If \fIfocus\fR is
+\f(CW0\fR, this means that this window should be skipped entirely during
+keyboard traversal.  \f(CW1\fR means that the this window should always
+receive the input focus.  An empty value means that the traversal
+scripts make the decision whether to focus on the window.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-tile \fIimage\fR 
+Specifies a tiled background for the widget.  If \fIimage\fR isn't
+\f(CW""\fR, the background is tiled using \fIimage\fR.
+Otherwise, the normal background color is drawn (see the
+\fB\-background\fR option).  \fIImage\fR must be an image created
+using the Tk \fBimage\fR command.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-title \fItext\fR 
+Sets the title to \fItext\fR. If \fItext\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+no title will be displayed.
+.TP
+\fB\-topmargin \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the size of the margin above the x2 axis.  If \fIpixels\fR
+is \f(CW0\fR, the margin size is calculated automatically.
+.TP
+\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the requested width of the widget.  The default is
+\f(CW5i\fR.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?
+See the 
+.SB "CROSSHAIRS COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "ELEMENT COMPONENTS"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBextents \fIitem\fR 
+Returns the size of a particular item in the graph.  \fIItem\fR must
+be either \f(CWleftmargin\fR, \f(CWrightmargin\fR, \f(CWtopmargin\fR,
+\f(CWbottommargin\fR, \f(CWplotwidth\fR, or \f(CWplotheight\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "GRID COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBinvtransform \fIwinX winY\fR 
+Performs an inverse coordinate transformation, mapping window
+coordinates back to graph-coordinates, using the standard X\-axis and Y\-axis.
+Returns a list of containing the X-Y graph-coordinates.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBinside \fIx y\fR
+Returns \f(CW1\fR is the designated screen-coordinate (\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR)
+is inside the plotting area and \f(CW0\fR otherwise.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "LEGEND COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBline\fB operation arg\fR...
+The operation is the same as \fBelement\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "MARKER COMPONENTS"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName\fR \fBmetafile\fR ?\fIfileName\fR?
+\fIThis operation is for Window platforms only\fR.  
+Creates a Windows enhanced metafile of the barchart.
+If present, \fIfileName\fR is the file name of the new metafile.
+Otherwise, the metafile is automatically added to the clipboard.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "POSTSCRIPT COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBsnap \fIphotoName\fR
+Takes a snapshot of the graph and stores the contents in the photo
+image \fIphotoName\fR.  \fIPhotoName\fR is the name of a Tk photo
+image that must already exist.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBtransform \fIx y\fR 
+Performs a coordinate transformation, mapping graph-coordinates to
+window coordinates, using the standard X\-axis and Y\-axis.
+Returns a list containing the X\-Y screen-coordinates.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBxaxis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?...
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBx2axis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?... 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fByaxis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?... 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBy2axis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?... 
+See the 
+.SB "AXIS COMPONENTS"
+section.
+.SH "BARCHART COMPONENTS"
+A graph is composed of several components: coordinate axes, data
+elements, legend, grid, cross hairs, postscript, and annotation
+markers. Instead of one big set of configuration options and
+operations, the graph is partitioned, where each component has its own
+configuration options and operations that specifically control that
+aspect or part of the graph. 
+.SS "AXIS COMPONENTS"
+Four coordinate axes are automatically created: two X\-coordinate axes
+(\f(CWx\fR and \f(CWx2\fR) and two Y\-coordinate axes (\f(CWy\fR, and
+\f(CWy2\fR).  By default, the axis \f(CWx\fR is located in the bottom
+margin, \f(CWy\fR in the left margin, \f(CWx2\fR in the top margin, and
+\f(CWy2\fR in the right margin.
+.PP
+An axis consists of the axis line, title, major and minor ticks, and
+tick labels.  Major ticks are drawn at uniform intervals along the
+axis.  Each tick is labeled with its coordinate value.  Minor ticks
+are drawn at uniform intervals within major ticks.  
+.PP
+The range of the axis controls what region of data is plotted.
+Data points outside the minimum and maximum limits of the axis are
+not plotted.  By default, the minimum and maximum limits are
+determined from the data, but you can reset either limit.
+.PP
+You can create and use several axes. To create an axis, invoke
+the axis component and its create operation.
+.CS
+# Create a new axis called "temperature"
+\&.b axis create temperature
+.CE
+You map data elements to an axis using the element's \-mapy and \-mapx
+configuration options. They specify the coordinate axes an element
+is mapped onto.
+.CS
+# Now map the temperature data to this axis.
+\&.b element create "temp" \-xdata $x \-ydata $tempData \\
+    \-mapy temperature
+.CE
+While you can have many axes, only four axes can be displayed
+simultaneously.  They are drawn in each of the margins surrounding
+the plotting area.  The axes \f(CWx\fR and \f(CWy\fR are drawn in the
+bottom and left margins. The axes \f(CWx2\fR and \f(CWy2\fR are drawn in
+top and right margins.  Only \f(CWx\fR and \f(CWy\fR are shown by
+default. Note that the axes can have different scales.
+.PP
+To display a different axis, you invoke one of the following
+components: \fBxaxis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR.
+The \fBuse\fR operation designates the axis to be drawn in the
+corresponding margin: \fBxaxis\fR in the bottom, \fByaxis\fR in the left, 
+\fBx2axis\fR in the top, and \fBy2axis\fR in the right.
+.CS
+# Display the axis temperature in the left margin.
+\&.b yaxis use temperature
+.CE
+.PP
+You can configure axes in many ways. The axis scale can be linear or
+logarithmic.  The values along the axis can either monotonically
+increase or decrease.  If you need custom tick labels, you can specify
+a Tcl procedure to format the label any way you wish.  You can
+control how ticks are drawn, by changing the major tick interval
+or the number of minor ticks.  You can define non-uniform tick intervals,
+such as for time-series plots.
+.PP
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBcget \fIaxisName \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the option given by \fIoption\fR for
+\fIaxisName\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described below
+for the axis \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBconfigure \fIaxisName \fR?\fIaxisName\fR?... ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of \fIaxisName\fR.
+Several axes can be changed.  If \fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list
+describing all the current options for \fIaxisName\fR is returned.  If
+\fIoption\fR is specified, but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing
+\fIoption\fR is returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR
+pairs are specified, then for each pair, the axis option \fIoption\fR
+is set to \fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for axes.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-autorange \fIrange\fR 
+Sets the range of values for the axis to \fIrange\fR.  The axis limits
+are automatically reset to display the most recent data points in this range.  
+If \fIrange\fR is 0.0, the range is
+determined from the limits of the data.  If \fB\-min\fR or \fB-max\fR
+are specified, they override this option.  The default is \f(CW0.0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the axis and tick labels.
+The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-command \fIprefix\fR
+Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked when formatting the axis tick
+labels. \fIPrefix\fR is a string containing the name of a Tcl proc and
+any extra arguments for the procedure.  This command is invoked for each
+major tick on the axis.  Two additional arguments are passed to the
+procedure: the pathname of the widget and the current the numeric
+value of the tick.  The procedure returns the formatted tick label.  If
+\f(CW""\fR is returned, no label will appear next to the tick.  You can
+get the standard tick labels again by setting \fIprefix\fR to
+\f(CW""\fR.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.sp 1
+Please note that this procedure is invoked while the bar chart is redrawn.
+You may query the widget's configuration options.  But do not reset
+options, because this can have unexpected results.
+.TP
+\fB\-descending \fIboolean\fR 
+Indicates whether the values along the axis are monotonically increasing or
+decreasing.  If \fIboolean\fR is true, the axis values will be
+decreasing.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the axis is displayed. 
+.TP
+\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
+Specifies how the axis title should be justified.  This matters only
+when the axis title contains more than one line of text. \fIJustify\fR
+must be \f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWright\fR, or \f(CWcenter\fR.  The default is
+\f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-limits \fIformatStr\fR
+Specifies a printf-like description to format the minimum and maximum
+limits of the axis.  The limits are displayed at the top/bottom or
+left/right sides of the plotting area.  \fIFormatStr\fR is a list of
+one or two format descriptions.  If one description is supplied, both
+the minimum and maximum limits are formatted in the same way.  If two,
+the first designates the format for the minimum limit, the second for
+the maximum.  If \f(CW""\fR is given as either description, then 
+the that limit will not be displayed.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the axis and tick lines.  The default is \f(CW1\fR
+pixel.
+.TP
+\fB\-logscale \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the scale of the axis is logarithmic or linear.  If
+\fIboolean\fR is true, the axis is logarithmic.  The default scale is
+linear.
+.TP
+\fB\-loose \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the limits of the axis should fit the data points tightly,
+at the outermost data points, or loosely, at the outer tick intervals.
+This is relevant only when the axis limit is automatically calculated.
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, the axis range is "loose".
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-majorticks \fImajorList\fR
+Specifies where to display major axis ticks.  You can use this option
+to display ticks at non-uniform intervals.  \fIMajorList\fR is a list
+of axis coordinates designating the location of major ticks.  No
+minor ticks are drawn.  If \fImajorList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, 
+major ticks will be automatically computed. The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-max \fIvalue\fR
+Sets the maximum limit of \fIaxisName\fR.  Any data point greater 
+than \fIvalue\fR is not displayed.  If \fIvalue\fR is \f(CW""\fR, 
+the maximum limit is calculated using the largest data value.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-min \fIvalue\fR
+Sets the minimum limit of \fIaxisName\fR. Any data point less than 
+\fIvalue\fR is not displayed.  If \fIvalue\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+the minimum limit is calculated using the smallest data value.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-minorticks \fIminorList\fR
+Specifies where to display minor axis ticks.  You can use this option
+to display minor ticks at non-uniform intervals. \fIMinorList\fR is a
+list of real values, ranging from 0.0 to 1.0, designating the placement of
+a minor tick.  No minor ticks are drawn if the \fB\-majortick\fR
+option is also set.  If \fIminorList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, minor ticks will
+be automatically computed. The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rotate \fItheta\fR
+Specifies the how many degrees to rotate the axis tick labels.
+\fITheta\fR is a real value representing the number of degrees
+to rotate the tick labels.  The default is \f(CW0.0\fR degrees.
+.TP
+\fB\-shiftby \fIvalue\fR
+Specifies how much to automatically shift the range of the axis.
+When the new data exceeds the current axis maximum, the maximum
+is increased in increments of \fIvalue\fR.  You can use this
+option to prevent the axis limits from being recomputed
+at each new time point. If \fIvalue\fR is 0.0, then no automatic
+shifting is down. The default is \f(CW0.0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-showticks \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether axis ticks should be drawn. If \fIboolean\fR is
+true, ticks are drawn.  If false, only the
+axis line is drawn. The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stepsize \fIvalue\fR
+Specifies the interval between major axis ticks.  If \fIvalue\fR isn't
+a valid interval (must be less than the axis range), 
+the request is ignored and the step size is automatically calculated.
+.TP
+\fB\-subdivisions \fInumber\fR 
+Indicates how many minor axis ticks are
+to be drawn.  For example, if \fInumber\fR is two, only one minor
+tick is drawn.  If \fInumber\fR is one, no minor ticks are
+displayed.  The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-tickfont \fIfontName\fR 
+Specifies the font for axis tick labels. The default is
+\f(CW*-Courier-Bold-R-Normal-*-100-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-ticklength \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the length of major and minor ticks (minor ticks are half the
+length of major ticks). If \fIpixels\fR is less than zero, the axis
+will be inverted with ticks drawn pointing towards the plot.  The
+default is \f(CW0.1i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-title \fItext\fR
+Sets the title of the axis. If \fItext\fR is 
+\f(CW""\fR, no axis title will be displayed.  
+.TP
+\fB\-titlecolor \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the axis title. The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-titlefont \fIfontName\fR 
+Specifies the font for axis title. The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-14-140-*\fR.
+.PP
+Axis configuration options may be also be set by the \fBoption\fR
+command.  The resource class is \f(CWAxis\fR.  The resource names
+are the names of the axes (such as \f(CWx\fR or \f(CWx2\fR).
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.Axis.Color  blue
+option add *Barchart.x.LogScale  true
+option add *Barchart.x2.LogScale false
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBcreate \fIaxisName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new axis by the name \fIaxisName\fR.  No axis by the same
+name can already exist. \fIOption\fR and \fIvalue\fR are described 
+in above in the axis \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBdelete \fR?\fIaxisName\fR?...
+Deletes the named axes. An axis is not really
+deleted until it is not longer in use, so it's safe to delete
+axes mapped to elements.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis invtransform \fIaxisName value\fR
+Performs the inverse transformation, changing the screen-coordinate
+\fIvalue\fR to a graph-coordinate, mapping the value mapped to
+\fIaxisName\fR.  Returns the graph-coordinate.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis limits \fIaxisName\fR
+Returns a list of the minimum and maximum limits for \fIaxisName\fR.  The order
+of the list is \f(CWmin max\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis names \fR?\fIpattern\fR?...
+Returns a list of axes matching zero or more patterns.  If no
+\fIpattern\fR argument is give, the names of all axes are returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis transform \fIaxisName value\fR
+Transforms the coordinate \fIvalue\fR to a screen-coordinate by mapping
+the it to \fIaxisName\fR.  Returns the transformed screen-coordinate.
+.PP
+Only four axes can be displayed simultaneously.  By default, they are
+\f(CWx\fR, \f(CWy\fR, \f(CWx2\fR, and \f(CWy2\fR.  You can swap in a different
+axis with \fBuse\fR operation of the special axis components:
+\fBxaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR.
+.CS
+\&.g create axis temp
+\&.g create axis time
+\&...
+\&.g xaxis use temp
+\&.g yaxis use time
+.CE
+Only the axes specified for use are displayed on the screen.
+.PP
+The \fBxaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR
+components operate on an axis location rather than a specific axis
+like the more general \fBaxis\fR component does.  The \fBxaxis\fR
+component manages the X-axis located in the bottom margin (whatever
+axis that happens to be).  Likewise, \fByaxis\fR uses the Y-axis in
+the left margin, \fBx2axis\fR the top X-axis, and \fBy2axis\fR the
+right Y-axis.
+.PP
+They implicitly control the axis that is currently using to that
+location.  By default, \fBxaxis\fR uses the \f(CWx\fR axis, \fByaxis\fR
+uses \f(CWy\fR, \fBx2axis\fR uses \f(CWx2\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR uses
+\f(CWy2\fR.  These components can be more convenient to use than always
+determining what axes are current being displayed by the graph.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for axes. They mirror exactly
+the operations of the \fBaxis\fR component.  The \fIaxis\fR argument
+must be \fBxaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, or \fBy2axis\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis \fBcget \fIoption\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis\fB invtransform \fIvalue\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis \fBlimits\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis\fB transform \fIvalue\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis\fB use \fR?\fIaxisName\fR?  
+Designates the axis \fIaxisName\fR is to be displayed at this
+location.  \fIAxisName\fR can not be already in use at another location.  
+This command returns the name of the axis currently using this location.
+.SS "CROSSHAIRS COMPONENT"
+Cross hairs consist of two intersecting lines (one vertical and one horizontal)
+drawn completely across the plotting area.  They are used to position
+the mouse in relation to the coordinate axes.  Cross hairs differ from line
+markers in that they are implemented using XOR drawing primitives.
+This means that they can be quickly drawn and erased without redrawing
+the entire widget.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for cross hairs:
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the cross hairs configuration option
+given by \fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option
+described below for the cross hairs \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs configure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...  
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of the cross hairs.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing all the current
+options for the cross hairs is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.
+If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then
+for each pair, the cross hairs option \fIoption\fR is set to
+\fIvalue\fR.
+The following options are available for cross hairs.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the cross hairs.  The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the cross hairs. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up
+to 11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes
+and gaps on the cross hair lines.  Each number must be between 1 and
+255.  If \fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the cross hairs will be solid
+lines.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether cross hairs are drawn. If \fIboolean\fR is true,
+cross hairs are not drawn.  The default is \f(CWyes\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Set the width of the cross hair lines.  The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-position \fIpos\fR 
+Specifies the screen position where the cross hairs intersect.
+\fIPos\fR must be in the form "\fI@x,y\fR", where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR
+are the window coordinates of the intersection.
+.PP
+Cross hairs configuration options may be also be set by the
+\fBoption\fR command.  The resource name and class are
+\f(CWcrosshairs\fR and \f(CWCrosshairs\fR respectively.
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.Crosshairs.LineWidth 2
+option add *Barchart.Crosshairs.Color     red
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs off\fR
+Turns off the cross hairs. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs on\fR
+Turns on the display of the cross hairs.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs toggle\fR 
+Toggles the current state of the cross hairs, alternately mapping and
+unmapping the cross hairs.
+.SH "ELEMENTS"
+A data element represents a set of data.  It contains x and y vectors
+which are the coordinates of the data points.  Elements are displayed
+as bars where the length of the bar is proportional to the ordinate of
+the data point.  Elements also control the appearance of the data,
+such as the color, stipple, relief, etc.
+.PP
+When new data elements are created, they are automatically added to a
+list of displayed elements.   The display list controls what elements
+are drawn and in what order.  
+.PP
+The following operations are available for elements.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement activate \fIelemName \fR?\fIindex\fR?...
+Specifies the data points of element \fIelemName\fR to be drawn
+using active foreground and background colors.  \fIElemName\fR is the
+name of the element and \fIindex\fR is a number representing the index
+of the data point. If no indices are present then all data points
+become active.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR?  ?\fIcommand\fR? 
+Associates \fIcommand\fR with \fItagName\fR such that whenever the
+event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for an element with this
+tag, \fIcommand\fR will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the 
+\fBbind\fR command except that it operates on graph elements, rather 
+than widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for
+complete details on \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on 
+\fIcommand\fR before invoking it.  
+.sp
+If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing 
+any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR.
+If the first character of \fIcommand\fR is \f(CW+\fR then \fIcommand\fR 
+augments an existing binding rather than replacing it. 
+If no \fIcommand\fR argument is provided then the command currently
+associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (it's an error occurs 
+if there's no such binding) is returned.  If both \fIcommand\fR and 
+\fIsequence\fR are missing then a list of all the event sequences for 
+which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement cget \fIelemName \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the element configuration option given by 
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any of the options described below
+for the element \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement closest \fIx y\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... ?\fIelemName\fR?...
+Finds the data point representing the bar closest to the window
+coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR in the element \fIelemName\fR.
+\fIElemName\fR is the name of an element, which must be currently displayed.  
+If no elements are specified, then all displayed elements are searched.  It
+returns a key-value list containing the name of the closest element, 
+the index of its closest point, and the graph-coordinates of the
+point. If no data point within the threshold distance can be found,
+\f(CW""\fR is returned.  The following \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR pairs
+are available.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-halo \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies a threshold distance where selected data points are ignored.
+\fIPixels\fR is a valid screen distance, such as \f(CW2\fR or \f(CW1.2i\fR.
+If this option isn't specified, then it defaults to the value of the
+\fBbarchart\fR's \fB\-halo\fR option.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement configure \fIelemName \fR?\fIelemName\fR... ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for elements.  Several
+elements can be modified at the same time. If \fIoption\fR isn't
+specified, a list describing all the current options for
+\fIelemName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified, but not
+\fIvalue\fR, then a list describing the option \fIoption\fR is
+returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are
+specified, then for each pair, the element option \fIoption\fR is set
+to \fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for elements.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-activepen \fIpenName\fR
+Specifies pen to use to draw active element.  If \fIpenName\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, no active elements will be drawn.  The default is 
+\f(CWactiveLine\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-bindtags \fItagList\fR
+Specifies the binding tags for the element.  \fITagList\fR is a list
+of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will determine how
+events for elements.  Each tag in the list matching the current event
+sequence will have its Tcl command executed.  Implicitly the name of
+the element is always the first tag in the list.  The default value is
+\f(CWall\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the the color of the border around each bar.  The default is
+\f(CWwhite\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-barwidth \fIvalue\fR 
+Specifies the width the bars drawn for the element.  \fIValue\fR is
+the width in X-coordinates.  If this option isn't
+specified, the width of each bar is the value of the widget's
+\fB\-barwidth\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-baseline \fIvalue\fR 
+Specifies the baseline of the bar segments.  This affects how bars are 
+drawn since bars are drawn from their respective y-coordinate the 
+baseline. By default the baseline is \f(CW0.0\fR.  
+.TP
+\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the border width of the 3-D border drawn around the outside of
+each bar.  The \fB\-relief\fR option determines if such a border is
+drawn.  \fIPixels\fR must be a valid screen distance like \f(CW2\fR or
+\f(CW0.25i\fR. The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-data \fIcoordList\fR
+Specifies the X\-Y coordinates of the data.  \fICoordList\fR is a
+list of numeric expressions representing the X\-Y coordinate pairs
+of each data point.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the interior of the bars.  
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the element is displayed.  The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-label \fItext\fR
+Sets the element's label in the legend.  If \fItext\fR
+is \f(CW""\fR, the element will have no entry in the legend.
+The default label is the element's name.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapx \fIxAxis\fR
+Selects the X\-axis to map the element's X\-coordinates onto.
+\fIXAxis\fR must be the name of an axis.  The default is \f(CWx\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapy \fIyAxis\fR
+Selects the Y\-axis to map the element's Y\-coordinates onto.
+\fIYAxis\fR must be the name of an axis. The default is \f(CWy\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-relief \fIstring\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect desired for bars.  \fIRelief\fR indicates how
+the interior of the bar should appear relative to the surface of the
+chart; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the bar should appear to
+protrude from the surface of the plotting area.  The default is
+\f(CWraised\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies a stipple pattern with which to draw the bars.  If
+\fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the bar is drawn in a solid fashion.
+.TP
+\fB\-xdata \fIxVector\fR 
+Specifies the x-coordinate vector of the data.
+\fIXVector\fR is the name of a BLT vector or a
+list of numeric expressions.  
+.TP
+\fB\-ydata \fIyVector\fR 
+Specifies the y-coordinate vector of the data.
+\fIYVector\fR is the name of a BLT vector or a list of
+numeric expressions.  
+.PP
+Element configuration options may also be set by the 
+\fBoption\fR command.  The resource names  in the option database 
+are prefixed by \f(CWelem\fR.
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.Element.background blue
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement create \fIelemName\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new element \fIelemName\fR.  Element
+names must be unique, so an element \fIelemName\fR may not already
+exist.  If additional arguments are present, they specify any of the
+element options valid for element \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement deactivate \fIpattern\fR...
+Deactivates all the elements matching \fIpattern\fR for the graph.  
+Elements whose names match any of the patterns given are redrawn 
+using their normal colors.  
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement delete\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?...
+Deletes all the elements matching \fIpattern\fR for the graph.  
+Elements whose names match any of the patterns given are deleted. 
+The graph will be redrawn without the deleted elements.  
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement exists \fIelemName\fR
+Returns \f(CW1\fR if an element \fIelemName\fR currently exists and
+\f(CW0\fR otherwise.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement names \fR?\fIpattern\fR?...  
+Returns the elements matching one or more pattern.  If no
+\fIpattern\fR is given, the names of all elements is returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement show\fR ?\fInameList\fR?  
+Queries or modifies the element display list.  The element display
+list designates the elements drawn and in what
+order. \fINameList\fR is a list of elements to be displayed in the
+order they are named.  If there is no \fInameList\fR argument,
+the current display list is returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement type\fR \fIelemName\fR
+Returns the type of \fIelemName\fR. 
+If the element is a bar element, the commands returns the string
+\f(CW"bar"\fR, otherwise it returns \f(CW"line"\fR.
+.CE
+.SS "GRID COMPONENT"
+Grid lines extend from the major and minor ticks of each axis
+horizontally or vertically across the plotting area.  The following
+operations are available for grid lines.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the grid line configuration option given by 
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described below
+for the grid \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid configure\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for grid lines.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing all the current
+grid options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is
+returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are
+specified, then for each pair, the grid line option \fIoption\fR is set to
+\fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for grid lines.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the grid lines.  The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the grid lines. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up
+to 11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes
+and gaps on the grid lines.  Each number must be between 1 and 255.
+If \fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the grid will be solid lines.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the grid should be drawn. If \fIboolean\fR
+is true, grid lines are not shown. The default is \f(CWyes\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of grid lines.  The default width is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapx \fIxAxis\fR
+Specifies the X\-axis to display grid lines.  \fIXAxis\fR
+must be the name of an axis or \f(CW""\fR for no grid lines.  
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapy \fIyAxis\fR
+Specifies the Y\-axis to display grid lines.  \fIYAxis\fR
+must be the name of an axis or \f(CW""\fR for no grid lines. 
+The default is \f(CWy\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-minor \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the grid lines should be drawn for minor ticks. 
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, the lines will appear at
+minor tick intervals.  The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.PP
+Grid configuration options may also be set by the 
+\fBoption\fR command.  The resource name and class are \f(CWgrid\fR and 
+\f(CWGrid\fR respectively. 
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.grid.LineWidth 2
+option add *Barchart.Grid.Color     black
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid off\fR
+Turns off the display the grid lines.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid on\fR
+Turns on the display the grid lines.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid toggle\fR
+Toggles the display of the grid.  
+.SS "LEGEND COMPONENT"
+The legend displays a list of the data elements.  Each entry consists
+of the element's symbol and label.  The legend can appear in any
+margin (the default location is in the right margin).  It
+can also be positioned anywhere within the plotting area.
+.PP
+The following operations are valid for the legend.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend activate \fIpattern\fR...
+Selects legend entries to be drawn using the active legend colors and relief.
+All entries whose element names match \fIpattern\fR  are selected.  To
+be selected, the element name must match only one \fIpattern\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR?  ?\fIcommand\fR? 
+Associates \fIcommand\fR with \fItagName\fR such that whenever the
+event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for a legend entry with this
+tag, \fIcommand\fR will be invoked.  Implicitly the element names
+in the entry are tags.  The syntax is similar to the 
+\fBbind\fR command except that it operates on legend entries, rather 
+than widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for
+complete details on \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on 
+\fIcommand\fR before invoking it.  
+.sp
+If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing 
+any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR.
+If the first character of \fIcommand\fR is \f(CW+\fR then \fIcommand\fR 
+augments an existing binding rather than replacing it. 
+If no \fIcommand\fR argument is provided then the command currently
+associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (it's an error occurs 
+if there's no such binding) is returned.  If both \fIcommand\fR and 
+\fIsequence\fR are missing then a list of all the event sequences for 
+which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of a legend configuration option.
+\fIOption\fR may be any option described below in the
+legend \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend configure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for the legend.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing the current
+legend options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is
+specified, but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is
+returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are
+specified, then for each pair, the legend option \fIoption\fR is set
+to \fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for the legend.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-activebackground \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color for active legend entries.  All legend
+entries marked active (see the legend \fBactivate\fR operation) are
+drawn using this background color.
+.TP
+\fB\-activeborderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3-D border around the outside edge of the active legend
+entries.  The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-activeforeground \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the foreground color for active legend entries.  All legend
+entries marked as active (see the legend \fBactivate\fR operation) are
+drawn using this foreground color.
+.TP
+\fB\-activerelief \fIrelief\fR 
+Specifies the 3-D effect desired for active legend entries.
+\fIRelief\fR denotes how the interior of the entry should appear
+relative to the legend; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the entry
+should appear to protrude from the legend, relative to the surface of
+the legend.  The default is \f(CWflat\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+Tells how to position the legend relative to the positioning point for
+the legend.  This is dependent on the value of the \fB\-position\fR
+option.  The default is \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.RS
+.TP 1.25i
+\f(CWleft\fR or \f(CWright\fR
+The anchor describes how to position the legend vertically.  
+.TP
+\f(CWtop\fR or \f(CWbottom\fR
+The anchor describes how to position the legend horizontally.  
+.TP
+\f(CW@x,y\fR
+The anchor specifies how to position the legend relative to the
+positioning point. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWcenter\fR then
+the legend is centered on the point; if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWn\fR then
+the legend will be drawn such that the top center point of the
+rectangular region occupied by the legend will be at the positioning
+point.
+.TP
+\f(CWplotarea\fR
+The anchor specifies how to position the legend relative to the
+plotting area. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWcenter\fR then the
+legend is centered in the plotting area; if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWne\fR
+then the legend will be drawn such that occupies the upper right
+corner of the plotting area.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the legend. If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+the legend background with be transparent.
+.TP
+\fB\-bindtags \fItagList\fR
+Specifies the binding tags for legend entries.  \fITagList\fR is a list
+of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will determine how
+events for legend entries.  Each tag in the list matching the current 
+event sequence will have its Tcl command executed. The default value 
+is \f(CWall\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3-D border around the outside edge of the legend (if
+such border is being drawn; the \fBrelief\fR option determines this).
+The default is \f(CW2\fR pixels.
+.TP
+\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR 
+\fIFontName\fR specifies a font to use when drawing the labels of each
+element into the legend.  The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-12-120-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the foreground color of the text drawn for the element's label.
+The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the legend should be displayed. If \fIboolean\fR is
+true, the legend will not be draw.  The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-ipadx \fIpad\fR 
+Sets the amount of internal padding to be added to the width of each
+legend entry.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If
+\fIpad\fR has two elements, the left side of the legend entry is
+padded by the first distance and the right side by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the left and right sides are padded
+evenly.  The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-ipady \fIpad\fR
+Sets an amount of internal padding to be added to the height of each
+legend entry.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If
+\fIpad\fR has two elements, the top of the entry is padded by the
+first distance and the bottom by the second.  If \fIpad\fR is just
+one distance, both the top and bottom of the entry are padded evenly.
+The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-padx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding to the left and right exteriors of the legend.
+\fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR
+has two elements, the left side of the legend is padded by the first
+distance and the right side by the second.  If \fIpad\fR has just one
+distance, both the left and right sides are padded evenly.  The
+default is \f(CW4\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pady \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding above and below the legend.  \fIPad\fR can be a list
+of one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the area above
+the legend is padded by the first distance and the area below by the
+second.  If \fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the top and
+bottom areas are padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-position \fIpos\fR
+Specifies where the legend is drawn. The
+\fB\-anchor\fR option also affects where the legend is positioned.  If
+\fIpos\fR is \f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWtop\fR, or \f(CWbottom\fR, the
+legend is drawn in the specified margin.  If \fIpos\fR is
+\f(CWplotarea\fR, then the legend is drawn inside the plotting area at a
+particular anchor.  If \fIpos\fR is in the form "\fI@x,y\fR", where
+\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are the window coordinates, the legend is drawn in
+the plotting area at the specified coordinates.  The default is
+\f(CWright\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-raised \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the legend is above or below the data elements.  This
+matters only if the legend is in the plotting area.  If \fIboolean\fR
+is true, the legend will be drawn on top of any elements that may
+overlap it. The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect for the border around the legend.
+\fIRelief\fR specifies how the interior of the legend should appear
+relative to the bar chart; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the legend
+should appear to protrude from the bar chart, relative to the surface of
+the bar chart.  The default is \f(CWsunken\fR.
+.PP
+Legend configuration options may also be set by the \fBoption\fR
+command.  The resource name and class are \f(CWlegend\fR and
+\f(CWLegend\fR respectively.
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.legend.Foreground blue
+option add *Barchart.Legend.Relief     raised
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend deactivate \fIpattern\fR...
+Selects legend entries to be drawn using the normal legend colors and
+relief.  All entries whose element names match \fIpattern\fR are
+selected.  To be selected, the element name must match only one
+\fIpattern\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend get \fIpos\fR
+Returns the name of the element whose entry is at the screen position
+\fIpos\fR in the legend.  \fIPos\fR must be in the form "\fI@x,y\fR",
+where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are window coordinates.  If the given
+coordinates do not lie over a legend entry, \f(CW""\fR is returned.
+.SS "PEN COMPONENTS"
+Pens define attributes for elements.
+Pens mirror the configuration options of data elements that pertain to
+how symbols and lines are drawn.  Data elements use pens to determine
+how they are drawn.  A data element may use several pens at once.  In
+this case, the pen used for a particular data point is determined from
+each element's weight vector (see the element's \fB\-weight\fR and
+\fB\-style\fR options).
+.PP
+One pen, called \f(CWactiveBar\fR, is automatically created.
+It's used as the default active pen for elements. So you can change
+the active attributes for all elements by simply reconfiguring this
+pen.
+.CS
+\&.g pen configure "activeBar" -fg green -bg green4
+.CE
+You can create and use several pens. To create a pen, invoke
+the pen component and its create operation.
+.CS
+\&.g pen create myPen
+.CE
+You map pens to a data element using either the element's 
+\fB\-pen\fR or \fB\-activepen\fR options.
+.CS
+\&.g element create "e1" -xdata $x -ydata $tempData \\
+    -pen myPen
+.CE
+An element can use several pens at once. This is done by specifying
+the name of the pen in the element's style list (see the
+\fB\-styles\fR option).
+.CS
+\&.g element configure "e1" -styles { myPen 2.0 3.0 }
+.CE
+This says that any data point with a weight between 2.0 and 3.0
+is to be drawn using the pen \f(CWmyPen\fR.  All other points
+are drawn with the element's default attributes.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for pen components.
+.PP
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBcget \fIpenName \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the option given by \fIoption\fR for
+\fIpenName\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described below
+for the pen \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBconfigure \fIpenName \fR?\fIpenName\fR... ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of
+\fIpenName\fR. Several pens can be modified at once.  If \fIoption\fR
+isn't specified, a list describing the current options for
+\fIpenName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified, but not
+\fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.  If one
+or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then for
+each pair, the pen option \fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.  The
+following options are valid for pens.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the the color of the border around each bar.  The default is
+\f(CWwhite\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the border width of the 3-D border drawn around the outside of
+each bar.  The \fB\-relief\fR option determines if such a border is
+drawn.  \fIPixels\fR must be a valid screen distance like \f(CW2\fR or
+\f(CW0.25i\fR. The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the interior of the bars.  
+.TP
+\fB\-relief \fIstring\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect desired for bars.  \fIRelief\fR indicates how
+the interior of the bar should appear relative to the surface of the
+chart; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the bar should appear to
+protrude from the bar chart, relative to the surface of the plotting
+area.  The default is \f(CWraised\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies a stipple pattern with which to draw the bars.  If
+\fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the bar is drawn in a solid fashion.
+.TP
+\fB\-type \fIelemType\fR 
+Specifies the type of element the pen is to be used with.
+This option should only be employed when creating the pen.  This
+is for those that wish to mix different types of elements (bars and
+lines) on the same graph.  The default type is "bar".
+.PP
+Pen configuration options may be also be set by the \fBoption\fR
+command.  The resource class is \f(CWPen\fR.  The resource names
+are the names of the pens.
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.Pen.Foreground	   blue
+option add *Barchart.activeBar.foreground  green
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBcreate \fIpenName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new pen by the name \fIpenName\fR.  No pen by the same
+name can already exist. \fIOption\fR and \fIvalue\fR are described 
+in above in the pen \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBdelete \fR?\fIpenName\fR?...
+Deletes the named pens. A pen is not really
+deleted until it is not longer in use, so it's safe to delete
+pens mapped to elements.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen names \fR?\fIpattern\fR?...
+Returns a list of pens matching zero or more patterns.  If no
+\fIpattern\fR argument is give, the names of all pens are returned.
+.SS "POSTSCRIPT COMPONENT"
+The barchart can generate encapsulated PostScript output.  There
+are several configuration options you can specify to control how the
+plot will be generated.  You can change the page dimensions and
+borders.  The plot itself can be scaled, centered, or rotated to
+landscape.  The PostScript output can be written directly to a file or
+returned through the interpreter.
+.PP
+The following postscript operations are available.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript cget \fIoption\fR 
+Returns the current value of the postscript option given by
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described
+below for the postscript \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript configure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for PostScript
+generation.  If \fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing 
+the current postscript options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If
+\fIoption\fR is specified, but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing
+\fIoption\fR is returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR
+pairs are specified, then for each pair, the postscript option
+\fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.  The following postscript options
+are available.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-center \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the plot should be centered on the PostScript page.  If
+\fIboolean\fR is false, the plot will be placed in the upper left
+corner of the page.  The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-colormap \fIvarName\fR
+\fIVarName\fR must be the name of a global array variable that
+specifies a color mapping from the X color name to PostScript.  Each
+element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of PostScript code to set a
+particular color value (e.g. ``\f(CW1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor\fR'').  When
+generating color information in PostScript, the array variable \fIvarName\fR
+is checked if an element of the name as the color exists. If so, it uses 
+its value as the PostScript
+command to set the color.  If this option hasn't been specified, or if
+there isn't an entry in \fIvarName\fR for a given color, then it uses
+the red, green, and blue intensities from the X color.
+.TP
+\fB\-colormode \fImode\fR
+Specifies how to output color information.  \fIMode\fR must be either
+\f(CWcolor\fR (for full color output), \f(CWgray\fR (convert all colors to
+their gray-scale equivalents) or \f(CWmono\fR (convert foreground colors
+to black and background colors to white).  The default mode is
+\f(CWcolor\fR. 
+.TP
+\fB\-fontmap \fIvarName\fR
+\fIVarName\fR must be the name of a global array variable that
+specifies a font mapping from the X font name to PostScript.  Each
+element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of a Tcl list with one or two
+elements; the name and point size of a PostScript font.
+When outputting PostScript commands for a particular font, the array
+variable \fIvarName\fR is checked to see if an element by the 
+specified font exists.  If there is such an element, then the font
+information contained in that element is used in the PostScript
+output.  (If the point size is omitted from the list, the point size
+of the X font is used).  Otherwise the X font is examined in an
+attempt to guess what PostScript font to use.  This works only for
+fonts whose foundry property is \fIAdobe\fR (such as Times, Helvetica,
+Courier, etc.).  If all of this fails then the font defaults to
+\f(CWHelvetica-Bold\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-decorations \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether PostScript commands to generate color backgrounds and 3-D
+borders will be output.  If \fIboolean\fR is false, the graph will
+background will be white and no 3-D borders will be generated. The
+default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the height of the plot.  This lets you print the bar chart with a
+height different from the one drawn on the screen.  If
+\fIpixels\fR is 0, the height is the same as the widget's height.
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-landscape \fIboolean\fR
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, this specifies the printed area is to be
+rotated 90 degrees.  In non-rotated output the X\-axis of the printed
+area runs along the short dimension of the page (``portrait''
+orientation); in rotated output the X\-axis runs along the long
+dimension of the page (``landscape'' orientation).  Defaults to
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-maxpect \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates to scale the plot so that it fills the PostScript page.
+The aspect ratio of the barchart is still retained.  The default is
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-padx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the horizontal padding for the left and right page borders.  The
+borders are exterior to the plot.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or
+two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the left border is padded
+by the first distance and the right border by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR has just one distance, both the left and right borders are
+padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW1i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pady \fIpad\fR 
+Sets the vertical padding for the top and bottom page borders. The
+borders are exterior to the plot.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or
+two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the top border is padded
+by the first distance and the bottom border by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR has just one distance, both the top and bottom borders are
+padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW1i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-paperheight \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the height of the postscript page.  This can be used to select
+between different page sizes (letter, A4, etc).  The default height is
+\f(CW11.0i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-paperwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the postscript page.  This can be used to select
+between different page sizes (letter, A4, etc).  The default width is
+\f(CW8.5i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the plot.  This lets you generate a plot
+of a width different from that of the widget.  If \fIpixels\fR
+is 0, the width is the same as the widget's width.  The default is
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.PP
+Postscript configuration options may be also be set by the
+\fBoption\fR command.  The resource name and class are
+\f(CWpostscript\fR and \f(CWPostscript\fR respectively.
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.postscript.Decorations false
+option add *Barchart.Postscript.Landscape   true
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript output \fR?\fIfileName\fR? ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Outputs a file of encapsulated PostScript.  If a
+\fIfileName\fR argument isn't present, the command returns the
+PostScript. If any \fIoption-value\fR pairs are present, they set
+configuration options controlling how the PostScript is generated.
+\fIOption\fR and \fIvalue\fR can be anything accepted by the
+postscript \fBconfigure\fR operation above.
+.SS "MARKER COMPONENTS"
+Markers are simple drawing procedures used to annotate or highlight
+areas of the graph.  Markers have various types: text strings,
+bitmaps, images, connected lines, windows, or polygons.  They can be
+associated with a particular element, so that when the element is
+hidden or un-hidden, so is the marker.  By default, markers are the
+last items drawn, so that data elements will appear in
+behind them.  You can change this by configuring the \fB\-under\fR
+option.
+.PP
+Markers, in contrast to elements, don't affect the scaling of the
+coordinate axes.  They can also have \fIelastic\fR coordinates
+(specified by \f(CW-Inf\fR and \f(CWInf\fR respectively) that translate
+into the minimum or maximum limit of the axis.  For example, you can
+place a marker so it always remains in the lower left corner of the
+plotting area, by using the coordinates \f(CW-Inf\fR,\f(CW-Inf\fR.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for markers.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker after \fImarkerId\fR ?\fIafterId\fR?
+Changes the order of the markers, drawing the first
+marker after the second.  If no second \fIafterId\fR argument is
+specified, the marker is placed at the end of the display list.  This
+command can be used to control how markers are displayed since markers
+are drawn in the order of this display list.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker before \fImarkerId\fR ?\fIbeforeId\fR?
+Changes the order of the markers, drawing the first
+marker before the second.  If no second \fIbeforeId\fR argument is
+specified, the marker is placed at the beginning of the display list.
+This command can be used to control how markers are displayed since
+markers are drawn in the order of this display list.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR?  ?\fIcommand\fR? 
+Associates \fIcommand\fR with \fItagName\fR such that whenever the
+event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for a marker with this
+tag, \fIcommand\fR will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the 
+\fBbind\fR command except that it operates on graph markers, rather 
+than widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for
+complete details on \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on 
+\fIcommand\fR before invoking it.  
+.sp
+If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing 
+any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR.
+If the first character of \fIcommand\fR is \f(CW+\fR then \fIcommand\fR 
+augments an existing binding rather than replacing it. 
+If no \fIcommand\fR argument is provided then the command currently
+associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (it's an error occurs 
+if there's no such binding) is returned.  If both \fIcommand\fR and 
+\fIsequence\fR are missing then a list of all the event sequences for 
+which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the marker configuration option given by
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described
+below in the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker configure \fImarkerId\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for markers.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing the current
+options for \fImarkerId\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.
+If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then
+for each pair, the marker option \fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.
+.sp
+The following options are valid for all markers.
+Each type of marker also has its own type-specific options.  
+They are described in the sections below.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-bindtags \fItagList\fR
+Specifies the binding tags for the marker.  \fITagList\fR is a list
+of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will determine how
+events for markers are handled.  Each tag in the list matching the 
+current event sequence will have its Tcl command executed.  Implicitly 
+the name of the marker is always the first tag in the list.
+The default value is \f(CWall\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-coords \fIcoordList\fR
+Specifies the coordinates of the marker.  \fICoordList\fR is 
+a list of graph-coordinates.  The number of coordinates required
+is dependent on the type of marker.  Text, image, and window markers
+need only two coordinates (an X\-Y coordinate).   Bitmap markers
+can take either two or four coordinates (if four, they represent the
+corners of the bitmap). Line markers
+need at least four coordinates, polygons at least six.
+If \fIcoordList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the marker will not be displayed.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-element \fIelemName\fR
+Links the marker with the element \fIelemName\fR.  The marker is
+drawn only if the element is also currently displayed (see the
+element's \fBshow\fR operation).  If \fIelemName\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the
+marker is always drawn.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR 
+Indicates whether the marker is drawn. If \fIboolean\fR is true,
+the marker is not drawn.  The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapx \fIxAxis\fR 
+Specifies the X\-axis to map the marker's X\-coordinates onto.
+\fIXAxis\fR must the name of an axis.  The default is \f(CWx\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapy \fIyAxis\fR
+Specifies the Y\-axis to map the marker's Y\-coordinates onto.
+\fIYAxis\fR must the name of an axis.  The default is \f(CWy\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-name \fImarkerId\fR
+Changes the identifier for the marker.  The identifier \fImarkerId\fR 
+can not already be used by another marker.  If this option
+isn't specified, the marker's name is uniquely generated.
+.TP
+\fB\-under \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the marker is drawn below/above data
+elements.  If \fIboolean\fR is true, the marker is be drawn
+underneath the data elements.  Otherwise, the marker is
+drawn on top of the element.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-xoffset \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies a screen distance to offset the marker horizontally. 
+\fIPixels\fR is a valid screen distance, such as \f(CW2\fR or \f(CW1.2i\fR.
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-yoffset \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies a screen distance to offset the markers vertically.
+\fIPixels\fR is a valid screen distance, such as \f(CW2\fR or \f(CW1.2i\fR.
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.PP
+Marker configuration options may also be set by the \fBoption\fR command.
+The resource class is either \f(CWBitmapMarker\fR,  \f(CWImageMarker\fR, 
+\f(CWLineMarker\fR, \f(CWPolygonMarker\fR, \f(CWTextMarker\fR, or \f(CWWindowMarker\fR,
+depending on the type of marker.  The resource name is the name of the
+marker.
+.CS
+option add *Barchart.TextMarker.Foreground white
+option add *Barchart.BitmapMarker.Foreground white
+option add *Barchart.m1.Background     blue
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create \fItype\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a marker of the selected type. \fIType\fR may be either
+\f(CWtext\fR, \f(CWline\fR, \f(CWbitmap\fR, \f(CWimage\fR, \f(CWpolygon\fR, or
+\f(CWwindow\fR.  This command returns the marker identifier, 
+used as the \fImarkerId\fR argument in the other marker-related
+commands.  If the \fB\-name\fR option is used, this overrides the
+normal marker identifier.  If the name provided is already used for
+another marker, the new marker will replace the old.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker delete\fR ?\fIname\fR?...
+Removes one of more markers.  The graph will automatically be redrawn
+without the marker.\fR.  
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker exists \fImarkerId\fR 
+Returns \f(CW1\fR if the marker \fImarkerId\fR exists and \f(CW0\fR
+otherwise.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker names\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?  
+Returns the names of all the markers that currently exist.  If
+\fIpattern\fR is supplied, only those markers whose names match it
+will be returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker type \fImarkerId\fR 
+Returns the type of the marker given by \fImarkerId\fR, such as
+\f(CWline\fR or \f(CWtext\fR.  If \fImarkerId\fR is not a valid a marker
+identifier, \f(CW""\fR is returned.
+.SS "BITMAP MARKERS"
+A bitmap marker displays a bitmap.  The size of the
+bitmap is controlled by the number of coordinates specified.  If two
+coordinates, they specify the position of the top-left corner of the
+bitmap.  The bitmap retains its normal width and height.  If four
+coordinates, the first and second pairs of coordinates represent the
+corners of the bitmap.  The bitmap will be stretched or reduced as
+necessary to fit into the bounding rectangle.
+.PP
+Bitmap markers are created with the marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in
+the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create bitmap \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each 
+sets a configuration options for the marker.  These
+same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used with the marker's
+\fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to bitmap markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Same as the \fB\-fill\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-bitmap \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies the bitmap to be displayed.  If \fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+the marker will not be displayed.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the bitmap.  If \fIcolor\fR is the empty
+string, no background will be transparent.  The default background color is
+\f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR 
+Same as the \fB\-outline\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-mask \fImask\fR
+Specifies a mask for the bitmap to be displayed. This mask is a bitmap
+itself, denoting the pixels that are transparent.  If \fImask\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, all pixels of the bitmap will be drawn.  The default is
+\f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the foreground color of the bitmap. The default value is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rotate \fItheta\fR
+Sets the rotation of the bitmap.  \fITheta\fR is a real number
+representing the angle of rotation in degrees.  The marker is first
+rotated and then placed according to its anchor position.  The default
+rotation is \f(CW0.0\fR.
+.SS "IMAGE MARKERS"
+A image marker displays an image.  Image markers are
+created with the marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create image \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the marker's \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to image markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+\fIAnchor\fR tells how to position the image relative to the
+positioning point for the image. For example, if \fIanchor\fR
+is \f(CWcenter\fR then the image is centered on the point;  if
+\fIanchor\fR is \f(CWn\fR then the image will be drawn such that
+the top center point of the rectangular region occupied by the
+image will be at the positioning point.
+This option defaults to \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-image \fIimage\fR
+Specifies the image to be drawn.
+If \fIimage\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the marker will not be
+drawn.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.SS "LINE MARKERS"
+A line marker displays one or more connected line segments.
+Line markers are created with marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create line \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the marker's \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to line markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the line. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up to 11
+numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes and gaps
+on the line.  Each number must be between 1 and 255.  If
+\fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the marker line will be solid.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the line.  This color is used with
+striped lines (see the \fB\-dashes\fR option). If \fIcolor\fR is
+the empty string, no background color is drawn (the line will be
+dashed, not striped).  The default background color is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the lines.
+The default width is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the foreground color of the line. The default value is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies a stipple pattern used to draw the line, rather than
+a solid line.
+\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap to use as the stipple
+pattern.  If \fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the
+line is drawn in a solid fashion. The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.SS "POLYGON MARKERS"
+A polygon marker displays a closed region described as two or more
+connected line segments.  It is assumed the first and
+last points are connected.  Polygon markers are created using the
+marker \fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create polygon \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the \fBmarker configure\fR command to change the marker's
+configuration.
+The following options are supported for polygon markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the outline of the polygon. \fIDashList\fR is a
+list of up to 11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of
+the dashes and gaps on the outline.  Each number must be between 1 and
+255. If \fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the outline will be a solid line.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the fill color of the polygon.  If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then
+the interior of the polygon is transparent.
+The default is \f(CWwhite\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the outline of the polygon. If \fIpixels\fR is zero, 
+no outline is drawn. The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the outline of the polygon.  If the polygon is
+stippled (see the \fB\-stipple\fR option), then this represents the
+foreground color of the stipple.  The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies that the polygon should be drawn with a stippled pattern
+rather than a solid color. \fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap to use as
+the stipple pattern.  If \fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the polygon is
+filled with a solid color (if the \fB\-fill\fR option is set).  The
+default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.SS "TEXT MARKERS"
+A text marker displays a string of characters on one or more lines of
+text.  Embedded newlines cause line breaks.  They may be used to
+annotate regions of the graph.  Text markers are created with the
+\fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create text \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR pairs, 
+each sets a configuration option for the text marker.  
+These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used with the 
+marker's \fBconfigure\fR operation.  
+.PP
+The following options are specific to text markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+\fIAnchor\fR tells how to position the text relative to the
+positioning point for the text. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is
+\f(CWcenter\fR then the text is centered on the point; if
+\fIanchor\fR is \f(CWn\fR then the text will be drawn such that the
+top center point of the rectangular region occupied by the text will
+be at the positioning point.  This default is \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Same as the \fB\-fill\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
+Specifies the font of the text.  The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-120-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the text.  If \fIcolor\fR is the empty
+string, no background will be transparent.  The default background color is
+\f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
+Same as the \fB\-outline\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
+Specifies how the text should be justified.  This matters only when
+the marker contains more than one line of text. \fIJustify\fR must be
+\f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWright\fR, or \f(CWcenter\fR.  The default is
+\f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the text. The default value is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-padx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding to the left and right exteriors of the text.
+\fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR
+has two elements, the left side of the text is padded by the first
+distance and the right side by the second.  If \fIpad\fR has just one
+distance, both the left and right sides are padded evenly.  The
+default is \f(CW4\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pady \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding above and below the text.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of
+one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the area above the
+text is padded by the first distance and the area below by the second.
+If \fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the top and bottom areas
+are padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW4\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rotate \fItheta\fR
+Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the text.  \fITheta\fR is a
+real number representing the angle of rotation.  The marker is first
+rotated along its center and is then drawn according to its anchor
+position. The default is \f(CW0.0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-text \fItext\fR
+Specifies the text of the marker.  The exact way the text is
+displayed may be affected by other options such as \fB\-anchor\fR or
+\fB\-rotate\fR.
+.SS "WINDOW MARKERS"
+A window marker displays a widget at a given position.
+Window markers are created with the marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in
+the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create window \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the marker's \fBconfigure\fR command.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to window markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+\fIAnchor\fR tells how to position the widget relative to the
+positioning point for the widget. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is
+\f(CWcenter\fR then the widget is centered on the point; if \fIanchor\fR
+is \f(CWn\fR then the widget will be displayed such that the top center
+point of the rectangular region occupied by the widget will be at the
+positioning point.  This option defaults to \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the height to assign to the marker's window.  If this option
+isn't specified, or if it is specified as \f(CW""\fR, then the window is
+given whatever height the widget requests internally.
+.TP
+\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the width to assign to the marker's window.  If this option
+isn't specified, or if it is specified as \f(CW""\fR, then the window is
+given whatever width the widget requests internally.
+.TP
+\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
+Specifies the widget to be managed by the barchart.  \fIPathName\fR must
+be a child of the \fBbarchart\fR widget.
+.SH "GRAPH COMPONENT BINDINGS"
+Specific barchart components, such as elements, markers and legend
+entries, can have a command trigger when event occurs in them, much
+like canvas items in Tk's canvas widget.  Not all event sequences are
+valid.  The only binding events that may be specified are those
+related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
+\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR).
+.PP
+Only one element or marker can be picked during an event.  This means,
+that if the mouse is directly over both an element and a marker, only
+the uppermost component is selected.  This isn't true for legend entries.  
+Both a legend entry and an element (or marker) binding commands 
+will be invoked if both items are picked.
+.PP
+It is possible for multiple bindings to match a particular event.
+This could occur, for example, if one binding is associated with the
+element name and another is associated with one of the element's tags
+(see the \fB\-bindtags\fR option).  When this occurs, all of the 
+matching bindings are invoked.  A binding associated with the element
+name is invoked first, followed by one binding for each of the element's 
+bindtags.  If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag, 
+then only the most specific binding is invoked.  A continue command 
+in a binding script terminates that script, and a break command 
+terminates that script and skips any remaining scripts for the event, 
+just as for the bind command.
+.PP
+The \fB\-bindtags\fR option for these components controls addition
+tag names which can be matched.  Implicitly elements and markers
+always have tags matching their names.  Setting the value of
+the \fB\-bindtags\fR option doesn't change this.
+.SH "C LANGUAGE API"
+You can manipulate data elements from the C language.  There
+may be situations where it is too expensive to translate the data
+values from ASCII strings.  Or you might want to read data in a
+special file format.
+.PP
+Data can manipulated from the C language using BLT vectors.
+You specify the X-Y data coordinates of an element as vectors and
+manipulate the vector from C.  The barchart will be redrawn automatically
+after the vectors are updated.
+.PP
+From Tcl, create the vectors and configure the element to use them.
+.CS
+vector X Y
+\&.g element configure line1 -xdata X -ydata Y
+.CE
+To set data points from C, you pass the values as arrays of doubles
+using the \fBBlt_ResetVector\fR call.  The vector is reset with the
+new data and at the next idle point (when Tk re-enters its event
+loop), the graph will be redrawn automatically.
+.CS
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <blt.h>
+
+register int i;
+Blt_Vector *xVec, *yVec;
+double x[50], y[50];
+
+/* Get the BLT vectors "X" and "Y" (created above from Tcl) */
+if ((Blt_GetVector(interp, "X", 50, &xVec) != TCL_OK) ||
+    (Blt_GetVector(interp, "Y", 50, &yVec) != TCL_OK)) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+for (i = 0; i < 50; i++) {
+    x[i] = i * 0.02;
+    y[i] = sin(x[i]);
+}	
+
+/* Put the data into BLT vectors */
+if ((Blt_ResetVector(xVec, x, 50, 50, TCL_VOLATILE) != TCL_OK) ||
+    (Blt_ResetVector(yVec, y, 50, 50, TCL_VOLATILE) != TCL_OK)) {
+   return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+.CE
+See the \fBvector\fR manual page for more details.
+.SH SPEED TIPS
+There may be cases where the bar chart needs to be drawn and updated as
+quickly as possible.  If drawing speed becomes a big
+problem, here are a few tips to speed up displays.
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+Try to minimize the number of data points.  The more data points 
+looked at, the more work the bar chart must do.  
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+If your data is generated as floating point values, the time required
+to convert the data values to and from ASCII strings can be
+significant, especially when there any many data points.  You can
+avoid the redundant string-to-decimal conversions using the C API to
+BLT vectors.
+.TP 2
+\(bu
+Don't stipple or dash the element.  Solid bars are much faster.
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+If you update data elements frequently, try turning off the
+widget's \fB\-bufferelements\fR option.  When the bar chart is first
+displayed, it draws data elements into an internal pixmap.  The pixmap
+acts as a cache, so that when the bar chart needs to be redrawn again, and
+the data elements or coordinate axes haven't changed, the pixmap is
+simply copied to the screen.  This is especially useful when you are
+using markers to highlight points and regions on the bar chart.  But if
+the bar chart is updated frequently, changing either the element data or
+coordinate axes, the buffering becomes redundant.
+.SH LIMITATIONS
+Auto-scale routines do not use requested min/max limits
+as boundaries when the axis is logarithmically scaled.  
+.PP
+The PostScript output generated for polygons with more than 1500
+points may exceed the limits of some printers (See PostScript Language
+Reference Manual, page 568).  The work-around is to break the polygon
+into separate pieces.
+.SH KEYWORDS
+bar chart, widget
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/graph.html b/tkblt/doc/graph.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70f1e6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/graph.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1759 @@
+<HTML>
+<BODY>
+<PRE>
+<!-- Manpage converted by man2html 3.0.1 -->
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2><PRE>
+       <B>graph</B> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2><PRE>
+       The  <B>graph</B>  command  creates  a graph for plotting two-dimensional data
+       (X-Y coordinates). It  has  many  configurable  components:  coordinate
+       axes,  elements,  legend, grid lines, cross hairs, etc.  They allow you
+       to customize the look and feel of the graph.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>INTRODUCTION</H2><PRE>
+       The <B>graph</B> command creates a new  window  for  plotting  two-dimensional
+       data  (X-Y coordinates).  Data points are plotted in a rectangular area
+       displayed in the center of the new window.  This is the <I>plotting</I>  <I>area</I>.
+       The  coordinate axes are drawn in the margins around the plotting area.
+       By default, the legend is displayed in the right margin.  The title  is
+       displayed in top margin.
+
+       The  <B>graph</B>  widget  is composed of several components: coordinate axes,
+       data elements, legend, grid, cross hairs, pens, postscript, and annota-
+       tion markers.
+
+       axis      The  graph has four standard axes (x, x2, y, and y2), but you
+                 can create and display any number of axes.  Axes control what
+                 region  of data is displayed and how the data is scaled. Each
+                 axis consists of the axis line, title, major and minor ticks,
+                 and tick labels.  Tick labels display the value at each major
+                 tick.
+
+       crosshairs
+                 Cross hairs are used to position the mouse  pointer  relative
+                 to  the  X  and  Y  coordinate axes. Two perpendicular lines,
+                 intersecting at the current location  of  the  mouse,  extend
+                 across the plotting area to the coordinate axes.
+
+       element   An  element  represents a set of data points. Elements can be
+                 plotted with a symbol at each data point and lines connecting
+                 the  points.  The appearance of the element, such as its sym-
+                 bol, line width, and color is configurable.
+
+       grid      Extends the major and minor ticks of the X-axis and/or Y-axis
+                 across the plotting area.
+
+       legend    The legend displays the name and symbol of each data element.
+                 The legend can be drawn in any  margin  or  in  the  plotting
+                 area.
+
+       marker    Markers  are  used  annotate or highlight areas of the graph.
+                 For example, you could use a polygon marker to fill  an  area
+                 under  a  curve,  or a text marker to label a particular data
+                 point. Markers come in various forms: text strings,  bitmaps,
+                 connected  line  segments, images, polygons, or embedded wid-
+                 gets.
+
+       <B>graph</B>  <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...  The <B>graph</B> command creates a new win-
+       dow <I>pathName</I> and makes it into a <B>graph</B> widget.  At the time  this  com-
+       mand  is  invoked,  there  must  not exist a window named <I>pathName</I>, but
+       <I>pathName</I>'s parent must exist.  Additional options may be  specified  on
+       the  command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the
+       graph such as its colors and font.  See the <B>configure</B>  operation  below
+       for the exact details about what <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are valid.
+
+       If successful, <B>graph</B> returns the path name of the widget.  It also cre-
+       ates a new Tcl command by the same name.  You can use this  command  to
+       invoke  various operations that query or modify the graph.  The general
+       form is: <I>pathName</I> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...  Both <I>operation</I> and its  arguments
+       determine  the exact behavior of the command.  The operations available
+       for the graph are described in the <B>GRAPH</B> <B>OPERATIONS</B> section.
+
+       The command can also be used to access components of the graph.   <I>path-</I>
+       <I>Name</I> <I>component</I> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...  The operation, now located after the
+       name of the component, is the function to be performed on  that  compo-
+       nent. Each component has its own set of operations that manipulate that
+       component.  They will be described below in their own sections.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>EXAMPLE</H2><PRE>
+       The <B>graph</B> command creates a new graph.  # Create a new graph.  Plotting
+       area  is black.  graph .g -plotbackground black A new Tcl command .g is
+       also created.  This command can be used to query and modify the  graph.
+       For example, to change the title of the graph to "My Plot", you use the
+       new command and the graph's <B>configure</B> operation.  # Change  the  title.
+       .g configure -title "My Plot" A graph has several components. To access
+       a particular component you use the component's name.  For  example,  to
+       add  data  elements, you use the new command and the <B>element</B> component.
+       # Create a  new  element  named  "line1"  .g  element  create  line1  \
+            -xdata { 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 } \      -ydata {
+       26.18 50.46 72.85 93.31 111.86 128.47  143.14            155.85  166.60
+       175.38  }  The  element's  X-Y coordinates are specified using lists of
+       numbers.  Alternately, BLT vectors could be used to hold the X-Y  coor-
+       dinates.   # Create two vectors and add them to the graph.  vector xVec
+       yVec xVec set { 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 }  yVec  set  {
+       26.18  50.46 72.85 93.31 111.86 128.47 143.14 155.85      166.60 175.38
+       } .g element create line1 -xdata xVec  -ydata  yVec  The  advantage  of
+       using  vectors  is that when you modify one, the graph is automatically
+       redrawn to reflect the new values.  # Change the y  coordinate  of  the
+       first  point.   set <B>yVector(0)</B> 25.18 An element named e1 is now created
+       in .b.  It is automatically added to the display list of elements.  You
+       can  use this list to control in what order elements are displayed.  To
+       query or reset the element display list, you  use  the  element's  <B>show</B>
+       operation.   #  Get  the  current display list set elemList [.b element
+       show] # Remove the first element so it won't be displayed.  .b  element
+       show  [lrange $elemList 0 end] The element will be displayed by as many
+       bars as there are data points (in this case there are ten).   The  bars
+       will  be drawn centered at the x-coordinate of the data point.  All the
+       bars will have the same attributes (colors, stipple, etc).   The  width
+       of each bar is by default one unit.  You can change this with using the
+       example, you change the scale of the Y-axis from linear  to  log  using
+       the  <B>axis</B>  component.   #  Y-axis  is  log  scale.  .g axis configure y
+       -logscale yes One important way axes are used is to zoom in on  a  par-
+       ticular  data  region.   Zooming  is done by simply specifying new axis
+       limits using the <B>-min</B> and <B>-max</B> configuration options.  .g axis  config-
+       ure  x  -min  1.0  -max 1.5 .g axis configure y -min 12.0 -max 55.15 To
+       zoom interactively, you link the <B>axis</B> <B>configure</B>  operations  with  some
+       user  interaction  (such  as pressing the mouse button), using the <B>bind</B>
+       command.  To convert between screen  and  graph  coordinates,  use  the
+       <B>invtransform</B>  operation.   # Click the button to set a new minimum bind
+       .g &lt;ButtonPress-1&gt; {
+           %W axis configure x -min [%W axis invtransform x %x]
+           %W axis configure x -min [%W axis invtransform x %y] } By  default,
+       the  limits of the axis are determined from data values.  To reset back
+       to the default limits, set the <B>-min</B>  and  <B>-max</B>  options  to  the  empty
+       value.   # Reset the axes to autoscale again.  .g axis configure x -min
+       {} -max {} .g axis configure y -min {} -max {} By default,  the  legend
+       is  drawn  in the right margin.  You can change this or any legend con-
+       figuration options using the <B>legend</B> component.  # Configure the  legend
+       font,  color,  and  relief  .g  legend configure -position left -relief
+       raised \      -font fixed -fg blue To prevent  the  legend  from  being
+       displayed,  turn  on the <B>-hide</B> option.  # Don't display the legend.  .g
+       legend configure -hide yes The <B>graph</B> widget has simple  drawing  proce-
+       dures  called  markers.  They can be used to highlight or annotate data
+       in the graph. The types of markers available are bitmaps, images, poly-
+       gons,  lines, or windows.  Markers can be used, for example, to mark or
+       brush points.  In this example, is a text marker that labels  the  data
+       first point.  Markers are created using the <B>marker</B> component.  # Create
+       a label for the first data point of "line1".   .g  marker  create  text
+       -name  first_marker  -coords { 0.2 26.18 } \      -text "start" -anchor
+       se  -xoffset  -10  -yoffset  -10  This  creates  a  text  marker  named
+       first_marker.  It will display the text "start" near the coordinates of
+       the first data point.  The <B>-anchor</B>, <B>-xoffset</B>, and <B>-yoffset</B> options  are
+       used  to display the marker above and to the left of the data point, so
+       that the data point isn't covered by the marker.  By  default,  markers
+       are  drawn  last,  on top of data.  You can change this with the <B>-under</B>
+       option.  # Draw the label before elements are drawn.  .g marker config-
+       ure first_marker -under yes You can add cross hairs or grid lines using
+       the <B>crosshairs</B> and <B>grid</B> components.  # Display  both  cross  hairs  and
+       grid  lines.   .g crosshairs configure -hide no -color red .g grid con-
+       figure -hide no -dashes { 2 2 } # Set up a binding  to  reposition  the
+       crosshairs.  bind .g &lt;Motion&gt; {
+           .g crosshairs configure -position @%x,%y } The crosshairs are repo-
+       sitioned as the mouse pointer is moved in the graph.  The  pointer  X-Y
+       coordinates define the center of the crosshairs.
+
+       Finally, to get hardcopy of the graph, use the <B>postscript</B> component.  #
+       Print the graph into file "file.ps" .g postscript output file.ps  -max-
+       pect  yes  -decorations no This generates a file file.ps containing the
+       encapsulated PostScript of the graph.   The  option  <B>-maxpect</B>  says  to
+       scale  the  plot to the size of the page.  Turning off the <B>-decorations</B>
+       option denotes that no borders or color  backgrounds  should  be  drawn
+              <I>option</I>.   <I>Option</I>  may be any option described below for the <B>con-</B>
+              <B>figure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries or modifies the configuration options of the graph.   If
+              <I>option</I>  isn't  specified,  a list describing the current options
+              for <I>pathName</I> is returned.   If  <I>option</I>  is  specified,  but  not
+              <I>value</I>,  then  a  list  describing <I>option</I> is returned.  If one or
+              more <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are specified, then for  each  pair,
+              the  option  <I>option</I>  is set to <I>value</I>.  The following options are
+              valid.
+
+              <B>-aspect</B> <I>width/height</I>
+                     Force a fixed aspect ratio of  <I>width/height</I>,  a  floating
+                     point number.
+
+              <B>-background</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the background color. This includes the margins and
+                     legend, but not the plotting area.
+
+              <B>-borderwidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the width of the 3-D border around the outside  edge
+                     of the widget.  The <B>-relief</B> option determines if the bor-
+                     der is to be drawn.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-bottommargin</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     If non-zero, overrides the computed size  of  the  margin
+                     extending  below  the X-coordinate axis.  If <I>pixels</I> is 0,
+                     the automatically computed size is used.  The default  is
+                     0.
+
+              <B>-bufferelements</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether  an internal pixmap to buffer the dis-
+                     play of data elements should  be  used.   If  <I>boolean</I>  is
+                     true,  data  elements  are  drawn  to an internal pixmap.
+                     This option  is  especially  useful  when  the  graph  is
+                     redrawn  frequently while the remains data unchanged (for
+                     example, moving a marker across the plot).  See the <B>SPEED</B>
+                     <B>TIPS</B> section.  The default is 1.
+
+              <B>-cursor</B> <I>cursor</I>
+                     Specifies  the  widget's  cursor.   The default cursor is
+                     crosshair.
+
+              <B>-font</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     Specifies the font of the graph  title.  The  default  is
+                     *-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-18-180-*.
+
+              <B>-halo</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies  a  maximum distance to consider when searching
+                     for the closest data point  (see  the  element's  <B>closest</B>
+                     operation  below).   Data points further than <I>pixels</I> away
+                     text.  <I>Justify</I>  must  be  left,  right,  or  center.  The
+                     default is center.
+
+              <B>-leftmargin</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     If non-zero, overrides the computed size  of  the  margin
+                     extending from the left edge of the window to the Y-coor-
+                     dinate axis.  If <I>pixels</I> is 0, the automatically  computed
+                     size is used.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-plotbackground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Specifies the background color of the plotting area.  The
+                     default is white.
+
+              <B>-plotborderwidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the width of the  3-D  border  around  the  plotting
+                     area.   The  <B>-plotrelief</B> option determines if a border is
+                     drawn.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-plotpadx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets the amount of padding to be added to  the  left  and
+                     right  sides  of the plotting area.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of
+                     one or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I>  has  two  elements,
+                     the left side of the plotting area entry is padded by the
+                     first distance and the right side by the second.  If  <I>pad</I>
+                     is  just  one distance, both the left and right sides are
+                     padded evenly.  The default is 8.
+
+              <B>-plotpady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets the amount of padding to be added  to  the  top  and
+                     bottom of the plotting area.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of one or
+                     two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements,  the  top
+                     of  the plotting area is padded by the first distance and
+                     the bottom by the second.  If <I>pad</I> is just  one  distance,
+                     both  the  top and bottom are padded evenly.  The default
+                     is 8.
+
+              <B>-plotrelief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies the 3-D effect for the plotting  area.   <I>Relief</I>
+                     specifies  how  the  interior of the plotting area should
+                     appear relative to rest of the graph; for example, raised
+                     means  the plot should appear to protrude from the graph,
+                     relative to the surface of the  graph.   The  default  is
+                     sunken.
+
+              <B>-relief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies  the  3-D  effect for the graph widget.  <I>Relief</I>
+                     specifies how the graph should appear relative to  widget
+                     it  is  packed  into; for example, raised means the graph
+                     should appear to protrude.  The default is flat.
+
+              <B>-rightmargin</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     If non-zero, overrides the computed size  of  the  margin
+
+              <B>-tile</B> <I>image</I>
+                     Specifies  a  tiled  background for the widget.  If <I>image</I>
+                     isn't "", the background is tiled  using  <I>image</I>.   Other-
+                     wise,  the  normal  background  color  is  drawn (see the
+                     <B>-background</B> option).  <I>Image</I>  must  be  an  image  created
+                     using the Tk <B>image</B> command.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-title</B> <I>text</I>
+                     Sets  the  title to <I>text</I>. If <I>text</I> is "", no title will be
+                     displayed.
+
+              <B>-topmargin</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     If non-zero, overrides the computed size  of  the  margin
+                     above  the  x2  axis.   If <I>pixels</I> is 0, the automatically
+                     computed size is used.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-width</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies the requested width of the widget.  The default
+                     is 5i.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?
+              See the <B>CROSSHAIRS</B> <B>COMPONENT</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>ELEMENT</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>extents</B> <I>item</I>
+              Returns  the  size of a particular item in the graph.  <I>Item</I> must
+              be  either  leftmargin,  rightmargin,  topmargin,  bottommargin,
+              plotwidth, or plotheight.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>GRID</B> <B>COMPONENT</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>invtransform</B> <I>winX</I> <I>winY</I>
+              Performs  an  inverse  coordinate transformation, mapping window
+              coordinates back to graph coordinates, using the standard X-axis
+              and  Y-axis.  Returns a list of containing the X-Y graph coordi-
+              nates.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>inside</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I>
+              Returns 1 is the designated  screen  coordinate  (<I>x</I>  and  <I>y</I>)  is
+              inside the plotting area and 0 otherwise.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>LEGEND</B> <B>COMPONENT</B> section.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>line</B> <B>operation</B> <B>arg</B>...
+              The operation is the same as <B>element</B>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+                        photo  Saves a Tk photo image.  <I>OutputName</I>  represents
+                               the  name of a Tk photo image that must already
+                               have been created.
+
+                        wmf    Saves an Aldus Placeable Metafile.   <I>OutputName</I>
+                               represents  the  filename where the metafile is
+                               written.  If <I>outputName</I> is CLIPBOARD, then out-
+                               put  is  written  directly to the Windows clip-
+                               board.  This format  is  available  only  under
+                               Microsoft Windows.
+
+                        emf    Saves  an  Enhanced Metafile. <I>OutputName</I> repre-
+                               sents the filename where the metafile is  writ-
+                               ten.   If  <I>outputName</I> is CLIPBOARD, then output
+                               is written directly to the  Windows  clipboard.
+                               This  format  is available only under Microsoft
+                               Windows.
+
+              <B>-height</B> <I>size</I>
+                        Specifies the height of the graph.  <I>Size</I> is  a  screen
+                        distance.  The graph will be redrawn using this dimen-
+                        sion, rather than its current window height.
+
+              <B>-width</B> <I>size</I>
+                        Specifies the width of the graph.  <I>Size</I>  is  a  screen
+                        distance.  The graph will be redrawn using this dimen-
+                        sion, rather than its current window width.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>transform</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I>
+              Performs a coordinate transformation, mapping graph  coordinates
+              to  window  coordinates,  using  the standard X-axis and Y-axis.
+              Returns a list containing the X-Y screen coordinates.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>xaxis</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>x2axis</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>yaxis</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>y2axis</B> <I>operation</I> ?<I>arg</I>?...
+              See the <B>AXIS</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B> section.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>GRAPH COMPONENTS</H2><PRE>
+       A graph is composed of several components: coordinate axes,  data  ele-
+       ments,  legend,  grid, cross hairs, postscript, and annotation markers.
+       Instead of one big set of configuration  options  and  operations,  the
+       graph  is  partitioned,  where each component has its own configuration
+       options and operations that specifically control that aspect or part of
+       the graph.
+
+   <B>AXIS</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B>
+       Four  coordinate  axes are automatically created: two X-coordinate axes
+       You can have several axes. To create an axis, invoke the axis component
+       and  its  create  operation.   # Create a new axis called "tempAxis" .g
+       axis create tempAxis You map data elements to an axis  using  the  ele-
+       ment's  -mapy and -mapx configuration options. They specify the coordi-
+       nate axes an element is mapped onto.  # Now map the  tempAxis  data  to
+       this  axis.   .g element create "e1" -xdata $x -ydata $y -mapy tempAxis
+       Any number of axes can be displayed simultaneously. They are  drawn  in
+       the  margins  surrounding  the plotting area.  The default axes x and y
+       are drawn in the bottom and left margins. The axes x2 and y2 are  drawn
+       in  top  and  right  margins.  By default, only x and y are shown. Note
+       that the axes can have different scales.
+
+       To display a different axis or more than one axis, you  invoke  one  of
+       the  following components: <B>xaxis</B>, <B>yaxis</B>, <B>x2axis</B>, and <B>y2axis</B>.  Each com-
+       ponent has a <B>use</B> operation that designates the axis  (or  axes)  to  be
+       drawn  in  that corresponding margin: <B>xaxis</B> in the bottom, <B>yaxis</B> in the
+       left, <B>x2axis</B> in the top, and <B>y2axis</B> in the right.  # Display  the  axis
+       tempAxis  in  the left margin.  .g yaxis use tempAxis The <B>use</B> operation
+       takes a list of axis names as its last argument.  This is the  list  of
+       axes to be drawn in this margin.
+
+       You  can  configure  axes in many ways. The axis scale can be linear or
+       logarithmic.  The  values  along  the  axis  can  either  monotonically
+       increase  or decrease.  If you need custom tick labels, you can specify
+       a Tcl procedure to format the label any way you wish.  You can  control
+       how  ticks are drawn, by changing the major tick interval or the number
+       of minor ticks.  You can define non-uniform tick intervals, such as for
+       time-series plots.
+
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>bind</B> <I>tagName</I> ?<I>sequence</I>?  ?<I>command</I>?
+              Associates  <I>command</I>  with  <I>tagName</I>  such that whenever the event
+              sequence given by <I>sequence</I> occurs for an  axis  with  this  tag,
+              <I>command</I> will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the <B>bind</B> com-
+              mand except that it operates on graph axes, rather than widgets.
+              See  the  <B>bind</B> manual entry for complete details on <I>sequence</I> and
+              the substitutions performed on <I>command</I> before invoking it.
+
+              If all arguments are specified then a new  binding  is  created,
+              replacing  any  existing  binding for the same <I>sequence</I> and <I>tag-</I>
+              <I>Name</I>.  If the first character of <I>command</I> is + then <I>command</I>  aug-
+              ments  an existing binding rather than replacing it.  If no <I>com-</I>
+              <I>mand</I> argument is provided then the command currently  associated
+              with  <I>tagName</I>  and  <I>sequence</I> (it's an error occurs if there's no
+              such binding) is returned.  If both  <I>command</I>  and  <I>sequence</I>  are
+              missing  then  a list of all the event sequences for which bind-
+              ings have been defined for <I>tagName</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>cget</B> <I>axisName</I> <I>option</I>
+              Returns the current value of the  option  given  by  <I>option</I>  for
+              <I>axisName</I>.  <I>Option</I> may be any option described below for the axis
+              <B>configure</B> operation.
+                     the  list  matching  the current event sequence will have
+                     its Tcl command executed.  Implicitly  the  name  of  the
+                     element is always the first tag in the list.  The default
+                     value is all.
+
+              <B>-color</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the axis and tick labels.  The  default
+                     is black.
+
+              <B>-descending</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the values along the axis are monotoni-
+                     cally increasing or decreasing.  If <I>boolean</I> is true,  the
+                     axis values will be decreasing.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  if  the axis is displayed. If <I>boolean</I> is false
+                     the axis will be displayed. Any  element  mapped  to  the
+                     axis is displayed regardless.  The default value is 0.
+
+              <B>-justify</B> <I>justify</I>
+                     Specifies  how  the axis title should be justified.  This
+                     matters only when the axis title contains more  than  one
+                     line  of  text.  <I>Justify</I>  must be left, right, or center.
+                     The default is center.
+
+              <B>-limits</B> <I>formatStr</I>
+                     Specifies a printf-like description to format the minimum
+                     and maximum limits of the axis.  The limits are displayed
+                     at the top/bottom or left/right  sides  of  the  plotting
+                     area.   <I>FormatStr</I> is a list of one or two format descrip-
+                     tions.  If one description is supplied, both the  minimum
+                     and  maximum  limits  are  formatted in the same way.  If
+                     two, the first designates  the  format  for  the  minimum
+                     limit,  the  second  for  the maximum.  If "" is given as
+                     either description, then the that limit will not be  dis-
+                     loosely, at the outer tick intervals.  If the axis  limit
+                     is  set  with  the -min or -max option, the axes are dis-
+                     played tightly.  If <I>boolean</I> is true, the  axis  range  is
+                     "loose".  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-majorticks</B> <I>majorList</I>
+                     Specifies where to display major axis ticks.  You can use
+                     this option to display ticks  at  non-uniform  intervals.
+                     <I>MajorList</I>  is  a list of axis coordinates designating the
+                     location of major ticks.  No minor ticks are  drawn.   If
+                     <I>majorList</I>  is  "", major ticks will be automatically com-
+                     puted. The default is "".
+
+              <B>-max</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Sets the maximum  limit  of  <I>axisName</I>.   Any  data  point
+                     greater than <I>value</I> is not displayed.  If <I>value</I> is "", the
+                     maximum limit is calculated using the largest data value.
+                     The default is "".
+
+              <B>-min</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Sets  the  minimum limit of <I>axisName</I>. Any data point less
+                     than <I>value</I> is not displayed.  If <I>value</I> is "", the minimum
+                     limit  is  calculated using the smallest data value.  The
+                     default is "".
+
+              <B>-minorticks</B> <I>minorList</I>
+                     Specifies where to display minor axis ticks.  You can use
+                     this  option to display minor ticks at non-uniform inter-
+                     vals. <I>MinorList</I> is a list of real  values,  ranging  from
+                     0.0  to  1.0,  designating the placement of a minor tick.
+                     No minor ticks are drawn if the <B>-majortick</B> option is also
+                     set.   If  <I>minorList</I> is "", minor ticks will be automati-
+                     cally computed. The default is "".
+
+              <B>-rotate</B> <I>theta</I>
+                     Specifies the how many degrees to rotate  the  axis  tick
+                     labels.  <I>Theta</I> is a real value representing the number of
+                     degrees to rotate the tick labels.  The  default  is  0.0
+                     degrees.
+
+              <B>-scrollcommand</B> <I>command</I>
+                     Specify the prefix for a command used to communicate with
+                     scrollbars for this axis, such as <I>.sbar</I> <I>set</I>.
+
+              <B>-scrollmax</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Sets the maximum limit of the  axis  scroll  region.   If
+                     <I>value</I>  is  "",  the maximum limit is calculated using the
+                     largest data value.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-scrollmin</B> <I>value</I>
+                     Sets the minimum limit of axis scroll region.   If  <I>value</I>
+                     is "", the minimum limit is calculated using the smallest
+                     Indicates how many minor axis ticks are to be drawn.  For
+                     example, if <I>number</I> is two, only one minor tick is  drawn.
+                     If  <I>number</I>  is  one,  no  minor ticks are displayed.  The
+                     default is 2.
+
+              <B>-tickfont</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     Specifies the font for axis tick labels. The  default  is
+                     *-Courier-Bold-R-Normal-*-100-*.
+
+              <B>-tickformat</B> <I>formatStr</I>
+                     Specifies a printf-like description to format teh axis
+                     tick labels.  You can get the standard tick labels again by
+                     setting <I>formatStr</I> to "".  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-tickformatcommand</B>, <B>-command</B> <I>prefix</I>
+                     Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked when formatting the
+                     axis tick labels. <I>Prefix</I> is a string containing the  name
+                     of  a Tcl proc and any extra arguments for the procedure.
+                     This command is invoked for each major tick on the  axis.
+                     Two additional arguments are passed to the procedure: the
+                     pathname of the widget and the current the numeric  value
+                     of  the  tick.   The procedure returns the formatted tick
+                     label.  If "" is returned, no label will appear  next  to
+                     the  tick.  You can get the standard tick labels again by
+                     setting <I>prefix</I> to "".  The default is "".
+
+                     The numeric value for the tick might change when using the
+                     <B>-logscale</B> and <B>-tickformat</B> options.
+
+                     Please note that this  procedure  is  invoked  while  the
+                     graph  is  redrawn.  You may query configuration options.
+                     But  do  not  them,  because  this  can  have  unexpected
+                     results.
+
+              <B>-ticklength</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the length of major and minor ticks (minor ticks are
+                     half the length of major ticks). If <I>pixels</I> is  less  than
+                     zero, the axis will be inverted with ticks drawn pointing
+                     towards the plot.  The default is 0.1i.
+
+              <B>-title</B> <I>text</I>
+                     Sets the title of the axis. If <I>text</I> is "", no axis  title
+                     will be displayed.
+
+              <B>-titlealternate</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  to  display  the  axis  title in its alternate
+                     location.  Normally the axis title is centered along  the
+                     axis.   This  option  places the axis either to the right
+                     (horizontal axes) or above (vertical axes) the axis.  The
+                     default is 0.
+
+              <B>-titlecolor</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the axis title. The default is black.
+
+              <B>-titlefont</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     Specifies  the font for axis title. The default is *-Hel-
+                     vetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-14-140-*.
+
+              Axis configuration options may be also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.   The  resource class is Axis.  The resource names are the
+              names  of  the  axes  (such   as   x   or   x2).    option   add
+              *Graph.Axis.Color    blue  option  add  *Graph.x.LogScale   true
+              option add *Graph.x2.LogScale false
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>create</B> <I>axisName</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Creates a new axis by the name <I>axisName</I>.  No axis  by  the  same
+              name  can already exist. <I>Option</I> and <I>value</I> are described in above
+              in the axis <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>delete</B> ?<I>axisName</I>?...
+              Deletes the named axes. An axis is not really deleted  until  it
+              is not longer in use, so it's safe to delete axes mapped to ele-
+              ments.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>invtransform</B> <I>axisName</I> <I>value</I>
+              Performs the inverse transformation, changing the screen coordi-
+              nate  <I>value</I>  to  a graph coordinate, mapping the value mapped to
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>axis</B> <B>view</B> <I>axisName</I>
+              Change the viewable area of this axis. Use as an argument  to  a
+              scrollbar's "<I>-command</I>".
+
+       The  default  axes are x, y, x2, and y2.  But you can display more than
+       four axes simultaneously.  You can also swap in a different  axis  with
+       <B>use</B> operation of the special axis components: <B>xaxis</B>, <B>x2axis</B>, <B>yaxis</B>, and
+       <B>y2axis</B>.  .g create axis temp .g create axis time ...  .g xaxis use temp
+       .g  yaxis use time Only the axes specified for use are displayed on the
+       screen.
+
+       The <B>xaxis</B>, <B>x2axis</B>, <B>yaxis</B>, and <B>y2axis</B>  components  operate  on  an  axis
+       location  rather than a specific axis like the more general <B>axis</B> compo-
+       nent does.  They implicitly control the axis that is currently using to
+       that location.  By default, <B>xaxis</B> uses the x axis, <B>yaxis</B> uses y, <B>x2axis</B>
+       uses x2, and <B>y2axis</B> uses y2.  When more than one axis is displayed in a
+       margin, it represents the first axis displayed.
+
+       The  following  operations  are available for axes. They mirror exactly
+       the operations of the <B>axis</B> component.  The <I>axis</I> argument must be <B>xaxis</B>,
+       <B>x2axis</B>,  <B>yaxis</B>,  or <B>y2axis</B>.  This feature is deprecated since more than
+       one axis can now be used a margin.  You  should  only  use  the  <B>xaxis</B>,
+       <B>x2axis</B>,  <B>yaxis</B>,  and <B>y2axis</B> components with the <B>use</B> operation.  For all
+       other operations, use the general <B>axis</B> component instead.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>invtransform</B> <I>value</I>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>limits</B>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>transform</B> <I>value</I>
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <I>axis</I> <B>use</B> ?<I>axisName</I>?
+              Designates the axis <I>axisName</I> is to be displayed  at  this  loca-
+              tion.   <I>AxisName</I>  can not be already in use at another location.
+              This command returns the name of the axis currently  using  this
+              location.
+
+   <B>CROSSHAIRS</B> <B>COMPONENT</B>
+       Cross  hairs  consist  of  two intersecting lines (one vertical and one
+       horizontal) drawn completely across the plotting area.  They  are  used
+       to  position the mouse in relation to the coordinate axes.  Cross hairs
+       differ from line markers in that they are implemented using XOR drawing
+       primitives.  This means that they can be quickly drawn and erased with-
+       out redrawing the entire graph.
+
+       The following operations are available for cross hairs:
+
+              <B>-color</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the cross hairs.  The default is black.
+
+              <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+                     Sets  the  dash  style  of the cross hairs. <I>DashList</I> is a
+                     list of up to 11 numbers that alternately  represent  the
+                     lengths  of  the dashes and gaps on the cross hair lines.
+                     Each number must be between 1 and 255.   If  <I>dashList</I>  is
+                     "", the cross hairs will be solid lines.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether  cross  hairs are drawn. If <I>boolean</I> is
+                     true, cross hairs are not drawn.  The default is yes.
+
+              <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Set the width of the cross hair lines.  The default is 1.
+
+              <B>-position</B> <I>pos</I>
+                     Specifies  the  screen  position  where  the  cross hairs
+                     intersect.  <I>Pos</I> must be in the form "<I>@x,y</I>", where <I>x</I> and <I>y</I>
+                     are the window coordinates of the intersection.
+
+              Cross  hairs  configuration  options  may  be also be set by the
+              <B>option</B> command.  The resource name and class are crosshairs  and
+              Crosshairs respectively.  option add *Graph.Crosshairs.LineWidth
+              2 option add *Graph.Crosshairs.Color     red
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>off</B>
+              Turns off the cross hairs.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>on</B>
+              Turns on the display of the cross hairs.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>crosshairs</B> <B>toggle</B>
+              Toggles the current state of the cross hairs,  alternately  map-
+              ping and unmapping the cross hairs.
+
+   <B>ELEMENT</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B>
+       A  data  element represents a set of data.  It contains x and y vectors
+       containing the coordinates of the data points.  Elements  can  be  dis-
+       played  with  a  symbol  at  each  data  point and lines connecting the
+       points.  Elements also control the appearance of the data, such as  the
+       symbol type, line width, color etc.
+
+       When  new  data elements are created, they are automatically added to a
+       list of displayed elements.   The display list controls  what  elements
+       are drawn and in what order.
+
+       The following operations are available for elements.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>activate</B> <I>elemName</I> ?<I>index</I>?...
+              Specifies  the data points of element <I>elemName</I> to be drawn using
+              replacing  any  existing  binding for the same <I>sequence</I> and <I>tag-</I>
+              <I>Name</I>.  If the first character of <I>command</I> is + then <I>command</I>  aug-
+              ments  an existing binding rather than replacing it.  If no <I>com-</I>
+              <I>mand</I> argument is provided then the command currently  associated
+              with  <I>tagName</I>  and  <I>sequence</I> (it's an error occurs if there's no
+              such binding) is returned.  If both  <I>command</I>  and  <I>sequence</I>  are
+              missing  then  a list of all the event sequences for which bind-
+              ings have been defined for <I>tagName</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>cget</B> <I>elemName</I> <I>option</I>
+              Returns the current value of the  element  configuration  option
+              given  by  <I>option</I>.   <I>Option</I>  may be any of the options described
+              below for the element <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>closest</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?... ?<I>elemName</I>?...
+              Searches for the data point closest to the window coordinates  <I>x</I>
+              and  <I>y</I>.  By default, all elements are searched.  Hidden elements
+              (see the <B>-hide</B> option is false) are ignored.  You can limit  the
+              search  by  specifying  only the elements you want to be consid-
+              ered.  <I>ElemName</I> must be the name of an element that can  not  be
+              hidden.   It returns a key-value list containing the name of the
+              closest element, the index of the closest data  point,  and  the
+              graph-coordinates  of  the  point.  Returns "", if no data point
+              within the  threshold  distance  can  be  found.  The  following
+              <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs are available.
+
+              <B>-along</B> <I>direction</I>
+                     Search for the closest element using the following crite-
+                     ria:
+
+                     x      Find closest element vertically from the given  X-
+                            coordinate.
+
+                     y      Find  the  closest  element  horizontally from the
+                            given Y-coordinate.
+
+                     both   Find the  closest  element  for  the  given  point
+                            (using both the X and Y coordinates).
+
+              <B>-halo</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies a threshold distance where selected data points
+                     are ignored.  <I>Pixels</I> is a valid screen distance, such  as
+                     2  or  1.2i.   If  this  option  isn't specified, then it
+                     defaults to the value of the graph's <B>-halo</B> option.
+
+              <B>-interpolate</B> <I>string</I>
+                     Indicates whether to consider projections that lie  along
+                     the  line  segments connecting data points when searching
+                     for the closest point.  The default value is 0. The  val-
+                     ues for <I>string</I> are described below.
+
+                     no          Search only for the closest data point.
+
+              <B>-activepen</B> <I>penName</I>
+                     Specifies pen to use to draw active element.  If  <I>penName</I>
+                     is  "", no active elements will be drawn.  The default is
+                     activeLine.
+
+              <B>-areabackground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Specifies the background color  of  the  area  under  the
+                     curve.  The  background area color is drawn only for bit-
+                     maps (see the <B>-areapattern</B> option).  If <I>color</I> is "",  the
+                     background is transparent.  The default is black.
+
+              <B>-areaforeground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Specifies  the  foreground  color  of  the area under the
+                     curve.  The default is black.
+
+              <B>-areapattern</B> <I>pattern</I>
+                     Specifies how to fill the area under the curve.   <I>Pattern</I>
+                     may  be  the  name  of  a  Tk  bitmap,  solid, or "".  If
+                     "solid", then the area under the curve is drawn with  the
+                     color  designated  by  the  <B>-areaforeground</B> option.  If a
+                     bitmap, then the bitmap  is  stippled  across  the  area.
+                     Here  the  bitmap colors are controlled by the <B>-areafore-</B>
+                     <B>ground</B> and <B>-areabackground</B> options.  If <I>pattern</I> is "", no
+                     filled area is drawn.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-areatile</B> <I>image</I>
+                     Specifies  the  name of a Tk image to be used to tile the
+                     area under the curve.  This option supersedes the <B>-areap-</B>
+                     <B>attern</B> option.  <I>Image</I> must be a photo image.  If <I>image</I> is
+                     "", no tiling is performed.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-bindtags</B> <I>tagList</I>
+                     Specifies the binding tags for the element.  <I>TagList</I> is a
+                     list of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will
+                     determine how events are handled for elements.  Each  tag
+                     in the list matching the current event sequence will have
+                     its Tcl command executed.  Implicitly  the  name  of  the
+                     element is always the first tag in the list.  The default
+                     value is all.
+
+              <B>-color</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the traces connecting the data  points.
+
+              <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+                     Sets  the  dash style of element line. <I>DashList</I> is a list
+                     of up  to  11  numbers  that  alternately  represent  the
+                     lengths of the dashes and gaps on the element line.  Each
+                     number must be between 1 and 255.  If <I>dashList</I> is "", the
+                     lines will be solid.
+
+              <B>-data</B> <I>coordList</I>
+                     Specifies  the X-Y coordinates of the data.  <I>CoordList</I> is
+                     Sets  the  element's label in the legend.  If <I>text</I> is "",
+                     the element will  have  no  entry  in  the  legend.   The
+                     default label is the element's name.
+
+              <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the  width  of  the  connecting  lines between data
+                     points.  If <I>pixels</I> is 0,  no  connecting  lines  will  be
+                     drawn between symbols.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-mapx</B> <I>xAxis</I>
+                     Selects  the  X-axis  to  map the element's X-coordinates
+                     onto.  <I>XAxis</I> must be the name of an axis.  The default is
+                     x.
+
+              <B>-mapy</B> <I>yAxis</I>
+                     Selects  the  Y-axis  to  map the element's Y-coordinates
+                     onto.  <I>YAxis</I> must be the name of an axis. The default  is
+                     y.
+
+              <B>-offdash</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the stripes when traces are dashed (see
+                     the <B>-dashes</B> option).  If <I>color</I> is "", then the "off" pix-
+                     els  will represent gaps instead of stripes.  If <I>color</I> is
+                     defcolor, then the color will be the same as  the  <B>-color</B>
+                     option.  The default is defcolor.
+
+              <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the  color  or  the outline around each symbol.  If
+                     <I>color</I> is "", then no outline is drawn. If <I>color</I>  is  def-
+                     color,  then  the  color  will  be the same as the <B>-color</B>
+                     option.  The default is defcolor.
+
+              <B>-pen</B> <I>penname</I>
+                     Set the pen to use for this element.
+
+              <B>-outlinewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the width of the outline bordering each symbol.   If
+                     <I>pixels</I>  is 0, no outline will be drawn. The default is 1.
+
+              <B>-pixels</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the size of symbols.  If <I>pixels</I>  is  0,  no  symbols
+                     will be drawn.  The default is 0.125i.
+
+              <B>-scalesymbols</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     If  <I>boolean</I>  is  true,  the size of the symbols drawn for
+                     <I>elemName</I> will change with scale of the X-axis and Y-axis.
+                     At the time this option is set, the current ranges of the
+                     axes are saved as the normalized scales (i.e scale factor
+                     is  1.0)  and the element is drawn at its designated size
+                     (see the <B>-pixels</B> option).   As  the  scale  of  the  axes
+                     change,  the  symbol  will  be  scaled  according  to the
+                     smaller of the X-axis and Y-axis scales.  If  <I>boolean</I>  is
+                     dratic spline is used.  The default is <I>linear</I>.
+
+              <B>-styles</B> <I>styleList</I>
+                     Specifies what pen to use based on the range  of  weights
+                     given.  <I>StyleList</I> is a list of style specifications. Each
+                     style specification, in turn, is a list consisting  of  a
+                     pen  name,  and  optionally  a minimum and maximum range.
+                     Data points whose weight (see the <B>-weight</B>  option)  falls
+                     in  this  range, are drawn with this pen.  If no range is
+                     specified it defaults to the index  of  the  pen  in  the
+                     list.   Note  that  this  affects only symbol attributes.
+                     Line attributes, such as line  width,  dashes,  etc.  are
+                     ignored.
+
+              <B>-symbol</B> <I>symbol</I>
+                     Specifies  the  symbol  for  data  points.  <I>Symbol</I> can be
+                     either  square,  circle,  diamond,  plus,  cross,  splus,
+                     scross,  triangle,  ""  (where  no symbol is drawn), or a
+                     bitmap.  Bitmaps are specified as "<I>source</I> ?<I>mask</I>?",  where
+                     <I>source</I>  is  the  name of the bitmap, and <I>mask</I> is the bit-
+                     map's optional mask.  The default is circle.
+
+              <B>-trace</B> <I>direction</I>
+                     Indicates whether connecting lines  between  data  points
+                     (whose  X-coordinate  values  are  either  increasing  or
+                     decreasing) are drawn.   <I>Direction</I>  must  be  increasing,
+                     decreasing,  or  both.   For  example,  if  <I>direction</I>  is
+                     increasing, connecting lines will be drawn  only  between
+                     those data points where X-coordinate values are monotoni-
+                     cally increasing.  If <I>direction</I> is both, connecting lines
+                     will  be  draw  between  all data points.  The default is
+                     both.
+
+              <B>-weights</B> <I>wVec</I>
+                     Specifies the weights  of  the  individual  data  points.
+                     This,  with the list pen styles (see the <B>-styles</B> option),
+                     controls how data points are drawn.  <I>WVec</I> is the name  of
+                     a  BLT vector or a list of numeric expressions represent-
+                     ing the weights for each data point.
+
+              <B>-xdata</B> <I>xVec</I>
+                     Specifies the X-coordinates of the  data.   <I>XVec</I>  is  the
+                     name of a BLT vector or a list of numeric expressions.
+
+              <B>-ydata</B> <I>yVec</I>
+                     Specifies  the  Y-coordinates  of  the data.  <I>YVec</I> is the
+                     name of a BLT vector or a list of numeric expressions.
+
+              Element configuration options may also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.   The  resource class is Element. The resource name is the
+              name of the  element.   option  add  *Graph.Element.symbol  line
+              option add *Graph.e1.symbol line
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>exists</B> <I>elemName</I>
+              Returns  1  if an element <I>elemName</I> currently exists and 0 other-
+              wise.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?...
+              Returns the elements matching one or more pattern.  If  no  <I>pat-</I>
+              <I>tern</I> is given, the names of all elements is returned.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>show</B> ?<I>nameList</I>?
+              Queries  or modifies the element display list.  The element dis-
+              play list designates the  elements  drawn  and  in  what  order.
+              <I>NameList</I> is a list of elements to be displayed in the order they
+              are named.  If there is no <I>nameList</I> argument, the  current  dis-
+              play list is returned.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>element</B> <B>type</B> <I>elemName</I>
+              Returns  the type of <I>elemName</I>.  If the element is a bar element,
+              the commands returns the  string  "bar",  otherwise  it  returns
+              "line".
+
+   <B>GRID</B> <B>COMPONENT</B>
+       Grid  lines extend from the major and minor ticks of each axis horizon-
+       tally or vertically across the plotting area.  The following operations
+       are available for grid lines.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+              Returns  the current value of the grid line configuration option
+              given by <I>option</I>.  <I>Option</I> may be any option described  below  for
+              the grid <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries  or  modifies  the configuration options for grid lines.
+              If <I>option</I> isn't specified, a list  describing  all  the  current
+              grid  options for <I>pathName</I> is returned.  If <I>option</I> is specified,
+              but not <I>value</I>, then a list describing <I>option</I>  is  returned.   If
+              one  or more <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are specified, then for each
+              pair, the grid line option <I>option</I> is set to <I>value</I>.  The  follow-
+              ing options are valid for grid lines.
+
+              <B>-color</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the color of the grid lines.  The default is black.
+
+              <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+                     Sets the dash style of the grid lines. <I>DashList</I> is a list
+                     of  up  to  11  numbers  that  alternately  represent the
+                     lengths of the dashes and gaps on the grid  lines.   Each
+                     number must be between 1 and 255.  If <I>dashList</I> is "", the
+                     grid will be solid lines.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the grid should be drawn. If <I>boolean</I> is
+
+              <B>-minor</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  whether  the  grid  lines  should be drawn for
+                     minor ticks.  If <I>boolean</I> is true, the lines  will  appear
+                     at minor tick intervals.  The default is 1.
+
+              Grid  configuration  options  may also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.  The resource name and class are  grid  and  Grid  respec-
+              tively.    option   add   *Graph.grid.LineWidth   2  option  add
+              *Graph.Grid.Color     black
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>off</B>
+              Turns off the display the grid lines.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>on</B>
+              Turns on the display the grid lines.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>grid</B> <B>toggle</B>
+              Toggles the display of the grid.
+
+   <B>LEGEND</B> <B>COMPONENT</B>
+       The legend displays a list of the data elements.  Each  entry  consists
+       of the element's symbol and label.  The legend can appear in any margin
+       (the default location is in the right margin).  It can  also  be  posi-
+       tioned anywhere within the plotting area.
+
+       The following operations are valid for the legend.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>activate</B> <I>pattern</I>...
+              Selects  legend entries to be drawn using the active legend col-
+              ors and relief.  All entries whose element names  match  <I>pattern</I>
+              are  selected.  To be selected, the element name must match only
+              one <I>pattern</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>bind</B> <I>tagName</I> ?<I>sequence</I>?  ?<I>command</I>?
+              Associates <I>command</I> with <I>tagName</I> such  that  whenever  the  event
+              sequence  given  by <I>sequence</I> occurs for a legend entry with this
+              tag, <I>command</I> will be invoked.  Implicitly the element  names  in
+              the  entry  are tags.  The syntax is similar to the <B>bind</B> command
+              except that it operates on legend entries, rather than  widgets.
+              See  the  <B>bind</B> manual entry for complete details on <I>sequence</I> and
+              the substitutions performed on <I>command</I> before invoking it.
+
+              If all arguments are specified then a new  binding  is  created,
+              replacing  any  existing  binding for the same <I>sequence</I> and <I>tag-</I>
+              <I>Name</I>.  If the first character of <I>command</I> is + then <I>command</I>  aug-
+              ments  an existing binding rather than replacing it.  If no <I>com-</I>
+              <I>mand</I> argument is provided then the command currently  associated
+              with  <I>tagName</I>  and  <I>sequence</I> (it's an error occurs if there's no
+              such binding) is returned.  If both  <I>command</I>  and  <I>sequence</I>  are
+              missing  then  a list of all the event sequences for which bind-
+              ings have been defined for <I>tagName</I>.
+
+              <B>-activebackground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the background color for active legend entries.  All
+                     legend  entries  marked  active  (see the legend <B>activate</B>
+                     operation) are drawn using this background color.
+
+              <B>-activeborderwidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the width of the 3-D border around the outside  edge
+                     of the active legend entries.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-activeforeground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the foreground color for active legend entries.  All
+                     legend entries marked as active (see the legend  <B>activate</B>
+                     operation) are drawn using this foreground color.
+
+              <B>-activerelief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies  the  3-D  effect  desired  for  active  legend
+                     entries.  <I>Relief</I> denotes how the interior  of  the  entry
+                     should appear relative to the legend; for example, raised
+                     means the entry should appear to protrude from  the  leg-
+                     end,  relative to the surface of the legend.  The default
+                     is flat.
+
+              <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+                     Tells how to position the legend relative  to  the  posi-
+                     tioning  point  for the legend.  This is dependent on the
+                     value of the <B>-position</B> option.  The default is center.
+
+                     left or right
+                                 The anchor describes how to position the leg-
+                                 end vertically.
+
+                     top or bottom
+                                 The anchor describes how to position the leg-
+                                 end horizontally.
+
+                     @x,y        The anchor specifies how to position the leg-
+                                 end  relative  to  the positioning point. For
+                                 example, if <I>anchor</I> is center then the  legend
+                                 is centered on the point; if <I>anchor</I> is n then
+                                 the legend will be drawn such  that  the  top
+                                 center  point of the rectangular region occu-
+                                 pied by the legend will be at the positioning
+                                 point.
+
+                     plotarea    The anchor specifies how to position the leg-
+                                 end relative to the plotting area. For  exam-
+                                 ple,  if  <I>anchor</I> is center then the legend is
+                                 centered in the plotting area; if  <I>anchor</I>  is
+                                 ne  then  the  legend will be drawn such that
+                                 occupies the upper right corner of the  plot-
+                                 ting area.
+
+                     Sets  the width of the 3-D border around the outside edge
+                     of the legend (if such border is being drawn; the  <B>relief</B>
+                     option determines this).  The default is 2 pixels.
+
+              <B>-font</B> <I>fontName</I>
+                     <I>FontName</I>  specifies a font to use when drawing the labels
+                     of each element into the legend.  The default  is  *-Hel-
+                     vetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-12-120-*.
+
+              <B>-foreground</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets  the foreground color of the text drawn for the ele-
+                     ment's label.  The default is black.
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the  legend  should  be  displayed.  If
+                     <I>boolean</I>  is  true,  the  legend  will  not  be draw.  The
+                     default is no.
+
+              <B>-ipadx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets the amount of internal padding to be  added  to  the
+                     width  of each legend entry.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of one or
+                     two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements, the  left
+                     side  of the legend entry is padded by the first distance
+                     and the right side by the second.  If  <I>pad</I>  is  just  one
+                     distance,  both  the  left  and  right  sides  are padded
+                     evenly.  The default is 2.
+
+              <B>-ipady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets an amount of internal padding to  be  added  to  the
+                     height of each legend entry.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of one or
+                     two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements,  the  top
+                     of the entry is padded by the first distance and the bot-
+                     tom by the second.  If <I>pad</I> is just one distance, both the
+                     top  and  bottom  of  the  entry  are padded evenly.  The
+                     default is 2.
+
+              <B>-padx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets the padding to the left and right exteriors  of  the
+                     legend.   <I>Pad</I>  can  be  a  list of one or two screen dis-
+                     tances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements, the left  side  of  the
+                     legend is padded by the first distance and the right side
+                     by the second.  If <I>pad</I> has just one  distance,  both  the
+                     left  and  right sides are padded evenly.  The default is
+                     4.
+
+              <B>-pady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets the padding above and below the legend.  <I>Pad</I> can  be
+                     a  list  of  one or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two
+                     elements, the area above the  legend  is  padded  by  the
+                     first  distance and the area below by the second.  If <I>pad</I>
+                     is just one distance, both the top and bottom  areas  are
+                     padded evenly.  The default is 0.
+                     plotting area.  If <I>boolean</I> is true, the  legend  will  be
+                     drawn  on  top  of  any elements that may overlap it. The
+                     default is no.
+
+              <B>-relief</B> <I>relief</I>
+                     Specifies the 3-D effect for the border around  the  leg-
+                     end.   <I>Relief</I>  specifies  how  the interior of the legend
+                     should appear relative to the graph; for example,  raised
+                     means  the  legend  should  appear  to  protrude from the
+                     graph, relative to the surface of the graph.  The default
+                     is sunken.
+
+              Legend  configuration options may also be set by the <B>option</B> com-
+              mand.  The resource name and class are legend and Legend respec-
+              tively.   option  add  *Graph.legend.Foreground  blue option add
+              *Graph.Legend.Relief     raised
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>deactivate</B> <I>pattern</I>...
+              Selects legend entries to be drawn using the normal legend  col-
+              ors  and  relief.  All entries whose element names match <I>pattern</I>
+              are selected.  To be selected, the element name must match  only
+              one <I>pattern</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>legend</B> <B>get</B> <I>pos</I>
+              Returns  the  name  of  the element whose entry is at the screen
+              position <I>pos</I> in the legend.  <I>Pos</I> must be  in  the  form  "<I>@x,y</I>",
+              where  <I>x</I> and <I>y</I> are window coordinates.  If the given coordinates
+              do not lie over a legend entry, "" is returned.
+
+   <B>PEN</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B>
+       Pens define attributes (both symbol and line style) for elements.  Pens
+       mirror  the  configuration options of data elements that pertain to how
+       symbols and lines are drawn.  Data elements use pens to  determine  how
+       they  are drawn.  A data element may use several pens at once.  In this
+       case, the pen used for a particular data point is determined from  each
+       element's weight vector (see the element's <B>-weight</B> and <B>-style</B> options).
+
+       One pen, called activeLine, is automatically created.  It's used as the
+       default  active  pen  for  elements.  So  you  can  change  the  active
+       attributes for all elements by simply reconfiguring this pen.   .g  pen
+       configure  "activeLine"  -color  green  You  can create and use several
+       pens. To create a pen, invoke the pen component and its  create  opera-
+       tion.   .g pen create myPen You map pens to a data element using either
+       the element's <B>-pen</B> or <B>-activepen</B> options.  .g  element  create  "line1"
+       -xdata $x -ydata $tempData \
+           -pen myPen An element can use several pens at once. This is done by
+       specifying the name of the pen in the element's  style  list  (see  the
+       <B>-styles</B>  option).  .g element configure "line1" -styles { myPen 2.0 3.0
+       } This says that any data point with a weight between 2.0 and 3.0 is to
+       be drawn using the pen myPen.  All other points are drawn with the ele-
+       ment's default attributes.
+
+              specified,  then  for each pair, the pen option <I>option</I> is set to
+              <I>value</I>.  The following options are valid for pens.
+
+              <B>-color</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the traces connecting the data  points.
+
+              <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+                     Sets  the  dash style of element line. <I>DashList</I> is a list
+                     of up  to  11  numbers  that  alternately  represent  the
+                     lengths of the dashes and gaps on the element line.  Each
+                     number must be between 1 and 255.  If <I>dashList</I> is "", the
+                     lines will be solid.
+
+              <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the interior color of symbols.  If <I>color</I> is "", then
+                     the interior of the symbol is transparent.  If  <I>color</I>  is
+                     defcolor,  then  the color will be the same as the <B>-color</B>
+                     option.  The default is defcolor.
+
+              <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets the width  of  the  connecting  lines  between  data
+                     points.   If  <I>pixels</I>  is  0,  no connecting lines will be
+                     drawn between symbols.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-offdash</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color of the stripes when traces are dashed (see
+                     the <B>-dashes</B> option).  If <I>color</I> is "", then the "off" pix-
+                     els will represent gaps instead of stripes.  If <I>color</I>  is
+                     defcolor,  then  the color will be the same as the <B>-color</B>
+                     option.  The default is defcolor.
+
+              <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+                     Sets the color or the outline  around  each  symbol.   If
+                     <I>color</I>  is  "", then no outline is drawn. If <I>color</I> is def-
+                     color, then the color will be  the  same  as  the  <B>-color</B>
+                     option.  The default is defcolor.
+
+              <B>-outlinewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the width of the outline bordering each symbol.  If
+                     <I>pixels</I> is 0, no outline will be drawn. The default is  1.
+
+              <B>-pixels</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the  size  of  symbols.  If <I>pixels</I> is 0, no symbols
+                     will be drawn.  The default is 0.125i.
+
+              <B>-symbol</B> <I>symbol</I>
+                     Specifies the symbol for  data  points.   <I>Symbol</I>  can  be
+                     either  square,  circle,  diamond,  plus,  cross,  splus,
+                     scross, triangle, "" (where no symbol  is  drawn),  or  a
+                     bitmap.   Bitmaps are specified as "<I>source</I> ?<I>mask</I>?", where
+                     <I>source</I> is the name of the bitmap, and <I>mask</I>  is  the  bit-
+                     map's optional mask.  The default is circle.
+
+              Creates a new pen by the name <I>penName</I>.  No pen by the same  name
+              can  already  exist.  <I>Option</I> and <I>value</I> are described in above in
+              the pen <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>pen</B> <B>delete</B> ?<I>penName</I>?...
+              Deletes the named pens. A pen is not really deleted until it  is
+              not  longer  in  use, so it's safe to delete pens mapped to ele-
+              ments.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>pen</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?...
+              Returns a list of pens matching zero or more  patterns.   If  no
+              <I>pattern</I> argument is give, the names of all pens are returned.
+
+   <B>POSTSCRIPT</B> <B>COMPONENT</B>
+       The  graph can generate encapsulated PostScript output.  There are sev-
+       eral configuration options you can specify to control how the plot will
+       be  generated.   You  can  change the page dimensions and borders.  The
+       plot itself can be scaled, centered,  or  rotated  to  landscape.   The
+       PostScript output can be written directly to a file or returned through
+       the interpreter.
+
+       The following postscript operations are available.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>postscript</B> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+              Returns the current value of  the  postscript  option  given  by
+              <I>option</I>.   <I>Option</I> may be any option described below for the post-
+              script <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>postscript</B> <B>configure</B> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries or modifies the  configuration  options  for  PostScript
+              generation.   If  <I>option</I>  isn't specified, a list describing the
+              current postscript options for <I>pathName</I> is returned.  If  <I>option</I>
+              is  specified,  but  not <I>value</I>, then a list describing <I>option</I> is
+              returned.  If one or more <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are  specified,
+              then  for  each  pair,  the  postscript  option <I>option</I> is set to
+              <I>value</I>.  The following postscript options are available.
+
+              <B>-center</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the plot  should  be  centered  on  the
+                     PostScript  page.   If <I>boolean</I> is false, the plot will be
+                     placed in the upper left corner of the page.  The default
+                     is 1.
+
+              <B>-colormap</B> <I>varName</I>
+                     <I>VarName</I>  must be the name of a global array variable that
+                     specifies a color mapping from the X color name to  Post-
+                     Script.   Each  element  of <I>varName</I> must consist of Post-
+                     Script code to set a particular color value  (e.g.  ``1.0
+                     1.0  0.0  setrgbcolor'').  When generating color informa-
+                     tion in PostScript, the array variable <I>varName</I> is checked
+                     if  an element of the name as the color exists. If so, it
+                     uses its value as  the  PostScript  command  to  set  the
+                     Script.   Each  element  of <I>varName</I> must consist of a Tcl
+                     list with one or two elements; the name and point size of
+                     a  PostScript  font.  When outputting PostScript commands
+                     for a particular font,  the  array  variable  <I>varName</I>  is
+                     checked  to  see  if  an  element  by  the specified font
+                     exists.  If there is  such  an  element,  then  the  font
+                     information  contained  in  that  element  is used in the
+                     PostScript output.  (If the point size  is  omitted  from
+                     the  list, the point size of the X font is used).  Other-
+                     wise the X font is examined in an attempt to  guess  what
+                     PostScript  font to use.  This works only for fonts whose
+                     foundry property is  <I>Adobe</I>  (such  as  Times,  Helvetica,
+                     Courier,  etc.).   If  all  of  this  fails then the font
+                     defaults to Helvetica-Bold.
+
+              <B>-decorations</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether PostScript commands to  generate  color
+                     backgrounds  and  3-D borders will be output.  If <I>boolean</I>
+                     is false, the background will be white and no 3-D borders
+                     will be generated. The default is 1.
+
+              <B>-height</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the  height  of  the plot.  This lets you print the
+                     graph with a height different from the one drawn  on  the
+                     screen.   If  <I>pixels</I>  is 0, the height is the same as the
+                     widget's height.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-landscape</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     If <I>boolean</I> is true, this specifies the printed area is to
+                     be  rotated 90 degrees.  In non-rotated output the X-axis
+                     of the printed area runs along the short dimension of the
+                     page  (``portrait''  orientation);  in rotated output the
+                     X-axis runs along the long dimension of the page (``land-
+                     scape'' orientation).  Defaults to 0.
+
+              <B>-maxpect</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  to  scale  the plot so that it fills the Post-
+                     Script page.  The aspect ratio  of  the  graph  is  still
+                     retained.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-padx</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  horizontal padding for the left and right page
+                     borders.  The borders are exterior to the plot.  <I>Pad</I>  can
+                     be a list of one or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two
+                     elements, the left border is padded by the first distance
+                     and  the right border by the second.  If <I>pad</I> has just one
+                     distance, both the left  and  right  borders  are  padded
+                     evenly.  The default is 1i.
+
+              <B>-pady</B> <I>pad</I>
+                     Sets  the  vertical  padding  for the top and bottom page
+                     borders. The borders are exterior to the plot.   <I>Pad</I>  can
+                     The default width is 8.5i.
+
+              <B>-width</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Sets  the  width  of  the plot.  This lets you generate a
+                     plot of a width different from that of  the  widget.   If
+                     <I>pixels</I> is 0, the width is the same as the widget's width.
+                     The default is 0.
+
+              Postscript configuration options may  be  also  be  set  by  the
+              <B>option</B>  command.  The resource name and class are postscript and
+              Postscript respectively.  option  add  *Graph.postscript.Decora-
+              tions false option add *Graph.Postscript.Landscape   true
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>postscript</B> <B>output</B> ?<I>fileName</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Outputs  a file of encapsulated PostScript.  If a <I>fileName</I> argu-
+              ment isn't present, the command returns the PostScript.  If  any
+              <I>option-value</I>  pairs  are present, they set configuration options
+              controlling how the PostScript is generated.  <I>Option</I>  and  <I>value</I>
+              can  be  anything accepted by the postscript <B>configure</B> operation
+              above.
+
+   <B>MARKER</B> <B>COMPONENTS</B>
+       Markers are simple drawing procedures used  to  annotate  or  highlight
+       areas of the graph.  Markers have various types: text strings, bitmaps,
+       images, connected lines, windows, or polygons.  They can be  associated
+       with  a  particular  element, so that when the element is hidden or un-
+       hidden, so is the marker.  By  default,  markers  are  the  last  items
+       drawn,  so  that  data  elements  will  appear in behind them.  You can
+       change this by configuring the <B>-under</B> option.
+
+       Markers, in contrast to elements, don't affect the scaling of the coor-
+       dinate axes.  They can also have <I>elastic</I> coordinates (specified by -Inf
+       and Inf respectively) that translate into the minimum or maximum  limit
+       of  the axis.  For example, you can place a marker so it always remains
+       in the lower left corner of the plotting area, by using the coordinates
+       -Inf,-Inf.
+
+       The following operations are available for markers.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>after</B> <I>markerId</I> ?<I>afterId</I>?
+              Changes the order of the markers, drawing the first marker after
+              the second.  If no second <I>afterId</I>  argument  is  specified,  the
+              marker  is  placed at the end of the display list.  This command
+              can be used to control how markers are displayed  since  markers
+              are drawn in the order of this display list.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>before</B> <I>markerId</I> ?<I>beforeId</I>?
+              Changes  the  order  of  the  markers,  drawing the first marker
+              before the second.  If no second <I>beforeId</I> argument is specified,
+              the marker is placed at the beginning of the display list.  This
+              command can be used to control how markers are  displayed  since
+              markers are drawn in the order of this display list.
+              with  <I>tagName</I>  and  <I>sequence</I> (it's an error occurs if there's no
+              such binding) is returned.  If both  <I>command</I>  and  <I>sequence</I>  are
+              missing  then  a list of all the event sequences for which bind-
+              ings have been defined for <I>tagName</I>.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>cget</B> <I>option</I>
+              Returns the current value of  the  marker  configuration  option
+              given  by  <I>option</I>.   <I>Option</I> may be any option described below in
+              the <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>configure</B> <I>markerId</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Queries or modifies the configuration options for  markers.   If
+              <I>option</I>  isn't  specified,  a list describing the current options
+              for <I>markerId</I> is returned.   If  <I>option</I>  is  specified,  but  not
+              <I>value</I>,  then  a  list  describing <I>option</I> is returned.  If one or
+              more <I>option</I> and <I>value</I> pairs are specified, then for  each  pair,
+              the marker option <I>option</I> is set to <I>value</I>.
+
+              The  following  options are valid for all markers.  Each type of
+              marker  also  has  its  own  type-specific  options.   They  are
+              described in the sections below.
+
+              <B>-bindtags</B> <I>tagList</I>
+                     Specifies  the binding tags for the marker.  <I>TagList</I> is a
+                     list of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will
+                     determine  how  events for markers are handled.  Each tag
+                     in the list matching the current event sequence will have
+                     its  Tcl  command  executed.   Implicitly the name of the
+                     marker is always the first tag in the list.  The  default
+                     value is all.
+
+              <B>-coords</B> <I>coordList</I>
+                     Specifies  the coordinates of the marker.  <I>CoordList</I> is a
+                     list of graph coordinates.   The  number  of  coordinates
+                     required  is  dependent  on  the  type  of marker.  Text,
+                     image, and window markers need only two  coordinates  (an
+                     X-Y  coordinate).   Bitmap markers can take either two or
+                     four coordinates (if four, they represent the corners  of
+                     the bitmap). Line markers need at least four coordinates,
+                     polygons at least six.  If <I>coordList</I> is  "",  the  marker
+                     will not be displayed.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-element</B> <I>elemName</I>
+                     Links  the  marker with the element <I>elemName</I>.  The marker
+                     is drawn only if the element is also currently  displayed
+                     (see  the  element's <B>show</B> operation).  If <I>elemName</I> is "",
+                     the marker is always drawn.  The default is "".
+
+              <B>-hide</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the marker  is  drawn.  If  <I>boolean</I>  is
+                     true, the marker is not drawn.  The default is no.
+
+              <B>-under</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates whether the marker is  drawn  below/above  data
+                     elements.   If  <I>boolean</I>  is  true, the marker is be drawn
+                     underneath the data element symbols  and  lines.   Other-
+                     wise,  the  marker  is  drawn on top of the element.  The
+                     default is 0.
+
+              <B>-xoffset</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies a screen distance to offset the marker horizon-
+                     tally.   <I>Pixels</I>  is a valid screen distance, such as 2 or
+                     1.2i.  The default is 0.
+
+              <B>-yoffset</B> <I>pixels</I>
+                     Specifies a screen distance to offset the markers  verti-
+                     cally.   <I>Pixels</I>  is a valid screen distance, such as 2 or
+                     1.2i.  The default is 0.
+
+              Marker configuration options may also be set by the <B>option</B>  com-
+              mand.   The resource class is either BitmapMarker,  ImageMarker,
+              LineMarker, PolygonMarker, TextMarker, or WindowMarker,  depend-
+              ing on the type of marker.  The resource name is the name of the
+              marker.  option add  *Graph.TextMarker.Foreground  white  option
+              add     *Graph.BitmapMarker.Foreground    white    option    add
+              *Graph.m1.Background     blue
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>create</B> <I>type</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>?...
+              Creates a marker of the selected type. <I>Type</I> may be either  text,
+              line,  bitmap,  image, polygon, or window.  This command returns
+              the marker identifier, used as  the  <I>markerId</I>  argument  in  the
+              other  marker-related  commands.   If  the <B>-name</B> option is used,
+              this overrides the normal marker identifier.  If the  name  pro-
+              vided  is  already  used for another marker, the new marker will
+              replace the old.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>delete</B> ?<I>name</I>?...
+              Removes one of more markers.  The graph  will  automatically  be
+              redrawn without the marker..
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>exists</B> <I>markerId</I>
+              Returns 1 if the marker <I>markerId</I> exists and 0 otherwise.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?
+              Returns  the  names of all the markers that currently exist.  If
+              <I>pattern</I> is supplied, only those markers  whose  names  match  it
+              will be returned.
+
+       <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>type</B> <I>markerId</I>
+              Returns  the  type of the marker given by <I>markerId</I>, such as line
+              or text.  If <I>markerId</I> is not a valid a marker identifier, ""  is
+              returned.
+
+   <B>BITMAP</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       The following options are specific to bitmap markers:
+
+       <B>-background</B> <I>color</I>
+              Same as the <B>-fill</B> option.
+
+       <B>-bitmap</B> <I>bitmap</I>
+              Specifies  the  bitmap  to  be  displayed.  If <I>bitmap</I> is "", the
+              marker will not be displayed.  The default is "".
+
+       <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the background color of the bitmap.  If <I>color</I> is the  empty
+              string,  no  background  will be transparent.  The default back-
+              ground color is "".
+
+       <B>-foreground</B> <I>color</I>
+              Same as the <B>-outline</B> option.
+
+       <B>-mask</B> <I>mask</I>
+              Specifies a mask for the bitmap to be displayed. This mask is  a
+              bitmap  itself,  denoting  the  pixels that are transparent.  If
+              <I>mask</I> is "", all pixels of the bitmap will be drawn.  The default
+              is "".
+
+       <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets  the  foreground  color of the bitmap. The default value is
+              black.
+
+       <B>-rotate</B> <I>theta</I>
+              Sets the rotation of the bitmap.  <I>Theta</I> is a real number  repre-
+              senting  the  angle of rotation in degrees.  The marker is first
+              rotated and then placed according to its anchor  position.   The
+              default rotation is 0.0.
+
+   <B>IMAGE</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       A  image  marker displays an image.  Image markers are created with the
+       marker's <B>create</B> operation in the form:  <I>pathName</I>  <B>marker</B>  <B>create</B>  <B>image</B>
+       ?<I>option</I>  <I>value</I>?...   There  may be many <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs, each sets a
+       configuration option for the marker.  These same <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may
+       be used with the marker's <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       The following options are specific to image markers:
+
+       <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+              <I>Anchor</I> tells how to position the image relative to the position-
+              ing point for the image. For example, if <I>anchor</I> is  center  then
+              the  image  is  centered  on the point;  if <I>anchor</I> is n then the
+              image will be drawn such that the top center point of the  rect-
+              angular  region occupied by the image will be at the positioning
+              point.  This option defaults to center.
+
+       <B>-image</B> <I>image</I>
+              Specifies the image to be drawn.  If <I>image</I>  is  "",  the  marker
+              gaps  on  the  line.  Each number must be between 1 and 255.  If
+              <I>dashList</I> is "", the marker line will be solid.
+
+       <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the background color of the line.  This color is used  with
+              striped  lines  (see the <B>-fdashes</B> option). If <I>color</I> is the empty
+              string, no background color is drawn (the line will  be  dashed,
+              not striped).  The default background color is "".
+
+       <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+              Sets the width of the lines.  The default width is 0.
+
+       <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets  the  foreground  color  of  the line. The default value is
+              black.
+
+       <B>-stipple</B> <I>bitmap</I>
+              Specifies a stipple pattern used to draw the line, rather than a
+              solid  line.   <I>Bitmap</I>  specifies  a bitmap to use as the stipple
+              pattern.  If <I>bitmap</I> is "", then the line is  drawn  in  a  solid
+              fashion. The default is "".
+
+   <B>POLYGON</B> <B>MARKERS</B>
+       A polygon marker displays a closed region described as two or more con-
+       nected line segments.  It is assumed the first and last points are con-
+       nected.   Polygon markers are created using the marker <B>create</B> operation
+       in the form: <I>pathName</I> <B>marker</B> <B>create</B> <B>polygon</B>  ?<I>option</I>  <I>value</I>?...   There
+       may  be  many  <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs, each sets a configuration option for
+       the marker.  These same <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may be used with the  <B>marker</B>
+       <B>configure</B>  command to change the marker's configuration.  The following
+       options are supported for polygon markers:
+
+       <B>-dashes</B> <I>dashList</I>
+              Sets the dash style of the outline of the polygon. <I>DashList</I> is a
+              list  of up to 11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths
+              of the dashes and gaps on the  outline.   Each  number  must  be
+              between  1  and  255.  If  <I>dashList</I> is "", the outline will be a
+              solid line.
+
+       <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the fill color of the polygon.  If <I>color</I> is  "",  then  the
+              interior of the polygon is transparent.  The default is white.
+
+       <B>-linewidth</B> <I>pixels</I>
+              Sets the width of the outline of the polygon. If <I>pixels</I> is zero,
+              no outline is drawn. The default is 0.
+
+       <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the color of the outline of the polygon.  If the polygon is
+              stippled  (see  the  <B>-stipple</B>  option), then this represents the
+              foreground color of the stipple.  The default is black.
+
+       the marker's <B>configure</B> operation.
+
+       The following options are specific to text markers:
+
+       <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+              <I>Anchor</I> tells how to position the text relative to the  position-
+              ing  point  for  the text. For example, if <I>anchor</I> is center then
+              the text is centered on the point; if <I>anchor</I> is n then the  text
+              will  be drawn such that the top center point of the rectangular
+              region occupied by the text will be at  the  positioning  point.
+              This default is center.
+
+       <B>-background</B> <I>color</I>
+              Same as the <B>-fill</B> option.
+
+       <B>-font</B> <I>fontName</I>
+              Specifies  the  font  of  the text.  The default is *-Helvetica-
+              Bold-R-Normal-*-120-*.
+
+       <B>-fill</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the background color of the text.  If <I>color</I>  is  the  empty
+              string,  no  background  will be transparent.  The default back-
+              ground color is "".
+
+       <B>-foreground</B> <I>color</I>
+              Same as the <B>-outline</B> option.
+
+       <B>-justify</B> <I>justify</I>
+              Specifies how the text should be justified.  This  matters  only
+              when  the  marker  contains  more than one line of text. <I>Justify</I>
+              must be left, right, or center.  The default is center.
+
+       <B>-outline</B> <I>color</I>
+              Sets the color of the text. The default value is black.
+
+       <B>-padx</B> <I>pad</I>
+              Sets the padding to the left and right exteriors  of  the  text.
+              <I>Pad</I>  can  be  a list of one or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has
+              two elements, the left side of the text is padded by  the  first
+              distance  and the right side by the second.  If <I>pad</I> has just one
+              distance, both the left and right sides are padded evenly.   The
+              default is 4.
+
+       <B>-pady</B> <I>pad</I>
+              Sets the padding above and below the text.  <I>Pad</I> can be a list of
+              one or two screen distances.  If <I>pad</I> has two elements, the  area
+              above  the  text  is  padded  by the first distance and the area
+              below by the second.  If <I>pad</I> is just one distance, both the  top
+              and bottom areas are padded evenly.  The default is 4.
+
+       <B>-rotate</B> <I>theta</I>
+              Specifies  the number of degrees to rotate the text.  <I>Theta</I> is a
+
+       <I>option</I>-<I>value</I> pairs may be used with the marker's <B>configure</B> command.
+
+       The following options are specific to window markers:
+
+       <B>-anchor</B> <I>anchor</I>
+              <I>Anchor</I> tells how to position the widget relative  to  the  posi-
+              tioning  point  for the widget. For example, if <I>anchor</I> is center
+              then the widget is centered on the point; if <I>anchor</I>  is  n  then
+              the  widget  will be displayed such that the top center point of
+              the rectangular region occupied by the widget  will  be  at  the
+              positioning point.  This option defaults to center.
+
+       <B>-height</B> <I>pixels</I>
+              Specifies  the height to assign to the marker's window.  If this
+              option isn't specified, or if it is specified as  "",  then  the
+              window  is given whatever height the widget requests internally.
+
+       <B>-width</B> <I>pixels</I>
+              Specifies the width to assign to the marker's window.   If  this
+              option  isn't  specified,  or if it is specified as "", then the
+              window is given whatever width the widget requests internally.
+
+       <B>-window</B> <I>pathName</I>
+              Specifies the widget to be managed by the graph.  <I>PathName</I>  must
+              be a child of the <B>graph</B> widget.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>GRAPH COMPONENT BINDINGS</H2><PRE>
+       Specific  graph  components,  such  as  elements,  markers  and  legend
+       entries, can have a command trigger when event  occurs  in  them,  much
+       like  canvas  items in Tk's canvas widget.  Not all event sequences are
+       valid.  The only binding events that may be specified are those related
+       to  the  mouse and keyboard (such as <B>Enter</B>, <B>Leave</B>, <B>ButtonPress</B>, <B>Motion</B>,
+       and <B>KeyPress</B>).
+
+       Only one element or marker can be picked during an event.  This  means,
+       that  if  the mouse is directly over both an element and a marker, only
+       the uppermost component  is  selected.   This  isn't  true  for  legend
+       entries.   Both  a legend entry and an element (or marker) binding com-
+       mands will be invoked if both items are picked.
+
+       It is possible for multiple bindings to match a particular event.  This
+       could occur, for example, if one binding is associated with the element
+       name and another is associated with one of the element's tags (see  the
+       <B>-bindtags</B>  option).  When this occurs, all of the matching bindings are
+       invoked.  A binding associated with the element name is invoked  first,
+       followed  by  one binding for each of the element's bindtags.  If there
+       are multiple matching bindings for a single tag,  then  only  the  most
+       specific  binding  is  invoked.  A continue command in a binding script
+       terminates that script, and a break command terminates that script  and
+       skips  any  remaining  scripts for the event, just as for the bind com-
+       mand.
+
+       vectors are updated.
+
+       From  Tcl,  create  the  vectors and configure the element to use them.
+       vector X Y .g element configure line1 -xdata X -ydata  Y  To  set  data
+       points  from  C,  you  pass  the  values as arrays of doubles using the
+       <B>Blt_ResetVector</B> call.  The vector is reset with the new data and at the
+       next  idle  point (when Tk re-enters its event loop), the graph will be
+       redrawn automatically.  #include &lt;tcl.h&gt; #include &lt;blt.h&gt;
+
+       register int i; Blt_Vector *xVec, *yVec; double x[50], y[50];
+
+       /* Get the BLT vectors "X" and "Y"  (created  above  from  Tcl)  */  if
+       ((Blt_GetVector(interp, "X", &amp;xVec) != TCL_OK) ||
+           (Blt_GetVector(interp, "Y", &amp;yVec) != TCL_OK)) {
+           return TCL_ERROR; }
+
+       for (i = 0; i &lt; 50; i++) {
+           x[i] = i * 0.02;
+           y[i] = sin(x[i]); }
+
+       /*  Put  the data into BLT vectors */ if ((Blt_ResetVector(xVec, x, 50,
+       50, TCL_VOLATILE) != TCL_OK) ||
+           (Blt_ResetVector(yVec, y, 50, 50, TCL_VOLATILE) != TCL_OK)) {
+          return TCL_ERROR; } See the <B>vector</B> manual page for more details.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>SPEED TIPS</H2><PRE>
+       There may be cases where the graph needs to be  drawn  and  updated  as
+       quickly  as possible.  If drawing speed becomes a big problem, here are
+       a few tips to speed up displays.
+
+       <B>o</B> Try to minimize the number of data points.  The more data points  the
+         looked at, the more work the graph must do.
+
+       <B>o</B> If your data is generated as floating point values, the time required
+         to convert the data values to and from ASCII strings can be  signifi-
+         cant,  especially when there any many data points.  You can avoid the
+         redundant string-to-decimal conversions using the C API to  BLT  vec-
+         tors.
+
+       <B>o</B> Data  elements  without  symbols  are drawn faster than with symbols.
+         Set the data element's <B>-symbol</B> option to none.  If you need  to  draw
+         symbols, try using the simple symbols such as splus and scross.
+
+       <B>o</B> Don't stipple or dash the element.  Solid lines are much faster.
+
+       <B>o</B> If  you update data elements frequently, try turning off the widget's
+         <B>-bufferelements</B> option.  When the graph is first displayed, it  draws
+         data  elements  into an internal pixmap.  The pixmap acts as a cache,
+         so that when the graph needs to be redrawn again, and the  data  ele-
+         ments or coordinate axes haven't changed, the pixmap is simply copied
+         to the screen.  This is especially useful when you are using  markers
+         to  highlight  points  and regions on the graph.  But if the graph is
+
+
+
+BLT                               BLT_VERSION                         graph(n)
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<ADDRESS>
+Man(1) output converted with
+<a href="http://www.oac.uci.edu/indiv/ehood/man2html.html">man2html</a>
+</ADDRESS>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/graph.n b/tkblt/doc/graph.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbbbb9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/graph.n
@@ -0,0 +1,2408 @@
+'\"
+'\" Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+'\" This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+'\" available under the same terms.
+'\"
+'\" Copyright 1991-1998 by Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies.
+'\"
+'\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+'\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+'\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that the
+'\" copyright notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting documentation,
+'\" and that the names of Lucent Technologies any of their entities not be used
+'\" in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
+'\" without specific, written prior permission.
+'\"
+'\" Lucent Technologies disclaims all warranties with regard to this software,
+'\" including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness.  In no event
+'\" shall Lucent Technologies be liable for any special, indirect or
+'\" consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use,
+'\" data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other
+'\" tortuous action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance
+'\" of this software.  
+'\"
+'\" Graph widget created by Sani Nassif and George Howlett.
+'\"
+.TH graph n BLT_VERSION BLT "BLT Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+graph \-  2D graph for plotting X\-Y coordinate data.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBgraph\fI \fIpathName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBgraph\fR command creates a graph for plotting
+two-dimensional data (X\-Y coordinates). It has many configurable
+components: coordinate axes, elements, legend, grid lines, cross
+hairs, etc.  They allow you to customize the look and feel of the
+graph.
+.SH INTRODUCTION
+The \fBgraph\fR command creates a new window for plotting
+two-dimensional data (X\-Y coordinates).  Data points are plotted in a
+rectangular area displayed in the center of the new window.  This is the
+\fIplotting area\fR.  The coordinate axes are drawn in the
+margins around the plotting area.  By default, the legend is displayed
+in the right margin.  The title is displayed in top margin.
+.PP
+The \fBgraph\fR widget is composed of several components: coordinate
+axes, data elements, legend, grid, cross hairs, pens, postscript, and
+annotation markers.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWaxis\fR 
+The graph has four standard axes (\f(CWx\fR, \f(CWx2\fR,
+\f(CWy\fR, and \f(CWy2\fR), but you can create and display any number 
+of axes.  Axes control what region of data is
+displayed and how the data is scaled. Each axis consists of the axis
+line, title, major and minor ticks, and tick labels.  Tick labels
+display the value at each major tick.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWcrosshairs\fR 
+Cross hairs are used to position the mouse pointer relative to the X
+and Y coordinate axes. Two perpendicular lines, intersecting at the
+current location of the mouse, extend across the plotting area to the
+coordinate axes.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWelement\fR 
+An element represents a set of data points. Elements can be plotted 
+with a symbol at each data point and lines connecting the points. 
+The appearance of the element, such as its symbol, line width, and 
+color is configurable.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWgrid\fR
+Extends the major and minor ticks of the X\-axis and/or Y\-axis across the 
+plotting area. 
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWlegend\fR 
+The legend displays the name and symbol of each data element. 
+The legend can be drawn in any margin or in the plotting area.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWmarker\fR
+Markers are used annotate or highlight areas of the graph. For 
+example, you could use a polygon marker to fill an area under a 
+curve, or a text marker to label a particular data point. Markers 
+come in various forms: text strings, bitmaps, connected line 
+segments, images, polygons, or embedded widgets.
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWpen\fR 
+Pens define attributes (both symbol and line style) for elements. 
+Data elements use pens to specify how they should be drawn.  A data 
+element may use many pens at once.  Here, the particular pen 
+used for a data point is determined from each element's weight 
+vector (see the element's \fB\-weight\fR and \fB\-style\fR options).  
+.TP 1i
+\f(CWpostscript\fR
+The widget can generate encapsulated PostScript output. This component
+has several options to configure how the PostScript is generated.
+.SH SYNTAX
+.DS
+\fBgraph \fIpathName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+The \fBgraph\fR command creates a new window \fIpathName\fR and makes
+it into a \fBgraph\fR widget.  At the time this command is invoked, there
+must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's
+parent must exist.  Additional options may be specified on the
+command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the
+graph such as its colors and font.  See the \fBconfigure\fR operation
+below for the exact details about what \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR
+pairs are valid.
+.PP
+If successful, \fBgraph\fR returns the path name of the widget.  It
+also creates a new Tcl command by the same name.  You can use this
+command to invoke various operations that query or modify the graph.
+The general form is:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fIoperation\fR \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+.DE
+Both \fIoperation\fR and its arguments determine the exact behavior of
+the command.  The operations available for the graph are described in 
+the 
+.SB "GRAPH OPERATIONS"
+section.
+.PP
+The command can also be used to access components of the graph.
+.DS
+\fIpathName component operation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?...
+.DE
+The operation, now located after the name of the component, is the
+function to be performed on that component. Each component has its own
+set of operations that manipulate that component.  They will be
+described below in their own sections.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+The \fBgraph\fR command creates a new graph.  
+.CS
+# Create a new graph.  Plotting area is black.
+graph .g \-plotbackground black
+.CE
+A new Tcl command \f(CW.g\fR is also created.  This command can be used
+to query and modify the graph.  For example, to change the title of
+the graph to "My Plot", you use the new command and the graph's
+\fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Change the title.
+\&.g configure \-title "My Plot"
+.CE
+A graph has several components. To access a particular component you
+use the component's name. For example, to add data elements, you use
+the new command and the \fBelement\fR component.
+.CS
+# Create a new element named "line1"
+\&.g element create line1 \\
+	\-xdata { 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 } \\
+	\-ydata { 26.18 50.46 72.85 93.31 111.86 128.47 143.14 
+		155.85 166.60 175.38 }
+.CE
+The element's X-Y coordinates are specified using lists of
+numbers.  Alternately, BLT vectors could be used to hold the X\-Y
+coordinates.
+.CS
+# Create two vectors and add them to the graph.
+vector xVec yVec
+xVec set { 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 }
+yVec set { 26.18 50.46 72.85 93.31 111.86 128.47 143.14 155.85 
+	166.60 175.38 }
+\&.g element create line1 \-xdata xVec \-ydata yVec
+.CE
+The advantage of using vectors is that when you modify one, the graph
+is automatically redrawn to reflect the new values.
+.CS
+# Change the y coordinate of the first point.
+set yVector(0) 25.18
+.CE
+An element named \f(CWe1\fR is now created in \f(CW.b\fR.  It 
+is automatically added to the display list of elements.  You can
+use this list to control in what order elements are displayed.
+To query or reset the element display list, you use the element's 
+\fBshow\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Get the current display list 
+set elemList [.b element show]
+# Remove the first element so it won't be displayed.
+\&.b element show [lrange $elemList 0 end]
+.CE
+The element will be displayed by as many bars as there are data points
+(in this case there are ten).  The bars will be drawn centered at the
+x-coordinate of the data point.  All the bars will have the same
+attributes (colors, stipple, etc).  The width of each bar is by
+default one unit.  You can change this with using the \fB\-barwidth\fR
+option.
+.CS
+# Change the X\-Y coordinates of the first point.
+set xVec(0) 0.18
+set yVec(0) 25.18
+.CE
+An element named \f(CWline1\fR is now created in \f(CW.g\fR.  By
+default, the element's label in the legend will be also \f(CWline1\fR.
+You can change the label, or specify no legend entry, again using the
+element's \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Don't display "line1" in the legend.
+\&.g element configure line1 \-label ""
+.CE
+You can configure more than just the element's label.  An element has
+many attributes such as symbol type and size, dashed or solid lines,
+colors, line width, etc.
+.CS
+\&.g element configure line1 \-symbol square \-color red \\
+	\-dashes { 2 4 2 } \-linewidth 2 \-pixels 2c
+.CE
+Four coordinate axes are automatically created: \f(CWx\fR, \f(CWx2\fR,
+\f(CWy\fR, and \f(CWy2\fR.  And by default, elements are mapped onto the
+axes \f(CWx\fR and \f(CWy\fR.  This can be changed with the \fB\-mapx\fR
+and \fB\-mapy\fR options.
+.CS
+# Map "line1" on the alternate Y\-axis "y2".
+\&.g element configure line1 \-mapy y2
+.CE
+Axes can be configured in many ways too.  For example, you change the
+scale of the Y\-axis from linear to log using the \fBaxis\fR component.
+.CS
+# Y\-axis is log scale.
+\&.g axis configure y \-logscale yes
+.CE
+One important way axes are used is to zoom in on a particular data
+region.  Zooming is done by simply specifying new axis limits using
+the \fB\-min\fR and \fB\-max\fR configuration options.
+.CS
+\&.g axis configure x \-min 1.0 \-max 1.5
+\&.g axis configure y \-min 12.0 \-max 55.15
+.CE
+To zoom interactively, you link the \fBaxis configure\fR operations with
+some user interaction (such as pressing the mouse button), using the
+\fBbind\fR command.  To convert between screen and graph coordinates,
+use the \fBinvtransform\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Click the button to set a new minimum 
+bind .g <ButtonPress-1> { 
+    %W axis configure x \-min [%W axis invtransform x %x]
+    %W axis configure x \-min [%W axis invtransform x %y]
+}
+.CE
+By default, the limits of the axis are determined from data values.
+To reset back to the default limits, set the \fB\-min\fR and
+\fB\-max\fR options to the empty value.
+.CS
+# Reset the axes to autoscale again.
+\&.g axis configure x \-min {} \-max {}
+\&.g axis configure y \-min {} \-max {}
+.CE
+By default, the legend is drawn in the right margin.  You can
+change this or any legend configuration options using the
+\fBlegend\fR component.
+.CS
+# Configure the legend font, color, and relief
+\&.g legend configure \-position left \-relief raised \\
+	\-font fixed \-fg blue
+.CE
+To prevent the legend from being displayed, turn on the \fB\-hide\fR
+option.
+.CS
+# Don't display the legend.
+\&.g legend configure \-hide yes\fR
+.CE
+The \fBgraph\fR widget has simple drawing procedures called markers.
+They can be used to highlight or annotate data in the graph. The types
+of markers available are bitmaps, images, polygons, lines, or windows.
+Markers can be used, for example, to mark or brush points.  In this
+example, is a text marker that labels the data first point.  Markers
+are created using the \fBmarker\fR component.
+.CS
+# Create a label for the first data point of "line1".
+\&.g marker create text \-name first_marker \-coords { 0.2 26.18 } \\
+	\-text "start" \-anchor se \-xoffset -10 \-yoffset -10
+.CE
+This creates a text marker named \f(CWfirst_marker\fR.  It will display
+the text "start" near the coordinates of the first data point.  The
+\fB\-anchor\fR, \fB\-xoffset\fR, and \fB\-yoffset\fR options are used
+to display the marker above and to the left of the data point, so that
+the data point isn't covered by the marker.  By default,
+markers are drawn last, on top of data.  You can change this with the
+\fB\-under\fR option.
+.CS
+# Draw the label before elements are drawn.
+\&.g marker configure first_marker \-under yes
+.CE
+You can add cross hairs or grid lines using the \fBcrosshairs\fR and
+\fBgrid\fR components.
+.CS
+# Display both cross hairs and grid lines.
+\&.g crosshairs configure \-hide no \-color red
+\&.g grid configure \-hide no \-dashes { 2 2 }
+# Set up a binding to reposition the crosshairs.
+bind .g <Motion> {
+    .g crosshairs configure -position @%x,%y
+}
+.CE
+The crosshairs are repositioned as the mouse pointer is moved
+in the graph.  The pointer X-Y coordinates define the center
+of the crosshairs.
+.PP
+Finally, to get hardcopy of the graph, use the \fBpostscript\fR
+component.
+.CS
+# Print the graph into file "file.ps"
+\&.g postscript output file.ps \-maxpect yes \-decorations no
+.CE
+This generates a file \f(CWfile.ps\fR containing the encapsulated
+PostScript of the graph.  The option \fB\-maxpect\fR says to scale the
+plot to the size of the page.  Turning off the \fB\-decorations\fR
+option denotes that no borders or color backgrounds should be
+drawn (i.e. the background of the margins, legend, and plotting
+area will be white).
+.SH "GRAPH OPERATIONS"
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "AXIS COMPONENTS"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBbar \fIelemName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new barchart element \fIelemName\fR.  It's an
+error if an element \fIelemName\fR already exists.  
+See the manual for \fBbarchart\fR for details about
+what \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are valid.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described
+below for the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of the graph.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing the current
+options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.
+If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then
+for each pair, the option \fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.
+The following options are valid.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-aspect \fIwidth/height\fR
+Force a fixed aspect ratio of \fIwidth/height\fR, a floating point number.
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color. This includes the margins and
+legend, but not the plotting area.
+.TP
+\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3\-D border around the outside edge of the widget.  The
+\fB\-relief\fR option determines if the border is to be drawn.  The
+default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-bottommargin \fIpixels\fR
+If non-zero, overrides the computed size of the margin extending 
+below the X\-coordinate axis.
+If \fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, the automatically computed size is used.  
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-bufferelements \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether an internal pixmap to buffer the display of data
+elements should be used.  If \fIboolean\fR is true, data elements are
+drawn to an internal pixmap.  This option is especially useful when
+the graph is redrawn frequently while the remains data unchanged (for
+example, moving a marker across the plot).  See the
+.SB "SPEED TIPS"
+section.
+The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-cursor \fIcursor\fR
+Specifies the widget's cursor.  The default cursor is \f(CWcrosshair\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR 
+Specifies the font of the graph title. The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-18-180-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-halo \fIpixels\fR 
+Specifies a maximum distance to consider when searching for the
+closest data point (see the element's \fBclosest\fR operation below).
+Data points further than \fIpixels\fR away are ignored.  The default is
+\f(CW0.5i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the requested height of widget.  The default is
+\f(CW4i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-invertxy \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the placement X\-axis and Y\-axis should be inverted.  If
+\fIboolean\fR is true, the X and Y axes are swapped.  The default is
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
+Specifies how the title should be justified.  This matters only when
+the title contains more than one line of text. \fIJustify\fR must be
+\f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWright\fR, or \f(CWcenter\fR.  The default is
+\f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-leftmargin \fIpixels\fR
+If non-zero, overrides the computed size of the margin extending 
+from the left edge of the window to the Y\-coordinate axis.  
+If \fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, the automatically computed size is used.  
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotbackground \fIcolor\fR
+Specifies the background color of the plotting area.  The default is
+\f(CWwhite\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotborderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3-D border around the plotting area.  The
+\fB\-plotrelief\fR option determines if a border is drawn.  The
+default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotpadx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the amount of padding to be added to the left and right sides of
+the plotting area.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen
+distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the left side of the
+plotting area entry is padded by the first distance and the right side
+by the second.  If \fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the left and
+right sides are padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW8\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotpady \fIpad\fR
+Sets the amount of padding to be added to the top and bottom of the
+plotting area.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen
+distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the top of the plotting
+area is padded by the first distance and the bottom by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the top and bottom are padded
+evenly.  The default is \f(CW8\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-plotrelief \fIrelief\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect for the plotting area.  \fIRelief\fR
+specifies how the interior of the plotting area should appear relative
+to rest of the graph; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the plot should
+appear to protrude from the graph, relative to the surface of the
+graph.  The default is \f(CWsunken\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect for the graph widget.  \fIRelief\fR
+specifies how the graph should appear relative to widget it is packed
+into; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the graph should
+appear to protrude.  The default is \f(CWflat\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rightmargin \fIpixels\fR
+If non-zero, overrides the computed size of the margin extending 
+from the plotting area to the right edge of
+the window. By default, the legend is drawn in this margin. 
+If \fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, the automatically computed size is used.  
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-takefocus\fR \fIfocus\fR 
+Provides information used when moving the focus from window to window
+via keyboard traversal (e.g., Tab and Shift-Tab).  If \fIfocus\fR is
+\f(CW0\fR, this means that this window should be skipped entirely during
+keyboard traversal.  \f(CW1\fR means that the this window should always
+receive the input focus.  An empty value means that the traversal
+scripts make the decision whether to focus on the window.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-tile \fIimage\fR 
+Specifies a tiled background for the widget.  If \fIimage\fR isn't
+\f(CW""\fR, the background is tiled using \fIimage\fR.
+Otherwise, the normal background color is drawn (see the
+\fB\-background\fR option).  \fIImage\fR must be an image created
+using the Tk \fBimage\fR command.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-title \fItext\fR 
+Sets the title to \fItext\fR. If \fItext\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+no title will be displayed.
+.TP
+\fB\-topmargin \fIpixels\fR 
+If non-zero, overrides the computed size of the margin above the x2
+axis.  If \fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, the automatically computed size
+is used.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the requested width of the widget.  The default is
+\f(CW5i\fR.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?
+See the 
+.SB "CROSSHAIRS COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "ELEMENT COMPONENTS"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBextents \fIitem\fR 
+Returns the size of a particular item in the graph.  \fIItem\fR must
+be either \f(CWleftmargin\fR, \f(CWrightmargin\fR, \f(CWtopmargin\fR,
+\f(CWbottommargin\fR, \f(CWplotwidth\fR, or \f(CWplotheight\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "GRID COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBinvtransform \fIwinX winY\fR 
+Performs an inverse coordinate transformation, mapping window
+coordinates back to graph coordinates, using the standard X\-axis and Y\-axis.
+Returns a list of containing the X-Y graph coordinates.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBinside \fIx y\fR
+Returns \f(CW1\fR is the designated screen coordinate (\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR)
+is inside the plotting area and \f(CW0\fR otherwise.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "LEGEND COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBline\fB operation arg\fR...
+The operation is the same as \fBelement\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "MARKER COMPONENTS"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript \fIoperation \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+See the 
+.SB "POSTSCRIPT COMPONENT"
+section.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBsnap \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIoutputName\fR
+Takes a snapshot of the graph, saving the output in \fIoutputName\fR.
+The following switches are available.
+.RS
+.TP 1i
+\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR
+Specifies how the snapshot is output. \fIFormat\fR may be one of 
+the following listed below.  The default is \f(CWphoto\fR. 
+.RS
+.TP 
+\f(CWphoto\fR
+Saves a Tk photo image. \fIOutputName\fR represents the name of a 
+Tk photo image that must already have been created.  
+.TP 
+\f(CWwmf\fR
+Saves an Aldus Placeable Metafile.  \fIOutputName\fR represents the
+filename where the metafile is written.  If \fIoutputName\fR is
+\f(CWCLIPBOARD\fR, then output is written directly to the Windows
+clipboard.  This format is available only under Microsoft Windows.
+.TP 
+\f(CWemf\fR
+Saves an Enhanced Metafile. \fIOutputName\fR represents the filename
+where the metafile is written.  If \fIoutputName\fR is
+\f(CWCLIPBOARD\fR, then output is written directly to the Windows
+clipboard.  This format is available only under Microsoft Windows.
+.RE
+.TP 1i
+\fB\-height\fR \fIsize\fR
+Specifies the height of the graph.  \fISize\fR is a screen distance.
+The graph will be redrawn using this dimension, rather than its
+current window height.
+.TP 1i
+\fB\-width\fR \fIsize\fR
+Specifies the width of the graph.  \fISize\fR is a screen distance.
+The graph will be redrawn using this dimension, rather than its
+current window width.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBtransform \fIx y\fR 
+Performs a coordinate transformation, mapping graph coordinates to
+window coordinates, using the standard X\-axis and Y\-axis.
+Returns a list containing the X\-Y screen coordinates.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBxaxis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?...
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBx2axis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?... 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fByaxis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?... 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBy2axis \fIoperation\fR ?\fIarg\fR?... 
+See the 
+.SB "AXIS COMPONENTS"
+section.
+.SH "GRAPH COMPONENTS"
+A graph is composed of several components: coordinate axes, data
+elements, legend, grid, cross hairs, postscript, and annotation
+markers. Instead of one big set of configuration options and
+operations, the graph is partitioned, where each component has its own
+configuration options and operations that specifically control that
+aspect or part of the graph. 
+.SS "AXIS COMPONENTS"
+Four coordinate axes are automatically created: two X\-coordinate axes
+(\f(CWx\fR and \f(CWx2\fR) and two Y\-coordinate axes (\f(CWy\fR, and
+\f(CWy2\fR).  By default, the axis \f(CWx\fR is located in the bottom
+margin, \f(CWy\fR in the left margin, \f(CWx2\fR in the top margin, and
+\f(CWy2\fR in the right margin.
+.PP
+An axis consists of the axis line, title, major and minor ticks, and
+tick labels.  Major ticks are drawn at uniform intervals along the
+axis.  Each tick is labeled with its coordinate value.  Minor ticks
+are drawn at uniform intervals within major ticks.  
+.PP
+The range of the axis controls what region of data is plotted.
+Data points outside the minimum and maximum limits of the axis are
+not plotted.  By default, the minimum and maximum limits are
+determined from the data, but you can reset either limit.
+.PP
+You can have several axes. To create an axis, invoke
+the axis component and its create operation.
+.CS
+# Create a new axis called "tempAxis"
+\&.g axis create tempAxis
+.CE
+You map data elements to an axis using the element's \-mapy and \-mapx
+configuration options. They specify the coordinate axes an element
+is mapped onto.
+.CS
+# Now map the tempAxis data to this axis.
+\&.g element create "e1" \-xdata $x \-ydata $y \-mapy tempAxis
+.CE
+Any number of axes can be displayed simultaneously. They are drawn in
+the margins surrounding the plotting area.  The default axes \f(CWx\fR
+and \f(CWy\fR are drawn in the bottom and left margins. The axes
+\f(CWx2\fR and \f(CWy2\fR are drawn in top and right margins.  By
+default, only \f(CWx\fR and \f(CWy\fR are shown. Note that the axes
+can have different scales.
+.PP
+To display a different axis or more than one axis, you invoke one of
+the following components: \fBxaxis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, and
+\fBy2axis\fR.  Each component has a \fBuse\fR operation that
+designates the axis (or axes) to be drawn in that corresponding
+margin: \fBxaxis\fR in the bottom, \fByaxis\fR in the left,
+\fBx2axis\fR in the top, and \fBy2axis\fR in the right.
+.CS
+# Display the axis tempAxis in the left margin.
+\&.g yaxis use tempAxis
+.CE
+The \fBuse\fR operation takes a list of axis names as its last
+argument.  This is the list of axes to be drawn in this margin.
+.PP
+You can configure axes in many ways. The axis scale can be linear or
+logarithmic.  The values along the axis can either monotonically
+increase or decrease.  If you need custom tick labels, you can specify
+a Tcl procedure to format the label any way you wish.  You can control
+how ticks are drawn, by changing the major tick interval or the number
+of minor ticks.  You can define non-uniform tick intervals, such as
+for time-series plots.
+.PP
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR?  ?\fIcommand\fR? 
+Associates \fIcommand\fR with \fItagName\fR such that whenever the
+event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for an axis with this
+tag, \fIcommand\fR will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the 
+\fBbind\fR command except that it operates on graph axes, rather 
+than widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for
+complete details on \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on 
+\fIcommand\fR before invoking it.  
+.sp
+If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing 
+any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR.
+If the first character of \fIcommand\fR is \f(CW+\fR then \fIcommand\fR 
+augments an existing binding rather than replacing it. 
+If no \fIcommand\fR argument is provided then the command currently
+associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (it's an error occurs 
+if there's no such binding) is returned.  If both \fIcommand\fR and 
+\fIsequence\fR are missing then a list of all the event sequences for 
+which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBcget \fIaxisName \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the option given by \fIoption\fR for
+\fIaxisName\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described below
+for the axis \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBconfigure \fIaxisName \fR?\fIaxisName\fR?... ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of \fIaxisName\fR.
+Several axes can be changed.  If \fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list
+describing all the current options for \fIaxisName\fR is returned.  If
+\fIoption\fR is specified, but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing
+\fIoption\fR is returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR
+pairs are specified, then for each pair, the axis option \fIoption\fR
+is set to \fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for axes.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-bindtags \fItagList\fR
+Specifies the binding tags for the axis.  \fITagList\fR is a list
+of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will determine how
+events for axes are handled.  Each tag in the list matching the current event
+sequence will have its Tcl command executed.  Implicitly the name of
+the element is always the first tag in the list.  The default value is
+\f(CWall\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the axis and tick labels.
+The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-descending \fIboolean\fR 
+Indicates whether the values along the axis are monotonically increasing or
+decreasing.  If \fIboolean\fR is true, the axis values will be
+decreasing.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates if the axis is displayed. If \fIboolean\fR is false the axis 
+will be displayed. Any element mapped to the axis is displayed regardless.
+The default value is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
+Specifies how the axis title should be justified.  This matters only
+when the axis title contains more than one line of text. \fIJustify\fR
+must be \f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWright\fR, or \f(CWcenter\fR.  The default is
+\f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-limits \fIformatStr\fR
+Specifies a printf-like description to format the minimum and maximum
+limits of the axis.  The limits are displayed at the top/bottom or
+left/right sides of the plotting area.  \fIFormatStr\fR is a list of
+one or two format descriptions.  If one description is supplied, both
+the minimum and maximum limits are formatted in the same way.  If two,
+the first designates the format for the minimum limit, the second for
+the maximum.  If \f(CW""\fR is given as either description, then 
+the that limit will not be displayed.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the axis and tick lines.  The default is \f(CW1\fR
+pixel.
+.TP
+\fB\-logscale \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the scale of the axis is logarithmic or linear.  If
+\fIboolean\fR is true, the axis is logarithmic.  The default scale is
+linear.
+.TP
+\fB\-loose \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the limits of the axis should fit the data points tightly,
+at the outermost data points, or loosely, at the outer tick intervals.
+If the axis limit is set with the -min or -max option, the axes are
+displayed tightly.
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, the axis range is "loose".
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-majorticks \fImajorList\fR
+Specifies where to display major axis ticks.  You can use this option
+to display ticks at non-uniform intervals.  \fIMajorList\fR is a list
+of axis coordinates designating the location of major ticks.  No
+minor ticks are drawn.  If \fImajorList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, 
+major ticks will be automatically computed. The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-max \fIvalue\fR
+Sets the maximum limit of \fIaxisName\fR.  Any data point greater 
+than \fIvalue\fR is not displayed.  If \fIvalue\fR is \f(CW""\fR, 
+the maximum limit is calculated using the largest data value.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-min \fIvalue\fR
+Sets the minimum limit of \fIaxisName\fR. Any data point less than 
+\fIvalue\fR is not displayed.  If \fIvalue\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+the minimum limit is calculated using the smallest data value.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-minorticks \fIminorList\fR
+Specifies where to display minor axis ticks.  You can use this option
+to display minor ticks at non-uniform intervals. \fIMinorList\fR is a
+list of real values, ranging from 0.0 to 1.0, designating the placement of
+a minor tick.  No minor ticks are drawn if the \fB\-majortick\fR
+option is also set.  If \fIminorList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, minor ticks will
+be automatically computed. The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rotate \fItheta\fR
+Specifies the how many degrees to rotate the axis tick labels.
+\fITheta\fR is a real value representing the number of degrees
+to rotate the tick labels.  The default is \f(CW0.0\fR degrees.
+.TP
+\fB\-scrollcommand \fIcommand\fR
+Specify the prefix for a command used to communicate with scrollbars
+for this axis, such as \fI.sbar set\fP.
+.TP
+\fB\-scrollmax \fIvalue\fR
+Sets the maximum limit of the axis scroll region.  If \fIvalue\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, the maximum limit is calculated using the largest data
+value.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-scrollmin \fIvalue\fR 
+Sets the minimum limit of axis scroll region.  If \fIvalue\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, the minimum limit is calculated using the smallest data
+value.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-showticks \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether axis ticks should be drawn. If \fIboolean\fR is
+true, ticks are drawn.  If false, only the
+axis line is drawn. The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stepsize \fIvalue\fR
+Specifies the interval between major axis ticks.  If \fIvalue\fR isn't
+a valid interval (must be less than the axis range), 
+the request is ignored and the step size is automatically calculated.
+.TP
+\fB\-subdivisions \fInumber\fR 
+Indicates how many minor axis ticks are
+to be drawn.  For example, if \fInumber\fR is two, only one minor
+tick is drawn.  If \fInumber\fR is one, no minor ticks are
+displayed.  The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-tickfont \fIfontName\fR 
+Specifies the font for axis tick labels. The default is
+\f(CW*-Courier-Bold-R-Normal-*-100-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-tickformat\fR \fIformatStr\fR
+Specifies a printf-like description to format teh axis
+tick labels.  You can get the standard tick labels again by
+setting \fIformatStr\fR to \f(CW""\fR.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-tickformatcommand\fR, \fB\-command \fIprefix\fR
+Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked when formatting the axis tick
+labels. \fIPrefix\fR is a string containing the name of a Tcl proc and
+any extra arguments for the procedure.  This command is invoked for each
+major tick on the axis.  Two additional arguments are passed to the
+procedure: the pathname of the widget and the current the numeric
+value of the tick.  The procedure returns the formatted tick label.  If
+\f(CW""\fR is returned, no label will appear next to the tick.  You can
+get the standard tick labels again by setting \fIprefix\fR to
+\f(CW""\fR.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.sp 1
+The numeric value for the tick might change when using the
+\fB\-logscale\fR and \fB\-tickformat\fR options.
+.sp 1
+Please note that this procedure is invoked while the graph is redrawn.
+You may query configuration options.  But do not them, because this
+can have unexpected results.
+.TP
+\fB\-ticklength \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the length of major and minor ticks (minor ticks are half the
+length of major ticks). If \fIpixels\fR is less than zero, the axis
+will be inverted with ticks drawn pointing towards the plot.  The
+default is \f(CW0.1i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-title \fItext\fR
+Sets the title of the axis. If \fItext\fR is 
+\f(CW""\fR, no axis title will be displayed.  
+.TP
+\fB\-titlealternate \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates to display the axis title in its alternate location. 
+Normally the axis title is centered along the axis.  This option
+places the axis either to the right (horizontal axes) or above
+(vertical axes) the axis.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-titlecolor \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the axis title. The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-titlefont \fIfontName\fR 
+Specifies the font for axis title. The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-14-140-*\fR.
+.PP
+Axis configuration options may be also be set by the \fBoption\fR
+command.  The resource class is \f(CWAxis\fR.  The resource names
+are the names of the axes (such as \f(CWx\fR or \f(CWx2\fR).
+.CS
+option add *Graph.Axis.Color  blue
+option add *Graph.x.LogScale  true
+option add *Graph.x2.LogScale false
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBcreate \fIaxisName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new axis by the name \fIaxisName\fR.  No axis by the same
+name can already exist. \fIOption\fR and \fIvalue\fR are described 
+in above in the axis \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis \fBdelete \fR?\fIaxisName\fR?...
+Deletes the named axes. An axis is not really
+deleted until it is not longer in use, so it's safe to delete
+axes mapped to elements.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis invtransform \fIaxisName value\fR
+Performs the inverse transformation, changing the screen coordinate
+\fIvalue\fR to a graph coordinate, mapping the value mapped to
+\fIaxisName\fR.  Returns the graph coordinate.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis limits \fIaxisName\fR
+Returns a list of the minimum and maximum limits for \fIaxisName\fR.  The order
+of the list is \f(CWmin max\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis names \fR?\fIpattern\fR?...
+Returns a list of axes matching zero or more patterns.  If no
+\fIpattern\fR argument is give, the names of all axes are returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis transform \fIaxisName value\fR
+Transforms the coordinate \fIvalue\fR to a screen coordinate by mapping
+the it to \fIaxisName\fR.  Returns the transformed screen coordinate.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBaxis view \fIaxisName\fR
+Change the viewable area of this axis. Use as an argument to a scrollbar's "\fI\-command\fR".
+.PP
+The default axes are \f(CWx\fR, \f(CWy\fR, \f(CWx2\fR, and \f(CWy2\fR.
+But you can display more than four axes simultaneously.  You can also
+swap in a different axis with \fBuse\fR operation of the special axis
+components: \fBxaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR.
+.CS
+\&.g create axis temp
+\&.g create axis time
+\&...
+\&.g xaxis use temp
+\&.g yaxis use time
+.CE
+Only the axes specified for use are displayed on the screen.
+.PP
+The \fBxaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR
+components operate on an axis location rather than a specific axis
+like the more general \fBaxis\fR component does.  They implicitly
+control the axis that is currently using to that location.  By
+default, \fBxaxis\fR uses the \f(CWx\fR axis, \fByaxis\fR uses
+\f(CWy\fR, \fBx2axis\fR uses \f(CWx2\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR uses
+\f(CWy2\fR.  When more than one axis is displayed in a margin, it
+represents the first axis displayed.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for axes. They mirror exactly
+the operations of the \fBaxis\fR component.  The \fIaxis\fR argument
+must be \fBxaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR, \fByaxis\fR, or \fBy2axis\fR.  This
+feature is deprecated since more than one axis can now be used a
+margin.  You should only use the \fBxaxis\fR, \fBx2axis\fR,
+\fByaxis\fR, and \fBy2axis\fR components with the \fBuse\fR operation.
+For all other operations, use the general \fBaxis\fR component
+instead.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis \fBcget \fIoption\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis\fB invtransform \fIvalue\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis \fBlimits\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis\fB transform \fIvalue\fR
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fIaxis\fB use \fR?\fIaxisName\fR?  
+Designates the axis \fIaxisName\fR is to be displayed at this
+location.  \fIAxisName\fR can not be already in use at another location.  
+This command returns the name of the axis currently using this location.
+.SS "CROSSHAIRS COMPONENT"
+Cross hairs consist of two intersecting lines (one vertical and one horizontal)
+drawn completely across the plotting area.  They are used to position
+the mouse in relation to the coordinate axes.  Cross hairs differ from line
+markers in that they are implemented using XOR drawing primitives.
+This means that they can be quickly drawn and erased without redrawing
+the entire graph.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for cross hairs:
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the cross hairs configuration option
+given by \fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option
+described below for the cross hairs \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs configure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...  
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of the cross hairs.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing all the current
+options for the cross hairs is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.
+If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then
+for each pair, the cross hairs option \fIoption\fR is set to
+\fIvalue\fR.
+The following options are available for cross hairs.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the cross hairs.  The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the cross hairs. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up
+to 11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes
+and gaps on the cross hair lines.  Each number must be between 1 and
+255.  If \fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the cross hairs will be solid
+lines.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether cross hairs are drawn. If \fIboolean\fR is true,
+cross hairs are not drawn.  The default is \f(CWyes\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Set the width of the cross hair lines.  The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-position \fIpos\fR 
+Specifies the screen position where the cross hairs intersect.
+\fIPos\fR must be in the form "\fI@x,y\fR", where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR
+are the window coordinates of the intersection.
+.PP
+Cross hairs configuration options may be also be set by the
+\fBoption\fR command.  The resource name and class are
+\f(CWcrosshairs\fR and \f(CWCrosshairs\fR respectively.
+.CS
+option add *Graph.Crosshairs.LineWidth 2
+option add *Graph.Crosshairs.Color     red
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs off\fR
+Turns off the cross hairs. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs on\fR
+Turns on the display of the cross hairs.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBcrosshairs toggle\fR 
+Toggles the current state of the cross hairs, alternately mapping and
+unmapping the cross hairs.
+.SS "ELEMENT COMPONENTS"
+A data element represents a set of data.  It contains x and y vectors
+containing the coordinates of the data points.  Elements can be
+displayed with a symbol at each data point and lines connecting the
+points.  Elements also control the appearance of the data, such as the
+symbol type, line width, color etc.
+.PP
+When new data elements are created, they are automatically added to a
+list of displayed elements.   The display list controls what elements
+are drawn and in what order.  
+.PP
+The following operations are available for elements.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement activate \fIelemName \fR?\fIindex\fR?...
+Specifies the data points of element \fIelemName\fR to be drawn
+using active foreground and background colors.  \fIElemName\fR is the
+name of the element and \fIindex\fR is a number representing the index
+of the data point. If no indices are present then all data points
+become active.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR?  ?\fIcommand\fR? 
+Associates \fIcommand\fR with \fItagName\fR such that whenever the
+event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for an element with this
+tag, \fIcommand\fR will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the 
+\fBbind\fR command except that it operates on graph elements, rather 
+than widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for
+complete details on \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on 
+\fIcommand\fR before invoking it.  
+.sp
+If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing 
+any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR.
+If the first character of \fIcommand\fR is \f(CW+\fR then \fIcommand\fR 
+augments an existing binding rather than replacing it. 
+If no \fIcommand\fR argument is provided then the command currently
+associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (it's an error occurs 
+if there's no such binding) is returned.  If both \fIcommand\fR and 
+\fIsequence\fR are missing then a list of all the event sequences for 
+which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement cget \fIelemName \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the element configuration option given by 
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any of the options described below
+for the element \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement closest \fIx y\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... ?\fIelemName\fR?...
+Searches for the data point closest to the window coordinates \fIx\fR
+and \fIy\fR.  By default, all elements are searched.  Hidden elements
+(see the \fB\-hide\fR option is false) are ignored.  You can limit the
+search by specifying only the elements you want to be considered. 
+\fIElemName\fR must be the name of an element that can not be hidden.
+It returns a key-value list containing the name of the closest element, 
+the index of the closest data point, and the graph-coordinates of the point. 
+Returns \f(CW""\fR, if no data point within the threshold distance 
+can be found. The following
+\fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs are available.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-along \fIdirection\fR
+Search for the closest element using the following criteria:
+.RS
+.TP
+\f(CWx\fR
+Find closest element vertically from the given X-coordinate. 
+.TP
+\f(CWy\fR
+Find the closest element horizontally from the given Y-coordinate. 
+.TP
+\f(CWboth\fR
+Find the closest element for the given point (using both the X and Y
+coordinates).  
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB\-halo \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies a threshold distance where selected data points are ignored.
+\fIPixels\fR is a valid screen distance, such as \f(CW2\fR or \f(CW1.2i\fR.
+If this option isn't specified, then it defaults to the value of the
+graph's \fB\-halo\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-interpolate \fIstring\fR
+Indicates whether to consider projections that lie along the line segments 
+connecting data points when searching for the closest point.
+The default value is \f(CW0\fR. The values for \fIstring\fR are
+described below.
+.RS
+.TP 1.25i
+\f(CWno\fR 
+Search only for the closest data point.
+.TP
+\f(CWyes\fR
+Search includes projections that lie along the
+line segments connecting the data points.  
+.RE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement configure \fIelemName \fR?\fIelemName\fR... ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for elements.  Several
+elements can be modified at the same time. If \fIoption\fR isn't
+specified, a list describing all the current options for
+\fIelemName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified, but not
+\fIvalue\fR, then a list describing the option \fIoption\fR is
+returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are
+specified, then for each pair, the element option \fIoption\fR is set
+to \fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for elements.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-activepen \fIpenName\fR
+Specifies pen to use to draw active element.  If \fIpenName\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, no active elements will be drawn.  The default is 
+\f(CWactiveLine\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-areabackground \fIcolor\fR 
+Specifies the background color of the area under the curve. The
+background area color is drawn only for bitmaps (see the
+\fB\-areapattern\fR option).  If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the
+background is transparent.  The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-areaforeground \fIcolor\fR 
+Specifies the foreground color of the area under the curve. 
+The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-areapattern \fIpattern\fR 
+Specifies how to fill the area under the curve.  \fIPattern\fR may be
+the name of a Tk bitmap, \f(CWsolid\fR, or \f(CW""\fR.  If "solid",
+then the area under the curve is drawn with the color designated by
+the \fB\-areaforeground\fR option.  If a bitmap, then the bitmap is
+stippled across the area.  Here the bitmap colors are controlled by the
+\fB\-areaforeground\fR and \fB\-areabackground\fR options.  If
+\fIpattern\fR is \f(CW""\fR, no filled area is drawn.  The default is
+\f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-areatile \fIimage\fR 
+Specifies the name of a Tk image to be used to tile the area under the
+curve.  This option supersedes the \fB\-areapattern\fR option.
+\fIImage\fR must be a photo image.  If \fIimage\fR is \f(CW""\fR, no
+tiling is performed.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-bindtags \fItagList\fR
+Specifies the binding tags for the element.  \fITagList\fR is a list
+of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will determine how
+events are handled for elements.  Each tag in the list matching the 
+current event
+sequence will have its Tcl command executed.  Implicitly the name of
+the element is always the first tag in the list.  The default value is
+\f(CWall\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the traces connecting the data points.  
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of element line. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up to
+11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes and
+gaps on the element line.  Each number must be between 1 and 255.  If
+\fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the lines will be solid.
+.TP
+\fB\-data \fIcoordList\fR
+Specifies the X\-Y coordinates of the data.  \fICoordList\fR is a
+list of numeric expressions representing the X\-Y coordinate pairs
+of each data point.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the interior color of symbols.  If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then
+the interior of the symbol is transparent.  If \fIcolor\fR is
+\f(CWdefcolor\fR, then the color will be the same as the \fB\-color\fR
+option.  The default is \f(CWdefcolor\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the element is displayed.  
+The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-label \fItext\fR
+Sets the element's label in the legend.  If \fItext\fR
+is \f(CW""\fR, the element will have no entry in the legend.
+The default label is the element's name. 
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR 
+Sets the width of the connecting lines between data points.  If
+\fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, no connecting lines will be drawn between
+symbols.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapx \fIxAxis\fR
+Selects the X\-axis to map the element's X\-coordinates onto.
+\fIXAxis\fR must be the name of an axis.  The default is \f(CWx\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapy \fIyAxis\fR
+Selects the Y\-axis to map the element's Y\-coordinates onto.
+\fIYAxis\fR must be the name of an axis. The default is \f(CWy\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-offdash \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the stripes when traces are dashed (see the
+\fB\-dashes\fR option).  If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the "off"
+pixels will represent gaps instead of stripes.  If \fIcolor\fR is
+\f(CWdefcolor\fR, then the color will be the same as the \fB\-color\fR
+option.  The default is \f(CWdefcolor\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color or the outline around each symbol.  If \fIcolor\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, then no outline is drawn. If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CWdefcolor\fR,
+then the color will be the same as the \fB\-color\fR option.  The
+default is \f(CWdefcolor\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pen \fIpenname\fR
+Set the pen to use for this element.
+.TP
+\fB\-outlinewidth \fIpixels\fR 
+Sets the width of the outline bordering each symbol.  If \fIpixels\fR
+is \f(CW0\fR, no outline will be drawn. The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pixels \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the size of symbols.  If \fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, no symbols will
+be drawn.  The default is \f(CW0.125i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-scalesymbols \fIboolean\fR 
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, the size of the symbols
+drawn for \fIelemName\fR will change with scale of the X\-axis and Y\-axis.
+At the time this option is set, the current ranges of the axes are
+saved as the normalized scales (i.e scale factor is 1.0) and the
+element is drawn at its designated size (see the \fB\-pixels\fR
+option).  As the scale of the axes change, the symbol will be scaled
+according to the smaller of the X\-axis and Y\-axis scales.  If \fIboolean\fR
+is false, the element's symbols are drawn at the designated size,
+regardless of axis scales.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-smooth \fIsmooth\fR 
+Specifies how connecting line segments are drawn between data points.
+\fISmooth\fR can be either \f(CWlinear\fR, \f(CWstep\fR, \f(CWnatural\fR, or
+\f(CWquadratic\fR.  If \fIsmooth\fR is \f(CWlinear\fR, a single line
+segment is drawn, connecting both data points. When \fIsmooth\fR is
+\f(CWstep\fR, two line segments are drawn. The first is a horizontal
+line segment that steps the next X\-coordinate.  The second is a
+vertical line, moving to the next Y\-coordinate.  Both \fInatural\fR and
+\fIquadratic\fR generate multiple segments between data points.  If
+\fInatural\fR, the segments are generated using a cubic spline.  If
+\fIquadratic\fR, a quadratic spline is used.  The default is
+\fIlinear\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-styles \fIstyleList\fR 
+Specifies what pen to use based on the range of weights given.
+\fIStyleList\fR is a list of style specifications. Each style
+specification, in turn, is a list consisting of a pen name, and
+optionally a minimum and maximum range.  Data points whose weight (see
+the \fB\-weight\fR option) falls in this range, are drawn with this
+pen.  If no range is specified it defaults to the index of the pen in
+the list.  Note that this affects only symbol attributes. Line
+attributes, such as line width, dashes, etc. are ignored.
+.TP
+\fB\-symbol \fIsymbol\fR 
+Specifies the symbol for data points.  \fISymbol\fR can be either
+\f(CWsquare\fR, \f(CWcircle\fR, \f(CWdiamond\fR, \f(CWplus\fR, \f(CWcross\fR,
+\f(CWsplus\fR, \f(CWscross\fR, \f(CWtriangle\fR, \f(CW""\fR (where no symbol
+is drawn), or a bitmap.  Bitmaps are specified as "\fIsource\fR
+?\fImask\fR?", where \fIsource\fR is the name of the bitmap, and
+\fImask\fR is the bitmap's optional mask.  The default is
+\f(CWcircle\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-trace \fIdirection\fR 
+Indicates whether connecting lines between data points (whose
+X\-coordinate values are either increasing or decreasing) are drawn.  
+\fIDirection\fR
+must be \f(CWincreasing\fR, \f(CWdecreasing\fR, or \f(CWboth\fR.  For
+example, if \fIdirection\fR is \f(CWincreasing\fR, connecting lines will
+be drawn only between those data points where X\-coordinate values are
+monotonically increasing.  If \fIdirection\fR is \f(CWboth\fR,
+connecting lines will be draw between all data points.  The default is
+\f(CWboth\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-weights \fIwVec\fR 
+Specifies the weights of the individual data points.  This, 
+with the list pen styles (see the \fB\-styles\fR option),
+controls how data points are drawn.  \fIWVec\fR is the name of a BLT
+vector or a list of numeric expressions representing the weights for
+each data point.
+.TP
+\fB\-xdata \fIxVec\fR 
+Specifies the X\-coordinates of the data.  \fIXVec\fR is the name of
+a BLT vector or a list of numeric expressions.
+.TP
+\fB\-ydata \fIyVec\fR 
+Specifies the Y\-coordinates of the data.  \fIYVec\fR is the name of
+a BLT vector or a list of numeric expressions.
+.PP
+Element configuration options may also be set by the \fBoption\fR
+command.  The resource class is \f(CWElement\fR. The resource name is
+the name of the element.
+.CS
+option add *Graph.Element.symbol line
+option add *Graph.e1.symbol line
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement create \fIelemName\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new element \fIelemName\fR.  It's an error is
+an element \fIelemName\fR already exists.  If
+additional arguments are present, they specify options valid for 
+the element \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement deactivate \fIelemName\fR ?\fIelemName\fR?...
+Deactivates all the elements matching \fIpattern\fR.
+Elements whose names match any of the patterns given are redrawn using
+their normal colors.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement delete\fR ?\fIelemName\fR?...
+Deletes all the named elements.  The graph is automatically redrawn.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement exists \fIelemName\fR
+Returns \f(CW1\fR if an element \fIelemName\fR currently exists and
+\f(CW0\fR otherwise.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement names \fR?\fIpattern\fR?...  
+Returns the elements matching one or more pattern.  If no
+\fIpattern\fR is given, the names of all elements is returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement show\fR ?\fInameList\fR?  
+Queries or modifies the element display list.  The element display
+list designates the elements drawn and in what
+order. \fINameList\fR is a list of elements to be displayed in the
+order they are named.  If there is no \fInameList\fR argument,
+the current display list is returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBelement type\fR \fIelemName\fR
+Returns the type of \fIelemName\fR. 
+If the element is a bar element, the commands returns the string
+\f(CW"bar"\fR, otherwise it returns \f(CW"line"\fR.
+.CE
+.SS "GRID COMPONENT"
+Grid lines extend from the major and minor ticks of each axis
+horizontally or vertically across the plotting area.  The following
+operations are available for grid lines.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the grid line configuration option given by 
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described below
+for the grid \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid configure\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for grid lines.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing all the current
+grid options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is
+returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are
+specified, then for each pair, the grid line option \fIoption\fR is set to
+\fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for grid lines.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the grid lines.  The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the grid lines. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up
+to 11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes
+and gaps on the grid lines.  Each number must be between 1 and 255.
+If \fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the grid will be solid lines.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the grid should be drawn. If \fIboolean\fR
+is true, grid lines are not shown. The default is \f(CWyes\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of grid lines.  The default width is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapx \fIxAxis\fR
+Specifies the X\-axis to display grid lines.  \fIXAxis\fR
+must be the name of an axis or \f(CW""\fR for no grid lines.  
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapy \fIyAxis\fR
+Specifies the Y\-axis to display grid lines.  \fIYAxis\fR
+must be the name of an axis or \f(CW""\fR for no grid lines. 
+The default is \f(CWy\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-minor \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the grid lines should be drawn for minor ticks. 
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, the lines will appear at
+minor tick intervals.  The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.PP
+Grid configuration options may also be set by the 
+\fBoption\fR command.  The resource name and class are \f(CWgrid\fR and 
+\f(CWGrid\fR respectively. 
+.CS
+option add *Graph.grid.LineWidth 2
+option add *Graph.Grid.Color     black
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid off\fR
+Turns off the display the grid lines.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid on\fR
+Turns on the display the grid lines.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBgrid toggle\fR
+Toggles the display of the grid.  
+.SS "LEGEND COMPONENT"
+The legend displays a list of the data elements.  Each entry consists
+of the element's symbol and label.  The legend can appear in any
+margin (the default location is in the right margin).  It
+can also be positioned anywhere within the plotting area.
+.PP
+The following operations are valid for the legend.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend activate \fIpattern\fR...
+Selects legend entries to be drawn using the active legend colors and relief.
+All entries whose element names match \fIpattern\fR  are selected.  To
+be selected, the element name must match only one \fIpattern\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR?  ?\fIcommand\fR? 
+Associates \fIcommand\fR with \fItagName\fR such that whenever the
+event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for a legend entry with this
+tag, \fIcommand\fR will be invoked.  Implicitly the element names
+in the entry are tags.  The syntax is similar to the 
+\fBbind\fR command except that it operates on legend entries, rather 
+than widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for
+complete details on \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on 
+\fIcommand\fR before invoking it.  
+.sp
+If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing 
+any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR.
+If the first character of \fIcommand\fR is \f(CW+\fR then \fIcommand\fR 
+augments an existing binding rather than replacing it. 
+If no \fIcommand\fR argument is provided then the command currently
+associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (it's an error occurs 
+if there's no such binding) is returned.  If both \fIcommand\fR and 
+\fIsequence\fR are missing then a list of all the event sequences for 
+which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of a legend configuration option.
+\fIOption\fR may be any option described below in the
+legend \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend configure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for the legend.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing the current
+legend options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is
+specified, but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is
+returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are
+specified, then for each pair, the legend option \fIoption\fR is set
+to \fIvalue\fR.  The following options are valid for the legend.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-activebackground \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color for active legend entries.  All legend
+entries marked active (see the legend \fBactivate\fR operation) are
+drawn using this background color.
+.TP
+\fB\-activeborderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3-D border around the outside edge of the active legend
+entries.  The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-activeforeground \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the foreground color for active legend entries.  All legend
+entries marked as active (see the legend \fBactivate\fR operation) are
+drawn using this foreground color.
+.TP
+\fB\-activerelief \fIrelief\fR 
+Specifies the 3-D effect desired for active legend entries.
+\fIRelief\fR denotes how the interior of the entry should appear
+relative to the legend; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the entry
+should appear to protrude from the legend, relative to the surface of
+the legend.  The default is \f(CWflat\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+Tells how to position the legend relative to the positioning point for
+the legend.  This is dependent on the value of the \fB\-position\fR
+option.  The default is \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.RS
+.TP 1.25i
+\f(CWleft\fR or \f(CWright\fR
+The anchor describes how to position the legend vertically.  
+.TP
+\f(CWtop\fR or \f(CWbottom\fR
+The anchor describes how to position the legend horizontally.  
+.TP
+\f(CW@x,y\fR
+The anchor specifies how to position the legend relative to the
+positioning point. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWcenter\fR then
+the legend is centered on the point; if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWn\fR then
+the legend will be drawn such that the top center point of the
+rectangular region occupied by the legend will be at the positioning
+point.
+.TP
+\f(CWplotarea\fR
+The anchor specifies how to position the legend relative to the
+plotting area. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWcenter\fR then the
+legend is centered in the plotting area; if \fIanchor\fR is \f(CWne\fR
+then the legend will be drawn such that occupies the upper right
+corner of the plotting area.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the legend. If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+the legend background with be transparent.
+.TP
+\fB\-bindtags \fItagList\fR
+Specifies the binding tags for legend entries.  \fITagList\fR is a list
+of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will determine how
+events are handled for legend entries.  Each tag in the list matching 
+the current event sequence will have its Tcl command executed. The 
+default value is \f(CWall\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the 3-D border around the outside edge of the legend (if
+such border is being drawn; the \fBrelief\fR option determines this).
+The default is \f(CW2\fR pixels.
+.TP
+\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR 
+\fIFontName\fR specifies a font to use when drawing the labels of each
+element into the legend.  The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-12-120-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the foreground color of the text drawn for the element's label.
+The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the legend should be displayed. If \fIboolean\fR is
+true, the legend will not be draw.  The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-ipadx \fIpad\fR 
+Sets the amount of internal padding to be added to the width of each
+legend entry.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If
+\fIpad\fR has two elements, the left side of the legend entry is
+padded by the first distance and the right side by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the left and right sides are padded
+evenly.  The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-ipady \fIpad\fR
+Sets an amount of internal padding to be added to the height of each
+legend entry.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If
+\fIpad\fR has two elements, the top of the entry is padded by the
+first distance and the bottom by the second.  If \fIpad\fR is just
+one distance, both the top and bottom of the entry are padded evenly.
+The default is \f(CW2\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-padx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding to the left and right exteriors of the legend.
+\fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR
+has two elements, the left side of the legend is padded by the first
+distance and the right side by the second.  If \fIpad\fR has just one
+distance, both the left and right sides are padded evenly.  The
+default is \f(CW4\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pady \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding above and below the legend.  \fIPad\fR can be a list
+of one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the area above
+the legend is padded by the first distance and the area below by the
+second.  If \fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the top and
+bottom areas are padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-position \fIpos\fR
+Specifies where the legend is drawn. The
+\fB\-anchor\fR option also affects where the legend is positioned.  If
+\fIpos\fR is \f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWtop\fR, or \f(CWbottom\fR, the
+legend is drawn in the specified margin.  If \fIpos\fR is
+\f(CWplotarea\fR, then the legend is drawn inside the plotting area at a
+particular anchor.  If \fIpos\fR is in the form "\fI@x,y\fR", where
+\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are the window coordinates, the legend is drawn in
+the plotting area at the specified coordinates.  The default is
+\f(CWright\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-raised \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the legend is above or below the data elements.  This
+matters only if the legend is in the plotting area.  If \fIboolean\fR
+is true, the legend will be drawn on top of any elements that may
+overlap it. The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR
+Specifies the 3-D effect for the border around the legend.
+\fIRelief\fR specifies how the interior of the legend should appear
+relative to the graph; for example, \f(CWraised\fR means the legend
+should appear to protrude from the graph, relative to the surface of
+the graph.  The default is \f(CWsunken\fR.
+.PP
+Legend configuration options may also be set by the \fBoption\fR
+command.  The resource name and class are \f(CWlegend\fR and
+\f(CWLegend\fR respectively.
+.CS
+option add *Graph.legend.Foreground blue
+option add *Graph.Legend.Relief     raised
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend deactivate \fIpattern\fR...
+Selects legend entries to be drawn using the normal legend colors and
+relief.  All entries whose element names match \fIpattern\fR are
+selected.  To be selected, the element name must match only one
+\fIpattern\fR.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBlegend get \fIpos\fR
+Returns the name of the element whose entry is at the screen position
+\fIpos\fR in the legend.  \fIPos\fR must be in the form "\fI@x,y\fR",
+where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are window coordinates.  If the given
+coordinates do not lie over a legend entry, \f(CW""\fR is returned.
+.SS "PEN COMPONENTS"
+Pens define attributes (both symbol and line style) for elements.
+Pens mirror the configuration options of data elements that pertain to
+how symbols and lines are drawn.  Data elements use pens to determine
+how they are drawn.  A data element may use several pens at once.  In
+this case, the pen used for a particular data point is determined from
+each element's weight vector (see the element's \fB\-weight\fR and
+\fB\-style\fR options).
+.PP
+One pen, called \f(CWactiveLine\fR, is automatically created.
+It's used as the default active pen for elements. So you can change
+the active attributes for all elements by simply reconfiguring this
+pen.
+.CS
+\&.g pen configure "activeLine" -color green
+.CE
+You can create and use several pens. To create a pen, invoke
+the pen component and its create operation.
+.CS
+\&.g pen create myPen
+.CE
+You map pens to a data element using either the element's 
+\fB\-pen\fR or \fB\-activepen\fR options.
+.CS
+\&.g element create "line1" -xdata $x -ydata $tempData \\
+    -pen myPen
+.CE
+An element can use several pens at once. This is done by specifying
+the name of the pen in the element's style list (see the
+\fB\-styles\fR option).
+.CS
+\&.g element configure "line1" -styles { myPen 2.0 3.0 }
+.CE
+This says that any data point with a weight between 2.0 and 3.0
+is to be drawn using the pen \f(CWmyPen\fR.  All other points
+are drawn with the element's default attributes.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for pen components.
+.PP
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBcget \fIpenName \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the option given by \fIoption\fR for
+\fIpenName\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described below
+for the pen \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBconfigure \fIpenName \fR?\fIpenName\fR... ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options of
+\fIpenName\fR. Several pens can be modified at once.  If \fIoption\fR
+isn't specified, a list describing the current options for
+\fIpenName\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified, but not
+\fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.  If one
+or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then for
+each pair, the pen option \fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.  The
+following options are valid for pens.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-color \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color of the traces connecting the data points.  
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of element line. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up to
+11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes and
+gaps on the element line.  Each number must be between 1 and 255.  If
+\fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the lines will be solid.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the interior color of symbols.  If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then
+the interior of the symbol is transparent.  If \fIcolor\fR is
+\f(CWdefcolor\fR, then the color will be the same as the \fB\-color\fR
+option.  The default is \f(CWdefcolor\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR 
+Sets the width of the connecting lines between data points.  If
+\fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, no connecting lines will be drawn between
+symbols.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-offdash \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the stripes when traces are dashed (see the
+\fB\-dashes\fR option).  If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the "off"
+pixels will represent gaps instead of stripes.  If \fIcolor\fR is
+\f(CWdefcolor\fR, then the color will be the same as the \fB\-color\fR
+option.  The default is \f(CWdefcolor\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR 
+Sets the color or the outline around each symbol.  If \fIcolor\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, then no outline is drawn. If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CWdefcolor\fR,
+then the color will be the same as the \fB\-color\fR option.  The
+default is \f(CWdefcolor\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outlinewidth \fIpixels\fR 
+Sets the width of the outline bordering each symbol.  If \fIpixels\fR
+is \f(CW0\fR, no outline will be drawn. The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pixels \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the size of symbols.  If \fIpixels\fR is \f(CW0\fR, no symbols will
+be drawn.  The default is \f(CW0.125i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-symbol \fIsymbol\fR 
+Specifies the symbol for data points.  \fISymbol\fR can be either
+\f(CWsquare\fR, \f(CWcircle\fR, \f(CWdiamond\fR, \f(CWplus\fR, \f(CWcross\fR,
+\f(CWsplus\fR, \f(CWscross\fR, \f(CWtriangle\fR, \f(CW""\fR (where no symbol
+is drawn), or a bitmap.  Bitmaps are specified as "\fIsource\fR
+?\fImask\fR?", where \fIsource\fR is the name of the bitmap, and
+\fImask\fR is the bitmap's optional mask.  The default is
+\f(CWcircle\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-type \fIelemType\fR 
+Specifies the type of element the pen is to be used with.
+This option should only be employed when creating the pen.  This
+is for those that wish to mix different types of elements (bars and
+lines) on the same graph.  The default type is "line".
+.PP
+Pen configuration options may be also be set by the \fBoption\fR
+command.  The resource class is \f(CWPen\fR.  The resource names
+are the names of the pens.
+.CS
+option add *Graph.Pen.Color  blue
+option add *Graph.activeLine.color  green
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBcreate \fIpenName \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a new pen by the name \fIpenName\fR.  No pen by the same
+name can already exist. \fIOption\fR and \fIvalue\fR are described 
+in above in the pen \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen \fBdelete \fR?\fIpenName\fR?...
+Deletes the named pens. A pen is not really
+deleted until it is not longer in use, so it's safe to delete
+pens mapped to elements.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpen names \fR?\fIpattern\fR?...
+Returns a list of pens matching zero or more patterns.  If no
+\fIpattern\fR argument is give, the names of all pens are returned.
+.SS "POSTSCRIPT COMPONENT"
+The graph can generate encapsulated PostScript output.  There
+are several configuration options you can specify to control how the
+plot will be generated.  You can change the page dimensions and
+borders.  The plot itself can be scaled, centered, or rotated to
+landscape.  The PostScript output can be written directly to a file or
+returned through the interpreter.
+.PP
+The following postscript operations are available.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript cget \fIoption\fR 
+Returns the current value of the postscript option given by
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described
+below for the postscript \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript configure \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for PostScript
+generation.  If \fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing 
+the current postscript options for \fIpathName\fR is returned.  If
+\fIoption\fR is specified, but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing
+\fIoption\fR is returned.  If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR
+pairs are specified, then for each pair, the postscript option
+\fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.  The following postscript options
+are available.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-center \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the plot should be centered on the PostScript page.  If
+\fIboolean\fR is false, the plot will be placed in the upper left
+corner of the page.  The default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-colormap \fIvarName\fR
+\fIVarName\fR must be the name of a global array variable that
+specifies a color mapping from the X color name to PostScript.  Each
+element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of PostScript code to set a
+particular color value (e.g. ``\f(CW1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor\fR'').  When
+generating color information in PostScript, the array variable \fIvarName\fR
+is checked if an element of the name as the color exists. If so, it uses 
+its value as the PostScript
+command to set the color.  If this option hasn't been specified, or if
+there isn't an entry in \fIvarName\fR for a given color, then it uses
+the red, green, and blue intensities from the X color.
+.TP
+\fB\-colormode \fImode\fR
+Specifies how to output color information.  \fIMode\fR must be either
+\f(CWcolor\fR (for full color output), \f(CWgray\fR (convert all colors to
+their gray-scale equivalents) or \f(CWmono\fR (convert foreground colors
+to black and background colors to white).  The default mode is
+\f(CWcolor\fR. 
+.TP
+\fB\-fontmap \fIvarName\fR
+\fIVarName\fR must be the name of a global array variable that
+specifies a font mapping from the X font name to PostScript.  Each
+element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of a Tcl list with one or two
+elements; the name and point size of a PostScript font.
+When outputting PostScript commands for a particular font, the array
+variable \fIvarName\fR is checked to see if an element by the 
+specified font exists.  If there is such an element, then the font
+information contained in that element is used in the PostScript
+output.  (If the point size is omitted from the list, the point size
+of the X font is used).  Otherwise the X font is examined in an
+attempt to guess what PostScript font to use.  This works only for
+fonts whose foundry property is \fIAdobe\fR (such as Times, Helvetica,
+Courier, etc.).  If all of this fails then the font defaults to
+\f(CWHelvetica-Bold\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-decorations \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether PostScript commands to generate color backgrounds and 3-D
+borders will be output.  If \fIboolean\fR is false, the background will be 
+white and no 3-D borders will be generated. The
+default is \f(CW1\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the height of the plot.  This lets you print the graph with a
+height different from the one drawn on the screen.  If
+\fIpixels\fR is 0, the height is the same as the widget's height.
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-landscape \fIboolean\fR
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, this specifies the printed area is to be
+rotated 90 degrees.  In non-rotated output the X\-axis of the printed
+area runs along the short dimension of the page (``portrait''
+orientation); in rotated output the X\-axis runs along the long
+dimension of the page (``landscape'' orientation).  Defaults to
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-maxpect \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates to scale the plot so that it fills the PostScript page.
+The aspect ratio of the graph is still retained.  The default is
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-padx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the horizontal padding for the left and right page borders.  The
+borders are exterior to the plot.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or
+two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the left border is padded
+by the first distance and the right border by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR has just one distance, both the left and right borders are
+padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW1i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pady \fIpad\fR 
+Sets the vertical padding for the top and bottom page borders. The
+borders are exterior to the plot.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of one or
+two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the top border is padded
+by the first distance and the bottom border by the second.  If
+\fIpad\fR has just one distance, both the top and bottom borders are
+padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW1i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-paperheight \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the height of the postscript page.  This can be used to select
+between different page sizes (letter, A4, etc).  The default height is
+\f(CW11.0i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-paperwidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the postscript page.  This can be used to select
+between different page sizes (letter, A4, etc).  The default width is
+\f(CW8.5i\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the plot.  This lets you generate a plot
+of a width different from that of the widget.  If \fIpixels\fR
+is 0, the width is the same as the widget's width.  The default is
+\f(CW0\fR.
+.PP
+Postscript configuration options may be also be set by the
+\fBoption\fR command.  The resource name and class are
+\f(CWpostscript\fR and \f(CWPostscript\fR respectively.
+.CS
+option add *Graph.postscript.Decorations false
+option add *Graph.Postscript.Landscape   true
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBpostscript output \fR?\fIfileName\fR? ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Outputs a file of encapsulated PostScript.  If a
+\fIfileName\fR argument isn't present, the command returns the
+PostScript. If any \fIoption-value\fR pairs are present, they set
+configuration options controlling how the PostScript is generated.
+\fIOption\fR and \fIvalue\fR can be anything accepted by the
+postscript \fBconfigure\fR operation above.
+.SS "MARKER COMPONENTS"
+Markers are simple drawing procedures used to annotate or highlight
+areas of the graph.  Markers have various types: text strings,
+bitmaps, images, connected lines, windows, or polygons.  They can be
+associated with a particular element, so that when the element is
+hidden or un-hidden, so is the marker.  By default, markers are the
+last items drawn, so that data elements will appear in
+behind them.  You can change this by configuring the \fB\-under\fR
+option.
+.PP
+Markers, in contrast to elements, don't affect the scaling of the
+coordinate axes.  They can also have \fIelastic\fR coordinates
+(specified by \f(CW-Inf\fR and \f(CWInf\fR respectively) that translate
+into the minimum or maximum limit of the axis.  For example, you can
+place a marker so it always remains in the lower left corner of the
+plotting area, by using the coordinates \f(CW-Inf\fR,\f(CW-Inf\fR.
+.PP
+The following operations are available for markers.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker after \fImarkerId\fR ?\fIafterId\fR?
+Changes the order of the markers, drawing the first
+marker after the second.  If no second \fIafterId\fR argument is
+specified, the marker is placed at the end of the display list.  This
+command can be used to control how markers are displayed since markers
+are drawn in the order of this display list.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker before \fImarkerId\fR ?\fIbeforeId\fR?
+Changes the order of the markers, drawing the first
+marker before the second.  If no second \fIbeforeId\fR argument is
+specified, the marker is placed at the beginning of the display list.
+This command can be used to control how markers are displayed since
+markers are drawn in the order of this display list.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR?  ?\fIcommand\fR? 
+Associates \fIcommand\fR with \fItagName\fR such that whenever the
+event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for a marker with this
+tag, \fIcommand\fR will be invoked.  The syntax is similar to the 
+\fBbind\fR command except that it operates on graph markers, rather 
+than widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for
+complete details on \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on 
+\fIcommand\fR before invoking it.  
+.sp
+If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing 
+any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR.
+If the first character of \fIcommand\fR is \f(CW+\fR then \fIcommand\fR 
+augments an existing binding rather than replacing it. 
+If no \fIcommand\fR argument is provided then the command currently
+associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (it's an error occurs 
+if there's no such binding) is returned.  If both \fIcommand\fR and 
+\fIsequence\fR are missing then a list of all the event sequences for 
+which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. 
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker cget \fIoption\fR
+Returns the current value of the marker configuration option given by
+\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any option described
+below in the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker configure \fImarkerId\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Queries or modifies the configuration options for markers.  If
+\fIoption\fR isn't specified, a list describing the current
+options for \fImarkerId\fR is returned.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
+but not \fIvalue\fR, then a list describing \fIoption\fR is returned.
+If one or more \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then
+for each pair, the marker option \fIoption\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR.
+.sp
+The following options are valid for all markers.
+Each type of marker also has its own type-specific options.  
+They are described in the sections below.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-bindtags \fItagList\fR
+Specifies the binding tags for the marker.  \fITagList\fR is a list
+of binding tag names.  The tags and their order will determine how
+events for markers are handled.  Each tag in the list matching the 
+current event sequence will have its Tcl command executed.  Implicitly 
+the name of the marker is always the first tag in the list.
+The default value is \f(CWall\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-coords \fIcoordList\fR
+Specifies the coordinates of the marker.  \fICoordList\fR is 
+a list of graph coordinates.  The number of coordinates required
+is dependent on the type of marker.  Text, image, and window markers
+need only two coordinates (an X\-Y coordinate).   Bitmap markers
+can take either two or four coordinates (if four, they represent the
+corners of the bitmap). Line markers
+need at least four coordinates, polygons at least six.
+If \fIcoordList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the marker will not be displayed.
+The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-element \fIelemName\fR
+Links the marker with the element \fIelemName\fR.  The marker is
+drawn only if the element is also currently displayed (see the
+element's \fBshow\fR operation).  If \fIelemName\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the
+marker is always drawn.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR 
+Indicates whether the marker is drawn. If \fIboolean\fR is true,
+the marker is not drawn.  The default is \f(CWno\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapx \fIxAxis\fR 
+Specifies the X\-axis to map the marker's X\-coordinates onto.
+\fIXAxis\fR must the name of an axis.  The default is \f(CWx\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-mapy \fIyAxis\fR
+Specifies the Y\-axis to map the marker's Y\-coordinates onto.
+\fIYAxis\fR must the name of an axis.  The default is \f(CWy\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-name \fImarkerId\fR
+Changes the identifier for the marker.  The identifier \fImarkerId\fR 
+can not already be used by another marker.  If this option
+isn't specified, the marker's name is uniquely generated.
+.TP
+\fB\-under \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates whether the marker is drawn below/above data
+elements.  If \fIboolean\fR is true, the marker is be drawn
+underneath the data element symbols and lines.  Otherwise, the marker is
+drawn on top of the element.  The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-xoffset \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies a screen distance to offset the marker horizontally. 
+\fIPixels\fR is a valid screen distance, such as \f(CW2\fR or \f(CW1.2i\fR.
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-yoffset \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies a screen distance to offset the markers vertically.
+\fIPixels\fR is a valid screen distance, such as \f(CW2\fR or \f(CW1.2i\fR.
+The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.PP
+Marker configuration options may also be set by the \fBoption\fR command.
+The resource class is either \f(CWBitmapMarker\fR,  \f(CWImageMarker\fR, 
+\f(CWLineMarker\fR, \f(CWPolygonMarker\fR, \f(CWTextMarker\fR, or \f(CWWindowMarker\fR,
+depending on the type of marker.  The resource name is the name of the
+marker.
+.CS
+option add *Graph.TextMarker.Foreground white
+option add *Graph.BitmapMarker.Foreground white
+option add *Graph.m1.Background     blue
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create \fItype\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
+Creates a marker of the selected type. \fIType\fR may be either
+\f(CWtext\fR, \f(CWline\fR, \f(CWbitmap\fR, \f(CWimage\fR, \f(CWpolygon\fR, or
+\f(CWwindow\fR.  This command returns the marker identifier, 
+used as the \fImarkerId\fR argument in the other marker-related
+commands.  If the \fB\-name\fR option is used, this overrides the
+normal marker identifier.  If the name provided is already used for
+another marker, the new marker will replace the old.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker delete\fR ?\fIname\fR?...
+Removes one of more markers.  The graph will automatically be redrawn
+without the marker.\fR.  
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker exists \fImarkerId\fR 
+Returns \f(CW1\fR if the marker \fImarkerId\fR exists and \f(CW0\fR
+otherwise.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker names\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?  
+Returns the names of all the markers that currently exist.  If
+\fIpattern\fR is supplied, only those markers whose names match it
+will be returned.
+.TP
+\fIpathName \fBmarker type \fImarkerId\fR 
+Returns the type of the marker given by \fImarkerId\fR, such as
+\f(CWline\fR or \f(CWtext\fR.  If \fImarkerId\fR is not a valid a marker
+identifier, \f(CW""\fR is returned.
+.SS "BITMAP MARKERS"
+A bitmap marker displays a bitmap.  The size of the
+bitmap is controlled by the number of coordinates specified.  If two
+coordinates, they specify the position of the top-left corner of the
+bitmap.  The bitmap retains its normal width and height.  If four
+coordinates, the first and second pairs of coordinates represent the
+corners of the bitmap.  The bitmap will be stretched or reduced as
+necessary to fit into the bounding rectangle.
+.PP
+Bitmap markers are created with the marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in
+the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create bitmap \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each 
+sets a configuration options for the marker.  These
+same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used with the marker's
+\fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to bitmap markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Same as the \fB\-fill\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-bitmap \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies the bitmap to be displayed.  If \fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR,
+the marker will not be displayed.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the bitmap.  If \fIcolor\fR is the empty
+string, no background will be transparent.  The default background color is
+\f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR 
+Same as the \fB\-outline\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-mask \fImask\fR
+Specifies a mask for the bitmap to be displayed. This mask is a bitmap
+itself, denoting the pixels that are transparent.  If \fImask\fR is
+\f(CW""\fR, all pixels of the bitmap will be drawn.  The default is
+\f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the foreground color of the bitmap. The default value is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rotate \fItheta\fR
+Sets the rotation of the bitmap.  \fITheta\fR is a real number
+representing the angle of rotation in degrees.  The marker is first
+rotated and then placed according to its anchor position.  The default
+rotation is \f(CW0.0\fR.
+.SS "IMAGE MARKERS"
+A image marker displays an image.  Image markers are
+created with the marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create image \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the marker's \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to image markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+\fIAnchor\fR tells how to position the image relative to the
+positioning point for the image. For example, if \fIanchor\fR
+is \f(CWcenter\fR then the image is centered on the point;  if
+\fIanchor\fR is \f(CWn\fR then the image will be drawn such that
+the top center point of the rectangular region occupied by the
+image will be at the positioning point.
+This option defaults to \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-image \fIimage\fR
+Specifies the image to be drawn.
+If \fIimage\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the marker will not be
+drawn.  The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.SS "LINE MARKERS"
+A line marker displays one or more connected line segments.
+Line markers are created with marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create line \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the marker's \fBconfigure\fR operation.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to line markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the line. \fIDashList\fR is a list of up to 11
+numbers that alternately represent the lengths of the dashes and gaps
+on the line.  Each number must be between 1 and 255.  If
+\fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the marker line will be solid.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the line.  This color is used with
+striped lines (see the \fB\-fdashes\fR option). If \fIcolor\fR is
+the empty string, no background color is drawn (the line will be
+dashed, not striped).  The default background color is \f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the lines.
+The default width is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the foreground color of the line. The default value is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies a stipple pattern used to draw the line, rather than
+a solid line.
+\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap to use as the stipple
+pattern.  If \fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the
+line is drawn in a solid fashion. The default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.SS "POLYGON MARKERS"
+A polygon marker displays a closed region described as two or more
+connected line segments.  It is assumed the first and
+last points are connected.  Polygon markers are created using the
+marker \fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create polygon \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the \fBmarker configure\fR command to change the marker's
+configuration.
+The following options are supported for polygon markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-dashes \fIdashList\fR
+Sets the dash style of the outline of the polygon. \fIDashList\fR is a
+list of up to 11 numbers that alternately represent the lengths of
+the dashes and gaps on the outline.  Each number must be between 1 and
+255. If \fIdashList\fR is \f(CW""\fR, the outline will be a solid line.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the fill color of the polygon.  If \fIcolor\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then
+the interior of the polygon is transparent.
+The default is \f(CWwhite\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-linewidth \fIpixels\fR
+Sets the width of the outline of the polygon. If \fIpixels\fR is zero, 
+no outline is drawn. The default is \f(CW0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the outline of the polygon.  If the polygon is
+stippled (see the \fB\-stipple\fR option), then this represents the
+foreground color of the stipple.  The default is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
+Specifies that the polygon should be drawn with a stippled pattern
+rather than a solid color. \fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap to use as
+the stipple pattern.  If \fIbitmap\fR is \f(CW""\fR, then the polygon is
+filled with a solid color (if the \fB\-fill\fR option is set).  The
+default is \f(CW""\fR.
+.SS "TEXT MARKERS"
+A text marker displays a string of characters on one or more lines of
+text.  Embedded newlines cause line breaks.  They may be used to
+annotate regions of the graph.  Text markers are created with the
+\fBcreate\fR operation in the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create text \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR pairs, 
+each sets a configuration option for the text marker.  
+These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used with the 
+marker's \fBconfigure\fR operation.  
+.PP
+The following options are specific to text markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+\fIAnchor\fR tells how to position the text relative to the
+positioning point for the text. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is
+\f(CWcenter\fR then the text is centered on the point; if
+\fIanchor\fR is \f(CWn\fR then the text will be drawn such that the
+top center point of the rectangular region occupied by the text will
+be at the positioning point.  This default is \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
+Same as the \fB\-fill\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
+Specifies the font of the text.  The default is
+\f(CW*-Helvetica-Bold-R-Normal-*-120-*\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the background color of the text.  If \fIcolor\fR is the empty
+string, no background will be transparent.  The default background color is
+\f(CW""\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
+Same as the \fB\-outline\fR option.
+.TP
+\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
+Specifies how the text should be justified.  This matters only when
+the marker contains more than one line of text. \fIJustify\fR must be
+\f(CWleft\fR, \f(CWright\fR, or \f(CWcenter\fR.  The default is
+\f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
+Sets the color of the text. The default value is \f(CWblack\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-padx \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding to the left and right exteriors of the text.
+\fIPad\fR can be a list of one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR
+has two elements, the left side of the text is padded by the first
+distance and the right side by the second.  If \fIpad\fR has just one
+distance, both the left and right sides are padded evenly.  The
+default is \f(CW4\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-pady \fIpad\fR
+Sets the padding above and below the text.  \fIPad\fR can be a list of
+one or two screen distances.  If \fIpad\fR has two elements, the area above the
+text is padded by the first distance and the area below by the second.
+If \fIpad\fR is just one distance, both the top and bottom areas
+are padded evenly.  The default is \f(CW4\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-rotate \fItheta\fR
+Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the text.  \fITheta\fR is a
+real number representing the angle of rotation.  The marker is first
+rotated along its center and is then drawn according to its anchor
+position. The default is \f(CW0.0\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-text \fItext\fR
+Specifies the text of the marker.  The exact way the text is
+displayed may be affected by other options such as \fB\-anchor\fR or
+\fB\-rotate\fR.
+.SS "WINDOW MARKERS"
+A window marker displays a widget at a given position.
+Window markers are created with the marker's \fBcreate\fR operation in
+the form:
+.DS
+\fIpathName \fBmarker create window \fR?\fIoption value\fR?...
+.DE
+There may be many \fIoption\fR-\fIvalue\fR
+pairs, each sets a configuration option
+for the marker.  These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
+used with the marker's \fBconfigure\fR command.
+.PP
+The following options are specific to window markers:
+.TP
+\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
+\fIAnchor\fR tells how to position the widget relative to the
+positioning point for the widget. For example, if \fIanchor\fR is
+\f(CWcenter\fR then the widget is centered on the point; if \fIanchor\fR
+is \f(CWn\fR then the widget will be displayed such that the top center
+point of the rectangular region occupied by the widget will be at the
+positioning point.  This option defaults to \f(CWcenter\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the height to assign to the marker's window.  If this option
+isn't specified, or if it is specified as \f(CW""\fR, then the window is
+given whatever height the widget requests internally.
+.TP
+\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
+Specifies the width to assign to the marker's window.  If this option
+isn't specified, or if it is specified as \f(CW""\fR, then the window is
+given whatever width the widget requests internally.
+.TP
+\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
+Specifies the widget to be managed by the graph.  \fIPathName\fR must
+be a child of the \fBgraph\fR widget.
+.SH "GRAPH COMPONENT BINDINGS"
+Specific graph components, such as elements, markers and legend
+entries, can have a command trigger when event occurs in them, much
+like canvas items in Tk's canvas widget.  Not all event sequences are
+valid.  The only binding events that may be specified are those
+related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
+\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR).
+.PP
+Only one element or marker can be picked during an event.  This means,
+that if the mouse is directly over both an element and a marker, only
+the uppermost component is selected.  This isn't true for legend entries.  
+Both a legend entry and an element (or marker) binding commands 
+will be invoked if both items are picked.
+.PP
+It is possible for multiple bindings to match a particular event.
+This could occur, for example, if one binding is associated with the
+element name and another is associated with one of the element's tags
+(see the \fB\-bindtags\fR option).  When this occurs, all of the 
+matching bindings are invoked.  A binding associated with the element
+name is invoked first, followed by one binding for each of the element's 
+bindtags.  If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag, 
+then only the most specific binding is invoked.  A continue command 
+in a binding script terminates that script, and a break command 
+terminates that script and skips any remaining scripts for the event, 
+just as for the bind command.
+.PP
+The \fB\-bindtags\fR option for these components controls addition
+tag names which can be matched.  Implicitly elements and markers
+always have tags matching their names.  Setting the value of
+the \fB\-bindtags\fR option doesn't change this.
+.SH "C LANGUAGE API"
+You can manipulate data elements from the C language.  There
+may be situations where it is too expensive to translate the data
+values from ASCII strings.  Or you might want to read data in a
+special file format.
+.PP
+Data can manipulated from the C language using BLT vectors.
+You specify the X-Y data coordinates of an element as vectors and
+manipulate the vector from C.  The graph will be redrawn automatically
+after the vectors are updated.
+.PP
+From Tcl, create the vectors and configure the element to use them.
+.CS
+vector X Y
+\&.g element configure line1 -xdata X -ydata Y
+.CE
+To set data points from C, you pass the values as arrays of doubles
+using the \fBBlt_ResetVector\fR call.  The vector is reset with the
+new data and at the next idle point (when Tk re-enters its event
+loop), the graph will be redrawn automatically.
+.CS
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <blt.h>
+
+register int i;
+Blt_Vector *xVec, *yVec;
+double x[50], y[50];
+
+/* Get the BLT vectors "X" and "Y" (created above from Tcl) */
+if ((Blt_GetVector(interp, "X", &xVec) != TCL_OK) ||
+    (Blt_GetVector(interp, "Y", &yVec) != TCL_OK)) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+for (i = 0; i < 50; i++) {
+    x[i] = i * 0.02;
+    y[i] = sin(x[i]);
+}	
+
+/* Put the data into BLT vectors */
+if ((Blt_ResetVector(xVec, x, 50, 50, TCL_VOLATILE) != TCL_OK) ||
+    (Blt_ResetVector(yVec, y, 50, 50, TCL_VOLATILE) != TCL_OK)) {
+   return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+.CE
+See the \fBvector\fR manual page for more details.
+.SH SPEED TIPS
+There may be cases where the graph needs to be drawn and updated as
+quickly as possible.  If drawing speed becomes a big
+problem, here are a few tips to speed up displays.
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+Try to minimize the number of data points.  The more data points
+the looked at, the more work the graph must do.
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+If your data is generated as floating point values, the time required
+to convert the data values to and from ASCII strings can be
+significant, especially when there any many data points.  You can
+avoid the redundant string-to-decimal conversions using the C API to
+BLT vectors.
+.TP 2
+\(bu
+Data elements without symbols are drawn faster than with symbols.
+Set the data element's \fB\-symbol\fR option to \f(CWnone\fR.  If you need to
+draw symbols, try using the simple symbols such as \f(CWsplus\fR and
+\f(CWscross\fR.
+.TP 2
+\(bu
+Don't stipple or dash the element.  Solid lines are much faster.
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+If you update data elements frequently, try turning off the
+widget's \fB\-bufferelements\fR option.  When the graph is first
+displayed, it draws data elements into an internal pixmap.  The pixmap
+acts as a cache, so that when the graph needs to be redrawn again, and
+the data elements or coordinate axes haven't changed, the pixmap is
+simply copied to the screen.  This is especially useful when you are
+using markers to highlight points and regions on the graph.  But if
+the graph is updated frequently, changing either the element data or
+coordinate axes, the buffering becomes redundant.
+.SH LIMITATIONS
+Auto-scale routines do not use requested min/max limits as boundaries
+when the axis is logarithmically scaled.
+.PP
+The PostScript output generated for polygons with more than 1500
+points may exceed the limits of some printers (See PostScript Language
+Reference Manual, page 568).  The work-around is to break the polygon
+into separate pieces.
+.SH KEYWORDS
+graph, widget
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/vector.html b/tkblt/doc/vector.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef097c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/vector.html
@@ -0,0 +1,704 @@
+<HTML>
+<BODY>
+<PRE>
+<!-- Manpage converted by man2html 3.0.1 -->
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2><PRE>
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>create</B> <I>vecName</I> ?<I>vecName</I>...? ?<I>switches</I>?
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>destroy</B> <I>vecName</I> ?<I>vecName</I>...?
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>expr</B> <I>expression</I>
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>...?
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2><PRE>
+       The <B>vector</B> command creates an array of floating point values.  The vec-
+       tor's components can be manipulated in three ways: through a Tcl  array
+       variable, a Tcl command, or the C API.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>INTRODUCTION</H2><PRE>
+       A vector is an ordered set of real numbers.  The components of a vector
+       are indexed by integers.
+
+       Vectors are common data structures for many applications.  For example,
+       a  graph  may  use  two vectors to represent the X-Y coordinates of the
+       data plotted.  The graph will automatically be redrawn when the vectors
+       are  updated or changed. By using vectors, you can separate data analy-
+       sis from the graph widget.  This makes it easier, for example,  to  add
+       data  transformations, such as splines.  It's possible to plot the same
+       data to in multiple graphs, where each graph presents a different  view
+       or scale of the data.
+
+       You  could  try to use Tcl's associative arrays as vectors.  Tcl arrays
+       are easy to use.  You can access individual elements randomly by speci-
+       fying  the  index,  or  the set the entire array by providing a list of
+       index and value pairs for each element.  The disadvantages of  associa-
+       tive  arrays  as  vectors  lie in the fact they are implemented as hash
+       tables.
+
+       <B>o</B> There's no implied ordering to the associative arrays.  If  you  used
+         vectors  for  plotting, you would want to insure the second component
+         comes after the first, an so on.  This isn't  possible  since  arrays
+         are actually hash tables.  For example, you can't get a range of val-
+         ues between two indices.  Nor can you sort an array.
+
+       <B>o</B> Arrays consume lots of memory when the  number  of  elements  becomes
+         large  (tens of thousands).  This is because each element's index and
+         value are stored as strings in the hash table.
+
+       <B>o</B> The C programming interface is unwieldy.  Normally with vectors,  you
+         would  like to view the Tcl array as you do a C array, as an array of
+         floats or doubles.  But with hash tables, you must convert  both  the
+         index  and  value to and from decimal strings, just to access an ele-
+         ment in the array.  This makes it cumbersome to perform operations on
+         the array as a whole.
+
+       The  <B>vector</B>  command  tries to overcome these disadvantages while still
+       0.0.  In addition, both a Tcl command and array variable, both named y,
+       are created.  You can use either the command or variable  to  query  or
+       modify components of the vector.  # Set the first value.  set <B>y(0)</B> 9.25
+       puts "y has [y length] components" The array y can be used to  read  or
+       set individual components of the vector.  Vector components are indexed
+       from zero.  The array index must be a number less than  the  number  of
+       components.  For example, it's an error if you try to set the 51st ele-
+       ment of y.  # This is an error. The vector only has 50 components.  set
+       <B>y(50)</B> 0.02 You can also specify a range of indices using a colon (:) to
+       separate the first and last indices of the range.  # Set the first  six
+       components  of y set y(0:5) 25.2 If you don't include an index, then it
+       will default to the first and/or last component of the vector.  # Print
+       out  all  the  components  of y puts "y = $y(:)" There are special non-
+       numeric indices.  The index end, specifies the last  component  of  the
+       vector.  It's an error to use this index if the vector is empty (length
+       is zero).  The index ++end can be used to extend the vector by one com-
+       ponent  and initialize it to a specific value.  You can't read from the
+       array using this index, though.  # Extend the vector by one  component.
+       set  y(++end)  0.02  The  other  special indices are min and max.  They
+       return the current smallest and largest components of  the  vector.   #
+       Print the bounds of the vector puts "min=$y(min) max=$y(max)" To delete
+       components from a vector, simply unset the corresponding array element.
+       In the following example, the first component of y is deleted.  All the
+       remaining components of y will be moved down by one index as the length
+       of  the  vector  is reduced by one.  # Delete the first component unset
+       <B>y(0)</B> puts "new first element is $<B>y(0)</B>" The  vector's  Tcl  command  can
+       also  be  used to query or set the vector.  # Create and set the compo-
+       nents of a new vector blt::vector create x x set { 0.02 0.04 0.06  0.08
+       0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 } Here we've created a vector x without a
+       initial length specification.  In this case, the length is  zero.   The
+       <B>set</B>  operation  resets  the vector, extending it and setting values for
+       each new component.
+
+       There are several operations for vectors.  The  <B>range</B>  operation  lists
+       the  components of a vector between two indices.  # List the components
+       puts "x = [x range 0 end]" You can search for a particular value  using
+       the  <B>search</B>  operation.  It returns a list of indices of the components
+       with the same value.  If no component has the same  value,  it  returns
+       "".   #  Find  the index of the biggest component set indices [x search
+       $x(max)] Other operations copy,  append,  or  sort  vectors.   You  can
+       append  vectors  or  new values onto an existing vector with the <B>append</B>
+       operation.  # Append assorted vectors and values to x x append x2 x3  {
+       2.3  4.5  }  x4 The <B>sort</B> operation sorts the vector.  If any additional
+       vectors are specified, they are rearranged in the  same  order  as  the
+       vector.   For example, you could use it to sort data points represented
+       by x and y vectors.  # Sort the data points x sort y The  vector  x  is
+       sorted  while  the  components of y are rearranged so that the original
+       x,y coordinate pairs are retained.
+
+       The <B>expr</B> operation lets you perform arithmetic on vectors.  The  result
+       is stored in the vector.  # Add the two vectors and a scalar x expr { x
+       + y } x expr { x * 2 } When a vector is modified, resized, or  deleted,
+       Vectors are created using the <B>vector</B> <B>create</B> operation.  Th <B>create</B> oper-
+       ation can be invoked in one of three forms:
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>create</B> <I>vecName</I>
+              This  creates a new vector <I>vecName</I> which initially has no compo-
+              nents.
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>create</B> <I>vecName</I>(<I>size</I>)
+              This second form creates a new vector which  will  contain  <I>size</I>
+              number  of  components.  The components will be indexed starting
+              from zero (0). The default value for the components is 0.0.
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>create</B> <I>vecName</I>(<I>first</I>:<I>last</I>)
+              The last form creates a new  vector  of  indexed  <I>first</I>  through
+              <I>last</I>.   <I>First</I> and <I>last</I> can be any integer value so long as <I>first</I>
+              is less than <I>last</I>.
+
+       Vector names must start with a letter and consist of  letters,  digits,
+       or  underscores.   #  Error:  must start with letter blt::vector create
+       1abc You can automatically generate vector names using the "#auto" vec-
+       tor  name.   The  <B>create</B>  operation will generate a unique vector name.
+       set vec [blt::vector create #auto] puts "$vec has [$vec length]  compo-
+       nents"
+
+   <B>VECTOR</B> <B>INDICES</B>
+       Vectors  are indexed by integers.  You can access the individual vector
+       components via its array variable or Tcl command.   The  string  repre-
+       senting  the index can be an integer, a numeric expression, a range, or
+       a special keyword.
+
+       The index must lie within the current range of the vector, otherwise an
+       an  error  message  is  returned.  Normally the indices of a vector are
+       start from 0.  But you can use the <B>offset</B> operation to  change  a  vec-
+       tor's  indices  on-the-fly.   puts  $<B>vecName(0)</B>  vecName offset -5 puts
+       $vecName(-5) You can also use  numeric  expressions  as  indices.   The
+       result  of  the expression must be an integer value.  set n 21 set vec-
+       Name($n+3) 50.2 The following special non-numeric  indices  are  avail-
+       able:  min,  max, end, and ++end.  puts "min = $vecName($min)" set vec-
+       Name(end) -1.2 The indices min and max will return the minimum and max-
+       imum values of the vector.  The index end returns the value of the last
+       component in the vector.  The index ++end is used to append  new  value
+       onto  the vector.  It automatically extends the vector by one component
+       and sets its value.  # Append an new component  to  the  end  set  vec-
+       Name(++end)  3.2 A range of indices can be indicated by a colon (:).  #
+       Set the first six components to 1.0 set vecName(0:5) 1.0 If no index is
+       supplied the first or last component is assumed.  # Print the values of
+       all the components puts $vecName(:)
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>VECTOR OPERATIONS</H2><PRE>
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>create</B> <I>vecName</I>?(<I>size</I>)?... ?<I>switches</I>?
+              The <B>create</B> operation creates a new vector <I>vecName</I>.  Both  a  Tcl
+              command  and  array variable <I>vecName</I> are also created.  The name
+                     then  no  variable  will be mapped.  You can always map a
+                     variable back to the vector using the  vector's  <B>variable</B>
+                     operation.
+
+              <B>-command</B> <I>cmdName</I>
+                     Maps  a  Tcl  command  to  the  vector. The vector can be
+                     accessed using <I>cmdName</I> and one  of  the  vector  instance
+                     operations.   A  Tcl  command by that name cannot already
+                     exist.  If <I>cmdName</I> is the empty string, no  command  map-
+                     ping will be made.
+
+              <B>-watchunset</B> <I>boolean</I>
+                     Indicates  that  the  vector  should automatically delete
+                     itself if the variable  associated  with  the  vector  is
+                     unset.  By default, the vector will not be deleted.  This
+                     is different from  previous  releases.   Set  <I>boolean</I>  to
+                     "true" to get the old behavior.
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>destroy</B> <I>vecName</I> ?<I>vecName...</I>?
+              Deletes  one  or  more  vectors.  Both the Tcl command and array
+              variable are removed also.
+
+       <B>blt::vector</B> <B>expr</B> <I>expression</I>
+              All binary operators take vectors  as  operands  (remember  that
+              numbers are treated as one-component vectors).  The exact action
+              of binary operators depends upon the length of the second  oper-
+              and.   If  the  second operand has only one component, then each
+              element of the first vector operand is computed by  that  value.
+              For  example,  the  expression "x * 2" multiples all elements of
+              the vector x by 2.  If the second operand has more than one com-
+              ponent,  both  operands  must  be the same length.  Each pair of
+              corresponding elements are computed.  So "x + y"  adds  the  the
+              first components of x and y together, the second, and so on.
+
+              The  valid  operators  are  listed  below, grouped in decreasing
+              order of precedence:
+
+              <B>-</B>  <B>!</B>                Unary minus  and  logical  NOT.   The  unary
+                                  minus  flips  the  sign of each component in
+                                  the  vector.   The  logical   not   operator
+                                  returns  a vector of whose values are 0.0 or
+                                  1.0.  For each  non-zero  component  1.0  is
+                                  returned, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+              <B>^</B>                   Exponentiation.
+
+              <B>*</B>  <B>/</B>  <B>%</B>             Multiply, divide, remainder.
+
+              <B>+</B>  <B>-</B>                Add and subtract.
+
+              <B>&lt;&lt;</B>  <B>&gt;&gt;</B>              Left and right shift.  Circularly shifts the
+                                  values of the vector (not implemented  yet).
+
+              <B>&amp;&amp;</B>                  Logical AND.  Produces a 1  result  if  both
+                                  operands are non-zero, 0 otherwise.
+
+              <B>||</B>                  Logical OR.  Produces a 0 result if both op-
+                                  erands are zero, 1 otherwise.
+
+              <I>x</I><B>?</B><I>y</I><B>:</B><I>z</I>               If-then-else, as  in  C.   (Not  implemented
+                                  yet).
+
+              See  the  C  manual  for more details on the results produced by
+              each operator.  All of the binary operators group  left-to-right
+              within the same precedence level.
+
+              Several  mathematical functions are supported for vectors.  Each
+              of the following functions invokes the math library function  of
+              the  same name; see the manual entries for the library functions
+              for details on what they do.  The operation is  applied  to  all
+              elements     of    the    vector    returning    the    results.
+              <B>acos</B>    <B>cos</B>     <B>hypot</B>   <B>sinh</B>        <B>asin</B>    <B>cosh</B>    <B>log</B>     <B>sqrt</B>
+              <B>atan</B>    <B>exp</B>     <B>log10</B>   <B>tan</B> <B>ceil</B>    <B>floor</B>   <B>sin</B>     <B>tanh</B>
+
+              Additional functions are:
+
+              <B>abs</B>       Returns the absolute value of each component.
+
+              <B>random</B>    Returns a vector of non-negative values uniformly dis-
+                        tributed between [0.0, 1.0) using <I>drand48</I>.   The  seed
+                        comes from the internal clock of the machine or may be
+                        set manual with the srandom function.
+
+              <B>round</B>     Rounds each component of the vector.
+
+              <B>srandom</B>   Initializes the random number generator using <I>srand48</I>.
+                        The high order 32-bits are set using the integral por-
+                        tion of the first vector component. All  other  compo-
+                        nents  are  ignored.  The low order 16-bits are set to
+                        an arbitrary value.
+
+              The following functions return a single value.
+
+              <B>adev</B>      Returns the average deviation (defined as the  sum  of
+                        the  absolute values of the differences between compo-
+                        nent and the mean, divided by the length of  the  vec-
+                        tor).
+
+              <B>kurtosis</B>  Returns  the  degree  of peakedness (fourth moment) of
+                        the vector.
+
+              <B>length</B>    Returns the number of components in the vector.
+
+              <B>max</B>       Returns the vector's maximum value.
+
+
+              <B>skew</B>      Returns  the skewness (or third moment) of the vector.
+                        This characterizes the degree of asymmetry of the vec-
+                        tor about the mean.
+
+              <B>sum</B>       Returns the sum of the components.
+
+              <B>var</B>       Returns  the  variance  of  the vector. The sum of the
+                        squared differences between  each  component  and  the
+                        mean  is computed.  The variance is the sum divided by
+                        the length of the vector minus 1.
+
+              The last set returns a vector of the same length  as  the  argu-
+              ment.
+
+              <B>norm</B>      Scales  the  values  of the vector to lie in the range
+                        [0.0..1.0].
+
+              <B>sort</B>      Returns the  vector  components  sorted  in  ascending
+                        order.
+
+       <B>vector</B> <B>names</B> ?<I>pattern</I>?
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>INSTANCE OPERATIONS</H2><PRE>
+       You  can  also use the vector's Tcl command to query or modify it.  The
+       general form is <I>vecName</I> <I>operation</I>  ?<I>arg</I>?...   Both  <I>operation</I>  and  its
+       arguments  determine the exact behavior of the command.  The operations
+       available for vectors are listed below.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>append</B> <I>item</I> ?<I>item</I>?...
+              Appends the component values from <I>item</I> to <I>vecName</I>.  <I>Item</I> can  be
+              either the name of a vector or a list of numeric values.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>binread</B> <I>channel</I> ?<I>length</I>? ?<I>switches</I>?
+              Reads  binary  values  from  a  Tcl  channel.  Values are either
+              appended to the end of the vector or placed  at  a  given  index
+              (using  the  <B>-at</B>  option), overwriting existing values.  Data is
+              read until EOF is found on the channel or a specified number  of
+              values  <I>length</I>  are  read (note that this is not necessarily the
+              same as the number of bytes). The following  switches  are  sup-
+              ported:
+
+              <B>-swap</B>  Swap  bytes  and  words.   The default endian is the host
+                     machine.
+
+              <B>-at</B> <I>index</I>
+                     New values will start at vector index <I>index</I>.   This  will
+                     overwrite any current values.
+
+              <B>-format</B> <I>format</I>
+                     Specifies  the  format of the data.  <I>Format</I> can be one of
+                     the following: "i1", "i2", "i4", "i8", "u1,  "u2",  "u4",
+
+              This is useful when the vector is large.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>delete</B> <I>index</I> ?<I>index</I>?...
+              Deletes the <I>index</I>th component from the vector <I>vecName</I>.  <I>Index</I> is
+              the  index  of  the  element to be deleted.  This is the same as
+              unsetting the array variable element <I>index</I>.  The vector is  com-
+              pacted after all the indices have been deleted.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>dup</B> <I>destName</I>
+              Copies  <I>vecName</I>  to <I>destName</I>. <I>DestName</I> is the name of a destina-
+              tion vector.  If a vector <I>destName</I> already exists, it  is  over-
+              written  with the components of <I>vecName</I>.  Otherwise a new vector
+              is created.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>expr</B> <I>expression</I>
+              Computes the expression and resets  the  values  of  the  vector
+              accordingly.    Both  scalar  and  vector  math  operations  are
+              allowed.  All values in expressions are either real  numbers  or
+              names of vectors.  All numbers are treated as one component vec-
+              tors.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>length</B> ?<I>newSize</I>?
+              Queries or resets the number of components in <I>vecName</I>.   <I>NewSize</I>
+              is  a  number specifying the new size of the vector.  If <I>newSize</I>
+              is smaller than the current size of <I>vecName</I>,  <I>vecName</I>  is  trun-
+              cated.   If  <I>newSize</I>  is greater, the vector is extended and the
+              new components are initialized to 0.0.  If no  <I>newSize</I>  argument
+              is present, the current length of the vector is returned.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>merge</B> <I>srcName</I> ?<I>srcName</I>?...
+              Merges  the  named  vectors into a single vector.  The resulting
+              vector is formed by merging the components of each source vector
+              one index at a time.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>notify</B> <I>keyword</I>
+              Controls  how vector clients are notified of changes to the vec-
+              tor.  The exact behavior is determined by <I>keyword</I>.
+
+              always Indicates that clients are  to  be  notified  immediately
+                     whenever the vector is updated.
+
+              never  Indicates that no clients are to be notified.
+
+              whenidle
+                     Indicates  that  clients  are  to be notified at the next
+                     idle point whenever the vector is updated.
+
+              now    If any client notifications is  currently  pending,  they
+                     are notified immediately.
+
+              cancel Cancels  pending  notifications of clients using the vec-
+                     tor.
+
+              <I>density</I> number of new components, whose values are  evenly  dis-
+              tributed between the original components values.  This is useful
+              for generating abscissas to be interpolated along a spline.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>range</B> <I>firstIndex</I> ?<I>lastIndex</I>?...
+              Returns a list of numeric values representing the vector  compo-
+              nents  between  two  indices.  Both <I>firstIndex</I> and <I>lastIndex</I> are
+              indices representing the range of components to be returned.  If
+              <I>lastIndex</I>  is less than <I>firstIndex</I>, the components are listed in
+              reverse order.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>search</B> <I>value</I> ?<I>value</I>?
+              Searches for a value or range of values among the components  of
+              <I>vecName</I>.   If  one <I>value</I> argument is given, a list of indices of
+              the components which equal <I>value</I> is returned.  If a second <I>value</I>
+              is  also  provided, then the indices of all components which lie
+              within the range of the two values are returned.  If  no  compo-
+              nents are found, then "" is returned.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>set</B> <I>item</I>
+              Resets  the components of the vector to <I>item</I>. <I>Item</I> can be either
+              a list of numeric expressions or another vector.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>seq</B> <I>start</I> ?<I>finish</I>? ?<I>step</I>?
+              Generates a sequence of values starting with  the  value  <I>start</I>.
+              <I>Finish</I>  indicates  the  terminating  value of the sequence.  The
+              vector is automatically resized to contain  just  the  sequence.
+              If three arguments are present, <I>step</I> designates the interval.
+
+              With  only two arguments (no <I>finish</I> argument), the sequence will
+              continue until the vector is filled.   With  one  argument,  the
+              interval defaults to 1.0.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>sort</B> ?<B>-reverse</B>? ?<I>argName</I>?...
+              Sorts  the  vector <I>vecName</I> in increasing order.  If the <B>-reverse</B>
+              flag is present, the vector is sorted in decreasing  order.   If
+              other  arguments <I>argName</I> are present, they are the names of vec-
+              tors which will be rearranged in the  same  manner  as  <I>vecName</I>.
+              Each  vector  must be the same length as <I>vecName</I>.  You could use
+              this to sort the x vector of a graph, while still retaining  the
+              same x,y coordinate pairs in a y vector.
+
+       <I>vecName</I> <B>variable</B> <I>varName</I>
+              Maps  a  Tcl  variable to the vector, creating another means for
+              accessing the vector.  The variable <I>varName</I> can't already exist.
+              This overrides any current variable mapping the vector may have.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>C LANGUAGE API</H2><PRE>
+       You can create, modify, and destroy vectors from C code, using  library
+       routines.   You  need to include the header file blt.h. It contains the
+       definition of the structure <B>Blt_Vector</B>, which  represents  the  vector.
+       It appears below.  typedef struct {
+       <B>Blt_CreateVector</B>
+
+         Synopsis: int <B>Blt_CreateVector</B> (<I>interp</I>, <I>vecName</I>, <I>length</I>, <I>vecPtrPtr</I>)
+                      Tcl_Interp  *<I>interp</I>; char *<I>vecName</I>; int <I>length</I>; Blt_Vec-
+                      tor **<I>vecPtrPtr</I>;
+
+         Description:
+                   Creates a new vector  <I>vecName</I>  with  a  length  of  <I>length</I>.
+                   <B>Blt_CreateVector</B>  creates  both a new Tcl command and array
+                   variable <I>vecName</I>.  Neither a  command  nor  variable  named
+                   <I>vecName</I>  can  already  exist.   A  pointer to the vector is
+                   placed into <I>vecPtrPtr</I>.
+
+         Results:  Returns TCL_OK if the vector is successfully  created.   If
+                   <I>length</I>  is  negative,  a  Tcl  variable  or command <I>vecName</I>
+                   already exists, or memory cannot be allocated for the  vec-
+                   tor,  then  TCL_ERROR  is  returned and <I>interp-&gt;result</I> will
+                   contain an error message.
+
+
+       <B>Blt_DeleteVectorByName</B>
+
+         Synopsis: int <B>Blt_DeleteVectorByName</B> (<I>interp</I>, <I>vecName</I>)
+                      Tcl_Interp *<I>interp</I>; char *<I>vecName</I>;
+
+         Description:
+                   Removes the vector <I>vecName</I>.  <I>VecName</I> is the name of a  vec-
+                   tor  which  must  already  exist.  Both the Tcl command and
+                   array variable <I>vecName</I> are destroyed.  All clients  of  the
+                   vector  will  be  notified  immediately that the vector has
+                   been destroyed.
+
+         Results:  Returns TCL_OK if the vector is successfully  deleted.   If
+                   <I>vecName</I>  is  not  the  name  a  vector,  then  TCL_ERROR is
+                   returned and <I>interp-&gt;result</I> will contain an error  message.
+
+
+       <B>Blt_DeleteVector</B>
+
+         Synopsis: int <B>Blt_DeleteVector</B> (<I>vecPtr</I>)
+                      Blt_Vector *<I>vecPtr</I>;
+
+         Description:
+                   Removes  the  vector  pointed  to  by  <I>vecPtr</I>.  <I>VecPtr</I> is a
+                   pointer to a vector,  typically  set  by  <B>Blt_GetVector</B>  or
+                   <B>Blt_CreateVector</B>.   Both the Tcl command and array variable
+                   of the vector are destroyed.  All  clients  of  the  vector
+                   will  be  notified  immediately  that  the  vector has been
+                   destroyed.
+
+         Results:  Returns TCL_OK if the vector is successfully  deleted.   If
+                   <I>vecName</I>  is  not  the  name  a  vector,  then  TCL_ERROR is
+
+         Results:  Returns TCL_OK if the vector is successfully retrieved.  If
+                   <I>vecName</I>  is  not  the  name  of a vector, then TCL_ERROR is
+                   returned and <I>interp-&gt;result</I> will contain an error  message.
+
+
+       <B>Blt_ResetVector</B>
+
+
+         Synopsis: int  <B>Blt_ResetVector</B>  (<I>vecPtr</I>,  <I>dataArr</I>,         <I>numValues</I>,
+                   <I>arraySize</I>, <I>freeProc</I>)
+                      Blt_Vector *<I>vecPtr</I>; double *<I>dataArr</I>; int *<I>numValues</I>; int
+                      *<I>arraySize</I>; Tcl_FreeProc *<I>freeProc</I>;
+
+         Description:
+                   Resets  the  components of the vector pointed to by <I>vecPtr</I>.
+                   Calling <B>Blt_ResetVector</B> will trigger the vector to dispatch
+                   notifications  to its clients. <I>DataArr</I> is the array of dou-
+                   bles which represents the vector  data.  <I>NumValues</I>  is  the
+                   number  of  elements  in the array. <I>ArraySize</I> is the actual
+                   size of the array (the array may be bigger than the  number
+                   of values stored in it). <I>FreeProc</I> indicates how the storage
+                   for the vector component array (<I>dataArr</I>) was allocated.  It
+                   is used to determine how to reallocate memory when the vec-
+                   tor is resized  or  destroyed.   It  must  be  TCL_DYNAMIC,
+                   TCL_STATIC,  TCL_VOLATILE,  or  a  pointer to a function to
+                   free the memory allocated for the vector array. If <I>freeProc</I>
+                   is  TCL_VOLATILE,  it indicates that <I>dataArr</I> must be copied
+                   and saved.  If <I>freeProc</I> is TCL_DYNAMIC, it  indicates  that
+                   <I>dataArr</I>  was dynamically allocated and that Tcl should free
+                   <I>dataArr</I> if necessary.  Static indicates that nothing should
+                   be done to release storage for <I>dataArr</I>.
+
+         Results:  Returns  TCL_OK  if the vector is successfully resized.  If
+                   <I>newSize</I> is negative, a vector <I>vecName</I> does  not  exist,  or
+                   memory  cannot  be allocated for the vector, then TCL_ERROR
+                   is returned and <I>interp-&gt;result</I> will contain an  error  mes-
+                   sage.
+
+
+       <B>Blt_ResizeVector</B>
+
+         Synopsis: int <B>Blt_ResizeVector</B> (<I>vecPtr</I>, <I>newSize</I>)
+                      Blt_Vector *<I>vecPtr</I>; int <I>newSize</I>;
+
+         Description:
+                   Resets  the  length  of  the vector pointed to by <I>vecPtr</I> to
+                   <I>newSize</I>.  If <I>newSize</I> is smaller than the  current  size  of
+                   the  vector,  it  is truncated.  If <I>newSize</I> is greater, the
+                   vector is extended and the new components  are  initialized
+                   to 0.0.  Calling <B>Blt_ResetVector</B> will trigger the vector to
+                   dispatch notifications.
+
+            Results:  Returns 1 if a vector <I>vecName</I> exists and 0 otherwise.
+
+
+         If  your  application  needs to be notified when a vector changes, it
+         can allocate a unique <I>client</I> <I>identifier</I> for itself.  Using this iden-
+         tifier,  you  can  then  register a call-back to be made whenever the
+         vector is updated or destroyed.  By default, the call-backs are  made
+         at the next idle point.  This can be changed to occur at the time the
+         vector is modified.  An application can allocate more than one  iden-
+         tifier  for any vector.  When the client application is done with the
+         vector, it should free the identifier.
+
+         The call-back routine must of the following type.
+
+                typedef void (<B>Blt_VectorChangedProc</B>) (Tcl_Interp *<I>interp</I>,
+                   ClientData <I>clientData</I>, Blt_VectorNotify <I>notify</I>);
+
+         <I>ClientData</I> is passed to this routine whenever it is called.  You  can
+         use  this  to pass information to the call-back.  The <I>notify</I> argument
+         indicates whether the vector has been updated of destroyed. It is  an
+         enumerated type.
+
+                typedef enum {
+                    BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_UPDATE=1,
+                    BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_DESTROY=2 } <B>Blt_VectorNotify</B>;
+
+
+         <B>Blt_AllocVectorId</B>
+
+            Synopsis: Blt_VectorId <B>Blt_AllocVectorId</B> (<I>interp</I>, <I>vecName</I>)
+                        Tcl_Interp *<I>interp</I>; char *<I>vecName</I>;
+
+            Description:
+                      Allocates  an client identifier for with the vector <I>vec-</I>
+                      <I>Name</I>.  This identifier can be used to  specify  a  call-
+                      back  which  is  triggered when the vector is updated or
+                      destroyed.
+
+            Results:  Returns a client identifier if successful.   If  <I>vecName</I>
+                      is  not  the name of a vector, then NULL is returned and
+                      <I>interp-&gt;result</I> will contain an error message.
+
+
+         <B>Blt_GetVectorById</B>
+
+            Synopsis: int <B>Blt_GetVector</B> (<I>interp</I>, <I>clientId</I>, <I>vecPtrPtr</I>)
+                        Tcl_Interp *<I>interp</I>; Blt_VectorId <I>clientId</I>;  Blt_Vector
+                        **<I>vecPtrPtr</I>;
+
+            Description:
+                      Retrieves  the  vector  used by <I>clientId</I>.  <I>ClientId</I> is a
+                      valid   vector   client    identifier    allocated    by
+                      Specifies  a call-back routine to be called whenever the
+                      vector associated with <I>clientId</I> is updated  or  deleted.
+                      <I>Proc</I>  is  a  pointer to call-back routine and must be of
+                      the type <B>Blt_VectorChangedProc</B>.  <I>ClientData</I>  is  a  one-
+                      word  value  to  be  passed  to  the  routine when it is
+                      invoked. If <I>proc</I> is NULL, then the client is  not  noti-
+                      fied.
+
+            Results:  The  designated call-back procedure will be invoked when
+                      the vector is updated or destroyed.
+
+
+         <B>Blt_FreeVectorId</B>
+
+            Synopsis: void <B>Blt_FreeVectorId</B> (<I>clientId</I>);
+                        Blt_VectorId <I>clientId</I>;
+
+            Description:
+                      Frees the client identifier.  Memory allocated  for  the
+                      identifier  is  released.   The client will no longer be
+                      notified when the vector is modified.
+
+            Results:  The designated call-back procedure will be no longer  be
+                      invoked when the vector is updated or destroyed.
+
+
+         <B>Blt_NameOfVectorId</B>
+
+            Synopsis: char *<B>Blt_NameOfVectorId</B> (<I>clientId</I>);
+                        Blt_VectorId <I>clientId</I>;
+
+            Description:
+                      Retrieves  the  name  of  the vector associated with the
+                      client identifier <I>clientId</I>.
+
+            Results:  Returns the name of the vector associated with <I>clientId</I>.
+                      If  <I>clientId</I> is not an identifier or the vector has been
+                      destroyed, NULL is returned.
+
+
+         <B>Blt_InstallIndexProc</B>
+
+            Synopsis: void <B>Blt_InstallIndexProc</B> (<I>indexName</I>, <I>procPtr</I>)
+                        char *<I>indexName</I>; Blt_VectorIndexProc *<I>procPtr</I>;
+
+            Description:
+                      Registers a function to be called to retrieved the index
+                      <I>indexName</I> from the vector's array variable.
+
+                      typedef double Blt_VectorIndexProc(Vector *vecPtr);
+
+                      The  function  will  be  passed a pointer to the vector.
+
+       reset  shortly.  The  vector  is updated when <B>lt_ResetVector</B> is called.
+       Blt_ResetVector makes the changes visible  to  the  Tcl  interface  and
+       other vector clients (such as a graph widget).
+
+       #include  &lt;tcl.h&gt;  #include  &lt;blt.h&gt;         Blt_Vector *vecPtr; double
+       *newArr; FILE *f; struct stat statBuf; int numBytes, numValues;
+
+       f = fopen("binary.dat", "r"); fstat(fileno(f),  &amp;statBuf);  numBytes  =
+       (int)statBuf.st_size;
+
+       /*  Allocate an array big enough to hold all the data */ newArr = (dou-
+       ble  *)malloc(numBytes);  numValues  =   numBytes   /   sizeof(double);
+       fread((void *)newArr, numValues, sizeof(double), f); fclose(f);
+
+       if (Blt_VectorExists(interp, "data"))  {
+           if   (Blt_GetVector(interp,   "data",   &amp;vecPtr)   !=   TCL_OK)   {
+               return TCL_ERROR;
+           } } else {
+          if  (Blt_CreateVector(interp,  "data",  0,  &amp;vecPtr)  !=  TCL_OK)  {
+               return TCL_ERROR;
+          } } /*
+        * Reset the vector. Clients will be notified when Tk is idle.
+        * TCL_DYNAMIC tells the vector to free the memory allocated
+        * if it needs to reallocate or destroy the vector.
+        */   if   (Blt_ResetVector(vecPtr,   newArr,   numValues,   numValues,
+               TCL_DYNAMIC) != TCL_OK) {
+           return TCL_ERROR; }
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>INCOMPATIBILITIES</H2><PRE>
+       In previous versions, if the array variable isn't global (i.e. local to
+       a Tcl procedure), the vector is automatically destroyed when the proce-
+       dure returns.  proc doit {} {
+           # Temporary vector x
+           vector <B>x(10)</B>
+           set <B>x(9)</B> 2.0
+             ...  }
+
+       This has changed.  Variables are not automatically destroyed when their
+       variable  is  unset.   You  can restore the old behavior by setting the
+       "-watchunset" switch.
+
+
+</PRE>
+<H2>KEYWORDS</H2><PRE>
+       vector, graph, widget
+
+
+
+BLT                               BLT_VERSION                   blt::vector(n)
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<ADDRESS>
+Man(1) output converted with
+<a href="http://www.oac.uci.edu/indiv/ehood/man2html.html">man2html</a>
+</ADDRESS>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/tkblt/doc/vector.n b/tkblt/doc/vector.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa8bb7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/doc/vector.n
@@ -0,0 +1,1134 @@
+'\"
+'\" Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+'\" This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+'\" available under the same terms.
+'\"
+'\" Copyright 1991-1997 by Lucent Technologies, Inc.
+'\"
+'\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+'\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+'\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that the
+'\" copyright notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting documentation,
+'\" and that the names of Lucent Technologies any of their entities not be used
+'\" in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
+'\" without specific, written prior permission.
+'\"
+'\" Lucent Technologies disclaims all warranties with regard to this software,
+'\" including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness.  In no event
+'\" shall Lucent Technologies be liable for any special, indirect or
+'\" consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use,
+'\" data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other
+'\" tortuous action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance
+'\" of this software.  
+'\"
+'\" Vector command created by George Howlett.
+'\"
+.TH blt::vector n BLT_VERSION BLT "BLT Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+\fBvector\fR \-  Vector data type for Tcl
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBblt::vector create \fIvecName \fR?\fIvecName\fR...? ?\fIswitches\fR? 
+.sp
+\fBblt::vector destroy \fIvecName \fR?\fIvecName\fR...?
+.sp
+\fBblt::vector expr \fIexpression\fR
+.sp
+\fBblt::vector names \fR?\fIpattern\fR...?
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBvector\fR command creates an array of floating point
+values.  The vector's components can be manipulated in three ways:
+through a Tcl array variable, a Tcl command, or the C API.
+.SH INTRODUCTION
+A vector is an ordered set of real numbers.  The components of a
+vector are indexed by integers.
+.PP
+Vectors are common data structures for many applications.  For
+example, a graph may use two vectors to represent the X-Y
+coordinates of the data plotted.  The graph will automatically
+be redrawn when the vectors are updated or changed. By using vectors, 
+you can separate
+data analysis from the graph widget.  This makes it easier, for
+example, to add data transformations, such as splines.  It's possible
+to plot the same data to in multiple graphs, where each graph presents
+a different view or scale of the data.
+.PP
+You could try to use Tcl's associative arrays as vectors.  Tcl arrays
+are easy to use.  You can access individual elements randomly by
+specifying the index, or the set the entire array by providing a list
+of index and value pairs for each element.  The disadvantages of 
+associative arrays as vectors lie in the fact they are implemented as
+hash tables.
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+There's no implied ordering to the associative arrays.  If you used
+vectors for plotting, you would want to insure the second component
+comes after the first, an so on.  This isn't possible since arrays
+are actually hash tables.  For example, you can't get a range of
+values between two indices.  Nor can you sort an array.
+.TP 2
+\(bu
+Arrays consume lots of memory when the number of elements becomes
+large (tens of thousands).  This is because each element's index and
+value are stored as strings in the hash table.
+.TP 2
+\(bu 
+The C programming interface is unwieldy.  Normally with vectors, you
+would like to view the Tcl array as you do a C array, as an array of
+floats or doubles.  But with hash tables, you must convert both the
+index and value to and from decimal strings, just to access
+an element in the array.  This makes it cumbersome to perform operations on
+the array as a whole.
+.PP
+The \fBvector\fR command tries to overcome these disadvantages while
+still retaining the ease of use of Tcl arrays.  The \fBvector\fR
+command creates both a new Tcl command and associate array which are
+linked to the vector components.  You can randomly access vector
+components though the elements of array.  Not have all indices are
+generated for the array, so printing the array (using the \fBparray\fR
+procedure) does not print out all the component values.  You can use
+the Tcl command to access the array as a whole.  You can copy, append,
+or sort vector using its command.  If you need greater performance, or
+customized behavior, you can write your own C code to manage vectors.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+You create vectors using the \fBvector\fR command and its \fBcreate\fR
+operation.
+.CS
+# Create a new vector. 
+blt::vector create y(50)
+.CE
+This creates a new vector named \f(CWy\fR.  It has fifty components, by
+default, initialized to \f(CW0.0\fR.  In addition, both a Tcl command
+and array variable, both named \f(CWy\fR, are created.  You can use
+either the command or variable to query or modify components of the
+vector.
+.CS
+# Set the first value. 
+set y(0) 9.25
+puts "y has [y length] components"
+.CE
+The array \f(CWy\fR can be used to read or set individual components of
+the vector.  Vector components are indexed from zero.  The array index
+must be a number less than the number of components.  For example,
+it's an error if you try to set the 51st element of \f(CWy\fR.
+.CS
+# This is an error. The vector only has 50 components.
+set y(50) 0.02
+.CE
+You can also specify a range of indices using a colon (:) to separate
+the first and last indices of the range.
+.CS
+# Set the first six components of y 
+set y(0:5) 25.2
+.CE
+If you don't include an index, then it will default to the first
+and/or last component of the vector.
+.CS
+# Print out all the components of y 
+puts "y = $y(:)"
+.CE
+There are special non-numeric indices.  The index \f(CWend\fR, specifies
+the last component of the vector.  It's an error to use this index if
+the vector is empty (length is zero).  The index \f(CW++end\fR can be
+used to extend the vector by one component and initialize it to a specific 
+value.  You can't read from the array using this index, though.
+.CS
+# Extend the vector by one component.
+set y(++end) 0.02
+.CE
+The other special indices are \f(CWmin\fR and \f(CWmax\fR.  They return the
+current smallest and largest components of the vector.  
+.CS
+# Print the bounds of the vector
+puts "min=$y(min) max=$y(max)"
+.CE
+To delete components from a vector, simply unset the corresponding
+array element. In the following example, the first component of
+\f(CWy\fR is deleted.  All the remaining components of \f(CWy\fR will be
+moved down by one index as the length of the vector is reduced by
+one.
+.CS
+# Delete the first component
+unset y(0)
+puts "new first element is $y(0)"
+.CE
+The vector's Tcl command can also be used to query or set the vector.
+.CS
+# Create and set the components of a new vector
+blt::vector create x
+x set { 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 }
+.CE
+Here we've created a vector \f(CWx\fR without a initial length specification.
+In this case, the length is zero.  The \fBset\fR operation resets the vector,
+extending it and setting values for each new component.  
+.PP
+There are several operations for vectors.  The \fBrange\fR operation
+lists the components of a vector between two indices.
+.CS
+# List the components 
+puts "x = [x range 0 end]"
+.CE
+You can search for a particular value using the \fBsearch\fR
+operation.  It returns a list of indices of the components with the
+same value.  If no component has the same value, it returns \f(CW""\fR.
+.CS
+# Find the index of the biggest component
+set indices [x search $x(max)]
+.CE
+Other operations copy, append, or sort vectors.  You can append
+vectors or new values onto an existing vector with the \fBappend\fR
+operation.
+.CS
+# Append assorted vectors and values to x
+x append x2 x3 { 2.3 4.5 } x4
+.CE
+The \fBsort\fR operation sorts the vector.  If any additional vectors
+are specified, they are rearranged in the same order as the vector.
+For example, you could use it to sort data points represented by x and
+y vectors.
+.CS
+# Sort the data points
+x sort y
+.CE
+The vector \f(CWx\fR is sorted while the components of \f(CWy\fR are 
+rearranged so that the original x,y coordinate pairs are retained.
+.PP
+The \fBexpr\fR operation lets you perform arithmetic on vectors.  
+The result is stored in the vector.
+.CS
+# Add the two vectors and a scalar
+x expr { x + y }
+x expr { x * 2 }
+.CE
+When a vector is modified, resized, or deleted, it may trigger
+call-backs to notify the clients of the vector.  For example, when a
+vector used in the \fBgraph\fR widget is updated, the vector
+automatically notifies the widget that it has changed.  The graph can
+then redrawn itself at the next idle point.  By default, the
+notification occurs when Tk is next idle.  This way you can modify the
+vector many times without incurring the penalty of the graph redrawing
+itself for each change.  You can change this behavior using the
+\fBnotify\fR operation.
+.CS
+# Make vector x notify after every change
+x notify always
+	...
+# Never notify
+x notify never
+	...
+# Force notification now
+x notify now
+.CE
+To delete a vector, use the \fBvector delete\fR command.  
+Both the vector and its corresponding Tcl command are destroyed.
+.CS
+# Remove vector x
+blt::vector destroy x
+.CE
+.SH SYNTAX
+Vectors are created using the \fBvector create\fR operation.  
+Th \fBcreate\fR operation can be invoked in one of three forms:
+.TP
+\fBblt::vector create \fIvecName\fR
+This creates a new vector \fIvecName\fR which initially has no components.
+.TP
+\fBblt::vector create \fIvecName\fR(\fIsize\fR)
+This second form creates a new vector which will contain \fIsize\fR
+number of components.  The components will be indexed starting from
+zero (0). The default value for the components is \f(CW0.0\fR.
+.TP
+\fBblt::vector create \fIvecName\fR(\fIfirst\fR:\fIlast\fR)
+The last form creates a new vector of indexed \fIfirst\fR through
+\fIlast\fR.  \fIFirst\fR and \fIlast\fR can be any integer value
+so long as \fIfirst\fR is less than \fIlast\fR.
+.PP
+Vector names must start with a letter and consist of letters, digits,
+or underscores.  
+.CS
+# Error: must start with letter
+blt::vector create 1abc
+.CE
+You can automatically generate vector names using the
+"\f(CW#auto\fR" vector name.  The \fBcreate\fR operation will generate a 
+unique vector name.
+.CS
+set vec [blt::vector create #auto]
+puts "$vec has [$vec length] components"
+.CE
+.SS VECTOR INDICES
+Vectors are indexed by integers.  You can access the individual vector
+components via its array variable or Tcl command.  The string
+representing the index can be an integer, a numeric expression, a
+range, or a special keyword.
+.PP
+The index must lie within the current range of the vector, otherwise
+an an error message is returned.  Normally the indices of a vector
+are start from 0.  But you can use the \fBoffset\fR operation to
+change a vector's indices on-the-fly.
+.CS
+puts $vecName(0)
+vecName offset -5
+puts $vecName(-5)
+.CE
+You can also use numeric expressions as indices.  The result
+of the expression must be an integer value.  
+.CS
+set n 21
+set vecName($n+3) 50.2
+.CE
+The following special non-numeric indices are available: \f(CWmin\fR, \f(CWmax\fR, \f(CWend\fR, and
+\f(CW++end\fR.  
+.CS
+puts "min = $vecName($min)"
+set vecName(end) -1.2
+.CE
+The indices \f(CWmin\fR and \f(CWmax\fR will return the minimum and maximum
+values of the vector.  The index \f(CWend\fR returns the value of the 
+last component in the vector.  The index \f(CW++end\fR is used to append
+new value onto the vector.  It automatically extends the vector by
+one component and sets its value.
+.CS
+# Append an new component to the end
+set vecName(++end) 3.2
+.CE
+A range of indices can be indicated by a colon (:).  
+.CS
+# Set the first six components to 1.0
+set vecName(0:5) 1.0
+.CE
+If no index is supplied the first or last component is assumed.
+.CS
+# Print the values of all the components
+puts $vecName(:)
+.CE
+.SH VECTOR OPERATIONS
+.TP
+\fBblt::vector create \fIvecName\fR?(\fIsize\fR)?... \fR?\fIswitches\fR? 
+The \fBcreate\fR operation creates a new vector \fIvecName\fR.  Both a
+Tcl command and array variable \fIvecName\fR are also created.  The
+name \fIvecName\fR must be unique, so another Tcl command or array
+variable can not already exist in that scope.  You can access the
+components of the vector using its variable.  If you change a value in
+the array, or unset an array element, the vector is updated to reflect
+the changes.  When the variable \fIvecName\fR is unset, the vector and
+its Tcl command are also destroyed.
+.sp
+The vector has optional switches that affect how the vector is created. They
+are as follows:
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-variable \fIvarName\fR
+Specifies the name of a Tcl variable to be mapped to the vector. If
+the variable already exists, it is first deleted, then recreated. 
+If \fIvarName\fR is the empty string, then no variable will be mapped.
+You can always map a variable back to the vector using the vector's 
+\fBvariable\fR operation.
+.TP
+\fB\-command \fIcmdName\fR
+Maps a Tcl command to the vector. The vector can be accessed using 
+\fIcmdName\fR and one of the vector instance operations.  
+A Tcl command by that name cannot already exist.
+If \fIcmdName\fR is the empty string, no command mapping
+will be made.
+.TP
+\fB\-watchunset \fIboolean\fR
+Indicates that the vector should automatically delete itself if
+the variable associated with the vector is unset.  By default,
+the vector will not be deleted.  This is different from previous
+releases.  Set \fIboolean\fR to "true" to get the old behavior.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBblt::vector destroy \fIvecName\fR \fR?\fIvecName...\fR?
+Deletes one or more vectors.  Both the Tcl command and array variable
+are removed also.
+.TP
+\fBblt::vector expr \fIexpression\fR
+.RS
+All binary operators take vectors as operands (remember that numbers
+are treated as one-component vectors).  The exact action of binary
+operators depends upon the length of the second operand.  If the
+second operand has only one component, then each element of the first
+vector operand is computed by that value.  For example, the expression
+"x * 2" multiples all elements of the vector x by 2.  If the second
+operand has more than one component, both operands must be the same
+length.  Each pair of corresponding elements are computed.  So "x + y"
+adds the the first components of x and y together, the second, and so on.
+.sp
+The valid operators are listed below, grouped in decreasing order
+of precedence:
+.TP 20
+\fB\-\0\0!\fR
+Unary minus and logical NOT.  The unary minus flips the sign of each
+component in the vector.  The logical not operator returns a vector of
+whose values are 0.0 or 1.0.  For each non-zero component 1.0 is returned,
+0.0 otherwise.
+.TP 20
+\fB^\fR
+Exponentiation.  
+.TP 20
+\fB*\0\0/\0\0%\fR
+Multiply, divide, remainder.  
+.TP 20
+\fB+\0\0\-\fR
+Add and subtract.  
+.TP 20
+\fB<<\0\0>>\fR
+Left and right shift.  Circularly shifts the values of the vector 
+(not implemented yet).
+.TP 20
+\fB<\0\0>\0\0<=\0\0>=\fR
+Boolean less, greater, less than or equal, and greater than or equal.
+Each operator returns a vector of ones and zeros.  If the condition is true, 
+1.0 is the component value, 0.0 otherwise.
+.TP 20
+\fB==\0\0!=\fR
+Boolean equal and not equal.
+Each operator returns a vector of ones and zeros.  If the condition is true, 
+1.0 is the component value, 0.0 otherwise.
+.TP 20
+\fB|\fR
+Bit-wise OR.  (Not implemented).
+.TP 20
+\fB&&\fR
+Logical AND.  Produces a 1 result if both operands are non-zero, 0 otherwise.
+.TP 20
+\fB||\fR
+Logical OR.  Produces a 0 result if both operands are zero, 1 otherwise.
+.TP 20
+\fIx\fB?\fIy\fB:\fIz\fR
+If-then-else, as in C.  (Not implemented yet).
+.LP
+See the C manual for more details on the results produced by each
+operator.  All of the binary operators group left-to-right within the
+same precedence level.  
+.sp
+Several mathematical functions are supported for vectors.  Each of
+the following functions invokes the math library function of the same name;
+see the manual entries for the library functions for details on what
+they do.  The operation is applied to all elements of the vector
+returning the results. 
+.CS
+.ta 2c 4c 6c
+\fBacos\fR	\fBcos\fR	\fBhypot\fR	\fBsinh\fR 
+\fBasin\fR	\fBcosh\fR	\fBlog\fR	\fBsqrt\fR 
+\fBatan\fR	\fBexp\fR	\fBlog10\fR	\fBtan\fR  
+\fBceil\fR	\fBfloor\fR	\fBsin\fR	\fBtanh\fR 
+.sp
+.CE
+Additional functions are:
+.TP 1i
+\fBabs\fR
+Returns the absolute value of each component.
+.TP 1i
+\fBrandom\fR
+Returns a vector of non-negative values uniformly distributed 
+between [0.0, 1.0) using \fIdrand48\fR.
+The seed comes from the internal clock of the machine or may be 
+set manual with the srandom function.
+.TP 1i
+\fBround\fR
+Rounds each component of the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBsrandom\fR
+Initializes the random number generator using \fIsrand48\fR.
+The high order 32-bits are set using the integral portion of the first 
+vector component. All other components are ignored.  The low order 16-bits 
+are set to an arbitrary value.
+.PP
+The following functions return a single value.
+.TP 1i
+\fBadev\fR 
+Returns the average deviation (defined as the sum of the absolute values 
+of the differences between component and the mean, divided by the length
+of the vector).
+.TP 1i
+\fBkurtosis\fR
+Returns the degree of peakedness (fourth moment) of the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBlength\fR
+Returns the number of components in the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBmax\fR
+Returns the vector's maximum value.
+.TP 1i
+\fBmean\fR
+Returns the mean value of the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBmedian\fR
+Returns the median of the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBmin\fR
+Returns the vector's minimum value.
+.TP 1i
+\fBq1\fR
+Returns the first quartile of the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBq3\fR
+Returns the third quartile of the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBprod\fR 
+Returns the product of the components.
+.TP 1i
+\fBsdev\fR 
+Returns the standard deviation (defined as the square root of the variance)
+of the vector.
+.TP 1i
+\fBskew\fR 
+Returns the skewness (or third moment) of the vector.  This characterizes
+the degree of asymmetry of the vector about the mean.
+.TP 1i
+\fBsum\fR 
+Returns the sum of the components.
+.TP 1i
+\fBvar\fR
+Returns the variance of the vector. The sum of the squared differences 
+between each component and the mean is computed.  The variance is 
+the sum divided by the length of the vector minus 1.
+.PP
+The last set returns a vector of the same length as the argument.
+.TP 1i
+\fBnorm\fR 
+Scales the values of the vector to lie in the range [0.0..1.0].
+.TP 1i
+\fBsort\fR
+Returns the vector components sorted in ascending order.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBvector names \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
+.SH INSTANCE OPERATIONS
+You can also use the vector's Tcl command to query or modify it.  The
+general form is
+.DS
+\fIvecName \fIoperation\fR \fR?\fIarg\fR?...
+.DE
+Both \fIoperation\fR and its arguments determine the exact behavior of
+the command.  The operations available for vectors are listed below.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBappend\fR \fIitem\fR ?\fIitem\fR?...
+Appends the component values from \fIitem\fR to \fIvecName\fR.
+\fIItem\fR can be either the name of a vector or a list of numeric
+values.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBbinread\fR \fIchannel\fR ?\fIlength\fR? ?\fIswitches\fR? 
+Reads binary values from a Tcl channel. Values are either appended
+to the end of the vector or placed at a given index (using the
+\fB\-at\fR option), overwriting existing values.  Data is read until EOF
+is found on the channel or a specified number of values \fIlength\fR 
+are read (note that this is not necessarily the same as the number of 
+bytes). The following switches are supported:
+.RS
+.TP
+\fB\-swap\fR
+Swap bytes and words.  The default endian is the host machine.
+.TP
+\fB\-at \fIindex\fR
+New values will start at vector index \fIindex\fR.  This will
+overwrite any current values.
+.TP
+\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR
+Specifies the format of the data.  \fIFormat\fR can be one of the
+following: "i1", "i2", "i4", "i8", "u1, "u2", "u4", "u8", "r4",
+"r8", or "r16".  The number indicates the number of bytes
+required for each value.  The letter indicates the type: "i" for signed,
+"u" for unsigned, "r" or real.  The default format is "r16".
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBclear\fR 
+Clears the element indices from the array variable associated with
+\fIvecName\fR.  This doesn't affect the components of the vector.  By
+default, the number of entries in the Tcl array doesn't match the
+number of components in the vector.  This is because its too expensive
+to maintain decimal strings for both the index and value for each
+component.  Instead, the index and value are saved only when you read
+or write an element with a new index.  This command removes the index
+and value strings from the array.  This is useful when the vector is
+large.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBdelete\fR \fIindex\fR ?\fIindex\fR?...
+Deletes the \fIindex\fRth component from the vector \fIvecName\fR.
+\fIIndex\fR is the index of the element to be deleted.  This is the
+same as unsetting the array variable element \fIindex\fR.  The vector
+is compacted after all the indices have been deleted.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBdup\fR \fIdestName\fR 
+Copies \fIvecName\fR to \fIdestName\fR. \fIDestName\fR is the name of a
+destination vector.  If a vector \fIdestName\fR already exists, it is
+overwritten with the components of \fIvecName\fR.  Otherwise a 
+new vector is created.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBexpr\fR \fIexpression\fR
+Computes the expression and resets the values of the vector accordingly.
+Both scalar and vector math operations are allowed.  All values in
+expressions are either real numbers or names of vectors.  All numbers
+are treated as one component vectors.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBlength\fR ?\fInewSize\fR?
+Queries or resets the number of components in \fIvecName\fR.
+\fINewSize\fR is a number specifying the new size of the vector.  If
+\fInewSize\fR is smaller than the current size of \fIvecName\fR,
+\fIvecName\fR is truncated.  If \fInewSize\fR is greater, the vector
+is extended and the new components are initialized to \f(CW0.0\fR.  If
+no \fInewSize\fR argument is present, the current length of the vector
+is returned.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBmerge\fR \fIsrcName\fR ?\fIsrcName\fR?...
+Merges the named vectors into a single vector.  The resulting 
+vector is formed by merging the components of each source vector 
+one index at a time.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBnotify\fR \fIkeyword\fR
+Controls how vector clients are notified of changes to the vector.  
+The exact behavior is determined by \fIkeyword\fR.
+.RS
+.TP 0.75i
+\f(CWalways\fR 
+Indicates that clients are to be notified immediately whenever the
+vector is updated.
+.TP
+\f(CWnever\fR
+Indicates that no clients are to be notified.
+.TP
+\f(CWwhenidle\fR
+Indicates that clients are to be notified at the next idle point
+whenever the vector is updated.
+.TP
+\f(CWnow\fR
+If any client notifications is currently pending, they are notified
+immediately.
+.TP
+\f(CWcancel\fR
+Cancels pending notifications of clients using the vector.
+.TP
+\f(CWpending\fR
+Returns \f(CW1\fR if a client notification is pending, and \f(CW0\fR otherwise.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBoffset\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?
+Shifts the indices of the vector by the amount specified by \fIvalue\fR.
+\fIValue\fR is an integer number.  If no \fIvalue\fR argument is 
+given, the current offset is returned.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBpopulate\fR \fIdestName\fR ?\fIdensity\fR?
+Creates a vector \fIdestName\fR which is a superset of \fIvecName\fR.
+\fIDestName\fR will include all the components of \fIvecName\fR, in
+addition the interval between each of the original components will
+contain a \fIdensity\fR number of new components, whose values are
+evenly distributed between the original components values.  This is
+useful for generating abscissas to be interpolated along a spline.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBrange\fR \fIfirstIndex\fR ?\fIlastIndex\fR?...
+Returns a list of numeric values representing the vector components
+between two indices. Both \fIfirstIndex\fR and \fIlastIndex\fR are 
+indices representing the range of components to be returned. If 
+\fIlastIndex\fR is less than \fIfirstIndex\fR, the components are
+listed in reverse order.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBsearch\fR \fIvalue\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?  
+Searches for a value or range of values among the components of
+\fIvecName\fR.  If one \fIvalue\fR argument is given, a list of
+indices of the components which equal \fIvalue\fR is returned.  If a
+second \fIvalue\fR is also provided, then the indices of all
+components which lie within the range of the two values are returned.
+If no components are found, then \f(CW""\fR is returned.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBset\fR \fIitem\fR
+Resets the components of the vector to \fIitem\fR. \fIItem\fR can
+be either a list of numeric expressions or another vector.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBseq\fR \fIstart\fR ?\fIfinish\fR? ?\fIstep\fR?
+Generates a sequence of values starting with the value \fIstart\fR.
+\fIFinish\fR indicates the terminating value of the sequence.  
+The vector is automatically resized to contain just the sequence.
+If three arguments are present, \fIstep\fR designates the interval.  
+.sp
+With only two arguments (no \fIfinish\fR argument), the sequence will
+continue until the vector is filled.  With one argument, the interval 
+defaults to 1.0.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBsort\fR ?\fB-reverse\fR? ?\fIargName\fR?...  
+Sorts the vector \fIvecName\fR in increasing order.  If the
+\fB-reverse\fR flag is present, the vector is sorted in decreasing
+order.  If other arguments \fIargName\fR are present, they are the
+names of vectors which will be rearranged in the same manner as
+\fIvecName\fR.  Each vector must be the same length as \fIvecName\fR.
+You could use this to sort the x vector of a graph, while still
+retaining the same x,y coordinate pairs in a y vector.
+.TP
+\fIvecName \fBvariable\fR \fIvarName\fR
+Maps a Tcl variable to the vector, creating another means for 
+accessing the vector.  The variable \fIvarName\fR can't already 
+exist. This overrides any current variable mapping the vector
+may have.
+.RE
+.SH C LANGUAGE API
+You can create, modify, and destroy vectors from C code, using 
+library routines.  
+You need to include the header file \f(CWblt.h\fR. It contains the
+definition of the structure \fBBlt_Vector\fR, which represents the
+vector.  It appears below.
+.CS
+\fRtypedef struct {
+    double *\fIvalueArr\fR; 
+    int \fInumValues\fR;    
+    int \fIarraySize\fR;    
+    double \fImin\fR, \fImax\fR;  
+} \fBBlt_Vector\fR;
+.CE
+The field \fIvalueArr\fR points to memory holding the vector
+components.  The components are stored in a double precision array,
+whose size size is represented by \fIarraySize\fR.  \fINumValues\fR is
+the length of vector.  The size of the array is always equal to or
+larger than the length of the vector.  \fIMin\fR and \fImax\fR are
+minimum and maximum component values.
+.SH LIBRARY ROUTINES
+The following routines are available from C to manage vectors.
+Vectors are identified by the vector name.
+.PP
+\fBBlt_CreateVector\fR 
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS 
+int \fBBlt_CreateVector\fR (\fIinterp\fR, \fIvecName\fR, \fIlength\fR, \fIvecPtrPtr\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR;
+char *\fIvecName\fR;
+int \fIlength\fR;
+Blt_Vector **\fIvecPtrPtr\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description:
+Creates a new vector \fIvecName\fR\fR with a length of \fIlength\fR.
+\fBBlt_CreateVector\fR creates both a new Tcl command and array 
+variable \fIvecName\fR.  Neither a command nor variable named 
+\fIvecName\fR can already exist.  A pointer to the vector is 
+placed into \fIvecPtrPtr\fR.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CWTCL_OK\fR if the vector is successfully created.  If
+\fIlength\fR is negative, a Tcl variable or command \fIvecName\fR
+already exists, or memory cannot be allocated for the vector, then
+\f(CWTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fIinterp->result\fR will contain an
+error message.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_DeleteVectorByName\fR 
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+int \fBBlt_DeleteVectorByName\fR (\fIinterp\fR, \fIvecName\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR;
+char *\fIvecName\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP 1i
+Description:
+Removes the vector \fIvecName\fR.  \fIVecName\fR is the name of a vector
+which must already exist.  Both the Tcl command and array variable
+\fIvecName\fR are destroyed.  All clients of the vector will be notified
+immediately that the vector has been destroyed.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CWTCL_OK\fR if the vector is successfully deleted.  If
+\fIvecName\fR is not the name a vector, then \f(CWTCL_ERROR\fR is returned
+and \fIinterp->result\fR will contain an error message.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_DeleteVector\fR 
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+int \fBBlt_DeleteVector\fR (\fIvecPtr\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Blt_Vector *\fIvecPtr\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP 1i
+Description:
+Removes the vector pointed to by \fIvecPtr\fR.  \fIVecPtr\fR is a
+pointer to a vector, typically set by \fBBlt_GetVector\fR or
+\fBBlt_CreateVector\fR.  Both the Tcl command and array variable of
+the vector are destroyed.  All clients of the vector will be notified
+immediately that the vector has been destroyed.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CWTCL_OK\fR if the vector is successfully deleted.  If
+\fIvecName\fR is not the name a vector, then \f(CWTCL_ERROR\fR is returned
+and \fIinterp->result\fR will contain an error message.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_GetVector\fR 
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+int \fBBlt_GetVector\fR (\fIinterp\fR, \fIvecName\fR, \fIvecPtrPtr\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR;
+char *\fIvecName\fR;
+Blt_Vector **\fIvecPtrPtr\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP 1i
+Description:
+Retrieves the vector \fIvecName\fR.  \fIVecName\fR is the name of a
+vector which must already exist.  \fIVecPtrPtr\fR will point be set to
+the address of the vector.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CWTCL_OK\fR if the vector is successfully retrieved.  If
+\fIvecName\fR is not the name of a vector, then \f(CWTCL_ERROR\fR is
+returned and \fIinterp->result\fR will contain an error message.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_ResetVector\fR 
+.PP
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+int \fBBlt_ResetVector\fR (\fIvecPtr\fR, \fIdataArr\fR, 
+	\fInumValues\fR, \fIarraySize\fR, \fIfreeProc\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Blt_Vector *\fIvecPtr\fR;
+double *\fIdataArr\fR;
+int *\fInumValues\fR;
+int *\fIarraySize\fR;
+Tcl_FreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description: 
+Resets the components of the vector pointed to by \fIvecPtr\fR.
+Calling \fBBlt_ResetVector\fR will trigger the vector to dispatch
+notifications to its clients. \fIDataArr\fR is the array of doubles
+which represents the vector data. \fINumValues\fR is the number of
+elements in the array. \fIArraySize\fR is the actual size of the array
+(the array may be bigger than the number of values stored in
+it). \fIFreeProc\fP indicates how the storage for the vector component
+array (\fIdataArr\fR) was allocated.  It is used to determine how to
+reallocate memory when the vector is resized or destroyed.  It must be
+\f(CWTCL_DYNAMIC\fR, \f(CWTCL_STATIC\fR, \f(CWTCL_VOLATILE\fR, or a pointer
+to a function to free the memory allocated for the vector array. If
+\fIfreeProc\fR is \f(CWTCL_VOLATILE\fR, it indicates that \fIdataArr\fR
+must be copied and saved.  If \fIfreeProc\fR is \f(CWTCL_DYNAMIC\fR, it
+indicates that \fIdataArr\fR was dynamically allocated and that Tcl
+should free \fIdataArr\fR if necessary.  \f(CWStatic\fR indicates that
+nothing should be done to release storage for \fIdataArr\fR.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CWTCL_OK\fR if the vector is successfully resized.  If
+\fInewSize\fR is negative, a vector \fIvecName\fR does not exist, or
+memory cannot be allocated for the vector, then \f(CWTCL_ERROR\fR is
+returned and \fIinterp->result\fR will contain an error message.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_ResizeVector\fR 
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+int \fBBlt_ResizeVector\fR (\fIvecPtr\fR, \fInewSize\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Blt_Vector *\fIvecPtr\fR;
+int \fInewSize\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description:
+Resets the length of the vector pointed to by \fIvecPtr\fR to
+\fInewSize\fR.  If \fInewSize\fR is smaller than the current size of
+the vector, it is truncated.  If \fInewSize\fR is greater, the vector
+is extended and the new components are initialized to \f(CW0.0\fR.
+Calling \fBBlt_ResetVector\fR will trigger the vector to dispatch
+notifications.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CWTCL_OK\fR if the vector is successfully resized.  If
+\fInewSize\fR is negative or memory can not be allocated for the vector, 
+then \f(CWTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fIinterp->result\fR will contain 
+an error message.
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_VectorExists\fR 
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+int \fBBlt_VectorExists\fR (\fIinterp\fR, \fIvecName\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR;
+char *\fIvecName\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description:
+Indicates if a vector named \fIvecName\fR exists in \fIinterp\fR.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CW1\fR if a vector \fIvecName\fR exists and \f(CW0\fR otherwise.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+If your application needs to be notified when a vector changes, it can
+allocate a unique \fIclient identifier\fR for itself.  Using this
+identifier, you can then register a call-back to be made whenever the
+vector is updated or destroyed.  By default, the call-backs are made at
+the next idle point.  This can be changed to occur at the time the
+vector is modified.  An application can allocate more than one
+identifier for any vector.  When the client application is done with
+the vector, it should free the identifier.
+.PP
+The call-back routine must of the following type.
+.CS
+.RS
+.sp
+typedef void (\fBBlt_VectorChangedProc\fR) (Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, 
+.RS .25i
+ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Blt_VectorNotify \fInotify\fR);
+.RE
+.sp
+.RE
+.CE
+.fi
+\fIClientData\fR is passed to this routine whenever it is called.  You
+can use this to pass information to the call-back.  The \fInotify\fR 
+argument indicates whether the vector has been updated of destroyed. It
+is an enumerated type.
+.CS
+.RS
+.sp
+typedef enum {
+    \f(CWBLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_UPDATE\fR=1,
+    \f(CWBLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_DESTROY\fR=2
+} \fBBlt_VectorNotify\fR;
+.sp
+.RE
+.CE
+.PP
+\fBBlt_AllocVectorId\fR
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+Blt_VectorId \fBBlt_AllocVectorId\fR (\fIinterp\fR, \fIvecName\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR;
+char *\fIvecName\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description:
+Allocates an client identifier for with the vector \fIvecName\fR.
+This identifier can be used to specify a call-back which is triggered
+when the vector is updated or destroyed.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns a client identifier if successful.  If \fIvecName\fR is not
+the name of a vector, then \f(CWNULL\fR is returned and
+\fIinterp->result\fR will contain an error message.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_GetVectorById\fR 
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+int \fBBlt_GetVector\fR (\fIinterp\fR, \fIclientId\fR, \fIvecPtrPtr\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR;
+Blt_VectorId \fIclientId\fR;
+Blt_Vector **\fIvecPtrPtr\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP 1i
+Description:
+Retrieves the vector used by \fIclientId\fR.  \fIClientId\fR is a valid
+vector client identifier allocated by \fBBlt_AllocVectorId\fR.
+\fIVecPtrPtr\fR will point be set to the address of the vector.
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns \f(CWTCL_OK\fR if the vector is successfully retrieved.  
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_SetVectorChangedProc\fR
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+void \fBBlt_SetVectorChangedProc\fR (\fIclientId\fR, \fIproc\fR, \fIclientData\fR);
+.RS 1.25i
+Blt_VectorId \fIclientId\fR;
+Blt_VectorChangedProc *\fIproc\fR;
+ClientData *\fIclientData\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description: 
+Specifies a call-back routine to be called whenever the vector
+associated with \fIclientId\fR is updated or deleted.  \fIProc\fR is a
+pointer to call-back routine and must be of the type
+\fBBlt_VectorChangedProc\fR.  \fIClientData\fR is a one-word value to
+be passed to the routine when it is invoked. If \fIproc\fR is
+\f(CWNULL\fR, then the client is not notified.
+.TP
+Results:
+The designated call-back procedure will be invoked when the vector is 
+updated or destroyed.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_FreeVectorId\fR
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+void \fBBlt_FreeVectorId\fR (\fIclientId\fR);
+.RS 1.25i
+Blt_VectorId \fIclientId\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description: 
+Frees the client identifier.  Memory allocated for the identifier 
+is released.  The client will no longer be notified when the
+vector is modified.
+.TP
+Results:
+The designated call-back procedure will be no longer be invoked when
+the vector is updated or destroyed.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_NameOfVectorId\fR
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+char *\fBBlt_NameOfVectorId\fR (\fIclientId\fR);
+.RS 1.25i
+Blt_VectorId \fIclientId\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description: 
+Retrieves the name of the vector associated with the client identifier
+\fIclientId\fR.  
+.TP
+Results:
+Returns the name of the vector associated with \fIclientId\fR.  If
+\fIclientId\fR is not an identifier or the vector has been destroyed, 
+\f(CWNULL\fR is returned.
+.RE
+.sp
+.PP
+\fBBlt_InstallIndexProc\fR
+.RS .25i
+.TP 1i
+Synopsis:
+.CS
+void \fBBlt_InstallIndexProc\fR (\fIindexName\fR, \fIprocPtr\fR)
+.RS 1.25i
+char *\fIindexName\fR;
+Blt_VectorIndexProc *\fIprocPtr\fR;
+.RE
+.CE
+.TP
+Description: 
+Registers a function to be called to retrieved the index \fIindexName\fR
+from the vector's array variable.  
+.sp
+typedef double Blt_VectorIndexProc(Vector *vecPtr);
+.sp
+The function will be passed a pointer to the vector.  The function must
+return a double representing the value at the index.
+.TP
+Results:
+The new index is installed into the vector.
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH C API EXAMPLE
+The following example opens a file of binary data and stores it in an
+array of doubles. The array size is computed from the size of the
+file. If the vector "data" exists, calling \fBBlt_VectorExists\fR,
+\fBBlt_GetVector\fR is called to get the pointer to the vector.
+Otherwise the routine \fBBlt_CreateVector\fR is called to create a new
+vector and returns a pointer to it. Just like the Tcl interface, both
+a new Tcl command and array variable are created when a new vector is
+created. It doesn't make any difference what the initial size of the
+vector is since it will be reset shortly. The vector is updated when
+\fBlt_ResetVector\fR is called.  Blt_ResetVector makes the changes
+visible to the Tcl interface and other vector clients (such as a graph
+widget).
+.sp
+.CS
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <blt.h>				
+...
+Blt_Vector *vecPtr;
+double *newArr;
+FILE *f;
+struct stat statBuf;
+int numBytes, numValues;
+
+f = fopen("binary.dat", "r");
+fstat(fileno(f), &statBuf);
+numBytes = (int)statBuf.st_size;
+
+/* Allocate an array big enough to hold all the data */
+newArr = (double *)malloc(numBytes);
+numValues = numBytes / sizeof(double);
+fread((void *)newArr, numValues, sizeof(double), f);
+fclose(f);
+
+if (Blt_VectorExists(interp, "data"))  {
+    if (Blt_GetVector(interp, "data", &vecPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+} else {
+   if (Blt_CreateVector(interp, "data", 0, &vecPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+   }
+}
+/* 
+ * Reset the vector. Clients will be notified when Tk is idle. 
+ * TCL_DYNAMIC tells the vector to free the memory allocated 
+ * if it needs to reallocate or destroy the vector.
+ */
+if (Blt_ResetVector(vecPtr, newArr, numValues, numValues, 
+	TCL_DYNAMIC) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+.CE
+.SH "INCOMPATIBILITIES"
+In previous versions, if the array variable isn't global 
+(i.e. local to a Tcl procedure), the vector is automatically 
+destroyed when the procedure returns.
+.CS
+proc doit {} {
+    # Temporary vector x
+    vector x(10)
+    set x(9) 2.0
+      ...
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+This has changed.  Variables are not automatically destroyed when
+their variable is unset.  You can restore the old behavior by
+setting the "-watchunset" switch.
+.CE
+.SH KEYWORDS
+vector, graph, widget
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkblt.decls b/tkblt/generic/tkblt.decls
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4b5c67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkblt.decls
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+library tkblt
+interface tkblt
+
+declare 0 generic {
+  int Blt_CreateVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName,
+		       int size, Blt_Vector** vecPtrPtr)
+}
+
+declare 1 generic {
+  int Blt_CreateVector2(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName,
+			const char *cmdName, const char *varName,
+			int initialSize, Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr)
+}
+
+declare 2 generic {
+  int Blt_DeleteVectorByName(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName)
+}
+
+declare 3 generic {
+  int Blt_DeleteVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr)
+}
+
+declare 4 generic {
+  int Blt_GetVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName,
+		    Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr)
+}
+
+declare 5 generic {
+  int Blt_GetVectorFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+			   Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr)
+}
+
+declare 6 generic {
+  int Blt_ResetVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr, double *dataArr, int n,
+		      int arraySize, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc)
+}
+
+declare 7 generic {
+  int Blt_ResizeVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr, int n)
+}
+
+declare 8 generic {
+  int Blt_VectorExists(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName)
+}
+
+declare 9 generic {
+  int Blt_VectorExists2(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName)
+}
+
+declare 10 generic {
+  Blt_VectorId Blt_AllocVectorId(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName)
+}
+
+declare 11 generic {
+  int Blt_GetVectorById(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_VectorId clientId,
+			Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr)
+}
+
+declare 12 generic {
+  void Blt_SetVectorChangedProc(Blt_VectorId clientId,
+				Blt_VectorChangedProc *proc,
+				ClientData clientData)
+}
+
+declare 13 generic {
+  void Blt_FreeVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId)
+}
+
+declare 14 generic {
+  const char *Blt_NameOfVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId)
+}
+
+declare 15 generic {
+  const char *Blt_NameOfVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr)
+}
+
+declare 16 generic {
+  int Blt_ExprVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, char *expr, Blt_Vector *vecPtr)
+}
+
+declare 17 generic {
+  void Blt_InstallIndexProc(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *indexName,
+			    Blt_VectorIndexProc * procPtr)
+}
+
+declare 18 generic {
+  double Blt_VecMin(Blt_Vector *vPtr)
+}
+
+declare 19 generic {
+  double Blt_VecMax(Blt_Vector *vPtr)
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltChain.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltChain.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dbd317c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltChain.C
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltChain.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+// ChainLink
+
+ChainLink::ChainLink(void* clientData)
+{
+  prev_ =NULL;
+  next_ =NULL;
+  manage_ =0;
+  clientData_ = clientData;
+}
+
+ChainLink::ChainLink(size_t ss)
+{
+  prev_ =NULL;
+  next_ =NULL;
+  manage_ =1;
+  clientData_ = (void*)calloc(1,ss);
+}
+
+ChainLink::~ChainLink()
+{
+  if (manage_ && clientData_)
+    free(clientData_);
+}
+
+// Chain
+
+Chain::Chain()
+{
+  head_ =NULL;
+  tail_ =NULL;
+  nLinks_ =0;
+}
+
+Chain::~Chain()
+{
+  ChainLink* linkPtr = head_;
+  while (linkPtr) {
+    ChainLink* oldPtr =linkPtr;
+    linkPtr = linkPtr->next_;
+    delete oldPtr;
+  }
+}
+
+void Chain::reset()
+{
+  ChainLink* linkPtr = head_;
+  while (linkPtr) {
+    ChainLink* oldPtr = linkPtr;
+    linkPtr = linkPtr->next_;
+    delete oldPtr;
+  }
+  head_ =NULL;
+  tail_ =NULL;
+  nLinks_ =0;
+}
+
+void Chain::linkAfter(ChainLink* linkPtr, ChainLink* afterPtr)
+{
+  if (!head_) {
+    head_ = linkPtr;
+    tail_ = linkPtr;
+  }
+  else {
+    if (!afterPtr) {
+      linkPtr->next_ = NULL;
+      linkPtr->prev_ = tail_;
+      tail_->next_ = linkPtr;
+      tail_ = linkPtr;
+    } 
+    else {
+      linkPtr->next_ = afterPtr->next_;
+      linkPtr->prev_ = afterPtr;
+      if (afterPtr == tail_)
+	tail_ = linkPtr;
+      else
+	afterPtr->next_->prev_ = linkPtr;
+      afterPtr->next_ = linkPtr;
+    }
+  }
+
+  nLinks_++;
+}
+
+void Chain::linkBefore(ChainLink* linkPtr, ChainLink* beforePtr)
+{
+  if (!head_) {
+    head_ = linkPtr;
+    tail_ = linkPtr;
+  }
+  else {
+    if (beforePtr == NULL) {
+      linkPtr->next_ = head_;
+      linkPtr->prev_ = NULL;
+      head_->prev_ = linkPtr;
+      head_ = linkPtr;
+    }
+    else {
+      linkPtr->prev_ = beforePtr->prev_;
+      linkPtr->next_ = beforePtr;
+      if (beforePtr == head_)
+	head_ = linkPtr;
+      else
+	beforePtr->prev_->next_ = linkPtr;
+      beforePtr->prev_ = linkPtr;
+    }
+  }
+
+  nLinks_++;
+}
+
+void Chain::unlinkLink(ChainLink* linkPtr)
+{
+  // Indicates if the link is actually remove from the chain
+  int unlinked;
+
+  unlinked = 0;
+  if (head_ == linkPtr) {
+    head_ = linkPtr->next_;
+    unlinked = 1;
+  }
+  if (tail_ == linkPtr) {
+    tail_ = linkPtr->prev_;
+    unlinked = 1;
+  }
+  if (linkPtr->next_) {
+    linkPtr->next_->prev_ = linkPtr->prev_;
+    unlinked = 1;
+  }
+  if (linkPtr->prev_) {
+    linkPtr->prev_->next_ = linkPtr->next_;
+    unlinked = 1;
+  }
+  if (unlinked)
+    nLinks_--;
+
+  linkPtr->prev_ =NULL;
+  linkPtr->next_ =NULL;
+}
+
+void Chain::deleteLink(ChainLink* link)
+{
+  unlinkLink(link);
+  delete link;
+  link = NULL;
+}
+
+ChainLink* Chain::append(void* clientData)
+{
+  ChainLink* link = new ChainLink(clientData);
+  linkAfter(link, NULL);
+  return link;
+}
+
+ChainLink* Chain::prepend(void* clientData)
+{
+  ChainLink* link = new ChainLink(clientData);
+  linkBefore(link, NULL);
+  return link;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltChain.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltChain.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e254f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltChain.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+#ifndef _BLT_CHAIN_H
+#define _BLT_CHAIN_H
+
+#define Chain_GetLength(c) (((c) == NULL) ? 0 : (c)->nLinks())
+#define Chain_FirstLink(c) (((c) == NULL) ? NULL : (c)->head())
+#define Chain_LastLink(c) (((c) == NULL) ? NULL : (c)->tail())
+
+#define Chain_PrevLink(l) ((l)->prev())
+#define Chain_NextLink(l) ((l)->next())
+#define Chain_GetValue(l) ((l)->clientData())
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  class Chain;
+
+  class ChainLink {
+    friend class Chain;
+
+  protected:
+    ChainLink* prev_;
+    ChainLink* next_;
+    int manage_;
+    void* clientData_;
+
+  public:
+    ChainLink(void*);
+    ChainLink(size_t);
+    virtual ~ChainLink();
+
+    ChainLink* prev() {return prev_;}
+    ChainLink* next() {return next_;}
+    void* clientData() {return clientData_;}
+    void setClientData(void* d) {clientData_ =d;}
+  };
+
+  class Chain {
+  protected:
+    ChainLink* head_;
+    ChainLink* tail_;
+    long nLinks_;
+
+  public:
+    Chain();
+    virtual ~Chain();
+
+    ChainLink* head() {return head_;}
+    ChainLink* tail() {return tail_;}
+    long nLinks() {return nLinks_;}
+
+    void reset();
+    void linkAfter(ChainLink* link, ChainLink* after);
+    void linkBefore(ChainLink* link, ChainLink* before);
+    void unlinkLink(ChainLink* linkPtr);
+    void deleteLink(ChainLink* link);
+    ChainLink* append(void* clientData);
+    ChainLink* prepend(void* clientData);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltConfig.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltConfig.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82fea4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltConfig.C
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/* 
+ *	Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
+ *	Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ *	See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ *	of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ *	Copyright 2003-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+void RestoreProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+		 char *ptr, char *savePtr)
+{
+  *(double*)ptr = *(double*)savePtr;
+}
+
+// Fill
+const char* fillObjOption[] = {"none", "x", "y", "both", NULL};
+
+// Dashes
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc DashesSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc DashesGetProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption dashesObjOption =
+  {
+    "dashes", DashesSetProc, DashesGetProc, NULL, NULL, NULL
+  };
+
+static int DashesSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			 Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+			 int offset, char* save, int flags)
+{
+  Dashes* dashesPtr = (Dashes*)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  int length;
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(*objPtr, &length);
+  if (!string || !string[0]) {
+    dashesPtr->values[0] = 0;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  if (!strncmp(string, "dot", length)) {	
+    dashesPtr->values[0] = 1;
+    dashesPtr->values[1] = 0;
+  }
+  else if (!strncmp(string, "dash", length)) {	
+    dashesPtr->values[0] = 5;
+    dashesPtr->values[1] = 2;
+    dashesPtr->values[2] = 0;
+  }
+  else if (!strncmp(string, "dashdot", length)) { 
+    dashesPtr->values[0] = 2;
+    dashesPtr->values[1] = 4;
+    dashesPtr->values[2] = 2;
+    dashesPtr->values[3] = 0;
+  }
+  else if (!strncmp(string, "dashdotdot", length)) { 
+    dashesPtr->values[0] = 2;
+    dashesPtr->values[1] = 4;
+    dashesPtr->values[2] = 2;
+    dashesPtr->values[3] = 2;
+    dashesPtr->values[4] = 0;
+  }
+  else {
+    int objc;
+    Tcl_Obj** objv;
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, *objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    // This is the postscript limit
+    if (objc > 11) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "too many values in dash list \"", 
+		       string, "\"", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    int ii;
+    for (ii=0; ii<objc; ii++) {
+      int value;
+      if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[ii], &value) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+      // Backward compatibility: Allow list of 0 to turn off dashes
+      if ((value == 0) && (objc == 1))
+	break;
+
+      if ((value < 1) || (value > 255)) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "dash value \"", 
+			 Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]), "\" is out of range", 
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      dashesPtr->values[ii] = (unsigned char)value;
+    }
+
+    // Make sure the array ends with a NULL byte
+    dashesPtr->values[ii] = 0;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+};
+
+static Tcl_Obj* DashesGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			     char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  Dashes* dashesPtr = (Dashes*)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  // count how many
+  int cnt =0;
+  while (dashesPtr->values[cnt])
+    cnt++;
+
+  if (!cnt)
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj**)NULL);
+
+  Tcl_Obj** ll = new Tcl_Obj*[cnt];
+  for (int ii=0; ii<cnt; ii++)
+    ll[ii] = Tcl_NewIntObj(dashesPtr->values[ii]);
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(cnt, ll);
+  delete [] ll;
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+};
+
+// List
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc ListSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc ListGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc ListFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption listObjOption =
+  {
+    "list", ListSetProc, ListGetProc, RestoreProc, ListFreeProc, NULL
+  };
+
+static int ListSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+		       Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+		       int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  const char*** listPtr = (const char***)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = *(double*)listPtr;
+
+  if (!listPtr)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  const char** argv;
+  int argc;
+  if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, Tcl_GetString(*objPtr), &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  *listPtr = argv;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+};
+
+static Tcl_Obj* ListGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			    char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  const char*** listPtr = (const char***)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  if (!listPtr || !(*listPtr))
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+  // count how many
+  int cnt=0;
+  for (const char** pp=*listPtr; *pp; pp++,cnt++) {}
+  if (!cnt)
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+  Tcl_Obj** ll = new Tcl_Obj*[cnt];
+  for (int ii=0; ii<cnt; ii++)
+    ll[ii] = Tcl_NewStringObj((*listPtr)[ii], -1);
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(cnt, ll);
+  delete [] ll;
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+};
+
+static void ListFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			 char *ptr)
+{
+  const char** argv = *(const char***)ptr;
+  if (argv)
+    Tcl_Free((char*)argv);
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltConfig.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..790649b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/* 
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltConfig_h__
+#define __BltConfig_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+extern const char* fillObjOption[];
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption dashesObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption listObjOption;
+extern Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc RestoreProc;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltDecls.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltDecls.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d7c679
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltDecls.h
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Exported function declarations:
+ */
+
+/* 0 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_CreateVector(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				const char *vecName, int size,
+				Blt_Vector**vecPtrPtr);
+/* 1 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_CreateVector2(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				const char *vecName, const char *cmdName,
+				const char *varName, int initialSize,
+				Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+/* 2 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_DeleteVectorByName(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				const char *vecName);
+/* 3 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_DeleteVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr);
+/* 4 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_GetVector(Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName,
+				Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+/* 5 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_GetVectorFromObj(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+/* 6 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_ResetVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr, double *dataArr,
+				int n, int arraySize, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc);
+/* 7 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_ResizeVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr, int n);
+/* 8 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_VectorExists(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				const char *vecName);
+/* 9 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_VectorExists2(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				const char *vecName);
+/* 10 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS Blt_VectorId	Blt_AllocVectorId(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				const char *vecName);
+/* 11 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_GetVectorById(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				Blt_VectorId clientId,
+				Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+/* 12 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS void		Blt_SetVectorChangedProc(Blt_VectorId clientId,
+				Blt_VectorChangedProc *proc,
+				ClientData clientData);
+/* 13 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS void		Blt_FreeVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId);
+/* 14 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS const char *	Blt_NameOfVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId);
+/* 15 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS const char *	Blt_NameOfVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr);
+/* 16 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int		Blt_ExprVector(Tcl_Interp*interp, char *expr,
+				Blt_Vector *vecPtr);
+/* 17 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS void		Blt_InstallIndexProc(Tcl_Interp*interp,
+				const char *indexName,
+				Blt_VectorIndexProc *procPtr);
+/* 18 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS double		Blt_VecMin(Blt_Vector *vPtr);
+/* 19 */
+TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS double		Blt_VecMax(Blt_Vector *vPtr);
+
+typedef struct TkbltStubs {
+    int magic;
+    void *hooks;
+
+    int (*blt_CreateVector) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName, int size, Blt_Vector**vecPtrPtr); /* 0 */
+    int (*blt_CreateVector2) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName, const char *cmdName, const char *varName, int initialSize, Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr); /* 1 */
+    int (*blt_DeleteVectorByName) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName); /* 2 */
+    int (*blt_DeleteVector) (Blt_Vector *vecPtr); /* 3 */
+    int (*blt_GetVector) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName, Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr); /* 4 */
+    int (*blt_GetVectorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp*interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr); /* 5 */
+    int (*blt_ResetVector) (Blt_Vector *vecPtr, double *dataArr, int n, int arraySize, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc); /* 6 */
+    int (*blt_ResizeVector) (Blt_Vector *vecPtr, int n); /* 7 */
+    int (*blt_VectorExists) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName); /* 8 */
+    int (*blt_VectorExists2) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName); /* 9 */
+    Blt_VectorId (*blt_AllocVectorId) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *vecName); /* 10 */
+    int (*blt_GetVectorById) (Tcl_Interp*interp, Blt_VectorId clientId, Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr); /* 11 */
+    void (*blt_SetVectorChangedProc) (Blt_VectorId clientId, Blt_VectorChangedProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 12 */
+    void (*blt_FreeVectorId) (Blt_VectorId clientId); /* 13 */
+    const char * (*blt_NameOfVectorId) (Blt_VectorId clientId); /* 14 */
+    const char * (*blt_NameOfVector) (Blt_Vector *vecPtr); /* 15 */
+    int (*blt_ExprVector) (Tcl_Interp*interp, char *expr, Blt_Vector *vecPtr); /* 16 */
+    void (*blt_InstallIndexProc) (Tcl_Interp*interp, const char *indexName, Blt_VectorIndexProc *procPtr); /* 17 */
+    double (*blt_VecMin) (Blt_Vector *vPtr); /* 18 */
+    double (*blt_VecMax) (Blt_Vector *vPtr); /* 19 */
+} TkbltStubs;
+
+extern const TkbltStubs *tkbltStubsPtr;
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USE_TKBLT_STUBS)
+
+/*
+ * Inline function declarations:
+ */
+
+#define Blt_CreateVector \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_CreateVector) /* 0 */
+#define Blt_CreateVector2 \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_CreateVector2) /* 1 */
+#define Blt_DeleteVectorByName \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_DeleteVectorByName) /* 2 */
+#define Blt_DeleteVector \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_DeleteVector) /* 3 */
+#define Blt_GetVector \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_GetVector) /* 4 */
+#define Blt_GetVectorFromObj \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_GetVectorFromObj) /* 5 */
+#define Blt_ResetVector \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_ResetVector) /* 6 */
+#define Blt_ResizeVector \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_ResizeVector) /* 7 */
+#define Blt_VectorExists \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_VectorExists) /* 8 */
+#define Blt_VectorExists2 \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_VectorExists2) /* 9 */
+#define Blt_AllocVectorId \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_AllocVectorId) /* 10 */
+#define Blt_GetVectorById \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_GetVectorById) /* 11 */
+#define Blt_SetVectorChangedProc \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_SetVectorChangedProc) /* 12 */
+#define Blt_FreeVectorId \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_FreeVectorId) /* 13 */
+#define Blt_NameOfVectorId \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_NameOfVectorId) /* 14 */
+#define Blt_NameOfVector \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_NameOfVector) /* 15 */
+#define Blt_ExprVector \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_ExprVector) /* 16 */
+#define Blt_InstallIndexProc \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_InstallIndexProc) /* 17 */
+#define Blt_VecMin \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_VecMin) /* 18 */
+#define Blt_VecMax \
+	(tkbltStubsPtr->blt_VecMax) /* 19 */
+
+#endif /* defined(USE_TKBLT_STUBS) */
+
+/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxis.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxis.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be3e995
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxis.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1984 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxisOption.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define AXIS_PAD_TITLE 2
+#define EXP10(x) (pow(10.0,(x)))
+
+AxisName Blt::axisNames[] = { 
+  { "x",  CID_AXIS_X },
+  { "y",  CID_AXIS_Y },
+  { "x2", CID_AXIS_X },
+  { "y2", CID_AXIS_Y }
+} ;
+
+// Defs
+
+extern double AdjustViewport(double offset, double windowSize);
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "ActiveForeground",
+   STD_ACTIVE_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, activeFgColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE}, 
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-activerelief", "activeRelief", "Relief",
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, activeRelief), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-autorange", "autoRange", "AutoRange",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, windowSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, normalBg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-background", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-bindtags", "bindTags", "BindTags",
+   "all", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, tags), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &listObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-borderwidth", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, borderWidth), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-checklimits", "checkLimits", "CheckLimits", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, checkLimits), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-color", "color", "Color",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, tickColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-command", NULL, NULL,
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-tickformatcommand", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-descending", "descending", "Descending",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, descending), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exterior", "exterior", "exterior",
+   "yes", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, exterior), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-foreground", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-grid", "grid", "Grid",
+   "yes", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, showGrid), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-gridcolor", "gridColor", "GridColor", 
+   "gray64", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, major.color), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-griddashes", "gridDashes", "GridDashes", 
+   "dot", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, major.dashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-gridlinewidth", "gridLineWidth", "GridLineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, major.lineWidth), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-gridminor", "gridMinor", "GridMinor", 
+   "yes", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, showGridMinor), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-gridminorcolor", "gridMinorColor", "GridMinorColor", 
+   "gray64", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, minor.color), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-gridminordashes", "gridMinorDashes", "GridMinorDashes", 
+   "dot", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, minor.dashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-gridminorlinewidth", "gridMinorLineWidth", 
+   "GridMinorLineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, minor.lineWidth), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, hide), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
+   "c", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, titleJustify), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-labeloffset", "labelOffset", "LabelOffset",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, labelOffset), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-limitscolor", "limitsColor", "LimitsColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, limitsTextStyle.color), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-limitsfont", "limitsFont", "LimitsFont",
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, limitsTextStyle.font), 
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-limitsformat", "limitsFormat", "LimitsFormat",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, limitsFormat), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-linewidth", "lineWidth", "LineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, lineWidth), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-logscale", "logScale", "LogScale",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, logScale), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-loosemin", "looseMin", "LooseMin", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, looseMin), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-loosemax", "looseMax", "LooseMax", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, looseMax), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-majorticks", "majorTicks", "MajorTicks",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, t1UPtr), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &ticksObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-max", "max", "Max", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqMax), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &limitObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-min", "min", "Min", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqMin), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &limitObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-minorticks", "minorTicks", "MinorTicks",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, t2UPtr), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &ticksObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, relief), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-rotate", "rotate", "Rotate", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, tickAngle), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-scrollcommand", "scrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, scrollCmdObjPtr), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &objectObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-scrollincrement", "scrollIncrement", "ScrollIncrement",
+   "10", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, scrollUnits), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-scrollmax", "scrollMax", "ScrollMax", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqScrollMax),  
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &limitObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-scrollmin", "scrollMin", "ScrollMin", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqScrollMin), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &limitObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-shiftby", "shiftBy", "ShiftBy",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, shiftBy), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-showticks", "showTicks", "ShowTicks",
+   "yes", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, showTicks), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-stepsize", "stepSize", "StepSize",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqStep), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_INT, "-subdivisions", "subdivisions", "Subdivisions",
+   "2", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqNumMinorTicks), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-tickanchor", "tickAnchor", "Anchor",
+   "c", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqTickAnchor), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-tickfont", "tickFont", "Font",
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, tickFont), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-ticklength", "tickLength", "TickLength",
+   "8", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, tickLength), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_INT, "-tickdefault", "tickDefault", "TickDefault",
+   "4", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, reqNumMajorTicks), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tickformat", "tickFormat", "TickFormat",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, tickFormat), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tickformatcommand", "tickformatcommand", "TickFormatCommand",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, tickFormatCmd), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-title", "title", "Title",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, title), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-titlealternate", "titleAlternate", "TitleAlternate",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, titleAlternate), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-titlecolor", "titleColor", "TitleColor", 
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, titleColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-titlefont", "titleFont", "TitleFont",
+   STD_FONT_NORMAL, -1, Tk_Offset(AxisOptions, titleFont), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+TickLabel::TickLabel(char* str)
+{
+  anchorPos.x = DBL_MAX;
+  anchorPos.y = DBL_MAX;
+  width =0;
+  height =0;
+  string = dupstr(str);
+}
+
+TickLabel::~TickLabel()
+{
+  delete [] string;
+}
+
+Ticks::Ticks(int cnt)
+{
+  nTicks =cnt;
+  values = new double[cnt];
+}
+
+Ticks::~Ticks()
+{
+  delete [] values;
+}
+
+Axis::Axis(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, int margin, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (AxisOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(AxisOptions));
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  classId_ = CID_NONE;
+  name_ = dupstr(name);
+  className_ = dupstr("none");
+
+  hashPtr_ = hPtr;
+  refCount_ =0;
+  use_ =0;
+  active_ =0;		
+
+  link =NULL;
+  chain =NULL;
+
+  titlePos_.x =0;
+  titlePos_.y =0;
+  titleWidth_ =0;
+  titleHeight_ =0;	
+  min_ =0;
+  max_ =0;
+  scrollMin_ =0;
+  scrollMax_ =0;
+  valueRange_.min =0;
+  valueRange_.max =0;
+  valueRange_.range =0;
+  valueRange_.scale =0;
+  axisRange_.min =0;
+  axisRange_.max =0;
+  axisRange_.range =0;
+  axisRange_.scale =0;
+  prevMin_ =0;
+  prevMax_ =0;
+  t1Ptr_ =NULL;
+  t2Ptr_ =NULL;
+  minorSweep_.initial =0;
+  minorSweep_.step =0;
+  minorSweep_.nSteps =0;
+  majorSweep_.initial =0;
+  majorSweep_.step =0;
+  majorSweep_.nSteps =0;
+
+  margin_ = margin;
+  segments_ =NULL;
+  nSegments_ =0;
+  tickLabels_ = new Chain();
+  left_ =0;
+  right_ =0;
+  top_ =0;
+  bottom_ =0;
+  width_ =0;
+  height_ =0;
+  maxTickWidth_ =0;
+  maxTickHeight_ =0; 
+  tickAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+  tickGC_ =NULL;
+  activeTickGC_ =NULL;
+  titleAngle_ =0;	
+  titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+  screenScale_ =0;
+  screenMin_ =0;
+  screenRange_ =0;
+
+  ops->reqMin =NAN;
+  ops->reqMax =NAN;
+  ops->reqScrollMin =NAN;
+  ops->reqScrollMax =NAN;
+
+  ops->limitsTextStyle.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->limitsTextStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->limitsTextStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->limitsTextStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->limitsTextStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr_->interp_, optionSpecs);
+}
+
+Axis::~Axis()
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  graphPtr_->bindTable_->deleteBindings(this);
+
+  if (link)
+    chain->deleteLink(link);
+
+  if (hashPtr_)
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashPtr_);
+
+  delete [] name_;
+  delete [] className_;
+
+  if (tickGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, tickGC_);
+
+  if (activeTickGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, activeTickGC_);
+
+  delete [] ops->major.segments;
+  if (ops->major.gc)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(ops->major.gc);
+
+  delete [] ops->minor.segments;
+  if (ops->minor.gc)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(ops->minor.gc);
+
+  delete t1Ptr_;
+  delete t2Ptr_;
+
+  freeTickLabels();
+
+  delete tickLabels_;
+
+  delete [] segments_;
+
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+  free(ops_);
+}
+
+int Axis::configure()
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  // Check the requested axis limits. Can't allow -min to be greater than
+  // -max.  Do this regardless of -checklimits option. We want to always 
+  // detect when the user has zoomed in beyond the precision of the data
+
+  if (((!isnan(ops->reqMin)) && (!isnan(ops->reqMax))) &&
+      (ops->reqMin >= ops->reqMax)) {
+      ostringstream str;
+      str << "impossible axis limits (-min " << ops->reqMin 
+	  << " >= -max " << ops->reqMax << ") for \"" 
+	  << name_ << "\"" << ends;
+      Tcl_AppendResult(graphPtr_->interp_, str.str().c_str(), NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  scrollMin_ = ops->reqScrollMin;
+  scrollMax_ = ops->reqScrollMax;
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    if (ops->checkLimits) {
+      // Check that the logscale limits are positive.
+      if ((!isnan(ops->reqMin)) && (ops->reqMin <= 0.0)) {
+	ostringstream str;
+	str << "bad logscale -min limit \"" << ops->reqMin 
+	    << "\" for axis \"" << name_ << "\"" << ends;
+	Tcl_AppendResult(graphPtr_->interp_, str.str().c_str(), NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+    if ((!isnan(scrollMin_)) && (scrollMin_ <= 0.0))
+      scrollMin_ = NAN;
+
+    if ((!isnan(scrollMax_)) && (scrollMax_ <= 0.0))
+      scrollMax_ = NAN;
+  }
+
+  double angle = fmod(ops->tickAngle, 360.0);
+  if (angle < 0.0)
+    angle += 360.0;
+
+  ops->tickAngle = angle;
+  resetTextStyles();
+
+  titleWidth_ = titleHeight_ = 0;
+  if (ops->title) {
+    int w, h;
+    graphPtr_->getTextExtents(ops->titleFont, ops->title, -1, &w, &h);
+    titleWidth_ = (unsigned int)w;
+    titleHeight_ = (unsigned int)h;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Axis::map(int offset, int margin)
+{
+  if (isHorizontal()) {
+    screenMin_ = graphPtr_->hOffset_;
+    width_ = graphPtr_->right_ - graphPtr_->left_;
+    screenRange_ = graphPtr_->hRange_;
+  }
+  else {
+    screenMin_ = graphPtr_->vOffset_;
+    height_ = graphPtr_->bottom_ - graphPtr_->top_;
+    screenRange_ = graphPtr_->vRange_;
+  }
+  screenScale_ = 1.0 / screenRange_;
+
+  AxisInfo info;
+  offsets(margin, offset, &info);
+  makeSegments(&info);
+}
+
+void Axis::mapStacked(int count, int margin)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  if (Chain_GetLength(gops->margins[margin_].axes) > 1 
+      || ops->reqNumMajorTicks <= 0)
+    ops->reqNumMajorTicks = 4;
+
+  unsigned int slice;
+  if (isHorizontal()) {
+    slice = graphPtr_->hRange_ / Chain_GetLength(gops->margins[margin].axes);
+    screenMin_ = graphPtr_->hOffset_;
+    width_ = slice;
+  }
+  else {
+    slice = graphPtr_->vRange_ / Chain_GetLength(gops->margins[margin].axes);
+    screenMin_ = graphPtr_->vOffset_;
+    height_ = slice;
+  }
+
+  int w, h;
+  graphPtr_->getTextExtents(ops->tickFont, "0", 1, &w, &h);
+  screenMin_ += (slice * count) + 2 + h / 2;
+  screenRange_ = slice - 2 * 2 - h;
+  screenScale_ = 1.0 / screenRange_;
+
+  AxisInfo info;
+  offsets(margin, 0, &info);
+  makeSegments(&info);
+}
+
+void Axis::mapGridlines()
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Ticks* t1Ptr = t1Ptr_;
+  if (!t1Ptr)
+    t1Ptr = generateTicks(&majorSweep_);
+ 
+  Ticks* t2Ptr = t2Ptr_;
+  if (!t2Ptr)
+    t2Ptr = generateTicks(&minorSweep_);
+
+  int needed = t1Ptr->nTicks;
+  if (ops->showGridMinor)
+    needed += (t1Ptr->nTicks * t2Ptr->nTicks);
+
+  if (needed == 0) {
+    if (t1Ptr != t1Ptr_)
+      delete t1Ptr;
+    if (t2Ptr != t2Ptr_)
+      delete t2Ptr;
+
+    return;			
+  }
+
+  needed = t1Ptr->nTicks;
+  if (needed != ops->major.nAllocated) {
+    delete [] ops->major.segments;
+    ops->major.segments = new Segment2d[needed];
+    ops->major.nAllocated = needed;
+  }
+  needed = (t1Ptr->nTicks * t2Ptr->nTicks);
+  if (needed != ops->minor.nAllocated) {
+    delete [] ops->minor.segments;
+    ops->minor.segments = new Segment2d[needed];
+    ops->minor.nAllocated = needed;
+  }
+
+  Segment2d* s1 = ops->major.segments;
+  Segment2d* s2 = ops->minor.segments;
+  for (int ii=0; ii<t1Ptr->nTicks; ii++) {
+    double value = t1Ptr->values[ii];
+    if (ops->showGridMinor) {
+      for (int jj=0; jj<t2Ptr->nTicks; jj++) {
+	double subValue = value + (majorSweep_.step * t2Ptr->values[jj]);
+	if (inRange(subValue, &axisRange_)) {
+	  makeGridLine(subValue, s2);
+	  s2++;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+    if (inRange(value, &axisRange_)) {
+      makeGridLine(value, s1);
+      s1++;
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (t1Ptr != t1Ptr_)
+    delete t1Ptr;
+  if (t2Ptr != t2Ptr_)
+    delete t2Ptr;
+
+  ops->major.nUsed = s1 - ops->major.segments;
+  ops->minor.nUsed = s2 - ops->minor.segments;
+}
+
+void Axis::draw(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->hide || !use_)
+    return;
+
+  if (ops->normalBg) {
+    int relief = active_ ? ops->activeRelief : ops->relief;
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(graphPtr_->tkwin_, drawable, ops->normalBg, 
+		       left_, top_, right_ - left_, bottom_ - top_,
+		       ops->borderWidth, relief);
+  }
+
+  if (ops->title) {
+    TextStyle ts(graphPtr_);
+    TextStyleOptions* tops = (TextStyleOptions*)ts.ops();
+
+    tops->angle = titleAngle_;
+    tops->font = ops->titleFont;
+    tops->anchor = titleAnchor_;
+    tops->color = active_ ? ops->activeFgColor : ops->titleColor;
+    tops->justify = ops->titleJustify;
+
+    ts.xPad_ = 1;
+    ts.yPad_ = 0;
+    ts.drawText(drawable, ops->title, titlePos_.x, titlePos_.y);
+  }
+
+  if (ops->scrollCmdObjPtr) {
+    double worldMin = valueRange_.min;
+    double worldMax = valueRange_.max;
+    if (!isnan(scrollMin_))
+      worldMin = scrollMin_;
+    if (!isnan(scrollMax_))
+      worldMax = scrollMax_;
+
+    double viewMin = min_;
+    double viewMax = max_;
+    if (viewMin < worldMin)
+      viewMin = worldMin;
+    if (viewMax > worldMax)
+      viewMax = worldMax;
+
+    if (ops->logScale) {
+      worldMin = log10(worldMin);
+      worldMax = log10(worldMax);
+      viewMin = log10(viewMin);
+      viewMax = log10(viewMax);
+    }
+
+    double worldWidth = worldMax - worldMin;	
+    double viewWidth = viewMax - viewMin;
+    int isHoriz = isHorizontal();
+
+    double fract;
+    if (isHoriz != ops->descending)
+      fract = (viewMin - worldMin) / worldWidth;
+    else
+      fract = (worldMax - viewMax) / worldWidth;
+
+    fract = AdjustViewport(fract, viewWidth / worldWidth);
+
+    if (isHoriz != ops->descending) {
+      viewMin = (fract * worldWidth);
+      min_ = viewMin + worldMin;
+      max_ = min_ + viewWidth;
+      viewMax = viewMin + viewWidth;
+      if (ops->logScale) {
+	min_ = EXP10(min_);
+	max_ = EXP10(max_);
+      }
+      updateScrollbar(graphPtr_->interp_, ops->scrollCmdObjPtr,
+		      (int)viewMin, (int)viewMax, (int)worldWidth);
+    }
+    else {
+      viewMax = (fract * worldWidth);
+      max_ = worldMax - viewMax;
+      min_ = max_ - viewWidth;
+      viewMin = viewMax + viewWidth;
+      if (ops->logScale) {
+	min_ = EXP10(min_);
+	max_ = EXP10(max_);
+      }
+      updateScrollbar(graphPtr_->interp_, ops->scrollCmdObjPtr,
+		      (int)viewMax, (int)viewMin, (int)worldWidth);
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (ops->showTicks) {
+    TextStyle ts(graphPtr_);
+    TextStyleOptions* tops = (TextStyleOptions*)ts.ops();
+
+    tops->angle = ops->tickAngle;
+    tops->font = ops->tickFont;
+    tops->anchor = tickAnchor_;
+    tops->color = active_ ? ops->activeFgColor : ops->tickColor;
+
+    ts.xPad_ = 2;
+    ts.yPad_ = 0;
+
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(tickLabels_); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {	
+      TickLabel* labelPtr = (TickLabel*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      ts.drawText(drawable, labelPtr->string, labelPtr->anchorPos.x, 
+		  labelPtr->anchorPos.y);
+    }
+  }
+
+  if ((nSegments_ > 0) && (ops->lineWidth > 0)) {	
+    GC gc = active_ ? activeTickGC_ : tickGC_;
+    graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, gc, segments_, nSegments_);
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::drawGrids(Drawable drawable) 
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->hide || !ops->showGrid || !use_)
+    return;
+
+  graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, ops->major.gc,
+			  ops->major.segments, ops->major.nUsed);
+
+  if (ops->showGridMinor)
+    graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, ops->minor.gc,
+			    ops->minor.segments, ops->minor.nUsed);
+}
+
+void Axis::drawLimits(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->limitsFormat)
+    return;
+
+  int vMin = graphPtr_->left_ + gops->xPad + 2;
+  int vMax = vMin;
+  int hMin = graphPtr_->bottom_ - gops->yPad - 2;
+  int hMax = hMin;
+
+  const int spacing =8;
+  int isHoriz = isHorizontal();
+  char* minPtr =NULL;
+  char* maxPtr =NULL;
+  char minString[200];
+  char maxString[200];
+  const char* fmt = ops->limitsFormat;
+  if (fmt && *fmt) {
+    minPtr = minString;
+    snprintf(minString, 200, fmt, axisRange_.min);
+
+    maxPtr = maxString;
+    snprintf(maxString, 200, fmt, axisRange_.max);
+  }
+  if (ops->descending) {
+    char *tmp = minPtr;
+    minPtr = maxPtr;
+    maxPtr = tmp;
+  }
+
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->limitsTextStyle);
+  if (maxPtr) {
+    if (isHoriz) {
+      ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 90.0;
+      ops->limitsTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_SE;
+
+      int ww, hh;
+      ts.drawTextBBox(drawable, maxPtr, graphPtr_->right_, hMax, &ww, &hh);
+      hMax -= (hh + spacing);
+    } 
+    else {
+      ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 0.0;
+      ops->limitsTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+
+      int ww, hh;
+      ts.drawTextBBox(drawable, maxPtr, vMax, graphPtr_->top_, &ww, &hh);
+      vMax += (ww + spacing);
+    }
+  }
+  if (minPtr) {
+    ops->limitsTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_SW;
+
+    if (isHoriz) {
+      ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 90.0;
+
+      int ww, hh;
+      ts.drawTextBBox(drawable, minPtr, graphPtr_->left_, hMin, &ww, &hh);
+      hMin -= (hh + spacing);
+    } 
+    else {
+      ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 0.0;
+
+      int ww, hh;
+      ts.drawTextBBox(drawable, minPtr, vMin, graphPtr_->bottom_, &ww, &hh);
+      vMin += (ww + spacing);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::setClass(ClassId classId)
+{
+  delete [] className_;
+
+  classId_ = classId;
+  switch (classId) {
+  case CID_NONE:
+    className_ = dupstr("none");
+    break;
+  case CID_AXIS_X:
+    className_ = dupstr("XAxis");
+    break;
+  case CID_AXIS_Y:
+    className_ = dupstr("YAxis");
+    break;
+  default:
+    className_ = NULL;
+    break;
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::logScale(double min, double max)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  double range;
+  double tickMin, tickMax;
+  double majorStep, minorStep;
+  int nMajor, nMinor;
+
+  nMajor = nMinor = 0;
+  majorStep = minorStep = 0.0;
+  tickMin = tickMax = NAN;
+  if (min < max) {
+    min = (min != 0.0) ? log10(fabs(min)) : 0.0;
+    max = (max != 0.0) ? log10(fabs(max)) : 1.0;
+
+    tickMin = floor(min);
+    tickMax = ceil(max);
+    range = tickMax - tickMin;
+	
+    if (range > 10) {
+      // There are too many decades to display a major tick at every
+      // decade.  Instead, treat the axis as a linear scale
+      range = niceNum(range, 0);
+      majorStep = niceNum(range / ops->reqNumMajorTicks, 1);
+      tickMin = floor(tickMin/majorStep)*majorStep;
+      tickMax = ceil(tickMax/majorStep)*majorStep;
+      nMajor = (int)((tickMax - tickMin) / majorStep) + 1;
+      minorStep = EXP10(floor(log10(majorStep)));
+      if (minorStep == majorStep) {
+	nMinor = 4;
+	minorStep = 0.2;
+      }
+      else
+	nMinor = (int)(majorStep/minorStep) - 1;
+    }
+    else {
+      if (tickMin == tickMax)
+	tickMax++;
+      majorStep = 1.0;
+      nMajor = (int)(tickMax - tickMin + 1); /* FIXME: Check this. */
+	    
+      minorStep = 0.0;		/* This is a special hack to pass
+				 * information to the GenerateTicks
+				 * routine. An interval of 0.0 tells 1)
+				 * this is a minor sweep and 2) the axis
+				 * is log scale. */
+      nMinor = 10;
+    }
+    if (!ops->looseMin || (ops->looseMin && !isnan(ops->reqMin))) {
+      tickMin = min;
+      nMajor++;
+    }
+    if (!ops->looseMax || (ops->looseMax && !isnan(ops->reqMax))) {
+      tickMax = max;
+    }
+  }
+  majorSweep_.step = majorStep;
+  majorSweep_.initial = floor(tickMin);
+  majorSweep_.nSteps = nMajor;
+  minorSweep_.initial = minorSweep_.step = minorStep;
+  minorSweep_.nSteps = nMinor;
+
+  setRange(&axisRange_, tickMin, tickMax);
+}
+
+void Axis::linearScale(double min, double max)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  unsigned int nTicks = 0;
+  double step = 1.0;
+  double axisMin =NAN;
+  double axisMax =NAN;
+  double tickMin =NAN;
+  double tickMax =NAN;
+
+  if (min < max) {
+    double range = max - min;
+    if (ops->reqStep > 0.0) {
+      step = ops->reqStep;
+      while ((2 * step) >= range && step >= (2 * DBL_EPSILON)) {
+	step *= 0.5;
+      }
+    }
+    else {
+      range = niceNum(range, 0);
+      step = niceNum(range / ops->reqNumMajorTicks, 1);
+    }
+    if (step >= DBL_EPSILON) {
+	axisMin = tickMin = floor(min / step) * step + 0.0;
+	axisMax = tickMax = ceil(max / step) * step + 0.0;
+	nTicks = (int)((tickMax-tickMin) / step) + 1;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * A zero step can result from having a too small range, such that
+	 * the floating point can no longer represent fractions of it (think
+	 * subnormals).  In such a case, let's just have two steps: the
+	 * minimum and the maximum.
+	 */
+	axisMin = tickMin = min;
+	axisMax = tickMax = min + DBL_EPSILON;
+	step = DBL_EPSILON;
+	nTicks = 2;
+    }
+  } 
+  majorSweep_.step = step;
+  majorSweep_.initial = tickMin;
+  majorSweep_.nSteps = nTicks;
+
+  /*
+   * The limits of the axis are either the range of the data ("tight") or at
+   * the next outer tick interval ("loose").  The looseness or tightness has
+   * to do with how the axis fits the range of data values.  This option is
+   * overridden when the user sets an axis limit (by either -min or -max
+   * option).  The axis limit is always at the selected limit (otherwise we
+   * assume that user would have picked a different number).
+   */
+  if (!ops->looseMin || (ops->looseMin && !isnan(ops->reqMin)))
+    axisMin = min;
+
+  if (!ops->looseMax || (ops->looseMax && !isnan(ops->reqMax)))
+    axisMax = max;
+
+  setRange(&axisRange_, axisMin, axisMax);
+
+  if (ops->reqNumMinorTicks > 0) {
+    nTicks = ops->reqNumMinorTicks - 1;
+    step = 1.0 / (nTicks + 1);
+  } 
+  else {
+    nTicks = 0;
+    step = 0.5;
+  }
+  minorSweep_.initial = minorSweep_.step = step;
+  minorSweep_.nSteps = nTicks;
+}
+
+void Axis::setRange(AxisRange *rangePtr, double min, double max)
+{
+  rangePtr->min = min;
+  rangePtr->max = max;
+  rangePtr->range = max - min;
+  if (fabs(rangePtr->range) < DBL_EPSILON) {
+    rangePtr->range = DBL_EPSILON;
+  }
+  rangePtr->scale = 1.0 / rangePtr->range;
+}
+
+void Axis::fixRange()
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  // When auto-scaling, the axis limits are the bounds of the element data.
+  // If no data exists, set arbitrary limits (wrt to log/linear scale).
+  double min = valueRange_.min;
+  double max = valueRange_.max;
+
+  // Check the requested axis limits. Can't allow -min to be greater
+  // than -max, or have undefined log scale limits.  */
+  if (((!isnan(ops->reqMin)) && (!isnan(ops->reqMax))) &&
+      (ops->reqMin >= ops->reqMax)) {
+    ops->reqMin = ops->reqMax = NAN;
+  }
+  if (ops->reqMin < -DBL_MAX) {
+    ops->reqMin = -DBL_MAX;
+  }
+  if (ops->reqMax > DBL_MAX) {
+    ops->reqMax = DBL_MAX;
+  }
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    if ((!isnan(ops->reqMin)) && (ops->reqMin <= 0.0))
+      ops->reqMin = NAN;
+
+    if ((!isnan(ops->reqMax)) && (ops->reqMax <= 0.0))
+      ops->reqMax = NAN;
+  }
+
+  if (min == DBL_MAX) {
+    if (!isnan(ops->reqMin))
+      min = ops->reqMin;
+    else
+      min = (ops->logScale) ? 0.001 : 0.0;
+  }
+  if (max == -DBL_MAX) {
+    if (!isnan(ops->reqMax))
+      max = ops->reqMax;
+    else
+      max = 1.0;
+  }
+  if (min >= max) {
+
+    // There is no range of data (i.e. min is not less than max), so
+    // manufacture one.
+    if (min == 0.0)
+      min = 0.0, max = 1.0;
+    else
+      max = min + (fabs(min) * 0.1);
+  }
+  setRange(&valueRange_, min, max);
+
+  // The axis limits are either the current data range or overridden by the
+  // values selected by the user with the -min or -max options.
+  min_ = min;
+  max_ = max;
+  if (!isnan(ops->reqMin))
+    min_ = ops->reqMin;
+
+  if (!isnan(ops->reqMax))
+    max_ = ops->reqMax;
+
+  if (max_ < min_) {
+    // If the limits still don't make sense, it's because one limit
+    // configuration option (-min or -max) was set and the other default
+    // (based upon the data) is too small or large.  Remedy this by making
+    // up a new min or max from the user-defined limit.
+    if (isnan(ops->reqMin))
+      min_ = max_ - (fabs(max_) * 0.1);
+
+    if (isnan(ops->reqMax))
+      max_ = min_ + (fabs(max_) * 0.1);
+  }
+
+  // If a window size is defined, handle auto ranging by shifting the axis
+  // limits.
+  if ((ops->windowSize > 0.0) && 
+      (isnan(ops->reqMin)) && (isnan(ops->reqMax))) {
+    if (ops->shiftBy < 0.0)
+      ops->shiftBy = 0.0;
+
+    max = min_ + ops->windowSize;
+    if (max_ >= max) {
+      if (ops->shiftBy > 0.0)
+	max = ceil(max_/ops->shiftBy)*ops->shiftBy;
+      min_ = max - ops->windowSize;
+    }
+    max_ = max;
+  }
+  if ((max_ != prevMax_) || 
+      (min_ != prevMin_)) {
+    /* and save the previous minimum and maximum values */
+    prevMin_ = min_;
+    prevMax_ = max_;
+  }
+}
+
+// Reference: Paul Heckbert, "Nice Numbers for Graph Labels",
+// Graphics Gems, pp 61-63.  
+double Axis::niceNum(double x, int round)
+{
+  double expt;			/* Exponent of x */
+  double frac;			/* Fractional part of x */
+  double nice;			/* Nice, rounded fraction */
+
+  expt = floor(log10(x));
+  frac = x / EXP10(expt);		/* between 1 and 10 */
+  if (round) {
+    if (frac < 1.5) {
+      nice = 1.0;
+    } else if (frac < 3.0) {
+      nice = 2.0;
+    } else if (frac < 7.0) {
+      nice = 5.0;
+    } else {
+      nice = 10.0;
+    }
+  } else {
+    if (frac <= 1.0) {
+      nice = 1.0;
+    } else if (frac <= 2.0) {
+      nice = 2.0;
+    } else if (frac <= 5.0) {
+      nice = 5.0;
+    } else {
+      nice = 10.0;
+    }
+  }
+  return nice * EXP10(expt);
+}
+
+int Axis::inRange(double x, AxisRange *rangePtr)
+{
+  if (rangePtr->range < DBL_EPSILON)
+    return (fabs(rangePtr->max - x) >= DBL_EPSILON);
+  else {
+    double norm;
+
+    norm = (x - rangePtr->min) * rangePtr->scale;
+    return ((norm >= -DBL_EPSILON) && ((norm - 1.0) < DBL_EPSILON));
+  }
+}
+
+int Axis::isHorizontal()
+{
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+  return ((classId_ == CID_AXIS_Y) == gops->inverted);
+}
+
+void Axis::freeTickLabels()
+{
+  Chain* chain = tickLabels_;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    TickLabel* labelPtr = (TickLabel*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    delete labelPtr;
+  }
+  chain->reset();
+}
+
+TickLabel* Axis::makeLabel(double value)
+{
+#define TICK_LABEL_SIZE		200
+
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  char string[TICK_LABEL_SIZE + 1];
+
+  // zero out any extremely small numbers
+  if (value<DBL_EPSILON && value>-DBL_EPSILON)
+    value =0;
+
+  if (ops->tickFormat && *ops->tickFormat) {
+    snprintf(string, TICK_LABEL_SIZE, ops->tickFormat, value);
+  } else if (ops->logScale) {
+    snprintf(string, TICK_LABEL_SIZE, "1E%d", int(value));
+  } else {
+    snprintf(string, TICK_LABEL_SIZE, "%.15G", value);
+  }
+
+  if (ops->tickFormatCmd) {
+    Tcl_Interp* interp = graphPtr_->interp_;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = graphPtr_->tkwin_;
+
+    // A TCL proc was designated to format tick labels. Append the path
+    // name of the widget and the default tick label as arguments when
+    // invoking it. Copy and save the new label from interp->result.
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    if (Tcl_VarEval(interp, ops->tickFormatCmd, " ", Tk_PathName(tkwin),
+		    " ", string, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+      Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+    }
+    else {
+      // The proc could return a string of any length, so arbitrarily
+      // limit it to what will fit in the return string.
+      strncpy(string, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), TICK_LABEL_SIZE);
+      string[TICK_LABEL_SIZE] = '\0';
+	    
+      Tcl_ResetResult(interp); /* Clear the interpreter's result. */
+    }
+  }
+
+  TickLabel* labelPtr = new TickLabel(string);
+
+  return labelPtr;
+}
+
+double Axis::invHMap(double x)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  double value;
+
+  x = (double)(x - screenMin_) * screenScale_;
+  if (ops->descending) {
+    x = 1.0 - x;
+  }
+  value = (x * axisRange_.range) + axisRange_.min;
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    value = EXP10(value);
+  }
+  return value;
+}
+
+double Axis::invVMap(double y)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  double value;
+
+  y = (double)(y - screenMin_) * screenScale_;
+  if (ops->descending) {
+    y = 1.0 - y;
+  }
+  value = ((1.0 - y) * axisRange_.range) + axisRange_.min;
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    value = EXP10(value);
+  }
+  return value;
+}
+
+double Axis::hMap(double x)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    x = log10(fabs(x));
+  }
+  /* Map graph coordinate to normalized coordinates [0..1] */
+  x = (x - axisRange_.min) * axisRange_.scale;
+  if (ops->descending) {
+    x = 1.0 - x;
+  }
+  return (x * screenRange_ + screenMin_);
+}
+
+double Axis::vMap(double y)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    y = log10(fabs(y));
+  }
+  /* Map graph coordinate to normalized coordinates [0..1] */
+  y = (y - axisRange_.min) * axisRange_.scale;
+  if (ops->descending) {
+    y = 1.0 - y;
+  }
+  return ((1.0 - y) * screenRange_ + screenMin_);
+}
+
+void Axis::getDataLimits(double min, double max)
+{
+  if (valueRange_.min > min)
+    valueRange_.min = min;
+
+  if (valueRange_.max < max)
+    valueRange_.max = max;
+}
+
+void Axis::resetTextStyles()
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  unsigned long gcMask;
+  gcMask = (GCForeground | GCLineWidth | GCCapStyle);
+  gcValues.foreground = ops->tickColor->pixel;
+  gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(ops->tickFont);
+  gcValues.line_width = ops->lineWidth;
+  gcValues.cap_style = CapProjecting;
+
+  GC newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (tickGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, tickGC_);
+  tickGC_ = newGC;
+
+  // Assuming settings from above GC
+  gcValues.foreground = ops->activeFgColor->pixel;
+  newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (activeTickGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, activeTickGC_);
+  activeTickGC_ = newGC;
+
+  gcValues.background = gcValues.foreground = ops->major.color->pixel;
+  gcValues.line_width = ops->major.lineWidth;
+  gcMask = (GCForeground | GCBackground | GCLineWidth);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->major.dashes)) {
+    gcValues.line_style = LineOnOffDash;
+    gcMask |= GCLineStyle;
+  }
+  newGC = graphPtr_->getPrivateGC(gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->major.dashes))
+    graphPtr_->setDashes(newGC, &ops->major.dashes);
+
+  if (ops->major.gc)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(ops->major.gc);
+
+  ops->major.gc = newGC;
+
+  gcValues.background = gcValues.foreground = ops->minor.color->pixel;
+  gcValues.line_width = ops->minor.lineWidth;
+  gcMask = (GCForeground | GCBackground | GCLineWidth);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->minor.dashes)) {
+    gcValues.line_style = LineOnOffDash;
+    gcMask |= GCLineStyle;
+  }
+  newGC = graphPtr_->getPrivateGC(gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->minor.dashes))
+    graphPtr_->setDashes(newGC, &ops->minor.dashes);
+
+  if (ops->minor.gc)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(ops->minor.gc);
+
+  ops->minor.gc = newGC;
+}
+
+void Axis::makeLine(int line, Segment2d *sp)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  double min = axisRange_.min;
+  double max = axisRange_.max;
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    min = EXP10(min);
+    max = EXP10(max);
+  }
+  if (isHorizontal()) {
+    sp->p.x = hMap(min);
+    sp->q.x = hMap(max);
+    sp->p.y = sp->q.y = line;
+  }
+  else {
+    sp->q.x = sp->p.x = line;
+    sp->p.y = vMap(min);
+    sp->q.y = vMap(max);
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::offsets(int margin, int offset, AxisInfo *infoPtr)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  int axisLine =0;
+  int t1 =0;
+  int t2 =0;
+  int labelOffset =AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+  int tickLabel =0;
+
+  float titleAngle[4] = {0.0, 90.0, 0.0, 270.0};
+  titleAngle_ = titleAngle[margin];
+  Margin *marginPtr = gops->margins + margin;
+
+  if (ops->lineWidth > 0) {
+    if (ops->showTicks) {
+      t1 = ops->tickLength;
+      t2 = (t1 * 10) / 15;
+    }
+    labelOffset = t1 + AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+    if (ops->exterior)
+      labelOffset += ops->lineWidth;
+  }
+
+  int axisPad =0;
+
+  // Adjust offset for the interior border width and the line width */
+  // fixme
+  int pad = 0;
+  //  int pad = 1;
+  //  if (graphPtr_->plotBW > 0)
+  //    pad += graphPtr_->plotBW + 1;
+
+  // Pre-calculate the x-coordinate positions of the axis, tick labels, and
+  // the individual major and minor ticks.
+  int inset = pad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+
+  switch (margin) {
+  case MARGIN_TOP:
+    {
+      int mark = graphPtr_->top_ - offset - pad;
+      tickAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_S;
+      left_ = screenMin_ - inset - 2;
+      right_ = screenMin_ + screenRange_ + inset - 1;
+      if (gops->stackAxes)
+	top_ = mark - marginPtr->axesOffset;
+      else
+	top_ = mark - height_;
+      bottom_ = mark;
+
+      axisLine = bottom_;
+      if (ops->exterior) {
+	axisLine -= gops->plotBW + axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = axisLine - 2;
+	if (ops->lineWidth > 0)
+	  tickLabel -= ops->tickLength;
+      } 
+      else {
+	if (gops->plotRelief == TK_RELIEF_SOLID)
+	  axisLine--;
+
+	axisLine -= axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = graphPtr_->top_ -  gops->plotBW - 2;
+      }
+
+      int x, y;
+      if (ops->titleAlternate) {
+	x = graphPtr_->right_ + AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	y = mark - (height_  / 2);
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_W;
+      }
+      else {
+	x = (right_ + left_) / 2;
+	if (gops->stackAxes)
+	  y = mark - marginPtr->axesOffset + AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	else
+	  y = mark - height_ + AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+      }
+      titlePos_.x = x;
+      titlePos_.y = y;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case MARGIN_BOTTOM:
+    {
+      /*
+       *  ----------- bottom + plot borderwidth
+       *      mark --------------------------------------------
+       *          ===================== axisLine (linewidth)
+       *                   tick
+       *		    title
+       *
+       *          ===================== axisLine (linewidth)
+       *  ----------- bottom + plot borderwidth
+       *      mark --------------------------------------------
+       *                   tick
+       *		    title
+       */
+      int mark = graphPtr_->bottom_ + offset;
+      double fangle = fmod(ops->tickAngle, 90.0);
+      if (fangle == 0.0)
+	tickAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+      else {
+	int quadrant = (int)(ops->tickAngle / 90.0);
+	if ((quadrant == 0) || (quadrant == 2))
+	  tickAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_NE;
+	else
+	  tickAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+      }
+
+      left_ = screenMin_ - inset - 2;
+      right_ = screenMin_ + screenRange_ + inset - 1;
+      top_ = mark + labelOffset - t1;
+      if (gops->stackAxes)
+	bottom_ = mark + marginPtr->axesOffset - 1;
+      else
+	bottom_ = mark + height_ - 1;
+
+      axisLine = top_;
+      if (gops->plotRelief == TK_RELIEF_SOLID)
+	axisLine++;
+
+      if (ops->exterior) {
+	axisLine += gops->plotBW + axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = axisLine + 2;
+	if (ops->lineWidth > 0)
+	  tickLabel += ops->tickLength;
+      }
+      else {
+	axisLine -= axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = graphPtr_->bottom_ +  gops->plotBW + 2;
+      }
+
+      int x, y;
+      if (ops->titleAlternate) {
+	x = graphPtr_->right_ + AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	y = mark + (height_ / 2);
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_W; 
+      }
+      else {
+	x = (right_ + left_) / 2;
+	if (gops->stackAxes)
+	  y = mark + marginPtr->axesOffset - AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	else
+	  y = mark + height_ - AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_S; 
+      }
+      titlePos_.x = x;
+      titlePos_.y = y;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case MARGIN_LEFT:
+    {
+      /*
+       *                    mark
+       *                  |  : 
+       *                  |  :      
+       *                  |  : 
+       *                  |  :
+       *                  |  : 
+       *     axisLine
+       */
+      /* 
+       * Exterior axis 
+       *     + plotarea right
+       *     |A|B|C|D|E|F|G|H
+       *           |right
+       * A = plot pad 
+       * B = plot border width
+       * C = axis pad
+       * D = axis line
+       * E = tick length
+       * F = tick label 
+       * G = graph border width
+       * H = highlight thickness
+       */
+      /* 
+       * Interior axis 
+       *     + plotarea right
+       *     |A|B|C|D|E|F|G|H
+       *           |right
+       * A = plot pad 
+       * B = tick length
+       * C = axis line width
+       * D = axis pad
+       * E = plot border width
+       * F = tick label 
+       * G = graph border width
+       * H = highlight thickness
+       */
+      int mark = graphPtr_->left_ - offset;
+      tickAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_E;
+      if (gops->stackAxes)
+	left_ = mark - marginPtr->axesOffset;
+      else
+	left_ = mark - width_;
+      right_ = mark - 3;
+      top_ = screenMin_ - inset - 2;
+      bottom_ = screenMin_ + screenRange_ + inset - 1;
+
+      axisLine = right_;
+      if (ops->exterior) {
+	axisLine -= gops->plotBW + axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = axisLine - 2;
+	if (ops->lineWidth > 0)
+	  tickLabel -= ops->tickLength;
+      }
+      else {
+	if (gops->plotRelief == TK_RELIEF_SOLID)
+	  axisLine--;
+	axisLine += axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = graphPtr_->left_ - gops->plotBW - 2;
+      }
+
+      int x, y;
+      if (ops->titleAlternate) {
+	x = mark - (width_ / 2);
+	y = graphPtr_->top_ - AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_SW; 
+      }
+      else {
+	if (gops->stackAxes)
+	  x = mark - marginPtr->axesOffset;
+	else
+	  x = mark - width_ + AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	y = (bottom_ + top_) / 2;
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_W; 
+      } 
+      titlePos_.x = x;
+      titlePos_.y = y;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case MARGIN_RIGHT:
+    {
+      int mark = graphPtr_->right_ + offset + pad;
+      tickAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_W;
+      left_ = mark;
+      if (gops->stackAxes)
+	right_ = mark + marginPtr->axesOffset - 1;
+      else
+	right_ = mark + width_ - 1;
+
+      top_ = screenMin_ - inset - 2;
+      bottom_ = screenMin_ + screenRange_ + inset -1;
+
+      axisLine = left_;
+      if (gops->plotRelief == TK_RELIEF_SOLID)
+	axisLine++;
+
+      if (ops->exterior) {
+	axisLine += gops->plotBW + axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = axisLine + 2;
+	if (ops->lineWidth > 0)
+	  tickLabel += ops->tickLength;
+      }
+      else {
+	axisLine -= axisPad + ops->lineWidth / 2;
+	tickLabel = graphPtr_->right_ + gops->plotBW + 2;
+      }
+
+      int x, y;
+      if (ops->titleAlternate) {
+	x = mark + (width_ / 2);
+	y = graphPtr_->top_ - AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_SE; 
+      }
+      else {
+	if (gops->stackAxes)
+	  x = mark + marginPtr->axesOffset - AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+	else
+	  x = mark + width_ - AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+
+	y = (bottom_ + top_) / 2;
+	titleAnchor_ = TK_ANCHOR_E;
+      }
+      titlePos_.x = x;
+      titlePos_.y = y;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case MARGIN_NONE:
+    axisLine = 0;
+    break;
+  }
+
+  if ((margin == MARGIN_LEFT) || (margin == MARGIN_TOP)) {
+    t1 = -t1;
+    t2 = -t2;
+    labelOffset = -labelOffset;
+  }
+
+  infoPtr->axis = axisLine;
+  infoPtr->t1 = axisLine + t1;
+  infoPtr->t2 = axisLine + t2;
+  if (tickLabel > 0)
+    infoPtr->label = tickLabel;
+  else
+    infoPtr->label = axisLine + labelOffset;
+
+  if (!ops->exterior) {
+    infoPtr->t1 = axisLine - t1;
+    infoPtr->t2 = axisLine - t2;
+  } 
+}
+
+void Axis::makeTick(double value, int tick, int line, Segment2d *sp)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->logScale)
+    value = EXP10(value);
+
+  if (isHorizontal()) {
+    sp->p.x = hMap(value);
+    sp->p.y = line;
+    sp->q.x = sp->p.x;
+    sp->q.y = tick;
+  }
+  else {
+    sp->p.x = line;
+    sp->p.y = vMap(value);
+    sp->q.x = tick;
+    sp->q.y = sp->p.y;
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::makeSegments(AxisInfo *infoPtr)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  delete [] segments_;
+  segments_ = NULL;
+
+  Ticks* t1Ptr = ops->t1UPtr ? ops->t1UPtr : t1Ptr_;
+  Ticks* t2Ptr = ops->t2UPtr ? ops->t2UPtr : t2Ptr_;
+
+  int nMajorTicks= t1Ptr ? t1Ptr->nTicks : 0;
+  int nMinorTicks= t2Ptr ? t2Ptr->nTicks : 0;
+
+  int arraySize = 1 + (nMajorTicks * (nMinorTicks + 1));
+  Segment2d* segments = new Segment2d[arraySize];
+  Segment2d* sp = segments;
+  if (ops->lineWidth > 0) {
+    makeLine(infoPtr->axis, sp);
+    sp++;
+  }
+
+  if (ops->showTicks) {
+    int isHoriz = isHorizontal();
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nMajorTicks; ii++) {
+      double t1 = t1Ptr->values[ii];
+      /* Minor ticks */
+      for (int jj=0; jj<nMinorTicks; jj++) {
+	double t2 = t1 + (majorSweep_.step*t2Ptr->values[jj]);
+	if (inRange(t2, &axisRange_)) {
+	  makeTick(t2, infoPtr->t2, infoPtr->axis, sp);
+	  sp++;
+	}
+      }
+      if (!inRange(t1, &axisRange_))
+	continue;
+
+      /* Major tick */
+      makeTick(t1, infoPtr->t1, infoPtr->axis, sp);
+      sp++;
+    }
+
+    ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(tickLabels_);
+    double labelPos = (double)infoPtr->label;
+
+    for (int ii=0; ii< nMajorTicks; ii++) {
+      double t1 = t1Ptr->values[ii];
+      if (ops->labelOffset)
+	t1 += majorSweep_.step * 0.5;
+
+      if (!inRange(t1, &axisRange_))
+	continue;
+
+      TickLabel* labelPtr = (TickLabel*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      link = Chain_NextLink(link);
+      Segment2d seg;
+      makeTick(t1, infoPtr->t1, infoPtr->axis, &seg);
+      // Save tick label X-Y position
+      if (isHoriz) {
+	labelPtr->anchorPos.x = seg.p.x;
+	labelPtr->anchorPos.y = labelPos;
+      }
+      else {
+	labelPtr->anchorPos.x = labelPos;
+	labelPtr->anchorPos.y = seg.p.y;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  segments_ = segments;
+  nSegments_ = sp - segments;
+}
+
+Ticks* Axis::generateTicks(TickSweep *sweepPtr)
+{
+  Ticks* ticksPtr = new Ticks(sweepPtr->nSteps);
+
+  if (sweepPtr->step == 0.0) { 
+    // Hack: A zero step indicates to use log values
+    // Precomputed log10 values [1..10]
+    static double logTable[] = {
+      0.0, 
+      0.301029995663981, 
+      0.477121254719662, 
+      0.602059991327962, 
+      0.698970004336019, 
+      0.778151250383644, 
+      0.845098040014257,
+      0.903089986991944, 
+      0.954242509439325, 
+      1.0
+    };
+    for (int ii=0; ii<sweepPtr->nSteps; ii++)
+      ticksPtr->values[ii] = logTable[ii];
+  }
+  else {
+    double value = sweepPtr->initial;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<sweepPtr->nSteps; ii++) {
+      value = (value/sweepPtr->step)*sweepPtr->step;
+      ticksPtr->values[ii] = value;
+      value += sweepPtr->step;
+    }
+  }
+
+  return ticksPtr;
+}
+
+void Axis::makeGridLine(double value, Segment2d *sp)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->logScale)
+    value = EXP10(value);
+
+  if (isHorizontal()) {
+    sp->p.x = hMap(value);
+    sp->p.y = graphPtr_->top_;
+    sp->q.x = sp->p.x;
+    sp->q.y = graphPtr_->bottom_;
+  }
+  else {
+    sp->p.x = graphPtr_->left_;
+    sp->p.y = vMap(value);
+    sp->q.x = graphPtr_->right_;
+    sp->q.y = sp->p.y;
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::print(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  PostscriptOptions* pops = (PostscriptOptions*)graphPtr_->postscript_->ops_;
+
+  if (ops->hide || !use_)
+    return;
+
+  psPtr->format("%% Axis \"%s\"\n", name_);
+  if (pops->decorations) {
+    if (ops->normalBg) {
+      int relief = active_ ? ops->activeRelief : ops->relief;
+      psPtr->fill3DRectangle(ops->normalBg, left_, top_, 
+			     right_-left_, bottom_-top_, 
+			     ops->borderWidth, relief);
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    psPtr->setClearBackground();
+    psPtr->fillRectangle(left_, top_, right_-left_, bottom_-top_);
+  }
+
+  if (ops->title) {
+    TextStyle ts(graphPtr_);
+    TextStyleOptions* tops = (TextStyleOptions*)ts.ops();
+
+    tops->angle = titleAngle_;
+    tops->font = ops->titleFont;
+    tops->anchor = titleAnchor_;
+    tops->color = active_ ? ops->activeFgColor : ops->titleColor;
+    tops->justify = ops->titleJustify;
+
+    ts.xPad_ = 1;
+    ts.yPad_ = 0;
+    ts.printText(psPtr, ops->title, titlePos_.x, titlePos_.y);
+  }
+
+  if (ops->showTicks) {
+    TextStyle ts(graphPtr_);
+    TextStyleOptions* tops = (TextStyleOptions*)ts.ops();
+
+    tops->angle = ops->tickAngle;
+    tops->font = ops->tickFont;
+    tops->anchor = tickAnchor_;
+    tops->color = active_ ? ops->activeFgColor : ops->tickColor;
+
+    ts.xPad_ = 2;
+    ts.yPad_ = 0;
+
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(tickLabels_); link; 
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      TickLabel *labelPtr = (TickLabel*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      ts.printText(psPtr, labelPtr->string, labelPtr->anchorPos.x, 
+		   labelPtr->anchorPos.y);
+    }
+  }
+
+  if ((nSegments_ > 0) && (ops->lineWidth > 0)) {
+    psPtr->setLineAttributes(active_ ? ops->activeFgColor : ops->tickColor,
+			     ops->lineWidth, (Dashes*)NULL, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+    psPtr->printSegments(segments_, nSegments_);
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::printGrids(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->hide || !ops->showGrid || !use_)
+    return;
+
+  psPtr->format("%% Axis %s: grid line attributes\n", name_);
+  psPtr->setLineAttributes(ops->major.color, ops->major.lineWidth, 
+			    &ops->major.dashes, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+  psPtr->format("%% Axis %s: major grid line segments\n", name_);
+  psPtr->printSegments(ops->major.segments, ops->major.nUsed);
+
+  if (ops->showGridMinor) {
+    psPtr->setLineAttributes(ops->minor.color, ops->minor.lineWidth, 
+			     &ops->minor.dashes, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+    psPtr->format("%% Axis %s: minor grid line segments\n", name_);
+    psPtr->printSegments(ops->minor.segments, ops->minor.nUsed);
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::printLimits(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->limitsFormat)
+    return;
+
+  double vMin = graphPtr_->left_ + gops->xPad + 2;
+  double vMax = vMin;
+  double hMin = graphPtr_->bottom_ - gops->yPad - 2;
+  double hMax = hMin;
+
+  const int spacing =8;
+  int isHoriz = isHorizontal();
+  char* minPtr =NULL;
+  char* maxPtr =NULL;
+  char minString[200];
+  char maxString[200];
+  const char* fmt = ops->limitsFormat;
+  if (fmt && *fmt) {
+    minPtr = minString;
+    snprintf(minString, 200, fmt, axisRange_.min);
+
+    maxPtr = maxString;
+    snprintf(maxString, 200, fmt, axisRange_.max);
+  }
+  if (ops->descending) {
+    char *tmp = minPtr;
+    minPtr = maxPtr;
+    maxPtr = tmp;
+  }
+
+  int textWidth, textHeight;
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->limitsTextStyle);
+  if (maxPtr) {
+    graphPtr_->getTextExtents(ops->tickFont, maxPtr, -1, 
+			      &textWidth, &textHeight);
+    if ((textWidth > 0) && (textHeight > 0)) {
+      if (isHoriz) {
+	ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 90.0;
+	ops->limitsTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_SE;
+
+	ts.printText(psPtr, maxPtr, graphPtr_->right_, (int)hMax);
+	hMax -= (textWidth + spacing);
+      } 
+      else {
+	ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 0.0;
+	ops->limitsTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+
+	ts.printText(psPtr, maxPtr, (int)vMax, graphPtr_->top_);
+	vMax += (textWidth + spacing);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (minPtr) {
+    graphPtr_->getTextExtents(ops->tickFont, minPtr, -1, 
+			      &textWidth, &textHeight);
+    if ((textWidth > 0) && (textHeight > 0)) {
+      ops->limitsTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_SW;
+
+      if (isHoriz) {
+	ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 90.0;
+
+	ts.printText(psPtr, minPtr, graphPtr_->left_, (int)hMin);
+	hMin -= (textWidth + spacing);
+      }
+      else {
+	ops->limitsTextStyle.angle = 0.0;
+
+	ts.printText(psPtr, minPtr, (int)vMin, graphPtr_->bottom_);
+	vMin += (textWidth + spacing);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Axis::updateScrollbar(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *scrollCmdObjPtr,
+			   int first, int last, int width)
+{
+  double firstFract =0.0;
+  double lastFract = 1.0;
+  if (width > 0) {
+    firstFract = (double)first / (double)width;
+    lastFract = (double)last / (double)width;
+  }
+  Tcl_Obj *cmdObjPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(scrollCmdObjPtr);
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, cmdObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(firstFract));
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, cmdObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(lastFract));
+  Tcl_IncrRefCount(cmdObjPtr);
+  if (Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, cmdObjPtr, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL) != TCL_OK) {
+    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+  }
+  Tcl_DecrRefCount(cmdObjPtr);
+}
+
+void Axis::getGeometry()
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  freeTickLabels();
+
+  // Leave room for axis baseline and padding
+  unsigned int y =0;
+  if (ops->exterior && (gops->plotRelief != TK_RELIEF_SOLID))
+    y += ops->lineWidth + 2;
+
+  maxTickHeight_ = maxTickWidth_ = 0;
+
+  if (t1Ptr_)
+    delete t1Ptr_;
+  t1Ptr_ = generateTicks(&majorSweep_);
+
+  if (t2Ptr_)
+    delete t2Ptr_;
+  t2Ptr_ = generateTicks(&minorSweep_);
+
+  if (ops->showTicks) {
+    Ticks* t1Ptr = ops->t1UPtr ? ops->t1UPtr : t1Ptr_;
+	
+    int nTicks =0;
+    if (t1Ptr)
+      nTicks = t1Ptr->nTicks;
+	
+    unsigned int nLabels =0;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nTicks; ii++) {
+      double x = t1Ptr->values[ii];
+      double x2 = t1Ptr->values[ii];
+      if (ops->labelOffset)
+	x2 += majorSweep_.step * 0.5;
+
+      if (!inRange(x2, &axisRange_))
+	continue;
+
+      TickLabel* labelPtr = makeLabel(x);
+      tickLabels_->append(labelPtr);
+      nLabels++;
+
+      // Get the dimensions of each tick label.  Remember tick labels
+      // can be multi-lined and/or rotated.
+      int lw, lh;
+      graphPtr_->getTextExtents(ops->tickFont, labelPtr->string, -1, &lw, &lh);
+      labelPtr->width  = lw;
+      labelPtr->height = lh;
+
+      if (ops->tickAngle != 0.0) {
+	// Rotated label width and height
+	double rlw, rlh;
+	graphPtr_->getBoundingBox(lw, lh, ops->tickAngle, &rlw, &rlh, NULL);
+	lw = (int)rlw;
+	lh = (int)rlh;
+      }
+      if (maxTickWidth_ < int(lw))
+	maxTickWidth_ = lw;
+
+      if (maxTickHeight_ < int(lh))
+	maxTickHeight_ = lh;
+    }
+	
+    unsigned int pad =0;
+    if (ops->exterior) {
+      // Because the axis cap style is "CapProjecting", we need to
+      // account for an extra 1.5 linewidth at the end of each line
+      pad = ((ops->lineWidth * 12) / 8);
+    }
+    if (isHorizontal())
+      y += maxTickHeight_ + pad;
+    else {
+      y += maxTickWidth_ + pad;
+      if (maxTickWidth_ > 0)
+	// Pad either size of label.
+	y += 5;
+    }
+    y += 2 * AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+    if ((ops->lineWidth > 0) && ops->exterior)
+      // Distance from axis line to tick label.
+      y += ops->tickLength;
+
+  } // showTicks
+
+  if (ops->title) {
+    if (ops->titleAlternate) {
+      if (y < titleHeight_)
+	y = titleHeight_;
+    } 
+    else
+      y += titleHeight_ + AXIS_PAD_TITLE;
+  }
+
+  // Correct for orientation of the axis
+  if (isHorizontal())
+    height_ = y;
+  else
+    width_ = y;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxis.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxis.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d459e8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxis.h
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef ___BltGrAxis_h__
+#define ___BltGrAxis_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltChain.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrText.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+  class Postscript;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int axis;
+    int t1;
+    int t2;
+    int label;
+  } AxisInfo;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char* name;
+    ClassId classId;
+  } AxisName;
+
+  extern AxisName axisNames[];
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Dashes dashes;
+    int lineWidth;
+    XColor* color;
+    GC gc;
+    Segment2d *segments;
+    int nUsed;
+    int nAllocated;
+  } Grid;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double min;
+    double max;
+    double range;
+    double scale;
+  } AxisRange;
+
+  class TickLabel {
+  public:
+    Point2d anchorPos;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+    char* string;
+
+  public:
+    TickLabel(char*);
+    virtual ~TickLabel();
+  };
+
+  class Ticks {
+  public:
+    int nTicks;
+    double* values;
+
+  public:
+    Ticks(int);
+    virtual ~Ticks();
+  };
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double initial;
+    double step;
+    int nSteps;
+  } TickSweep;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char** tags;
+    int checkLimits;
+    int exterior;
+    int showGrid;
+    int showGridMinor;
+    int hide;
+    int showTicks;
+
+    double windowSize;
+    const char *tickFormatCmd;
+    int descending;
+    int labelOffset;
+    TextStyleOptions limitsTextStyle;
+    const char *limitsFormat;
+    int lineWidth;
+    int logScale;
+    int looseMin;
+    int looseMax;
+    Ticks* t1UPtr;
+    Ticks* t2UPtr;
+    double reqMin;
+    double reqMax;
+    Tcl_Obj *scrollCmdObjPtr;
+    int scrollUnits;
+    double reqScrollMin;
+    double reqScrollMax;
+    double shiftBy;
+    double reqStep;
+    int reqNumMajorTicks;
+    int reqNumMinorTicks;
+    int tickLength;
+    const char *title;
+    int titleAlternate;
+
+    XColor* activeFgColor;
+    int activeRelief;
+    Tk_3DBorder normalBg;
+    int borderWidth;
+    XColor* tickColor;
+    Grid major;
+    Grid minor;
+    Tk_Justify titleJustify;
+    int relief;
+    double tickAngle;	
+    Tk_Anchor reqTickAnchor;
+    Tk_Font tickFont;
+    Tk_Font titleFont;
+    XColor* titleColor;
+
+    const char *tickFormat;
+  } AxisOptions;
+
+  class Axis {
+  protected:
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+
+  public:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    ClassId classId_;
+    const char* name_;
+    const char* className_;
+
+    Tcl_HashEntry* hashPtr_;
+    int refCount_;
+    int use_;
+    int active_;		
+
+    ChainLink* link;
+    Chain* chain;
+
+    Point2d titlePos_;
+    unsigned int titleWidth_;
+    unsigned int titleHeight_;
+    double min_;
+    double max_;
+    double scrollMin_;
+    double scrollMax_;
+    AxisRange valueRange_;
+    AxisRange axisRange_;
+    double prevMin_;
+    double prevMax_;
+    Ticks* t1Ptr_;
+    Ticks* t2Ptr_;
+    TickSweep minorSweep_;
+    TickSweep majorSweep_;
+
+    int margin_;
+    Segment2d *segments_;
+    int nSegments_;
+    Chain* tickLabels_;
+    int left_;
+    int right_;
+    int top_;
+    int bottom_;
+    int width_;
+    int height_;
+    int maxTickWidth_;
+    int maxTickHeight_;
+    Tk_Anchor tickAnchor_;
+    GC tickGC_;
+    GC activeTickGC_;
+    double titleAngle_;	
+    Tk_Anchor titleAnchor_;
+    double screenScale_;
+    int screenMin_;
+    int screenRange_;
+
+  protected:
+    double niceNum(double, int);
+    void setRange(AxisRange*, double, double);
+    void makeGridLine(double, Segment2d*);
+    void makeSegments(AxisInfo*);
+    void resetTextStyles();
+    void makeLine(int, Segment2d*);
+    void makeTick(double, int, int, Segment2d*);
+    void offsets(int, int, AxisInfo*);
+    void updateScrollbar(Tcl_Interp*, Tcl_Obj*, int, int, int);
+
+  public:
+    Axis(Graph*, const char*, int, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~Axis();
+
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable() {return optionTable_;}
+    void* ops() {return ops_;}
+    ClassId classId() {return classId_;}
+    const char* className() {return className_;}
+
+    int configure();
+    void map(int, int);
+    void draw(Drawable);
+    void drawGrids(Drawable);
+    void drawLimits(Drawable);
+    void print(PSOutput*);
+    void printGrids(PSOutput*);
+    void printLimits(PSOutput*);
+
+    void mapStacked(int, int);
+    void mapGridlines();
+    void setClass(ClassId);
+    void logScale(double, double);
+    void linearScale(double, double);
+    void fixRange();
+    int isHorizontal();
+    void freeTickLabels();
+    TickLabel* makeLabel(double);
+    void getDataLimits(double, double);
+    Ticks* generateTicks(TickSweep*);
+    int inRange(double, AxisRange*);
+    void getGeometry();
+
+    double invHMap(double x);
+    double invVMap(double y);
+    double hMap(double x);
+    double vMap(double y);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb3277e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxisOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define EXP10(x)	(pow(10.0,(x)))
+
+static int GetAxisScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[],
+			     double *offsetPtr, double windowSize,
+			     double scrollUnits, double scale);
+
+static double Clamp(double x) 
+{
+  return (x < 0.0) ? 0.0 : (x > 1.0) ? 1.0 : x;
+}
+
+int Blt::AxisObjConfigure(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)axisPtr->ops(), axisPtr->optionTable(), 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    if (axisPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    graphPtr->flags |= mask;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisCgetOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId ?option value?...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisConfigureOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+static int ActivateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisActivateOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int BindOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->axes_.tagTable, &iter); hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      char* tagName = (char*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&graphPtr->axes_.tagTable, hPtr);
+      Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(tagName, -1);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else
+    return graphPtr->bindTable_->configure(graphPtr->axisTag(Tcl_GetString(objv[3])), objc-4, objv+4);
+}
+
+static int CreateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (graphPtr->createAxis(objc, objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[3]);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int DeleteOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+    
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (axisPtr->refCount_ == 0)
+    delete axisPtr;
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int InvTransformOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId scoord");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisInvTransformOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+static int LimitsOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisLimitsOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+static int MarginOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisMarginOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+static int NamesOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  if (objc<3) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?pattern...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->axes_.table, &cursor); hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+      Axis* axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj(axisPtr->name_, -1));
+    }
+  } 
+  else {
+    Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->axes_.table, &cursor); hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+      Axis* axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+	const char *pattern = (const char*)Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]);
+	if (Tcl_StringMatch(axisPtr->name_, pattern)) {
+	  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+				   Tcl_NewStringObj(axisPtr->name_, -1));
+	  break;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int TransformOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId coord");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisTransformOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+static int TypeOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisTypeOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+static int ViewOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "axisId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(objv[3], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return AxisViewOp(axisPtr, interp, objc-1, objv+1);
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::axisEnsemble[] = {
+  {"activate",     ActivateOp, 0},
+  {"bind",         BindOp, 0},
+  {"cget", 	   CgetOp,0 },
+  {"configure",    ConfigureOp,0 },
+  {"create",       CreateOp, 0},
+  {"deactivate",   ActivateOp, 0},
+  {"delete",       DeleteOp, 0},
+  {"invtransform", InvTransformOp, 0},
+  {"limits",       LimitsOp, 0},
+  {"margin",       MarginOp, 0},
+  {"names",        NamesOp, 0},
+  {"transform",    TransformOp, 0},
+  {"type",         TypeOp, 0},
+  {"view",         ViewOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+// Support
+
+double AdjustViewport(double offset, double windowSize)
+{
+  // Canvas-style scrolling allows the world to be scrolled within the window.
+  if (windowSize > 1.0) {
+    if (windowSize < (1.0 - offset))
+      offset = 1.0 - windowSize;
+
+    if (offset > 0.0)
+      offset = 0.0;
+  }
+  else {
+    if ((offset + windowSize) > 1.0)
+      offset = 1.0 - windowSize;
+
+    if (offset < 0.0)
+      offset = 0.0;
+  }
+  return offset;
+}
+
+static int GetAxisScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[],
+			     double *offsetPtr, double windowSize,
+			     double scrollUnits, double scale)
+{
+  const char *string;
+  char c;
+  double offset;
+  int length;
+
+  offset = *offsetPtr;
+  string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[0], &length);
+  c = string[0];
+  scrollUnits *= scale;
+  if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(string, "scroll", length) == 0)) {
+    int count;
+    double fract;
+
+    /* Scroll number unit/page */
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[1], &count) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &length);
+    c = string[0];
+    if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(string, "units", length) == 0))
+      fract = count * scrollUnits;
+    else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(string, "pages", length) == 0))
+      /* A page is 90% of the view-able window. */
+      fract = (int)(count * windowSize * 0.9 + 0.5);
+    else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(string, "pixels", length) == 0))
+      fract = count * scale;
+    else {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown \"scroll\" units \"", string,
+		       "\"", NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    offset += fract;
+  } 
+  else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(string, "moveto", length) == 0)) {
+    double fract;
+
+    /* moveto fraction */
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[1], &fract) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    offset = fract;
+  } 
+  else {
+    int count;
+    double fract;
+
+    /* Treat like "scroll units" */
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[0], &count) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    fract = (double)count * scrollUnits;
+    offset += fract;
+    /* CHECK THIS: return TCL_OK; */
+  }
+  *offsetPtr = AdjustViewport(offset, windowSize);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+// Common Ops
+
+int AxisCgetOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+	       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+
+  if (objc != 4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "cget option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char*)axisPtr->ops(),
+				      axisPtr->optionTable(),
+				      objv[3], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (!objPtr)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int AxisConfigureOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+
+  if (objc <= 4) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)axisPtr->ops(), 
+				       axisPtr->optionTable(), 
+				       (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (!objPtr)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return AxisObjConfigure(axisPtr, interp, objc-3, objv+3);
+}
+
+int AxisActivateOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+  const char *string;
+
+  string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  axisPtr->active_ = (string[0] == 'a') ? 1 : 0;
+
+  if (!ops->hide && axisPtr->use_) {
+    graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int AxisInvTransformOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+
+  if (graphPtr->flags & RESET)
+    graphPtr->resetAxes();
+
+  int sy;
+  if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &sy) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Is the axis vertical or horizontal?
+  // Check the site where the axis was positioned.  If the axis is
+  // virtual, all we have to go on is how it was mapped to an
+  // element (using either -mapx or -mapy options).  
+  double y = axisPtr->isHorizontal() ? 
+    axisPtr->invHMap(sy) : axisPtr->invVMap(sy);
+
+  Tcl_SetDoubleObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), y);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int AxisLimitsOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+
+  if (graphPtr->flags & RESET)
+    graphPtr->resetAxes();
+
+  double min, max;
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    min = EXP10(axisPtr->axisRange_.min);
+    max = EXP10(axisPtr->axisRange_.max);
+  } 
+  else {
+    min = axisPtr->axisRange_.min;
+    max = axisPtr->axisRange_.max;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(min));
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(max));
+
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int AxisMarginOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  const char *marginName = "";
+  if (axisPtr->use_)
+    marginName = axisNames[axisPtr->margin_].name;
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), marginName, -1);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int AxisTransformOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+
+  if (graphPtr->flags & RESET)
+    graphPtr->resetAxes();
+
+  double x;
+  if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (axisPtr->isHorizontal())
+    x = axisPtr->hMap(x);
+  else
+    x = axisPtr->vMap(x);
+
+  Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), (int)x);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int AxisTypeOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+	       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  const char* typeName = "";
+  if (axisPtr->use_) {
+    switch (axisPtr->classId_) {
+    case CID_AXIS_X:
+      typeName = "x";
+      break;
+    case CID_AXIS_Y:
+      typeName = "y";
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), typeName, -1);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int AxisViewOp(Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+	       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+  Graph* graphPtr = axisPtr->graphPtr_;
+  double worldMin = axisPtr->valueRange_.min;
+  double worldMax = axisPtr->valueRange_.max;
+  /* Override data dimensions with user-selected limits. */
+  if (!isnan(axisPtr->scrollMin_))
+    worldMin = axisPtr->scrollMin_;
+
+  if (!isnan(axisPtr->scrollMax_))
+    worldMax = axisPtr->scrollMax_;
+
+  double viewMin = axisPtr->min_;
+  double viewMax = axisPtr->max_;
+  /* Bound the view within scroll region. */ 
+  if (viewMin < worldMin)
+    viewMin = worldMin;
+
+  if (viewMax > worldMax)
+    viewMax = worldMax;
+
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    worldMin = log10(worldMin);
+    worldMax = log10(worldMax);
+    viewMin  = log10(viewMin);
+    viewMax  = log10(viewMax);
+  }
+  double worldWidth = worldMax - worldMin;
+  double viewWidth  = viewMax - viewMin;
+
+  /* Unlike horizontal axes, vertical axis values run opposite of the
+   * scrollbar first/last values.  So instead of pushing the axis minimum
+   * around, we move the maximum instead. */
+  double axisOffset;
+  double axisScale;
+  if (axisPtr->isHorizontal() != ops->descending) {
+    axisOffset  = viewMin - worldMin;
+    axisScale = graphPtr->hScale_;
+  } else {
+    axisOffset  = worldMax - viewMax;
+    axisScale = graphPtr->vScale_;
+  }
+  if (objc == 4) {
+    double first = Clamp(axisOffset / worldWidth);
+    double last = Clamp((axisOffset + viewWidth) / worldWidth);
+    Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(first));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(last));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  double fract = axisOffset / worldWidth;
+  if (GetAxisScrollInfo(interp, objc, objv, &fract, viewWidth / worldWidth, 
+			ops->scrollUnits, axisScale) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (axisPtr->isHorizontal() != ops->descending) {
+    ops->reqMin = (fract * worldWidth) + worldMin;
+    ops->reqMax = ops->reqMin + viewWidth;
+  }
+  else {
+    ops->reqMax = worldMax - (fract * worldWidth);
+    ops->reqMin = ops->reqMax - viewWidth;
+  }
+  if (ops->logScale) {
+    ops->reqMin = EXP10(ops->reqMin);
+    ops->reqMax = EXP10(ops->reqMax);
+  }
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..777aea7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrAxisOp_h__
+#define __BltGrAxisOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble axisEnsemble[];
+  extern int AxisObjConfigure(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+};
+
+extern int AxisCgetOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisConfigureOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisActivateOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisInvTransformOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisLimitsOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisMarginOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisTransformOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisTypeOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+extern int AxisViewOp(Blt::Axis* axisPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOption.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOption.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f91d99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOption.C
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxisOption.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc AxisSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc AxisGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc AxisFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption xAxisObjOption =
+  {
+    "xaxis", AxisSetProc, AxisGetProc, RestoreProc, AxisFreeProc,
+    (ClientData)CID_AXIS_X
+  };
+Tk_ObjCustomOption yAxisObjOption =
+  {
+    "yaxis", AxisSetProc, AxisGetProc, RestoreProc, AxisFreeProc,
+    (ClientData)CID_AXIS_Y
+  };
+
+static int AxisSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+		       int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  Axis** axisPtrPtr = (Axis**)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = *(double*)axisPtrPtr;
+  
+  if (!axisPtrPtr)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  Graph* graphPtr = getGraphFromWindowData(tkwin);
+#ifdef _WIN64
+  ClassId classId = (ClassId)((long long)clientData);
+#else
+  ClassId classId = (ClassId)((long)clientData);
+#endif
+
+  Axis *axisPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getAxis(*objPtr, &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (classId != CID_NONE) {
+    // Set the axis type on the first use of it.
+    if ((axisPtr->refCount_ == 0) || (axisPtr->classId_ == CID_NONE))
+      axisPtr->setClass(classId);
+
+    else if (axisPtr->classId_ != classId) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "axis \"", Tcl_GetString(*objPtr),
+		       "\" is already in use on an opposite ", 
+		       axisPtr->className_, "-axis", 
+		       NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    axisPtr->refCount_++;
+  }
+
+  *axisPtrPtr = axisPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+};
+
+static Tcl_Obj* AxisGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			    char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = *(Axis**)(widgRec + offset);
+  if (!axisPtr)
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj("", -1);
+
+  return Tcl_NewStringObj(axisPtr->name_, -1);
+};
+
+static void AxisFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *ptr)
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = *(Axis**)ptr;
+  if (axisPtr) {
+    axisPtr->refCount_--;
+    if (axisPtr->refCount_ == 0)
+      delete axisPtr;
+  }
+}
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc LimitSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc LimitGetProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption limitObjOption =
+  {
+    "limit", LimitSetProc, LimitGetProc, NULL, NULL, NULL
+  };
+
+static int LimitSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+			int offset, char* save, int flags)
+{
+  double* limitPtr = (double*)(widgRec + offset);
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetString(*objPtr);
+  if (!string || !string[0]) {
+    *limitPtr = NAN;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, *objPtr, limitPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* LimitGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			     char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  double limit = *(double*)(widgRec + offset);
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr;
+
+  if (!isnan(limit))
+    objPtr = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(limit);
+  else
+    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("", -1);
+
+  return objPtr;
+}
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc TicksSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc TicksGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc TicksFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption ticksObjOption =
+  {
+    "ticks", TicksSetProc, TicksGetProc, RestoreProc, TicksFreeProc, NULL
+  };
+
+static int TicksSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+			int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  Ticks** ticksPtrPtr = (Ticks**)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = *(double*)ticksPtrPtr;
+
+  if (!ticksPtrPtr)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  int objc;
+  Tcl_Obj** objv;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, *objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Ticks* ticksPtr = NULL;
+  if (objc > 0) {
+    ticksPtr = new Ticks(objc);
+    for (int ii=0; ii<objc; ii++) {
+      double value;
+      if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[ii], &value) != TCL_OK) {
+	delete ticksPtr;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      ticksPtr->values[ii] = value;
+    }
+    ticksPtr->nTicks = objc;
+  }
+
+  *ticksPtrPtr = ticksPtr;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* TicksGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			     char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  Ticks* ticksPtr = *(Ticks**)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  if (!ticksPtr)
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+  int cnt = ticksPtr->nTicks;
+  Tcl_Obj** ll = new Tcl_Obj*[cnt];
+  for (int ii = 0; ii<cnt; ii++)
+    ll[ii] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(ticksPtr->values[ii]);
+
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(cnt, ll);
+  delete [] ll;
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+}
+
+static void TicksFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			 char *ptr)
+{
+  Ticks* ticksPtr = *(Ticks**)ptr;
+  delete ticksPtr;
+}
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc ObjectSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc ObjectGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc ObjectFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption objectObjOption =
+  {
+    "object", ObjectSetProc, ObjectGetProc, RestoreProc, ObjectFreeProc, NULL,
+  };
+
+static int ObjectSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+			int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  Tcl_Obj** objectPtrPtr = (Tcl_Obj**)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = *(double*)objectPtrPtr;
+
+  if (!objectPtrPtr)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  Tcl_IncrRefCount(*objPtr);
+  *objectPtrPtr = *objPtr;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+    
+static Tcl_Obj* ObjectGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			      char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  Tcl_Obj** objectPtrPtr = (Tcl_Obj**)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  if (!objectPtrPtr)
+    return Tcl_NewObj();
+
+  return *objectPtrPtr;
+}
+
+static void ObjectFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			   char *ptr)
+{
+  Tcl_Obj* objectPtr = *(Tcl_Obj**)ptr;
+  if (objectPtr)
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(objectPtr);
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOption.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOption.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4efa8ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrAxisOption.h
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrAxisOption_h__
+#define __BltGrAxisOption_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption xAxisObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption yAxisObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption limitObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption ticksObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption objectObjOption;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrBind.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrBind.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e7e81e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrBind.C
@@ -0,0 +1,227 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1998 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include <iostream>
+#include <sstream>
+#include <iomanip>
+using namespace std;
+
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_EventProc BindProc;
+
+BindTable::BindTable(Graph* graphPtr, Pick* pickPtr)
+{
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  pickPtr_ = pickPtr;
+  grab_ =0;
+  table_ = Tk_CreateBindingTable(graphPtr->interp_);
+  currentItem_ =NULL;
+  currentContext_ =CID_NONE;
+  newItem_ =NULL;
+  newContext_ =CID_NONE;
+  focusItem_ =NULL;
+  focusContext_ =CID_NONE;
+  //  pickEvent =NULL;
+  state_ =0;
+
+  unsigned int mask = (KeyPressMask | KeyReleaseMask | ButtonPressMask |
+		       ButtonReleaseMask | EnterWindowMask | LeaveWindowMask |
+		       PointerMotionMask);
+  Tk_CreateEventHandler(graphPtr->tkwin_, mask, BindProc, this);
+}
+
+BindTable::~BindTable()
+{
+  Tk_DeleteBindingTable(table_);
+  unsigned int mask = (KeyPressMask | KeyReleaseMask | ButtonPressMask |
+		       ButtonReleaseMask | EnterWindowMask | LeaveWindowMask |
+		       PointerMotionMask);
+  Tk_DeleteEventHandler(graphPtr_->tkwin_, mask, BindProc, this);
+}
+
+int BindTable::configure(ClientData item, int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc == 0) {
+    Tk_GetAllBindings(graphPtr_->interp_, table_, item);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[0]);
+  if (objc == 1) {
+    const char* command = 
+      Tk_GetBinding(graphPtr_->interp_, table_, item, string);
+    if (!command) {
+      Tcl_ResetResult(graphPtr_->interp_);
+      Tcl_AppendResult(graphPtr_->interp_, "invalid binding event \"", 
+		       string, "\"", NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(graphPtr_->interp_), command, -1);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  const char* seq = string;
+  const char* command = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+  if (command[0] == '\0')
+    return Tk_DeleteBinding(graphPtr_->interp_, table_, item, seq);
+
+  unsigned long mask;
+  if (command[0] == '+')
+    mask = Tk_CreateBinding(graphPtr_->interp_, table_, 
+			    item, seq, command+1, 1);
+  else
+    mask = Tk_CreateBinding(graphPtr_->interp_, table_, 
+			    item, seq, command, 0);
+  if (!mask)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (mask & (unsigned) ~(ButtonMotionMask|Button1MotionMask
+			  |Button2MotionMask|Button3MotionMask|Button4MotionMask
+			  |Button5MotionMask|ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask
+			  |EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|KeyPressMask
+			  |KeyReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask)) {
+    Tk_DeleteBinding(graphPtr_->interp_, table_, item, seq);
+    Tcl_ResetResult(graphPtr_->interp_);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(graphPtr_->interp_, "requested illegal events; ",
+		     "only key, button, motion, enter, leave, and virtual ",
+		     "events may be used", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void BindTable::deleteBindings(ClientData object)
+{
+  Tk_DeleteAllBindings(table_, object);
+
+  if (currentItem_ == object) {
+    currentItem_ =NULL;
+    currentContext_ =CID_NONE;
+  }
+
+  if (newItem_ == object) {
+    newItem_ =NULL;
+    newContext_ =CID_NONE;
+  }
+
+  if (focusItem_ == object) {
+    focusItem_ =NULL;
+    focusContext_ =CID_NONE;
+  }
+}
+
+void BindTable::doEvent(XEvent* eventPtr)
+{
+  ClientData item = currentItem_;
+  ClassId classId = currentContext_;
+
+  if ((eventPtr->type == KeyPress) || (eventPtr->type == KeyRelease)) {
+    item = focusItem_;
+    classId = focusContext_;
+  }
+  if (!item)
+    return;
+
+  int nTags;
+  const char** tagArray = graphPtr_->getTags(item, classId, &nTags);
+  Tk_BindEvent(table_, eventPtr, graphPtr_->tkwin_, nTags, (void**)tagArray);
+
+  delete [] tagArray;
+}
+
+void BindTable::pickItem(XEvent* eventPtr)
+{
+  int buttonDown = state_
+    & (Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask|Button4Mask|Button5Mask);
+
+  // A LeaveNotify event automatically means that there's no current item,
+  if (eventPtr->type != LeaveNotify) {
+    int x = eventPtr->xcrossing.x;
+    int y = eventPtr->xcrossing.y;
+    newItem_ = pickPtr_->pickEntry(x, y, &newContext_);
+  }
+  else {
+    newItem_ =NULL;
+    newContext_ = CID_NONE;
+  }
+
+  // Nothing to do: the current item hasn't changed.
+  if ((newItem_ == currentItem_) && !grab_)
+    return;
+
+  if (!buttonDown)
+    grab_ =0;
+
+  if ((newItem_ != currentItem_) && buttonDown) {
+    grab_ =1;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  grab_ =0;
+  currentItem_ = newItem_;
+  currentContext_ = newContext_;
+}
+
+static void BindProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent* eventPtr)
+{
+  BindTable* bindPtr = (BindTable*)clientData;
+  Tcl_Preserve(bindPtr->graphPtr_);
+
+  switch (eventPtr->type) {
+  case ButtonPress:
+  case ButtonRelease:
+    bindPtr->state_ = eventPtr->xbutton.state;
+    break;
+  case EnterNotify:
+  case LeaveNotify:
+    bindPtr->state_ = eventPtr->xcrossing.state;
+    break;
+  case MotionNotify:
+    bindPtr->state_ = eventPtr->xmotion.state;
+    break;
+  case KeyPress:
+  case KeyRelease:
+    bindPtr->state_ = eventPtr->xkey.state;
+    break;
+  }
+
+  bindPtr->pickItem(eventPtr);
+  bindPtr->doEvent(eventPtr);
+
+  Tcl_Release(bindPtr->graphPtr_);
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrBind.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrBind.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7947210
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrBind.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1998-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrBind_h__
+#define __BltGrBind_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+  class Pick;
+
+  class BindTable {
+  protected:
+    Tk_BindingTable table_;
+    unsigned int grab_;
+    ClientData newItem_;
+    ClassId newContext_;
+    Pick* pickPtr_;
+
+  public:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    ClientData currentItem_;
+    ClassId currentContext_;
+    ClientData focusItem_;
+    ClassId focusContext_;
+    int state_;
+    XEvent pickEvent_;
+
+  public:
+    BindTable(Graph*, Pick*);
+    virtual ~BindTable();
+  
+    int configure(ClientData, int, Tcl_Obj *const []);
+    void deleteBindings(ClientData object);
+    void doEvent(XEvent*);
+    void pickItem(XEvent*);
+
+    ClientData currentItem() {return currentItem_;}
+  };
+};
+
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrDef.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrDef.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d73836a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrDef.h
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrDef_h__
+#define __BltGrDef_h__
+
+#define STD_NORMAL_BACKGROUND "gray85"
+#define STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND "black"
+#define STD_ACTIVE_BACKGROUND "gray90"
+#define STD_ACTIVE_FOREGROUND "black"
+
+#define STD_FONT_LARGE	"helvetica 16 normal roman"
+#define STD_FONT_MEDIUM	"helvetica 14 normal roman"
+#define STD_FONT_NORMAL	"helvetica 12 normal roman"
+#define STD_FONT_SMALL	"helvetica 10 normal roman"
+
+#define STD_BORDERWIDTH "2"
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElem.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElem.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..faf1b72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElem.C
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+// Class ElemValues
+
+ElemValues::ElemValues()
+{
+  values_ =NULL;
+  nValues_ =0;
+  min_ =0;
+  max_ =0;
+}
+
+ElemValues::~ElemValues()
+{
+  delete [] values_;
+}
+
+void ElemValues::reset()
+{
+  delete [] values_;
+  values_ =NULL;
+  nValues_ =0;
+  min_ =0;
+  max_ =0;
+}
+
+ElemValuesSource::ElemValuesSource(int nn) : ElemValues()
+{
+  nValues_ = nn;
+  values_ = new double[nn];
+}
+
+ElemValuesSource::ElemValuesSource(int nn, double* vv) : ElemValues()
+{
+  nValues_ = nn;
+  values_ = vv;
+}
+
+ElemValuesSource::~ElemValuesSource()
+{
+}
+
+void ElemValuesSource::findRange()
+{
+  if (nValues_<1 || !values_)
+    return;
+
+  min_ = DBL_MAX;
+  max_ = -DBL_MAX;
+  for (int ii=0; ii<nValues_; ii++) {
+    if (isfinite(values_[ii])) {
+      if (values_[ii] < min_)
+	min_ = values_[ii];
+      if (values_[ii] > max_)
+	max_ = values_[ii];
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+ElemValuesVector::ElemValuesVector(Element* ptr, const char* vecName) 
+  : ElemValues()
+{
+  elemPtr_ = ptr;
+  Graph* graphPtr = elemPtr_->graphPtr_;
+  source_ = Blt_AllocVectorId(graphPtr->interp_, vecName);
+}
+
+ElemValuesVector::~ElemValuesVector()
+{
+  freeSource();
+}
+
+int ElemValuesVector::getVector()
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = elemPtr_->graphPtr_;
+
+  Blt_Vector *vecPtr;
+  if (Blt_GetVectorById(graphPtr->interp_, source_, &vecPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (fetchValues(vecPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+    freeSource();
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Blt_SetVectorChangedProc(source_, VectorChangedProc, this);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int ElemValuesVector::fetchValues(Blt_Vector* vector)
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = elemPtr_->graphPtr_;
+
+  delete [] values_;
+  values_ = NULL;
+  nValues_ = 0;
+  min_ =0;
+  max_ =0;
+
+  int ss = Blt_VecLength(vector);
+  if (!ss)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  double* array = new double[ss];
+  if (!array) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(graphPtr->interp_, "can't allocate new vector", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  memcpy(array, Blt_VecData(vector), ss*sizeof(double));
+  values_ = array;
+  nValues_ = Blt_VecLength(vector);
+  min_ = Blt_VecMin(vector);
+  max_ = Blt_VecMax(vector);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void ElemValuesVector::freeSource()
+{
+  if (source_) { 
+    Blt_SetVectorChangedProc(source_, NULL, NULL);
+    Blt_FreeVectorId(source_); 
+    source_ = NULL;
+  }
+}
+
+// Class Element
+
+Element::Element(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+{
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  name_ = dupstr(name);
+  optionTable_ =NULL;
+  ops_ =NULL;
+  hashPtr_ = hPtr;
+
+  row_ =0;
+  col_ =0;
+  activeIndices_ =NULL;
+  nActiveIndices_ =0;
+  xRange_ =0;
+  yRange_ =0;
+  active_ =0;
+  labelActive_ =0;
+
+  link =NULL;
+}
+
+Element::~Element()
+{
+  graphPtr_->bindTable_->deleteBindings(this);
+
+  if (link)
+    graphPtr_->elements_.displayList->deleteLink(link);
+
+  if (hashPtr_)
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashPtr_);
+
+  delete [] name_;
+
+  delete [] activeIndices_;
+
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+  free(ops_);
+}
+
+double Element::FindElemValuesMinimum(ElemValues* valuesPtr, double minLimit)
+{
+  double min = DBL_MAX;
+  if (!valuesPtr)
+    return min;
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<valuesPtr->nValues(); ii++) {
+    double x = valuesPtr->values_[ii];
+    // What do you do about negative values when using log
+    // scale values seems like a grey area. Mirror.
+    if (x < 0.0)
+      x = -x;
+    if ((x > minLimit) && (min > x))
+      min = x;
+  }
+  if (min == DBL_MAX)
+    min = minLimit;
+
+  return min;
+}
+
+PenStyle** Element::StyleMap()
+{
+  ElementOptions* ops = (ElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  int nPoints = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+  int nWeights = MIN(ops->w ? ops->w->nValues() : 0, nPoints);
+  double* w = ops->w ? ops->w->values_ : NULL;
+  ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette);
+  PenStyle* stylePtr = (PenStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+
+  // Create a style mapping array (data point index to style), 
+  // initialized to the default style.
+  PenStyle** dataToStyle = new PenStyle*[nPoints];
+  for (int ii=0; ii<nPoints; ii++)
+    dataToStyle[ii] = stylePtr;
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<nWeights; ii++) {
+    for (link=Chain_LastLink(ops->stylePalette); link; 
+	 link=Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+      stylePtr = (PenStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+
+      if (stylePtr->weight.range > 0.0) {
+	double norm = (w[ii] - stylePtr->weight.min) / stylePtr->weight.range;
+	if (((norm - 1.0) <= DBL_EPSILON) && 
+	    (((1.0 - norm) - 1.0) <= DBL_EPSILON)) {
+	  dataToStyle[ii] = stylePtr;
+	  break;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  return dataToStyle;
+}
+
+void Element::freeStylePalette(Chain* stylePalette)
+{
+  // Skip the first slot. It contains the built-in "normal" pen of the element
+  ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(stylePalette);
+  if (link) {
+    ChainLink* next;
+    for (link=Chain_NextLink(link); link; link=next) {
+      next = Chain_NextLink(link);
+      PenStyle *stylePtr = (PenStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      Pen* penPtr = stylePtr->penPtr;
+      if (penPtr) {
+	penPtr->refCount_--;
+	if (penPtr->refCount_ == 0)
+	  delete penPtr;
+      }
+      stylePalette->deleteLink(link);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElem.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElem.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8904df0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElem.h
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrElem_h__
+#define __BltGrElem_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltVector.h"
+#include "tkbltChain.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+#define SHOW_NONE	0
+#define SHOW_X		1
+#define SHOW_Y		2
+#define SHOW_BOTH	3
+
+#define NUMBEROFPOINTS(e) MIN( (e)->coords.x ? (e)->coords.x->nValues() : 0, \
+			       (e)->coords.y ? (e)->coords.y->nValues() : 0 )
+#define NORMALPEN(e) ((((e)->normalPenPtr == NULL) ? \
+		       (e)->builtinPenPtr : (e)->normalPenPtr))
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Axis;
+  class Element;
+  class Pen;
+  class Postscript;
+
+  class ElemValues {
+  protected:
+    double min_;
+    double max_;
+    int nValues_;
+
+  public:
+    double* values_;
+
+  public:
+    ElemValues();
+    virtual ~ElemValues();
+
+    void reset();
+    int nValues() {return nValues_;}
+    double min() {return min_;}
+    double max() {return max_;}
+  };
+
+  class ElemValuesSource : public ElemValues
+  {
+  public:
+    ElemValuesSource(int);
+    ElemValuesSource(int, double*);
+    ~ElemValuesSource();
+
+    void findRange();
+  };
+
+  class ElemValuesVector : public ElemValues
+  {
+  public:
+    Element* elemPtr_;
+    Blt_VectorId source_;
+
+  public:
+    ElemValuesVector(Element*, const char*);
+    ~ElemValuesVector();
+
+    int getVector();
+    int fetchValues(Blt_Vector*);
+    void freeSource();
+  };
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Segment2d *segments;
+    int *map;
+    int length;
+  } GraphSegments;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    ElemValuesSource* x;
+    ElemValuesSource* y;
+  } ElemCoords;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double min;
+    double max;
+    double range;
+  } Weight;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Weight weight;
+    Pen* penPtr;
+  } PenStyle;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    const char* label;
+    const char** tags;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    ElemCoords coords;
+    ElemValues* w;
+    ElemValues* xError;
+    ElemValues* yError;
+    ElemValues* xHigh;
+    ElemValues* xLow;
+    ElemValues* yHigh;
+    ElemValues* yLow;
+    int hide;
+    int legendRelief;
+    Chain* stylePalette;
+    Pen* builtinPenPtr;
+    Pen* activePenPtr;
+    Pen* normalPenPtr;
+    PenOptions builtinPen;
+  } ElementOptions;
+
+  class Element {
+  protected:
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+
+    double xRange_;
+    double yRange_;
+
+  public:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    const char* name_;
+    Tcl_HashEntry* hashPtr_;
+    unsigned row_;
+    unsigned col_;
+    int nActiveIndices_;
+    int* activeIndices_;
+    int active_;		
+    int labelActive_;
+
+    ChainLink* link;
+
+  protected:
+    double FindElemValuesMinimum(ElemValues*, double);
+    PenStyle** StyleMap();
+
+  public:
+    Element(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~Element();
+
+    virtual int configure() =0;
+    virtual void map() =0;
+    virtual void extents(Region2d*) =0;
+    virtual void draw(Drawable) =0;
+    virtual void drawActive(Drawable) =0;
+    virtual void drawSymbol(Drawable, int, int, int) =0;
+    virtual void closest() =0;
+    virtual void print(PSOutput*) =0;
+    virtual void printActive(PSOutput*) =0;
+    virtual void printSymbol(PSOutput*, double, double, int) =0;
+
+    virtual ClassId classId() =0;
+    virtual const char* className() =0;
+    virtual const char* typeName() =0;
+
+    void freeStylePalette (Chain*);
+
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable() {return optionTable_;}
+    void* ops() {return ops_;}
+  };
+};
+
+extern void VectorChangedProc(Tcl_Interp* interp, ClientData clientData, 
+			      Blt_VectorNotify notify);
+
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemBar.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemBar.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6698760
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemBar.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1315 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraphBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemOption.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define CLAMP(x,l,h)	((x) = (((x)<(l))? (l) : ((x)>(h)) ? (h) : (x)))
+#define MIN3(a,b,c)	(((a)<(b))?(((a)<(c))?(a):(c)):(((b)<(c))?(b):(c)))
+
+#define PointInRectangle(r,x0,y0)					\
+  (((x0) <= (int)((r)->x + (r)->width - 1)) && ((x0) >= (int)(r)->x) && \
+   ((y0) <= (int)((r)->y + (r)->height - 1)) && ((y0) >= (int)(r)->y))
+
+// OptionSpecs
+
+static Tk_ObjCustomOption styleObjOption =
+  {
+    "style", StyleSetProc, StyleGetProc, StyleRestoreProc, StyleFreeProc, 
+    (ClientData)sizeof(BarStyle)
+  };
+
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption penObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption pairsObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption valuesObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption xAxisObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption yAxisObjOption;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-activepen", "activePen", "ActivePen",
+   "active", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, activePenPtr), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &penObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-background", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-barwidth", "barWidth", "BarWidth",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, barWidth), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-borderwidth", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-bindtags", "bindTags", "BindTags",
+   "all", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, tags), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &listObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.borderWidth),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-color", "color", "color",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.fill),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-data", "data", "Data", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, coords),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &pairsObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-errorbarcolor", "errorBarColor", "ErrorBarColor",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS,"-errorbarwidth", "errorBarWidth", "ErrorBarWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarLineWidth),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-errorbarcap", "errorBarCap", "ErrorBarCap", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarCapWidth),
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-outline", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fill", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-foreground", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-outline", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, hide), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-label", "label", "Label",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, label), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-legendrelief", "legendRelief", "LegendRelief",
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, legendRelief), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapx", "mapX", "MapX", 
+   "x", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, xAxis), 0, &xAxisObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapy", "mapY", "MapY",
+   "y", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, yAxis), 0, &yAxisObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-outline", "outline", "Outline",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.outlineColor),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-pen", "pen", "Pen", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, normalPenPtr), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &penObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+   "raised", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.relief), 
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showerrorbars", "showErrorBars", "ShowErrorBars",
+   "both", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarShow), 
+   0, &fillObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showvalues", "showValues", "ShowValues",
+   "none", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.valueShow), 
+   0, &fillObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-stack", "stack", "Stack", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, groupName),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-styles", "styles", "Styles",
+   "", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, stylePalette), 
+   0, &styleObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-valueanchor", "valueAnchor", "ValueAnchor",
+   "s", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.valueStyle.anchor),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-valuecolor", "valueColor", "ValueColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, 
+   Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions,builtinPen.valueStyle.color), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-valuefont", "valueFont", "ValueFont",
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.valueStyle.font),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-valueformat", "valueFormat", "ValueFormat",
+   "%g", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.valueFormat),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-valuerotate", "valueRotate", "ValueRotate",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, builtinPen.valueStyle.angle),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-weights", "weights", "Weights",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, w), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-x", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-xdata", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xdata", "xData", "XData", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, coords.x), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xerror", "xError", "XError", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, xError), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xhigh", "xHigh", "XHigh", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, xHigh), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xlow", "xLow", "XLow", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, xLow), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-y", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-ydata", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-ydata", "yData", "YData", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, coords.y), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-yerror", "yError", "YError", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, yError), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-yhigh", "yHigh", "YHigh",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, yHigh), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-ylow", "yLow", "YLow", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarElementOptions, yLow), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+BarElement::BarElement(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+  : Element(graphPtr, name, hPtr)
+{
+  barToData_ =NULL;
+  bars_ =NULL;
+  activeToData_ =NULL;
+  activeRects_ =NULL;
+  nBars_ =0;
+  nActive_ =0;
+
+  xeb_.segments =NULL;
+  xeb_.map =NULL;
+  xeb_.length =0;
+  yeb_.segments =NULL;
+  yeb_.map =NULL;
+  yeb_.length =0;
+
+  ops_ = (BarElementOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(BarElementOptions));
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+  ops->elemPtr = (Element*)this;
+
+  builtinPenPtr = new BarPen(graphPtr_, "builtin", &ops->builtinPen);
+  ops->builtinPenPtr = builtinPenPtr;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr->interp_, optionSpecs);
+
+  ops->stylePalette = new Chain();
+
+  // this is an option and will be freed via Tk_FreeConfigOptions
+  // By default an element's name and label are the same
+  ops->label = Tcl_Alloc(strlen(name)+1);
+  if (name)
+    strcpy((char*)ops->label,(char*)name);
+
+  Tk_InitOptions(graphPtr_->interp_, (char*)&(ops->builtinPen),
+		 builtinPenPtr->optionTable(), graphPtr->tkwin_);
+}
+
+BarElement::~BarElement()
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  delete builtinPenPtr;
+
+  reset();
+
+  if (ops->stylePalette) {
+    freeStylePalette(ops->stylePalette);
+    delete ops->stylePalette;
+  }
+}
+
+int BarElement::configure()
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (builtinPenPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Point to the static normal pen if no external pens have been selected.
+  ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette);
+  if (!link) {
+    link = new ChainLink(sizeof(BarStyle));
+    ops->stylePalette->linkAfter(link, NULL);
+  }
+  BarStyle* stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+  stylePtr->penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void BarElement::map()
+{
+  BarGraph* barGraphPtr_ = (BarGraph*)graphPtr_;
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+  BarGraphOptions* gops = (BarGraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  if (!link)
+    return;
+
+  reset();
+  if (!ops->coords.x || !ops->coords.y ||
+      !ops->coords.x->nValues() || !ops->coords.y->nValues())
+    return;
+  int nPoints = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+
+  double barWidth = (ops->barWidth > 0.0) ? ops->barWidth : gops->barWidth;
+  AxisOptions* axisyops = (AxisOptions*)ops->yAxis->ops();
+  double baseline = (axisyops->logScale) ? 0.0 : gops->baseline;
+  double barOffset = barWidth * 0.5;
+
+  // Create an array of bars representing the screen coordinates of all the
+  // segments in the bar.
+  Rectangle* bars = new Rectangle[nPoints];
+  int* barToData = new int[nPoints];
+
+  double* x = ops->coords.x->values_;
+  double* y = ops->coords.y->values_;
+  int count = 0;
+
+  int ii;
+  Rectangle* rp;
+  for (rp=bars, ii=0; ii<nPoints; ii++) {
+    // Two opposite corners of the rectangle in graph coordinates
+    Point2d c1, c2;
+
+    // check Abscissa is out of range of the x-axis
+    if (((x[ii] - barWidth) > ops->xAxis->axisRange_.max) ||
+	((x[ii] + barWidth) < ops->xAxis->axisRange_.min))
+      continue;			
+
+    c1.x = x[ii] - barOffset;
+    c1.y = y[ii];
+    c2.x = c1.x + barWidth;
+    c2.y = baseline;
+
+    // If the mode is "aligned" or "stacked" we need to adjust the x or y
+    // coordinates of the two corners.
+    if ((barGraphPtr_->nBarGroups_ > 0) && 
+	((BarGraph::BarMode)gops->barMode != BarGraph::INFRONT) && 
+	(!gops->stackAxes)) {
+      
+      BarSetKey key;
+      key.value =x[ii];
+      key.xAxis =ops->xAxis;
+      key.yAxis =NULL;
+      Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = 
+	Tcl_FindHashEntry(&barGraphPtr_->setTable_, (char*)&key);
+
+      if (hPtr) {
+	Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	const char *name = (ops->groupName) ? ops->groupName:ops->yAxis->name_;
+	Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr2 = Tcl_FindHashEntry(tablePtr, name);
+	if (hPtr2) {
+	  BarGroup* groupPtr = (BarGroup*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr2);
+	  double slice = barWidth / (double)barGraphPtr_->maxBarSetSize_;
+	  double offset = (slice * groupPtr->index);
+	  if (barGraphPtr_->maxBarSetSize_ > 1) {
+	    offset += slice * 0.05;
+	    slice *= 0.90;
+	  }
+
+	  switch ((BarGraph::BarMode)gops->barMode) {
+	  case BarGraph::STACKED:
+	    groupPtr->count++;
+	    c2.y = groupPtr->lastY;
+	    c1.y += c2.y;
+	    groupPtr->lastY = c1.y;
+	    c1.x += offset;
+	    c2.x = c1.x + slice;
+	    break;
+			
+	  case BarGraph::ALIGNED:
+	    slice /= groupPtr->nSegments;
+	    c1.x += offset + (slice * groupPtr->count);
+	    c2.x = c1.x + slice;
+	    groupPtr->count++;
+	    break;
+			
+	  case BarGraph::OVERLAP:
+	    {
+	      slice /= (groupPtr->nSegments + 1);
+	      double width = slice + slice;
+	      groupPtr->count++;
+	      c1.x += offset + 
+		(slice * (groupPtr->nSegments - groupPtr->count));
+	      c2.x = c1.x + width;
+	    }
+	    break;
+			
+	  case BarGraph::INFRONT:
+	    break;
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+    }
+
+    int invertBar = 0;
+    if (c1.y < c2.y) {
+      // Handle negative bar values by swapping ordinates
+      double temp = c1.y;
+      c1.y = c2.y;
+      c2.y = temp;
+      invertBar = 1;
+    }
+
+    // Get the two corners of the bar segment and compute the rectangle
+    double ybot = c2.y;
+    c1 = graphPtr_->map2D(c1.x, c1.y, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+    c2 = graphPtr_->map2D(c2.x, c2.y, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+    if ((ybot == 0.0) && (axisyops->logScale))
+      c2.y = graphPtr_->bottom_;
+	    
+    if (c2.y < c1.y) {
+      double t = c1.y;
+      c1.y = c2.y;
+      c2.y = t;
+    }
+
+    if (c2.x < c1.x) {
+      double t = c1.x;
+      c1.x = c2.x;
+      c2.x = t;
+    }
+
+    if ((c1.x > graphPtr_->right_) || (c2.x < graphPtr_->left_) || 
+	(c1.y > graphPtr_->bottom_) || (c2.y < graphPtr_->top_))
+      continue;
+
+    // Bound the bars horizontally by the width of the graph window 
+    // Bound the bars vertically by the position of the axis.
+    double right =0;
+    double left =0;
+    double top =0;
+    double bottom =0;
+    if (gops->stackAxes) {
+      top = ops->yAxis->screenMin_;
+      bottom = ops->yAxis->screenMin_ + ops->yAxis->screenRange_;
+      left = graphPtr_->left_;
+      right = graphPtr_->right_;
+    }
+    else {
+      bottom = right = 10000;
+      // Shouldn't really have a call to Tk_Width or Tk_Height in
+      // mapping routine.  We only want to clamp the bar segment to the
+      // size of the window if we're actually mapped onscreen
+      if (Tk_Height(graphPtr_->tkwin_) > 1)
+	bottom = Tk_Height(graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+      if (Tk_Width(graphPtr_->tkwin_) > 1)
+	right = Tk_Width(graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+    }
+
+    CLAMP(c1.y, top, bottom);
+    CLAMP(c2.y, top, bottom);
+    CLAMP(c1.x, left, right);
+    CLAMP(c2.x, left, right);
+    double dx = fabs(c1.x - c2.x);
+    double dy = fabs(c1.y - c2.y);
+    if ((dx == 0) || (dy == 0))
+      continue;
+
+    int height = (int)dy;
+    int width  = (int)dx;
+    if (invertBar)
+      rp->y = (int)MIN(c1.y, c2.y);
+    else
+      rp->y = (int)(MAX(c1.y, c2.y)) - height;
+
+    rp->x = (int)MIN(c1.x, c2.x);
+
+    rp->width = width + 1;
+    rp->width |= 0x1;
+    if (rp->width < 1)
+      rp->width = 1;
+
+    rp->height = height + 1;
+    if (rp->height < 1)
+      rp->height = 1;
+
+    // Save the data index corresponding to the rectangle
+    barToData[count] = ii;
+    count++;
+    rp++;
+  }
+  nBars_ = count;
+  bars_ = bars;
+  barToData_ = barToData;
+  if (nActiveIndices_ > 0)
+    mapActive();
+	
+  int size = 20;
+  if (count > 0)
+    size = bars->width;
+
+  // Set the symbol size of all the pen styles
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    BarStyle *stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    BarPen* penPtr = stylePtr->penPtr;
+    BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+    stylePtr->symbolSize = size;
+    stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth = pops->errorBarCapWidth;
+  }
+
+  BarStyle** dataToStyle = (BarStyle**)StyleMap();
+  if (((ops->yHigh && ops->yHigh->nValues() > 0) && 
+       (ops->yLow && ops->yLow->nValues() > 0)) ||
+      ((ops->xHigh && ops->xHigh->nValues() > 0) &&
+       (ops->xLow && ops->xLow->nValues() > 0)) ||
+      (ops->xError && ops->xError->nValues() > 0) || 
+      (ops->yError && ops->yError->nValues() > 0)) {
+    mapErrorBars(dataToStyle);
+  }
+
+  mergePens(dataToStyle);
+  delete [] dataToStyle;
+}
+
+void BarElement::extents(Region2d *regPtr)
+{
+  BarGraph* barGraphPtr_ = (BarGraph*)graphPtr_;
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+  BarGraphOptions* gops = (BarGraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  regPtr->top = regPtr->left = DBL_MAX;
+  regPtr->bottom = regPtr->right = -DBL_MAX;
+
+  if (!ops->coords.x || !ops->coords.y ||
+      !ops->coords.x->nValues() || !ops->coords.y->nValues())
+    return;
+
+  int nPoints = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+
+  double middle = 0.5;
+  regPtr->left = ops->coords.x->min() - middle;
+  regPtr->right = ops->coords.x->max() + middle;
+
+  regPtr->top = ops->coords.y->min();
+  regPtr->bottom = ops->coords.y->max();
+  if (regPtr->bottom < gops->baseline)
+    regPtr->bottom = gops->baseline;
+
+  // Handle stacked bar elements specially.
+  // If element is stacked, the sum of its ordinates may be outside the
+  // minimum/maximum limits of the element's data points.
+  if (((BarGraph::BarMode)gops->barMode == BarGraph::STACKED) && 
+      (barGraphPtr_->nBarGroups_ > 0))
+    checkStacks(ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis, &regPtr->top, &regPtr->bottom);
+
+  // Warning: You get what you deserve if the x-axis is logScale
+  AxisOptions* axisxops = (AxisOptions*)ops->xAxis->ops();
+  AxisOptions* axisyops = (AxisOptions*)ops->yAxis->ops();
+  if (axisxops->logScale)
+    regPtr->left = FindElemValuesMinimum(ops->coords.x, DBL_MIN) + middle;
+
+  // Fix y-min limits for barchart
+  if (axisyops->logScale) {
+    if ((regPtr->top <= 0.0) || (regPtr->top > 1.0))
+      regPtr->top = 1.0;
+  }
+  else {
+    if (regPtr->top > 0.0)
+      regPtr->top = 0.0;
+  }
+
+  // Correct the extents for error bars if they exist
+  if (ops->xError && (ops->xError->nValues() > 0)) {
+    nPoints = MIN(ops->xError->nValues(), nPoints);
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nPoints; ii++) {
+      double x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii] + ops->xError->values_[ii];
+      if (x > regPtr->right)
+	regPtr->right = x;
+
+      x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii] - ops->xError->values_[ii];
+      if (axisxops->logScale) {
+	// Mirror negative values, instead of ignoring them
+	if (x < 0.0)
+	  x = -x;
+
+	if ((x > DBL_MIN) && (x < regPtr->left))
+	  regPtr->left = x;
+
+      } 
+      else if (x < regPtr->left)
+	regPtr->left = x;
+    }		     
+  }
+  else {
+    if ((ops->xHigh) &&
+	(ops->xHigh->nValues() > 0) && 
+	(ops->xHigh->max() > regPtr->right))
+      regPtr->right = ops->xHigh->max();
+
+    if (ops->xLow && (ops->xLow->nValues() > 0)) {
+      double left;
+      if ((ops->xLow->min() <= 0.0) && (axisxops->logScale))
+	left = FindElemValuesMinimum(ops->xLow, DBL_MIN);
+      else
+	left = ops->xLow->min();
+
+      if (left < regPtr->left)
+	regPtr->left = left;
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (ops->yError && (ops->yError->nValues() > 0)) {
+    nPoints = MIN(ops->yError->nValues(), nPoints);
+
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nPoints; ii++) {
+      double y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii] + ops->yError->values_[ii];
+      if (y > regPtr->bottom)
+	regPtr->bottom = y;
+
+      y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii] - ops->yError->values_[ii];
+      if (axisyops->logScale) {
+	// Mirror negative values, instead of ignoring them
+	if (y < 0.0) 
+	  y = -y;
+
+	if ((y > DBL_MIN) && (y < regPtr->left))
+	  regPtr->top = y;
+
+      }
+      else if (y < regPtr->top)
+	regPtr->top = y;
+    }		     
+  }
+  else {
+    if ((ops->yHigh) &&
+	(ops->yHigh->nValues() > 0) && 
+	(ops->yHigh->max() > regPtr->bottom))
+      regPtr->bottom = ops->yHigh->max();
+
+    if (ops->yLow && ops->yLow->nValues() > 0) {
+      double top;
+      if ((ops->yLow->min() <= 0.0) && 
+	  (axisyops->logScale))
+	top = FindElemValuesMinimum(ops->yLow, DBL_MIN);
+      else
+	top = ops->yLow->min();
+
+      if (top < regPtr->top)
+	regPtr->top = top;
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::closest()
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+  BarGraphOptions* gops = (BarGraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  ClosestSearch* searchPtr = &gops->search;
+  double minDist = searchPtr->dist;
+  int imin = 0;
+    
+  int ii;
+  Rectangle* bp;
+  for (bp=bars_, ii=0; ii<nBars_; ii++, bp++) {
+    if (PointInRectangle(bp, searchPtr->x, searchPtr->y)) {
+      imin = barToData_[ii];
+      minDist = 0.0;
+      break;
+    }
+    double left = bp->x;
+    double top = bp->y;
+    double right = (double)(bp->x + bp->width);
+    double bottom = (double)(bp->y + bp->height);
+
+    Point2d outline[5];
+    outline[4].x = outline[3].x = outline[0].x = left;
+    outline[4].y = outline[1].y = outline[0].y = top;
+    outline[2].x = outline[1].x = right;
+    outline[3].y = outline[2].y = bottom;
+
+    Point2d *pp, *pend;
+    for (pp=outline, pend=outline+4; pp<pend; pp++) {
+      Point2d t = getProjection(searchPtr->x, searchPtr->y, pp, pp + 1);
+      if (t.x > right)
+	t.x = right;
+      else if (t.x < left)
+	t.x = left;
+
+      if (t.y > bottom)
+	t.y = bottom;
+      else if (t.y < top)
+	t.y = top;
+
+      double dist = hypot((t.x - searchPtr->x), (t.y - searchPtr->y));
+      if (dist < minDist) {
+	minDist = dist;
+	imin = barToData_[ii];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  if (minDist < searchPtr->dist) {
+    searchPtr->elemPtr = (Element*)this;
+    searchPtr->dist = minDist;
+    searchPtr->index = imin;
+    searchPtr->point.x = 
+      ops->coords.x ? (double)ops->coords.x->values_[imin] : 0;
+    searchPtr->point.y = 
+      ops->coords.y ? (double)ops->coords.y->values_[imin] : 0;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::draw(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->hide)
+    return;
+
+  int count = 0;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+
+    BarStyle* stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    BarPen* penPtr = (BarPen*)stylePtr->penPtr;
+    BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+    if (stylePtr->nBars > 0)
+      drawSegments(drawable, penPtr, stylePtr->bars, stylePtr->nBars);
+
+    if ((stylePtr->xeb.length > 0) && (pops->errorBarShow & SHOW_X))
+      graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, penPtr->errorBarGC_, 
+			      stylePtr->xeb.segments, stylePtr->xeb.length);
+
+    if ((stylePtr->yeb.length > 0) && (pops->errorBarShow & SHOW_Y))
+      graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, penPtr->errorBarGC_, 
+			      stylePtr->yeb.segments, stylePtr->yeb.length);
+
+    if (pops->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      drawValues(drawable, penPtr, stylePtr->bars, stylePtr->nBars, 
+		    barToData_ + count);
+
+    count += stylePtr->nBars;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::drawActive(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->hide || !active_)
+    return;
+
+  BarPen* penPtr = (BarPen*)ops->activePenPtr;
+  if (!penPtr)
+    return;
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (nActiveIndices_ > 0) {
+    mapActive();
+
+    drawSegments(drawable, penPtr, activeRects_, nActive_);
+    if (pops->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      drawValues(drawable, penPtr, activeRects_, nActive_, activeToData_);
+  }
+  else if (nActiveIndices_ < 0) {
+    drawSegments(drawable, penPtr, bars_, nBars_);
+    if (pops->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      drawValues(drawable, penPtr, bars_, nBars_, barToData_);
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::drawSymbol(Drawable drawable, int x, int y, int size)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  BarPen* penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  int radius = (size / 2);
+  size--;
+
+  x -= radius;
+  y -= radius;
+
+  Tk_Fill3DRectangle(graphPtr_->tkwin_, drawable, 
+		     pops->fill, x, y, size, size, 
+		     pops->borderWidth, pops->relief);
+
+  if (pops->outlineColor)
+    XDrawRectangle(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr->outlineGC_,
+		   x, y, size, size);
+}
+
+void BarElement::print(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+  
+  if (ops->hide)
+    return;
+
+  psPtr->format("\n%% Element \"%s\"\n\n", name_);
+
+  int count = 0;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+
+    BarStyle *stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    BarPen* penPtr = (BarPen*)stylePtr->penPtr;
+    BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+    if (stylePtr->nBars > 0)
+      printSegments(psPtr, penPtr, stylePtr->bars, stylePtr->nBars);
+
+    XColor* colorPtr = pops->errorBarColor;
+    if (!colorPtr)
+      colorPtr = pops->outlineColor;
+    if (!colorPtr)
+      colorPtr = Tk_3DBorderColor(pops->fill);
+
+    if ((stylePtr->xeb.length > 0) && (pops->errorBarShow & SHOW_X)) {
+      psPtr->setLineAttributes(colorPtr, pops->errorBarLineWidth, 
+			       NULL, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+      psPtr->printSegments(stylePtr->xeb.segments, stylePtr->xeb.length);
+    }
+
+    if ((stylePtr->yeb.length > 0) && (pops->errorBarShow & SHOW_Y)) {
+      psPtr->setLineAttributes(colorPtr, pops->errorBarLineWidth, 
+			       NULL, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+      psPtr->printSegments(stylePtr->yeb.segments, stylePtr->yeb.length);
+    }
+
+    if (pops->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      printValues(psPtr, penPtr, stylePtr->bars, stylePtr->nBars, 
+			    barToData_ + count);
+
+    count += stylePtr->nBars;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::printActive(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->hide || !active_)
+    return;
+
+  BarPen* penPtr = (BarPen*)ops->activePenPtr;
+  if (!penPtr)
+    return;
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+	
+  psPtr->format("\n%% Active Element \"%s\"\n\n", name_);
+
+  if (nActiveIndices_ > 0) {
+    mapActive();
+
+    printSegments(psPtr, penPtr, activeRects_, nActive_);
+    if (pops->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      printValues(psPtr, penPtr, activeRects_, nActive_,activeToData_);
+  }
+  else if (nActiveIndices_ < 0) {
+    printSegments(psPtr, penPtr, bars_, nBars_);
+    if (pops->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      printValues(psPtr, penPtr, bars_, nBars_, barToData_);
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::printSymbol(PSOutput* psPtr, double x, double y, int size)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  BarPen* penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  x -= size/2.;
+  y -= size/2.;
+
+  psPtr->fill3DRectangle(pops->fill, x, y, size, size,
+			 pops->borderWidth, pops->relief);
+
+  if (pops->outlineColor) {
+    psPtr->setForeground(pops->outlineColor);
+    psPtr->printRectangle(x, y, size, size);
+  }
+}
+
+// Support
+
+void BarElement::ResetStylePalette(Chain* stylePalette)
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(stylePalette); link; 
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    BarStyle *stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    stylePtr->xeb.length = 0;
+    stylePtr->yeb.length = 0;
+    stylePtr->nBars = 0;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::checkStacks(Axis* xAxis, Axis* yAxis, 
+			     double* minPtr, double* maxPtr)
+{
+  BarGraph* barGraphPtr_ = (BarGraph*)graphPtr_;
+  BarGraphOptions* gops = (BarGraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+  if (((BarGraph::BarMode)gops->barMode != BarGraph::STACKED) || 
+      barGraphPtr_->nBarGroups_ == 0)
+    return;
+
+  for (BarGroup *gp = barGraphPtr_->barGroups_, 
+	 *gend = gp + barGraphPtr_->nBarGroups_; gp < gend; gp++) {
+    if ((gp->xAxis == xAxis) && (gp->yAxis == yAxis)) {
+
+      // Check if any of the y-values (because of stacking) are greater
+      // than the current limits of the graph.
+      if (gp->sum < 0.0) {
+	if (*minPtr > gp->sum)
+	  *minPtr = gp->sum;
+      }
+      else {
+	if (*maxPtr < gp->sum)
+	  *maxPtr = gp->sum;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::mergePens(BarStyle** dataToStyle)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (Chain_GetLength(ops->stylePalette) < 2) {
+    ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette);
+    BarStyle *stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    stylePtr->nBars = nBars_;
+    stylePtr->bars = bars_;
+    stylePtr->symbolSize = bars_->width / 2;
+    stylePtr->xeb.length = xeb_.length;
+    stylePtr->xeb.segments = xeb_.segments;
+    stylePtr->yeb.length = yeb_.length;
+    stylePtr->yeb.segments = yeb_.segments;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  // We have more than one style. Group bar segments of like pen styles together
+  if (nBars_ > 0) {
+    Rectangle* bars = new Rectangle[nBars_];
+    int* barToData = new int[nBars_];
+    Rectangle* bp = bars;
+    int* ip = barToData;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link; 
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      BarStyle *stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      stylePtr->symbolSize = bp->width / 2;
+      stylePtr->bars = bp;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<nBars_; ii++) {
+	int iData = barToData[ii];
+	if (dataToStyle[iData] == stylePtr) {
+	  *bp++ = bars[ii];
+	  *ip++ = iData;
+	}
+      }
+      stylePtr->nBars = bp - stylePtr->bars;
+    }
+    delete [] bars_;
+    bars_ = bars;
+    delete [] barToData_;
+    barToData_ = barToData;
+  }
+
+  if (xeb_.length > 0) {
+    Segment2d* bars = new Segment2d[xeb_.length];
+    Segment2d *sp = bars;
+    int* map = new int[xeb_.length];
+    int* ip = map;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      BarStyle *stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      stylePtr->xeb.segments = sp;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<xeb_.length; ii++) {
+	int iData = xeb_.map[ii];
+	if (dataToStyle[iData] == stylePtr) {
+	  *sp++ = xeb_.segments[ii];
+	  *ip++ = iData;
+	}
+      }
+      stylePtr->xeb.length = sp - stylePtr->xeb.segments;
+    }
+    delete [] xeb_.segments;
+    xeb_.segments = bars;
+    delete [] xeb_.map;
+    xeb_.map = map;
+  }
+
+  if (yeb_.length > 0) {
+    Segment2d* bars = new Segment2d[yeb_.length];
+    Segment2d* sp = bars;
+    int* map = new int[yeb_.length];
+    int* ip = map;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link; 
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      BarStyle *stylePtr = (BarStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      stylePtr->yeb.segments = sp;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<yeb_.length; ii++) {
+	int iData = yeb_.map[ii];
+	if (dataToStyle[iData] == stylePtr) {
+	  *sp++ = yeb_.segments[ii];
+	  *ip++ = iData;
+	}
+      }
+      stylePtr->yeb.length = sp - stylePtr->yeb.segments;
+    }
+    delete [] yeb_.segments;
+    yeb_.segments = bars;
+    delete [] yeb_.map;
+    yeb_.map = map;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::mapActive()
+{
+  delete [] activeRects_;
+  activeRects_ = NULL;
+
+  delete [] activeToData_;
+  activeToData_ = NULL;
+
+  nActive_ = 0;
+
+  if (nActiveIndices_ > 0) {
+    Rectangle* activeRects = new Rectangle[nActiveIndices_];
+    int* activeToData = new int[nActiveIndices_];
+    int count = 0;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nBars_; ii++) {
+      for (int *ip = activeIndices_, *iend = ip + nActiveIndices_;
+	   ip < iend; ip++) {
+	if (barToData_[ii] == *ip) {
+	  activeRects[count] = bars_[ii];
+	  activeToData[count] = ii;
+	  count++;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+    nActive_ = count;
+    activeRects_ = activeRects;
+    activeToData_ = activeToData;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::reset()
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  ResetStylePalette(ops->stylePalette);
+
+  delete [] activeRects_;
+  activeRects_ = NULL;
+  delete [] activeToData_;
+  activeToData_ = NULL;
+
+  delete [] xeb_.segments;
+  xeb_.segments = NULL;
+  delete [] xeb_.map;
+  xeb_.map = NULL;
+  xeb_.length = 0;
+
+  delete [] yeb_.segments;
+  yeb_.segments = NULL;
+  delete [] yeb_.map;
+  yeb_.map = NULL;
+  yeb_.length = 0;
+
+  delete [] bars_;
+  bars_ = NULL;
+  delete [] barToData_;
+  barToData_ = NULL;
+
+  nActive_ = 0;
+  nBars_ = 0;
+}
+
+void BarElement::mapErrorBars(BarStyle **dataToStyle)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Region2d reg;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&reg);
+
+  int nPoints = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+  int nn =0;
+  if (ops->coords.x && ops->coords.y) {
+    if (ops->xError && (ops->xError->nValues() > 0))
+      nn = MIN(ops->xError->nValues(), nPoints);
+    else
+      if (ops->xHigh && ops->xLow)
+	nn = MIN3(ops->xHigh->nValues(), ops->xLow->nValues(), nPoints);
+  }
+
+  if (nn) {
+    Segment2d* bars = new Segment2d[nn * 3];
+    Segment2d* segPtr = bars;
+    int* map = new int[nn * 3];
+    int* indexPtr = map;
+
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nn; ii++) {
+      double x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii];
+      double y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii];
+      BarStyle* stylePtr = dataToStyle[ii];
+
+      if ((isfinite(x)) && (isfinite(y))) {
+	double high, low;
+	if (ops->xError->nValues() > 0) {
+	  high = x + ops->xError->values_[ii];
+	  low = x - ops->xError->values_[ii];
+	}
+	else {
+	  high = ops->xHigh ? ops->xHigh->values_[ii] : 0;
+	  low  = ops->xLow  ? ops->xLow->values_[ii]  : 0;
+	}
+	if ((isfinite(high)) && (isfinite(low)))  {
+	  Point2d p = graphPtr_->map2D(high, y, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  Point2d q = graphPtr_->map2D(low, y, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  segPtr->p = p;
+	  segPtr->q = q;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&reg, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Left cap
+	  segPtr->p.x = p.x;
+	  segPtr->q.x = p.x;
+	  segPtr->p.y = p.y - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.y = p.y + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&reg, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Right cap
+	  segPtr->p.x = q.x;
+	  segPtr->q.x = q.x;
+	  segPtr->p.y = q.y - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.y = q.y + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&reg, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+    }
+    xeb_.segments = bars;
+    xeb_.length = segPtr - bars;
+    xeb_.map = map;
+  }
+
+  nn =0;
+  if (ops->coords.x && ops->coords.y) {
+    if (ops->yError && (ops->yError->nValues() > 0))
+      nn = MIN(ops->yError->nValues(), nPoints);
+    else
+      if (ops->yHigh && ops->yLow)
+	nn = MIN3(ops->yHigh->nValues(), ops->yLow->nValues(), nPoints);
+  }
+
+  if (nn) {
+    Segment2d* bars = new Segment2d[nn * 3];
+    Segment2d* segPtr = bars;
+    int* map = new int[nn * 3];
+    int* indexPtr = map;
+
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nn; ii++) {
+      double x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii];
+      double y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii];
+      BarStyle *stylePtr = dataToStyle[ii];
+
+      if ((isfinite(x)) && (isfinite(y))) {
+      double high, low;
+	if (ops->yError->nValues() > 0) {
+	  high = y + ops->yError->values_[ii];
+	  low = y - ops->yError->values_[ii];
+	}
+	else {
+	  high = ops->yHigh->values_[ii];
+	  low = ops->yLow->values_[ii];
+	}
+	if ((isfinite(high)) && (isfinite(low)))  {
+	  Point2d p = graphPtr_->map2D(x, high, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  Point2d q = graphPtr_->map2D(x, low, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  segPtr->p = p;
+	  segPtr->q = q;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&reg, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Top cap
+	  segPtr->p.y = p.y;
+	  segPtr->q.y = p.y;
+	  segPtr->p.x = p.x - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.x = p.x + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&reg, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Bottom cap
+	  segPtr->p.y = q.y;
+	  segPtr->q.y = q.y;
+	  segPtr->p.x = q.x - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.x = q.x + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&reg, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+    }
+    yeb_.segments = bars;
+    yeb_.length = segPtr - bars;
+    yeb_.map = map;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::drawSegments(Drawable drawable, BarPen* penPtr,
+				 Rectangle *bars, int nBars)
+{
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+  for (Rectangle *rp = bars, *rend = rp + nBars; rp < rend; rp++) {
+    if ((rp->width < 1) || (rp->height < 1))
+      continue;
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(graphPtr_->tkwin_, drawable, 
+		       pops->fill, rp->x, rp->y, rp->width, rp->height, 
+		       pops->borderWidth, pops->relief);
+
+    if (pops->outlineColor)
+      XDrawRectangle(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr->outlineGC_, 
+		     rp->x, rp->y, rp->width, rp->height);
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::drawValues(Drawable drawable, BarPen* penPtr, 
+			       Rectangle *bars, int nBars, int *barToData)
+{
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+  BarGraphOptions* gops = (BarGraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  const char *fmt = pops->valueFormat;
+  if (!fmt)
+    fmt = "%g";
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &pops->valueStyle);
+
+  int count = 0;
+  for (Rectangle *rp = bars, *rend = rp + nBars; rp < rend; rp++) {
+    Point2d anchorPos;
+    char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2 + 2];
+
+    double x = ops->coords.x->values_[barToData[count]];
+    double y = ops->coords.y->values_[barToData[count]];
+
+    count++;
+    if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_X)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_Y)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_BOTH) {
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x);
+      strcat(string, ",");
+      snprintf(string + strlen(string), TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y);
+    }
+
+    if (gops->inverted) {
+      anchorPos.y = rp->y + rp->height * 0.5;
+      anchorPos.x = rp->x + rp->width;
+      if (x < gops->baseline)
+	anchorPos.x -= rp->width;
+    }
+    else {
+      anchorPos.x = rp->x + rp->width * 0.5;
+      anchorPos.y = rp->y;
+      if (y < gops->baseline)
+	anchorPos.y += rp->height;
+    }
+
+    ts.drawText(drawable, string, anchorPos.x, anchorPos.y);
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::printSegments(PSOutput* psPtr, BarPen* penPtr, 
+			       Rectangle *bars, int nBars)
+{
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+  for (Rectangle *rp = bars, *rend = rp + nBars; rp < rend; rp++) {
+    if ((rp->width < 1) || (rp->height < 1))
+      continue;
+
+    psPtr->fill3DRectangle(pops->fill, (double)rp->x, (double)rp->y,
+			   (int)rp->width, (int)rp->height,
+			   pops->borderWidth, pops->relief);
+
+    if (pops->outlineColor) {
+      psPtr->setForeground(pops->outlineColor);
+      psPtr->printRectangle((double)rp->x, (double)rp->y, 
+			   (int)rp->width, (int)rp->height);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void BarElement::printValues(PSOutput* psPtr, BarPen* penPtr, 
+			     Rectangle *bars, int nBars, int *barToData)
+{
+  BarPenOptions* pops = (BarPenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+  BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)ops_;
+  BarGraphOptions* gops = (BarGraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  int count = 0;
+  const char* fmt = pops->valueFormat;
+  if (!fmt)
+    fmt = "%g";
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &pops->valueStyle);
+
+  for (Rectangle *rp = bars, *rend = rp + nBars; rp < rend; rp++) {
+    double x = ops->coords.x->values_[barToData[count]];
+    double y = ops->coords.y->values_[barToData[count]];
+
+    count++;
+    char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2 + 2];
+    if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_X)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_Y)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_BOTH) {
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x);
+      strcat(string, ",");
+      snprintf(string + strlen(string), TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y);
+    }
+
+    Point2d anchorPos;
+    if (gops->inverted) {
+      anchorPos.y = rp->y + rp->height * 0.5;
+      anchorPos.x = rp->x + rp->width;
+      if (x < gops->baseline)
+	anchorPos.x -= rp->width;
+    }
+    else {
+      anchorPos.x = rp->x + rp->width * 0.5;
+      anchorPos.y = rp->y;
+      if (y < gops->baseline)
+	anchorPos.y += rp->height;
+    }
+
+    ts.printText(psPtr, string, anchorPos.x, anchorPos.y);
+  }
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemBar.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemBar.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b48114
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemBar.h
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrElemBar_h__
+#define __BltGrElemBar_h__
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenBar.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    float x1;
+    float y1;
+    float x2;
+    float y2;
+  } BarRegion;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Weight weight;
+    BarPen* penPtr;
+    Rectangle* bars;
+    int nBars;
+    GraphSegments xeb;
+    GraphSegments yeb;
+    int symbolSize;
+    int errorBarCapWidth;
+  } BarStyle;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    const char *label;
+    char** tags;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    ElemCoords coords;
+    ElemValues* w;
+    ElemValues* xError;
+    ElemValues* yError;
+    ElemValues* xHigh;
+    ElemValues* xLow;
+    ElemValues* yHigh;
+    ElemValues* yLow;
+    int hide;
+    int legendRelief;
+    Chain* stylePalette;
+    BarPen* builtinPenPtr;
+    BarPen* activePenPtr;
+    BarPen* normalPenPtr;
+    BarPenOptions builtinPen;
+
+    // derived
+    double barWidth;
+    const char *groupName;
+  } BarElementOptions;
+
+  class BarElement : public Element {
+  protected:
+    BarPen* builtinPenPtr;
+    int* barToData_;
+    Rectangle* bars_;
+    int* activeToData_;
+    Rectangle* activeRects_;
+    int nBars_;
+    int nActive_;
+    GraphSegments xeb_;
+    GraphSegments yeb_;
+
+  protected:
+    void ResetStylePalette(Chain*);
+    void checkStacks(Axis*, Axis*, double*, double*);
+    void mergePens(BarStyle**);
+    void mapActive();
+    void reset();
+    void mapErrorBars(BarStyle**);
+    void drawSegments(Drawable, BarPen*, Rectangle*, int);
+    void drawValues(Drawable, BarPen*, Rectangle*, int, int*);
+    void printSegments(PSOutput*, BarPen*, Rectangle*, int);
+    void printValues(PSOutput*, BarPen*, Rectangle*, int, int*);
+
+  public:
+    BarElement(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~BarElement();
+
+    ClassId classId() {return CID_ELEM_BAR;}
+    const char* className() {return "BarElement";}
+    const char* typeName() {return "bar";}
+
+    int configure();
+    void map();
+    void extents(Region2d*);
+    void closest();
+    void draw(Drawable);
+    void drawActive(Drawable);
+    void drawSymbol(Drawable, int, int, int);
+    void print(PSOutput*);
+    void printActive(PSOutput*);
+    void printSymbol(PSOutput*, double, double, int);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLine.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLine.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f8ec8f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLine.C
@@ -0,0 +1,2405 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright (c) 1993 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemOption.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define SEARCH_X	0
+#define SEARCH_Y	1
+#define SEARCH_BOTH	2
+
+#define SEARCH_POINTS	0	// closest data point.
+#define SEARCH_TRACES	1	// closest point on trace.
+#define SEARCH_AUTO	2	// traces if linewidth is > 0 and more than one
+
+#define MIN3(a,b,c)	(((a)<(b))?(((a)<(c))?(a):(c)):(((b)<(c))?(b):(c)))
+#define PointInRegion(e,x,y) (((x) <= (e)->right) && ((x) >= (e)->left) && ((y) <= (e)->bottom) && ((y) >= (e)->top))
+
+#define BROKEN_TRACE(dir,last,next) (((dir == INCREASING)&&(next < last)) || ((dir == DECREASING)&&(next > last)))
+#define DRAW_SYMBOL() (symbolInterval_==0||(symbolCounter_%symbolInterval_)==0)
+
+static const char* symbolMacros[] =
+  {"Li", "Sq", "Ci", "Di", "Pl", "Cr", "Sp", "Sc", "Tr", "Ar", "Bm", NULL};
+
+// OptionSpecs
+
+static const char* smoothObjOption[] = 
+  {"linear", "step", "cubic", "quadratic", "catrom", NULL};
+
+static const char* penDirObjOption[] = 
+  {"increasing", "decreasing", "both", NULL};
+
+static Tk_ObjCustomOption styleObjOption =
+  {
+    "styles", StyleSetProc, StyleGetProc, StyleRestoreProc, StyleFreeProc, 
+    (ClientData)sizeof(LineStyle)
+  };
+
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption penObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption pairsObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption valuesObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption xAxisObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption yAxisObjOption;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-activepen", "activePen", "ActivePen",
+   "active", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, activePenPtr), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &penObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-areabackground", "areaBackground", "AreaBackground",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, fillBg), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-bindtags", "bindTags", "BindTags", 
+   "all", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, tags), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &listObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-color", "color", "Color", 
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, 
+   Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.traceColor), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-dashes", "dashes", "Dashes", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.traceDashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-data", "data", "Data", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, coords),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &pairsObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-errorbarcolor", "errorBarColor", "ErrorBarColor",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS,"-errorbarwidth", "errorBarWidth", "ErrorBarWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarLineWidth),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-errorbarcap", "errorBarCap", "ErrorBarCap", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarCapWidth),
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-fill", "fill", "Fill", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.symbol.fillColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, hide), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-label", "label", "Label", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, label), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK | TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-legendrelief", "legendRelief", "LegendRelief",
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, legendRelief), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-linewidth", "lineWidth", "LineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.traceWidth),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapx", "mapX", "MapX",
+   "x", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, xAxis), 0, &xAxisObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapy", "mapY", "MapY",
+   "y", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, yAxis), 0, &yAxisObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_INT, "-maxsymbols", "maxSymbols", "MaxSymbols",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, reqMaxSymbols), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-offdash", "offDash", "OffDash", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.traceOffColor),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-outline", "outline", "Outline", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.symbol.outlineColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-outlinewidth", "outlineWidth", "OutlineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.symbol.outlineWidth),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-pen", "pen", "Pen",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, normalPenPtr), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &penObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pixels", "pixels", "Pixels", 
+   "0.1i", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.symbol.size), 
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-reduce", "reduce", "Reduce",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, rTolerance), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-scalesymbols", "scaleSymbols", "ScaleSymbols",
+   "yes", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, scaleSymbols), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showerrorbars", "showErrorBars", "ShowErrorBars",
+   "both", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.errorBarShow), 
+   0, &fillObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showvalues", "showValues", "ShowValues",
+   "none", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.valueShow), 
+   0, &fillObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-smooth", "smooth", "Smooth", 
+   "linear", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, reqSmooth), 
+   0, &smoothObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-styles", "styles", "Styles",
+   "", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, stylePalette), 
+   0, &styleObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-symbol", "symbol", "Symbol",
+   "none", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.symbol), 
+   0, &symbolObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-trace", "trace", "Trace",
+   "both", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, penDir), 
+   0, &penDirObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-valueanchor", "valueAnchor", "ValueAnchor",
+   "s", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.valueStyle.anchor),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-valuecolor", "valueColor", "ValueColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND,-1,
+   Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.valueStyle.color),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-valuefont", "valueFont", "ValueFont",
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, 
+   Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.valueStyle.font),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-valueformat", "valueFormat", "ValueFormat",
+   "%g", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.valueFormat), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-valuerotate", "valueRotate", "ValueRotate",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, builtinPen.valueStyle.angle),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-weights", "weights", "Weights",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, w), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-x", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-xdata", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xdata", "xData", "XData", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, coords.x), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xerror", "xError", "XError", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, xError), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xhigh", "xHigh", "XHigh", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, xHigh), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-xlow", "xLow", "XLow", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, xLow), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-y", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-ydata", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-ydata", "yData", "YData", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, coords.y), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-yerror", "yError", "YError", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, yError), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-yhigh", "yHigh", "YHigh",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, yHigh), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-ylow", "yLow", "YLow", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineElementOptions, yLow), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &valuesObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+LineElement::LineElement(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+  : Element(graphPtr, name, hPtr)
+{
+  smooth_ = LINEAR;
+  fillPts_ =NULL;
+  nFillPts_ = 0;
+
+  symbolPts_.points =NULL;
+  symbolPts_.length =0;
+  symbolPts_.map =NULL;
+  activePts_.points =NULL;
+  activePts_.length =0;
+  activePts_.map =NULL;
+
+  xeb_.segments =NULL;
+  xeb_.map =NULL;
+  xeb_.length =0;
+  yeb_.segments =NULL;
+  yeb_.map =NULL;
+  yeb_.length =0;
+
+  symbolInterval_ =0;
+  symbolCounter_ =0;
+  traces_ =NULL;
+
+  ops_ = (LineElementOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(LineElementOptions));
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  ops->elemPtr = (Element*)this;
+
+  builtinPenPtr = new LinePen(graphPtr, "builtin", &ops->builtinPen);
+  ops->builtinPenPtr = builtinPenPtr;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr->interp_, optionSpecs);
+
+  ops->stylePalette = new Chain();
+  // this is an option and will be freed via Tk_FreeConfigOptions
+  // By default an element's name and label are the same
+  ops->label = Tcl_Alloc(strlen(name)+1);
+  if (name)
+    strcpy((char*)ops->label,(char*)name);
+
+  Tk_InitOptions(graphPtr->interp_, (char*)&(ops->builtinPen),
+		 builtinPenPtr->optionTable(), graphPtr->tkwin_);
+}
+
+LineElement::~LineElement()
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  delete builtinPenPtr;
+
+  reset();
+
+  if (ops->stylePalette) {
+    freeStylePalette(ops->stylePalette);
+    delete ops->stylePalette;
+  }
+
+  delete [] fillPts_;
+}
+
+int LineElement::configure()
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (builtinPenPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Point to the static normal/active pens if no external pens have been
+  // selected.
+  ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette);
+  if (!link) {
+    link = new ChainLink(sizeof(LineStyle));
+    ops->stylePalette->linkAfter(link, NULL);
+  } 
+  LineStyle* stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+  stylePtr->penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void LineElement::map()
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+    
+  if (!link)
+    return;
+
+  reset();
+  if (!ops->coords.x || !ops->coords.y ||
+      !ops->coords.x->nValues() || !ops->coords.y->nValues())
+    return;
+
+  MapInfo mi;
+  getScreenPoints(&mi);
+  mapSymbols(&mi);
+
+  if (nActiveIndices_ > 0)
+    mapActiveSymbols();
+
+  // Map connecting line segments if they are to be displayed.
+  smooth_ = (Smoothing)ops->reqSmooth;
+  if ((mi.nScreenPts > 1) && (ops->builtinPen.traceWidth > 0)) {
+    // Do smoothing if necessary.  This can extend the coordinate array,
+    // so both mi.points and mi.nPoints may change.
+    switch (smooth_) {
+    case STEP:
+      generateSteps(&mi);
+      break;
+
+    case CUBIC:
+    case QUADRATIC:
+      // Can't interpolate with less than three points
+      if (mi.nScreenPts < 3)
+	smooth_ = LINEAR;
+      else
+	generateSpline(&mi);
+      break;
+
+    case CATROM:
+      // Can't interpolate with less than three points
+      if (mi.nScreenPts < 3)
+	smooth_ = LINEAR;
+      else
+	generateParametricSpline(&mi);
+      break;
+
+    default:
+      break;
+    }
+    if (ops->rTolerance > 0.0)
+      reducePoints(&mi, ops->rTolerance);
+
+    if (ops->fillBg)
+      mapFillArea(&mi);
+
+    mapTraces(&mi);
+  }
+  delete [] mi.screenPts;
+  delete [] mi.map;
+
+  // Set the symbol size of all the pen styles
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    LineStyle* stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    LinePen* penPtr = (LinePen *)stylePtr->penPtr;
+    LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+    int size = scaleSymbol(penOps->symbol.size);
+    stylePtr->symbolSize = size;
+    stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth = penOps->errorBarCapWidth;
+  }
+
+  LineStyle** styleMap = (LineStyle**)StyleMap();
+  if (((ops->yHigh && ops->yHigh->nValues() > 0) &&
+       (ops->yLow && ops->yLow->nValues() > 0)) ||
+      ((ops->xHigh && ops->xHigh->nValues() > 0) &&
+       (ops->xLow && ops->xLow->nValues() > 0)) ||
+      (ops->xError && ops->xError->nValues() > 0) ||
+      (ops->yError && ops->yError->nValues() > 0)) {
+    mapErrorBars(styleMap);
+  }
+
+  mergePens(styleMap);
+  delete [] styleMap;
+}
+
+void LineElement::extents(Region2d *extsPtr)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  extsPtr->top = extsPtr->left = DBL_MAX;
+  extsPtr->bottom = extsPtr->right = -DBL_MAX;
+
+  if (!ops->coords.x || !ops->coords.y ||
+      !ops->coords.x->nValues() || !ops->coords.y->nValues())
+    return;
+  int np = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+
+  extsPtr->right = ops->coords.x->max();
+  AxisOptions* axisxops = (AxisOptions*)ops->xAxis->ops();
+  if ((ops->coords.x->min() <= 0.0) && (axisxops->logScale))
+    extsPtr->left = FindElemValuesMinimum(ops->coords.x, DBL_MIN);
+  else
+    extsPtr->left = ops->coords.x->min();
+
+  extsPtr->bottom = ops->coords.y->max();
+  AxisOptions* axisyops = (AxisOptions*)ops->yAxis->ops();
+  if ((ops->coords.y->min() <= 0.0) && (axisyops->logScale))
+    extsPtr->top = FindElemValuesMinimum(ops->coords.y, DBL_MIN);
+  else
+    extsPtr->top = ops->coords.y->min();
+
+  // Correct the data limits for error bars
+  if (ops->xError && ops->xError->nValues() > 0) {
+    np = MIN(ops->xError->nValues(), np);
+    for (int ii=0; ii<np; ii++) {
+      double x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii] + ops->xError->values_[ii];
+      if (x > extsPtr->right)
+	extsPtr->right = x;
+
+      x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii] - ops->xError->values_[ii];
+      AxisOptions* axisxops = (AxisOptions*)ops->xAxis->ops();
+      if (axisxops->logScale) {
+	// Mirror negative values, instead of ignoring them
+	if (x < 0.0)
+	  x = -x;
+	if ((x > DBL_MIN) && (x < extsPtr->left))
+	  extsPtr->left = x;
+      } 
+      else if (x < extsPtr->left)
+	extsPtr->left = x;
+    }		     
+  }
+  else {
+    if (ops->xHigh && 
+	(ops->xHigh->nValues() > 0) && 
+	(ops->xHigh->max() > extsPtr->right)) {
+      extsPtr->right = ops->xHigh->max();
+    }
+    if (ops->xLow && ops->xLow->nValues() > 0) {
+      double left;
+      if ((ops->xLow->min() <= 0.0) && (axisxops->logScale))
+	left = FindElemValuesMinimum(ops->xLow, DBL_MIN);
+      else
+	left = ops->xLow->min();
+
+      if (left < extsPtr->left)
+	extsPtr->left = left;
+    }
+  }
+    
+  if (ops->yError && ops->yError->nValues() > 0) {
+    np = MIN(ops->yError->nValues(), np);
+    for (int ii=0; ii<np; ii++) {
+      double y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii] + ops->yError->values_[ii];
+      if (y > extsPtr->bottom)
+	extsPtr->bottom = y;
+
+      y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii] - ops->yError->values_[ii];
+      AxisOptions* axisyops = (AxisOptions*)ops->yAxis->ops();
+      if (axisyops->logScale) {
+	// Mirror negative values, instead of ignoring them
+	if (y < 0.0)
+	  y = -y;
+	if ((y > DBL_MIN) && (y < extsPtr->left))
+	  extsPtr->top = y;
+      }
+      else if (y < extsPtr->top)
+	extsPtr->top = y;
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    if (ops->yHigh && (ops->yHigh->nValues() > 0) && 
+	(ops->yHigh->max() > extsPtr->bottom))
+      extsPtr->bottom = ops->yHigh->max();
+
+    if (ops->yLow && ops->yLow->nValues() > 0) {
+      double top;
+      if ((ops->yLow->min() <= 0.0) && (axisyops->logScale))
+	top = FindElemValuesMinimum(ops->yLow, DBL_MIN);
+      else
+	top = ops->yLow->min();
+
+      if (top < extsPtr->top)
+	extsPtr->top = top;
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::closest()
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  ClosestSearch* searchPtr = &gops->search;
+  int mode = searchPtr->mode;
+  if (mode == SEARCH_AUTO) {
+    LinePen* penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+    LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+    mode = SEARCH_POINTS;
+    if ((NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops) > 1) && (penOps->traceWidth > 0))
+      mode = SEARCH_TRACES;
+  }
+  if (mode == SEARCH_POINTS)
+    closestPoint(searchPtr);
+  else {
+    int found = closestTrace();
+    if ((!found) && (searchPtr->along != SEARCH_BOTH))
+      closestPoint(searchPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::draw(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  LinePen* penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (ops->hide)
+    return;
+
+  // Fill area under the curve
+  if (ops->fillBg && fillPts_) {
+    XPoint*points = new XPoint[nFillPts_];
+
+    unsigned int count =0;
+    for (Point2d *pp = fillPts_, *endp = pp + nFillPts_; pp < endp; pp++) {
+      points[count].x = (short)pp->x;
+      points[count].y = (short)pp->y;
+      count++;
+    }
+    Tk_Fill3DPolygon(graphPtr_->tkwin_, drawable, ops->fillBg, points, 
+		     nFillPts_, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    delete [] points;
+  }
+
+  // Error bars
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    LineStyle* stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    LinePen* penPtr = (LinePen *)stylePtr->penPtr;
+    LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+    if ((stylePtr->xeb.length > 0) && (penOps->errorBarShow & SHOW_X))
+      graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, penPtr->errorBarGC_, 
+			      stylePtr->xeb.segments, stylePtr->xeb.length);
+
+    if ((stylePtr->yeb.length > 0) && (penOps->errorBarShow & SHOW_Y))
+      graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, penPtr->errorBarGC_, 
+			      stylePtr->yeb.segments, stylePtr->yeb.length);
+  }
+
+  // traces
+  if ((Chain_GetLength(traces_) > 0) && (penOps->traceWidth > 0))
+    drawTraces(drawable, penPtr);
+
+  // Symbols, values
+  if (ops->reqMaxSymbols > 0) {
+    int total = 0;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      total += stylePtr->symbolPts.length;
+    }
+    symbolInterval_ = total / ops->reqMaxSymbols;
+    symbolCounter_ = 0;
+  }
+
+  unsigned int count =0;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    LineStyle* stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    LinePen* penPtr = (LinePen *)stylePtr->penPtr;
+    LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+    if ((stylePtr->symbolPts.length > 0) && 
+	(penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE))
+      drawSymbols(drawable, penPtr, stylePtr->symbolSize,
+		  stylePtr->symbolPts.length, stylePtr->symbolPts.points);
+
+    if (penOps->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      drawValues(drawable, penPtr, stylePtr->symbolPts.length, 
+		 stylePtr->symbolPts.points, symbolPts_.map + count);
+
+    count += stylePtr->symbolPts.length;
+  }
+
+  symbolInterval_ = 0;
+  symbolCounter_ = 0;
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawActive(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  LinePen* penPtr = (LinePen*)ops->activePenPtr;
+  if (!penPtr)
+    return;
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (ops->hide || !active_)
+    return;
+
+  int symbolSize = scaleSymbol(penOps->symbol.size);
+
+  if (nActiveIndices_ > 0) {
+    mapActiveSymbols();
+
+    if (penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE)
+      drawSymbols(drawable, penPtr, symbolSize, activePts_.length,
+		  activePts_.points);
+    if (penOps->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      drawValues(drawable, penPtr, activePts_.length, activePts_.points, 
+		 activePts_.map);
+  }
+  else if (nActiveIndices_ < 0) { 
+    if ((Chain_GetLength(traces_) > 0) && (penOps->traceWidth > 0))
+      drawTraces(drawable, penPtr);
+
+    if (penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE)
+      drawSymbols(drawable, penPtr, symbolSize, symbolPts_.length,
+		  symbolPts_.points);
+
+    if (penOps->valueShow != SHOW_NONE) {
+      drawValues(drawable, penPtr, symbolPts_.length, symbolPts_.points, 
+		 symbolPts_.map);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawSymbol(Drawable drawable, int x, int y, int size)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  LinePen* penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (penOps->traceWidth > 0) {
+    // Draw an extra line offset by one pixel from the previous to give a
+    // thicker appearance.  This is only for the legend entry.  This routine
+    // is never called for drawing the actual line segments.
+    XDrawLine(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr->traceGC_, x - size, y, 
+	      x + size, y);
+    XDrawLine(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr->traceGC_, x - size, y + 1,
+	      x + size, y + 1);
+  }
+  if (penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE) {
+    Point2d point;
+    point.x = x;
+    point.y = y;
+    drawSymbols(drawable, penPtr, size, 1, &point);
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::print(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  LinePen* penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (ops->hide)
+    return;
+
+  psPtr->format("\n%% Element \"%s\"\n\n", name_);
+
+  // Draw fill area
+  if (ops->fillBg && fillPts_) {
+    psPtr->append("% start fill area\n");
+    psPtr->setBackground(ops->fillBg);
+    psPtr->printPolyline(fillPts_, nFillPts_);
+    psPtr->append("gsave fill grestore\n");
+    psPtr->append("% end fill area\n");
+  }
+
+  // traces
+  if ((Chain_GetLength(traces_) > 0) && (penOps->traceWidth > 0))
+    printTraces(psPtr, penPtr);
+
+  // Symbols, error bars, values
+  if (ops->reqMaxSymbols > 0) {
+    int total = 0;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      total += stylePtr->symbolPts.length;
+    }
+    symbolInterval_ = total / ops->reqMaxSymbols;
+    symbolCounter_ = 0;
+  }
+
+  unsigned int count =0;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    LinePen* penPtr = (LinePen *)stylePtr->penPtr;
+    LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+    XColor* colorPtr = penOps->errorBarColor;
+    if (!colorPtr)
+      colorPtr = penOps->traceColor;
+
+    if ((stylePtr->xeb.length > 0) && (penOps->errorBarShow & SHOW_X)) {
+      psPtr->setLineAttributes(colorPtr, penOps->errorBarLineWidth, 
+			       NULL, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+      psPtr->printSegments(stylePtr->xeb.segments, stylePtr->xeb.length);
+    }
+
+    if ((stylePtr->yeb.length > 0) && (penOps->errorBarShow & SHOW_Y)) {
+      psPtr->setLineAttributes(colorPtr, penOps->errorBarLineWidth, 
+			       NULL, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+      psPtr->printSegments(stylePtr->yeb.segments, stylePtr->yeb.length);
+    }
+
+    if ((stylePtr->symbolPts.length > 0) && 
+	(penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE))
+      printSymbols(psPtr, penPtr, stylePtr->symbolSize, 
+		   stylePtr->symbolPts.length, stylePtr->symbolPts.points);
+
+    if (penOps->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      printValues(psPtr, penPtr, stylePtr->symbolPts.length, 
+		  stylePtr->symbolPts.points, symbolPts_.map + count);
+
+    count += stylePtr->symbolPts.length;
+  }
+
+  symbolInterval_ = 0;
+  symbolCounter_ = 0;
+}
+
+void LineElement::printActive(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  LinePen* penPtr = (LinePen *)ops->activePenPtr;
+  if (!penPtr)
+    return;
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (ops->hide || !active_)
+    return;
+
+  psPtr->format("\n%% Active Element \"%s\"\n\n", name_);
+
+  int symbolSize = scaleSymbol(penOps->symbol.size);
+  if (nActiveIndices_ > 0) {
+    mapActiveSymbols();
+
+    if (penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE)
+      printSymbols(psPtr, penPtr, symbolSize, activePts_.length,
+			  activePts_.points);
+
+    if (penOps->valueShow != SHOW_NONE)
+      printValues(psPtr, penPtr, activePts_.length, activePts_.points,
+		  activePts_.map);
+  }
+  else if (nActiveIndices_ < 0) {
+    if ((Chain_GetLength(traces_) > 0) && (penOps->traceWidth > 0))
+      printTraces(psPtr, (LinePen*)penPtr);
+
+    if (penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE)
+      printSymbols(psPtr, penPtr, symbolSize, symbolPts_.length, 
+		   symbolPts_.points);
+    if (penOps->valueShow != SHOW_NONE) {
+      printValues(psPtr, penPtr, symbolPts_.length, symbolPts_.points,
+		  symbolPts_.map);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::printSymbol(PSOutput* psPtr, double x, double y, int size)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  LinePen* penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (penOps->traceWidth > 0) {
+    // Draw an extra line offset by one pixel from the previous to give a
+    // thicker appearance.  This is only for the legend entry.  This routine
+    // is never called for drawing the actual line segments.
+    psPtr->setLineAttributes(penOps->traceColor, penOps->traceWidth, 
+			      &penOps->traceDashes, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+    psPtr->format("%g %g %d Li\n", x, y, size + size);
+  }
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.type != SYMBOL_NONE) {
+    Point2d point;
+    point.x = x;
+    point.y = y;
+    printSymbols(psPtr, penPtr, size, 1, &point);
+  }
+}
+
+// Support
+
+double LineElement::distanceToLine(int x, int y, Point2d *p, Point2d *q,
+				   Point2d *t)
+{
+  double right, left, top, bottom;
+
+  *t = getProjection(x, y, p, q);
+  if (p->x > q->x)
+    right = p->x, left = q->x;
+  else
+    left = p->x, right = q->x;
+
+  if (p->y > q->y)
+    bottom = p->y, top = q->y;
+  else
+    top = p->y, bottom = q->y;
+
+  if (t->x > right)
+    t->x = right;
+  else if (t->x < left)
+    t->x = left;
+
+  if (t->y > bottom)
+    t->y = bottom;
+  else if (t->y < top)
+    t->y = top;
+
+  return hypot((t->x - x), (t->y - y));
+}
+
+double LineElement::distanceToX(int x, int y, Point2d *p, Point2d *q, 
+				Point2d *t)
+{
+  double dx, dy;
+  double d;
+
+  if (p->x > q->x) {
+    if ((x > p->x) || (x < q->x)) {
+      return DBL_MAX;		/* X-coordinate outside line segment. */
+    }
+  } else {
+    if ((x > q->x) || (x < p->x)) {
+      return DBL_MAX;		/* X-coordinate outside line segment. */
+    }
+  }
+  dx = p->x - q->x;
+  dy = p->y - q->y;
+  t->x = (double)x;
+  if (fabs(dx) < DBL_EPSILON) {
+    double d1, d2;
+    /* 
+     * Same X-coordinate indicates a vertical line.  Pick the closest end
+     * point.
+     */
+    d1 = p->y - y;
+    d2 = q->y - y;
+    if (fabs(d1) < fabs(d2)) {
+      t->y = p->y, d = d1;
+    } else {
+      t->y = q->y, d = d2;
+    }
+  }
+  else if (fabs(dy) < DBL_EPSILON) {
+    /* Horizontal line. */
+    t->y = p->y, d = p->y - y;
+  }
+  else {
+    double m = dy / dx;
+    double b = p->y - (m * p->x);
+    t->y = (x * m) + b;
+    d = y - t->y;
+  }
+
+  return fabs(d);
+}
+
+double LineElement::distanceToY(int x, int y, Point2d *p, Point2d *q,
+				Point2d *t)
+{
+  double dx, dy;
+  double d;
+
+  if (p->y > q->y) {
+    if ((y > p->y) || (y < q->y)) {
+      return DBL_MAX;
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    if ((y > q->y) || (y < p->y)) {
+      return DBL_MAX;
+    }
+  }
+  dx = p->x - q->x;
+  dy = p->y - q->y;
+  t->y = y;
+  if (fabs(dy) < DBL_EPSILON) {
+    double d1, d2;
+
+    /* Save Y-coordinate indicates an horizontal line. Pick the closest end
+     * point. */
+    d1 = p->x - x;
+    d2 = q->x - x;
+    if (fabs(d1) < fabs(d2)) {
+      t->x = p->x, d = d1;
+    }
+    else {
+      t->x = q->x, d = d2;
+    }
+  }
+  else if (fabs(dx) < DBL_EPSILON) {
+    /* Vertical line. */
+    t->x = p->x, d = p->x - x;
+  } 
+  else {
+    double m = dy / dx;
+    double b = p->y - (m * p->x);
+    t->x = (y - b) / m;
+    d = x - t->x;
+  }
+
+  return fabs(d);
+}
+
+int LineElement::scaleSymbol(int normalSize)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  double scale = 1.0;
+  if (ops->scaleSymbols) {
+    double xRange = (ops->xAxis->max_ - ops->xAxis->min_);
+    double yRange = (ops->yAxis->max_ - ops->yAxis->min_);
+    // Save the ranges as a baseline for future scaling
+    if (!xRange_ || !yRange_) {
+      xRange_ = xRange;
+      yRange_ = yRange;
+    }
+    else {
+      // Scale the symbol by the smallest change in the X or Y axes
+      double xScale = xRange_ / xRange;
+      double yScale = yRange_ / yRange;
+      scale = MIN(xScale, yScale);
+    }
+  }
+  int newSize = (int)(normalSize * scale);
+
+  int maxSize = MIN(graphPtr_->hRange_, graphPtr_->vRange_);
+  if (newSize > maxSize)
+    newSize = maxSize;
+
+  // Make the symbol size odd so that its center is a single pixel.
+  newSize |= 0x01;
+
+  return newSize;
+}
+
+void LineElement::getScreenPoints(MapInfo* mapPtr)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->coords.x || !ops->coords.y) {
+    mapPtr->screenPts = NULL;
+    mapPtr->nScreenPts = 0;
+    mapPtr->map = NULL;
+  }
+
+  int np = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+  double* x = ops->coords.x->values_;
+  double* y = ops->coords.y->values_;
+  Point2d* points = new Point2d[np];
+  int* map = new int[np];
+
+  int count = 0;
+  if (gops->inverted) {
+    for (int ii=0; ii<np; ii++) {
+      if ((isfinite(x[ii])) && (isfinite(y[ii]))) {
+	points[count].x = ops->yAxis->hMap(y[ii]);
+	points[count].y = ops->xAxis->vMap(x[ii]);
+	map[count] = ii;
+	count++;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    for (int ii=0; ii< np; ii++) {
+      if ((isfinite(x[ii])) && (isfinite(y[ii]))) {
+	points[count].x = ops->xAxis->hMap(x[ii]);
+	points[count].y = ops->yAxis->vMap(y[ii]);
+	map[count] = ii;
+	count++;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  mapPtr->screenPts = points;
+  mapPtr->nScreenPts = count;
+  mapPtr->map = map;
+}
+
+void LineElement::reducePoints(MapInfo *mapPtr, double tolerance)
+{
+  int* simple = new int[mapPtr->nScreenPts];
+  int* map = new int[mapPtr->nScreenPts];
+  Point2d* screenPts = new Point2d[mapPtr->nScreenPts];
+  int np = simplify(mapPtr->screenPts, 0, mapPtr->nScreenPts - 1, 
+		    tolerance, simple);
+  for (int ii=0; ii<np; ii++) {
+    int kk = simple[ii];
+    screenPts[ii] = mapPtr->screenPts[kk];
+    map[ii] = mapPtr->map[kk];
+  }
+  delete [] simple;
+
+  delete [] mapPtr->screenPts;
+  mapPtr->screenPts = screenPts;
+  delete [] mapPtr->map;
+  mapPtr->map = map;
+  mapPtr->nScreenPts = np;
+}
+
+// Douglas-Peucker line simplification algorithm
+int LineElement::simplify(Point2d *inputPts, int low, int high, 
+			  double tolerance, int *indices)
+{
+#define StackPush(a)	s++, stack[s] = (a)
+#define StackPop(a)	(a) = stack[s], s--
+#define StackEmpty()	(s < 0)
+#define StackTop()	stack[s]
+    int split = -1; 
+    double dist2, tolerance2;
+    int s = -1;			/* Points to top stack item. */
+
+    int* stack = new int[high - low + 1];
+    StackPush(high);
+    int count = 0;
+    indices[count++] = 0;
+    tolerance2 = tolerance * tolerance;
+    while (!StackEmpty()) {
+	dist2 = findSplit(inputPts, low, StackTop(), &split);
+	if (dist2 > tolerance2)
+	    StackPush(split);
+	else {
+	    indices[count++] = StackTop();
+	    StackPop(low);
+	}
+    } 
+    delete [] stack;
+    return count;
+}
+
+double LineElement::findSplit(Point2d *points, int i, int j, int *split)	
+{    
+    double maxDist2 = -1.0;
+    if ((i + 1) < j) {
+	double a = points[i].y - points[j].y;
+	double b = points[j].x - points[i].x;
+	double c = (points[i].x * points[j].y) - (points[i].y * points[j].x);
+	for (int kk = (i + 1); kk < j; kk++) {
+	    double dist2 = (points[kk].x * a) + (points[kk].y * b) + c;
+	    if (dist2 < 0.0)
+		dist2 = -dist2;	
+
+	    // Track the maximum.
+	    if (dist2 > maxDist2) {
+		maxDist2 = dist2;
+		*split = kk;
+	    }
+	}
+	// Correction for segment length---should be redone if can == 0
+	maxDist2 *= maxDist2 / (a * a + b * b);
+    } 
+    return maxDist2;
+}
+
+void LineElement::generateSteps(MapInfo *mapPtr)
+{
+  int newSize = ((mapPtr->nScreenPts - 1) * 2) + 1;
+  Point2d* screenPts = new Point2d[newSize];
+  int* map = new int[newSize];
+  screenPts[0] = mapPtr->screenPts[0];
+  map[0] = 0;
+
+  int count = 1;
+  for (int i = 1; i < mapPtr->nScreenPts; i++) {
+    screenPts[count + 1] = mapPtr->screenPts[i];
+
+    // Hold last y-coordinate, use new x-coordinate
+    screenPts[count].x = screenPts[count + 1].x;
+    screenPts[count].y = screenPts[count - 1].y;
+
+    // Use the same style for both the hold and the step points
+    map[count] = map[count + 1] = mapPtr->map[i];
+    count += 2;
+  }
+  delete [] mapPtr->map;
+  mapPtr->map = map;
+  delete [] mapPtr->screenPts;
+  mapPtr->screenPts = screenPts;
+  mapPtr->nScreenPts = newSize;
+}
+
+void LineElement::generateSpline(MapInfo *mapPtr)
+{
+  int nOrigPts = mapPtr->nScreenPts;
+  Point2d* origPts = mapPtr->screenPts;
+
+  // check points are not monotonically increasing
+  for (int ii=0, jj=1; jj<nOrigPts; ii++, jj++) {
+    if (origPts[jj].x <= origPts[ii].x)
+      return;
+  }
+  if (((origPts[0].x > (double)graphPtr_->right_)) ||
+      ((origPts[mapPtr->nScreenPts - 1].x < (double)graphPtr_->left_)))
+    return;
+
+  // The spline is computed in screen coordinates instead of data points so
+  // that we can select the abscissas of the interpolated points from each
+  // pixel horizontally across the plotting area.
+  int extra = (graphPtr_->right_ - graphPtr_->left_) + 1;
+  if (extra < 1)
+    return;
+
+  int niPts = nOrigPts + extra + 1;
+  Point2d* iPts = new Point2d[niPts];
+  int* map = new int[niPts];
+
+  // Populate the x2 array with both the original X-coordinates and extra
+  // X-coordinates for each horizontal pixel that the line segment contains
+  int count = 0;
+  for (int ii=0, jj=1; jj<nOrigPts; ii++, jj++) {
+    // Add the original x-coordinate
+    iPts[count].x = origPts[ii].x;
+
+    // Include the starting offset of the point in the offset array
+    map[count] = mapPtr->map[ii];
+    count++;
+
+    // Is any part of the interval (line segment) in the plotting area? 
+    if ((origPts[jj].x >= (double)graphPtr_->left_) || 
+	(origPts[ii].x <= (double)graphPtr_->right_)) {
+      double x = origPts[ii].x + 1.0;
+
+      /*
+       * Since the line segment may be partially clipped on the left or
+       * right side, the points to interpolate are always interior to
+       * the plotting area.
+       *
+       *           left			    right
+       *      x1----|---------------------------|---x2
+       *
+       * Pick the max of the starting X-coordinate and the left edge and
+       * the min of the last X-coordinate and the right edge.
+       */
+      x = MAX(x, (double)graphPtr_->left_);
+      double last = MIN(origPts[jj].x, (double)graphPtr_->right_);
+
+      // Add the extra x-coordinates to the interval
+      while (x < last) {
+	map[count] = mapPtr->map[ii];
+	iPts[count++].x = x;
+	x++;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  niPts = count;
+  int result = 0;
+  if (smooth_ == CUBIC)
+    result = naturalSpline(origPts, nOrigPts, iPts, niPts);
+  else if (smooth_ == QUADRATIC)
+    result = quadraticSpline(origPts, nOrigPts, iPts, niPts);
+
+  // The spline interpolation failed.  We will fall back to the current
+  // coordinates and do no smoothing (standard line segments)
+  if (!result) {
+    smooth_ = LINEAR;
+    delete [] iPts;
+    delete [] map;
+  }
+  else {
+    delete [] mapPtr->map;
+    mapPtr->map = map;
+    delete [] mapPtr->screenPts;
+    mapPtr->screenPts = iPts;
+    mapPtr->nScreenPts = niPts;
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::generateParametricSpline(MapInfo *mapPtr)
+{
+  int nOrigPts = mapPtr->nScreenPts;
+  Point2d *origPts = mapPtr->screenPts;
+
+  Region2d exts;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&exts);
+
+  /* 
+   * Populate the x2 array with both the original X-coordinates and extra
+   * X-coordinates for each horizontal pixel that the line segment contains.
+   */
+  int count = 1;
+  for (int i = 0, j = 1; j < nOrigPts; i++, j++) {
+    Point2d p = origPts[i];
+    Point2d q = origPts[j];
+    count++;
+    if (lineRectClip(&exts, &p, &q))
+      count += (int)(hypot(q.x - p.x, q.y - p.y) * 0.5);
+  }
+  int niPts = count;
+  Point2d *iPts = new Point2d[niPts];
+  int* map = new int[niPts];
+
+  /* 
+   * FIXME: This is just plain wrong.  The spline should be computed
+   *        and evaluated in separate steps.  This will mean breaking
+   *	      up this routine since the catrom coefficients can be
+   *	      independently computed for original data point.  This 
+   *	      also handles the problem of allocating enough points 
+   *	      since evaluation is independent of the number of points 
+   *		to be evalualted.  The interpolated 
+   *	      line segments should be clipped, not the original segments.
+   */
+  count = 0;
+  int i,j;
+  for (i = 0, j = 1; j < nOrigPts; i++, j++) {
+    Point2d p = origPts[i];
+    Point2d q = origPts[j];
+
+    double d = hypot(q.x - p.x, q.y - p.y);
+    /* Add the original x-coordinate */
+    iPts[count].x = (double)i;
+    iPts[count].y = 0.0;
+
+    /* Include the starting offset of the point in the offset array */
+    map[count] = mapPtr->map[i];
+    count++;
+
+    /* Is any part of the interval (line segment) in the plotting
+     * area?  */
+
+    if (lineRectClip(&exts, &p, &q)) {
+      double dp, dq;
+
+      /* Distance of original point to p. */
+      dp = hypot(p.x - origPts[i].x, p.y - origPts[i].y);
+      /* Distance of original point to q. */
+      dq = hypot(q.x - origPts[i].x, q.y - origPts[i].y);
+      dp += 2.0;
+      while(dp <= dq) {
+	/* Point is indicated by its interval and parameter t. */
+	iPts[count].x = (double)i;
+	iPts[count].y =  dp / d;
+	map[count] = mapPtr->map[i];
+	count++;
+	dp += 2.0;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  iPts[count].x = (double)i;
+  iPts[count].y = 0.0;
+  map[count] = mapPtr->map[i];
+  count++;
+  niPts = count;
+  int result = 0;
+  if (smooth_ == CUBIC)
+    result = naturalParametricSpline(origPts, nOrigPts, &exts, 0, iPts, niPts);
+  else if (smooth_ == CATROM)
+    result = catromParametricSpline(origPts, nOrigPts, iPts, niPts);
+
+  // The spline interpolation failed.  We will fall back to the current
+  // coordinates and do no smoothing (standard line segments)
+  if (!result) {
+    smooth_ = LINEAR;
+    delete [] iPts;
+    delete [] map;
+  }
+  else {
+    delete [] mapPtr->map;
+    mapPtr->map = map;
+    delete [] mapPtr->screenPts;
+    mapPtr->screenPts = iPts;
+    mapPtr->nScreenPts = niPts;
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::mapSymbols(MapInfo *mapPtr)
+{
+  Point2d* points = new Point2d[mapPtr->nScreenPts];
+  int *map = new int[mapPtr->nScreenPts];
+
+  Region2d exts;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&exts);
+
+  Point2d *pp;
+  int count = 0;
+  int i;
+  for (pp=mapPtr->screenPts, i=0; i<mapPtr->nScreenPts; i++, pp++) {
+    if (PointInRegion(&exts, pp->x, pp->y)) {
+      points[count].x = pp->x;
+      points[count].y = pp->y;
+      map[count] = mapPtr->map[i];
+      count++;
+    }
+  }
+  symbolPts_.points = points;
+  symbolPts_.length = count;
+  symbolPts_.map = map;
+}
+
+void LineElement::mapActiveSymbols()
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  delete [] activePts_.points;
+  activePts_.points = NULL;
+  delete [] activePts_.map;
+  activePts_.map = NULL;
+
+  Region2d exts;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&exts);
+
+  Point2d *points = new Point2d[nActiveIndices_];
+  int* map = new int[nActiveIndices_];
+  int np = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+  int count = 0;
+  if (ops->coords.x && ops->coords.y) {
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nActiveIndices_; ii++) {
+      int iPoint = activeIndices_[ii];
+      if (iPoint >= np)
+	continue;
+
+      double x = ops->coords.x->values_[iPoint];
+      double y = ops->coords.y->values_[iPoint];
+      points[count] = graphPtr_->map2D(x, y, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+      map[count] = iPoint;
+      if (PointInRegion(&exts, points[count].x, points[count].y)) {
+	count++;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (count > 0) {
+    activePts_.points = points;
+    activePts_.map = map;
+  }
+  else {
+    delete [] points;
+    delete [] map;	
+  }
+  activePts_.length = count;
+}
+
+void LineElement::mergePens(LineStyle **styleMap)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (Chain_GetLength(ops->stylePalette) < 2) {
+    ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette);
+    LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    stylePtr->symbolPts.length = symbolPts_.length;
+    stylePtr->symbolPts.points = symbolPts_.points;
+    stylePtr->xeb.length = xeb_.length;
+    stylePtr->xeb.segments = xeb_.segments;
+    stylePtr->yeb.length = yeb_.length;
+    stylePtr->yeb.segments = yeb_.segments;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  if (symbolPts_.length > 0) {
+    Point2d* points = new Point2d[symbolPts_.length];
+    int* map = new int[symbolPts_.length];
+    Point2d *pp = points;
+    int* ip = map;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      stylePtr->symbolPts.points = pp;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<symbolPts_.length; ii++) {
+	int iData = symbolPts_.map[ii];
+	if (styleMap[iData] == stylePtr) {
+	  *pp++ = symbolPts_.points[ii];
+	  *ip++ = iData;
+	}
+      }
+      stylePtr->symbolPts.length = pp - stylePtr->symbolPts.points;
+    }
+    delete [] symbolPts_.points;
+    symbolPts_.points = points;
+    delete [] symbolPts_.map;
+    symbolPts_.map = map;
+  }
+
+  if (xeb_.length > 0) {
+    Segment2d* segments = new Segment2d[xeb_.length];
+    Segment2d *sp = segments;
+    int* map = new int[xeb_.length];
+    int* ip = map;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      stylePtr->xeb.segments = sp;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<xeb_.length; ii++) {
+	int iData = xeb_.map[ii];
+	if (styleMap[iData] == stylePtr) {
+	  *sp++ = xeb_.segments[ii];
+	  *ip++ = iData;
+	}
+      }
+      stylePtr->xeb.length = sp - stylePtr->xeb.segments;
+    }
+    delete [] xeb_.segments;
+    xeb_.segments = segments;
+    delete [] xeb_.map;
+    xeb_.map = map;
+  }
+
+  if (yeb_.length > 0) {
+    Segment2d* segments = new Segment2d[yeb_.length];
+    Segment2d* sp = segments;
+    int* map = new int [yeb_.length];
+    int* ip = map;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      stylePtr->yeb.segments = sp;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<yeb_.length; ii++) {
+	int iData = yeb_.map[ii];
+	if (styleMap[iData] == stylePtr) {
+	  *sp++ = yeb_.segments[ii];
+	  *ip++ = iData;
+	}
+      }
+      stylePtr->yeb.length = sp - stylePtr->yeb.segments;
+    }
+    delete [] yeb_.segments;
+    yeb_.segments = segments;
+    delete [] yeb_.map;
+    yeb_.map = map;
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::saveTrace(int start, int length, MapInfo* mapPtr)
+{
+  bltTrace* tracePtr  = new bltTrace;
+  Point2d* screenPts = new Point2d[length];
+  int* map = new int[length];
+
+  // Copy the screen coordinates of the trace into the point array
+  if (mapPtr->map) {
+    for (int ii=0, jj=start; ii<length; ii++, jj++) {
+      screenPts[ii].x = mapPtr->screenPts[jj].x;
+      screenPts[ii].y = mapPtr->screenPts[jj].y;
+      map[ii] = mapPtr->map[jj];
+    }
+  } 
+  else {
+    for (int ii=0, jj=start; ii<length; ii++, jj++) {
+      screenPts[ii].x = mapPtr->screenPts[jj].x;
+      screenPts[ii].y = mapPtr->screenPts[jj].y;
+      map[ii] = jj;
+    }
+  }
+  tracePtr->screenPts.length = length;
+  tracePtr->screenPts.points = screenPts;
+  tracePtr->screenPts.map = map;
+  tracePtr->start = start;
+  if (traces_ == NULL)
+    traces_ = new Chain();
+
+  traces_->append(tracePtr);
+}
+
+void LineElement::freeTraces()
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(traces_); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    bltTrace* tracePtr = (bltTrace*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    delete [] tracePtr->screenPts.map;
+    delete [] tracePtr->screenPts.points;
+    delete tracePtr;
+  }
+  delete traces_;
+  traces_ = NULL;
+}
+
+void LineElement::mapTraces(MapInfo *mapPtr)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Region2d exts;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&exts);
+
+  int count = 1;
+  Point2d* p = mapPtr->screenPts;
+  Point2d* q = p + 1;
+
+  int start;
+  int ii;
+  for (ii=1; ii<mapPtr->nScreenPts; ii++, p++, q++) {
+    // Save the coordinates of the last point before clipping.
+    Point2d originalq = *q;
+    int broken = BROKEN_TRACE(ops->penDir, p->x, q->x);
+    LineRectClipResult clipresult = lineRectClip(&exts, p, q);
+
+    if (broken || clipresult == CLIP_OUTSIDE) {
+      // The last line segment is either totally clipped by the plotting
+      // area or the x-direction is wrong, breaking the trace.  Either
+      // way, save information about the last trace (if one exists),
+      // discarding the current line segment
+      if (count > 1) {
+	start = ii - count;
+	saveTrace(start, count, mapPtr);
+	count = 1;
+      }
+    }
+    else {
+      // Add the point to the trace
+      count++;
+
+      // If the last point is clipped, this means that the trace is
+      // broken after this point.  Restore the original coordinate
+      // (before clipping) after saving the trace.
+      if (clipresult & CLIP_Q) {
+	start = ii - (count - 1);
+	saveTrace(start, count, mapPtr);
+	mapPtr->screenPts[ii] = originalq;
+	count = 1;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  if (count > 1) {
+    start = ii - count;
+    saveTrace(start, count, mapPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::mapFillArea(MapInfo *mapPtr)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  if (fillPts_) {
+    delete [] fillPts_;
+    fillPts_ = NULL;
+    nFillPts_ = 0;
+  }
+  if (mapPtr->nScreenPts < 3)
+    return;
+
+  int np = mapPtr->nScreenPts + 3;
+  Region2d exts;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&exts);
+
+  Point2d* origPts = new Point2d[np];
+  if (gops->inverted) {
+    int i;
+    double minX = (double)ops->yAxis->screenMin_;
+    for (i = 0; i < mapPtr->nScreenPts; i++) {
+      origPts[i].x = mapPtr->screenPts[i].x + 1;
+      origPts[i].y = mapPtr->screenPts[i].y;
+      if (origPts[i].x < minX) {
+	minX = origPts[i].x;
+      }
+    }	
+    // Add edges to make the polygon fill to the bottom of plotting window
+    origPts[i].x = minX;
+    origPts[i].y = origPts[i - 1].y;
+    i++;
+    origPts[i].x = minX;
+    origPts[i].y = origPts[0].y; 
+    i++;
+    origPts[i] = origPts[0];
+  }
+  else {
+    int i;
+    double maxY = (double)ops->yAxis->bottom_;
+    for (i = 0; i < mapPtr->nScreenPts; i++) {
+      origPts[i].x = mapPtr->screenPts[i].x + 1;
+      origPts[i].y = mapPtr->screenPts[i].y;
+      if (origPts[i].y > maxY) {
+	maxY = origPts[i].y;
+      }
+    }	
+    // Add edges to extend the fill polygon to the bottom of plotting window
+    origPts[i].x = origPts[i - 1].x;
+    origPts[i].y = maxY;
+    i++;
+    origPts[i].x = origPts[0].x; 
+    origPts[i].y = maxY;
+    i++;
+    origPts[i] = origPts[0];
+  }
+
+  Point2d *clipPts = new Point2d[np * 3];
+  np = polyRectClip(&exts, origPts, np - 1, clipPts);
+
+  delete [] origPts;
+  if (np < 3)
+    delete [] clipPts;
+  else {
+    fillPts_ = clipPts;
+    nFillPts_ = np;
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::reset()
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  freeTraces();
+
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->stylePalette); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    LineStyle *stylePtr = (LineStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    stylePtr->symbolPts.length = 0;
+    stylePtr->xeb.length = 0;
+    stylePtr->yeb.length = 0;
+  }
+
+  delete [] symbolPts_.points;
+  symbolPts_.points = NULL;
+
+  delete [] symbolPts_.map;
+  symbolPts_.map = NULL;
+  symbolPts_.length = 0;
+
+  delete [] activePts_.points;
+  activePts_.points = NULL;
+  activePts_.length = 0;
+
+  delete [] activePts_.map;
+  activePts_.map = NULL;
+
+  delete [] xeb_.segments;
+  xeb_.segments = NULL;
+  delete [] xeb_.map;
+  xeb_.map = NULL;
+  xeb_.length = 0;
+
+  delete [] yeb_.segments;
+  yeb_.segments = NULL;
+  delete [] yeb_.map;
+  yeb_.map = NULL;
+  yeb_.length = 0;
+}
+
+void LineElement::mapErrorBars(LineStyle **styleMap)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Region2d exts;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&exts);
+
+  int nn =0;
+  int np = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+  if (ops->coords.x && ops->coords.y) {
+    if (ops->xError && (ops->xError->nValues() > 0))
+      nn = MIN(ops->xError->nValues(), np);
+    else
+      if (ops->xHigh && ops->xLow)
+	nn = MIN3(ops->xHigh->nValues(), ops->xLow->nValues(), np);
+  }
+
+  if (nn) {
+    Segment2d* errorBars = new Segment2d[nn * 3];
+    Segment2d* segPtr = errorBars;
+    int* errorToData = new int[nn * 3];
+    int* indexPtr = errorToData;
+
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nn; ii++) {
+      double x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii];
+      double y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii];
+      LineStyle* stylePtr = styleMap[ii];
+
+      if ((isfinite(x)) && (isfinite(y))) {
+	double high;
+	double low;
+	if (ops->xError && ops->xError->nValues() > 0) {
+	  high = x + ops->xError->values_[ii];
+	  low = x - ops->xError->values_[ii];
+	} 
+	else {
+	  high = ops->xHigh ? ops->xHigh->values_[ii] : 0;
+	  low  = ops->xLow ? ops->xLow->values_[ii] : 0;
+	}
+
+	if ((isfinite(high)) && (isfinite(low)))  {
+	  Point2d p = graphPtr_->map2D(high, y, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  Point2d q = graphPtr_->map2D(low, y, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  segPtr->p = p;
+	  segPtr->q = q;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&exts, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Left cap
+	  segPtr->p.x = p.x;
+	  segPtr->q.x = p.x;
+	  segPtr->p.y = p.y - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.y = p.y + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&exts, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Right cap
+	  segPtr->p.x = q.x;
+	  segPtr->q.x = q.x;
+	  segPtr->p.y = q.y - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.y = q.y + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&exts, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+    }
+    xeb_.segments = errorBars;
+    xeb_.length = segPtr - errorBars;
+    xeb_.map = errorToData;
+  }
+
+  nn =0;
+  if (ops->coords.x && ops->coords.y) {
+    if (ops->yError && (ops->yError->nValues() > 0))
+      nn = MIN(ops->yError->nValues(), np);
+    else
+      if (ops->yHigh && ops->yLow)
+	nn = MIN3(ops->yHigh->nValues(), ops->yLow->nValues(), np);
+  }
+
+  if (nn) {
+    Segment2d* errorBars = new Segment2d[nn * 3];
+    Segment2d* segPtr = errorBars;
+    int* errorToData = new int[nn * 3];
+    int* indexPtr = errorToData;
+
+    for (int ii=0; ii<nn; ii++) {
+      double x = ops->coords.x->values_[ii];
+      double y = ops->coords.y->values_[ii];
+      LineStyle* stylePtr = styleMap[ii];
+
+      if ((isfinite(x)) && (isfinite(y))) {
+	double high;
+	double low;
+	if (ops->yError && ops->yError->nValues() > 0) {
+ 	  high = y + ops->yError->values_[ii];
+ 	  low = y - ops->yError->values_[ii];
+ 	} 
+	else {
+ 	  high = ops->yHigh->values_[ii];
+ 	  low = ops->yLow->values_[ii];
+ 	}
+
+	if ((isfinite(high)) && (isfinite(low)))  {
+	  Point2d p = graphPtr_->map2D(x, high, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  Point2d q = graphPtr_->map2D(x, low, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+	  segPtr->p = p;
+	  segPtr->q = q;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&exts, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Top cap
+	  segPtr->p.y = p.y;
+	  segPtr->q.y = p.y;
+	  segPtr->p.x = p.x - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.x = p.x + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&exts, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	  // Bottom cap
+	  segPtr->p.y = q.y;
+	  segPtr->q.y = q.y;
+	  segPtr->p.x = q.x - stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  segPtr->q.x = q.x + stylePtr->errorBarCapWidth;
+	  if (lineRectClip(&exts, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	    segPtr++;
+	    *indexPtr++ = ii;
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+    }
+    yeb_.segments = errorBars;
+    yeb_.length = segPtr - errorBars;
+    yeb_.map = errorToData;
+  }
+}
+
+int LineElement::closestTrace()
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+  ClosestSearch* searchPtr = &gops->search;
+
+  Point2d closest;
+
+  int iClose = -1;
+  double dMin = searchPtr->dist;
+  closest.x = closest.y = 0;
+  for (ChainLink *link=Chain_FirstLink(traces_); link; 
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    bltTrace *tracePtr = (bltTrace*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    for (Point2d *p=tracePtr->screenPts.points, 
+	   *pend=p + (tracePtr->screenPts.length - 1); p<pend; p++) {
+      Point2d b;
+      double d;
+      if (searchPtr->along == SEARCH_X)
+	d = distanceToX(searchPtr->x, searchPtr->y, p, p + 1, &b);
+      else if (searchPtr->along == SEARCH_Y)
+	d = distanceToY(searchPtr->x, searchPtr->y, p, p + 1, &b);
+      else
+	d = distanceToLine(searchPtr->x, searchPtr->y, p, p + 1, &b);
+
+      if (d < dMin) {
+	closest = b;
+	iClose = tracePtr->screenPts.map[p-tracePtr->screenPts.points];
+	dMin = d;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  if (dMin < searchPtr->dist) {
+    searchPtr->dist = dMin;
+    searchPtr->elemPtr = (Element*)this;
+    searchPtr->index = iClose;
+    searchPtr->point = graphPtr_->invMap2D(closest.x, closest.y, 
+					   ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+    return 1;
+  }
+
+  return 0;
+}
+
+void LineElement::closestPoint(ClosestSearch *searchPtr)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+
+  double dMin = searchPtr->dist;
+  int iClose = 0;
+
+  // Instead of testing each data point in graph coordinates, look at the
+  // array of mapped screen coordinates. The advantages are
+  //  1) only examine points that are visible (unclipped), and
+  //  2) the computed distance is already in screen coordinates.
+  int count =0;
+  for (Point2d *pp = symbolPts_.points; count < symbolPts_.length;
+       count++, pp++) {
+    double dx = (double)abs(searchPtr->x - pp->x);
+    double dy = (double)abs(searchPtr->y - pp->y);
+    double d;
+    if (searchPtr->along == SEARCH_BOTH)
+      d = hypot(dx, dy);
+    else if (searchPtr->along == SEARCH_X)
+      d = dx;
+    else if (searchPtr->along == SEARCH_Y)
+      d = dy;
+    else
+      continue;
+
+    if (d < dMin) {
+      iClose = symbolPts_.map[count];
+      dMin = d;
+    }
+  }
+  if (dMin < searchPtr->dist) {
+    searchPtr->elemPtr = (Element*)this;
+    searchPtr->dist = dMin;
+    searchPtr->index = iClose;
+    searchPtr->point.x = ops->coords.x->values_[iClose];
+    searchPtr->point.y = ops->coords.y->values_[iClose];
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawCircle(Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			     LinePen* penPtr, 
+			     int nSymbolPts, Point2d *symbolPts, int radius)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  int count = 0;
+  int s = radius + radius;
+  XArc* arcs = new XArc[nSymbolPts];
+  XArc *ap = arcs;
+  for (Point2d *pp=symbolPts, *pend=pp+nSymbolPts; pp<pend; pp++) {
+    if (DRAW_SYMBOL()) {
+      ap->x = (short)(pp->x - radius);
+      ap->y = (short)(pp->y - radius);
+      ap->width = (short)s;
+      ap->height = (short)s;
+      ap->angle1 = 0;
+      ap->angle2 = 23040;
+      ap++;
+      count++;
+    }
+    symbolCounter_++;
+  }
+
+  for (XArc *ap=arcs, *aend=ap+count; ap<aend; ap++) {
+    if (penOps->symbol.fillGC)
+      XFillArc(display, drawable, penOps->symbol.fillGC, 
+	       ap->x, ap->y, ap->width, ap->height, ap->angle1, ap->angle2);
+
+    if (penOps->symbol.outlineWidth > 0)
+      XDrawArc(display, drawable, penOps->symbol.outlineGC,
+	       ap->x, ap->y, ap->width, ap->height, ap->angle1, ap->angle2);
+  }
+
+  delete [] arcs;
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawSquare(Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			     LinePen* penPtr, 
+			     int nSymbolPts, Point2d *symbolPts, int r)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  int s = r + r;
+  int count =0;
+  Rectangle* rectangles = new Rectangle[nSymbolPts];
+  Rectangle* rp=rectangles;
+  for (Point2d *pp=symbolPts, *pend=pp+nSymbolPts; pp<pend; pp++) {
+    if (DRAW_SYMBOL()) {
+      rp->x = (int)pp->x - r;
+      rp->y = (int)pp->y - r;
+      rp->width = s;
+      rp->height = s;
+      rp++;
+      count++;
+    }
+    symbolCounter_++;
+  }
+
+  for (Rectangle *rp=rectangles, *rend=rp+count; rp<rend; rp ++) {
+    if (penOps->symbol.fillGC)
+      XFillRectangle(display, drawable, penOps->symbol.fillGC,
+		     rp->x, rp->y, rp->width, rp->height);
+
+    if (penOps->symbol.outlineWidth > 0)
+      XDrawRectangle(display, drawable, penOps->symbol.outlineGC,
+		     rp->x, rp->y, rp->width, rp->height);
+  }
+
+  delete [] rectangles;
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawSCross(Display* display, Drawable drawable, 
+			     LinePen* penPtr, 
+			     int nSymbolPts, Point2d* symbolPts, int r2)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  Point pattern[4];
+  if (penOps->symbol.type == SYMBOL_SCROSS) {
+    r2 = (int)(r2 * M_SQRT1_2);
+    pattern[3].y = pattern[2].x = pattern[0].x = pattern[0].y = -r2;
+    pattern[3].x = pattern[2].y = pattern[1].y = pattern[1].x = r2;
+  }
+  else {
+    pattern[0].y = pattern[1].y = pattern[2].x = pattern[3].x = 0;
+    pattern[0].x = pattern[2].y = -r2;
+    pattern[1].x = pattern[3].y = r2;
+  }
+
+  for (Point2d *pp=symbolPts, *endp=pp+nSymbolPts; pp<endp; pp++) {
+    if (DRAW_SYMBOL()) {
+      int rndx = (int)pp->x;
+      int rndy = (int)pp->y;
+      XDrawLine(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penOps->symbol.outlineGC,
+		pattern[0].x + rndx, pattern[0].y + rndy,
+		pattern[1].x + rndx, pattern[1].y + rndy);
+      XDrawLine(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penOps->symbol.outlineGC,
+		pattern[2].x + rndx, pattern[2].y + rndy,
+		pattern[3].x + rndx, pattern[3].y + rndy);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawCross(Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			    LinePen* penPtr, 
+			    int nSymbolPts, Point2d *symbolPts, int r2)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  /*
+   *          2   3       The plus/cross symbol is a closed polygon
+   *                      of 12 points. The diagram to the left
+   *    0,12  1   4    5  represents the positions of the points
+   *           x,y        which are computed below. The extra
+   *     11  10   7    6  (thirteenth) point connects the first and
+   *                      last points.
+   *          9   8
+   */
+  int d = (r2 / 3);
+  Point pattern[13];
+  pattern[0].x = pattern[11].x = pattern[12].x = -r2;
+  pattern[2].x = pattern[1].x = pattern[10].x = pattern[9].x = -d;
+  pattern[3].x = pattern[4].x = pattern[7].x = pattern[8].x = d;
+  pattern[5].x = pattern[6].x = r2;
+  pattern[2].y = pattern[3].y = -r2;
+  pattern[0].y = pattern[1].y = pattern[4].y = pattern[5].y =
+  pattern[12].y = -d;
+  pattern[11].y = pattern[10].y = pattern[7].y = pattern[6].y = d;
+  pattern[9].y = pattern[8].y = r2;
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.type == SYMBOL_CROSS) {
+    // For the cross symbol, rotate the points by 45 degrees
+    for (int ii=0; ii<12; ii++) {
+      double dx = (double)pattern[ii].x * M_SQRT1_2;
+      double dy = (double)pattern[ii].y * M_SQRT1_2;
+      pattern[ii].x = (int)(dx - dy);
+      pattern[ii].y = (int)(dx + dy);
+    }
+    pattern[12] = pattern[0];
+  }
+
+  int count = 0;
+  XPoint* polygon = new XPoint[nSymbolPts*13];
+  XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+  for (Point2d *pp = symbolPts, *endp = pp + nSymbolPts; pp < endp; pp++) {
+    if (DRAW_SYMBOL()) {
+      int rndx = (int)pp->x;
+      int rndy = (int)pp->y;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<13; ii++) {
+	xpp->x = (short)(pattern[ii].x + rndx);
+	xpp->y = (short)(pattern[ii].y + rndy);
+	xpp++;
+      }
+      count++;
+    }
+    symbolCounter_++;
+  }
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.fillGC) {
+    XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<count; ii++, xpp += 13)
+      XFillPolygon(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, 
+		   penOps->symbol.fillGC, xpp, 13, Complex, 
+		   CoordModeOrigin);
+  }
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.outlineWidth > 0) {
+    XPoint*xpp = polygon;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<count; ii++, xpp += 13)
+      XDrawLines(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, 
+		 penOps->symbol.outlineGC, xpp, 13, CoordModeOrigin);
+  }
+
+  delete [] polygon;
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawDiamond(Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			      LinePen* penPtr, 
+			      int nSymbolPts, Point2d *symbolPts, int r1)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  /*
+   *                      The plus symbol is a closed polygon
+   *            1         of 4 points. The diagram to the left
+   *                      represents the positions of the points
+   *       0,4 x,y  2     which are computed below. The extra
+   *                      (fifth) point connects the first and
+   *            3         last points.
+   */
+  Point pattern[5];
+  pattern[1].y = pattern[0].x = -r1;
+  pattern[2].y = pattern[3].x = pattern[0].y = pattern[1].x = 0;
+  pattern[3].y = pattern[2].x = r1;
+  pattern[4] = pattern[0];
+
+  int count = 0;
+  XPoint* polygon = new XPoint[nSymbolPts*5];
+  XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+  for (Point2d *pp = symbolPts, *endp = pp + nSymbolPts; pp < endp; pp++) {
+    if (DRAW_SYMBOL()) {
+      int rndx = (int)pp->x;
+      int rndy = (int)pp->y;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<5; ii++) {
+	xpp->x = (short)(pattern[ii].x + rndx);
+	xpp->y = (short)(pattern[ii].y + rndy);
+	xpp++;
+      }
+      count++;
+    }
+    symbolCounter_++;
+  }
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.fillGC) {
+    XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<count; ii++, xpp += 5)
+      XFillPolygon(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, 
+		   penOps->symbol.fillGC, xpp, 5, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+  }
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.outlineWidth > 0) {
+    XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<count; ii++, xpp += 5)
+      XDrawLines(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, 
+		 penOps->symbol.outlineGC, xpp, 5, CoordModeOrigin);
+  }
+
+  delete [] polygon;
+}
+
+#define B_RATIO		1.3467736870885982
+#define TAN30		0.57735026918962573
+#define COS30		0.86602540378443871
+void LineElement::drawArrow(Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			    LinePen* penPtr, 
+			    int nSymbolPts, Point2d *symbolPts, int size)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  double b = size * B_RATIO * 0.7 * 0.5;
+  short b2 = (short)b;
+  short h2 = (short)(TAN30 * b);
+  short h1 = (short)(b / COS30);
+  /*
+   *                      The triangle symbol is a closed polygon
+   *           0,3         of 3 points. The diagram to the left
+   *                      represents the positions of the points
+   *           x,y        which are computed below. The extra
+   *                      (fourth) point connects the first and
+   *      2           1   last points.
+   */
+
+  Point pattern[4];
+  if (penOps->symbol.type == SYMBOL_ARROW) {
+    pattern[3].x = pattern[0].x = 0;
+    pattern[3].y = pattern[0].y = h1;
+    pattern[1].x = b2;
+    pattern[2].y = pattern[1].y = -h2;
+    pattern[2].x = -b2;
+  } else {
+    pattern[3].x = pattern[0].x = 0;
+    pattern[3].y = pattern[0].y = -h1;
+    pattern[1].x = b2;
+    pattern[2].y = pattern[1].y = h2;
+    pattern[2].x = -b2;
+  }
+
+  int count = 0;
+  XPoint* polygon = new XPoint[nSymbolPts*4];
+  XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+  for (Point2d *pp = symbolPts, *endp = pp + nSymbolPts; pp < endp; pp++) {
+    if (DRAW_SYMBOL()) {
+      int rndx = (int)pp->x;
+      int rndy = (int)pp->y;
+      for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+	xpp->x = (short)(pattern[ii].x + rndx);
+	xpp->y = (short)(pattern[ii].y + rndy);
+	xpp++;
+      }
+      count++;
+    }
+    symbolCounter_++;
+  }
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.fillGC) {
+    XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<count; ii++, xpp += 4)
+      XFillPolygon(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, 
+		   penOps->symbol.fillGC, xpp, 4, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+  }
+
+  if (penOps->symbol.outlineWidth > 0) {
+    XPoint* xpp = polygon;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<count; ii++, xpp += 4)
+      XDrawLines(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, 
+		 penOps->symbol.outlineGC, xpp, 4, CoordModeOrigin);
+  }
+
+  delete [] polygon;
+}
+
+#define S_RATIO		0.886226925452758
+void LineElement::drawSymbols(Drawable drawable, LinePen* penPtr, int size,
+			      int nSymbolPts, Point2d* symbolPts)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* penOps = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  if (size < 3) {
+    if (penOps->symbol.fillGC) {
+      for (Point2d *pp = symbolPts, *endp = pp + nSymbolPts; pp < endp; pp++)
+	XDrawLine(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penOps->symbol.fillGC, 
+		  (int)pp->x, (int)pp->y, (int)pp->x+1, (int)pp->y+1);
+    }
+    return;
+  }
+
+  int r1 = (int)ceil(size * 0.5);
+  int r2 = (int)ceil(size * S_RATIO * 0.5);
+
+  switch (penOps->symbol.type) {
+  case SYMBOL_NONE:
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_SQUARE:
+    drawSquare(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr, nSymbolPts,symbolPts,r2);
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_CIRCLE:
+    drawCircle(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr, nSymbolPts,symbolPts,r1);
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_SPLUS:
+  case SYMBOL_SCROSS:
+    drawSCross(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr, nSymbolPts,symbolPts,r2);
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_PLUS:
+  case SYMBOL_CROSS:
+    drawCross(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr, nSymbolPts,symbolPts,r2);
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_DIAMOND:
+    drawDiamond(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr, nSymbolPts,symbolPts,r1);
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_TRIANGLE:
+  case SYMBOL_ARROW:
+    drawArrow(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr, nSymbolPts,symbolPts,size);
+    break;
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawTraces(Drawable drawable, LinePen* penPtr)
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(traces_); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    bltTrace* tracePtr = (bltTrace*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+
+    int count = tracePtr->screenPts.length; 
+    XPoint* points = new XPoint[count];
+    XPoint*xpp = points;
+    for (int ii=0; ii<count; ii++, xpp++) {
+      xpp->x = (short)tracePtr->screenPts.points[ii].x;
+      xpp->y = (short)tracePtr->screenPts.points[ii].y;
+    }
+    XDrawLines(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, penPtr->traceGC_, points, 
+	       count, CoordModeOrigin);
+    delete [] points;
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::drawValues(Drawable drawable, LinePen* penPtr, 
+			     int length, Point2d *points, int *map)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  LinePenOptions* pops = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2 + 2];
+  const char* fmt = pops->valueFormat;
+  if (fmt == NULL)
+    fmt = "%g";
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &pops->valueStyle);
+
+  double* xval = ops->coords.x->values_;
+  double* yval = ops->coords.y->values_;
+  int count = 0;
+
+  for (Point2d *pp = points, *endp = points + length; pp < endp; pp++) {
+    double x = xval[map[count]];
+    double y = yval[map[count]];
+    count++;
+    if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_X)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_Y)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_BOTH) {
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x);
+      strcat(string, ",");
+      snprintf(string + strlen(string), TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y);
+    }
+
+    ts.drawText(drawable, string, pp->x, pp->y);
+  } 
+}
+
+void LineElement::printSymbols(PSOutput* psPtr, LinePen* penPtr, int size,
+			       int nSymbolPts, Point2d *symbolPts)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* pops = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  double symbolSize;
+
+  // Set line and foreground attributes
+  XColor* fillColor = pops->symbol.fillColor;
+  if (!fillColor)
+    fillColor = pops->traceColor;
+
+  XColor* outlineColor = pops->symbol.outlineColor;
+  if (!outlineColor)
+    outlineColor = pops->traceColor;
+
+  if (pops->symbol.type == SYMBOL_NONE)
+    psPtr->setLineAttributes(pops->traceColor, pops->traceWidth + 2,
+			     &pops->traceDashes, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+  else {
+    psPtr->setLineWidth(pops->symbol.outlineWidth);
+    psPtr->setDashes(NULL);
+  }
+
+  // build DrawSymbolProc
+  psPtr->append("\n/DrawSymbolProc {\n");
+  switch (pops->symbol.type) {
+  case SYMBOL_NONE:
+    break;
+  default:
+    psPtr->append("  ");
+    psPtr->setBackground(fillColor);
+    psPtr->append("  gsave fill grestore\n");
+
+    if (pops->symbol.outlineWidth > 0) {
+      psPtr->append("  ");
+      psPtr->setForeground(outlineColor);
+      psPtr->append("  stroke\n");
+    }
+    break;
+  }
+  psPtr->append("} def\n\n");
+
+  // set size
+  symbolSize = (double)size;
+  switch (pops->symbol.type) {
+  case SYMBOL_SQUARE:
+  case SYMBOL_CROSS:
+  case SYMBOL_PLUS:
+  case SYMBOL_SCROSS:
+  case SYMBOL_SPLUS:
+    symbolSize = (double)size * S_RATIO;
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_TRIANGLE:
+  case SYMBOL_ARROW:
+    symbolSize = (double)size * 0.7;
+    break;
+  case SYMBOL_DIAMOND:
+    symbolSize = (double)size * M_SQRT1_2;
+    break;
+
+  default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  int count =0;
+  for (Point2d *pp=symbolPts, *endp=symbolPts + nSymbolPts; pp < endp; pp++) {
+    if (DRAW_SYMBOL()) {
+      psPtr->format("%g %g %g %s\n", pp->x, pp->y, symbolSize, 
+		    symbolMacros[pops->symbol.type]);
+      count++;
+    }
+    symbolCounter_++;
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::setLineAttributes(PSOutput* psPtr, LinePen* penPtr)
+{
+  LinePenOptions* pops = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  psPtr->setLineAttributes(pops->traceColor, pops->traceWidth, 
+			   &pops->traceDashes, CapButt, JoinMiter);
+
+  if ((LineIsDashed(pops->traceDashes)) && 
+      (pops->traceOffColor)) {
+    psPtr->append("/DashesProc {\n  gsave\n    ");
+    psPtr->setBackground(pops->traceOffColor);
+    psPtr->append("    ");
+    psPtr->setDashes(NULL);
+    psPtr->append("stroke\n  grestore\n} def\n");
+  } else {
+    psPtr->append("/DashesProc {} def\n");
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::printTraces(PSOutput* psPtr, LinePen* penPtr)
+{
+  setLineAttributes(psPtr, penPtr);
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(traces_); link; 
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    bltTrace *tracePtr = (bltTrace*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    if (tracePtr->screenPts.length > 0) {
+      psPtr->append("% start trace\n");
+      psPtr->printMaxPolyline(tracePtr->screenPts.points, 
+			     tracePtr->screenPts.length);
+      psPtr->append("% end trace\n");
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void LineElement::printValues(PSOutput* psPtr, LinePen* penPtr, 
+			      int nSymbolPts, Point2d *symbolPts, 
+			      int *pointToData)
+{
+  LineElementOptions* ops = (LineElementOptions*)ops_;
+  LinePenOptions* pops = (LinePenOptions*)penPtr->ops();
+
+  const char* fmt = pops->valueFormat;
+  if (fmt == NULL)
+    fmt = "%g";
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &pops->valueStyle);
+
+  int count = 0;
+  for (Point2d *pp=symbolPts, *endp=symbolPts + nSymbolPts; pp < endp; pp++) {
+    double x = ops->coords.x->values_[pointToData[count]];
+    double y = ops->coords.y->values_[pointToData[count]];
+    count++;
+
+    char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2 + 2];
+    if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_X)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_Y)
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y); 
+    else if (pops->valueShow == SHOW_BOTH) {
+      snprintf(string, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, x);
+      strcat(string, ",");
+      snprintf(string + strlen(string), TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, fmt, y);
+    }
+
+    ts.printText(psPtr, string, pp->x, pp->y);
+  } 
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLine.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLine.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f937615
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLine.h
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrElemLine_h__
+#define __BltGrElemLine_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenLine.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Point2d *screenPts;
+    int nScreenPts;
+    int *styleMap;
+    int *map;
+  } MapInfo;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Point2d *points;
+    int length;
+    int *map;
+  } GraphPoints;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int start;
+    GraphPoints screenPts;
+  } bltTrace;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Weight weight;
+    LinePen* penPtr;
+    GraphPoints symbolPts;
+    GraphSegments xeb;
+    GraphSegments yeb;
+    int symbolSize;
+    int errorBarCapWidth;
+  } LineStyle;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    const char* label;
+    char** tags;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    ElemCoords coords;
+    ElemValues* w;
+    ElemValues* xError;
+    ElemValues* yError;
+    ElemValues* xHigh;
+    ElemValues* xLow;
+    ElemValues* yHigh;
+    ElemValues* yLow;
+    int hide;
+    int legendRelief;
+    Chain* stylePalette;
+    LinePen *builtinPenPtr;
+    LinePen *activePenPtr;
+    LinePen *normalPenPtr;
+    LinePenOptions builtinPen;
+
+    // derived
+    Tk_3DBorder fillBg;
+    int reqMaxSymbols;
+    double rTolerance;
+    int scaleSymbols;
+    int reqSmooth;
+    int penDir;
+  } LineElementOptions;
+
+  class LineElement : public Element {
+  public:
+    enum PenDirection {INCREASING, DECREASING, BOTH_DIRECTIONS};
+    enum Smoothing {LINEAR, STEP, CUBIC, QUADRATIC, CATROM};
+
+  protected:
+    LinePen* builtinPenPtr;
+    Smoothing smooth_;
+    Point2d *fillPts_;
+    int nFillPts_;
+    GraphPoints symbolPts_;
+    GraphPoints activePts_;
+    GraphSegments xeb_;
+    GraphSegments yeb_;
+    int symbolInterval_;
+    int symbolCounter_;
+    Chain* traces_;
+
+    void drawCircle(Display*, Drawable, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    void drawSquare(Display*, Drawable, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    void drawSCross(Display*, Drawable, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    void drawCross(Display*, Drawable, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    void drawDiamond(Display*, Drawable, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    void drawArrow(Display*, Drawable, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int);
+
+  protected:
+    int scaleSymbol(int);
+    void getScreenPoints(MapInfo*);
+    void reducePoints(MapInfo*, double);
+    void generateSteps(MapInfo*);
+    void generateSpline(MapInfo*);
+    void generateParametricSpline(MapInfo*);
+    void mapSymbols(MapInfo*);
+    void mapActiveSymbols();
+    void mergePens(LineStyle**);
+    int outCode(Region2d*, Point2d*);
+    int clipSegment(Region2d*, int, int, Point2d*, Point2d*);
+    void saveTrace(int, int, MapInfo*);
+    void freeTraces();
+    void mapTraces(MapInfo*);
+    void mapFillArea(MapInfo*);
+    void mapErrorBars(LineStyle**);
+    void reset();
+    int closestTrace();
+    void closestPoint(ClosestSearch*);
+    void drawSymbols(Drawable, LinePen*, int, int, Point2d*);
+    void drawTraces(Drawable, LinePen*);
+    void drawValues(Drawable, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int*);
+    void setLineAttributes(PSOutput*, LinePen*);
+    void printTraces(PSOutput*, LinePen*);
+    void printValues(PSOutput*, LinePen*, int, Point2d*, int*);
+    void printSymbols(PSOutput*, LinePen*, int, int, Point2d*);
+    double distanceToLine(int, int, Point2d*, Point2d*, Point2d*);
+    double distanceToX(int, int, Point2d*, Point2d*, Point2d*);
+    double distanceToY(int, int, Point2d*, Point2d*, Point2d*);
+    int simplify(Point2d*, int, int, double, int*);
+    double findSplit(Point2d*, int, int, int*);
+
+    int naturalSpline(Point2d*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    int quadraticSpline(Point2d*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    int naturalParametricSpline(Point2d*, int, Region2d*, int, Point2d*, int);
+    int catromParametricSpline(Point2d*, int, Point2d*, int);
+
+  public:
+    LineElement(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~LineElement();
+
+    ClassId classId() {return CID_ELEM_LINE;}
+    const char* className() {return "LineElement";}
+    const char* typeName() {return "line";}
+
+    int configure();
+    void map();
+    void extents(Region2d*);
+    void closest();
+    void draw(Drawable);
+    void drawActive(Drawable);
+    void drawSymbol(Drawable, int, int, int);
+    void print(PSOutput*);
+    void printActive(PSOutput*);
+    void printSymbol(PSOutput*, double, double, int);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLineSpline.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLineSpline.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9224d53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemLineSpline.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1086 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 2009 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGrElemLine.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+typedef double TriDiagonalMatrix[3];
+typedef struct {
+  double b, c, d;
+} Cubic2D;
+
+typedef struct {
+  double b, c, d, e, f;
+} Quint2D;
+
+// Quadratic spline parameters
+#define E1	param[0]
+#define E2	param[1]
+#define V1	param[2]
+#define V2	param[3]
+#define W1	param[4]
+#define W2	param[5]
+#define Z1	param[6]
+#define Z2	param[7]
+#define Y1	param[8]
+#define Y2	param[9]
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Search --
+ *
+ *	Conducts a binary search for a value.  This routine is called
+ *	only if key is between x(0) and x(len - 1).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the index of the largest value in xtab for which
+ *	x[i] < key.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static int Search(Point2d points[], int nPoints, double key, int *foundPtr)
+{
+  int low = 0;
+  int high = nPoints - 1;
+
+  while (high >= low) {
+    int mid = (high + low) / 2;
+    if (key > points[mid].x)
+      low = mid + 1;
+    else if (key < points[mid].x)
+      high = mid - 1;
+    else {
+      *foundPtr = 1;
+      return mid;
+    }
+  }
+  *foundPtr = 0;
+  return low;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * QuadChoose --
+ *
+ *	Determines the case needed for the computation of the parame-
+ *	ters of the quadratic spline.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ * 	Returns a case number (1-4) which controls how the parameters
+ * 	of the quadratic spline are evaluated.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static int QuadChoose(Point2d* p, Point2d* q, double m1, double m2, 
+		      double epsilon)
+{
+  // Calculate the slope of the line joining P and Q
+  double slope = (q->y - p->y) / (q->x - p->x);
+
+  if (slope != 0.0) {
+    double prod1 = slope * m1;
+    double prod2 = slope * m2;
+
+    // Find the absolute values of the slopes slope, m1, and m2
+    double mref = fabs(slope);
+    double mref1 = fabs(m1);
+    double mref2 = fabs(m2);
+
+    // If the relative deviation of m1 or m2 from slope is less than
+    // epsilon, then choose case 2 or case 3.
+    double relerr = epsilon * mref;
+    if ((fabs(slope - m1) > relerr) && (fabs(slope - m2) > relerr) &&
+	(prod1 >= 0.0) && (prod2 >= 0.0)) {
+      double prod = (mref - mref1) * (mref - mref2);
+      if (prod < 0.0) {
+	// l1, the line through (x1,y1) with slope m1, and l2,
+	// the line through (x2,y2) with slope m2, intersect
+	// at a point whose abscissa is between x1 and x2.
+	// The abscissa becomes a knot of the spline.
+	return 1;
+      }
+      if (mref1 > (mref * 2.0)) {
+	if (mref2 <= ((2.0 - epsilon) * mref))
+	  return 3;
+      }
+      else if (mref2 <= (mref * 2.0)) {
+	// Both l1 and l2 cross the line through
+	// (x1+x2)/2.0,y1 and (x1+x2)/2.0,y2, which is the
+	// midline of the rectangle formed by P and Q or both
+	// m1 and m2 have signs different than the sign of
+	// slope, or one of m1 and m2 has opposite sign from
+	// slope and l1 and l2 intersect to the left of x1 or
+	// to the right of x2.  The point (x1+x2)/2. is a knot
+	// of the spline.
+	return 2;
+      }
+      else if (mref1 <= ((2.0 - epsilon) * mref)) {
+	// In cases 3 and 4, sign(m1)=sign(m2)=sign(slope).
+	// Either l1 or l2 crosses the midline, but not both.
+	// Choose case 4 if mref1 is greater than
+	// (2.-epsilon)*mref; otherwise, choose case 3.
+	return 3;
+      }
+      // If neither l1 nor l2 crosses the midline, the spline
+      // requires two knots between x1 and x2.
+      return 4;
+    }
+    else {
+      // The sign of at least one of the slopes m1 or m2 does not
+      // agree with the sign of *slope*.
+      if ((prod1 < 0.0) && (prod2 < 0.0)) {
+	return 2;
+      }
+      else if (prod1 < 0.0) {
+	if (mref2 > ((epsilon + 1.0) * mref))
+	  return 1;
+	else
+	  return 2;
+      }
+      else if (mref1 > ((epsilon + 1.0) * mref))
+	return 1;
+      else
+	return 2;
+    }
+  }
+  else if ((m1 * m2) >= 0.0)
+    return 2;
+  else
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *	Computes the knots and other parameters of the spline on the
+ *	interval PQ.
+ * On input--
+ *	P and Q are the coordinates of the points of interpolation.
+ *	m1 is the slope at P.
+ *	m2 is the slope at Q.
+ *	ncase controls the number and location of the knots.
+ * On output--
+ *
+ *	(v1,v2),(w1,w2),(z1,z2), and (e1,e2) are the coordinates of
+ *	the knots and other parameters of the spline on P.
+ *	(e1,e2) and Q are used only if ncase=4.
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static void QuadCases(Point2d* p, Point2d* q, double m1, double m2, 
+		      double param[], int which)
+{
+  if ((which == 3) || (which == 4)) {
+    double c1 = p->x + (q->y - p->y) / m1;
+    double d1 = q->x + (p->y - q->y) / m2;
+    double h1 = c1 * 2.0 - p->x;
+    double j1 = d1 * 2.0 - q->x;
+    double mbar1 = (q->y - p->y) / (h1 - p->x);
+    double mbar2 = (p->y - q->y) / (j1 - q->x);
+
+    if (which == 4) {
+      // Case 4
+      Y1 = (p->x + c1) / 2.0;
+      V1 = (p->x + Y1) / 2.0;
+      V2 = m1 * (V1 - p->x) + p->y;
+      Z1 = (d1 + q->x) / 2.0;
+      W1 = (q->x + Z1) / 2.0;
+      W2 = m2 * (W1 - q->x) + q->y;
+      double mbar3 = (W2 - V2) / (W1 - V1);
+      Y2 = mbar3 * (Y1 - V1) + V2;
+      Z2 = mbar3 * (Z1 - V1) + V2;
+      E1 = (Y1 + Z1) / 2.0;
+      E2 = mbar3 * (E1 - V1) + V2;
+    }
+    else {
+      // Case 3
+      double k1 = (p->y - q->y + q->x * mbar2 - p->x * mbar1) / (mbar2 - mbar1);
+      if (fabs(m1) > fabs(m2)) {
+	Z1 = (k1 + p->x) / 2.0;
+      } else {
+	Z1 = (k1 + q->x) / 2.0;
+      }
+      V1 = (p->x + Z1) / 2.0;
+      V2 = p->y + m1 * (V1 - p->x);
+      W1 = (q->x + Z1) / 2.0;
+      W2 = q->y + m2 * (W1 - q->x);
+      Z2 = V2 + (W2 - V2) / (W1 - V1) * (Z1 - V1);
+    }
+  }
+  else if (which == 2) {
+    // Case 2
+    Z1 = (p->x + q->x) / 2.0;
+    V1 = (p->x + Z1) / 2.0;
+    V2 = p->y + m1 * (V1 - p->x);
+    W1 = (Z1 + q->x) / 2.0;
+    W2 = q->y + m2 * (W1 - q->x);
+    Z2 = (V2 + W2) / 2.0;
+  }
+  else {
+    // Case 1
+    Z1 = (p->y - q->y + m2 * q->x - m1 * p->x) / (m2 - m1);
+    double ztwo = p->y + m1 * (Z1 - p->x);
+    V1 = (p->x + Z1) / 2.0;
+    V2 = (p->y + ztwo) / 2.0;
+    W1 = (Z1 + q->x) / 2.0;
+    W2 = (ztwo + q->y) / 2.0;
+    Z2 = V2 + (W2 - V2) / (W1 - V1) * (Z1 - V1);
+  }
+}
+
+static int QuadSelect(Point2d* p, Point2d* q, double m1, double m2, 
+		      double epsilon, double param[])
+{
+  int ncase = QuadChoose(p, q, m1, m2, epsilon);
+  QuadCases(p, q, m1, m2, param, ncase);
+  return ncase;
+}
+
+static double QuadGetImage(double p1, double p2, double p3, double x1, 
+			   double x2, double x3)
+{
+  double A = x1 - x2;
+  double B = x2 - x3;
+  double C = x1 - x3;
+
+  double y = (p1 * (A * A) + p2 * 2.0 * B * A + p3 * (B * B)) / (C * C);
+  return y;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *	Finds the image of a point in x.
+ *	On input
+ *	x	Contains the value at which the spline is evaluated.
+ *	leftX, leftY
+ *		Coordinates of the left-hand data point used in the
+ *		evaluation of x values.
+ *	rightX, rightY
+ *		Coordinates of the right-hand data point used in the
+ *		evaluation of x values.
+ *	Z1, Z2, Y1, Y2, E2, W2, V2
+ *		Parameters of the spline.
+ *	ncase	Controls the evaluation of the spline by indicating
+ *		whether one or two knots were placed in the interval
+ *		(xtabs,xtabs1).
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static void QuadSpline(Point2d* intp, Point2d* left, Point2d* right,
+		       double param[], int ncase)
+
+{
+  double y;
+
+  if (ncase == 4) {
+    // Case 4:  More than one knot was placed in the interval.
+    // Determine the location of data point relative to the 1st knot.
+    if (Y1 > intp->x)
+      y = QuadGetImage(left->y, V2, Y2, Y1, intp->x, left->x);
+    else if (Y1 < intp->x) {
+      // Determine the location of the data point relative to the 2nd knot.
+      if (Z1 > intp->x)
+	y = QuadGetImage(Y2, E2, Z2, Z1, intp->x, Y1);
+      else if (Z1 < intp->x)
+	y = QuadGetImage(Z2, W2, right->y, right->x, intp->x, Z1);
+      else
+	y = Z2;
+    }
+    else
+      y = Y2;
+  }
+  else {
+    // Cases 1, 2, or 3:
+    // Determine the location of the data point relative to the knot.
+    if (Z1 < intp->x)
+      y = QuadGetImage(Z2, W2, right->y, right->x, intp->x, Z1);
+    else if (Z1 > intp->x)
+      y = QuadGetImage(left->y, V2, Z2, Z1, intp->x, left->x);
+    else
+      y = Z2;
+  }
+
+  intp->y = y;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * 	Calculates the derivative at each of the data points.  The
+ * 	slopes computed will insure that an osculatory quadratic
+ * 	spline will have one additional knot between two adjacent
+ * 	points of interpolation.  Convexity and monotonicity are
+ * 	preserved wherever these conditions are compatible with the
+ * 	data.
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static void QuadSlopes(Point2d *points, double *m, int nPoints)
+{
+  double m1s =0;
+  double m2s =0;
+  double m1 =0;
+  double m2 =0;
+  int i, n, l;
+  for (l = 0, i = 1, n = 2; i < (nPoints - 1); l++, i++, n++) {
+    // Calculate the slopes of the two lines joining three
+    // consecutive data points.
+    double ydif1 = points[i].y - points[l].y;
+    double ydif2 = points[n].y - points[i].y;
+    m1 = ydif1 / (points[i].x - points[l].x);
+    m2 = ydif2 / (points[n].x - points[i].x);
+    if (i == 1) {
+      // Save slopes of starting point
+      m1s = m1;
+      m2s = m2;
+    }
+    // If one of the preceding slopes is zero or if they have opposite
+    // sign, assign the value zero to the derivative at the middle point.
+    if ((m1 == 0.0) || (m2 == 0.0) || ((m1 * m2) <= 0.0))
+      m[i] = 0.0;
+    else if (fabs(m1) > fabs(m2)) {
+      // Calculate the slope by extending the line with slope m1.
+      double xbar = ydif2 / m1 + points[i].x;
+      double xhat = (xbar + points[n].x) / 2.0;
+      m[i] = ydif2 / (xhat - points[i].x);
+    }
+    else {
+      // Calculate the slope by extending the line with slope m2.
+      double xbar = -ydif1 / m2 + points[i].x;
+      double xhat = (points[l].x + xbar) / 2.0;
+      m[i] = ydif1 / (points[i].x - xhat);
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Calculate the slope at the last point, x(n).
+  i = nPoints - 2;
+  n = nPoints - 1;
+  if ((m1 * m2) < 0.0)
+    m[n] = m2 * 2.0;
+  else {
+    double xmid = (points[i].x + points[n].x) / 2.0;
+    double yxmid = m[i] * (xmid - points[i].x) + points[i].y;
+    m[n] = (points[n].y - yxmid) / (points[n].x - xmid);
+    if ((m[n] * m2) < 0.0)
+      m[n] = 0.0;
+  }
+
+  // Calculate the slope at the first point, x(0).
+  if ((m1s * m2s) < 0.0)
+    m[0] = m1s * 2.0;
+  else {
+    double xmid = (points[0].x + points[1].x) / 2.0;
+    double yxmid = m[1] * (xmid - points[1].x) + points[1].y;
+    m[0] = (yxmid - points[0].y) / (xmid - points[0].x);
+    if ((m[0] * m1s) < 0.0)
+      m[0] = 0.0;
+  }
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * QuadEval --
+ *
+ * 	QuadEval controls the evaluation of an osculatory quadratic
+ * 	spline.  The user may provide his own slopes at the points of
+ * 	interpolation or use the subroutine 'QuadSlopes' to calculate
+ * 	slopes which are consistent with the shape of the data.
+ *
+ * ON INPUT--
+ *   	intpPts	must be a nondecreasing vector of points at which the
+ *		spline will be evaluated.
+ *   	origPts	contains the abscissas of the data points to be
+ *		interpolated. xtab must be increasing.
+ *   	y	contains the ordinates of the data points to be
+ *		interpolated.
+ *   	m 	contains the slope of the spline at each point of
+ *		interpolation.
+ *   	nPoints	number of data points (dimension of xtab and y).
+ *   	numEval is the number of points of evaluation (dimension of
+ *		xval and yval).
+ *   	epsilon 	is a relative error tolerance used in subroutine
+ *		'QuadChoose' to distinguish the situation m(i) or
+ *		m(i+1) is relatively close to the slope or twice
+ *		the slope of the linear segment between xtab(i) and
+ *		xtab(i+1).  If this situation occurs, roundoff may
+ *		cause a change in convexity or monotonicity of the
+ *   		resulting spline and a change in the case number
+ *		provided by 'QuadChoose'.  If epsilon is not equal to zero,
+ *		then epsilon should be greater than or equal to machine
+ *		epsilon.
+ * ON OUTPUT--
+ * 	yval 	contains the images of the points in xval.
+ *   	err 	is one of the following error codes:
+ *      	0 - QuadEval ran normally.
+ *      	1 - xval(i) is less than xtab(1) for at least one
+ *		    i or xval(i) is greater than xtab(num) for at
+ *		    least one i. QuadEval will extrapolate to provide
+ *		    function values for these abscissas.
+ *      	2 - xval(i+1) < xval(i) for some i.
+ *
+ *
+ *  QuadEval calls the following subroutines or functions:
+ *      Search
+ *      QuadCases
+ *      QuadChoose
+ *      QuadSpline
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static int QuadEval(Point2d origPts[], int nOrigPts, Point2d intpPts[],
+		    int nIntpPts, double *m, double epsilon)
+{
+  double param[10];
+
+  // Initialize indices and set error result
+  int error = 0;
+  int l = nOrigPts - 1;
+  int p = l - 1;
+  int ncase = 1;
+
+  // Determine if abscissas of new vector are non-decreasing.
+  for (int jj=1; jj<nIntpPts; jj++) {
+    if (intpPts[jj].x < intpPts[jj - 1].x)
+      return 2;
+  }
+  // Determine if any of the points in xval are LESS than the
+  // abscissa of the first data point.
+  int start;
+  for (start = 0; start < nIntpPts; start++) {
+    if (intpPts[start].x >= origPts[0].x)
+      break;
+  }
+  // Determine if any of the points in xval are GREATER than the
+  // abscissa of the l data point.
+  int end;
+  for (end = nIntpPts - 1; end >= 0; end--) {
+    if (intpPts[end].x <= origPts[l].x)
+      break;
+  }
+
+  if (start > 0) {
+    // Set error value to indicate that extrapolation has occurred
+    error = 1;
+
+    // Calculate the images of points of evaluation whose abscissas
+    // are less than the abscissa of the first data point.
+    ncase = QuadSelect(origPts, origPts + 1, m[0], m[1], epsilon, param);
+    for (int jj=0; jj<(start - 1); jj++)
+      QuadSpline(intpPts + jj, origPts, origPts + 1, param, ncase);
+    if (nIntpPts == 1)
+      return error;
+  }
+  int ii;
+  int nn;
+  if ((nIntpPts == 1) && (end != (nIntpPts - 1)))
+    goto noExtrapolation;
+    
+  // Search locates the interval in which the first in-range
+  // point of evaluation lies.
+  int found;
+  ii = Search(origPts, nOrigPts, intpPts[start].x, &found);
+    
+  nn = ii + 1;
+  if (nn >= nOrigPts) {
+    nn = nOrigPts - 1;
+    ii = nOrigPts - 2;
+  }
+  /*
+   * If the first in-range point of evaluation is equal to one
+   * of the data points, assign the appropriate value from y.
+   * Continue until a point of evaluation is found which is not
+   * equal to a data point.
+   */
+  if (found) {
+    do {
+      intpPts[start].y = origPts[ii].y;
+      start++;
+      if (start >= nIntpPts) {
+	return error;
+      }
+    } while (intpPts[start - 1].x == intpPts[start].x);
+	
+    for (;;) {
+      if (intpPts[start].x < origPts[nn].x) {
+	break;	/* Break out of for-loop */
+      }
+      if (intpPts[start].x == origPts[nn].x) {
+	do {
+	  intpPts[start].y = origPts[nn].y;
+	  start++;
+	  if (start >= nIntpPts) {
+	    return error;
+	  }
+	} while (intpPts[start].x == intpPts[start - 1].x);
+      }
+      ii++;
+      nn++;
+    }
+  }
+  /*
+   * Calculate the images of all the points which lie within
+   * range of the data.
+   */
+  if ((ii > 0) || (error != 1))
+    ncase = QuadSelect(origPts+ii, origPts+nn, m[ii], m[nn], epsilon, param);
+
+  for (int jj=start; jj<=end; jj++) {
+    // If xx(j) - x(n) is negative, do not recalculate
+    // the parameters for this section of the spline since
+    // they are already known.
+    if (intpPts[jj].x == origPts[nn].x) {
+      intpPts[jj].y = origPts[nn].y;
+      continue;
+    }
+    else if (intpPts[jj].x > origPts[nn].x) {
+      double delta;
+	    
+      // Determine that the routine is in the correct part of the spline
+      do {
+	ii++;
+	nn++;
+	delta = intpPts[jj].x - origPts[nn].x;
+      } while (delta > 0.0);
+	    
+      if (delta < 0.0)
+	ncase = QuadSelect(origPts+ii, origPts+nn, m[ii], m[nn], 
+			   epsilon, param);
+      else if (delta == 0.0) {
+	intpPts[jj].y = origPts[nn].y;
+	continue;
+      }
+    }
+    QuadSpline(intpPts+jj, origPts+ii, origPts+nn, param, ncase);
+  }
+    
+  if (end == (nIntpPts - 1))
+    return error;
+
+  if ((nn == l) && (intpPts[end].x != origPts[l].x))
+    goto noExtrapolation;
+
+  // Set error value to indicate that extrapolation has occurred
+  error = 1;
+  ncase = QuadSelect(origPts + p, origPts + l, m[p], m[l], epsilon, param);
+
+ noExtrapolation:
+  // Calculate the images of the points of evaluation whose
+  // abscissas are greater than the abscissa of the last data point.
+  for (int jj=(end + 1); jj<nIntpPts; jj++)
+    QuadSpline(intpPts + jj, origPts + p, origPts + l, param, ncase);
+
+  return error;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ *		  Shape preserving quadratic splines
+ *		   by D.F.Mcallister & J.A.Roulier
+ *		    Coded by S.L.Dodd & M.Roulier
+ *			 N.C.State University
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+/*
+ * Driver routine for quadratic spline package
+ * On input--
+ *   X,Y    Contain n-long arrays of data (x is increasing)
+ *   XM     Contains m-long array of x values (increasing)
+ *   eps    Relative error tolerance
+ *   n      Number of input data points
+ *   m      Number of output data points
+ * On output--
+ *   work   Contains the value of the first derivative at each data point
+ *   ym     Contains the interpolated spline value at each data point
+ */
+int LineElement::quadraticSpline(Point2d *origPts, int nOrigPts, 
+				 Point2d *intpPts, int nIntpPts)
+{
+  double* work = new double[nOrigPts];
+  double epsilon = 0.0;
+  /* allocate space for vectors used in calculation */
+  QuadSlopes(origPts, work, nOrigPts);
+  int result = QuadEval(origPts, nOrigPts, intpPts, nIntpPts, work, epsilon);
+  delete [] work;
+  if (result > 1) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Reference:
+ *	Numerical Analysis, R. Burden, J. Faires and A. Reynolds.
+ *	Prindle, Weber & Schmidt 1981 pp 112
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+int LineElement::naturalSpline(Point2d *origPts, int nOrigPts, 
+			       Point2d *intpPts, int nIntpPts)
+{
+  Point2d *ip, *iend;
+  double x, dy, alpha;
+  int isKnot;
+  int i, j, n;
+
+  double* dx = new double[nOrigPts];
+  /* Calculate vector of differences */
+  for (i = 0, j = 1; j < nOrigPts; i++, j++) {
+    dx[i] = origPts[j].x - origPts[i].x;
+    if (dx[i] < 0.0) {
+      return 0;
+    }
+  }
+  n = nOrigPts - 1;		/* Number of intervals. */
+  TriDiagonalMatrix* A = new TriDiagonalMatrix[nOrigPts];
+  if (!A) {
+    delete [] dx;
+    return 0;
+  }
+  /* Vectors to solve the tridiagonal matrix */
+  A[0][0] = A[n][0] = 1.0;
+  A[0][1] = A[n][1] = 0.0;
+  A[0][2] = A[n][2] = 0.0;
+
+  /* Calculate the intermediate results */
+  for (i = 0, j = 1; j < n; j++, i++) {
+    alpha = 3.0 * ((origPts[j + 1].y / dx[j]) - (origPts[j].y / dx[i]) - 
+		   (origPts[j].y / dx[j]) + (origPts[i].y / dx[i]));
+    A[j][0] = 2 * (dx[j] + dx[i]) - dx[i] * A[i][1];
+    A[j][1] = dx[j] / A[j][0];
+    A[j][2] = (alpha - dx[i] * A[i][2]) / A[j][0];
+  }
+
+  Cubic2D* eq = new Cubic2D[nOrigPts];
+  if (!eq) {
+    delete [] A;
+    delete [] dx;
+    return 0;
+  }
+  eq[0].c = eq[n].c = 0.0;
+  for (j = n, i = n - 1; i >= 0; i--, j--) {
+    eq[i].c = A[i][2] - A[i][1] * eq[j].c;
+    dy = origPts[i+1].y - origPts[i].y;
+    eq[i].b = (dy) / dx[i] - dx[i] * (eq[j].c + 2.0 * eq[i].c) / 3.0;
+    eq[i].d = (eq[j].c - eq[i].c) / (3.0 * dx[i]);
+  }
+  delete [] A;
+  delete [] dx;
+
+  /* Now calculate the new values */
+  for (ip = intpPts, iend = ip + nIntpPts; ip < iend; ip++) {
+    ip->y = 0.0;
+    x = ip->x;
+
+    /* Is it outside the interval? */
+    if ((x < origPts[0].x) || (x > origPts[n].x)) {
+      continue;
+    }
+    /* Search for the interval containing x in the point array */
+    i = Search(origPts, nOrigPts, x, &isKnot);
+    if (isKnot) {
+      ip->y = origPts[i].y;
+    } else {
+      i--;
+      x -= origPts[i].x;
+      ip->y = origPts[i].y + x * (eq[i].b + x * (eq[i].c + x * eq[i].d));
+    }
+  }
+  delete [] eq;
+  return 1;
+}
+
+typedef struct {
+  double t;			/* Arc length of interval. */
+  double x;			/* 2nd derivative of X with respect to T */
+  double y;			/* 2nd derivative of Y with respect to T */
+} CubicSpline;
+
+/*
+ * The following two procedures solve the special linear system which arise
+ * in cubic spline interpolation. If x is assumed cyclic ( x[i]=x[n+i] ) the
+ * equations can be written as (i=0,1,...,n-1):
+ *     m[i][0] * x[i-1] + m[i][1] * x[i] + m[i][2] * x[i+1] = b[i] .
+ * In matrix notation one gets A * x = b, where the matrix A is tridiagonal
+ * with additional elements in the upper right and lower left position:
+ *   A[i][0] = A_{i,i-1}  for i=1,2,...,n-1    and    m[0][0] = A_{0,n-1} ,
+ *   A[i][1] = A_{i, i }  for i=0,1,...,n-1
+ *   A[i][2] = A_{i,i+1}  for i=0,1,...,n-2    and    m[n-1][2] = A_{n-1,0}.
+ * A should be symmetric (A[i+1][0] == A[i][2]) and positive definite.
+ * The size of the system is given in n (n>=1).
+ *
+ * In the first procedure the Cholesky decomposition A = C^T * D * C
+ * (C is upper triangle with unit diagonal, D is diagonal) is calculated.
+ * Return TRUE if decomposition exist.
+ */
+static int SolveCubic1(TriDiagonalMatrix A[], int n)
+{
+  int i;
+  double m_ij, m_n, m_nn, d;
+
+  if (n < 1) {
+    return 0;		/* Dimension should be at least 1 */
+  }
+  d = A[0][1];		/* D_{0,0} = A_{0,0} */
+  if (d <= 0.0) {
+    return 0;		/* A (or D) should be positive definite */
+  }
+  m_n = A[0][0];		/*  A_{0,n-1}  */
+  m_nn = A[n - 1][1];		/* A_{n-1,n-1} */
+  for (i = 0; i < n - 2; i++) {
+    m_ij = A[i][2];		/*  A_{i,1}  */
+    A[i][2] = m_ij / d;	/* C_{i,i+1} */
+    A[i][0] = m_n / d;	/* C_{i,n-1} */
+    m_nn -= A[i][0] * m_n;	/* to get C_{n-1,n-1} */
+    m_n = -A[i][2] * m_n;	/* to get C_{i+1,n-1} */
+    d = A[i + 1][1] - A[i][2] * m_ij;	/* D_{i+1,i+1} */
+    if (d <= 0.0) {
+      return 0;	/* Elements of D should be positive */
+    }
+    A[i + 1][1] = d;
+  }
+  if (n >= 2) {		/* Complete last column */
+    m_n += A[n - 2][2];	/* add A_{n-2,n-1} */
+    A[n - 2][0] = m_n / d;	/* C_{n-2,n-1} */
+    A[n - 1][1] = d = m_nn - A[n - 2][0] * m_n;	/* D_{n-1,n-1} */
+    if (d <= 0.0) {
+      return 0;
+    }
+  }
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ * The second procedure solves the linear system, with the Cholesky
+ * decomposition calculated above (in m[][]) and the right side b given
+ * in x[]. The solution x overwrites the right side in x[].
+ */
+static void SolveCubic2(TriDiagonalMatrix A[], CubicSpline spline[], 
+			int nIntervals)
+{
+  int n = nIntervals - 2;
+  int m = nIntervals - 1;
+
+  // Division by transpose of C : b = C^{-T} * b 
+  double x = spline[m].x;
+  double y = spline[m].y;
+  for (int ii=0; ii<n; ii++) {
+    spline[ii + 1].x -= A[ii][2] * spline[ii].x; /* C_{i,i+1} * x(i) */
+    spline[ii + 1].y -= A[ii][2] * spline[ii].y; /* C_{i,i+1} * x(i) */
+    x -= A[ii][0] * spline[ii].x;	/* C_{i,n-1} * x(i) */
+    y -= A[ii][0] * spline[ii].y; /* C_{i,n-1} * x(i) */
+  }
+  if (n >= 0) {
+    // C_{n-2,n-1} * x_{n-1}
+    spline[m].x = x - A[n][0] * spline[n].x; 
+    spline[m].y = y - A[n][0] * spline[n].y; 
+  }
+  // Division by D: b = D^{-1} * b 
+  for (int ii=0; ii<nIntervals; ii++) {
+    spline[ii].x /= A[ii][1];
+    spline[ii].y /= A[ii][1];
+  }
+
+  // Division by C: b = C^{-1} * b
+  x = spline[m].x;
+  y = spline[m].y;
+  if (n >= 0) {
+    // C_{n-2,n-1} * x_{n-1}
+    spline[n].x -= A[n][0] * x;	
+    spline[n].y -= A[n][0] * y;	
+  }
+  for (int ii=(n - 1); ii>=0; ii--) {
+    // C_{i,i+1} * x_{i+1} + C_{i,n-1} * x_{n-1}
+    spline[ii].x -= A[ii][2] * spline[ii + 1].x + A[ii][0] * x;
+    spline[ii].y -= A[ii][2] * spline[ii + 1].y + A[ii][0] * y;
+  }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Find second derivatives (x''(t_i),y''(t_i)) of cubic spline interpolation
+ * through list of points (x_i,y_i). The parameter t is calculated as the
+ * length of the linear stroke. The number of points must be at least 3.
+ * Note: For CLOSED_CONTOURs the first and last point must be equal.
+ */
+static CubicSpline* CubicSlopes(Point2d points[], int nPoints,
+				int isClosed, double unitX, double unitY)
+{
+  CubicSpline *s1, *s2;
+  int n, i;
+  double norm, dx, dy;
+    
+  CubicSpline* spline = new CubicSpline[nPoints];
+  if (!spline)
+    return NULL;
+
+  TriDiagonalMatrix *A = new TriDiagonalMatrix[nPoints];
+  if (!A) {
+    delete [] spline;
+    return NULL;
+  }
+  /*
+   * Calculate first differences in (dxdt2[i], y[i]) and interval lengths
+   * in dist[i]:
+   */
+  s1 = spline;
+  for (i = 0; i < nPoints - 1; i++) {
+    s1->x = points[i+1].x - points[i].x;
+    s1->y = points[i+1].y - points[i].y;
+
+    /*
+     * The Norm of a linear stroke is calculated in "normal coordinates"
+     * and used as interval length:
+     */
+    dx = s1->x / unitX;
+    dy = s1->y / unitY;
+    s1->t = sqrt(dx * dx + dy * dy);
+
+    s1->x /= s1->t;	/* first difference, with unit norm: */
+    s1->y /= s1->t;	/*   || (dxdt2[i], y[i]) || = 1      */
+    s1++;
+  }
+
+  /*
+   * Setup linear System:  Ax = b
+   */
+  n = nPoints - 2;		/* Without first and last point */
+  if (isClosed) {
+    /* First and last points must be equal for CLOSED_CONTOURs */
+    spline[nPoints - 1].t = spline[0].t;
+    spline[nPoints - 1].x = spline[0].x;
+    spline[nPoints - 1].y = spline[0].y;
+    n++;			/* Add last point (= first point) */
+  }
+  s1 = spline, s2 = s1 + 1;
+  for (i = 0; i < n; i++) {
+    /* Matrix A, mainly tridiagonal with cyclic second index 
+       ("j = j+n mod n") 
+    */
+    A[i][0] = s1->t;	/* Off-diagonal element A_{i,i-1} */
+    A[i][1] = 2.0 * (s1->t + s2->t);	/* A_{i,i} */
+    A[i][2] = s2->t;	/* Off-diagonal element A_{i,i+1} */
+
+    /* Right side b_x and b_y */
+    s1->x = (s2->x - s1->x) * 6.0;
+    s1->y = (s2->y - s1->y) * 6.0;
+
+    /* 
+     * If the linear stroke shows a cusp of more than 90 degree,
+     * the right side is reduced to avoid oscillations in the
+     * spline: 
+     */
+    /*
+     * The Norm of a linear stroke is calculated in "normal coordinates"
+     * and used as interval length:
+     */
+    dx = s1->x / unitX;
+    dy = s1->y / unitY;
+    norm = sqrt(dx * dx + dy * dy) / 8.5;
+    if (norm > 1.0) {
+      /* The first derivative will not be continuous */
+      s1->x /= norm;
+      s1->y /= norm;
+    }
+    s1++, s2++;
+  }
+
+  if (!isClosed) {
+    /* Third derivative is set to zero at both ends */
+    A[0][1] += A[0][0];	/* A_{0,0}     */
+    A[0][0] = 0.0;		/* A_{0,n-1}   */
+    A[n-1][1] += A[n-1][2]; /* A_{n-1,n-1} */
+    A[n-1][2] = 0.0;	/* A_{n-1,0}   */
+  }
+  /* Solve linear systems for dxdt2[] and y[] */
+
+  if (SolveCubic1(A, n)) {	/* Cholesky decomposition */
+    SolveCubic2(A, spline, n); /* A * dxdt2 = b_x */
+  }
+  else {			/* Should not happen, but who knows ... */
+    delete [] A;
+    delete [] spline;
+    return NULL;
+  }
+  /* Shift all second derivatives one place right and update the ends. */
+  s2 = spline + n, s1 = s2 - 1;
+  for (/* empty */; s2 > spline; s2--, s1--) {
+    s2->x = s1->x;
+    s2->y = s1->y;
+  }
+  if (isClosed) {
+    spline[0].x = spline[n].x;
+    spline[0].y = spline[n].y;
+  } else {
+    /* Third derivative is 0.0 for the first and last interval. */
+    spline[0].x = spline[1].x; 
+    spline[0].y = spline[1].y; 
+    spline[n + 1].x = spline[n].x;
+    spline[n + 1].y = spline[n].y;
+  }
+  delete [] A;
+  return spline;
+}
+
+// Calculate interpolated values of the spline function (defined via p_cntr
+// and the second derivatives dxdt2[] and dydt2[]). The number of tabulated
+// values is n. On an equidistant grid n_intpol values are calculated.
+static int CubicEval(Point2d *origPts, int nOrigPts, Point2d *intpPts, 
+		     int nIntpPts, CubicSpline *spline)
+{
+  double t, tSkip;
+  Point2d q;
+  int count;
+
+  /* Sum the lengths of all the segments (intervals). */
+  double tMax = 0.0;
+  for (int ii=0; ii<nOrigPts - 1; ii++)
+    tMax += spline[ii].t;
+
+  /* Need a better way of doing this... */
+
+  /* The distance between interpolated points */
+  tSkip = (1. - 1e-7) * tMax / (nIntpPts - 1);
+    
+  t = 0.0;			/* Spline parameter value. */
+  q = origPts[0];
+  count = 0;
+
+  intpPts[count++] = q;	/* First point. */
+  t += tSkip;
+    
+  for (int ii=0, jj=1; jj<nOrigPts; ii++, jj++) {
+    // Interval length
+    double d = spline[ii].t;
+    Point2d p = q;
+    q = origPts[ii+1];
+    double hx = (q.x - p.x) / d;
+    double hy = (q.y - p.y) / d;
+    double dx0 = (spline[jj].x + 2 * spline[ii].x) / 6.0;
+    double dy0 = (spline[jj].y + 2 * spline[ii].y) / 6.0;
+    double dx01 = (spline[jj].x - spline[ii].x) / (6.0 * d);
+    double dy01 = (spline[jj].y - spline[ii].y) / (6.0 * d);
+    while (t <= spline[ii].t) { /* t in current interval ? */
+      p.x += t * (hx + (t - d) * (dx0 + t * dx01));
+      p.y += t * (hy + (t - d) * (dy0 + t * dy01));
+      intpPts[count++] = p;
+      t += tSkip;
+    }
+
+    // Parameter t relative to start of next interval 
+    t -= spline[ii].t;
+  }
+
+  return count;
+}
+
+int LineElement::naturalParametricSpline(Point2d *origPts, int nOrigPts, 
+					 Region2d *extsPtr, int isClosed,
+					 Point2d *intpPts, int nIntpPts)
+{
+  // Generate a cubic spline curve through the points (x_i,y_i) which are
+  // stored in the linked list p_cntr.
+  // The spline is defined as a 2d-function s(t) = (x(t),y(t)), where the
+  // parameter t is the length of the linear stroke.
+
+  if (nOrigPts < 3)
+    return 0;
+
+  if (isClosed) {
+    origPts[nOrigPts].x = origPts[0].x;
+    origPts[nOrigPts].y = origPts[0].y;
+    nOrigPts++;
+  }
+
+  // Width and height of the grid is used at unit length (2d-norm)
+  double unitX = extsPtr->right - extsPtr->left;
+  double unitY = extsPtr->bottom - extsPtr->top;
+  if (unitX < FLT_EPSILON)
+    unitX = FLT_EPSILON;
+  if (unitY < FLT_EPSILON)
+    unitY = FLT_EPSILON;
+
+  /* Calculate parameters for cubic spline: 
+   *		t     = arc length of interval.
+   *		dxdt2 = second derivatives of x with respect to t, 
+   *		dydt2 = second derivatives of y with respect to t, 
+   */
+  CubicSpline* spline = CubicSlopes(origPts, nOrigPts, isClosed, unitX, unitY);
+  if (spline == NULL)
+    return 0;
+
+  int result= CubicEval(origPts, nOrigPts, intpPts, nIntpPts, spline);
+
+  delete [] spline;
+  return result;
+}
+
+static void CatromCoeffs(Point2d* p, Point2d* a, Point2d* b, 
+			 Point2d* c, Point2d* d)
+{
+  a->x = -p[0].x + 3.0 * p[1].x - 3.0 * p[2].x + p[3].x;
+  b->x = 2.0 * p[0].x - 5.0 * p[1].x + 4.0 * p[2].x - p[3].x;
+  c->x = -p[0].x + p[2].x;
+  d->x = 2.0 * p[1].x;
+  a->y = -p[0].y + 3.0 * p[1].y - 3.0 * p[2].y + p[3].y;
+  b->y = 2.0 * p[0].y - 5.0 * p[1].y + 4.0 * p[2].y - p[3].y;
+  c->y = -p[0].y + p[2].y;
+  d->y = 2.0 * p[1].y;
+}
+
+int LineElement::catromParametricSpline(Point2d* points, int nPoints, 
+					Point2d* intpPts, int nIntpPts)
+{
+  // The spline is computed in screen coordinates instead of data points so
+  // that we can select the abscissas of the interpolated points from each
+  // pixel horizontally across the plotting area.
+
+  Point2d* origPts = new Point2d[nPoints + 4];
+  memcpy(origPts + 1, points, sizeof(Point2d) * nPoints);
+
+  origPts[0] = origPts[1];
+  origPts[nPoints + 2] = origPts[nPoints + 1] = origPts[nPoints];
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<nIntpPts; ii++) {
+    int interval = (int)intpPts[ii].x;
+    double t = intpPts[ii].y;
+    Point2d a, b, c, d;
+    CatromCoeffs(origPts + interval, &a, &b, &c, &d);
+    intpPts[ii].x = (d.x + t * (c.x + t * (b.x + t * a.x))) / 2.0;
+    intpPts[ii].y = (d.y + t * (c.y + t * (b.y + t * a.y))) / 2.0;
+  }
+
+  delete [] origPts;
+  return 1;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fdfe4f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,652 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static int GetIndex(Tcl_Interp* interp, Element* elemPtr, 
+		    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *indexPtr);
+static Tcl_Obj *DisplayListObj(Graph* graphPtr);
+
+int Blt::ElementObjConfigure(Element* elemPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = elemPtr->graphPtr_;
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)elemPtr->ops(), elemPtr->optionTable(), 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    if (elemPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    graphPtr->flags |= mask;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Element* elemPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[3], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, 
+				      (char*)elemPtr->ops(), 
+				      elemPtr->optionTable(),
+				      objv[4], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (objPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId ?option value...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Element* elemPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[3], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (objc <= 5) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)elemPtr->ops(), 
+				       elemPtr->optionTable(), 
+				       (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return ElementObjConfigure(elemPtr, interp, objc-4, objv+4);
+}
+
+static int ActivateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc<3) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?elemId? ?index...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  // List all the currently active elements
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->elements_.table, &iter); hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      if (elemPtr->active_)
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr,
+				 Tcl_NewStringObj(elemPtr->name_, -1));
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  Element* elemPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[3], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int* indices = NULL;
+  int nIndices = -1;
+  if (objc > 4) {
+    nIndices = objc - 4;
+    indices = new int[nIndices];
+
+    int* activePtr = indices;
+    for (int ii=4; ii<objc; ii++) {
+      if (GetIndex(interp, elemPtr, objv[ii], activePtr) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      activePtr++;
+    }
+  }
+
+  delete [] elemPtr->activeIndices_;
+  elemPtr->activeIndices_ = indices;
+  elemPtr->nActiveIndices_ = nIndices;
+
+  elemPtr->active_ = 1;
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int BindOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->elements_.tagTable, &iter); hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      char* tagName = 
+	(char*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&graphPtr->elements_.tagTable, hPtr);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr,Tcl_NewStringObj(tagName,-1));
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  return graphPtr->bindTable_->configure(graphPtr->elementTag(Tcl_GetString(objv[3])), objc - 4, objv + 4);
+}
+
+static int ClosestOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "x y ?elemName?...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr->ops_;
+  ClosestSearch* searchPtr = &gops->search;
+
+  if (graphPtr->flags & RESET)
+    graphPtr->resetAxes();
+
+  int x;
+  if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ": bad window x-coordinate", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  int y;
+  if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ": bad window y-coordinate", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  searchPtr->x = x;
+  searchPtr->y = y;
+  searchPtr->index = -1;
+  searchPtr->dist = (double)(searchPtr->halo + 1);
+
+  if (objc>5) {
+    for (int ii=5; ii<objc; ii++) {
+      Element* elemPtr;
+      if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[ii], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+      ElementOptions* eops = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+      if (!eops->hide)
+	elemPtr->closest();
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    // Find the closest point from the set of displayed elements,
+    // searching the display list from back to front.  That way if
+    // the points from two different elements overlay each other
+    // exactly, the last one picked will be the topmost.  
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(graphPtr->elements_.displayList);
+	 link; link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      ElementOptions* eops = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+      if (!eops->hide)
+	elemPtr->closest();
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (searchPtr->dist < (double)searchPtr->halo) {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj("name", -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj(searchPtr->elemPtr->name_, -1)); 
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj("index", -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(searchPtr->index));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj("x", -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(searchPtr->point.x));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj("y", -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(searchPtr->point.y));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj("dist", -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(searchPtr->dist));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int CreateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  // may vary in length
+  //  if (objc!=4) {
+  //    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId");
+  //    return TCL_ERROR;
+  //  }
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  
+  if (graphPtr->createElement(objc, objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[3]);
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int DeactivateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[ii], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    delete [] elemPtr->activeIndices_;
+    elemPtr->activeIndices_ = NULL;
+    elemPtr->nActiveIndices_ = 0;
+    elemPtr->active_ = 0;
+  }
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int DeleteOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[ii], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    graphPtr->legend_->removeElement(elemPtr);
+    delete elemPtr;
+  }
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ExistsOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = 
+    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&graphPtr->elements_.table, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+  Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), (hPtr != NULL));
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int LowerOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  // Move the links of lowered elements out of the display list into
+  // a temporary list
+  Chain* chain = new Chain();
+
+  for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[ii], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    // look for duplicates
+    int ok=1;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain);
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* ptr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      if (ptr == elemPtr) {
+	ok=0;
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    if (ok && elemPtr->link) {
+      graphPtr->elements_.displayList->unlinkLink(elemPtr->link); 
+      chain->linkAfter(elemPtr->link, NULL); 
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Append the links to end of the display list
+  ChainLink *next;
+  for (ChainLink *link = Chain_FirstLink(chain); link; link = next) {
+    next = Chain_NextLink(link);
+    chain->unlinkLink(link); 
+    graphPtr->elements_.displayList->linkAfter(link, NULL); 
+  }	
+  delete chain;
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, DisplayListObj(graphPtr));
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int NamesOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc<3) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?pattern...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->elements_.table, &iter); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(elemPtr->name_, -1);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->elements_.table, &iter); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
+      for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+	if (Tcl_StringMatch(elemPtr->name_,Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]))) {
+	  Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(elemPtr->name_, -1);
+	  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+	  break;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int RaiseOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Chain* chain = new Chain();
+  for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[ii], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    // look for duplicates
+    int ok=1;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain);
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* ptr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      if (ptr == elemPtr) {
+	ok=0;
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    if (ok && elemPtr->link) {
+      graphPtr->elements_.displayList->unlinkLink(elemPtr->link); 
+      chain->linkAfter(elemPtr->link, NULL); 
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Prepend the links to beginning of the display list in reverse order
+  ChainLink *prev;
+  for (ChainLink *link = Chain_LastLink(chain); link; link = prev) {
+    prev = Chain_PrevLink(link);
+    chain->unlinkLink(link); 
+    graphPtr->elements_.displayList->linkBefore(link, NULL); 
+  }	
+  delete chain;
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, DisplayListObj(graphPtr));
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ShowOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  // may vary in length
+  if (objc<3) {
+  //  if (objc!=3 || objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?nameList?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, DisplayListObj(graphPtr));
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  int elemObjc;
+  Tcl_Obj** elemObjv;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[3], &elemObjc, &elemObjv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Collect the named elements into a list
+  Chain* chain = new Chain();
+  for (int ii=0; ii<elemObjc; ii++) {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    if (graphPtr->getElement(elemObjv[ii], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+      delete chain;
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    // look for duplicates
+    int ok=1;
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain);
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* ptr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      if (ptr == elemPtr) {
+	ok=0;
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    if (ok) 
+      chain->append(elemPtr);
+  }
+
+  // Clear the links from the currently displayed elements
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->elements_.displayList);
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->link = NULL;
+  }
+  delete graphPtr->elements_.displayList;
+  graphPtr->elements_.displayList = chain;
+
+  // Set links on all the displayed elements
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain); link; 
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->link = link;
+  }
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, DisplayListObj(graphPtr));
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int TypeOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "elemId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Element* elemPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getElement(objv[3], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), elemPtr->typeName(), -1);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::elementEnsemble[] = {
+  {"activate",   ActivateOp, 0},
+  {"bind",       BindOp, 0},
+  {"cget",       CgetOp, 0},
+  {"closest",    ClosestOp, 0},
+  {"configure",  ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"create",     CreateOp,  0},
+  {"deactivate", DeactivateOp, 0},
+  {"delete",     DeleteOp, 0},
+  {"exists",     ExistsOp, 0},
+  {"lower",      LowerOp, 0},
+  {"names",      NamesOp, 0},
+  {"raise",      RaiseOp, 0},
+  {"show",       ShowOp, 0},
+  {"type",       TypeOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+// Support
+
+static Tcl_Obj *DisplayListObj(Graph* graphPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->elements_.displayList); 
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(elemPtr->name_, -1);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(graphPtr->interp_, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+  }
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+}
+
+static int GetIndex(Tcl_Interp* interp, Element* elemPtr, 
+		    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *indexPtr)
+{
+  ElementOptions* ops = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+
+  char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  if ((*string == 'e') && (strcmp("end", string) == 0))
+    *indexPtr = NUMBEROFPOINTS(ops);
+  else if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objPtr, indexPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b596b11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrElemOp_h__
+#define __BltGrElemOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble elementEnsemble[];
+  extern int ElementObjConfigure(Blt::Element* elemPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+				 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOption.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOption.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0a67e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOption.C
@@ -0,0 +1,396 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltChain.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemOption.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define SETRANGE(l) ((l).range = ((l).max > (l).min) ? ((l).max - (l).min) : DBL_EPSILON)
+#define SETWEIGHT(l, lo, hi) ((l).min = (lo), (l).max = (hi), SETRANGE(l))
+
+// Defs
+
+static int GetPenStyleFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Graph* graphPtr,
+			      Tcl_Obj *objPtr, ClassId classId,
+			      PenStyle *stylePtr);
+static int ParseValues(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *nValuesPtr,
+		       double **arrayPtr);
+
+// OptionSpecs
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc ValuesSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc ValuesGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc ValuesFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption valuesObjOption =
+  {
+    "values", ValuesSetProc, ValuesGetProc, RestoreProc, ValuesFreeProc, NULL
+  };
+
+static int ValuesSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+		       int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  ElemValues** valuesPtrPtr = (ElemValues**)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = *(double*)valuesPtrPtr;
+  ElementOptions* ops = (ElementOptions*)widgRec;
+  Element* elemPtr = ops->elemPtr;
+
+  if (!valuesPtrPtr)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  Tcl_Obj** objv;
+  int objc;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, *objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (objc == 0) {
+    *valuesPtrPtr = NULL;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[0]);
+  if (objc == 1) {
+    if (Blt_VectorExists2(interp, string)) {
+      ElemValuesVector* valuesPtr = new ElemValuesVector(elemPtr, string);
+      if (valuesPtr->getVector() != TCL_OK) {
+	delete valuesPtr;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      *valuesPtrPtr = valuesPtr;
+    }
+    else
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  else {
+    double* values;
+    int nValues;
+    if (ParseValues(interp, *objPtr, &nValues, &values) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    ElemValuesSource* valuesPtr = new ElemValuesSource(nValues, values);
+    valuesPtr->findRange();
+    *valuesPtrPtr = valuesPtr;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* ValuesGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			    char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  ElemValues* valuesPtr = *(ElemValues**)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  if (!valuesPtr)
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj("", -1);
+    
+  int cnt = valuesPtr->nValues();
+  if (!cnt)
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj**)NULL);
+
+  Tcl_Obj** ll = new Tcl_Obj*[cnt];
+  for (int ii=0; ii<cnt; ii++)
+    ll[ii] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(valuesPtr->values_[ii]);
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(cnt, ll);
+  delete [] ll;
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+}
+
+static void ValuesFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *ptr)
+{
+  ElemValues* valuesPtr = *(ElemValues**)ptr;
+  delete valuesPtr;
+}
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc PairsSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc PairsGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc PairsRestoreProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc PairsFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption pairsObjOption =
+  {
+    "pairs", PairsSetProc, PairsGetProc, PairsRestoreProc, PairsFreeProc, NULL
+  };
+
+static int PairsSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+		       int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  ElemCoords* coordsPtr = (ElemCoords*)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = (double)NULL;
+
+  double* values;
+  int nValues;
+  if (ParseValues(interp, *objPtr, &nValues, &values) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (nValues == 0)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  if (nValues & 1) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "odd number of data points", NULL);
+    delete [] values;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  nValues /= 2;
+  delete coordsPtr->x;
+  coordsPtr->x = new ElemValuesSource(nValues);
+
+  delete coordsPtr->y;
+  coordsPtr->y = new ElemValuesSource(nValues);
+
+  int ii=0;
+  for (double* p = values; ii<nValues; ii++) {
+    coordsPtr->x->values_[ii] = *p++;
+    coordsPtr->y->values_[ii] = *p++;
+  }
+  delete [] values;
+
+  coordsPtr->x->findRange();
+  coordsPtr->y->findRange();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+};
+
+static Tcl_Obj* PairsGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			    char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  ElemCoords* coordsPtr = (ElemCoords*)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  if (!coordsPtr || 
+      !coordsPtr->x || !coordsPtr->y || 
+      !coordsPtr->x->nValues() || !coordsPtr->y->nValues())
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj**)NULL);
+
+  int cnt = MIN(coordsPtr->x->nValues(), coordsPtr->y->nValues());
+  Tcl_Obj** ll = new Tcl_Obj*[2*cnt];
+  for (int ii=0, jj=0; ii<cnt; ii++) {
+    ll[jj++] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(coordsPtr->x->values_[ii]);
+    ll[jj++] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(coordsPtr->y->values_[ii]);
+  }
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(2*cnt, ll);
+  delete [] ll;
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+};
+
+static void PairsRestoreProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			     char *ptr, char *savePtr)
+{
+  // do nothing
+}
+
+static void PairsFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *ptr)
+{
+  // do nothing
+}
+
+int StyleSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		 Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+		 int offset, char* save, int flags)
+{
+  Chain* stylePalette = *(Chain**)(widgRec + offset);
+  ElementOptions* ops = (ElementOptions*)(widgRec);
+  Element* elemPtr = ops->elemPtr;
+  size_t size = (size_t)clientData;
+
+  int objc;
+  Tcl_Obj** objv;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, *objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Reserve the first entry for the "normal" pen. We'll set the style later
+  elemPtr->freeStylePalette(stylePalette);
+  ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(stylePalette);
+  if (!link) {
+    link = new ChainLink(size);
+    stylePalette->linkAfter(link, NULL);
+  }
+
+  PenStyle* stylePtr = (PenStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+  stylePtr->penPtr = NORMALPEN(ops);
+  for (int ii = 0; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    link = new ChainLink(size);
+    stylePtr = (PenStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    stylePtr->weight.min = (double)ii;
+    stylePtr->weight.max = (double)ii + 1.0;
+    stylePtr->weight.range = 1.0;
+    if (GetPenStyleFromObj(interp, elemPtr->graphPtr_, objv[ii], 
+			   elemPtr->classId(), 
+			   (PenStyle*)stylePtr) != TCL_OK) {
+      elemPtr->freeStylePalette(stylePalette);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    stylePalette->linkAfter(link, NULL);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj* StyleGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+		      char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  Chain* stylePalette = *(Chain**)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  // count how many
+  int cnt =0;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(stylePalette); link; 
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link), cnt++) {}
+  if (!cnt)
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj**)NULL);
+
+  Tcl_Obj** ll = new Tcl_Obj*[3*cnt];
+  int ii=0;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(stylePalette); link; 
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    PenStyle *stylePtr = (PenStyle*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ll[ii++] = Tcl_NewStringObj(stylePtr->penPtr->name_, -1);
+    ll[ii++] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(stylePtr->weight.min);
+    ll[ii++] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(stylePtr->weight.max);
+  }
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(3*cnt,ll);
+  delete [] ll;
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+}
+
+void StyleRestoreProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+		      char *ptr, char *savePtr)
+{
+  // do nothing
+}
+
+void StyleFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *ptr)
+{
+  // do nothing
+}
+
+// Support
+
+static int GetPenStyleFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Graph* graphPtr,
+			      Tcl_Obj *objPtr, ClassId classId,
+			      PenStyle *stylePtr)
+{
+  int objc;
+  Tcl_Obj **objv;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if ((objc != 1) && (objc != 3)) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad style entry \"", 
+		     Tcl_GetString(objPtr), 
+		     "\": should be \"penName\" or \"penName min max\"", 
+		     NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Pen* penPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getPen(objv[0], &penPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    double min, max;
+    if ((Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[1], &min) != TCL_OK) ||
+	(Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &max) != TCL_OK))
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    SETWEIGHT(stylePtr->weight, min, max);
+  }
+
+  penPtr->refCount_++;
+  stylePtr->penPtr = penPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void VectorChangedProc(Tcl_Interp* interp, ClientData clientData, 
+		       Blt_VectorNotify notify)
+{
+  ElemValuesVector* valuesPtr = (ElemValuesVector*)clientData;
+  if (!valuesPtr)
+    return;
+
+  if (notify == BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_DESTROY) {
+    valuesPtr->freeSource();
+    valuesPtr->reset();
+  }
+  else {
+    Blt_Vector* vector;
+    Blt_GetVectorById(interp, valuesPtr->source_, &vector);
+    if (valuesPtr->fetchValues(vector) != TCL_OK)
+      return;
+  }
+
+  Element* elemPtr = valuesPtr->elemPtr_;
+  Graph* graphPtr = elemPtr->graphPtr_;
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+}
+
+static int ParseValues(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *nValuesPtr,
+		       double **arrayPtr)
+{
+  int objc;
+  Tcl_Obj **objv;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  *arrayPtr = NULL;
+  *nValuesPtr = 0;
+  if (objc > 0) {
+    double* array = new double[objc];
+    if (!array) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't allocate new vector", NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    int i=0;
+    for (double* p = array; i < objc; i++, p++) {
+      if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[i], p) != TCL_OK) {
+	delete [] array;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+    *arrayPtr = array;
+    *nValuesPtr = objc;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOption.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOption.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4312691
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrElemOption.h
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrElemOption_h__
+#define __BltGrElemOption_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+extern const char* fillObjOption[];
+extern Tk_CustomOptionSetProc StyleSetProc;
+extern Tk_CustomOptionGetProc StyleGetProc;
+extern Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc StyleRestoreProc;
+extern Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc StyleFreeProc;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairs.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairs.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7ea3d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairs.C
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairs.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-color", "color", "Color", 
+   "green", -1, Tk_Offset(CrosshairsOptions, colorPtr), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-dashes", "dashes", "Dashes", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(CrosshairsOptions, dashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-linewidth", "lineWidth", "Linewidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(CrosshairsOptions, lineWidth), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-x", "x", "X",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(CrosshairsOptions, x), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-y", "y", "Y",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(CrosshairsOptions, y), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+Crosshairs::Crosshairs(Graph* graphPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (CrosshairsOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(CrosshairsOptions));
+
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  visible_ =0;
+  gc_ =NULL;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr->interp_, optionSpecs);
+  Tk_InitOptions(graphPtr->interp_, (char*)ops_, optionTable_, 
+		 graphPtr->tkwin_);
+}
+
+Crosshairs::~Crosshairs()
+{
+  if (gc_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(gc_);
+
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+  free(ops_);
+}
+
+// Configure
+
+int Crosshairs::configure()
+{
+  CrosshairsOptions* ops = (CrosshairsOptions*)ops_;
+
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  gcValues.foreground = ops->colorPtr->pixel;
+  gcValues.line_width = ops->lineWidth;
+  unsigned long gcMask = (GCForeground | GCLineWidth);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->dashes)) {
+    gcValues.line_style = LineOnOffDash;
+    gcMask |= GCLineStyle;
+  }
+  GC newGC = graphPtr_->getPrivateGC(gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->dashes))
+    graphPtr_->setDashes(newGC, &ops->dashes);
+
+  if (gc_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(gc_);
+  gc_ = newGC;
+
+  // Are the new coordinates on the graph?
+  map();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Crosshairs::map()
+{
+  CrosshairsOptions* ops = (CrosshairsOptions*)ops_;
+
+  segArr_[0].x = ops->x;
+  segArr_[1].x = ops->x;
+  segArr_[0].y = graphPtr_->bottom_;
+  segArr_[1].y = graphPtr_->top_;
+  segArr_[2].y = ops->y;
+  segArr_[3].y = ops->y;
+  segArr_[2].x = graphPtr_->left_;
+  segArr_[3].x = graphPtr_->right_;
+}
+
+void Crosshairs::on()
+{
+  visible_ =1;
+}
+
+void Crosshairs::off()
+{
+  visible_ =0;
+}
+
+void Crosshairs::draw(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  CrosshairsOptions* ops = (CrosshairsOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (visible_ && Tk_IsMapped(graphPtr_->tkwin_)) {
+    if (ops->x <= graphPtr_->right_ &&
+	ops->x >= graphPtr_->left_ &&
+	ops->y <= graphPtr_->bottom_ &&
+	ops->y >= graphPtr_->top_) {
+      XDrawLine(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, gc_, 
+		segArr_[0].x, segArr_[0].y, segArr_[1].x, segArr_[1].y);
+      XDrawLine(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, gc_, 
+		segArr_[2].x, segArr_[2].y, segArr_[3].x, segArr_[3].y);
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairs.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairs.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a86d0c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrHairs_h__
+#define __BltGrHairs_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    XColor* colorPtr;
+    Dashes dashes;
+    int lineWidth;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+  } CrosshairsOptions;
+
+  class Crosshairs {
+  protected:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+
+    int visible_;
+    GC gc_;
+    Point segArr_[4];
+
+  public:
+    Crosshairs(Graph*);
+    virtual ~Crosshairs();
+
+    int configure();
+    void map();
+    void draw(Drawable);
+
+    void on();
+    void off();
+    int isOn() {return visible_;}
+
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable() {return optionTable_;}
+    void* ops() {return ops_;}
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairsOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairsOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57650ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairsOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairs.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairsOp.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static int CrosshairsObjConfigure(Graph* graphPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+				  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Crosshairs* chPtr = graphPtr->crosshairs_;
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)chPtr->ops(), chPtr->optionTable(), 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    if (chPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    graphPtr->flags |= mask;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc != 4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "cget option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Crosshairs* chPtr = graphPtr->crosshairs_;
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, 
+				      (char*)chPtr->ops(), 
+				      chPtr->optionTable(),
+				      objv[3], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (objPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Crosshairs* chPtr = graphPtr->crosshairs_;
+  if (objc <= 4) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)chPtr->ops(), 
+				       chPtr->optionTable(), 
+				       (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return CrosshairsObjConfigure(graphPtr, interp, objc-3, objv+3);
+}
+
+static int OnOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Crosshairs *chPtr = graphPtr->crosshairs_;
+
+  chPtr->on();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int OffOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Crosshairs *chPtr = graphPtr->crosshairs_;
+
+  chPtr->off();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ToggleOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Crosshairs *chPtr = graphPtr->crosshairs_;
+
+  if (chPtr->isOn())
+    chPtr->off();
+  else
+    chPtr->on();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::crosshairsEnsemble[] = {
+  {"cget", 	CgetOp, 0},
+  {"configure",	ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"off",       OffOp, 0},
+  {"on",        OnOp, 0},
+  {"toggle",    ToggleOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairsOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairsOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f3d009
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrHairsOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrHairsOp_h__
+#define __BltGrHairsOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble crosshairsEnsemble[];
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegd.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegd.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b8822f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegd.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1070 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static void SelectCmdProc(ClientData);
+static Tk_SelectionProc SelectionProc;
+
+// OptionSpecs
+
+static const char* selectmodeObjOption[] = {
+  "single", "multiple", NULL
+};
+static const char*  positionObjOption[] = {
+  "rightmargin", "leftmargin", "topmargin", "bottommargin", 
+  "plotarea", "xy", NULL
+};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground",
+   "ActiveBackground", 
+   STD_ACTIVE_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, activeBg), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-activeborderwidth", "activeBorderWidth", 
+   "ActiveBorderWidth", 
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, entryBW), 0, NULL, LAYOUT}, 
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "ActiveForeground",
+   STD_ACTIVE_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, activeFgColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-activerelief", "activeRelief", "ActiveRelief",
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, activeRelief), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor", 
+   "n", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, anchor), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-background", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, normalBg), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, borderWidth), 
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT}, 
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-borderwidth", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_INT, "-columns", "columns", "columns",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, reqColumns), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection", "ExportSelection", 
+   "no",  -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, exportSelection), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-focusdashes", "focusDashes", "FocusDashes",
+   "dot", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, focusDashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-focusforeground", "focusForeground", "FocusForeground",
+   STD_ACTIVE_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, focusColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", 
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, style.font), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-foreground", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, fgColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, hide), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-ipadx", "iPadX", "Pad", 
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, ixPad), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-ipady", "iPadY", "Pad", 
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, iyPad), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-nofocusselectbackground", "noFocusSelectBackground", 
+   "NoFocusSelectBackground", 
+   STD_ACTIVE_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selOutFocusBg), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-nofocusselectforeground", "noFocusSelectForeground", 
+   "NoFocusSelectForeground", 
+   STD_ACTIVE_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selOutFocusFgColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad", 
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, xPad), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad", 
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, yPad), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-position", "position", "Position", 
+   "rightmargin", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, position),
+   0, &positionObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-raised", "raised", "Raised", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, raised), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", 
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, relief), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_INT, "-rows", "rows", "rows", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, reqRows), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", 
+   "SelectBackground", 
+   STD_ACTIVE_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selInFocusBg), 
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", 
+   "SelectBorderWidth", 
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selBW), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectcommand", "selectCommand", "SelectCommand",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selectCmd), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "SelectForeground",
+   STD_ACTIVE_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selInFocusFgColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-selectmode", "selectMode", "SelectMode",
+   "multiple", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selectMode), 
+   0, &selectmodeObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-selectrelief", "selectRelief", "SelectRelief",
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, selRelief), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-title", "title", "Title", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, title), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-titlecolor", "titleColor", "TitleColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, titleStyle.color), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-titlefont", "titleFont", "TitleFont",
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, titleStyle.font), 
+   0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-x", "x", "X", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, xReq), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-y", "y", "Y", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LegendOptions, yReq), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+Legend::Legend(Graph* graphPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (void*)calloc(1, sizeof(LegendOptions));
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  flags =0;
+  nEntries_ =0;
+  nColumns_ =0;
+  nRows_ =0;
+  width_ =0;
+  height_ =0;
+  entryWidth_ =0;
+  entryHeight_ =0;
+  x_ =0;
+  y_ =0;
+  bindTable_ =NULL;
+  focusGC_ =NULL;
+  focusPtr_ =NULL;
+  selAnchorPtr_ =NULL;
+  selMarkPtr_ =NULL;
+  selected_ = new Chain();
+  titleWidth_ =0;
+  titleHeight_ =0;
+
+  ops->style.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->style.color =NULL;
+  ops->style.font =NULL;
+  ops->style.angle =0;
+  ops->style.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  ops->titleStyle.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->titleStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->titleStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->titleStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->titleStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  bindTable_ = new BindTable(graphPtr, this);
+
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&selectTable_, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+
+  Tk_CreateSelHandler(graphPtr_->tkwin_, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING, 
+		      SelectionProc, this, XA_STRING);
+
+  optionTable_ =Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr->interp_, optionSpecs);
+  Tk_InitOptions(graphPtr->interp_, (char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr->tkwin_);
+}
+
+Legend::~Legend()
+{
+  //  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+
+  delete bindTable_;
+    
+  if (focusGC_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(focusGC_);
+
+  if (graphPtr_->tkwin_)
+    Tk_DeleteSelHandler(graphPtr_->tkwin_, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING);
+
+  delete selected_;
+
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+  free(ops_);
+}
+
+int Legend::configure()
+{
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+
+  // GC for active label, Dashed outline
+  unsigned long gcMask = GCForeground | GCLineStyle;
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  gcValues.foreground = ops->focusColor->pixel;
+  gcValues.line_style = (LineIsDashed(ops->focusDashes))
+    ? LineOnOffDash : LineSolid;
+  GC newGC = graphPtr_->getPrivateGC(gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->focusDashes)) {
+    ops->focusDashes.offset = 2;
+    graphPtr_->setDashes(newGC, &ops->focusDashes);
+  }
+  if (focusGC_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(focusGC_);
+
+  focusGC_ = newGC;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Legend::map(int plotWidth, int plotHeight)
+{
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+  
+  entryWidth_ =0;
+  entryHeight_ = 0;
+  nRows_ =0;
+  nColumns_ =0;
+  nEntries_ =0;
+  height_ =0;
+  width_ = 0;
+
+  TextStyle tts(graphPtr_, &ops->titleStyle);
+  tts.getExtents(ops->title, &titleWidth_, &titleHeight_);
+
+  // Count the number of legend entries and determine the widest and tallest
+  // label.  The number of entries would normally be the number of elements,
+  // but elements can have no legend entry (-label "").
+  int nEntries =0;
+  int maxWidth =0;
+  int maxHeight =0;
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->style);
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr_->elements_.displayList); 
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      continue;
+
+    int w, h;
+    ts.getExtents(elemOps->label, &w, &h);
+    if (maxWidth < (int)w)
+      maxWidth = w;
+
+    if (maxHeight < (int)h)
+      maxHeight = h;
+
+    nEntries++;
+  }
+  if (nEntries == 0)
+    return;
+
+  Tk_FontMetrics fontMetrics;
+  Tk_GetFontMetrics(ops->style.font, &fontMetrics);
+  int symbolWidth = 2 * fontMetrics.ascent;
+
+  maxWidth += 2 * ops->entryBW + 2*ops->ixPad +
+    + symbolWidth + 3 * 2;
+
+  maxHeight += 2 * ops->entryBW + 2*ops->iyPad;
+
+  maxWidth |= 0x01;
+  maxHeight |= 0x01;
+
+  int lw = plotWidth - 2 * ops->borderWidth - 2*ops->xPad;
+  int lh = plotHeight - 2 * ops->borderWidth - 2*ops->yPad;
+
+  /*
+   * The number of rows and columns is computed as one of the following:
+   *
+   *	both options set		User defined. 
+   *  -rows				Compute columns from rows.
+   *  -columns			Compute rows from columns.
+   *	neither set			Compute rows and columns from
+   *					size of plot.  
+   */
+  int nRows =0;
+  int nColumns =0;
+  if (ops->reqRows > 0) {
+    nRows = MIN(ops->reqRows, nEntries); 
+    if (ops->reqColumns > 0)
+      nColumns = MIN(ops->reqColumns, nEntries);
+    else
+      nColumns = ((nEntries - 1) / nRows) + 1; /* Only -rows. */
+  }
+  else if (ops->reqColumns > 0) { /* Only -columns. */
+    nColumns = MIN(ops->reqColumns, nEntries);
+    nRows = ((nEntries - 1) / nColumns) + 1;
+  }
+  else {			
+    // Compute # of rows and columns from the legend size
+    nRows = lh / maxHeight;
+    nColumns = lw / maxWidth;
+    if (nRows < 1) {
+      nRows = nEntries;
+    }
+    if (nColumns < 1) {
+      nColumns = nEntries;
+    }
+    if (nRows > nEntries) {
+      nRows = nEntries;
+    } 
+    switch ((Position)ops->position) {
+    case TOP:
+    case BOTTOM:
+      nRows = ((nEntries - 1) / nColumns) + 1;
+      break;
+    case LEFT:
+    case RIGHT:
+    default:
+      nColumns = ((nEntries - 1) / nRows) + 1;
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+  if (nColumns < 1)
+    nColumns = 1;
+
+  if (nRows < 1)
+    nRows = 1;
+
+  lh = (nRows * maxHeight);
+  if (titleHeight_ > 0)
+    lh += titleHeight_ + ops->yPad;
+
+  lw = nColumns * maxWidth;
+  if (lw < (int)(titleWidth_))
+    lw = titleWidth_;
+
+  width_ = lw + 2 * ops->borderWidth + 2*ops->xPad;
+  height_ = lh + 2 * ops->borderWidth + 2*ops->yPad;
+  nRows_ = nRows;
+  nColumns_ = nColumns;
+  nEntries_ = nEntries;
+  entryHeight_ = maxHeight;
+  entryWidth_ = maxWidth;
+
+  int row =0;
+  int col =0;
+  int count =0;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr_->elements_.displayList); 
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    count++;
+    elemPtr->row_ = row;
+    elemPtr->col_ = col;
+    row++;
+    if ((count % nRows) == 0) {
+      col++;
+      row = 0;
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Legend::draw(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  if ((ops->hide) || (nEntries_ == 0))
+    return;
+
+  setOrigin();
+  Tk_Window tkwin = graphPtr_->tkwin_;
+  int w = width_;
+  int h = height_;
+
+  Pixmap pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(graphPtr_->display_, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), w, h, 
+			       Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+
+  if (ops->normalBg)
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, ops->normalBg, 0, 0, 
+		       w, h, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+  else {
+    switch ((Position)ops->position) {
+    case TOP:
+    case BOTTOM:
+    case RIGHT:
+    case LEFT:
+      Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, gops->normalBg, 0, 0, 
+			 w, h, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+      break;
+    case PLOT:
+    case XY:
+      // Legend background is transparent and is positioned over the the
+      // plot area.  Either copy the part of the background from the backing
+      // store pixmap or (if no backing store exists) just fill it with the
+      // background color of the plot.
+      if (graphPtr_->cache_ != None)
+	XCopyArea(graphPtr_->display_, graphPtr_->cache_, pixmap, 
+		  graphPtr_->drawGC_, x_, y_, w, h, 0, 0);
+      else 
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, gops->plotBg, 0, 0, 
+			   w, h, TK_RELIEF_FLAT, 0);
+      break;
+    };
+  }
+
+  Tk_FontMetrics fontMetrics;
+  Tk_GetFontMetrics(ops->style.font, &fontMetrics);
+
+  int symbolSize = fontMetrics.ascent;
+  int xMid = symbolSize + 1 + ops->entryBW;
+  int yMid = (symbolSize / 2) + 1 + ops->entryBW;
+  int xLabel = 2 * symbolSize + ops->entryBW +  ops->ixPad + 2 * 2;
+  int ySymbol = yMid + ops->iyPad; 
+  int xSymbol = xMid + 2;
+
+  int x = ops->xPad + ops->borderWidth;
+  int y = ops->yPad + ops->borderWidth;
+  
+  TextStyle tts(graphPtr_, &ops->titleStyle);
+  tts.drawText(pixmap, ops->title, x, y);
+  if (titleHeight_ > 0)
+    y += titleHeight_ + ops->yPad;
+
+  int count = 0;
+  int yStart = y;
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->style);
+
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr_->elements_.displayList);
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      continue;
+
+    int isSelected = entryIsSelected(elemPtr);
+    if (elemPtr->labelActive_)
+      Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, ops->activeBg, 
+			 x, y, entryWidth_, entryHeight_, 
+			 ops->entryBW, ops->activeRelief);
+    else if (isSelected) {
+      XColor* fg = (flags & FOCUS) ?
+	ops->selInFocusFgColor : ops->selOutFocusFgColor;
+      Tk_3DBorder bg = (flags & FOCUS) ?
+	ops->selInFocusBg : ops->selOutFocusBg;
+      ops->style.color = fg;
+      Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, bg, x, y, 
+			 entryWidth_, entryHeight_, 
+			 ops->selBW, ops->selRelief);
+    }
+    else {
+      ops->style.color = ops->fgColor;
+      if (elemOps->legendRelief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, gops->normalBg, 
+			   x, y, entryWidth_, 
+			   entryHeight_, ops->entryBW, 
+			   elemOps->legendRelief);
+    }
+    elemPtr->drawSymbol(pixmap, x + xSymbol, y + ySymbol, symbolSize);
+
+    ts.drawText(pixmap, elemOps->label, x+xLabel, y+ops->entryBW+ops->iyPad);
+    count++;
+
+    if (focusPtr_ == elemPtr) {
+      if (isSelected) {
+	XColor* color = (flags & FOCUS) ?
+	  ops->selInFocusFgColor : ops->selOutFocusFgColor;
+	XSetForeground(graphPtr_->display_, focusGC_, color->pixel);
+      }
+      XDrawRectangle(graphPtr_->display_, pixmap, focusGC_, 
+		     x + 1, y + 1, entryWidth_ - 3, 
+		     entryHeight_ - 3);
+      if (isSelected)
+	XSetForeground(graphPtr_->display_, focusGC_, ops->focusColor->pixel);
+    }
+
+    // Check when to move to the next column
+    if ((count % nRows_) > 0)
+      y += entryHeight_;
+    else {
+      x += entryWidth_;
+      y = yStart;
+    }
+  }
+
+  Tk_3DBorder bg = ops->normalBg;
+  if (!bg)
+    bg = gops->normalBg;
+
+  Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, bg, 0, 0, w, h, 
+		     ops->borderWidth, ops->relief);
+  XCopyArea(graphPtr_->display_, pixmap, drawable, graphPtr_->drawGC_, 
+	    0, 0, w, h, x_, y_);
+
+  Tk_FreePixmap(graphPtr_->display_, pixmap);
+}
+
+void Legend::print(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+  PostscriptOptions* pops = (PostscriptOptions*)graphPtr_->postscript_->ops_;
+
+  if ((ops->hide) || (nEntries_ == 0))
+    return;
+
+  setOrigin();
+
+  double x = x_;
+  double y = y_;
+  int width = width_ - 2*ops->xPad;
+  int height = height_ - 2*ops->yPad;
+
+  psPtr->append("% Legend\n");
+  if (pops->decorations) {
+    if (ops->normalBg)
+      psPtr->fill3DRectangle(ops->normalBg, x, y, width, height, 
+			     ops->borderWidth, ops->relief);
+    else
+      psPtr->print3DRectangle(gops->normalBg, x, y, width, height, 
+			     ops->borderWidth, ops->relief);
+
+  }
+  else {
+    psPtr->setClearBackground();
+    psPtr->fillRectangle(x, y, width, height);
+  }
+
+  Tk_FontMetrics fontMetrics;
+  Tk_GetFontMetrics(ops->style.font, &fontMetrics);
+  int symbolSize = fontMetrics.ascent;
+  int xMid = symbolSize + 1 + ops->entryBW;
+  int yMid = (symbolSize / 2) + 1 + ops->entryBW;
+  int xLabel = 2 * symbolSize + ops->entryBW + ops->ixPad + 5;
+  int xSymbol = xMid + ops->ixPad;
+  int ySymbol = yMid + ops->iyPad;
+
+  x += ops->borderWidth;
+  y += ops->borderWidth;
+  TextStyle tts(graphPtr_, &ops->titleStyle);
+  tts.printText(psPtr, ops->title, x, y);
+  if (titleHeight_ > 0)
+    y += titleHeight_ + ops->yPad;
+
+  int count = 0;
+  double yStart = y;
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->style);
+
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr_->elements_.displayList); 
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      continue;
+
+    if (elemPtr->labelActive_) {
+      ops->style.color = ops->activeFgColor;
+      psPtr->fill3DRectangle(ops->activeBg, x, y, entryWidth_, 
+			     entryHeight_, ops->entryBW, 
+			     ops->activeRelief);
+    }
+    else {
+      ops->style.color = ops->fgColor;
+      if (elemOps->legendRelief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)
+	psPtr->print3DRectangle(gops->normalBg, x, y, entryWidth_, entryHeight_,
+			       ops->entryBW, elemOps->legendRelief);
+    }
+    elemPtr->printSymbol(psPtr, x + xSymbol, y + ySymbol, symbolSize);
+    ts.printText(psPtr, elemOps->label, x + xLabel, 
+		 y + ops->entryBW + ops->iyPad);
+    count++;
+
+    if ((count % nRows_) > 0)
+      y += entryHeight_;
+    else {
+      x += entryWidth_;
+      y = yStart;
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Legend::removeElement(Element* elemPtr)
+{
+  bindTable_->deleteBindings(elemPtr);
+}
+
+void Legend::eventuallyInvokeSelectCmd()
+{
+  if ((flags & SELECT_PENDING) == 0) {
+    flags |= SELECT_PENDING;
+    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SelectCmdProc, this);
+  }
+}
+
+void Legend::setOrigin()
+{
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+
+  int x =0;
+  int y =0;
+  int w =0;
+  int h =0;
+  switch ((Position)ops->position) {
+  case RIGHT:
+    w = gops->rightMargin.width - gops->rightMargin.axesOffset;
+    h = graphPtr_->bottom_ - graphPtr_->top_;
+    x = graphPtr_->right_ + gops->rightMargin.axesOffset;
+    y = graphPtr_->top_;
+    break;
+
+  case LEFT:
+    w = gops->leftMargin.width - gops->leftMargin.axesOffset;
+    h = graphPtr_->bottom_ - graphPtr_->top_;
+    x = graphPtr_->inset_;
+    y = graphPtr_->top_;
+    break;
+
+  case TOP:
+    w = graphPtr_->right_ - graphPtr_->left_;
+    h = gops->topMargin.height - gops->topMargin.axesOffset;
+    if (gops->title)
+      h -= graphPtr_->titleHeight_;
+
+    x = graphPtr_->left_;
+    y = graphPtr_->inset_;
+    if (gops->title)
+      y += graphPtr_->titleHeight_;
+    break;
+
+  case BOTTOM:
+    w = graphPtr_->right_ - graphPtr_->left_;
+    h = gops->bottomMargin.height - gops->bottomMargin.axesOffset;
+    x = graphPtr_->left_;
+    y = graphPtr_->bottom_ + gops->bottomMargin.axesOffset;
+    break;
+
+  case PLOT:
+    w = graphPtr_->right_ - graphPtr_->left_;
+    h = graphPtr_->bottom_ - graphPtr_->top_;
+    x = graphPtr_->left_;
+    y = graphPtr_->top_;
+    break;
+
+  case XY:
+    w = width_;
+    h = height_;
+    x = ops->xReq;
+    y = ops->yReq;
+    if (x < 0)
+      x += graphPtr_->width_;
+
+    if (y < 0)
+      y += graphPtr_->height_;
+    break;
+  }
+
+  switch (ops->anchor) {
+  case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+    if (h > height_)
+      y += (h - height_) / 2;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+    if (h > height_)
+      y += (h - height_);
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+    if (w > width_)
+      x += (w - width_) / 2;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+    if (h > height_)
+      y += (h - height_) / 2;
+
+    if (w > width_)
+      x += (w - width_) / 2;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+    if (w > width_)
+      x += (w - width_) / 2;
+
+    if (h > height_)
+      y += (h - height_);
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+    if (w > width_)
+      x += w - width_;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+    if (w > width_)
+      x += w - width_;
+
+    if (h > height_)
+      y += (h - height_) / 2;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+    if (w > width_) {
+      x += w - width_;
+    }
+    if (h > height_) {
+      y += (h - height_);
+    }
+    break;
+  }
+
+  x_ = x + ops->xPad;
+  y_ = y + ops->yPad;
+}
+
+void Legend::selectEntry(Element* elemPtr)
+{
+  switch (flags & SELECT_TOGGLE) {
+  case SELECT_CLEAR:
+    deselectElement(elemPtr);
+    break;
+  case SELECT_SET:
+    selectElement(elemPtr);
+    break;
+  case SELECT_TOGGLE:
+    Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&selectTable_, (char*)elemPtr);
+    if (hPtr)
+      deselectElement(elemPtr);
+    else
+      selectElement(elemPtr);
+    break;
+  }
+}
+
+void Legend::selectElement(Element* elemPtr)
+{
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = 
+    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&selectTable_, (char*)elemPtr, &isNew);
+  if (isNew) {
+    ChainLink* link = selected_->append(elemPtr);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, link);
+  }
+}
+
+void Legend::deselectElement(Element* elemPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&selectTable_, (char*)elemPtr);
+  if (hPtr) {
+    ChainLink* link = (ChainLink*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    selected_->deleteLink(link);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+
+int Legend::selectRange(Element *fromPtr, Element *toPtr)
+{
+  int isBefore=0;
+  for (ChainLink* linkPtr = fromPtr->link; linkPtr; linkPtr = linkPtr->next())
+    if (linkPtr == toPtr->link)
+      isBefore =1;
+
+  if (isBefore) {
+    for (ChainLink* link = fromPtr->link; link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      selectEntry(elemPtr);
+      if (link == toPtr->link)
+	break;
+    }
+  } 
+  else {
+    for (ChainLink* link = fromPtr->link; link; link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      selectEntry(elemPtr);
+      if (link == toPtr->link)
+	break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Legend::clearSelection()
+{
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&selectTable_);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&selectTable_, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+  selected_->reset();
+
+  if (ops->selectCmd)
+    eventuallyInvokeSelectCmd();
+}
+
+int Legend::entryIsSelected(Element* elemPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&selectTable_, (char*)elemPtr);
+  return (hPtr != NULL);
+}
+
+int Legend::getElementFromObj(Tcl_Obj* objPtr, Element** elemPtrPtr)
+{
+  const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  Element* elemPtr = NULL;
+
+  if (!strcmp(string, "anchor"))
+    elemPtr = selAnchorPtr_;
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "current"))
+    elemPtr = (Element*)bindTable_->currentItem();
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "first"))
+    elemPtr = getFirstElement();
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "focus"))
+    elemPtr = focusPtr_;
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "last"))
+    elemPtr = getLastElement();
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "end"))
+    elemPtr = getLastElement();
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "next.row"))
+    elemPtr = getNextRow(focusPtr_);
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "next.column"))
+    elemPtr = getNextColumn(focusPtr_);
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "previous.row"))
+    elemPtr = getPreviousRow(focusPtr_);
+  else if (!strcmp(string, "previous.column"))
+    elemPtr = getPreviousColumn(focusPtr_);
+  else if (string[0] == '@') {
+    int x, y;
+    if (graphPtr_->getXY(string, &x, &y) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    ClassId classId;
+    elemPtr = (Element*)pickEntry(x, y, &classId);
+  }
+  else {
+    if (graphPtr_->getElement(objPtr, &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (!elemPtr->link) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(graphPtr_->interp_, "bad legend index \"", string, "\"",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      elemPtr = NULL;
+  }
+
+  *elemPtrPtr = elemPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+Element* Legend::getNextRow(Element* focusPtr)
+{
+  unsigned col = focusPtr->col_;
+  unsigned row = focusPtr->row_ + 1;
+  for (ChainLink* link = focusPtr->link; link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      continue;
+
+    if ((elemPtr->col_ == col) && (elemPtr->row_ == row))
+      return elemPtr;	
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+Element* Legend::getNextColumn(Element* focusPtr)
+{
+  unsigned col = focusPtr->col_ + 1;
+  unsigned row = focusPtr->row_;
+  for (ChainLink* link = focusPtr->link; link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      continue;
+
+    if ((elemPtr->col_ == col) && (elemPtr->row_ == row))
+      return elemPtr;
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+Element* Legend::getPreviousRow(Element* focusPtr)
+{
+  unsigned col = focusPtr->col_;
+  unsigned row = focusPtr->row_ - 1;
+  for (ChainLink* link = focusPtr->link; link; link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      continue;
+
+    if ((elemPtr->col_ == col) && (elemPtr->row_ == row))
+      return elemPtr;	
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+Element* Legend::getPreviousColumn(Element* focusPtr)
+{
+  unsigned col = focusPtr->col_ - 1;
+  unsigned row = focusPtr->row_;
+  for (ChainLink* link = focusPtr->link; link; link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+
+    if (!elemOps->label)
+      continue;
+
+    if ((elemPtr->col_ == col) && (elemPtr->row_ == row))
+      return elemPtr;	
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+Element* Legend::getFirstElement()
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr_->elements_.displayList);
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+    if (elemOps->label)
+      return elemPtr;
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+Element* Legend::getLastElement()
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(graphPtr_->elements_.displayList); 
+       link; link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+    if (elemOps->label)
+      return elemPtr;
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+ClientData Legend::pickEntry(int xx, int yy, ClassId* classIdPtr)
+{
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)ops_;
+
+  int ww = width_;
+  int hh = height_;
+
+  if (titleHeight_ > 0)
+    yy -= titleHeight_ + ops->yPad;
+
+  xx -= x_ + ops->borderWidth;
+  yy -= y_ + ops->borderWidth;
+  ww -= 2 * ops->borderWidth + 2*ops->xPad;
+  hh -= 2 * ops->borderWidth + 2*ops->yPad;
+
+  // In the bounding box? if so, compute the index
+  if (xx >= 0 && xx < ww && yy >= 0 && yy < hh) {
+    int row    = yy / entryHeight_;
+    int column = xx / entryWidth_;
+    int nn = (column * nRows_) + row;
+
+    // Legend entries are stored in bottom-to-top
+    if (nn < nEntries_) {
+      int count = 0;
+      for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr_->elements_.displayList);
+	   link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+	Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+	ElementOptions* elemOps = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+	if (elemOps->label) {
+	  if (count == nn) {
+	    *classIdPtr = elemPtr->classId();
+	    return elemPtr;
+	  }
+	  count++;
+	}
+      }	      
+    }
+  }
+
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+// Support
+
+static int SelectionProc(ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer,
+			 int maxBytes)
+{
+  Legend* legendPtr = (Legend*)clientData;
+  Graph* graphPtr = legendPtr->graphPtr_;
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)legendPtr->ops();
+
+  if ((ops->exportSelection) == 0)
+    return -1;
+
+  // Retrieve the names of the selected entries
+  Tcl_DString dString;
+  Tcl_DStringInit(&dString);
+  if (legendPtr->flags & SELECT_SORTED) {
+    for (ChainLink* link=Chain_FirstLink(legendPtr->selected_); 
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString, elemPtr->name_, -1);
+      Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString, "\n", -1);
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    for (ChainLink* link=Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->elements_.displayList);
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      if (legendPtr->entryIsSelected(elemPtr)) {
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString, elemPtr->name_, -1);
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString, "\n", -1);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  int nBytes = Tcl_DStringLength(&dString) - offset;
+  strncpy(buffer, Tcl_DStringValue(&dString) + offset, maxBytes);
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+  buffer[maxBytes] = '\0';
+  return MIN(nBytes, maxBytes);
+}
+
+static void SelectCmdProc(ClientData clientData) 
+{
+  Legend* legendPtr = (Legend*)clientData;
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)legendPtr->ops();
+
+  Tcl_Preserve(legendPtr);
+  legendPtr->flags &= ~SELECT_PENDING;
+  if (ops->selectCmd) {
+    Tcl_Interp* interp = legendPtr->graphPtr_->interp_;
+    if (Tcl_GlobalEval(interp, ops->selectCmd) != TCL_OK)
+      Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+  }
+  Tcl_Release(legendPtr);
+}
+
+
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegd.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegd.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..66ffbc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegd.h
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrLegend_h__
+#define __BltGrLegend_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrText.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+  class Pick;
+  class Element;
+
+  /*
+   *  Selection related flags:
+   *	SELECT_PENDING		A "selection" command idle task is pending.
+   *	SELECT_CLEAR		Clear selection flag of entry.
+   *	SELECT_SET		Set selection flag of entry.
+   *	SELECT_TOGGLE		Toggle selection flag of entry.
+   *			        Mask of selection set/clear/toggle flags.
+   *	SELECT_SORTED		Indicates if the entries in the selection 
+   *				should be sorted or displayed in the order 
+   *				they were selected.
+   */
+
+#define SELECT_CLEAR		(1<<24)
+#define SELECT_PENDING		(1<<25)
+#define SELECT_SET		(1<<26)
+#define SELECT_SORTED		(1<<27)
+#define SELECT_TOGGLE		(SELECT_SET | SELECT_CLEAR)
+
+  typedef enum {
+    SELECT_MODE_SINGLE, SELECT_MODE_MULTIPLE
+  } SelectMode;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBg;
+    XColor* activeFgColor;
+    int activeRelief;
+    Tk_3DBorder normalBg;
+    XColor* fgColor;
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;
+    int borderWidth;
+    int reqColumns;
+    int exportSelection;
+    Dashes focusDashes;
+    XColor* focusColor;
+    TextStyleOptions style;
+    int hide;
+    int ixPad;
+    int iyPad;
+    int xPad;
+    int yPad;
+    int raised;
+    int relief;
+    int reqRows;
+    int entryBW;
+    int selBW;
+    int xReq;
+    int yReq;
+    int position;
+    const char *selectCmd;
+    Tk_3DBorder selOutFocusBg;
+    Tk_3DBorder selInFocusBg;
+    XColor* selOutFocusFgColor;
+    XColor* selInFocusFgColor;
+    SelectMode selectMode;
+    int selRelief;
+    const char *title;
+    TextStyleOptions titleStyle;
+  } LegendOptions;
+
+  class Legend : public Pick {
+  public:
+    enum Position {RIGHT, LEFT, TOP, BOTTOM, PLOT, XY};
+
+  protected:
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+
+    GC focusGC_;
+    Tcl_HashTable selectTable_;
+
+  public:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    unsigned int flags;
+
+    int width_;
+    int height_;
+    int x_;
+    int y_;
+
+    int nEntries_;
+    int nColumns_;
+    int nRows_;
+    int entryWidth_;
+    int entryHeight_;
+    BindTable* bindTable_;
+    Element* focusPtr_;
+    Element* selAnchorPtr_;
+    Element* selMarkPtr_;
+    Chain* selected_;
+    int titleWidth_;
+    int titleHeight_;
+
+  protected:
+    void setOrigin();
+    Element* getNextRow(Element*);
+    Element* getNextColumn(Element*);
+    Element* getPreviousRow(Element*);
+    Element* getPreviousColumn(Element*);
+    Element* getFirstElement();
+    Element* getLastElement();
+
+  public:
+    Legend(Graph*);
+    virtual ~Legend();
+
+    int configure();
+    void map(int, int);
+    void draw(Drawable drawable);
+    void print(PSOutput* ps);
+    void eventuallyInvokeSelectCmd();
+
+    void removeElement(Element*);
+    int getElementFromObj(Tcl_Obj*, Element**);
+
+    void selectEntry(Element*);
+    void selectElement(Element*);
+    void deselectElement(Element*);
+    int selectRange(Element*, Element*);
+    void clearSelection();
+    int entryIsSelected(Element*);
+
+    void* ops() {return ops_;}
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable() {return optionTable_;}
+
+    Position position() {return (Position)((LegendOptions*)ops_)->position;}
+    int isRaised() {return ((LegendOptions*)ops_)->raised;}
+    int isHidden() {return ((LegendOptions*)ops_)->hide;}
+
+    ClientData pickEntry(int, int, ClassId*);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegdOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegdOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..139d2f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegdOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,496 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegdOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_LostSelProc LostSelectionProc;
+
+static int LegendObjConfigure(Graph* graphPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)legendPtr->ops(),
+			legendPtr->optionTable(), 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    if (legendPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    graphPtr->flags |= mask;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc != 4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "cget option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, 
+				      (char*)legendPtr->ops(), 
+				      legendPtr->optionTable(),
+				      objv[3], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (objPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  if (objc <= 4) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)legendPtr->ops(), 
+				       legendPtr->optionTable(), 
+				       (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return LegendObjConfigure(graphPtr, interp, objc-3, objv+3);
+}
+
+static int ActivateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)legendPtr->ops();
+
+  const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  int active = (string[0] == 'a') ? 1 : 0;
+  int redraw = 0;
+  for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    
+    const char* pattern = Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]);
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->elements_.displayList);
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      if (Tcl_StringMatch(elemPtr->name_, pattern)) {
+	if (active) {
+	  if (!elemPtr->labelActive_) {
+	    elemPtr->labelActive_ =1;
+	    redraw = 1;
+	  }
+	}
+	else {
+	  if (elemPtr->labelActive_) {
+	    elemPtr->labelActive_ =0;
+	    redraw = 1;
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (redraw && !ops->hide) {
+    graphPtr->flags |= LAYOUT;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+  }
+
+  // List active elements in stacking order
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->elements_.displayList);
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    if (elemPtr->labelActive_) {
+      Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(elemPtr->name_, -1);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+    }
+  }
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int BindOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->elements_.tagTable, &iter); hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      char* tagName = 
+	(char*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&graphPtr->elements_.tagTable, hPtr);
+      Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(tagName, -1);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  return graphPtr->legend_->bindTable_->configure(graphPtr->elementTag(Tcl_GetString(objv[3])), objc - 4, objv + 4);
+}
+
+static int CurselectionOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  if (legendPtr->flags & SELECT_SORTED) {
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(legendPtr->selected_); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(elemPtr->name_, -1);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    // List of selected entries is in stacking order
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->elements_.displayList);
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+
+      if (legendPtr->entryIsSelected(elemPtr)) {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(elemPtr->name_, -1);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int FocusOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+
+  legendPtr->focusPtr_ = NULL;
+  if (objc == 4) {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    if (legendPtr->getElementFromObj(objv[3], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (elemPtr) {
+      legendPtr->focusPtr_ = elemPtr;
+
+      legendPtr->bindTable_->focusItem_ = (ClientData)elemPtr;
+      legendPtr->bindTable_->focusContext_ = elemPtr->classId();
+    }
+  }
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  if (legendPtr->focusPtr_)
+    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),legendPtr->focusPtr_->name_,-1);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int GetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<3)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)legendPtr->ops();
+
+  if (((ops->hide) == 0) && (legendPtr->nEntries_ > 0)) {
+    Element* elemPtr;
+
+    if (legendPtr->getElementFromObj(objv[3], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (elemPtr)
+      Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), elemPtr->name_, -1);
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::legendEnsemble[] = {
+  {"activate",     ActivateOp, 0},
+  {"bind",         BindOp, 0},
+  {"cget",         CgetOp, 0},
+  {"configure",    ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"curselection", CurselectionOp, 0},
+  {"deactivate",   ActivateOp, 0},
+  {"focus",        FocusOp, 0},
+  {"get",          GetOp, 0},
+  {"selection",    0, selectionEnsemble},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+// Selection Ops
+
+static int SelectionAnchorOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  Element* elemPtr;
+
+  if (legendPtr->getElementFromObj(objv[4], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Set both the anchor and the mark. Indicates that a single entry
+  // is selected
+  legendPtr->selAnchorPtr_ = elemPtr;
+  legendPtr->selMarkPtr_ = NULL;
+  if (elemPtr)
+    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), elemPtr->name_, -1);
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SelectionClearallOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  legendPtr->clearSelection();
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SelectionIncludesOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  Element* elemPtr;
+  if (legendPtr->getElementFromObj(objv[4], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int boo = legendPtr->entryIsSelected(elemPtr);
+  Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), boo);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SelectionMarkOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)legendPtr->ops();
+  Element* elemPtr;
+
+  if (legendPtr->getElementFromObj(objv[4], &elemPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (legendPtr->selAnchorPtr_ == NULL) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "selection anchor must be set first", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (legendPtr->selMarkPtr_ != elemPtr) {
+    // Deselect entry from the list all the way back to the anchor
+    ChainLink *link, *next;
+    for (link = Chain_LastLink(legendPtr->selected_); link; link = next) {
+      next = Chain_PrevLink(link);
+      Element *selectPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      if (selectPtr == legendPtr->selAnchorPtr_)
+	break;
+
+      legendPtr->deselectElement(selectPtr);
+    }
+
+    legendPtr->flags &= ~SELECT_TOGGLE;
+    legendPtr->flags |= SELECT_SET;
+    legendPtr->selectRange(legendPtr->selAnchorPtr_, elemPtr);
+    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), elemPtr->name_, -1);
+    legendPtr->selMarkPtr_ = elemPtr;
+
+    if (ops->selectCmd)
+      legendPtr->eventuallyInvokeSelectCmd();
+
+    graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SelectionPresentOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  int boo = (Chain_GetLength(legendPtr->selected_) > 0);
+  Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), boo);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SelectionSetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Legend* legendPtr = graphPtr->legend_;
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)legendPtr->ops();
+
+  legendPtr->flags &= ~SELECT_TOGGLE;
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+  switch (string[0]) {
+  case 's':
+    legendPtr->flags |= SELECT_SET;
+    break;
+  case 'c':
+    legendPtr->flags |= SELECT_CLEAR;
+    break;
+  case 't':
+    legendPtr->flags |= SELECT_TOGGLE;
+    break;
+  }
+
+  Element *firstPtr;
+  if (legendPtr->getElementFromObj(objv[4], &firstPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  ElementOptions* eops = (ElementOptions*)firstPtr->ops();
+
+  if ((eops->hide) && ((legendPtr->flags & SELECT_CLEAR)==0)) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't select hidden node \"", 
+		     Tcl_GetString(objv[4]), "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Element* lastPtr = firstPtr;
+  if (objc > 5) {
+    if (legendPtr->getElementFromObj(objv[5], &lastPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    ElementOptions* eops = (ElementOptions*)firstPtr->ops();
+
+    if (eops->hide && ((legendPtr->flags & SELECT_CLEAR) == 0)) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't select hidden node \"", 
+		       Tcl_GetString(objv[5]), "\"", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (firstPtr == lastPtr)
+    legendPtr->selectEntry(firstPtr);
+  else
+    legendPtr->selectRange(firstPtr, lastPtr);
+
+  // Set both the anchor and the mark. Indicates that a single entry is
+  // selected
+  if (legendPtr->selAnchorPtr_ == NULL)
+    legendPtr->selAnchorPtr_ = firstPtr;
+
+  if (ops->exportSelection)
+    Tk_OwnSelection(graphPtr->tkwin_, XA_PRIMARY, LostSelectionProc, legendPtr);
+
+  if (ops->selectCmd)
+    legendPtr->eventuallyInvokeSelectCmd();
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::selectionEnsemble[] = {
+  {"anchor",   SelectionAnchorOp, 0},
+  {"clear",    SelectionSetOp, 0},
+  {"clearall", SelectionClearallOp, 0},
+  {"includes", SelectionIncludesOp, 0},
+  {"mark",     SelectionMarkOp, 0},
+  {"present",  SelectionPresentOp, 0},
+  {"set",      SelectionSetOp, 0},
+  {"toggle",   SelectionSetOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+// Support
+
+static void LostSelectionProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+  Legend* legendPtr = (Legend*)clientData;
+  LegendOptions* ops = (LegendOptions*)legendPtr->ops();
+  Graph* graphPtr = legendPtr->graphPtr_;
+
+  if (ops->exportSelection)
+    legendPtr->clearSelection();
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+}
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegdOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegdOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6369a2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrLegdOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrLegdOp_h__
+#define __BltGrLegdOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble legendEnsemble[];
+  extern const Ensemble selectionEnsemble[];
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarker.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarker.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f701f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarker.C
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <float.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+Marker::Marker(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+{
+  optionTable_ =NULL;
+  ops_ =NULL;
+
+  graphPtr_ =graphPtr;  
+  name_ = dupstr(name);
+  hashPtr_ = hPtr;
+  link =NULL;
+  flags =0;
+  clipped_ =0;
+}
+
+Marker::~Marker()
+{
+  graphPtr_->bindTable_->deleteBindings(this);
+
+  if (link)
+    graphPtr_->markers_.displayList->deleteLink(link);
+
+  if (hashPtr_)
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashPtr_);
+
+  delete [] name_;
+
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+  free(ops_);
+}
+
+double Marker::HMap(Axis *axisPtr, double x)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+
+  if (x == DBL_MAX)
+    x = 1.0;
+  else if (x == -DBL_MAX)
+    x = 0.0;
+  else {
+    if (ops->logScale) {
+      if (x > 0.0)
+	x = log10(x);
+      else if (x < 0.0)
+	x = 0.0;
+    }
+    x = (x - axisPtr->axisRange_.min) * axisPtr->axisRange_.scale;
+  }
+  if (ops->descending)
+    x = 1.0 - x;
+
+  // Horizontal transformation
+  return (x * axisPtr->screenRange_ + axisPtr->screenMin_);
+}
+
+double Marker::VMap(Axis *axisPtr, double y)
+{
+  AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+
+  if (y == DBL_MAX)
+    y = 1.0;
+  else if (y == -DBL_MAX)
+    y = 0.0;
+  else {
+    if (ops->logScale) {
+      if (y > 0.0)
+	y = log10(y);
+      else if (y < 0.0)
+	y = 0.0;
+    }
+    y = (y - axisPtr->axisRange_.min) * axisPtr->axisRange_.scale;
+  }
+  if (ops->descending)
+    y = 1.0 - y;
+
+  // Vertical transformation
+  return (((1.0 - y) * axisPtr->screenRange_) + axisPtr->screenMin_);
+}
+
+Point2d Marker::mapPoint(Point2d* pointPtr, Axis* xAxis, Axis* yAxis)
+{
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+  Point2d result;
+  if (gops->inverted) {
+    result.x = HMap(yAxis, pointPtr->y);
+    result.y = VMap(xAxis, pointPtr->x);
+  }
+  else {
+    result.x = HMap(xAxis, pointPtr->x);
+    result.y = VMap(yAxis, pointPtr->y);
+  }
+
+  return result;
+}
+
+int Marker::boxesDontOverlap(Graph* graphPtr_, Region2d *extsPtr)
+{
+  return (((double)graphPtr_->right_ < extsPtr->left) ||
+	  ((double)graphPtr_->bottom_ < extsPtr->top) ||
+	  (extsPtr->right < (double)graphPtr_->left_) ||
+	  (extsPtr->bottom < (double)graphPtr_->top_));
+}
+
+int Marker::regionInPolygon(Region2d *regionPtr, Point2d *points, int nPoints,
+			    int enclosed)
+{
+  if (enclosed) {
+    // All points of the polygon must be inside the rectangle.
+    for (Point2d *pp = points, *pend = pp + nPoints; pp < pend; pp++) {
+      if ((pp->x < regionPtr->left) || (pp->x > regionPtr->right) ||
+	  (pp->y < regionPtr->top) || (pp->y > regionPtr->bottom)) {
+	return 0;	/* One point is exterior. */
+      }
+    }
+    return 1;
+  }
+  else {
+    // If any segment of the polygon clips the bounding region, the
+    // polygon overlaps the rectangle.
+    points[nPoints] = points[0];
+    for (Point2d *pp = points, *pend = pp + nPoints; pp < pend; pp++) {
+      Point2d p = *pp;
+      Point2d q = *(pp + 1);
+      if (lineRectClip(regionPtr, &p, &q))
+	return 1;
+    }
+
+    // Otherwise the polygon and rectangle are either disjoint or
+    // enclosed.  Check if one corner of the rectangle is inside the polygon.
+    Point2d r;
+    r.x = regionPtr->left;
+    r.y = regionPtr->top;
+
+    return pointInPolygon(&r, points, nPoints);
+  }
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarker.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarker.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..573357d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarker.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrMarker_h__
+#define __BltGrMarker_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltChain.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+  class Postscript;
+  class Axis;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Point2d* points;
+    int num;
+  } Coords;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char** tags;
+    Coords* worldPts;
+    const char* elemName;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    int hide;
+    int drawUnder;
+    int xOffset;
+    int yOffset;
+  } MarkerOptions;
+
+  class Marker {
+  protected:
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+
+  public:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    const char *name_;
+    Tcl_HashEntry* hashPtr_;
+    ChainLink* link;
+    unsigned int flags;		
+    int clipped_;
+
+  protected:
+    double HMap(Axis*, double);
+    double VMap(Axis*, double);
+    Point2d mapPoint(Point2d*, Axis*, Axis*);
+    int boxesDontOverlap(Graph*, Region2d*);
+    int regionInPolygon(Region2d *extsPtr, Point2d *points, 
+			int nPoints, int enclosed);
+
+  public:
+    Marker(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~Marker();
+
+    virtual int configure() =0;
+    virtual void draw(Drawable) =0;
+    virtual void map() =0;
+    virtual int pointIn(Point2d*) =0;
+    virtual int regionIn(Region2d*, int) =0;
+    virtual void print(PSOutput*) =0;
+
+    virtual ClassId classId() =0;
+    virtual const char* className() =0;
+    virtual const char* typeName() =0;
+
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable() {return optionTable_;}
+    void* ops() {return ops_;}
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerLine.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerLine.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82c9ab8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerLine.C
@@ -0,0 +1,298 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerOption.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define BOUND(x, lo, hi) (((x) > (hi)) ? (hi) : ((x) < (lo)) ? (lo) : (x))
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-bindtags", "bindTags", "BindTags", 
+   "Line all", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, tags), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &listObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-cap", "cap", "Cap", 
+   "butt", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, capStyle),
+   0, &capStyleObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-coords", "coords", "Coords",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, worldPts), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &coordsObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-dashes", "dashes", "Dashes",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, dashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", "dashOffset", "DashOffset",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, dashes.offset), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-element", "element", "Element", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, elemName),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-fill", "fill", "Fill",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, fillColor),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-join", "join", "Join", 
+   "miter", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, joinStyle),
+   0, &joinStyleObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-linewidth", "lineWidth", "LineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, lineWidth), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, hide), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapx", "mapX", "MapX",
+   "x", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, xAxis), 0, &xAxisObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapy", "mapY", "MapY", 
+   "y", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, yAxis), 0, &yAxisObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-outline", "outline", "Outline",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, outlineColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-under", "under", "Under",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, drawUnder), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-xoffset", "xOffset", "XOffset",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, xOffset), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-yoffset", "yOffset", "YOffset",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineMarkerOptions, yOffset), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+LineMarker::LineMarker(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr) 
+  : Marker(graphPtr, name, hPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (LineMarkerOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(LineMarkerOptions));
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr->interp_, optionSpecs);
+
+  gc_ =NULL;
+  segments_ =NULL;
+  nSegments_ =0;
+}
+
+LineMarker::~LineMarker()
+{
+  if (gc_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(gc_);
+  delete [] segments_;
+}
+
+int LineMarker::configure()
+{
+  LineMarkerOptions* ops = (LineMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  unsigned long gcMask = (GCLineWidth | GCLineStyle | GCCapStyle | GCJoinStyle);
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  if (ops->outlineColor) {
+    gcMask |= GCForeground;
+    gcValues.foreground = ops->outlineColor->pixel;
+  }
+  if (ops->fillColor) {
+    gcMask |= GCBackground;
+    gcValues.background = ops->fillColor->pixel;
+  }
+  gcValues.cap_style = ops->capStyle;
+  gcValues.join_style = ops->joinStyle;
+  gcValues.line_width = ops->lineWidth;
+  gcValues.line_style = LineSolid;
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->dashes)) {
+    gcValues.line_style = 
+      (gcMask & GCBackground) ? LineDoubleDash : LineOnOffDash;
+  }
+
+  GC newGC = graphPtr_->getPrivateGC(gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (gc_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(gc_);
+
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->dashes))
+    graphPtr_->setDashes(newGC, &ops->dashes);
+  gc_ = newGC;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void LineMarker::draw(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  if (nSegments_ > 0)
+    graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, gc_, segments_, nSegments_);
+}
+
+void LineMarker::map()
+{
+  LineMarkerOptions* ops = (LineMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  delete [] segments_;
+  segments_ = NULL;
+  nSegments_ = 0;
+
+  if (!ops->worldPts || (ops->worldPts->num < 2))
+    return;
+
+  Region2d extents;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&extents);
+
+  // Allow twice the number of world coordinates. The line will represented
+  // as series of line segments, not one continous polyline.  This is
+  // because clipping against the plot area may chop the line into several
+  // disconnected segments.
+
+  Segment2d* segments = new Segment2d[ops->worldPts->num];
+  Point2d* srcPtr = ops->worldPts->points;
+  Point2d p = mapPoint(srcPtr, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+  p.x += ops->xOffset;
+  p.y += ops->yOffset;
+
+  Segment2d* segPtr = segments;
+  Point2d* pend;
+  for (srcPtr++, pend = ops->worldPts->points + ops->worldPts->num; 
+       srcPtr < pend; srcPtr++) {
+    Point2d next = mapPoint(srcPtr, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+    next.x += ops->xOffset;
+    next.y += ops->yOffset;
+    Point2d q = next;
+
+    if (lineRectClip(&extents, &p, &q)) {
+      segPtr->p = p;
+      segPtr->q = q;
+      segPtr++;
+    }
+    p = next;
+  }
+  nSegments_ = segPtr - segments;
+  segments_ = segments;
+  clipped_ = (nSegments_ == 0);
+}
+
+int LineMarker::pointIn(Point2d *samplePtr)
+{
+  GraphOptions* gops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr_->ops_;
+  return pointInSegments(samplePtr, segments_, nSegments_, 
+			 (double)gops->search.halo);
+}
+
+int LineMarker::pointInSegments(Point2d* samplePtr, Segment2d* segments,
+				int nSegments, double halo)
+{
+  double minDist = DBL_MAX;
+  for (Segment2d *sp = segments, *send = sp + nSegments; sp < send; sp++) {
+    Point2d t = getProjection((int)samplePtr->x, (int)samplePtr->y, 
+			  &sp->p, &sp->q);
+    double right;
+    double left;
+    if (sp->p.x > sp->q.x) {
+      right = sp->p.x;
+      left = sp->q.x;
+    }
+    else {
+      right = sp->q.x;
+      left = sp->p.x;
+    }
+
+    double top;
+    double bottom;
+    if (sp->p.y > sp->q.y) {
+      bottom = sp->p.y;
+      top = sp->q.y;
+    }
+    else {
+      bottom = sp->q.y;
+      top = sp->p.y;
+    }
+
+    Point2d p;
+    p.x = BOUND(t.x, left, right);
+    p.y = BOUND(t.y, top, bottom);
+
+    double dist = hypot(p.x - samplePtr->x, p.y - samplePtr->y);
+    if (dist < minDist)
+      minDist = dist;
+  }
+
+  return (minDist < halo);
+}
+
+int LineMarker::regionIn(Region2d *extsPtr, int enclosed)
+{
+  LineMarkerOptions* ops = (LineMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->worldPts || ops->worldPts->num < 2)
+    return 0;
+
+  if (enclosed) {
+    for (Point2d *pp = ops->worldPts->points, *pend = pp + ops->worldPts->num; 
+	 pp < pend; pp++) {
+      Point2d p = mapPoint(pp, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+      if ((p.x < extsPtr->left) && (p.x > extsPtr->right) &&
+	  (p.y < extsPtr->top) && (p.y > extsPtr->bottom)) {
+	return 0;
+      }
+    }
+    return 1;
+  }
+  else {
+    int count = 0;
+    for (Point2d *pp=ops->worldPts->points, *pend=pp+(ops->worldPts->num - 1); 
+	 pp < pend; pp++) {
+      Point2d p = mapPoint(pp, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+      Point2d q = mapPoint(pp + 1, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+      if (lineRectClip(extsPtr, &p, &q))
+	count++;
+    }
+    return (count > 0);		/* At least 1 segment passes through
+				 * region. */
+  }
+}
+
+void LineMarker::print(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  LineMarkerOptions* ops = (LineMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (nSegments_ > 0) {
+    psPtr->setLineAttributes(ops->outlineColor, ops->lineWidth,
+			     &ops->dashes, ops->capStyle, ops->joinStyle);
+    if ((LineIsDashed(ops->dashes)) && (ops->fillColor)) {
+      psPtr->append("/DashesProc {\n  gsave\n    ");
+      psPtr->setBackground(ops->fillColor);
+      psPtr->append("    ");
+      psPtr->setDashes(NULL);
+      psPtr->append("stroke\n");
+      psPtr->append("grestore\n");
+      psPtr->append("} def\n");
+    } 
+    else
+      psPtr->append("/DashesProc {} def\n");
+
+    psPtr->printSegments(segments_, nSegments_);
+  }
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerLine.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerLine.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3191951
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerLine.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrMarkerLine_h__
+#define __BltGrMarkerLine_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char** tags;
+    Coords* worldPts;
+    const char* elemName;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    int hide;
+    int drawUnder;
+    int xOffset;
+    int yOffset;
+
+    int capStyle;
+    Dashes dashes;
+    XColor* fillColor;
+    int joinStyle;
+    int lineWidth;
+    XColor* outlineColor;
+  } LineMarkerOptions;
+
+  class LineMarker : public Marker {
+  protected:
+    GC gc_;
+    Segment2d* segments_;
+    int nSegments_;
+
+  protected:
+    int configure();
+    void draw(Drawable);
+    void map();
+    int pointIn(Point2d*);
+    int regionIn(Region2d*, int);
+    void print(PSOutput*);
+    int pointInSegments(Point2d *samplePtr, Segment2d *segments, 
+			int nSegments, double halo);
+
+  public:
+    LineMarker(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~LineMarker();
+
+    ClassId classId() {return CID_MARKER_LINE;}
+    const char* className() {return "LineMarker";}
+    const char* typeName() {return "line";}
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5103a3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,495 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerText.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static int GetMarkerFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Graph* graphPtr, 
+			    Tcl_Obj* objPtr, Marker** markerPtrPtr);
+
+#define FIND_ENCLOSED	 (1<<0)
+#define FIND_OVERLAPPING (1<<1)
+
+static int MarkerObjConfigure( Graph* graphPtr,Marker* markerPtr,
+			       Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)markerPtr->ops(), 
+			markerPtr->optionTable(), 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    markerPtr->flags |= MAP_ITEM;
+    if (markerPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    MarkerOptions* ops = (MarkerOptions*)markerPtr->ops();
+    if (ops->drawUnder)
+      graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+    graphPtr->flags |= mask;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CreateMarker(Graph* graphPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  int offset = 5;
+  const char* name =NULL;
+  ostringstream str;
+  if (objc == 4) {
+    offset = 4;
+    str << "marker" << graphPtr->nextMarkerId_++ << ends;
+    name = dupstr(str.str().c_str());
+  }
+  else {
+    name = dupstr(Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+    if (name[0] == '-') {
+      delete [] name;
+      offset = 4;
+      str << "marker" << graphPtr->nextMarkerId_++ << ends;
+      name = dupstr(str.str().c_str());
+    }
+  }
+
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr =
+    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&graphPtr->markers_.table, name, &isNew);
+  if (!isNew) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(graphPtr->interp_, "marker \"", name,
+		     "\" already exists in \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
+		     "\"", NULL);
+    delete [] name;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  const char* type = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+  Marker* markerPtr;
+  if (!strcmp(type, "line"))
+    markerPtr = new LineMarker(graphPtr, name, hPtr);
+  else if (!strcmp(type, "polygon"))
+    markerPtr = new PolygonMarker(graphPtr, name, hPtr);
+  else if (!strcmp(type, "text"))
+    markerPtr = new TextMarker(graphPtr, name, hPtr);
+  else {
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+    delete [] name;
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown marker type ", type, NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, markerPtr);
+
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(graphPtr->interp_, (char*)markerPtr->ops(), markerPtr->optionTable(), graphPtr->tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (MarkerObjConfigure(graphPtr, markerPtr, interp, objc-offset, objv+offset) != TCL_OK)) {
+    delete markerPtr;
+    delete [] name;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  // Unlike elements, new markers are drawn on top of old markers
+  markerPtr->link = graphPtr->markers_.displayList->prepend(markerPtr);
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), name, -1);
+
+  delete [] name;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markerId option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Marker* markerPtr;
+  if (GetMarkerFromObj(interp, graphPtr, objv[3], &markerPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, 
+				      (char*)markerPtr->ops(), 
+				      markerPtr->optionTable(),
+				      objv[4], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (objPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markerId ?option value...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Marker* markerPtr;
+  if (GetMarkerFromObj(interp, graphPtr, objv[3], &markerPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (objc <= 5) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)markerPtr->ops(), 
+				       markerPtr->optionTable(), 
+				       (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return MarkerObjConfigure(graphPtr, markerPtr, interp, objc-4, objv+4);
+}
+
+static int BindOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry* hp = 
+	   Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->markers_.tagTable, &iter); 
+	 hp; hp = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+
+      const char* tag = 
+	(const char*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&graphPtr->markers_.tagTable, hp);
+      Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(tag, -1);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, objPtr);
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } else if (objc >= 4) {
+    return graphPtr->bindTable_->configure(graphPtr->markerTag(Tcl_GetString(objv[3])), objc - 4, objv + 4);
+  } else {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markerId ?tag? ?sequence? ?command?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CreateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "markerId ?type? ?option value...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (CreateMarker(graphPtr, interp, objc, objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  // set in CreateMarker
+  // Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[3]);
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int DeleteOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc<4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "markerId...");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  int res = TCL_OK;
+
+  for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    Marker* markerPtr;
+    const char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]);
+    Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&graphPtr->markers_.table, string);
+    if (!hPtr) {
+      if (res == TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't find markers in \"",
+			 Tk_PathName(graphPtr->tkwin_), "\":", NULL);
+      }
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]));
+      res = TCL_ERROR;
+    } else {
+      markerPtr = (Marker*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      delete markerPtr;
+    }
+  }
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return res;
+}
+
+static int ExistsOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markerId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr =
+    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&graphPtr->markers_.table, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+  Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), (hPtr != NULL));
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int FindOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=8) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "searchtype left top right bottom");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+  int mode;
+  if (strcmp(string, "enclosed") == 0)
+    mode = FIND_ENCLOSED;
+  else if (strcmp(string, "overlapping") == 0)
+    mode = FIND_OVERLAPPING;
+  else {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad search type \"", string, 
+		     ": should be \"enclosed\", or \"overlapping\"",
+		     NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  int left, right, top, bottom;
+  if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &left) != TCL_OK) ||
+      (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &top) != TCL_OK) ||
+      (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[6], &right) != TCL_OK) ||
+      (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[7], &bottom) != TCL_OK)) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Region2d extents;
+  if (left < right) {
+    extents.left = (double)left;
+    extents.right = (double)right;
+  }
+  else {
+    extents.left = (double)right;
+    extents.right = (double)left;
+  }
+  if (top < bottom) {
+    extents.top = (double)top;
+    extents.bottom = (double)bottom;
+  }
+  else {
+    extents.top = (double)bottom;
+    extents.bottom = (double)top;
+  }
+
+  int enclosed = (mode == FIND_ENCLOSED);
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->markers_.displayList);
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    MarkerOptions* ops = (MarkerOptions*)markerPtr->ops();
+    if (ops->hide)
+      continue;
+
+    if (graphPtr->isElementHidden(markerPtr))
+      continue;
+
+    if (markerPtr->regionIn(&extents, enclosed)) {
+      Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_SetStringObj(objPtr, markerPtr->name_, -1);
+      return TCL_OK;
+    }
+  }
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), "", -1);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int NamesOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    for (ChainLink* link=Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->markers_.displayList); 
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr,
+			       Tcl_NewStringObj(markerPtr->name_, -1));
+    }
+  } 
+  else {
+    for (ChainLink* link=Chain_FirstLink(graphPtr->markers_.displayList); 
+	 link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      for (int ii = 3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+	const char* pattern = (const char*)Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]);
+	if (Tcl_StringMatch(markerPtr->name_, pattern)) {
+	  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr,
+				   Tcl_NewStringObj(markerPtr->name_, -1));
+	  break;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int RelinkOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4 && objc!=5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markerId ?placeId?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Marker* markerPtr;
+  if (GetMarkerFromObj(interp, graphPtr, objv[3], &markerPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Marker* placePtr =NULL;
+  if (objc == 5)
+    if (GetMarkerFromObj(interp, graphPtr, objv[4], &placePtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  ChainLink* link = markerPtr->link;
+  graphPtr->markers_.displayList->unlinkLink(markerPtr->link);
+
+  ChainLink* place = placePtr ? placePtr->link : NULL;
+
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  if (string[0] == 'l')
+    graphPtr->markers_.displayList->linkAfter(link, place);
+  else
+    graphPtr->markers_.displayList->linkBefore(link, place);
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= CACHE;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int TypeOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc!=4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markerId");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Marker* markerPtr;
+  if (GetMarkerFromObj(interp, graphPtr, objv[3], &markerPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), markerPtr->typeName(), -1);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::markerEnsemble[] = {
+  {"bind",      BindOp, 0},
+  {"cget",      CgetOp, 0},
+  {"configure", ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"create",    CreateOp, 0},
+  {"delete",    DeleteOp, 0},
+  {"exists",    ExistsOp, 0},
+  {"find",      FindOp, 0},
+  {"lower",     RelinkOp, 0},
+  {"names",     NamesOp, 0},
+  {"raise",     RelinkOp, 0},
+  {"type",      TypeOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+// Support
+
+static int GetMarkerFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Graph* graphPtr, 
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Marker** markerPtrPtr)
+{
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&graphPtr->markers_.table, string);
+  if (hPtr) {
+    *markerPtrPtr = (Marker*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  if (interp) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't find marker \"", string, 
+		     "\" in \"", Tk_PathName(graphPtr->tkwin_), "\"", NULL);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f7c16f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __Blt_GrMarkerOp_h__
+#define __Blt_GrMarkerOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble markerEnsemble[];
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOption.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOption.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b13fd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOption.C
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <float.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerOption.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tcl_Obj* PrintCoordinate(double x);
+static int GetCoordinate(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *valuePtr);
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc CoordsSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc CoordsGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc CoordsFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption coordsObjOption =
+  {
+    "coords", CoordsSetProc, CoordsGetProc, RestoreProc, CoordsFreeProc, NULL
+  };
+
+static int CoordsSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			 Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+			 int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  Coords** coordsPtrPtr = (Coords**)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = *(double*)coordsPtrPtr;
+
+  if (!coordsPtrPtr)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  int objc;
+  Tcl_Obj** objv;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, *objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (objc == 0) {
+    *coordsPtrPtr = NULL;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  if (objc & 1) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "odd number of marker coordinates specified",NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Coords* coordsPtr = new Coords;
+  coordsPtr->num = objc/2;
+  coordsPtr->points = new Point2d[coordsPtr->num];
+
+  Point2d* pp = coordsPtr->points;
+  for (int ii=0; ii<objc; ii+=2) {
+    double x, y;
+    if ((GetCoordinate(interp, objv[ii], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
+	(GetCoordinate(interp, objv[ii+1], &y) != TCL_OK))
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    pp->x = x;
+    pp->y = y;
+    pp++;
+  }
+
+  *coordsPtrPtr = coordsPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* CoordsGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			      char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  Coords* coordsPtr = *(Coords**)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  if (!coordsPtr)
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+  int cnt = coordsPtr->num*2;
+  Tcl_Obj** ll = new Tcl_Obj*[cnt];
+
+  Point2d* pp = coordsPtr->points;
+  for (int ii=0; ii<cnt; pp++) {
+    ll[ii++] = PrintCoordinate(pp->x);
+    ll[ii++] = PrintCoordinate(pp->y);
+  }
+
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(cnt, ll);
+  delete [] ll;
+  return listObjPtr;
+}
+
+static void CoordsFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			   char *ptr)
+{
+  Coords* coordsPtr = *(Coords**)ptr;
+  if (coordsPtr) {
+    delete [] coordsPtr->points;
+    delete coordsPtr;
+  }
+}
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc CapStyleSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc CapStyleGetProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption capStyleObjOption =
+  {
+    "capStyle", CapStyleSetProc, CapStyleGetProc, NULL, NULL, NULL
+  };
+
+static int CapStyleSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			   Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+			   int offset, char* save, int flags)
+{
+  int* ptr = (int*)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  Tk_Uid uid = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(*objPtr));
+  int cap;
+  if (Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, uid, &cap) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  *ptr = cap;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* CapStyleGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			      char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  int* ptr = (int*)(widgRec + offset);
+  return Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfCapStyle(*ptr), -1);
+}
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc JoinStyleSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc JoinStyleGetProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption joinStyleObjOption =
+  {
+    "joinStyle", JoinStyleSetProc, JoinStyleGetProc, NULL, NULL, NULL
+  };
+
+static int JoinStyleSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			   Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+			   int offset, char* save, int flags)
+{
+  int* ptr = (int*)(widgRec + offset);
+
+  Tk_Uid uid = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(*objPtr));
+  int join;
+  if (Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, uid, &join) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  *ptr = join;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* JoinStyleGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			      char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  int* ptr = (int*)(widgRec + offset);
+  return Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(*ptr), -1);
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* PrintCoordinate(double x)
+{
+  if (x == DBL_MAX)
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj("+Inf", -1);
+  else if (x == -DBL_MAX)
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj("-Inf", -1);
+  else
+    return Tcl_NewDoubleObj(x);
+}
+
+static int GetCoordinate(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *valuePtr)
+{
+  const char* expr = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  char c = expr[0];
+  if ((c == 'I') && (strcmp(expr, "Inf") == 0))
+    *valuePtr = DBL_MAX;		/* Elastic upper bound */
+  else if ((c == '-') && (expr[1] == 'I') && (strcmp(expr, "-Inf") == 0))
+    *valuePtr = -DBL_MAX;		/* Elastic lower bound */
+  else if ((c == '+') && (expr[1] == 'I') && (strcmp(expr, "+Inf") == 0))
+    *valuePtr = DBL_MAX;		/* Elastic upper bound */
+  else if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objPtr, valuePtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOption.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOption.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..143810e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerOption.h
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __Blt_GrMarkerOption_h__
+#define __Blt_GrMarkerOption_h__
+
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption coordsObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption capStyleObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption joinStyleObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption xAxisObjOption;
+extern Tk_ObjCustomOption yAxisObjOption;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..383d0e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.C
@@ -0,0 +1,298 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerOption.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-bindtags", "bindTags", "BindTags", 
+   "Polygon all", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, tags), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &listObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-cap", "cap", "Cap", 
+   "butt", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, capStyle),
+   0, &capStyleObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-coords", "coords", "Coords",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, worldPts), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &coordsObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-dashes", "dashes", "Dashes",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, dashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-element", "element", "Element", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, elemName),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-fill", "fill", "Fill", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, fill),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-join", "join", "Join", 
+   "miter", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, joinStyle),
+   0, &joinStyleObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-linewidth", "lineWidth", "LineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, lineWidth), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, hide), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapx", "mapX", "MapX",
+   "x", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, xAxis), 0, &xAxisObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapy", "mapY", "MapY", 
+   "y", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, yAxis), 0, &yAxisObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-outline", "outline", "Outline", 
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, outline), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-under", "under", "Under",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, drawUnder), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-xoffset", "xOffset", "XOffset",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, xOffset), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-yoffset", "yOffset", "YOffset",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(PolygonMarkerOptions, yOffset), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+PolygonMarker::PolygonMarker(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, 
+			     Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr) 
+  : Marker(graphPtr, name, hPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (PolygonMarkerOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(PolygonMarkerOptions));
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr->interp_, optionSpecs);
+
+  screenPts_ =NULL;
+  outlineGC_ =NULL;
+  fillGC_ =NULL;
+  fillPts_ =NULL;
+  nFillPts_ =0;
+  outlinePts_ =NULL;
+  nOutlinePts_ =0;
+}
+
+PolygonMarker::~PolygonMarker()
+{
+  if (fillGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, fillGC_);
+  if (outlineGC_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(outlineGC_);
+  delete [] fillPts_;
+  delete [] outlinePts_;
+  delete [] screenPts_;
+}
+
+int PolygonMarker::configure()
+{
+  PolygonMarkerOptions* ops = (PolygonMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  // outlineGC
+  unsigned long gcMask = (GCLineWidth | GCLineStyle);
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  if (ops->outline) {
+    gcMask |= GCForeground;
+    gcValues.foreground = ops->outline->pixel;
+  }
+  gcMask |= (GCCapStyle | GCJoinStyle);
+  gcValues.cap_style = ops->capStyle;
+  gcValues.join_style = ops->joinStyle;
+  gcValues.line_style = LineSolid;
+  gcValues.dash_offset = 0;
+  gcValues.line_width = ops->lineWidth;
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->dashes))
+    gcValues.line_style = LineOnOffDash;
+
+  GC newGC = graphPtr_->getPrivateGC(gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (LineIsDashed(ops->dashes))
+    graphPtr_->setDashes(newGC, &ops->dashes);
+  if (outlineGC_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(outlineGC_);
+  outlineGC_ = newGC;
+
+  // fillGC
+  gcMask = 0;
+  if (ops->fill) {
+    gcMask |= GCForeground;
+    gcValues.foreground = ops->fill->pixel;
+  }
+  newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (fillGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, fillGC_);
+  fillGC_ = newGC;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void PolygonMarker::draw(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  PolygonMarkerOptions* ops = (PolygonMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  // fill region
+  if ((nFillPts_ > 0) && (ops->fill)) {
+    XPoint* points = new XPoint[nFillPts_];
+    if (!points)
+      return;
+
+    XPoint* dp = points;
+    for (Point2d *sp = fillPts_, *send = sp + nFillPts_; sp < send; sp++) {
+      dp->x = (short)sp->x;
+      dp->y = (short)sp->y;
+      dp++;
+    }
+
+    XFillPolygon(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, fillGC_, points, 
+		 nFillPts_, Complex, CoordModeOrigin);
+    delete [] points;
+  }
+
+  // outline
+  if ((nOutlinePts_ > 0) && (ops->lineWidth > 0) && (ops->outline))
+    graphPtr_->drawSegments(drawable, outlineGC_, outlinePts_, nOutlinePts_);
+}
+
+void PolygonMarker::map()
+{
+  PolygonMarkerOptions* ops = (PolygonMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (outlinePts_) {
+    delete [] outlinePts_;
+    outlinePts_ = NULL;
+    nOutlinePts_ = 0;
+  }
+
+  if (fillPts_) {
+    delete [] fillPts_;
+    fillPts_ = NULL;
+    nFillPts_ = 0;
+  }
+
+  if (screenPts_) {
+    delete [] screenPts_;
+    screenPts_ = NULL;
+  }
+
+  if (!ops->worldPts || ops->worldPts->num < 3)
+    return;
+
+  // Allocate and fill a temporary array to hold the screen coordinates of
+  // the polygon.
+
+  int nScreenPts = ops->worldPts->num + 1;
+  Point2d* screenPts = new Point2d[nScreenPts + 1];
+  {
+    Point2d* dp = screenPts;
+    for (Point2d *sp = ops->worldPts->points, *send = sp + ops->worldPts->num; 
+	 sp < send; sp++) {
+      *dp = mapPoint(sp, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+      dp->x += ops->xOffset;
+      dp->y += ops->yOffset;
+      dp++;
+    }
+    *dp = screenPts[0];
+  }
+  Region2d extents;
+  graphPtr_->extents(&extents);
+
+  clipped_ = 1;
+  if (ops->fill) {
+    Point2d* lfillPts = new Point2d[nScreenPts * 3];
+    int n = polyRectClip(&extents, screenPts, ops->worldPts->num,lfillPts);
+    if (n < 3)
+      delete [] lfillPts;
+    else {
+      nFillPts_ = n;
+      fillPts_ = lfillPts;
+      clipped_ = 0;
+    }
+  }
+  if ((ops->outline) && (ops->lineWidth > 0)) { 
+    // Generate line segments representing the polygon outline.  The
+    // resulting outline may or may not be closed from viewport clipping.
+    Segment2d* outlinePts = new Segment2d[nScreenPts];
+    if (!outlinePts)
+      return;
+
+    // Note that this assumes that the point array contains an extra point
+    // that closes the polygon.
+    Segment2d* segPtr = outlinePts;
+    for (Point2d *sp=screenPts, *send=sp+(nScreenPts - 1); sp < send; sp++) {
+      segPtr->p = sp[0];
+      segPtr->q = sp[1];
+      if (lineRectClip(&extents, &segPtr->p, &segPtr->q)) {
+	segPtr++;
+      }
+    }
+    nOutlinePts_ = segPtr - outlinePts;
+    outlinePts_ = outlinePts;
+    if (nOutlinePts_ > 0)
+      clipped_ = 0;
+  }
+
+  screenPts_ = screenPts;
+}
+
+int PolygonMarker::pointIn(Point2d *samplePtr)
+{
+  PolygonMarkerOptions* ops = (PolygonMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->worldPts && (ops->worldPts->num >= 3) && screenPts_)
+    return pointInPolygon(samplePtr, screenPts_, ops->worldPts->num + 1);
+
+  return 0;
+}
+
+int PolygonMarker::regionIn(Region2d *extsPtr, int enclosed)
+{
+  PolygonMarkerOptions* ops = (PolygonMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+    
+  if (ops->worldPts && (ops->worldPts->num >= 3) && screenPts_)
+    return regionInPolygon(extsPtr, screenPts_, ops->worldPts->num, enclosed);
+
+  return 0;
+}
+
+void PolygonMarker::print(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  PolygonMarkerOptions* ops = (PolygonMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->fill) {
+    psPtr->printPolyline(fillPts_, nFillPts_);
+    psPtr->setForeground(ops->fill);
+    psPtr->append("fill\n");
+  }
+
+  if ((ops->lineWidth > 0) && (ops->outline)) {
+    psPtr->setLineAttributes(ops->outline, ops->lineWidth, &ops->dashes,
+			     ops->capStyle, ops->joinStyle);
+    psPtr->append("/DashesProc {} def\n");
+
+    psPtr->printSegments(outlinePts_, nOutlinePts_);
+  }
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8eb2216
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerPolygon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrMarkerPolygon_h__
+#define __BltGrMarkerPolygon_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char** tags;
+    Coords* worldPts;
+    const char* elemName;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    int hide;
+    int drawUnder;
+    int xOffset;
+    int yOffset;
+
+    int capStyle;
+    Dashes dashes;
+    XColor* fill;
+    int joinStyle;
+    int lineWidth;
+    XColor* outline;
+  } PolygonMarkerOptions;
+
+  class PolygonMarker : public Marker {
+  protected:
+    Point2d *screenPts_;
+    GC outlineGC_;
+    GC fillGC_;
+    Point2d *fillPts_;
+    int nFillPts_;
+    Segment2d *outlinePts_;
+    int nOutlinePts_;
+
+  protected:
+    int configure();
+    void draw(Drawable);
+    void map();
+    int pointIn(Point2d*);
+    int regionIn(Region2d*, int);
+    void print(PSOutput*);
+
+  public:
+    PolygonMarker(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~PolygonMarker();
+
+    ClassId classId() {return CID_MARKER_POLYGON;}
+    const char* className() {return "PolygonMarker";}
+    const char* typeName() {return "polygon";}
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerText.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerText.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c4da2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerText.C
@@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerText.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerOption.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor", 
+   "center", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, anchor), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-background", "background", "Background",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, fillColor),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-background", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-bindtags", "bindTags", "BindTags", 
+   "Text all", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, tags), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &listObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-coords", "coords", "Coords",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, worldPts), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &coordsObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-element", "element", "Element", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, elemName),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-foreground", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fill", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-background", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", 
+   STD_FONT_NORMAL, -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, style.font), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, style.color),
+   0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
+   "left", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, style.justify), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, hide), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapx", "mapX", "MapX",
+   "x", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, xAxis), 0, &xAxisObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-mapy", "mapY", "MapY", 
+   "y", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, yAxis), 0, &yAxisObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-outline", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-foreground", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-rotate", "rotate", "Rotate", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, style.angle), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, string), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-under", "under", "Under",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, drawUnder), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-xoffset", "xOffset", "XOffset",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, xOffset), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-yoffset", "yOffset", "YOffset",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(TextMarkerOptions, yOffset), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+TextMarker::TextMarker(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr) 
+  : Marker(graphPtr, name, hPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (TextMarkerOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(TextMarkerOptions));
+  TextMarkerOptions* ops = (TextMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  ops->style.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->style.color =NULL;
+  ops->style.font =NULL;
+  ops->style.angle =0;
+  ops->style.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  anchorPt_.x =0;
+  anchorPt_.y =0;
+  width_ =0;
+  height_ =0;
+  fillGC_ =NULL;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr->interp_, optionSpecs);
+}
+
+TextMarker::~TextMarker()
+{
+}
+
+int TextMarker::configure()
+{
+  TextMarkerOptions* ops = (TextMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  ops->style.angle = (float)fmod(ops->style.angle, 360.0);
+  if (ops->style.angle < 0.0)
+    ops->style.angle += 360.0;
+
+  GC newGC = NULL;
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  unsigned long gcMask;
+  if (ops->fillColor) {
+    gcMask = GCForeground;
+    gcValues.foreground = ops->fillColor->pixel;
+    newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+  }
+  if (fillGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, fillGC_);
+  fillGC_ = newGC;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void TextMarker::draw(Drawable drawable) 
+{
+  TextMarkerOptions* ops = (TextMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->string)
+    return;
+
+  if (fillGC_) {
+    XPoint points[4];
+    for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+      points[ii].x = (short)(outline_[ii].x + anchorPt_.x);
+      points[ii].y = (short)(outline_[ii].y + anchorPt_.y);
+    }
+    XFillPolygon(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, fillGC_, points, 4,
+		 Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+  }
+
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->style);
+  ts.drawText(drawable, ops->string, anchorPt_.x, anchorPt_.y);
+}
+
+void TextMarker::map()
+{
+  TextMarkerOptions* ops = (TextMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->string)
+    return;
+
+  if (!ops->worldPts || (ops->worldPts->num < 1))
+    return;
+
+  width_ =0;
+  height_ =0;
+
+  int w, h;
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->style);
+  ts.getExtents(ops->string, &w, &h);
+
+  double rw;
+  double rh;
+  graphPtr_->getBoundingBox(w, h, ops->style.angle, &rw, &rh, outline_);
+  width_ = (int)rw;
+  height_ = (int)rh;
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+    outline_[ii].x += rw * 0.5;
+    outline_[ii].y += rh * 0.5;
+  }
+  outline_[4].x = outline_[0].x;
+  outline_[4].y = outline_[0].y;
+
+  Point2d anchorPtr = mapPoint(ops->worldPts->points, ops->xAxis, ops->yAxis);
+  anchorPtr = graphPtr_->anchorPoint(anchorPtr.x, anchorPtr.y, 
+				     width_, height_, ops->anchor);
+  anchorPtr.x += ops->xOffset;
+  anchorPtr.y += ops->yOffset;
+
+  Region2d extents;
+  extents.left = anchorPtr.x;
+  extents.top = anchorPtr.y;
+  extents.right = anchorPtr.x + width_ - 1;
+  extents.bottom = anchorPtr.y + height_ - 1;
+  clipped_ = boxesDontOverlap(graphPtr_, &extents);
+
+  anchorPt_ = anchorPtr;
+}
+
+int TextMarker::pointIn(Point2d *samplePtr)
+{
+  TextMarkerOptions* ops = (TextMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->string)
+    return 0;
+
+  if (ops->style.angle != 0.0) {
+    Point2d points[5];
+
+    // Figure out the bounding polygon (isolateral) for the text and see
+    // if the point is inside of it.
+    for (int ii=0; ii<5; ii++) {
+      points[ii].x = outline_[ii].x + anchorPt_.x;
+      points[ii].y = outline_[ii].y + anchorPt_.y;
+    }
+    return pointInPolygon(samplePtr, points, 5);
+  } 
+
+  return ((samplePtr->x >= anchorPt_.x) && 
+	  (samplePtr->x < (anchorPt_.x + width_)) &&
+	  (samplePtr->y >= anchorPt_.y) && 
+	  (samplePtr->y < (anchorPt_.y + height_)));
+}
+
+int TextMarker::regionIn(Region2d *extsPtr, int enclosed)
+{
+  TextMarkerOptions* ops = (TextMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->style.angle != 0.0) {
+    Point2d points[5];
+    for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+      points[ii].x = outline_[ii].x + anchorPt_.x;
+      points[ii].y = outline_[ii].y + anchorPt_.y;
+    }
+    return regionInPolygon(extsPtr, points, 4, enclosed);
+  } 
+
+  if (enclosed)
+    return ((anchorPt_.x >= extsPtr->left) &&
+	    (anchorPt_.y >= extsPtr->top) && 
+	    ((anchorPt_.x + width_) <= extsPtr->right) &&
+	    ((anchorPt_.y + height_) <= extsPtr->bottom));
+
+  return !((anchorPt_.x >= extsPtr->right) ||
+	   (anchorPt_.y >= extsPtr->bottom) ||
+	   ((anchorPt_.x + width_) <= extsPtr->left) ||
+	   ((anchorPt_.y + height_) <= extsPtr->top));
+}
+
+void TextMarker::print(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  TextMarkerOptions* ops = (TextMarkerOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (!ops->string)
+    return;
+
+  if (fillGC_) {
+    Point2d points[4];
+    for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+      points[ii].x = outline_[ii].x + anchorPt_.x;
+      points[ii].y = outline_[ii].y + anchorPt_.y;
+    }
+    psPtr->setBackground(ops->fillColor);
+    psPtr->fillPolygon(points, 4);
+  }
+
+  TextStyle ts(graphPtr_, &ops->style);
+  ts.printText(psPtr, ops->string, anchorPt_.x, anchorPt_.y);
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerText.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerText.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99dc814
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMarkerText.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrMarkerText_h__
+#define __BltGrMarkerText_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char** tags;
+    Coords* worldPts;
+    const char* elemName;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    int hide;
+    int drawUnder;
+    int xOffset;
+    int yOffset;
+
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;
+    XColor* fillColor;
+    TextStyleOptions style;
+    const char* string;
+  } TextMarkerOptions;
+
+  class TextMarker : public Marker {
+  protected:
+    Point2d anchorPt_;
+    int width_;
+    int height_;
+    GC fillGC_;
+    Point2d outline_[5];
+
+  protected:
+    int configure();
+    void draw(Drawable);
+    void map();
+    int pointIn(Point2d*);
+    int regionIn(Region2d*, int);
+    void print(PSOutput*);
+
+  public:
+    TextMarker(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~TextMarker();
+
+    ClassId classId() {return CID_MARKER_TEXT;}
+    const char* className() {return "TextMarker";}
+    const char* typeName() {return "text";}
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMisc.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMisc.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aaafcfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMisc.C
@@ -0,0 +1,405 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <float.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+char* Blt::dupstr(const char* str)
+{
+  char* copy =NULL;
+  if (str) {
+    copy=new char[strlen(str)+1];
+    strcpy(copy,str);
+  }
+
+  return copy;
+}
+
+int Blt::pointInPolygon(Point2d *s, Point2d *points, int nPoints)
+{
+  int count = 0;
+  for (Point2d *p=points, *q=p+1, *qend=p + nPoints; q < qend; p++, q++) {
+    if (((p->y <= s->y) && (s->y < q->y)) || 
+	((q->y <= s->y) && (s->y < p->y))) {
+      double b;
+
+      b = (q->x - p->x) * (s->y - p->y) / (q->y - p->y) + p->x;
+      if (s->x < b) {
+	count++;	/* Count the number of intersections. */
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  return (count & 0x01);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *      Clips a rectangle in one direction where some of the coordinates are
+ *      infinite.
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static LineRectClipResult ClipInfinity (double *pa, double *pb, double *qa, double *qb, double region_min, double region_max)
+{
+  int finitepa = isfinite(*pa);
+  int finiteqa = isfinite(*qa);
+
+  if (!finitepa) {
+    if (finiteqa) {
+      if (*pa > 0) {		// +Inf
+	*pa = region_max;
+      } else if (*pa < 0) {	// -Inf
+	*pa = region_min;
+      } else {			// NaN
+	return CLIP_OUTSIDE;
+      }
+      // *qa is finite, simplify to zero slope at *pb.
+      *pb = *qb;
+      return CLIP_P;
+    } else {			// Both infinite.
+      int positivepa = *pa > 0;
+      int positiveqa = *qa > 0;
+
+      if (positivepa < positiveqa) { // (p,q) ~ (-Inf,Inf)
+	*pa = region_min;
+	*qa = region_max;
+      } else if (positivepa > positiveqa) { // (p,q) ~ (Inf,-Inf)
+	*pa = region_max;
+	*qa = region_min;
+      } else {			// (Inf,Inf), (-Inf,-Inf) or NaN.
+	return CLIP_OUTSIDE;
+      }
+      // At opposite infinities; simplify to zero slope in the middle.
+      *pb = *qb = (*pb + *qb) / 2.0;
+      return CLIP_P | CLIP_Q;
+    }
+  } else if (!finiteqa) {
+    // *pa is finite.
+    if (*qa > 0) {		// +Inf
+      *qa = region_max;
+    } else if (*qa < 0) {	// -Inf
+      *qa = region_min;
+    } else {			// NaN
+      return CLIP_OUTSIDE;
+    }
+    // *pa is finite, simplify to zero slope at *qb.
+    *qb = *pb;
+    return CLIP_Q;
+  }
+  return CLIP_OUTSIDE;
+}
+
+
+static int ClipTest (double ds, double dr, double *t1, double *t2)
+{
+  double t;
+
+  if (ds < 0.0) {
+    t = dr / ds;
+    if (t > *t2) {
+      return 0;			/* Line is outside clipping edge */
+    } 
+    if (t > *t1) {
+      *t1 = t;
+    }
+  } else if (ds > 0.0) {
+    t = dr / ds;
+    if (t < *t1) {
+      return 0;			/* Line is outside clipping edge */
+    } 
+    if (t < *t2) {
+      *t2 = t;
+    }
+  } else {
+    /* d = 0, so line is parallel to this clipping edge */
+    if (dr < 0.0) {		/* Line is outside clipping edge */
+      return 0;
+    }
+  }
+  return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *	Clips the given line segment to a rectangular region.  The coordinates
+ *	of the clipped line segment are returned.  The original coordinates
+ *	are overwritten.
+ *
+ *      The return value indicates whether the line was completely outside of
+ *      the region, returning CLIP_OUTSIDE; or at least partly inside, returning
+ *      CLIP_INSIDE.  In the latter case, the result might be or'ed with CLIP_P
+ *      if p coordinates were clipped, or CLIP_Q if q coordinates were.
+ *
+ *	Reference: 
+ *	  Liang, Y-D., and B. Barsky, A new concept and method for
+ *	  Line Clipping, ACM, TOG,3(1), 1984, pp.1-22.
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+LineRectClipResult Blt::lineRectClip(Region2d* regionPtr, Point2d *p, Point2d *q)
+{
+  double t1, t2;
+  double dx, dy;
+  LineRectClipResult res = CLIP_OUTSIDE;
+
+  res |= ClipInfinity(&p->x, &p->y, &q->x, &q->y, regionPtr->bottom, regionPtr->top);
+
+  t1 = 0.0, t2 = 1.0;
+  dx = q->x - p->x;
+  if ((ClipTest (-dx, p->x - regionPtr->left, &t1, &t2)) &&
+      (ClipTest (dx, regionPtr->right - p->x, &t1, &t2))) {
+    res |= ClipInfinity(&p->y, &p->x, &q->y, &q->x, regionPtr->top, regionPtr->bottom);
+
+    dy = q->y - p->y;
+    if ((ClipTest (-dy, p->y - regionPtr->top, &t1, &t2)) && 
+	(ClipTest (dy, regionPtr->bottom - p->y, &t1, &t2))) {
+      if (t2 < 1.0) {
+	q->x = p->x + t2 * dx;
+	q->y = p->y + t2 * dy;
+	res |= CLIP_Q;
+      }
+      if (t1 > 0.0) {
+	p->x += t1 * dx;
+	p->y += t1 * dy;
+	res |= CLIP_P;
+      }
+      return res | CLIP_INSIDE;
+    }
+  }
+  return CLIP_OUTSIDE;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *	Clips the given polygon to a rectangular region.  The resulting
+ *	polygon is returned. Note that the resulting polyon may be complex,
+ *	connected by zero width/height segments.  The drawing routine (such as
+ *	XFillPolygon) will not draw a connecting segment.
+ *
+ *	Reference:  
+ *	  Liang Y. D. and Brian A. Barsky, "Analysis and Algorithm for
+ *	  Polygon Clipping", Communications of ACM, Vol. 26,
+ *	  p.868-877, 1983
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+#define AddVertex(vx, vy)	    r->x=(vx), r->y=(vy), r++, count++ 
+#define LastVertex(vx, vy)	    r->x=(vx), r->y=(vy), count++ 
+
+int Blt::polyRectClip(Region2d *regionPtr, Point2d *points, int nPoints,
+		      Point2d *clipPts)
+{
+  Point2d* r = clipPts;
+  // Counts # of vertices in output polygon.
+  int count = 0;
+
+  points[nPoints] = points[0];
+  for (Point2d *p=points, *q=p+1, *pend=p+nPoints; p<pend; p++, q++) {
+    double dx, dy;
+    double tin1, tin2, tinx, tiny;
+    double xin, yin, xout, yout;
+
+    dx = q->x - p->x;	/* X-direction */
+    dy = q->y - p->y;	/* Y-direction */
+
+    if (fabs(dx) < FLT_EPSILON)
+      dx = (p->x > regionPtr->left) ? -FLT_EPSILON : FLT_EPSILON ;
+
+    if (fabs(dy) < FLT_EPSILON)
+      dy = (p->y > regionPtr->top) ? -FLT_EPSILON : FLT_EPSILON ;
+
+    if (dx > 0.0) {		/* Left */
+      xin = regionPtr->left;
+      xout = regionPtr->right + 1.0;
+    }
+    else {		/* Right */
+      xin = regionPtr->right + 1.0;
+      xout = regionPtr->left;
+    }
+    if (dy > 0.0) {		/* Top */
+      yin = regionPtr->top;
+      yout = regionPtr->bottom + 1.0;
+    }
+    else {		/* Bottom */
+      yin = regionPtr->bottom + 1.0;
+      yout = regionPtr->top;
+    }
+	
+    tinx = (xin - p->x) / dx;
+    tiny = (yin - p->y) / dy;
+	
+    if (tinx < tiny) {	/* Hits x first */
+      tin1 = tinx;
+      tin2 = tiny;
+    }
+    else {		/* Hits y first */
+      tin1 = tiny;
+      tin2 = tinx;
+    }
+	
+    if (tin1 <= 1.0) {
+      if (tin1 > 0.0) {
+	AddVertex(xin, yin);
+      }
+      if (tin2 <= 1.0) {
+	double toutx = (xout - p->x) / dx;
+	double touty = (yout - p->y) / dy;
+	double tout1 = MIN(toutx, touty);
+		
+	if ((tin2 > 0.0) || (tout1 > 0.0)) {
+	  if (tin2 <= tout1) {
+	    if (tin2 > 0.0) {
+	      if (tinx > tiny) {
+		AddVertex(xin, p->y + tinx * dy);
+	      } else {
+		AddVertex(p->x + tiny * dx, yin);
+	      }
+	    }
+	    if (tout1 < 1.0) {
+	      if (toutx < touty) {
+		AddVertex(xout, p->y + toutx * dy);
+	      } else {
+		AddVertex(p->x + touty * dx, yout);
+	      }
+	    } else {
+	      AddVertex(q->x, q->y);
+	    }
+	  } else {
+	    if (tinx > tiny) {
+	      AddVertex(xin, yout);
+	    } else {
+	      AddVertex(xout, yin);
+	    }
+
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  if (count > 0) {
+    LastVertex(clipPts[0].x, clipPts[0].y);
+  }
+  return count;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *	Computes the projection of a point on a line.  The line (given by two
+ *	points), is assumed the be infinite.
+ *
+ *	Compute the slope (angle) of the line and rotate it 90 degrees.  Using
+ *	the slope-intercept method (we know the second line from the sample
+ *	test point and the computed slope), then find the intersection of both
+ *	lines. This will be the projection of the sample point on the first
+ *	line.
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+Point2d Blt::getProjection(int x, int y, Point2d *p, Point2d *q)
+{
+  double dx = p->x - q->x;
+  double dy = p->y - q->y;
+
+  /* Test for horizontal and vertical lines */
+  Point2d t;
+  if (fabs(dx) < DBL_EPSILON) {
+    t.x = p->x;
+    t.y = (double)y;
+  }
+  else if (fabs(dy) < DBL_EPSILON) {
+    t.x = (double)x;
+    t.y = p->y;
+  }
+  else {
+    /* Compute the slope and intercept of PQ. */
+    double m1 = (dy / dx);
+    double b1 = p->y - (p->x * m1);
+
+    /* 
+     * Compute the slope and intercept of a second line segment: one that
+     * intersects through sample X-Y coordinate with a slope perpendicular
+     * to original line.
+     */
+
+    /* Find midpoint of PQ. */
+    double midX = (p->x + q->x) * 0.5;
+    double midY = (p->y + q->y) * 0.5;
+
+    /* Rotate the line 90 degrees */
+    double ax = midX - (0.5 * dy);
+    double ay = midY - (0.5 * -dx);
+    double bx = midX + (0.5 * dy);
+    double by = midY + (0.5 * -dx);
+
+    double m2 = (ay - by) / (ax - bx);
+    double b2 = y - (x * m2);
+
+    /*
+     * Given the equations of two lines which contain the same point,
+     *
+     *    y = m1 * x + b1
+     *    y = m2 * x + b2
+     *
+     * solve for the intersection.
+     *
+     *    x = (b2 - b1) / (m1 - m2)
+     *    y = m1 * x + b1
+     *
+     */
+
+    t.x = (b2 - b1) / (m1 - m2);
+    t.y = m1 * t.x + b1;
+  }
+
+  return t;
+}
+
+Graph* Blt::getGraphFromWindowData(Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+  while (tkwin) {
+    TkWindow* winPtr = (TkWindow*)tkwin;
+    if (winPtr->instanceData != NULL) {
+      Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)winPtr->instanceData;
+      if (graphPtr)
+	return graphPtr;
+    }
+    tkwin = Tk_Parent(tkwin);
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMisc.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMisc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c16dce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrMisc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrMisc_h__
+#define __BltGrMisc_h__
+
+#include <iostream>
+#include <sstream>
+#include <iomanip>
+using namespace std;
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#ifndef MIN
+#   define MIN(x,y) ((x)<(y)?(x):(y))
+#endif
+
+#ifndef MAX
+#   define MAX(x,y) ((x)>(y)?(x):(y))
+#endif
+
+#define	GRAPH_DELETED   (1<<1)
+#define REDRAW_PENDING  (1<<2)
+#define FOCUS           (1<<3)
+
+#define	MAP_ITEM        (1<<4)
+
+#define RESET           (1<<5)
+#define LAYOUT          (1<<6)
+#define	MAP_MARKERS     (1<<7)
+#define	CACHE           (1<<8)
+
+#define MARGIN_NONE	-1
+#define MARGIN_BOTTOM	0		/* x */
+#define MARGIN_LEFT	1 		/* y */
+#define MARGIN_TOP	2		/* x2 */
+#define MARGIN_RIGHT	3		/* y2 */
+
+#define LineIsDashed(d) ((d).values[0] != 0)
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int x, y;
+  } Point;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int x, y;
+    unsigned width, height;
+  } Rectangle;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double x;
+    double y;
+  } Point2d;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Point2d p;
+    Point2d q;
+  } Segment2d;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double left;
+    double right;
+    double top;
+    double bottom;
+  } Region2d;
+
+  typedef enum {
+    CID_NONE, CID_AXIS_X, CID_AXIS_Y, CID_ELEM_BAR, CID_ELEM_LINE,
+    CID_MARKER_BITMAP, CID_MARKER_IMAGE, CID_MARKER_LINE, CID_MARKER_POLYGON,
+    CID_MARKER_TEXT
+  } ClassId;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    unsigned char values[12];
+    int offset;
+  } Dashes;
+
+  typedef enum {
+    CLIP_OUTSIDE = 0,
+    CLIP_INSIDE  = 1 << 0,
+    CLIP_P       = 1 << 1,
+    CLIP_Q       = 1 << 2
+  } LineRectClipResult;
+
+  inline LineRectClipResult operator|(LineRectClipResult a, LineRectClipResult b) {
+    return static_cast<LineRectClipResult>(static_cast<int>(a) | static_cast<int>(b));
+  }
+
+  inline LineRectClipResult operator&(LineRectClipResult a, LineRectClipResult b) {
+    return static_cast<LineRectClipResult>(static_cast<int>(a) & static_cast<int>(b));
+  }
+
+  inline LineRectClipResult & operator|=(LineRectClipResult & rhs, LineRectClipResult v) {
+    rhs = rhs | v;
+    return rhs;
+  }
+
+  extern char* dupstr(const char*);
+  extern Graph* getGraphFromWindowData(Tk_Window tkwin);
+
+  extern int pointInPolygon(Point2d *samplePtr, Point2d *screenPts, 
+			    int nScreenPts);
+  extern int polyRectClip(Region2d *extsPtr, Point2d *inputPts,
+			  int nInputPts, Point2d *outputPts);
+  extern LineRectClipResult lineRectClip(Region2d *regionPtr, Point2d *p, Point2d *q);
+  extern Point2d getProjection (int x, int y, Point2d *p, Point2d *q);
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPSOutput.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPSOutput.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..07d4864
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPSOutput.C
@@ -0,0 +1,931 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <time.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tk.h"
+
+// copied from tk3d.h
+
+typedef struct TkBorder {
+    Screen *screen;		/* Screen on which the border will be used. */
+    Visual *visual;		/* Visual for all windows and pixmaps using
+				 * the border. */
+    int depth;			/* Number of bits per pixel of drawables where
+				 * the border will be used. */
+    Colormap colormap;		/* Colormap out of which pixels are
+				 * allocated. */
+    int resourceRefCount;	/* Number of active uses of this color (each
+				 * active use corresponds to a call to
+				 * Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj or Tk_Get3DBorder).
+				 * If this count is 0, then this structure is
+				 * no longer valid and it isn't present in
+				 * borderTable: it is being kept around only
+				 * because there are objects referring to it.
+				 * The structure is freed when objRefCount and
+				 * resourceRefCount are both 0. */
+    int objRefCount;		/* The number of Tcl objects that reference
+				 * this structure. */
+    XColor *bgColorPtr;		/* Background color (intensity between
+				 * lightColorPtr and darkColorPtr). */
+    XColor *darkColorPtr;	/* Color for darker areas (must free when
+				 * deleting structure). NULL means shadows
+				 * haven't been allocated yet.*/
+    XColor *lightColorPtr;	/* Color used for lighter areas of border
+				 * (must free this when deleting structure).
+				 * NULL means shadows haven't been allocated
+				 * yet. */
+    Pixmap shadow;		/* Stipple pattern to use for drawing shadows
+				 * areas. Used for displays with <= 64 colors
+				 * or where colormap has filled up. */
+    GC bgGC;			/* Used (if necessary) to draw areas in the
+				 * background color. */
+    GC darkGC;			/* Used to draw darker parts of the border.
+				 * None means the shadow colors haven't been
+				 * allocated yet.*/
+    GC lightGC;			/* Used to draw lighter parts of the border.
+				 * None means the shadow colors haven't been
+				 * allocated yet. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* Entry in borderTable (needed in order to
+				 * delete structure). */
+    struct TkBorder *nextPtr;	/* Points to the next TkBorder structure with
+				 * the same color name. Borders with the same
+				 * name but different screens or colormaps are
+				 * chained together off a single entry in
+				 * borderTable. */
+} TkBorder;
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+PSOutput::PSOutput(Graph* graphPtr)
+{
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+
+  Tcl_DStringInit(&dString_);
+}
+
+PSOutput::~PSOutput()
+{
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&dString_);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::printPolyline(Point2d* screenPts, int nScreenPts)
+{
+  Point2d* pp = screenPts;
+  append("newpath\n");
+  format("  %g %g moveto\n", pp->x, pp->y);
+
+  Point2d* pend;
+  for (pp++, pend = screenPts + nScreenPts; pp < pend; pp++)
+    format("  %g %g lineto\n", pp->x, pp->y);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::printMaxPolyline(Point2d* points, int nPoints)
+{
+  if (nPoints <= 0)
+    return;
+
+  for (int nLeft = nPoints; nLeft > 0; nLeft -= 1500) {
+    int length = MIN(1500, nLeft);
+    printPolyline(points, length);
+    append("DashesProc stroke\n");
+    points += length;
+  }
+}
+
+void PSOutput::printSegments(Segment2d* segments, int nSegments)
+{
+  append("newpath\n");
+
+  for (Segment2d *sp = segments, *send = sp + nSegments; sp < send; sp++) {
+    format("  %g %g moveto %g %g lineto\n", sp->p.x, sp->p.y, sp->q.x, sp->q.y);
+    append("DashesProc stroke\n");
+  }
+}
+
+void PSOutput::computeBBox(int width, int height)
+{
+  Postscript* setupPtr = graphPtr_->postscript_;
+  PostscriptOptions* pops = (PostscriptOptions*)setupPtr->ops_;
+
+  // scale from points to pica
+  double pica = 25.4 / 72 *
+    WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(graphPtr_->tkwin_)) / 
+    WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(graphPtr_->tkwin_));
+
+  double hBorder = 2*pops->xPad/pica;
+  double vBorder = 2*pops->yPad/pica;
+  int hSize = !pops->landscape ? width : height; 
+  int vSize = !pops->landscape ? height : width;
+
+  // If the paper size wasn't specified, set it to the graph size plus the
+  // paper border.
+  double paperWidth = pops->reqPaperWidth > 0 ? pops->reqPaperWidth/pica :
+    hSize + hBorder;
+  double paperHeight = pops->reqPaperHeight > 0 ? pops->reqPaperHeight/pica :
+    vSize + vBorder;
+
+  // Scale the plot size if it's bigger than the paper
+  double hScale = (hSize+hBorder) > paperWidth ? 1.0 :
+    paperWidth - hBorder / hSize;
+  double vScale = (vSize + vBorder) > paperHeight ? 1.0 :
+    paperHeight - vBorder / vSize;
+
+  double scale = MIN(hScale, vScale);
+  if (scale != 1.0) {
+    hSize = (int)(hSize*scale + 0.5);
+    vSize = (int)(vSize*scale + 0.5);
+  }
+
+  int x = (int)((paperWidth > hSize) && pops->center ?
+		(paperWidth - hSize) / 2 : pops->xPad/pica);
+  int y = (int)((paperHeight > vSize) && pops->center ?
+		(paperHeight - vSize) / 2 : pops->yPad/pica);
+
+  setupPtr->left = x;
+  setupPtr->bottom = y;
+  setupPtr->right = x + hSize - 1;
+  setupPtr->top = y + vSize - 1;
+  setupPtr->scale = scale;
+  setupPtr->paperHeight = (int)paperHeight;
+  setupPtr->paperWidth = (int)paperWidth;
+}
+
+const char* PSOutput::getValue(int* lengthPtr)
+{
+  *lengthPtr = strlen(Tcl_DStringValue(&dString_));
+  return Tcl_DStringValue(&dString_);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::append(const char* string)
+{
+  Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString_, string, -1);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::format(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+  va_list argList;
+
+  va_start(argList, fmt);
+  vsnprintf(scratchArr_, POSTSCRIPT_BUFSIZ, fmt, argList);
+  va_end(argList);
+  Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString_, scratchArr_, -1);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setLineWidth(int lineWidth)
+{
+  if (lineWidth < 1)
+    lineWidth = 1;
+  format("%d setlinewidth\n", lineWidth);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::printRectangle(double x, double y, int width, int height)
+{
+  append("newpath\n");
+  format("  %g %g moveto\n", x, y);
+  format("  %d %d rlineto\n", width, 0);
+  format("  %d %d rlineto\n", 0, height);
+  format("  %d %d rlineto\n", -width, 0);
+  append("closepath\n");
+  append("stroke\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::fillRectangle(double x, double y, int width, int height)
+{
+  append("newpath\n");
+  format("  %g %g moveto\n", x, y);
+  format("  %d %d rlineto\n", width, 0);
+  format("  %d %d rlineto\n", 0, height);
+  format("  %d %d rlineto\n", -width, 0);
+  append("closepath\n");
+  append("fill\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::fillRectangles(Rectangle* rectangles, int nRectangles)
+{
+  for (Rectangle *rp = rectangles, *rend = rp + nRectangles; rp < rend; rp++)
+    fillRectangle((double)rp->x, (double)rp->y, (int)rp->width,(int)rp->height);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setBackground(XColor* colorPtr)
+{
+  PostscriptOptions* pops = (PostscriptOptions*)graphPtr_->postscript_->ops_;
+  printXColor(colorPtr);
+  append(" setrgbcolor\n");
+  if (pops->greyscale)
+    append(" currentgray setgray\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setForeground(XColor* colorPtr)
+{
+  PostscriptOptions* pops = (PostscriptOptions*)graphPtr_->postscript_->ops_;
+  printXColor(colorPtr);
+  append(" setrgbcolor\n");
+  if (pops->greyscale)
+    append(" currentgray setgray\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setBackground(Tk_3DBorder border)
+{
+  TkBorder* borderPtr = (TkBorder*)border;
+  setBackground(borderPtr->bgColorPtr);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setFont(Tk_Font font) 
+{
+  Tcl_DString psdstr;
+  Tcl_DStringInit(&psdstr);
+  int psSize = Tk_PostscriptFontName(font, &psdstr);
+  format("%d /%s SetFont\n", psSize, Tcl_DStringValue(&psdstr));
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&psdstr);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setLineAttributes(XColor* colorPtr,int lineWidth,
+				   Dashes* dashesPtr, int capStyle, 
+				   int joinStyle)
+{
+  setJoinStyle(joinStyle);
+  setCapStyle(capStyle);
+  setForeground(colorPtr);
+  setLineWidth(lineWidth);
+  setDashes(dashesPtr);
+  append("/DashesProc {} def\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::fill3DRectangle(Tk_3DBorder border, double x, double y,
+				 int width, int height, int borderWidth, 
+				 int relief)
+{
+  TkBorder* borderPtr = (TkBorder*)border;
+
+  setBackground(borderPtr->bgColorPtr);
+  fillRectangle(x, y, width, height);
+  print3DRectangle(border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setClearBackground()
+{
+  append("1 1 1 setrgbcolor\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setDashes(Dashes* dashesPtr)
+{
+
+  append("[ ");
+  if (dashesPtr) {
+    for (unsigned char* vp = dashesPtr->values; *vp != 0; vp++)
+      format(" %d", *vp);
+  }
+  append("] 0 setdash\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::fillPolygon(Point2d *screenPts, int nScreenPts)
+{
+  printPolygon(screenPts, nScreenPts);
+  append("fill\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setJoinStyle(int joinStyle)
+{
+  // miter = 0, round = 1, bevel = 2
+  format("%d setlinejoin\n", joinStyle);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::setCapStyle(int capStyle)
+{
+  // X11:not last = 0, butt = 1, round = 2, projecting = 3
+  // PS: butt = 0, round = 1, projecting = 2
+  if (capStyle > 0)
+    capStyle--;
+
+  format("%d setlinecap\n", capStyle);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::printPolygon(Point2d *screenPts, int nScreenPts)
+{
+  Point2d* pp = screenPts;
+  append("newpath\n");
+  format("  %g %g moveto\n", pp->x, pp->y);
+
+  Point2d* pend;
+  for (pp++, pend = screenPts + nScreenPts; pp < pend; pp++) 
+    format("  %g %g lineto\n", pp->x, pp->y);
+
+  format("  %g %g lineto\n", screenPts[0].x, screenPts[0].y);
+  append("closepath\n");
+}
+
+void PSOutput::print3DRectangle(Tk_3DBorder border, double x, double y,
+				 int width, int height, int borderWidth,
+				 int relief)
+{
+  int twiceWidth = (borderWidth * 2);
+  if ((width < twiceWidth) || (height < twiceWidth))
+    return;
+
+  TkBorder* borderPtr = (TkBorder*)border;
+
+  // Handle grooves and ridges with recursive calls
+  if ((relief == TK_RELIEF_GROOVE) || (relief == TK_RELIEF_RIDGE)) {
+    int halfWidth = borderWidth / 2;
+    int insideOffset = borderWidth - halfWidth;
+    print3DRectangle(border, (double)x, (double)y, width, height, halfWidth, 
+		    (relief == TK_RELIEF_GROOVE) ? 
+		    TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN : TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+    print3DRectangle(border, (double)(x + insideOffset), 
+		    (double)(y + insideOffset), width - insideOffset * 2, 
+		    height - insideOffset * 2, halfWidth,
+		    (relief == TK_RELIEF_GROOVE) ? 
+		    TK_RELIEF_RAISED : TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+    return;
+  }
+
+  XColor* lightPtr = borderPtr->lightColorPtr;
+  XColor* darkPtr = borderPtr->darkColorPtr;
+  XColor light;
+  if (!lightPtr) {
+    light.red = 0x00;
+    light.blue = 0x00;
+    light.green = 0x00;
+    lightPtr = &light;
+  }
+  XColor dark;
+  if (!darkPtr) {
+    dark.red = 0x00;
+    dark.blue = 0x00;
+    dark.green = 0x00;
+    darkPtr = &dark;
+  }
+
+  XColor* topPtr, *bottomPtr;
+  if (relief == TK_RELIEF_RAISED) {
+    topPtr = lightPtr;
+    bottomPtr = darkPtr;
+  }
+  else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
+    topPtr = darkPtr;
+    bottomPtr = lightPtr;
+  }
+  else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SOLID) {
+    topPtr = lightPtr;
+    bottomPtr = lightPtr;
+  }
+  else {
+    topPtr = borderPtr->bgColorPtr;
+    bottomPtr = borderPtr->bgColorPtr;
+  }
+
+  setBackground(bottomPtr);
+  fillRectangle(x, y + height - borderWidth, width, borderWidth);
+  fillRectangle(x + width - borderWidth, y, borderWidth, height);
+
+  Point2d points[7];
+  points[0].x = points[1].x = points[6].x = x;
+  points[0].y = points[6].y = y + height;
+  points[1].y = points[2].y = y;
+  points[2].x = x + width;
+  points[3].x = x + width - borderWidth;
+  points[3].y = points[4].y = y + borderWidth;
+  points[4].x = points[5].x = x + borderWidth;
+  points[5].y = y + height - borderWidth;
+  if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)
+    setBackground(topPtr);
+
+  fillPolygon(points, 7);
+}
+
+void PSOutput::printXColor(XColor* colorPtr)
+{
+  format("%g %g %g",
+	 ((double)(colorPtr->red >> 8) / 255.0),
+	 ((double)(colorPtr->green >> 8) / 255.0),
+	 ((double)(colorPtr->blue >> 8) / 255.0));
+}
+
+int PSOutput::preamble(const char* fileName)
+{
+  Postscript* setupPtr = graphPtr_->postscript_;
+  PostscriptOptions* ops = (PostscriptOptions*)setupPtr->ops_;
+
+  if (!fileName)
+    fileName = Tk_PathName(graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+
+  // Comments
+  append("%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0\n");
+
+  // The "BoundingBox" comment is required for EPS files. The box
+  // coordinates are integers, so we need round away from the center of the
+  // box.
+  format("%%%%BoundingBox: %d %d %d %d\n",
+	 setupPtr->left, setupPtr->paperHeight - setupPtr->top,
+	 setupPtr->right, setupPtr->paperHeight - setupPtr->bottom);
+	
+  append("%%Pages: 0\n");
+
+  format("%%%%Creator: (%s %s %s)\n", PACKAGE_NAME, PACKAGE_VERSION,
+	 Tk_Class(graphPtr_->tkwin_));
+
+  time_t ticks = time((time_t *) NULL);
+  char date[200];
+  strcpy(date, ctime(&ticks));
+  char* newline = date + strlen(date) - 1;
+  if (*newline == '\n')
+    *newline = '\0';
+
+  format("%%%%CreationDate: (%s)\n", date);
+  format("%%%%Title: (%s)\n", fileName);
+  append("%%DocumentData: Clean7Bit\n");
+  if (ops->landscape)
+    append("%%Orientation: Landscape\n");
+  else
+    append("%%Orientation: Portrait\n");
+
+  append("%%DocumentNeededResources: font Helvetica Courier\n");
+  addComments(ops->comments);
+  append("%%EndComments\n\n");
+
+  // Prolog
+  prolog();
+
+  // Setup
+  append("%%BeginSetup\n");
+  append("gsave\n");
+  append("1 setlinewidth\n");
+  append("1 setlinejoin\n");
+  append("0 setlinecap\n");
+  append("[] 0 setdash\n");
+  append("0 0 0 setrgbcolor\n");
+
+  if (ops->footer) {
+    const char* who = getenv("LOGNAME");
+    if (!who)
+      who = "???";
+
+    append("8 /Helvetica SetFont\n");
+    append("10 30 moveto\n");
+    format("(Date: %s) show\n", date);
+    append("10 20 moveto\n");
+    format("(File: %s) show\n", fileName);
+    append("10 10 moveto\n");
+    format("(Created by: %s@%s) show\n", who, Tcl_GetHostName());
+    append("0 0 moveto\n");
+  }
+
+  // Set the conversion from postscript to X11 coordinates. Scale pica to
+  // pixels and flip the y-axis (the origin is the upperleft corner).
+  // Papersize is in pixels. Translate the new origin *after* changing the scale
+  append("% Transform coordinate system to use X11 coordinates\n");
+  append("% 1. Flip y-axis over by reversing the scale,\n");
+  append("% 2. Translate the origin to the other side of the page,\n");
+  append("%    making the origin the upper left corner\n");
+  append("1 -1 scale\n");
+  format("0 %d translate\n", -setupPtr->paperHeight);
+
+  // Set Origin
+  format("%% Set origin\n%d %d translate\n\n", setupPtr->left,setupPtr->bottom);
+  if (ops->landscape)
+    format("%% Landscape orientation\n0 %g translate\n-90 rotate\n",
+	   ((double)graphPtr_->width_ * setupPtr->scale));
+
+  append("\n%%EndSetup\n\n");
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void PSOutput::addComments(const char** comments)
+{
+  if (!comments)
+    return;
+
+  for (const char** pp = comments; *pp; pp+=2) {
+    if (*(pp+1) == NULL)
+      break;
+    format("%% %s: %s\n", *pp, *(pp+1));
+  }
+}
+
+unsigned char PSOutput::reverseBits(unsigned char byte)
+{
+  byte = ((byte >> 1) & 0x55) | ((byte << 1) & 0xaa);
+  byte = ((byte >> 2) & 0x33) | ((byte << 2) & 0xcc);
+  byte = ((byte >> 4) & 0x0f) | ((byte << 4) & 0xf0);
+  return byte;
+}
+
+void PSOutput::byteToHex(unsigned char byte, char* string)
+{
+  static char hexDigits[] = "0123456789ABCDEF";
+
+  string[0] = hexDigits[byte >> 4];
+  string[1] = hexDigits[byte & 0x0F];
+}
+
+void PSOutput::prolog()
+{
+  append(
+"%%BeginProlog\n"
+"%\n"
+"% PostScript prolog file of the BLT graph widget.\n"
+"%\n"
+"% Copyright 1989-1992 Regents of the University of California.\n"
+"% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this\n"
+"% software and its documentation for any purpose and without\n"
+"% fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright\n"
+"% notice appear in all copies.  The University of California\n"
+"% makes no representations about the suitability of this\n"
+"% software for any purpose.  It is provided 'as is' without\n"
+"% express or implied warranty.\n"
+"%\n"
+"% Copyright 1991-1997 Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies.\n"
+"%\n"
+"% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its\n"
+"% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided\n"
+"% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that the\n"
+"% copyright notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting documentation,\n"
+"% and that the names of Lucent Technologies any of their entities not be used\n"
+"% in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software\n"
+"% without specific, written prior permission.\n"
+"%\n"
+"% Lucent Technologies disclaims all warranties with regard to this software,\n"
+"% including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness.  In no event\n"
+"% shall Lucent Technologies be liable for any special, indirect or\n"
+"% consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use,\n"
+"% data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other\n"
+"% tortuous action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance\n"
+"% of this software.\n"
+"%\n"
+"\n"
+"200 dict begin\n"
+"\n"
+"/BaseRatio 1.3467736870885982 def	% Ratio triangle base / symbol size\n"
+"/DrawSymbolProc 0 def			% Routine to draw symbol outline/fill\n"
+"/DashesProc 0 def			% Dashes routine (line segments)\n"
+"\n"
+"% Define the array ISOLatin1Encoding (which specifies how characters are \n"
+"% encoded for ISO-8859-1 fonts), if it isn't already present (Postscript \n"
+"% level 2 is supposed to define it, but level 1 doesn't). \n"
+"\n"
+"systemdict /ISOLatin1Encoding known not { \n"
+"  /ISOLatin1Encoding [ \n"
+"    /space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space \n"
+"    /space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space \n"
+"    /space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space \n"
+"    /space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space \n"
+"    /space /exclam /quotedbl /numbersign /dollar /percent /ampersand \n"
+"    /quoteright \n"
+"    /parenleft /parenright /asterisk /plus /comma /minus /period /slash \n"
+"    /zero /one /two /three /four /five /six /seven \n"
+"    /eight /nine /colon /semicolon /less /equal /greater /question \n"
+"    /at /A /B /C /D /E /F /G \n"
+"    /H /I /J /K /L /M /N /O \n"
+"    /P /Q /R /S /T /U /V /W \n"
+"    /X /Y /Z /bracketleft /backslash /bracketright /asciicircum /underscore \n"
+"    /quoteleft /a /b /c /d /e /f /g \n"
+"    /h /i /j /k /l /m /n /o \n"
+"    /p /q /r /s /t /u /v /w \n"
+"    /x /y /z /braceleft /bar /braceright /asciitilde /space \n"
+"    /space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space \n"
+"    /space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space \n"
+"    /dotlessi /grave /acute /circumflex /tilde /macron /breve /dotaccent \n"
+"    /dieresis /space /ring /cedilla /space /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron \n"
+"    /space /exclamdown /cent /sterling /currency /yen /brokenbar /section \n"
+"    /dieresis /copyright /ordfeminine /guillemotleft /logicalnot /hyphen \n"
+"    /registered /macron \n"
+"    /degree /plusminus /twosuperior /threesuperior /acute /mu /paragraph \n"
+"    /periodcentered \n"
+"    /cedillar /onesuperior /ordmasculine /guillemotright /onequarter \n"
+"    /onehalf /threequarters /questiondown \n"
+"    /Agrave /Aacute /Acircumflex /Atilde /Adieresis /Aring /AE /Ccedilla \n"
+"    /Egrave /Eacute /Ecircumflex /Edieresis /Igrave /Iacute /Icircumflex \n"
+"    /Idieresis \n"
+"    /Eth /Ntilde /Ograve /Oacute /Ocircumflex /Otilde /Odieresis /multiply \n"
+"    /Oslash /Ugrave /Uacute /Ucircumflex /Udieresis /Yacute /Thorn \n"
+"    /germandbls \n"
+"    /agrave /aacute /acircumflex /atilde /adieresis /aring /ae /ccedilla \n"
+"    /egrave /eacute /ecircumflex /edieresis /igrave /iacute /icircumflex \n"
+"    /idieresis \n"
+"    /eth /ntilde /ograve /oacute /ocircumflex /otilde /odieresis /divide \n"
+"    /oslash /ugrave /uacute /ucircumflex /udieresis /yacute /thorn \n"
+"    /ydieresis \n"
+"  ] def \n"
+"} if \n"
+"\n"
+"% font ISOEncode font \n"
+"% This procedure changes the encoding of a font from the default \n"
+"% Postscript encoding to ISOLatin1.  It is typically invoked just \n"
+"% before invoking 'setfont'.  The body of this procedure comes from \n"
+"% Section 5.6.1 of the Postscript book. \n"
+"\n"
+"/ISOEncode { \n"
+"  dup length dict\n"
+"  begin \n"
+"    {1 index /FID ne {def} {pop pop} ifelse} forall \n"
+"    /Encoding ISOLatin1Encoding def \n"
+"    currentdict \n"
+"  end \n"
+"\n"
+"  % I'm not sure why it's necessary to use 'definefont' on this new \n"
+"  % font, but it seems to be important; just use the name 'Temporary' \n"
+"  % for the font. \n"
+"\n"
+"  /Temporary exch definefont \n"
+"} bind def \n"
+"\n"
+"/Stroke {\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    stroke\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"/Fill {\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    fill\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"/SetFont { 	\n"
+"  % Stack: pointSize fontName\n"
+"  findfont exch scalefont ISOEncode setfont\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"/Box {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y width height\n"
+"  newpath\n"
+"    exch 4 2 roll moveto\n"
+"    dup 0 rlineto\n"
+"    exch 0 exch rlineto\n"
+"    neg 0 rlineto\n"
+"  closepath\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"/LS {	% Stack: x1 y1 x2 y2\n"
+"  newpath \n"
+"    4 2 roll moveto \n"
+"    lineto \n"
+"  closepath\n"
+"  stroke\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"/baselineSampler ( TXygqPZ) def\n"
+"% Put an extra-tall character in; done this way to avoid encoding trouble\n"
+"baselineSampler 0 196 put\n"
+"\n"
+"/cstringshow {\n"
+"  {\n"
+"    dup type /stringtype eq\n"
+"    { show } { glyphshow }\n"
+"    ifelse\n"
+"  } forall\n"
+"} bind def\n"
+"\n"
+"/cstringwidth {\n"
+"  0 exch 0 exch\n"
+"  {\n"
+"    dup type /stringtype eq\n"
+"    { stringwidth } {\n"
+"      currentfont /Encoding get exch 1 exch put (\001)\n"
+"      stringwidth\n"
+"    }\n"
+"    ifelse\n"
+"    exch 3 1 roll add 3 1 roll add exch\n"
+"  } forall\n"
+"} bind def\n" 
+"\n"
+"/DrawText {\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"  /justify exch def\n"
+"  /yoffset exch def\n"
+"  /xoffset exch def\n"
+"  /strings exch def\n"
+"  % Compute the baseline offset and the actual font height.\n"
+"  0 0 moveto baselineSampler false charpath\n"
+"  pathbbox dup /baseline exch def\n"
+"  exch pop exch sub /height exch def pop\n"
+"  newpath\n"
+"  % overall width\n"
+"  /ww 0 def\n"
+"  strings {\n"
+"    cstringwidth pop\n"
+"    dup ww gt {/ww exch def} {pop} ifelse\n"
+"    newpath\n"
+"  } forall\n"
+"  % overall height\n"
+"  /hh 0 def\n"
+"  strings length height mul /hh exch def\n"
+"  newpath\n"
+"  % Translate to x,y\n"
+"  translate\n"
+"  % Translate to offset\n"
+"  ww xoffset mul hh yoffset mul translate\n"
+"  % rotate\n"
+"  ww 2 div hh 2 div translate\n"
+"  neg rotate\n"
+"  ww -2 div hh -2 div translate\n"
+"  % Translate to justify and baseline\n"
+"  justify ww mul baseline translate\n"
+"  % For each line, justify and display\n"
+"  strings {\n"
+"    dup cstringwidth pop\n"
+"    justify neg mul 0 moveto\n"
+"    gsave\n"
+"    1 -1 scale\n"
+"    cstringshow\n"
+"    grestore\n"
+"    0 height translate\n"
+"  } forall\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} bind def \n"
+"\n"
+"% Symbols:\n"
+"\n"
+"% Skinny-cross\n"
+"/Sc {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 -2 roll translate 45 rotate\n"
+"    0 0 3 -1 roll Sp\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Skinny-plus\n"
+"/Sp {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 -2 roll translate\n"
+"    2 div\n"
+"    dup 2 copy\n"
+"    newpath \n"
+"      neg 0 \n"
+"      moveto 0 \n"
+"      lineto\n"
+"    DrawSymbolProc\n"
+"    newpath \n"
+"      neg 0 \n"
+"      exch moveto 0 \n"
+"      exch lineto\n"
+"    DrawSymbolProc\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Cross\n"
+"/Cr {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 -2 roll translate 45 rotate\n"
+"    0 0 3 -1 roll Pl\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Plus\n"
+"/Pl {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 -2 roll translate\n"
+"    dup 2 div\n"
+"    exch 6 div\n"
+"\n"
+"    %\n"
+"    %          2   3		The plus/cross symbol is a\n"
+"    %				closed polygon of 12 points.\n"
+"    %      0   1   4    5	The diagram to the left\n"
+"    %           x,y		represents the positions of\n"
+"    %     11  10   7    6	the points which are computed\n"
+"    %				below.\n"
+"    %          9   8\n"
+"    %\n"
+"\n"
+"    newpath\n"
+"      2 copy exch neg exch neg moveto \n"
+"      dup neg dup lineto\n"
+"      2 copy neg exch neg lineto\n"
+"      2 copy exch neg lineto\n"
+"      dup dup neg lineto \n"
+"      2 copy neg lineto 2 copy lineto\n"
+"      dup dup lineto \n"
+"      2 copy exch lineto \n"
+"      2 copy neg exch lineto\n"
+"      dup dup neg exch lineto \n"
+"      exch neg exch lineto\n"
+"    closepath\n"
+"    DrawSymbolProc\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Circle\n"
+"/Ci {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 copy pop moveto \n"
+"    newpath\n"
+"      2 div 0 360 arc\n"
+"    closepath \n"
+"    DrawSymbolProc\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Square\n"
+"/Sq {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    dup dup 2 div dup\n"
+"    6 -1 roll exch sub exch\n"
+"    5 -1 roll exch sub 4 -2 roll Box\n"
+"    DrawSymbolProc\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Line\n"
+"/Li {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 1 roll exch 3 -1 roll 2 div 3 copy\n"
+"    newpath\n"
+"      sub exch moveto \n"
+"      add exch lineto\n"
+"    closepath\n"
+"    stroke\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Diamond\n"
+"/Di {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 1 roll translate 45 rotate 0 0 3 -1 roll Sq\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"    \n"
+"% Triangle\n"
+"/Tr {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 -2 roll translate\n"
+"    BaseRatio mul 0.5 mul		% Calculate 1/2 base\n"
+"    dup 0 exch 30 cos mul		% h1 = height above center point\n"
+"    neg				% b2 0 -h1\n"
+"    newpath \n"
+"      moveto				% point 1;  b2\n"
+"      dup 30 sin 30 cos div mul	% h2 = height below center point\n"
+"      2 copy lineto			% point 2;  b2 h2\n"
+"      exch neg exch lineto		% \n"
+"    closepath\n"
+"    DrawSymbolProc\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"% Arrow\n"
+"/Ar {\n"
+"  % Stack: x y symbolSize\n"
+"  gsave\n"
+"    3 -2 roll translate\n"
+"    BaseRatio mul 0.5 mul		% Calculate 1/2 base\n"
+"    dup 0 exch 30 cos mul		% h1 = height above center point\n"
+"					% b2 0 h1\n"
+"    newpath moveto			% point 1;  b2\n"
+"    dup 30 sin 30 cos div mul		% h2 = height below center point\n"
+"    neg				% -h2 b2\n"
+"    2 copy lineto			% point 2;  b2 h2\n"
+"    exch neg exch lineto		% \n"
+"    closepath\n"
+"    DrawSymbolProc\n"
+"  grestore\n"
+"} def\n"
+"\n"
+"%%EndProlog\n"
+);
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPSOutput.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPSOutput.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04bb2fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPSOutput.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __Blt_GrPSOutput_h__
+#define __Blt_GrPSOutput_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#define POSTSCRIPT_BUFSIZ ((BUFSIZ*2)-1)
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+  class Postscript;
+
+  class PSOutput {
+  protected:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    Tcl_DString dString_;
+    char scratchArr_[POSTSCRIPT_BUFSIZ+1];
+
+  protected:
+    void addComments(const char**);
+    void printXColor(XColor*);
+    unsigned char reverseBits(unsigned char);
+    void byteToHex(unsigned char, char*);
+    void setJoinStyle(int);
+    void setCapStyle(int);
+    void prolog();
+
+  public:
+    PSOutput(Graph*);
+    virtual ~PSOutput();
+
+    void printPolyline(Point2d*, int);
+    void printMaxPolyline(Point2d*, int);
+    void printSegments(Segment2d*, int);
+    void printRectangle(double, double, int, int);
+    void printPolygon(Point2d*, int);
+    void print3DRectangle(Tk_3DBorder, double, double, int, int, int, int);
+
+    void fillRectangle(double, double, int, int);
+    void fillRectangles(Rectangle*, int);
+    void fill3DRectangle(Tk_3DBorder, double, double, int, int, int, int);
+    void fillPolygon(Point2d*, int);
+
+    void setFont(Tk_Font); 
+    void setLineWidth(int);
+    void setBackground(XColor*);
+    void setForeground(XColor*);
+    void setBackground(Tk_3DBorder);
+    void setLineAttributes(XColor*,int, Dashes*, int, int);
+    void setClearBackground();
+    void setDashes(Dashes*);
+
+    int preamble(const char*);
+    void computeBBox(int, int);
+    const char* getValue(int*);
+    void append(const char*);
+    void format(const char*, ...);
+    void varAppend(const char*, ...);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPen.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPen.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71e5fe9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPen.C
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+Pen::Pen(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+{
+  optionTable_ = NULL;
+  ops_ = NULL;
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  name_ = dupstr(name);
+  hashPtr_ = hPtr;
+  refCount_ =0;
+  flags =0;
+  manageOptions_ =0;
+}
+
+Pen::~Pen()
+{
+  delete [] name_;
+
+  if (hashPtr_)
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashPtr_);
+
+  //  PenOptions* ops = (PenOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+
+  if (manageOptions_)
+    free(ops_);
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPen.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPen.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..003e8dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPen.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrPen_h__
+#define __BltGrPen_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrText.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int errorBarShow;
+    int errorBarLineWidth;
+    int errorBarCapWidth;
+    XColor* errorBarColor;
+    int valueShow;
+    const char* valueFormat;
+    TextStyleOptions valueStyle;
+  } PenOptions;
+
+  class Pen {
+  protected:
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+
+  public:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    const char *name_;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr_;
+    int refCount_;
+    unsigned int flags;
+    int manageOptions_;
+
+  public:
+    Pen();
+    Pen(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    virtual ~Pen();
+
+    virtual ClassId classId() =0;
+    virtual const char* className() =0;
+    virtual const char* typeName() =0;
+
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable() {return optionTable_;}
+    void* ops() {return ops_;}
+
+    virtual int configure() =0;
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenBar.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenBar.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f6e59a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenBar.C
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrPenBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec barPenOptionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-background", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-borderwidth", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, borderWidth), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-color", "color", "Color",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, fill), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-errorbarcolor", "errorBarColor", "ErrorBarColor",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, errorBarColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-errorbarwidth", "errorBarWidth","ErrorBarWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, errorBarLineWidth), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-errorbarcap", "errorBarCap", "ErrorBarCap", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, errorBarCapWidth), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-outline", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fill", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-color", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-foreground", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-outline", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-outline", "outline", "Outline",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, outlineColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+   "raised", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, relief), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showerrorbars", "showErrorBars", "ShowErrorBars",
+   "both", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, errorBarShow), 
+   0, &fillObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showvalues", "showValues", "ShowValues",
+   "none", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, valueShow), 0, &fillObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-valueanchor", "valueAnchor", "ValueAnchor",
+   "s", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, valueStyle.anchor), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-valuecolor", "valueColor", "ValueColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, valueStyle.color),
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-valuefont", "valueFont", "ValueFont",
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, valueStyle.font), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-valueformat", "valueFormat", "ValueFormat",
+   "%g", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, valueFormat), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-valuerotate", "valueRotate", "ValueRotate",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarPenOptions, valueStyle.angle), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+BarPen::BarPen(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+  : Pen(graphPtr, name, hPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = calloc(1, sizeof(BarPenOptions));
+  BarPenOptions* ops = (BarPenOptions*)ops_;
+  manageOptions_ =1;
+
+  outlineGC_ =NULL;
+  errorBarGC_ =NULL;
+
+  ops->valueStyle.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->valueStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->valueStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr_->interp_, barPenOptionSpecs);
+}
+
+BarPen::BarPen(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, void* options)
+  : Pen(graphPtr, name, NULL)
+{
+  ops_ = options;
+  BarPenOptions* ops = (BarPenOptions*)ops_;
+  manageOptions_ =0;
+
+  outlineGC_ =NULL;
+  errorBarGC_ =NULL;
+
+  ops->valueStyle.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->valueStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->valueStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr_->interp_, barPenOptionSpecs);
+}
+
+BarPen::~BarPen()
+{
+  if (outlineGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, outlineGC_);
+  if (errorBarGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, errorBarGC_);
+}
+
+int BarPen::configure()
+{
+  BarPenOptions* ops = (BarPenOptions*)ops_;
+
+  // outlineGC
+  {
+    unsigned long gcMask = GCForeground | GCLineWidth;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    gcValues.line_width = ops->borderWidth;
+    if (ops->outlineColor)
+      gcValues.foreground = ops->outlineColor->pixel;
+    else if (ops->fill)
+      gcValues.foreground = Tk_3DBorderColor(ops->fill)->pixel;
+    GC newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+    if (outlineGC_)
+      Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, outlineGC_);
+    outlineGC_ = newGC;
+  }
+
+  // errorBarGC
+  {
+    unsigned long gcMask = GCForeground | GCLineWidth;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    if (ops->errorBarColor)
+      gcValues.foreground = ops->errorBarColor->pixel;
+    else if (ops->outlineColor)
+      gcValues.foreground = ops->outlineColor->pixel;
+    else if (ops->fill)
+      gcValues.foreground = Tk_3DBorderColor(ops->fill)->pixel;
+
+    gcValues.line_width = ops->errorBarLineWidth;
+    GC newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+    if (errorBarGC_)
+      Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, errorBarGC_);
+    errorBarGC_ = newGC;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenBar.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenBar.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f39db94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenBar.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrPenBar_h__
+#define __BltGrPenBar_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int errorBarShow;
+    int errorBarLineWidth;
+    int errorBarCapWidth;
+    XColor* errorBarColor;
+    int valueShow;
+    const char *valueFormat;
+    TextStyleOptions valueStyle;
+
+    XColor* outlineColor;
+    Tk_3DBorder fill;
+    int borderWidth;
+    int relief;
+  } BarPenOptions;
+
+  class BarPen : public Pen {
+  public:
+    GC fillGC_;
+    GC outlineGC_;
+    GC errorBarGC_;
+
+  public:
+    BarPen(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    BarPen(Graph*, const char*, void*);
+    virtual ~BarPen();
+
+    ClassId classId() {return CID_ELEM_BAR;}
+    const char* className() {return "BarElement";}
+    const char* typeName() {return "bar";}
+
+    int configure();
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenLine.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenLine.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f15ce8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenLine.C
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrPenLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+const char* symbolObjOption[] = 
+  {"none", "square", "circle", "diamond", "plus", "cross", "splus", "scross", "triangle", "arrow", NULL};
+
+// Defs
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec linePenOptionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-color", "color", "Color", 
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, traceColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-dashes", "dashes", "Dashes", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, traceDashes), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &dashesObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-errorbarcolor", "errorBarColor", "ErrorBarColor",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, errorBarColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-errorbarwidth", "errorBarWidth", "ErrorBarWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, errorBarLineWidth), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-errorbarcap", "errorBarCap", "ErrorBarCap", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, errorBarCapWidth), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-fill", "fill", "Fill", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, symbol.fillColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-linewidth", "lineWidth", "LineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, traceWidth), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-offdash", "offDash", "OffDash", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, traceOffColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-outline", "outline", "Outline", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, symbol.outlineColor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-outlinewidth", "outlineWidth", "OutlineWidth",
+   "1", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, symbol.outlineWidth), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pixels", "pixels", "Pixels", 
+   "0.1i", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, symbol.size), 0, NULL, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showerrorbars", "showErrorBars", "ShowErrorBars",
+   "both", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, errorBarShow), 
+   0, &fillObjOption, LAYOUT},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-showvalues", "showValues", "ShowValues",
+   "none", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, valueShow), 0, &fillObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-symbol", "symbol", "Symbol",
+   "none", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, symbol), 0, &symbolObjOption, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-valueanchor", "valueAnchor", "ValueAnchor",
+   "s", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, valueStyle.anchor), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-valuecolor", "valueColor", "ValueColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, valueStyle.color), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-valuefont", "valueFont", "ValueFont",
+   STD_FONT_SMALL, -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, valueStyle.font), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-valueformat", "valueFormat", "ValueFormat",
+   "%g", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, valueFormat), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-valuerotate", "valueRotate", "ValueRotate",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LinePenOptions, valueStyle.angle), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+LinePen::LinePen(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr)
+  : Pen(graphPtr, name, hPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = calloc(1, sizeof(LinePenOptions));
+  LinePenOptions* ops = (LinePenOptions*)ops_;
+  manageOptions_ =1;
+
+  traceGC_ =NULL;
+  errorBarGC_ =NULL;
+
+  ops->symbol.type = SYMBOL_NONE;
+
+  ops->valueStyle.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->valueStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->valueStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr_->interp_, linePenOptionSpecs);
+}
+
+LinePen::LinePen(Graph* graphPtr, const char* name, void* options)
+  : Pen(graphPtr, name, NULL)
+{
+  ops_ = options;
+  LinePenOptions* ops = (LinePenOptions*)ops_;
+  manageOptions_ =0;
+
+  traceGC_ =NULL;
+  errorBarGC_ =NULL;
+
+  ops->symbol.type = SYMBOL_NONE;
+
+  ops->valueStyle.anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->valueStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->valueStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->valueStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr_->interp_, linePenOptionSpecs);
+}
+
+LinePen::~LinePen()
+{
+  LinePenOptions* ops = (LinePenOptions*)ops_;
+  
+  if (errorBarGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, errorBarGC_);
+
+  if (traceGC_)
+    graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(traceGC_);
+
+  if (ops->symbol.outlineGC)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, ops->symbol.outlineGC);
+
+  if (ops->symbol.fillGC)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, ops->symbol.fillGC);
+}
+
+int LinePen::configure()
+{
+  LinePenOptions* ops = (LinePenOptions*)ops_;
+
+  // symbol outline
+  {
+    unsigned long gcMask = (GCLineWidth | GCForeground);
+    XColor* colorPtr = ops->symbol.outlineColor;
+    if (!colorPtr)
+      colorPtr = ops->traceColor;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    gcValues.foreground = colorPtr->pixel;
+    gcValues.line_width = ops->symbol.outlineWidth;
+    GC newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+    if (ops->symbol.outlineGC)
+      Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, ops->symbol.outlineGC);
+    ops->symbol.outlineGC = newGC;
+  }
+
+  // symbol fill
+  {
+    unsigned long gcMask = (GCLineWidth | GCForeground);
+    XColor* colorPtr = ops->symbol.fillColor;
+    if (!colorPtr)
+      colorPtr = ops->traceColor;
+    GC newGC = NULL;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    if (colorPtr) {
+      gcValues.foreground = colorPtr->pixel;
+      newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+    }
+    if (ops->symbol.fillGC)
+      Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, ops->symbol.fillGC);
+    ops->symbol.fillGC = newGC;
+  }
+
+  // trace
+  {
+    unsigned long gcMask = 
+      (GCLineWidth | GCForeground | GCLineStyle | GCCapStyle | GCJoinStyle);
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    gcValues.cap_style = CapButt;
+    gcValues.join_style = JoinRound;
+    gcValues.line_style = LineSolid;
+    gcValues.line_width = ops->traceWidth;
+
+    gcValues.foreground = ops->traceColor->pixel;
+    XColor* colorPtr = ops->traceOffColor;
+    if (colorPtr) {
+      gcMask |= GCBackground;
+      gcValues.background = colorPtr->pixel;
+    }
+    if (LineIsDashed(ops->traceDashes)) {
+      gcValues.line_width = ops->traceWidth;
+      gcValues.line_style = !colorPtr ? LineOnOffDash : LineDoubleDash;
+    }
+    GC newGC = graphPtr_->getPrivateGC(gcMask, &gcValues);
+    if (traceGC_)
+      graphPtr_->freePrivateGC(traceGC_);
+
+    if (LineIsDashed(ops->traceDashes)) {
+      ops->traceDashes.offset = ops->traceDashes.values[0] / 2;
+      graphPtr_->setDashes(newGC, &ops->traceDashes);
+    }
+    traceGC_ = newGC;
+  }
+
+  // errorbar
+  {
+    unsigned long gcMask = (GCLineWidth | GCForeground);
+    XColor* colorPtr = ops->errorBarColor;
+    if (!colorPtr)
+      colorPtr = ops->traceColor;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    gcValues.line_width = ops->errorBarLineWidth;
+    gcValues.foreground = colorPtr->pixel;
+    GC newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+    if (errorBarGC_) {
+      Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, errorBarGC_);
+    }
+    errorBarGC_ = newGC;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenLine.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenLine.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63eeeb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenLine.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrPenLine_h__
+#define __BltGrPenLine_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef enum {
+    SYMBOL_NONE, SYMBOL_SQUARE, SYMBOL_CIRCLE, SYMBOL_DIAMOND, SYMBOL_PLUS,
+    SYMBOL_CROSS, SYMBOL_SPLUS, SYMBOL_SCROSS, SYMBOL_TRIANGLE, SYMBOL_ARROW
+  } SymbolType;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    SymbolType type;
+    int size;
+    XColor* outlineColor;
+    int outlineWidth;
+    GC outlineGC;
+    XColor* fillColor;
+    GC fillGC;
+  } Symbol;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int errorBarShow;
+    int errorBarLineWidth;
+    int errorBarCapWidth;
+    XColor* errorBarColor;
+    int valueShow;
+    const char* valueFormat;
+    TextStyleOptions valueStyle;
+
+    Symbol symbol;
+    int traceWidth;
+    Dashes traceDashes;
+    XColor* traceColor;
+    XColor* traceOffColor;
+  } LinePenOptions;
+
+  class LinePen : public Pen {
+  public:
+    GC traceGC_;
+    GC errorBarGC_;
+
+  public:
+    LinePen(Graph*, const char*, Tcl_HashEntry*);
+    LinePen(Graph*, const char*, void*);
+    virtual ~LinePen();
+
+    ClassId classId() {return CID_ELEM_LINE;}
+    const char* className() {return "LineElement";}
+    const char* typeName() {return "line";}
+
+    int configure();
+  };
+};
+
+extern const char* symbolObjOption[];
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c5669d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1996-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenBar.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+int Blt::PenObjConfigure(Graph* graphPtr, Pen* penPtr, 
+			 Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)penPtr->ops(), penPtr->optionTable(), 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    if (penPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    graphPtr->flags |= mask;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc != 5) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "cget option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Pen* penPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getPen(objv[3], &penPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, 
+				      (char*)penPtr->ops(), 
+				      penPtr->optionTable(),
+				      objv[4], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (objPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Pen* penPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getPen(objv[3], &penPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (objc <= 5) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)penPtr->ops(), 
+				       penPtr->optionTable(), 
+				       (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return PenObjConfigure(graphPtr, penPtr, interp, objc-4, objv+4);
+}
+
+static int CreateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (graphPtr->createPen(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), objc, objv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[3]);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int DeleteOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+    
+  Pen* penPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getPen(objv[3], &penPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (penPtr->refCount_ == 0)
+    delete penPtr;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int NamesOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->penTable_, &iter);
+	 hPtr; hPtr=Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      Pen* penPtr = (Pen*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			       Tcl_NewStringObj(penPtr->name_, -1));
+    }
+  } 
+  else {
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&graphPtr->penTable_, &iter);
+	 hPtr; hPtr=Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      Pen* penPtr = (Pen*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      for (int ii=3; ii<objc; ii++) {
+	char *pattern = Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]);
+	if (Tcl_StringMatch(penPtr->name_, pattern)) {
+	  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+				   Tcl_NewStringObj(penPtr->name_, -1));
+	  break;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int TypeOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc<4)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Pen* penPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getPen(objv[3], &penPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), penPtr->typeName(), -1);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::penEnsemble[] = {
+  {"cget",      CgetOp, 0},
+  {"configure", ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"create",    CreateOp, 0},
+  {"delete",    DeleteOp, 0},
+  {"names",     NamesOp, 0},
+  {"type",      TypeOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5dab592
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrPenOp_h__
+#define __BltGrPenOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble penEnsemble[];
+  extern int PenObjConfigure(Blt::Graph* graphPtr, Blt::Pen* penPtr, 
+			     Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOption.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOption.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1da1b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPenOption.C
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1996-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_CustomOptionSetProc PenSetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionGetProc PenGetProc;
+static Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc PenFreeProc;
+Tk_ObjCustomOption penObjOption =
+  {
+    "pen", PenSetProc, PenGetProc, RestoreProc, PenFreeProc, NULL
+  };
+
+static int PenSetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		      Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj** objPtr, char* widgRec,
+		      int offset, char* savePtr, int flags)
+{
+  Pen** penPtrPtr = (Pen**)(widgRec + offset);
+  *(double*)savePtr = *(double*)penPtrPtr;
+  
+  if (!penPtrPtr)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetString(*objPtr);
+  if (!string || !string[0]) {
+    *penPtrPtr = NULL;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  Graph* graphPtr = getGraphFromWindowData(tkwin);
+  Pen* penPtr;
+  if (graphPtr->getPen(*objPtr, &penPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  penPtr->refCount_++;
+  *penPtrPtr = penPtr;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+};
+
+static Tcl_Obj* PenGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, 
+			   char *widgRec, int offset)
+{
+  Pen* penPtr = *(Pen**)(widgRec + offset);
+  if (!penPtr)
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj("", -1);
+
+  return Tcl_NewStringObj(penPtr->name_, -1);
+};
+
+static void PenFreeProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *ptr)
+{
+  Pen* penPtr = *(Pen**)ptr;
+  if (penPtr)
+    if (penPtr->refCount_ > 0)
+      penPtr->refCount_--;
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscript.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscript.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4bbf504
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscript.C
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltConfig.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-center", "center", "Center", 
+   "yes", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, center), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-comments", "comments", "Comments",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, comments), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, &listObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-decorations", "decorations", "Decorations",
+   "yes", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, decorations), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-footer", "footer", "Footer",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, footer), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-greyscale", "greyscale", "Greyscale",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, greyscale), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, reqHeight), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-landscape", "landscape", "Landscape",
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, landscape), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_INT, "-level", "level", "Level", 
+   "2", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, level), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "PadX", 
+   "1.0i", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, xPad), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "PadY", 
+   "1.0i", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, yPad), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-paperheight", "paperHeight", "PaperHeight",
+   "11.0i", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, reqPaperHeight), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-paperwidth", "paperWidth", "PaperWidth",
+   "8.5i", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, reqPaperWidth), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(PostscriptOptions, reqWidth), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+Postscript::Postscript(Graph* graphPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (PostscriptOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(PostscriptOptions));
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+
+  optionTable_ =Tk_CreateOptionTable(graphPtr_->interp_, optionSpecs);
+  Tk_InitOptions(graphPtr_->interp_, (char*)ops_, optionTable_,
+		 graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+}
+
+Postscript::~Postscript()
+{
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, graphPtr_->tkwin_);
+  free(ops_);
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscript.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscript.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0c35a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscript.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrPostscript_h__
+#define __BltGrPostscript_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+namespace Blt {
+ 
+  typedef struct {
+    int center;
+    const char **comments;
+    int decorations;
+    int footer;
+    int greyscale;
+    int landscape;
+    int level;
+    int xPad;
+    int yPad;
+    int reqPaperWidth;
+    int reqPaperHeight;
+    int reqWidth;
+    int reqHeight;
+  } PostscriptOptions;
+
+  class Postscript  {
+  public:
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+
+    int left;
+    int bottom;
+    int right;
+    int top;
+    double scale;
+    int paperHeight;
+    int paperWidth;
+
+  public:
+    Postscript(Graph*);
+    virtual ~Postscript();
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscriptOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscriptOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..931feb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscriptOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscriptOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+int Blt::PostscriptObjConfigure(Graph* graphPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+				int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Postscript* setupPtr = graphPtr->postscript_;
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)setupPtr->ops_, setupPtr->optionTable_, 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (objc != 4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "cget option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Postscript *setupPtr = graphPtr->postscript_;
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, 
+				      (char*)setupPtr->ops_, 
+				      setupPtr->optionTable_,
+				      objv[3], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (objPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Postscript* setupPtr = graphPtr->postscript_;
+  if (objc <= 4) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)setupPtr->ops_, 
+				       setupPtr->optionTable_, 
+				       (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return PostscriptObjConfigure(graphPtr, interp, objc-3, objv+3);
+}
+
+static int OutputOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  const char *fileName = NULL;
+  Tcl_Channel channel = NULL;
+  if (objc > 3) {
+    fileName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+    if (fileName[0] != '-') {
+      // First argument is the file name
+      objv++, objc--;
+
+      channel = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, fileName, "w", 0666);
+      if (!channel)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+      if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, channel, "-translation", "binary") 
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+
+  PSOutput* psPtr = new PSOutput(graphPtr);
+  
+  if (PostscriptObjConfigure(graphPtr, interp, objc-3, objv+3) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (channel)
+      Tcl_Close(interp, channel);
+    delete psPtr;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (graphPtr->print(fileName, psPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (channel)
+      Tcl_Close(interp, channel);
+    delete psPtr;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  int length;
+  const char* buffer = psPtr->getValue(&length);
+  if (channel) {
+    int nBytes = Tcl_Write(channel, buffer, length);
+    if (nBytes < 0) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error writing file \"", fileName, "\": ",
+		       Tcl_PosixError(interp), (char *)NULL);
+      if (channel)
+	Tcl_Close(interp, channel);
+      delete psPtr;
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_Close(interp, channel);
+  }
+  else
+    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), buffer, length);
+
+  delete psPtr;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::postscriptEnsemble[] = {
+  {"cget",      CgetOp, 0},
+  {"configure", ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"output",    OutputOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscriptOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscriptOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a81266
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrPostscriptOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrPostscriptOp_h__
+#define __BltGrPostscriptOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble postscriptEnsemble[];
+  extern int PostscriptObjConfigure(Blt::Graph* graphPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+				    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrText.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrText.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b4e3e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrText.C
@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrText.h"
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+TextStyle::TextStyle(Graph* graphPtr)
+{
+  ops_ = (TextStyleOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(TextStyleOptions));
+  TextStyleOptions* ops = (TextStyleOptions*)ops_;
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  manageOptions_ = 1;
+
+  ops->anchor =TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+  ops->color =NULL;
+  ops->font =NULL;
+  ops->angle =0;
+  ops->justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  xPad_ = 0;
+  yPad_ = 0;
+  gc_ = NULL;
+}
+
+TextStyle::TextStyle(Graph* graphPtr, TextStyleOptions* ops)
+{
+  ops_ = (TextStyleOptions*)ops;
+  graphPtr_ = graphPtr;
+  manageOptions_ = 0;
+
+  xPad_ = 0;
+  yPad_ = 0;
+  gc_ = NULL;
+}
+
+TextStyle::~TextStyle()
+{
+  //  TextStyleOptions* ops = (TextStyleOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (gc_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, gc_);
+
+  if (manageOptions_)
+    free(ops_);
+}
+
+void TextStyle::drawText(Drawable drawable, const char *text, double x, double y) {
+  drawText(drawable, text, (int)x, (int)y);
+}
+
+void TextStyle::drawText(Drawable drawable, const char *text, int x, int y)
+{
+  drawTextBBox(drawable, text, x, y, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+void TextStyle::drawTextBBox(Drawable drawable, const char *text,
+			     int x, int y, int* ww, int* hh)
+{
+  TextStyleOptions* ops = (TextStyleOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (!text || !(*text))
+    return;
+
+  if (!gc_)
+    resetStyle();
+
+  int w1, h1;
+  Tk_TextLayout layout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(ops->font, text, -1, -1, 
+					      ops->justify, 0, &w1, &h1);
+  Point2d rr = rotateText(x, y, w1, h1);
+#if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION == 8) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION >= 6)
+  TkDrawAngledTextLayout(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, gc_, layout,
+			 (int)rr.x, (int)rr.y, ops->angle, 0, -1);
+#else
+  Tk_DrawTextLayout(graphPtr_->display_, drawable, gc_, layout,
+		    (int)rr.x, (int)rr.y, 0, -1);
+#endif
+  Tk_FreeTextLayout(layout);
+
+  if (ww && hh) {
+    double angle = fmod(ops->angle, 360.0);
+    if (angle < 0.0)
+      angle += 360.0;
+
+    if (angle != 0.0) {
+      double rotWidth, rotHeight;
+      graphPtr_->getBoundingBox(w1, h1, angle, &rotWidth, &rotHeight, NULL);
+      w1 = (int)rotWidth;
+      h1 = (int)rotHeight;
+    }
+
+    *ww = w1;
+    *hh = h1;
+  }
+}
+
+void TextStyle::printText(PSOutput* psPtr, const char *text, int x, int y)
+{
+  TextStyleOptions* ops = (TextStyleOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (!text || !(*text))
+    return;
+
+  int w1, h1;
+  Tk_TextLayout layout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(ops->font, text, -1, -1,
+					      ops->justify, 0, &w1, &h1);
+
+  int xx =0;
+  int yy =0;
+  switch (ops->anchor) {
+  case TK_ANCHOR_NW:	   xx = 0; yy = 0; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_N:	   xx = 1; yy = 0; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	   xx = 2; yy = 0; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_E:	   xx = 2; yy = 1; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	   xx = 2; yy = 2; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_S:	   xx = 1; yy = 2; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_SW:	   xx = 0; yy = 2; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_W:	   xx = 0; yy = 1; break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER: xx = 1; yy = 1; break;
+  }
+
+  const char* justify =NULL;
+  switch (ops->justify) {
+  case TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT:   justify = "0";   break;
+  case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: justify = "0.5"; break;
+  case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT:  justify = "1";   break;
+  }
+
+  psPtr->setFont(ops->font);
+  psPtr->setForeground(ops->color);
+
+  psPtr->format("%g %d %d [\n", ops->angle, x, y);
+  Tcl_ResetResult(graphPtr_->interp_);
+  Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(graphPtr_->interp_, layout);
+  psPtr->append(Tcl_GetStringResult(graphPtr_->interp_));
+  Tcl_ResetResult(graphPtr_->interp_);
+  psPtr->format("] %g %g %s DrawText\n", xx/-2.0, yy/-2.0, justify);
+}
+
+void TextStyle::printText(PSOutput* psPtr, const char *text, double x, double y) {
+  return printText(psPtr, text, (int)x, (int)y);
+}
+
+void TextStyle::resetStyle()
+{
+  TextStyleOptions* ops = (TextStyleOptions*)ops_;
+
+  unsigned long gcMask;
+  gcMask = GCFont;
+
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(ops->font);
+  if (ops->color) {
+    gcMask |= GCForeground;
+    gcValues.foreground = ops->color->pixel;
+  }
+  GC newGC = Tk_GetGC(graphPtr_->tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (gc_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(graphPtr_->display_, gc_);
+
+  gc_ = newGC;
+}
+
+Point2d TextStyle::rotateText(int x, int y, int w1, int h1)
+{
+  TextStyleOptions* ops = (TextStyleOptions*)ops_;
+
+  //  Matrix t0 = Translate(-x,-y);
+  //  Matrix t1 = Translate(-w1/2,-h1/2);
+  //  Matrix rr = Rotate(angle);
+  //  Matrix t2 = Translate(w2/2,h2/2);
+  //  Matrix t3 = Translate(x,y);
+
+  double angle = ops->angle;
+  double ccos = cos(M_PI*angle/180.);
+  double ssin = sin(M_PI*angle/180.);
+  double w2, h2;
+  graphPtr_->getBoundingBox(w1, h1, angle, &w2, &h2, NULL);
+
+  double x1 = x+w1/2.;
+  double y1 = y+h1/2.;
+  double x2 = w2/2.+x;
+  double y2 = h2/2.+y;
+
+  double rx =  x*ccos + y*ssin + (-x1*ccos -y1*ssin +x2);
+  double ry = -x*ssin + y*ccos + ( x1*ssin -y1*ccos +y2);
+
+  return graphPtr_->anchorPoint(rx, ry, w2, h2, ops->anchor);
+}
+
+void TextStyle::getExtents(const char *text, int* ww, int* hh)
+{
+  TextStyleOptions* ops = (TextStyleOptions*)ops_;
+
+  int w, h;
+  graphPtr_->getTextExtents(ops->font, text, -1, &w, &h);
+  *ww = w + 2*xPad_;
+  *hh = h + 2*yPad_;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrText.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrText.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4593b33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrText.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltText_h__
+#define __BltText_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Graph;
+  class PSOutput;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;
+    XColor* color;
+    Tk_Font font;
+    double angle;
+    Tk_Justify justify;
+  } TextStyleOptions;
+
+  class TextStyle {
+  protected:
+    Graph* graphPtr_;
+    void* ops_;
+    GC gc_;
+    int manageOptions_;
+
+  public:
+    int xPad_;
+    int yPad_;
+
+  protected:
+    void resetStyle();
+    Point2d rotateText(int, int, int, int);
+
+  public:
+    TextStyle(Graph*);
+    TextStyle(Graph*, TextStyleOptions*);
+    virtual ~TextStyle();
+
+    void* ops() {return ops_;}
+    void drawText(Drawable, const char*, int, int);
+    void drawText(Drawable, const char*, double, double);
+    void drawTextBBox(Drawable, const char*, int, int, int*, int*);
+    void printText(PSOutput*, const char*, int, int);
+    void printText(PSOutput*, const char*, double, double);
+    void getExtents(const char*, int*, int*);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrXAxisOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrXAxisOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac788ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrXAxisOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGrXAxisOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxisOp.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Axis* GetAxisFromCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Obj* obj)
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr->ops_;
+
+  int margin;
+  const char* name = Tcl_GetString(obj);
+  if (!strcmp(name,"xaxis"))
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_LEFT : MARGIN_BOTTOM;
+  else if (!strcmp(name,"yaxis"))
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_BOTTOM : MARGIN_LEFT;
+  else if (!strcmp(name,"x2axis"))
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_RIGHT : MARGIN_TOP;
+  else if (!strcmp(name,"y2axis"))
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_TOP : MARGIN_RIGHT;
+  else
+    return NULL;
+
+  ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->margins[margin].axes);
+  return (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return AxisCgetOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return AxisConfigureOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int ActivateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return AxisActivateOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int BindOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return graphPtr->bindTable_->configure(graphPtr->axisTag(axisPtr->name_), objc-3, objv+3);
+}
+
+static int InvTransformOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return AxisInvTransformOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int LimitsOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return AxisLimitsOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int TransformOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return AxisTransformOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int UseOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr->ops_;
+
+  int margin;
+  ClassId classId;
+  const char* name = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+  if (!strcmp(name,"xaxis")) {
+    classId = CID_AXIS_X;
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_LEFT : MARGIN_BOTTOM;
+  }
+  else if (!strcmp(name,"yaxis")) {
+    classId = CID_AXIS_Y;
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_BOTTOM : MARGIN_LEFT;
+  }
+  else if (!strcmp(name,"x2axis")) {
+    classId = CID_AXIS_X;
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_RIGHT : MARGIN_TOP;
+  }
+  else if (!strcmp(name,"y2axis")) {
+    classId = CID_AXIS_Y;
+    margin = (ops->inverted) ? MARGIN_TOP : MARGIN_RIGHT;
+  }
+  else
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Chain* chain = ops->margins[margin].axes;
+
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Axis* axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr,
+			       Tcl_NewStringObj(axisPtr->name_, -1));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  int axisObjc;  
+  Tcl_Obj **axisObjv;
+  if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[3], &axisObjc, &axisObjv) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Axis* axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    axisPtr->link = NULL;
+    axisPtr->use_ =0;
+    axisPtr->margin_ = MARGIN_NONE;
+    // Clear the axis type if it's not currently used
+    if (axisPtr->refCount_ == 0)
+      axisPtr->setClass(CID_NONE);
+  }
+
+  chain->reset();
+  for (int ii=0; ii<axisObjc; ii++) {
+    Axis* axisPtr;
+    if (graphPtr->getAxis(axisObjv[ii], &axisPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (axisPtr->classId_ == CID_NONE)
+      axisPtr->setClass(classId);
+    else if (axisPtr->classId_ != classId) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong type axis \"", 
+		       axisPtr->name_, "\": can't use ", 
+		       axisPtr->className_, " type axis.", NULL); 
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (axisPtr->link) {
+      // Move the axis from the old margin's "use" list to the new
+      axisPtr->chain->unlinkLink(axisPtr->link);
+      chain->linkAfter(axisPtr->link, NULL);
+    }
+    else
+      axisPtr->link = chain->append(axisPtr);
+
+    axisPtr->chain = chain;
+    axisPtr->use_ =1;
+    axisPtr->margin_ = margin;
+  }
+
+  graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+  graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ViewOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Axis* axisPtr = GetAxisFromCmd(clientData, objv[1]);
+  return AxisViewOp(axisPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+const Ensemble Blt::xaxisEnsemble[] = {
+  {"activate",     ActivateOp, 0},
+  {"bind",         BindOp, 0},
+  {"cget",         CgetOp, 0},
+  {"configure",    ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"deactivate",   ActivateOp, 0},
+  {"invtransform", InvTransformOp, 0},
+  {"limits",       LimitsOp, 0},
+  {"transform",    TransformOp, 0},
+  {"use",          UseOp, 0},
+  {"view",         ViewOp, 0},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrXAxisOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrXAxisOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b813c83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGrXAxisOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGrXAxisOp_h__
+#define __BltGrXAxisOp_h__
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+  extern const Ensemble xaxisEnsemble[];
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraph.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraph.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1453dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraph.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1458 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <cfloat>
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include <tkInt.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGraphOp.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGrBind.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxisOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrXAxisOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairs.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPSOutput.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define MARKER_ABOVE	0
+#define MARKER_UNDER	1
+
+// OptionSpecs
+
+Graph::Graph(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+	     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  valid_ =1;
+  interp_ = interp;
+  tkwin_ = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp_, Tk_MainWindow(interp_), 
+				  Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
+  if (!tkwin_) {
+    valid_ =0;
+    return;
+  }
+  display_ = Tk_Display(tkwin_);
+  ((TkWindow*)tkwin_)->instanceData = this;
+
+  cmdToken_ = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp_, Tk_PathName(tkwin_),
+				   GraphInstCmdProc, this,
+				   GraphInstCmdDeleteProc);
+
+  flags = RESET;
+  nextMarkerId_ = 1;
+
+  inset_ =0;
+  titleX_ =0;
+  titleY_ =0;
+  titleWidth_ =0;
+  titleHeight_ =0;
+  width_ =0;
+  height_ =0;
+  left_ =0;
+  right_ =0;
+  top_ =0;
+  bottom_ =0;
+  focusPtr_ =NULL;
+  halo_ =0;
+  drawGC_ =NULL;
+  vRange_ =0;
+  hRange_ =0;
+  vOffset_ =0;
+  hOffset_ =0;
+  vScale_ =0;
+  hScale_ =0;
+  cache_ =None;
+  cacheWidth_ =0;
+  cacheHeight_ =0;
+
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&axes_.table, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&axes_.tagTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&elements_.table, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&elements_.tagTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&markers_.table, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&markers_.tagTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&penTable_, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+  axes_.displayList = new Chain();
+  elements_.displayList = new Chain();
+  markers_.displayList = new Chain();
+  bindTable_ = new BindTable(this, this);
+
+  // Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the graph,
+  // otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it.
+  Tcl_Preserve(tkwin_);
+
+  Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin_, 
+			ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
+			GraphEventProc, this);
+}
+
+Graph::~Graph()
+{
+  //  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  destroyMarkers();
+  destroyElements();  // must come before legend and others
+
+  delete crosshairs_;
+  delete legend_;
+  delete postscript_;
+
+  destroyAxes();
+  destroyPens();
+
+  delete bindTable_;
+
+  if (drawGC_)
+    Tk_FreeGC(display_, drawGC_);
+
+  if (cache_ != None)
+    Tk_FreePixmap(display_, cache_);
+
+  Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char*)ops_, optionTable_, tkwin_);
+  Tcl_Release(tkwin_);
+  tkwin_ = NULL;
+
+  free (ops_);
+}
+
+int Graph::configure()	
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  inset_ = ops->borderWidth + ops->highlightWidth;
+  if ((ops->reqHeight != Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin_)) ||
+      (ops->reqWidth != Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin_)))
+    Tk_GeometryRequest(tkwin_, ops->reqWidth, ops->reqHeight);
+
+  Tk_SetInternalBorder(tkwin_, ops->borderWidth);
+  XColor* colorPtr = Tk_3DBorderColor(ops->normalBg);
+
+  titleWidth_ =0;
+  titleHeight_ =0;
+  if (ops->title != NULL) {
+    int w, h;
+    TextStyle ts(this, &ops->titleTextStyle);
+    ts.getExtents(ops->title, &w, &h);
+    titleHeight_ = h;
+  }
+
+  // Create GCs for interior and exterior regions, and a background GC for
+  // clearing the margins with XFillRectangle
+  // Margin
+  XGCValues gcValues;
+  gcValues.foreground = ops->titleTextStyle.color->pixel;
+  gcValues.background = colorPtr->pixel;
+  unsigned long gcMask = (GCForeground | GCBackground);
+  GC newGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin_, gcMask, &gcValues);
+  if (drawGC_ != NULL)
+    Tk_FreeGC(display_, drawGC_);
+  drawGC_ = newGC;
+
+  // If the -inverted option changed, we need to readjust the pointers
+  // to the axes and recompute the their scales.
+  adjustAxes();
+
+  // Free the pixmap if we're not buffering the display of elements anymore.
+  if (cache_ != None) {
+    Tk_FreePixmap(display_, cache_);
+    cache_ = None;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Graph::map()
+{
+  if (flags & RESET) {
+    resetAxes();
+    flags &= ~RESET;
+    flags |= LAYOUT;
+  }
+
+  if (flags & LAYOUT) {
+    layoutGraph();
+    crosshairs_->map();
+    mapAxes();
+    mapElements();
+    flags &= ~LAYOUT;
+    flags |= MAP_MARKERS | CACHE;
+  }
+
+  mapMarkers();
+}
+
+void Graph::draw()
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
+  if ((flags & GRAPH_DELETED) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin_))
+    return;
+
+  // Don't bother computing the layout until the size of the window is
+  // something reasonable.
+  if ((Tk_Width(tkwin_) <= 1) || (Tk_Height(tkwin_) <= 1))
+    return;
+
+  width_ = Tk_Width(tkwin_);
+  height_ = Tk_Height(tkwin_);
+
+  map();
+
+  // Create a pixmap the size of the window for double buffering
+  Pixmap drawable = Tk_GetPixmap(display_, Tk_WindowId(tkwin_), 
+				 width_, height_, Tk_Depth(tkwin_));
+
+  if (cache_ == None || cacheWidth_ != width_ || cacheHeight_ != height_) {
+    if (cache_ != None)
+      Tk_FreePixmap(display_, cache_);
+    cache_ = Tk_GetPixmap(display_, Tk_WindowId(tkwin_), width_, height_, 
+			  Tk_Depth(tkwin_));
+    cacheWidth_ = width_;
+    cacheHeight_ = height_;
+    flags |= CACHE;
+  }
+
+  // Update cache if needed
+  if (flags & CACHE) {
+    drawMargins(cache_);
+
+    switch (legend_->position()) {
+    case Legend::TOP:
+    case Legend::BOTTOM:
+    case Legend::RIGHT:
+    case Legend::LEFT:
+      legend_->draw(cache_);
+      break;
+    default:
+      break;
+    }
+
+    // Draw the background of the plotting area with 3D border
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin_, cache_, ops->plotBg, 
+		       left_-ops->plotBW, 
+		       top_-ops->plotBW, 
+		       right_-left_+1+2*ops->plotBW,
+		       bottom_-top_+1+2*ops->plotBW, 
+		       ops->plotBW, ops->plotRelief);
+  
+    drawAxesGrids(cache_);
+    drawAxes(cache_);
+    drawAxesLimits(cache_);
+
+    if (!legend_->isRaised()) {
+      switch (legend_->position()) {
+      case Legend::PLOT:
+      case Legend::XY:
+	legend_->draw(cache_);
+	break;
+      default:
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    drawMarkers(cache_, MARKER_UNDER);
+    drawElements(cache_);
+    drawActiveElements(cache_);
+
+    if (legend_->isRaised()) {
+      switch (legend_->position()) {
+      case Legend::PLOT:
+      case Legend::XY:
+	legend_->draw(cache_);
+	break;
+      default:
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    flags &= ~CACHE;
+  }
+
+  XCopyArea(display_, cache_, drawable, drawGC_, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin_),
+	    Tk_Height(tkwin_), 0, 0);
+  
+  drawMarkers(drawable, MARKER_ABOVE);
+
+  // Draw 3D border just inside of the focus highlight ring
+  if ((ops->borderWidth > 0) && (ops->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT))
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin_, drawable, ops->normalBg, 
+		       ops->highlightWidth, ops->highlightWidth, 
+		       width_ - 2*ops->highlightWidth, 
+		       height_ - 2*ops->highlightWidth, 
+		       ops->borderWidth, ops->relief);
+
+  // Draw focus highlight ring
+  if ((ops->highlightWidth > 0) && (flags & FOCUS)) {
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(ops->highlightColor, drawable);
+    Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin_, gc, ops->highlightWidth, drawable);
+  }
+
+  // crosshairs
+  crosshairs_->draw(drawable);
+
+  XCopyArea(display_, drawable, Tk_WindowId(tkwin_), drawGC_, 
+	    0, 0, width_, height_, 0, 0);
+
+  Tk_FreePixmap(display_, drawable);
+}
+
+int Graph::print(const char* ident, PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+  PostscriptOptions* pops = (PostscriptOptions*)postscript_->ops_;
+
+  // be sure the window is realized so that relief colors are available
+  if (flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
+    flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
+    DisplayGraph(this);
+  }
+
+  // We need to know how big a graph to print.  If the graph hasn't been drawn
+  // yet, the width and height will be 1.  Instead use the requested size of
+  // the widget.  The user can still override this with the -width and -height
+  // postscript options.
+  if (pops->reqWidth > 0)
+    width_ = pops->reqWidth;
+  else if (width_ < 2)
+    width_ = Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin_);
+
+  if (pops->reqHeight > 0)
+    height_ = pops->reqHeight;
+  else if (height_ < 2)
+    height_ = Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin_);
+
+  psPtr->computeBBox(width_, height_);
+  flags |= RESET;
+
+  // Turn on PostScript measurements when computing the graph's layout.
+  reconfigure();
+
+  map();
+
+  int x = left_ - ops->plotBW;
+  int y = top_ - ops->plotBW;
+
+  int w = (right_ - left_ + 1) + (2*ops->plotBW);
+  int h = (bottom_ - top_ + 1) + (2*ops->plotBW);
+
+  int result = psPtr->preamble(ident);
+  if (result != TCL_OK)
+    goto error;
+
+  psPtr->setFont(ops->titleTextStyle.font);
+  if (pops->decorations)
+    psPtr->setBackground(Tk_3DBorderColor(ops->plotBg));
+  else
+    psPtr->setClearBackground();
+
+  psPtr->fillRectangle(x, y, w, h);
+  psPtr->append("gsave\n\n");
+
+  // Start
+  printMargins(psPtr);
+
+  switch (legend_->position()) {
+  case Legend::TOP:
+  case Legend::BOTTOM:
+  case Legend::RIGHT:
+  case Legend::LEFT:
+    legend_->print(psPtr);
+    break;
+  default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  printAxesGrids(psPtr);
+  printAxes(psPtr);
+  printAxesLimits(psPtr);
+
+  if (!legend_->isRaised()) {
+    switch (legend_->position()) {
+    case Legend::PLOT:
+    case Legend::XY:
+      legend_->print(psPtr);
+      break;
+    default:
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  printMarkers(psPtr, MARKER_UNDER);
+  printElements(psPtr);
+  printActiveElements(psPtr);
+
+  if (legend_->isRaised()) {
+    switch (legend_->position()) {
+    case Legend::PLOT:
+    case Legend::XY:
+      legend_->print(psPtr);
+      break;
+    default:
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+  printMarkers(psPtr, MARKER_ABOVE);
+
+  psPtr->append("\n");
+  psPtr->append("% Unset clipping\n");
+  psPtr->append("grestore\n\n");
+  psPtr->append("showpage\n");
+  psPtr->append("%Trailer\n");
+  psPtr->append("grestore\n");
+  psPtr->append("end\n");
+  psPtr->append("%EOF\n");
+
+ error:
+  width_ = Tk_Width(tkwin_);
+  height_ = Tk_Height(tkwin_);
+  reconfigure();
+
+  // Redraw the graph in order to re-calculate the layout as soon as
+  // possible. This is in the case the crosshairs are active.
+  flags |= LAYOUT;
+  eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return result;
+}
+
+void Graph::eventuallyRedraw() 
+{
+  if (flags & GRAPH_DELETED)
+    return;
+
+  if (!(flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
+    flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
+    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayGraph, this);
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::extents(Region2d* regionPtr)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  regionPtr->left = (double)(hOffset_ - ops->xPad);
+  regionPtr->top = (double)(vOffset_ - ops->yPad);
+  regionPtr->right = (double)(hOffset_ + hRange_ + ops->xPad);
+  regionPtr->bottom = (double)(vOffset_ + vRange_ + ops->yPad);
+}
+
+int Graph::invoke(const Ensemble* ensemble, int cmdIndex,
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  while (cmdIndex < objc) {
+    int index;
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp_, objv[cmdIndex], ensemble, sizeof(ensemble[0]), "command", 0, &index) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (ensemble[index].proc)
+      return ensemble[index].proc(this, interp_, objc, objv);
+
+    ensemble = ensemble[index].subensemble;
+    ++cmdIndex;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp_, cmdIndex, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
+  return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+void Graph::reconfigure()
+{
+  configure();
+  legend_->configure();
+  configureElements();
+  configureAxes();
+  configureMarkers();
+}
+
+// Margins
+
+void Graph::drawMargins(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+  Rectangle rects[4];
+
+  // Draw the four outer rectangles which encompass the plotting
+  // surface. This clears the surrounding area and clips the plot.
+  rects[0].x = rects[0].y = rects[3].x = rects[1].x = 0;
+  rects[0].width = rects[3].width = width_;
+  rects[0].height = top_;
+  rects[3].y = bottom_;
+  rects[3].height = height_ - bottom_;
+  rects[2].y = rects[1].y = top_;
+  rects[1].width = left_;
+  rects[2].height = rects[1].height = bottom_ - top_;
+  rects[2].x = right_;
+  rects[2].width = width_ - right_;
+
+  Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin_, drawable, ops->normalBg, 
+		     rects[0].x, rects[0].y, rects[0].width, rects[0].height, 
+		     0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+  Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin_, drawable, ops->normalBg, 
+		     rects[1].x, rects[1].y, rects[1].width, rects[1].height, 
+		     0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+  Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin_, drawable, ops->normalBg, 
+		     rects[2].x, rects[2].y, rects[2].width, rects[2].height, 
+		     0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+  Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin_, drawable, ops->normalBg, 
+		     rects[3].x, rects[3].y, rects[3].width, rects[3].height, 
+		     0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+  // Draw 3D border around the plotting area
+  if (ops->plotBW > 0) {
+    int x = left_ - ops->plotBW;
+    int y = top_ - ops->plotBW;
+    int w = (right_ - left_) + (2*ops->plotBW);
+    int h = (bottom_ - top_) + (2*ops->plotBW);
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin_, drawable, ops->normalBg, 
+		       x, y, w, h, ops->plotBW, ops->plotRelief);
+  }
+  
+  if (ops->title) {
+    TextStyle ts(this, &ops->titleTextStyle);
+    ts.drawText(drawable, ops->title, titleX_, titleY_);
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::printMargins(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+  PostscriptOptions* pops = (PostscriptOptions*)postscript_->ops_;
+  Rectangle margin[4];
+
+  margin[0].x = margin[0].y = margin[3].x = margin[1].x = 0;
+  margin[0].width = margin[3].width = width_;
+  margin[0].height = top_;
+  margin[3].y = bottom_;
+  margin[3].height = height_ - bottom_;
+  margin[2].y = margin[1].y = top_;
+  margin[1].width = left_;
+  margin[2].height = margin[1].height = bottom_ - top_;
+  margin[2].x = right_;
+  margin[2].width = width_ - right_;
+
+  // Clear the surrounding margins and clip the plotting surface
+  if (pops->decorations)
+    psPtr->setBackground(Tk_3DBorderColor(ops->normalBg));
+  else
+    psPtr->setClearBackground();
+
+  psPtr->append("% Margins\n");
+  psPtr->fillRectangles(margin, 4);
+    
+  if (pops->decorations) {
+    psPtr->append("% Interior 3D border\n");
+    if (ops->plotBW > 0) {
+      int x = left_ - ops->plotBW;
+      int y = top_ - ops->plotBW;
+      int w = (right_ - left_) + (2*ops->plotBW);
+      int h = (bottom_ - top_) + (2*ops->plotBW);
+      psPtr->print3DRectangle(ops->normalBg, (double)x, (double)y, w, h,
+			      ops->plotBW, ops->plotRelief);
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (ops->title) {
+    psPtr->append("% Graph title\n");
+    TextStyle ts(this, &ops->titleTextStyle);
+    ts.printText(psPtr, ops->title, titleX_, titleY_);
+  }
+}
+
+// Pens
+
+void Graph::destroyPens()
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&penTable_, &iter);
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+    Pen* penPtr = (Pen*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    delete penPtr;
+  }
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&penTable_);
+}
+
+int Graph::getPen(Tcl_Obj* objPtr, Pen** penPtrPtr)
+{
+  *penPtrPtr = NULL;
+  const char *name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  if (!name || !name[0])
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&penTable_, name);
+  if (!hPtr) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "can't find pen \"", name, "\" in \"", 
+		     Tk_PathName(tkwin_), "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  *penPtrPtr = (Pen*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+// Elements
+
+void Graph::destroyElements()
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&elements_.table, &iter);
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    legend_->removeElement(elemPtr);
+    delete elemPtr;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&elements_.table);
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&elements_.tagTable);
+  delete elements_.displayList;
+}
+
+void Graph::configureElements()
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->configure();
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::mapElements()
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->map();
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::drawElements(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  // Draw with respect to the stacking order
+  for (ChainLink* link=Chain_LastLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->draw(drawable);
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::drawActiveElements(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->drawActive(drawable);
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::printElements(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->print(psPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::printActiveElements(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    elemPtr->printActive(psPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+int Graph::getElement(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Element **elemPtrPtr)
+{
+  *elemPtrPtr =NULL;
+  const char* name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  if (!name || !name[0])
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_HashEntry*hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&elements_.table, name);
+  if (!hPtr) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "can't find element \"", name, "\" in \"",
+		     Tk_PathName(tkwin_), "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  *elemPtrPtr = (Element*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+ClientData Graph::elementTag(const char *tagName)
+{
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = 
+    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&elements_.tagTable, tagName, &isNew);
+  return Tcl_GetHashKey(&elements_.tagTable, hPtr);
+}
+
+// Markers
+
+void Graph::destroyMarkers()
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&markers_.table, &iter); 
+       hPtr; hPtr=Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+    Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    delete markerPtr;
+  }
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&markers_.table);
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&markers_.tagTable);
+  delete markers_.displayList;
+}
+
+
+void Graph::configureMarkers()
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(markers_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    markerPtr->configure();
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::mapMarkers()
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(markers_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    MarkerOptions* mops = (MarkerOptions*)markerPtr->ops();
+
+    if (mops->hide)
+      continue;
+
+    if ((flags & MAP_MARKERS) || (markerPtr->flags & MAP_ITEM)) {
+      markerPtr->map();
+      markerPtr->flags &= ~MAP_ITEM;
+    }
+  }
+
+  flags &= ~MAP_MARKERS;
+}
+
+void Graph::drawMarkers(Drawable drawable, int under)
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(markers_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    MarkerOptions* mops = (MarkerOptions*)markerPtr->ops();
+
+    if ((mops->drawUnder != under) || markerPtr->clipped_ || mops->hide)
+      continue;
+
+    if (isElementHidden(markerPtr))
+      continue;
+
+    markerPtr->draw(drawable);
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::printMarkers(PSOutput* psPtr, int under)
+{
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(markers_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    MarkerOptions* mops = (MarkerOptions*)markerPtr->ops();
+    if (mops->drawUnder != under)
+      continue;
+
+    if (mops->hide)
+      continue;
+
+    if (isElementHidden(markerPtr))
+      continue;
+
+    psPtr->format("%% Marker \"%s\" is a %s.\n", 
+		  markerPtr->name_, markerPtr->className());
+    markerPtr->print(psPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+ClientData Graph::markerTag(const char* tagName)    
+{
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&markers_.tagTable, tagName,&isNew);
+  return Tcl_GetHashKey(&markers_.tagTable, hPtr);
+}
+
+Marker* Graph::nearestMarker(int x, int y, int under)
+{
+  Point2d point;
+  point.x = (double)x;
+  point.y = (double)y;
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(markers_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Marker* markerPtr = (Marker*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    MarkerOptions* mops = (MarkerOptions*)markerPtr->ops();
+
+    if ((markerPtr->flags & MAP_ITEM) || mops->hide)
+      continue;
+
+    if (isElementHidden(markerPtr))
+      continue;
+
+    if (mops->drawUnder == under)
+      if (markerPtr->pointIn(&point))
+	return markerPtr;
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+int Graph::isElementHidden(Marker* markerPtr)
+{
+  MarkerOptions* mops = (MarkerOptions*)markerPtr->ops();
+
+  if (mops->elemName) {
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&elements_.table, mops->elemName);
+    if (hPtr) {
+      Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      ElementOptions* eops = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+      if (!elemPtr->link || eops->hide)
+	return 1;
+    }
+  }
+  return 0;
+}
+
+// Axis
+
+int Graph::createAxes()
+{
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+    int isNew;
+    Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = 
+      Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&axes_.table, axisNames[ii].name, &isNew);
+    Chain* chain = new Chain();
+
+    Axis* axisPtr = new Axis(this, axisNames[ii].name, ii, hPtr);
+    if (!axisPtr)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, axisPtr);
+
+    axisPtr->refCount_ = 1;
+    axisPtr->use_ =1;
+    
+    axisPtr->setClass(!(ii&1) ? CID_AXIS_X : CID_AXIS_Y);
+
+    if (Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)axisPtr->ops(), 
+		       axisPtr->optionTable(), tkwin_) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (axisPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if ((axisPtr->margin_ == MARGIN_RIGHT) || (axisPtr->margin_ == MARGIN_TOP))
+      ops->hide = 1;
+
+    axisChain_[ii] = chain;
+    axisPtr->link = chain->append(axisPtr);
+    axisPtr->chain = chain;
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Graph::createAxis(int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+  if (string[0] == '-') {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "name of axis \"", string, 
+		     "\" can't start with a '-'", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&axes_.table, string, &isNew);
+  if (!isNew) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "axis \"", string, "\" already exists in \"",
+		     Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Axis* axisPtr = new Axis(this, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), MARGIN_NONE, hPtr);
+  if (!axisPtr)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, axisPtr);
+
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)axisPtr->ops(), axisPtr->optionTable(), tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (AxisObjConfigure(axisPtr, interp_, objc-4, objv+4) != TCL_OK)) {
+    delete axisPtr;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Graph::destroyAxes()
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&axes_.table, &cursor);
+       hPtr; hPtr=Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    delete axisPtr;
+  }
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&axes_.table);
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++)
+    delete axisChain_[ii];
+
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&axes_.tagTable);
+  delete axes_.displayList;
+}
+
+void Graph::configureAxes()
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&axes_.table, &cursor);
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    axisPtr->configure();
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::mapAxes()
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+    int count =0;
+    int offset =0;
+
+    Chain* chain = ops->margins[ii].axes;
+    for (ChainLink* link=Chain_FirstLink(chain); link; 
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      AxisOptions* aops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+      if (!axisPtr->use_)
+	continue;
+
+      if (aops->reqNumMajorTicks <= 0)
+	aops->reqNumMajorTicks = 4;
+
+      if (ops->stackAxes)
+	axisPtr->mapStacked(count, ii);
+      else 
+	axisPtr->map(offset, ii);
+
+      if (aops->showGrid)
+	axisPtr->mapGridlines();
+
+      offset += axisPtr->isHorizontal() ? axisPtr->height_ : axisPtr->width_;
+      count++;
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::drawAxes(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(ops->margins[ii].axes); link;
+	 link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+      Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      axisPtr->draw(drawable);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::drawAxesLimits(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&axes_.table, &cursor);
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    axisPtr->drawLimits(drawable);
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::drawAxesGrids(Drawable drawable)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->margins[ii].axes); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      axisPtr->drawGrids(drawable);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::printAxes(PSOutput* psPtr) 
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  for (Margin *mp = ops->margins, *mend = mp + 4; mp < mend; mp++) {
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(mp->axes); link; 
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      axisPtr->print(psPtr);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::printAxesGrids(PSOutput* psPtr) 
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(ops->margins[ii].axes); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      axisPtr->printGrids(psPtr);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Graph::printAxesLimits(PSOutput* psPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&axes_.table, &cursor);
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    axisPtr->printLimits(psPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+int Graph::getAxis(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Axis **axisPtrPtr)
+{
+  *axisPtrPtr = NULL;
+  const char* name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  if (!name || !name[0])
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&axes_.table, name);
+  if (!hPtr) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "can't find axis \"", name, "\" in \"", 
+		     Tk_PathName(tkwin_), "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  *axisPtrPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+ClientData Graph::axisTag(const char *tagName)
+{
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&axes_.tagTable, tagName, &isNew);
+  return Tcl_GetHashKey(&axes_.tagTable, hPtr);
+}
+
+void Graph::adjustAxes() 
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (ops->inverted) {
+    ops->leftMargin.axes   = axisChain_[0];
+    ops->bottomMargin.axes = axisChain_[1];
+    ops->rightMargin.axes  = axisChain_[2];
+    ops->topMargin.axes    = axisChain_[3];
+  }
+  else {
+    ops->leftMargin.axes   = axisChain_[1];
+    ops->bottomMargin.axes = axisChain_[0];
+    ops->rightMargin.axes  = axisChain_[3];
+    ops->topMargin.axes    = axisChain_[2];
+  }
+}
+
+Point2d Graph::map2D(double x, double y, Axis* xAxis, Axis* yAxis)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Point2d point;
+  if (ops->inverted) {
+    point.x = yAxis->hMap(y);
+    point.y = xAxis->vMap(x);
+  }
+  else {
+    point.x = xAxis->hMap(x);
+    point.y = yAxis->vMap(y);
+  }
+  return point;
+}
+
+Point2d Graph::invMap2D(double x, double y, Axis* xAxis, Axis* yAxis)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Point2d point;
+  if (ops->inverted) {
+    point.x = xAxis->invVMap(y);
+    point.y = yAxis->invHMap(x);
+  }
+  else {
+    point.x = xAxis->invHMap(x);
+    point.y = yAxis->invVMap(y);
+  }
+  return point;
+}
+
+void Graph::resetAxes()
+{
+  // Step 1:  Reset all axes. Initialize the data limits of the axis to
+  // impossible values.
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&axes_.table, &cursor);
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    axisPtr->min_ = axisPtr->valueRange_.min = DBL_MAX;
+    axisPtr->max_ = axisPtr->valueRange_.max = -DBL_MAX;
+  }
+
+  // Step 2:  For each element that's to be displayed, get the smallest
+  // and largest data values mapped to each X and Y-axis.  This
+  // will be the axis limits if the user doesn't override them 
+  // with -min and -max options.
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    Region2d exts;
+
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* elemops = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+    elemPtr->extents(&exts);
+    elemops->xAxis->getDataLimits(exts.left, exts.right);
+    elemops->yAxis->getDataLimits(exts.top, exts.bottom);
+  }
+
+  // Step 3:  Now that we know the range of data values for each axis,
+  // set axis limits and compute a sweep to generate tick values.
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&axes_.table, &cursor);
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+    axisPtr->fixRange();
+
+    double min = axisPtr->min_;
+    double max = axisPtr->max_;
+    if ((!isnan(axisPtr->scrollMin_)) && (min < axisPtr->scrollMin_))
+      min = axisPtr->scrollMin_;
+
+    if ((!isnan(axisPtr->scrollMax_)) && (max > axisPtr->scrollMax_))
+      max = axisPtr->scrollMax_;
+
+    if (ops->logScale)
+      axisPtr->logScale(min, max);
+    else
+      axisPtr->linearScale(min, max);
+  }
+}
+
+Axis* Graph::nearestAxis(int x, int y)
+{
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&axes_.table, &cursor); 
+       hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Axis *axisPtr = (Axis*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+    if (ops->hide || !axisPtr->use_)
+      continue;
+
+    if (ops->showTicks) {
+      for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(axisPtr->tickLabels_); link;
+	   link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {	
+	TickLabel *labelPtr = (TickLabel*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+	double rw, rh;
+	Point2d bbox[5];
+	getBoundingBox(labelPtr->width, labelPtr->height, ops->tickAngle,
+		       &rw, &rh, bbox);
+	Point2d t;
+	t = anchorPoint(labelPtr->anchorPos.x, labelPtr->anchorPos.y,
+			rw, rh, axisPtr->tickAnchor_);
+	t.x = x - t.x - (rw * 0.5);
+	t.y = y - t.y - (rh * 0.5);
+
+	bbox[4] = bbox[0];
+	if (pointInPolygon(&t, bbox, 5)) {
+	  return axisPtr;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+
+    if (ops->title) {
+      int w, h;
+      double rw, rh;
+      Point2d bbox[5];
+      getTextExtents(ops->titleFont, ops->title, -1, &w, &h);
+      getBoundingBox(w, h, axisPtr->titleAngle_, &rw, &rh, bbox);
+      Point2d t = anchorPoint(axisPtr->titlePos_.x, axisPtr->titlePos_.y, 
+			      rw, rh, axisPtr->titleAnchor_);
+      // Translate the point so that the 0,0 is the upper left 
+      // corner of the bounding box
+      t.x = x - t.x - (rw * 0.5);
+      t.y = y - t.y - (rh * 0.5);
+	    
+      bbox[4] = bbox[0];
+      if (pointInPolygon(&t, bbox, 5)) {
+	return axisPtr;
+      }
+    }
+    if (ops->lineWidth > 0) {
+      if ((x <= axisPtr->right_) && (x >= axisPtr->left_) && 
+	  (y <= axisPtr->bottom_) && (y >= axisPtr->top_)) {
+	return axisPtr;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  return NULL;
+}
+ 
+// Bind
+
+const char** Graph::getTags(ClientData object, ClassId classId, int* num)
+{
+  const char** tags =NULL;
+
+  switch (classId) {
+  case CID_ELEM_BAR:		
+  case CID_ELEM_LINE: 
+    {
+      Element* ptr = (Element*)object;
+      ElementOptions* ops = (ElementOptions*)ptr->ops();
+      int cnt =0;
+      for (const char** pp=ops->tags; *pp; pp++)
+	cnt++;
+      cnt +=2;
+
+      tags = new const char*[cnt];
+      tags[0] = (const char*)elementTag(ptr->name_);
+      tags[1] = (const char*)elementTag(ptr->className());
+      int ii=2;
+      for (const char** pp = ops->tags; *pp; pp++, ii++)
+	tags[ii] = (const char*)elementTag(*pp);
+
+      *num = cnt;
+      return tags;
+    }
+    break;
+  case CID_AXIS_X:
+  case CID_AXIS_Y:
+    {
+      Axis* ptr = (Axis*)object;
+      AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)ptr->ops();
+      int cnt =0;
+      for (const char** pp=ops->tags; *pp; pp++)
+	cnt++;
+      cnt +=2;
+
+      tags = new const char*[cnt];
+      tags[0] = (const char*)axisTag(ptr->name_);
+      tags[1] = (const char*)axisTag(ptr->className());
+      int ii=2;
+      for (const char** pp = ops->tags; *pp; pp++, ii++)
+	tags[ii] = (const char*)axisTag(*pp);
+
+      *num = cnt;
+      return tags;
+    }
+    break;
+  case CID_MARKER_BITMAP:
+  case CID_MARKER_LINE:
+  case CID_MARKER_POLYGON:
+  case CID_MARKER_TEXT:
+    {
+      Marker* ptr = (Marker*)object;
+      MarkerOptions* ops = (MarkerOptions*)ptr->ops();
+      int cnt =0;
+      for (const char** pp=ops->tags; *pp; pp++)
+	cnt++;
+      cnt +=2;
+
+      tags = new const char*[cnt];
+      tags[0] = (const char*)markerTag(ptr->name_);
+      tags[1] = (const char*)markerTag(ptr->className());
+      int ii=2;
+      for (const char** pp = ops->tags; *pp; pp++, ii++)
+	tags[ii] = (const char*)markerTag(*pp);
+
+      *num = cnt;
+      return tags;
+    }
+    break;
+  default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+ClientData Graph::pickEntry(int xx, int yy, ClassId* classIdPtr)
+{
+  if (flags & (LAYOUT | MAP_MARKERS)) {
+    *classIdPtr = CID_NONE;
+    return NULL;
+  }
+
+  // Sample coordinate is in one of the graph margins. Can only pick an axis.
+  Region2d exts;
+  extents(&exts);
+  if (xx>=exts.right || xx<exts.left || yy>=exts.bottom || yy<exts.top) {
+    Axis* axisPtr = nearestAxis(xx, yy);
+    if (axisPtr) {
+      *classIdPtr = axisPtr->classId();
+      return axisPtr;
+    }
+  }
+
+  // From top-to-bottom check:
+  // 1. markers drawn on top (-under false).
+  // 2. elements using its display list back to front.
+  // 3. markers drawn under element (-under true).
+  Marker* markerPtr = nearestMarker(xx, yy, 0);
+  if (markerPtr) {
+    *classIdPtr = markerPtr->classId();
+    return markerPtr;
+  }
+
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+  ClosestSearch* searchPtr = &ops->search;
+  searchPtr->index = -1;
+  searchPtr->x = xx;
+  searchPtr->y = yy;
+  searchPtr->dist = (double)(searchPtr->halo + 1);
+	
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_LastLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_PrevLink(link)) {
+    Element* elemPtr = (Element*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    ElementOptions* eops = (ElementOptions*)elemPtr->ops();
+    if (eops->hide)
+      continue;
+    elemPtr->closest();
+  }
+
+  // Found an element within the minimum halo distance.
+  if (searchPtr->dist <= (double)searchPtr->halo) {
+    *classIdPtr = searchPtr->elemPtr->classId();
+    return searchPtr->elemPtr;
+  }
+
+  markerPtr = nearestMarker(xx, yy, 1);
+  if (markerPtr) {
+    *classIdPtr = markerPtr->classId();
+    return markerPtr;
+  }
+
+  *classIdPtr = CID_NONE;
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+int Graph::getXY(const char* string, int* xPtr, int* yPtr)
+{
+  if (!string || !*string) {
+    *xPtr = -SHRT_MAX;
+    *yPtr = -SHRT_MAX;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  if (*string != '@') {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "bad position \"", string, 
+		     "\": should be \"@x,y\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  char* comma = (char*)strchr(string + 1, ',');
+  if (!comma) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "bad position \"", string, 
+		     "\": should be \"@x,y\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  *comma = '\0';
+  int x, y;
+  int result = ((Tk_GetPixels(interp_, tkwin_, string + 1, &x) == TCL_OK) &&
+		(Tk_GetPixels(interp_, tkwin_, comma + 1, &y) == TCL_OK));
+  *comma = ',';
+  if (!result) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, ": can't parse position \"", string, "\"",
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  *xPtr = x;
+  *yPtr = y;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+// Graphics
+
+void Graph::drawSegments(Drawable drawable, GC gc, 
+			 Segment2d* segments, int nSegments)
+{
+  for (Segment2d *sp = segments, *send = sp + nSegments; sp < send; sp++)
+    XDrawLine(display_, drawable, gc, (int)sp->p.x, (int)sp->p.y, (int)sp->q.x, (int)sp->q.y);
+}
+
+GC Graph::getPrivateGC(unsigned long gcMask, XGCValues *valuePtr)
+{
+  Pixmap pixmap = None;
+  Drawable drawable = Tk_WindowId(tkwin_);
+  Display* display = Tk_Display(tkwin_);
+  if (drawable == None)
+    drawable = RootWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin_),Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin_));
+
+  GC gc = XCreateGC(display, drawable, gcMask, valuePtr);
+  if (pixmap != None)
+    Tk_FreePixmap(display, pixmap);
+
+  return gc;
+}
+
+void Graph::freePrivateGC(GC gc)
+{
+  Tk_FreeXId(display_, (XID)XGContextFromGC(gc));
+  XFreeGC(display_, gc);
+}
+
+void Graph::setDashes(GC gc, Dashes* dashesPtr)
+{
+  XSetDashes(display_, gc, dashesPtr->offset, (const char*)dashesPtr->values,
+	     (int)strlen((char*)dashesPtr->values));
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraph.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraph.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f8df01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraph.h
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGraph_h__
+#define __BltGraph_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltChain.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+#include "tkbltGrText.h"
+
+typedef struct Ensemble {
+  const char *name;
+  Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc;
+  const struct Ensemble *subensemble;
+} Ensemble;
+
+namespace Blt {
+  class Axis;
+  class BindTable;
+  class Crosshairs;
+  class Element;
+  class Marker;
+  class Legend;
+  class Pen;
+  class Postscript;
+  class PSOutput;
+
+  class Pick {
+  public:
+    virtual ClientData pickEntry(int, int, ClassId*) =0;
+  };
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int halo;
+    int mode;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int along;
+
+    Element* elemPtr;
+    Point2d point;
+    int index;
+    double dist;
+  } ClosestSearch;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    int width;
+    int height;
+    int axesOffset;
+    int axesTitleLength;
+    int maxTickWidth;
+    int maxTickHeight;
+    unsigned int nAxes;
+    Chain* axes;
+    int reqSize;
+    int site;
+  } Margin;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Tcl_HashTable table;
+    Chain* displayList;
+    Tcl_HashTable tagTable;
+  } Component;
+
+#define rightMargin	margins[MARGIN_RIGHT]
+#define leftMargin	margins[MARGIN_LEFT]
+#define topMargin	margins[MARGIN_TOP]
+#define bottomMargin	margins[MARGIN_BOTTOM]
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double aspect;
+    Tk_3DBorder normalBg;
+    int borderWidth;
+    Margin margins[4];
+    Tk_Cursor cursor;
+    TextStyleOptions titleTextStyle;
+    int reqHeight;
+    XColor* highlightBgColor;
+    XColor* highlightColor;
+    int highlightWidth;
+    int inverted;
+    Tk_3DBorder plotBg;
+    int plotBW;
+    int xPad;
+    int yPad;
+    int plotRelief;
+    int relief;
+    ClosestSearch search;
+    int stackAxes;
+    const char *takeFocus; // nor used in C code
+    const char *title;
+    int reqWidth;
+    int reqPlotWidth;
+    int reqPlotHeight;
+  } GraphOptions;
+
+  class Graph : public Pick {
+  public:
+    Tcl_Interp* interp_;
+    Tk_Window tkwin_;
+    Display *display_;
+    Tcl_Command cmdToken_;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable_;
+    void* ops_;
+    int valid_;
+
+    unsigned int flags;
+    int nextMarkerId_;
+
+    Component axes_;
+    Component elements_;
+    Component markers_;
+    Tcl_HashTable penTable_;
+    BindTable* bindTable_;
+    Chain* axisChain_[4];
+
+    Legend* legend_;
+    Crosshairs* crosshairs_;
+    Postscript* postscript_;
+
+    int inset_;
+    int titleX_;
+    int titleY_;
+    int titleWidth_;
+    int titleHeight_;
+    int width_;
+    int height_;
+    int left_;
+    int right_;
+    int top_;
+    int bottom_;
+    Axis* focusPtr_;
+    int halo_;
+    GC drawGC_;
+    int vRange_;
+    int hRange_;
+    int vOffset_;
+    int hOffset_;
+    double vScale_;
+    double hScale_;
+    Pixmap cache_;
+    int cacheWidth_;
+    int cacheHeight_;
+
+  protected:
+    void layoutGraph();
+  
+    void drawMargins(Drawable);
+    void printMargins(PSOutput*);
+    int getMarginGeometry(Margin*);
+
+    void destroyPens();
+
+    void destroyElements();
+    void configureElements();
+    virtual void mapElements();
+    void drawElements(Drawable);
+    void drawActiveElements(Drawable);
+    void printElements(PSOutput*);
+    void printActiveElements(PSOutput*);
+
+    void destroyMarkers();
+    void configureMarkers();
+    void mapMarkers();
+    void drawMarkers(Drawable, int);
+    void printMarkers(PSOutput*, int);
+
+    int createAxes();
+    void destroyAxes();
+    void configureAxes();
+    void mapAxes();
+    void drawAxes(Drawable);
+    void drawAxesLimits(Drawable);
+    void drawAxesGrids(Drawable);
+    void adjustAxes();
+
+  public:
+    Graph(ClientData, Tcl_Interp*, int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+    virtual ~Graph();
+
+    virtual int configure();
+    void map();
+    void draw();
+    void eventuallyRedraw();
+    int print(const char*, PSOutput*);
+    void extents(Region2d*);
+    int invoke(const Ensemble*, int, int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+    void reconfigure();
+
+    int createAxis(int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+    void printAxes(PSOutput*);
+    void printAxesGrids(PSOutput*);
+    void printAxesLimits(PSOutput*);
+    int getAxis(Tcl_Obj*, Axis**);
+    ClientData axisTag(const char*);
+    Point2d map2D(double, double, Axis*, Axis*);
+    Point2d invMap2D(double, double, Axis*, Axis*);
+    virtual void resetAxes();
+    Axis* nearestAxis(int, int);
+
+    ClientData markerTag(const char*);
+    Marker* nearestMarker(int, int, int);
+    int isElementHidden(Marker*);
+
+    virtual int createElement(int, Tcl_Obj* const []) =0;
+    int getElement(Tcl_Obj*, Element**);
+    ClientData elementTag(const char*);
+
+    virtual int createPen(const char*, int, Tcl_Obj* const []) =0;
+    int getPen(Tcl_Obj*, Pen**);
+
+    int getXY(const char*, int*, int*);
+    void getTextExtents(Tk_Font, const char*, int, int*, int*);
+    void getBoundingBox(int, int, double, double*, double*, Point2d*);
+    Point2d anchorPoint(double, double, double, double, Tk_Anchor);
+
+    const char** getTags(ClientData, ClassId, int*);
+    ClientData pickEntry(int, int, ClassId*);
+
+    void drawSegments(Drawable, GC, Segment2d*, int);
+    void setDashes(GC, Dashes*);
+
+    GC getPrivateGC(unsigned long, XGCValues*);
+    void freePrivateGC(GC);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphBar.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphBar.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..861c12a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphBar.C
@@ -0,0 +1,516 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraphBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGraphOp.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrXAxisOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairs.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+// BarGroup
+
+BarGroup::BarGroup()
+{
+  nSegments =0;
+  xAxis =NULL;
+  yAxis =NULL;
+  sum =0;
+  count =0;
+  lastY =0;
+  index =0;
+}
+
+// BarGraph
+
+static const char* barmodeObjOption[] = 
+  {"normal", "stacked", "aligned", "overlap", NULL};
+static const char* searchModeObjOption[] = {"points", "traces", "auto", NULL};
+static const char* searchAlongObjOption[] = {"x", "y", "both", NULL};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-aspect", "aspect", "Aspect", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, aspect), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
+   STD_NORMAL_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, normalBg), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-barmode", "barMode", "BarMode", 
+   "normal", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, barMode), 
+   0, &barmodeObjOption, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-barwidth", "barWidth", "BarWidth", 
+   ".9", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, barWidth), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-baseline", "baseline", "Baseline", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, baseline), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-borderwidth", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-background", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-bottommargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, borderWidth), 
+   0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-bottommargin", "bottomMargin", "BottomMargin",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, bottomMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", 
+   "crosshair", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, cursor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-foreground", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", 
+   STD_FONT_MEDIUM, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, titleTextStyle.font), 
+   0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, titleTextStyle.color), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-halo", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-searchhalo", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", 
+   "4i", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, reqHeight), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
+   "HighlightBackground", 
+   STD_NORMAL_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, highlightBgColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, highlightColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
+   "HighlightThickness", 
+   "2", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, highlightWidth), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-invertxy", "invertXY", "InvertXY", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, inverted), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", 
+   "center", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, titleTextStyle.justify), 
+   0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-leftmargin", "leftMargin", "Margin", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, leftMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-lm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-leftmargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-plotbackground", "plotbackground", "PlotBackground",
+   STD_NORMAL_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, plotBg), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotborderwidth", "plotBorderWidth", "PlotBorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, plotBW), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotpadx", "plotPadX", "PlotPad", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, xPad), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotpady", "plotPadY", "PlotPad", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, yPad), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-plotrelief", "plotRelief", "Relief", 
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, plotRelief), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", 
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, relief), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-rightmargin", "rightMargin", "Margin", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, rightMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-rm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-rightmargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-searchhalo", "searchhalo", "SearchHalo", 
+   "2m", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, search.halo), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-searchmode", "searchMode", "SearchMode",
+   "points", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, search.mode), 
+   0, &searchModeObjOption, 0}, 
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-searchalong", "searchAlong", "SearchAlong",
+   "both", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, search.along), 
+   0, &searchAlongObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-stackaxes", "stackAxes", "StackAxes", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, stackAxes), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, takeFocus), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-title", "title", "Title", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, title), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-tm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-topmargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-topmargin", "topMargin", "TopMargin", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, topMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", 
+   "5i", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, reqWidth), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotwidth", "plotWidth", "PlotWidth", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, reqPlotWidth), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotheight", "plotHeight", "PlotHeight", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(BarGraphOptions, reqPlotHeight), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+// Create
+
+BarGraph::BarGraph(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+  : Graph(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
+{
+  // problems so far?
+  if (!valid_)
+    return;
+
+  ops_ = (BarGraphOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(BarGraphOptions));
+  BarGraphOptions* ops = (BarGraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Tk_SetClass(tkwin_, "Barchart");
+
+  barGroups_ =NULL;
+  nBarGroups_ =0;
+  maxBarSetSize_ =0;
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&setTable_, sizeof(BarSetKey)/sizeof(int));
+
+  ops->bottomMargin.site = MARGIN_BOTTOM;
+  ops->leftMargin.site = MARGIN_LEFT;
+  ops->topMargin.site = MARGIN_TOP;
+  ops->rightMargin.site = MARGIN_RIGHT;
+
+  ops->titleTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp_, optionSpecs);
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)ops_, optionTable_, tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (GraphObjConfigure(this, interp_, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK)) {
+    valid_ =0;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  // do this last after Tk_SetClass set
+  legend_ = new Legend(this);
+  crosshairs_ = new Crosshairs(this);
+  postscript_ = new Postscript(this);
+
+  if (createPen("active", 0, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+    valid_ =0;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  if (createAxes() != TCL_OK) {
+    valid_ =0;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  adjustAxes();
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp_), Tk_PathName(tkwin_), -1);
+}
+
+BarGraph::~BarGraph()
+{
+  destroyBarSets();
+}
+
+int BarGraph::configure()	
+{
+  BarGraphOptions* ops = (BarGraphOptions*)ops_;
+  // Don't allow negative bar widths. Reset to an arbitrary value (0.1)
+  if (ops->barWidth <= 0.0)
+    ops->barWidth = 0.9;
+
+  return Graph::configure();
+}
+
+int BarGraph::createPen(const char* penName, int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = 
+    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&penTable_, penName, &isNew);
+  if (!isNew) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "pen \"", penName, "\" already exists in \"",
+		     Tk_PathName(tkwin_), "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Pen* penPtr = new BarPen(this, penName, hPtr);
+  if (!penPtr)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, penPtr);
+
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)penPtr->ops(), penPtr->optionTable(), tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (PenObjConfigure(this, penPtr, interp_, objc-4, objv+4) != TCL_OK)) {
+    delete penPtr;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  flags |= RESET;
+  eventuallyRedraw();
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int BarGraph::createElement(int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  char *name = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+  if (name[0] == '-') {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "name of element \"", name, 
+		     "\" can't start with a '-'", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = 
+    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&elements_.table, name, &isNew);
+  if (!isNew) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "element \"", name, 
+		     "\" already exists in \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), 
+		     "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Element* elemPtr = new BarElement(this, name, hPtr);
+  if (!elemPtr)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, elemPtr);
+
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)elemPtr->ops(), elemPtr->optionTable(), tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (ElementObjConfigure(elemPtr, interp_, objc-4, objv+4) != TCL_OK)) {
+    delete elemPtr;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  elemPtr->link = elements_.displayList->append(elemPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void BarGraph::mapElements()
+{
+  BarGraphOptions* ops = (BarGraphOptions*)ops_;
+  if ((BarMode)ops->barMode != INFRONT)
+    resetBarSets();
+
+  Graph::mapElements();
+}
+
+void BarGraph::resetAxes()
+{
+  BarGraphOptions* ops = (BarGraphOptions*)ops_;
+  
+  /* FIXME: This should be called whenever the display list of
+   *	      elements change. Maybe yet another flag INIT_STACKS to
+   *	      indicate that the element display list has changed.
+   *	      Needs to be done before the axis limits are set.
+   */
+  initBarSets();
+  if (((BarMode)ops->barMode == STACKED) && (nBarGroups_ > 0))
+    computeBarStacks();
+
+  Graph::resetAxes();
+}
+
+void BarGraph::initBarSets()
+{
+  BarGraphOptions* ops = (BarGraphOptions*)ops_;
+  
+  // Free resources associated with a previous frequency table. This includes
+  // the array of frequency information and the table itself
+  destroyBarSets();
+  if ((BarMode)ops->barMode == INFRONT)
+    return;
+
+  // Initialize a hash table and fill it with unique abscissas.  Keep track
+  // of the frequency of each x-coordinate and how many abscissas have
+  // duplicate mappings.
+  Tcl_HashTable setTable;
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&setTable, sizeof(BarSetKey)/sizeof(int));
+  int nSegs =0;
+
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(elements_.displayList);
+       link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    BarElement* bePtr = (BarElement*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)bePtr->ops();
+    if (ops->hide)
+      continue;
+
+    nSegs++;
+    if (ops->coords.x) {
+      int nPoints = ops->coords.x->nValues();
+      for (double *x=ops->coords.x->values_, *xend=x+nPoints; x<xend; x++) {
+	BarSetKey key;
+	key.value =*x;
+	key.xAxis =ops->xAxis;
+	key.yAxis =NULL;
+
+	int isNew;
+	Tcl_HashEntry* hhPtr = 
+	  Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&setTable, (char*)&key, &isNew);
+	Tcl_HashTable* tablePtr;
+	if (isNew) {
+	  tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable*)malloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
+	  Tcl_InitHashTable(tablePtr, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+	  Tcl_SetHashValue(hhPtr, tablePtr);
+	}
+	else
+	  tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hhPtr);
+
+	const char* name = ops->groupName ? ops->groupName : ops->yAxis->name_;
+	Tcl_HashEntry* hhPtr2 = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(tablePtr, name, &isNew);
+	size_t count =1;
+	if (!isNew) {
+	  count = (size_t)Tcl_GetHashValue(hhPtr2);
+	  count++;
+	}		
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hhPtr2, count);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  // no bar elements to be displayed
+  if (setTable.numEntries == 0)
+    return;
+
+  int sum =0;
+  int max =0;
+  Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry *hhPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&setTable, &iter); hhPtr;
+       hhPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+    BarSetKey* keyPtr = (BarSetKey*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&setTable, hhPtr);
+    Tcl_HashTable* tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hhPtr);
+
+    int isNew;
+    Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = 
+      Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&setTable_, (char*)keyPtr, &isNew);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, tablePtr);
+
+    if (max < tablePtr->numEntries)
+      max = tablePtr->numEntries; // # of stacks in group
+    sum += tablePtr->numEntries;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&setTable);
+
+  if (sum > 0) {
+    barGroups_ = new BarGroup[sum];
+    BarGroup* groupPtr = barGroups_;
+    Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+    for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&setTable_, &iter); 
+	 hPtr; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+      BarSetKey* keyPtr = (BarSetKey*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&setTable_, hPtr);
+      Tcl_HashTable* tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
+      size_t xcount = 0;
+      Tcl_HashSearch iter2;
+      for (Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr2 = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(tablePtr, &iter2);
+	   hPtr2; hPtr2 = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter2)) {
+	size_t count = (size_t)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr2);
+	groupPtr->nSegments = count;
+	groupPtr->xAxis = keyPtr->xAxis;
+	groupPtr->yAxis = keyPtr->yAxis;
+	groupPtr->index = xcount++;
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr2, groupPtr);
+
+	groupPtr++;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  maxBarSetSize_ = max;
+  nBarGroups_ = sum;
+}
+
+void BarGraph::destroyBarSets()
+{
+  delete [] barGroups_;
+  barGroups_ = NULL;
+
+  nBarGroups_ = 0;
+  Tcl_HashSearch iter;
+  for (Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&setTable_, &iter); hPtr; 
+       hPtr=Tcl_NextHashEntry(&iter)) {
+    Tcl_HashTable* tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(tablePtr);
+    free(tablePtr);
+  }
+
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&setTable_);
+  Tcl_InitHashTable(&setTable_, sizeof(BarSetKey)/sizeof(int));
+}
+
+void BarGraph::resetBarSets()
+{
+  for (BarGroup *gp = barGroups_, *gend = gp + nBarGroups_; gp < gend; gp++) {
+    gp->lastY = 0.0;
+    gp->count = 0;
+  }
+}
+
+void BarGraph::computeBarStacks()
+{
+  BarGraphOptions* ops = (BarGraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  if (((BarMode)ops->barMode != STACKED) || (nBarGroups_ == 0))
+    return;
+
+  // Initialize the stack sums to zero
+  for (BarGroup *gp = barGroups_, *gend = gp + nBarGroups_; gp < gend; gp++)
+    gp->sum = 0.0;
+
+  // Consider each bar x-y coordinate. Add the ordinates of duplicate
+  // abscissas
+
+  for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(elements_.displayList); link;
+       link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    BarElement* bePtr = (BarElement*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    BarElementOptions* ops = (BarElementOptions*)bePtr->ops();
+    if (ops->hide)
+      continue;
+
+    if (ops->coords.x && ops->coords.y) {
+      for (double *x=ops->coords.x->values_, *y=ops->coords.y->values_, 
+	     *xend=x+ops->coords.x->nValues(); x<xend; x++, y++) {
+	BarSetKey key;
+	key.value =*x;
+	key.xAxis =ops->xAxis;
+	key.yAxis =NULL;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&setTable_, (char*)&key);
+	if (!hPtr)
+	  continue;
+
+	Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	const char *name = ops->groupName ? ops->groupName : ops->yAxis->name_;
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(tablePtr, name);
+	if (!hPtr)
+	  continue;
+
+	BarGroup *groupPtr = (BarGroup*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	groupPtr->sum += *y;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphBar.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphBar.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ee1ab8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphBar.h
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGraphBar_h__
+#define __BltGraphBar_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double value;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+  } BarSetKey;
+
+  class BarGroup {
+  public:
+    int nSegments;
+    Axis* xAxis;
+    Axis* yAxis;
+    double sum;
+    int count;
+    double lastY;
+    size_t index;
+
+  public:
+    BarGroup();
+  };
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double aspect;
+    Tk_3DBorder normalBg;
+    int borderWidth;
+    Margin margins[4];
+    Tk_Cursor cursor;
+    TextStyleOptions titleTextStyle;
+    int reqHeight;
+    XColor* highlightBgColor;
+    XColor* highlightColor;
+    int highlightWidth;
+    int inverted;
+    Tk_3DBorder plotBg;
+    int plotBW;
+    int xPad;
+    int yPad;
+    int plotRelief;
+    int relief;
+    ClosestSearch search;
+    int stackAxes;
+    const char *takeFocus; // nor used in C code
+    const char *title;
+    int reqWidth;
+    int reqPlotWidth;
+    int reqPlotHeight;
+
+    // bar graph
+    int barMode;
+    double barWidth;
+    double baseline;
+  } BarGraphOptions;
+
+  class BarGraph : public Graph {
+  public:
+    enum BarMode {INFRONT, STACKED, ALIGNED, OVERLAP};
+
+  public:
+    BarGroup* barGroups_;
+    int nBarGroups_;
+    Tcl_HashTable setTable_;
+    int maxBarSetSize_;
+
+  protected:
+    void resetAxes();
+    void mapElements();
+    void initBarSets();
+    void destroyBarSets();
+    void resetBarSets();
+    void computeBarStacks();
+
+  public:
+    BarGraph(ClientData, Tcl_Interp*, int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+    virtual ~BarGraph();
+
+    int configure();
+    int createPen(const char*, int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+    int createElement(int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphLine.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphLine.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe3f5d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphLine.C
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraphLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGraphOp.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrXAxisOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairs.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrDef.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static const char* searchModeObjOption[] = {"points", "traces", "auto", NULL};
+static const char* searchAlongObjOption[] = {"x", "y", "both", NULL};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+  {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-aspect", "aspect", "Aspect", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, aspect), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
+   STD_NORMAL_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, normalBg), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-borderwidth", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-background", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-bottommargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, borderWidth), 
+   0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-bottommargin", "bottomMargin", "BottomMargin",
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, bottomMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", 
+   "crosshair", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, cursor), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-foreground", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", 
+   STD_FONT_MEDIUM, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, titleTextStyle.font),
+   0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, 
+   Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, titleTextStyle.color), 0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-halo", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-searchhalo", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", 
+   "4i", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, reqHeight), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
+   "HighlightBackground", 
+   STD_NORMAL_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, highlightBgColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
+   STD_NORMAL_FOREGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, highlightColor), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
+   "HighlightThickness", 
+   "2", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, highlightWidth), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-invertxy", "invertXY", "InvertXY", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, inverted), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", 
+   "center", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, titleTextStyle.justify),
+   0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-leftmargin", "leftMargin", "Margin", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, leftMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-lm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-leftmargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-plotbackground", "plotbackground", "PlotBackground",
+   STD_NORMAL_BACKGROUND, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, plotBg), 
+   0, NULL, CACHE},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotborderwidth", "plotBorderWidth", "PlotBorderWidth",
+   STD_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, plotBW), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotpadx", "plotPadX", "PlotPad", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, xPad), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotpady", "plotPadY", "PlotPad", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, yPad), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-plotrelief", "plotRelief", "Relief", 
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, plotRelief), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", 
+   "flat", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, relief), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-rightmargin", "rightMargin", "Margin", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, rightMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-rm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-rightmargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-searchhalo", "searchhalo", "SearchHalo", 
+   "2m", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, search.halo), 0, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-searchmode", "searchMode", "SearchMode",
+   "points", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, search.mode), 
+   0, &searchModeObjOption, 0}, 
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-searchalong", "searchAlong", "SearchAlong",
+   "both", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, search.along), 
+   0, &searchAlongObjOption, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-stackaxes", "stackAxes", "StackAxes", 
+   "no", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, stackAxes), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, takeFocus),
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-title", "title", "Title", 
+   NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, title), 
+   TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-tm", NULL, NULL, 
+   NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData)"-topmargin", 0},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-topmargin", "topMargin", "TopMargin", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, topMargin.reqSize), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", 
+   "5i", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, reqWidth), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotwidth", "plotWidth", "PlotWidth", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, reqPlotWidth), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-plotheight", "plotHeight", "PlotHeight", 
+   "0", -1, Tk_Offset(LineGraphOptions, reqPlotHeight), 0, NULL, RESET},
+  {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+// Create
+
+LineGraph::LineGraph(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+  : Graph(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
+{
+  // problems so far?
+  if (!valid_)
+    return;
+
+  ops_ = (LineGraphOptions*)calloc(1, sizeof(LineGraphOptions));
+  LineGraphOptions* ops = (LineGraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  Tk_SetClass(tkwin_, "Graph");
+
+  ops->bottomMargin.site = MARGIN_BOTTOM;
+  ops->leftMargin.site = MARGIN_LEFT;
+  ops->topMargin.site = MARGIN_TOP;
+  ops->rightMargin.site = MARGIN_RIGHT;
+
+  ops->titleTextStyle.anchor = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.color =NULL;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.font =NULL;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.angle =0;
+  ops->titleTextStyle.justify =TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+
+  optionTable_ = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp_, optionSpecs);
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)ops_, optionTable_, tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (GraphObjConfigure(this, interp_, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK)) {
+    valid_ =0;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  // do this last after Tk_SetClass set
+  legend_ = new Legend(this);
+  crosshairs_ = new Crosshairs(this);
+  postscript_ = new Postscript(this);
+
+  if (createPen("active", 0, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+    valid_ =0;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  if (createAxes() != TCL_OK) {
+    valid_ =0;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  adjustAxes();
+
+  Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp_), Tk_PathName(tkwin_), -1);
+}
+
+LineGraph::~LineGraph()
+{
+}
+
+int LineGraph::createPen(const char* penName, int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = 
+    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&penTable_, penName, &isNew);
+  if (!isNew) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "pen \"", penName, "\" already exists in \"",
+		     Tk_PathName(tkwin_), "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Pen* penPtr = new LinePen(this, penName, hPtr);
+  if (!penPtr)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, penPtr);
+
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)penPtr->ops(), penPtr->optionTable(), tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (PenObjConfigure(this, penPtr, interp_, objc-4, objv+4) != TCL_OK)) {
+    delete penPtr;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int LineGraph::createElement(int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  char *name = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+  if (name[0] == '-') {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "name of element \"", name, 
+		     "\" can't start with a '-'", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  int isNew;
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = 
+    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&elements_.table, name, &isNew);
+  if (!isNew) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp_, "element \"", name, 
+		     "\" already exists in \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), 
+		     "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Element* elemPtr = new LineElement(this, name, hPtr);
+  if (!elemPtr)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, elemPtr);
+
+  if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp_, (char*)elemPtr->ops(), elemPtr->optionTable(), tkwin_) != TCL_OK) || (ElementObjConfigure(elemPtr, interp_, objc-4, objv+4) != TCL_OK)) {
+    delete elemPtr;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  elemPtr->link = elements_.displayList->append(elemPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphLine.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphLine.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea8d2a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphLine.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGraphLine_h__
+#define __BltGraphLine_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double aspect;
+    Tk_3DBorder normalBg;
+    int borderWidth;
+    Margin margins[4];
+    Tk_Cursor cursor;
+    Blt::TextStyleOptions titleTextStyle;
+    int reqHeight;
+    XColor* highlightBgColor;
+    XColor* highlightColor;
+    int highlightWidth;
+    int inverted;
+    Tk_3DBorder plotBg;
+    int plotBW;
+    int xPad;
+    int yPad;
+    int plotRelief;
+    int relief;
+    ClosestSearch search;
+    int stackAxes;
+    const char *takeFocus; // nor used in C code
+    const char *title;
+    int reqWidth;
+    int reqPlotWidth;
+    int reqPlotHeight;
+  } LineGraphOptions;
+
+  class LineGraph : public Graph {
+  public:
+    LineGraph(ClientData, Tcl_Interp*, int objc, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+    virtual ~LineGraph();
+
+    int createElement(int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+    int createPen(const char*, int, Tcl_Obj* const []);
+  };
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ada2758
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,462 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGraphLine.h"
+#include "tkbltGraphBar.h"
+#include "tkbltGraphOp.h"
+
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxisOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElemOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairs.h"
+#include "tkbltGrHairsOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegdOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarker.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMarkerOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscript.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPostscriptOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPen.h"
+#include "tkbltGrPenOp.h"
+#include "tkbltGrXAxisOp.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static Tcl_ObjCmdProc BarchartObjCmd;
+static Tcl_ObjCmdProc GraphObjCmd;
+
+static Axis* GetFirstAxis(Chain* chain);
+
+int GraphObjConfigure(Graph* graphPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+  int mask =0;
+  int error;
+  Tcl_Obj* errorResult;
+
+  for (error=0; error<=1; error++) {
+    if (!error) {
+      if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)graphPtr->ops_, graphPtr->optionTable_, 
+			objc, objv, graphPtr->tkwin_, &savedOptions, &mask)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	continue;
+    }
+    else {
+      errorResult = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(errorResult);
+      Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+
+    if (graphPtr->configure() != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    graphPtr->flags |= mask;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+
+    break; 
+  }
+
+  if (!error) {
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+static int CgetOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc != 3) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, 
+				      (char*)graphPtr->ops_, 
+				      graphPtr->optionTable_,
+				      objv[2], graphPtr->tkwin_);
+  if (objPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  else
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ConfigureOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (objc <= 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char*)graphPtr->ops_, 
+				       graphPtr->optionTable_, 
+				       (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL, 
+				       graphPtr->tkwin_);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    else
+      Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  else
+    return GraphObjConfigure(graphPtr, interp, objc-2, objv+2);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ExtentsOp --
+ *
+ *	Reports the size of one of several items within the graph.  The
+ *	following are valid items:
+ *
+ *	  "bottommargin"	Height of the bottom margin
+ *	  "leftmargin"		Width of the left margin
+ *	  "legend"		x y w h of the legend
+ *	  "plotarea"		x y w h of the plotarea
+ *	  "plotheight"		Height of the plot area
+ *	  "rightmargin"		Width of the right margin
+ *	  "topmargin"		Height of the top margin
+ *        "plotwidth"		Width of the plot area
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int ExtentsOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)graphPtr->ops_;
+  int length;
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &length);
+  char c = string[0];
+  if ((c == 'p') && (length > 4) && 
+      (strncmp("plotheight", string, length) == 0)) {
+    int height = graphPtr->bottom_ - graphPtr->top_ + 1;
+    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), height);
+  }
+  else if ((c == 'p') && (length > 4) &&
+	     (strncmp("plotwidth", string, length) == 0)) {
+    int width = graphPtr->right_ - graphPtr->left_ + 1;
+    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), width);
+  }
+  else if ((c == 'p') && (length > 4) &&
+	     (strncmp("plotarea", string, length) == 0)) {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			     Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->left_));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			     Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->top_));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->right_ - graphPtr->left_+1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->bottom_ - graphPtr->top_+1));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+  else if ((c == 'l') && (length > 2) &&
+	     (strncmp("legend", string, length) == 0)) {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			     Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->legend_->x_));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			     Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->legend_->y_));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			     Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->legend_->width_));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			     Tcl_NewIntObj(graphPtr->legend_->height_));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+  else if ((c == 'l') && (length > 2) &&
+	   (strncmp("leftmargin", string, length) == 0)) {
+    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), ops->leftMargin.width);
+  }
+  else if ((c == 'r') && (length > 1) &&
+	     (strncmp("rightmargin", string, length) == 0)) {
+    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), ops->rightMargin.width);
+  }
+  else if ((c == 't') && (length > 1) &&
+	     (strncmp("topmargin", string, length) == 0)) {
+    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), ops->topMargin.height);
+  }
+  else if ((c == 'b') && (length > 1) &&
+	     (strncmp("bottommargin", string, length) == 0)) {
+    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), ops->bottomMargin.height);
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad extent item \"", objv[2],
+		     "\": should be plotheight, plotwidth, leftmargin, rightmargin, \
+topmargin, bottommargin, plotarea, or legend", (char*)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int InsideOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, int objc, 
+		    Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc != 4) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  int x;
+  if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int y;
+  if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Region2d exts;
+  graphPtr->extents(&exts);
+
+  int result = (x<=exts.right && x>=exts.left && y<=exts.bottom && y>=exts.top);
+  Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), result);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int InvtransformOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, int objc, 
+			  Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  double x, y;
+  if ((Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
+      (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK))
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (graphPtr->flags & RESET)
+    graphPtr->resetAxes();
+
+  // Perform the reverse transformation, converting from window coordinates
+  // to graph data coordinates.  Note that the point is always mapped to the
+  // bottom and left axes (which may not be what the user wants)
+  Axis* xAxis = GetFirstAxis(graphPtr->axisChain_[0]);
+  Axis* yAxis = GetFirstAxis(graphPtr->axisChain_[1]);
+  Point2d point = graphPtr->invMap2D(x, y, xAxis, yAxis);
+
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(point.x));
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(point.y));
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int TransformOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, int objc, 
+		       Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  double x, y;
+  if ((Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
+      (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK))
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (graphPtr->flags & RESET)
+    graphPtr->resetAxes();
+
+  // Perform the transformation from window to graph coordinates.  Note that
+  // the points are always mapped onto the bottom and left axes (which may
+  // not be the what the user wants
+  Axis* xAxis = GetFirstAxis(graphPtr->axisChain_[0]);
+  Axis* yAxis = GetFirstAxis(graphPtr->axisChain_[1]);
+
+  Point2d point = graphPtr->map2D(x, y, xAxis, yAxis);
+
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj((int)point.x));
+  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj((int)point.y));
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static const Ensemble graphEnsemble[] = {
+  {"axis",        0, Blt::axisEnsemble},
+  {"bar",         0, Blt::elementEnsemble},
+  {"cget", 	  CgetOp, 0},
+  {"configure",   ConfigureOp, 0},
+  {"crosshairs",  0, Blt::crosshairsEnsemble},
+  {"element",     0, Blt::elementEnsemble},
+  {"extents",     ExtentsOp, 0},
+  {"inside",      InsideOp, 0},
+  {"invtransform",InvtransformOp, 0},
+  {"legend",      0, Blt::legendEnsemble},
+  {"line",        0, Blt::elementEnsemble},
+  {"marker",      0, Blt::markerEnsemble},
+  {"pen",         0, Blt::penEnsemble},
+  {"postscript",  0, Blt::postscriptEnsemble},
+  {"transform",   TransformOp, 0},
+  {"xaxis",       0, Blt::xaxisEnsemble},
+  {"yaxis",       0, Blt::xaxisEnsemble},
+  {"x2axis",      0, Blt::xaxisEnsemble},
+  {"y2axis",      0, Blt::xaxisEnsemble},
+  { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+// Support
+
+static Axis* GetFirstAxis(Chain* chain)
+{
+  ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(chain);
+  if (!link)
+    return NULL;
+
+  return (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+}
+
+// Tk Interface
+
+int Blt_GraphCmdInitProc(Tcl_Interp* interp)
+{
+  Tcl_Namespace* nsPtr = Tcl_FindNamespace(interp, "::blt", NULL, 
+					   TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+  if (nsPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  {
+    const char* cmdPath = "::blt::graph";
+    Tcl_Command cmdToken = Tcl_FindCommand(interp, cmdPath, NULL, 0);
+    if (cmdToken)
+      return TCL_OK;
+    cmdToken = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, cmdPath, GraphObjCmd, NULL, NULL);
+    if (Tcl_Export(interp, nsPtr, "graph", 0) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  {
+    const char* cmdPath = "::blt::barchart";
+    Tcl_Command cmdToken = Tcl_FindCommand(interp, cmdPath, NULL, 0);
+    if (cmdToken)
+      return TCL_OK;
+    cmdToken = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, cmdPath, BarchartObjCmd, NULL,NULL);
+    if (Tcl_Export(interp, nsPtr, "barchart", 0) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int GraphObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, int objc, 
+		       Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc < 2) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?options?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Graph* graphPtr = new LineGraph(clientData, interp, objc, objv);
+  return graphPtr->valid_ ? TCL_OK : TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+static int BarchartObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, int objc, 
+			  Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc < 2) {
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?options?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Graph* graphPtr = new BarGraph(clientData, interp, objc, objv);
+  return graphPtr->valid_ ? TCL_OK : TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+int GraphInstCmdProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  Tcl_Preserve(graphPtr);
+  int result = graphPtr->invoke(graphEnsemble, 1, objc, objv);
+  Tcl_Release(graphPtr);
+  return result;
+}
+
+// called by Tcl_DeleteCommand
+void GraphInstCmdDeleteProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  if (!(graphPtr->flags & GRAPH_DELETED))
+    Tk_DestroyWindow(graphPtr->tkwin_);
+}
+
+void GraphEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent* eventPtr)
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+
+  if (eventPtr->type == Expose) {
+    if (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)
+      graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+  }
+  else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn || eventPtr->type == FocusOut) {
+    if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
+      if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn)
+	graphPtr->flags |= FOCUS;
+      else
+	graphPtr->flags &= ~FOCUS;
+      graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+    }
+  }
+  else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+    if (!(graphPtr->flags & GRAPH_DELETED)) {
+      graphPtr->flags |= GRAPH_DELETED;
+      Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(graphPtr->interp_, graphPtr->cmdToken_);
+      if (graphPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayGraph, graphPtr);
+      Tcl_EventuallyFree(graphPtr, DestroyGraph);
+    }
+  }
+  else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
+    graphPtr->flags |= RESET;
+    graphPtr->eventuallyRedraw();
+  }
+}
+
+void DisplayGraph(ClientData clientData)
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)clientData;
+  graphPtr->draw();
+}
+
+// called by Tcl_EventuallyFree and others
+void DestroyGraph(char* dataPtr)
+{
+  Graph* graphPtr = (Graph*)dataPtr;
+  delete graphPtr;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff3f6ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltGraphOp_h__
+#define __BltGraphOp_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+extern int GraphObjConfigure(Blt::Graph* graphPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+
+extern Tcl_ObjCmdProc GraphInstCmdProc;
+extern Tcl_CmdDeleteProc GraphInstCmdDeleteProc;
+extern Tk_EventProc GraphEventProc;
+extern Tcl_IdleProc DisplayGraph;
+extern Tcl_FreeProc DestroyGraph;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphSup.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphSup.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5eb3d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltGraphSup.C
@@ -0,0 +1,686 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltGraph.h"
+#include "tkbltGrAxis.h"
+#include "tkbltGrElem.h"
+#include "tkbltGrLegd.h"
+#include "tkbltGrMisc.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define AXIS_PAD_TITLE 2
+#define ROTATE_0	0
+#define ROTATE_90	1
+#define ROTATE_180	2
+#define ROTATE_270	3
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * layoutGraph --
+ *
+ *	Calculate the layout of the graph.  Based upon the data, axis limits,
+ *	X and Y titles, and title height, determine the cavity left which is
+ *	the plotting surface.  The first step get the data and axis limits for
+ *	calculating the space needed for the top, bottom, left, and right
+ *	margins.
+ *
+ * 	1) The LEFT margin is the area from the left border to the Y axis 
+ *	   (not including ticks). It composes the border width, the width an 
+ *	   optional Y axis label and its padding, and the tick numeric labels. 
+ *	   The Y axis label is rotated 90 degrees so that the width is the 
+ *	   font height.
+ *
+ * 	2) The RIGHT margin is the area from the end of the graph
+ *	   to the right window border. It composes the border width,
+ *	   some padding, the font height (this may be dubious. It
+ *	   appears to provide a more even border), the max of the
+ *	   legend width and 1/2 max X tick number. This last part is
+ *	   so that the last tick label is not clipped.
+ *
+ *           Window Width
+ *      ___________________________________________________________
+ *      |          |                               |               |
+ *      |          |   TOP  height of title        |               |
+ *      |          |                               |               |
+ *      |          |           x2 title            |               |
+ *      |          |                               |               |
+ *      |          |        height of x2-axis      |               |
+ *      |__________|_______________________________|_______________|  W
+ *      |          | -plotpady                     |               |  i
+ *      |__________|_______________________________|_______________|  n
+ *      |          | top                   right   |               |  d
+ *      |          |                               |               |  o
+ *      |   LEFT   |                               |     RIGHT     |  w
+ *      |          |                               |               |
+ *      | y        |     Free area = 104%          |      y2       |  H
+ *      |          |     Plotting surface = 100%   |               |  e
+ *      | t        |     Tick length = 2 + 2%      |      t        |  i
+ *      | i        |                               |      i        |  g
+ *      | t        |                               |      t  legend|  h
+ *      | l        |                               |      l   width|  t
+ *      | e        |                               |      e        |
+ *      |    height|                               |height         |
+ *      |       of |                               | of            |
+ *      |    y-axis|                               |y2-axis        |
+ *      |          |                               |               |
+ *      |          |origin 0,0                     |               |
+ *      |__________|_left_________________bottom___|_______________|
+ *      |          |-plotpady                      |               |
+ *      |__________|_______________________________|_______________|
+ *      |          | (xoffset, yoffset)            |               |
+ *      |          |                               |               |
+ *      |          |       height of x-axis        |               |
+ *      |          |                               |               |
+ *      |          |   BOTTOM   x title            |               |
+ *      |__________|_______________________________|_______________|
+ *
+ * 3) The TOP margin is the area from the top window border to the top
+ *    of the graph. It composes the border width, twice the height of
+ *    the title font (if one is given) and some padding between the
+ *    title.
+ *
+ * 4) The BOTTOM margin is area from the bottom window border to the
+ *    X axis (not including ticks). It composes the border width, the height
+ *    an optional X axis label and its padding, the height of the font
+ *    of the tick labels.
+ *
+ * The plotting area is between the margins which includes the X and Y axes
+ * including the ticks but not the tick numeric labels. The length of the
+ * ticks and its padding is 5% of the entire plotting area.  Hence the entire
+ * plotting area is scaled as 105% of the width and height of the area.
+ *
+ * The axis labels, ticks labels, title, and legend may or may not be
+ * displayed which must be taken into account.
+ *
+ * if reqWidth > 0 : set outer size
+ * if reqPlotWidth > 0 : set plot size
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void Graph::layoutGraph()
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+
+  int width = width_;
+  int height = height_;
+
+  // Step 1
+  // Compute the amount of space needed to display the axes
+  // associated with each margin.  They can be overridden by 
+  // -leftmargin, -rightmargin, -bottommargin, and -topmargin 
+  // graph options, respectively.
+  int left   = getMarginGeometry(&ops->leftMargin);
+  int right  = getMarginGeometry(&ops->rightMargin);
+  int top    = getMarginGeometry(&ops->topMargin);
+  int bottom = getMarginGeometry(&ops->bottomMargin);
+
+  int pad = ops->bottomMargin.maxTickWidth;
+  if (pad < ops->topMargin.maxTickWidth)
+    pad = ops->topMargin.maxTickWidth;
+
+  pad = pad / 2 + 3;
+  if (right < pad)
+    right = pad;
+
+  if (left < pad)
+    left = pad;
+
+  pad = ops->leftMargin.maxTickHeight;
+  if (pad < ops->rightMargin.maxTickHeight)
+    pad = ops->rightMargin.maxTickHeight;
+
+  pad = pad / 2;
+  if (top < pad)
+    top = pad;
+
+  if (bottom < pad)
+    bottom = pad;
+
+  if (ops->leftMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    left = ops->leftMargin.reqSize;
+
+  if (ops->rightMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    right = ops->rightMargin.reqSize;
+
+  if (ops->topMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    top = ops->topMargin.reqSize;
+
+  if (ops->bottomMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    bottom = ops->bottomMargin.reqSize;
+
+  // Step 2
+  // Add the graph title height to the top margin. 
+  if (ops->title)
+    top += titleHeight_ + 6;
+
+  int inset = (inset_ + ops->plotBW);
+  int inset2 = 2 * inset;
+
+  // Step 3
+  // Estimate the size of the plot area from the remaining
+  // space.  This may be overridden by the -plotwidth and
+  // -plotheight graph options.  We use this to compute the
+  // size of the legend. 
+  if (width == 0)
+    width = 400;
+
+  if (height == 0)
+    height = 400;
+
+  int plotWidth  = (ops->reqPlotWidth > 0) ? ops->reqPlotWidth :
+    width - (inset2 + left + right);
+  int plotHeight = (ops->reqPlotHeight > 0) ? ops->reqPlotHeight : 
+    height - (inset2 + top + bottom);
+  legend_->map(plotWidth, plotHeight);
+
+  // Step 4
+  // Add the legend to the appropiate margin. 
+  if (!legend_->isHidden()) {
+    switch (legend_->position()) {
+    case Legend::RIGHT:
+      right += legend_->width_ + 2;
+      break;
+    case Legend::LEFT:
+      left += legend_->width_ + 2;
+      break;
+    case Legend::TOP:
+      top += legend_->height_ + 2;
+      break;
+    case Legend::BOTTOM:
+      bottom += legend_->height_ + 2;
+      break;
+    case Legend::XY:
+    case Legend::PLOT:
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Recompute the plotarea or graph size, now accounting for the legend. 
+  if (ops->reqPlotWidth == 0) {
+    plotWidth = width  - (inset2 + left + right);
+    if (plotWidth < 1)
+      plotWidth = 1;
+  }
+  if (ops->reqPlotHeight == 0) {
+    plotHeight = height - (inset2 + top + bottom);
+    if (plotHeight < 1)
+      plotHeight = 1;
+  }
+
+  // Step 5
+  // If necessary, correct for the requested plot area aspect ratio.
+  if ((ops->reqPlotWidth == 0) && (ops->reqPlotHeight == 0) && 
+      (ops->aspect > 0.0)) {
+    double ratio;
+
+    // Shrink one dimension of the plotarea to fit the requested
+    // width/height aspect ratio.
+    ratio = plotWidth / plotHeight;
+    if (ratio > ops->aspect) {
+      // Shrink the width
+      int scaledWidth = (int)(plotHeight * ops->aspect);
+      if (scaledWidth < 1)
+	scaledWidth = 1;
+
+      // Add the difference to the right margin.
+      // CHECK THIS: w = scaledWidth
+      right += (plotWidth - scaledWidth);
+    }
+    else {
+      // Shrink the height
+      int scaledHeight = (int)(plotWidth / ops->aspect);
+      if (scaledHeight < 1)
+	scaledHeight = 1;
+
+      // Add the difference to the top margin
+      // CHECK THIS: h = scaledHeight;
+      top += (plotHeight - scaledHeight); 
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Step 6
+  // If there's multiple axes in a margin, the axis titles will be
+  // displayed in the adjoining margins.  Make sure there's room 
+  // for the longest axis titles.
+  if (top < ops->leftMargin.axesTitleLength)
+    top = ops->leftMargin.axesTitleLength;
+
+  if (right < ops->bottomMargin.axesTitleLength)
+    right = ops->bottomMargin.axesTitleLength;
+
+  if (top < ops->rightMargin.axesTitleLength)
+    top = ops->rightMargin.axesTitleLength;
+
+  if (right < ops->topMargin.axesTitleLength)
+    right = ops->topMargin.axesTitleLength;
+
+  // Step 7
+  // Override calculated values with requested margin sizes.
+  if (ops->leftMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    left = ops->leftMargin.reqSize;
+
+  if (ops->rightMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    right = ops->rightMargin.reqSize;
+
+  if (ops->topMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    top = ops->topMargin.reqSize;
+
+  if (ops->bottomMargin.reqSize > 0)
+    bottom = ops->bottomMargin.reqSize;
+
+  if (ops->reqPlotWidth > 0) {	
+    // Width of plotarea is constained.  If there's extra space, add it to
+    // the left and/or right margins.  If there's too little, grow the
+    // graph width to accomodate it.
+    int w = plotWidth + inset2 + left + right;
+
+    // Extra space in window
+    if (width > w) {
+      int extra = (width - w) / 2;
+      if (ops->leftMargin.reqSize == 0) { 
+	left += extra;
+	if (ops->rightMargin.reqSize == 0)
+	  right += extra;
+	else
+	  left += extra;
+      }
+      else if (ops->rightMargin.reqSize == 0)
+	right += extra + extra;
+    }
+    else if (width < w)
+      width = w;
+  } 
+
+  // Constrain the plotarea height
+  if (ops->reqPlotHeight > 0) {
+
+    // Height of plotarea is constained.  If there's extra space, 
+    // add it to th top and/or bottom margins.  If there's too little,
+    // grow the graph height to accomodate it.
+    int h = plotHeight + inset2 + top + bottom;
+
+    // Extra space in window
+    if (height > h) {
+      int extra = (height - h) / 2;
+      if (ops->topMargin.reqSize == 0) { 
+	top += extra;
+	if (ops->bottomMargin.reqSize == 0)
+	  bottom += extra;
+	else
+	  top += extra;
+      }
+      else if (ops->bottomMargin.reqSize == 0)
+	bottom += extra + extra;
+    }
+    else if (height < h)
+      height = h;
+  }	
+
+  width_  = width;
+  height_ = height;
+  left_   = left + inset;
+  top_    = top + inset;
+  right_  = width - right - inset;
+  bottom_ = height - bottom - inset;
+
+  ops->leftMargin.width    = left   + inset_;
+  ops->rightMargin.width   = right  + inset_;
+  ops->topMargin.height    = top    + inset_;
+  ops->bottomMargin.height = bottom + inset_;
+	    
+  vOffset_ = top_ + ops->yPad;
+  vRange_  = plotHeight - 2*ops->yPad;
+  hOffset_ = left_ + ops->xPad;
+  hRange_  = plotWidth  - 2*ops->xPad;
+
+  if (vRange_ < 1)
+    vRange_ = 1;
+
+  if (hRange_ < 1)
+    hRange_ = 1;
+
+  hScale_ = 1.0 / hRange_;
+  vScale_ = 1.0 / vRange_;
+
+  // Calculate the placement of the graph title so it is centered within the
+  // space provided for it in the top margin
+  titleY_ = 3 + inset_;
+  titleX_ = (right_ + left_) / 2;
+}
+
+int Graph::getMarginGeometry(Margin *marginPtr)
+{
+  GraphOptions* ops = (GraphOptions*)ops_;
+  int isHoriz = !(marginPtr->site & 0x1); /* Even sites are horizontal */
+
+  // Count the visible axes.
+  unsigned int nVisible = 0;
+  unsigned int l =0;
+  int w =0;
+  int h =0;
+
+  marginPtr->maxTickWidth =0;
+  marginPtr->maxTickHeight =0;
+
+  if (ops->stackAxes) {
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(marginPtr->axes); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Axis* axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+      if (!ops->hide && axisPtr->use_) {
+	nVisible++;
+	axisPtr->getGeometry();
+
+	if (isHoriz) {
+	  if (h < axisPtr->height_)
+	    h = axisPtr->height_;
+	}
+	else {
+	  if (w < axisPtr->width_)
+	    w = axisPtr->width_;
+	}
+	if (axisPtr->maxTickWidth_ > marginPtr->maxTickWidth)
+	  marginPtr->maxTickWidth = axisPtr->maxTickWidth_;
+
+	if (axisPtr->maxTickHeight_ > marginPtr->maxTickHeight)
+	  marginPtr->maxTickHeight = axisPtr->maxTickHeight_;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    for (ChainLink* link = Chain_FirstLink(marginPtr->axes); link;
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      Axis* axisPtr = (Axis*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      AxisOptions* ops = (AxisOptions*)axisPtr->ops();
+      if (!ops->hide && axisPtr->use_) {
+	nVisible++;
+	axisPtr->getGeometry();
+
+	if ((ops->titleAlternate) && (l < axisPtr->titleWidth_))
+	  l = axisPtr->titleWidth_;
+
+	if (isHoriz)
+	  h += axisPtr->height_;
+	else
+	  w += axisPtr->width_;
+
+	if (axisPtr->maxTickWidth_ > marginPtr->maxTickWidth)
+	  marginPtr->maxTickWidth = axisPtr->maxTickWidth_;
+
+	if (axisPtr->maxTickHeight_ > marginPtr->maxTickHeight)
+	  marginPtr->maxTickHeight = axisPtr->maxTickHeight_;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  // Enforce a minimum size for margins.
+  if (w < 3)
+    w = 3;
+
+  if (h < 3)
+    h = 3;
+
+  marginPtr->nAxes = nVisible;
+  marginPtr->axesTitleLength = l;
+  marginPtr->width = w;
+  marginPtr->height = h;
+  marginPtr->axesOffset = (isHoriz) ? h : w;
+  return marginPtr->axesOffset;
+}
+
+void Graph::getTextExtents(Tk_Font font, const char *text, int textLen,
+			   int* ww, int* hh)
+{
+  if (!text) {
+    *ww =0;
+    *hh =0;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+  Tk_GetFontMetrics(font, &fm);
+  int lineHeight = fm.linespace;
+
+  if (textLen < 0)
+    textLen = strlen(text);
+
+  int maxWidth =0;
+  int maxHeight =0;
+  int lineLen =0;
+  const char *line =NULL;
+  const char *p, *pend;
+  for (p =line=text, pend=text+textLen; p<pend; p++) {
+    if (*p == '\n') {
+      if (lineLen > 0) {
+	int lineWidth = Tk_TextWidth(font, line, lineLen);
+	if (lineWidth > maxWidth)
+	  maxWidth = lineWidth;
+      }
+      maxHeight += lineHeight;
+      line = p + 1;	/* Point to the start of the next line. */
+      lineLen = 0;	/* Reset counter to indicate the start of a
+			 * new line. */
+      continue;
+    }
+    lineLen++;
+  }
+
+  if ((lineLen > 0) && (*(p - 1) != '\n')) {
+    maxHeight += lineHeight;
+    int lineWidth = Tk_TextWidth(font, line, lineLen);
+    if (lineWidth > maxWidth)
+      maxWidth = lineWidth;
+  }
+
+  *ww = maxWidth;
+  *hh = maxHeight;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ *	Computes the dimensions of the bounding box surrounding a rectangle
+ *	rotated about its center.  If pointArr isn't NULL, the coordinates of
+ *	the rotated rectangle are also returned.
+ *
+ *	The dimensions are determined by rotating the rectangle, and doubling
+ *	the maximum x-coordinate and y-coordinate.
+ *
+ *		w = 2 * maxX,  h = 2 * maxY
+ *
+ *	Since the rectangle is centered at 0,0, the coordinates of the
+ *	bounding box are (-w/2,-h/2 w/2,-h/2, w/2,h/2 -w/2,h/2).
+ *
+ *  		0 ------- 1
+ *  		|         |
+ *  		|    x    |
+ *  		|         |
+ *  		3 ------- 2
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The width and height of the bounding box containing the rotated
+ *	rectangle are returned.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+void Graph::getBoundingBox(int width, int height, double angle,
+			   double *rotWidthPtr, double *rotHeightPtr,
+			   Point2d *bbox)
+{
+  angle = fmod(angle, 360.0);
+  if (fmod(angle, 90.0) == 0.0) {
+    int ll, ur, ul, lr;
+    double rotWidth, rotHeight;
+
+    // Handle right-angle rotations specially
+    int quadrant = (int)(angle / 90.0);
+    switch (quadrant) {
+    case ROTATE_270:
+      ul = 3, ur = 0, lr = 1, ll = 2;
+      rotWidth = (double)height;
+      rotHeight = (double)width;
+      break;
+    case ROTATE_90:
+      ul = 1, ur = 2, lr = 3, ll = 0;
+      rotWidth = (double)height;
+      rotHeight = (double)width;
+      break;
+    case ROTATE_180:
+      ul = 2, ur = 3, lr = 0, ll = 1;
+      rotWidth = (double)width;
+      rotHeight = (double)height;
+      break;
+    default:
+    case ROTATE_0:
+      ul = 0, ur = 1, lr = 2, ll = 3;
+      rotWidth = (double)width;
+      rotHeight = (double)height;
+      break;
+    }
+    if (bbox) {
+      double x = rotWidth * 0.5;
+      double y = rotHeight * 0.5;
+      bbox[ll].x = bbox[ul].x = -x;
+      bbox[ur].y = bbox[ul].y = -y;
+      bbox[lr].x = bbox[ur].x = x;
+      bbox[ll].y = bbox[lr].y = y;
+    }
+    *rotWidthPtr = rotWidth;
+    *rotHeightPtr = rotHeight;
+    return;
+  }
+
+  // Set the four corners of the rectangle whose center is the origin
+  Point2d corner[4];
+  corner[1].x = corner[2].x = (double)width * 0.5;
+  corner[0].x = corner[3].x = -corner[1].x;
+  corner[2].y = corner[3].y = (double)height * 0.5;
+  corner[0].y = corner[1].y = -corner[2].y;
+
+  double radians = (-angle / 180.0) * M_PI;
+  double sinTheta = sin(radians);
+  double cosTheta = cos(radians);
+  double xMax =0;
+  double yMax =0;
+
+  // Rotate the four corners and find the maximum X and Y coordinates
+  for (int ii=0; ii<4; ii++) {
+    double x = (corner[ii].x * cosTheta) - (corner[ii].y * sinTheta);
+    double y = (corner[ii].x * sinTheta) + (corner[ii].y * cosTheta);
+    if (x > xMax)
+      xMax = x;
+
+    if (y > yMax)
+      yMax = y;
+
+    if (bbox) {
+      bbox[ii].x = x;
+      bbox[ii].y = y;
+    }
+  }
+
+  // By symmetry, the width and height of the bounding box are twice the
+  // maximum x and y coordinates.
+  *rotWidthPtr = xMax + xMax;
+  *rotHeightPtr = yMax + yMax;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Blt_AnchorPoint --
+ *
+ * 	Translates a position, using both the dimensions of the bounding box,
+ * 	and the anchor direction, returning the coordinates of the upper-left
+ * 	corner of the box. The anchor indicates where the given x-y position
+ * 	is in relation to the bounding box.
+ *
+ *  		7 nw --- 0 n --- 1 ne
+ *  		 |                |
+ *  		6 w    8 center  2 e
+ *  		 |                |
+ *  		5 sw --- 4 s --- 3 se
+ *
+ * 	The coordinates returned are translated to the origin of the bounding
+ * 	box (suitable for giving to XCopyArea, XCopyPlane, etc.)
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The translated coordinates of the bounding box are returned.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+Point2d Graph::anchorPoint(double x, double y, double w, double h,	
+			   Tk_Anchor anchor)
+{
+  Point2d t;
+
+  switch (anchor) {
+  case TK_ANCHOR_NW:		/* 7 Upper left corner */
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_W:		/* 6 Left center */
+    y -= (h * 0.5);
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_SW:		/* 5 Lower left corner */
+    y -= h;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_N:		/* 0 Top center */
+    x -= (w * 0.5);
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:	/* 8 Center */
+    x -= (w * 0.5);
+    y -= (h * 0.5);
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_S:		/* 4 Bottom center */
+    x -= (w * 0.5);
+    y -= h;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_NE:		/* 1 Upper right corner */
+    x -= w;
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_E:		/* 2 Right center */
+    x -= w;
+    y -= (h * 0.5);
+    break;
+  case TK_ANCHOR_SE:		/* 3 Lower right corner */
+    x -= w;
+    y -= h;
+    break;
+  }
+
+  t.x = x;
+  t.y = y;
+  return t;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltInt.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltInt.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f9c3ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltInt.C
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <iostream>
+using namespace std;
+
+extern "C" {
+DLLEXPORT Tcl_AppInitProc Tkblt_Init;
+DLLEXPORT Tcl_AppInitProc Tkblt_SafeInit;
+};
+
+Tcl_AppInitProc Blt_VectorCmdInitProc;
+Tcl_AppInitProc Blt_GraphCmdInitProc;
+
+#include "tkbltStubInit.c"
+
+DLLEXPORT int Tkblt_Init(Tcl_Interp* interp)
+{
+  Tcl_Namespace *nsPtr;
+
+  if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, TCL_PATCH_LEVEL, 0) == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  if (Tk_InitStubs(interp, TK_PATCH_LEVEL, 0) == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  nsPtr = Tcl_FindNamespace(interp, "::blt", (Tcl_Namespace *)NULL, 0);
+  if (nsPtr == NULL) {
+    nsPtr = Tcl_CreateNamespace(interp, "::blt", NULL, NULL);
+    if (nsPtr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (Blt_VectorCmdInitProc(interp) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  if (Blt_GraphCmdInitProc(interp) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (Tcl_PkgProvideEx(interp, PACKAGE_NAME, PACKAGE_VERSION, (ClientData)&tkbltStubs) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+DLLEXPORT int Tkblt_SafeInit(Tcl_Interp* interp)
+{
+  return Tkblt_Init(interp);
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltInt.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltInt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2bf96ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltInt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/*
+ *	Copyright 2017 Patzschke+Rasp Software GmbH
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TKBLT_INT_H__
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER)
+
+#include <limits>
+
+#if !defined(NAN)
+#define NAN (std::numeric_limits<double>::quiet_NaN())
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(isnan)
+#define isnan(x) _isnan(x)
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(isfinite)
+#define isfinite(x) _finite(x)
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(isinf)
+#define isinf(x) !_finite(x)
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(numeric_limits)
+#define numeric_limits(x) _numeric_limits(x)
+#endif
+
+#if _MSC_VER < 1900
+#define snprintf _snprintf
+#else
+#include <stdio.h> //sprintf
+#endif
+
+#endif	/* _MSC_VER */
+
+#endif	/* __TKBLT_INT_H__ */
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltNsUtil.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltNsUtil.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2ecfa3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltNsUtil.C
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1997-2008 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __CYGWIN__
+extern "C" {
+#include <tclInt.h>
+}
+#else
+#include <tclInt.h>
+#endif
+
+#include "tkbltNsUtil.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+Tcl_Namespace* Blt::GetCommandNamespace(Tcl_Command cmdToken)
+{
+  Command* cmdPtr = (Command*)cmdToken;
+  return (Tcl_Namespace *)cmdPtr->nsPtr;
+}
+
+int Blt::ParseObjectName(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *path, 
+			Blt_ObjectName *namePtr, unsigned int flags)
+{
+  namePtr->nsPtr = NULL;
+  namePtr->name = NULL;
+  char* colon = NULL;
+
+  /* Find the last namespace separator in the qualified name. */
+  char* last = (char *)(path + strlen(path));
+  while (--last > path) {
+    if ((*last == ':') && (*(last - 1) == ':')) {
+      last++;		/* just after the last "::" */
+      colon = last - 2;
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+  if (colon == NULL) {
+    namePtr->name = path;
+    if ((flags & BLT_NO_DEFAULT_NS) == 0) {
+      namePtr->nsPtr = Tcl_GetCurrentNamespace(interp);
+    }
+    return 1;		/* No namespace designated in name. */
+  }
+
+  /* Separate the namespace and the object name. */
+  *colon = '\0';
+  if (path[0] == '\0') {
+    namePtr->nsPtr = Tcl_GetGlobalNamespace(interp);
+  } else {
+    namePtr->nsPtr = Tcl_FindNamespace(interp, (char *)path, NULL, 
+				       (flags & BLT_NO_ERROR_MSG) ? 0 : TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+  }
+  /* Repair the string. */    *colon = ':';
+
+  if (namePtr->nsPtr == NULL) {
+    return 0;		/* Namespace doesn't exist. */
+  }
+  namePtr->name =last;
+  return 1;
+}
+
+char* Blt::MakeQualifiedName(Blt_ObjectName *namePtr, Tcl_DString *resultPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_DStringInit(resultPtr);
+  if ((namePtr->nsPtr->fullName[0] != ':') || 
+      (namePtr->nsPtr->fullName[1] != ':') ||
+      (namePtr->nsPtr->fullName[2] != '\0')) {
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(resultPtr, namePtr->nsPtr->fullName, -1);
+  }
+  Tcl_DStringAppend(resultPtr, "::", -1);
+  Tcl_DStringAppend(resultPtr, (char *)namePtr->name, -1);
+  return Tcl_DStringValue(resultPtr);
+}
+
+static Tcl_Namespace* NamespaceOfVariable(Var *varPtr)
+{
+  if (varPtr->flags & VAR_IN_HASHTABLE) {
+    VarInHash *vhashPtr = (VarInHash *)varPtr;
+    TclVarHashTable *vtablePtr;
+
+    vtablePtr = (TclVarHashTable *)vhashPtr->entry.tablePtr;
+    return (Tcl_Namespace*)(vtablePtr->nsPtr);
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+Tcl_Namespace* Blt::GetVariableNamespace(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *path)
+{
+  Blt_ObjectName objName;
+  if (!ParseObjectName(interp, path, &objName, BLT_NO_DEFAULT_NS))
+    return NULL;
+
+  if (objName.nsPtr == NULL) {
+    Var*varPtr = (Var*)Tcl_FindNamespaceVar(interp, (char *)path, 
+					    (Tcl_Namespace *)NULL, 
+					    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    if (varPtr)
+      return NamespaceOfVariable(varPtr);
+
+  }
+  return objName.nsPtr;    
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltNsUtil.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltNsUtil.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..950a48a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltNsUtil.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef BLT_NS_UTIL_H
+#define BLT_NS_UTIL_H 1
+
+#define NS_SEARCH_NONE		(0)
+#define NS_SEARCH_CURRENT	(1<<0)
+#define NS_SEARCH_GLOBAL	(1<<1)
+#define NS_SEARCH_BOTH		(NS_SEARCH_GLOBAL | NS_SEARCH_CURRENT)
+
+#define BLT_NO_DEFAULT_NS	(1<<0)
+#define BLT_NO_ERROR_MSG	(1<<1)
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char *name;
+    Tcl_Namespace *nsPtr;
+  } Blt_ObjectName;
+
+  extern Tcl_Namespace* GetVariableNamespace(Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+					     const char *varName);
+
+  extern Tcl_Namespace* GetCommandNamespace(Tcl_Command cmdToken);
+
+  extern int ParseObjectName(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *name, 
+				 Blt_ObjectName *objNamePtr, 
+				 unsigned int flags);
+
+  extern char* MakeQualifiedName(Blt_ObjectName *objNamePtr, 
+				 Tcl_DString *resultPtr);
+};
+
+#endif /* BLT_NS_UTIL_H */
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4199a44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "tkbltOp.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+static int BinaryOpSearch(Blt_OpSpec *specs, int nSpecs, const char *string,
+			  int length)
+{
+  int low = 0;
+  int high = nSpecs - 1;
+  char c = string[0];
+  while (low <= high) {
+    int median = (low + high) >> 1;
+    Blt_OpSpec *specPtr = specs + median;
+
+    /* Test the first character */
+    int compare = c - specPtr->name[0];
+    if (compare == 0) {
+      /* Now test the entire string */
+      compare = strncmp(string, specPtr->name, length);
+      if (compare == 0) {
+	if ((int)length < specPtr->minChars) {
+	  return -2;	/* Ambiguous operation name */
+	}
+      }
+    }
+    if (compare < 0) {
+      high = median - 1;
+    } else if (compare > 0) {
+      low = median + 1;
+    } else {
+      return median;		/* Op found. */
+    }
+  }
+  return -1;				/* Can't find operation */
+}
+
+static int LinearOpSearch(Blt_OpSpec *specs, int nSpecs, const char *string,
+			  int length)
+{
+  char c = string[0];
+  int nMatches = 0;
+  int last = -1;
+  int i =0;
+  for (Blt_OpSpec *specPtr = specs; i<nSpecs; i++, specPtr++) {
+    if ((c == specPtr->name[0]) && 
+	(strncmp(string, specPtr->name, length) == 0)) {
+      last = i;
+      nMatches++;
+      if ((int)length == specPtr->minChars) {
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  if (nMatches > 1)
+    return -2;			/* Ambiguous operation name */
+
+  if (nMatches == 0)
+    return -1;			/* Can't find operation */
+
+  return last;			/* Op found. */
+}
+
+void* Blt::GetOpFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, int nSpecs, Blt_OpSpec *specs,
+		       int operPos, int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[],
+		       int flags)
+{
+  Blt_OpSpec *specPtr;
+  int n;
+
+  if (objc <= operPos) {		/* No operation argument */
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: ", (char *)NULL);
+  usage:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "should be one of...", (char *)NULL);
+    for (n = 0; n < nSpecs; n++) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n  ", (char *)NULL);
+      for (int ii = 0; ii < operPos; ii++) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]), " ", 
+			 (char *)NULL);
+      }
+      specPtr = specs + n;
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, specPtr->name, " ", specPtr->usage,
+		       (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    return NULL;
+  }
+
+  int length;
+  const char* string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[operPos], &length);
+  if (flags & BLT_OP_LINEAR_SEARCH)
+    n = LinearOpSearch(specs, nSpecs, string, length);
+  else
+    n = BinaryOpSearch(specs, nSpecs, string, length);
+
+  if (n == -2) {
+    char c;
+
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous", (char *)NULL);
+    if (operPos > 2) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", Tcl_GetString(objv[operPos - 1]), 
+		       (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " operation \"", string, "\" matches: ",
+		     (char *)NULL);
+
+    c = string[0];
+    for (n = 0; n < nSpecs; n++) {
+      specPtr = specs + n;
+      if ((c == specPtr->name[0]) &&
+	  (strncmp(string, specPtr->name, length) == 0)) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", specPtr->name, (char *)NULL);
+      }
+    }
+    return NULL;
+
+  } else if (n == -1) {	      /* Can't find operation, display help */
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad", (char *)NULL);
+    if (operPos > 2) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", Tcl_GetString(objv[operPos - 1]), 
+		       (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " operation \"", string, "\": ", (char *)NULL);
+    goto usage;
+  }
+  specPtr = specs + n;
+  if ((objc < specPtr->minArgs) || 
+      ((specPtr->maxArgs > 0) && (objc > specPtr->maxArgs))) {
+    int i;
+
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", (char *)NULL);
+    for (i = 0; i < operPos; i++) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), " ", 
+		       (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, specPtr->name, " ", specPtr->usage, "\"",
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    return NULL;
+  }
+  return specPtr->proc;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltOp.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltOp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc9ffb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltOp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BltOp_h__
+#define __BltOp_h__
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#define BLT_OP_BINARY_SEARCH	0
+#define BLT_OP_LINEAR_SEARCH	1
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    const char *name;		/* Name of operation */
+    int minChars;		/* Minimum # characters to disambiguate */
+    void *proc;
+    int minArgs;		/* Minimum # args required */
+    int maxArgs;		/* Maximum # args required */
+    const char *usage;		/* Usage message */
+  } Blt_OpSpec;
+
+  typedef enum {
+    BLT_OP_ARG0,		/* Op is the first argument. */
+    BLT_OP_ARG1,		/* Op is the second argument. */
+    BLT_OP_ARG2,		/* Op is the third argument. */
+    BLT_OP_ARG3,		/* Op is the fourth argument. */
+    BLT_OP_ARG4			/* Op is the fifth argument. */
+
+  } Blt_OpIndex;
+
+  void *GetOpFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, int nSpecs, 
+		     Blt_OpSpec *specs, int operPos, int objc, 
+		     Tcl_Obj* const objv[], int flags);
+};
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltParse.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltParse.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..095b16a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltParse.C
@@ -0,0 +1,388 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is copied from tclParse.c in the TCL library distribution.
+ *
+ *	Copyright (c) 1987-1993 The Regents of the University of
+ *	California.
+ *
+ *	Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * 
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Since TCL 8.1.0 these routines have been replaced by ones that
+ * generate byte-codes.  But since these routines are used in vector
+ * expressions, where no such byte-compilation is necessary, I now
+ * include them.  In fact, the byte-compiled versions would be slower
+ * since the compiled code typically runs only one time.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <iostream>
+#include <sstream>
+#include <iomanip>
+using namespace std;
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+
+#include "tkbltParse.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+/*
+ * A table used to classify input characters to assist in parsing
+ * TCL commands.  The table should be indexed with a signed character
+ * using the CHAR_TYPE macro.  The character may have a negative
+ * value.  The CHAR_TYPE macro takes a pointer to a signed character
+ * and a pointer to the last character in the source string.  If the
+ * src pointer is pointing at the terminating null of the string,
+ * CHAR_TYPE returns TCL_COMMAND_END.
+ */
+
+#define STATIC_STRING_SPACE	150
+#define TCL_NORMAL		0x01
+#define TCL_SPACE		0x02
+#define TCL_COMMAND_END		0x04
+#define TCL_QUOTE		0x08
+#define TCL_OPEN_BRACKET	0x10
+#define TCL_OPEN_BRACE		0x20
+#define TCL_CLOSE_BRACE		0x40
+#define TCL_BACKSLASH		0x80
+#define TCL_DOLLAR		0x00
+
+/*
+ * The following table assigns a type to each character. Only types
+ * meaningful to TCL parsing are represented here. The table is
+ * designed to be referenced with either signed or unsigned characters,
+ * so it has 384 entries. The first 128 entries correspond to negative
+ * character values, the next 256 correspond to positive character
+ * values. The last 128 entries are identical to the first 128. The
+ * table is always indexed with a 128-byte offset (the 128th entry
+ * corresponds to a 0 character value).
+ */
+
+static unsigned char tclTypeTable[] =
+{
+ /*
+     * Negative character values, from -128 to -1:
+     */
+
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+
+    /*
+     * Positive character values, from 0-127:
+     */
+
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_SPACE, TCL_COMMAND_END, TCL_SPACE,
+    TCL_SPACE, TCL_SPACE, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_SPACE, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_QUOTE, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_DOLLAR, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_COMMAND_END,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_OPEN_BRACKET,
+    TCL_BACKSLASH, TCL_COMMAND_END, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_OPEN_BRACE,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_CLOSE_BRACE, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+
+    /*
+     * Large unsigned character values, from 128-255:
+     */
+
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+    TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL, TCL_NORMAL,
+};
+
+#define CHAR_TYPE(src,last) \
+	(((src)==(last))?TCL_COMMAND_END:(tclTypeTable+128)[(int)*(src)])
+
+int Blt::ParseNestedCmd(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string,
+		       int flags, const char **termPtr, ParseValue *parsePtr)
+
+{
+  return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+int Blt::ParseBraces(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string,
+		    const char **termPtr, ParseValue *parsePtr)
+{
+    int level;
+    const char *src;
+    char *dest, *end;
+    char c;
+    const char *lastChar = string + strlen(string);
+
+    src = string;
+    dest = parsePtr->next;
+    end = parsePtr->end;
+    level = 1;
+
+    /*
+     * Copy the characters one at a time to the result area, stopping
+     * when the matching close-brace is found.
+     */
+
+    for (;;) {
+	c = *src;
+	src++;
+
+	if (dest == end) {
+	    parsePtr->next = dest;
+	    (*parsePtr->expandProc) (parsePtr, 20);
+	    dest = parsePtr->next;
+	    end = parsePtr->end;
+	}
+	*dest = c;
+	dest++;
+
+	if (CHAR_TYPE(src - 1, lastChar) == TCL_NORMAL) {
+	    continue;
+	} else if (c == '{') {
+	    level++;
+	} else if (c == '}') {
+	    level--;
+	    if (level == 0) {
+		dest--;		/* Don't copy the last close brace. */
+		break;
+	    }
+	} else if (c == '\\') {
+	    int count;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Must always squish out backslash-newlines, even when in
+	     * braces.  This is needed so that this sequence can appear
+	     * anywhere in a command, such as the middle of an expression.
+	     */
+
+	    if (*src == '\n') {
+		dest[-1] = Tcl_Backslash(src - 1, &count);
+		src += count - 1;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_Backslash(src - 1, &count);
+		while (count > 1) {
+		    if (dest == end) {
+			parsePtr->next = dest;
+			(*parsePtr->expandProc) (parsePtr, 20);
+			dest = parsePtr->next;
+			end = parsePtr->end;
+		    }
+		    *dest = *src;
+		    dest++;
+		    src++;
+		    count--;
+		}
+	    }
+	} else if (c == '\0') {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "missing close-brace", (char *)NULL);
+	    *termPtr = string - 1;
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    *dest = '\0';
+    parsePtr->next = dest;
+    *termPtr = src;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Blt::ExpandParseValue(ParseValue *parsePtr, int needed)
+
+{
+    /*
+     * Either double the size of the buffer or add enough new space
+     * to meet the demand, whichever produces a larger new buffer.
+     */
+    int size = (parsePtr->end - parsePtr->buffer) + 1;
+    if (size < needed)
+	size += needed;
+    else
+	size += size;
+
+    char* buffer = (char*)malloc((unsigned int)size);
+
+    /*
+     * Copy from old buffer to new, free old buffer if needed, and
+     * mark new buffer as malloc-ed.
+     */
+    memcpy((VOID *) buffer, (VOID *) parsePtr->buffer,
+	(size_t) (parsePtr->next - parsePtr->buffer));
+    parsePtr->next = buffer + (parsePtr->next - parsePtr->buffer);
+    if (parsePtr->clientData != 0) {
+	free(parsePtr->buffer);
+    }
+    parsePtr->buffer = buffer;
+    parsePtr->end = buffer + size - 1;
+    parsePtr->clientData = (ClientData)1;
+}
+
+int Blt::ParseQuotes(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string, int termChar,
+		    int flags, const char **termPtr, ParseValue *parsePtr)
+{
+    const char *src;
+    char *dest, c;
+    const char *lastChar = string + strlen(string);
+
+    src = string;
+    dest = parsePtr->next;
+
+    for (;;) {
+	if (dest == parsePtr->end) {
+	    /*
+	     * Target buffer space is about to run out.  Make more space.
+	     */
+	    parsePtr->next = dest;
+	    (*parsePtr->expandProc) (parsePtr, 1);
+	    dest = parsePtr->next;
+	}
+	c = *src;
+	src++;
+	if (c == termChar) {
+	    *dest = '\0';
+	    parsePtr->next = dest;
+	    *termPtr = src;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if (CHAR_TYPE(src - 1, lastChar) == TCL_NORMAL) {
+	  copy:
+	    *dest = c;
+	    dest++;
+	    continue;
+	} else if (c == '$') {
+	    int length;
+	    const char *value;
+
+	    value = Tcl_ParseVar(interp, src - 1, termPtr);
+	    if (value == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    src = *termPtr;
+	    length = strlen(value);
+	    if ((parsePtr->end - dest) <= length) {
+		parsePtr->next = dest;
+		(*parsePtr->expandProc) (parsePtr, length);
+		dest = parsePtr->next;
+	    }
+	    strcpy(dest, value);
+	    dest += length;
+	    continue;
+	} else if (c == '[') {
+	    int result;
+
+	    parsePtr->next = dest;
+	    result = ParseNestedCmd(interp, src, flags, termPtr, parsePtr);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		return result;
+	    }
+	    src = *termPtr;
+	    dest = parsePtr->next;
+	    continue;
+	} else if (c == '\\') {
+	    int nRead;
+
+	    src--;
+	    *dest = Tcl_Backslash(src, &nRead);
+	    dest++;
+	    src += nRead;
+	    continue;
+	} else if (c == '\0') {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    ostringstream str;
+	    str << "missing " << termChar << ends;
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), str.str().c_str(), 9);
+	    *termPtr = string - 1;
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    goto copy;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltParse.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltParse.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee215a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltParse.h
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BLT_PARSE_H
+#define _BLT_PARSE_H
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct _ParseValue ParseValue;
+  struct _ParseValue {
+    char *buffer;
+    char *next;
+    char *end;
+    void (*expandProc)(ParseValue *pvPtr, int needed);
+    ClientData clientData;
+  };
+
+  extern int ParseBraces(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string, 
+			     const char **termPtr, ParseValue *pvPtr);
+  extern int ParseNestedCmd(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string, 
+				int flags, const char **termPtr,
+				ParseValue *pvPtr);
+  extern int ParseQuotes(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string, 
+			     int termChar, int flags, const char **termPtr,
+			     ParseValue * pvPtr);
+  extern void ExpandParseValue(ParseValue *pvPtr, int needed);
+}
+
+#endif 
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltStubInit.c b/tkblt/generic/tkbltStubInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..354b7f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltStubInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+#include "tkbltVector.h"
+
+/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */
+
+const TkbltStubs tkbltStubs = {
+    TCL_STUB_MAGIC,
+    0,
+    Blt_CreateVector, /* 0 */
+    Blt_CreateVector2, /* 1 */
+    Blt_DeleteVectorByName, /* 2 */
+    Blt_DeleteVector, /* 3 */
+    Blt_GetVector, /* 4 */
+    Blt_GetVectorFromObj, /* 5 */
+    Blt_ResetVector, /* 6 */
+    Blt_ResizeVector, /* 7 */
+    Blt_VectorExists, /* 8 */
+    Blt_VectorExists2, /* 9 */
+    Blt_AllocVectorId, /* 10 */
+    Blt_GetVectorById, /* 11 */
+    Blt_SetVectorChangedProc, /* 12 */
+    Blt_FreeVectorId, /* 13 */
+    Blt_NameOfVectorId, /* 14 */
+    Blt_NameOfVector, /* 15 */
+    Blt_ExprVector, /* 16 */
+    Blt_InstallIndexProc, /* 17 */
+    Blt_VecMin, /* 18 */
+    Blt_VecMax, /* 19 */
+};
+
+/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltStubLib.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltStubLib.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e973063
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltStubLib.C
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+#ifndef USE_TCL_STUBS
+#define USE_TCL_STUBS
+#endif
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+
+ClientData tkbltStubsPtr =NULL;
+
+const char* Tkblt_InitStubs(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char* version, int exact)
+{
+    const char* actualVersion = 
+      Tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp, "tkblt", version, exact, &tkbltStubsPtr);
+
+    return (actualVersion && tkbltStubsPtr) ? actualVersion : NULL;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltSwitch.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltSwitch.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb80663
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltSwitch.C
@@ -0,0 +1,407 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include <iostream>
+#include <sstream>
+#include <iomanip>
+using namespace std;
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+
+#include "tkbltSwitch.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define COUNT_NNEG		0
+#define COUNT_POS		1
+#define COUNT_ANY		2
+
+static char* Blt_Strdup(const char *string)
+{
+  size_t size = strlen(string) + 1;
+  char* ptr = (char*)malloc(size * sizeof(char));
+  if (ptr != NULL) {
+    strcpy(ptr, string);
+  }
+  return ptr;
+}
+
+static int Blt_GetCountFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int check,
+			       long *valuePtr)
+{
+  long count;
+  if (Tcl_GetLongFromObj(interp, objPtr, &count) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  switch (check) {
+  case COUNT_NNEG:
+    if (count < 0) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad value \"", Tcl_GetString(objPtr), 
+		       "\": can't be negative", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    break;
+  case COUNT_POS:
+    if (count <= 0) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad value \"", Tcl_GetString(objPtr), 
+		       "\": must be positive", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    break;
+  case COUNT_ANY:
+    break;
+  }
+  *valuePtr = count;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void DoHelp(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_SwitchSpec *specs)
+{
+  Tcl_DString ds;
+  Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
+  Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, "following switches are available:", -1);
+  for (Blt_SwitchSpec *sp = specs; sp->type != BLT_SWITCH_END; sp++) {
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, "\n    ", 4);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, sp->switchName, -1);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, " ", 1);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, sp->help, -1);
+  }
+  Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), (char *)NULL);
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+}
+
+static Blt_SwitchSpec *FindSwitchSpec(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_SwitchSpec *specs,
+				      const char *name, int length,
+				      int needFlags, int hateFlags)
+{
+  char c = name[1];
+  Blt_SwitchSpec *matchPtr = NULL;
+  for (Blt_SwitchSpec *sp = specs; sp->type != BLT_SWITCH_END; sp++) {
+    if (sp->switchName == NULL)
+      continue;
+
+    if (((sp->flags & needFlags) != needFlags) || (sp->flags & hateFlags))
+      continue;
+
+    if ((sp->switchName[1] != c) || (strncmp(sp->switchName,name,length)!=0))
+      continue;
+
+    if (sp->switchName[length] == '\0')
+      return sp;		/* Stop on a perfect match. */
+
+    if (matchPtr != NULL) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous switch \"", name, "\"\n", 
+		       (char *) NULL);
+      DoHelp(interp, specs);
+      return NULL;
+    }
+    matchPtr = sp;
+  }
+
+  if (strcmp(name, "-help") == 0) {
+    DoHelp(interp, specs);
+    return NULL;
+  }
+
+  if (matchPtr == NULL) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown switch \"", name, "\"\n", 
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    DoHelp(interp, specs);
+    return NULL;
+  }
+
+  return matchPtr;
+}
+
+static int DoSwitch(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_SwitchSpec *sp,
+		    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, void *record)
+{
+  do {
+    char *ptr = (char *)record + sp->offset;
+    switch (sp->type) {
+    case BLT_SWITCH_BOOLEAN:
+      {
+	int boo;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objPtr, &boo) != TCL_OK) {
+	  return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (sp->mask > 0) {
+	  if (boo) {
+	    *((int *)ptr) |= sp->mask;
+	  } else {
+	    *((int *)ptr) &= ~sp->mask;
+	  }
+	} else {
+	  *((int *)ptr) = boo;
+	}
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_DOUBLE:
+      if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objPtr, (double *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_OBJ:
+      Tcl_IncrRefCount(objPtr);
+      *(Tcl_Obj **)ptr = objPtr;
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_FLOAT:
+      {
+	double value;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objPtr, &value) != TCL_OK) {
+	  return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	*(float *)ptr = (float)value;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_INT:
+      if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objPtr, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_INT_NNEG:
+      {
+	long value;
+		
+	if (Blt_GetCountFromObj(interp, objPtr, COUNT_NNEG, 
+				&value) != TCL_OK) {
+	  return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	*(int *)ptr = (int)value;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_INT_POS:
+      {
+	long value;
+		
+	if (Blt_GetCountFromObj(interp, objPtr, COUNT_POS, 
+				&value) != TCL_OK) {
+	  return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	*(int *)ptr = (int)value;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_LIST:
+      {
+	int argc;
+
+	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &argc, 
+			  (const char ***)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+	  return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_LONG:
+      if (Tcl_GetLongFromObj(interp, objPtr, (long *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_LONG_NNEG:
+      {
+	long value;
+		
+	if (Blt_GetCountFromObj(interp, objPtr, COUNT_NNEG, 
+				&value) != TCL_OK) {
+	  return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	*(long *)ptr = value;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_LONG_POS:
+      {
+	long value;
+		
+	if (Blt_GetCountFromObj(interp, objPtr, COUNT_POS, &value)
+	    != TCL_OK) {
+	  return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	*(long *)ptr = value;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_STRING: 
+      {
+	char *value;
+		
+	value = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+	value =  (*value == '\0') ?  NULL : Blt_Strdup(value);
+	if (*(char **)ptr != NULL) {
+	  free(*(char **)ptr);
+	}
+	*(char **)ptr = value;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM:
+      if ((*sp->customPtr->parseProc)(sp->customPtr->clientData, interp,
+				      sp->switchName, objPtr, (char *)record, sp->offset, sp->flags) 
+	  != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      break;
+
+    default: 
+      ostringstream str;
+      str << sp->type << ends;
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad switch table: unknown type \"",
+		       str.str().c_str(), "\"", NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    sp++;
+  } while ((sp->switchName == NULL) && (sp->type != BLT_SWITCH_END));
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt::ParseSwitches(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_SwitchSpec *specs,
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[], void *record,
+		      int flags)
+{
+  Blt_SwitchSpec *sp;
+  int needFlags = flags & ~(BLT_SWITCH_USER_BIT - 1);
+  int hateFlags = 0;
+
+  /*
+   * Pass 1:  Clear the change flags on all the specs so that we 
+   *          can check it later.
+   */
+  for (sp = specs; sp->type != BLT_SWITCH_END; sp++)
+    sp->flags &= ~BLT_SWITCH_SPECIFIED;
+
+  /*
+   * Pass 2:  Process the arguments that match entries in the specs.
+   *		It's an error if the argument doesn't match anything.
+   */
+  int count;
+  for (count = 0; count < objc; count++) {
+    char *arg;
+    int length;
+
+    arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[count], &length);
+    if (flags & BLT_SWITCH_OBJV_PARTIAL) {
+      /* 
+       * If the argument doesn't start with a '-' (not a switch) or is
+       * '--', stop processing and return the number of arguments
+       * comsumed.
+       */
+      if (arg[0] != '-') {
+	return count;
+      }
+      if ((arg[1] == '-') && (arg[2] == '\0')) {
+	return count + 1; /* include the "--" in the count. */
+      }
+    }
+    sp = FindSwitchSpec(interp, specs, arg, length, needFlags, hateFlags);
+    if (sp == NULL) {
+      return -1;
+    }
+    if (sp->type == BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK) {
+      char *ptr;
+
+      ptr = (char *)record + sp->offset;
+      *((int *)ptr) |= sp->mask;
+    } else if (sp->type == BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK_INVERT) {
+      char *ptr;
+	    
+      ptr = (char *)record + sp->offset;
+      *((int *)ptr) &= ~sp->mask;
+    } else if (sp->type == BLT_SWITCH_VALUE) {
+      char *ptr;
+	    
+      ptr = (char *)record + sp->offset;
+      *((int *)ptr) = sp->mask;
+    } else {
+      count++;
+      if (count == objc) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", arg, "\" missing", 
+			 (char *) NULL);
+	return -1;
+      }
+      if (DoSwitch(interp, sp, objv[count], record) != TCL_OK) {
+	ostringstream str;
+	str << "\n    (processing \"" << sp->switchName << "\" switch)" << ends;
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, str.str().c_str());
+	return -1;
+      }
+    }
+    sp->flags |= BLT_SWITCH_SPECIFIED;
+  }
+
+  return count;
+}
+
+void Blt::FreeSwitches(Blt_SwitchSpec *specs, void *record, int needFlags)
+{
+  for (Blt_SwitchSpec *sp = specs; sp->type != BLT_SWITCH_END; sp++) {
+    if ((sp->flags & needFlags) == needFlags) {
+      char *ptr = (char *)record + sp->offset;
+      switch (sp->type) {
+      case BLT_SWITCH_STRING:
+      case BLT_SWITCH_LIST:
+	if (*((char **) ptr) != NULL) {
+	  free(*((char **) ptr));
+	  *((char **) ptr) = NULL;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case BLT_SWITCH_OBJ:
+	if (*((Tcl_Obj **) ptr) != NULL) {
+	  Tcl_DecrRefCount(*((Tcl_Obj **)ptr));
+	  *((Tcl_Obj **) ptr) = NULL;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM:
+	if ((*(char **)ptr != NULL) && 
+	    (sp->customPtr->freeProc != NULL)) {
+	  (*sp->customPtr->freeProc)((char *)record, sp->offset, 
+				     sp->flags);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      default:
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltSwitch.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltSwitch.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eed7b31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltSwitch.h
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef BLT_SWITCH_H
+#define BLT_SWITCH_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+
+#define BLT_SWITCH_DEFAULTS		(0)
+#define BLT_SWITCH_ARGV_PARTIAL		(1<<1)
+#define BLT_SWITCH_OBJV_PARTIAL		(1<<1)
+
+  /*
+   * Possible flag values for Blt_SwitchSpec structures.  Any bits at or
+   * above BLT_SWITCH_USER_BIT may be used by clients for selecting
+   * certain entries.
+   */
+#define BLT_SWITCH_NULL_OK		(1<<0)
+#define BLT_SWITCH_DONT_SET_DEFAULT	(1<<3)
+#define BLT_SWITCH_SPECIFIED		(1<<4)
+#define BLT_SWITCH_USER_BIT		(1<<8)
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef int (Blt_SwitchParseProc)(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+				    const char *switchName, 
+				    Tcl_Obj *valueObjPtr, char *record, 
+				    int offset, int flags);
+  typedef void (Blt_SwitchFreeProc)(char *record, int offset, int flags);
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Blt_SwitchParseProc *parseProc; /* Procedure to parse a switch
+				     * value and store it in its *
+				     * converted form in the data *
+				     * record. */
+
+    Blt_SwitchFreeProc *freeProc; /* Procedure to free a switch. */
+
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary one-word value used by
+				 * switch parser, passed to
+				 * parseProc. */
+  } Blt_SwitchCustom;
+
+  /*
+   * Type values for Blt_SwitchSpec structures.  See the user
+   * documentation for details.
+   */
+  typedef enum {
+    BLT_SWITCH_BOOLEAN, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_DOUBLE, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK_INVERT, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_FLOAT, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_INT, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_INT_NNEG, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_INT_POS,
+    BLT_SWITCH_LIST, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_LONG, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_LONG_NNEG, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_LONG_POS,
+    BLT_SWITCH_OBJ,
+    BLT_SWITCH_STRING, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_VALUE, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM, 
+    BLT_SWITCH_END
+  } Blt_SwitchTypes;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Blt_SwitchTypes type;	/* Type of option, such as
+				 * BLT_SWITCH_COLOR; see definitions
+				 * below.  Last option in table must
+				 * have type BLT_SWITCH_END. */
+
+    const char *switchName;	/* Switch used to specify option in
+				 * argv.  NULL means this spec is part
+				 * of a group. */
+
+    const char *help;		/* Help string. */
+    int offset;			/* Where in widget record to store
+				 * value; use Blt_Offset macro to
+				 * generate values for this. */
+
+    int flags;			/* Any combination of the values
+				 * defined below. */
+
+    unsigned int mask;
+
+    Blt_SwitchCustom *customPtr; /* If type is BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM then
+				  * this is a pointer to info about how
+				  * to parse and print the option.
+				  * Otherwise it is irrelevant. */
+  } Blt_SwitchSpec;
+
+  extern int ParseSwitches(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_SwitchSpec *specPtr, 
+			       int objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv, void *rec,
+			       int flags);
+  extern void FreeSwitches(Blt_SwitchSpec *specs, void *rec, int flags);
+};
+
+#endif /* BLT_SWITCH_H */
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecCmd.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecCmd.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a03fe6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecCmd.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1821 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1995-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ *
+ * Code for binary data read operation was donated by Harold Kirsch.
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * TODO:
+ *	o Add H. Kirsch's vector binary read operation
+ *		x binread file0
+ *		x binread -file file0
+ *
+ *	o Add ASCII/binary file reader
+ *		x read fileName
+ *
+ *	o Allow Tcl-based client notifications.
+ *		vector x
+ *		x notify call Display
+ *		x notify delete Display
+ *		x notify reorder #1 #2
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltVecInt.h"
+#include "tkbltOp.h"
+#include "tkbltNsUtil.h"
+#include "tkbltSwitch.h"
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+extern int Blt_SimplifyLine (Point2d *origPts, int low, int high, 
+			     double tolerance, int *indices);
+
+typedef int (VectorCmdProc)(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, int objc, 
+			    Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+typedef int (QSortCompareProc) (const void *, const void *);
+
+static Blt_SwitchParseProc ObjToFFTVector;
+static Blt_SwitchCustom fftVectorSwitch = {
+  ObjToFFTVector, NULL, (ClientData)0,
+};
+
+static Blt_SwitchParseProc ObjToIndex;
+static Blt_SwitchCustom indexSwitch = {
+  ObjToIndex, NULL, (ClientData)0,
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+  Tcl_Obj *formatObjPtr;
+  int from, to;
+} PrintSwitches;
+
+static Blt_SwitchSpec printSwitches[] = 
+  {
+    {BLT_SWITCH_OBJ,    "-format", "string",
+     Tk_Offset(PrintSwitches, formatObjPtr), 0},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM, "-from",   "index",
+     Tk_Offset(PrintSwitches, from),         0, 0, &indexSwitch},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM, "-to",     "index",
+     Tk_Offset(PrintSwitches, to),           0, 0, &indexSwitch},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_END}
+  };
+
+
+typedef struct {
+  int flags;
+} SortSwitches;
+
+#define SORT_DECREASING (1<<0)
+#define SORT_UNIQUE	(1<<1)
+
+static Blt_SwitchSpec sortSwitches[] = 
+  {
+    {BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK, "-decreasing", "",
+	Tk_Offset(SortSwitches, flags),   0, SORT_DECREASING},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK, "-reverse",   "",
+	Tk_Offset(SortSwitches, flags),   0, SORT_DECREASING},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK, "-uniq",     "", 
+	Tk_Offset(SortSwitches, flags),   0, SORT_UNIQUE},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_END}
+  };
+
+typedef struct {
+  double delta;
+  Vector *imagPtr;	/* Vector containing imaginary part. */
+  Vector *freqPtr;	/* Vector containing frequencies. */
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;
+  int mask;			/* Flags controlling FFT. */
+} FFTData;
+
+
+static Blt_SwitchSpec fftSwitches[] = {
+  {BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM, "-imagpart",    "vector",
+   Tk_Offset(FFTData, imagPtr), 0, 0, &fftVectorSwitch},
+  {BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK, "-noconstant", "",
+   Tk_Offset(FFTData, mask), 0, FFT_NO_CONSTANT},
+  {BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK, "-spectrum", "",
+   Tk_Offset(FFTData, mask), 0, FFT_SPECTRUM},
+  {BLT_SWITCH_BITMASK, "-bartlett",  "",
+   Tk_Offset(FFTData, mask), 0, FFT_BARTLETT},
+  {BLT_SWITCH_DOUBLE, "-delta",   "float",
+   Tk_Offset(FFTData, mask), 0, 0, },
+  {BLT_SWITCH_CUSTOM, "-frequencies", "vector",
+   Tk_Offset(FFTData, freqPtr), 0, 0, &fftVectorSwitch},
+  {BLT_SWITCH_END}
+};
+
+static int Blt_ExprIntFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, 
+			      int *valuePtr)
+{
+  // First try to extract the value as a simple integer.
+  if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, objPtr, valuePtr) == TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_OK;
+ 
+  // Otherwise try to parse it as an expression.
+  long lvalue;
+  if (Tcl_ExprLong(interp, Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &lvalue) == TCL_OK) {
+    *valuePtr = lvalue;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+static int Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, 
+				 double *valuePtr)
+{
+  // First try to extract the value as a double precision number.
+  if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, objPtr, valuePtr) == TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  // Interpret the empty string "" and "NaN" as NaN.
+  int length;
+  char *string;
+  string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length);
+  if (length == 0 || (length == 3 && strcmp(string, "NaN") == 0)) {
+    *valuePtr = NAN;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  // Then try to parse it as an expression.
+  if (Tcl_ExprDouble(interp, string, valuePtr) == TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+static int ObjToFFTVector(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			  const char *switchName, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+			  char *record, int offset, int flags)
+{
+  FFTData *dataPtr = (FFTData *)record;
+  Vector *vPtr;
+  Vector **vPtrPtr = (Vector **)(record + offset);
+  int isNew;			/* Not used. */
+  char *string;
+
+  string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+  vPtr = Vec_Create(dataPtr->dataPtr, string, string, string, &isNew);
+  if (vPtr == NULL) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  *vPtrPtr = vPtr;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ObjToIndex(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		      const char *switchName, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, char *record,
+		      int offset, int flags)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector*)clientData;
+  int *indexPtr = (int *)(record + offset);
+  int index;
+
+  if (Vec_GetIndex(interp, vPtr, Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &index, 
+		       INDEX_CHECK, (Blt_VectorIndexProc **)NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  *indexPtr = index;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Tcl_Obj* GetValues(Vector *vPtr, int first, int last)
+{ 
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  for (double *vp=vPtr->valueArr+first, *vend=vPtr->valueArr+last; 
+       vp <= vend; vp++)
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(vPtr->interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(*vp));
+
+  return listObjPtr;
+}
+
+static void ReplicateValue(Vector *vPtr, int first, int last, double value)
+{ 
+  for (double *vp=vPtr->valueArr+first, *vend=vPtr->valueArr+last; 
+       vp <= vend; vp++)
+    *vp = value; 
+
+  vPtr->notifyFlags |= UPDATE_RANGE; 
+}
+
+static int CopyList(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (Vec_SetLength(interp, vPtr, objc) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  for (int ii = 0; ii < objc; ii++) {
+    double value;
+    if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[ii], &value) != TCL_OK) {
+      Vec_SetLength(interp, vPtr, ii);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    vPtr->valueArr[ii] = value;
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int AppendVector(Vector *destPtr, Vector *srcPtr)
+{
+  size_t oldSize = destPtr->length;
+  size_t newSize = oldSize + srcPtr->last - srcPtr->first + 1;
+  if (Vec_ChangeLength(destPtr->interp, destPtr, newSize) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  size_t nBytes = (newSize - oldSize) * sizeof(double);
+  memcpy((char *)(destPtr->valueArr + oldSize),
+	 (srcPtr->valueArr + srcPtr->first), nBytes);
+  destPtr->notifyFlags |= UPDATE_RANGE;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int AppendList(Vector *vPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Tcl_Interp* interp = vPtr->interp;
+
+  int oldSize = vPtr->length;
+  if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, vPtr, vPtr->length + objc) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int count = oldSize;
+  for (int i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+    double value;
+    if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[i], &value) != TCL_OK) {
+      Vec_ChangeLength(interp, vPtr, count);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    vPtr->valueArr[count++] = value;
+  }
+  vPtr->notifyFlags |= UPDATE_RANGE;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+// Vector instance option commands
+
+static int AppendOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  for (int i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+    Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_ParseElement((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, vPtr->dataPtr, 
+				     Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), 
+				     (const char **)NULL, NS_SEARCH_BOTH);
+    int result;
+    if (v2Ptr != NULL)
+      result = AppendVector(vPtr, v2Ptr);
+    else {
+      int nElem;
+      Tcl_Obj **elemObjArr;
+
+      if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[i], &nElem, &elemObjArr) 
+	  != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      result = AppendList(vPtr, nElem, elemObjArr);
+    }
+
+    if (result != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (objc > 2) {
+    if (vPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ClearOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int DeleteOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  // FIXME: Don't delete vector with no indices
+  if (objc == 2) {
+    Vec_Free(vPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  // Allocate an "unset" bitmap the size of the vector
+  unsigned char* unsetArr = 
+    (unsigned char*)calloc(sizeof(unsigned char), (vPtr->length + 7) / 8);
+#define SetBit(i) (unsetArr[(i) >> 3] |= (1 << ((i) & 0x07)))
+#define GetBit(i) (unsetArr[(i) >> 3] &  (1 << ((i) & 0x07)))
+
+  for (int i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+    char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+    if (Vec_GetIndexRange(interp, vPtr, string, (INDEX_COLON | INDEX_CHECK),
+			  (Blt_VectorIndexProc **) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+      free(unsetArr);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    // Mark the range of elements for deletion
+    for (int j = vPtr->first; j <= vPtr->last; j++)
+      SetBit(j);		
+  }
+
+  int count = 0;
+  for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+    // Skip elements marked for deletion
+    if (GetBit(i))
+      continue;
+
+    if (count < i) {
+      vPtr->valueArr[count] = vPtr->valueArr[i];
+    }
+    count++;
+  }
+  free(unsetArr);
+  vPtr->length = count;
+
+  if (vPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int DupOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  for (int i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+    char* name = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+    int isNew;
+    Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_Create(vPtr->dataPtr, name, name, name, &isNew);
+    if (v2Ptr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (v2Ptr == vPtr)
+      continue;
+
+    if (Vec_Duplicate(v2Ptr, vPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (!isNew) {
+      if (v2Ptr->flush)
+	Vec_FlushCache(v2Ptr);
+      Vec_UpdateClients(v2Ptr);
+    }
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int FFTOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  FFTData data;
+  memset(&data, 0, sizeof(data));
+  data.delta = 1.0;
+
+  char* realVecName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  int isNew;
+  Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_Create(vPtr->dataPtr, realVecName, realVecName, 
+			     realVecName, &isNew);
+  if (v2Ptr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (v2Ptr == vPtr) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "real vector \"", realVecName, "\"", 
+		     " can't be the same as the source", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (ParseSwitches(interp, fftSwitches, objc - 3, objv + 3, &data, 
+		    BLT_SWITCH_DEFAULTS) < 0)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (Vec_FFT(interp, v2Ptr, data.imagPtr, data.freqPtr, data.delta,
+	      data.mask, vPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Update bookkeeping
+  if (!isNew) {
+    if (v2Ptr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(v2Ptr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(v2Ptr);
+  }
+
+  if (data.imagPtr != NULL) {
+    if (data.imagPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(data.imagPtr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(data.imagPtr);
+  }
+
+  if (data.freqPtr != NULL) {
+    if (data.freqPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(data.freqPtr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(data.freqPtr);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}	
+
+static int InverseFFTOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  char* name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  Vector *srcImagPtr;
+  if (Vec_LookupName(vPtr->dataPtr, name, &srcImagPtr) != TCL_OK )
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  name = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+  int isNew;
+  Vector* destRealPtr = Vec_Create(vPtr->dataPtr, name, name, name, &isNew);
+  name = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
+  Vector* destImagPtr = Vec_Create(vPtr->dataPtr, name, name, name, &isNew);
+
+  if (Vec_InverseFFT(interp, srcImagPtr, destRealPtr, destImagPtr, vPtr) 
+      != TCL_OK )
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (destRealPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(destRealPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(destRealPtr);
+
+  if (destImagPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(destImagPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(destImagPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int IndexOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  if (Vec_GetIndexRange(interp, vPtr, string, INDEX_ALL_FLAGS, 
+			(Blt_VectorIndexProc **) NULL) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int first = vPtr->first;
+  int last = vPtr->last;
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr;
+
+    if (first == vPtr->length) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get index \"", string, "\"",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;	/* Can't read from index "++end" */
+    }
+    listObjPtr = GetValues(vPtr, first, last);
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+  else {
+    // FIXME: huh? Why set values here?
+    if (first == SPECIAL_INDEX) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't set index \"", string, "\"",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      // Tried to set "min" or "max"
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    double value;
+    if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &value) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (first == vPtr->length) {
+      if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, vPtr, vPtr->length + 1) != TCL_OK) 
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    ReplicateValue(vPtr, first, last, value);
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[3]);
+    if (vPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int LengthOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    int nElem;
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &nElem) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (nElem < 0) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad vector size \"", 
+		       Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\"", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if ((Vec_SetSize(interp, vPtr, nElem) != TCL_OK) ||
+	(Vec_SetLength(interp, vPtr, nElem) != TCL_OK))
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (vPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+  }
+  Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), vPtr->length);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int MapOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc > 2) {
+    if (Vec_MapVariable(interp, vPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2])) 
+	!= TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (vPtr->arrayName != NULL)
+    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), vPtr->arrayName, -1);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int MaxOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Tcl_SetDoubleObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), Vec_Max(vPtr));
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int MergeOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  // Allocate an array of vector pointers of each vector to be
+  // merged in the current vector.
+  Vector** vecArr = (Vector**)malloc(sizeof(Vector *) * objc);
+  Vector** vPtrPtr = vecArr;
+
+  int refSize = -1;
+  int nElem = 0;
+  for (int i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+    Vector *v2Ptr;
+    if (Vec_LookupName(vPtr->dataPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), &v2Ptr)
+	!= TCL_OK) {
+      free(vecArr);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    // Check that all the vectors are the same length
+    int length = v2Ptr->last - v2Ptr->first + 1;
+    if (refSize < 0)
+      refSize = length;
+    else if (length != refSize) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(vPtr->interp, "vectors \"", vPtr->name,
+		       "\" and \"", v2Ptr->name, "\" differ in length",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      free(vecArr);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    *vPtrPtr++ = v2Ptr;
+    nElem += refSize;
+  }
+  *vPtrPtr = NULL;
+
+  double* valueArr = (double*)malloc(sizeof(double) * nElem);
+  if (valueArr == NULL) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(vPtr->interp, "not enough memory to allocate ", 
+		     Itoa(nElem), " vector elements", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  // Merge the values from each of the vectors into the current vector
+  double* valuePtr = valueArr;
+  for (int i = 0; i < refSize; i++) {
+    for (Vector** vpp = vecArr; *vpp != NULL; vpp++) {
+      *valuePtr++ = (*vpp)->valueArr[i + (*vpp)->first];
+    }
+  }
+  free(vecArr);
+  Vec_Reset(vPtr, valueArr, nElem, nElem, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int MinOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Tcl_SetDoubleObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), Vec_Min(vPtr));
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int NormalizeOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Vec_UpdateRange(vPtr);
+  double range = vPtr->max - vPtr->min;
+  if (objc > 2) {
+    char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+    int isNew;
+    Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_Create(vPtr->dataPtr, string, string, string, &isNew);
+    if (v2Ptr == NULL)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (Vec_SetLength(interp, v2Ptr, vPtr->length) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++)
+      v2Ptr->valueArr[i] = (vPtr->valueArr[i] - vPtr->min) / range;
+
+    Vec_UpdateRange(v2Ptr);
+    if (!isNew) {
+      if (v2Ptr->flush) {
+	Vec_FlushCache(v2Ptr);
+      }
+      Vec_UpdateClients(v2Ptr);
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+      double norm = (vPtr->valueArr[i] - vPtr->min) / range;
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			       Tcl_NewDoubleObj(norm));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int NotifyOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  enum optionIndices {
+    OPTION_ALWAYS, OPTION_NEVER, OPTION_WHENIDLE, 
+    OPTION_NOW, OPTION_CANCEL, OPTION_PENDING
+  };
+  static const char *optionArr[] = {
+    "always", "never", "whenidle", "now", "cancel", "pending", NULL
+  };
+
+  int option;
+  if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], optionArr, "qualifier", TCL_EXACT,
+			  &option) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  switch (option) {
+  case OPTION_ALWAYS:
+    vPtr->notifyFlags &= ~NOTIFY_WHEN_MASK;
+    vPtr->notifyFlags |= NOTIFY_ALWAYS;
+    break;
+  case OPTION_NEVER:
+    vPtr->notifyFlags &= ~NOTIFY_WHEN_MASK;
+    vPtr->notifyFlags |= NOTIFY_NEVER;
+    break;
+  case OPTION_WHENIDLE:
+    vPtr->notifyFlags &= ~NOTIFY_WHEN_MASK;
+    vPtr->notifyFlags |= NOTIFY_WHENIDLE;
+    break;
+  case OPTION_NOW:
+    // FIXME: How does this play when an update is pending?
+    Blt_Vec_NotifyClients(vPtr);
+    break;
+  case OPTION_CANCEL:
+    if (vPtr->notifyFlags & NOTIFY_PENDING) {
+      vPtr->notifyFlags &= ~NOTIFY_PENDING;
+      Tcl_CancelIdleCall(Blt_Vec_NotifyClients, (ClientData)vPtr);
+    }
+    break;
+  case OPTION_PENDING:
+    int boll = (vPtr->notifyFlags & NOTIFY_PENDING);
+    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), boll);
+    break;
+  }	
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int PopulateOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  int isNew;
+  Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_Create(vPtr->dataPtr, string, string, string, &isNew);
+  if (v2Ptr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Source vector is empty
+  if (vPtr->length == 0)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  int density;
+  if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &density) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (density < 1) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad density \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 
+		     "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  int size = (vPtr->length - 1) * (density + 1) + 1;
+  if (Vec_SetLength(interp, v2Ptr, size) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int count = 0;
+  double* valuePtr = v2Ptr->valueArr;
+  int i;
+  for (i = 0; i < (vPtr->length - 1); i++) {
+    double range = vPtr->valueArr[i + 1] - vPtr->valueArr[i];
+    double slice = range / (double)(density + 1);
+    for (int j = 0; j <= density; j++) {
+      *valuePtr = vPtr->valueArr[i] + (slice * (double)j);
+      valuePtr++;
+      count++;
+    }
+  }
+  count++;
+  *valuePtr = vPtr->valueArr[i];
+  if (!isNew) {
+    if (v2Ptr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(v2Ptr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(v2Ptr);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ValuesOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  PrintSwitches switches;
+  switches.formatObjPtr = NULL;
+  switches.from = 0;
+  switches.to = vPtr->length - 1;
+  indexSwitch.clientData = vPtr;
+  if (ParseSwitches(interp, printSwitches, objc - 2, objv + 2, &switches, 
+			BLT_SWITCH_DEFAULTS) < 0)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (switches.from > switches.to) {
+    // swap positions
+    int tmp = switches.to;
+    switches.to = switches.from;
+    switches.from = tmp;
+  }
+
+  if (switches.formatObjPtr == NULL) {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    for (int i = switches.from; i <= switches.to; i++)
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			       Tcl_NewDoubleObj(vPtr->valueArr[i]));
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_DString ds;
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
+    const char* fmt = Tcl_GetString(switches.formatObjPtr);
+    for (int i = switches.from; i <= switches.to; i++) {
+      char buffer[200];
+      sprintf(buffer, fmt, vPtr->valueArr[i]);
+      Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, buffer, -1);
+    }
+    Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &ds);
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+  }
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int RangeOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  int first;
+  int last;
+
+  if (objc == 2) {
+    first = 0;
+    last = vPtr->length - 1;
+  }
+  else if (objc == 4) {
+    if ((Vec_GetIndex(interp, vPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), &first, 
+		      INDEX_CHECK, (Blt_VectorIndexProc **) NULL) != TCL_OK) ||
+	(Vec_GetIndex(interp, vPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &last, 
+		      INDEX_CHECK, (Blt_VectorIndexProc **) NULL) != TCL_OK))
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
+		     Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " range ?first last?",
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  if (first > last) {
+    // Return the list reversed
+    for (int i=last; i<=first; i++)
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			       Tcl_NewDoubleObj(vPtr->valueArr[i]));
+  }
+  else {
+    for (int i=first; i<=last; i++)
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			       Tcl_NewDoubleObj(vPtr->valueArr[i]));
+  }
+
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int InRange(double value, double min, double max)
+{
+  double range = max - min;
+  if (range < DBL_EPSILON)
+    return (fabs(max - value) < DBL_EPSILON);
+
+  double norm = (value - min) / range;
+  return ((norm >= -DBL_EPSILON) && ((norm - 1.0) < DBL_EPSILON));
+}
+
+enum NativeFormats {
+  FMT_UNKNOWN = -1,
+  FMT_UCHAR, FMT_CHAR,
+  FMT_USHORT, FMT_SHORT,
+  FMT_UINT, FMT_INT,
+  FMT_ULONG, FMT_LONG,
+  FMT_FLOAT, FMT_DOUBLE
+};
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetBinaryFormat
+ *
+ *      Translates a format string into a native type.  Valid formats are
+ *
+ *		signed		i1, i2, i4, i8
+ *		unsigned 	u1, u2, u4, u8
+ *		real		r4, r8, r16
+ *
+ *	There must be a corresponding native type.  For example, this for
+ *	reading 2-byte binary integers from an instrument and converting them
+ *	to unsigned shorts or ints.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static enum NativeFormats GetBinaryFormat(Tcl_Interp* interp, char *string,
+					  int *sizePtr)
+{
+  char c = tolower(string[0]);
+  if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string + 1, sizePtr) != TCL_OK) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown binary format \"", string,
+		     "\": incorrect byte size", (char *)NULL);
+    return FMT_UNKNOWN;
+  }
+
+  switch (c) {
+  case 'r':
+    if (*sizePtr == sizeof(double))
+      return FMT_DOUBLE;
+    else if (*sizePtr == sizeof(float))
+      return FMT_FLOAT;
+
+    break;
+
+  case 'i':
+    if (*sizePtr == sizeof(char))
+      return FMT_CHAR;
+    else if (*sizePtr == sizeof(int))
+      return FMT_INT;
+    else if (*sizePtr == sizeof(long))
+      return FMT_LONG;
+    else if (*sizePtr == sizeof(short))
+      return FMT_SHORT;
+
+    break;
+
+  case 'u':
+    if (*sizePtr == sizeof(unsigned char))
+      return FMT_UCHAR;
+    else if (*sizePtr == sizeof(unsigned int))
+      return FMT_UINT;
+    else if (*sizePtr == sizeof(unsigned long))
+      return FMT_ULONG;
+    else if (*sizePtr == sizeof(unsigned short))
+      return FMT_USHORT;
+
+    break;
+
+  default:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown binary format \"", string,
+		     "\": should be either i#, r#, u# (where # is size in bytes)",
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    return FMT_UNKNOWN;
+  }
+  Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't handle format \"", string, "\"", 
+		   (char *)NULL);
+
+  return FMT_UNKNOWN;
+}
+
+static int CopyValues(Vector *vPtr, char *byteArr, enum NativeFormats fmt,
+		      int size, int length, int swap, int *indexPtr)
+{
+  if ((swap) && (size > 1)) {
+    int nBytes = size * length;
+    for (int i = 0; i < nBytes; i += size) {
+      unsigned char* p = (unsigned char *)(byteArr + i);
+      int left, right;
+      for (left = 0, right = size - 1; left < right; left++, right--) {
+	p[left] ^= p[right];
+	p[right] ^= p[left];
+	p[left] ^= p[right];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  int newSize = *indexPtr + length;
+  if (newSize > vPtr->length) {
+    if (Vec_ChangeLength(vPtr->interp, vPtr, newSize) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+#define CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, arr)			\
+  for (int i = 0, n = *indexPtr; i < length; i++, n++) {	\
+    (vPtr)->valueArr[n] = (double)(arr)[i];		\
+  }
+
+  switch (fmt) {
+  case FMT_CHAR:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (char *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_UCHAR:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (unsigned char *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_INT:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (int *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_UINT:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (unsigned int *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_LONG:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (long *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_ULONG:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (unsigned long *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_SHORT:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (short int *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_USHORT:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (unsigned short int *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_FLOAT:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (float *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_DOUBLE:
+    CopyArrayToVector(vPtr, (double *)byteArr);
+    break;
+
+  case FMT_UNKNOWN:
+    break;
+  }
+  *indexPtr += length;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * BinreadOp --
+ *
+ *	Reads binary values from a TCL channel. Values are either appended to
+ *	the end of the vector or placed at a given index (using the "-at"
+ *	option), overwriting existing values.  Data is read until EOF is found
+ *	on the channel or a specified number of values are read.  (note that
+ *	this is not necessarily the same as the number of bytes).
+ *
+ *	The following flags are supported:
+ *		-swap		Swap bytes
+ *		-at index	Start writing data at the index.
+ *		-format fmt	Specifies the format of the data.
+ *
+ *	This binary reader was created and graciously donated by Harald Kirsch
+ *	(kir@iitb.fhg.de).  Anything that's wrong is due to my (gah) munging
+ *	of the code.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a standard TCL result. The interpreter result will contain the
+ *	number of values (not the number of bytes) read.
+ *
+ * Caveats:
+ *	Channel reads must end on an element boundary.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int BinreadOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		     int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  enum NativeFormats fmt;
+
+  char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  int mode;
+  Tcl_Channel channel = Tcl_GetChannel(interp, string, &mode);
+  if (channel == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if ((mode & TCL_READABLE) == 0) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "channel \"", string,
+		     "\" wasn't opened for reading", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  int first = vPtr->length;
+  fmt = FMT_DOUBLE;
+  int size = sizeof(double);
+  int swap = 0;
+  int count = 0;
+
+  if (objc > 3) {
+    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+    if (string[0] != '-') {
+      long int value;
+      // Get the number of values to read.
+      if (Tcl_GetLongFromObj(interp, objv[3], &value) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+      if (value < 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "count can't be negative", (char *)NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      count = (size_t)value;
+      objc--, objv++;
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Process any option-value pairs that remain.
+  for (int i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+    if (strcmp(string, "-swap") == 0)
+      swap = 1;
+    else if (strcmp(string, "-format") == 0) {
+      i++;
+      if (i >= objc) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "missing arg after \"", string,
+			 "\"", (char *)NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+
+      string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+      fmt = GetBinaryFormat(interp, string, &size);
+      if (fmt == FMT_UNKNOWN)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else if (strcmp(string, "-at") == 0) {
+      i++;
+      if (i >= objc) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "missing arg after \"", string,
+			 "\"", (char *)NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+
+      string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+      if (Vec_GetIndex(interp, vPtr, string, &first, 0, 
+			   (Blt_VectorIndexProc **)NULL) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+      if (first > vPtr->length) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "index \"", string,
+			 "\" is out of range", (char *)NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+#define BUFFER_SIZE 1024
+  int arraySize = (count == 0) ? BUFFER_SIZE*size : count*size;
+
+  char* byteArr = (char*)malloc(arraySize);
+  // FIXME: restore old channel translation later?
+  if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, channel, "-translation","binary") != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int total = 0;
+  while (!Tcl_Eof(channel)) {
+    int bytesRead = Tcl_Read(channel, byteArr, arraySize);
+    if (bytesRead < 0) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading channel: ",
+		       Tcl_PosixError(interp), (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if ((bytesRead % size) != 0) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading channel: short read",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    int length = bytesRead / size;
+    if (CopyValues(vPtr, byteArr, fmt, size, length, swap, &first) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    total += length;
+    if (count > 0)
+      break;
+  }
+  free(byteArr);
+
+  if (vPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+
+  // Set the result as the number of values read
+  Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), total);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SearchOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  int wantValue = 0;
+  char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+  if ((string[0] == '-') && (strcmp(string, "-value") == 0)) {
+    wantValue = 1;
+    objv++, objc--;
+  }
+  double min;
+  if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &min) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  double max = min;
+  if (objc > 4) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: should be \"",
+		     Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " search ?-value? min ?max?", 
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if ((objc > 3) && (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &max) != TCL_OK))
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  // Bogus range. Don't bother looking
+  if ((min - max) >= DBL_EPSILON)
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+  if (wantValue) {
+    for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+      if (InRange(vPtr->valueArr[i], min, max))
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+				 Tcl_NewDoubleObj(vPtr->valueArr[i]));
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+      if (InRange(vPtr->valueArr[i], min, max))
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr,
+				 Tcl_NewIntObj(i + vPtr->offset));
+    }
+  }
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int OffsetOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (objc == 3) {
+    int newOffset;
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &newOffset) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    vPtr->offset = newOffset;
+  }
+  Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), vPtr->offset);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int RandomOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++)
+    vPtr->valueArr[i] = drand48();
+
+  if (vPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SeqOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  double start;
+  if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &start) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  double stop;
+  if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &stop) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int n = vPtr->length;
+  if ((objc > 4) && (Blt_ExprIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &n) != TCL_OK))
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (n > 1) {
+    if (Vec_SetLength(interp, vPtr, n) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    double step = (stop - start) / (double)(n - 1);
+    for (int i = 0; i < n; i++)
+      vPtr->valueArr[i] = start + (step * i);
+
+    if (vPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+
+    Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SetOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  int nElem;
+  Tcl_Obj **elemObjArr;
+
+  // The source can be either a list of numbers or another vector.
+
+  Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_ParseElement((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, vPtr->dataPtr, 
+				   Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL, 
+				   NS_SEARCH_BOTH);
+  int result;
+  if (v2Ptr != NULL) {
+    if (vPtr == v2Ptr) {
+      // Source and destination vectors are the same.  Copy the source
+      // first into a temporary vector to avoid memory overlaps.
+      Vector* tmpPtr = Vec_New(vPtr->dataPtr);
+      result = Vec_Duplicate(tmpPtr, v2Ptr);
+      if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	result = Vec_Duplicate(vPtr, tmpPtr);
+      }
+      Vec_Free(tmpPtr);
+    }
+    else
+      result = Vec_Duplicate(vPtr, v2Ptr);
+  }
+  else if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[2], &nElem, &elemObjArr) 
+	   == TCL_OK)
+    result = CopyList(vPtr, interp, nElem, elemObjArr);
+  else
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (result == TCL_OK) {
+    // The vector has changed; so flush the array indices (they're wrong
+    // now), find the new range of the data, and notify the vector's
+    //clients that it's been modified.
+    if (vPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+    Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+  }
+
+  return result;
+}
+
+static int SimplifyOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  double tolerance = 10.0;
+
+  int nPoints = vPtr->length / 2;
+  int* simple  = (int*)malloc(nPoints * sizeof(int));
+  Point2d* reduced = (Point2d*)malloc(nPoints * sizeof(Point2d));
+  Point2d* orig = (Point2d *)vPtr->valueArr;
+  int n = Blt_SimplifyLine(orig, 0, nPoints - 1, tolerance, simple);
+  for (int i = 0; i < n; i++)
+    reduced[i] = orig[simple[i]];
+
+  free(simple);
+  Vec_Reset(vPtr, (double *)reduced, n * 2, vPtr->length, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+  // The vector has changed; so flush the array indices (they're wrong
+  // now), find the new range of the data, and notify the vector's
+  // clients that it's been modified.
+  if (vPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int SplitOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  int nVectors = objc - 2;
+  if ((vPtr->length % nVectors) != 0) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't split vector \"", vPtr->name, 
+		     "\" into ", Itoa(nVectors), " even parts.", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if (nVectors > 0) {
+    int extra = vPtr->length / nVectors;
+    for (int i = 0; i < nVectors; i++) {
+      char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+2]);
+      int isNew;
+      Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_Create(vPtr->dataPtr, string, string, string, &isNew);
+      int oldSize = v2Ptr->length;
+      int newSize = oldSize + extra;
+      if (Vec_SetLength(interp, v2Ptr, newSize) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+      int j,k;
+      for (j = i, k = oldSize; j < vPtr->length; j += nVectors, k++)
+	v2Ptr->valueArr[k] = vPtr->valueArr[j];
+
+      Vec_UpdateClients(v2Ptr);
+      if (v2Ptr->flush) {
+	Vec_FlushCache(v2Ptr);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
+// Pointer to the array of values currently being sorted.
+static Vector **sortVectors;
+// Indicates the ordering of the sort. If non-zero, the vectors are sorted in
+// decreasing order
+static int sortDecreasing;
+static int nSortVectors;
+
+static int CompareVectors(void *a, void *b)
+{
+  int sign = (sortDecreasing) ? -1 : 1;
+  for (int i = 0; i < nSortVectors; i++) {
+    Vector* vPtr = sortVectors[i];
+    double delta = vPtr->valueArr[*(int *)a] - vPtr->valueArr[*(int *)b];
+    if (delta < 0.0)
+      return (-1 * sign);
+    else if (delta > 0.0)
+      return (1 * sign);
+  }
+
+  return 0;
+}
+
+size_t* Blt::Vec_SortMap(Vector **vectors, int nVectors)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = *vectors;
+  int length = vPtr->last - vPtr->first + 1;
+  size_t* map = (size_t*)malloc(sizeof(size_t) * length);
+  for (int i = vPtr->first; i <= vPtr->last; i++)
+    map[i] = i;
+
+  // Set global variables for sorting routine
+  sortVectors = vectors;
+  nSortVectors = nVectors;
+  qsort((char *)map, length, sizeof(size_t),(QSortCompareProc *)CompareVectors);
+
+  return map;
+}
+
+static size_t* SortVectors(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+
+  Vector** vectors = (Vector**)malloc(sizeof(Vector *) * (objc + 1));
+  vectors[0] = vPtr;
+  size_t* map = NULL;
+  for (int i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+    Vector* v2Ptr;
+    if (Vec_LookupName(vPtr->dataPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), 
+			   &v2Ptr) != TCL_OK)
+      goto error;
+
+    if (v2Ptr->length != vPtr->length) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "vector \"", v2Ptr->name,
+		       "\" is not the same size as \"", vPtr->name, "\"",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      goto error;
+    }
+    vectors[i + 1] = v2Ptr;
+  }
+  map = Vec_SortMap(vectors, objc + 1);
+
+ error:
+  free(vectors);
+
+  return map;
+}
+
+static int SortOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  sortDecreasing = 0;
+  SortSwitches switches;
+  switches.flags = 0;
+  int i = ParseSwitches(interp, sortSwitches, objc - 2, objv + 2, &switches, 
+			BLT_SWITCH_OBJV_PARTIAL);
+  if (i < 0)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  objc -= i, objv += i;
+  sortDecreasing = (switches.flags & SORT_DECREASING);
+
+  size_t *map = (objc > 2) ? SortVectors(vPtr, interp, objc - 2, objv + 2) :
+    Vec_SortMap(&vPtr, 1);
+
+  if (map == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  int sortLength = vPtr->length;
+
+  // Create an array to store a copy of the current values of the
+  // vector. We'll merge the values back into the vector based upon the
+  // indices found in the index array.
+  size_t nBytes = sizeof(double) * sortLength;
+  double* copy = (double*)malloc(nBytes);
+  memcpy((char *)copy, (char *)vPtr->valueArr, nBytes);
+  if (switches.flags & SORT_UNIQUE) {
+    int count =1;
+    for (int n = 1; n < sortLength; n++) {
+      size_t next = map[n];
+      size_t prev = map[n - 1];
+      if (copy[next] != copy[prev]) {
+	map[count] = next;
+	count++;
+      }
+    }
+    sortLength = count;
+    nBytes = sortLength * sizeof(double);
+  }
+
+  if (sortLength != vPtr->length)
+    Vec_SetLength(interp, vPtr, sortLength);
+
+  for (int n = 0; n < sortLength; n++)
+    vPtr->valueArr[n] = copy[map[n]];
+
+  if (vPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+
+  // Now sort any other vectors in the same fashion.  The vectors must be
+  // the same size as the map though
+  int result = TCL_ERROR;
+  for (int i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+    Vector *v2Ptr;
+    if (Vec_LookupName(vPtr->dataPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), &v2Ptr) != TCL_OK)
+      goto error;
+
+    if (sortLength != v2Ptr->length)
+      Vec_SetLength(interp, v2Ptr, sortLength);
+
+    memcpy((char *)copy, (char *)v2Ptr->valueArr, nBytes);
+    for (int n = 0; n < sortLength; n++)
+      v2Ptr->valueArr[n] = copy[map[n]];
+
+    Vec_UpdateClients(v2Ptr);
+    if (v2Ptr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(v2Ptr);
+  }
+  result = TCL_OK;
+
+ error:
+  free(copy);
+  free(map);
+
+  return result;
+}
+
+static int InstExprOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		      int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  if (Blt_ExprVector(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), (Blt_Vector *)vPtr) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (vPtr->flush)
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ArithOp(Vector *vPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		   int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  double value;
+  double scalar;
+
+  Vector* v2Ptr = Vec_ParseElement((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, vPtr->dataPtr, 
+				   Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL, 
+				   NS_SEARCH_BOTH);
+  if (v2Ptr != NULL) {
+    int length = v2Ptr->last - v2Ptr->first + 1;
+    if (length != vPtr->length) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "vectors \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), 
+		       "\" and \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
+		       "\" are not the same length", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    switch (string[0]) {
+    case '*':
+      for (int i = 0, j = v2Ptr->first; i < vPtr->length; i++, j++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] * v2Ptr->valueArr[j];
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case '/':
+      for (int i = 0, j = v2Ptr->first; i < vPtr->length; i++, j++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] / v2Ptr->valueArr[j];
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case '-':
+      for (int i = 0, j = v2Ptr->first; i < vPtr->length; i++, j++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] - v2Ptr->valueArr[j];
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case '+':
+      for (int i = 0, j = v2Ptr->first; i < vPtr->length; i++, j++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] + v2Ptr->valueArr[j];
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+
+  }
+  else if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &scalar) == TCL_OK) {
+    Tcl_Obj* listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **)NULL);
+    char* string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+    switch (string[0]) {
+    case '*':
+      for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] * scalar;
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case '/':
+      for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] / scalar;
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case '-':
+      for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] - scalar;
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+
+    case '+':
+      for (int i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[i] + scalar;
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+      }
+      break;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+  else
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Blt_OpSpec vectorInstOps[] =
+  {
+    {"*",         1, (void*)ArithOp,     3, 3, "item",},	/*Deprecated*/
+    {"+",         1, (void*)ArithOp,     3, 3, "item",},	/*Deprecated*/
+    {"-",         1, (void*)ArithOp,     3, 3, "item",},	/*Deprecated*/
+    {"/",         1, (void*)ArithOp,     3, 3, "item",},	/*Deprecated*/
+    {"append",    1, (void*)AppendOp,    3, 0, "items ?items...?",},
+    {"binread",   1, (void*)BinreadOp,   3, 0, "channel ?numValues? ?flags?",},
+    {"clear",     1, (void*)ClearOp,     2, 2, "",},
+    {"delete",    2, (void*)DeleteOp,    2, 0, "index ?index...?",},
+    {"dup",       2, (void*)DupOp,       3, 0, "vecName",},
+    {"expr",      1, (void*)InstExprOp,  3, 3, "expression",},
+    {"fft",	  1, (void*)FFTOp,	  3, 0, "vecName ?switches?",},
+    {"index",     3, (void*)IndexOp,     3, 4, "index ?value?",},
+    {"inversefft",3, (void*)InverseFFTOp,4, 4, "vecName vecName",},
+    {"length",    1, (void*)LengthOp,    2, 3, "?newSize?",},
+    {"max",       2, (void*)MaxOp,       2, 2, "",},
+    {"merge",     2, (void*)MergeOp,     3, 0, "vecName ?vecName...?",},
+    {"min",       2, (void*)MinOp,       2, 2, "",},
+    {"normalize", 3, (void*)NormalizeOp, 2, 3, "?vecName?",},	/*Deprecated*/
+    {"notify",    3, (void*)NotifyOp,    3, 3, "keyword",},
+    {"offset",    1, (void*)OffsetOp,    2, 3, "?offset?",},
+    {"populate",  1, (void*)PopulateOp,  4, 4, "vecName density",},
+    {"random",    4, (void*)RandomOp,    2, 2, "",},	/*Deprecated*/
+    {"range",     4, (void*)RangeOp,     2, 4, "first last",},
+    {"search",    3, (void*)SearchOp,    3, 5, "?-value? value ?value?",},
+    {"seq",       3, (void*)SeqOp,       4, 5, "begin end ?num?",},
+    {"set",       3, (void*)SetOp,       3, 3, "list",},
+    {"simplify",  2, (void*)SimplifyOp,  2, 2, },
+    {"sort",      2, (void*)SortOp,      2, 0, "?switches? ?vecName...?",},
+    {"split",     2, (void*)SplitOp,     2, 0, "?vecName...?",},
+    {"values",    3, (void*)ValuesOp,    2, 0, "?switches?",},
+    {"variable",  3, (void*)MapOp,       2, 3, "?varName?",},
+  };
+
+static int nInstOps = sizeof(vectorInstOps) / sizeof(Blt_OpSpec);
+
+int Blt::Vec_InstCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector*)clientData;
+  vPtr->first = 0;
+  vPtr->last = vPtr->length - 1;
+  VectorCmdProc *proc =
+    (VectorCmdProc*)GetOpFromObj(interp, nInstOps, vectorInstOps, 
+				 BLT_OP_ARG1, objc, objv, 0);
+  if (proc == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return (*proc) (vPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+#define MAX_ERR_MSG 1023
+static char message[MAX_ERR_MSG + 1];
+char* Blt::Vec_VarTrace(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+		       const char *part1, const char *part2, int flags)
+{
+  Blt_VectorIndexProc *indexProc;
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector*)clientData;
+
+  if (part2 == NULL) {
+    if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
+      free((void*)(vPtr->arrayName));
+      vPtr->arrayName = NULL;
+      if (vPtr->freeOnUnset)
+	Vec_Free(vPtr);
+    }
+
+    return NULL;
+  }
+
+  int first;
+  int last;
+  int varFlags;
+
+  if (Vec_GetIndexRange(interp, vPtr, part2, INDEX_ALL_FLAGS, &indexProc)
+      != TCL_OK)
+    goto error;
+
+  first = vPtr->first;
+  last = vPtr->last;
+  varFlags = TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG | (TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY & flags);
+  if (flags & TCL_TRACE_WRITES) {
+    // Tried to set "min" or "max"
+    if (first == SPECIAL_INDEX)
+      return (char *)"read-only index";
+
+    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, part1, part2, varFlags);
+    if (objPtr == NULL)
+      goto error;
+
+    double value;
+    if (Blt_ExprDoubleFromObj(interp, objPtr, &value) != TCL_OK) {
+      // Single numeric index. Reset the array element to
+      // its old value on errors
+      if ((last == first) && (first >= 0))
+	Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, part1, part2, objPtr, varFlags);
+      goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (first == vPtr->length) {
+      if (Vec_ChangeLength((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, vPtr, vPtr->length + 1)
+	  != TCL_OK)
+	return (char *)"error resizing vector";
+    }
+
+    // Set possibly an entire range of values
+    ReplicateValue(vPtr, first, last, value);
+  }
+  else if (flags & TCL_TRACE_READS) {
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+    if (vPtr->length == 0) {
+      if (Tcl_SetVar2(interp, part1, part2, "", varFlags) == NULL)
+	goto error;
+
+      return NULL;
+    }
+
+    if  (first == vPtr->length)
+      return (char *)"write-only index";
+
+    if (first == last) {
+      double value;
+      if (first >= 0)
+	value = vPtr->valueArr[first];
+      else {
+	vPtr->first = 0, vPtr->last = vPtr->length - 1;
+	value = (*indexProc) ((Blt_Vector *) vPtr);
+      }
+
+      objPtr = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value);
+      if (Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, part1, part2, objPtr, varFlags) == NULL) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
+	goto error;
+      }
+    }
+    else {
+      objPtr = GetValues(vPtr, first, last);
+      if (Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, part1, part2, objPtr, varFlags) == NULL)
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
+	goto error;
+    }
+  }
+  else if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
+    if ((first == vPtr->length) || (first == SPECIAL_INDEX))
+      return (char *)"special vector index";
+
+    // Collapse the vector from the point of the first unset element.
+    // Also flush any array variable entries so that the shift is
+    // reflected when the array variable is read.
+    for (int i = first, j = last + 1; j < vPtr->length; i++, j++)
+      vPtr->valueArr[i] = vPtr->valueArr[j];
+
+    vPtr->length -= ((last - first) + 1);
+    if (vPtr->flush)
+      Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+
+  }
+  else
+    return (char *)"unknown variable trace flag";
+
+  if (flags & (TCL_TRACE_UNSETS | TCL_TRACE_WRITES))
+    Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+
+  Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+  return NULL;
+
+ error: 
+  strncpy(message, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), MAX_ERR_MSG);
+  message[MAX_ERR_MSG] = '\0';
+  return message;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecInt.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecInt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc516a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecInt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1995-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+
+#include "tkbltChain.h"
+#include "tkbltVector.h"
+
+#define VECTOR_THREAD_KEY	"BLT Vector Data"
+#define VECTOR_MAGIC		((unsigned int) 0x46170277)
+
+/* These defines allow parsing of different types of indices */
+
+#define INDEX_SPECIAL	(1<<0)	/* Recognize "min", "max", and "++end" as
+				 * valid indices */
+#define INDEX_COLON	(1<<1)	/* Also recognize a range of indices separated
+				 * by a colon */
+#define INDEX_CHECK	(1<<2)	/* Verify that the specified index or range of
+				 * indices are within limits */
+#define INDEX_ALL_FLAGS    (INDEX_SPECIAL | INDEX_COLON | INDEX_CHECK)
+
+#define SPECIAL_INDEX		-2
+
+#define FFT_NO_CONSTANT		(1<<0)
+#define FFT_BARTLETT		(1<<1)
+#define FFT_SPECTRUM		(1<<2)
+
+#define NOTIFY_UPDATED		((int)BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_UPDATE)
+#define NOTIFY_DESTROYED	((int)BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_DESTROY)
+
+#define NOTIFY_NEVER		(1<<3)	/* Never notify clients of updates to
+					 * the vector */
+#define NOTIFY_ALWAYS		(1<<4)	/* Notify clients after each update
+					 * of the vector is made */
+#define NOTIFY_WHENIDLE		(1<<5)	/* Notify clients at the next idle point
+					 * that the vector has been updated. */
+
+#define NOTIFY_PENDING		(1<<6)	/* A do-when-idle notification of the
+					 * vector's clients is pending. */
+#define NOTIFY_NOW		(1<<7)	/* Notify clients of changes once
+					 * immediately */
+
+#define NOTIFY_WHEN_MASK	(NOTIFY_NEVER|NOTIFY_ALWAYS|NOTIFY_WHENIDLE)
+
+#define UPDATE_RANGE		(1<<9)	/* The data of the vector has changed.
+					 * Update the min and max limits when
+					 * they are needed */
+
+#define FindRange(array, first, last, min, max) \
+  {						\
+    min = max = 0.0;				\
+    if (first <= last) {			\
+      register int i;				\
+      min = max = array[first];			\
+      for (i = first + 1; i <= last; i++) {	\
+	if (min > array[i]) {			\
+	  min = array[i];			\
+	} else if (max < array[i]) {		\
+	  max = array[i];			\
+	}					\
+      }						\
+    }						\
+  }
+
+namespace Blt {
+
+  typedef struct {
+    double x;
+    double y;
+  } Point2d;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    Tcl_HashTable vectorTable;	/* Table of vectors */
+    Tcl_HashTable mathProcTable; /* Table of vector math functions */
+    Tcl_HashTable indexProcTable;
+    Tcl_Interp* interp;
+    unsigned int nextId;
+  } VectorInterpData;
+
+  typedef struct {
+    // If you change these fields, make sure you change the definition of
+    // Blt_Vector in blt.h too.
+    double *valueArr;		/* Array of values (malloc-ed) */
+    int length;			/* Current number of values in the array. */
+    int size;			/* Maximum number of values that can be stored
+				 * in the value array. */
+    double min, max;		/* Minimum and maximum values in the vector */
+    int dirty;			/* Indicates if the vector has been updated */
+    int reserved;
+
+    /* The following fields are local to this module  */
+
+    const char *name;		/* The namespace-qualified name of the vector.
+				 * It points to the hash key allocated for the
+				 * entry in the vector hash table. */
+    VectorInterpData *dataPtr;
+    Tcl_Interp* interp;		/* Interpreter associated with the vector */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* If non-NULL, pointer in a hash table to
+				 * track the vectors in use. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc;	/* Address of procedure to call to release
+				 * storage for the value array, Optionally can
+				 * be one of the following: TCL_STATIC,
+				 * TCL_DYNAMIC, or TCL_VOLATILE. */
+    const char *arrayName;	/* The name of the TCL array variable mapped
+				 * to the vector (malloc'ed). If NULL,
+				 * indicates that the vector isn't mapped to
+				 * any variable */
+    Tcl_Namespace *nsPtr;	/* Namespace context of the vector itself. */
+    int offset;			/* Offset from zero of the vector's starting
+				 * index */
+    Tcl_Command cmdToken;	/* Token for vector's TCL command. */
+    Chain* chain;		/* List of clients using this vector */
+    int notifyFlags;		/* Notification flags. See definitions
+				 * below */
+    int varFlags;		/* Indicate if the variable is global,
+				 * namespace, or local */
+    int freeOnUnset;		/* For backward compatibility only: If
+				 * non-zero, free the vector when its variable
+				 * is unset. */
+    int flush;
+    int first, last;		/* Selected region of vector. This is used
+				 * mostly for the math routines */
+  } Vector;
+
+  extern const char* Itoa(int value);
+  extern int  Vec_GetIndex(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr, 
+			   const char *string, int *indexPtr, int flags, 
+			   Blt_VectorIndexProc **procPtrPtr);
+  extern int  Vec_GetIndexRange(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr, 
+				const char *string, int flags,
+				Blt_VectorIndexProc **procPtrPtr);
+  extern Vector* Vec_ParseElement(Tcl_Interp* interp, VectorInterpData *dataPtr,
+				  const char *start, const char **endPtr, 
+				  int flags);
+  extern int Vec_SetLength(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr, int length);
+  extern int Vec_SetSize(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr, int size);
+  extern void Vec_FlushCache(Vector *vPtr);
+  extern void Vec_UpdateRange(Vector *vPtr);
+  extern void Vec_UpdateClients(Vector *vPtr);
+  extern void Vec_Free(Vector *vPtr);
+  extern Vector* Vec_New(VectorInterpData *dataPtr);
+  extern int Vec_MapVariable(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr, 
+			     const char *name);
+  extern int Vec_ChangeLength(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr, int length);
+  extern Vector* Vec_Create(VectorInterpData *dataPtr, const char *name,
+			    const char *cmdName, const char *varName, 
+			    int *newPtr);
+  extern int Vec_LookupName(VectorInterpData *dataPtr, const char *vecName,
+			    Vector **vPtrPtr);
+  extern VectorInterpData* Vec_GetInterpData (Tcl_Interp* interp);
+  extern int Vec_Reset(Vector *vPtr, double *dataArr, int nValues,
+		       int arraySize, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc);
+  extern int Vec_FFT(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *realPtr,
+		     Vector *phasesPtr, Vector *freqPtr, double delta, 
+		     int flags, Vector *srcPtr);
+  extern int Vec_InverseFFT(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *iSrcPtr, 
+				Vector *rDestPtr, Vector *iDestPtr,
+				Vector *srcPtr);
+  extern int Vec_Duplicate(Vector *destPtr, Vector *srcPtr);
+  extern size_t *Vec_SortMap(Vector **vectors, int nVectors);
+  extern double Vec_Max(Vector *vecObjPtr);
+  extern double Vec_Min(Vector *vecObjPtr);
+  extern int ExprVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, char *string, Blt_Vector *vector);
+  
+  extern Tcl_ObjCmdProc Vec_InstCmd;
+  extern Tcl_VarTraceProc Vec_VarTrace;
+  extern void Vec_InstallMathFunctions(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr);
+  extern void Vec_UninstallMathFunctions(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr);
+  extern void Vec_InstallSpecialIndices(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr);
+};
+
+extern Tcl_IdleProc Blt_Vec_NotifyClients;
+
+#ifdef _WIN32
+double drand48(void);
+void srand48(long int seed);
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecMath.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecMath.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03277d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecMath.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1612 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1995-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+#include "tkbltVecInt.h"
+#include "tkbltNsUtil.h"
+#include "tkbltParse.h"
+
+using namespace std;
+using namespace Blt;
+
+/*
+ * Three types of math functions:
+ *
+ *	ComponentProc		Function is applied in multiple calls to
+ *				each component of the vector.
+ *	VectorProc		Entire vector is passed, each component is
+ *				modified.
+ *	ScalarProc		Entire vector is passed, single scalar value
+ *				is returned.
+ */
+
+typedef double (ComponentProc)(double value);
+typedef int (VectorProc)(Vector *vPtr);
+typedef double (ScalarProc)(Vector *vPtr);
+
+/*
+ * Built-in math functions:
+ */
+typedef int (GenericMathProc) (void*, Tcl_Interp*, Vector*);
+
+/*
+ * MathFunction --
+ *
+ *	Contains information about math functions that can be called
+ *	for vectors.  The table of math functions is global within the
+ *	application.  So you can't define two different "sqrt"
+ *	functions.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  const char *name;		/* Name of built-in math function.  If
+				 * NULL, indicates that the function
+				 * was user-defined and dynamically
+				 * allocated.  Function names are
+				 * global across all interpreters. */
+
+  void *proc;			/* Procedure that implements this math
+				 * function. */
+
+  ClientData clientData;	/* Argument to pass when invoking the
+				 * function. */
+
+} MathFunction;
+
+/* The data structure below is used to describe an expression value,
+ * which can be either a double-precision floating-point value, or a
+ * string.  A given number has only one value at a time.  */
+
+#define STATIC_STRING_SPACE 150
+
+/*
+ * Tokens --
+ *
+ *	The token types are defined below.  In addition, there is a
+ *	table associating a precedence with each operator.  The order
+ *	of types is important.  Consult the code before changing it.
+ */
+enum Tokens {
+  VALUE, OPEN_PAREN, CLOSE_PAREN, COMMA, END, UNKNOWN,
+  MULT = 8, DIVIDE, MOD, PLUS, MINUS,
+  LEFT_SHIFT, RIGHT_SHIFT,
+  LESS, GREATER, LEQ, GEQ, EQUAL, NEQ,
+  OLD_BIT_AND, EXPONENT, OLD_BIT_OR, OLD_QUESTY, OLD_COLON,
+  AND, OR, UNARY_MINUS, OLD_UNARY_PLUS, NOT, OLD_BIT_NOT
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+  Vector *vPtr;
+  char staticSpace[STATIC_STRING_SPACE];
+  ParseValue pv;		/* Used to hold a string value, if any. */
+} Value;
+
+/*
+ * ParseInfo --
+ *
+ *	The data structure below describes the state of parsing an
+ *	expression.  It's passed among the routines in this module.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  const char *expr;		/* The entire right-hand side of the
+				 * expression, as originally passed to
+				 * Blt_ExprVector. */
+
+  const char *nextPtr;	/* Position of the next character to
+			 * be scanned from the expression
+			 * string. */
+
+  enum Tokens token;		/* Type of the last token to be parsed
+				 * from nextPtr.  See below for
+				 * definitions.  Corresponds to the
+				 * characters just before nextPtr. */
+
+} ParseInfo;
+
+/*
+ * Precedence table.  The values for non-operator token types are ignored.
+ */
+static int precTable[] =
+  {
+    0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+    12, 12, 12,			/* MULT, DIVIDE, MOD */
+    11, 11,			/* PLUS, MINUS */
+    10, 10,			/* LEFT_SHIFT, RIGHT_SHIFT */
+    9, 9, 9, 9,			/* LESS, GREATER, LEQ, GEQ */
+    8, 8,			/* EQUAL, NEQ */
+    7,				/* OLD_BIT_AND */
+    13,				/* EXPONENTIATION */
+    5,				/* OLD_BIT_OR */
+    4,				/* AND */
+    3,				/* OR */
+    2,				/* OLD_QUESTY */
+    1,				/* OLD_COLON */
+    14, 14, 14, 14		/* UNARY_MINUS, OLD_UNARY_PLUS, NOT,
+				 * OLD_BIT_NOT */
+  };
+
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations.
+ */
+
+static int NextValue(Tcl_Interp* interp, ParseInfo *piPtr, int prec, 
+		     Value *valuePtr);
+
+static int Sort(Vector *vPtr)
+{
+  size_t* map = Vec_SortMap(&vPtr, 1);
+  double* values = (double*)malloc(sizeof(double) * vPtr->length);
+  for(int ii = vPtr->first; ii <= vPtr->last; ii++)
+    values[ii] = vPtr->valueArr[map[ii]];
+
+  free(map);
+  for (int ii = vPtr->first; ii <= vPtr->last; ii++)
+    vPtr->valueArr[ii] = values[ii];
+
+  free(values);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static double Length(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  return (double)(vPtr->last - vPtr->first + 1);
+}
+
+double Blt_VecMax(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  return Vec_Max(vPtr);
+}
+
+double Blt_VecMin(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  return Vec_Min(vPtr);
+}
+
+int Blt_ExprVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, char *string, Blt_Vector *vector)
+{
+  return ExprVector(interp,string,vector);
+}
+
+static double Product(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double prod;
+  double *vp, *vend;
+
+  prod = 1.0;
+  for(vp = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->first,
+	vend = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->last; vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    prod *= *vp;
+  }
+  return prod;
+}
+
+static double Sum(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  // Kahan summation algorithm
+
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double* vp = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->first;
+  double sum = *vp++;
+  double c = 0.0;			/* A running compensation for lost
+				 * low-order bits.*/
+  for (double* vend = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->last; vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    double y = *vp - c;		/* So far, so good: c is zero.*/
+    double t = sum + y;		/* Alas, sum is big, y small, so
+				 * low-order digits of y are lost.*/
+    c = (t - sum) - y;	/* (t - sum) recovers the high-order
+			 * part of y; subtracting y recovers
+			 * -(low part of y) */
+    sum = t;
+  }
+
+  return sum;
+}
+
+static double Mean(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double sum = Sum(vectorPtr);
+  int n = vPtr->last - vPtr->first + 1;
+
+  return sum / (double)n;
+}
+
+// var = 1/N Sum( (x[i] - mean)^2 )
+static double Variance(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double mean = Mean(vectorPtr);
+  double var = 0.0;
+  int count = 0;
+  for(double *vp=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->first, *vend=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->last;
+      vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    double dx = *vp - mean;
+    var += dx * dx;
+    count++;
+  }
+
+  if (count < 2)
+    return 0.0;
+
+  var /= (double)(count - 1);
+  return var;
+}
+
+// skew = Sum( (x[i] - mean)^3 ) / (var^3/2)
+static double Skew(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double mean = Mean(vectorPtr);
+  double var = 0;
+  double skew = 0;
+  int count = 0;
+  for(double *vp=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->first, *vend=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->last;
+      vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    double diff = *vp - mean;
+    diff = fabs(diff);
+    double diffsq = diff * diff;
+    var += diffsq;
+    skew += diffsq * diff;
+    count++;
+  }
+
+  if (count < 2)
+    return 0.0;
+
+  var /= (double)(count - 1);
+  skew /= count * var * sqrt(var);
+  return skew;
+}
+
+static double StdDeviation(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  double var;
+
+  var = Variance(vectorPtr);
+  if (var > 0.0) {
+    return sqrt(var);
+  }
+  return 0.0;
+}
+
+static double AvgDeviation(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double mean = Mean(vectorPtr);
+  double avg = 0.0;
+  int count = 0;
+  for(double *vp=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->first, *vend=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->last;
+      vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    double diff = *vp - mean;
+    avg += fabs(diff);
+    count++;
+  }
+
+  if (count < 2)
+    return 0.0;
+
+  avg /= (double)count;
+  return avg;
+}
+
+static double Kurtosis(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double mean = Mean(vectorPtr);
+  double var = 0;
+  double kurt = 0;
+  int count = 0;
+  for(double *vp=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->first, *vend=vPtr->valueArr+vPtr->last;
+      vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    double diff = *vp - mean;
+    double diffsq = diff * diff;
+    var += diffsq;
+    kurt += diffsq * diffsq;
+    count++;
+  }
+
+  if (count < 2)
+    return 0.0;
+
+  var /= (double)(count - 1);
+
+  if (var == 0.0)
+    return 0.0;
+
+  kurt /= (count * var * var);
+  return kurt - 3.0;		/* Fisher Kurtosis */
+}
+
+static double Median(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  size_t *map;
+  double q2;
+  int mid;
+
+  if (vPtr->length == 0) {
+    return -DBL_MAX;
+  }
+  map = Vec_SortMap(&vPtr, 1);
+  mid = (vPtr->length - 1) / 2;
+
+  /*  
+   * Determine Q2 by checking if the number of elements [0..n-1] is
+   * odd or even.  If even, we must take the average of the two
+   * middle values.  
+   */
+  if (vPtr->length & 1) { /* Odd */
+    q2 = vPtr->valueArr[map[mid]];
+  } else {			/* Even */
+    q2 = (vPtr->valueArr[map[mid]] + 
+	  vPtr->valueArr[map[mid + 1]]) * 0.5;
+  }
+  free(map);
+  return q2;
+}
+
+static double Q1(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double q1;
+  size_t *map;
+
+  if (vPtr->length == 0) {
+    return -DBL_MAX;
+  } 
+  map = Vec_SortMap(&vPtr, 1);
+
+  if (vPtr->length < 4) {
+    q1 = vPtr->valueArr[map[0]];
+  } else {
+    int mid, q;
+
+    mid = (vPtr->length - 1) / 2;
+    q = mid / 2;
+
+    /* 
+     * Determine Q1 by checking if the number of elements in the
+     * bottom half [0..mid) is odd or even.   If even, we must
+     * take the average of the two middle values.
+     */
+    if (mid & 1) {		/* Odd */
+      q1 = vPtr->valueArr[map[q]]; 
+    } else {		/* Even */
+      q1 = (vPtr->valueArr[map[q]] + 
+	    vPtr->valueArr[map[q + 1]]) * 0.5; 
+    }
+  }
+  free(map);
+  return q1;
+}
+
+static double Q3(Blt_Vector *vectorPtr)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vectorPtr;
+  double q3;
+  size_t *map;
+
+  if (vPtr->length == 0) {
+    return -DBL_MAX;
+  } 
+
+  map = Vec_SortMap(&vPtr, 1);
+
+  if (vPtr->length < 4) {
+    q3 = vPtr->valueArr[map[vPtr->length - 1]];
+  } else {
+    int mid, q;
+
+    mid = (vPtr->length - 1) / 2;
+    q = (vPtr->length + mid) / 2;
+
+    /* 
+     * Determine Q3 by checking if the number of elements in the
+     * upper half (mid..n-1] is odd or even.   If even, we must
+     * take the average of the two middle values.
+     */
+    if (mid & 1) {		/* Odd */
+      q3 = vPtr->valueArr[map[q]];
+    } else {		/* Even */
+      q3 = (vPtr->valueArr[map[q]] + 
+	    vPtr->valueArr[map[q + 1]]) * 0.5; 
+    }
+  }
+  free(map);
+  return q3;
+}
+
+static int Norm(Blt_Vector *vector)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vector;
+  double norm, range, min, max;
+  int i;
+
+  min = Vec_Min(vPtr);
+  max = Vec_Max(vPtr);
+  range = max - min;
+  for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+    norm = (vPtr->valueArr[i] - min) / range;
+    vPtr->valueArr[i] = norm;
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static double Nonzeros(Blt_Vector *vector)
+{
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vector;
+  int count;
+  double *vp, *vend;
+
+  count = 0;
+  for(vp = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->first, vend = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->last; vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    if (*vp == 0.0)
+      count++;
+  }
+  return (double) count;
+}
+
+static double Fabs(double value)
+{
+  if (value < 0.0)
+    return -value;
+  return value;
+}
+
+static double Round(double value)
+{
+  if (value < 0.0)
+    return ceil(value - 0.5);
+  else
+    return floor(value + 0.5);
+}
+
+static double Fmod(double x, double y)
+{
+  if (y == 0.0)
+    return 0.0;
+  return x - (floor(x / y) * y);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MathError --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called when an error occurs during a
+ *	floating-point operation.  It reads errno and sets
+ *	interp->result accordingly.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Interp->result is set to hold an error message.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static void MathError(Tcl_Interp* interp, double value)
+{
+  if ((errno == EDOM) || (value != value)) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "domain error: argument not in valid range",
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "ARITH", "DOMAIN", 
+		     Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), (char *)NULL);
+  }
+  else if ((errno == ERANGE) || isinf(value)) {
+    if (value == 0.0) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
+		       "floating-point value too small to represent",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "ARITH", "UNDERFLOW", 
+		       Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    else {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
+		       "floating-point value too large to represent",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "ARITH", "OVERFLOW", 
+		       Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), (char *)NULL);
+    }
+  }
+  else {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown floating-point error, ",
+		     "errno = ", Itoa(errno), (char *)NULL);
+    Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "ARITH", "UNKNOWN", 
+		     Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), (char *)NULL);
+  }
+}
+
+static int ParseString(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string, Value *valuePtr)
+{
+  const char *endPtr;
+  double value;
+
+  errno = 0;
+
+  /*   
+   * The string can be either a number or a vector.  First try to
+   * convert the string to a number.  If that fails then see if
+   * we can find a vector by that name.
+   */
+
+  value = strtod(string, (char **)&endPtr);
+  if ((endPtr != string) && (*endPtr == '\0')) {
+    if (errno != 0) {
+      Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+      MathError(interp, value);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    /* Numbers are stored as single element vectors. */
+    if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, valuePtr->vPtr, 1) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    valuePtr->vPtr->valueArr[0] = value;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } else {
+    Vector *vPtr;
+
+    while (isspace((unsigned char)(*string))) {
+      string++;		/* Skip spaces leading the vector name. */    
+    }
+    vPtr = Vec_ParseElement(interp, valuePtr->vPtr->dataPtr, 
+				string, &endPtr, NS_SEARCH_BOTH);
+    if (vPtr == NULL) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (*endPtr != '\0') {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "extra characters after vector", 
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    /* Copy the designated vector to our temporary. */
+    Vec_Duplicate(valuePtr->vPtr, vPtr);
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ParseMathFunction(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *start,
+			     ParseInfo *piPtr, Value *valuePtr)
+{
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+  MathFunction *mathPtr;	/* Info about math function. */
+  char *p;
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;	/* Interpreter-specific data. */
+  GenericMathProc *proc;
+
+  /*
+   * Find the end of the math function's name and lookup the
+   * record for the function.
+   */
+  p = (char *)start;
+  while (isspace((unsigned char)(*p))) {
+    p++;
+  }
+  piPtr->nextPtr = p;
+  while (isalnum((unsigned char)(*p)) || (*p == '_')) {
+    p++;
+  }
+  if (*p != '(') {
+    return TCL_RETURN;	/* Must start with open parenthesis */
+  }
+  dataPtr = valuePtr->vPtr->dataPtr;
+  *p = '\0';
+  hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dataPtr->mathProcTable, piPtr->nextPtr);
+  *p = '(';
+  if (hPtr == NULL) {
+    return TCL_RETURN;	/* Name doesn't match any known function */
+  }
+  /* Pick up the single value as the argument to the function */
+  piPtr->token = OPEN_PAREN;
+  piPtr->nextPtr = p + 1;
+  valuePtr->pv.next = valuePtr->pv.buffer;
+  if (NextValue(interp, piPtr, -1, valuePtr) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;	/* Parse error */
+  }
+  if (piPtr->token != CLOSE_PAREN) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unmatched parentheses in expression \"",
+		     piPtr->expr, "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;	/* Missing right parenthesis */
+  }
+  mathPtr = (MathFunction*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+  proc = (GenericMathProc*)mathPtr->proc;
+  if ((*proc) (mathPtr->clientData, interp, valuePtr->vPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;	/* Function invocation error */
+  }
+  piPtr->token = VALUE;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int NextToken(Tcl_Interp* interp, ParseInfo *piPtr, Value *valuePtr)
+{
+  const char *p;
+  const char *endPtr;
+  const char *var;
+  int result;
+
+  p = piPtr->nextPtr;
+  while (isspace((unsigned char)(*p))) {
+    p++;
+  }
+  if (*p == '\0') {
+    piPtr->token = END;
+    piPtr->nextPtr = p;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  /*
+   * Try to parse the token as a floating-point number. But check
+   * that the first character isn't a "-" or "+", which "strtod"
+   * will happily accept as an unary operator.  Otherwise, we might
+   * accidently treat a binary operator as unary by mistake, which
+   * will eventually cause a syntax error.
+   */
+  if ((*p != '-') && (*p != '+')) {
+    double value;
+
+    errno = 0;
+    value = strtod(p, (char **)&endPtr);
+    if (endPtr != p) {
+      if (errno != 0) {
+	MathError(interp, value);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      piPtr->token = VALUE;
+      piPtr->nextPtr = endPtr;
+
+      /*
+       * Save the single floating-point value as an 1-component vector.
+       */
+      if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, valuePtr->vPtr, 1) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      valuePtr->vPtr->valueArr[0] = value;
+      return TCL_OK;
+    }
+  }
+  piPtr->nextPtr = p + 1;
+  switch (*p) {
+  case '$':
+    piPtr->token = VALUE;
+    var = Tcl_ParseVar(interp, p, &endPtr);
+    if (var == NULL) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    piPtr->nextPtr = endPtr;
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    result = ParseString(interp, var, valuePtr);
+    return result;
+
+  case '[':
+    piPtr->token = VALUE;
+    result = ParseNestedCmd(interp, p + 1, 0, &endPtr, &valuePtr->pv);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+      return result;
+    }
+    piPtr->nextPtr = endPtr;
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    result = ParseString(interp, valuePtr->pv.buffer, valuePtr);
+    return result;
+
+  case '"':
+    piPtr->token = VALUE;
+    result = ParseQuotes(interp, p + 1, '"', 0, &endPtr, &valuePtr->pv);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+      return result;
+    }
+    piPtr->nextPtr = endPtr;
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    result = ParseString(interp, valuePtr->pv.buffer, valuePtr);
+    return result;
+
+  case '{':
+    piPtr->token = VALUE;
+    result = ParseBraces(interp, p + 1, &endPtr, &valuePtr->pv);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+      return result;
+    }
+    piPtr->nextPtr = endPtr;
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    result = ParseString(interp, valuePtr->pv.buffer, valuePtr);
+    return result;
+
+  case '(':
+    piPtr->token = OPEN_PAREN;
+    break;
+
+  case ')':
+    piPtr->token = CLOSE_PAREN;
+    break;
+
+  case ',':
+    piPtr->token = COMMA;
+    break;
+
+  case '*':
+    piPtr->token = MULT;
+    break;
+
+  case '/':
+    piPtr->token = DIVIDE;
+    break;
+
+  case '%':
+    piPtr->token = MOD;
+    break;
+
+  case '+':
+    piPtr->token = PLUS;
+    break;
+
+  case '-':
+    piPtr->token = MINUS;
+    break;
+
+  case '^':
+    piPtr->token = EXPONENT;
+    break;
+
+  case '<':
+    switch (*(p + 1)) {
+    case '<':
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = LEFT_SHIFT;
+      break;
+    case '=':
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = LEQ;
+      break;
+    default:
+      piPtr->token = LESS;
+      break;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case '>':
+    switch (*(p + 1)) {
+    case '>':
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = RIGHT_SHIFT;
+      break;
+    case '=':
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = GEQ;
+      break;
+    default:
+      piPtr->token = GREATER;
+      break;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case '=':
+    if (*(p + 1) == '=') {
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = EQUAL;
+    } else {
+      piPtr->token = UNKNOWN;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case '&':
+    if (*(p + 1) == '&') {
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = AND;
+    } else {
+      piPtr->token = UNKNOWN;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case '|':
+    if (*(p + 1) == '|') {
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = OR;
+    } else {
+      piPtr->token = UNKNOWN;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case '!':
+    if (*(p + 1) == '=') {
+      piPtr->nextPtr = p + 2;
+      piPtr->token = NEQ;
+    } else {
+      piPtr->token = NOT;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  default:
+    piPtr->token = VALUE;
+    result = ParseMathFunction(interp, p, piPtr, valuePtr);
+    if ((result == TCL_OK) || (result == TCL_ERROR)) {
+      return result;
+    } else {
+      Vector *vPtr;
+
+      while (isspace((unsigned char)(*p))) {
+	p++;		/* Skip spaces leading the vector name. */    
+      }
+      vPtr = Vec_ParseElement(interp, valuePtr->vPtr->dataPtr, 
+				  p, &endPtr, NS_SEARCH_BOTH);
+      if (vPtr == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      Vec_Duplicate(valuePtr->vPtr, vPtr);
+      piPtr->nextPtr = endPtr;
+    }
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int NextValue(Tcl_Interp* interp, ParseInfo *piPtr,
+		     int prec, Value *valuePtr)
+{
+  Value value2;		/* Second operand for current operator.  */
+  int oper;		/* Current operator (either unary or binary). */
+  int gotOp;			/* Non-zero means already lexed the operator
+				 * (while picking up value for unary operator).
+				 * Don't lex again. */
+  int result;
+  Vector *vPtr, *v2Ptr;
+  int i;
+
+  /*
+   * There are two phases to this procedure.  First, pick off an initial
+   * value.  Then, parse (binary operator, value) pairs until done.
+   */
+
+  vPtr = valuePtr->vPtr;
+  v2Ptr = Vec_New(vPtr->dataPtr);
+  gotOp = 0;
+  value2.vPtr = v2Ptr;
+  value2.pv.buffer = value2.pv.next = value2.staticSpace;
+  value2.pv.end = value2.pv.buffer + STATIC_STRING_SPACE - 1;
+  value2.pv.expandProc = ExpandParseValue;
+  value2.pv.clientData = NULL;
+
+  result = NextToken(interp, piPtr, valuePtr);
+  if (result != TCL_OK) {
+    goto done;
+  }
+  if (piPtr->token == OPEN_PAREN) {
+
+    /* Parenthesized sub-expression. */
+
+    result = NextValue(interp, piPtr, -1, valuePtr);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+      goto done;
+    }
+    if (piPtr->token != CLOSE_PAREN) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unmatched parentheses in expression \"",
+		       piPtr->expr, "\"", (char *)NULL);
+      result = TCL_ERROR;
+      goto done;
+    }
+  } else {
+    if (piPtr->token == MINUS) {
+      piPtr->token = UNARY_MINUS;
+    }
+    if (piPtr->token >= UNARY_MINUS) {
+      oper = piPtr->token;
+      result = NextValue(interp, piPtr, precTable[oper], valuePtr);
+      if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	goto done;
+      }
+      gotOp = 1;
+      /* Process unary operators. */
+      switch (oper) {
+      case UNARY_MINUS:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  vPtr->valueArr[i] = -(vPtr->valueArr[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case NOT:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  vPtr->valueArr[i] = (double)(!vPtr->valueArr[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+      default:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown operator", (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+    } else if (piPtr->token != VALUE) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "missing operand", (char *)NULL);
+      goto error;
+    }
+  }
+  if (!gotOp) {
+    result = NextToken(interp, piPtr, &value2);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+      goto done;
+    }
+  }
+  /*
+   * Got the first operand.  Now fetch (operator, operand) pairs.
+   */
+  for (;;) {
+    oper = piPtr->token;
+
+    value2.pv.next = value2.pv.buffer;
+    if ((oper < MULT) || (oper >= UNARY_MINUS)) {
+      if ((oper == END) || (oper == CLOSE_PAREN) || 
+	  (oper == COMMA)) {
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	goto done;
+      } else {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad operator", (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+    }
+    if (precTable[oper] <= prec) {
+      result = TCL_OK;
+      goto done;
+    }
+    result = NextValue(interp, piPtr, precTable[oper], &value2);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+      goto done;
+    }
+    if ((piPtr->token < MULT) && (piPtr->token != VALUE) &&
+	(piPtr->token != END) && (piPtr->token != CLOSE_PAREN) &&
+	(piPtr->token != COMMA)) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unexpected token in expression",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      goto error;
+    }
+    /*
+     * At this point we have two vectors and an operator.
+     */
+
+    if (v2Ptr->length == 1) {
+      double *opnd;
+      double scalar;
+
+      /*
+       * 2nd operand is a scalar.
+       */
+      scalar = v2Ptr->valueArr[0];
+      opnd = vPtr->valueArr;
+      switch (oper) {
+      case MULT:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] *= scalar;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case DIVIDE:
+	if (scalar == 0.0) {
+	  Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "divide by zero", (char *)NULL);
+	  goto error;
+	}
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] /= scalar;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case PLUS:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] += scalar;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case MINUS:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] -= scalar;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case EXPONENT:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = pow(opnd[i], scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case MOD:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = Fmod(opnd[i], scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LESS:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] < scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case GREATER:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] > scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LEQ:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] <= scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case GEQ:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] >= scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case EQUAL:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] == scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case NEQ:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] != scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case AND:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] && scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case OR:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] || scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LEFT_SHIFT:
+	{
+	  int offset;
+
+	  offset = (int)scalar % vPtr->length;
+	  if (offset > 0) {
+	    double *hold;
+	    int j;
+
+	    hold = (double*)malloc(sizeof(double) * offset);
+	    for (i = 0; i < offset; i++) {
+	      hold[i] = opnd[i];
+	    }
+	    for (i = offset, j = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++, j++) {
+	      opnd[j] = opnd[i];
+	    }
+	    for (i = 0, j = vPtr->length - offset;
+		 j < vPtr->length; i++, j++) {
+	      opnd[j] = hold[i];
+	    }
+	    free(hold);
+	  }
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case RIGHT_SHIFT:
+	{
+	  int offset;
+
+	  offset = (int)scalar % vPtr->length;
+	  if (offset > 0) {
+	    double *hold;
+	    int j;
+			
+	    hold = (double*)malloc(sizeof(double) * offset);
+	    for (i = vPtr->length - offset, j = 0; 
+		 i < vPtr->length; i++, j++) {
+	      hold[j] = opnd[i];
+	    }
+	    for (i = vPtr->length - offset - 1, 
+		   j = vPtr->length - 1; i >= 0; i--, j--) {
+	      opnd[j] = opnd[i];
+	    }
+	    for (i = 0; i < offset; i++) {
+	      opnd[i] = hold[i];
+	    }
+	    free(hold);
+	  }
+	}
+	break;
+
+      default:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown operator in expression",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+
+    } else if (vPtr->length == 1) {
+      double *opnd;
+      double scalar;
+
+      /*
+       * 1st operand is a scalar.
+       */
+      scalar = vPtr->valueArr[0];
+      Vec_Duplicate(vPtr, v2Ptr);
+      opnd = vPtr->valueArr;
+      switch (oper) {
+      case MULT:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] *= scalar;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case PLUS:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] += scalar;
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case DIVIDE:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  if (opnd[i] == 0.0) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "divide by zero",
+			     (char *)NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	  }
+	  opnd[i] = (scalar / opnd[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case MINUS:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = scalar - opnd[i];
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case EXPONENT:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = pow(scalar, opnd[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case MOD:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = Fmod(scalar, opnd[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LESS:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(scalar < opnd[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case GREATER:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(scalar > opnd[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LEQ:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(scalar >= opnd[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case GEQ:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(scalar <= opnd[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case EQUAL:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] == scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case NEQ:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] != scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case AND:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] && scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case OR:
+	for(i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd[i] = (double)(opnd[i] || scalar);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LEFT_SHIFT:
+      case RIGHT_SHIFT:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "second shift operand must be scalar",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+
+      default:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown operator in expression",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+    } else {
+      double *opnd1, *opnd2;
+      /*
+       * Carry out the function of the specified operator.
+       */
+      if (vPtr->length != v2Ptr->length) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "vectors are different lengths",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+      opnd1 = vPtr->valueArr, opnd2 = v2Ptr->valueArr;
+      switch (oper) {
+      case MULT:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] *= opnd2[i];
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case DIVIDE:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  if (opnd2[i] == 0.0) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			     "can't divide by 0.0 vector component",
+			     (char *)NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	  }
+	  opnd1[i] /= opnd2[i];
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case PLUS:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] += opnd2[i];
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case MINUS:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] -= opnd2[i];
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case MOD:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = Fmod(opnd1[i], opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case EXPONENT:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = pow(opnd1[i], opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LESS:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] < opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case GREATER:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] > opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LEQ:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] <= opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case GEQ:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] >= opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case EQUAL:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] == opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case NEQ:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] != opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case AND:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] && opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case OR:
+	for (i = 0; i < vPtr->length; i++) {
+	  opnd1[i] = (double)(opnd1[i] || opnd2[i]);
+	}
+	break;
+
+      case LEFT_SHIFT:
+      case RIGHT_SHIFT:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "second shift operand must be scalar",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+
+      default:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown operator in expression",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+ done:
+  if (value2.pv.buffer != value2.staticSpace) {
+    free(value2.pv.buffer);
+  }
+  Vec_Free(v2Ptr);
+  return result;
+
+ error:
+  if (value2.pv.buffer != value2.staticSpace) {
+    free(value2.pv.buffer);
+  }
+  Vec_Free(v2Ptr);
+  return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+static int EvaluateExpression(Tcl_Interp* interp, char *string,
+			      Value *valuePtr)
+{
+  ParseInfo info;
+  int result;
+  Vector *vPtr;
+  double *vp, *vend;
+
+  info.expr = info.nextPtr = string;
+  valuePtr->pv.buffer = valuePtr->pv.next = valuePtr->staticSpace;
+  valuePtr->pv.end = valuePtr->pv.buffer + STATIC_STRING_SPACE - 1;
+  valuePtr->pv.expandProc = ExpandParseValue;
+  valuePtr->pv.clientData = NULL;
+
+  result = NextValue(interp, &info, -1, valuePtr);
+  if (result != TCL_OK) {
+    return result;
+  }
+  if (info.token != END) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ": syntax error in expression \"",
+		     string, "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  vPtr = valuePtr->vPtr;
+
+  /* Check for NaN's and overflows. */
+  for (vp = vPtr->valueArr, vend = vp + vPtr->length; vp < vend; vp++) {
+    if (!isfinite(*vp)) {
+      /*
+       * IEEE floating-point error.
+       */
+      MathError(interp, *vp);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ComponentFunc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			 Vector *vPtr)
+{
+  ComponentProc *procPtr = (ComponentProc *) clientData;
+  double *vp, *vend;
+
+  errno = 0;
+  for(vp = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->first, 
+	vend = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->last; vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    *vp = (*procPtr) (*vp);
+    if (errno != 0) {
+      MathError(interp, *vp);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!isfinite(*vp)) {
+      /*
+       * IEEE floating-point error.
+       */
+      MathError(interp, *vp);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int ScalarFunc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr)
+{
+  double value;
+  ScalarProc *procPtr = (ScalarProc *) clientData;
+
+  errno = 0;
+  value = (*procPtr) (vPtr);
+  if (errno != 0) {
+    MathError(interp, value);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, vPtr, 1) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  vPtr->valueArr[0] = value;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int VectorFunc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector *vPtr)
+{
+  VectorProc *procPtr = (VectorProc *) clientData;
+
+  return (*procPtr) (vPtr);
+}
+
+
+static MathFunction mathFunctions[] =
+  {
+    {"abs",     (void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)Fabs},
+    {"acos",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))acos},
+    {"asin",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))asin},
+    {"atan",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))atan},
+    {"adev",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)AvgDeviation},
+    {"ceil",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))ceil},
+    {"cos",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))cos},
+    {"cosh",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))cosh},
+    {"exp",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))exp},
+    {"floor",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))floor},
+    {"kurtosis",(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Kurtosis},
+    {"length",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Length},
+    {"log",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))log},
+    {"log10",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))log10},
+    {"max",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Blt_VecMax},
+    {"mean",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Mean},
+    {"median",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Median},
+    {"min",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Blt_VecMin},
+    {"norm",	(void*)VectorFunc,    (ClientData)Norm},
+    {"nz",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Nonzeros},
+    {"q1",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Q1},
+    {"q3",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Q3},
+    {"prod",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Product},
+    {"random",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)drand48},
+    {"round",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)Round},
+    {"sdev",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)StdDeviation},
+    {"sin",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))sin},
+    {"sinh",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))sinh},
+    {"skew",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Skew},
+    {"sort",	(void*)VectorFunc,    (ClientData)Sort},
+    {"sqrt",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))sqrt},
+    {"sum",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Sum},
+    {"tan",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))tan},
+    {"tanh",	(void*)ComponentFunc, (ClientData)(double (*)(double))tanh},
+    {"var",	(void*)ScalarFunc,    (ClientData)Variance},
+    {(char *)NULL,},
+  };
+
+void Blt::Vec_InstallMathFunctions(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr)
+{
+  MathFunction *mathPtr;
+
+  for (mathPtr = mathFunctions; mathPtr->name != NULL; mathPtr++) {
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    int isNew;
+
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(tablePtr, mathPtr->name, &isNew);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, (ClientData)mathPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+void Blt::Vec_UninstallMathFunctions(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr)
+{
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+
+  for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(tablePtr, &cursor); hPtr != NULL; 
+       hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    MathFunction *mathPtr = (MathFunction*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    if (mathPtr->name == NULL)
+      free(mathPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+static void InstallIndexProc(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr, const char *string,
+			     Blt_VectorIndexProc *procPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+  int dummy;
+
+  hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(tablePtr, string, &dummy);
+  if (procPtr == NULL)
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+  else
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, (ClientData)procPtr);
+}
+
+void Blt::Vec_InstallSpecialIndices(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr)
+{
+  InstallIndexProc(tablePtr, "min",  Blt_VecMin);
+  InstallIndexProc(tablePtr, "max",  Blt_VecMax);
+  InstallIndexProc(tablePtr, "mean", Mean);
+  InstallIndexProc(tablePtr, "sum",  Sum);
+  InstallIndexProc(tablePtr, "prod", Product);
+}
+
+int Blt::ExprVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, char *string, Blt_Vector *vector)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;	/* Interpreter-specific data. */
+  Vector *vPtr = (Vector *)vector;
+  Value value;
+
+  dataPtr = (vector != NULL) ? vPtr->dataPtr : Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+  value.vPtr = Vec_New(dataPtr);
+  if (EvaluateExpression(interp, string, &value) != TCL_OK) {
+    Vec_Free(value.vPtr);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (vPtr != NULL) {
+    Vec_Duplicate(vPtr, value.vPtr);
+  } else {
+    Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr;
+    double *vp, *vend;
+
+    /* No result vector.  Put values in interp->result.  */
+    listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
+    for (vp = value.vPtr->valueArr, vend = vp + value.vPtr->length; 
+	 vp < vend; vp++) {
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(*vp));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  }
+  Vec_Free(value.vPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+#ifdef _WIN32
+double drand48(void)
+{
+  return (double)rand() / (double)RAND_MAX;
+}
+
+void srand48(long int seed)
+{
+  srand(seed);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecOp.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecOp.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c84723
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVecOp.C
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1991-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+
+#include "tkbltVecInt.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+extern Tcl_ObjCmdProc VectorObjCmd;
+
+int Blt_VectorCmdInitProc(Tcl_Interp* interp)
+{
+
+  Tcl_Namespace* nsPtr = Tcl_FindNamespace(interp, "::blt", NULL, 
+					   TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+  if (nsPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  const char* cmdPath = "::blt::vector";
+  Tcl_Command cmdToken = Tcl_FindCommand(interp, cmdPath, NULL, 0);
+  if (cmdToken)
+    return TCL_OK;
+  cmdToken = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, cmdPath, VectorObjCmd, 
+				  Vec_GetInterpData(interp), NULL);
+  if (Tcl_Export(interp, nsPtr, "vector", 0) != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltVector.C b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVector.C
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0837917
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVector.C
@@ -0,0 +1,1875 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1995-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+ *	a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+ *	"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+ *	without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+ *	distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+ *	permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+ *	the following conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ *	EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ *	MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+ *	NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+ *	LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+ *	OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+ *	WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * TODO:
+ *	o Add H. Kirsch's vector binary read operation
+ *		x binread file0
+ *		x binread -file file0
+ *
+ *	o Add ASCII/binary file reader
+ *		x read fileName
+ *
+ *	o Allow Tcl-based client notifications.
+ *		vector x
+ *		x notify call Display
+ *		x notify delete Display
+ *		x notify reorder #1 #2
+ */
+
+#include <float.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+#include <cmath>
+
+#include "tkbltInt.h"
+#include "tkbltVecInt.h"
+#include "tkbltNsUtil.h"
+#include "tkbltSwitch.h"
+#include "tkbltOp.h"
+
+using namespace Blt;
+
+#define DEF_ARRAY_SIZE		64
+#define TRACE_ALL  (TCL_TRACE_WRITES | TCL_TRACE_READS | TCL_TRACE_UNSETS)
+
+
+#define VECTOR_CHAR(c)	((isalnum((unsigned char)(c))) ||		\
+			 (c == '_') || (c == ':') || (c == '@') || (c == '.'))
+
+/*
+ * VectorClient --
+ *
+ *	A vector can be shared by several clients.  Each client allocates this
+ *	structure that acts as its key for using the vector.  Clients can also
+ *	designate a callback routine that is executed whenever the vector is
+ *	updated or destroyed.
+ *
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  unsigned int magic;		/* Magic value designating whether this really
+				 * is a vector token or not */
+  Vector* serverPtr;		/* Pointer to the master record of the vector.
+				 * If NULL, indicates that the vector has been
+				 * destroyed but as of yet, this client hasn't
+				 * recognized it. */
+  Blt_VectorChangedProc *proc;/* Routine to call when the contents of the
+			       * vector change or the vector is deleted. */
+  ClientData clientData;	/* Data passed whenever the vector change
+				 * procedure is called. */
+  ChainLink* link;		/* Used to quickly remove this entry from its
+				 * server's client chain. */
+} VectorClient;
+
+static Tcl_CmdDeleteProc VectorInstDeleteProc;
+extern Tcl_ObjCmdProc VectorObjCmd;
+static Tcl_InterpDeleteProc VectorInterpDeleteProc;
+
+typedef struct {
+  char *varName;		/* Requested variable name. */
+  char *cmdName;		/* Requested command name. */
+  int flush;			/* Flush */
+  int watchUnset;		/* Watch when variable is unset. */
+} CreateSwitches;
+
+static Blt_SwitchSpec createSwitches[] = 
+  {
+    {BLT_SWITCH_STRING, "-variable", "varName",
+     Tk_Offset(CreateSwitches, varName), BLT_SWITCH_NULL_OK},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_STRING, "-command", "command",
+     Tk_Offset(CreateSwitches, cmdName), BLT_SWITCH_NULL_OK},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_BOOLEAN, "-watchunset", "bool",
+     Tk_Offset(CreateSwitches, watchUnset), 0},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_BOOLEAN, "-flush", "bool",
+     Tk_Offset(CreateSwitches, flush), 0},
+    {BLT_SWITCH_END}
+  };
+
+typedef int (VectorCmdProc)(Vector* vecObjPtr, Tcl_Interp* interp, 
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[]);
+
+static char stringRep[200];
+
+const char *Blt::Itoa(int value)
+{
+  snprintf(stringRep, 200, "%d", value);
+  return stringRep;
+}
+
+static char* Blt_Strdup(const char *string)
+{
+  size_t size = strlen(string) + 1;
+  char* ptr = (char*)malloc(size * sizeof(char));
+  if (ptr != NULL)
+    strcpy(ptr, string);
+
+  return ptr;
+}
+
+static Vector* FindVectorInNamespace(VectorInterpData *dataPtr,	
+				     Blt_ObjectName *objNamePtr)
+{
+  Tcl_DString dString;
+  const char* name = MakeQualifiedName(objNamePtr, &dString);
+  Tcl_HashEntry* hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dataPtr->vectorTable, name);
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+  if (hPtr != NULL)
+    return (Vector*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+static Vector* GetVectorObject(VectorInterpData *dataPtr, const char *name,
+			       int flags)
+{
+  Tcl_Interp* interp = dataPtr->interp;
+  Blt_ObjectName objName;
+  if (!ParseObjectName(interp, name, &objName, BLT_NO_ERROR_MSG | BLT_NO_DEFAULT_NS))
+    return NULL;
+
+  Vector* vPtr = NULL;
+  if (objName.nsPtr != NULL)
+    vPtr = FindVectorInNamespace(dataPtr, &objName);
+  else {
+    if (flags & NS_SEARCH_CURRENT) {
+      objName.nsPtr = Tcl_GetCurrentNamespace(interp);
+      vPtr = FindVectorInNamespace(dataPtr, &objName);
+    }
+    if ((vPtr == NULL) && (flags & NS_SEARCH_GLOBAL)) {
+      objName.nsPtr = Tcl_GetGlobalNamespace(interp);
+      vPtr = FindVectorInNamespace(dataPtr, &objName);
+    }
+  }
+
+  return vPtr;
+}
+
+void Blt::Vec_UpdateRange(Vector* vPtr)
+{
+  double* vp = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->first;
+  double* vend = vPtr->valueArr + vPtr->last;
+  double min = *vp;
+  double max = *vp++;
+  for (/* empty */; vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    if (min > *vp)
+      min = *vp; 
+    else if (max < *vp)
+      max = *vp; 
+  } 
+  vPtr->min = min;
+  vPtr->max = max;
+  vPtr->notifyFlags &= ~UPDATE_RANGE;
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_GetIndex(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* vPtr, const char *string,
+		     int *indexPtr, int flags, Blt_VectorIndexProc **procPtrPtr)
+{
+  int value;
+  char c = string[0];
+
+  // Treat the index "end" like a numeric index
+  if ((c == 'e') && (strcmp(string, "end") == 0)) {
+    if (vPtr->length < 1) {
+      if (interp != NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"end\": vector is empty", 
+			 (char *)NULL);
+      }
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    *indexPtr = vPtr->length - 1;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } else if ((c == '+') && (strcmp(string, "++end") == 0)) {
+    *indexPtr = vPtr->length;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+  if (procPtrPtr != NULL) {
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&vPtr->dataPtr->indexProcTable, string);
+    if (hPtr != NULL) {
+      *indexPtr = SPECIAL_INDEX;
+      *procPtrPtr = (Blt_VectorIndexProc*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+      return TCL_OK;
+    }
+  }
+  if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, (char *)string, &value) != TCL_OK) {
+    long int lvalue;
+    /*   
+     * Unlike Tcl_GetInt, Tcl_ExprLong needs a valid interpreter, but the
+     * interp passed in may be NULL.  So we have to use vPtr->interp and
+     * then reset the result.
+     */
+    if (Tcl_ExprLong(vPtr->interp, (char *)string, &lvalue) != TCL_OK) {
+      Tcl_ResetResult(vPtr->interp);
+      if (interp != NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", string, "\"", 
+			 (char *)NULL);
+      }
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    value = (int)lvalue;
+  }
+  /*
+   * Correct the index by the current value of the offset. This makes all
+   * the numeric indices non-negative, which is how we distinguish the
+   * special non-numeric indices.
+   */
+  value -= vPtr->offset;
+
+  if ((value < 0) || ((flags & INDEX_CHECK) && (value >= vPtr->length))) {
+    if (interp != NULL) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "index \"", string, "\" is out of range", 
+		       (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  *indexPtr = (int)value;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_GetIndexRange(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* vPtr, const char *string,
+			   int flags, Blt_VectorIndexProc** procPtrPtr)
+{
+  int ielem;
+  char* colon = NULL;
+  if (flags & INDEX_COLON)
+    colon = (char*)strchr(string, ':');
+
+  if (colon != NULL) {
+    if (string == colon) {
+      vPtr->first = 0;	/* Default to the first index */
+    }
+    else {
+      int result;
+
+      *colon = '\0';
+      result = Vec_GetIndex(interp, vPtr, string, &ielem, flags,
+				(Blt_VectorIndexProc **) NULL);
+      *colon = ':';
+      if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      vPtr->first = ielem;
+    }
+    if (*(colon + 1) == '\0') {
+      /* Default to the last index */
+      vPtr->last = (vPtr->length > 0) ? vPtr->length - 1 : 0;
+    } else {
+      if (Vec_GetIndex(interp, vPtr, colon + 1, &ielem, flags,
+			   (Blt_VectorIndexProc **) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      vPtr->last = ielem;
+    }
+    if (vPtr->first > vPtr->last) {
+      if (interp != NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad range \"", string,
+			 "\" (first > last)", (char *)NULL);
+      }
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  } else {
+    if (Vec_GetIndex(interp, vPtr, string, &ielem, flags, 
+			 procPtrPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    vPtr->last = vPtr->first = ielem;
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+Vector* Blt::Vec_ParseElement(Tcl_Interp* interp, VectorInterpData *dataPtr,
+			     const char* start, const char** endPtr, int flags)
+{
+  char* p = (char*)start;
+  // Find the end of the vector name
+  while (VECTOR_CHAR(*p)) {
+    p++;
+  }
+  char saved = *p;
+  *p = '\0';
+
+  Vector* vPtr = GetVectorObject(dataPtr, start, flags);
+  if (vPtr == NULL) {
+    if (interp != NULL) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't find vector \"", start, "\"", 
+		       (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    *p = saved;
+    return NULL;
+  }
+  *p = saved;
+  vPtr->first = 0;
+  vPtr->last = vPtr->length - 1;
+  if (*p == '(') {
+    int count, result;
+
+    start = p + 1;
+    p++;
+
+    /* Find the matching right parenthesis */
+    count = 1;
+    while (*p != '\0') {
+      if (*p == ')') {
+	count--;
+	if (count == 0) {
+	  break;
+	}
+      } else if (*p == '(') {
+	count++;
+      }
+      p++;
+    }
+    if (count > 0) {
+      if (interp != NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unbalanced parentheses \"", start, 
+			 "\"", (char *)NULL);
+      }
+      return NULL;
+    }
+    *p = '\0';
+    result = Vec_GetIndexRange(interp, vPtr, start, (INDEX_COLON | INDEX_CHECK), (Blt_VectorIndexProc **) NULL);
+    *p = ')';
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+      return NULL;
+    }
+    p++;
+  }
+  if (endPtr != NULL) {
+    *endPtr = p;
+  }
+  return vPtr;
+}
+
+void Blt_Vec_NotifyClients(ClientData clientData)
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector*)clientData;
+  ChainLink *link, *next;
+  Blt_VectorNotify notify;
+
+  notify = (vPtr->notifyFlags & NOTIFY_DESTROYED)
+    ? BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_DESTROY : BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_UPDATE;
+  vPtr->notifyFlags &= ~(NOTIFY_UPDATED | NOTIFY_DESTROYED | NOTIFY_PENDING);
+  for (link = Chain_FirstLink(vPtr->chain); link; link = next) {
+    next = Chain_NextLink(link);
+    VectorClient *clientPtr = (VectorClient*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    if ((clientPtr->proc != NULL) && (clientPtr->serverPtr != NULL)) {
+      (*clientPtr->proc) (vPtr->interp, clientPtr->clientData, notify);
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Some clients may not handle the "destroy" callback properly (they
+  // should call Blt_FreeVectorId to release the client identifier), so mark
+  // any remaining clients to indicate that vector's server has gone away.
+  if (notify == BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_DESTROY) {
+    for (link = Chain_FirstLink(vPtr->chain); link; 
+	 link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+      VectorClient *clientPtr = (VectorClient*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+      clientPtr->serverPtr = NULL;
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void Blt::Vec_UpdateClients(Vector* vPtr)
+{
+  vPtr->dirty++;
+  vPtr->max = vPtr->min = NAN;
+  if (vPtr->notifyFlags & NOTIFY_NEVER) {
+    return;
+  }
+  vPtr->notifyFlags |= NOTIFY_UPDATED;
+  if (vPtr->notifyFlags & NOTIFY_ALWAYS) {
+    Blt_Vec_NotifyClients(vPtr);
+    return;
+  }
+  if (!(vPtr->notifyFlags & NOTIFY_PENDING)) {
+    vPtr->notifyFlags |= NOTIFY_PENDING;
+    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(Blt_Vec_NotifyClients, vPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+void Blt::Vec_FlushCache(Vector* vPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_Interp* interp = vPtr->interp;
+
+  if (vPtr->arrayName == NULL)
+    return;
+
+  /* Turn off the trace temporarily so that we can unset all the
+   * elements in the array.  */
+
+  Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, vPtr->arrayName, (char *)NULL,
+		  TRACE_ALL | vPtr->varFlags, Vec_VarTrace, vPtr);
+
+  /* Clear all the element entries from the entire array */
+  Tcl_UnsetVar2(interp, vPtr->arrayName, (char *)NULL, vPtr->varFlags);
+
+  /* Restore the "end" index by default and the trace on the entire array */
+  Tcl_SetVar2(interp, vPtr->arrayName, "end", "", vPtr->varFlags);
+  Tcl_TraceVar2(interp, vPtr->arrayName, (char *)NULL,
+		TRACE_ALL | vPtr->varFlags, Vec_VarTrace, vPtr);
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_LookupName(VectorInterpData *dataPtr, const char *vecName,
+		       Vector** vPtrPtr)
+{
+
+  const char *endPtr;
+  Vector* vPtr = Vec_ParseElement(dataPtr->interp, dataPtr, vecName, &endPtr, NS_SEARCH_BOTH);
+  if (vPtr == NULL)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  if (*endPtr != '\0') {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(dataPtr->interp, 
+		     "extra characters after vector name", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  *vPtrPtr = vPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+double Blt::Vec_Min(Vector* vecObjPtr)
+{
+  double* vp = vecObjPtr->valueArr + vecObjPtr->first;
+  double* vend = vecObjPtr->valueArr + vecObjPtr->last;
+  double min = *vp++;
+  for (/* empty */; vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    if (min > *vp)
+      min = *vp; 
+  } 
+  vecObjPtr->min = min;
+  return vecObjPtr->min;
+}
+
+double Blt::Vec_Max(Vector* vecObjPtr)
+{
+  double max = NAN;
+  double* vp = vecObjPtr->valueArr + vecObjPtr->first;
+  double* vend = vecObjPtr->valueArr + vecObjPtr->last;
+  max = *vp++;
+  for (/* empty */; vp <= vend; vp++) {
+    if (max < *vp)
+      max = *vp; 
+  } 
+  vecObjPtr->max = max;
+  return vecObjPtr->max;
+}
+
+static void DeleteCommand(Vector* vPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_Interp* interp = vPtr->interp;
+  char *qualName;
+  Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
+  Tcl_DString dString;
+  Blt_ObjectName objName;
+
+  Tcl_DStringInit(&dString);
+  objName.name = Tcl_GetCommandName(interp, vPtr->cmdToken);
+  objName.nsPtr = GetCommandNamespace(vPtr->cmdToken);
+  qualName = MakeQualifiedName(&objName, &dString);
+  if (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, qualName, &cmdInfo)) {
+    // Disable the callback before deleting the TCL command
+    cmdInfo.deleteProc = NULL;	
+    Tcl_SetCommandInfo(interp, qualName, &cmdInfo);
+    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(interp, vPtr->cmdToken);
+  }
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+  vPtr->cmdToken = 0;
+}
+
+static void UnmapVariable(Vector* vPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_Interp* interp = vPtr->interp;
+
+  // Unset the entire array
+  Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, vPtr->arrayName, (char *)NULL,
+		  (TRACE_ALL | vPtr->varFlags), Vec_VarTrace, vPtr);
+  Tcl_UnsetVar2(interp, vPtr->arrayName, (char *)NULL, vPtr->varFlags);
+
+  if (vPtr->arrayName != NULL) {
+    free((void*)(vPtr->arrayName));
+    vPtr->arrayName = NULL;
+  }
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_MapVariable(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* vPtr, const char *path)
+{
+  Blt_ObjectName objName;
+  char *newPath;
+  const char *result;
+  Tcl_DString dString;
+
+  if (vPtr->arrayName != NULL) {
+    UnmapVariable(vPtr);
+  }
+  if ((path == NULL) || (path[0] == '\0')) {
+    return TCL_OK;		/* If the variable pathname is the empty
+				 * string, simply return after removing any
+				 * existing variable. */
+  }
+  /* Get the variable name (without the namespace qualifier). */
+  if (!ParseObjectName(interp, path, &objName, BLT_NO_DEFAULT_NS)) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (objName.nsPtr == NULL) {
+    /* 
+     * If there was no namespace qualifier, try harder to see if the
+     * variable is non-local.
+     */
+    objName.nsPtr = GetVariableNamespace(interp, objName.name);
+  } 
+  Tcl_DStringInit(&dString);
+  vPtr->varFlags = 0;
+  if (objName.nsPtr != NULL) {	/* Global or namespace variable. */
+    newPath = MakeQualifiedName(&objName, &dString);
+    vPtr->varFlags |= (TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+  } else {			/* Local variable. */
+    newPath = (char *)objName.name;
+  }
+
+  /*
+   * To play it safe, delete the variable first.  This has the benefical
+   * side-effect of unmapping the variable from another vector that may be
+   * currently associated with it.
+   */
+  Tcl_UnsetVar2(interp, newPath, (char *)NULL, 0);
+
+  /* 
+   * Set the index "end" in the array.  This will create the variable
+   * immediately so that we can check its namespace context.
+   */
+  result = Tcl_SetVar2(interp, newPath, "end", "", TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+  if (result == NULL) {
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  /* Create a full-array trace on reads, writes, and unsets. */
+  Tcl_TraceVar2(interp, newPath, (char *)NULL, TRACE_ALL, Vec_VarTrace,
+		vPtr);
+  vPtr->arrayName = Blt_Strdup(newPath);
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_SetSize(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* vPtr, int newSize)
+{
+  if (newSize <= 0) {
+    newSize = DEF_ARRAY_SIZE;
+  }
+  if (newSize == vPtr->size) {
+    /* Same size, use the current array. */
+    return TCL_OK;
+  } 
+  if (vPtr->freeProc == TCL_DYNAMIC) {
+    /* Old memory was dynamically allocated, so use realloc. */
+    double* newArr = (double*)realloc(vPtr->valueArr, newSize * sizeof(double));
+    if (newArr == NULL) {
+      if (interp != NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't reallocate ", 
+			 Itoa(newSize), " elements for vector \"", 
+			 vPtr->name, "\"", (char *)NULL); 
+      }
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    vPtr->size = newSize;
+    vPtr->valueArr = newArr;
+    return TCL_OK;
+  }
+
+  {
+    /* Old memory was created specially (static or special allocator).
+     * Replace with dynamically allocated memory (malloc-ed). */
+
+    double* newArr = (double*)calloc(newSize, sizeof(double));
+    if (newArr == NULL) {
+      if (interp != NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't allocate ", 
+			 Itoa(newSize), " elements for vector \"", 
+			 vPtr->name, "\"", (char *)NULL); 
+      }
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    {
+      int used, wanted;
+	    
+      /* Copy the contents of the old memory into the new. */
+      used = vPtr->length;
+      wanted = newSize;
+	    
+      if (used > wanted) {
+	used = wanted;
+      }
+      /* Copy any previous data */
+      if (used > 0) {
+	memcpy(newArr, vPtr->valueArr, used * sizeof(double));
+      }
+    }
+	
+    /* 
+     * We're not using the old storage anymore, so free it if it's not
+     * TCL_STATIC.  It's static because the user previously reset the
+     * vector with a statically allocated array (setting freeProc to
+     * TCL_STATIC).
+     */
+    if (vPtr->freeProc != TCL_STATIC) {
+      if (vPtr->freeProc == TCL_DYNAMIC) {
+	free(vPtr->valueArr);
+      } else {
+	(*vPtr->freeProc) ((char *)vPtr->valueArr);
+      }
+    }
+    vPtr->freeProc = TCL_DYNAMIC; /* Set the type of the new storage */
+    vPtr->valueArr = newArr;
+    vPtr->size = newSize;
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_SetLength(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* vPtr, int newLength)
+{
+  if (vPtr->size < newLength) {
+    if (Vec_SetSize(interp, vPtr, newLength) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+  vPtr->length = newLength;
+  vPtr->first = 0;
+  vPtr->last = newLength - 1;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_ChangeLength(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* vPtr, int newLength)
+{
+  if (newLength < 0) {
+    newLength = 0;
+  } 
+  if (newLength > vPtr->size) {
+    int newSize;		/* Size of array in elements */
+    
+    /* Compute the new size of the array.  It's a multiple of
+     * DEF_ARRAY_SIZE. */
+    newSize = DEF_ARRAY_SIZE;
+    while (newSize < newLength) {
+      newSize += newSize;
+    }
+    if (newSize != vPtr->size) {
+      if (Vec_SetSize(interp, vPtr, newSize) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  vPtr->length = newLength;
+  vPtr->first = 0;
+  vPtr->last = newLength - 1;
+  return TCL_OK;
+    
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_Reset(Vector* vPtr, double *valueArr, int length,
+		  int size, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc)
+{
+  if (vPtr->valueArr != valueArr) {	/* New array of values resides
+					 * in different memory than
+					 * the current vector.  */
+    if ((valueArr == NULL) || (size == 0)) {
+      /* Empty array. Set up default values */
+      valueArr = (double*)malloc(sizeof(double) * DEF_ARRAY_SIZE);
+      size = DEF_ARRAY_SIZE;
+      if (valueArr == NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(vPtr->interp, "can't allocate ", 
+			 Itoa(size), " elements for vector \"", 
+			 vPtr->name, "\"", (char *)NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      freeProc = TCL_DYNAMIC;
+      length = 0;
+    }
+    else if (freeProc == TCL_VOLATILE) {
+      /* Data is volatile. Make a copy of the value array.  */
+      double* newArr = (double*)malloc(size * sizeof(double));
+      if (newArr == NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(vPtr->interp, "can't allocate ", 
+			 Itoa(size), " elements for vector \"", 
+			 vPtr->name, "\"", (char *)NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+      }
+      memcpy((char *)newArr, (char *)valueArr, 
+	     sizeof(double) * length);
+      valueArr = newArr;
+      freeProc = TCL_DYNAMIC;
+    } 
+
+    if (vPtr->freeProc != TCL_STATIC) {
+      /* Old data was dynamically allocated. Free it before attaching
+       * new data.  */
+      if (vPtr->freeProc == TCL_DYNAMIC) {
+	free(vPtr->valueArr);
+      } else {
+	(*freeProc) ((char *)vPtr->valueArr);
+      }
+    }
+    vPtr->freeProc = freeProc;
+    vPtr->valueArr = valueArr;
+    vPtr->size = size;
+  }
+
+  vPtr->length = length;
+  if (vPtr->flush) {
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  }
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+Vector* Blt::Vec_New(VectorInterpData *dataPtr)
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector*)calloc(1, sizeof(Vector));
+  vPtr->valueArr = (double*)malloc(sizeof(double) * DEF_ARRAY_SIZE);
+  if (vPtr->valueArr == NULL) {
+    free(vPtr);
+    return NULL;
+  }
+  vPtr->size = DEF_ARRAY_SIZE;
+  vPtr->freeProc = TCL_DYNAMIC;
+  vPtr->length = 0;
+  vPtr->interp = dataPtr->interp;
+  vPtr->hashPtr = NULL;
+  vPtr->chain = new Chain();
+  vPtr->flush = 0;
+  vPtr->min = vPtr->max = NAN;
+  vPtr->notifyFlags = NOTIFY_WHENIDLE;
+  vPtr->dataPtr = dataPtr;
+  return vPtr;
+}
+
+void Blt::Vec_Free(Vector* vPtr)
+{
+  ChainLink* link;
+
+  if (vPtr->cmdToken != 0) {
+    DeleteCommand(vPtr);
+  }
+  if (vPtr->arrayName != NULL) {
+    UnmapVariable(vPtr);
+  }
+  vPtr->length = 0;
+
+  /* Immediately notify clients that vector is going away */
+  if (vPtr->notifyFlags & NOTIFY_PENDING) {
+    vPtr->notifyFlags &= ~NOTIFY_PENDING;
+    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(Blt_Vec_NotifyClients, vPtr);
+  }
+  vPtr->notifyFlags |= NOTIFY_DESTROYED;
+  Blt_Vec_NotifyClients(vPtr);
+
+  for (link = Chain_FirstLink(vPtr->chain); link; link = Chain_NextLink(link)) {
+    VectorClient *clientPtr = (VectorClient*)Chain_GetValue(link);
+    free(clientPtr);
+  }
+  delete vPtr->chain;
+  if ((vPtr->valueArr != NULL) && (vPtr->freeProc != TCL_STATIC)) {
+    if (vPtr->freeProc == TCL_DYNAMIC) {
+      free(vPtr->valueArr);
+    } else {
+      (*vPtr->freeProc) ((char *)vPtr->valueArr);
+    }
+  }
+  if (vPtr->hashPtr != NULL) {
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(vPtr->hashPtr);
+  }
+#ifdef NAMESPACE_DELETE_NOTIFY
+  if (vPtr->nsPtr != NULL) {
+    Blt_DestroyNsDeleteNotify(vPtr->interp, vPtr->nsPtr, vPtr);
+  }
+#endif /* NAMESPACE_DELETE_NOTIFY */
+  free(vPtr);
+}
+
+static void VectorInstDeleteProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector*)clientData;
+  vPtr->cmdToken = 0;
+  Vec_Free(vPtr);
+}
+
+Vector* Blt::Vec_Create(VectorInterpData *dataPtr, const char *vecName,
+		       const char *cmdName, const char *varName, int *isNewPtr)
+{
+  Tcl_DString dString;
+  Blt_ObjectName objName;
+  char *qualName;
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+  Tcl_Interp* interp = dataPtr->interp;
+
+  int isNew = 0;
+  Vector* vPtr = NULL;
+
+  if (!ParseObjectName(interp, vecName, &objName, 0))
+    return NULL;
+
+  Tcl_DStringInit(&dString);
+  if ((objName.name[0] == '#') && (strcmp(objName.name, "#auto") == 0)) {
+
+    do {	/* Generate a unique vector name. */
+      char string[200];
+
+      snprintf(string, 200, "vector%d", dataPtr->nextId++);
+      objName.name = string;
+      qualName = MakeQualifiedName(&objName, &dString);
+      hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dataPtr->vectorTable, qualName);
+    } while (hPtr != NULL);
+  } else {
+    const char *p;
+
+    for (p = objName.name; *p != '\0'; p++) {
+      if (!VECTOR_CHAR(*p)) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad vector name \"", objName.name,
+			 "\": must contain digits, letters, underscore, or period",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+    }
+    qualName = MakeQualifiedName(&objName, &dString);
+    vPtr = Vec_ParseElement((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, dataPtr, qualName, 
+				NULL, NS_SEARCH_CURRENT);
+  }
+  if (vPtr == NULL) {
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dataPtr->vectorTable, qualName, &isNew);
+    vPtr = Vec_New(dataPtr);
+    vPtr->hashPtr = hPtr;
+    vPtr->nsPtr = objName.nsPtr;
+
+    vPtr->name = (const char*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&dataPtr->vectorTable, hPtr);
+#ifdef NAMESPACE_DELETE_NOTIFY
+    Blt_CreateNsDeleteNotify(interp, objName.nsPtr, vPtr, 
+			     VectorInstDeleteProc);
+#endif /* NAMESPACE_DELETE_NOTIFY */
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, vPtr);
+  }
+  if (cmdName != NULL) {
+    Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
+
+    if ((cmdName == vecName) ||
+	((cmdName[0] == '#') && (strcmp(cmdName, "#auto")==0))) {
+      cmdName = qualName;
+    } 
+    if (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, (char *)cmdName, &cmdInfo)) {
+      if (vPtr != cmdInfo.objClientData) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "command \"", cmdName,
+			 "\" already exists", (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+      /* We get here only if the old name is the same as the new. */
+      goto checkVariable;
+    }
+  }
+  if (vPtr->cmdToken != 0) {
+    DeleteCommand(vPtr);	/* Command already exists, delete old first */
+  }
+  if (cmdName != NULL) {
+    Tcl_DString dString2;
+	
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&dString2);
+    if (cmdName != qualName) {
+      if (!ParseObjectName(interp, cmdName, &objName, 0)) {
+	goto error;
+      }
+      cmdName = MakeQualifiedName(&objName, &dString2);
+    }
+    vPtr->cmdToken = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, (char *)cmdName, Vec_InstCmd,
+					  vPtr, VectorInstDeleteProc);
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&dString2);
+  }
+ checkVariable:
+  if (varName != NULL) {
+    if ((varName[0] == '#') && (strcmp(varName, "#auto") == 0)) {
+      varName = qualName;
+    }
+    if (Vec_MapVariable(interp, vPtr, varName) != TCL_OK) {
+      goto error;
+    }
+  }
+
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+  *isNewPtr = isNew;
+  return vPtr;
+
+ error:
+  Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+  if (vPtr != NULL) {
+    Vec_Free(vPtr);
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_Duplicate(Vector* destPtr, Vector* srcPtr)
+{
+  size_t nBytes;
+  size_t length;
+
+  if (destPtr == srcPtr) {
+    /* Copying the same vector. */
+  }
+  length = srcPtr->last - srcPtr->first + 1;
+  if (Vec_ChangeLength(destPtr->interp, destPtr, length) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  nBytes = length * sizeof(double);
+  memcpy(destPtr->valueArr, srcPtr->valueArr + srcPtr->first, nBytes);
+  destPtr->offset = srcPtr->offset;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
+static int VectorNamesOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  VectorInterpData* dataPtr = (VectorInterpData*)clientData;
+  Tcl_Obj *listObjPtr;
+
+  listObjPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
+  if (objc == 2) {
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+
+    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&dataPtr->vectorTable, &cursor);
+	 hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+      char *name = (char*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&dataPtr->vectorTable, hPtr);
+      Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+			       Tcl_NewStringObj(name, -1));
+    }
+  } else {
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+
+    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&dataPtr->vectorTable, &cursor);
+	 hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+      char *name = (char*)Tcl_GetHashKey(&dataPtr->vectorTable, hPtr);
+      int i;
+      for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+	char *pattern;
+
+	pattern = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	if (Tcl_StringMatch(name, pattern)) {
+	  Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObjPtr, 
+				   Tcl_NewStringObj(name, -1));
+	  break;
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObjPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int VectorCreate2(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			 int argStart, int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr = (VectorInterpData*)clientData;
+  Vector* vPtr;
+  int count, i;
+  CreateSwitches switches;
+
+  // Handle switches to the vector command and collect the vector name
+  // arguments into an array.
+  count = 0;
+  vPtr = NULL;
+  for (i = argStart; i < objc; i++) {
+    char *string;
+
+    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+    if (string[0] == '-') {
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+  count = i - argStart;
+  if (count == 0) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no vector names supplied", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  memset(&switches, 0, sizeof(switches));
+  if (ParseSwitches(interp, createSwitches, objc - i, objv + i, 
+			&switches, BLT_SWITCH_DEFAULTS) < 0) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (count > 1) {
+    if (switches.cmdName != NULL) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
+		       "can't specify more than one vector with \"-command\" switch",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      goto error;
+    }
+    if (switches.varName != NULL) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		       "can't specify more than one vector with \"-variable\" switch",
+		       (char *)NULL);
+      goto error;
+    }
+  }
+  for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+    char *leftParen, *rightParen;
+    char *string;
+    int isNew;
+    int size, first, last;
+
+    size = first = last = 0;
+    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i + argStart]);
+    leftParen = strchr(string, '(');
+    rightParen = strchr(string, ')');
+    if (((leftParen != NULL) && (rightParen == NULL)) ||
+	((leftParen == NULL) && (rightParen != NULL)) ||
+	(leftParen > rightParen)) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad vector specification \"", string,
+		       "\"", (char *)NULL);
+      goto error;
+    }
+    if (leftParen != NULL) {
+      int result;
+      char *colon;
+
+      *rightParen = '\0';
+      colon = strchr(leftParen + 1, ':');
+      if (colon != NULL) {
+
+	/* Specification is in the form vecName(first:last) */
+	*colon = '\0';
+	result = Tcl_GetInt(interp, leftParen + 1, &first);
+	if ((*(colon + 1) != '\0') && (result == TCL_OK)) {
+	  result = Tcl_GetInt(interp, colon + 1, &last);
+	  if (first > last) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad vector range \"",
+			     string, "\"", (char *)NULL);
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	  }
+	  size = (last - first) + 1;
+	}
+	*colon = ':';
+      } else {
+	/* Specification is in the form vecName(size) */
+	result = Tcl_GetInt(interp, leftParen + 1, &size);
+      }
+      *rightParen = ')';
+      if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	goto error;
+      }
+      if (size < 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad vector size \"", string, "\"",
+			 (char *)NULL);
+	goto error;
+      }
+    }
+    if (leftParen != NULL) {
+      *leftParen = '\0';
+    }
+    /*
+     * By default, we create a TCL command by the name of the vector.
+     */
+    vPtr = Vec_Create(dataPtr, string,
+			  (switches.cmdName == NULL) ? string : switches.cmdName,
+			  (switches.varName == NULL) ? string : switches.varName, &isNew);
+    if (leftParen != NULL) {
+      *leftParen = '(';
+    }
+    if (vPtr == NULL) {
+      goto error;
+    }
+    vPtr->freeOnUnset = switches.watchUnset;
+    vPtr->flush = switches.flush;
+    vPtr->offset = first;
+    if (size > 0) {
+      if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, vPtr, size) != TCL_OK) {
+	goto error;
+      }
+    }
+    if (!isNew) {
+      if (vPtr->flush) {
+	Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+      }
+      Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+    }
+  }
+  FreeSwitches(createSwitches, (char *)&switches, 0);
+  if (vPtr != NULL) {
+    /* Return the name of the last vector created  */
+    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), vPtr->name, -1);
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+ error:
+  FreeSwitches(createSwitches, (char *)&switches, 0);
+  return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+static int VectorCreateOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			  int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  return VectorCreate2(clientData, interp, 2, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int VectorDestroyOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			   int objc,Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr = (VectorInterpData*)clientData;
+
+  for (int ii=2; ii<objc; ii++) {
+    Vector* vPtr;
+    if (Vec_LookupName(dataPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[ii]), &vPtr) != TCL_OK)
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    Vec_Free(vPtr);
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int VectorExprOp(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+			int objc,    Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  return Blt_ExprVector(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), (Blt_Vector* )NULL);
+}
+
+static Blt_OpSpec vectorCmdOps[] =
+  {
+    {"create", 1, (void*)VectorCreateOp, 3, 0,
+     "vecName ?vecName...? ?switches...?",},
+    {"destroy", 1, (void*)VectorDestroyOp, 3, 0,
+     "vecName ?vecName...?",},
+    {"expr", 1, (void*)VectorExprOp, 3, 3, "expression",},
+    {"names", 1, (void*)VectorNamesOp, 2, 3, "?pattern?...",},
+  };
+
+static int nCmdOps = sizeof(vectorCmdOps) / sizeof(Blt_OpSpec);
+
+int VectorObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp,
+		 int objc, Tcl_Obj* const objv[])
+{
+  VectorCmdProc *proc;
+
+  if (objc > 1) {
+    char *string;
+    char c;
+    int i;
+    Blt_OpSpec *specPtr;
+
+    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+    c = string[0];
+    for (specPtr = vectorCmdOps, i = 0; i < nCmdOps; i++, specPtr++) {
+      if ((c == specPtr->name[0]) &&
+	  (strcmp(string, specPtr->name) == 0)) {
+	goto doOp;
+      }
+    }
+    // The first argument is not an operation, so assume that its
+    // actually the name of a vector to be created
+    return VectorCreate2(clientData, interp, 1, objc, objv);
+  }
+ doOp:
+  /* Do the usual vector operation lookup now. */
+  proc = (VectorCmdProc*)GetOpFromObj(interp, nCmdOps, vectorCmdOps, 
+				      BLT_OP_ARG1, objc, objv,0);
+  if (proc == NULL) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  return (*proc) ((Vector*)clientData, interp, objc, objv);
+}
+
+static void VectorInterpDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp* interp)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr = (VectorInterpData*)clientData;
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+  Tcl_HashSearch cursor;
+    
+  for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&dataPtr->vectorTable, &cursor);
+       hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
+    Vector* vPtr = (Vector*)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    vPtr->hashPtr = NULL;
+    Vec_Free(vPtr);
+  }
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&dataPtr->vectorTable);
+
+  /* If any user-defined math functions were installed, remove them.  */
+  Vec_UninstallMathFunctions(&dataPtr->mathProcTable);
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&dataPtr->mathProcTable);
+
+  Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&dataPtr->indexProcTable);
+  Tcl_DeleteAssocData(interp, VECTOR_THREAD_KEY);
+  free(dataPtr);
+}
+
+VectorInterpData* Blt::Vec_GetInterpData(Tcl_Interp* interp)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;
+  Tcl_InterpDeleteProc *proc;
+
+  dataPtr = (VectorInterpData *)
+    Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, VECTOR_THREAD_KEY, &proc);
+  if (dataPtr == NULL) {
+    dataPtr = (VectorInterpData*)malloc(sizeof(VectorInterpData));
+    dataPtr->interp = interp;
+    dataPtr->nextId = 0;
+    Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, VECTOR_THREAD_KEY, VectorInterpDeleteProc,
+		     dataPtr);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&dataPtr->vectorTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&dataPtr->mathProcTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&dataPtr->indexProcTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Vec_InstallMathFunctions(&dataPtr->mathProcTable);
+    Vec_InstallSpecialIndices(&dataPtr->indexProcTable);
+    srand48((long)time((time_t *) NULL));
+  }
+  return dataPtr;
+}
+
+/* C Application interface to vectors */
+
+int Blt_CreateVector2(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName,
+		      const char *cmdName, const char *varName,
+		      int initialSize, Blt_Vector* *vecPtrPtr)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;	/* Interpreter-specific data. */
+  Vector* vPtr;
+  int isNew;
+  char *nameCopy;
+
+  if (initialSize < 0) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad vector size \"", Itoa(initialSize),
+		     "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  dataPtr = Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+
+  nameCopy = Blt_Strdup(vecName);
+  vPtr = Vec_Create(dataPtr, nameCopy, cmdName, varName, &isNew);
+  free(nameCopy);
+
+  if (vPtr == NULL) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (initialSize > 0) {
+    if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, vPtr, initialSize) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+  if (vecPtrPtr != NULL) {
+    *vecPtrPtr = (Blt_Vector* ) vPtr;
+  }
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt_CreateVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *name, int size,
+		     Blt_Vector* *vecPtrPtr)
+{
+  return Blt_CreateVector2(interp, name, name, name, size, vecPtrPtr);
+}
+
+int Blt_DeleteVector(Blt_Vector* vecPtr)
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector* )vecPtr;
+
+  Vec_Free(vPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt_DeleteVectorByName(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *name)
+{
+  // If the vector name was passed via a read-only string (e.g. "x"), the
+  // Vec_ParseElement routine will segfault when it tries to write into
+  // the string.  Therefore make a writable copy and free it when we're done.
+  char* nameCopy = Blt_Strdup(name);
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr = Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+  Vector* vPtr;
+  int result = Vec_LookupName(dataPtr, nameCopy, &vPtr);
+  free(nameCopy);
+
+  if (result != TCL_OK)
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+  Vec_Free(vPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt_VectorExists2(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;
+
+  dataPtr = Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+  if (GetVectorObject(dataPtr, vecName, NS_SEARCH_BOTH) != NULL) {
+    return 1;
+  }
+  return 0;
+}
+
+int Blt_VectorExists(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName)
+{
+  char *nameCopy;
+  int result;
+
+  /*
+   * If the vector name was passed via a read-only string (e.g. "x"), the
+   * Blt_VectorParseName routine will segfault when it tries to write into
+   * the string.  Therefore make a writable copy and free it when we're
+   * done.
+   */
+  nameCopy = Blt_Strdup(vecName);
+  result = Blt_VectorExists2(interp, nameCopy);
+  free(nameCopy);
+  return result;
+}
+
+int Blt_GetVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *name, Blt_Vector* *vecPtrPtr)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;	/* Interpreter-specific data. */
+  Vector* vPtr;
+  char *nameCopy;
+  int result;
+
+  dataPtr = Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+  /*
+   * If the vector name was passed via a read-only string (e.g. "x"), the
+   * Blt_VectorParseName routine will segfault when it tries to write into
+   * the string.  Therefore make a writable copy and free it when we're
+   * done.
+   */
+  nameCopy = Blt_Strdup(name);
+  result = Vec_LookupName(dataPtr, nameCopy, &vPtr);
+  free(nameCopy);
+  if (result != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  Vec_UpdateRange(vPtr);
+  *vecPtrPtr = (Blt_Vector* ) vPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt_GetVectorFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+			 Blt_Vector* *vecPtrPtr)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;	/* Interpreter-specific data. */
+  Vector* vPtr;
+
+  dataPtr = Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+  if (Vec_LookupName(dataPtr, Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &vPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  Vec_UpdateRange(vPtr);
+  *vecPtrPtr = (Blt_Vector* ) vPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int Blt_ResetVector(Blt_Vector* vecPtr,	double *valueArr, int length,
+		    int size, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc)
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector* )vecPtr;
+
+  if (size < 0) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(vPtr->interp, "bad array size", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  return Vec_Reset(vPtr, valueArr, length, size, freeProc);
+}
+
+int Blt_ResizeVector(Blt_Vector* vecPtr, int length)
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector* )vecPtr;
+
+  if (Vec_ChangeLength((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, vPtr, length) != TCL_OK) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(vPtr->interp, "can't resize vector \"", vPtr->name,
+		     "\"", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (vPtr->flush) {
+    Vec_FlushCache(vPtr);
+  }
+  Vec_UpdateClients(vPtr);
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+Blt_VectorId Blt_AllocVectorId(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *name)
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;	/* Interpreter-specific data. */
+  Vector* vPtr;
+  VectorClient *clientPtr;
+  Blt_VectorId clientId;
+  int result;
+  char *nameCopy;
+
+  dataPtr = Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+  /*
+   * If the vector name was passed via a read-only string (e.g. "x"), the
+   * Blt_VectorParseName routine will segfault when it tries to write into
+   * the string.  Therefore make a writable copy and free it when we're
+   * done.
+   */
+  nameCopy = Blt_Strdup(name);
+  result = Vec_LookupName(dataPtr, nameCopy, &vPtr);
+  free(nameCopy);
+
+  if (result != TCL_OK) {
+    return (Blt_VectorId) 0;
+  }
+  /* Allocate a new client structure */
+  clientPtr = (VectorClient*)calloc(1, sizeof(VectorClient));
+  clientPtr->magic = VECTOR_MAGIC;
+
+  /* Add the new client to the server's list of clients */
+  clientPtr->link = vPtr->chain->append(clientPtr);
+  clientPtr->serverPtr = vPtr;
+  clientId = (Blt_VectorId) clientPtr;
+  return clientId;
+}
+
+void Blt_SetVectorChangedProc(Blt_VectorId clientId,
+			      Blt_VectorChangedProc *proc,
+			      ClientData clientData)
+{
+  VectorClient *clientPtr = (VectorClient *)clientId;
+
+  if (clientPtr->magic != VECTOR_MAGIC) {
+    return;			/* Not a valid token */
+  }
+  clientPtr->clientData = clientData;
+  clientPtr->proc = proc;
+}
+
+void Blt_FreeVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId)
+{
+  VectorClient *clientPtr = (VectorClient *)clientId;
+
+  if (clientPtr->magic != VECTOR_MAGIC)
+    return;
+
+  if (clientPtr->serverPtr != NULL) {
+    // Remove the client from the server's list
+    clientPtr->serverPtr->chain->deleteLink(clientPtr->link);
+  }
+  free(clientPtr);
+}
+
+const char* Blt_NameOfVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId) 
+{
+  VectorClient *clientPtr = (VectorClient *)clientId;
+
+  if ((clientPtr->magic != VECTOR_MAGIC) || (clientPtr->serverPtr == NULL)) {
+    return NULL;
+  }
+  return clientPtr->serverPtr->name;
+}
+
+const char* Blt_NameOfVector(Blt_Vector* vecPtr) /* Vector to query. */
+{
+  Vector* vPtr = (Vector* )vecPtr;
+  return vPtr->name;
+}
+
+int Blt_GetVectorById(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_VectorId clientId,
+		      Blt_Vector* *vecPtrPtr)
+{
+  VectorClient *clientPtr = (VectorClient *)clientId;
+
+  if (clientPtr->magic != VECTOR_MAGIC) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad vector token", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (clientPtr->serverPtr == NULL) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "vector no longer exists", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  Vec_UpdateRange(clientPtr->serverPtr);
+  *vecPtrPtr = (Blt_Vector* ) clientPtr->serverPtr;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Blt_InstallIndexProc(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *string, 
+			  Blt_VectorIndexProc *procPtr) 
+{
+  VectorInterpData *dataPtr;	/* Interpreter-specific data. */
+  Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+  int isNew;
+
+  dataPtr = Vec_GetInterpData(interp);
+  hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dataPtr->indexProcTable, string, &isNew);
+  if (procPtr == NULL) {
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+  } else {
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, procPtr);
+  }
+}
+
+#define SWAP(a,b) tempr=(a);(a)=(b);(b)=tempr
+
+/* routine by Brenner
+ * data is the array of complex data points, perversely
+ * starting at 1
+ * nn is the number of complex points, i.e. half the length of data
+ * isign is 1 for forward, -1 for inverse
+ */
+static void four1(double *data, unsigned long nn, int isign)
+{
+  unsigned long n,mmax,m,j,istep,i;
+  double wtemp,wr,wpr,wpi,wi,theta;
+  double tempr,tempi;
+    
+  n=nn << 1;
+  j=1;
+  for (i = 1;i<n;i+=2) {
+    if (j > i) {
+      SWAP(data[j],data[i]);
+      SWAP(data[j+1],data[i+1]);
+    }
+    m=n >> 1;
+    while (m >= 2 && j > m) {
+      j -= m;
+      m >>= 1;
+    }
+    j += m;
+  }
+  mmax=2;
+  while (n > mmax) {
+    istep=mmax << 1;
+    theta=isign*(6.28318530717959/mmax);
+    wtemp=sin(0.5*theta);
+    wpr = -2.0*wtemp*wtemp;
+    wpi=sin(theta);
+    wr=1.0;
+    wi=0.0;
+    for (m=1;m<mmax;m+=2) {
+      for (i=m;i<=n;i+=istep) {
+	j=i+mmax;
+	tempr=wr*data[j]-wi*data[j+1];
+	tempi=wr*data[j+1]+wi*data[j];
+	data[j]=data[i]-tempr;
+	data[j+1]=data[i+1]-tempi;
+	data[i] += tempr;
+	data[i+1] += tempi;
+      }
+      wr=(wtemp=wr)*wpr-wi*wpi+wr;
+      wi=wi*wpr+wtemp*wpi+wi;
+    }
+    mmax=istep;
+  }
+}
+#undef SWAP
+
+static int 
+smallest_power_of_2_not_less_than(int x)
+{
+  int pow2 = 1;
+
+  while (pow2 < x){
+    pow2 <<= 1;
+  }
+  return pow2;
+}
+
+int Blt::Vec_FFT(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* realPtr, Vector* phasesPtr,
+		Vector* freqPtr, double delta, int flags, Vector* srcPtr) 
+{
+  int length;
+  int pow2len;
+  double *paddedData;
+  int i;
+  double Wss = 0.0;
+  /* TENTATIVE */
+  int middle = 1;
+  int noconstant;
+
+  noconstant = (flags & FFT_NO_CONSTANT) ? 1 : 0;
+
+  /* Length of the original vector. */
+  length = srcPtr->last - srcPtr->first + 1;
+  /* new length */
+  pow2len = smallest_power_of_2_not_less_than( length );
+
+  /* We do not do in-place FFTs */
+  if (realPtr == srcPtr) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "real vector \"", realPtr->name, 
+		     "\" can't be the same as the source", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (phasesPtr != NULL) {
+    if (phasesPtr == srcPtr) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "imaginary vector \"", phasesPtr->name, 
+		       "\" can't be the same as the source", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, phasesPtr, 
+			     pow2len/2-noconstant+middle) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+  if (freqPtr != NULL) {
+    if (freqPtr == srcPtr) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "frequency vector \"", freqPtr->name, 
+		       "\" can't be the same as the source", (char *)NULL);
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, freqPtr, 
+			     pow2len/2-noconstant+middle) != TCL_OK) {
+      return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Allocate memory zero-filled array. */
+  paddedData = (double*)calloc(pow2len * 2, sizeof(double));
+  if (paddedData == NULL) {
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't allocate memory for padded data",
+		     (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+    
+  /*
+   * Since we just do real transforms, only even locations will be
+   * filled with data.
+   */
+  if (flags & FFT_BARTLETT) {	/* Bartlett window 1 - ( (x - N/2) / (N/2) ) */
+    double Nhalf = pow2len*0.5;
+    double Nhalf_1 = 1.0 / Nhalf;
+    double w;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+      w = 1.0 - fabs( (i-Nhalf) * Nhalf_1 );
+      Wss += w;
+      paddedData[2*i] = w * srcPtr->valueArr[i];
+    }
+    for(/*empty*/; i < pow2len; i++) {
+      w = 1.0 - fabs((i-Nhalf) * Nhalf_1);
+      Wss += w;
+    }
+  } else {			/* Squared window, i.e. no data windowing. */
+    for (i = 0; i < length; i++) { 
+      paddedData[2*i] = srcPtr->valueArr[i]; 
+    }
+    Wss = pow2len;
+  }
+    
+  /* Fourier */
+  four1(paddedData-1, pow2len, 1);
+    
+  /*
+    for(i=0;i<pow2len;i++){
+    printf( "(%f %f) ", paddedData[2*i], paddedData[2*i+1] );
+    }
+  */
+    
+  /* the spectrum is the modulus of the transforms, scaled by 1/N^2 */
+  /* or 1/(N * Wss) for windowed data */
+  if (flags & FFT_SPECTRUM) {
+    double re, im, reS, imS;
+    double factor = 1.0 / (pow2len*Wss);
+    double *v = realPtr->valueArr;
+	
+    for (i = 0 + noconstant; i < pow2len / 2; i++) {
+      re = paddedData[2*i];
+      im = paddedData[2*i+1];
+      reS = paddedData[2*pow2len-2*i-2];
+      imS = paddedData[2*pow2len-2*i-1];
+      v[i - noconstant] = factor * (
+# if 0
+				    hypot( paddedData[2*i], paddedData[2*i+1] )
+				    + hypot(
+					    paddedData[pow2len*2-2*i-2],
+					    paddedData[pow2len*2-2*i-1]
+					    )
+# else
+				    sqrt( re*re + im* im ) + sqrt( reS*reS + imS*imS )
+# endif
+				    );
+    }
+  } else {
+    for(i = 0 + noconstant; i < pow2len / 2 + middle; i++) {
+      realPtr->valueArr[i - noconstant] = paddedData[2*i];
+    }
+  }
+  if( phasesPtr != NULL ){
+    for (i = 0 + noconstant; i < pow2len / 2 + middle; i++) {
+      phasesPtr->valueArr[i-noconstant] = paddedData[2*i+1];
+    }
+  }
+    
+  /* Compute frequencies */
+  if (freqPtr != NULL) {
+    double N = pow2len;
+    double denom = 1.0 / N / delta;
+    for( i=0+noconstant; i<pow2len/2+middle; i++ ){
+      freqPtr->valueArr[i-noconstant] = ((double) i) * denom;
+    }
+  }
+    
+  /* Memory is necessarily dynamic, because nobody touched it ! */
+  free(paddedData);
+    
+  realPtr->offset = 0;
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
+int Blt::Vec_InverseFFT(Tcl_Interp* interp, Vector* srcImagPtr, 
+		       Vector* destRealPtr, Vector* destImagPtr, Vector* srcPtr)
+{
+  int length;
+  int pow2len;
+  double *paddedData;
+  int i;
+  double oneOverN;
+
+  if ((destRealPtr == srcPtr) || (destImagPtr == srcPtr )){
+    /* we do not do in-place FFTs */
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  length = srcPtr->last - srcPtr->first + 1;
+
+  /* minus one because of the magical middle element! */
+  pow2len = smallest_power_of_2_not_less_than( (length-1)*2 );
+  oneOverN = 1.0 / pow2len;
+
+  if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, destRealPtr, pow2len) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  if (Vec_ChangeLength(interp, destImagPtr, pow2len) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  if( length != (srcImagPtr->last - srcImagPtr->first + 1) ){
+    Tcl_AppendResult(srcPtr->interp,
+		     "the length of the imagPart vector must ",
+		     "be the same as the real one", (char *)NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  paddedData = (double*)malloc( pow2len*2*sizeof(double) );
+  if( paddedData == NULL ){
+    if (interp != NULL) {
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "memory allocation failed", (char *)NULL);
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+  }
+  for(i=0;i<pow2len*2;i++) { paddedData[i] = 0.0; }
+  for(i=0;i<length-1;i++){
+    paddedData[2*i] = srcPtr->valueArr[i];
+    paddedData[2*i+1] = srcImagPtr->valueArr[i];
+    paddedData[pow2len*2 - 2*i - 2 ] = srcPtr->valueArr[i+1];
+    paddedData[pow2len*2 - 2*i - 1 ] = - srcImagPtr->valueArr[i+1];
+  }
+  /* mythical middle element */
+  paddedData[(length-1)*2] = srcPtr->valueArr[length-1];
+  paddedData[(length-1)*2+1] = srcImagPtr->valueArr[length-1];
+
+  /*
+    for(i=0;i<pow2len;i++){
+    printf( "(%f %f) ", paddedData[2*i], paddedData[2*i+1] );
+    }
+  */
+
+  /* fourier */
+  four1( paddedData-1, pow2len, -1 );
+
+  /* put values in their places, normalising by 1/N */
+  for(i=0;i<pow2len;i++){
+    destRealPtr->valueArr[i] = paddedData[2*i] * oneOverN;
+    destImagPtr->valueArr[i] = paddedData[2*i+1] * oneOverN;
+  }
+
+  /* memory is necessarily dynamic, because nobody touched it ! */
+  free( paddedData );
+
+  return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static double FindSplit(Point2d *points, int i, int j, int *split)	
+{    
+  double maxDist2;
+    
+  maxDist2 = -1.0;
+  if ((i + 1) < j) {
+    int k;
+    double a, b, c;	
+
+    /* 
+     * 
+     *  dist2 P(k) =  |  1  P(i).x  P(i).y  |
+     *		  |  1  P(j).x  P(j).y  |
+     *                |  1  P(k).x  P(k).y  |
+     *       ------------------------------------------
+     *       (P(i).x - P(j).x)^2 + (P(i).y - P(j).y)^2
+     */
+
+    a = points[i].y - points[j].y;
+    b = points[j].x - points[i].x;
+    c = (points[i].x * points[j].y) - (points[i].y * points[j].x);
+    for (k = (i + 1); k < j; k++) {
+      double dist2;
+
+      dist2 = (points[k].x * a) + (points[k].y * b) + c;
+      if (dist2 < 0.0) {
+	dist2 = -dist2;	
+      }
+      if (dist2 > maxDist2) {
+	maxDist2 = dist2;	/* Track the maximum. */
+	*split = k;
+      }
+    }
+    /* Correction for segment length---should be redone if can == 0 */
+    maxDist2 *= maxDist2 / (a * a + b * b);
+  } 
+  return maxDist2;
+}
+
+// Douglas-Peucker line simplification algorithm */
+int Blt_SimplifyLine(Point2d *inputPts, int low, int high, double tolerance,
+		     int *indices)
+{
+#define StackPush(a)	s++, stack[s] = (a)
+#define StackPop(a)	(a) = stack[s], s--
+#define StackEmpty()	(s < 0)
+#define StackTop()	stack[s]
+  int *stack;
+  int split = -1; 
+  double dist2, tolerance2;
+  int s = -1;			/* Points to top stack item. */
+  int count;
+
+  stack = (int*)malloc(sizeof(int) * (high - low + 1));
+  StackPush(high);
+  count = 0;
+  indices[count++] = 0;
+  tolerance2 = tolerance * tolerance;
+  while (!StackEmpty()) {
+    dist2 = FindSplit(inputPts, low, StackTop(), &split);
+    if (dist2 > tolerance2) {
+      StackPush(split);
+    } else {
+      indices[count++] = StackTop();
+      StackPop(low);
+    }
+  } 
+  free(stack);
+  return count;
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/generic/tkbltVector.h b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVector.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45ddf6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/generic/tkbltVector.h
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+/*
+ * Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, Cambridge, MA, USA
+ * This code has been modified under the terms listed below and is made
+ * available under the same terms.
+ */
+
+/*
+ *	Copyright 1993-2004 George A Howlett.
+ *
+ *	Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
+ *	obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
+ *	files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
+ *	restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
+ *	copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+ *	sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
+ *	Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
+ *	conditions:
+ *
+ *	The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+ *	included in all copies or substantial portions of the
+ *	Software.
+ *
+ *	THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ *	KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
+ *	WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ *	PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
+ *	OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ *	OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
+ *	OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+ *	SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BLT_VECTOR_H
+#define _BLT_VECTOR_H
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+
+#ifdef BUILD_tkblt
+#   define TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
+#else
+#   ifdef USE_TCL_STUBS
+#      define TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS /* */
+#   else
+#      define TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+#   endif
+#endif
+
+
+typedef enum {
+  BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_UPDATE = 1, /* The vector's values has been updated */
+  BLT_VECTOR_NOTIFY_DESTROY	/* The vector has been destroyed and the client
+				 * should no longer use its data (calling
+				 * Blt_FreeVectorId) */
+} Blt_VectorNotify;
+
+typedef struct _Blt_VectorId *Blt_VectorId;
+
+typedef void (Blt_VectorChangedProc)(Tcl_Interp* interp, ClientData clientData,
+				     Blt_VectorNotify notify);
+
+typedef struct {
+  double *valueArr;		/* Array of values (possibly malloc-ed) */
+  int numValues;		/* Number of values in the array */
+  int arraySize;		/* Size of the allocated space */
+  double min, max;		/* Minimum and maximum values in the vector */
+  int dirty;			/* Indicates if the vector has been updated */
+  int reserved;		/* Reserved for future use */
+
+} Blt_Vector;
+
+typedef double (Blt_VectorIndexProc)(Blt_Vector * vecPtr);
+
+typedef enum {
+  BLT_MATH_FUNC_SCALAR = 1,	/* The function returns a single double
+				 * precision value. */
+  BLT_MATH_FUNC_VECTOR	/* The function processes the entire vector. */
+} Blt_MathFuncType;
+
+/*
+ * To be safe, use the macros below, rather than the fields of the
+ * structure directly.
+ *
+ * The Blt_Vector is basically an opaque type.  But it's also the
+ * actual memory address of the vector itself.  I wanted to make the
+ * API as unobtrusive as possible.  So instead of giving you a copy of
+ * the vector, providing various functions to access and update the
+ * vector, you get your hands on the actual memory (array of doubles)
+ * shared by all the vector's clients.
+ *
+ * The trade-off for speed and convenience is safety.  You can easily
+ * break things by writing into the vector when other clients are
+ * using it.  Use Blt_ResetVector to get around this.  At least the
+ * macros are a reminder it isn't really safe to reset the data
+ * fields, except by the API routines.  
+ */
+#define Blt_VecData(v)		((v)->valueArr)
+#define Blt_VecLength(v)	((v)->numValues)
+#define Blt_VecSize(v)		((v)->arraySize)
+#define Blt_VecDirty(v)		((v)->dirty)
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_CreateVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName,
+			      int size, Blt_Vector** vecPtrPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_CreateVector2(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName,
+			       const char *cmdName, const char *varName,
+			       int initialSize, Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_DeleteVectorByName(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_DeleteVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_GetVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName,
+			   Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_GetVectorFromObj(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+				  Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_ResetVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr, double *dataArr, int n,
+			     int arraySize, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_ResizeVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr, int n);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_VectorExists(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_VectorExists2(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS Blt_VectorId Blt_AllocVectorId(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *vecName);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_GetVectorById(Tcl_Interp* interp, Blt_VectorId clientId,
+			       Blt_Vector **vecPtrPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS void Blt_SetVectorChangedProc(Blt_VectorId clientId,
+				       Blt_VectorChangedProc *proc,
+				       ClientData clientData);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS void Blt_FreeVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS const char *Blt_NameOfVectorId(Blt_VectorId clientId);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS const char *Blt_NameOfVector(Blt_Vector *vecPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS int Blt_ExprVector(Tcl_Interp* interp, char *expr, Blt_Vector *vecPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS void Blt_InstallIndexProc(Tcl_Interp* interp, const char *indexName,
+				   Blt_VectorIndexProc * procPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS double Blt_VecMin(Blt_Vector *vPtr);
+  TKBLT_STORAGE_CLASS double Blt_VecMax(Blt_Vector *vPtr);
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#include "tkbltDecls.h"
+
+#endif /* _BLT_VECTOR_H */
diff --git a/tkblt/library/graph.tcl b/tkblt/library/graph.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4dfe8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/library/graph.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,554 @@
+package provide Tkblt 3.0
+
+namespace eval ::blt::legend {
+    variable _private 
+    array set _private {
+	afterId ""
+	scroll 0
+	space off
+	drag 0
+	x 0
+	y 0
+    }
+}
+
+namespace eval ::blt::ZoomStack {
+    variable _private
+    array set _private {
+	afterId ""
+	scroll 0
+	space off
+	drag 0
+	x 0
+	y 0
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::legend::SetSelectionAnchor { w tagOrId } {
+    set elem [$w legend get $tagOrId]
+    # If the anchor hasn't changed, don't do anything
+    if { $elem != [$w legend get anchor] } {
+	$w legend selection clearall
+	$w legend focus $elem
+	$w legend selection set $elem
+	$w legend selection anchor $elem
+    }
+}
+
+# ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+#
+# MoveFocus --
+#
+#	Invoked by KeyPress bindings.  Moves the active selection to
+#	the entry <where>, which is an index such as "up", "down",
+#	"prevsibling", "nextsibling", etc.
+#
+# ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+proc blt::legend::MoveFocus { w elem } {
+    catch {$w legend focus $elem} result
+    puts stderr "result=$result elem=$elem"
+    if { [$w legend cget -selectmode] == "single" } {
+        $w legend selection clearall
+        $w legend selection set focus
+	$w legend selection anchor focus
+    }
+}
+
+
+proc Blt_ActiveLegend { g } {
+    $g legend bind all <Enter> [list blt::ActivateLegend $g ]
+    $g legend bind all <Leave> [list blt::DeactivateLegend $g]
+    $g legend bind all <ButtonPress-1> [list blt::HighlightLegend $g]
+}
+
+proc Blt_Crosshairs { g } {
+    blt::Crosshairs $g 
+}
+
+proc Blt_ResetCrosshairs { g state } {
+    blt::Crosshairs $g "Any-Motion" $state
+}
+
+proc Blt_ZoomStack { g args } {
+    array set params {
+	-mode click
+	-button "ButtonPress-3"
+    }
+    array set params $args
+    if { $params(-mode) == "click" } {
+	blt::ZoomStack::ClickClick $g $params(-button)
+    } else {
+	blt::ZoomStack::ClickRelease $g $params(-button)
+    }	
+}
+
+proc Blt_ClosestPoint { g } {
+    blt::ClosestPoint $g
+}
+
+#
+# The following procedures that reside in the "blt" namespace are
+# supposed to be private.
+#
+
+proc blt::ActivateLegend { g } {
+    set elem [$g legend get current]
+    $g legend activate $elem
+}
+proc blt::DeactivateLegend { g } {
+    set elem [$g legend get current]
+    $g legend deactivate $elem
+}
+
+proc blt::HighlightLegend { g } {
+    set elem [$g legend get current]
+    if { $elem != ""  } {
+      set relief [$g element cget $elem -legendrelief]
+      if { $relief == "flat" } {
+	$g element configure $elem -legendrelief raised
+	$g element activate $elem
+      } else {
+	$g element configure $elem -legendrelief flat
+	$g element deactivate $elem
+      }
+   }
+}
+
+proc blt::Crosshairs { g {event "Any-Motion"} {state "on"}} {
+    $g crosshairs $state
+    bind crosshairs-$g <$event>   {
+	%W crosshairs configure -position @%x,%y 
+    }
+    bind crosshairs-$g <Leave>   {
+	%W crosshairs off
+    }
+    bind crosshairs-$g <Enter>   {
+	%W crosshairs on
+    }
+    $g crosshairs configure -color red
+    if { $state == "on" } {
+	blt::AddBindTag $g crosshairs-$g
+    } elseif { $state == "off" } {
+	blt::RemoveBindTag $g crosshairs-$g
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::ClosestPoint { g {event "Control-ButtonPress-2"} } {
+    bind closest-point-$g <$event>  {
+	blt::FindElement %W %x %y
+    }
+    blt::AddBindTag $g closest-point-$g
+}
+
+proc blt::AddBindTag { widget tag } {
+    set oldTagList [bindtags $widget]
+    if { [lsearch $oldTagList $tag] < 0 } {
+	bindtags $widget [linsert $oldTagList 0  $tag]
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::RemoveBindTag { widget tag } {
+    set oldTagList [bindtags $widget]
+    set index [lsearch $oldTagList $tag]
+    if { $index >= 0 } {
+	bindtags $widget [lreplace $oldTagList $index $index]
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::FindElement { g x y } {
+    array set info [$g element closest $x $y -interpolate yes]
+    if { ![info exists info(name)] } {
+	beep
+	return
+    }
+    # --------------------------------------------------------------
+    # find(name)		- element Id
+    # find(index)		- index of closest point
+    # find(x) find(y)		- coordinates of closest point
+    #				  or closest point on line segment.
+    # find(dist)		- distance from sample coordinate
+    # --------------------------------------------------------------
+    set markerName "bltClosest_$info(name)"
+    catch { $g marker delete $markerName }
+    $g marker create text $markerName \
+	-coords "$info(x) $info(y)" \
+	-text "$info(name): $info(dist)\nindex $info(index)" \
+	-anchor center -justify left \
+	-yoffset 0 -bg {} 
+
+    set coords [$g invtransform $x $y]
+    set nx [lindex $coords 0]
+    set ny [lindex $coords 1]
+
+    $g marker create line line.$markerName -coords "$nx $ny $info(x) $info(y)"
+
+    blt::FlashPoint $g $info(name) $info(index) 10
+    blt::FlashPoint $g $info(name) [expr $info(index) + 1] 10
+}
+
+proc blt::FlashPoint { g name index count } {
+    if { $count & 1 } {
+        $g element deactivate $name 
+    } else {
+        $g element activate $name $index
+    }
+    incr count -1
+    if { $count > 0 } {
+	after 200 blt::FlashPoint $g $name $index $count
+	update
+    } else {
+	catch {eval $g marker delete [$g marker names "bltClosest_*"]}
+    }
+}
+
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::Init { g } {
+    variable _private
+    set _private($g,interval) 100
+    set _private($g,afterId) 0
+    set _private($g,A,x) {}
+    set _private($g,A,y) {}
+    set _private($g,B,x) {}
+    set _private($g,B,y) {}
+    set _private($g,stack) {}
+    set _private($g,corner) A
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::ClickClick { g reset } {
+    variable _private
+    
+    Init $g
+    
+    bind zoom-$g <Enter> "focus %W"
+    bind zoom-$g <KeyPress-Escape> { blt::ZoomStack::Reset %W }
+    bind zoom-$g <ButtonPress-1> { blt::ZoomStack::SetPoint %W %x %y }
+    bind zoom-$g <${reset}> { 
+	if { [%W inside %x %y] } { 
+	    blt::ZoomStack::Reset %W 
+	}
+    }
+    blt::AddBindTag $g zoom-$g
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::ClickRelease { g reset } {
+    variable _private
+    
+    Init $g
+    bind zoom-$g <Enter> "focus %W"
+    bind zoom-$g <KeyPress-Escape> {blt::ZoomStack::Reset %W}
+    bind zoom-$g <ButtonPress-1> {blt::ZoomStack::DragStart %W %x %y}
+    bind zoom-$g <B1-Motion> {blt::ZoomStack::DragMotion %W %x %y}
+    bind zoom-$g <ButtonRelease-1> {blt::ZoomStack::DragFinish %W %x %y}
+    bind zoom-$g <${reset}> { 
+	if { [%W inside %x %y] } { 
+	    blt::ZoomStack::Reset %W 
+	}
+    }
+    blt::AddBindTag $g zoom-$g
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::GetCoords { g x y index } {
+    variable _private
+    if { [$g cget -invertxy] } {
+	set _private($g,$index,x) $y
+	set _private($g,$index,y) $x
+    } else {
+	set _private($g,$index,x) $x
+	set _private($g,$index,y) $y
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::MarkPoint { g index } {
+    variable _private
+
+    if { [llength [$g xaxis use]] > 0 } {
+	set x [$g xaxis invtransform $_private($g,$index,x)]
+    } else if { [llength [$g x2axis use]] > 0 } {
+	set x [$g x2axis invtransform $_private($g,$index,x)]
+    }
+    if { [llength [$g yaxis use]] > 0 } {
+	set y [$g yaxis invtransform $_private($g,$index,y)]
+    } else if { [llength [$g y2axis use]] > 0 } {
+	set y [$g y2axis invtransform $_private($g,$index,y)]
+    }
+    set marker "zoomText_$index"
+    set text [format "x=%.4g\ny=%.4g" $x $y] 
+
+    if [$g marker exists $marker] {
+     	$g marker configure $marker -coords "$x $y" -text $text 
+    } else {
+    	$g marker create text $marker \
+	    -coords "$x $y" \
+	    -text $text -anchor center -bg {} -justify left
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::DestroyTitle { g } {
+    variable _private
+
+    if { $_private($g,corner) == "A" } {
+	catch { $g marker delete "zoomTitle" }
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::Pop { g } {
+    variable _private
+
+    set zoomStack $_private($g,stack)
+    if { [llength $zoomStack] > 0 } {
+	set cmd [lindex $zoomStack 0]
+	set _private($g,stack) [lrange $zoomStack 1 end]
+	eval $cmd
+	TitleLast $g
+	update
+	after 2000 [list blt::ZoomStack::DestroyTitle $g]
+    } else {
+	catch { $g marker delete "zoomTitle" }
+    }
+}
+
+# Push the old axis limits on the stack and set the new ones
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::Push { g } {
+    variable _private
+
+    catch {eval $g marker delete [$g marker names "zoom*"]}
+    if { [info exists _private($g,afterId)] } {
+	after cancel $_private($g,afterId)
+    }
+    set x1 $_private($g,A,x)
+    set y1 $_private($g,A,y)
+    set x2 $_private($g,B,x)
+    set y2 $_private($g,B,y)
+
+    if { ($x1 == $x2) || ($y1 == $y2) } { 
+	# No delta, revert to start
+	return
+    }
+    set cmd {}
+    foreach axis [$g axis names] {
+	if { [$g axis cget $axis -hide] } {
+	    continue
+	}
+	set min [$g axis cget $axis -min] 
+	set max [$g axis cget $axis -max]
+	set logscale  [$g axis cget $axis -logscale]
+	# Save the current scale (log or linear) so that we can restore it.
+	# This is for the case where the user changes to logscale while
+	# zooming.  A previously pushed axis limit could be negative.  It
+	# seems better for popping the zoom stack to restore a previous view
+	# (not convert the ranges).
+	set c [list $g axis configure $axis]
+	lappend c -min $min -max $max -logscale $logscale
+	append cmd "$c\n"
+    }
+
+    # This effectively pushes the command to reset the graph to the current
+    # zoom level onto the stack.  This is useful if the new axis ranges are
+    # bad and we need to reset the zoom stack.
+    set _private($g,stack) [linsert $_private($g,stack) 0 $cmd]
+    foreach axis [$g axis names] {
+	if { [$g axis cget $axis -hide] } {
+	    continue;			# Don't set zoom on axes not displayed.
+	}
+	set type [$g axis type $axis]
+	if { $type  == "x" } {
+	    set min [$g axis invtransform $axis $x1]
+	    set max [$g axis invtransform $axis $x2]
+	} elseif { $type == "y" } {
+	    set min [$g axis invtransform $axis $y1]
+	    set max [$g axis invtransform $axis $y2]
+	} else {
+	    continue;			# Axis is not bound to any margin.
+	}
+	if { ![SetAxisRanges $g $axis $min $max] } {
+	    Pop $g
+	    bell
+	    return
+	}
+    }
+    update;				# This "update" redraws the graph
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::SetAxisRanges { g axis min max } {
+    if { $min > $max } { 
+	set tmp $max; set max $min; set min $tmp
+    }
+    if { [catch { $g axis configure $axis -min $min -max $max }] != 0 } {
+	return 0
+    }
+    return 1
+}
+
+#
+# This routine terminates either an existing zoom, or pops back to
+# the previous zoom level (if no zoom is in progress).
+#
+proc blt::ZoomStack::Reset { g } {
+    variable _private
+
+    if { ![info exists _private($g,corner)] } {
+	Init $g 
+    }
+    catch {eval $g marker delete [$g marker names "zoom*"]}
+
+    if { $_private($g,corner) == "A" } {
+	# Reset the whole axis
+	Pop $g
+    } else {
+	set _private($g,corner) A
+	blt::RemoveBindTag $g select-region-$g
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::TitleNext { g } {
+    variable _private
+
+    set level [expr [llength $_private($g,stack)] + 1]
+    if { [$g cget -invertxy] } {
+	set coords "Inf -Inf"
+    } else {
+	set coords "-Inf Inf"
+    }
+    set marker "zoomTitle"
+    if {![$g marker exists $marker]} {
+	$g marker create text $marker -bindtags "" -anchor nw
+    }
+    $g marker configure $marker -text "Zoom #$level" -coords $coords
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::TitleLast { g } {
+    variable _private
+
+    set level [llength $_private($g,stack)]
+    if { [$g cget -invertxy] } {
+	set coords "Inf -Inf"
+    } else {
+	set coords "-Inf Inf"
+    }
+
+    set marker "zoomTitle"
+    if { $level > 0 } {
+	if {![$g marker exists $marker]} {
+	    $g marker create text "zoomTitle" -anchor nw
+	}
+     	$g marker configure $marker -text "Zoom #$level" -coords $coords
+    }
+}
+
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::SetPoint { g x y } {
+    variable _private
+    if { ![info exists _private($g,corner)] } {
+	Init $g
+    }
+    GetCoords $g $x $y $_private($g,corner)
+    bind select-region-$g <Motion> { 
+	blt::ZoomStack::GetCoords %W %x %y B
+	#blt::ZoomStack::MarkPoint $g B
+	blt::ZoomStack::Box %W
+    }
+    if { $_private($g,corner) == "A" } {
+	if { ![$g inside $x $y] } {
+	    return
+	}
+	# First corner selected, start watching motion events
+
+	#MarkPoint $g A
+	TitleNext $g 
+
+	blt::AddBindTag $g select-region-$g
+	set _private($g,corner) B
+    } else {
+	# Delete the modal binding
+	blt::RemoveBindTag $g select-region-$g
+	Push $g 
+	set _private($g,corner) A
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::DragStart { g x y } {
+    variable _private
+    if { ![info exists _private($g,corner)] } {
+	Init $g
+    }
+    GetCoords $g $x $y A
+    if { ![$g inside $x $y] } {
+	return
+    }
+    set _private(drag) 1
+    TitleNext $g 
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::DragMotion { g x y } {
+    variable _private 
+
+    if { $_private(drag) } {
+	GetCoords $g $x $y B
+	set dx [expr abs($_private($g,B,x) - $_private($g,A,x))]
+	set dy [expr abs($_private($g,B,y) - $_private($g,A,y))]
+	Box $g
+	if { $dy > 10 && $dx > 10 } {
+	    return 1
+	}	
+    }
+    return 0
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::DragFinish { g x y } {
+    variable _private 
+    if { [DragMotion $g $x $y] } {
+	Push $g 
+    } else {
+	catch {eval $g marker delete [$g marker names "zoom*"]}
+	if { [info exists _private($g,afterId)] } {
+	    after cancel $_private($g,afterId)
+	}
+    }
+    set _private(drag) 0
+}
+
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::MarchingAnts { g offset } {
+    variable _private
+
+    incr offset
+    # wrap the counter after 2^16
+    set offset [expr $offset & 0xFFFF]
+    if { [$g marker exists zoomOutline] } {
+	$g marker configure zoomOutline -dashoffset $offset 
+	set interval $_private($g,interval)
+	set id [after $interval [list blt::ZoomStack::MarchingAnts $g $offset]]
+	set _private($g,afterId) $id
+    }
+}
+
+proc blt::ZoomStack::Box { g } {
+    variable _private
+
+    if { $_private($g,A,x) > $_private($g,B,x) } { 
+	set x1 [$g xaxis invtransform $_private($g,B,x)]
+	set y1 [$g yaxis invtransform $_private($g,B,y)]
+	set x2 [$g xaxis invtransform $_private($g,A,x)]
+	set y2 [$g yaxis invtransform $_private($g,A,y)]
+    } else {
+	set x1 [$g xaxis invtransform $_private($g,A,x)]
+	set y1 [$g yaxis invtransform $_private($g,A,y)]
+	set x2 [$g xaxis invtransform $_private($g,B,x)]
+	set y2 [$g yaxis invtransform $_private($g,B,y)]
+    }
+    set coords "$x1 $y1 $x2 $y1 $x2 $y2 $x1 $y2 $x1 $y1"
+    if { [$g marker exists "zoomOutline"] } {
+	$g marker configure "zoomOutline" -coords $coords 
+    } else {
+	set X [lindex [$g xaxis use] 0]
+	set Y [lindex [$g yaxis use] 0]
+	$g marker create line "zoomOutline" \
+	    -coords $coords -mapx $X -mapy $Y \
+	    -dashes 4 -linewidth 1
+	set interval $_private($g,interval)
+	set id [after $interval [list blt::ZoomStack::MarchingAnts $g 0]]
+	set _private($g,afterId) $id
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tkblt/pkgIndex.tcl.in b/tkblt/pkgIndex.tcl.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea7d80b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/pkgIndex.tcl.in
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+#
+# Tcl package index file
+#
+package ifneeded @PACKAGE_NAME@ @PACKAGE_VERSION@ \
+    [list load [file join $dir @PKG_LIB_FILE@] @PACKAGE_NAME@]\n[list source [file join $dir graph.tcl]]
diff --git a/tkblt/tclconfig/ChangeLog b/tkblt/tclconfig/ChangeLog
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9504def
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tclconfig/ChangeLog
@@ -0,0 +1,1003 @@
+2016-03-11 Sean Woods <yoda@etoyoc.com>
+  *tcl.m4 Fixed the search for Tcl and Wish shells under MinGW. Static builds and threaded builds
+  get an "s" or "t" added to the name.
+
+2015-08-28  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  Rfe [00189c4afc]: Allow semi-static UCRT build on
+	Windows with VC 14.0
+
+2013-10-08  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  Bug [172223e008]: Wrong filename in
+	--disable-shared compile on MinGW
+
+2013-10-04  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  stub library is no longer linked with msvcrt??.dll.
+
+2013-10-01  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  Workaround for MinGW bug #2065:  "gcc --shared" links
+	with libgcc_s_dw2-1.dll when using 64-bit division in C
+
+2013-07-04  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  Bug [3324676]: AC_PROG_INSTALL incompat,
+	Bug [3606445]: Unneeded -DHAVE_NO_SEH=1 when not building on Windows
+
+2013-07-02  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  Bug [32afa6e256]: dirent64 check is incorrect in tcl.m4
+	(thanks to Brian Griffin)
+
+2013-06-20  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  Use X11/Xlib.h for checking where X11 can be found
+	in stead of X11/XIntrinsic.h. Suggested by Pietro Cerutti.
+
+2013-06-04  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Eliminate NO_VIZ macro as current
+	zlib uses HAVE_HIDDEN in stead. One more last-moment
+	fix for FreeBSD by Pietro Cerutti
+
+2013-05-19  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Fix for FreeBSD, and remove support for old
+	FreeBSD versions. Patch by Pietro Cerutti
+
+2013-03-12  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Patch by Andrew Shadura, providing better support for
+	* three architectures they have in Debian.
+
+2012-08-07  Stuart Cassoff  <stwo@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Added "-DNDEBUG" to CFLAGS_DEFAULT
+	when building with --disable-symbols.
+
+2012-08-07  Stuart Cassoff  <stwo@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [Bug 3555058]: Checkin [30736d63f0] broke
+	CFLAGS_DEFAULT, LDFLAGS_DEFAULT
+
+2012-08-07  Stuart Cassoff  <stwo@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [Bug 3511806]: Checkin [30736d63f0] broke CFLAGS
+
+2012-08-07  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [Bug 3511806]: Checkin [30736d63f0] broke CFLAGS
+
+2012-07-25  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: My previous commit (2012-04-03) broke the ActiveTcl
+	build for AMD64, because of the quotes in "C:/<path>/AMD64/cl.exe".
+	It turns out that the AC_TRY_COMPILE macro cannot handle that.
+
+2012-07-22  Stuart Cassoff  <stwo@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Tidy: consistency, spelling, phrasing, whitespace.
+	No functional change.
+
+2012-04-03  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [Bug 3511806] Compiler checks too early
+	This change allows to build the cygwin and mingw32 ports of
+	Tcl/Tk extensions to build out-of-the-box using a native or
+	cross-compiler, e.g. on Cygwin, Linux or Darwin.
+
+2011-04-02  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* install-sh: Fix issue with library stripping in install-sh
+	 (backported from kevin_walzer's patch from Tcl 8.6 trunk)
+
+2011-04-05  Andreas Kupries  <andreask@activestate.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Applied patch by Jeff Lawson. Nicer error message when
+	  tclConfig.sh was not found.
+
+2010-12-15  Stuart Cassoff  <stwo@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* install-sh: Upgrade to newer install-sh and use it.
+	* tcl.m4:
+
+2010-12-14  Stuart Cassoff  <stwo@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Better building on OpenBSD.
+
+2010-12-14  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: when using gcc, don't try to determine Win64 SDK
+
+2010-12-12  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Determine correctly a cross-compiler-windres
+
+2010-11-23  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add some cross-compile support, borrowed from Tcl 8.6
+
+2010-09-16  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: correct HP-UX LDFLAGS (only used when building big shell)
+
+2010-09-14  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add extra if check for .manifest file generation
+	Add notice about package name and version being built.
+
+2010-09-09  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [FREQ #3058486] TEA_LOAD_CONFIG doesn't set all BUILD_ vars
+	Slightly related: defining BUILD_$1 on all platforms - not only win -
+	allows the -fvisibility feature to be used in extensions as well, at
+	least if you compile against tcl >= 8.5.
+
+2010-08-26  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: ensure safe quoting for autoheader usage
+
+2010-08-19  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add TEA_ADD_CLEANFILES macro to make adding cleanfiles
+	easier, and add *.exp to CLEANFILES Windows default.
+	(TEA_MAKE_LIB): Enhanced to check for MSVC that requires manifests
+	and auto-embed it into proj DLL via MAKE_SHARED_LIB.  Also define
+	VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL and VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE that do the same
+	magic in case it is needed for extended TEA projects.
+
+2010-08-16  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	*** Bump to TEA_VERSION 3.9 ***
+	If upgrading from TEA_VERSION 3.8, copy over tcl.m4, change
+	TEA_INIT to use 3.9 and reconfigure (ac-2.59+).
+	BUILD_${PACKAGE_NAME} will be auto-defined on Windows for
+	correct setting of TCL_STORAGE_CLASS.
+	TEA_LOAD_CONFIG users should remove the SHLIB_LD_LIBS setting done
+	in configure.in (LIBS will be automagically populated by
+	TEA_LOAD_CONFIG).
+	TEA_EXPORT_CONFIG has been added for ${pkg}Config.sh creators
+	SHLIB_LD_FLAGS was deprecated a while ago, remove it if it is
+	still in your Makefile.in.
+
+	* tcl.m4: add /usr/lib64 to set of auto-search dirs. [Bug 1230554]
+	Auto-define BUILD_$PACKAGE_NAME so users don't need to.  This
+	needs to correspond with $pkg.h define magic for TCL_STORAGE_CLASS.
+	Auto-define CLEANFILES.  Users can expand it.
+	(SHLIB_LD_LIBS): define to '${LIBS}' default and change it only if
+	necessary.  Platforms not using this may simply not work or have
+	very funky linkers.
+	(TEA_LOAD_CONFIG): When loading config for another extension,
+	auto-add stub libraries found with TEA_ADD_LIBS.  Eases
+	configure.in for modules like itk and img::*.
+	(TEA_EXPORT_CONFIG): Add standardized function for exporting a
+	${pkg}Config.sh.  See use by img::* and itcl.
+
+2010-08-12  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	*** Bump to TEA_VERSION 3.8 ***
+	If upgrading from TEA_VERSION 3.7, copy over tcl.m4, change
+	TEA_INIT to use 3.8 and reconfigure (ac-2.59+).
+	No other changes should be necessary.
+
+	* tcl.m4: remove more vestigial bits from removed platforms.
+	Add back SCO_SV-3.2*.
+	Remove use of DL_LIBS and DL_OBJS and related baggage - these are
+	only needed by the core to support 'load'.
+	Allow for macosx in TEA_ADD_SOURCES.
+	Correct check for found_xincludes=no in TEA_PATH_UNIX_X.
+
+2010-08-11  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: remove the following old platform configurations:
+	UNIX_SV*|UnixWare-5*, SunOS-4.*, SINIX*5.4*, SCO_SV-3.2*<readded>,
+	OSF1-1.*, NEXTSTEP-*, NetBSD-1.*|FreeBSD-[[1-2]].*, MP-RAS-*,
+	IRIX-5.*, HP-UX-*.08.*|HP-UX-*.09.*|HP-UX-*.10.*, dgux*,
+	BSD/OS-2.1*|BSD/OS-3*
+	(AIX): drop AIX-pre4 support and use of ldAix, use -bexpall/-brtl
+
+2010-07-05  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [Patch #1055668] removal of exported internals from
+	tclInt.h (EXTERN macro)
+
+2010-04-14  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4    - Backport a lot of quoting fixes from tcl8.6/unix/tcl.m4
+	            - Fix determination of CYGPATH for CYGWIN
+	  With those fixes, itcl and tdbc compile fine with CYGWIN
+
+2010-04-06  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* install-sh         [Bug 2982540] configure and install* script files
+	                     should always have LF
+
+2010-02-19  Stuart Cassoff  <stwo@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Correct compiler/linker flags for threaded builds on
+	OpenBSD.
+
+2010-01-19  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Detect CYGWIN variant: win32 or unix
+
+2010-01-03  Donal K. Fellows  <dkf@users.sf.net>
+
+	* unix/tcl.m4 (TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): [Tcl Bug 1636685]: Use the
+	configuration for modern FreeBSD suggested by the FreeBSD porter.
+
+2009-10-22  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [Tcl Patch #2883533] tcl.m4 support for Haiku OS
+
+2009-04-27  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): harden the check to add _r to CC on
+	AIX with threads.
+
+2009-04-10  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): check for 64-bit TkAqua.
+
+2009-03-26  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tclconfig/tcl.m4: Adapt LDFLAGS and LD_SEARCH_FLAGS
+	together with SHLIB_LD definition to unbreak building on HPUX.
+
+2009-03-20  Andreas Kupries  <andreask@activestate.com>
+
+	* tclconfig/tcl.m4: Changed SHLIB_LD definition to unbreak
+	building on HPUX.
+
+2009-03-16  Joe English  <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4(TEA_PUBLIC_TK_HEADERS): Look at ${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC}
+	(found in tkConfig.sh) when trying to guess where tk.h might be
+	[Patch 1960628].
+
+2009-03-11  Joe English  <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Allow ${SHLIB_SUFFIX} to be overridden at
+	configure-time [Patch 1960628].  Also fix some comment typos,
+	and an uninitialized variable bug-waiting-to-happen.
+
+2008-12-21  Jan Nijtmans  <nijtmans@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: [Bug 2073255] Tcl_GetString(NULL) doesn't crash on HP-UX
+	          (this bug report was for Tcl, but holds for TEA as well.)
+
+2008-12-20  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: sync with tdbc tcl.m4 changes
+	(SunOS-5.11): Sun cc SHLIB_LD: use LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS
+
+2008-12-02  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	*** Bump to TEA_VERSION 3.7 ***
+
+	* tcl.m4: in private header check, check for <plat>Port.h instead
+	of Int.h to ensure all private headers are available.
+
+2008-11-04  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): sync TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS handling of
+	Tk.framework PrivateHeaders with TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS.
+
+2008-11-04  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PATH_TCLCONFIG, TEA_PATH_TKCONFIG): exit with error
+	when tclConfig.sh cannot be found. [Bug #1997760]
+	(TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS, TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS): allow for
+	finding the headers installed in the public areas, e.g. a result of
+	make install-private-headers. [Bug #1631922]
+
+2008-08-12  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): link shlib with current and compatiblity version
+	flags; look for libX11.dylib when searching for X11 libraries.
+
+2008-06-12  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (SunOS-5.11): fix 64bit amd64 support with gcc & Sun cc.
+
+2008-03-27  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (SunOS-5.1x): fix 64bit support for Sun cc. [Bug 1921166]
+
+2008-02-01  Donal K. Fellows  <donal.k.fellows@man.ac.uk>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): Updated to work at least in part with
+	more modern VC versions. Currently just made the linker flags more
+	flexible; more work may be needed.
+
+2007-10-26  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): add support for 64-bit X11.
+
+2007-10-23  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	*** Tagged tea-3-branch to start TEA 4 development on HEAD ***
+
+2007-09-17  Joe English  <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: use '${CC} -shared' instead of 'ld -Bshareable'
+	to build shared libraries on current NetBSDs [Bug 1749251].
+
+2007-09-15  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: 	replace all direct references to compiler by ${CC} to
+			enable CC overriding at configure & make time.
+	(SunOS-5.1x):	replace direct use of '/usr/ccs/bin/ld' in SHLIB_LD by
+			'cc' compiler driver.
+
+2007-08-08  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: check Ttk dir for Tk private headers (8.5).
+	Add some comments to other bits.
+
+2007-06-25  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PROG_TCLSH, TEA_PROG_WISH): move where / is added.
+
+2007-06-13  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: fix --with-tkinclude alignment. [Bug 1506111]
+
+2007-06-06  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): fix 64bit arch removal in fat 32&64bit builds.
+
+2007-05-18  Donal K. Fellows  <donal.k.fellows@man.ac.uk>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Added quoting so that paths with spaces cause fewer
+	problems.
+
+2007-03-07  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): s/CFLAGS/CPPFLAGS/ in -mmacosx-version-min check.
+
+2007-02-15  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: correct private header check to search in generic subdir
+
+2007-02-09  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	*** Bump to TEA_VERSION 3.6 ***
+
+	* tcl.m4: correct -d to -f
+	(TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): SHLIB_SUFFIX is .so on HP ia64 [Bug 1615058]
+
+2007-02-08  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS, TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS): check
+	that the dirs actually have private headers. [Bug 1631922]
+
+2007-02-04  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add caching to -pipe check.
+
+2007-01-25  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: integrate CPPFLAGS into CFLAGS as late as possible and
+	move (rather than duplicate) -isysroot flags from CFLAGS to CPPFLAGS to
+	avoid errors about multiple -isysroot flags from some older gcc builds.
+
+2006-01-19  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: ensure CPPFLAGS env var is used when set. [Bug 1586861]
+	(Darwin): add -isysroot and -mmacosx-version-min flags to CPPFLAGS when
+	present in CFLAGS to avoid discrepancies between what headers configure
+	sees during preprocessing tests and compiling tests.
+
+2006-12-19  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): --enable-64bit: verify linking with 64bit -arch flag
+	succeeds before enabling 64bit build.
+
+2006-12-16  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Linux): fix previous change to use makefile variable
+	LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS in SHLIB_LD, to ensure linker
+	flags in sampleextension Makefile are picked up.
+
+2006-11-26  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Linux): --enable-64bit support. [Patch 1597389], [Bug 1230558]
+
+2006-08-18  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): add support for --enable-64bit on x86_64, for
+	universal builds including x86_64 and for use of -mmacosx-version-min
+	instead of MACOSX_DEPLOYMENT_TARGET. For Tk extensions, remove 64-bit
+	arch flags from CFLAGS like in the Tk configure, as neither TkAqua nor
+	TkX11 can be built for 64-bit at present.
+
+2006-03-28  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: []-quote AC_DEFUN functions.
+	(TEA_PATH_TKCONFIG): Fixed Windows-specific check for tkConfig.sh.
+	(TEA_MAKE_LIB): Prepend 'lib' for Windows-gcc configs.
+
+2006-03-07  Joe English  <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Set SHLIB_LD_FLAGS='${LIBS}' on NetBSD,
+	as per the other *BSD variants [Bug 1334613].
+
+2006-01-25  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	*** Bump to TEA version 3.5 ***
+
+	* tcl.m4: keep LD_SEARCH_FLAGS and CC_SEARCH_FLAGS synchronous
+	with core tcl.m4 meaning.
+
+2006-01-24  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): use makefile variable LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of
+	LDFLAGS in SHLIB_LD, to ensure linker flags in sampleextension Makefile
+	are picked up. [Bug 1403343]
+
+2006-01-23  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add C:/Tcl/lib and C:/Progra~1/Tcl/lib dirs to check for
+	*Config.sh on Windows. [Bug 1407544]
+
+2006-01-23  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): for Tk extensions, remove -arch ppc64 from CFLAGS
+	like in the Tk configure, as neither TkAqua nor TkX11 can be built for
+	64bit at present (no 64bit GUI libraries).
+
+2006-01-22  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: restore system=windows on Windows.
+	Remove error if 'ar' isn't found (it may not be on Windows).
+	Do not add -lxnet or define _XOPEN_SOURCE on HP-UX by default.
+	Ensure the C|LDFLAGS_DEFAULT gets the fully sub'd value at
+	configure time.
+
+2006-01-10  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add caching, use AC_CACHE_CHECK instead of AC_CACHE_VAL
+	where possible, consistent message quoting, sync relevant
+	tcl/unix/tcl.m4 HEAD changes and gratuitous formatting differences
+	(notably sunc removal of support for for ancient BSD's, IRIX 4,
+	RISCos and Ultrix by kennykb), Darwin improvements to
+	TEA_LOAD_*CONFIG to make linking work against Tcl/Tk frameworks
+	installed in arbitrary location, change TEA_PROG_* search order
+	(look in *_BIN_DIR parents before *_PREFIX).
+
+2006-01-05  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add dkf's system config refactor
+
+2006-01-04  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: remove extraneous ' that causes bash 3.1 to choke
+
+2005-12-19  Joe English  <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PATH_TCLCONFIG &c): Look for tclConfig.sh &c
+	in ${libdir}, where they are installed by default [Patch #1377407].
+
+2005-12-05  Don Porter  <dgp@users.sf.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PUBLIC_*_HEADERS):	Better support for finding
+	header files for uninstalled Tcl and Tk.
+
+2005-12-02  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: correctly bump TEA_VERSION var to 3.4
+
+2005-12-01  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* unix/tcl.m4 (Darwin): fixed error when MACOSX_DEPLOYMENT_TARGET unset
+
+2005-11-29  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4:  *** Bump to TEA version 3.4 ***
+	Add Windows x64 build support.
+	Remove TEA_PATH_NOSPACE and handle the problem with ""s where
+	necessary - the macro relied on TCLSH_PROG which didn't work for
+	cross-compiles.
+
+2005-11-27  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): add 64bit support, add CFLAGS to SHLIB_LD to
+	support passing -isysroot in env(CFLAGS) to configure (flag can't
+	be present twice, so can't be in both CFLAGS and LDFLAGS during
+	configure), don't use -prebind when deploying on 10.4.
+	(TEA_ENABLE_LANGINFO, TEA_TIME_HANDLER): add/fix caching.
+
+2005-10-30  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: fixed two tests for TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM = "aqua" that
+	should have been for `uname -s` = "Darwin" instead; added some
+	missing quoting.
+	(TEA_PROG_TCLSH, TEA_PROG_WISH): fix incorrect assumption that
+	install location of tclConfig.sh/tkConfig.sh allows to determine
+	the tclsh/wish install dir via ../bin. Indeed tcl/tk can be
+	configured with arbitrary --libdir and --bindir (independent of
+	prefix) and such a configuration is in fact standard with Darwin
+	framework builds. At least now also check ${TCL_PREFIX}/bin
+	resp. ${TK_PREFIX}/bin for presence of tclsh resp. wish (if tcl/tk
+	have been configured with arbitrary --bindir, this will still not
+	find them, for a general solution *Config.sh would need to contain
+	the values of bindir/libdir/includedir passed to configure).
+
+2005-10-07  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Fix Solaris 5.10 check and Solaris AMD64 64-bit builds.
+
+2005-10-04  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS): add / to finish sed macro
+	(TEA_ENABLE_THREADS): don't check for pthread_attr_setstacksize func
+
+2005-09-13  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: *** Update to TEA version 3.3 ***
+	define TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM in TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG.
+	Make --enable-threads the default (users can --disable-threads).
+	Improve AIX ${CC}_r fix to better check existing ${CC} value.
+	Do the appropriate evals to not require the *TOP_DIR_NATIVE vars
+	be set for extensions that use private headers.
+	Make aqua check for Xlib compat headers the same as win32.
+
+2005-07-26  Mo DeJong  <mdejong@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PROG_TCLSH, TEA_BUILD_TCLSH,
+	TEA_PROG_WISH, TEA_BUILD_WISH): Remove
+	TEA_BUILD_TCLSH and TEA_BUILD_WISH because
+	of complaints that it broke the build when
+	only an installed version of Tcl was available
+	at extension build time. The TEA_PROG_TCLSH and
+	TEA_PROG_WISH macros will no longer search the
+	path at all. The build tclsh or installed
+	tclsh shell will now be found by TEA_PROG_TCLSH.
+
+2005-07-24  Mo DeJong  <mdejong@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PROG_TCLSH, TEA_BUILD_TCLSH,
+	TEA_PROG_WISH, TEA_BUILD_WISH):
+	Split confused search for tclsh on PATH and
+	build and install locations into two macros.
+	TEA_PROG_TCLSH and TEA_PROG_WISH search the
+	system PATH for an installed tclsh or wish.
+	The TEA_BUILD_TCLSH and TEA_BUILD_WISH
+	macros determine the name of tclsh or
+	wish in the Tcl or Tk build directory even
+	if tclsh or wish has not yet been built.
+	[Tcl bug 1160114]
+	[Tcl patch 1244153]
+
+2005-06-23  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS): add ${TK_SRC_DIR}/macosx to
+	TK_INCLUDES when building against TkAqua.
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PATH_X): fixed missing comma in AC_DEFINE
+
+	* tcl.m4: changes to better support framework builds of Tcl and Tk out
+	of the box: search framework install locations for *Config.sh, and if in
+	presence of a framework build, use the framework's Headers and
+	PrivateHeaders directories for public and private includes. [FR 947735]
+
+2005-06-18  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): add -headerpad_max_install_names to LDFLAGS to
+	ensure we can always relocate binaries with install_name_tool.
+
+2005-06-04  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PATH_X): for TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM == aqua, check if xlib
+	compat headers are available in tkheaders location, otherwise add xlib
+	sourcedir to TK_XINCLUDES.
+
+2005-04-25  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: added AC_DEFINE* descriptions (from core tcl.m4) to allow
+	use with autoheader.
+	(Darwin): added configure checks for recently added linker flags
+	-single_module and -search_paths_first to allow building with older
+	tools (and on Mac OS X 10.1), use -single_module in SHLIB_LD.
+	(TEA_MISSING_POSIX_HEADERS): added caching of dirent.h check.
+	(TEA_BUGGY_STRTOD): added caching (sync with core tcl.m4).
+
+2005-03-24  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS): use Tcl header defaults for wide
+	int type only on Windows when __int64 is detected as valid.
+
+2005-03-24  Don Porter  <dgp@users.sf.net>
+
+	* README.txt:	Update reference to "SC_* macros" to "TEA_* macros".
+	* tcl.m4:	Incorporated recent improvements in SC_PATH_TCLCONFIG
+	and SC_PATH_TKCONFIG into TEA_PATH_TCLCONFIG and TEA_PATH_TKCONFIG.
+	Corrected search path in TEA_PATH_CONFIG and added
+	AC_SUBST($1_BIN_DIR) to TEA_LOAD_CONFIG so that packages that load
+	the configuration of another package can know where they loaded
+	it from.
+
+2005-03-18  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): correct 2005-03-17 change to have
+	variant LD_SEARCH_FLAGS for gcc and cc builds.
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PROG_TCLSH, TEA_PROG_WISH): correct x-compile check.
+
+2005-03-17  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Correct gcc build and HP-UX-11.
+
+2005-02-08  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_ADD_LIBS): don't touch lib args starting with -.
+	(TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): only define _DLL for CE in shared build.
+	(TEA_MAKE_LIB): set RANLIB* to : on Windows (it's not needed).
+
+2005-02-01  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: redo of 2005-01-27 changes to correctly handle paths
+	with spaces.  Win/CE and Win/64 builds now require a prebuilt
+	tclsh to handle conversion to short pathnames.  This is done in
+	the new TEA_PATH_NOSPACE macro.  For Win/CE|64, make CC just the
+	compiler and move the necessary includes to CFLAGS.
+	(TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): Add Solaris 64-bit gcc build support.
+	(TEA_PROG_TCLSH, TEA_PROG_WISH): Allow TCLSH_PROG and WISH_PROG to
+	be set in the env and prevent resetting.
+	(TEA_ADD_LIBS): On Windows using GCC (mingw), convert foo.lib
+	args to -lfoo, for use with mingw.
+		*** POTENTIAL INCOMPATABILITY ***
+	(TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): Fix AIX gcc builds to work out-of-box.
+	Bumped TEA to 3.2.
+
+2005-01-27  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: remove cygpath calls to support msys.
+	Update base CE build assumption to "420,ARMV4,ARM,Pocket PC 2003".
+	Make STLIB_LD use $LINKBIN -lib.
+
+2005-01-25  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (Darwin): fixed bug with static build linking to dynamic
+	library in /usr/lib etc instead of linking to static library earlier
+	in search path. [Tcl Bug 956908]
+	Removed obsolete references to Rhapsody.
+
+2004-12-29  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Updates for VC7 compatibility, fixing CFLAGS and LDFLAGS
+	options, using better default -O levels. [Bug 1092952, 1091967]
+
+2004-12-29  Joe English  <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Do not use ${DBGX} suffix when building
+	shared libraries [patch #1081595, TIP #34]
+
+2004-09-07  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): support eVC4 Win/CE builds
+
+2004-08-10  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_INIT, TEA_PREFIX): update handling of exec_prefix to
+	work around subdir configures since autoconf only propagates the
+	prefix (not exec_prefix).
+
+2004-07-23  Daniel Steffen  <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): Darwin section: brought inline with
+	Tcl 8.5 HEAD config, removed core specific & obsolete settings.
+
+2004-07-22  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_PATH_X): check in TK_DEFS for MAC_OSX_TK to see if
+	we are compiling on Aqua.  Add TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM var that
+	reflects 'tk windowingsystem' value.
+
+2004-07-16  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_ENABLE_THREADS): force a threaded build when
+	building against a threaded core.
+	(CFLAGS_WARNING): Remove -Wconversion for gcc builds
+	(TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): Reorder configure.in for better 64-bit build
+	configuration, replacing EXTRA_CFLAGS with CFLAGS.  [Bug #874058]
+	Update to latest Tcl 8.5 head config settings.
+	Call this TEA version 3.1.
+
+2004-04-29  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS): replace AC_TRY_RUN test with
+	AC_TRY_COMPILE for the long vs. long long check. (kenny)
+
+2004-04-26  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS): update against core tcl.m4 to
+	define TCL_WIDE_INT_IS_LONG if 'using long'.
+
+2004-03-19  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: correct Windows builds getting LDFLAGS info in MAKE_LIB
+
+2004-02-11  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: correct TCL_INCLUDES for private headers on Windows - it
+	doesn't need the eval.
+
+2004-02-10  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: don't require TK_INCLUDES and TCL_INCLUDES to have the
+	DIR_NATIVE vars defined when using private headers on unix.
+	Allow $... to TEA_ADD_SOURCES for constructs like
+	TEA_ADD_SOURCES([\$(WIN_OBJECTS)]), that allow the developer to
+	place more in the Makefile.in.
+	tkUnixPort.h checks for HAVE_LIMITS_H, so do both HAVE and
+	CHECK on limits.h
+
+2003-12-10  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* Makefile.in:      added TEA_ADD_LIBS, TEA_ADD_INCLUDES and
+	* configure:        TEA_ADD_CFLAGS to configurable parameters with
+	* configure.in:     PKG_* equivs in the Makefile.  This allows the
+	* tclconfig/tcl.m4: user to worry less about actual magic VAR names.
+	Corrected Makefile.in to note that TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES requires
+	exact file names.
+
+2003-12-09  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: updated OpenBSD support based on [Patch #775246] (cassoff)
+
+2003-12-05  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* configure:
+	* configure.in:
+	* Makefile.in (VPATH): readd $(srcdir) to front of VPATH as the
+	first part of VPATH can get chopped off.
+	Change .c.$(OBJEXT) rule to .c.@OBJEXT@ to support more makes.
+	* tclconfig/tcl.m4: add TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES to support libstub
+	generation and TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES to replace RUNTIME_SOURCES as
+	the way the user specifies library files.
+
+2003-12-03  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* configure:           Update of TEA spec to (hopefully) simplify
+	* configure.in:        some aspects of TEA by making use of more
+	* Makefile.in:         AC 2.5x features.  Use PACKAGE_NAME (instead
+	* generic/tclsample.c: of PACKAGE) and PACKAGE_VERSION (instead of
+	* tclconfig/tcl.m4:    VERSION) arguments to AC_INIT as the TEA
+	package name and version.
+	Provide a version argument to TEA_INIT - starting with 3.0.
+	Drop all use of interior shell substs that older makefiles didn't
+	like.  Use PKG_* naming convention instead.
+	Move specification of source files and public headers into
+	configure.in with TEA_ADD_SOURCES and TEA_ADD_HEADERS.  These will
+	be munged during ./configure into the right obj file names (no
+	$(SOURCES:.c=.obj) needed).
+	There is almost nothing that should be touched in Makefile.in now
+	for the developer.  May want to add a TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES for the
+	RUNTIME_SOURCES that remains.
+	Use SHLID_LD_FLAGS (instead of SHLID_LDFLAGS) as Tcl does.
+	Only specify the user requested LDFLAGS/CFLAGS in the Makefile,
+	don't mention the _OPTIMIZE/_DEBUG variants.
+
+2003-10-15  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: create a TEA_SETUP_COMPILER_CC the precedes the
+	TEA_SETUP_COMPILER macro.  They are split so the check for CC
+	occurs before any use of CC.  Also add AC_PROG_CPP to the compiler
+	checks.
+
+2003-10-06  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Updated for autoconf 2.5x prereq.
+	Where TCL_WIDE_INT_TYPE would be __int64, defer to the code checks
+	in tcl.h, which also handles TCL_LL_MODIFIER* properly.
+
+2003-04-22  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: correct default setting of ARCH for WinCE builds.
+	Correct \ escaping for CE sed macros.
+
+2003-04-10  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: replace $(syscal) construct with older `syscall` for
+	systems where sh != bash.
+
+2003-04-09  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_WITH_CELIB): add --enable-wince and --with-celib
+	options for Windows/CE compilation support.  Requires the
+	Microsoft eMbedded SDK and Keuchel's celib emulation layer.
+
+2003-02-18  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_ENABLE_THREADS): Make sure -lpthread gets passed on
+	the link line when checking for the pthread_attr_setstacksize
+	symbol. (dejong)
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_SETUP_COMPILER): added default calls to
+	TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAGS, TEA_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS,
+	TEA_MISSING_POSIX_HEADERS and TEA_BUGGY_STRTOD.
+
+2003-02-14  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: correct HP-UX ia64 --enable-64bit build flags
+
+2003-01-29  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: check $prefix/lib as well as $exec_prefix/lib when
+	looking for tcl|tkConfig.sh, as this check is done before we would
+	set exec_prefix when the user does not define it.
+
+2003-01-21  Mo DeJong  <mdejong@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): Fix build support
+	for mingw, the previous implementation would
+	use VC++ when compiling with mingw gcc. Don't
+	pass -fPIC since gcc always compiles pic code
+	under win32. Change some hard coded cases
+	of gcc to ${CC}.
+
+2002-10-15  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: move the CFLAGS definition from TEA_ENABLE_SHARED to
+	TEA_MAKE_LIB because setting too early confuses other AC_* macros.
+	Correct the HP-11 SHLIB_LD_LIBS setting.
+
+	* tcl.m4: add the CFLAGS definition into TEA_ENABLE_SHARED and
+	make it pick up the env CFLAGS at configure time.
+
+2002-10-09  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: add --enable-symbols=mem option to enable TCL_MEM_DEBUG.
+	Improved AIX 64-bit build support, allow it on AIX-4 as well.
+	Enable 64-bit HP-11 compilation with gcc.
+	Enable 64-bit IRIX64-6 cc build support.
+	Correct FreeBSD thread library linkage.
+	Add OSF1 static build support.
+	Improve SunOS-5 shared build SHLIB_LD macro.
+
+2002-07-20  Zoran Vasiljevic  <zoran@archiware.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Added MINGW32 to list of systems checked for Windows build.
+	Also, fixes some indentation issues with "--with-XXX" options.
+
+2002-04-23  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_ENABLE_THREADS): added USE_THREAD_ALLOC define to
+	use new threaded allocatory by default on Unix for Tcl 8.4.
+	(TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS): corrected LD_SEARCH_FLAGS for FreeBSD-3+.
+
+2002-04-22  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4 (TEA_SETUP_COMPILER): removed call to AC_CYGWIN so that
+	we can use autoconf 2.5x as well as 2.13.  This prevents us from
+	being able to warn against the use of cygwin gcc at configure
+	time, but allows autoconf 2.5x, which is what is shipped with most
+	newer systems.
+
+2002-04-11  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Enabled COFF as well as CV style debug info with
+	--enable-symbols to allow Dr. Watson users to see function info.
+	More info on debugging levels can be obtained at:
+	http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/en-us/dnvc60/html/gendepdebug.asp
+
+2002-04-03  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: change all SC_* macros to TEA_*.  The SC_ was for
+	Scriptics, which is no more.  TEA represents a better, independent
+	prefix that won't need changing.
+	Added preliminary mingw gcc support. [Patch #538772]
+	Added TEA_PREFIX macro that handles defaulting the prefix and
+	exec_prefix vars to those used by Tcl if none were specified.
+	Added TEA_SETUP_COMPILER macro that encompasses the AC_PROG_CC
+	check and several other basic AC_PROG checks needed for making
+	executables.  This greatly simplifies user's configure.in files.
+	Collapsed AIX-5 defines into AIX-* with extra checks for doing the
+	ELF stuff on AIX-5-ia64.
+	Updated TEA_ENABLE_THREADS to take an optional arg to allow
+	switching it on by default (for Thread) and add sanity checking to
+	warn the user if configuring threads incompatibly.
+
+2002-03-29  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: made sure that SHLIB_LDFLAGS was set to LDFLAGS_DEFAULT.
+	Removed --enable-64bit support for AIX-4 because it wasn't correct.
+	Added -MT or -MD Windows linker switches to properly support
+	symbols-enabled builds.
+
+2002-03-28  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: called AC_MSG_ERROR when SC_TEA_INIT wasn't called first
+	instead of calling it as that inlines it each time in shell code.
+	Changed Windows CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE to use -O2 instead of -Oti.
+	Noted TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=nodots for Windows builds.
+	A few changes to support itcl (and perhaps others):
+	Added support for making your own stub libraries to SC_MAKE_LIB.
+	New SC_PATH_CONFIG and SC_LOAD_CONFIG that take a package name arg
+	and find that ${pkg}Config.sh file.  itk uses this for itcl.
+
+2002-03-27  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: made SC_LOAD_TKCONFIG recognize when working with a Tk
+	build dir setup.
+	Added EXTRA_CFLAGS and SHLIB_LD_LIBS substs to SC_CONFIG_CFLAGS.
+	Added XLIBSW onto LIBS when it is defined.
+	Remove TCL_LIBS from MAKE_LIB and correctly use SHLIB_LD_LIBS
+	instead to not rely as much on tclConfig.sh cached info.
+	Add TK_BIN_DIR to paths to find wish in SC_PROG_WISH.
+	These move towards making TEA much more independent of *Config.sh.
+
+2002-03-19  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: corrected forgotten (UN)SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX and
+	SHLIB_SUFFIX defines for Win.
+	(SC_PATH_X): made this only do the check on unix platforms.
+
+2002-03-12  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* README.txt: updated to reflect fewer files
+
+2002-03-06  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* config.guess (removed):
+	* config.sub (removed): removed unnecessary files
+
+	* installFile.tcl (removed):
+	* mkinstalldirs (removed): these aren't really necessary for
+	making TEA work
+
+	* tcl.m4 (SC_PUBLIC_TCL_HEADERS, SC_PUBLIC_TK_HEADERS): don't
+	check /usr(/local)/include for includes on Windows when not using
+	gcc
+
+2002-03-05  Jeff Hobbs  <jeffh@ActiveState.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: added warnings on Windows, removed RELPATH define and
+	added TCL_LIBS to MAKE_LIB macro.
+
+	This import represents 2.0.0, or a new start at attempting to
+	make TEA much easier for C extension developers.
+
+	**** moved from tclpro project to core tcl project, ****
+	**** renamed to 'tclconfig'                         ****
+
+2001-03-15    Karl Lehenbauer <karl@procplace.com>
+
+	* installFile.tcl: Added updating of the modification time of
+	  the target file whether we overwrote it or decided that it
+	  hadn't changed.  This was necessary for us to be able to
+	  determine whether or not a module install touched the file.
+
+2001-03-08    Karl Lehenbauer <karl@procplace.com>
+
+	* installFile.tcl: Added support for converting new-style (1.1+)
+	  Cygnus drive paths to Tcl-style.
+
+2001-01-15    <brent.welch@interwoven.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Added FreeBSD clause.
+
+2001-01-03    <brent.welch@interwoven.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Fixed typo in SC_LIB_SPEC where it is checking
+	for exec-prefix.
+
+2000-12-01    <brent.welch@interwoven.com>
+
+	* tcl.m4: Concatenated most of the Ajuba acsite.m4 file
+	so we don't need to modify the autoconf installation.
+	* config.guess:
+	* config.sub:
+	* installFile.tcl:
+	Added files from the itcl config subdirectory,
+	which should go away.
+
+2000-7-29    <welch@ajubasolutions.com>
+
+	* Fixed the use of TCL_SRC_DIR and TK_SRC_DIR within
+	TCL_PRIVATE_INCLUDES and TK_PRIVATE_INCLUDES to match their recent
+	change from $(srcdir) to $(srcdir)/..
diff --git a/tkblt/tclconfig/README.txt b/tkblt/tclconfig/README.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..59b5a3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tclconfig/README.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+These files comprise the basic building blocks for a Tcl Extension
+Architecture (TEA) extension.  For more information on TEA see:
+
+	http://www.tcl.tk/doc/tea/
+
+This package is part of the Tcl project at SourceForge, and latest
+sources should be available there:
+
+	http://tcl.sourceforge.net/
+
+This package is a freely available open source package.  You can do
+virtually anything you like with it, such as modifying it, redistributing
+it, and selling it either in whole or in part.
+
+CONTENTS
+========
+The following is a short description of the files you will find in
+the sample extension.
+
+README.txt	This file
+
+install-sh	Program used for copying binaries and script files
+		to their install locations.
+
+tcl.m4		Collection of Tcl autoconf macros.  Included by a package's
+		aclocal.m4 to define TEA_* macros.
diff --git a/tkblt/tclconfig/install-sh b/tkblt/tclconfig/install-sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..7c34c3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tclconfig/install-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,528 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# install - install a program, script, or datafile
+
+scriptversion=2011-04-20.01; # UTC
+
+# This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was
+# later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the
+# following copyright and license.
+#
+# Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium
+#
+# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
+# of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
+# deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
+# rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+# sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
+# furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
+#
+# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
+# all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+#
+# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+# IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+# X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
+# AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
+# TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+#
+# Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not
+# be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal-
+# ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor-
+# tium.
+#
+#
+# FSF changes to this file are in the public domain.
+#
+# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
+# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
+# when there is no Makefile.
+#
+# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
+# from scratch.
+
+nl='
+'
+IFS=" ""	$nl"
+
+# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
+
+# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
+doit=${DOITPROG-}
+if test -z "$doit"; then
+  doit_exec=exec
+else
+  doit_exec=$doit
+fi
+
+# Put in absolute file names if you don't have them in your path;
+# or use environment vars.
+
+chgrpprog=${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}
+chmodprog=${CHMODPROG-chmod}
+chownprog=${CHOWNPROG-chown}
+cmpprog=${CMPPROG-cmp}
+cpprog=${CPPROG-cp}
+mkdirprog=${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}
+mvprog=${MVPROG-mv}
+rmprog=${RMPROG-rm}
+stripprog=${STRIPPROG-strip}
+
+posix_glob='?'
+initialize_posix_glob='
+  test "$posix_glob" != "?" || {
+    if (set -f) 2>/dev/null; then
+      posix_glob=
+    else
+      posix_glob=:
+    fi
+  }
+'
+
+posix_mkdir=
+
+# Desired mode of installed file.
+mode=0755
+
+chgrpcmd=
+chmodcmd=$chmodprog
+chowncmd=
+mvcmd=$mvprog
+rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+stripcmd=
+
+src=
+dst=
+dir_arg=
+dst_arg=
+
+copy_on_change=false
+no_target_directory=
+
+usage="\
+Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [-T] SRCFILE DSTFILE
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... SRCFILES... DIRECTORY
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SRCFILES...
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORIES...
+
+In the 1st form, copy SRCFILE to DSTFILE.
+In the 2nd and 3rd, copy all SRCFILES to DIRECTORY.
+In the 4th, create DIRECTORIES.
+
+Options:
+     --help     display this help and exit.
+     --version  display version info and exit.
+
+  -c            (ignored)
+  -C            install only if different (preserve the last data modification time)
+  -d            create directories instead of installing files.
+  -g GROUP      $chgrpprog installed files to GROUP.
+  -m MODE       $chmodprog installed files to MODE.
+  -o USER       $chownprog installed files to USER.
+  -s            $stripprog installed files.
+  -S            $stripprog installed files.
+  -t DIRECTORY  install into DIRECTORY.
+  -T            report an error if DSTFILE is a directory.
+
+Environment variables override the default commands:
+  CHGRPPROG CHMODPROG CHOWNPROG CMPPROG CPPROG MKDIRPROG MVPROG
+  RMPROG STRIPPROG
+"
+
+while test $# -ne 0; do
+  case $1 in
+    -c) ;;
+
+    -C) copy_on_change=true;;
+
+    -d) dir_arg=true;;
+
+    -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
+	shift;;
+
+    --help) echo "$usage"; exit $?;;
+
+    -m) mode=$2
+	case $mode in
+	  *' '* | *'	'* | *'
+'*	  | *'*'* | *'?'* | *'['*)
+	    echo "$0: invalid mode: $mode" >&2
+	    exit 1;;
+	esac
+	shift;;
+
+    -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
+	shift;;
+
+    -s) stripcmd=$stripprog;;
+
+    -S) stripcmd="$stripprog $2"
+	shift;;
+
+    -t) dst_arg=$2
+	shift;;
+
+    -T) no_target_directory=true;;
+
+    --version) echo "$0 $scriptversion"; exit $?;;
+
+    --)	shift
+	break;;
+
+    -*)	echo "$0: invalid option: $1" >&2
+	exit 1;;
+
+    *)  break;;
+  esac
+  shift
+done
+
+if test $# -ne 0 && test -z "$dir_arg$dst_arg"; then
+  # When -d is used, all remaining arguments are directories to create.
+  # When -t is used, the destination is already specified.
+  # Otherwise, the last argument is the destination.  Remove it from $@.
+  for arg
+  do
+    if test -n "$dst_arg"; then
+      # $@ is not empty: it contains at least $arg.
+      set fnord "$@" "$dst_arg"
+      shift # fnord
+    fi
+    shift # arg
+    dst_arg=$arg
+  done
+fi
+
+if test $# -eq 0; then
+  if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
+    echo "$0: no input file specified." >&2
+    exit 1
+  fi
+  # It's OK to call `install-sh -d' without argument.
+  # This can happen when creating conditional directories.
+  exit 0
+fi
+
+if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
+  do_exit='(exit $ret); exit $ret'
+  trap "ret=129; $do_exit" 1
+  trap "ret=130; $do_exit" 2
+  trap "ret=141; $do_exit" 13
+  trap "ret=143; $do_exit" 15
+
+  # Set umask so as not to create temps with too-generous modes.
+  # However, 'strip' requires both read and write access to temps.
+  case $mode in
+    # Optimize common cases.
+    *644) cp_umask=133;;
+    *755) cp_umask=22;;
+
+    *[0-7])
+      if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
+	u_plus_rw=
+      else
+	u_plus_rw='% 200'
+      fi
+      cp_umask=`expr '(' 777 - $mode % 1000 ')' $u_plus_rw`;;
+    *)
+      if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
+	u_plus_rw=
+      else
+	u_plus_rw=,u+rw
+      fi
+      cp_umask=$mode$u_plus_rw;;
+  esac
+fi
+
+for src
+do
+  # Protect names starting with `-'.
+  case $src in
+    -*) src=./$src;;
+  esac
+
+  if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+    dst=$src
+    dstdir=$dst
+    test -d "$dstdir"
+    dstdir_status=$?
+  else
+
+    # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$cpprog $src $dsttmp" command
+    # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
+    # if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
+    if test ! -f "$src" && test ! -d "$src"; then
+      echo "$0: $src does not exist." >&2
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+    if test -z "$dst_arg"; then
+      echo "$0: no destination specified." >&2
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+    dst=$dst_arg
+    # Protect names starting with `-'.
+    case $dst in
+      -*) dst=./$dst;;
+    esac
+
+    # If destination is a directory, append the input filename; won't work
+    # if double slashes aren't ignored.
+    if test -d "$dst"; then
+      if test -n "$no_target_directory"; then
+	echo "$0: $dst_arg: Is a directory" >&2
+	exit 1
+      fi
+      dstdir=$dst
+      dst=$dstdir/`basename "$src"`
+      dstdir_status=0
+    else
+      # Prefer dirname, but fall back on a substitute if dirname fails.
+      dstdir=`
+	(dirname "$dst") 2>/dev/null ||
+	expr X"$dst" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
+	     X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
+	     X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
+	     X"$dst" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
+	echo X"$dst" |
+	    sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
+		   s//\1/
+		   q
+		 }
+		 /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
+		   s//\1/
+		   q
+		 }
+		 /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
+		   s//\1/
+		   q
+		 }
+		 /^X\(\/\).*/{
+		   s//\1/
+		   q
+		 }
+		 s/.*/./; q'
+      `
+
+      test -d "$dstdir"
+      dstdir_status=$?
+    fi
+  fi
+
+  obsolete_mkdir_used=false
+
+  if test $dstdir_status != 0; then
+    case $posix_mkdir in
+      '')
+	# Create intermediate dirs using mode 755 as modified by the umask.
+	# This is like FreeBSD 'install' as of 1997-10-28.
+	umask=`umask`
+	case $stripcmd.$umask in
+	  # Optimize common cases.
+	  *[2367][2367]) mkdir_umask=$umask;;
+	  .*0[02][02] | .[02][02] | .[02]) mkdir_umask=22;;
+
+	  *[0-7])
+	    mkdir_umask=`expr $umask + 22 \
+	      - $umask % 100 % 40 + $umask % 20 \
+	      - $umask % 10 % 4 + $umask % 2
+	    `;;
+	  *) mkdir_umask=$umask,go-w;;
+	esac
+
+	# With -d, create the new directory with the user-specified mode.
+	# Otherwise, rely on $mkdir_umask.
+	if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+	  mkdir_mode=-m$mode
+	else
+	  mkdir_mode=
+	fi
+
+	posix_mkdir=false
+	case $umask in
+	  *[123567][0-7][0-7])
+	    # POSIX mkdir -p sets u+wx bits regardless of umask, which
+	    # is incompatible with FreeBSD 'install' when (umask & 300) != 0.
+	    ;;
+	  *)
+	    tmpdir=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/ins$RANDOM-$$
+	    trap 'ret=$?; rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir" 2>/dev/null; exit $ret' 0
+
+	    if (umask $mkdir_umask &&
+		exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$tmpdir/d") >/dev/null 2>&1
+	    then
+	      if test -z "$dir_arg" || {
+		   # Check for POSIX incompatibilities with -m.
+		   # HP-UX 11.23 and IRIX 6.5 mkdir -m -p sets group- or
+		   # other-writeable bit of parent directory when it shouldn't.
+		   # FreeBSD 6.1 mkdir -m -p sets mode of existing directory.
+		   ls_ld_tmpdir=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"`
+		   case $ls_ld_tmpdir in
+		     d????-?r-*) different_mode=700;;
+		     d????-?--*) different_mode=755;;
+		     *) false;;
+		   esac &&
+		   $mkdirprog -m$different_mode -p -- "$tmpdir" && {
+		     ls_ld_tmpdir_1=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"`
+		     test "$ls_ld_tmpdir" = "$ls_ld_tmpdir_1"
+		   }
+		 }
+	      then posix_mkdir=:
+	      fi
+	      rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir"
+	    else
+	      # Remove any dirs left behind by ancient mkdir implementations.
+	      rmdir ./$mkdir_mode ./-p ./-- 2>/dev/null
+	    fi
+	    trap '' 0;;
+	esac;;
+    esac
+
+    if
+      $posix_mkdir && (
+	umask $mkdir_umask &&
+	$doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir"
+      )
+    then :
+    else
+
+      # The umask is ridiculous, or mkdir does not conform to POSIX,
+      # or it failed possibly due to a race condition.  Create the
+      # directory the slow way, step by step, checking for races as we go.
+
+      case $dstdir in
+	/*) prefix='/';;
+	-*) prefix='./';;
+	*)  prefix='';;
+      esac
+
+      eval "$initialize_posix_glob"
+
+      oIFS=$IFS
+      IFS=/
+      $posix_glob set -f
+      set fnord $dstdir
+      shift
+      $posix_glob set +f
+      IFS=$oIFS
+
+      prefixes=
+
+      for d
+      do
+	test -z "$d" && continue
+
+	prefix=$prefix$d
+	if test -d "$prefix"; then
+	  prefixes=
+	else
+	  if $posix_mkdir; then
+	    (umask=$mkdir_umask &&
+	     $doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir") && break
+	    # Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
+	    test -d "$prefix" || exit 1
+	  else
+	    case $prefix in
+	      *\'*) qprefix=`echo "$prefix" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;;
+	      *) qprefix=$prefix;;
+	    esac
+	    prefixes="$prefixes '$qprefix'"
+	  fi
+	fi
+	prefix=$prefix/
+      done
+
+      if test -n "$prefixes"; then
+	# Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
+	(umask $mkdir_umask &&
+	 eval "\$doit_exec \$mkdirprog $prefixes") ||
+	  test -d "$dstdir" || exit 1
+	obsolete_mkdir_used=true
+      fi
+    fi
+  fi
+
+  if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+    { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dst"; } &&
+    { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dst"; } &&
+    { test "$obsolete_mkdir_used$chowncmd$chgrpcmd" = false ||
+      test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dst"; } || exit 1
+  else
+
+    # Make a couple of temp file names in the proper directory.
+    dsttmp=$dstdir/_inst.$$_
+    rmtmp=$dstdir/_rm.$$_
+
+    # Trap to clean up those temp files at exit.
+    trap 'ret=$?; rm -f "$dsttmp" "$rmtmp" && exit $ret' 0
+
+    # Copy the file name to the temp name.
+    (umask $cp_umask && $doit_exec $cpprog "$src" "$dsttmp") &&
+
+    # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits.
+    #
+    # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing.  If we want to
+    # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
+    # errors from the above "$doit $cpprog $src $dsttmp" command.
+    #
+    { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
+    { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
+    { test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit $stripcmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
+    { test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dsttmp"; } &&
+
+    # If -C, don't bother to copy if it wouldn't change the file.
+    if $copy_on_change &&
+       old=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dst"	2>/dev/null` &&
+       new=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dsttmp"	2>/dev/null` &&
+
+       eval "$initialize_posix_glob" &&
+       $posix_glob set -f &&
+       set X $old && old=:$2:$4:$5:$6 &&
+       set X $new && new=:$2:$4:$5:$6 &&
+       $posix_glob set +f &&
+
+       test "$old" = "$new" &&
+       $cmpprog "$dst" "$dsttmp" >/dev/null 2>&1
+    then
+      rm -f "$dsttmp"
+    else
+      # Rename the file to the real destination.
+      $doit $mvcmd -f "$dsttmp" "$dst" 2>/dev/null ||
+
+      # The rename failed, perhaps because mv can't rename something else
+      # to itself, or perhaps because mv is so ancient that it does not
+      # support -f.
+      {
+	# Now remove or move aside any old file at destination location.
+	# We try this two ways since rm can't unlink itself on some
+	# systems and the destination file might be busy for other
+	# reasons.  In this case, the final cleanup might fail but the new
+	# file should still install successfully.
+	{
+	  test ! -f "$dst" ||
+	  $doit $rmcmd -f "$dst" 2>/dev/null ||
+	  { $doit $mvcmd -f "$dst" "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null &&
+	    { $doit $rmcmd -f "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null; :; }
+	  } ||
+	  { echo "$0: cannot unlink or rename $dst" >&2
+	    (exit 1); exit 1
+	  }
+	} &&
+
+	# Now rename the file to the real destination.
+	$doit $mvcmd "$dsttmp" "$dst"
+      }
+    fi || exit 1
+
+    trap '' 0
+  fi
+done
+
+# Local variables:
+# eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
+# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+# time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC"
+# time-stamp-end: "; # UTC"
+# End:
diff --git a/tkblt/tclconfig/tcl.m4 b/tkblt/tclconfig/tcl.m4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c20634
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tclconfig/tcl.m4
@@ -0,0 +1,4176 @@
+# tcl.m4 --
+#
+#	This file provides a set of autoconf macros to help TEA-enable
+#	a Tcl extension.
+#
+# Copyright (c) 1999-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
+# Copyright (c) 2002-2005 ActiveState Corporation.
+#
+# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+
+AC_PREREQ(2.57)
+
+# Possible values for key variables defined:
+#
+# TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM - win32 aqua x11 (mirrors 'tk windowingsystem')
+# TEA_PLATFORM        - windows unix
+# TEA_TK_EXTENSION    - True if this is a Tk extension
+#
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PATH_TCLCONFIG --
+#
+#	Locate the tclConfig.sh file and perform a sanity check on
+#	the Tcl compile flags
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--with-tcl=...
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		TCL_BIN_DIR	Full path to the directory containing
+#				the tclConfig.sh file
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PATH_TCLCONFIG], [
+    dnl TEA specific: Make sure we are initialized
+    AC_REQUIRE([TEA_INIT])
+    #
+    # Ok, lets find the tcl configuration
+    # First, look for one uninstalled.
+    # the alternative search directory is invoked by --with-tcl
+    #
+
+    if test x"${no_tcl}" = x ; then
+	# we reset no_tcl in case something fails here
+	no_tcl=true
+	AC_ARG_WITH(tcl,
+	    AC_HELP_STRING([--with-tcl],
+		[directory containing tcl configuration (tclConfig.sh)]),
+	    with_tclconfig="${withval}")
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Tcl configuration])
+	AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_c_tclconfig,[
+
+	    # First check to see if --with-tcl was specified.
+	    if test x"${with_tclconfig}" != x ; then
+		case "${with_tclconfig}" in
+		    */tclConfig.sh )
+			if test -f "${with_tclconfig}"; then
+			    AC_MSG_WARN([--with-tcl argument should refer to directory containing tclConfig.sh, not to tclConfig.sh itself])
+			    with_tclconfig="`echo "${with_tclconfig}" | sed 's!/tclConfig\.sh$!!'`"
+			fi ;;
+		esac
+		if test -f "${with_tclconfig}/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd "${with_tclconfig}"; pwd)`"
+		else
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([${with_tclconfig} directory doesn't contain tclConfig.sh])
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    # then check for a private Tcl installation
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # on Darwin, check in Framework installation locations
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin" -a x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ~/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Network/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /System/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Network/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/System/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/Tcl.framework/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/Tcl.framework; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # TEA specific: on Windows, check in common installation locations
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+		-a x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d C:/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d C:/Progra~1/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few common install locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tcl8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tcl8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tcl8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tcl8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few other private locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			${srcdir}/../tcl \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tclconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+	])
+
+	if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
+	    TCL_BIN_DIR="# no Tcl configs found"
+	    AC_MSG_ERROR([Can't find Tcl configuration definitions. Use --with-tcl to specify a directory containing tclConfig.sh])
+	else
+	    no_tcl=
+	    TCL_BIN_DIR="${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}"
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([found ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PATH_TKCONFIG --
+#
+#	Locate the tkConfig.sh file
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--with-tk=...
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		TK_BIN_DIR	Full path to the directory containing
+#				the tkConfig.sh file
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PATH_TKCONFIG], [
+    #
+    # Ok, lets find the tk configuration
+    # First, look for one uninstalled.
+    # the alternative search directory is invoked by --with-tk
+    #
+
+    if test x"${no_tk}" = x ; then
+	# we reset no_tk in case something fails here
+	no_tk=true
+	AC_ARG_WITH(tk,
+	    AC_HELP_STRING([--with-tk],
+		[directory containing tk configuration (tkConfig.sh)]),
+	    with_tkconfig="${withval}")
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Tk configuration])
+	AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_c_tkconfig,[
+
+	    # First check to see if --with-tkconfig was specified.
+	    if test x"${with_tkconfig}" != x ; then
+		case "${with_tkconfig}" in
+		    */tkConfig.sh )
+			if test -f "${with_tkconfig}"; then
+			    AC_MSG_WARN([--with-tk argument should refer to directory containing tkConfig.sh, not to tkConfig.sh itself])
+			    with_tkconfig="`echo "${with_tkconfig}" | sed 's!/tkConfig\.sh$!!'`"
+			fi ;;
+		esac
+		if test -f "${with_tkconfig}/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd "${with_tkconfig}"; pwd)`"
+		else
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([${with_tkconfig} directory doesn't contain tkConfig.sh])
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    # then check for a private Tk library
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			../tk \
+			`ls -dr ../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../tk \
+			`ls -dr ../../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../../tk \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # on Darwin, check in Framework installation locations
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin" -a x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ~/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Network/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /System/Library/Frameworks 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/Network/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/Platforms/MacOSX.platform/Developer/SDKs/MacOSX.sdk/System/Library/Frameworks/Tcl.framework 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/Tk.framework/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/Tk.framework; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few common install locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tk8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib/tk8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tk8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tk8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tk8.6 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib/tcl/tk8.5 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # TEA specific: on Windows, check in common installation locations
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+		-a x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d C:/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d C:/Progra~1/Tcl/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few other private locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			${srcdir}/../tk \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tk[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` ; do
+		    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" \
+			    -a -f "$i/win/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/win; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_tkconfig="`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`"
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+	])
+
+	if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}" = x ; then
+	    TK_BIN_DIR="# no Tk configs found"
+	    AC_MSG_ERROR([Can't find Tk configuration definitions. Use --with-tk to specify a directory containing tkConfig.sh])
+	else
+	    no_tk=
+	    TK_BIN_DIR="${ac_cv_c_tkconfig}"
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([found ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG --
+#
+#	Load the tclConfig.sh file
+#
+# Arguments:
+#
+#	Requires the following vars to be set:
+#		TCL_BIN_DIR
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		TCL_BIN_DIR
+#		TCL_SRC_DIR
+#		TCL_LIB_FILE
+#		TCL_ZIP_FILE
+#		TCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for existence of ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh])
+
+    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh" ; then
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([loading])
+	. "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh"
+    else
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([could not find ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclConfig.sh])
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TCL_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TCL_LIB_FILE=\"${TCL_LIB_FILE}\""
+    eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}\""
+
+    # If the TCL_BIN_DIR is the build directory (not the install directory),
+    # then set the common variable name to the value of the build variables.
+    # For example, the variable TCL_LIB_SPEC will be set to the value
+    # of TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC. An extension should make use of TCL_LIB_SPEC
+    # instead of TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC since it will work with both an
+    # installed and uninstalled version of Tcl.
+    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        TCL_LIB_SPEC="${TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC="${TCL_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TCL_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TCL_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH}"
+    elif test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+	# If Tcl was built as a framework, attempt to use the libraries
+	# from the framework at the given location so that linking works
+	# against Tcl.framework installed in an arbitrary location.
+	case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+	    *TCL_FRAMEWORK*)
+		if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    for i in "`cd "${TCL_BIN_DIR}"; pwd`" \
+			     "`cd "${TCL_BIN_DIR}"/../..; pwd`"; do
+			if test "`basename "$i"`" = "${TCL_LIB_FILE}.framework"; then
+			    TCL_LIB_SPEC="-F`dirname "$i" | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` -framework ${TCL_LIB_FILE}"
+			    break
+			fi
+		    done
+		fi
+		if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`echo "${TCL_BIN_DIR}"  | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+		    TCL_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+		fi
+		;;
+	esac
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TCL_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TCL_LIB_FLAG=\"${TCL_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TCL_LIB_SPEC=\"${TCL_LIB_SPEC}\""
+    eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC}\""
+
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_VERSION)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_PATCH_LEVEL)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_BIN_DIR)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_SRC_DIR)
+
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_LIB_FILE)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_LIB_FLAG)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_LIB_SPEC)
+
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC)
+
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([platform])
+    hold_cc=$CC; CC="$TCL_CC"
+    AC_TRY_COMPILE(,[
+	    #ifdef _WIN32
+		#error win32
+	    #endif
+	], [
+	    TEA_PLATFORM="unix"
+	    CYGPATH=echo
+	], [
+	    TEA_PLATFORM="windows"
+	    AC_CHECK_PROG(CYGPATH, cygpath, cygpath -m, echo)	]
+    )
+    CC=$hold_cc
+    AC_MSG_RESULT($TEA_PLATFORM)
+
+    # The BUILD_$pkg is to define the correct extern storage class
+    # handling when making this package
+    AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(BUILD_${PACKAGE_NAME}, [],
+	    [Building extension source?])
+    # Do this here as we have fully defined TEA_PLATFORM now
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	EXEEXT=".exe"
+	CLEANFILES="$CLEANFILES *.lib *.dll *.pdb *.exp"
+    fi
+
+    # TEA specific:
+    AC_SUBST(CLEANFILES)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_LIBS)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_DEFS)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_EXTRA_CFLAGS)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_LD_FLAGS)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_SHLIB_LD_LIBS)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG --
+#
+#	Load the tkConfig.sh file
+#
+# Arguments:
+#
+#	Requires the following vars to be set:
+#		TK_BIN_DIR
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Sets the following vars that should be in tkConfig.sh:
+#		TK_BIN_DIR
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for existence of ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh])
+
+    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh" ; then
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([loading])
+	. "${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh"
+    else
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([could not find ${TK_BIN_DIR}/tkConfig.sh])
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TK_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TK_LIB_FILE=\"${TK_LIB_FILE}\""
+    eval "TK_STUB_LIB_FILE=\"${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}\""
+
+    # If the TK_BIN_DIR is the build directory (not the install directory),
+    # then set the common variable name to the value of the build variables.
+    # For example, the variable TK_LIB_SPEC will be set to the value
+    # of TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC. An extension should make use of TK_LIB_SPEC
+    # instead of TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC since it will work with both an
+    # installed and uninstalled version of Tcl.
+    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        TK_LIB_SPEC="${TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="${TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+        TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH}"
+    elif test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+	# If Tk was built as a framework, attempt to use the libraries
+	# from the framework at the given location so that linking works
+	# against Tk.framework installed in an arbitrary location.
+	case ${TK_DEFS} in
+	    *TK_FRAMEWORK*)
+		if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    for i in "`cd "${TK_BIN_DIR}"; pwd`" \
+			     "`cd "${TK_BIN_DIR}"/../..; pwd`"; do
+			if test "`basename "$i"`" = "${TK_LIB_FILE}.framework"; then
+			    TK_LIB_SPEC="-F`dirname "$i" | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` -framework ${TK_LIB_FILE}"
+			    break
+			fi
+		    done
+		fi
+		if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}"; then
+		    TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L` echo "${TK_BIN_DIR}"  | sed -e 's/ /\\\\ /g'` ${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+		    TK_STUB_LIB_PATH="${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+		fi
+		;;
+	esac
+    fi
+
+    # eval is required to do the TK_DBGX substitution
+    eval "TK_LIB_FLAG=\"${TK_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TK_LIB_SPEC=\"${TK_LIB_SPEC}\""
+    eval "TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG=\"${TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG}\""
+    eval "TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC=\"${TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC}\""
+
+    # TEA specific: Ensure windowingsystem is defined
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "unix" ; then
+	case ${TK_DEFS} in
+	    *MAC_OSX_TK*)
+		AC_DEFINE(MAC_OSX_TK, 1, [Are we building against Mac OS X TkAqua?])
+		TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM="aqua"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM="x11"
+		;;
+	esac
+    elif test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM="win32"
+    fi
+
+    AC_SUBST(TK_VERSION)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_BIN_DIR)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_SRC_DIR)
+
+    AC_SUBST(TK_LIB_FILE)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_LIB_FLAG)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_LIB_SPEC)
+
+    AC_SUBST(TK_STUB_LIB_FILE)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_STUB_LIB_FLAG)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC)
+
+    # TEA specific:
+    AC_SUBST(TK_LIBS)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_XINCLUDES)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PROG_TCLSH
+#	Determine the fully qualified path name of the tclsh executable
+#	in the Tcl build directory or the tclsh installed in a bin
+#	directory. This macro will correctly determine the name
+#	of the tclsh executable even if tclsh has not yet been
+#	built in the build directory. The tclsh found is always
+#	associated with a tclConfig.sh file. This tclsh should be used
+#	only for running extension test cases. It should never be
+#	or generation of files (like pkgIndex.tcl) at build time.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		TCLSH_PROG
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PROG_TCLSH], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for tclsh])
+    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        # tclConfig.sh is in Tcl build directory
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+          if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}s${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}s${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}"
+          fi
+        else
+            TCLSH_PROG="${TCL_BIN_DIR}/tclsh"
+        fi
+    else
+        # tclConfig.sh is in install location
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+            TCLSH_PROG="tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+        else
+            TCLSH_PROG="tclsh${TCL_MAJOR_VERSION}.${TCL_MINOR_VERSION}${TCL_DBGX}"
+        fi
+        list="`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../bin 2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/..     2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TCL_PREFIX}/bin     2>/dev/null`"
+        for i in $list ; do
+            if test -f "$i/${TCLSH_PROG}" ; then
+                REAL_TCL_BIN_DIR="`cd "$i"; pwd`/"
+                break
+            fi
+        done
+        TCLSH_PROG="${REAL_TCL_BIN_DIR}${TCLSH_PROG}"
+    fi
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([${TCLSH_PROG}])
+    AC_SUBST(TCLSH_PROG)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PROG_WISH
+#	Determine the fully qualified path name of the wish executable
+#	in the Tk build directory or the wish installed in a bin
+#	directory. This macro will correctly determine the name
+#	of the wish executable even if wish has not yet been
+#	built in the build directory. The wish found is always
+#	associated with a tkConfig.sh file. This wish should be used
+#	only for running extension test cases. It should never be
+#	or generation of files (like pkgIndex.tcl) at build time.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		WISH_PROG
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PROG_WISH], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for wish])
+    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+        # tkConfig.sh is in Tk build directory
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+          if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}s${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}$s{EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}t${EXEEXT}"
+          elif test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}" ; then
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}st${EXEEXT}"
+          fi
+        else
+            WISH_PROG="${TK_BIN_DIR}/wish"
+        fi
+    else
+        # tkConfig.sh is in install location
+        if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+            WISH_PROG="wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}${EXEEXT}"
+        else
+            WISH_PROG="wish${TK_MAJOR_VERSION}.${TK_MINOR_VERSION}${TK_DBGX}"
+        fi
+        list="`ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/../bin 2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/..     2>/dev/null` \
+              `ls -d ${TK_PREFIX}/bin     2>/dev/null`"
+        for i in $list ; do
+            if test -f "$i/${WISH_PROG}" ; then
+                REAL_TK_BIN_DIR="`cd "$i"; pwd`/"
+                break
+            fi
+        done
+        WISH_PROG="${REAL_TK_BIN_DIR}${WISH_PROG}"
+    fi
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([${WISH_PROG}])
+    AC_SUBST(WISH_PROG)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ENABLE_SHARED --
+#
+#	Allows the building of shared libraries
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--enable-shared=yes|no
+#		--enable-stubs=yes|no
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		STATIC_BUILD	Used for building import/export libraries
+#				on Windows.
+#
+#	Sets the following vars:
+#		SHARED_BUILD	Value of 1 or 0
+#               STUBS_BUILD     Value if 1 or 0
+#               USE_TCL_STUBS   Value true: if SHARED_BUILD or --enable-stubs
+#               USE_TCLOO_STUBS Value true: if SHARED_BUILD or --enable-stubs
+#               USE_TK_STUBS    Value true: if SHARED_BUILD or --enable-stubs
+#                                AND TEA_WINDOWING_SYSTEM != ""
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ENABLE_SHARED], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([how to build libraries])
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(shared,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-shared],
+	    [build and link with shared libraries (default: on)]),
+	[shared_ok=$enableval], [shared_ok=yes])
+
+    if test "${enable_shared+set}" = set; then
+	enableval="$enable_shared"
+	shared_ok=$enableval
+    else
+	shared_ok=yes
+    fi
+
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(stubs,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-stubs],
+	    [build and link with stub libraries. Always true for shared builds (default: on)]),
+	[stubs_ok=$enableval], [stubs_ok=yes])
+
+    if test "${enable_stubs+set}" = set; then
+	enableval="$enable_stubs"
+	stubs_ok=$enableval
+    else
+	stubs_ok=yes
+    fi
+
+    # Stubs are always enabled for shared builds
+    if test "$shared_ok" = "yes" ; then
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([shared])
+	SHARED_BUILD=1
+        STUBS_BUILD=1
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([static])
+	SHARED_BUILD=0
+	AC_DEFINE(STATIC_BUILD, 1, [This a static build])
+        if test "$stubs_ok" = "yes" ; then
+          STUBS_BUILD=1
+        else
+          STUBS_BUILD=0
+        fi
+    fi
+    if test "${STUBS_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+      AC_DEFINE(USE_TCL_STUBS, 1, [Use Tcl stubs])
+      AC_DEFINE(USE_TCLOO_STUBS, 1, [Use TclOO stubs])
+      if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" != ""; then
+        AC_DEFINE(USE_TK_STUBS, 1, [Use Tk stubs])
+      fi
+    fi
+
+    AC_SUBST(SHARED_BUILD)
+    AC_SUBST(STUBS_BUILD)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ENABLE_THREADS --
+#
+#	Specify if thread support should be enabled.  If "yes" is specified
+#	as an arg (optional), threads are enabled by default, "no" means
+#	threads are disabled.  "yes" is the default.
+#
+#	TCL_THREADS is checked so that if you are compiling an extension
+#	against a threaded core, your extension must be compiled threaded
+#	as well.
+#
+#	Note that it is legal to have a thread enabled extension run in a
+#	threaded or non-threaded Tcl core, but a non-threaded extension may
+#	only run in a non-threaded Tcl core.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--enable-threads
+#
+#	Sets the following vars:
+#		THREADS_LIBS	Thread library(s)
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		TCL_THREADS
+#		_REENTRANT
+#		_THREAD_SAFE
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ENABLE_THREADS], [
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(threads,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-threads],
+	    [build with threads (default: on)]),
+	[tcl_ok=$enableval], [tcl_ok=yes])
+
+    if test "${enable_threads+set}" = set; then
+	enableval="$enable_threads"
+	tcl_ok=$enableval
+    else
+	tcl_ok=yes
+    fi
+
+    if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes" -o "${TCL_THREADS}" = 1; then
+	TCL_THREADS=1
+
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" ; then
+	    # We are always OK on Windows, so check what this platform wants:
+
+	    # USE_THREAD_ALLOC tells us to try the special thread-based
+	    # allocator that significantly reduces lock contention
+	    AC_DEFINE(USE_THREAD_ALLOC, 1,
+		[Do we want to use the threaded memory allocator?])
+	    AC_DEFINE(_REENTRANT, 1, [Do we want the reentrant OS API?])
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "SunOS" ; then
+		AC_DEFINE(_POSIX_PTHREAD_SEMANTICS, 1,
+			[Do we really want to follow the standard? Yes we do!])
+	    fi
+	    AC_DEFINE(_THREAD_SAFE, 1, [Do we want the thread-safe OS API?])
+	    AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread,pthread_mutex_init,tcl_ok=yes,tcl_ok=no)
+	    if test "$tcl_ok" = "no"; then
+		# Check a little harder for __pthread_mutex_init in the same
+		# library, as some systems hide it there until pthread.h is
+		# defined.  We could alternatively do an AC_TRY_COMPILE with
+		# pthread.h, but that will work with libpthread really doesn't
+		# exist, like AIX 4.2.  [Bug: 4359]
+		AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread, __pthread_mutex_init,
+		    tcl_ok=yes, tcl_ok=no)
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+		# The space is needed
+		THREADS_LIBS=" -lpthread"
+	    else
+		AC_CHECK_LIB(pthreads, pthread_mutex_init,
+		    tcl_ok=yes, tcl_ok=no)
+		if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+		    # The space is needed
+		    THREADS_LIBS=" -lpthreads"
+		else
+		    AC_CHECK_LIB(c, pthread_mutex_init,
+			tcl_ok=yes, tcl_ok=no)
+		    if test "$tcl_ok" = "no"; then
+			AC_CHECK_LIB(c_r, pthread_mutex_init,
+			    tcl_ok=yes, tcl_ok=no)
+			if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+			    # The space is needed
+			    THREADS_LIBS=" -pthread"
+			else
+			    TCL_THREADS=0
+			    AC_MSG_WARN([Do not know how to find pthread lib on your system - thread support disabled])
+			fi
+		    fi
+		fi
+	    fi
+	fi
+    else
+	TCL_THREADS=0
+    fi
+    # Do checking message here to not mess up interleaved configure output
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for building with threads])
+    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = 1; then
+	AC_DEFINE(TCL_THREADS, 1, [Are we building with threads enabled?])
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([yes (default)])
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+    fi
+    # TCL_THREADS sanity checking.  See if our request for building with
+    # threads is the same as the way Tcl was built.  If not, warn the user.
+    case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+	*THREADS=1*)
+	    if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "0"; then
+		AC_MSG_WARN([
+    Building ${PACKAGE_NAME} without threads enabled, but building against Tcl
+    that IS thread-enabled.  It is recommended to use --enable-threads.])
+	    fi
+	    ;;
+    esac
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_THREADS)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ENABLE_SYMBOLS --
+#
+#	Specify if debugging symbols should be used.
+#	Memory (TCL_MEM_DEBUG) debugging can also be enabled.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+#	TEA varies from core Tcl in that C|LDFLAGS_DEFAULT receives
+#	the value of C|LDFLAGS_OPTIMIZE|DEBUG already substituted.
+#	Requires the following vars to be set in the Makefile:
+#		CFLAGS_DEFAULT
+#		LDFLAGS_DEFAULT
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--enable-symbols
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		CFLAGS_DEFAULT	Sets to $(CFLAGS_DEBUG) if true
+#				Sets to "$(CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE) -DNDEBUG" if false
+#		LDFLAGS_DEFAULT	Sets to $(LDFLAGS_DEBUG) if true
+#				Sets to $(LDFLAGS_OPTIMIZE) if false
+#		DBGX		Formerly used as debug library extension;
+#				always blank now.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ENABLE_SYMBOLS], [
+    dnl TEA specific: Make sure we are initialized
+    AC_REQUIRE([TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS])
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for build with symbols])
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(symbols,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-symbols],
+	    [build with debugging symbols (default: off)]),
+	[tcl_ok=$enableval], [tcl_ok=no])
+    DBGX=""
+    if test "$tcl_ok" = "no"; then
+	CFLAGS_DEFAULT="${CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE} -DNDEBUG"
+	LDFLAGS_DEFAULT="${LDFLAGS_OPTIMIZE}"
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+    else
+	CFLAGS_DEFAULT="${CFLAGS_DEBUG}"
+	LDFLAGS_DEFAULT="${LDFLAGS_DEBUG}"
+	if test "$tcl_ok" = "yes"; then
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([yes (standard debugging)])
+	fi
+    fi
+    # TEA specific:
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" ; then
+	LDFLAGS_DEFAULT="${LDFLAGS}"
+    fi
+    AC_SUBST(CFLAGS_DEFAULT)
+    AC_SUBST(LDFLAGS_DEFAULT)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_DBGX)
+
+    if test "$tcl_ok" = "mem" -o "$tcl_ok" = "all"; then
+	AC_DEFINE(TCL_MEM_DEBUG, 1, [Is memory debugging enabled?])
+    fi
+
+    if test "$tcl_ok" != "yes" -a "$tcl_ok" != "no"; then
+	if test "$tcl_ok" = "all"; then
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([enabled symbols mem debugging])
+	else
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([enabled $tcl_ok debugging])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ENABLE_LANGINFO --
+#
+#	Allows use of modern nl_langinfo check for better l10n.
+#	This is only relevant for Unix.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--enable-langinfo=yes|no (default is yes)
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		HAVE_LANGINFO	Triggers use of nl_langinfo if defined.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ENABLE_LANGINFO], [
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(langinfo,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-langinfo],
+	    [use nl_langinfo if possible to determine encoding at startup, otherwise use old heuristic (default: on)]),
+	[langinfo_ok=$enableval], [langinfo_ok=yes])
+
+    HAVE_LANGINFO=0
+    if test "$langinfo_ok" = "yes"; then
+	AC_CHECK_HEADER(langinfo.h,[langinfo_ok=yes],[langinfo_ok=no])
+    fi
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to use nl_langinfo])
+    if test "$langinfo_ok" = "yes"; then
+	AC_CACHE_VAL(tcl_cv_langinfo_h, [
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <langinfo.h>], [nl_langinfo(CODESET);],
+		    [tcl_cv_langinfo_h=yes],[tcl_cv_langinfo_h=no])])
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([$tcl_cv_langinfo_h])
+	if test $tcl_cv_langinfo_h = yes; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_LANGINFO, 1, [Do we have nl_langinfo()?])
+	fi
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([$langinfo_ok])
+    fi
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_CONFIG_SYSTEM
+#
+#	Determine what the system is (some things cannot be easily checked
+#	on a feature-driven basis, alas). This can usually be done via the
+#	"uname" command.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#	Defines the following var:
+#
+#	system -	System/platform/version identification code.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_CONFIG_SYSTEM], [
+    AC_CACHE_CHECK([system version], tcl_cv_sys_version, [
+	# TEA specific:
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	    tcl_cv_sys_version=windows
+	else
+	    tcl_cv_sys_version=`uname -s`-`uname -r`
+	    if test "$?" -ne 0 ; then
+		AC_MSG_WARN([can't find uname command])
+		tcl_cv_sys_version=unknown
+	    else
+		if test "`uname -s`" = "AIX" ; then
+		    tcl_cv_sys_version=AIX-`uname -v`.`uname -r`
+		fi
+	    fi
+	fi
+    ])
+    system=$tcl_cv_sys_version
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS
+#
+#	Try to determine the proper flags to pass to the compiler
+#	for building shared libraries and other such nonsense.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substitutes the following vars:
+#
+#	DL_OBJS, DL_LIBS - removed for TEA, only needed by core.
+#       LDFLAGS -      Flags to pass to the compiler when linking object
+#                       files into an executable application binary such
+#                       as tclsh.
+#       LD_SEARCH_FLAGS-Flags to pass to ld, such as "-R /usr/local/tcl/lib",
+#                       that tell the run-time dynamic linker where to look
+#                       for shared libraries such as libtcl.so.  Depends on
+#                       the variable LIB_RUNTIME_DIR in the Makefile. Could
+#                       be the same as CC_SEARCH_FLAGS if ${CC} is used to link.
+#       CC_SEARCH_FLAGS-Flags to pass to ${CC}, such as "-Wl,-rpath,/usr/local/tcl/lib",
+#                       that tell the run-time dynamic linker where to look
+#                       for shared libraries such as libtcl.so.  Depends on
+#                       the variable LIB_RUNTIME_DIR in the Makefile.
+#       SHLIB_CFLAGS -  Flags to pass to cc when compiling the components
+#                       of a shared library (may request position-independent
+#                       code, among other things).
+#       SHLIB_LD -      Base command to use for combining object files
+#                       into a shared library.
+#       SHLIB_LD_LIBS - Dependent libraries for the linker to scan when
+#                       creating shared libraries.  This symbol typically
+#                       goes at the end of the "ld" commands that build
+#                       shared libraries. The value of the symbol defaults to
+#                       "${LIBS}" if all of the dependent libraries should
+#                       be specified when creating a shared library.  If
+#                       dependent libraries should not be specified (as on
+#                       SunOS 4.x, where they cause the link to fail, or in
+#                       general if Tcl and Tk aren't themselves shared
+#                       libraries), then this symbol has an empty string
+#                       as its value.
+#       SHLIB_SUFFIX -  Suffix to use for the names of dynamically loadable
+#                       extensions.  An empty string means we don't know how
+#                       to use shared libraries on this platform.
+#       LIB_SUFFIX -    Specifies everything that comes after the "libfoo"
+#                       in a static or shared library name, using the $PACKAGE_VERSION variable
+#                       to put the version in the right place.  This is used
+#                       by platforms that need non-standard library names.
+#                       Examples:  ${PACKAGE_VERSION}.so.1.1 on NetBSD, since it needs
+#                       to have a version after the .so, and ${PACKAGE_VERSION}.a
+#                       on AIX, since a shared library needs to have
+#                       a .a extension whereas shared objects for loadable
+#                       extensions have a .so extension.  Defaults to
+#                       ${PACKAGE_VERSION}${SHLIB_SUFFIX}.
+#	CFLAGS_DEBUG -
+#			Flags used when running the compiler in debug mode
+#	CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE -
+#			Flags used when running the compiler in optimize mode
+#	CFLAGS -	Additional CFLAGS added as necessary (usually 64-bit)
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS], [
+    dnl TEA specific: Make sure we are initialized
+    AC_REQUIRE([TEA_INIT])
+
+    # Step 0.a: Enable 64 bit support?
+
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([if 64bit support is requested])
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(64bit,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-64bit],
+	    [enable 64bit support (default: off)]),
+	[do64bit=$enableval], [do64bit=no])
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([$do64bit])
+
+    # Step 0.b: Enable Solaris 64 bit VIS support?
+
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([if 64bit Sparc VIS support is requested])
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(64bit-vis,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-64bit-vis],
+	    [enable 64bit Sparc VIS support (default: off)]),
+	[do64bitVIS=$enableval], [do64bitVIS=no])
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([$do64bitVIS])
+    # Force 64bit on with VIS
+    AS_IF([test "$do64bitVIS" = "yes"], [do64bit=yes])
+
+    # Step 0.c: Check if visibility support is available. Do this here so
+    # that platform specific alternatives can be used below if this fails.
+
+    AC_CACHE_CHECK([if compiler supports visibility "hidden"],
+	tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden, [
+	hold_cflags=$CFLAGS; CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -Werror"
+	AC_TRY_LINK([
+	    extern __attribute__((__visibility__("hidden"))) void f(void);
+	    void f(void) {}], [f();], tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden=yes,
+	    tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden=no)
+	CFLAGS=$hold_cflags])
+    AS_IF([test $tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden = yes], [
+	AC_DEFINE(MODULE_SCOPE,
+	    [extern __attribute__((__visibility__("hidden")))],
+	    [Compiler support for module scope symbols])
+	AC_DEFINE(HAVE_HIDDEN, [1], [Compiler support for module scope symbols])
+    ])
+
+    # Step 0.d: Disable -rpath support?
+
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([if rpath support is requested])
+    AC_ARG_ENABLE(rpath,
+	AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-rpath],
+	    [disable rpath support (default: on)]),
+	[doRpath=$enableval], [doRpath=yes])
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([$doRpath])
+
+    # TEA specific: Cross-compiling options for Windows/CE builds?
+
+    AS_IF([test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = windows], [
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([if Windows/CE build is requested])
+	AC_ARG_ENABLE(wince,
+	    AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-wince],
+		[enable Win/CE support (where applicable)]),
+	    [doWince=$enableval], [doWince=no])
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([$doWince])
+    ])
+
+    # Set the variable "system" to hold the name and version number
+    # for the system.
+
+    TEA_CONFIG_SYSTEM
+
+    # Require ranlib early so we can override it in special cases below.
+
+    AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_RANLIB])
+
+    # Set configuration options based on system name and version.
+    # This is similar to Tcl's unix/tcl.m4 except that we've added a
+    # "windows" case and removed some core-only vars.
+
+    do64bit_ok=no
+    # default to '{$LIBS}' and set to "" on per-platform necessary basis
+    SHLIB_LD_LIBS='${LIBS}'
+    # When ld needs options to work in 64-bit mode, put them in
+    # LDFLAGS_ARCH so they eventually end up in LDFLAGS even if [load]
+    # is disabled by the user. [Bug 1016796]
+    LDFLAGS_ARCH=""
+    UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX=""
+    # TEA specific: use PACKAGE_VERSION instead of VERSION
+    TCL_TRIM_DOTS='`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`'
+    ECHO_VERSION='`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION}`'
+    TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=ok
+    CFLAGS_DEBUG=-g
+    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+	CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=-O2
+	CFLAGS_WARNING="-Wall"
+    ], [
+	CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=-O
+	CFLAGS_WARNING=""
+    ])
+    AC_CHECK_TOOL(AR, ar)
+    STLIB_LD='${AR} cr'
+    LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="LD_LIBRARY_PATH"
+    AS_IF([test "x$SHLIB_VERSION" = x],[SHLIB_VERSION=""],[SHLIB_VERSION=".$SHLIB_VERSION"])
+    case $system in
+	# TEA specific:
+	windows)
+	    # This is a 2-stage check to make sure we have the 64-bit SDK
+	    # We have to know where the SDK is installed.
+	    # This magic is based on MS Platform SDK for Win2003 SP1 - hobbs
+	    # MACHINE is IX86 for LINK, but this is used by the manifest,
+	    # which requires x86|amd64|ia64.
+	    MACHINE="X86"
+	    if test "$do64bit" != "no" ; then
+		if test "x${MSSDK}x" = "xx" ; then
+		    MSSDK="C:/Progra~1/Microsoft Platform SDK"
+		fi
+		MSSDK=`echo "$MSSDK" | sed -e  's!\\\!/!g'`
+		PATH64=""
+		case "$do64bit" in
+		    amd64|x64|yes)
+			MACHINE="AMD64" ; # default to AMD64 64-bit build
+			PATH64="${MSSDK}/Bin/Win64/x86/AMD64"
+			;;
+		    ia64)
+			MACHINE="IA64"
+			PATH64="${MSSDK}/Bin/Win64"
+			;;
+		esac
+		if test "$GCC" != "yes" -a ! -d "${PATH64}" ; then
+		    AC_MSG_WARN([Could not find 64-bit $MACHINE SDK to enable 64bit mode])
+		    AC_MSG_WARN([Ensure latest Platform SDK is installed])
+		    do64bit="no"
+		else
+		    AC_MSG_RESULT([   Using 64-bit $MACHINE mode])
+		    do64bit_ok="yes"
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$doWince" != "no" ; then
+		if test "$do64bit" != "no" ; then
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([Windows/CE and 64-bit builds incompatible])
+		fi
+		if test "$GCC" = "yes" ; then
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([Windows/CE and GCC builds incompatible])
+		fi
+		TEA_PATH_CELIB
+		# Set defaults for common evc4/PPC2003 setup
+		# Currently Tcl requires 300+, possibly 420+ for sockets
+		CEVERSION=420; 		# could be 211 300 301 400 420 ...
+		TARGETCPU=ARMV4;	# could be ARMV4 ARM MIPS SH3 X86 ...
+		ARCH=ARM;		# could be ARM MIPS X86EM ...
+		PLATFORM="Pocket PC 2003"; # or "Pocket PC 2002"
+		if test "$doWince" != "yes"; then
+		    # If !yes then the user specified something
+		    # Reset ARCH to allow user to skip specifying it
+		    ARCH=
+		    eval `echo $doWince | awk -F, '{ \
+	    if (length([$]1)) { printf "CEVERSION=\"%s\"\n", [$]1; \
+	    if ([$]1 < 400)   { printf "PLATFORM=\"Pocket PC 2002\"\n" } }; \
+	    if (length([$]2)) { printf "TARGETCPU=\"%s\"\n", toupper([$]2) }; \
+	    if (length([$]3)) { printf "ARCH=\"%s\"\n", toupper([$]3) }; \
+	    if (length([$]4)) { printf "PLATFORM=\"%s\"\n", [$]4 }; \
+		    }'`
+		    if test "x${ARCH}" = "x" ; then
+			ARCH=$TARGETCPU;
+		    fi
+		fi
+		OSVERSION=WCE$CEVERSION;
+	    	if test "x${WCEROOT}" = "x" ; then
+			WCEROOT="C:/Program Files/Microsoft eMbedded C++ 4.0"
+		    if test ! -d "${WCEROOT}" ; then
+			WCEROOT="C:/Program Files/Microsoft eMbedded Tools"
+		    fi
+		fi
+		if test "x${SDKROOT}" = "x" ; then
+		    SDKROOT="C:/Program Files/Windows CE Tools"
+		    if test ! -d "${SDKROOT}" ; then
+			SDKROOT="C:/Windows CE Tools"
+		    fi
+		fi
+		WCEROOT=`echo "$WCEROOT" | sed -e 's!\\\!/!g'`
+		SDKROOT=`echo "$SDKROOT" | sed -e 's!\\\!/!g'`
+		if test ! -d "${SDKROOT}/${OSVERSION}/${PLATFORM}/Lib/${TARGETCPU}" \
+		    -o ! -d "${WCEROOT}/EVC/${OSVERSION}/bin"; then
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([could not find PocketPC SDK or target compiler to enable WinCE mode [$CEVERSION,$TARGETCPU,$ARCH,$PLATFORM]])
+		    doWince="no"
+		else
+		    # We could PATH_NOSPACE these, but that's not important,
+		    # as long as we quote them when used.
+		    CEINCLUDE="${SDKROOT}/${OSVERSION}/${PLATFORM}/include"
+		    if test -d "${CEINCLUDE}/${TARGETCPU}" ; then
+			CEINCLUDE="${CEINCLUDE}/${TARGETCPU}"
+		    fi
+		    CELIBPATH="${SDKROOT}/${OSVERSION}/${PLATFORM}/Lib/${TARGETCPU}"
+    		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$GCC" != "yes" ; then
+	        if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "0" ; then
+		    runtime=-MT
+	        else
+		    runtime=-MD
+	        fi
+	        case "x`echo \${VisualStudioVersion}`" in
+	            x1[[4-9]]*)
+		        lflags="${lflags} -nodefaultlib:libucrt.lib"
+		        TEA_ADD_LIBS([ucrt.lib])
+	            ;;
+	            *)
+	            ;;
+	        esac
+
+                if test "$do64bit" != "no" ; then
+		    # All this magic is necessary for the Win64 SDK RC1 - hobbs
+		    CC="\"${PATH64}/cl.exe\""
+		    CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} -I\"${MSSDK}/Include\" -I\"${MSSDK}/Include/crt\" -I\"${MSSDK}/Include/crt/sys\""
+		    RC="\"${MSSDK}/bin/rc.exe\""
+		    lflags="${lflags} -nologo -MACHINE:${MACHINE} -LIBPATH:\"${MSSDK}/Lib/${MACHINE}\""
+		    LINKBIN="\"${PATH64}/link.exe\""
+		    CFLAGS_DEBUG="-nologo -Zi -Od -W3 ${runtime}d"
+		    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-nologo -O2 -W2 ${runtime}"
+		    # Avoid 'unresolved external symbol __security_cookie'
+		    # errors, c.f. http://support.microsoft.com/?id=894573
+		    TEA_ADD_LIBS([bufferoverflowU.lib])
+		elif test "$doWince" != "no" ; then
+		    CEBINROOT="${WCEROOT}/EVC/${OSVERSION}/bin"
+		    if test "${TARGETCPU}" = "X86"; then
+			CC="\"${CEBINROOT}/cl.exe\""
+		    else
+			CC="\"${CEBINROOT}/cl${ARCH}.exe\""
+		    fi
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -I\"${CELIB_DIR}/inc\" -I\"${CEINCLUDE}\""
+		    RC="\"${WCEROOT}/Common/EVC/bin/rc.exe\""
+		    arch=`echo ${ARCH} | awk '{print tolower([$]0)}'`
+		    defs="${ARCH} _${ARCH}_ ${arch} PALM_SIZE _MT _WINDOWS"
+		    if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+			# Static CE builds require static celib as well
+		    	defs="${defs} _DLL"
+		    fi
+		    for i in $defs ; do
+			AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED($i, 1, [WinCE def ]$i)
+		    done
+		    AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(_WIN32_WCE, $CEVERSION, [_WIN32_WCE version])
+		    AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(UNDER_CE, $CEVERSION, [UNDER_CE version])
+		    CFLAGS_DEBUG="-nologo -Zi -Od"
+		    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-nologo -Ox"
+		    lversion=`echo ${CEVERSION} | sed -e 's/\(.\)\(..\)/\1\.\2/'`
+		    lflags="${lflags} -MACHINE:${ARCH} -LIBPATH:\"${CELIBPATH}\" -subsystem:windowsce,${lversion} -nologo"
+		    LINKBIN="\"${CEBINROOT}/link.exe\""
+		    AC_SUBST(CELIB_DIR)
+		else
+		    RC="rc"
+		    lflags="${lflags} -nologo"
+		    LINKBIN="link"
+		    CFLAGS_DEBUG="-nologo -Z7 -Od -W3 -WX ${runtime}d"
+		    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-nologo -O2 -W2 ${runtime}"
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		# mingw gcc mode
+		AC_CHECK_TOOL(RC, windres)
+		CFLAGS_DEBUG="-g"
+		CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-O2 -fomit-frame-pointer"
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.a'
+		LDFLAGS_CONSOLE="-wl,--subsystem,console ${lflags}"
+		LDFLAGS_WINDOW="-wl,--subsystem,windows ${lflags}"
+
+		AC_CACHE_CHECK(for cross-compile version of gcc,
+			ac_cv_cross,
+			AC_TRY_COMPILE([
+			    #ifdef _WIN32
+				#error cross-compiler
+			    #endif
+			], [],
+			ac_cv_cross=yes,
+			ac_cv_cross=no)
+		      )
+		      if test "$ac_cv_cross" = "yes"; then
+			case "$do64bit" in
+			    amd64|x64|yes)
+				CC="x86_64-w64-mingw32-gcc"
+				LD="x86_64-w64-mingw32-ld"
+				AR="x86_64-w64-mingw32-ar"
+				RANLIB="x86_64-w64-mingw32-ranlib"
+				RC="x86_64-w64-mingw32-windres"
+			    ;;
+			    *)
+				CC="i686-w64-mingw32-gcc"
+				LD="i686-w64-mingw32-ld"
+				AR="i686-w64-mingw32-ar"
+				RANLIB="i686-w64-mingw32-ranlib"
+				RC="i686-w64-mingw32-windres"
+			    ;;
+			esac
+		fi
+
+	    else
+		SHLIB_LD="${LINKBIN} -dll ${lflags}"
+		# link -lib only works when -lib is the first arg
+		STLIB_LD="${LINKBIN} -lib ${lflags}"
+		UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.lib'
+		PATHTYPE=-w
+		# For information on what debugtype is most useful, see:
+		# http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/en-us/dnvc60/html/gendepdebug.asp
+		# and also
+		# http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/y0zzbyt4%28VS.80%29.aspx
+		# This essentially turns it all on.
+		LDFLAGS_DEBUG="-debug -debugtype:cv"
+		LDFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-release"
+		if test "$doWince" != "no" ; then
+		    LDFLAGS_CONSOLE="-link ${lflags}"
+		    LDFLAGS_WINDOW=${LDFLAGS_CONSOLE}
+		else
+		    LDFLAGS_CONSOLE="-link -subsystem:console ${lflags}"
+		    LDFLAGS_WINDOW="-link -subsystem:windows ${lflags}"
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".dll"
+	    SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.dll'
+
+	    TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=nodots
+    	    ;;
+	AIX-*)
+	    AS_IF([test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1" -a "$GCC" != "yes"], [
+		# AIX requires the _r compiler when gcc isn't being used
+		case "${CC}" in
+		    *_r|*_r\ *)
+			# ok ...
+			;;
+		    *)
+			# Make sure only first arg gets _r
+		    	CC=`echo "$CC" | sed -e 's/^\([[^ ]]*\)/\1_r/'`
+			;;
+		esac
+		AC_MSG_RESULT([Using $CC for compiling with threads])
+	    ])
+	    LIBS="$LIBS -lc"
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+
+	    LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="LIBPATH"
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+	    AS_IF([test "$do64bit" = yes], [
+		AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		    AC_MSG_WARN([64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system])
+		], [
+		    do64bit_ok=yes
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -q64"
+		    LDFLAGS_ARCH="-q64"
+		    RANLIB="${RANLIB} -X64"
+		    AR="${AR} -X64"
+		    SHLIB_LD_FLAGS="-b64"
+		])
+	    ])
+
+	    AS_IF([test "`uname -m`" = ia64], [
+		# AIX-5 uses ELF style dynamic libraries on IA-64, but not PPC
+		SHLIB_LD="/usr/ccs/bin/ld -G -z text"
+		AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		], [
+		    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		])
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+	    ], [
+		AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared -Wl,-bexpall'
+		], [
+		    SHLIB_LD="/bin/ld -bhalt:4 -bM:SRE -bexpall -H512 -T512 -bnoentry"
+		    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -brtl"
+		])
+		SHLIB_LD="${SHLIB_LD} ${SHLIB_LD_FLAGS}"
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-L${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	BeOS*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -nostart'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+
+	    #-----------------------------------------------------------
+	    # Check for inet_ntoa in -lbind, for BeOS (which also needs
+	    # -lsocket, even if the network functions are in -lnet which
+	    # is always linked to, for compatibility.
+	    #-----------------------------------------------------------
+	    AC_CHECK_LIB(bind, inet_ntoa, [LIBS="$LIBS -lbind -lsocket"])
+	    ;;
+	BSD/OS-4.*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-export-dynamic -fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -export-dynamic"
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	CYGWIN_*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} -Wl,--out-implib,\$[@].a"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".dll"
+	    EXEEXT=".exe"
+	    do64bit_ok=yes
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	Haiku*)
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic"
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -shared'
+	    AC_CHECK_LIB(network, inet_ntoa, [LIBS="$LIBS -lnetwork"])
+	    ;;
+	HP-UX-*.11.*)
+	    # Use updated header definitions where possible
+	    AC_DEFINE(_XOPEN_SOURCE_EXTENDED, 1, [Do we want to use the XOPEN network library?])
+	    # TEA specific: Needed by Tcl, but not most extensions
+	    #AC_DEFINE(_XOPEN_SOURCE, 1, [Do we want to use the XOPEN network library?])
+	    #LIBS="$LIBS -lxnet"               # Use the XOPEN network library
+
+	    AS_IF([test "`uname -m`" = ia64], [
+		SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+		# Use newer C++ library for C++ extensions
+		#if test "$GCC" != "yes" ; then
+		#   CPPFLAGS="-AA"
+		#fi
+	    ], [
+		SHLIB_SUFFIX=".sl"
+	    ])
+	    AC_CHECK_LIB(dld, shl_load, tcl_ok=yes, tcl_ok=no)
+	    AS_IF([test "$tcl_ok" = yes], [
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-E"
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,+s,+b,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}:.'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='+s +b ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}:.'
+		LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="SHLIB_PATH"
+	    ])
+	    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    ], [
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -z"
+		# Users may want PA-RISC 1.1/2.0 portable code - needs HP cc
+		#CFLAGS="$CFLAGS +DAportable"
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="+z"
+		SHLIB_LD="ld -b"
+	    ])
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+	    AS_IF([test "$do64bit" = "yes"], [
+		AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		    case `${CC} -dumpmachine` in
+			hppa64*)
+			    # 64-bit gcc in use.  Fix flags for GNU ld.
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+			    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+			    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+				CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+			    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+			    ;;
+			*)
+			    AC_MSG_WARN([64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system])
+			    ;;
+		    esac
+		], [
+		    do64bit_ok=yes
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS +DD64"
+		    LDFLAGS_ARCH="+DD64"
+		])
+	    ]) ;;
+	IRIX-6.*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -n32 -shared -rdata_shared"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-rpath ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+	    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -mabi=n32"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -mabi=n32"
+	    ], [
+		case $system in
+		    IRIX-6.3)
+			# Use to build 6.2 compatible binaries on 6.3.
+			CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -n32 -D_OLD_TERMIOS"
+			;;
+		    *)
+			CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -n32"
+			;;
+		esac
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -n32"
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	IRIX64-6.*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -n32 -shared -rdata_shared"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-rpath ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+
+	    AS_IF([test "$do64bit" = yes], [
+	        AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+	            AC_MSG_WARN([64bit mode not supported by gcc])
+	        ], [
+	            do64bit_ok=yes
+	            SHLIB_LD="ld -64 -shared -rdata_shared"
+	            CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -64"
+	            LDFLAGS_ARCH="-64"
+	        ])
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	Linux*|GNU*|NetBSD-Debian)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+
+	    # TEA specific:
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-O2 -fomit-frame-pointer"
+
+	    # TEA specific: use LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT} -shared'
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,--export-dynamic"
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    AS_IF([test "`uname -m`" = "alpha"], [CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -mieee"])
+	    AS_IF([test $do64bit = yes], [
+		AC_CACHE_CHECK([if compiler accepts -m64 flag], tcl_cv_cc_m64, [
+		    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+		    AC_TRY_LINK(,, tcl_cv_cc_m64=yes, tcl_cv_cc_m64=no)
+		    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags])
+		AS_IF([test $tcl_cv_cc_m64 = yes], [
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+		    do64bit_ok=yes
+		])
+	   ])
+
+	    # The combo of gcc + glibc has a bug related to inlining of
+	    # functions like strtod(). The -fno-builtin flag should address
+	    # this problem but it does not work. The -fno-inline flag is kind
+	    # of overkill but it works. Disable inlining only when one of the
+	    # files in compat/*.c is being linked in.
+
+	    AS_IF([test x"${USE_COMPAT}" != x],[CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -fno-inline"])
+	    ;;
+	Lynx*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=-02
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+	    LD_FLAGS="-Wl,--export-dynamic"
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+	    ;;
+	OpenBSD-*)
+	    arch=`arch -s`
+	    case "$arch" in
+	    alpha|sparc64)
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fpic"
+		;;
+	    esac
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.so${SHLIB_VERSION}'
+	    LDFLAGS="-Wl,-export-dynamic"
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-O2"
+	    AS_IF([test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1"], [
+		# On OpenBSD:	Compile with -pthread
+		#		Don't link with -lpthread
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-lpthread//`
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pthread"
+	    ])
+	    # OpenBSD doesn't do version numbers with dots.
+	    UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.a'
+	    TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=nodots
+	    ;;
+	NetBSD-*)
+	    # NetBSD has ELF and can use 'cc -shared' to build shared libs
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} ${SHLIB_CFLAGS} -shared'
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -export-dynamic"
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    AS_IF([test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1"], [
+		# The -pthread needs to go in the CFLAGS, not LIBS
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-pthread//`
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pthread"
+	    	LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -pthread"
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*)
+	    # This configuration from FreeBSD Ports.
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD="${CC} -shared"
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} -Wl,-soname,\$[@]"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    LDFLAGS=""
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+	    AS_IF([test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1"], [
+		# The -pthread needs to go in the LDFLAGS, not LIBS
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-pthread//`
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $PTHREAD_CFLAGS"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS $PTHREAD_LIBS"])
+	    case $system in
+	    FreeBSD-3.*)
+		# Version numbers are dot-stripped by system policy.
+		TCL_TRIM_DOTS=`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`
+		UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}.a'
+		SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${TCL_TRIM_DOTS}\$\{DBGX\}.so.1'
+		TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK=nodots
+		;;
+	    esac
+	    ;;
+	Darwin-*)
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE="-Os"
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fno-common"
+	    # To avoid discrepancies between what headers configure sees during
+	    # preprocessing tests and compiling tests, move any -isysroot and
+	    # -mmacosx-version-min flags from CFLAGS to CPPFLAGS:
+	    CPPFLAGS="${CPPFLAGS} `echo " ${CFLAGS}" | \
+		awk 'BEGIN {FS=" +-";ORS=" "}; {for (i=2;i<=NF;i++) \
+		if ([$]i~/^(isysroot|mmacosx-version-min)/) print "-"[$]i}'`"
+	    CFLAGS="`echo " ${CFLAGS}" | \
+		awk 'BEGIN {FS=" +-";ORS=" "}; {for (i=2;i<=NF;i++) \
+		if (!([$]i~/^(isysroot|mmacosx-version-min)/)) print "-"[$]i}'`"
+	    AS_IF([test $do64bit = yes], [
+		case `arch` in
+		    ppc)
+			AC_CACHE_CHECK([if compiler accepts -arch ppc64 flag],
+				tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64, [
+			    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch ppc64 -mpowerpc64 -mcpu=G5"
+			    AC_TRY_LINK(,, tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64=yes,
+				    tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64=no)
+			    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags])
+			AS_IF([test $tcl_cv_cc_arch_ppc64 = yes], [
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch ppc64 -mpowerpc64 -mcpu=G5"
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+			]);;
+		    i386)
+			AC_CACHE_CHECK([if compiler accepts -arch x86_64 flag],
+				tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64, [
+			    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch x86_64"
+			    AC_TRY_LINK(,, tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64=yes,
+				    tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64=no)
+			    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags])
+			AS_IF([test $tcl_cv_cc_arch_x86_64 = yes], [
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -arch x86_64"
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+			]);;
+		    *)
+			AC_MSG_WARN([Don't know how enable 64-bit on architecture `arch`]);;
+		esac
+	    ], [
+		# Check for combined 32-bit and 64-bit fat build
+		AS_IF([echo "$CFLAGS " |grep -E -q -- '-arch (ppc64|x86_64) ' \
+		    && echo "$CFLAGS " |grep -E -q -- '-arch (ppc|i386) '], [
+		    fat_32_64=yes])
+	    ])
+	    # TEA specific: use LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -dynamiclib ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT}'
+	    AC_CACHE_CHECK([if ld accepts -single_module flag], tcl_cv_ld_single_module, [
+		hold_ldflags=$LDFLAGS
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -dynamiclib -Wl,-single_module"
+		AC_TRY_LINK(, [int i;], tcl_cv_ld_single_module=yes, tcl_cv_ld_single_module=no)
+		LDFLAGS=$hold_ldflags])
+	    AS_IF([test $tcl_cv_ld_single_module = yes], [
+		SHLIB_LD="${SHLIB_LD} -Wl,-single_module"
+	    ])
+	    # TEA specific: link shlib with current and compatibility version flags
+	    vers=`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | sed -e 's/^\([[0-9]]\{1,5\}\)\(\(\.[[0-9]]\{1,3\}\)\{0,2\}\).*$/\1\2/p' -e d`
+	    SHLIB_LD="${SHLIB_LD} -current_version ${vers:-0} -compatibility_version ${vers:-0}"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".dylib"
+	    # Don't use -prebind when building for Mac OS X 10.4 or later only:
+	    AS_IF([test "`echo "${MACOSX_DEPLOYMENT_TARGET}" | awk -F '10\\.' '{print int([$]2)}'`" -lt 4 -a \
+		"`echo "${CPPFLAGS}" | awk -F '-mmacosx-version-min=10\\.' '{print int([$]2)}'`" -lt 4], [
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -prebind"])
+	    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -headerpad_max_install_names"
+	    AC_CACHE_CHECK([if ld accepts -search_paths_first flag],
+		    tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first, [
+		hold_ldflags=$LDFLAGS
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-search_paths_first"
+		AC_TRY_LINK(, [int i;], tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first=yes,
+			tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first=no)
+		LDFLAGS=$hold_ldflags])
+	    AS_IF([test $tcl_cv_ld_search_paths_first = yes], [
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-search_paths_first"
+	    ])
+	    AS_IF([test "$tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden" != yes], [
+		AC_DEFINE(MODULE_SCOPE, [__private_extern__],
+		    [Compiler support for module scope symbols])
+		tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden=yes
+	    ])
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="DYLD_LIBRARY_PATH"
+	    # TEA specific: for combined 32 & 64 bit fat builds of Tk
+	    # extensions, verify that 64-bit build is possible.
+	    AS_IF([test "$fat_32_64" = yes && test -n "${TK_BIN_DIR}"], [
+		AS_IF([test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = x11], [
+		    AC_CACHE_CHECK([for 64-bit X11], tcl_cv_lib_x11_64, [
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval 'hold_'$v'="$'$v'";'$v'="`echo "$'$v' "|sed -e "s/-arch ppc / /g" -e "s/-arch i386 / /g"`"'
+			done
+			CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS -I/usr/X11R6/include"
+			LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -L/usr/X11R6/lib -lX11"
+			AC_TRY_LINK([#include <X11/Xlib.h>], [XrmInitialize();],
+			    tcl_cv_lib_x11_64=yes, tcl_cv_lib_x11_64=no)
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval $v'="$hold_'$v'"'
+			done])
+		])
+		AS_IF([test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = aqua], [
+		    AC_CACHE_CHECK([for 64-bit Tk], tcl_cv_lib_tk_64, [
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval 'hold_'$v'="$'$v'";'$v'="`echo "$'$v' "|sed -e "s/-arch ppc / /g" -e "s/-arch i386 / /g"`"'
+			done
+			CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS -DUSE_TCL_STUBS=1 -DUSE_TK_STUBS=1 ${TCL_INCLUDES} ${TK_INCLUDES}"
+			LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS ${TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC} ${TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+			AC_TRY_LINK([#include <tk.h>], [Tk_InitStubs(NULL, "", 0);],
+			    tcl_cv_lib_tk_64=yes, tcl_cv_lib_tk_64=no)
+			for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			    eval $v'="$hold_'$v'"'
+			done])
+		])
+		# remove 64-bit arch flags from CFLAGS et al. if configuration
+		# does not support 64-bit.
+		AS_IF([test "$tcl_cv_lib_tk_64" = no -o "$tcl_cv_lib_x11_64" = no], [
+		    AC_MSG_NOTICE([Removing 64-bit architectures from compiler & linker flags])
+		    for v in CFLAGS CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS; do
+			eval $v'="`echo "$'$v' "|sed -e "s/-arch ppc64 / /g" -e "s/-arch x86_64 / /g"`"'
+		    done])
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	OS/390-*)
+	    CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE=""		# Optimizer is buggy
+	    AC_DEFINE(_OE_SOCKETS, 1,	# needed in sys/socket.h
+		[Should OS/390 do the right thing with sockets?])
+	    ;;
+	OSF1-V*)
+	    # Digital OSF/1
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+	    AS_IF([test "$SHARED_BUILD" = 1], [
+	        SHLIB_LD='ld -shared -expect_unresolved "*"'
+	    ], [
+	        SHLIB_LD='ld -non_shared -expect_unresolved "*"'
+	    ])
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    AS_IF([test $doRpath = yes], [
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-rpath,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-rpath ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'])
+	    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -mieee"], [
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DHAVE_TZSET -std1 -ieee"])
+	    # see pthread_intro(3) for pthread support on osf1, k.furukawa
+	    AS_IF([test "${TCL_THREADS}" = 1], [
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DHAVE_PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSTACKSIZE"
+		CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DTCL_THREAD_STACK_MIN=PTHREAD_STACK_MIN*64"
+		LIBS=`echo $LIBS | sed s/-lpthreads//`
+		AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		    LIBS="$LIBS -lpthread -lmach -lexc"
+		], [
+		    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pthread"
+		    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -pthread"
+		])
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	QNX-6*)
+	    # QNX RTP
+	    # This may work for all QNX, but it was only reported for v6.
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -Bshareable -x"
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	SCO_SV-3.2*)
+	    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC -melf"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -melf -Wl,-Bexport"
+	    ], [
+		SHLIB_CFLAGS="-Kpic -belf"
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -belf -Wl,-Bexport"
+	    ])
+	    SHLIB_LD="ld -G"
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+	SunOS-5.[[0-6]])
+	    # Careful to not let 5.10+ fall into this case
+
+	    # Note: If _REENTRANT isn't defined, then Solaris
+	    # won't define thread-safe library routines.
+
+	    AC_DEFINE(_REENTRANT, 1, [Do we want the reentrant OS API?])
+	    AC_DEFINE(_POSIX_PTHREAD_SEMANTICS, 1,
+		[Do we really want to follow the standard? Yes we do!])
+
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-KPIC"
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    ], [
+		SHLIB_LD="/usr/ccs/bin/ld -G -z text"
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	SunOS-5*)
+	    # Note: If _REENTRANT isn't defined, then Solaris
+	    # won't define thread-safe library routines.
+
+	    AC_DEFINE(_REENTRANT, 1, [Do we want the reentrant OS API?])
+	    AC_DEFINE(_POSIX_PTHREAD_SEMANTICS, 1,
+		[Do we really want to follow the standard? Yes we do!])
+
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-KPIC"
+
+	    # Check to enable 64-bit flags for compiler/linker
+	    AS_IF([test "$do64bit" = yes], [
+		arch=`isainfo`
+		AS_IF([test "$arch" = "sparcv9 sparc"], [
+		    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+			AS_IF([test "`${CC} -dumpversion | awk -F. '{print [$]1}'`" -lt 3], [
+			    AC_MSG_WARN([64bit mode not supported with GCC < 3.2 on $system])
+			], [
+			    do64bit_ok=yes
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64 -mcpu=v9"
+			    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -m64 -mcpu=v9"
+			    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC"
+			])
+		    ], [
+			do64bit_ok=yes
+			AS_IF([test "$do64bitVIS" = yes], [
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -xarch=v9a"
+			    LDFLAGS_ARCH="-xarch=v9a"
+			], [
+			    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -xarch=v9"
+			    LDFLAGS_ARCH="-xarch=v9"
+			])
+			# Solaris 64 uses this as well
+			#LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR="LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64"
+		    ])
+		], [AS_IF([test "$arch" = "amd64 i386"], [
+		    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+			case $system in
+			    SunOS-5.1[[1-9]]*|SunOS-5.[[2-9]][[0-9]]*)
+				do64bit_ok=yes
+				CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+				LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -m64";;
+			    *)
+				AC_MSG_WARN([64bit mode not supported with GCC on $system]);;
+			esac
+		    ], [
+			do64bit_ok=yes
+			case $system in
+			    SunOS-5.1[[1-9]]*|SunOS-5.[[2-9]][[0-9]]*)
+				CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -m64"
+				LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -m64";;
+			    *)
+				CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -xarch=amd64"
+				LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -xarch=amd64";;
+			esac
+		    ])
+		], [AC_MSG_WARN([64bit mode not supported for $arch])])])
+	    ])
+
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+		SHLIB_LD='${CC} -shared'
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS}
+		AS_IF([test "$do64bit_ok" = yes], [
+		    AS_IF([test "$arch" = "sparcv9 sparc"], [
+			# We need to specify -static-libgcc or we need to
+			# add the path to the sparv9 libgcc.
+			# JH: static-libgcc is necessary for core Tcl, but may
+			# not be necessary for extensions.
+			SHLIB_LD="$SHLIB_LD -m64 -mcpu=v9 -static-libgcc"
+			# for finding sparcv9 libgcc, get the regular libgcc
+			# path, remove so name and append 'sparcv9'
+			#v9gcclibdir="`gcc -print-file-name=libgcc_s.so` | ..."
+			#CC_SEARCH_FLAGS="${CC_SEARCH_FLAGS},-R,$v9gcclibdir"
+		    ], [AS_IF([test "$arch" = "amd64 i386"], [
+			# JH: static-libgcc is necessary for core Tcl, but may
+			# not be necessary for extensions.
+			SHLIB_LD="$SHLIB_LD -m64 -static-libgcc"
+		    ])])
+		])
+	    ], [
+		case $system in
+		    SunOS-5.[[1-9]][[0-9]]*)
+			# TEA specific: use LDFLAGS_DEFAULT instead of LDFLAGS
+			SHLIB_LD='${CC} -G -z text ${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT}';;
+		    *)
+			SHLIB_LD='/usr/ccs/bin/ld -G -z text';;
+		esac
+		CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='-Wl,-R,${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+		LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='-R ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+	    ])
+	    ;;
+	UNIX_SV* | UnixWare-5*)
+	    SHLIB_CFLAGS="-KPIC"
+	    SHLIB_LD='${CC} -G'
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS=""
+	    SHLIB_SUFFIX=".so"
+	    # Some UNIX_SV* systems (unixware 1.1.2 for example) have linkers
+	    # that don't grok the -Bexport option.  Test that it does.
+	    AC_CACHE_CHECK([for ld accepts -Bexport flag], tcl_cv_ld_Bexport, [
+		hold_ldflags=$LDFLAGS
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-Bexport"
+		AC_TRY_LINK(, [int i;], tcl_cv_ld_Bexport=yes, tcl_cv_ld_Bexport=no)
+	        LDFLAGS=$hold_ldflags])
+	    AS_IF([test $tcl_cv_ld_Bexport = yes], [
+		LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -Wl,-Bexport"
+	    ])
+	    CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=""
+	    ;;
+    esac
+
+    AS_IF([test "$do64bit" = yes -a "$do64bit_ok" = no], [
+	AC_MSG_WARN([64bit support being disabled -- don't know magic for this platform])
+    ])
+
+dnl # Add any CPPFLAGS set in the environment to our CFLAGS, but delay doing so
+dnl # until the end of configure, as configure's compile and link tests use
+dnl # both CPPFLAGS and CFLAGS (unlike our compile and link) but configure's
+dnl # preprocessing tests use only CPPFLAGS.
+    AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS_PRE([CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} ${CPPFLAGS}"; CPPFLAGS=""])
+
+    # Add in the arch flags late to ensure it wasn't removed.
+    # Not necessary in TEA, but this is aligned with core
+    LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS $LDFLAGS_ARCH"
+
+    # If we're running gcc, then change the C flags for compiling shared
+    # libraries to the right flags for gcc, instead of those for the
+    # standard manufacturer compiler.
+
+    AS_IF([test "$GCC" = yes], [
+	case $system in
+	    AIX-*) ;;
+	    BSD/OS*) ;;
+	    CYGWIN_*|MINGW32_*|MINGW64_*) ;;
+	    IRIX*) ;;
+	    NetBSD-*|DragonFly-*|FreeBSD-*|OpenBSD-*) ;;
+	    Darwin-*) ;;
+	    SCO_SV-3.2*) ;;
+	    windows) ;;
+	    *) SHLIB_CFLAGS="-fPIC" ;;
+	esac])
+
+    AS_IF([test "$tcl_cv_cc_visibility_hidden" != yes], [
+	AC_DEFINE(MODULE_SCOPE, [extern],
+	    [No Compiler support for module scope symbols])
+    ])
+
+    AS_IF([test "$SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX" = ""], [
+    # TEA specific: use PACKAGE_VERSION instead of VERSION
+    SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${PACKAGE_VERSION}${SHLIB_SUFFIX}'])
+    AS_IF([test "$UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX" = ""], [
+    # TEA specific: use PACKAGE_VERSION instead of VERSION
+    UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX='${PACKAGE_VERSION}.a'])
+
+    if test "${GCC}" = "yes" -a ${SHLIB_SUFFIX} = ".dll"; then
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK(for SEH support in compiler,
+	    tcl_cv_seh,
+	AC_TRY_RUN([
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#include <windows.h>
+#undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+
+	    int main(int argc, char** argv) {
+		int a, b = 0;
+		__try {
+		    a = 666 / b;
+		}
+		__except (EXCEPTION_EXECUTE_HANDLER) {
+		    return 0;
+		}
+		return 1;
+	    }
+	],
+	    tcl_cv_seh=yes,
+	    tcl_cv_seh=no,
+	    tcl_cv_seh=no)
+	)
+	if test "$tcl_cv_seh" = "no" ; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_NO_SEH, 1,
+		    [Defined when mingw does not support SEH])
+	fi
+
+	#
+	# Check to see if the excpt.h include file provided contains the
+	# definition for EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION; if not, which is the case
+	# with Cygwin's version as of 2002-04-10, define it to be int,
+	# sufficient for getting the current code to work.
+	#
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK(for EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION support in include files,
+	    tcl_cv_eh_disposition,
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([
+#	    define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#	    include <windows.h>
+#	    undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+	    ],[
+		EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION x;
+	    ],
+		tcl_cv_eh_disposition=yes,
+		tcl_cv_eh_disposition=no)
+	)
+	if test "$tcl_cv_eh_disposition" = "no" ; then
+	AC_DEFINE(EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION, int,
+		[Defined when cygwin/mingw does not support EXCEPTION DISPOSITION])
+	fi
+
+	# Check to see if winnt.h defines CHAR, SHORT, and LONG
+	# even if VOID has already been #defined. The win32api
+	# used by mingw and cygwin is known to do this.
+
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK(for winnt.h that ignores VOID define,
+	    tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void,
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([
+#define VOID void
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#include <windows.h>
+#undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+	    ], [
+		CHAR c;
+		SHORT s;
+		LONG l;
+	    ],
+        tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void=yes,
+        tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void=no)
+	)
+	if test "$tcl_cv_winnt_ignore_void" = "yes" ; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_WINNT_IGNORE_VOID, 1,
+		    [Defined when cygwin/mingw ignores VOID define in winnt.h])
+	fi
+    fi
+
+	# See if the compiler supports casting to a union type.
+	# This is used to stop gcc from printing a compiler
+	# warning when initializing a union member.
+
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK(for cast to union support,
+	    tcl_cv_cast_to_union,
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([],
+	    [
+		  union foo { int i; double d; };
+		  union foo f = (union foo) (int) 0;
+	    ],
+	    tcl_cv_cast_to_union=yes,
+	    tcl_cv_cast_to_union=no)
+	)
+	if test "$tcl_cv_cast_to_union" = "yes"; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_CAST_TO_UNION, 1,
+		    [Defined when compiler supports casting to union type.])
+	fi
+
+    AC_SUBST(CFLAGS_DEBUG)
+    AC_SUBST(CFLAGS_OPTIMIZE)
+    AC_SUBST(CFLAGS_WARNING)
+
+    AC_SUBST(STLIB_LD)
+    AC_SUBST(SHLIB_LD)
+
+    AC_SUBST(SHLIB_LD_LIBS)
+    AC_SUBST(SHLIB_CFLAGS)
+
+    AC_SUBST(LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR)
+
+    # These must be called after we do the basic CFLAGS checks and
+    # verify any possible 64-bit or similar switches are necessary
+    TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAGS
+    TEA_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_SERIAL_PORT
+#
+#	Determine which interface to use to talk to the serial port.
+#	Note that #include lines must begin in leftmost column for
+#	some compilers to recognize them as preprocessor directives,
+#	and some build environments have stdin not pointing at a
+#	pseudo-terminal (usually /dev/null instead.)
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines only one of the following vars:
+#		HAVE_SYS_MODEM_H
+#		USE_TERMIOS
+#		USE_TERMIO
+#		USE_SGTTY
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_SERIAL_PORT], [
+    AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/modem.h)
+    AC_CACHE_CHECK([termios vs. termio vs. sgtty], tcl_cv_api_serial, [
+    AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <termios.h>
+
+int main() {
+    struct termios t;
+    if (tcgetattr(0, &t) == 0) {
+	cfsetospeed(&t, 0);
+	t.c_cflag |= PARENB | PARODD | CSIZE | CSTOPB;
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}], tcl_cv_api_serial=termios, tcl_cv_api_serial=no, tcl_cv_api_serial=no)
+    if test $tcl_cv_api_serial = no ; then
+	AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <termio.h>
+
+int main() {
+    struct termio t;
+    if (ioctl(0, TCGETA, &t) == 0) {
+	t.c_cflag |= CBAUD | PARENB | PARODD | CSIZE | CSTOPB;
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}], tcl_cv_api_serial=termio, tcl_cv_api_serial=no, tcl_cv_api_serial=no)
+    fi
+    if test $tcl_cv_api_serial = no ; then
+	AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <sgtty.h>
+
+int main() {
+    struct sgttyb t;
+    if (ioctl(0, TIOCGETP, &t) == 0) {
+	t.sg_ospeed = 0;
+	t.sg_flags |= ODDP | EVENP | RAW;
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}], tcl_cv_api_serial=sgtty, tcl_cv_api_serial=no, tcl_cv_api_serial=no)
+    fi
+    if test $tcl_cv_api_serial = no ; then
+	AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <termios.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+int main() {
+    struct termios t;
+    if (tcgetattr(0, &t) == 0
+	|| errno == ENOTTY || errno == ENXIO || errno == EINVAL) {
+	cfsetospeed(&t, 0);
+	t.c_cflag |= PARENB | PARODD | CSIZE | CSTOPB;
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}], tcl_cv_api_serial=termios, tcl_cv_api_serial=no, tcl_cv_api_serial=no)
+    fi
+    if test $tcl_cv_api_serial = no; then
+	AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <termio.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+int main() {
+    struct termio t;
+    if (ioctl(0, TCGETA, &t) == 0
+	|| errno == ENOTTY || errno == ENXIO || errno == EINVAL) {
+	t.c_cflag |= CBAUD | PARENB | PARODD | CSIZE | CSTOPB;
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return 1;
+    }], tcl_cv_api_serial=termio, tcl_cv_api_serial=no, tcl_cv_api_serial=no)
+    fi
+    if test $tcl_cv_api_serial = no; then
+	AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <sgtty.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+int main() {
+    struct sgttyb t;
+    if (ioctl(0, TIOCGETP, &t) == 0
+	|| errno == ENOTTY || errno == ENXIO || errno == EINVAL) {
+	t.sg_ospeed = 0;
+	t.sg_flags |= ODDP | EVENP | RAW;
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}], tcl_cv_api_serial=sgtty, tcl_cv_api_serial=none, tcl_cv_api_serial=none)
+    fi])
+    case $tcl_cv_api_serial in
+	termios) AC_DEFINE(USE_TERMIOS, 1, [Use the termios API for serial lines]);;
+	termio)  AC_DEFINE(USE_TERMIO, 1, [Use the termio API for serial lines]);;
+	sgtty)   AC_DEFINE(USE_SGTTY, 1, [Use the sgtty API for serial lines]);;
+    esac
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PATH_X
+#
+#	Locate the X11 header files and the X11 library archive.  Try
+#	the ac_path_x macro first, but if it doesn't find the X stuff
+#	(e.g. because there's no xmkmf program) then check through
+#	a list of possible directories.  Under some conditions the
+#	autoconf macro will return an include directory that contains
+#	no include files, so double-check its result just to be safe.
+#
+#	This should be called after TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS as setting the
+#	LIBS line can confuse some configure macro magic.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Sets the following vars:
+#		XINCLUDES
+#		XLIBSW
+#		PKG_LIBS (appends to)
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PATH_X], [
+    if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = "x11" ; then
+	TEA_PATH_UNIX_X
+    fi
+])
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PATH_UNIX_X], [
+    AC_PATH_X
+    not_really_there=""
+    if test "$no_x" = ""; then
+	if test "$x_includes" = ""; then
+	    AC_TRY_CPP([#include <X11/Xlib.h>], , not_really_there="yes")
+	else
+	    if test ! -r $x_includes/X11/Xlib.h; then
+		not_really_there="yes"
+	    fi
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "$no_x" = "yes" -o "$not_really_there" = "yes"; then
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for X11 header files])
+	found_xincludes="no"
+	AC_TRY_CPP([#include <X11/Xlib.h>], found_xincludes="yes", found_xincludes="no")
+	if test "$found_xincludes" = "no"; then
+	    dirs="/usr/unsupported/include /usr/local/include /usr/X386/include /usr/X11R6/include /usr/X11R5/include /usr/include/X11R5 /usr/include/X11R4 /usr/openwin/include /usr/X11/include /usr/sww/include"
+	    for i in $dirs ; do
+		if test -r $i/X11/Xlib.h; then
+		    AC_MSG_RESULT([$i])
+		    XINCLUDES=" -I$i"
+		    found_xincludes="yes"
+		    break
+		fi
+	    done
+	fi
+    else
+	if test "$x_includes" != ""; then
+	    XINCLUDES="-I$x_includes"
+	    found_xincludes="yes"
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "$found_xincludes" = "no"; then
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([couldn't find any!])
+    fi
+
+    if test "$no_x" = yes; then
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for X11 libraries])
+	XLIBSW=nope
+	dirs="/usr/unsupported/lib /usr/local/lib /usr/X386/lib /usr/X11R6/lib /usr/X11R5/lib /usr/lib/X11R5 /usr/lib/X11R4 /usr/openwin/lib /usr/X11/lib /usr/sww/X11/lib"
+	for i in $dirs ; do
+	    if test -r $i/libX11.a -o -r $i/libX11.so -o -r $i/libX11.sl -o -r $i/libX11.dylib; then
+		AC_MSG_RESULT([$i])
+		XLIBSW="-L$i -lX11"
+		x_libraries="$i"
+		break
+	    fi
+	done
+    else
+	if test "$x_libraries" = ""; then
+	    XLIBSW=-lX11
+	else
+	    XLIBSW="-L$x_libraries -lX11"
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "$XLIBSW" = nope ; then
+	AC_CHECK_LIB(Xwindow, XCreateWindow, XLIBSW=-lXwindow)
+    fi
+    if test "$XLIBSW" = nope ; then
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([could not find any!  Using -lX11.])
+	XLIBSW=-lX11
+    fi
+    # TEA specific:
+    if test x"${XLIBSW}" != x ; then
+	PKG_LIBS="${PKG_LIBS} ${XLIBSW}"
+    fi
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_BLOCKING_STYLE
+#
+#	The statements below check for systems where POSIX-style
+#	non-blocking I/O (O_NONBLOCK) doesn't work or is unimplemented.
+#	On these systems (mostly older ones), use the old BSD-style
+#	FIONBIO approach instead.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines some of the following vars:
+#		HAVE_SYS_IOCTL_H
+#		HAVE_SYS_FILIO_H
+#		USE_FIONBIO
+#		O_NONBLOCK
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_BLOCKING_STYLE], [
+    AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/ioctl.h)
+    AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/filio.h)
+    TEA_CONFIG_SYSTEM
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([FIONBIO vs. O_NONBLOCK for nonblocking I/O])
+    case $system in
+	OSF*)
+	    AC_DEFINE(USE_FIONBIO, 1, [Should we use FIONBIO?])
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([FIONBIO])
+	    ;;
+	*)
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([O_NONBLOCK])
+	    ;;
+    esac
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_TIME_HANDLER
+#
+#	Checks how the system deals with time.h, what time structures
+#	are used on the system, and what fields the structures have.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines some of the following vars:
+#		USE_DELTA_FOR_TZ
+#		HAVE_TM_GMTOFF
+#		HAVE_TM_TZADJ
+#		HAVE_TIMEZONE_VAR
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_TIME_HANDLER], [
+    AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/time.h)
+    AC_HEADER_TIME
+    AC_STRUCT_TIMEZONE
+
+    AC_CHECK_FUNCS(gmtime_r localtime_r)
+
+    AC_CACHE_CHECK([tm_tzadj in struct tm], tcl_cv_member_tm_tzadj, [
+	AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <time.h>], [struct tm tm; tm.tm_tzadj;],
+	    tcl_cv_member_tm_tzadj=yes, tcl_cv_member_tm_tzadj=no)])
+    if test $tcl_cv_member_tm_tzadj = yes ; then
+	AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TM_TZADJ, 1, [Should we use the tm_tzadj field of struct tm?])
+    fi
+
+    AC_CACHE_CHECK([tm_gmtoff in struct tm], tcl_cv_member_tm_gmtoff, [
+	AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <time.h>], [struct tm tm; tm.tm_gmtoff;],
+	    tcl_cv_member_tm_gmtoff=yes, tcl_cv_member_tm_gmtoff=no)])
+    if test $tcl_cv_member_tm_gmtoff = yes ; then
+	AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TM_GMTOFF, 1, [Should we use the tm_gmtoff field of struct tm?])
+    fi
+
+    #
+    # Its important to include time.h in this check, as some systems
+    # (like convex) have timezone functions, etc.
+    #
+    AC_CACHE_CHECK([long timezone variable], tcl_cv_timezone_long, [
+	AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <time.h>],
+	    [extern long timezone;
+	    timezone += 1;
+	    exit (0);],
+	    tcl_cv_timezone_long=yes, tcl_cv_timezone_long=no)])
+    if test $tcl_cv_timezone_long = yes ; then
+	AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TIMEZONE_VAR, 1, [Should we use the global timezone variable?])
+    else
+	#
+	# On some systems (eg IRIX 6.2), timezone is a time_t and not a long.
+	#
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK([time_t timezone variable], tcl_cv_timezone_time, [
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <time.h>],
+		[extern time_t timezone;
+		timezone += 1;
+		exit (0);],
+		tcl_cv_timezone_time=yes, tcl_cv_timezone_time=no)])
+	if test $tcl_cv_timezone_time = yes ; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TIMEZONE_VAR, 1, [Should we use the global timezone variable?])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_BUGGY_STRTOD
+#
+#	Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the
+#	terminating character under some conditions.  Check for this
+#	and if the problem exists use a substitute procedure
+#	"fixstrtod" (provided by Tcl) that corrects the error.
+#	Also, on Compaq's Tru64 Unix 5.0,
+#	strtod(" ") returns 0.0 instead of a failure to convert.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Might defines some of the following vars:
+#		strtod (=fixstrtod)
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_BUGGY_STRTOD], [
+    AC_CHECK_FUNC(strtod, tcl_strtod=1, tcl_strtod=0)
+    if test "$tcl_strtod" = 1; then
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK([for Solaris2.4/Tru64 strtod bugs], tcl_cv_strtod_buggy,[
+	    AC_TRY_RUN([
+		extern double strtod();
+		int main() {
+		    char *infString="Inf", *nanString="NaN", *spaceString=" ";
+		    char *term;
+		    double value;
+		    value = strtod(infString, &term);
+		    if ((term != infString) && (term[-1] == 0)) {
+			exit(1);
+		    }
+		    value = strtod(nanString, &term);
+		    if ((term != nanString) && (term[-1] == 0)) {
+			exit(1);
+		    }
+		    value = strtod(spaceString, &term);
+		    if (term == (spaceString+1)) {
+			exit(1);
+		    }
+		    exit(0);
+		}], tcl_cv_strtod_buggy=ok, tcl_cv_strtod_buggy=buggy,
+		    tcl_cv_strtod_buggy=buggy)])
+	if test "$tcl_cv_strtod_buggy" = buggy; then
+	    AC_LIBOBJ([fixstrtod])
+	    USE_COMPAT=1
+	    AC_DEFINE(strtod, fixstrtod, [Do we want to use the strtod() in compat?])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAGS
+#
+#	Check for what flags are needed to be passed so the correct OS
+#	features are available.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	None
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Might define the following vars:
+#		_ISOC99_SOURCE
+#		_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
+#		_LARGEFILE_SOURCE64
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAG],[
+    AC_CACHE_VAL([tcl_cv_flag_]translit($1,[A-Z],[a-z]),
+	AC_TRY_COMPILE([$2], $3, [tcl_cv_flag_]translit($1,[A-Z],[a-z])=no,
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([[#define ]$1[ 1
+]$2], $3,
+		[tcl_cv_flag_]translit($1,[A-Z],[a-z])=yes,
+		[tcl_cv_flag_]translit($1,[A-Z],[a-z])=no)))
+    if test ["x${tcl_cv_flag_]translit($1,[A-Z],[a-z])[}" = "xyes"] ; then
+	AC_DEFINE($1, 1, [Add the ]$1[ flag when building])
+	tcl_flags="$tcl_flags $1"
+    fi
+])
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAGS],[
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for required early compiler flags])
+    tcl_flags=""
+    TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAG(_ISOC99_SOURCE,[#include <stdlib.h>],
+	[char *p = (char *)strtoll; char *q = (char *)strtoull;])
+    TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAG(_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE,[#include <sys/stat.h>],
+	[struct stat64 buf; int i = stat64("/", &buf);])
+    TEA_TCL_EARLY_FLAG(_LARGEFILE_SOURCE64,[#include <sys/stat.h>],
+	[char *p = (char *)open64;])
+    if test "x${tcl_flags}" = "x" ; then
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([none])
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([${tcl_flags}])
+    fi
+])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS
+#
+#	Check for what is defined in the way of 64-bit features.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	None
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Might define the following vars:
+#		TCL_WIDE_INT_IS_LONG
+#		TCL_WIDE_INT_TYPE
+#		HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64
+#		HAVE_STRUCT_STAT64
+#		HAVE_TYPE_OFF64_T
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_TCL_64BIT_FLAGS], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for 64-bit integer type])
+    AC_CACHE_VAL(tcl_cv_type_64bit,[
+	tcl_cv_type_64bit=none
+	# See if the compiler knows natively about __int64
+	AC_TRY_COMPILE(,[__int64 value = (__int64) 0;],
+	    tcl_type_64bit=__int64, tcl_type_64bit="long long")
+	# See if we should use long anyway  Note that we substitute in the
+	# type that is our current guess for a 64-bit type inside this check
+	# program, so it should be modified only carefully...
+        AC_TRY_COMPILE(,[switch (0) {
+            case 1: case (sizeof(]${tcl_type_64bit}[)==sizeof(long)): ;
+        }],tcl_cv_type_64bit=${tcl_type_64bit})])
+    if test "${tcl_cv_type_64bit}" = none ; then
+	AC_DEFINE(TCL_WIDE_INT_IS_LONG, 1, [Are wide integers to be implemented with C 'long's?])
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([using long])
+    elif test "${tcl_cv_type_64bit}" = "__int64" \
+		-a "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	# TEA specific: We actually want to use the default tcl.h checks in
+	# this case to handle both TCL_WIDE_INT_TYPE and TCL_LL_MODIFIER*
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([using Tcl header defaults])
+    else
+	AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(TCL_WIDE_INT_TYPE,${tcl_cv_type_64bit},
+	    [What type should be used to define wide integers?])
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([${tcl_cv_type_64bit}])
+
+	# Now check for auxiliary declarations
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK([for struct dirent64], tcl_cv_struct_dirent64,[
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <dirent.h>],[struct dirent64 p;],
+		tcl_cv_struct_dirent64=yes,tcl_cv_struct_dirent64=no)])
+	if test "x${tcl_cv_struct_dirent64}" = "xyes" ; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT64, 1, [Is 'struct dirent64' in <sys/types.h>?])
+	fi
+
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK([for struct stat64], tcl_cv_struct_stat64,[
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <sys/stat.h>],[struct stat64 p;
+],
+		tcl_cv_struct_stat64=yes,tcl_cv_struct_stat64=no)])
+	if test "x${tcl_cv_struct_stat64}" = "xyes" ; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_STRUCT_STAT64, 1, [Is 'struct stat64' in <sys/stat.h>?])
+	fi
+
+	AC_CHECK_FUNCS(open64 lseek64)
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for off64_t])
+	AC_CACHE_VAL(tcl_cv_type_off64_t,[
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <sys/types.h>],[off64_t offset;
+],
+		tcl_cv_type_off64_t=yes,tcl_cv_type_off64_t=no)])
+	dnl Define HAVE_TYPE_OFF64_T only when the off64_t type and the
+	dnl functions lseek64 and open64 are defined.
+	if test "x${tcl_cv_type_off64_t}" = "xyes" && \
+	        test "x${ac_cv_func_lseek64}" = "xyes" && \
+	        test "x${ac_cv_func_open64}" = "xyes" ; then
+	    AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TYPE_OFF64_T, 1, [Is off64_t in <sys/types.h>?])
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+	else
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+##
+## Here ends the standard Tcl configuration bits and starts the
+## TEA specific functions
+##
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_INIT --
+#
+#	Init various Tcl Extension Architecture (TEA) variables.
+#	This should be the first called TEA_* macro.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		CYGPATH
+#		EXEEXT
+#	Defines only:
+#		TEA_VERSION
+#		TEA_INITED
+#		TEA_PLATFORM (windows or unix)
+#
+# "cygpath" is used on windows to generate native path names for include
+# files. These variables should only be used with the compiler and linker
+# since they generate native path names.
+#
+# EXEEXT
+#	Select the executable extension based on the host type.  This
+#	is a lightweight replacement for AC_EXEEXT that doesn't require
+#	a compiler.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_INIT], [
+    TEA_VERSION="3.13"
+
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([TEA configuration])
+    if test x"${PACKAGE_NAME}" = x ; then
+	AC_MSG_ERROR([
+The PACKAGE_NAME variable must be defined by your TEA configure.ac])
+    fi
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([ok (TEA ${TEA_VERSION})])
+
+    # If the user did not set CFLAGS, set it now to keep macros
+    # like AC_PROG_CC and AC_TRY_COMPILE from adding "-g -O2".
+    if test "${CFLAGS+set}" != "set" ; then
+	CFLAGS=""
+    fi
+
+    case "`uname -s`" in
+	*win32*|*WIN32*|*MINGW32_*|*MINGW64_*)
+	    AC_CHECK_PROG(CYGPATH, cygpath, cygpath -m, echo)
+	    EXEEXT=".exe"
+	    TEA_PLATFORM="windows"
+	    ;;
+	*CYGWIN_*)
+	    EXEEXT=".exe"
+	    # CYGPATH and TEA_PLATFORM are determined later in LOAD_TCLCONFIG
+	    ;;
+	*)
+	    CYGPATH=echo
+	    # Maybe we are cross-compiling....
+	    case ${host_alias} in
+		*mingw32*)
+		EXEEXT=".exe"
+		TEA_PLATFORM="windows"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		EXEEXT=""
+		TEA_PLATFORM="unix"
+		;;
+	    esac
+	    ;;
+    esac
+
+    # Check if exec_prefix is set. If not use fall back to prefix.
+    # Note when adjusted, so that TEA_PREFIX can correct for this.
+    # This is needed for recursive configures, since autoconf propagates
+    # $prefix, but not $exec_prefix (doh!).
+    if test x$exec_prefix = xNONE ; then
+	exec_prefix_default=yes
+	exec_prefix=$prefix
+    fi
+
+    AC_MSG_NOTICE([configuring ${PACKAGE_NAME} ${PACKAGE_VERSION}])
+
+    AC_SUBST(EXEEXT)
+    AC_SUBST(CYGPATH)
+
+    # This package name must be replaced statically for AC_SUBST to work
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_LIB_FILE)
+    # Substitute STUB_LIB_FILE in case package creates a stub library too.
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE)
+
+    # We AC_SUBST these here to ensure they are subst'ed,
+    # in case the user doesn't call TEA_ADD_...
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_STUB_SOURCES)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_TCL_SOURCES)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_HEADERS)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_INCLUDES)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_LIBS)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_CFLAGS)
+
+    # Configure the installer.
+    TEA_INSTALLER
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_SOURCES --
+#
+#	Specify one or more source files.  Users should check for
+#	the right platform before adding to their list.
+#	It is not important to specify the directory, as long as it is
+#	in the generic, win or unix subdirectory of $(srcdir).
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		PKG_SOURCES
+#		PKG_OBJECTS
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_SOURCES], [
+    vars="$@"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	case $i in
+	    [\$]*)
+		# allow $-var names
+		PKG_SOURCES="$PKG_SOURCES $i"
+		PKG_OBJECTS="$PKG_OBJECTS $i"
+		;;
+	    *)
+		# check for existence - allows for generic/win/unix VPATH
+		# To add more dirs here (like 'src'), you have to update VPATH
+		# in Makefile.in as well
+		if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/generic/$i" \
+		    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/win/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/unix/$i" \
+		    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/macosx/$i" \
+		    ; then
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([could not find source file '$i'])
+		fi
+		PKG_SOURCES="$PKG_SOURCES $i"
+		# this assumes it is in a VPATH dir
+#		i=`basename $i`
+		# handle user calling this before or after TEA_SETUP_COMPILER
+		if test x"${OBJEXT}" != x ; then
+		    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[[^.]]*$//'`.${OBJEXT}"
+		else
+		    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[[^.]]*$//'`.\${OBJEXT}"
+		fi
+		PKG_OBJECTS="$PKG_OBJECTS $j"
+		;;
+	esac
+    done
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_SOURCES)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_OBJECTS)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES --
+#
+#	Specify one or more source files.  Users should check for
+#	the right platform before adding to their list.
+#	It is not important to specify the directory, as long as it is
+#	in the generic, win or unix subdirectory of $(srcdir).
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		PKG_STUB_SOURCES
+#		PKG_STUB_OBJECTS
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES], [
+    vars="$@"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	# check for existence - allows for generic/win/unix VPATH
+	if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/generic/$i" \
+	    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/win/$i" -a ! -f "${srcdir}/unix/$i" \
+	    -a ! -f "${srcdir}/macosx/$i" \
+	    ; then
+	    AC_MSG_ERROR([could not find stub source file '$i'])
+	fi
+	PKG_STUB_SOURCES="$PKG_STUB_SOURCES $i"
+	# this assumes it is in a VPATH dir
+	i=`basename $i`
+	# handle user calling this before or after TEA_SETUP_COMPILER
+	if test x"${OBJEXT}" != x ; then
+	    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[[^.]]*$//'`.${OBJEXT}"
+	else
+	    j="`echo $i | sed -e 's/\.[[^.]]*$//'`.\${OBJEXT}"
+	fi
+	PKG_STUB_OBJECTS="$PKG_STUB_OBJECTS $j"
+    done
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_STUB_SOURCES)
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES --
+#
+#	Specify one or more Tcl source files.  These should be platform
+#	independent runtime files.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		PKG_TCL_SOURCES
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES], [
+    vars="$@"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	# check for existence, be strict because it is installed
+	if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" ; then
+	    AC_MSG_ERROR([could not find tcl source file '${srcdir}/$i'])
+	fi
+	PKG_TCL_SOURCES="$PKG_TCL_SOURCES $i"
+    done
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_TCL_SOURCES)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_HEADERS --
+#
+#	Specify one or more source headers.  Users should check for
+#	the right platform before adding to their list.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		PKG_HEADERS
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_HEADERS], [
+    vars="$@"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	# check for existence, be strict because it is installed
+	if test ! -f "${srcdir}/$i" ; then
+	    AC_MSG_ERROR([could not find header file '${srcdir}/$i'])
+	fi
+	PKG_HEADERS="$PKG_HEADERS $i"
+    done
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_HEADERS)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_INCLUDES --
+#
+#	Specify one or more include dirs.  Users should check for
+#	the right platform before adding to their list.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		PKG_INCLUDES
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_INCLUDES], [
+    vars="$@"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	PKG_INCLUDES="$PKG_INCLUDES $i"
+    done
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_INCLUDES)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_LIBS --
+#
+#	Specify one or more libraries.  Users should check for
+#	the right platform before adding to their list.  For Windows,
+#	libraries provided in "foo.lib" format will be converted to
+#	"-lfoo" when using GCC (mingw).
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		PKG_LIBS
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_LIBS], [
+    vars="$@"
+    for i in $vars; do
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" = "yes" ; then
+	    # Convert foo.lib to -lfoo for GCC.  No-op if not *.lib
+	    i=`echo "$i" | sed -e 's/^\([[^-]].*\)\.lib[$]/-l\1/i'`
+	fi
+	PKG_LIBS="$PKG_LIBS $i"
+    done
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_LIBS)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_CFLAGS --
+#
+#	Specify one or more CFLAGS.  Users should check for
+#	the right platform before adding to their list.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines and substs the following vars:
+#		PKG_CFLAGS
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_CFLAGS], [
+    PKG_CFLAGS="$PKG_CFLAGS $@"
+    AC_SUBST(PKG_CFLAGS)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_ADD_CLEANFILES --
+#
+#	Specify one or more CLEANFILES.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	one or more file names to clean target
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Appends to CLEANFILES, already defined for subst in LOAD_TCLCONFIG
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ADD_CLEANFILES], [
+    CLEANFILES="$CLEANFILES $@"
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PREFIX --
+#
+#	Handle the --prefix=... option by defaulting to what Tcl gave
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	If --prefix or --exec-prefix was not specified, $prefix and
+#	$exec_prefix will be set to the values given to Tcl when it was
+#	configured.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PREFIX], [
+    if test "${prefix}" = "NONE"; then
+	prefix_default=yes
+	if test x"${TCL_PREFIX}" != x; then
+	    AC_MSG_NOTICE([--prefix defaulting to TCL_PREFIX ${TCL_PREFIX}])
+	    prefix=${TCL_PREFIX}
+	else
+	    AC_MSG_NOTICE([--prefix defaulting to /usr/local])
+	    prefix=/usr/local
+	fi
+    fi
+    if test "${exec_prefix}" = "NONE" -a x"${prefix_default}" = x"yes" \
+	-o x"${exec_prefix_default}" = x"yes" ; then
+	if test x"${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}" != x; then
+	    AC_MSG_NOTICE([--exec-prefix defaulting to TCL_EXEC_PREFIX ${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}])
+	    exec_prefix=${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}
+	else
+	    AC_MSG_NOTICE([--exec-prefix defaulting to ${prefix}])
+	    exec_prefix=$prefix
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_SETUP_COMPILER_CC --
+#
+#	Do compiler checks the way we want.  This is just a replacement
+#	for AC_PROG_CC in TEA configure.ac files to make them cleaner.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Sets up CC var and other standard bits we need to make executables.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_SETUP_COMPILER_CC], [
+    # Don't put any macros that use the compiler (e.g. AC_TRY_COMPILE)
+    # in this macro, they need to go into TEA_SETUP_COMPILER instead.
+
+    AC_PROG_CC
+    AC_PROG_CPP
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Checks to see if the make program sets the $MAKE variable.
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    AC_PROG_MAKE_SET
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Find ranlib
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    AC_CHECK_TOOL(RANLIB, ranlib)
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Determines the correct binary file extension (.o, .obj, .exe etc.)
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    AC_OBJEXT
+    AC_EXEEXT
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_SETUP_COMPILER --
+#
+#	Do compiler checks that use the compiler.  This must go after
+#	TEA_SETUP_COMPILER_CC, which does the actual compiler check.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Sets up CC var and other standard bits we need to make executables.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_SETUP_COMPILER], [
+    # Any macros that use the compiler (e.g. AC_TRY_COMPILE) have to go here.
+    AC_REQUIRE([TEA_SETUP_COMPILER_CC])
+
+    #------------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # If we're using GCC, see if the compiler understands -pipe. If so, use it.
+    # It makes compiling go faster.  (This is only a performance feature.)
+    #------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    if test -z "$no_pipe" -a -n "$GCC"; then
+	AC_CACHE_CHECK([if the compiler understands -pipe],
+	    tcl_cv_cc_pipe, [
+	    hold_cflags=$CFLAGS; CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pipe"
+	    AC_TRY_COMPILE(,, tcl_cv_cc_pipe=yes, tcl_cv_cc_pipe=no)
+	    CFLAGS=$hold_cflags])
+	if test $tcl_cv_cc_pipe = yes; then
+	    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -pipe"
+	fi
+    fi
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Common compiler flag setup
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    AC_C_BIGENDIAN
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_MAKE_LIB --
+#
+#	Generate a line that can be used to build a shared/unshared library
+#	in a platform independent manner.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+#	Requires:
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#	CFLAGS -	Done late here to note disturb other AC macros
+#       MAKE_LIB -      Command to execute to build the Tcl library;
+#                       differs depending on whether or not Tcl is being
+#                       compiled as a shared library.
+#	MAKE_SHARED_LIB	Makefile rule for building a shared library
+#	MAKE_STATIC_LIB	Makefile rule for building a static library
+#	MAKE_STUB_LIB	Makefile rule for building a stub library
+#	VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL Makefile rule for embedded VC manifest in DLL
+#	VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE Makefile rule for embedded VC manifest in EXE
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_MAKE_LIB], [
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" != "yes"; then
+	MAKE_STATIC_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} -out:\[$]@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS)"
+	MAKE_SHARED_LIB="\${SHLIB_LD} \${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} \${LDFLAGS_DEFAULT} -out:\[$]@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS)"
+	AC_EGREP_CPP([manifest needed], [
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1400
+print("manifest needed")
+#endif
+	], [
+	# Could do a CHECK_PROG for mt, but should always be with MSVC8+
+	VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL="if test -f \[$]@.manifest ; then mt.exe -nologo -manifest \[$]@.manifest -outputresource:\[$]@\;2 ; fi"
+	VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE="if test -f \[$]@.manifest ; then mt.exe -nologo -manifest \[$]@.manifest -outputresource:\[$]@\;1 ; fi"
+	MAKE_SHARED_LIB="${MAKE_SHARED_LIB} ; ${VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL}"
+	TEA_ADD_CLEANFILES([*.manifest])
+	])
+	MAKE_STUB_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} -nodefaultlib -out:\[$]@ \$(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)"
+    else
+	MAKE_STATIC_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} \[$]@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS)"
+	MAKE_SHARED_LIB="\${SHLIB_LD} -o \[$]@ \$(PKG_OBJECTS) \${SHLIB_LD_LIBS}"
+	MAKE_STUB_LIB="\${STLIB_LD} \[$]@ \$(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)"
+    fi
+
+    if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	MAKE_LIB="${MAKE_SHARED_LIB} "
+    else
+	MAKE_LIB="${MAKE_STATIC_LIB} "
+    fi
+
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # Shared libraries and static libraries have different names.
+    # Use the double eval to make sure any variables in the suffix is
+    # substituted. (@@@ Might not be necessary anymore)
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" ; then
+	if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	    # We force the unresolved linking of symbols that are really in
+	    # the private libraries of Tcl and Tk.
+	    if test x"${TK_BIN_DIR}" != x ; then
+		SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} \"`${CYGPATH} ${TK_BIN_DIR}/${TK_STUB_LIB_FILE}`\""
+	    fi
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} \"`${CYGPATH} ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}`\""
+	    if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} -static-libgcc"
+	    fi
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	else
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	    if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		PKG_LIB_FILE=lib${PKG_LIB_FILE}
+	    fi
+	fi
+	# Some packages build their own stubs libraries
+	eval eval "PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE=${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}stub${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+	    PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE=lib${PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE}
+	fi
+	# These aren't needed on Windows (either MSVC or gcc)
+	RANLIB=:
+	RANLIB_STUB=:
+    else
+	RANLIB_STUB="${RANLIB}"
+	if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	    SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} ${TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+	    if test x"${TK_BIN_DIR}" != x ; then
+		SHLIB_LD_LIBS="${SHLIB_LD_LIBS} ${TK_STUB_LIB_SPEC}"
+	    fi
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=lib${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	    RANLIB=:
+	else
+	    eval eval "PKG_LIB_FILE=lib${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+	fi
+	# Some packages build their own stubs libraries
+	eval eval "PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE=lib${PACKAGE_LIB_PREFIX}${PACKAGE_NAME}stub${UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+    fi
+
+    # These are escaped so that only CFLAGS is picked up at configure time.
+    # The other values will be substituted at make time.
+    CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} \${CFLAGS_DEFAULT} \${CFLAGS_WARNING}"
+    if test "${SHARED_BUILD}" = "1" ; then
+	CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} \${SHLIB_CFLAGS}"
+    fi
+
+    AC_SUBST(MAKE_LIB)
+    AC_SUBST(MAKE_SHARED_LIB)
+    AC_SUBST(MAKE_STATIC_LIB)
+    AC_SUBST(MAKE_STUB_LIB)
+    AC_SUBST(RANLIB_STUB)
+    AC_SUBST(VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL)
+    AC_SUBST(VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_LIB_SPEC --
+#
+#	Compute the name of an existing object library located in libdir
+#	from the given base name and produce the appropriate linker flags.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	basename	The base name of the library without version
+#			numbers, extensions, or "lib" prefixes.
+#	extra_dir	Extra directory in which to search for the
+#			library.  This location is used first, then
+#			$prefix/$exec-prefix, then some defaults.
+#
+# Requires:
+#	TEA_INIT and TEA_PREFIX must be called first.
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		${basename}_LIB_NAME	The computed library name.
+#		${basename}_LIB_SPEC	The computed linker flags.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_LIB_SPEC], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for $1 library])
+
+    # Look in exec-prefix for the library (defined by TEA_PREFIX).
+
+    tea_lib_name_dir="${exec_prefix}/lib"
+
+    # Or in a user-specified location.
+
+    if test x"$2" != x ; then
+	tea_extra_lib_dir=$2
+    else
+	tea_extra_lib_dir=NONE
+    fi
+
+    for i in \
+	    `ls -dr ${tea_extra_lib_dir}/$1[[0-9]]*.lib 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr ${tea_extra_lib_dir}/lib$1[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr ${tea_lib_name_dir}/$1[[0-9]]*.lib 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr ${tea_lib_name_dir}/lib$1[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr /usr/lib/$1[[0-9]]*.lib 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr /usr/lib/lib$1[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr /usr/lib64/$1[[0-9]]*.lib 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr /usr/lib64/lib$1[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr /usr/local/lib/$1[[0-9]]*.lib 2>/dev/null ` \
+	    `ls -dr /usr/local/lib/lib$1[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null ` ; do
+	if test -f "$i" ; then
+	    tea_lib_name_dir=`dirname $i`
+	    $1_LIB_NAME=`basename $i`
+	    $1_LIB_PATH_NAME=$i
+	    break
+	fi
+    done
+
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+	$1_LIB_SPEC=\"`${CYGPATH} ${$1_LIB_PATH_NAME} 2>/dev/null`\"
+    else
+	# Strip off the leading "lib" and trailing ".a" or ".so"
+
+	tea_lib_name_lib=`echo ${$1_LIB_NAME}|sed -e 's/^lib//' -e 's/\.[[^.]]*$//' -e 's/\.so.*//'`
+	$1_LIB_SPEC="-L${tea_lib_name_dir} -l${tea_lib_name_lib}"
+    fi
+
+    if test "x${$1_LIB_NAME}" = x ; then
+	AC_MSG_ERROR([not found])
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([${$1_LIB_SPEC}])
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS --
+#
+#	Locate the private Tcl include files
+#
+# Arguments:
+#
+#	Requires:
+#		TCL_SRC_DIR	Assumes that TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG has
+#				already been called.
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		TCL_TOP_DIR_NATIVE
+#		TCL_INCLUDES
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS], [
+    # Allow for --with-tclinclude to take effect and define ${ac_cv_c_tclh}
+    AC_REQUIRE([TEA_PUBLIC_TCL_HEADERS])
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Tcl private include files])
+
+    TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${TCL_SRC_DIR}`
+    TCL_TOP_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+    # Check to see if tcl<Plat>Port.h isn't already with the public headers
+    # Don't look for tclInt.h because that resides with tcl.h in the core
+    # sources, but the <plat>Port headers are in a different directory
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tclh}/tclWinPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    elif test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "unix" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tclh}/tclUnixPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    else
+	TCL_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/generic\"
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+	    TCL_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/win\"
+	else
+	    TCL_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TCL_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/unix\"
+	fi
+	# Overwrite the previous TCL_INCLUDES as this should capture both
+	# public and private headers in the same set.
+	# We want to ensure these are substituted so as not to require
+	# any *_NATIVE vars be defined in the Makefile
+	TCL_INCLUDES="-I${TCL_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE} -I${TCL_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE}"
+	if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+            # If Tcl was built as a framework, attempt to use
+            # the framework's Headers and PrivateHeaders directories
+            case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+	    	*TCL_FRAMEWORK*)
+		    if test -d "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Headers" -a \
+			    -d "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders"; then
+			TCL_INCLUDES="-I\"${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Headers\" -I\"${TCL_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders\" ${TCL_INCLUDES}"
+		    else
+			TCL_INCLUDES="${TCL_INCLUDES} ${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC} `echo "${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/Headers/PrivateHeaders/'`"
+		    fi
+	            ;;
+	    esac
+	    result="Using ${TCL_INCLUDES}"
+	else
+	    if test ! -f "${TCL_SRC_DIR}/generic/tclInt.h" ; then
+		AC_MSG_ERROR([Cannot find private header tclInt.h in ${TCL_SRC_DIR}])
+	    fi
+	    result="Using srcdir found in tclConfig.sh: ${TCL_SRC_DIR}"
+	fi
+    fi
+
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_TOP_DIR_NATIVE)
+
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_INCLUDES)
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([${result}])
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PUBLIC_TCL_HEADERS --
+#
+#	Locate the installed public Tcl header files
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	None.
+#
+# Requires:
+#	CYGPATH must be set
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds a --with-tclinclude switch to configure.
+#	Result is cached.
+#
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		TCL_INCLUDES
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PUBLIC_TCL_HEADERS], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Tcl public headers])
+
+    AC_ARG_WITH(tclinclude, [  --with-tclinclude       directory containing the public Tcl header files], with_tclinclude=${withval})
+
+    AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_c_tclh, [
+	# Use the value from --with-tclinclude, if it was given
+
+	if test x"${with_tclinclude}" != x ; then
+	    if test -f "${with_tclinclude}/tcl.h" ; then
+		ac_cv_c_tclh=${with_tclinclude}
+	    else
+		AC_MSG_ERROR([${with_tclinclude} directory does not contain tcl.h])
+	    fi
+	else
+	    list=""
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+		# If Tcl was built as a framework, attempt to use
+		# the framework's Headers directory
+		case ${TCL_DEFS} in
+		    *TCL_FRAMEWORK*)
+			list="`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Headers 2>/dev/null`"
+			;;
+		esac
+	    fi
+
+	    # Look in the source dir only if Tcl is not installed,
+	    # and in that situation, look there before installed locations.
+	    if test -f "${TCL_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+		list="$list `ls -d ${TCL_SRC_DIR}/generic 2>/dev/null`"
+	    fi
+
+	    # Check order: pkg --prefix location, Tcl's --prefix location,
+	    # relative to directory of tclConfig.sh.
+
+	    eval "temp_includedir=${includedir}"
+	    list="$list \
+		`ls -d ${temp_includedir}        2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_PREFIX}/include     2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../include 2>/dev/null`"
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" -o "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		list="$list /usr/local/include /usr/include"
+		if test x"${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC}" != x ; then
+		    d=`echo "${TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/^-I//'`
+		    list="$list `ls -d ${d} 2>/dev/null`"
+		fi
+	    fi
+	    for i in $list ; do
+		if test -f "$i/tcl.h" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tclh=$i
+		    break
+		fi
+	    done
+	fi
+    ])
+
+    # Print a message based on how we determined the include path
+
+    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclh}" = x ; then
+	AC_MSG_ERROR([tcl.h not found.  Please specify its location with --with-tclinclude])
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([${ac_cv_c_tclh}])
+    fi
+
+    # Convert to a native path and substitute into the output files.
+
+    INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${ac_cv_c_tclh}`
+
+    TCL_INCLUDES=-I\"${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_INCLUDES)
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS --
+#
+#	Locate the private Tk include files
+#
+# Arguments:
+#
+#	Requires:
+#		TK_SRC_DIR	Assumes that TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG has
+#				 already been called.
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		TK_INCLUDES
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS], [
+    # Allow for --with-tkinclude to take effect and define ${ac_cv_c_tkh}
+    AC_REQUIRE([TEA_PUBLIC_TK_HEADERS])
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Tk private include files])
+
+    TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${TK_SRC_DIR}`
+    TK_TOP_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+    # Check to see if tk<Plat>Port.h isn't already with the public headers
+    # Don't look for tkInt.h because that resides with tk.h in the core
+    # sources, but the <plat>Port headers are in a different directory
+    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tkh}/tkWinPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    elif test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "unix" -a \
+	-f "${ac_cv_c_tkh}/tkUnixPort.h"; then
+	result="private headers found with public headers"
+    else
+	TK_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/generic\"
+	TK_XLIB_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/xlib\"
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows"; then
+	    TK_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/win\"
+	else
+	    TK_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE=\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/unix\"
+	fi
+	# Overwrite the previous TK_INCLUDES as this should capture both
+	# public and private headers in the same set.
+	# We want to ensure these are substituted so as not to require
+	# any *_NATIVE vars be defined in the Makefile
+	TK_INCLUDES="-I${TK_GENERIC_DIR_NATIVE} -I${TK_PLATFORM_DIR_NATIVE}"
+	# Detect and add ttk subdir
+	if test -d "${TK_SRC_DIR}/generic/ttk"; then
+	   TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} -I\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/generic/ttk\""
+	fi
+	if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" != "x11"; then
+	   TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} -I\"${TK_XLIB_DIR_NATIVE}\""
+	fi
+	if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" = "aqua"; then
+	   TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} -I\"${TK_SRC_DIR_NATIVE}/macosx\""
+	fi
+	if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+	    # If Tk was built as a framework, attempt to use
+	    # the framework's Headers and PrivateHeaders directories
+	    case ${TK_DEFS} in
+		*TK_FRAMEWORK*)
+			if test -d "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Headers" -a \
+				-d "${TK_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders"; then
+			    TK_INCLUDES="-I\"${TK_BIN_DIR}/Headers\" -I\"${TK_BIN_DIR}/PrivateHeaders\" ${TK_INCLUDES}"
+			else
+			    TK_INCLUDES="${TK_INCLUDES} ${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC} `echo "${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/Headers/PrivateHeaders/'`"
+			fi
+			;;
+	    esac
+	    result="Using ${TK_INCLUDES}"
+	else
+	    if test ! -f "${TK_SRC_DIR}/generic/tkInt.h" ; then
+	       AC_MSG_ERROR([Cannot find private header tkInt.h in ${TK_SRC_DIR}])
+	    fi
+	    result="Using srcdir found in tkConfig.sh: ${TK_SRC_DIR}"
+	fi
+    fi
+
+    AC_SUBST(TK_TOP_DIR_NATIVE)
+    AC_SUBST(TK_XLIB_DIR_NATIVE)
+
+    AC_SUBST(TK_INCLUDES)
+    AC_MSG_RESULT([${result}])
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PUBLIC_TK_HEADERS --
+#
+#	Locate the installed public Tk header files
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	None.
+#
+# Requires:
+#	CYGPATH must be set
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds a --with-tkinclude switch to configure.
+#	Result is cached.
+#
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		TK_INCLUDES
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PUBLIC_TK_HEADERS], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Tk public headers])
+
+    AC_ARG_WITH(tkinclude, [  --with-tkinclude        directory containing the public Tk header files], with_tkinclude=${withval})
+
+    AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_c_tkh, [
+	# Use the value from --with-tkinclude, if it was given
+
+	if test x"${with_tkinclude}" != x ; then
+	    if test -f "${with_tkinclude}/tk.h" ; then
+		ac_cv_c_tkh=${with_tkinclude}
+	    else
+		AC_MSG_ERROR([${with_tkinclude} directory does not contain tk.h])
+	    fi
+	else
+	    list=""
+	    if test "`uname -s`" = "Darwin"; then
+		# If Tk was built as a framework, attempt to use
+		# the framework's Headers directory.
+		case ${TK_DEFS} in
+		    *TK_FRAMEWORK*)
+			list="`ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/Headers 2>/dev/null`"
+			;;
+		esac
+	    fi
+
+	    # Look in the source dir only if Tk is not installed,
+	    # and in that situation, look there before installed locations.
+	    if test -f "${TK_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+		list="$list `ls -d ${TK_SRC_DIR}/generic 2>/dev/null`"
+	    fi
+
+	    # Check order: pkg --prefix location, Tk's --prefix location,
+	    # relative to directory of tkConfig.sh, Tcl's --prefix location,
+	    # relative to directory of tclConfig.sh.
+
+	    eval "temp_includedir=${includedir}"
+	    list="$list \
+		`ls -d ${temp_includedir}        2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TK_PREFIX}/include      2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TK_BIN_DIR}/../include  2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_PREFIX}/include     2>/dev/null` \
+		`ls -d ${TCL_BIN_DIR}/../include 2>/dev/null`"
+	    if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" != "windows" -o "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+		list="$list /usr/local/include /usr/include"
+		if test x"${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC}" != x ; then
+		    d=`echo "${TK_INCLUDE_SPEC}" | sed -e 's/^-I//'`
+		    list="$list `ls -d ${d} 2>/dev/null`"
+		fi
+	    fi
+	    for i in $list ; do
+		if test -f "$i/tk.h" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_tkh=$i
+		    break
+		fi
+	    done
+	fi
+    ])
+
+    # Print a message based on how we determined the include path
+
+    if test x"${ac_cv_c_tkh}" = x ; then
+	AC_MSG_ERROR([tk.h not found.  Please specify its location with --with-tkinclude])
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([${ac_cv_c_tkh}])
+    fi
+
+    # Convert to a native path and substitute into the output files.
+
+    INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE=`${CYGPATH} ${ac_cv_c_tkh}`
+
+    TK_INCLUDES=-I\"${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+
+    AC_SUBST(TK_INCLUDES)
+
+    if test "${TEA_WINDOWINGSYSTEM}" != "x11"; then
+	# On Windows and Aqua, we need the X compat headers
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for X11 header files])
+	if test ! -r "${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}/X11/Xlib.h"; then
+	    INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE="`${CYGPATH} ${TK_SRC_DIR}/xlib`"
+	    TK_XINCLUDES=-I\"${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}\"
+	    AC_SUBST(TK_XINCLUDES)
+	fi
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([${INCLUDE_DIR_NATIVE}])
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PATH_CONFIG --
+#
+#	Locate the ${1}Config.sh file and perform a sanity check on
+#	the ${1} compile flags.  These are used by packages like
+#	[incr Tk] that load *Config.sh files from more than Tcl and Tk.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--with-$1=...
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		$1_BIN_DIR	Full path to the directory containing
+#				the $1Config.sh file
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PATH_CONFIG], [
+    #
+    # Ok, lets find the $1 configuration
+    # First, look for one uninstalled.
+    # the alternative search directory is invoked by --with-$1
+    #
+
+    if test x"${no_$1}" = x ; then
+	# we reset no_$1 in case something fails here
+	no_$1=true
+	AC_ARG_WITH($1, [  --with-$1              directory containing $1 configuration ($1Config.sh)], with_$1config=${withval})
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for $1 configuration])
+	AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_c_$1config,[
+
+	    # First check to see if --with-$1 was specified.
+	    if test x"${with_$1config}" != x ; then
+		case ${with_$1config} in
+		    */$1Config.sh )
+			if test -f ${with_$1config}; then
+			    AC_MSG_WARN([--with-$1 argument should refer to directory containing $1Config.sh, not to $1Config.sh itself])
+			    with_$1config=`echo ${with_$1config} | sed 's!/$1Config\.sh$!!'`
+			fi;;
+		esac
+		if test -f "${with_$1config}/$1Config.sh" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_$1config=`(cd ${with_$1config}; pwd)`
+		else
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([${with_$1config} directory doesn't contain $1Config.sh])
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    # then check for a private $1 installation
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_$1config}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			../$1 \
+			`ls -dr ../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]*.[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]][[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../$1 \
+			`ls -dr ../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]*.[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]][[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			../../../$1 \
+			`ls -dr ../../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]*.[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]][[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ../../../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			${srcdir}/../$1 \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]*.[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]][[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../$1*[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/$1Config.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_$1config=`(cd $i; pwd)`
+			break
+		    fi
+		    if test -f "$i/unix/$1Config.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_$1config=`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+
+	    # check in a few common install locations
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_$1config}" = x ; then
+		for i in `ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${exec_prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d ${prefix}/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/pkg/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null` \
+			`ls -d /usr/lib64 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -f "$i/$1Config.sh" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_$1config=`(cd $i; pwd)`
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+	])
+
+	if test x"${ac_cv_c_$1config}" = x ; then
+	    $1_BIN_DIR="# no $1 configs found"
+	    AC_MSG_WARN([Cannot find $1 configuration definitions])
+	    exit 0
+	else
+	    no_$1=
+	    $1_BIN_DIR=${ac_cv_c_$1config}
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([found $$1_BIN_DIR/$1Config.sh])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_LOAD_CONFIG --
+#
+#	Load the $1Config.sh file
+#
+# Arguments:
+#
+#	Requires the following vars to be set:
+#		$1_BIN_DIR
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		$1_SRC_DIR
+#		$1_LIB_FILE
+#		$1_LIB_SPEC
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_LOAD_CONFIG], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for existence of ${$1_BIN_DIR}/$1Config.sh])
+
+    if test -f "${$1_BIN_DIR}/$1Config.sh" ; then
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([loading])
+	. "${$1_BIN_DIR}/$1Config.sh"
+    else
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([file not found])
+    fi
+
+    #
+    # If the $1_BIN_DIR is the build directory (not the install directory),
+    # then set the common variable name to the value of the build variables.
+    # For example, the variable $1_LIB_SPEC will be set to the value
+    # of $1_BUILD_LIB_SPEC. An extension should make use of $1_LIB_SPEC
+    # instead of $1_BUILD_LIB_SPEC since it will work with both an
+    # installed and uninstalled version of Tcl.
+    #
+
+    if test -f "${$1_BIN_DIR}/Makefile" ; then
+	AC_MSG_WARN([Found Makefile - using build library specs for $1])
+        $1_LIB_SPEC=${$1_BUILD_LIB_SPEC}
+        $1_STUB_LIB_SPEC=${$1_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC}
+        $1_STUB_LIB_PATH=${$1_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH}
+        $1_INCLUDE_SPEC=${$1_BUILD_INCLUDE_SPEC}
+        $1_LIBRARY_PATH=${$1_LIBRARY_PATH}
+    fi
+
+    AC_SUBST($1_VERSION)
+    AC_SUBST($1_BIN_DIR)
+    AC_SUBST($1_SRC_DIR)
+
+    AC_SUBST($1_LIB_FILE)
+    AC_SUBST($1_LIB_SPEC)
+
+    AC_SUBST($1_STUB_LIB_FILE)
+    AC_SUBST($1_STUB_LIB_SPEC)
+    AC_SUBST($1_STUB_LIB_PATH)
+
+    # Allow the caller to prevent this auto-check by specifying any 2nd arg
+    AS_IF([test "x$2" = x], [
+	# Check both upper and lower-case variants
+	# If a dev wanted non-stubs libs, this function could take an option
+	# to not use _STUB in the paths below
+	AS_IF([test "x${$1_STUB_LIB_SPEC}" = x],
+	    [TEA_LOAD_CONFIG_LIB(translit($1,[a-z],[A-Z])_STUB)],
+	    [TEA_LOAD_CONFIG_LIB($1_STUB)])
+    ])
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_LOAD_CONFIG_LIB --
+#
+#	Helper function to load correct library from another extension's
+#	${PACKAGE}Config.sh.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Adds to LIBS the appropriate extension library
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_LOAD_CONFIG_LIB], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([For $1 library for LIBS])
+    # This simplifies the use of stub libraries by automatically adding
+    # the stub lib to your path.  Normally this would add to SHLIB_LD_LIBS,
+    # but this is called before CONFIG_CFLAGS.  More importantly, this adds
+    # to PKG_LIBS, which becomes LIBS, and that is only used by SHLIB_LD.
+    if test "x${$1_LIB_SPEC}" != "x" ; then
+	if test "${TEA_PLATFORM}" = "windows" -a "$GCC" != "yes" ; then
+	    TEA_ADD_LIBS([\"`${CYGPATH} ${$1_LIB_PATH}`\"])
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([using $1_LIB_PATH ${$1_LIB_PATH}])
+	else
+	    TEA_ADD_LIBS([${$1_LIB_SPEC}])
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([using $1_LIB_SPEC ${$1_LIB_SPEC}])
+	fi
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT([file not found])
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_EXPORT_CONFIG --
+#
+#	Define the data to insert into the ${PACKAGE}Config.sh file
+#
+# Arguments:
+#
+#	Requires the following vars to be set:
+#		$1
+#
+# Results:
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_EXPORT_CONFIG], [
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+    # These are for $1Config.sh
+    #--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    # pkglibdir must be a fully qualified path and (not ${exec_prefix}/lib)
+    eval pkglibdir="[$]{libdir}/$1${PACKAGE_VERSION}"
+    if test "${TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK}" = "ok"; then
+	eval $1_LIB_FLAG="-l$1${PACKAGE_VERSION}${DBGX}"
+	eval $1_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-l$1stub${PACKAGE_VERSION}${DBGX}"
+    else
+	eval $1_LIB_FLAG="-l$1`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`${DBGX}"
+	eval $1_STUB_LIB_FLAG="-l$1stub`echo ${PACKAGE_VERSION} | tr -d .`${DBGX}"
+    fi
+    $1_BUILD_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH $(pwd)` ${$1_LIB_FLAG}"
+    $1_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH ${pkglibdir}` ${$1_LIB_FLAG}"
+    $1_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH $(pwd)` [$]{$1_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+    $1_STUB_LIB_SPEC="-L`$CYGPATH ${pkglibdir}` [$]{$1_STUB_LIB_FLAG}"
+    $1_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH="`$CYGPATH $(pwd)`/[$]{PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+    $1_STUB_LIB_PATH="`$CYGPATH ${pkglibdir}`/[$]{PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE}"
+
+    AC_SUBST($1_BUILD_LIB_SPEC)
+    AC_SUBST($1_LIB_SPEC)
+    AC_SUBST($1_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC)
+    AC_SUBST($1_STUB_LIB_SPEC)
+    AC_SUBST($1_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH)
+    AC_SUBST($1_STUB_LIB_PATH)
+
+    AC_SUBST(MAJOR_VERSION)
+    AC_SUBST(MINOR_VERSION)
+    AC_SUBST(PATCHLEVEL)
+])
+
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_PATH_CELIB --
+#
+#	Locate Keuchel's celib emulation layer for targeting Win/CE
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#
+#	Adds the following arguments to configure:
+#		--with-celib=...
+#
+#	Defines the following vars:
+#		CELIB_DIR	Full path to the directory containing
+#				the include and platform lib files
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_PATH_CELIB], [
+    # First, look for one uninstalled.
+    # the alternative search directory is invoked by --with-celib
+
+    if test x"${no_celib}" = x ; then
+	# we reset no_celib in case something fails here
+	no_celib=true
+	AC_ARG_WITH(celib,[  --with-celib=DIR        use Windows/CE support library from DIR], with_celibconfig=${withval})
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Windows/CE celib directory])
+	AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_c_celibconfig,[
+	    # First check to see if --with-celibconfig was specified.
+	    if test x"${with_celibconfig}" != x ; then
+		if test -d "${with_celibconfig}/inc" ; then
+		    ac_cv_c_celibconfig=`(cd ${with_celibconfig}; pwd)`
+		else
+		    AC_MSG_ERROR([${with_celibconfig} directory doesn't contain inc directory])
+		fi
+	    fi
+
+	    # then check for a celib library
+	    if test x"${ac_cv_c_celibconfig}" = x ; then
+		for i in \
+			../celib-palm-3.0 \
+			../celib \
+			../../celib-palm-3.0 \
+			../../celib \
+			`ls -dr ../celib-*3.[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			${srcdir}/../celib-palm-3.0 \
+			${srcdir}/../celib \
+			`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../celib-*3.[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
+			; do
+		    if test -d "$i/inc" ; then
+			ac_cv_c_celibconfig=`(cd $i; pwd)`
+			break
+		    fi
+		done
+	    fi
+	])
+	if test x"${ac_cv_c_celibconfig}" = x ; then
+	    AC_MSG_ERROR([Cannot find celib support library directory])
+	else
+	    no_celib=
+	    CELIB_DIR=${ac_cv_c_celibconfig}
+	    CELIB_DIR=`echo "$CELIB_DIR" | sed -e 's!\\\!/!g'`
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT([found $CELIB_DIR])
+	fi
+    fi
+])
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TEA_INSTALLER --
+#
+#	Configure the installer.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		INSTALL
+#		INSTALL_DATA_DIR
+#		INSTALL_DATA
+#		INSTALL_PROGRAM
+#		INSTALL_SCRIPT
+#		INSTALL_LIBRARY
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_INSTALLER], [
+    INSTALL='$(SHELL) $(srcdir)/tclconfig/install-sh -c'
+    INSTALL_DATA_DIR='${INSTALL} -d -m 755'
+    INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644'
+    INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL} -m 755'
+    INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL} -m 755'
+
+    TEA_CONFIG_SYSTEM
+    case $system in
+	HP-UX-*) INSTALL_LIBRARY='${INSTALL} -m 755' ;;
+	      *) INSTALL_LIBRARY='${INSTALL} -m 644' ;;
+    esac
+
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL)
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL_DATA_DIR)
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL_DATA)
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL_PROGRAM)
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL_SCRIPT)
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL_LIBRARY)
+])
+
+###
+# Tip 430 - ZipFS Modifications
+###
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# SC_ZIPFS_SUPPORT
+#	Locate a zip encoder installed on the system path, or none.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		TCL_ZIP_FILE
+#		TCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT
+#		TCL_ZIPFS_FLAG
+#		ZIP_PROG
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# SC_PROG_ZIP
+#	Locate a zip encoder installed on the system path, or none.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	none
+#
+# Results:
+#	Substitutes the following vars:
+#		ZIP_PROG
+#       ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS
+#       ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH
+#       ZIP_INSTALL_OBJS
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([TEA_ZIPFS_SUPPORT], [
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for zipfs support])
+    ZIP_PROG=""
+    ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS=""
+    ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH=""
+    INSTALL_MSGS=""
+    # If our native tclsh processes the "install" command line option
+    # we can use it to mint zip files
+    AS_IF([$TCLSH_PROG install],[
+      ZIP_PROG=${TCLSH_PROG}
+      ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS="install mkzip"
+      ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH="."
+      AC_MSG_RESULT([Can use Native Tclsh for Zip encoding])
+    ])
+    if test "x$ZIP_PROG" = "x" ; then
+        AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_path_zip, [
+        search_path=`echo ${PATH} | sed -e 's/:/ /g'`
+        for dir in $search_path ; do
+            for j in `ls -r $dir/zip 2> /dev/null` \
+                `ls -r $dir/zip 2> /dev/null` ; do
+            if test x"$ac_cv_path_zip" = x ; then
+                if test -f "$j" ; then
+                ac_cv_path_zip=$j
+                break
+                fi
+            fi
+            done
+        done
+        ])
+        if test -f "$ac_cv_path_zip" ; then
+            ZIP_PROG="$ac_cv_path_zip "
+            AC_MSG_RESULT([$ZIP_PROG])
+            ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS="-rq"
+            ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH="."
+            AC_MSG_RESULT([Found INFO Zip in environment])
+            # Use standard arguments for zip
+        fi
+    fi
+    if test "x$ZIP_PROG" = "x" ; then
+	    # It is not an error if an installed version of Zip can't be located.
+        ZIP_PROG=""
+        ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS=""
+        ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH=""
+        TCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT=0
+        TCL_ZIPFS_FLAG=
+    else
+        # ZIPFS Support
+       eval "TCL_ZIP_FILE=\"${TCL_ZIP_FILE}\""
+       if test ${TCL_ZIP_FILE} = "" ; then
+          TCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT=0
+          TCL_ZIPFS_FLAG=
+          INSTALL_LIBRARIES=install-libraries
+          INSTALL_MSGS=install-msgs
+       else
+           if test ${SHARED_BUILD} = 1 ; then
+              TCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT=1
+              INSTALL_LIBRARIES=install-libraries-zipfs-shared
+           else
+              TCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT=2
+              INSTALL_LIBRARIES=install-libraries-zipfs-static
+           fi
+          TCL_ZIPFS_FLAG=-DTCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT
+       fi
+    fi
+
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_ZIP_FILE)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_ZIPFS_SUPPORT)
+    AC_SUBST(TCL_ZIPFS_FLAG)
+    AC_SUBST(ZIP_PROG)
+    AC_SUBST(ZIP_PROG_OPTIONS)
+    AC_SUBST(ZIP_PROG_VFSSEARCH)
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL_LIBRARIES)
+    AC_SUBST(INSTALL_MSGS)
+])
+
+# Local Variables:
+# mode: autoconf
+# End:
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/all.tcl b/tkblt/tests/all.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..badd21f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/all.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+source linegraph.tcl
+source lineelement.tcl
+source linepen.tcl
+source bargraph.tcl
+source barelement.tcl
+source barpen.tcl
+source axis.tcl
+source legend.tcl
+source crosshairs.tcl
+source markers.tcl
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/axis.tcl b/tkblt/tests/axis.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..80f97ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/axis.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+$graph axis configure x -bd 2 -background cyan -title "X\nAxis" -limitsformat "%g"
+$graph axis configure y -bd 2 -background cyan -title "Y\nAxis"
+bltCmd $graph axis activate y
+
+puts stderr "Testing Axis..."
+
+bltTest3 $graph axis y -activeforeground red $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis y -activerelief sunken $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -autorange 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -background yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -bg blue $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -bindtags {aa} 0
+bltTest3 $graph axis y -bd 4 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis y -borderwidth 4 $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -checklimits $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -color red $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -command $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -descending yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -exterior no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -fg magenta $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -foreground yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -grid no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -gridcolor blue $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -griddashes {8 3} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -gridlinewidth 2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -gridminor no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -gridminorcolor blue $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -gridminordashes {8 3} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -gridminorlinewidth 2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -hide yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -justify left $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -justify center $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -justify right $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -labeloffset yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -limitscolor red $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -limitsfont {times 18 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -limitsformat "%e" $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -linewidth 2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -logscale yes $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -loosemin $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -loosemax $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -majorticks $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -max $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -min $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -minorticks $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -relief flat $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -relief groove $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -relief raised $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -relief ridge $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -relief solid $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -relief sunken $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -rotate 45 $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -scrollcommand $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -scrollincrement $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -scrollmax $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph axis x -scrollmin $dops
+##bltTest3 $graph axis x -shiftby 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -showticks no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -stepsize 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -subdivisions 4 $dops
+##bltTest3 $graph axis x -tickanchor n $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -tickfont {times 12 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -ticklength 20 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -tickdefault 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -title {This is a Title} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -titlealternate yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -titlecolor yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph axis x -titlefont {times 24 bold italic} $dops
+
+#bltCmd $graph axis activate foo
+#bltCmd $graph axis bind x
+bltCmd $graph axis cget x -color
+bltCmd $graph axis configure x
+bltCmd $graph axis configure x -color
+#bltCmd $graph axis create foo
+#bltCmd $graph axis deactivate foo
+#bltCmd $graph axis delete foo
+#bltCmd $graph axis invtransform x
+#bltCmd $graph axis limits x
+#bltCmd $graph axis margin x
+#bltCmd $graph axis names x
+#bltCmd $graph axis transform x
+#bltCmd $graph axis type x
+#bltCmd $graph axis view x
+
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis activate
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis bind
+bltCmd $graph xaxis cget -color
+bltCmd $graph xaxis configure
+bltCmd $graph xaxis configure -color
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis deactivate
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis invtransform
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis limits
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis transform
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis use
+#bltCmd $graph xaxis view
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/barelement.tcl b/tkblt/tests/barelement.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b8cb07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/barelement.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .bar
+set graph [bltBarGraph $w]
+
+$graph element configure data1 -color red -showvalues y 
+$graph element configure data2 -color blue
+
+$graph pen create foo -showvalues y -color purple
+$graph element activate data3
+
+puts stderr "Testing Bar Element..."
+
+bltTest3 $graph element data3 -activepen foo $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -background yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -barwidth 1 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -bd 4 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -bg yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -bindtags {aa} 0
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -borderwidth 4 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -color yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -data {0.2 8 0.4 20 0.6 31 0.8 41 1.0 50 1.2 59 1.4 65 1.6 70 1.8 75 2.0 85} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -errorbarcolor green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -errorbarwidth 2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -errorbarcap 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -fg yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -fill cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -foreground green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -hide yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -label "This is a test" $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -legendrelief groove $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -mapx x2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -mapy y2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -outline red $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -pen foo $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -relief flat $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -relief groove $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -relief raised $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -relief ridge $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -relief solid $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -relief sunken $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -showerrorbars no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -showvalues none $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -showvalues x $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -showvalues both $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -stack $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -styles $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor nw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor n $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor ne $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor e $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor se $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor s $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor sw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor w $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valuecolor cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valuefont {times 18 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueformat "%e" $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valuerotate 45 $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -weights $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -x {0 .2 .4 .6 .8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -xdata {0 .2 .4 .6 .8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -xerror {.1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1} $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -xhigh $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -xlow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -y {8 20 31 41 50 59 65 70 75 85}  $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -ydata {8 20 31 41 50 59 65 70 75 85} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -yerror {5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5} $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -yhigh $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -ylow $dops
+
+bltCmd $graph element activate data2
+bltCmd $graph element deactivate data2
+#bltCmd $graph element bind data1 <Button-1> [list puts "%x %y"]
+bltCmd $graph element cget data1 -showvalues
+bltCmd $graph element configure data1
+bltCmd $graph element configure data1 -showvalues
+#bltCmd $graph element closest 50 50
+#bltCmd $graph element closest 50 50 data1 data2
+bltCmd $graph element create data4
+bltCmd $graph element create data5
+bltCmd $graph element delete data4 data5
+bltCmd $graph element exists data1
+bltCmd $graph element lower data1
+bltCmd $graph element lower data2 data3
+bltCmd $graph element names
+bltCmd $graph element names data1
+bltCmd $graph element raise data2
+bltCmd $graph element raise data2 data3
+bltCmd $graph element raise data1
+bltCmd $graph element show data2
+bltCmd $graph element show {data1 data2 data3}
+bltCmd $graph element type data1
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/bargraph.tcl b/tkblt/tests/bargraph.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20f067d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/bargraph.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .bar
+set graph [bltBarGraph $w]
+
+puts stderr "Testing Bar Graph..."
+
+# Graph
+bltTest $graph -aspect 2 $dops
+bltTest $graph -background red $dops
+bltTest $graph -barmode stacked $dops
+bltTest $graph -barmode aligned $dops
+bltTest $graph -barmode overlap $dops
+bltTest $graph -barwidth .15 $dops
+#bltTest $graph -baseline $dops
+bltTest $graph -bd 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -bg green $dops
+bltTest $graph -bm 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -borderwidth 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -bottommargin 50 $dops
+#bltTest $graph -bufferelements $dops
+#bltTest $graph -buffergraph $dops
+bltTest $graph -cursor cross $dops
+bltTest $graph -fg blue $dops
+bltTest $graph -font {times 36 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest $graph -foreground cyan $dops
+#bltTest $graph -halo $dops
+bltTest $graph -height 300 $dops
+#bltTest $graph -highlightbackground $dops
+#bltTest $graph -highlightcolor $dops
+#bltTest $graph -highlightthickness $dops
+bltTest $graph -invertxy yes $dops
+bltTest $graph -justify left $dops
+bltTest $graph -justify center $dops
+bltTest $graph -justify right $dops
+bltTest $graph -leftmargin 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -lm 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotbackground cyan $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotborderwidth 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotpadx 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotpady 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotrelief groove $dops
+bltTest $graph -relief groove $dops
+bltTest $graph -rightmargin 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -rm 50 $dops
+#bltTest $graph -searchhalo $dops
+#bltTest $graph -searchmode $dops
+#bltTest $graph -searchalong $dops
+#bltTest $graph -stackaxes $dops
+#bltTest $graph -takefocus $dops
+bltTest $graph -title "This is a Title" $dops
+bltTest $graph -tm 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -topmargin 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -width 300 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotwidth 300 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotheight 300 $dops
+
+##bltCmd $graph axis
+bltCmd $graph cget -background
+bltCmd $graph configure 
+bltCmd $graph configure 
+bltCmd $graph configure -background cyan
+##bltCmd $graph crosshairs
+##bltCmd $graph element
+#bltCmd $graph extents
+#bltCmd $graph inside
+#bltCmd $graph invtransform
+##bltCmd $graph legend
+##bltCmd $graph marker
+##bltCmd $graph pen
+##bltCmd $graph postscript
+#bltCmd $graph transform
+##bltCmd $graph x2axis
+##bltCmd $graph xaxis
+##bltCmd $graph y2axis
+##bltCmd $graph yaxis
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/barpen.tcl b/tkblt/tests/barpen.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d06928b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/barpen.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .bar
+set graph [bltBarGraph $w]
+
+$graph pen create foo -color red -showvalues y
+$graph element configure data2 -pen foo
+
+puts stderr "Testing Bar Pen..."
+
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -background yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -bd 4 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -bg yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -borderwidth 4 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -color yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -errorbarcolor green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -errorbarwidth 2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -errorbarcap 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -fg yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -fill cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -foreground green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -outline red $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -relief flat $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -showerrorbars no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -showvalues none $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -showvalues x $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -showvalues both $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor nw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor n $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor ne $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor e $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor se $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor s $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor sw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor w $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valuecolor cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valuefont {times 18 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueformat "%e" $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valuerotate 45 $dops
+
+bltCmd $graph pen cget foo -color
+bltCmd $graph pen configure foo
+bltCmd $graph pen configure foo -color
+bltCmd $graph pen create bar
+bltCmd $graph pen delete bar
+bltCmd $graph pen names 
+bltCmd $graph pen type foo
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/base.tcl b/tkblt/tests/base.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3dac2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/base.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+package require tkblt
+
+#set sleep 1000
+set sleep 500
+if {![info exists dops]} {
+    set dops 0
+}
+
+proc bltPlot {w title} {
+    toplevel $w
+    wm title $w $title
+    wm protocol $w WM_DELETE_WINDOW [list bltPlotDestroy $w]
+
+    set mb ${w}mb
+    menu $mb
+    $w configure -menu $mb
+}
+
+proc bltPlotDestroy {w} {
+    destroy ${w}mb
+    destroy $w
+}
+
+proc bltTest {graph option value {dops 0}} {
+    global sleep
+
+    puts stderr "  $option $value"
+    set org [$graph cget $option]
+    $graph configure $option $value
+    update
+    if {$dops} {
+	$graph postscript output foo.ps
+	exec open /Applications/Preview.app/ foo.ps
+    }
+    after $sleep
+#    read stdin 1
+    $graph configure $option $org
+    update
+    after $sleep
+}
+
+proc bltTest2 {graph which option value {dops 0}} {
+    global sleep
+
+    puts stderr "  $option $value"
+    set org [$graph $which cget $option]
+    $graph $which configure $option $value
+    update
+    if {$dops} {
+	$graph postscript output foo.ps
+	exec open /Applications/Preview.app/ foo.ps
+    }
+    after $sleep
+#    read stdin 1
+    $graph $which configure $option $org
+    update
+    after $sleep
+}
+
+proc bltTest3 {graph which item option value {dops 0}} {
+    global sleep
+
+    puts stderr "  $item $option $value"
+    set org [$graph $which cget $item $option]
+    $graph $which configure $item $option $value
+    update
+    if {$dops} {
+	$graph postscript output foo.ps
+	exec open /Applications/Preview.app/ foo.ps
+    }
+    after $sleep
+#    read stdin 1
+    $graph $which configure $item $option $org
+    update
+    after $sleep
+}
+
+proc bltCmd {graph args} {
+    global sleep
+
+    puts stderr " $graph $args"
+    eval $graph $args
+    update
+    after $sleep
+#    read stdin 1
+}
+
+proc bltElements {graph} {
+    blt::vector create xv(10)
+    blt::vector create yv(10)
+    xv set { 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 }
+    yv set { 5 10 10 15 15 10 20 25 30 35 }
+
+    $graph element create data1 -data {0.2 13 0.4 25 0.6 36 0.8 46 1.0 55 1.2 64 1.4 70 1.6 75 1.8 80 2.0 90}
+
+    $graph element create data2 \
+	-xdata {0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0} \
+	-ydata {26 50 72 92 110 128 140 150 160 180} \
+	-xerror {.05 .05 .05 .05 .05 .05 .05 .05 .05 .05} \
+ 	-yerror {10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10}  \
+	-color red
+
+    $graph element create data3 -xdata xv -ydata yv -color green
+
+    $graph legend configure -title "Legend"
+}
+
+proc bltBarGraph {w} {
+    global sleep
+
+    bltPlot $w "Bar Graph"
+    set graph [blt::barchart ${w}.gr \
+		   -width 600 \
+		   -height 500 \
+		   -title "Bar\nGraph" \
+		   -barwidth .2 \
+		   -barmode aligned \
+		  ]
+    pack $graph -expand yes -fill both
+    bltElements $graph
+
+    update
+    after $sleep
+    return $graph
+}
+
+proc bltLineGraph {w} {
+    global sleep
+
+    bltPlot $w "Line Graph"
+    set graph [blt::graph ${w}.gr \
+		   -width 600 \
+		   -height 500 \
+		   -title "Line\nGraph" \
+		  ]
+    pack $graph -expand yes -fill both
+    bltElements $graph
+
+    update
+    after $sleep
+    return $graph
+}
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/crosshairs.tcl b/tkblt/tests/crosshairs.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c63cea5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/crosshairs.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+$graph crosshairs on
+$graph crosshairs configure -x 200 -y 200
+
+puts stderr "Testing Crosshairs..."
+
+bltTest2 $graph crosshairs -color green
+bltTest2 $graph crosshairs -dashes "8 3"
+bltTest2 $graph crosshairs -linewidth 3
+bltTest2 $graph crosshairs -x 100
+bltTest2 $graph crosshairs -y 100
+
+bltCmd $graph crosshairs cget -color
+bltCmd $graph crosshairs configure
+bltCmd $graph crosshairs configure -color
+bltCmd $graph crosshairs on
+bltCmd $graph crosshairs off
+bltCmd $graph crosshairs toggle
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/legend.tcl b/tkblt/tests/legend.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dba8da0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/legend.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+$graph legend selection set data2
+$graph legend focus data1
+$graph legend configure -selectrelief groove
+
+puts stderr "Testing Legend..."
+
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -activebackground $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -activeborderwidth $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -activeforeground $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -activerelief $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor nw $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor n $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor ne $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor e $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor se $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor s $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor sw $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -anchor w $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -bg pink $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -background cyan $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -borderwidth 20 $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -bd 20 $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -columns 2 $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -exportselection $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -focusdashes "8 3" $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -focusforeground red $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -font {times 18 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -fg yellow $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -foreground purple $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -hide yes $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -ipadx 20 $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -ipady 20 $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -nofocusselectbackground $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -nofocusselectforeground $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -padx 20 $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -pady 20 $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -position rightmargin $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -position leftmargin $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -position topmargin $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -position bottommargin $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -position plotarea $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -position xy $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -x 250 $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -y 100 $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -raised yes $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -relief flat $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -relief groove $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -relief raised $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -relief ridge $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -relief solid $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -relief sunken $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -rows 1 $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -selectbackground $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -selectborderwidth 3 $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -selectcommand $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -selectforeground $dops
+#bltTest2 $graph legend -selectmode $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -selectrelief flat $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -title "Hello World" $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -titlecolor red $dops
+bltTest2 $graph legend -titlefont {times 24 bold italic} $dops
+
+#bltCmd $graph legend activate
+#bltCmd $graph legend bind
+bltCmd $graph legend cget -fg
+bltCmd $graph legend configure
+bltCmd $graph legend configure -fg
+#bltCmd $graph legend curselection
+#bltCmd $graph legend deactivate
+bltCmd $graph legend focus data1
+bltCmd $graph legend focus
+#bltCmd $graph legend get anchor
+#bltCmd $graph legend get current
+#bltCmd $graph legend get first
+#bltCmd $graph legend get last
+#bltCmd $graph legend get end
+#bltCmd $graph legend get next.row
+#bltCmd $graph legend get next.column
+#bltCmd $graph legend get previous.row
+#bltCmd $graph legend get previous.column
+#bltCmd $graph legend get @100,100
+#bltCmd $graph legend get data1
+bltCmd $graph legend selection anchor data1
+bltCmd $graph legend selection mark data1
+bltCmd $graph legend selection includes data2
+bltCmd $graph legend selection present
+bltCmd $graph legend selection set data1 data2
+bltCmd $graph legend selection clear data1 data2
+bltCmd $graph legend selection set data1 data2
+bltCmd $graph legend selection toggle data1 data2
+bltCmd $graph legend selection set data1 data2
+bltCmd $graph legend selection clearall
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/lineelement.tcl b/tkblt/tests/lineelement.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5edb38e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/lineelement.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+$graph element configure data1 -dash {8 3} -showvalues y -smooth step -symbol circle -outline yellow -outlinewidth 3 -pixels 10
+
+$graph pen create foo -showvalues y -symbol circle -dashes {8 3} -color purple -linewidth 2
+$graph element activate data3
+
+puts stderr "Testing Line Element.."
+
+bltTest3 $graph element data3 -activepen foo $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -areabackground yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -bindtags {aa}
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -color yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -dashes {8 3} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -data {0.2 8 0.4 20 0.6 31 0.8 41 1.0 50 1.2 59 1.4 65 1.6 70 1.8 75 2.0 85} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -errorbarcolor green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -errorbarwidth 2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -errorbarcap 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -fill cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -hide yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -label "This is a test" $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -legendrelief groove $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -linewidth 3 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -mapx x2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -mapy y2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -maxsymbols 4 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -offdash black $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -outline green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -outlinewidth 5 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -pen foo $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -pixels 20 $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -reduce $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -scalesymbols no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -showerrorbars no $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -showvalues none $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -showvalues x $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -showvalues both $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -smooth linear $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -smooth cubic $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -smooth quadratic $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -smooth catrom $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -styles $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol arrow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol cross $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol diamond $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol none $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol plus $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol scross $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol splus $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol square $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -symbol triangle $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -trace both $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor nw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor n $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor ne $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor e $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor se $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor s $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor sw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueanchor w $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valuecolor cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valuefont {times 18 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valueformat "%e" $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -valuerotate 45 $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -weights $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -x {0 .2 .4 .6 .8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -xdata {0 .2 .4 .6 .8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -xerror {.1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1} $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -xhigh $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -xlow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -y {8 20 31 41 50 59 65 70 75 85}  $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data1 -ydata {8 20 31 41 50 59 65 70 75 85} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph element data2 -yerror {5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5} $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -yhigh $dops
+#bltTest3 $graph element data2 -ylow $dops
+
+bltCmd $graph element activate data2
+bltCmd $graph element deactivate data2
+#bltCmd $graph element bind data1 <Button-1> [list puts "%x %y"]
+bltCmd $graph element cget data1 -smooth
+bltCmd $graph element configure data1
+bltCmd $graph element configure data1 -smooth
+#bltCmd $graph element closest 50 50
+#bltCmd $graph element closest 50 50 data1 data2
+bltCmd $graph element create data4
+bltCmd $graph element create data5
+bltCmd $graph element delete data4 data5
+bltCmd $graph element exists data1
+bltCmd $graph element lower data1
+bltCmd $graph element lower data2 data3
+bltCmd $graph element names
+bltCmd $graph element names data1
+bltCmd $graph element raise data2
+bltCmd $graph element raise data2 data3
+bltCmd $graph element raise data1
+bltCmd $graph element show data2
+bltCmd $graph element show {data1 data2 data3}
+bltCmd $graph element type data1
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/linegraph.tcl b/tkblt/tests/linegraph.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6204e72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/linegraph.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+puts stderr "Testing Line Graph..."
+
+bltTest $graph -aspect 2 $dops
+bltTest $graph -background red $dops
+#bltTest $graph -baseline $dops
+bltTest $graph -bd 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -bg green $dops
+bltTest $graph -bm 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -borderwidth 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -bottommargin 50 $dops
+#bltTest $graph -bufferelements $dops
+#bltTest $graph -buffergraph $dops
+bltTest $graph -cursor cross $dops
+bltTest $graph -fg blue $dops
+bltTest $graph -font {times 36 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest $graph -foreground cyan $dops
+#bltTest $graph -halo $dops
+bltTest $graph -height 300 $dops
+#bltTest $graph -highlightbackground $dops
+#bltTest $graph -highlightcolor $dops
+#bltTest $graph -highlightthickness $dops
+bltTest $graph -invertxy yes $dops
+bltTest $graph -justify left $dops
+bltTest $graph -justify center $dops
+bltTest $graph -justify right $dops
+bltTest $graph -leftmargin 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -lm 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotbackground cyan $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotborderwidth 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotpadx 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotpady 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotrelief groove $dops
+bltTest $graph -relief groove $dops
+bltTest $graph -rightmargin 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -rm 50 $dops
+#bltTest $graph -searchhalo $dops
+#bltTest $graph -searchmode $dops
+#bltTest $graph -searchalong $dops
+#bltTest $graph -stackaxes $dops
+#bltTest $graph -takefocus $dops
+bltTest $graph -title "This is a Title" $dops
+bltTest $graph -tm 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -topmargin 50 $dops
+bltTest $graph -width 300 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotwidth 300 $dops
+bltTest $graph -plotheight 300 $dops
+
+##bltCmd $graph axis
+bltCmd $graph cget -background
+bltCmd $graph configure 
+bltCmd $graph configure 
+bltCmd $graph configure -background cyan
+##bltCmd $graph crosshairs
+##bltCmd $graph element
+#bltCmd $graph extents
+#bltCmd $graph inside
+#bltCmd $graph invtransform
+##bltCmd $graph legend
+##bltCmd $graph marker
+##bltCmd $graph pen
+#bltCmd $graph postscript output foo.ps
+#bltCmd $graph transform
+##bltCmd $graph x2axis
+##bltCmd $graph xaxis
+##bltCmd $graph y2axis
+##bltCmd $graph yaxis
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/linemarker.tcl b/tkblt/tests/linemarker.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b66ba6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/linemarker.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+set mm [$graph marker create line tt -element data2 \
+	    -coords {1 50 1.5 100 1 150} -linewidth 5]
+set nn [$graph marker create line ss -element data2 \
+	    -coords {1 150 .5 100 1 50} -linewidth 2 \
+	    -outline green -dashes 4]
+$graph element configure data1 -hide yes
+
+puts stderr "Testing Line Marker..."
+
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -bindtags {aa} 0
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -cap round $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -coords {1 50 1.5 100 2 150} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -dashes {8 3} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $nn -dashoffset 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -element data1 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $nn -fill yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -join round $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -linewidth 1 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -hide yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -mapx x2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -mapy y2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -outline green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -under yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -xoffset 20 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -yoffset 20 $dops
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/linepen.tcl b/tkblt/tests/linepen.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e47b243
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/linepen.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+$graph pen create foo -color red -showvalues y -symbol circle -dashes {4 4}
+$graph element configure data2 -pen foo
+
+puts stderr "Testing Line Pen..."
+
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -color yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -dashes {8 3} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -errorbarcolor green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -errorbarwidth 2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -errorbarcap 10 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -fill cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -linewidth 3 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -offdash black $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -outline green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -outlinewidth 5 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -pixels 20 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -showvalues none $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol arrow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol cross $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol diamond $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol none $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol plus $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol scross $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol splus $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol square $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -symbol triangle $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor nw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor n $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor ne $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor e $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor se $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor s $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor sw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueanchor w $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valuecolor cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valuefont {times 18 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valueformat "%e" $dops
+bltTest3 $graph pen foo -valuerotate 45 $dops
+
+bltCmd $graph pen cget foo -color
+bltCmd $graph pen configure foo
+bltCmd $graph pen configure foo -color
+bltCmd $graph pen create bar
+bltCmd $graph pen delete bar
+bltCmd $graph pen names 
+bltCmd $graph pen type foo
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/marker.tcl b/tkblt/tests/marker.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a09a43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/marker.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+set mm [$graph marker create line tt -element data1 \
+	    -coords {1 50 1.5 100 1 150} -linewidth 5 -bind {aa}]
+set nn [$graph marker create line ss -element data1 \
+	    -coords {1 150 .5 100 1 50} -linewidth 1 \
+	    -outline green -dashes 4]
+
+puts stderr "Testing Marker..."
+
+#bltCmd $graph marker bind aa <Button-1> [list puts "%x %y"]
+bltCmd $graph marker cget $mm -cap
+bltCmd $graph marker configure $mm
+bltCmd $graph marker configure $mm -cap
+set foo [$graph marker create line]
+bltCmd $graph marker delete $foo
+set foo [$graph marker create line foo]
+bltCmd $graph marker delete $foo
+bltCmd $graph marker exists $mm
+bltCmd $graph marker find enclosed 0 0 2 200
+bltCmd $graph marker lower $mm
+bltCmd $graph marker lower $mm $nn
+bltCmd $graph marker names
+bltCmd $graph marker raise $mm
+bltCmd $graph marker raise $mm $nn
+bltCmd $graph marker type $mm
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/markers.tcl b/tkblt/tests/markers.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f43c8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/markers.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+source marker.tcl
+source linemarker.tcl
+source polygonmarker.tcl
+source textmarker.tcl
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/polygonmarker.tcl b/tkblt/tests/polygonmarker.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1712b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/polygonmarker.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+set mm [$graph marker create polygon tt -element data2 \
+	    -coords {1 50 1.5 100 1 150} -linewidth 5]
+$graph element configure data1 -hide yes
+
+puts stderr "Testing Polygon Marker..."
+
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -bindtags {aa} 0
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -cap round $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -coords {1 50 1.5 100 2 150} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -dashes {8 3} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -element data1 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -fill yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -join round $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -linewidth 1 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -hide yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -mapx x2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -mapy y2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -outline yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -under yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -xoffset 20 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -yoffset 20 $dops
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/ps.tcl b/tkblt/tests/ps.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a9ce23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/ps.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+$graph axis configure x -title "X\nAxis" -limitsformat "%g"
+$graph axis configure y -title "Y\nAxis"
+
+$graph element configure data1 -dash {8 3} -showvalues y -smooth step -symbol circle -outline yellow -outlinewidth 3 -pixels 10 -valuefont "times 14 italic" -valuerotate 45
+
+$graph legend configure -relief raised
+$graph xaxis configure -bg cyan -relief raised
+$graph configure -relief raised
+$graph configure -plotrelief raised
+
+$graph legend selection set data2
+$graph legend focus data1
+$graph legend configure -selectrelief groove
+
+$graph postscript configure -decorations yes
+$graph postscript output foo.ps
+$graph postscript configure -decorations no
+$graph postscript output bar.ps
+
+#set graph [bltBarGraph $w]
+
+#puts stderr "done"
+#bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/test.tcl b/tkblt/tests/test.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df6ffd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/test.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+#set graph [bltBarGraph $w]
+
+#puts stderr "done"
+#bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tests/textmarker.tcl b/tkblt/tests/textmarker.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba3defc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tests/textmarker.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+source base.tcl
+
+set w .line
+set graph [bltLineGraph $w]
+
+set mm [$graph marker create text tt -element data2 \
+	    -coords {1. 112} -text "Text\nMarker" -font {helvetica 24}]
+$graph element configure data1 -hide yes
+
+puts stderr "Testing Text Marker..."
+
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor nw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor n $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor ne $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor e $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor se $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor s $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor sw $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -anchor w $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -background yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -bg red $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -bindtags {aa} 0
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -coords {1 50} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -element data1 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -fg cyan $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -fill yellow $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -font {times 24 bold italic} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -foreground blue $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -justify left $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -justify center $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -justify right $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -hide yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -mapx x2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -mapy y2 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -outline green $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -rotate 45 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -text {Hello World} $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -under yes $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -xoffset 20 $dops
+bltTest3 $graph marker $mm -yoffset 20 $dops
+
+puts stderr "done"
+bltPlotDestroy $w
+
diff --git a/tkblt/tkbltConfig.sh.in b/tkblt/tkbltConfig.sh.in
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..5464ed6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tkbltConfig.sh.in
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+# tkbltConfig.sh --
+#
+# This shell script (for sh) is generated automatically by tkblt's
+# configure script.  It will create shell variables for most of
+# the configuration options discovered by the configure script.
+# This script is intended to be included by the configure scripts
+# for tkblt extensions so that they don't have to figure this all
+# out for themselves.  This file does not duplicate information
+# already provided by tclConfig.sh, so you may need to use that
+# file in addition to this one.
+#
+# The information in this file is specific to a single platform.
+
+# tkblt's version number.
+tkblt_VERSION='@PACKAGE_VERSION@'
+
+# The name of the tkblt library (may be either a .a file or a shared library):
+tkblt_LIB_FILE=@PKG_LIB_FILE@
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the tkblt library from its
+# build directory.
+tkblt_BUILD_LIB_SPEC='@tkblt_BUILD_LIB_SPEC@'
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the tkblt library from its
+# installed directory.
+tkblt_LIB_SPEC='@tkblt_LIB_SPEC@'
+
+# The name of the tkblt stub library (a .a file):
+tkblt_STUB_LIB_FILE=@PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE@
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the tkblt stub library from its
+# build directory.
+tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC='@tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC@'
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the tkblt stub library from its
+# installed directory.
+tkblt_STUB_LIB_SPEC='@tkblt_STUB_LIB_SPEC@'
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the tkblt stub library from its
+# build directory.
+tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH='@tkblt_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH@'
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the tkblt stub library from its
+# installed directory.
+tkblt_STUB_LIB_PATH='@tkblt_STUB_LIB_PATH@'
diff --git a/tkblt/tools/genStubs.tcl b/tkblt/tools/genStubs.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a75dc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tkblt/tools/genStubs.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,1179 @@
+# genStubs.tcl --
+#
+#	This script generates a set of stub files for a given
+#	interface.
+#
+#
+# Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
+# Copyright (c) 2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+#
+# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+
+package require Tcl 8.4
+
+namespace eval genStubs {
+    # libraryName --
+    #
+    #	The name of the entire library.  This value is used to compute
+    #	the USE_*_STUBS macro and the name of the init file.
+
+    variable libraryName "UNKNOWN"
+
+    # interfaces --
+    #
+    #	An array indexed by interface name that is used to maintain
+    #   the set of valid interfaces.  The value is empty.
+
+    array set interfaces {}
+
+    # curName --
+    #
+    #	The name of the interface currently being defined.
+
+    variable curName "UNKNOWN"
+
+    # scspec --
+    #
+    #	Storage class specifier for external function declarations.
+    #	Normally "EXTERN", may be set to something like XYZAPI
+    #
+    variable scspec "EXTERN"
+
+    # epoch, revision --
+    #
+    #	The epoch and revision numbers of the interface currently being defined.
+    #   (@@@TODO: should be an array mapping interface names -> numbers)
+    #
+
+    variable epoch {}
+    variable revision 0
+
+    # hooks --
+    #
+    #	An array indexed by interface name that contains the set of
+    #	subinterfaces that should be defined for a given interface.
+
+    array set hooks {}
+
+    # stubs --
+    #
+    #	This three dimensional array is indexed first by interface name,
+    #	second by platform name, and third by a numeric offset or the
+    #	constant "lastNum".  The lastNum entry contains the largest
+    #	numeric offset used for a given interface/platform combo.  Each
+    #	numeric offset contains the C function specification that
+    #	should be used for the given entry in the stub table.  The spec
+    #	consists of a list in the form returned by parseDecl.
+
+    array set stubs {}
+
+    # outDir --
+    #
+    #	The directory where the generated files should be placed.
+
+    variable outDir .
+}
+
+# genStubs::library --
+#
+#	This function is used in the declarations file to set the name
+#	of the library that the interfaces are associated with (e.g. "tcl").
+#	This value will be used to define the inline conditional macro.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The library name.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::library {name} {
+    variable libraryName $name
+}
+
+# genStubs::interface --
+#
+#	This function is used in the declarations file to set the name
+#	of the interface currently being defined.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::interface {name} {
+    variable curName $name
+    variable interfaces
+
+    set interfaces($name) {}
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::scspec --
+#
+#	Define the storage class macro used for external function declarations.
+#	Typically, this will be a macro like XYZAPI or EXTERN that
+#	expands to either DLLIMPORT or DLLEXPORT, depending on whether
+#	-DBUILD_XYZ has been set.
+#
+proc genStubs::scspec {value} {
+    variable scspec $value
+}
+
+# genStubs::epoch --
+#
+#	Define the epoch number for this library.  The epoch
+#	should be incrememented when a release is made that
+#	contains incompatible changes to the public API.
+#
+proc genStubs::epoch {value} {
+    variable epoch $value
+}
+
+# genStubs::hooks --
+#
+#	This function defines the subinterface hooks for the current
+#	interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	names	The ordered list of interfaces that are reachable through the
+#		hook vector.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::hooks {names} {
+    variable curName
+    variable hooks
+
+    set hooks($curName) $names
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::declare --
+#
+#	This function is used in the declarations file to declare a new
+#	interface entry.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	index		The index number of the interface.
+#	platform	The platform the interface belongs to.  Should be one
+#			of generic, win, unix, or macosx or aqua or x11.
+#	decl		The C function declaration, or {} for an undefined
+#			entry.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::declare {args} {
+    variable stubs
+    variable curName
+    variable revision
+
+    incr revision
+    if {[llength $args] == 2} {
+	lassign $args index decl
+	set platformList generic
+    } elseif {[llength $args] == 3} {
+	lassign $args index platformList decl
+    } else {
+	puts stderr "wrong # args: declare $args"
+	return
+    }
+
+    # Check for duplicate declarations, then add the declaration and
+    # bump the lastNum counter if necessary.
+
+    foreach platform $platformList {
+	if {[info exists stubs($curName,$platform,$index)]} {
+	    puts stderr "Duplicate entry: declare $args"
+	}
+    }
+    regsub -all "\[ \t\n\]+" [string trim $decl] " " decl
+    set decl [parseDecl $decl]
+
+    foreach platform $platformList {
+	if {$decl ne ""} {
+	    set stubs($curName,$platform,$index) $decl
+	    if {![info exists stubs($curName,$platform,lastNum)] \
+		    || ($index > $stubs($curName,$platform,lastNum))} {
+		set stubs($curName,$platform,lastNum) $index
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::export --
+#
+#	This function is used in the declarations file to declare a symbol
+#	that is exported from the library but is not in the stubs table.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	decl		The C function declaration, or {} for an undefined
+#			entry.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::export {args} {
+    if {[llength $args] != 1} {
+	puts stderr "wrong # args: export $args"
+    }
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::rewriteFile --
+#
+#	This function replaces the machine generated portion of the
+#	specified file with new contents.  It looks for the !BEGIN! and
+#	!END! comments to determine where to place the new text.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	file	The name of the file to modify.
+#	text	The new text to place in the file.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::rewriteFile {file text} {
+    if {![file exists $file]} {
+	puts stderr "Cannot find file: $file"
+	return
+    }
+    set in [open ${file} r]
+    set out [open ${file}.new w]
+    fconfigure $out -translation lf
+
+    while {![eof $in]} {
+	set line [gets $in]
+	if {[string match "*!BEGIN!*" $line]} {
+	    break
+	}
+	puts $out $line
+    }
+    puts $out "/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */"
+    puts $out $text
+    while {![eof $in]} {
+	set line [gets $in]
+	if {[string match "*!END!*" $line]} {
+	    break
+	}
+    }
+    puts $out "/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */"
+    puts -nonewline $out [read $in]
+    close $in
+    close $out
+    file rename -force ${file}.new ${file}
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::addPlatformGuard --
+#
+#	Wrap a string inside a platform #ifdef.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	plat	Platform to test.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the original text inside an appropriate #ifdef.
+
+proc genStubs::addPlatformGuard {plat iftxt {eltxt {}} {withCygwin 0}} {
+    set text ""
+    switch $plat {
+	win {
+	    append text "#if defined(_WIN32)"
+	    if {$withCygwin} {
+		append text " || defined(__CYGWIN__)"
+	    }
+	    append text " /* WIN */\n${iftxt}"
+	    if {$eltxt ne ""} {
+		append text "#else /* WIN */\n${eltxt}"
+	    }
+	    append text "#endif /* WIN */\n"
+	}
+	unix {
+	    append text "#if !defined(_WIN32)"
+	    if {$withCygwin} {
+		append text " && !defined(__CYGWIN__)"
+	    }
+	    append text " && !defined(MAC_OSX_TCL)\
+		    /* UNIX */\n${iftxt}"
+	    if {$eltxt ne ""} {
+		append text "#else /* UNIX */\n${eltxt}"
+	    }
+	    append text "#endif /* UNIX */\n"
+	}
+	macosx {
+	    append text "#ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL /* MACOSX */\n${iftxt}"
+	    if {$eltxt ne ""} {
+		append text "#else /* MACOSX */\n${eltxt}"
+	    }
+	    append text "#endif /* MACOSX */\n"
+	}
+	aqua {
+	    append text "#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */\n${iftxt}"
+	    if {$eltxt ne ""} {
+		append text "#else /* AQUA */\n${eltxt}"
+	    }
+	    append text "#endif /* AQUA */\n"
+	}
+	x11 {
+	    append text "#if !(defined(_WIN32)"
+	    if {$withCygwin} {
+		append text " || defined(__CYGWIN__)"
+	    }
+	    append text " || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))\
+		    /* X11 */\n${iftxt}"
+	    if {$eltxt ne ""} {
+		append text "#else /* X11 */\n${eltxt}"
+	    }
+	    append text "#endif /* X11 */\n"
+	}
+	default {
+	    append text "${iftxt}${eltxt}"
+	}
+    }
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitSlots --
+#
+#	Generate the stub table slots for the given interface.  If there
+#	are no generic slots, then one table is generated for each
+#	platform, otherwise one table is generated for all platforms.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#	textVar	The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitSlots {name textVar} {
+    upvar $textVar text
+
+    forAllStubs $name makeSlot 1 text {"    void (*reserved$i)(void);\n"}
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::parseDecl --
+#
+#	Parse a C function declaration into its component parts.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns a list of the form {returnType name args}.  The args
+#	element consists of a list of type/name pairs, or a single
+#	element "void".  If the function declaration is malformed
+#	then an error is displayed and the return value is {}.
+
+proc genStubs::parseDecl {decl} {
+    if {![regexp {^(.*)\((.*)\)$} $decl all prefix args]} {
+	set prefix $decl
+	set args {}
+    }
+    set prefix [string trim $prefix]
+    if {![regexp {^(.+[ ][*]*)([^ *]+)$} $prefix all rtype fname]} {
+	puts stderr "Bad return type: $decl"
+	return
+    }
+    set rtype [string trim $rtype]
+    if {$args eq ""} {
+	return [list $rtype $fname {}]
+    }
+    foreach arg [split $args ,] {
+	lappend argList [string trim $arg]
+    }
+    if {![string compare [lindex $argList end] "..."]} {
+	set args TCL_VARARGS
+	foreach arg [lrange $argList 0 end-1] {
+	    set argInfo [parseArg $arg]
+	    if {[llength $argInfo] == 2 || [llength $argInfo] == 3} {
+		lappend args $argInfo
+	    } else {
+		puts stderr "Bad argument: '$arg' in '$decl'"
+		return
+	    }
+	}
+    } else {
+	set args {}
+	foreach arg $argList {
+	    set argInfo [parseArg $arg]
+	    if {![string compare $argInfo "void"]} {
+		lappend args "void"
+		break
+	    } elseif {[llength $argInfo] == 2 || [llength $argInfo] == 3} {
+		lappend args $argInfo
+	    } else {
+		puts stderr "Bad argument: '$arg' in '$decl'"
+		return
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return [list $rtype $fname $args]
+}
+
+# genStubs::parseArg --
+#
+#	This function parses a function argument into a type and name.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	arg	The argument to parse.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns a list of type and name with an optional third array
+#	indicator.  If the argument is malformed, returns "".
+
+proc genStubs::parseArg {arg} {
+    if {![regexp {^(.+[ ][*]*)([^][ *]+)(\[\])?$} $arg all type name array]} {
+	if {$arg eq "void"} {
+	    return $arg
+	} else {
+	    return
+	}
+    }
+    set result [list [string trim $type] $name]
+    if {$array ne ""} {
+	lappend result $array
+    }
+    return $result
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeDecl --
+#
+#	Generate the prototype for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted declaration string.
+
+proc genStubs::makeDecl {name decl index} {
+    variable scspec
+    lassign $decl rtype fname args
+
+    append text "/* $index */\n"
+    set line "$scspec $rtype"
+    set count [expr {2 - ([string length $line] / 8)}]
+    append line [string range "\t\t\t" 0 $count]
+    set pad [expr {24 - [string length $line]}]
+    if {$pad <= 0} {
+	append line " "
+	set pad 0
+    }
+    if {$args eq ""} {
+	append line $fname
+	append text $line
+	append text ";\n"
+	return $text
+    }
+    append line $fname
+
+    set arg1 [lindex $args 0]
+    switch -exact $arg1 {
+	void {
+	    append line "(void)"
+	}
+	TCL_VARARGS {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg [lrange $args 1 end] {
+		append line $sep
+		set next {}
+		append next [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $next end] ne "*"} {
+		    append next " "
+		}
+		append next [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		if {[string length $line] + [string length $next] \
+			+ $pad > 76} {
+		    append text [string trimright $line] \n
+		    set line "\t\t\t\t"
+		    set pad 28
+		}
+		append line $next
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append line ", ...)"
+	    if {[lindex $args end] eq "{const char *} format"} {
+		append line " TCL_FORMAT_PRINTF(" [expr [llength $args] - 1] ", " [llength $args] ")"
+	    }
+	}
+	default {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg $args {
+		append line $sep
+		set next {}
+		append next [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $next end] ne "*"} {
+		    append next " "
+		}
+		append next [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		if {[string length $line] + [string length $next] \
+			+ $pad > 76} {
+		    append text [string trimright $line] \n
+		    set line "\t\t\t\t"
+		    set pad 28
+		}
+		append line $next
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append line ")"
+	}
+    }
+    return "$text$line;\n"
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeMacro --
+#
+#	Generate the inline macro for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted macro definition.
+
+proc genStubs::makeMacro {name decl index} {
+    lassign $decl rtype fname args
+
+    set lfname [string tolower [string index $fname 0]]
+    append lfname [string range $fname 1 end]
+
+    set text "#define $fname \\\n\t("
+    if {$args eq ""} {
+	append text "*"
+    }
+    append text "${name}StubsPtr->$lfname)"
+    append text " /* $index */\n"
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeSlot --
+#
+#	Generate the stub table entry for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted table entry.
+
+proc genStubs::makeSlot {name decl index} {
+    lassign $decl rtype fname args
+
+    set lfname [string tolower [string index $fname 0]]
+    append lfname [string range $fname 1 end]
+
+    set text "    "
+    if {$args eq ""} {
+	append text $rtype " *" $lfname "; /* $index */\n"
+	return $text
+    }
+    if {[string range $rtype end-8 end] eq "__stdcall"} {
+	append text [string trim [string range $rtype 0 end-9]] " (__stdcall *" $lfname ") "
+    } else {
+	append text $rtype " (*" $lfname ") "
+    }
+    set arg1 [lindex $args 0]
+    switch -exact $arg1 {
+	void {
+	    append text "(void)"
+	}
+	TCL_VARARGS {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg [lrange $args 1 end] {
+		append text $sep [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $text end] ne "*"} {
+		    append text " "
+		}
+		append text [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append text ", ...)"
+	    if {[lindex $args end] eq "{const char *} format"} {
+		append text " TCL_FORMAT_PRINTF(" [expr [llength $args] - 1] ", " [llength $args] ")"
+	    }
+	}
+	default {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg $args {
+		append text $sep [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $text end] ne "*"} {
+		    append text " "
+		}
+		append text [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append text ")"
+	}
+    }
+
+    append text "; /* $index */\n"
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeInit --
+#
+#	Generate the prototype for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted declaration string.
+
+proc genStubs::makeInit {name decl index} {
+    if {[lindex $decl 2] eq ""} {
+	append text "    &" [lindex $decl 1] ", /* " $index " */\n"
+    } else {
+	append text "    " [lindex $decl 1] ", /* " $index " */\n"
+    }
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::forAllStubs --
+#
+#	This function iterates over all of the platforms and invokes
+#	a callback for each slot.  The result of the callback is then
+#	placed inside appropriate platform guards.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name		The interface name.
+#	slotProc	The proc to invoke to handle the slot.  It will
+#			have the interface name, the declaration,  and
+#			the index appended.
+#	onAll		If 1, emit the skip string even if there are
+#			definitions for one or more platforms.
+#	textVar		The variable to use for output.
+#	skipString	The string to emit if a slot is skipped.  This
+#			string will be subst'ed in the loop so "$i" can
+#			be used to substitute the index value.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::forAllStubs {name slotProc onAll textVar
+	{skipString {"/* Slot $i is reserved */\n"}}} {
+    variable stubs
+    upvar $textVar text
+
+    set plats [array names stubs $name,*,lastNum]
+    if {[info exists stubs($name,generic,lastNum)]} {
+	# Emit integrated stubs block
+	set lastNum -1
+	foreach plat [array names stubs $name,*,lastNum] {
+	    if {$stubs($plat) > $lastNum} {
+		set lastNum $stubs($plat)
+	    }
+	}
+	for {set i 0} {$i <= $lastNum} {incr i} {
+	    set slots [array names stubs $name,*,$i]
+	    set emit 0
+	    if {[info exists stubs($name,generic,$i)]} {
+		if {[llength $slots] > 1} {
+		    puts stderr "conflicting generic and platform entries:\
+			    $name $i"
+		}
+		append text [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,generic,$i) $i]
+		set emit 1
+	    } elseif {[llength $slots] > 0} {
+		array set slot {unix 0 x11 0 win 0 macosx 0 aqua 0}
+		foreach s $slots {
+		    set slot([lindex [split $s ,] 1]) 1
+		}
+		# "aqua", "macosx" and "x11" are special cases:
+		# "macosx" implies "unix", "aqua" implies "macosx" and "x11"
+		# implies "unix", so we need to be careful not to emit
+		# duplicate stubs entries:
+		if {($slot(unix) && $slot(macosx)) || (
+			($slot(unix) || $slot(macosx)) &&
+			($slot(x11)  || $slot(aqua)))} {
+		    puts stderr "conflicting platform entries: $name $i"
+		}
+		## unix ##
+		set temp {}
+		set plat unix
+		if {!$slot(aqua) && !$slot(x11)} {
+		    if {$slot($plat)} {
+			append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+		    } elseif {$onAll} {
+			eval {append temp} $skipString
+		    }
+		}
+		if {$temp ne ""} {
+		    append text [addPlatformGuard $plat $temp]
+		    set emit 1
+		}
+		## x11 ##
+		set temp {}
+		set plat x11
+		if {!$slot(unix) && !$slot(macosx)} {
+		    if {$slot($plat)} {
+			append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+		    } elseif {$onAll} {
+			eval {append temp} $skipString
+		    }
+		}
+		if {$temp ne ""} {
+		    append text [addPlatformGuard $plat $temp]
+		    set emit 1
+		}
+		## win ##
+		set temp {}
+		set plat win
+		if {$slot($plat)} {
+		    append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+		} elseif {$onAll} {
+		    eval {append temp} $skipString
+		}
+		if {$temp ne ""} {
+		    append text [addPlatformGuard $plat $temp]
+		    set emit 1
+		}
+		## macosx ##
+		set temp {}
+		set plat macosx
+		if {!$slot(aqua) && !$slot(x11)} {
+		    if {$slot($plat)} {
+			append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+		    } elseif {$slot(unix)} {
+			append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,unix,$i) $i]
+		    } elseif {$onAll} {
+			eval {append temp} $skipString
+		    }
+		}
+		if {$temp ne ""} {
+		    append text [addPlatformGuard $plat $temp]
+		    set emit 1
+		}
+		## aqua ##
+		set temp {}
+		set plat aqua
+		if {!$slot(unix) && !$slot(macosx)} {
+		    if {[string range $skipString 1 2] ne "/*"} {
+			# genStubs.tcl previously had a bug here causing it to
+			# erroneously generate both a unix entry and an aqua
+			# entry for a given stubs table slot. To preserve
+			# backwards compatibility, generate a dummy stubs entry
+			# before every aqua entry (note that this breaks the
+			# correspondence between emitted entry number and
+			# actual position of the entry in the stubs table, e.g.
+			# TkIntStubs entry 113 for aqua is in fact at position
+			# 114 in the table, entry 114 at position 116 etc).
+			eval {append temp} $skipString
+			set temp "[string range $temp 0 end-1] /*\
+				Dummy entry for stubs table backwards\
+				compatibility */\n"
+		    }
+		    if {$slot($plat)} {
+			append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+		    } elseif {$onAll} {
+			eval {append temp} $skipString
+		    }
+		}
+		if {$temp ne ""} {
+		    append text [addPlatformGuard $plat $temp]
+		    set emit 1
+		}
+	    }
+	    if {!$emit} {
+		eval {append text} $skipString
+	    }
+	}
+    } else {
+	# Emit separate stubs blocks per platform
+	array set block {unix 0 x11 0 win 0 macosx 0 aqua 0}
+	foreach s [array names stubs $name,*,lastNum] {
+	    set block([lindex [split $s ,] 1]) 1
+	}
+	## unix ##
+	if {$block(unix) && !$block(x11)} {
+	    set temp {}
+	    set plat unix
+	    set lastNum $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)
+	    for {set i 0} {$i <= $lastNum} {incr i} {
+		if {[info exists stubs($name,$plat,$i)]} {
+		    append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+		} else {
+		    eval {append temp} $skipString
+		}
+	    }
+	    append text [addPlatformGuard $plat $temp {} true]
+	}
+	## win ##
+	if {$block(win)} {
+	    set temp {}
+	    set plat win
+	    set lastNum $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)
+	    for {set i 0} {$i <= $lastNum} {incr i} {
+		if {[info exists stubs($name,$plat,$i)]} {
+		    append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+		} else {
+		    eval {append temp} $skipString
+		}
+	    }
+	    append text [addPlatformGuard $plat $temp {} true]
+	}
+	## macosx ##
+	if {($block(unix) || $block(macosx)) && !$block(aqua) && !$block(x11)} {
+	    set temp {}
+	    set lastNum -1
+	    foreach plat {unix macosx} {
+		if {$block($plat)} {
+		    set lastNum [expr {$lastNum > $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)
+			    ? $lastNum : $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)}]
+		}
+	    }
+	    for {set i 0} {$i <= $lastNum} {incr i} {
+		set emit 0
+		foreach plat {unix macosx} {
+		    if {[info exists stubs($name,$plat,$i)]} {
+			append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+			set emit 1
+			break
+		    }
+		}
+		if {!$emit} {
+		    eval {append temp} $skipString
+		}
+	    }
+	    append text [addPlatformGuard macosx $temp]
+	}
+	## aqua ##
+	if {$block(aqua)} {
+	    set temp {}
+	    set lastNum -1
+	    foreach plat {unix macosx aqua} {
+		if {$block($plat)} {
+		    set lastNum [expr {$lastNum > $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)
+			    ? $lastNum : $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)}]
+		}
+	    }
+	    for {set i 0} {$i <= $lastNum} {incr i} {
+		set emit 0
+		foreach plat {unix macosx aqua} {
+		    if {[info exists stubs($name,$plat,$i)]} {
+			append temp [$slotProc $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+			set emit 1
+			break
+		    }
+		}
+		if {!$emit} {
+		    eval {append temp} $skipString
+		}
+	    }
+	    append text [addPlatformGuard aqua $temp]
+	}
+	## x11 ##
+	if {$block(x11)} {
+	    set temp {}
+	    set lastNum -1
+	    foreach plat {unix macosx x11} {
+		if {$block($plat)} {
+		    set lastNum [expr {$lastNum > $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)
+			    ? $lastNum : $stubs($name,$plat,lastNum)}]
+		}
+	    }
+	    for {set i 0} {$i <= $lastNum} {incr i} {
+		set emit 0
+		foreach plat {unix macosx x11} {
+		    if {[info exists stubs($name,$plat,$i)]} {
+			if {$plat ne "macosx"} {
+			    append temp [$slotProc $name \
+				    $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i]
+			} else {
+			    eval {set etxt} $skipString
+			    append temp [addPlatformGuard $plat [$slotProc \
+				    $name $stubs($name,$plat,$i) $i] $etxt true]
+			}
+			set emit 1
+			break
+		    }
+		}
+		if {!$emit} {
+		    eval {append temp} $skipString
+		}
+	    }
+	    append text [addPlatformGuard x11 $temp {} true]
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitDeclarations --
+#
+#	This function emits the function declarations for this interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	textVar	The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitDeclarations {name textVar} {
+    upvar $textVar text
+
+    append text "\n/*\n * Exported function declarations:\n */\n\n"
+    forAllStubs $name makeDecl 0 text
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitMacros --
+#
+#	This function emits the inline macros for an interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#	textVar	The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitMacros {name textVar} {
+    variable libraryName
+    upvar $textVar text
+
+    set upName [string toupper $libraryName]
+    append text "\n#if defined(USE_${upName}_STUBS)\n"
+    append text "\n/*\n * Inline function declarations:\n */\n\n"
+
+    forAllStubs $name makeMacro 0 text
+
+    append text "\n#endif /* defined(USE_${upName}_STUBS) */\n"
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitHeader --
+#
+#	This function emits the body of the <name>Decls.h file for
+#	the specified interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitHeader {name} {
+    variable outDir
+    variable hooks
+    variable epoch
+    variable revision
+
+    set capName [string toupper [string index $name 0]]
+    append capName [string range $name 1 end]
+
+    if {$epoch ne ""} {
+	set CAPName [string toupper $name]
+	append text "\n"
+	append text "#define ${CAPName}_STUBS_EPOCH $epoch\n"
+	append text "#define ${CAPName}_STUBS_REVISION $revision\n"
+    }
+
+    append text "\n#ifdef __cplusplus\nextern \"C\" {\n#endif\n"
+
+    emitDeclarations $name text
+
+    if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	append text "\ntypedef struct {\n"
+	foreach hook $hooks($name) {
+	    set capHook [string toupper [string index $hook 0]]
+	    append capHook [string range $hook 1 end]
+	    append text "    const struct ${capHook}Stubs *${hook}Stubs;\n"
+	}
+	append text "} ${capName}StubHooks;\n"
+    }
+    append text "\ntypedef struct ${capName}Stubs {\n"
+    append text "    int magic;\n"
+    if {$epoch ne ""} {
+	append text "    int epoch;\n"
+	append text "    int revision;\n"
+    }
+    if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	append text "    const ${capName}StubHooks *hooks;\n\n"
+    } else {
+	append text "    void *hooks;\n\n"
+    }
+
+    emitSlots $name text
+
+    append text "} ${capName}Stubs;\n\n"
+
+    append text "extern const ${capName}Stubs *${name}StubsPtr;\n\n"
+    append text "#ifdef __cplusplus\n}\n#endif\n"
+
+    emitMacros $name text
+
+    rewriteFile [file join $outDir ${name}Decls.h] $text
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitInit --
+#
+#	Generate the table initializers for an interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name		The name of the interface to initialize.
+#	textVar		The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted output.
+
+proc genStubs::emitInit {name textVar} {
+    variable hooks
+    variable interfaces
+    variable epoch
+    upvar $textVar text
+    set root 1
+
+    set capName [string toupper [string index $name 0]]
+    append capName [string range $name 1 end]
+
+    if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	append text "\nstatic const ${capName}StubHooks ${name}StubHooks = \{\n"
+	set sep "    "
+	foreach sub $hooks($name) {
+	    append text $sep "&${sub}Stubs"
+	    set sep ",\n    "
+	}
+	append text "\n\};\n"
+    }
+    foreach intf [array names interfaces] {
+	if {[info exists hooks($intf)]} {
+	    if {[lsearch -exact $hooks($intf) $name] >= 0} {
+		set root 0
+		break
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    append text "\n"
+    if {!$root} {
+	append text "static "
+    }
+    append text "const ${capName}Stubs ${name}Stubs = \{\n    TCL_STUB_MAGIC,\n"
+    if {$epoch ne ""} {
+	set CAPName [string toupper $name]
+	append text "    ${CAPName}_STUBS_EPOCH,\n"
+	append text "    ${CAPName}_STUBS_REVISION,\n"
+    }
+    if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	append text "    &${name}StubHooks,\n"
+    } else {
+	append text "    0,\n"
+    }
+
+    forAllStubs $name makeInit 1 text {"    0, /* $i */\n"}
+
+    append text "\};\n"
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitInits --
+#
+#	This function emits the body of the <name>StubInit.c file for
+#	the specified interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitInits {} {
+    variable hooks
+    variable outDir
+    variable libraryName
+    variable interfaces
+
+    # Assuming that dependencies only go one level deep, we need to emit
+    # all of the leaves first to avoid needing forward declarations.
+
+    set leaves {}
+    set roots {}
+    foreach name [lsort [array names interfaces]] {
+	if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	    lappend roots $name
+	} else {
+	    lappend leaves $name
+	}
+    }
+    foreach name $leaves {
+	emitInit $name text
+    }
+    foreach name $roots {
+	emitInit $name text
+    }
+
+    rewriteFile [file join $outDir ${libraryName}StubInit.c] $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::init --
+#
+#	This is the main entry point.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	None.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::init {} {
+    global argv argv0
+    variable outDir
+    variable interfaces
+
+    if {[llength $argv] < 2} {
+	puts stderr "usage: $argv0 outDir declFile ?declFile...?"
+	exit 1
+    }
+
+    set outDir [lindex $argv 0]
+
+    foreach file [lrange $argv 1 end] {
+	source $file
+    }
+
+    foreach name [lsort [array names interfaces]] {
+	puts "Emitting $name"
+	emitHeader $name
+    }
+
+    emitInits
+}
+
+# lassign --
+#
+#	This function emulates the TclX lassign command.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	valueList	A list containing the values to be assigned.
+#	args		The list of variables to be assigned.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns any values that were not assigned to variables.
+
+if {[string length [namespace which lassign]] == 0} {
+    proc lassign {valueList args} {
+	if {[llength $args] == 0} {
+	    error "wrong # args: should be \"lassign list varName ?varName ...?\""
+	}
+	uplevel [list foreach $args $valueList {break}]
+	return [lrange $valueList [llength $args] end]
+    }
+}
+
+genStubs::init